Using Adams/View Command Lang. - MD Adams 2010

analysis 1
analysis
2 Adams/View Commands
analysis collate_contacts
Sets the tolerance value for track data and reference marker with respect to which contact data is
computed.
Format:
analyis_name = existing analysis
contact_name = new contact
tolerance = real
reference_marker = existing marker
Example:
analysis collate_contacts &

analysis_name = last_run &
contact_name = contact_between_part_1_and_2 &
tolerance = 0.1 &
reference_marker = marker_3
Description:
Parameter Value Type Description

analysis_name Existing analysis Specifies an existing analysis.
Contact_name Existing contact Specifies an existing contact.
tolerance Real Specifies the distance used to decide if two successive impacts
of two geometries used by the same contact belong to the same
track. If you do not provide it, Adams/Solver computes the
tolerance, which can take a long time.
reference_marker Existing marker Specifies the marker with respect to which the track data is
computed. Otherwise, the track data is in the global reference
frame.
Extended Definition:
1. A track is a sequence of individual impacts between two particular geometries specified by a
single contact object. The two geometries for a particular track should always be the same at every
impact along that track.
analysis 3
It is possible for a contact object and two of its geometries to have more than one track. For
example, if a contact and two of its geometries have more than one impact at the same time, each
separate impact must belong to a separate track to remove ambiguity. Also, when the separation
between impacts is great enough according to either an automatic or given criteria, the impacts
may be assembled into separate tracks.
There is an experimental method of specifying a delta value for the separation criteria that will
make the program skip the automatic criteria, sometimes saving a significant amount of time. This
can be done by setting the tolerance parameter using the analysis collate_contacts
command. By using a large tolerance value, you can coerce tracks together that may have been
separated by the automatic criteria. See Knowledge Base Article 10523 for more information.
Automatic criteria for a contact and an I and J geometry:
• The geometric center (centroid) of all the impacts over the entire simulation is found in three
frames: the global frame and the I and J part frames.
• The average distance of the impacts from the centroid is computed, again in each of the three
frames.
• The standard deviation of the impacts from this average distance is computed in the three
frames. This value for the standard deviation is used as a delta to decide if any two impacts
are close enough to be considered to belong to the same track. The frame with the minimum
distance is used for the comparison.
To force a pair of locations on two different parts to belong to separate tracks you can place a
small separate piece of geometry at that particular point on each part. For example, instead of
making a table out of a single piece of geometry and letting the algorithm try to find the separate
legs as four separate tracks, placing a cap at the end of each leg will force separate tracks.
2. You can identify an entity, such as a marker or force, by typing its name or by picking it from the
screen. If the entity is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it
convenient to type the name even if the element is displayed.
If an entity is available by default, you can identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify a entity under a different part, you may need to enter the
model and part names as well. For example, you can specify marker 'pivot' from model 'links', part
'lower_arm' by entering ".links.lower_arm.pivot".
If you type a "?", Adams/View lists the entity available by default.
You must separate multiple entity names by commas. If the entity is visible in one of your views,
you can identify it by picking it. You need not separate multiple element picks by commas.
Note: • If you created a marker by reading an Adams/Solver dataset or graphics file, the
marker name is the letters MAR followed by the dataset marker ID number. For
example, the name of MARKER/101 is MAR101. If you created the marker
during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that time.
• You may have explicitly named an analysis when you created it by reading one or
more Adams output files (graphics (.gra), request (.req), or results (.res)). By
default, the name of the analysis is the root name of the Adams output files without
the extension. If you created the analysis by reading an Adams graphics file, for
example, the analysis name is the name of the graphics file without the .gra
extension
• You need to be using the XML Results File (XRF) format in order for the contact
incident data to be available for collation.
analysis 5
analysis create
analysis create
Allows you to create an empty analysis. This is useful for reading spreadsheet data into a results set, using
the numeric_results read_from_file command.
Format:
analysis create
analysis_name = new analysis
Example:
analysis create &

analysis_name = my_analysis
Description:

analysis_name New Analysis Specifies the name of the analysis in which to store output files.
1. When using the Adams/View command language and naming entities, you can use the name later
to refer to this entity. Adams/View does not allow you to have two entities with the same name,
so you must provide a unique name. Normally, entity names are composed of alphabetic, numeric,
or '_' (underscore) characters, and start with an alphabetic or '_' character. They may be of any
length.
By enclosing the name in double quotes, you can use other printable characters, or start the name
with a numeral. If a name contains characters, or starts with a numeral, you must always quote
the name when entering it.
Note that you can specify the parentage of an entity (for example, what part "owns" a marker or
a geometry element) when you create it by changing the name. If you enter just the entity name,
then Adams/View assigns the default parent. If you type in the full name, then you can override
the default parent. In most cases, when creating an entity, Adams/View provides a default name.
The default name that Adams/View provides specifies the parentage that it has assumed. You can,
of course, delete this name and use your own. The form of a full name is:
"...._NAME.GRAND_PARENT_NAME.PARENT_NAME.ENTITY_NAME"
The number of levels used varies from case to case and the parentage must exist before an entity
can be assigned to it.
analysis delete
analysis delete
Allows you to delete an existing analysis. You must enter the name of the analysis you want to delete by
specifying the name of an analysis on the default model or the full name.
You can reverse this modification by issuing an undo command.
Format:
analysis delete
analysis_name = existing analysis
Example:
analysis delete &

Description:

analysis_name existing analysis Specifies the name of the analysis to be deleted
length.
analysis 7
analysis modify
analysis modify
Allows you to modify an existing analysis. You must enter the name of the analysis you want to modify
by specifying the name of an analysis on the default model or the full name.
You can reverse this modification by issuing an undo command.
Format:
analysis modify
new_analysis_name = new name of analysis
Example:
analysis modify &

analysis_name = .model_1.analysis_1 &
new_analysis_name = .model.my_analysis
Description:

analysis_name Existing Analysis Specifies the name of the analysis in which to store
output files
New_analysis_name New Analysis Name Specifies the name of the new analysis
length.
with a numeral. If a name contains characters, or starts with a numeral, you must always quote the
name when entering it.
analysis modify
analysis 9
analysis reload_files
Allows you to read the specified analysis file into Adams/View again, reloading any files that were read
when creating the analysis. The analysis files then update any existing plots or analysis results.
Format:
:
Example:
analysis reload_files &

Description:

analysis_name Existing analysis Specifies the name of an existing analysis to be loaded
length.
2. By enclosing the name in double quotes, you can use other printable characters, or start the name
animation 1
animation
animation add_simulation
Allows you to add a simulation to an existing animation.
Format:
:
animation_name = an existing animation
page_name = an existing page
old_analysis_name = an existing analysis
new_analysis_name = a new analysis
Example:
:
animation add_simulation &

animation_name = anim__1 &
old_analysis_name = Last_Run &
new_analysis_name = ana__1
Description:

animation_name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing animation.
Animation
page_name An Existing Page Instead of animation_name, you can specify the page
name containing the animation.
old_analysis_name An Existing Analysis Specifies the name of the existing analysis.
new_analysis_name A New Analysis Specifies a name for the new analysis
1. This command is useful when you need to compare two animations side by side. For example, if
you want to compare the animation of two cars side by side and see which is faster, you can add
the simulation of one car to the other car’s animation.
2. Normally, entity names are composed of alphabetic, numeric, or '_' (underscore) characters, and
start with an alphabetic or '_' character. They may be of any length.
By enclosing the name in double quotes, you may use other printable characters, or start the name
animation 3
Note that you can specify the parentage of an entity (e.g. what part "owns" a marker or a geometry
element) when you CREATE it by changing the name. If you enter just the entity name, then the
default parent will be assigned by Adams/View. If you type in the full name, then you may
override the default parent. In most cases, when creating an entity, Adams/View will provide a
default name. The default name that Adams/View provides will specify the parentage that it has
assumed.
You may, of course, delete this name and use your own. The form of a full name is:
animation create
animation create
Allows you to create a model
Format:
animation create
animation_name = a new animation
analysis_name = an existing analysis
view_name = an existing view
number_of_cycles = integer
time_range = time
frame_range = integer
frame_number = integer
time = time
configuration = display_frame
increment_frame_by = integer
superimposed = on_off
base_marker = an existing marker
camera_ref_marker = an existing marker
point_trace_marker = an existing marker
icon_visibility = on_off
offset = location
colors = an existing color
Example:
animation create &

analysis_name = Hood_1 &
view_name = View_1 &
component = Plot_1 &
number_of_cycles = 10 &
animation_name = Animation__1 &
time = 50 &
configuration = Model_input &
animation 5
animation create
animation create &

point_trace_marker = Marker_71 &
icon_visibility = On
Description:

animation_name A New Animation Specifies the name of a new animation
analysis_name An Existing Analysis Specifies the name of an existing analysis
view_name An Existing View Specifies the name of the view that you would like to
view the animation from
number_of_cycles Integer Specifies the number of complete cycles to be animated
time_range Time Specifies the analysis output Adams simulation output
time steps at which to start and stop the animation (in
that order).
frame_range Integer Specifies the analysis frame number (output time step)
at which to start and stop the animation (in that order).
Frame_number Integer Specifies the frame number (adams simulation output
time step) at which to configure a model during the
single_frame_display command.
Time Time Specifies the time as a real number greater than or
equal to zero
Configuration Display_frame Specifies what output frame, or output time step, of the
simulation results is to be displayed for the
single_frame_display command
Increment_frame_by Integer Specifies the number of frames to skip between each
animation step
Superimposed On_off Parameter used with the animation command to specify
whether or not to show each frame of the animation
individually or superimposed on top of another
Base_marker An Existing Marker Specifies a marker whose position will be frozen in the
view as the model gets animated
Camera_ref_marker An Existing Marker Identifies a marker which specifies the viewing
direction as the model gets animated
Point_trace_marker An Existing Marker Specifies marker(s) whose position will be traced in the
view as the model animates
Icon_visibility On_off Specifies whether or not to display icons during an
animation
animation create

Offset Location Specifies the offset of the axis line from the plot border
Colors An Existing Color Modifies the red, green, and blue components of
existing colors.
1. You may reverse this creation at a later time with an UNDO command.
2. When Adams/View reads a request, graphics, and results files (.req, .gra, and .res, respectively)
with the file analysis read command, it stores it in an analysis. By default, the name of the analysis
is the file name, excluding the extension.
3. Each view created has a name associated with it. The view_name parameter is used to identify a
view for a particular operation. In most cases, view_name=all is also a valid entry. The all option
indicates "all displayed views". There are eight standard views available when the Adams/View
is started. These views are: front, top, right, iso, bottom, left, and back. The first four of these
standard views are displayed by default when Adams/View is started.
The user may create new views using the 'VIEW MANAGEMENT CREATE' command, and
save/restore their attributesIf the VIEW_NAME parameter is used, the desired view can be
identified by picking in the window or entering the name from the keyboard.
4. This means, based on number_of_cycles parameter, the animation will continuously run through
all the specified frames the specified number of times.
f entered, the NUMBER_OF_CYCLES parameter must be a positive integer.This value will be
remembered and will be the default the next time an animation is performed. This parameter is
optional, and if not entered, will default initially to 1 (until updated by the user).
5. If entered, time_range parameter must be two real numbers (separated by commas) where the
second is greater than the first and the default values are initially 0.0,1000.0. If new values are
entered, these values will be remembered and be the default next time the parameter is used. If a
value greater than the simulation endint time is entered for the second value, the system will stop
at the last frame.
These time values will be rounded to the nearest simulation output time step value.This parameter
is optional and mutually exclusive with the FRAME_RANGE parameter. If neither is entered, the
previous values to TIME_RANGE will be used (0,0,1000.0, if they have not been changed by the
user
Special Note: Even if only one view_name is provided, the time range will be applied to the
specified view and any other views that contain the same model (the model indicated by
analysis_name parameter). If only analysis_name is provided (view_name parameter is omitted),
any views that contain the model indicated by analysis_name will be affected
6. If entered, this parameter must be two positive integers (separated by commas) where the second
is greater than the first and the default values are initially 1,10000. If new values are entered, these
values will be remembered and be the default next time the parameter is used.
If a value greater than the last frame number is entered for the second value, the system will stop
at the last frame. This parameter is optional and mutually exclusive with the TIME_RANGE
animation 7
animation create
parameter. If neither is entered, the previous values to FRAME_RANGE will be used (1,10000 if
they have not been changed by the user .Special Note: Even if only one view_name is provided,
the frame range will be applied to the specified view and any other views that contain the same
model (the model indicated by analysis_name parameter). If only analysis_name is provided
(view_name parameter is omitted), any views that contain the model indicated by analysis_name
will be affected
7. If entered the frame_number must be a positive integer corresponding to the desired frame (output
time step) and the default value is initially 1. If a new value is entered, this value will be
remembered and be the default next time the command is used. If a value greater than the last
frame number is entered, the system will display the last frame.
This parameter is optional and mutually exclusive with the CONFIGURATION and TIME
parameters. If none of the three are entered, the first frame will be displayed .Special Note: Even
if only one view_name is provided, the frame number will be applied to the specified view and
any other views that contain the same model (the model indicated by analysis_name parameter).
If only analysis_name is provided (view_name parameter is omitted), views that contain the
model indicated by analysis_name will be affected
8. The legal values for this parameter are:
MODEL_INPUT, the configuration as input to Adams before analysis,
INITIAL_CONDITIONS, the configuration after initial conditions are met,
EQUILIBRIUM, the configuration after an equilibrium analysis,
FORWARD, one frame forward from the current one displayed, and
BACKWARD, one frame backward from the current one displayed.
Therefore, this parameter is not used to specify a particular time or frame_number. In fact, this
parameter is mutually exclusive with the FRAME_NUMBER and TIME parameters. These two
parameters are used to specify the time dependent frames of the simulation output.
The CONFIGURATION parameter is optional and if not entered, the system will display the first
time dependent frame in the graphics file (assuming its mutually exclusive counterparts are not
entered either).
9. This allows the user to speed up the viewing of motions that take many frames to develop (that
move slowly). If a negative value is entered, the animation will play in the reverse.
If entered, the INCREMENT_FRAMES_BY parameter must have an absolute value less than the
maximum number of frames in the analysis. This parameter is optional and if not entered, will
default to 1.
10. The superimposed view is sometimes referred to as a fan diagram. Superimposing frames is useful
to show the relationship of the models parts between frames but often obscures the view of the
motion.
This is an optional parameter and if not entered, then no superimposed frames will be drawn. The
legal values of this parameter are ON and OFF. ON indicates that frames will be superimpose
during the animation. OFF, the default, indicates that frames will not be superimpose during the
animation.
animation create
11. This is particularly useful when a relatively small object undergoes both, small configuration
changes as well as large overall gross motion. For example, the flight path of a jet is very large
over time relative to the motion of the control surfaces on the jet. In this case, selecting the
BASE_MARKER to be on the jet would be appropriate.
This parameter can be used with the CAMERA_REF_MARKER to create a different effect on
the viewing direction. When the CAMERA_REF_MARKER and the BASE_MARKER are
specified together, the viewing direction is "from" the CAMERA_REF_MARKER position "to"
the BASE_MARKER position.
In addition, the "up" direction of the view is computed based on the direction of the
CAMERA_REF_MARKER "y" axis (i.e. the y axis is projected into a direction perpendicular to
the viewing direction defined by the two markers). This viewing direction is recomputed between
each frame of the animation. This feature allows the effect of watching an object come from a
distance, pass by, and proceed into the distance.
12. camera_ref_marker parameter is used to identify a marker which specifies the viewing direction
as the model gets animated.
13. point_trace_marker parameter is particularly useful when a marker undergoes complicated
motion, or has motion that is easily obscured by other model graphics. For example, the path of a
chain link being whipped, or a car wheel center's 3D motion. In this case, selecting the
BASE_MARKER to be on the wheel center would be appropriate.
14. Entering 'ON' will cause Adams/View to display the icons during animation. This will cause
slower animation times. For this reason, 'OFF' is the default value.
Cautions:
1. Typing the name is the only way to identify a stored view that is not displayed.
2. The model graphics need not be displayed to trace the path of a marker in a view. Up to 10 markers
can be traced simultaneously.
animation 9
animation delete
animation delete
Allows you to delete an existing animation.
Format:
animation delete
Example:
animation delete &

animation_name = ani__1
Description:

animation_name An Existing Animation Specifies an existing animation
assumed.
animation display
animation display
Allows you to display the model in the specified view.
Format:
animation display
Example:
animation display &

animation_name = animation_1 &
view_name = view_1
Description:

animation_name An Existing Animation Specifies an existing animation name that is to be run
view_name An Existing View Specifies the name associated with the view created
1. If no view has been specified, the model will be displayed in the active view.
This command can be useful when the the entire model is no longer visible in the current view
space. MODEL DISPLAY will "fit" the model to the current view space.
2. The view_name parameter is used to identify a view for a particular operation. In most cases,
view_name=all is also a valid entry. The all option indicates "all displayed views". There are
eight standard views available when the Adams/View is started. These views are: front, top, right,
iso, bottom, left, and back. The first four of these standard views are displayed by default when
Adams/View is started. The user may create new views using the 'VIEW MANAGEMENT
CREATE' command, and save/restore their attributes.
If the VIEW_NAME parameter is used, the desired view can be identified by picking in the
window or entering the name from the keyboard.
Typing the name is the only way to identify a stored view that is not displayed.
animation 11
animation log
animation log
Allows you to specify whether or not cache information is to be maintained on the physical disk.
Format:
animation log
flex_caching = boolean
object_caching = boolean
Example:
animation log &

flex_caching = on &
object_caching = on
Description:

flex_caching Boolean
object_caching Boolean Specifies if information for rigid/non flexible bodies is to be cached
1. By default, cache information necessary for animations containing flexible bodies is maintained
on the disk in files with a .fcf extension. Adams/PostProcessor can also maintain this information
in physical memory, which can result in significantly less disk input/output, higher CPU
utilization, and, consequently, faster performance. If you work in an environment with remote
disk servers (accessed across a network), you should see a dramatic improvement in performance
if you select to maintain the cache in memory. Users using local disk will see improvements on a
smaller scale.
The disadvantage of memory caching is the increased process size and the risk that it will exceed
your computer's physical memory. If your computer has enough physical memory, then this
approach is more efficient. If your computer does not have enough physical memory, then its
operating system will begin swapping and the animation performance may be worse than when
using the .fcf file. We recommend that you test each model with this setting and monitor the
process size using the Task Manager on Windows or the equivalent tool on UNIX (for example,
gmemusage -s on SGI).
animation log
Cautions:
1. If the cache is turned on, performance will be improved but will use up the computer’s physical
memory.
animation 13
animation modify
animation modify
Allows you to modify an existing model
Format:
animation modify
animation_name = a new animation
time_range = time
time = time
offset = location
Example:
animation modify &

analysis_name = Hood_1 &
view_name = View_1 &
component = Plot_1 &
animation_name = Animation__1 &
time = 50 &
configuration = Model_input &
animation modify
animation modify &

point_trace_marker = Marker_71 &
icon_visibility = On
Description:
Parameter Value type Description

animation_name A New Animation Specifies the name of a new animation
analysis_name An Existing Analysis Specifies the name of an existing analysis
view_name An Existing View Specifies the name of the view that you would like to
view the animation from
number_of_cycles Integer Specifies the number of complete cycles to animate
time_range Time Specifies the analysis output Adams simulation output
time steps at which to start and stop the animation (in
that order).
frame_range Integer Specifies the analysis frame number (output time step)
at which to start and stop the animation (in that order).
frame_number Integer Specifies the frame number (Adams simulation output
time step) at which to configure a model during the
time Time Specifies the time as a real number greater than or equal
to zero
configuration Display_frame Specifies what output frame, or output time step, of the
simulation results is to be displayed for the
single_frame_display command
increment_frame_by Integer Specifies the number of frames to skip between each
animation step
superimposed On_off Parameter used with the animation command to specify
individually or superimposed on top of another
base_marker An Existing Marker Specifies a marker whose position will be frozen in the
camera_ref_marker An Existing Marker Identifies a marker which specifies the viewing
direction as the model animates
point_trace_marker An Existing Marker Specifies marker(s) whose position will be traced in the
icon_visibility On_off Specifies whether or not to display icons during an
animation
animation 15
animation modify
Parameter Value type Description

offset Location Specifies the offset of the axis line from the plot border
colors An Existing Color Modifies the red, green, and blue components of
existing colors.
1. You must enter the name of the model you wish to modify either by picking it from the screen or
specifying the full name.
2. You may reverse this modification at a later time with an UNDO command.
standard views are displayed by default when Adams/View is started.
save/restore their attributes.
5. This means, based on number_of_cycles parameter, the animation will continuously run through
all the specified frames the specified number of times.
If entered, the NUMBER_OF_CYCLES parameter must be a positive integer.
This value will be remembered and will be the default the next time an animation is performed.
This parameter is optional and if not entered, will default initially to 1 (until updated by the user).
6. If entered, time_range parameter must be two real numbers (separated by commas) where the
value greater than the simulation endint time is entered for the second value, the system will stop
at the last frame.
These time values will be rounded to the nearest simulation output time step value.
This parameter is optional and mutually exclusive with the FRAME_RANGE parameter. If
neither is entered, the previous values to TIME_RANGE will be used (0,0,1000.0, if they have
not been changed by the user)
Special Note: Even if only one view_name is provided, the time range will be applied to the
animation modify
7. If entered, this parameter must be two positive integers (separated by commas) where the second
is greater than the first and the default values are initially 1,10000. If new values are entered, these
values will be remembered and be the default next time the parameter is used.
If a value greater than the last frame number is entered for the second value, the system will stop
at the last frame.
This parameter is optional and mutually exclusive of the TIME_RANGE parameter. If neither is
entered, the previous values to FRAME_RANGE will be used (1,10000, if they have not been
changed by the user)
Special Note: Even if only one view_name is provided, the frame range will be applied to the
8. If entered, the frame_number must be a positive integer corresponding to the desired frame
(output time step) and the default value is initially 1. If a new value is entered, this value will be
parameters. If none of the three are entered, the first frame will be displayed.
Special Note: Even if only one view_name is provided, the frame number will be applied to the
9. The legal values for this parameter are:
MODEL_INPUT, the configuration as input to Adams before analysis,
INITIAL_CONDITIONS, the configuration after initial conditions are met,
EQUILIBRIUM, the configuration after an equilibrium analysis,
FORWARD, one frame forward from the current one displayed, and BACKWARD, one frame
backward from the current one displayed.
parameter are used to specify the time dependent frames of the simulation output.
The CONFIGURATION parameter is optional and if not entered the system will display the 1st
time dependent frame in the graphics file (assuming it's mutually exclusive counterparts are not
entered either).
10. This allows the user to speed up the viewing of motions that take many frames to develop (that
move slowly). If a negative value is entered, the animation will play in reverse.
If entered, the INCREMENT_FRAMES_BY parameter must have an absolute value less than the
default to 1.
animation 17
animation modify
motion.
This is an optional parameter and if not entered then no superimposed frames will be drawn. The
legal values of this parameter are ON and OFF. ON indicates that frames will be superimpose
during the animation. OFF, the default, indicates that frames will not be superimpose during the
animation.
12. This is particularly useful when a relatively small object undergoes both small configuration
changes as well as large overall gross motion. For example, the flight path of a jet is very large
over time relative to the motion of the control surfaces on the jet. In this case selecting the
BASE_MARKER to be on the jet would be appropriate.
13. camera_ref_marker parameter is used to identify a marker which specifies the viewing direction
as the model gets animated
14. point_trace_marker parameter is particularly useful when a marker undergoes complicated
BASE_MARKER to be on the wheel center would be appropriate.
15. Entering 'ON' will cause Adams/View to display the icons during animation. This will cause
slower animation times. For this reason, 'OFF' is the default value.
Cautions:
2. The model graphics need not be displayed to trace the path of a marker in a view. Up to 10 markers
can be traced simultaneously.
animation pause
animation pause
Allows you to pause/stop an animation while it is running.
Format:
animation pause
Example:
animation pause &

page_name = page_1
Description:

page_name An Existing Page Specifies the page in the Adams/Postprocessor that is to
be run
1. The parameter supplied to this command could be either an animation name or a page name (run
from the post processor)
animation 19
animation play
animation play
Allows you to play an animation.
Format:
animation play
Example:
animation play &

page_name = page_1
Description:

animation_name An Existing Animation Specifies an existing animation name that has to be run
be run
1. The parameter supplied to this command could either be an animation name or a page name (run
animation record start

Allows you to record the animation. The video file is saved in the current working directory.
Format:

image_prefix = string
image_type = string
avi_frames_per_sec = integer
avi_compression = boolean
avi_quality = integer
avi_keyframe_every = integer
mpeg_ngop = integer
mpeg_round_size = boolean
window_size = integer
Example:
animation record start &

image_prefix = ".jpg" &
image_type = jpg &
avi_frames_per_sec = 15 &
avi_compression = no &
avi_quality = 10 &
avi_keyframe_every = 25 &
mpeg_ngop = 2 &
mpeg_round_size = yes &
window_size = 2
Description:

image_prefix String Set the prefix used to name the set of files.
image_type String Select the format: .avi, .tif, .jpg, .bmp, .mpg, .png, and .xpm
avi_frames_per_sec Integer Enter the number of frames per second used in the recording.
animation 21

avi_compression Boolean Enters yes or no depending on whether or not the avi needs to
be compressed.
avi_quality Integer Enters a value or use the slider to set the image quality.
avi_keyframe_every Integer Sets the interval between key frames. The default is a key frame
every 5000 frames.
mpeg_ngop Integer Enters an integer number.
mpeg_round_size Boolean Specifies yes or no if size is to be rounded to multiples of 16.
window_size Integer Enters an integer number to specify window size.
1. Adams/PostProcessor appends a unique number to the prefix to form the name of each file. For
example, if you specify a prefix of suspension, then each .tif file is named suspension_0001.tif,
suspension_0002.tif, and so on. If you do not specify a name, the prefix is frame (for example,
frame_001.tif).
2. When a digital movie stream is encoded with compression, the pixels of each frame are evaluated
against previous frames (those designated as key) and only pixels that changed are stored. For
example, a movie of a car traveling along a road can have many pixels in the image background
that do not change during the entire movie. Therefore, storing only the pixels that change allows
for significant compression. In many cases, however, it can degrade movie quality, especially
with movies where a large percentage of pixels are changing from frame-to-frame, such as with
wireframe graphics. Because Adams/PostProcessor lets you set the key frame rates, you control
both, the compression factor and the movie quality.
3. Movies with many key frames will have high quality, while movies with few key frames, such as
the default every 5000 frames, will have lower quality. For a typical 20-second AVI movie of a
shaded Adams model, a key frame rate would be 12.
4. Some playback programs require the pixel height and width to be multiples of 16. Turning the
mpeg_round_size option ‘on’ ensures that your movie plays in many playback programs.
Caution: (AVI format is only available on Windows).
Tip: 1. Turn off compression to improve the quality of the images.

2. When you set use compression when recording in AVI format, the playback
program may restrict the size of image frames, usually to a multiple of 2 or 4.
Therefore, your recording may appear cut off on one or more sides. The
workaround is to change the animation window size before recording.
animation record stop

Stop the animation recording
Format:
Example:
animation 23
animation replace_simulation
Replace an existing analysis/page name with another in the animation.
Format:
old_analysis_name = an existing analysis
new_analysis_name = a new analysis
Example:
animation replace_simulation &

animation_name = anim__1 &
old_analysis_name = last_run &
new_analysis_name = ana__1
Description:

animation_name An Existing Specify name of an existing animation.
Animation
page_name An Existing Page Instead of animation_name, you can specify the
page name containing the animation.
old_analysis_name An Existing Analysis Specify name of the existing analysis.
new_analysis_name A New Analysis Specify name of the new analysis
1. This command is useful when you need to compare two animations side by side. For example if
you want to compare the animation of two cars side by side and see which is faster, you can add
the simulation of one car to the other cars animation.
start with an alphabetic or '_' character. They may be any length.
Note: You can specify the parentage of an entity (e.g. what part "owns" a marker or a geometry
element) when you CREATE it by changing the name. If you enter just the entity name,
then the default parent will be assigned by Adams/View. If you type in the full name, then
you may over ride the default parent. In most cases, when creating anentity, Adams/View
will provide a default name. The default namethatAdams/View provides will specify the
parentage that it has assumed.
You may, or course, delete this name and use your own. The form of a full name is:
animation 25
animation reset
animation reset
Allows you to reset an animation.
Format:
:
animation reset
Example:
animation reset &

animation_name = an existing animation &
Description:

be run
1. The parameter supplied to this command could either be an animation name or a page name (run
animation step
animation step
Allows you to step the animation either forward or backwards as needed.
Format:
animation step
direction = animation_direction
Example:
animation step &

direction = forward &
page_name = page_1
Description:

direction Animation_direction Specifies whether you want the animation to step in the
forward or backward direction
be run
1. When you play an animation, Adams/View plays every frame by default. You can rewind an
animation and play the animation at various speeds. During fast-forward and fast-backward play
modes, Adams/View plays only every fifth frame.
break 1
break
Allows you to exit the innermost FOR or WHILE loop immediately and stop execution of the loop.
When Adams/View encounters a BREAK command inside a loop, it immediately exits the loop without
executing the remaining commands for that iteration.
The BREAK command affects only the innermost FOR or WHILE loop.
Format:
BREAK
Example:
variable create variable_name=ip integer_value=0
while condition=(ip < 5)
variable modify variable_name=ip integer_value(eval(ip+1))
if condition=(eval(DB_EXISTS ("MAR"//ip)))
break
end
marker create marker_name=(eval("MAR"//ip)) &
location=(eval(ip-1)),0,0
end
variable delete variable_name=ip
In this example, Adams/View creates markers, named MAR1, MAR2, MAR3, MAR4, and MAR5,
unless a marker already exists with one of those names. As soon as it encounters an existing marker,
Adams/View exits the loop and does not create any more.
check_messages 1
check_messages
This command provides you with a way to monitor an Adams simulation while it is running in batch
mode. This is done by querying the Adams message data base using some filter and sorting parameters.
The FAULTS, ERRORS, WARNINGS, and INFO parameters allow you to filter out only the messages
that you want to see. All messages will be reported with like messages grouped according to message
type, unless the SORT_BY_TIME parameter is set to YES.
The SORT_BY_TIME parameter specifies in what order the messages of all types are to be reported.
When SORT_BY_TIME is set to YES, all message types will be merged together and reported in the
order in which they occurred during the simulation (i.e. sorted on the base of simulation time).
The FILE_NAME parameter specifies the name of the Adams message file that is to be read. This
parameter will default to the message file for the default analysis unless you override it by providing
another FILE_NAME with this parameter is specified. The proper extension is ".mdb", the default, but
can be overridden by simply supplying a different extension.
You do not need to enclose the file name in quotes if it only contains alpha-numeric characters and starts
with a letter. If you want to include other characters, such as a '.' for an extension or '/' or '[]' for directory
paths, you must enclose the name in quotes.
Format:
check_messages
file_name = string
faults = boolean
errors = boolean
warnings = boolean
info = boolean
sort_by_time = boolean
Example:
check_messages &
faults = yes &
errors = yes &
warnings = no &
info = no &
sort_by_time = yes
When the above command is executed, all the messages related to faults and errors will be displayed in
the order in which they occur during the simulation.
Description:

file_name String Specifies the name of the Adams message file that is to be read.
faults boolean Specifies that the messages of type PROGRAM FAULT are to be
reported.
errors boolean Specifies that the messages of type ERROR are to be reported.
warnings boolean Specifies that the messages of type WARNING are to be reported.
info boolean Specifies that the messages of type INFO are to be reported.
sort_by_time boolean Specifies in what order the messages of all types are to be reported.
1. The FILE_NAME parameter will default to the file for the default analysis unless this parameter
is specified. The proper extension is ".mdb", the default, but can be overridden by simply
supplying a different extension.
You do not need to enclose the file name in quotes if it only contains alpha-numeric characters
and starts with a letter. If you want to include other characters, such as a '.' for an extension or '/'
or '[]' for directory paths, you must enclose the name in quotes.
2. All messages of type FAULTS, ERROR, WARNINGS and INFO will be reported together unless
the SORT_BY_TIME parameter is set to yes. In this case, all message types will be merged
together and reported in the order in which they occurred during the simulation (i.e. sorting based
on simulation time).
clearance 1
clearance
clearance compute
clearance compute
Allows you to carry out the specified clearance study. Use the menu items Tools -> Clearance ->
Compute in Adams/PostProcessor, to execute a clearance study.
Format:
clearance compute
treat_flex_as_rigid = yes/no
Example:
clearance compute &

analysis_name = Last_Run &
treat_flex_as_rigid = yes
Description:

analysis_name Existing Analysis This parameter gets assigned the name of an existing
simulation analysis.
treat_flex_as_rigid Boolean Decides if the flexible bodies should be treated as rigid bodies
while executing the clearance study.
1. The clearance study which is being carried out uses the analysis specified by the
existing_analysis parameter as the basis of the study.
clearance 3
clearance create
clearance create
Creates a new clearance study. Use the menu items Tools->Clearance->Create in Adams/PostProcessor,
to create a clearance study.
Format:
clearance create
clearance_name = string
comments = string
i_geometry = existing geometry
i_part = existing part
i_flex = existing part
j_geometry = existing geometry
j_part = existing part
j_flex = existing part
maximum = real
method = selection list
Example:
clearance create &

clearance_name = .testdb.CLEARANCE_1 &
comments = " test comment" &
i_geometry = LINK_2 &
j_geometry = BOX_1 &
maximum = 90 &
method = polygon
Description:

clearance_name String Specifies the name of the clearance study.
comments String Any accompanying extra information that the user wishes to
store with the clearance study.
i_geometry Existing Geometry The first selected entity if it is a geometry
i_part Existing Part The first selected entity if it is a part
clearance create

i_flex Existing Part The first selected entity if it is a part
j_geometry Existing Geometry The second selected entity if it is a geometry
j_part Existing Part The second selected entity if it is a part
j_flex Existing Part The first selected entity if it is a part
maximum Real To reduce the calculations in the clearance study, you can also
define a maximum distance above which
Adams/PostProcessor does not calculate the clearance
method Selection List The calculation method used by the Adams/PostProcessor for
clearance studies.
1. The information entered in the comments parameter is displayed as the title on the clearance plot
which can be generated by the Adams/Postprocessor.
2. Clearance can be found out between two bodies which can be parts or geometries. If the first
selected body happens to be a geometry, i_geometry should be selected as the parameter which
holds the first body, in the dialog box that appears for clearance create.
3. Clearance can be found out between two bodies which can be parts or geometries. If the second
selected body happens to be a geometry, j_geometry should be selected as the parameter which
holds the second body, in the dialog box that appears for clearance create.
4. Clearance can be found out between two bodies which can be parts or geometries. If the first
selected body happens to be a part, i_part should be selected as the parameter which holds the first
body, in the dialog box that appears for clearance create.
5. Clearance can be found out between two bodies which can be parts or geometries. If the second
selected body happens to be a part, j_part should be selected as the parameter which holds the
second body, in the dialog box that appears for clearance create.
6. To reduce the calculations in the clearance study, you can also define a maximum distance above
which Adams/PostProcessor does not calculate the clearance. When you play an animation, if the
distance between the pair of objects is greater than the maximum distance specified by you,
Adams/PostProcessor does not display a line between the objects. In addition, in the clearance
study reports, if the distance between two selected bodies exceeds the maximum distance
specified by you, Adams/PostProcessor records the distance as the maximum distance and not the
actual distance.
7. Adams/PostProcessor uses two different calculations for clearance studies - polygon and vertex.
• Polygon
In the Polygon method, Adams/PostProcessor calculates the minimum distance between the
surfaces of the triangles that make up the geometry. This is the most accurate method but
requires the most time and calculations. See also, Vertex.
• Vertex
clearance 5
clearance create
In Vertex method, Adams/PostProcessor calculates only the minimum distances between the
vertices of the triangles that make up the geometry. This method is less accurate than Polygon,
but calculates faster.
clearance delete
clearance delete
Allows you to delete an existing clearance study.
Format:
clearance delete
clearance_name = an existing clearance
Example:
clearance delete &

clearance_name = Clearance_1
Description:

clearance_name An Existing Clearance Specifies an existing clearance to delete
clearance 7
clearance export_results
Allows you to export the results of an existing clearance study to the specified file.
Format:
file_name = any file
Example:
clearance export_results &

file_name = "c:/testdir/test.out" &
analysis_name = Last_Run
Description:

file_name Any File Specifies the file to which the output is expected to be written
analysis_name An Existing This parameter gets assigned the name of any existing
Simulation Analysis simulation analysis.
1. This parameter gets assigned the name of the output file to which the results of the current
clearance study should be written.
2. This analysis specified by the analysis_name parameter is used as the basis for the clearance study
being carried out.
clearance modify
clearance modify
Enables the user to modify an existing clearance study.
Format:
clearance modify
clearance_name = an existing clearance
new_clearance_name = a new clearance
comments = comment string
maximum = real value
method = selection list
Example:
clearance modify &

clearance_name = clearance_4 &
new_clearance_name = clearance_4_new_1 &
comments = "clearace_4 modified &
maximum = 120.0
Description:

clearance_name Existing Clearance Specifies the name of an existing clearance study
new_clearance_name New Clearance Specifies the name of a new clearance study
comments String Comment string
maximum Real Value To reduce the calculations in the clearance study, you can
also define a maximum distance above which
Adams/PostProcessor does not calculate the clearance
method Selection List Specifies the calculation method for the clearance study
1. When you play an animation, if the distance between the pair of objects is greater than the
maximum distance specified by you, Adams/PostProcessor does not display a line between the
objects. In addition, in the clearance study reports, if the distance between two selected bodies
exceeds the maximum distance specified by you, Adams/PostProcessor records the distance as the
maximum distance and not the actual distance.
clearance 9
clearance modify
2. Adams/PostProcessor uses two different calculations for clearance studies - polygon and vertex.
• Polygon
In the Polygon method, Adams/PostProcessor calculates the minimum distance between the
surfaces of the triangles that make up the geometry. This is the most accurate method but
requires the most time and calculations. See also Vertex.
• Vertex
In Vertex method, Adams/PostProcessor calculates only the minimum distance between the
vertices of the triangles that make up the geometry. This method is less accurate than Polygon,
but calculates faster.
clearance modify
color 1
color
Allows you to select a basic color or create a custom color to be used for displaying objects, the
background of the main window and any view windows that you create.
color create
color create
Allows you to create a new color by specifying the red, blue and green components of the color.
Format:
color create
color_name= a new color
red_component= real
green_component= real
blue_component= real
Example:
color create &

Color_name= MY_COLOR &
Red_component= 0.98 &
Green_component= 0.89 &
Blue_component= 0.66
Description:

color_name A New Color Specifies the name of the new color to be created
red_component Real Specifies the amount of red in a color
green_component Real Specifies the amount of green in a color
blue_component Real Specifies the amount of blue in a color
1. Color_name should be different from the names of any of the existing colors present. If you need
to modify the hue of an existing color, then use the modify keyword within the command color.
2. Red_component can be a real value greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to one.
You can use any combination of red, green, or blue to define a color.
3. Green_component can be a real value greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to one.
Blue_component can be a real value greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to one.
color 3
color modify
color modify
This command allows you to modify an existing color by changing the red, blue and green components
of the color.
Format:
color modify
color_name= an existing color
new_color_name= a new color
red_component= real
green_component= real
blue_component= real
Example:
color modify &

Color_name= MY_COLOR &
New_color_name= MODIFIED_COLOR &
Red_component= 0.99 &
Green_component= 0.89 &
Blue_component= 0.56
Description:

color_name An Existing Color Specifies an existing color
new_color_name A New Color Changes the name of the existing color
red_component Real Specifies the amount of red in a color
green_component Real Specifies the amount of green in a color
blue_component Real Specifies the amount of blue in a color
1. The new_color_name parameter allows the user to change the name of the existing color. For
example, if you make an existing color, RED, lighter by reducing its red component, you could
rename it as, say, LT_RED.
2. Red_componenet can be a real value greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to one.
color modify
3. Green_component can be a real value greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to one.
4. Blue_component can be a real value greater than or equal to zero and less than or equal to one.
constraint 1
constraint
constraint attributes
Allows the specification of attributes to be set on an individual constraint or a group of constraints.
Format:
constraint_name = existing constraint
scale_of_icons = real
size_of_icons = length
visibility = on/off/no_opinion/toggle
name_visibility = on/off/no_opinion/toggle
color = existing color
active = on/off/no_opinion
dependents_active = on/off/no_opinion
Example:
constraint attributes &

constraint_name = joint_1 &
scale_of_icons = 1.2 &
visibility = on &
name_visibility = off &
active = on &
dependents_active = off
The above statement will set the new size of the icons by multiplying the current icon size by 1.2. The
Joint_1 will be visible since its visibility parameter is turned ON. The visibility of the view name
displayed at the top center position of a given view will be turned OFF since the name_visibility
parameter is turned OFF.
If JOINT_1 has a marker MAR1 which is the I marker of a joint JOI1 (which has a J marker MAR2),
then JOI1 will be deactivated as well because the dependants_active parameter being turned OFF.
Also, if the joint JOI1 is referenced in a request function, or if the I marker is referenced by a request,
then the request will be deactivated.
constraint 3
Description:

constraint_name Existing constraint Specifies the constraint to modify.
name
scale_of_icons Real Specifies a unit-less scale factor to apply to the current
icon size.
size_of_icons Length Specifies the size, in modeling units, the Adams/View
icons will appear.
visibility On/Off/No_optinion/ Specifies the visibility of graphic entities.
Toggle
name_visibility On/Off/No_optinion/ The Name_Visibility parameter provides control over the
Toggle visibility of the view name displayed at the top center
position of a given view.
color Existing color Specifies the color the modeling entity should be drawn
in.
active On/Off/No_opinion When you set Active=No, that element is written to the
data set as a comment. When you set the Active attribute
on an object, you are also setting it on the children of the
object.
dependents_active On/Off/No_opinion Sets the active parameters for all the dependants of the
constraint.
1. You may identify a constraint by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
• If the constraint is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it
convenient to type the name even if the constraint is displayed.
• If you created the constraint by reading an Adams data set, the constraint name is the first three
letters of the Adams statement type followed by the Adams data set constraint ID number. The
name of ADAMS JOINT/101 is JOI101, for example. If you created the constraint during
preprocessing, you gave it a name at that time.
• If a constraint is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not,
you must enter its full name. To identify a constraint under a different model, for instance, you
may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify constraint
'servo_motor' from model 'test' by entering ".test.servo_motor". If you type a "?",
Adams/View will list the constraints available by default.
• You must separate multiple constraint names by commas.
• If the constraint is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
graphics associated with it.
• You need not separate multiple constraint picks by commas.
2. If no initial size is specified for Adams/View icons, the default size will be one modeling
LENGTH unit. For example, if the modeling units are K/M/S, a part axes icon will have triad legs
of one meter in length.
When you specify SCALE_OF_ICONS, a new size is calculated by multipling the current size,
by the scale, and storing the product as the new ICON_SIZE.
When you set SIZE_OF_ICONS at the model level, all Adams/View icons used in creating a
model will use the size specified.
If the model has an SIZE_OF_ICONS set, and a part under that model has a different
SIZE_OF_ICONS, the model's ICONS_SIZE will take precedence.
An Example:
.model ---------------------- SIZE_OF_ICONS = .15 meters
.constraint -------------------- SIZE_OF_ICONS = .125 meters
The constraint's icon will be 1.5 meters is size.
If the model has SIZE_OF_ICONS of set to 0.0 , and a constraint under that model has a
SIZE_OF_ICONS set to .125, the constraint's icon size will be used.
An Example:
.model ---------------------- SIZE_OF_ICONS = 0.0 meters
.constraint -------------------- SIZE_OF_ICONS = .125 meters
The constraint's icon will be .125 meters is size.
4. The visibility parameter is used to control whether graphic entities, such as markers, joints, and
parts, are to be drawn in an Adams/View viewport. The legal values for this parameter are: ON,
OFF, and TOGGLE. ON will make the desired entity visible. OFF will make the desired entity
invisible. TOGGLE will take the current state of an entities visibility and reverse it.
5. The legal values of the visibility parameter are ON and OFF. This is an optional parameter and if
not entered the name will be visible (i.e. will be ON).
6. Adams/View allows you to specify the following colors for modeling entities: BLACK, WHITE,
RED, GREEN, BLUE, CYAN, MAGENTA, YELLOW, and NO_COLOR
Specifying 'NO_COLOR' for a modeling entity, instructs Adams/View to use the default color for
this entity, if there is no color present in its parent modeling entity.
Example 1:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part---------------------- RED
.geometry(circle) ------- NO_COLOR
The circle will be RED.
Example 2:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part---------------------- RED
.geometry(circle) ------- BLUE
constraint 5
If a parent modeling entity has a color previously specified, that color takes precedence.
Adams/View will issue a warning message about color precedence. The circle will be RED.
Example 3:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part---------------------- NO_COLOR
The circle will be BLUE.
7. If you set ACTIVE=NO on a part, but wish for a marker on that part to be on, then you must
explicitly set ACTIVE=YES on the marker, after setting activation on the part.
The DEPENDENTS_ACTIVE parameter acts in the same fashion, but sets the ACTIVE attribute
for the dependents, all the way down the dependency chain. For example, if you execute the
following command:
PART ATTRIBUTES PART=PAR1 DEPENDENTS_ACTIVE=NO
Where PAR1 has a marker MAR1 which is the I marker of a joint JOI1 (which has a J marker
MAR2), then JOI1 will be deactivated.
Also, if the joint JOI1 is referenced in a request function, or if the I marker is referenced by a
request, then the request will be deactivated.
Propagation of activation status through groups is as if each element were to have its activation
status changed indvidually.
Elements affected are:
• Group
• Part
• Differential Equation
• Marker
• Geometry
• Constraints
• Forces
• Data Elements
• Output Control
8. You can set the following attributes on a constraint.
• SIZE_OF_ICONS / SCALE_OF_ICONS: These two parameters are mutually exclusive. You
may set a size of the icon used for the constraint representation in modeling units, or you may
scale the size of the icon by a non-unit scale factor.
• VISIBILITY. You may set a constraint's visibility ON, OFF or TOGGLE the current setting.
When you set a constraint's visibility OFF, the constraint will not be drawn. When you set a
constraint's visibility ON, you allow that constraint to be drawn.
• NAME_VISIBILITY: You may set a constraint's name label visibility ON, OFF or TOGGLE the
current setting with this parameter.
• COLOR: You may set the color of a constraint with this parameter.
If an entity does not have a GRAPHICS ATTRIBUTE setting, the value for that GRAPHIC
ATTRIBUTE may be inherited from another entity. INHERITANCE may be either TOP_DOWN
or BOTTOM_UP.
BOTTOM_UP and TOP_DOWN refer to the natural hierarchy of the Adams model. The
hierarchy is a tree structure with the model at the apex. Parts exist beneath the model, and markers
exist beneath the parts. If the icon size of the model is set to 0.1, and the default INHERITANCE
is set to TOP_DOWN, then all icons displayed within the model will be displayed at this size.
However, if the icon size of a model is set to 0.1, and then the default INHERITANCE is set to
BOTTOM_UP, then any icons set to a size other than the model's icon size will be displayed at
their own size.
Caution: Note that if the visibility of the view name is turned off the only indication that a view is
"active" will be the color of the viewport border. This would be a problem on a black and
white monitor.
Tip: Use the constraint_name parameter to identify the existing constraint to affect with this
command.
constraint 7
constraint copy
constraint copy
Allows you to create a replica constraint within the same model.
Format:
constraint copy
new_constraint_name = new constraint name
Example:
constraint copy &

new_constraint_name = copy_joint_1
Description:

Constraint_name Existing constraint Specifies the constraint to delete.
new_constraint_name New constraint name Specifies the name of the new constraint.
1. Any Adams/View object you delete, may be "undeleted" by using the UNDO commands. If you
have deleted something you would like back, enter the command "undo backward", or pick on the
fixed menu entry 'UNDO'.
• You may identify a constraint by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
name of Adams joint/101 is JOI101, for example. If you created the constraint during
you must enter its full name.
• To identify a constraint under a different model, for instance, you may need to enter the model
name as well. For example, you may specify constraint 'servo_motor' from model 'test' by
entering ".test.servo_motor". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the constraints available
by default.
constraint copy

2. Adams/View will not allow you to have two constraints with the same full name, so you must
provide a unique name.
Normally, entity names are composed of alphabetic, numeric, or '_' (underscore) characters, and
element) when you create it by changing the name. If you enter just the entity name, then the
default parent will be assigned by Adams/View. If you type in the full name, then you may over
ride the default parent. In most cases, when creating an entity, Adams/View will provide a default
name. The default name that Adams/View provides will specify the parentage that it has assumed.
3. This replica constraint will be identical to the original with the exception of the constraint name.
Constraints must have unique names relative to other constraints in a given model. The replica
will be completely independent of the original, and may be modified without effecting the
original.
When the new constraint is created, it uses the same markers or joints as the original. A first step
after the copy of a joint constraint might be to modify the I and J markers on the replica.
Constraints may not be copied from model to model.
Tip: You may use the new_constraint_name later to refer to the constraint.
constraint 9
constraint create complex_joint coupler

Allows the creation of a coupler.
Format:

coupler_name = a new coupler
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
joint_name = an existing joint
type_of_freedom = coupler_freedom
motion_multipliers = real
first_angular_scale_factor = angle
first_scale_factor = real
second_angular_scale_factor = angle
second_scale_factor = real
third_angular_scale_factor = angle
third_scale_factor = real
user_function = real
Example:
constraint create complex_joint coupler &

coupler_name = coupler__1 &
adams_id = 1 &
comments = "comment string" &
joint_name = joint_1 , joint_1 &
motion_multipliers = 0.1 , 0.2 &
type_of_freedom = rot_rot_rot
Description:

coupler_name A New Coupler Specifies the name of the new coupler. You may
use this name later to refer to this coupler.
adams_id Adams_id Specifies an integer used to identify this element in
the Adams data file.
comments String Specifies comments for the object being created or
modified.
joint_name An Existing Joint Specifies the translational, revolute, or cylindrical
joint associated with this entity. Some entities
constrain motion at, or are otherwise associated
with, specific joints. You use this parameter to
identify that joint.
type_of_freedom Coupler_freedom Specifies whether cylindrical joints transfer
translational or rotational motion.
motion_multipliers Real Specifies the relative motion of the joints you
identify with joints
first_angular_scale_factor Angle Specifies the angular motion of the first joint you
identify with JOINT_NAME relative to the motion
of the second and third joints you identify with
Joint_Name.
first_scale_factor Real Specifies the non-angular motion of the first joint
you identify with JOINT_NAME relative to the
motion of the second and third joints you identify
with Joint_Name.
second_angular_scale_factor Angle Specifies the angular motion of the second joint
you identify with Joint_Name relative to the
motion of the first and third joints you identify with
JOINT_NAME
second_scale_factor Real Specifies the non-angular motion of the second
joint you identify with Joint_Name relative to the
motion of the first and third joints you identify with
Joint_Name.
third_angular_scale_factor Angle Specifies the angular motion of the third joint you
identify with Joint_Name relative to the motion of
the first and second joints you identify with
Joint_Name.
constraint 11

third_scale_factor Real Specifies the non-angular motion of the third joint
you identify with Joint_Name relative to the
motion of the first and second joints you identify
with Joint_Name.
user_function Real Specifies up to 30 values for Adams to pass to a
userwritten subroutine. See the Adams User's
Manual for information on writing user-written
subroutines.
1. A coupler creates the coupling of the translational and/or the rotational motion of two or three
joints. With this constraint, you can deliver or relate motion from one area of a mechanism to
another. Components whose behavior you might approximate with this statement include
combinations of hydraulic generators, motors, and pistons and include flexible, rotational
transmission cables.
2. Normally, entity names like the coupler name are composed of alphabetic, numeric, or '_'
(underscore) characters, and start with an alphabetic or '_' character. They may be any length. By
enclosing the name in double quotes, you may use other printable characters, or start the name
name when entering it. Note that you can specify the parentage of an entity (e.g. what part "owns"
a marker or a geometry element) when you create it by changing the name. If you enter just the
entity name, then the default parent will be assigned by Adams/View. If you type in the full name,
then you may over ride the default parent. In most cases, when creating an entity, Adams/View
will provide a default name. The default name that Adams/View provides will specify the
parentage that it has assumed. You may, or course, delete this name and use your own. The form
of a full name is:
3. When you use the File Adams_data_set write command, Adams/View writes an Adams data
file for your model. Adams requires that each modeling element be identified by a unique integer
identifier. If you use this parameter to specify a non-zero identifier, Adams/View will use it in the
corresponding statement in the Adams data file. You may also enter zero as an identifier, either
explicitly or by default. The next time you write an Adams file, Adams/View will replace the zero
with a unique, internally-generated identifier. Adams/View will permanently store this identifier
with the element just as if you had entered it yourself. Normally, you would let all identifiers
default to zero, and Adams/View would generate the identifiers for you. You are never required
to enter a non-zero identifier. You only need to specify it if, for some reason, you wish to control
the Adams file output.
4. When an Adams/Solver data file (.adm) is read into Adams/View, all comments associated with
a statement (from the end of the previous statement through the end of the current statement) are
stored with the object. Comments in the data file can be associated with model. These comments
must follow the title statement and be followed by the comment 'END OF MODEL
COMMENTS'. This string must be uppercase. When an Adams/Solver data file is written, the
comments for an object are written before the statement corresponding to the object.
5. You may identify a joint by typing its name or by picking it from the screen. If the joint is not
visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it convenient to type the name
even if the joint is displayed. If you created the joint by reading an data set or graphics file, the
joint name is the letters JOI followed by the Adams data set joint ID number. The name of Adams
JOINT/101 is JOI101, for example. If you created the joint during preprocessing, you gave it a
name at that time. If a joint is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only.
If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a joint under a model, for instance, you may
need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify joint 'lower_pivot' in model
'links' by entering ".links.lower_pivot". You must separate multiple joint names by commas. If
the joint is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it. You need not separate multiple joint picks by commas.
6. Adams assumes that translational joints transfer translational motion and that revolute joints
transfer rotational motion. A cylindrical joint permits both translational and rotational motion,
however. If your coupler includes cylindrical joints, you must use this parameter to indicate which
motion is transferred at each joint.
7. Adams uses the values in the SCALES argument in the following equation:
(r1 * q1) + (r2 * q2) + (r3 * q3) = 0,
where r1, r2, and r3 are the scale factors for the three joints and q1, q2, and q3 are the translational
or the rotational displacements of the joint I markers with respect to their J markers. Suppose you
are coupling two joints, and SCALES=1,-2. The equation that relates the two joints is
q1 + (-2 * q2) = 0, or
q1 = 2 * q2.
The displacement (q1) of the I marker with respect to the J marker in the first joint is twice that
of the displacement (q2) of the I marker with respect to the J marker in the second joint; the two
displacements have the same sign. If you specify two joints in the JOINTS argument, you must
specify r2. If you specify only one value, Adams assumes it is r2 and uses the default value of 1
for r1.
8. Adams uses the first_angular_scale_factor (r1) in the following equation:
(r1 * q1) + (r2 * q2) + (r3 * q3) = 0,
are coupling two joints, and r1=1 and r2=-2. The equation that relates the two joints is
q1 + (-2 * q2) = 0, or
q1 = 2 * q2.
constraint 13
displacements have the same sign.
9. Adams uses the first_scale_factor (r1) in the following equation:
(r1 * q1) + (r2 * q2) + (r3 * q3) = 0,
q1 + (-2 * q2) = 0, or
q1 = 2 * q2.
10. Adams uses the second_angular scale_factor (r2) in the following equation:
(r1 * q1) + (r2 * q2) + (r3 * q3) = 0,
q1 + (-2 * q2) = 0, or
q1 = 2 * q2.
11. Adams uses the second_scale_factor (r2) in the following equation:
(r1 * q1) + (r2 * q2) + (r3 * q3) = 0,
q1 + (-2 * q2) = 0, or
q1 = 2 * q2.
12. Adams uses the third_angular_scale_factor (r3) in the following equation:
(r1 * q1) + (r2 * q2) + (r3 * q3) = 0,
or the rotational displacements of the joint I markers with respect to their J markers.
13. adams uses the third_scale_factor (r3) in the following equation:
(r1 * q1) + (r2 * q2) + (r3 * q3) = 0,
Caution: Adams/View will not allow you to have two couplers with the same full name, so you must
Tip: If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the joints available by default.
constraint 15
constraint create complex_joint gear

Allows the creation of a gear pair.
Format:

joint_name = a new gear
adams_id = integer
comments = string
common_velocity_marker = an existing marker
Example:
constraint create complex_joint gear &

gear_name = gear__1 &
adams_id = 3 &
joint_name = joint_1 &
common_velocity_marker = marker_1
Description:

gear_name A New Gear Specifies the name of the new gear.
modified.
joint associated with this entity.
common_velocity_ marker An Existing Marker Specifies the marker that designates the point of
contact and determines the ratio of the two gears.
1. A gear pair relates the motion of three parts and two joints. The three parts are the two gear parts
and a third part, the carrier, to which the gears are attached by the two joints. The joints must be
translational, revolute, or cylindrical. Different combinations of joint types and orientations allow
you to model spur, helical, planetary, bevel, and rack-and-pinion gear pairs.
2. The gear element uses the location of the common velocity marker to determine the point of
contact of the two gear pitch circles. The direction of the z-axis of the common velocity marker
indicates the direction of the common velocity of points on the gear teeth in contact. This is also
the direction in which gear tooth forces act. The location of the common velocity marker is
constant with respect to the carrier part.
3. Normally, entity names like the gear name are composed of alphabetic, numeric, or '_'
a marker or a geometry element) when you create it by changing the name. If you enter just the
of a full name is:
4. When you use the FILE Adams_data_set write command, Adams/View writes an Adams data file
for your model. Adams requires that each modeling element be identified by a unique integer
constraint 17
even if the joint is displayed. If you created the joint by reading an Adams data set or graphics
file, the joint name is the letters JOI followed by the Adams data set joint ID number. The name
of Adams joint/101 is JOI101, for example. If you created the joint during preprocessing, you
gave it a name at that time. If a joint is available by default, you may identify it by entering its
name only. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a joint under a model, for instance,
you may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify joint 'lower_pivot'
in model 'links' by entering ".links.lower_pivot". You must separate multiple joint names by
commas. If the joint is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
graphics associated with it. You need not separate multiple joint picks by commas.
7. You define the constant-velocity (CV) marker on the carrier part to which the J markers of the
joints belong. The z-axis of this marker must point in the direction of common velocity at the point
of contact. The direction of common velocity is tangent to both pitch circles and would be normal
to the tooth surfaces of the gears if the pressure angle was zero. (Adams always assumes a
pressure angle of zero.) The CV marker has constant position and orientation in the carrier LPRF
and does not change when the direction of power flow through the gear changes.
Tip: 1. If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the joints available by default.
2. You may use the gear_name later to refer to this gear. Adams/View will not allow
you to have two gears with the same full name, so you must provide a unique name.
3. Some entities constrain motion at, or are otherwise associated with, specific joints.
You use the joint_name parameter to identify that joint.
4. The common_velocity_marker also determines the direction of the reaction forces
developed by the joints in the gear pair.
constraint create general_constraint

Format:

general_constraint_name = new gen_constraint name
adams_id = geom. _id
comments = string,
i_marker_name = existing marker
function = function
Example:
constraint create general_constraint &

general_constraint_name = gcon_1 &
i_marker_name = marker_11 &
function = time
Description:

general_constraint_name New name Specify a name for the GCON
adams_id integer Specifies an integer used to identify this element in the
Adams data file.
modified.
I_marker_name Existing marker Specify an existing marker name.
function Function Specifies an expression or defines and passes constants
to a user-written subroutine to define the motion.
1. When you use the File Adams_data_set write command, Adams/View writes an Adams data file
corresponding statement in the Adams data file.
constraint 19
You may also enter zero as an identifier, either explicitly or by default. The next time you write
an Adams file, Adams/View will replace the zero with a unique, internally-generated identifier.
Adams/View will permanently store this identifier with the element just as if you had entered it
yourself.
Normally, you would let all identifiers default to zero, and Adams/View would generate the
identifiers for you. You are never required to enter a non-zero identifier. You only need to specify
it if, for some reason, you wish to control the Adams file output.
2. You may identify a joint by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the joint is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it convenient
to type the name even if the joint is displayed.
If you created the joint by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the joint name is the letters
JOI followed by the Adams data set joint ID number. The name of Adams JOINT/101 is JOI101,
for example. If you created the joint during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that time.
If a joint is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you must
enter its full name. To identify a joint under a model, for instance, you may need to enter the
model name as well. For example, you may specify joint 'lower_pivot' in model 'links' by entering
".links.lower_pivot". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the joints available by default.
You must separate multiple joint names by commas.
If the joint is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
You need not separate multiple joint picks by commas.
3. While the JOINT statement describes a physically recognizable combination of constraints that
are used to connect bodies together, the GCON statement enables you to define an arbitrary
constraint specific to a particular model. The GCON statement is more general and can be used
to equivalently define the existent JOINT elements. Therefore, the spherical joint
JOINT/11, SPHERICAL, I=1,J=3
could be equivalently replaced by the following set of three GCONs:
GCON/111, I=2, FUNC=DX(2,3)
GCON/112, I=2, FUNC=DY(2,3)
GCON/113, I=2, FUNC=DZ(2,3)
The GCON statement allows you to define both holonomic and non-holonomic constraints.
Holonomic constraints only depend on position measures, like GCON/111 through GCON/113
above. A constraint is non-holonomic if (a) its expression exp1 contains velocity measures, and
(b) there is no expression exp2 that is the time integral of exp1. An example of a non-holonomic
constraint is a roll without slip condition
GCON/34, FUNC=VX(2) - WZ(2)*DY(2)
The GCON statement introduces a constraint to Adams/Solver (C++) that is guaranteed to be
handled correctly as long as the FUNCTION is in Pfaffian form. In this context, note that any
holonomic expression is automatically in Pfaffian form. In the case of non-holonomic constraints,
a Pfaffian constraint requires that the FUNCTION is limited to expressions that are linear in
velocity quantities. In other words, if there are velocity quantities in the definition of the
FUNCTION (as is the case in the previous GCON), a partial derivative of the FUNCTION with
respect to any velocity quantity present in its definition should lead to an expression that does not
depend on velocity quantities. The previous GCON is therefore in Pfaffian form,
FUNC FUNC
since -------------------- = 1 and -------------------- = – DX  2  which makes the FUNC linear in velocity quantities.
FUNC WZ  2 
Another example of a Pfaffian non-holonomic constraint is the perpendicularity condition
GCON/25, FU=VX(2,3)*DX(2,1)+ VY(2,3)*DY(2,1)+ VZ(2,3)*DZ(2,1)
that indicates that the velocity V(2,3) is orthogonal to the distance vector between markers I=2
and J=1.
An example of a non-Pfaffian GCON is
GCON/25,FU=VX(2,3)*VX(2,3)*DX(2,1)+VY(2,3)*DY(2,1)+
VZ(2,3)*DZ(2,1)
FU
For this example, ------------------------ = 2  VX  2 3   DX  2 1  which is an expression that depends on the
VX  2 3 
velocity measure VX(2,3).
The FUNCTION expression exp can reference variables defined in the .adm file through the
VARVAL construct. It should be stressed again that correct handling of the GCON requires that
the expression defining the VARIABLE only depends on time, and position and velocity
measures; in other words, the Pfaffian character of the GCON is not undermined by the presence
of the VARVAL.
Cautions:
1. Objects of type General_Constraint are not compatible with Adams/Solver (FORTRAN).
2. The topology of the model has changed so .model_1.GCON__1 is no longer connected in a way
that is compatible with Adams/Solver (FORTRAN).
3. An attribute of .model_1.GCON__1 is no longer compatible with Adams/Solver (FORTRAN).
If you intend to use Adams/Solver (FORTRAN), you must change your model to eliminate the
incompatibility. For more information, see the online help for the object listed.
If you do not want to use Adams/Solver (FORTRAN), then be sure that you set your preferences
so Adams/Solver (C++) is the default as follows:
a. From the Settings menu, point to Solver and then select either Solver Executable or
Preferences, depending on the product you are using.
b. To learn more, press F1 in the dialog box.
• Correct handling of a GCON element assumes a FUNCTION defined in Pfaffian form.
• Kinematic models are incompatible with velocity constraints. If a model is rendered kinematic
by displacement constraints, any additional velocity constraints will be either redundant or
conflicting. In either case, version 2003 of Adams/Solver (C++) is incapable of analyzing the
model as explained below:
Currently, there is no redundancy check for user constraints defined at the velocity level.
Therefore, you can impose constraints that are not redundant at the position level, but lead to a set
of redundant constraints when their time derivative is considered with other velocity level
constraints during the velocity Initial Conditions (IC) analysis. Consider the situation when two
constraint 21
constraints are defined as GCON/1, FU=DX(1,2), and GCON/2, FU=VX(1,2). Because the
redundant constraint analysis only includes position level constraints, Adams/Solver (C++) will
not identify that a velocity-level constraint (GCON/2) induces a redundant constraint during the
velocity computation. As a result, a model that contains these two user constraints will fail during
the velocity analysis with a singular Jacobian error.
• GCON is a new modeling element only available in the Adams/Solver (C++). Currently there is
no support for defining GCON through Adams/View, so you need to edit the .adm file to add
user-defined constraints. Adams/View correctly imports the edited .adm file, and the internal
Adams/Solver (C++) from within Adams/View correctly handles the simulation of the model.
• If you use GCON to constrain the values of DIFF, LSE, and TFSISO elements, note that they
will not contribute degrees of freedom that are considered removed by a GCON element. The
GCON statement functions properly for Pfaffian expressions depending on position and velocity
measures and time, or as mentioned earlier, on VARVALs measures for VARIABLEs that only
depend on position and velocity measures and time.
• Consequently, a model that contains velocity constraints can only be simulated using the
dynamic solver.
• For a position-level GCON, the FUNCTION must be at least three times differentiable. If the
GCON introduces a velocity-level constraint, then the FUNCTION should be at least twice
differentiable. This requirement ensures that internally Adams/Solver (C++) can take the
necessary derivatives to perform certain types of analyses such as Acceleration/Force
reconciliation, dynamic analysis, and so on. Note that if the expression provided for GCON is
not continuously differentiable for the required number of times, the integrator will either fail, or
have a difficult time finding the numerical solution.
• The ability of the Adams/Solver (C++) to handle function expressions to provide the necessary
derivatives required by the GCON does not extend to user subroutines. Consequently, a
VARIABLE can only be referenced in a GCON provided it is defined using function
expressions, rather than a VARSUB subroutine.
• Use the RESULTS/XRF statement in order to get the reaction force on marker I reported in the
results file. This is the only output format currently able to handle GCON output.
Tip: There is no dedicated function that returns the reaction force induced by a user constraint
on a marker. You can invoke an existing function such as FX(I[; J][;K]) for this purpose.
Note that FX(I[; J][;K]) reports the force that acts on the I marker as a result of both
constraint and external forces applied to this marker. To only obtain the contribution of the
the GCON, the markers that appear in FX(I[; J][;K]) should be exclusively used to define
the GCON, and no other elements such as applied forces, joints, or motions should refer
them.
constraint create higher_pair_contact curve_curve

Allows you to create a curve_curve constraint.
Format:

curve_curve_name = new ccurve
adams_id = geom._id
comments = string
i_curve_name = existing acurve
J_curve_name = existing acurve
I_ref_marker_name = existing marker
J_ref_marker_name = Existing marker
i_marker_id = integer
J_marker_id = integer
I_displacement_ic = length
no_i_displacement_ic = true
j_displacement_ic = length
no_j_displacement_ic = true
i_ velocity_ic = velocity
no_i_velocity_ic = true
j_velocity_ic = velocity
no_j_velocity_ic = true
i_ ic_ref_marker_name = existing marker
ji_ ic_ref_marker_name = existing marker
Description:

curve_curve_name New ccurve Specifies the name of the new curve_curve. You
may use this name later to refer to this
curve_curve.
adams_id Integer Specifies an integer used to identify this element in
the Adams data File.
Comments String Specifies comments for the object being created or
modified.
constraint 23

i_curve_name Existing Acurve name Specifies the name of a CURVE from which
Adams constructs the first Curve
J_curve_name Existing acurve Specifies the name of a CURVE from which
Adams constructs the second curve.
I_ref_marker_name Existing marker Specifies the name of a fixed MARKER on the
part containing I_CURVE.
J_ref_marker_name Existing marker Specifies the name of a fixed MARKER on the
part containing J_CURVE.
I_floating_marker_name Existing marker Specify an existing floating marker.
J_floating_marker_name Existing marker Specify an existing floating marker.
I_marker_id Integer Specifies the Adams ID for the floating marker
which is automatically created on the I part by
AdamS/View.
J_marker_id Integer Specifies the ID for the floating marker which is
automatically created on the J part by
Adams/View. This allows you to reference the
floating marker in a request or function by the id
you specify, instead of letting Adams/View
generate one.
I_displacement_ic Length Specifies the initial point of contact on the first
curve.
J_displacement_ic Length Specifies the initial point of contact on the second
curve.
No_i_displacement_ic True Specifies that if an I_DISPLACEMENT_IC has
been set via any means, to "UNSET" the
displacement initial condition.
No_j_displacement_ic True Specifies that if an J_DISPLACEMENT_IC has
I_velocity_ic Velocity Specifies the initial velocity of the contact point
along I_CURVE.
J_velocity_ic Velocity Specifies the initial velocity of the contact point
along J_CURVE.
No_i_velocity_ic True Specifies that if an I_VELOCITY_IC has been set
via any means, to "UNSET" the velocity initial
condition.
No_j_velocity_ic True Specifies that if an J_VELOCITY_IC has been set
condition.

I_ic_ref_marker_name An existing marker Specifies the name of a fixed MARKER defining
the coordinate system in which the values for
I_DISPLACEMENT_IC are defined. The
I_IC_REF_MARKER must be on the same part as
the I_REF_MARKER.
J_ic_ref_marker_name An existing marker Specifies the name of a fixed MARKER defining
the coordinate system in which the values for
J_DISPLACEMENT_IC are defined. The
J_IC_REF_MARKER must be on the same part as
the J_REF_MARKER.
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two point_curves with the same full name, so you must
yourself.
constraint 25
3. The I_REFERENCE_MARKER marker specifies the coordinate system in which the x, y, z

coordinates of I_CURVE are specified. The curve is attached rigidly to the part specified in the
I_PART_NAME parameter and containing the I_REFERENCE_MARKER marker. The z
component of the CURVE must be zero. As a result, the curve will lie in the x-y plane of the
I_REFERENCE_MARKER marker.
4. The J_REFERENCE_MARKER specifies the coordinate system in which the x, y, z coordinates
of J_CURVE are specified. The curve is attached rigidly to the part specified in the
J_PART_NAME parameter and containing the J_REFERENCE_MARKER. The z component of
the CURVE must be zero. As a result, the curve will lie in the x-y plane of the
J_REFERENCE_MARKER.
5. The I_REF_MARKER marker identifies the coordinate system in which the coordinates of
ICURVE are specified. Adams constructs the I_CURVE in the I_REF_MARKER marker
coordinate system. Adams/View will automatically create the I "floating" marker. The I "floating
marker" and I_REF_MARKER markers must lie on the same part.
6. The J_REF_MARKER marker identifies the coordinate system that the coordinates of J_CURVE
are specified. Adams constructs the J_CURVE in the J_REF_MARKER coordinate system. The
J "floating" and J_REF_MARKER markers must lie on the same part.
7. For the i_displacement_ic parameter, if the point specified is not exactly on the curve, Adams will
use a point on the curve nearest to that specified. By default, the contact point is specified in the
I_REF_MARKER coordinate system. If another coordinate system is more convenient, you may
supply the I_IC_REF_MARKER argument and enter I_DISPLACEMENT_IC in
I_IC_REF_MARKER coordinates.
If you supply I_DISPLACEMENT_IC, Adams assembles the system with the contact at the
specified point on the curve, even if it must override part initial conditions in order to do so. If
you do not supply I_DISPLACEMENT_IC, Adams assumes the initial contact is at the point on
the first curve closest to J_CURVE in the input configuration. In this case, Adams may adjust that
contact point to maintain other part or constraint initial conditions.
8. For the j_displacement_ic parameter, if the point specified is not exactly on the curve, Adams uses
a point on the curve nearest to that specified. By default, the contact point is specified in the
J_REF_MARKER coordinate system. If another coordinate system is more convenient, you may
supply the J_IC_REF_MARKER and enter J_DISPLACEMENT_IC in J_IC_REF_MARKER
coordinates.
If you supply J_DISPLACEMENT_IC, Adams assembles the system with the contact at the
you do not supply J_DISPLACEMENT_IC, Adams assumes the initial contact is at a point on the
second curve closest to ICURVE in the input configuration. In this case, Adams may adjust that
9. The i_velocity_ic is the speed at which the contact point is initially moving relative to the curve.
I_VELOCITY_IC is negative if the contact point is moving towards the start of the curve, positive
if the contact point is moving toward the end of the curve, and zero if the contact point is
stationary on the curve.
If you supply I_VELOCITY_IC, Adams gives the contact point the specified initial velocity along
the first curve, even if it must override part initial conditions in order to do so. If you do not supply
I_VELOCITY_IC, Adams assumes the initial velocity is zero, but may adjust that velocity to
maintain other part or constraint initial conditions.
10. The j_velocity_ic is the speed at which the contact point is initially moving relative to the curve.
J_VELOCITY_IC is negative if the contact point is moving towards the start of the curve, positive
If you supply J_VELOCITY_IC, Adams gives the contact point the specified initial velocity
along the second curve, even if it must override part initial conditions in order to do so. If you do
not supply J_VELOCITY_IC, Adams assumes the initial velocity is zero, but may adjust that
velocity to maintain other part or constraint initial conditions.
11. The CURVE_CURVE defines a curve-curve constraint, which restricts a planar curve on one part
to be in contact with, and tangent to, a planar curve on a second part. The curves must lie in
parallel planes.
Adams constructs the first curve from the I_CURVE curve and the I_REF_MARKER, the second
curve from the J_CURVE value and the J_REF_MARKER. In both cases, the CURVE command
(I_CURVE or J_CURVE) defines x and y coordinates along the curve as a function of the
independent parameter (u). The z coordinates of the curves must be zero. The reference marker
(I_REF_MARKER or J_REF_MARKER) defines the part the constraining curve is attached to
and the coordinate system in which Adams applies the coordinates from the CURVE statement.
Both I_CURVE and J_CURVE may be open or closed, defined analytically or as a set of discrete
data points.
The CURVE_CURVE constraint removes three degrees-of-freedom from the system. Adams
restricts the motion of the parts such that the curves are always in contact and the curves are
tangent at the contact point. Although Adams requires that the curves lie in parallel planes, the
CURVE_CURVE command does not enforce this. You must build the model in such a way that
the curves are held in parallel planes, which will remove another three degrees of freedom.
Assuming the curves are held in parallel planes, a CURVE_CURVE leaves two relative degrees
of freedom between the curves. The first curve may slide or roll on the second, but may not move
perpendicular to the curve tangents at the contact.
Internally, Adams actually generates five constraint equations, but also adds two new system
variables and equations for a net decrease of one degree-of-freedom. The added system variables
are the two curve parameters at the contact points on the curves. Two of the constraints restrict
the x and y coordinates at the contact point on the first curve to match the x and y coordinates at
the the contact point on the second curve. The third constraint restricts the tangent at the contact
point on the first curve to be parallel to the tangent at the contact point on the second curve.
More than one POINT_CURVE or CURVE_CURVE statement may reference the same CURVE
statement. If the mechanism contains several similar contacts, you may enter just one CURVE
statement, then use it with several POINT_CURVE or CURVE_CURVE constraints, each with a
different REF_MARKER.
constraint 27
The I_VELOCITY_IC and J_VELOCITY_IC are specified in the reference frame of the part
containing the I_REF_MARKER or J_REF_MARKER marker, respectively. In other words, the
I_VELOCITY_IC is the speed of the contact point specified from the standpoint of an observer
on the part containing the first curve. This means if the contact point is not moving globally, but
the first curve is, then I_VELOCITY_IC is still non-zero.
Adams detects a fatal user error if the contact point moves off the end of an open curve. You
should make sure the CURVE statement defines the curve over the expected range of motion. The
initial conditions arguments, I_DISPLACEMENT_IC, J_DISPLACEMENT_IC,
I_VELOCITY_IC and J_VELOCITY_IC, impose constraints that are active only during an initial
conditions analysis. Adams does not impose these initial conditions during subsequent analyses.
For a kinematic analysis, the initial conditions are redundant. Do not use the
I_DISPLACEMENT_IC, J_DISPLACEMENT_IC, I_VELOCITY_IC or J_VELOCITY_IC
arguments on the CURVE_CURVE statements for systems with zero degrees of freedom.
Adams requires that there be a unique contact point in the vicinity of the I floating and J floating
markers during simulation. If this condition is violated, Adams may be unable to find the correct
contact point or may even jump from one contact point to the next.
One way to ensure that contact points are unique is to specify curve shapes that are convex. Note
that for a convex curve, any line segment connecting two points on the curve lie in the domain of
the curve. The same is not true for non-convex curves.
Caution: For the no_i_displacement_ic,no_j_displacement_ic,no_i_velocity and no_j_velocity

parameters, setting these parameters to true is not the same as setting the value to zero. A
zero displacement/velocity is not the same as "no" displacement/velocity. Therefore, by
setting this parameter to true there is no longer a displacement/velocity initial condition for
this element.
Note: The I- and J- marker id allow you to reference the floating marker in a request or function
by the id you specify, instead of letting Adams/View generate one.
constraint create higher_pair_contact point_curve

Allows you to create a point_curve.
Format:

point_curve_name = new pcurve
adams_id = geom._id
comments = string
curve_name = existing acurve
i_part_name = existing body
location = location
relative_to = an existing model, part or marker
i_marker_name = An existing marker
j_floating_marker_name = An existing fmarker
j_marker_id = integer
ref_marker_name = existing marker
displacement_ic = length
no_displacement_ic = true
velocity_ic = velocity
no_velocity_ic = true
ic_ref_marker_name = existing marker
Description:

point_curve_name New Pcurve Specifies the name of the new point_curve. You
may use this name later to refer to this point_curve.
modified.
curve_name Existing Acurve Specifies the name of a CURVE that defines the
name contour or shape on which the fixed marker can
move.
constraint 29

i_part_name Existing body Specifies the name of the part which will have a
point location constrained to lie on the curve
defined by CURVE and REF_MARKER.
location Location Specifies the point location on the i part that will be
constrained to lie on the curve defined by CURVE
and REF_MARKER.
relative_to Existing part, body or Specifies the coordinate system that location
marker coordinates and orientation angles are with respect
to.
i_marker_name Existing marker Specifies the name of a fixed MARKER that
name Adams constrains to lie on the curve defined by
CURVE and REF_MARKER.
j_floating_marker_name Existing floating Specify an existing floating marker name.
marker name
j_marker_id Integer Specifies the Adams ID for the floating marker
which is automatically created on the J part by
floating marker in a request or function by the id
generate one.
ref_marker_name Existing marker Specifies the name of a MARKER fixed on the part
containing the curve on which the I_MARKER
must move.
displacement_ic Length Specifies the initial point of contact on the curve.
no_displacement_ic true Specifies that if a DISPLACEMENT_IC has been
set via any means, to "UNSET" the displacement
initial condition.
velocity_ic Velocity Specifies the initial tangential velocity of the
I_MARKER along the curve.
no_velocity_ic True Specifies that if a VELOCITY_IC has been set via
any means, to "UNSET" the velocity initial
condition.
ic_ref_marker_name Existing marker Specifies the name of a the fixed MARKER
defining the coordinate system in which the values
for DISPLACEMENT_IC values are specified.
The IC_REF_MARKER must be on the same part

as the REF_MARKER.
2. When you use the FILE Adams_DATA_SET WRITE command, Adams/View writes an Adams
data file for your model. Adams requires that each modeling element be identified by a unique
integer identifier. If you use this parameter to specify a non-zero identifier, Adams/View will use
it in the corresponding statement in the Adams data file.
yourself.
3. The specfied part and the curve must belong to different parts. You may identify a part by typing
its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the part is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it convenient
to type the name even if the part is displayed.
If you created the part by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the part name is the letters
PAR followed by the Adams data set part ID number. The name of Adams PART/101 is PAR101,
for example. If you created the part during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that time.
If a part is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you must
enter its full name. To identify a part under another model, for instance, you may need to enter the
model name as well. For example, you may specify part 'arm' from model 'robot' by entering
".robot.arm". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the parts available by default.
You must separate multiple part names by commas.
constraint 31
If the part is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
You need not separate multiple part picks by commas.
4. The "floating" marker is automatically created by Adams/View on the part specified in the
J_PART_NAME parameter. Adams will orient the J floating marker so that its x-axis is along the
tangent vector at the contact point, its y-axis is along the gradient vector at the contact point in the
plane containing the tangent vector and the center of curvature, and its z-axis is along the binormal
at contact point.
You may identify a part by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
PAR followed by the Adams data set part ID number. The name of Adams PART/101 is PAR101,
for example. If you created the part during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that time.
associated with it.
5. If this parameter is not specified, the default coordinate system is used. The default coordinate
system is initially your model, i.e. the global coordinate system. You may change the default
coordinate system using the 'defaults coordinate_system' command.
6. The REF_MARKER is used to associate the shape defined by the CURVE to the part on which
the REF_MARKER lies. The curve coordinates are therefore specified in the coordinate system
of the REF_MARKER. The floating J marker and REF_MARKER must belong to the same
PART.
You may identify a marker by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the marker is not visible on the screen, you must type the name.
You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the marker is displayed.
If you created the marker by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the marker name is the
letters MAR followed by the Adams data set marker ID number. The name of Adams
MARKER/101 is MAR101, for example. If you created the marker during preprocessing, you
gave it a name at that time.
If a marker is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify a marker under a different part, for instance, you may need
to enter the model and part names as well. For example, you may specify marker 'pivot' from
model 'links', part 'lower_arm' by entering ".links.lower_arm.pivot". If you type a "?",
Adams/View will list the markers available by default.
You must separate multiple marker names by commas.
If the marker is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on it.
You need not separate multiple marker picks by commas.
7. If the point specified is not exactly on the curve, Adams uses a point on the curve nearest to that
specified. By default, DISPLACEMENT_IC is specified in the REF_MARKER marker
coordinate system. If another coordinate system is more convenient, you may supply the
IC_REF_MARKER argument and enter DISPLACEMENT_IC in IC_REF_MARKER marker
coordinates. If you supply DISPLACEMENT_IC values, Adams assembles the system with the
I_MARKER at the specified point on the curve, even if it must override part initial conditions in
order to do so. If you do not supply DISPLACEMENT_IC, Adams assumes the initial contact is
at the point on the curve closest to the initial I_MARKER position. However, it may adjust that
8. The velocity_ic parameter specified the speed at which the I_MARKER is initially moving
relative to the curve. The VELOCITY_IC is negative if the I_MARKER is moving towards the
start of the curve, positive if the I_MARKER is moving toward the end of the curve, and zero if
the I_MARKER is stationary on the curve.
If you supply the VELOCITY_IC, 1 gives the I_MARKER the specified initial tangential velocity
along the curve, even if it must override part initial conditions in order to do so. If you do not
supply VELOCITY_IC, Adams assumes the initial tangential velocity is zero, but may adjust that
The I_MARKER and REF_MARKER must belong to different parts.
9. The POINT_CURVE command defines a point-to-curve constraint, which restricts a fixed point
defined on one part to lie on a curve defined on a second part. This is an instance of a higher pair
constraint.
10. The part containing the I_MARKER is free to roll and slide on the curve that is fixed to a second
part. Lift-off is not allowed, i.e., the I_MARKER must always lie on the curve.
11. The curve itself may be planar or spatial, open or closed. The "floating J" marker origin defines
the contact point on the curve; its orientation defines the tangent, normal, and binormal at the
contact point. A POINT_CURVE constraint removes two translational degrees-of-freedom from
the system. Adams restricts the origin of the I_MARKER to always lie on the curve. The
I_MARKER may translate only in one direction relative to the curve, along the instantaneous
tangent. The I marker is free to rotate in all three directions.
1
constraint 33
12. More than one POINT_CURVE or CURVE_CURVE element may reference the same CURVE
13. The VELOCITY_IC is specified in the reference frame of the part containing the
REF_MARKER. In other words, the VELOCITY_IC is the speed of the I_MARKER specified
from the standpoint of an observer on the part containing the curve. This means that if the
I_MARKER is not moving globally but the curve is, then VELOCITY_IC is still non-zero.
14. The initial conditions arguments, DISPLACEMENT_IC and VELOCITY_IC, impose constraints
that are active only during an initial conditions analysis. Adams does not impose these initial
conditions during subsequent analyses.
DISPLACEMENT_IC or VELOCITY_IC arguments on the POINT_CURVE command for
systems with zero degrees of freedom.
Caution: 1. For the no_displacement_ic and no_velocity parameters, setting these parameters to
true is not the same as setting the value to zero. A zero displacement/velocity is not
the same as "no" displacement/velocity. Therefore, by setting this parameter to true
there is no longer a displacement initial condition for this element.
2. The I_MARKER and REF_MARKER must belong to different parts.
3. Adams aborts the simulation if the contact point moves off the end of an open curve.
The user should make sure the CURVE statement defines the curve over the
expected range of motion.
Tip: The x, y, z values associated with the CURVE are the coordinates of points lying on the
CURVE and are calculated in the coordinate system of the REF_MARKER.
constraint create joint convel

Allows the creation of a constant velocity joint.
Format:

joint_name = a new joint
adams_id = integer
comments = string
i_part_name = an existing body
j_part_name = an existing body
location = location
orientation = location
along_axis_orientation = location
in_plane_orientation = location
i_marker_name = an existing marker
j_marker_name = an existing marker
Example:
constraint create joint convel &

joint_name = JOINT__1 &
adams_id = 2 &
i_part_name = part_1 &
j_part_name = part_2 &
location = 10 , 10 , 5 &
orientation = 1 , 2 , 1 &
relative_to = ground &
j_marker_name = marker_2
constraint 35
Description:

joint_name A New Joint Specifies the name of the new joint. You may use this
name later to refer to this joint. Adams/View will not
allow you to have two joints with the same full name,
so you must provide a unique name.
adams_id Adams_id Specifies an integer used to identify this element in the
Adams data file.
modified.
i_part_name An Existing Body Specifies the part that is the first of two parts
connected by this joint. Adams/View connects one
part at the I marker to the other at the J marker. These
markers are automatically generated using this
method of joint creation.
j_part_name An Existing Body Specifies the part that is the second of two parts
part at the J marker to the other at the I marker. These
location Location Specifies the locations to be used to define the
position of a constraint during its creation. The I and J
markers will be automatically created at this location
on the I_PART_NAME and J_PART_NAME
respectively.
orientation Orientation Specifies the orientation of the J marker for the
constraint being created using three rotation angles.
The I marker is oriented based on the J marker
orientation and the requirements of the particular
constraint being created. These markers are created
automatically.
along_axis_orientation Location Specifies the orientation of a coordinate system (e.g.
marker or part) by directing one of the axes.
Adams/View will assign an arbitrary rotation about
the axis.
in_plane_orientation Location Specifies the orientation of a coordinate system (e.g.
marker or part) by directing one of the axes and
locating one of thecoordinate planes.
relative_to An Existing Model, Specifies the coordinate system that location
Part Or Marker coordinates and orientation angles are with respect to.

i_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies a marker on the first of two parts connected
by this joint. Adams/View connects one part at the I
marker to the other at the J marker.
j_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies a marker on the second of two parts
part at the I marker to the other at the J marker.
1. A CONVEL joint is a two-degree-of-freedom joint that superimposes the origin of two markers
while constraining the local z-rotation of the I marker to match the local z-rotation of the J marker.
2. Normally, entity names like the joint name are composed of alphabetic, numeric, or '_'
a marker or a geometry element) when you CREATE it by changing the name. If you enter just
the entity name, then the default parent will be assigned by Adams/View. If you type in the full
name, then you may over ride the default parent. In most cases, when creating an entity,
Adams/View will provide a default name. The default name that Adams/View provides will
specify the parentage that it has assumed. You may, or course, delete this name and use your own.
The form of a full name is:
constraint 37
5. Adams/View will orient the coordinate system by starting from the initial coordinate system and
applying three successive rotations. Depending on the convention you have selected, the rotations
may occur about space-fixed or bodyfixed axes in any meaningful combination of the x, y, and z
axes.
By default, you supply Euler (body313, or body-fixed z, x, z) angles. You may change this
convention with the 'DEFAULTS UNITS ORIENTATION_TYPE=' command. For example,
selecting SPACE123 means you will subsequently be supplying space-fixed x, y, and z angles.
Adams/View applies your orientation angles starting from the coordinate system you identify
with the RELATIVE_TO parameter. The default for the RELATIVE_TO parameter is the default
coordinate system.
6. For the along_axis_orientation parameter you may enter either one or two locations to direct the
axis. If you enter one location, the axis will point toward the location. If you specify two locations,
the axis will be parallel to, and pointing the same way as, the vector from the first location to the
second. Note that this does not completely dictate the orientation of the coordinate system.
Adams/View will osition the coordinate system with an arbitrary rotation about the axis. If you
must completely control the coordinate system orientation, use ORIENTATION or
IN_PLANE_ORIENTATION. By default, you direct the Z axis of the coordinate system.
You may change this convention with the 'DEFAULTS ORIENT_AXIS_AND_PLANE
AXIS_AND_PLANE_SETTING=' command. For example, selecting either
X_AXIS_XY_PLANE or X_AXIS_XZ_PLANE means you will subsequently be directing the X
axis. The plane-convention setting does not affect this parameter. Adams/View applies your
location coordinates in the coordinate system you identify with the RELATIVE_TO parameter.
The default for the RELATIVE_TO parameter is the default coordinate system.
7. For the in_plane_orientation parameter you may enter either two or three locations. If you enter
two locations, the axis will point toward the first location and the plane will fall on the second. If
you specify three locations, the axis will be parallel to, and pointing the same way as, the vector
from the first location to the second and the plane will be parallel to the plane defined by the three
locations. By default, you direct the Z axis of the coordinate system and locate the ZX plane. You
may use the 'DEFAULTS ORIENT_AXIS_AND_PLANE AXIS_AND_PLANE_SETTING='
command to change this convention. For example, selecting X_AXIS_XY_PLANE means you
will subsequently be directing the X axis and locating the XY plane. Adams/View applies your
8. If the relative_to parameter is not specified, the default coordinate system is used. The default
coordinate system is initially your model, i.e. the global coordinate system. You may change the
default coordinate system using the 'defaults coordinate_system' command.
9. The pitch diameter relates the rotational motion of the pinion to the translational motion of the
rack. When the pinion turns in the positive direction around the z-axis of the I marker, a positive
pitch diameter moves the rack in the positive direction along the z-axis of the J marker and a
negative pitch diameter moves the rack in the negative direction along the z-axis of the J marker.
constraint create joint cylindrical

Allows the creation of a cylindrical joint.
Format:

joint_name = new joint name
adams_id = Geom_id
comments = String
translational_ic = length
no_translational_ic = true
rotational_ic = angle
no_rotational_ic = true
angular_velocity_ic = angular_velocity
no_angular_velocity_ic = true
j_part_name = existing body
Location = location
orientation = orientation
relative_to = existing model, part or marker
j_marker_name = existing marker
Example:
constraint create joint Cylindrical &

joint_name = .model_1.JOINT_2 &
adams_id = 2 &
i_part_name = PART_2 &
j_part_name = PART_3
constraint 39
Description:

joint_name New joint name Specifies the name of the new joint.
adams_id Integer Specifies an integer used to identify this element in the
Adams data file.
modified.
translational_ic Length Specifies the initial translational displacement on a
translational or cylindrical joint.
no_translational_ic True Specifies to "UNSET" the "translational" velocity
initial condition for the specified constraint, if set.
velocity_ic Velocity Specifies the initial translational velocity on a
no_velocity_ic True Specifies to "UNSET" the velocity initial condition, if
a VELOCITY_IC is set via any means.
rotational_ic Real Specifies the initial rotational displacement on a
revolute or cylindrical joint.
no_rotational_ic True Specifies to "UNSET" the "rotational" velocity initial
condition for the specified constraint, if set.
angular_velocity_ic Angular_velocity Specifies the initial angular velocity on a revolute or
cylindrical joint.
no_angular_velocity_ic True Specifies to "UNSET" the "angular_velocity" initial
condition for the specified constraint, if set.
i_part_name Existing body Specifies the part that is the first of two parts
connected by this joint.
j_part_name Existing body Specifies the part that is the second of two parts
location location Specifies the locations to be used to define the position
of a constraint during its creation.
Adams/View will assign an arbitrary rotation about the
axis.
locating one of the coordinate planes.

relative_to Existing model, Specifies the coordinate system that location
part or marker coordinates and orientation angles correspond to.
i_marker_name Existing marker Specifies a marker on the first of the two parts
j_marker_name Existing marker Specifies a marker on the second of the two parts
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two joints with the same name, so you must provide a
unique name.
assumed.
2. When you use the FILE ADAMS_DATA_SET WRITE command, Adams/View writes an
Adams data file for your model. Adams requires that each modeling element be identified by a
unique integer identifier. If you use this parameter to specify a non-zero identifier, Adams/View
will use it in the corresponding statement in the Adams data file.
yourself.
3. Adams/View measures the translational displacement of the origin of the I marker along the
common z-axis of the I and the J markers with respect to the origin of the J marker.
constraint 41
If you specify TRANSLATIONAL_IC, but not VELOCITY_IC, Adams/View will set

VELOCITY_IC to zero.
Joint initial conditions impose constraints that are active only during initial conditions analysis
(not at the time of the initial configuration). Adams does not impose initial conditions during
subsequent analyses.
If you impose initial conditions on the joint that are inconsistent with those on a part in the joint,
the initial conditions take precedence. However, if you impose initial conditions on the joint that
are inconsistent with imparted motions on the joint, the initial conditions, as specified by the
motion generator, take precedence.
4. Adams/View measures the translational velocity of the origin of the I marker along the common
z-axis of the I and the J markers with respect to the origin of the J marker.
If you specify VELOCITY_IC, but not TRANSLATIONAL_IC, Adams/View will set
TRANSLATIONAL_IC to zero.
5. Adams/View measures the rotational displacement of the x-axis of the I marker about the
common z-axis of the I and the J markers with respect to the x-axis of the J marker.
If you specify ROTATIONAL_IC, but not ANGULAR_VELOCITY_IC, Adams/View will set
ANGULAR_VELOCITY_IC to zero.
6. Adams/View measures the angular velocity of the x-axis of the I marker about the common z-axis
of the I and the J markers with respect to the x-axis of the J marker.
If you specify ANGULAR_VELOCITY_IC, but not ROTATIONAL_IC, Adams/View will set
ROTATIONAL_IC to zero.
7. By default, you supply Cartesian (x, y, z) coordinates. You may use the 'defaults units
coordinate_system_type =' command to change this convention. For example, selecting
'cylindrical' means you will subsequently be supplying r, theta, and z coordinates.
Adams/View applies your location coordinates in the coordinate system you identify with the
RELATIVE_TO parameter. The default for the RELATIVE_TO parameter is the default
coordinate system.
(See the RELATIVE_TO parameter for this command.)
8. For the parameter “orientation”, the I marker is oriented based on the J marker orientation and the
requirements of the particular constraint being created. These markers are created automatically.
Adams/View will orient the coordinate system by starting from the initial coordinate system and
applying three successive rotations.
Depending on the convention you have selected, the rotations may occur about space-fixed or
body-fixed axes in any meaningful combination of the x, y, and z axes.
By default, you supply Euler (body313, or body-fixed z, x, z) angles.
You may change this convention with the 'DEFAULTS UNITS ORIENTATION_TYPE='
command. For example, selecting SPACE123 means you will subsequently be supplying space-
fixed x, y, and z angles.
coordinate system.
9. For the “along_axis_orientation” parameter, you may enter either one or two locations to direct
the axis. If you enter one location, the axis will point towards the location. If you specify two
locations, the axis will be parallel to, and pointing the same way as, the vector from the first
location to the second.
Note that this does not completely dictate the orientation of the coordinate system. Adams/View
will position the coordinate system with an arbitrary rotation about the axis. If you must
completely control the coordinate system orientation, use ORIENTATION or
IN_PLANE_ORIENTATION.
By default, you direct the Z axis of the coordinate system. You may change this convention with
the 'DEFAULTS ORIENT_AXIS_AND_PLANE AXIS_AND_PLANE_SETTING=' command.
For example, selecting either X_AXIS_XY_PLANE or X_AXIS_XZ_PLANE means you will
subsequently be directing the X axis. The plane-convention setting does not affect this parameter.
coordinate system.
constraint 43
10. For the “in_plane_orientation” parameter, you may enter either two or three locations. If you enter
locations.
By default, you direct the Z axis of the coordinate system and locate the ZX plane. You may use
the 'DEFAULTS ORIENT_AXIS_AND_PLANE AXIS_AND_PLANE_SETTING=' command
to change this convention. For example, selecting X_AXIS_XY_PLANE means you will
subsequently be directing the X axis and locating the XY plane.
coordinate system.
11. If the “relative_to” parameter is not specified, the default coordinate system is used. The default
12. A cylindrical joint is a two-degree-of-freedom joint that allows both relative translational and
relative rotational displacement of one part with respect to another. For a cylindrical joint, Adams
keeps the z-axis of the I marker parallel to, and co-directed with, the z-axis of the J marker and
confines the origin of the I marker to the z-axis of the J marker so that the I and the J markers have
a common z-axis. To determine translational motion, Adams measures the movement of the
origin of the I marker along the z-axis and with respect to the J marker. To determine rotational
motion, Adams measures the rotation of the x-axis of the I marker about the common z-axis and
with respect to the x-axis of the J marker.
Caution: For the parameters,

“no_translational_ic”,”no_velocity_ic”,”no_rotational_ic”,”no_angular_velocity_ic”,
setting the values to true is not the same as setting them to zero. A zero velocity is not the
same as "no" velocity. Therefore, by setting this parameter to true, there is no longer a
velocity initial condition for this element.
Tip: 1. You may use the joint_name later to refer to this joint.
2. Adams/View connects one part at the J marker to the other at the I marker. These
markers are automatically generated using this method of joint creation.
The I and J markers will be automatically created at this location on the
I_PART_NAME and J_PART_NAME respectively.
constraint create joint fixed

Allows the creation of a fixed joint.
Format:

Adams_id = integer
comments = string
location = location
Example:

Adams_id = 2 &
location = 10 , 10 , 5 &
constraint 45
Description:

joint_name A New Joint Specifies the name of the new joint.
Adams_id Adams_id Specifies an integer used to identify this element in
modified.
position of a constraint during its creation.
the axis.
1. A fixed joint essentially locks two parts together. It can be used as a placeholder for another joint
or in conjunction with the ACTIVATE and DACTIVATE commands in Adams to model special
effects.
3. When you use the FILE_ADAMS_DATA_SET WRITE command, Adams/View writes an
will use it in the corresponding statement in the Adams data file. You may also enter zero as an
identifier, either explicitly or by default. The next time you write an Adams file, Adams/View will
replace the zero with a unique, internally-generated identifier. Adams/View will permanently
store this identifier with the element just as if you had entered it yourself. Normally, you would
let all identifiers default to zero, and Adams/View would generate the identifiers for you. You are
never required to enter a non-zero identifier. You only need to specify it if, for some reason, you
wish to control the Adams file output.
axes.
coordinate system.
constraint 47

10. A FIXED joint is a zero-degree-of-freedom joint that superimposes the origins of the I and J
markers while also constraining the X, Y, and Z axes of the I marker to remain parallel to the
respective X, Y, and Z axes of the J marker.
Tip: 1. You may use this name later to refer to this joint. Adams/View will not allow you
to have two joints with the same full name, so you must provide a unique name.
2. Adams/View connects one part at the I marker to the other at the J marker. These
3. The I and J markers will be automatically created at this location on the
4. The I marker is oriented based on the J marker orientation and the requirements of
the particular constraint being created. These markers are created automatically.
constraint create joint hooke

Allows the creation of a hooke joint.
Format:

joint_name = A New Joint
adams_id = Integer
comments = String
i_part_name = An Existing Body
j_part_name = An Existing Body
location = Location
orientation = Location
along_axis_orientation = Location
in_plane_orientation = Location
relative_to = An Existing Model, Part Or Marker
i_marker_name = An Existing Marker
j_marker_name = An Existing Marker
Example:

adams_id = 2 &
location = 10 , 10 , 5 &
constraint 49
Description:

joint_name A NEW JOINT Specifies the name of the new joint.
adams_id ADAMS_ID Specifies an integer used to identify this element in the
Adams data file.
comments STRING Specifies comments for the object being created or
modified.
i_part_name AN EXISTING Specifies the part that is the first of two parts connected
BODY by this joint.
j_part_name AN EXISTING Specifies the part that is the second of two parts
BODY connected by this joint.
location LOCATION Specifies the locations to be used to define the position
orientation ORIENTATION Specifies the orientation of the J marker for the
along_axis_orientation LOCATION Specifies the orientation of a coordinate system (e.g.
axis.
in_plane_orientation LOCATION Specifies the orientation of a coordinate system (e.g.
relative_to AN EXISTING Specifies the coordinate system that location
MODEL, PART OR coordinates and orientation angles are with respect to.
MARKER
i_marker_name AN EXISTING Specifies a marker on the first of two parts connected
MARKER by this joint.
j_marker_name AN EXISTING Specifies a marker on the second of two parts
MARKER connected by this joint.
1. The UNIVERSAL joint required the Z-axis of the I marker to be perpendicular to the Z-axis of
the J marker, whereas the HOOKE joint requires THE X-axis of the I marker to be perpendicular
to the Y-axis of the J marker, so that they outline the crosspiece of the joint. A valid HOOKE joint
may be properly defined with two coincident markers and can better take advantage of the
automatic marker generation capabilities of Adams/View.
axes.
coordinate system.
constraint 51
10. A HOOKE joint is a two-degree-of-freedom joint that is that same as the UNIVERSAL joint with
the exception that the marker orientations have been modified.
Tip: 1. You may use the joint_name later to refer to this joint. Adams/View will not allow
you to have two joints with the same full name, so you must provide a unique name.
constraint create joint planar

Allows the creation of a planar joint. A planar joint is a three-degree-of-freedom joint that allows the x-
y plane of one part to slide in the x-y plane of another part.
Format:

adams_id = integer
comments = string
location = location
Example:
constraint create joint planar &

adams_id = 2 &
location = 10 , 10 , 5 &
constraint 53
Description:

modified.
the axis.
by this joint.
1. For a planar joint, Adams keeps the origin of the I marker in the x-y plane of the J marker and
keeps the z axis of the I marker perpendicular to the x-y plane of the J marker.
axes.
coordinate system.
constraint 55

Tip: 1. You may use the joint_name later to refer to the joint. Adams/View will not allow
constraint create joint rackpin

A rack-and-pinion joint is a five-degree-of-freedom joint that constrains the rotational and translational
displacement of the I marker as it rolls along the z-axis of the J marker.
Format:

adams_id = integer
comments = string
location = location
diameter_of_pitch = real number
Example:
constraint create joint rackpin &

adams_id = 2 &
location = 10 , 10 , 5 &
j_marker_name = marker_2 &
diameter_of_pitch = 0.2
constraint 57
Description:

Adams data file.
modified.
position of a constraint during its creation. The I and J
markers will be automatically created at this location
on the I_PART_NAME and J_PART_NAME
respectively.
automatically.
the axis.

diameter_of_pitch Length Specifies the pitch diameter of the pinion gear of a
rack-andpinion joint.
1. For a rack-and-pinion joint, the x-axis of the pinion must be parallel to and pointed in the same
direction as the z (translational) axis of the rack. The separation between the two axes should be
one-half the pitch diameter of the pinion. The rack-and-pinion joint itself does not enforce the
position and orientation it requires, but the chain of both parts and joints that connects markers I
and J should enforce the position and orientation. A common approach for enforcing the position
and the orientation is to support the rack with a translational joint and to support the pinion with
a revolute joint.
constraint 59
axes.
coordinate system.
Tip: The I marker is at the center of the pinion, and the J marker is in the rack.
constraint 61
constraint create joint revolute

Allows the creation of a revolute joint.
Format:
Constraint create joint revolute

joint_name = new joint
adams_id = geom._id
comments = string
angular_velocity_ic = angular_vel
friction_enabled = enable_friction
delta_v = real
maximum_deformation = real
mu_dyn_rot = real
mu_stat_rot = real
max_fric_rot = torque
preload_radial = force
preload_axial = force
inner_radius = length
outer_radius = length
location = location
orientation = orienatation
Example:
constraint create joint Revolute &

adams_id = 1 &
i_marker_name = .model_1.PART_2.MARKER_5 &
j_marker_name = .model_1.PART_3.MARKER_6
Description:

joint_name New joint Specifies the name of the new joint. You may use
this name later to refer to this joint.
adams_id Integer Specifies an integer used to identify this element
in the Adams data file.
Comments String Specifies comments for the object being created
or modified.
no_rotational_ic True Specifies that if a "rotational" velocity initial
condition has been set, to "UNSET" the
"rotational" velocity initial condition for the
specified constraint.
angular_velocity_ic Real Specifies the initial angular velocity on a
no_angular_velocity_ic True Specifies that if an "angular_velocity" initial
"angular_velocity" initial condition for the
Friction_enabled Yes/No/Preload_only The constant default value will be used if this
parameter is omitted
delta_v Real Real number should be greater than zero.
maximum_deformation Real Real number should be greater than zero.
mu_dyn_rot Real A real number greater than or equal to 0
mu_stat_rot Real A real number greater than or equal to 0
max_fric_rot Torque A real number greater than or equal to 0
preload_radial Force A real number greater than or equal to 0
preload_axial Force A real number greater than or equal to 0
constraint 63

inner_radius Length A real number greater than or equal to 0
outer_radius Length A real number greater than or equal to 0
connected by this joint. Adams/View connects
one part at the I marker to the other at the J
marker.
connected by this joint. Adams/View connects
one part at the J marker to the other at the I
marker.
These markers are automatically generated using

this method of joint creation.
Location Location Specifies the locations to be used to define the
Orientation orientation Specifies the orientation of the J marker for the
constraint being created using three rotation
angles.
along_axis_orientation Location Specifies the orientation of a coordinate system
(e.g. marker or part) by directing one of the axes.
in_plane_orientation Location Specifies the orientation of a coordinate system
(e.g. marker or part) by directing one of the axes
and locating one of the coordinate planes.
relative_to Existing model, part Specifies the coordinate system that location
or marker coordinates and orientation angles are with
respect to.
i_marker_name Existing marker Specifies a marker on the first of two parts
j_marker_name Existing marker Specifies a marker on the second of two parts
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two joints with the same full name, so you must provide
a unique name.
yourself.
the initial conditions on the joint have precedence over those on the part. However, if you impose
initial conditions on the joint that are inconsistent with imparted motions on the joint, the initial
conditions as specified by the motion generator have precedence over those here.
If you specify ANGULAR_VELOCITY_IC, but not ROTATIONAL_IC, Adams/View ill set
Joint initial conditions impose constraints that are active only uring initial conditions analysis (not
at the time of the initial onfiguration). Adams does not impose initial conditions during
constraint 65
5. The I and J markers will be automatically created at this location on the I_PART_NAME and
J_PART_NAME respectively.
By default, you supply Cartesian (x, y, z) coordinates. You may use the 'defaults units
coordinate system. (See the RELATIVE_TO parameter for this command).
6. The I marker is oriented based on the J marker orientation and the requirements of the particular
constraint being created. These markers are created automatically.
coordinate system.
7. Adams/View will assign an arbitrary rotation about the axis.
You may enter either one or two locations to direct the axis. If you enter one location, the axis will
point toward the location. If you specify two locations, the axis will be parallel to, and pointing
the same way as, the vector from the first location to the second.
coordinate system.
locations.
coordinate system.
10. A revolute joint is a single-degree-of-freedom joint that allows rotation of one part with respect
to another about a common axis. For a revolute joint, Adams superimposes the origins of the I and
J markers and keeps their z-axes parallel and co-directed. Relative motion occurs about the
common z-axis. Adams measures the angle of the x-axis of the I marker relative to the x-axis of
the J marker to determine the rotational displacement. Adams measures positive rotation
according to the right-hand rule.
Caution: “No_rotational_ic” and “no_angular_velocity_ic” being set to True is not the same as
setting the value to zero. A zero velocity is not the same as "no" velocity. Therefore, by
setting this parameter to true there is no longer a velocity initial condition for this element.
Tip: 1. The I- and J- markers are automatically generated using this method of joint
creation.
2. Adams/View connects one part at the I marker to the other at the J marker.
constraint 67
constraint create joint screw

Allows the creation of a screw joint. A screw joint is a five-degree-of-freedom joint that constrains the
rotational and translational displacement of the I marker as it spins about the z-axis of the J marker.
Format:

adams_id = integer
comments = string
location = location
pitch = real number
Example:
constraint create joint screw &

joint_name = joint__1 &
adams_id = 2 &
location = 10 , 10 , 5 &
pitch = 0.2
Description:

modified.
position of a constraint during its creation. The I and
J markers will be automatically created at this
location on the I_PART_NAME and J_PART_NAME
respectively.
automatically.
the axis.
locating one of the
coordinate planes.
constraint 69

pitch Length Specifies the pitch of the joint.
1. For a screw joint, the z-axis of the I marker and the z-axis of the J marker must always be parallel
and co-directed. Although the screw joint does not enforce this parallelism, the chain of parts and
joints that connects the two markers should. During simulation, the I marker displacement along
the J marker z-axis is a function of the relative angle of the x-axis of the I marker with respect to
the x-axis of the J marker. Adams measures a positive rotation according to the right-hand rule.
For every full rotation, the displacement of the I marker along the z-axis of the J marker is equal
to the value of the screw pitch. If phi is zero, the translational displacement may be zero or any
multiple of the pitch.
axes.
coordinate system.
constraint 71
constraint create joint spherical

Allows the creation of a spherical joint.
Format:

adams_id = geom._id
comments = string
location = location
Orientation = orientation
relative_to = existing part, body or marker
Example:
constraint create joint Spherical &

adams_id = 6 &
Description:

joint_name New joint name Specifies the name of the new joint. You may use this name
later to refer to this joint.
adams_id Integer Specifies an integer used to identify this element in the Adams
data file.
comments String Specifies comments for the object being created or modified.
constraint 73

i_part_name Existing body Specifies the part that is the first of two parts connected by this
joint. Adams/View connects one part at the I marker to the
other at the J marker. These markers are automatically
generated using this method of joint creation.
j_part_name Existing body Specifies the part that is the second of two parts connected by
this joint. Adams/View connects one part at the J marker to the
other at the I marker. These markers are automatically
generated using this method of joint creation.
location Location Specifies the locations to be used to define the position of a
constraint during its creation. The I and J markers will be
automatically created at this location on the I_PART_NAME
and J_PART_NAME respectively.
orientation Orientation Specifies the orientation of the J marker for the constraint
being created using three rotation angles. The I marker is
oriented based on the J marker orientation and the
requirements of the particular constraint being created. These
markers are created automatically.
along_axis_orient Location Specifies the orientation of a coordinate system (e.g. marker
ation or part) by directing one of the axes. Adams/View will assign
an arbitrary rotation about the axis.
in_plane_orientati Location Specifies the orientation of a coordinate system (e.g. marker
on or part) by directing one of the axes and locating one of the
coordinate planes.
relative_to Existing body, Specifies the coordinate system that location coordinates and
part or marker orientation angles are with respect to.
i_marker_name Existing marker Specifies a marker on the first of two parts connected by this
joint.
Adams/View connects one part at the I marker to the other at

the J marker.
j_marker_name Existing marker Specifies a marker on the second of two parts connected by
this joint.
Adams/View connects one part at the I marker to the other at

the J marker.
a unique name.
yourself.
may occur about space-fixed or body-fixed axes in any meaningful combination of the x, y, and
z axes.
constraint 75
coordinate system.
the axis. If you enter one location, the axis will point toward the location. If you specify two
coordinate system.
locations.
coordinate system.
8. A spherical joint is a three-degree-of-freedom joint. While permitting all three rotations, a
spherical joint superimposes the I and the J markers.
constraint create joint translational

Allows the creation of a translational joint. A translational joint is a single-degree-of-freedom joint that
allows translational displacement of one part relative to another.
Format:

adams_id = integer
comments = string
velocity_ic = real
delta_v = real
mu_dyn_trans = real
mu_stat_trans = real
max_fric_trans = real
preload_x = real
preload_y = real
height = real
width = real
location = location
constraint 77
Example:
constraint create joint translational &

joint_name = joint__1 &
adams_id = 2 &
translational_ic = 1.2 &
velocity_ic = 1.4 &
friction_enabled = preload_only &
delta_v = 1.4 &
maximum_deformation = 0.02 &
mu_dyn_trans = 0.4 &
mu_stat_trans = 0.8 &
max_fric_trans = 0.15 &
preload_x = 1 &
preload_y = 1.2 &
height = 1.5 &
width = 0.8 &
location = 10 , 10 , 5 &
Description:

modified.

no_translational_ic True_only Specifies that if a "translational" velocity initial
"translational" velocity initial condition for the
no_velocity_ic True_only Specifies that if a VELOCITY_IC has been set via
condition.
friction_enabled Enable_friction
delta_v Real
maximum_deformation Real
mu_dyn_trans Real
mu_stat_trans Real
max_fric_trans Real
preload_x Force
preload_y Force
height Real Specify a height for the info window.
width Real Specify a width for the info window.
the axis.
constraint 79

Part Or Marker coordinates and orientation angles are with respect
to.
by this joint.
1. For a translational joint, Adams keeps all the axes of the I and the J markers parallel and keeps
the origin of the I marker on the z-axis of the J marker so that the two markers have a common z-
axis. To determine the translational displacement of the I marker with respect to the J marker,
Adams measures the origin of the I marker with respect to the origin of the J marker along their
common z-axis.
common z-axis of the I and the J markers with respect to the origin of the J marker. If you specify
TRANSLATIONAL_IC, but not VELOCITY_IC, Adams/View will set VELOCITY_IC to zero.
subsequent analyses. If you impose initial conditions on the joint that are inconsistent with those
on a part in the joint, the initial conditions on the joint have precedence over those on the part.
However, if you impose initial conditions on the joint that are inconsistent with imparted motions
on the joint, the initial conditions as specified by the motion generator have precedence over those
here.
6. Setting the no_translational_ic is not the same as setting the value to zero. A zero velocity is not
the same as "no" velocity. Therefore, by setting this parameter to true there is no longer a velocity
initial condition for this element.
z-axis of the I and the J markers with respect to the origin of the J marker. If you specify
VELOCITY_IC, but not TRANSLATIONAL_IC, Adams/View will set TRANSLATIONAL_IC
to zero. Joint initial conditions impose constraints that are active only during initial conditions
analysis (not at the time of the initial configuration). Adams does not impose initial conditions
during subsequent analyses. If you impose initial conditions on the joint that are inconsistent with
those on a part in the joint, the initial conditions on the joint have precedence over those n the part.
here.
8. Setting the no_velocity_ic parameter is not the same as setting the value to zero. A zero velocity
is not the same as "no" velocity. Therefore, by setting this parameter to true there is no longer a
9. The height and the width values should be a real number between 0.0 and 2.0, where 2.0
represents the height of the Adams/View window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the info
window to be one half as high as the Adams/View window.
10. By default, you supply Cartesian (x, y, z) coordinates for the location parameter. You may use the
'defaults units coordinate_system_type =' command to change this convention. For example,
selecting 'cylindrical' means you will subsequently be supplying r, theta, and z coordinates.
constraint 81
axes.
coordinate system.
Tip: 1. You may use the joint_name later to refer to this joint. Adams/View will not allow
constraint 83
constraint create joint universal

Allows you to create a universal joint.
Format:
:

adams_id = geom_id
comments = string
location = location
relative_to = existing part,body or marker
Example:
constraint create joint universal &

adams_id = 4 &
i_marker_name = MARKER_11 &
j_marker_name = MARKER_12
Description:

joint_name New joint name Specifies the name of the new joint. You may use
this name later to refer to this joint.
or modified.

orientation orientation Specifies the orientation of the J marker for the
angles.
along_axis_orientation location Specifies the orientation of a coordinate system
Adams/View will assign an arbitrary rotation
about the axis.
in_plane_orientation location Specifies the orientation of a coordinate system
relative_to Existing model, part or Specifies the coordinate system that location
marker coordinates and orientation angles are with
respect to.
Adams/View connects one part at the I marker to

the other at the J
marker.
a unique name.
constraint 85
yourself.
coordinate system.
coordinate system.
locations.
coordinate system.
8. A universal joint is a joint that allows two degrees of rotational freedom.
For a universal joint, Adams superimposes the origins of I and J and keeps their z-axes
perpendicular, so that they outline the crosspiece of the joint. The origins of the I and the J markers
are at the center of the crosspiece.
Tip: 1. Adams/View connects one part at the I marker to the other at the J marker. These
2. Adams/View connects one part at the J marker to the other at the I marker. These
constraint 87
constraint create motion_generator

Allows the creation of a motion generator in a model.
Format:

motion_name = a new motion
adams_id = geom._id
comments = string
joint_name = existing joint
type_of_freedom = freedom type
axis = motion_axes
function = function
time_derivative = displacement/ velocity/ acceleration
rotational_displacement_ic = angle
rotational_velocity_ic = angular_velocity
Routine = string
Example:
constraint create motion_generator &

motion_name = ROT_MOTION &
joint_name = JOINT_1 &
type_of_freedom = rotational &
function = time &
rotational_velocity_ic = 25.9 &
rotational_displacement_ic = 25.4
The above command will apply a rotational motion to the specified joint which is a function of time. Its
rotational velocity would be 25.9 and its rotational displacement would be 25.4.
Description:

motion_name New Motion Name Specifies the name of the new motion generator.
You may use this name later to refer to this motion
generator.
modified.
joint_name Existing Joint Specifies the translational, revolute, or cylindrical
type_of_freedom Translational/rotational Specifies translational or a rotational motion if you
attach this motion generator to a cylindrical joint.
i_marker_name Existing Marker Specify an existing I marker
j_marker_name Existing Marker Specify an existing J marker
axis X/y/ Z/ B1/ B2/ B3 Allows you to create and modify additional axes on
a plot to effect multiple axis plotting.
function Function Specifies an expression or defines and passes
constants to a user-written subroutine to define the
motion.
user-written subroutine.
Routine String
time_derivative Velocity/displacement/ Specifies that the FUNCTION argument defines the
acceleration motion displacement, velocity, or acceleration.
displacement_ic Length Specifies the initial displacement of the motion,
when the motion is defined in terms of velocity or
acceleration.
velocity_ic Velocity Specifies the initial velocity of the motion, when the
motion is defined in terms of acceleration.
rotational_displaceme Angle Specifies the rotational displacement.
nt_ic
rotational_velocity_ic Real Specifies the rotational velocity.
constraint 89
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two motion generators with the same full name, so you
must provide a unique name.
yourself.
associated with it.

4. The “type_of_freedom” parameter is necessary only when you apply motion to a cylindrical joint.
For a translational joint or a revolute joint, Adams assumes you want translational motion or
rotational motion, respectively.
5. When you create a plot template, Adams/View creates two axes by default, one horizontal and
one vertical. These are the plot's primary axes which Adams/View uses to perform cursor tracking
and to draw the grid. The plot TEMPLATE commands also operate on the plot's primary axes.
Each axis consists of an axis line, tic marks, numbers and a label. Use the axis ATTRIBUTES to
change visibility and color attributes for the axis entities.
To plot a curve against the new axes, specify the axis names when you create the curve.
You can make the new axes the plot's primary axes by modifying the plot's template and
specifying the desired axes as the PRIMARY_HAXIS and PRIMARY_VAXIS. The grid will
then reflect the divisions of the new axes and cursor tracking will reflect the new axes' coordinate
system.
6. The motion must be a function of time only and not a function of the state variables.
Adams/View treats this parameter as a series of literal strings. When you write an Adams data set,
Adams/View writes these strings, just as you enter them here, after the 'FUNCTION=' argument.
If you want to define the motion with an expression, enclose the expression in quotes and enter it
just as you would in the data set. See the Adams User's Manual for information on writing
function expressions. If your expression is longer than 65 characters, you should break it up into
separate strings so it does not extend past the Adams 80-character line-length limit. Adams/View
will write each string on a separate line in the data set.
If you want to define the motion with a user-written subroutine, enter the character string
"USER(r1[,...,r30])", where r1[,...,r30] are the values you want Adams to pass to your user-written
subroutine MOTSUB. If you enter "USER(1.,2.,3.)", for instance, Adams will call your
MOTSUB with values 1, 2, and 3. See the Adams User's Manual for more information on using
MOTSUBs.
7. A MOTION_GENERATOR determines a translational or a rotational motion as a function of
time. In Adams you can apply a motion to a translational, to a revolute, or to a cylindrical joint.
You can define the motion with a FUNCTION expression or with a user-written subroutine.
You can assign a translational motion at either a translational or a cylindrical joint, and you can
assign a rotational motion at either a revolute or a cylindrical joint. Adams uses the two markers
that specify the joint to define the motion. In other words, Adams controls the rotational or the
translational displacement of the I marker in the joint with respect to the J marker in the joint.
For a translational motion, Adams moves the I marker along the z-axis of the J marker. The J
marker origin represents zero displacement, while the z-axis of the J marker defines the positive
direction. For a rotational motion, Adams rotates the I marker about the z-axis of the J marker.
Positive rotations are positive according to the right-hand rule. The z-axis of the I marker must be
collinear with the z-axis of the J marker at all times. The angle is zero when the x-axis of the I
marker is also collinear with the x-axis of the J marker.
constraint 91
constraint create primitive_joint at_point

Allows the creation of an at_point joint primitive.
Format:

jprim_name = new primitive joint
adams_id = integer
comments = string
location = location
Example:
constraint create primitive_joint at_point &

jprim_name = JPRIM__1 &
Description:

jprim_name New primitive joint Specifies the name of the new jprim. You may use
name this name later to refer to this jprim.
comments String Specifies comments for the object being created
or modified.

angles.
about the axis.
respect to.
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two jprims with the same full name, so you must provide
a unique name.
constraint 93
yourself.
3. For the location parameter, the I and J markers will be automatically created at this location on
the I_PART_NAME and J_PART_NAME respectively.
coordinate system.
5. You may enter either one or two locations to direct the axis. If you enter one location, the axis will
coordinate system.
locations.
coordinate system.
Tip: Adams/View connects one part at the I marker to the other at the J marker. These markers
are automatically generated using this method of joint creation.
constraint 95
constraint create primitive_joint inline

Allows the creation of an inline joint primitive.
Format:

jprim_name = new primitive joint
adams_id = integer
comments = string
location = location
Example:
constraint create primitive_joint inline &

Description:

jprim_name New primitive joint Specifies the name of the new jprim. You may
name use this name later to refer to this jprim.
or modified.

angles.
(e.g. marker or part) by directing one of the
axes. Adams/View will assign an arbitrary
rotation about the axis.
respect to.
a unique name.
constraint 97
yourself.
z axes.
coordinate system.
coordinate system.
locations.
coordinate system.
8. An inline joint primitive indicates a four-degree-of-freedom joint primitive that allows one
translational and three rotational motions of one part with respect to another.
For an inline primitive, Adams imposes two translational constraints, which confine the
translational motion of the I marker to the line defined by the z-axis of the J marker.
constraint 99
constraint create primitive_joint inplane

Allows the creation of an inplane joint primitive.
Format:

jprim_name = a new primitive joint name
adams_id = integer
comments = string
location = location
Example:
constraint create primitive_joint inplane &

adams_id = 2&
location = 10 , 10 , 5 &
Description:

jprim_name A NEW Specifies the name of the new jprim.
PRIMITIVE
JOINT
Adams data file.
comments STRING Specifies comments for the object being created or
modified.
i_part_name AN EXISTING Specifies the part that is the first of two parts connected
BODY by this joint.
j_part_name AN EXISTING Specifies the part that is the second of two parts
BODY connected by this joint.
location LOCATION Specifies the locations to be used to define the position of
a constraint during its creation.
orientation ORIENTATION Specifies the orientation of the J marker for the constraint
being created using three rotation angles.
along_axis_orientation LOCATION Specifies the orientation of a coordinate system (e.g.
marker or part) by directing one of the axes. Adams/View
will assign an arbitrary rotation about the axis.
in_plane_orientation LOCATION Specifies the orientation of a coordinate system (e.g.
marker or part) by directing one of the axes and locating
one of the coordinate planes.
relative_to AN EXISTING Specifies the coordinate system that location coordinates
MODEL, PART and orientation angles are with respect to.
OR MARKER
i_marker_name AN EXISTING Specifies a marker on the first of two parts connected by
MARKER this joint.
j_marker_name AN EXISTING Specifies a marker on the second of two parts connected
MARKER by this joint.
1. For an inplane primitive, Adams imposes one translational constraint, which confines the
translational motion of the I marker to the x-y plane of the J marker.
2. Normally, entity names like the jprim_name are composed of alphabetic, numeric, or '_'
constraint 101
axes.
coordinate system.

9. An inplane joint primitive indicates a five-degree-of-freedom joint primitive that allows both
translational and rotational motion of one part with respect to another.
Tip: 1. You may use the jprim_name later to refer to this jprim. Adams/View will not allow
you to have two jprims with the same full name, so you must provide a unique
name.
constraint 103
constraint create primitive_joint orientation

Allows the creation of an orientation joint primitive.
Format:

adams_id = integer
comments = string
location = location
Example:
constraint create primitive_joint orientation &

adams_id = 2 &
location = 10 , 10 , 5 &
Description:

jprim_name A New Primative Specifies the name of the new jprim.
Joint
modified.
the axis.
locating one of thecoordinate planes.
to.
by this joint.
1. For an orientation primitive, Adams imposes three rotational constraints to keep the orientation
of the I marker identical to the orientation of the J marker.
constraint 105
axes.
coordinate system.

9. An orientation joint primitive indicates a three-degree-of-freedom joint primitive that allows only
translational motion of one part with respect to another.
name.
constraint 107
constraint create primitive_joint parallel_axis

Allows creation of a parallel axis joint primitive.
Format:

adams_id = integer
comments = string
location = location
Example:
constraint create primitive_joint parallel_axis &

adams_id = 2 &
location = 10 , 10 , 5 &
orientation = 1 , 2 , 1
Description:

jprim_name A New Primative Specifies the name of the new jprim.
Joint
modified.
the axis.
1. For a parallel axis primitive, Adams imposes two rotational constraints so that the z-axis of the I
marker stays parallel to the z-axis of the J marker. This primitive permits relative rotation about
the common z-axis of I and J and permits all relative displacements.
constraint 109
axes.
coordinate system.

9. A parallel joint primitive is a four-degree-of-freedom joint primitive that allows both translational
and rotational motion of one part with respect to another.
name.
constraint 111
constraint create primitive_joint perpendicular

Allows the creation of a perpendicular joint primitive.
Format:
Constraint create primitive_joint perpendicular

jprim_name = new primitive joint name
adams_id = geom_id
comments = string
j_part_name = Existing body
location = location
relative_to = existing part, body or marker
i_marker_name = existing marker name
j_marker_name = existing marker name
Example:
constraint create primitive_joint perpendicular &

Description:

Jprim_name New primitive joint Specifies the name of the new jprim. You may
name use this name later to refer to this jprim.
or modified.

angles. The I marker is oriented based on the J
marker orientation and the requirements of the
particular constraint being created. These
markers are created automatically.

about the axis.
relative_to Existing part, body or Specifies the coordinate system that location
respect to.
i_marker_name Existing marker name Specifies a marker on the first of two parts

the other at the J marker.
j_marker_name Existing marker name Specifies a marker on the second of two parts

the other at the J
marker.
a unique name.
constraint 113
yourself.
z axes.
coordinate system.
coordinate system.
locations.
coordinate system.
8. A perpendicular joint primitive is a five-degree-of-freedom joint primitive that allows both
For a perpendicular primitive, Adams imposes a single rotational constraint on the I and the J
markers so that their z-axes remain perpendicular. This allows relative rotations about either z-
axis, but does not allow any relative rotation in the direction perpendicular to both z-axes.
Tip: 1. Adams/View connects one part at the I marker to the other at the J marker. These
constraint 115
constraint create primitive_joint point _point

Allows the creation of an point_point joint primitive.
Format:
constraint create primitive_joint point_point

prim_name = new primitive joint
adams_id = integer
comments = string
location = location
offset = length
Example:
constraint create primitive_joint point_point &

j_marker_name = MARKER_12 &
offset = 2
Description:

jprim_name New primitive joint Specifies the name of the new jprim. You may use
name this name later to refer to this jprim.
or modified.
angles.
about the axis.
respect to.
offset Length Specifies the prescribed distance between the two
points.
a unique name.
constraint 117
"...._NAME.GRAND_PARENT_NAME.PARENT_NAME.ENTITY_NAME". The number of
levels used varies from case to case and the parentage must exist before an entity can be assigned
to it.
2. When you use the FILE ADAMS_DATA_SET WRITE command, Adams/View writes an Adams
yourself.
RELATIVE_TO parameter. The default for the RELATIVE_TO parameter is the default coordinate
system. (See the RELATIVE_TO parameter for this command).
body-fixed axes in any meaningful combination of the x, y, and z axes. By default, you supply
Euler (body313, or body-fixed z, x, z) angles. You may change this convention with the
'DEFAULTS UNITS ORIENTATION_TYPE=' command. For example, selecting SPACE123 means
you will subsequently be supplying space-fixed x, y, and z angles.

coordinate system.
the 'DEFAULTS ORIENT_AXIS_AND_PLANE AXIS_AND_PLANE_SETTING=' command. For
example, selecting either X_AXIS_XY_PLANE or X_AXIS_XZ_PLANE means you will
system.
may use the 'DEFAULTS ORIENT_AXIS_AND_PLANE AXIS_AND_PLANE_SETTING=' command
system.
constraint 119
constraint create user_defined

Allows the user to create a USER DEFINED constraint.
Format:

user_constraint_name = new user constraint
adams_id = geom._id
comments = string
user_function = function
Description:

user_constraint_name New user defined Allows the user to create a USER DEFINED constraint.
constraint
Adams data file.
modified.
user_function Real Specifies up to 30 values for Adams to pass to a user-
written subroutine.
yourself.
2. A user-defined constraint describes a system constraint as a function of time and as many as thirty
variables. Each of these variables must be the displacement or the velocity of a part. For any part
at any point in time, six displacements define its position, and six velocities define its velocity.
The six displacements are the x, y, and z translations and the three Euler angle rotations. The six
velocities are the x, y, and z translational velocities and the time derivatives of the three Euler
angles. Adams measures all of these displacements and velocities at the origin of the principal
axes with respect to the global coordinate system. A USER DEFINED constraint is only used
when a constraint is needed that is not definable by any of the other constraint types.
constraint 121
constraint delete
constraint delete
Allows you to delete an existing constraint.
Format:
constraint delete
Example:
constraint delete &

constraint_name = joint_1
Description:

Constraint_name Existing constraint Specifies the constraint to delete.
• You may identify a constraint by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
name of Adams JOINT/101 is JOI101, for example. If you created the constraint during
may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify constraint
'servo_motor' from model 'test' by entering ".test.servo_motor". If you type a "?",
Adams/View will list the constraints available by default.
constraint delete
2. You must enter the name of the constraint you wish to delete by either picking it from the screen
or specifying the full name.
You may reverse this deletion at a later time with an UNDO command.
constraint 123
constraint modify complex_joint coupler

Allows the modification of an existing coupler.
Format:

coupler_name = an existing coupler
new_coupler_name = a new coupler
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
type_of_freedom = coupler_freedom
motion_multipliers = real
first_angular_scale_factor = angle
first_scale_factor = real
second_angular_scale_factor = angle
second_scale_factor = real
third_angular_scale_factor = angle
third_scale_factor = real
Example:
constraint modify complex_joint coupler &

coupler_name = coupler__1 &
new_coupler_name = coupler__2 &
adams_id = 1 &
joint_name = JOINT_1 , JOINT_1 &
motion_multipliers = 0.1 , 0.2 &
type_of_freedom = rot_rot_rot
Description:

coupler_name An Existing Coupler Specifies the coupler to modify.
new_coupler_name A New Coupler Specifies the name of the new coupler.
adams_id Adams_id Specifies an integer used to identify this element
or modified.
joint_name An Existing Joint Specifies the translational, revolute, or
cylindrical joint associated with this entity.
type_of_freedom Coupler_freedom Specifies whether cylindrical joints transfer
translational or rotational motion.
motion_multipliers Real Specifies the relative motion of the joints you
identify with JOINTS
first_angular_scale_factor Angle Specifies the angular motion of the first joint
motion of the second and third joints you
identify with JOINT_NAME.
first_scale_factor Real Specifies the non-angular motion of the first
joint you identify with JOINT_NAME relative
to the motion of the second and third joints you
second_angular_scale_factor Angle Specifies the angular motion of the second joint
motion of the first and third joints you identify
with JOINT_NAME
second_scale_factor Real Specifies the non-angular motion of the second
to the motion of the first and third joints you
third_angular_scale_factor Angle Specifies the angular motion of the third joint
motion of the first and second joints you identify
with JOINT_NAME.
constraint 125

third_scale_factor Real Specifies the non-angular motion of the third
to the motion of the first and second joints you
userwritten subroutine.
1. A coupler creates the coupling of the translational and/or the rotational motion of two or three
joints. With this constraint, you can deliver or relate motion from one area of a mechanism to
another. Components whose behavior you might approximate with this statement include
combinations of hydraulic generators, motors, and pistons and include flexible, rotational
transmission cables.
2. You may identify a coupler by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the coupler is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it convenient
to type the name even if the coupler is displayed. If you created the coupler by reading an Adams
data set, the coupler name is the letters COU followed by the Adams data set coupler ID number.
The name of Adams COUPLER/101 is COU101, for example. If you created the coupler during
preprocessing, you gave it a name at that time. If a coupler is available by default, you may
identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a coupler
under a different model, for instance, you may need to enter the model name as well. For example,
you may specify coupler 'differential' from model 'test' by entering ".test.differential". You must
separate multiple coupler names by commas.
3. Normally, entity names like the coupler name are composed of alphabetic, numeric, or '_'
of Adams JOINT/101 is JOI101, for example. If you created the joint during preprocessing, you
7. AdamsAdams assumes that translational joints transfer translational motion and that revolute
joints transfer rotational motion. A cylindrical joint permits both translational and rotational
motion, however. If your coupler includes cylindrical joints, you must use this parameter to
indicate which motion is transferred at each joint.
8. Adams uses the values in the SCALES argument in the following equation:
(r1 * q1) + (r2 * q2) + (r3 * q3) = 0,
or the rotational displacements of the joint I markers with respect to their J
markers. Suppose you are coupling two joints, and SCALES=1,-2. The equation that relates the
two joints is
q1 + (-2 * q2) = 0, or
q1 = 2 * q2.
displacements have the same sign. If you specify two joints in the JOINTS argument, you must
specify r2. If you specify only one value, Adams assumes it is r2 and uses the default value of 1
for r1.
9. Adams uses the first_angular_scale_factor (r1) in the following equation:
(r1 * q1) + (r2 * q2) + (r3 * q3) = 0,
constraint 127
q1 + (-2 * q2) = 0, or
q1 = 2 * q2.
10. Adams uses the first_scale_factor (r1) in the following equation:
(r1 * q1) + (r2 * q2) + (r3 * q3) = 0,
q1 + (-2 * q2) = 0, or
q1 = 2 * q2.
11. Adams uses the second_angular scale_factor (r2) in the following equation:
(r1 * q1) + (r2 * q2) + (r3 * q3) = 0,
q1 + (-2 * q2) = 0, or
q1 = 2 * q2.
12. Adams uses the second_scale_factor (r2) in the following equation:
(r1 * q1) + (r2 * q2) + (r3 * q3) = 0,
q1 + (-2 * q2) = 0, or
q1 = 2 * q2.
13. Adams uses the third_angular_scale_factor (r3) in the following equation:
(r1 * q1) + (r2 * q2) + (r3 * q3) = 0,
14. Adams uses the third_scale_factor (r3) in the following equation:
(r1 * q1) + (r2 * q2) + (r3 * q3) = 0,
Tip: 1. If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the couplers available by default.
2. If the coupler is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any
of the graphics associated with it.
3. You need not separate multiple coupler picks by commas.
4. You use the coupler_name parameter to identify the existing coupler to affect with
this command.
5. You may use the new_coupler_name later to refer to this coupler. Adams/View will
not allow you to have two couplers with the same full name, so you must provide a
unique name.
6. Some entities constrain motion at, or are otherwise associated with, specific joints.
You use this parameter to identify that joint.
7. See the Adams User's Manual for information on writing user-written subroutines.
constraint 129
constraint modify complex_joint gear

Allows the modification of an existing gear pair.
Format:

gear_name = an existing joint
new_gear_name = a new joint
adams_id = integer
comments = string
common_velocity_marker = an existing marker
Example:
constraint modify complex_joint gear &

gear_name = GEAR__1 &
new_gear_name = GEAR__2 &
adams_id = 2 &
common_velocity_marker = marker_1
Description:

gear_name An existing gear Specifies the gear to modify.
new_gear_name A new gear Specifies the name of the new gear. .
adams_id ADAMS_ID Specifies an integer used to identify this element in
modified.
joint associated with this entity.
common_velocity_marker An Existing Marker Specifies the marker that designates the point of
contact and determines the ratio of the two gears.
1. The gear element uses the location of the common velocity marker to determine the point of
contact of the two gear pitch circles. The direction of the z-axis of the common velocity marker
indicates the direction of the common velocity of points on the gear teeth in contact. This is also
the direction in which gear tooth forces act. The location of the common velocity marker is
constant with respect to the carrier part.
2. You may identify a gear pair by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the gear pair is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it
convenient to type the name even if the gear is displayed. If you created the gear by reading an
Adams data set, the gear name is the letters GEA followed by the Adams data set gear ID number.
The name of Adams GEAR/101 is GEA101, for example. If you created the gear during
preprocessing, you gave it a name at that time. If a gear is available by default, you may identify
it by entering its name only. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a gear under
another model, for instance, you may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may
specify gear 'spur1' from model 'train' by entering ".train.spur1". You must separate multiple gear
names by commas. If the gear is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on
any of the graphics associated with it. You need not separate multiple gear picks by commas.
3. Normally, entity names like the gear name are composed of alphabetic, numeric, or '_'
Adams/View will provide a default name. The defaultname that Adams/View provides will
constraint 131
in model 'links' by entering ".links.lower_pivot". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the joints
available by default. You must separate multiple joint names by commas. If the joint is visible in
one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics associated with it. You
need not separate multiple joint picks by commas.
7. You define the constant-velocity (CV) marker on the carrier part to which the J markers of the
joints belong. The z-axis of this marker must point in the direction of common velocity at the point
of contact. The direction of common velocity is tangent to both pitch circles and would be normal
to the tooth surfaces of the gears if the pressure angle was zero. (Adams always assumes a
pressure angle of zero.)
The CV marker has constant position and orientation in the carrier LPRF and does not change
when the direction of power flow through the gear changes.
8. A gear pair relates the motion of three parts and two joints. The three parts are the two gear parts
and a third part, the carrier, to which the gears are attached by the two joints. The joints must be
translational, revolute, or cylindrical. Different combinations of joint types and orientations allow
you to model spur, helical, planetary, bevel, and rack-and-pinion gear pairs.
Tip: 1. If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the gears available by default.
2. You use the joint_name parameter to identify the existing gear to affect with this
command.
3. You may use the new_gear_name later to refer to this gear. Adams/View will not
allow you to have two gears with the same full name, so you must provide a unique
name.
4. Some entities constraint motion at, or are otherwise associated with, specific joints.
You use this parameter to identify that joint.
5. The common_velocity_marker also determines the direction of the reaction forces
developed by the joints in the gear pair.
constraint modify general_constraint

The GCON statement introduces a constraint equation that must be satisfied by Adams/Solver (C++)
during the simulation. This allows you to specify both holonomic and non-holonomic constraints.
Format:

general_constraint_name = existing gen_constraint name
new_general_constraint_name = new gen_constraint name
adams_id = geom. _id
comments = string,
function = function
Example:
constraint modify general_constraint &

general_constraint_name = GCON_1 &
new_general_constraint_name = MY_GCON &
function = time
Description:

general_constraint_name Existing GCON name Specify a name of the GCON to be modified
New_general_constraint_ New GCON name Specify the new name for the GCON
name
adams_id integer Specifies an integer used to identify this
element in the Adams data file.
or modified.
I_marker_name Existing marker Specify an existing marker name.
constants to a user-written subroutine to define
the motion.
constraint 133
yourself.
associated with it.
3. While the JOINT statement describes a physically recognizable combination of constraints that
are used to connect bodies together, the GCON statement enables you to define an arbitrary
constraint specific to a particular model. The GCON statement is more general and can be used
to equivalently define the existent JOINT elements. Therefore, the spherical joint
JOINT/11, SPHERICAL, I=1,J=3
could be equivalently replaced by the following set of three GCONs:
GCON/111, I=2, FUNC=DX(2,3)
GCON/112, I=2, FUNC=DY(2,3)
GCON/113, I=2, FUNC=DZ(2,3)
The GCON statement allows you to define both holonomic and non-holonomic constraints.
Holonomic constraints only depend on position measures, like GCON/111 through GCON/113
above. A constraint is non-holonomic if (a) its expression exp1 contains velocity measures, and
(b) there is no expression exp2 that is the time integral of exp1. An example of a non-holonomic
constraint is a roll without slip condition
GCON/34, FUNC=VX(2) - WZ(2)*DY(2)
The GCON statement introduces a constraint to Adams/Solver (C++) that is guaranteed to be

handled correctly as long as the FUNCTION is in Pfaffian form. In this context, note that any
holonomic expression is automatically in Pfaffian form. In the case of non-holonomic constraints,
a Pfaffian constraint requires that the FUNCTION is limited to expressions that are linear in
velocity quantities. In other words, if there are velocity quantities in the definition of the
FUNCTION (as is the case in the previous GCON), a partial derivative of the FUNCTION with
respect to any velocity quantity present in its definition should lead to an expression that does not
depend on velocity quantities. The previous GCON is therefore in Pfaffian form,
FUNC FUNC
since -------------------- = 1 and -------------------- = – DX  2  which makes the FUNC linear in velocity quantities.
FUNC WZ  2 
Another example of a Pfaffian non-holonomic constraint is the perpendicularity condition
GCON/25, FU=VX(2,3)*DX(2,1)+ VY(2,3)*DY(2,1)+ VZ(2,3)*DZ(2,1)
that indicates that the velocity V(2,3) is orthogonal to the distance vector between markers I=2
and J=1.
An example of a non-Pfaffian GCON is
GCON/25,FU=VX(2,3)*VX(2,3)*DX(2,1)+VY(2,3)*DY(2,1)+
VZ(2,3)*DZ(2,1)
FU
For this example, ------------------------ = 2  VX  2 3   DX  2 1  which is an expression that depends on the
VX  2 3 
velocity measure VX(2,3).
The FUNCTION expression exp can reference variables defined in the .adm file through the
VARVAL construct. It should be stressed again that correct handling of the GCON requires that
the expression defining the VARIABLE only depends on time, and position and velocity
measures; in other words, the Pfaffian character of the GCON is not undermined by the presence
of the VARVAL.
Cautions:
1. Objects of type General_Constraint are not compatible with Adams/Solver (FORTRAN).
2. The topology of the model has changed so .model_1.GCON__1 is no longer connected in a way
that is compatible with Adams/Solver (FORTRAN).
3. An attribute of .model_1.GCON__1 is no longer compatible with Adams/Solver (FORTRAN).
If you intend to use Adams/Solver (FORTRAN), you must change your model to eliminate the
incompatibility. For more information, see the online help for the object listed.
If you do not want to use Adams/Solver (FORTRAN), then be sure that you set your preferences
so Adams/Solver (C++) is the default as follows:
a. From the Settings menu, point to Solver and then select either Solver Executable or
Preferences, depending on the product you are using.
b. To learn more, press F1 in the dialog box.
• Correct handling of a GCON element assumes a FUNCTION defined in Pfaffian form.
• Kinematic models are incompatible with velocity constraints. If a model is rendered kinematic
by displacement constraints, any additional velocity constraints will be either redundant or
conflicting. In either case, version 2003 of Adams/Solver (C++) is incapable of analyzing the
model as explained below:
constraint 135
Currently, there is no redundancy check for user constraints defined at the velocity level.
Therefore, you can impose constraints that are not redundant at the position level, but lead to
a set of redundant constraints when their time derivative is considered with other velocity level
constraints during the velocity Initial Conditions (IC) analysis. Consider the situation when
two constraints are defined as GCON/1, FU=DX(1,2), and GCON/2, FU=VX(1,2). Because
the redundant constraint analysis only includes position level constraints, Adams/Solver
(C++) will not identify that a velocity-level constraint (GCON/2) induces a redundant
constraint during the velocity computation. As a result, a model that contains these two user
constraints will fail during the velocity analysis with a singular Jacobian error.
• GCON is a new modeling element only available in the Adams/Solver (C++). Currently there
is no support for defining GCON through Adams/View, so you need to edit the .adm file to
add user-defined constraints. Adams/View correctly imports the edited .adm file, and the
internal Adams/Solver (C++) from within Adams/View correctly handles the simulation of
the model.
• If you use GCON to constrain the values of DIFF, LSE, and TFSISO elements, note that they
will not contribute degrees of freedom that are considered removed by a GCON element. The
GCON statement functions properly for Pfaffian expressions depending on position and
velocity measures and time, or as mentioned earlier, on VARVALs measures for
VARIABLEs that only depend on position and velocity measures and time.
• Consequently, a model that contains velocity constraints can only be simulated using the
dynamic solver.
• For a position-level GCON, the FUNCTION must be at least three times differentiable. If the
GCON introduces a velocity-level constraint, then the FUNCTION should be at least twice
differentiable. This requirement ensures that internally Adams/Solver (C++) can take the
necessary derivatives to perform certain types of analyses such as Acceleration/Force
reconciliation, dynamic analysis, and so on. Note that if the expression provided for GCON is
not continuously differentiable for the required number of times, the integrator will either fail,
or have a difficult time finding the numerical solution.
• The ability of the Adams/Solver (C++) to handle function expressions to provide the
necessary derivatives required by the GCON does not extend to user subroutines.
Consequently, a VARIABLE can only be referenced in a GCON provided it is defined using
function expressions, rather than a VARSUB subroutine.
• Use the RESULTS/XRF statement in order to get the reaction force on marker I reported in
the results file. This is the only output format currently able to handle GCON output.
Tips:
1. There is no dedicated function that returns the reaction force induced by a user constraint on a
marker. You can invoke an existing function such as FX(I[; J][;K]) for this purpose. Note that
FX(I[; J][;K]) reports the force that acts on the I marker as a result of both constraint and external
forces applied to this marker. To only obtain the contribution of the the GCON, the markers that
appear in FX(I[; J][;K]) should be exclusively used to define the GCON, and no other elements
such as applied forces, joints, or motions should refer them.
constraint modify higher_pair_contact curve_curve

Allows you to modify a curve_curve constraint.
Format:

curve_curve_name = existing ccurve
new curve_curve_name = new cccurve name
adams_id = geom._id
comments = string
i_curve_name = existing acurve
J_curve_name = existing acurve
I_ref_marker_name = existing marker
J_ref_marker_name = existing marker
I_displacement_ic = length
no_i_displacement_ic = true
j_displacement_ic = length
no_j_displacement_ic = true
i_ velocity_ic = velocity
no_i_velocity_ic = true
j_velocity_ic = velocity
no_j_velocity_ic = true
i_ ic_ref_marker_name = existing marker,
ji_ ic_ref_marker_name = existing marker
Description:

curve_curve_name New ccurve Specifies the name of an existing curve_curve
New_curve_curve_name New ccurve name Specifies the name of the new curve_curve. You
curve_curve.
in the Adams data File.
or modified.
constraint 137

i_curve_name Existing Acurve name Specifies the name of a CURVE from which
Adams constructs the first Curve
J_curve_name Existing acurve Specifies the name of a CURVE from which
Adams constructs the second curve.
I_ref_marker_name Existing marker Specifies the name of a fixed MARKER on the
part containing I_CURVE.
J_ref_marker_name Existing marker Specifies the name of a fixed MARKER on the
part containing J_CURVE.
I_floating_marker_name Existing marker Specify an existing floating marker.
J_floating_marker_name Existing marker Specify an existing floating marker.
I_displacement_ic Length Specifies the initial point of contact on the first
curve.
J_displacement_ic Length Specifies the initial point of contact on the
second curve.
No_i_displacement_ic True Specifies that if an I_DISPLACEMENT_IC has
No_j_displacement_ic True Specifies that if an J_DISPLACEMENT_IC has
I_velocity_ic Velocity Specifies the initial velocity of the contact point
along I_CURVE.
J_velocity_ic Velocity Specifies the initial velocity of the contact point
along J_CURVE.
No_i_velocity_ic True Specifies that if an I_VELOCITY_IC has been
set via any means, to "UNSET" the velocity
initial condition.
No_j_velocity_ic True Specifies that if an J_VELOCITY_IC has been
set via any means, to "UNSET" the velocity
initial condition.

I_ic_ref_marker_name An existing marker Specifies the name of a fixed MARKER
defining the coordinate system in which the
values for I_DISPLACEMENT_IC are defined.
The I_IC_REF_MARKER must be on the same
part as the I_REF_MARKER.
J_ic_ref_marker_name An existing marker Specifies the name of a fixed MARKER
defining the co ordinate system in which the
values for J_DISPLACEMENT_IC are defined.
The J_IC_REF_MARKER must be on the same
part as the J_REF_MARKER.
yourself.
constraint 139
3. The I_REFERENCE_MARKER marker specifies the coordinate system in which the x, y, z

coordinates of I_CURVE are specified. The curve is attached rigidly to the part specified in the
I_PART_NAME parameter and containing the I_REFERENCE_MARKER marker. The z
component of the CURVE must be zero. As a result, the curve will lie in the x-y plane of the
I_REFERENCE_MARKER marker.
4. The J_REFERENCE_MARKER specifies the coordinate system in which the x, y, z coordinates
of J_CURVE are specified. The curve is attached rigidly to the part specified in the
J_PART_NAME parameter and containing the J_REFERENCE_MARKER. The z component of
the CURVE must be zero. As a result, the curve will lie in the x-y plane of the
J_REFERENCE_MARKER.
5. The I_REF_MARKER marker identifies the coordinate system in which the coordinates of
ICURVE are specified. Adams constructs the I_CURVE in the I_REF_MARKER marker
coordinate system. Adams/View will automatically create the I "floating" marker. The I "floating
marker" and I_REF_MARKER markers must lie on the same part.
6. The J_REF_MARKER marker identifies the coordinate system that the coordinates of J_CURVE
are specified. Adams constructs the J_CURVE in the J_REF_MARKER coordinate system. The
J "floating" and J_REF_MARKER markers must lie on the same part.
7. For the i_displacement_ic parameter, if the point specified is not exactly on the curve, Adams will
use a point on the curve nearest to that specified. By default, the contact point is specified in the
I_REF_MARKER coordinate system. If another coordinate system is more convenient, you may
supply the I_IC_REF_MARKER argument and enter I_DISPLACEMENT_IC in
I_IC_REF_MARKER coordinates.
If you supply I_DISPLACEMENT_IC, Adams assembles the system with the contact at the
you do not supply I_DISPLACEMENT_IC, Adams assumes the initial contact is at the point on
the first curve closest to J_CURVE in the input configuration. In this case, Adams may adjust that
8. For the j_displacement_ic parameter, if the point specified is not exactly on the curve, Adams uses
a point on the curve nearest to that specified. By default, the contact point is specified in the
J_REF_MARKER coordinate system. If another coordinate system is more convenient, you may
supply the J_IC_REF_MARKER and enter J_DISPLACEMENT_IC in J_IC_REF_MARKER
coordinates.
If you supply J_DISPLACEMENT_IC, Adams assembles the system with the contact at the
you do not supply J_DISPLACEMENT_IC, Adams assumes the initial contact is at a point on the
second curve closest to ICURVE in the input configuration. In this case, Adams may adjust that
9. The i_velocity_ic is the speed at which the contact point is initially moving relative to the curve.
I_VELOCITY_IC is negative if the contact point is moving towards the start of the curve, positive
If you supply I_VELOCITY_IC, Adams gives the contact point the specified initial velocity along
the first curve, even if it must override part initial conditions in order to do so. If you do not supply
I_VELOCITY_IC, Adams assumes the initial velocity is zero, but may adjust that velocity to
maintain other part or constraint initial conditions.
10. The j_velocity_ic is the speed at which the contact point is initially moving relative to the curve.
J_VELOCITY_IC is negative if the contact point is moving towards the start of the curve, positive
If you supply J_VELOCITY_IC, Adams gives the contact point the specified initial velocity
along the second curve, even if it must override part initial conditions in order to do so. If you do
not supply J_VELOCITY_IC, Adams assumes the initial velocity is zero, but may adjust that
11. The CURVE_CURVE defines a curve-curve constraint, which restricts a planar curve on one part
to be in contact with, and tangent to, a planar curve on a second part. The curves must lie in
parallel planes.
Adams constructs the first curve from the I_CURVE curve and the I_REF_MARKER, the second
curve from the J_CURVE value and the J_REF_MARKER. In both cases, the CURVE command
(I_CURVE or J_CURVE) defines x and y coordinates along the curve as a function of the
independent parameter (u). The z coordinates of the curves must be zero. The reference marker
(I_REF_MARKER or J_REF_MARKER) defines the part the constraining curve is attached to
and the coordinate system in which Adams applies the coordinates from the CURVE statement.
Both I_CURVE and J_CURVE may be open or closed, defined analytically or as a set of discrete
data points.
The CURVE_CURVE constraint removes three degrees-of-freedom from the system. Adams
restricts the motion of the parts such that the curves are always in contact and the curves are
tangent at the contact point. Although Adams requires that the curves lie in parallel planes, the
CURVE_CURVE command does not enforce this. You must build the model in such a way that
the curves are held in parallel planes, which will remove another three degrees of freedom.
Assuming the curves are held in parallel planes, a CURVE_CURVE leaves two relative degrees
of freedom between the curves. The first curve may slide or roll on the second, but may not move
perpendicular to the curve tangents at the contact.
Internally, Adams actually generates five constraint equations, but also adds two new system
variables and equations for a net decrease of one degree-of-freedom. The added system variables
are the two curve parameters at the contact points on the curves. Two of the constraints restrict
the x and y coordinates at the contact point on the first curve to match the x and y coordinates at
the contact point on the second curve. The third constraint restricts the tangent at the contact point
on the first curve to be parallel to the tangent at the contact point on the second curve.
More than one POINT_CURVE or CURVE_CURVE statement may reference the same CURVE
constraint 141
The I_VELOCITY_IC and J_VELOCITY_IC are specified in the reference frame of the part
containing the I_REF_MARKER or J_REF_MARKER marker, respectively. In other words, the
I_VELOCITY_IC is the speed of the contact point specified from the standpoint of an observer
on the part containing the first curve. This means if the contact point is not moving globally, but
the first curve is, then I_VELOCITY_IC is still non-zero.
Adams detects a fatal user error if the contact point moves off the end of an open curve. You
should make sure the CURVE statement defines the curve over the expected range of motion. The
initial conditions arguments, I_DISPLACEMENT_IC, J_DISPLACEMENT_IC,
I_VELOCITY_IC and J_VELOCITY_IC, impose constraints that are active only during an initial
conditions analysis. Adams does not impose these initial conditions during subsequent analyses.
I_DISPLACEMENT_IC, J_DISPLACEMENT_IC, I_VELOCITY_IC or J_VELOCITY_IC
arguments on the CURVE_CURVE statements for systems with zero degrees of freedom.
Adams requires that there be a unique contact point in the vicinity of the I floating and J floating
markers during simulation. If this condition is violated, Adams may be unable to find the correct
contact point or may even jump from one contact point to the next.
One way to ensure that contact points are unique is to specify curve shapes that are convex. Note
that for a convex curve, any line segment connecting two points on the curve lie in the domain of
the curve. The same is not true for non-convex curves.
Cautions:
1. For the no_i_displacement_ic,no_j_displacement_ic,no_i_velocity and no_j_velocity
parameters, setting these parameters to true is not the same as setting the value to zero. A zero
displacement/velocity is not the same as "no" displacement/velocity. Therefore, by setting this
parameter to true there is no longer a displacement/velocity initial condition for this element.
constraint modify higher_pair_contact point_curve

Allows you to modify a point_curve.
Format:

point_curve_name = existing pcurve
new_point_curve_name = new name for pcurve
adams_id = geom._id
comments = string
curve_name = existing acurve
i_marker_name = An existing marker
j_floating_marker_name = An existing fmarker
no_displacement_ic = true
ic_ref_marker_name = existing marker
Description:

point_curve_name Existing Pcurve Specifies the name of an existing point_curve.
New_point_curve_name New pcurve name Specifies the name of the new point_curve. You
point_curve.
or modified.
curve_name Existing Acurve name Specifies the name of a CURVE that defines the
contour or shape on which the fixed marker can
move.
i_marker_name Existing marker name Specifies the name of a fixed MARKER that
Adams constrains to lie on the curve defined by
CURVE and REF_MARKER.
constraint 143

j_floating_marker_name Existing floating marker Specify an existing floating marker name.
name
ref_marker_name Existing marker Specifies the name of a MARKER fixed on the
part containing the curve on which the
I_MARKER must move.
displacement_ic Length Specifies the initial point of contact on the
curve.
no_displacement_ic true Specifies that if a DISPLACEMENT_IC has
velocity_ic Velocity Specifies the initial tangential velocity of the
I_MARKER along the curve.
no_velocity_ic True Specifies that if a VELOCITY_IC has been set
condition.
ic_ref_marker_name Existing marker Specifies the name of a the fixed MARKER
defining the coordinate system in which the
values for DISPLACEMENT_IC values are
specified.
Adams data file for your model. AdamsAdams requires that each modeling element be identified
by a unique integer identifier. If you use this parameter to specify a non-zero identifier,
Adams/View will use it in the corresponding statement in the Adams data file.
yourself.
3. The REF_MARKER is used to associate the shape defined by the CURVE to the part on which
the REF_MARKER lies. The curve coordinates are therefore specified in the coordinate system
of the REF_MARKER. The floating J marker and REF_MARKER must belong to the same
PART.
If the marker is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it convenient
to type the name even if the marker is displayed.
4. If the point specified is not exactly on the curve, Adams uses a point on the curve nearest to that
specified. By default, DISPLACEMENT_IC is specified in the REF_MARKER marker
coordinate system. If another coordinate system is more convenient, you may supply the
IC_REF_MARKER argument and enter DISPLACEMENT_IC in IC_REF_MARKER marker
coordinates. If you supply DISPLACEMENT_IC values, Adams assembles the system with the
I_MARKER at the specified point on the curve, even if it must override part initial conditions in
order to do so. If you do not supply DISPLACEMENT_IC, Adams assumes the initial contact is
at the point on the curve closest to the initial I_MARKER position. However, it may adjust that
constraint 145
5. The velocity_ic parameter specified the speed at which the I_MARKER is initially moving
relative to the curve. The VELOCITY_IC is negative if the I_MARKER is moving towards the
start of the curve, positive if the I_MARKER is moving toward the end of the curve, and zero if
the I_MARKER is stationary on the curve.
If you supply the VELOCITY_IC, Adams gives the I_MARKER the specified initial tangential
velocity along the curve, even if it must override part initial conditions in order to do so. If you
do not supply VELOCITY_IC, Adams assumes the initial tangential velocity is zero, but may
adjust that velocity to maintain other part or constraint initial conditions.
6. The POINT_CURVE command defines a point-to-curve constraint, which restricts a fixed point
defined on one part to lie on a curve defined on a second part. This is an instance of a higher pair
constraint.
The part containing the I_MARKER is free to roll and slide on the curve that is fixed to a second
part. Lift-off is not allowed, i.e., the I_MARKER must always lie on the curve.
The curve itself may be planar or spatial, open or closed. The "floating J" marker origin defines
the contact point on the curve; its orientation defines the tangent, normal, and binormal at the
contact point. A POINT_CURVE constraint removes two translational degrees-of-freedom from
the system. Adams restricts the origin of the I_MARKER to always lie on the curve. The
I_MARKER may translate only in one direction relative to the curve, along the instantaneous
tangent. The I marker is free to rotate in all three directions.
More than one POINT_CURVE or CURVE_CURVE element may reference the same CURVE
The VELOCITY_IC is specified in the reference frame of the part containing the
REF_MARKER. In other words, the VELOCITY_IC is the speed of the I_MARKER specified
from the standpoint of an observer on the part containing the curve. This means that if the
I_MARKER is not moving globally but the curve is, then VELOCITY_IC is still non-zero.
The initial conditions arguments, DISPLACEMENT_IC and VELOCITY_IC, impose constraints
that are active only during an initial conditions analysis. Adams does not impose these initial
conditions during subsequent analyses.
DISPLACEMENT_IC or VELOCITY_IC arguments on the POINT_CURVE command for
systems with zero degrees of freedom.
Cautions:
1. For the no_displacement_ic and no_velocity parameters, setting these parameters to true is not the
same as setting the value to zero. A zero displacement/velocity is not the same as "no"
displacement/velocity. Therefore, by setting this parameter to true there is no longer a
displacement initial condition for this element.
2. The I_MARKER and REF_MARKER must belong to different parts.
3. Adams aborts the simulation if the contact point moves off the end of an open curve. The user
should make sure the CURVE statement defines the curve over the expected range of motion.
4. The IC_REF_MARKER must be on the same part as the REF_MARKER.
Tip: 1. The x, y, z values associated with the CURVE are the coordinates of points lying
on the CURVE and are calculated in the coordinate system of the REF_MARKER.
constraint 147
constraint modify joint cylindrical

Allows the modifcation of a cylindrical joint.
Format:

joint_name = existing joint name
new_joint_name = new joint name
adams_id = Geom_id
comments = String
angular_velocity_ic = angular_velocity
Example:
constraint modify joint Cylindrical &

new_joint_name = My_Cylinderical_joint &
adams_id = 2 &
Description:

joint_name New joint name Specifies the name of an existing joint.
New_joint_name New joint name Specifies new name of the joint. You may use this name
Adams data file.
modified.
no_translational_ic True Specifies that if a "translational" velocity initial
condition has been set, to "UNSET" the "translational"
velocity initial condition for the specified constraint.
no_velocity_ic True Specifies that if a VELOCITY_IC has been set via any
means, to "UNSET" the velocity initial condition.
no_rotational_ic True Specifies that if a "rotational" velocity initial condition
has been set, to "UNSET" the "rotational" velocity
initial condition for the specified constraint.
angular_velocity_ic Angular_velocity Specifies the initial angular velocity on a revolute or
cylindrical joint.
no_angular_velocity_ic True Specifies that if an "angular_velocity" initial condition
has been set, to "UNSET" the "angular_velocity" initial
condition for the specified constraint.
i_marker_name Existing marker Specifies a marker on the first of two parts connected by
this joint.
j_marker_name Existing marker Specifies a marker on the second of two parts connected
by this joint.
a unique name.
constraint 149
will use it in the corresponding statement in the AdamsAdams data file.
yourself.
common z-axis of the I and the J markers with respect to the origin of the J marker.
If you specify TRANSLATIONAL_IC, but not VELOCITY_IC, Adams/View will set
VELOCITY_IC to zero.
z-axis of the I and the J markers with respect to the origin of the J marker.
If you specify VELOCITY_IC, but not TRANSLATIONAL_IC, Adams/View will set
TRANSLATIONAL_IC to zero.
7. A cylindrical joint is a two-degree-of-freedom joint that allows both relative translational and
relative rotational displacement of one part with respect to another. For a cylindrical joint, Adams
keeps the z-axis of the I marker parallel to, and co-directed with, the z-axis of the J marker and
confines the origin of the I marker to the z-axis of the J marker so that the I and the J markers have
a common z-axis. To determine translational motion, Adams measures the movement of the
origin of the I marker along the z-axis and with respect to the J marker. To determine rotational
motion, Adams measures the rotation of the x-axis of the I marker about the common z-axis and
with respect to the x-axis of the J marker.
Caution: 1. For the parameters

“no_translational_ic”,”no_velocity_ic”,”no_rotational_ic”,setting it to true is not
the same as setting the value to zero. A zero velocity is not the same as "no"
velocity. Therefore, by setting this parameter to true there is no longer a velocity
constraint 151
Tip: 1. Adams/View connects one part at the I marker to the other at the J marker.
constraint modify joint fixed

Allows the modification of an existing fixed joint.
Format:

new_joint_name = a new joint
adams_id = integer
comments = string
Example:
constraint modify joint fixed &

new_joint_name = JOINT__2 &
adams_id = 2 &
Description:

joint_name An existing joint Specifies the joint to modify.
new_joint_name A new joint Specifies the name of the new joint.
Adams data file.
constraint 153

i_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies a marker on the first of two parts connected by this
other at the J marker.
j_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies a marker on the second of two parts connected by
this joint. Adams/View connects one part at the I marker to
1. A fixed joint essentially locks to parts together. It can be used as a placeholder for another joint
or in conjunction with the ACTIVATE and DACTIVATE commands in Adams to model special
effects.
6. A FIXED joint is a zero-degree-of-freedom joint that superimposes the origins of the I and J
markers while also constraining the X, Y, and Z axes of the I marker to remain parallel to the
respective X, Y, and Z axes of the J marker.
2. Use the joint name parameter to identify the existing joint to affect with this
command.
3. You may use the new_joint_name later to refer to this joint. Adams/View will not
allow you to have two joints with the same full name, so you must provide a unique
name.
constraint 155
constraint modify joint hooke

Allows the modification of an existing hooke joint.
Format:

adams_id = integer
comments = string
Example:
constraint modify joint hooke &

adams_id = 2 &
Description:

joint_name An existing joint Specifies the joint to modify. You use this parameter to
identify the existing joint to affect with this command.
new_joint_name A new joint Specifies the name of the new joint. You may use this name
later to refer to this joint. Adams/View will not allow you to
have two joints with the same full name, so you must provide
a unique name.
Adams data file.

1. The UNIVERSAL joint required the Z-axis of the I marker to be perpendicular to the Z-axis of
the J marker, whereas the HOOKE joint requires THE X-axis of the I marker to be perpendicular
to the Y-axis of the J marker, so that they outline the crosspiece of the joint. A valid HOOKE joint
may be properly defined with two coincident markers and can better take advantage of the
automatic marker generation capabilities of Adams/View.
constraint 157
6. A HOOKE joint is a two-degree-of-freedom joint that is that same as the UNIVERSAL joint with
the exception that the marker orientations have been modified.
constraint modify joint planar

Allows the modification of an existing planar joint.
Format:

adams_id = integer
comments = string
Example:
constraint modify joint planar &

adams_id = 2 &
Description:

joint_name An Existing Joint Specifies the joint to modify.
new_joint_name A New Joint Specifies the name of the new joint.
Adams data file.
joint.
this joint.
constraint 159
5. A planar joint is a three-degree-of-freedom joint that allows the x-y plane of one part to slide in
the x-y plane of another part. For a planar joint, Adams keeps the origin of the I marker in the x-
y plane of the J marker and keeps the z axis of the I marker perpendicular to the x-y plane of the
J marker.
2. Use the joint_name parameter to identify the existing joint to affect with this
command.
name.
constraint 161
constraint modify joint rackpin

Allows modification of an existing rack-and-pinion joint.
Format:

adams_id = integer
comments = string
diameter_of_pitch = real number
Example:
:
constraint modify joint rackpin &

adams_id = 2 &
j_marker_name= marker_2 &
diameter_of_pitch = 0.22
Description:

new_joint_name A New Joint Specifies the name of the new joint.
Adams data file.
modified.
i_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies a marker on the first of two parts connected by
this joint.

this joint.
diameter_of_pitch Length Specifies the pitch diameter of the pinion gear of a rack-
and-pinion joint.
1. For a rack-and-pinion joint, the x-axis of the pinion must be parallel to and pointed in the same
direction as the z (translational) axis of the rack. The separation between the two axes should be
one-half the pitch diameter of the pinion. The rack-and-pinion joint itself does not enforce the
position and orientation it requires, but the chain of both parts and joints that connects markers I
and J should enforce the position and orientation. A common approach for enforcing the position
and the orientation is to support the rack with a translational joint and to support the pinion with
a revolute joint.
constraint 163
7. A rack-and-pinion joint is a five-degree-of-freedom joint that constrains the rotational and
translational displacement of the I marker as it rolls along the z-axis of the J marker. The I marker
is at the center of the pinion, and the J marker is in the rack.
Tip: 1. If you type a "?", AdamsAdams/View will list the joints available by default.
2. Use the joint_name parameter to identify the existing joint to affect with this
command.
name.
constraint modify joint revolute

Allows the modifcation of a revolute joint.
Format:

new_joint_name = new joint
adams_id = geom._id
comments = string
angular_velocity_ic = angular_vel
delta_v = real
mu_dyn_rot = real
mu_stat_rot = real
max_fric_rot = torque
preload_radial = force
preload_axial = force
inner_radius = length
outer_radius = length
location = location
orientation = orienatation
constraint 165
Example:
constraint modify joint Revolute &

neW_joint_name = MY_REVOLUTE_JOINT &
adams_id = 1 &
Description:

joint_name Existing joint Specifies the name of the joint to be modified. You may
use this name later to refer to this joint.
New_joint_name New joint name Specified the name of the new joint.
Adams data file.
modified.
rotational_ic Real Specifies the initial rotational displacement on a revolute
or cylindrical joint.
no_rotational_ic True Specifies that if a "rotational" velocity initial condition
has been set, to "UNSET" the "rotational" velocity initial
angular_velocity_ic Real Specifies the initial angular velocity on a revolute or
cylindrical joint.
no_angular_velocity True Specifies that if an "angular_velocity" initial condition
_ic has been set, to "UNSET" the "angular_velocity" initial
friction_enabled Yes/No/Preload_onl The constant default value will be used if this parameter
y is omitted.
delta_v Real Real number should be greater than zero.
maximum_deformat Real Real number should be greater than zero.
ion
mu_dyn_rot Real A real number greater than or equal to 0
mu_stat_rot Real A real number greater than or equal to 0
max_fric_rot Torque A real number greater than or equal to 0

preload_radial Force A real number greater than or equal to 0
preload_axial Force A real number greater than or equal to 0
inner_radius Length A real number greater than or equal to 0
outer_radius Length A real number greater than or equal to 0
i_part_name Existing body Specifies the part that is the first of two parts connected
marker to the other at the J marker. These markers are
automatically generated using this method of joint
creation.
connected by this joint. Adams/View connects one part at
the J marker to the other at the I marker. These markers
are automatically generated using this method of joint
creation.
Location Location Specifies the locations to be used to define the position
orientation orientation Specifies the orientation of the J marker for the constraint
along_axis_orientati Location Specifies the orientation of a coordinate system (e.g.
on marker or part) by directing one of the axes.
relative_to Existing model, part Specifies the coordinate system that location coordinates
or marker and orientation angles are with respect to.
this joint.
Adams/View connects one part at the I marker to the

by this joint.
Adams/View connects one part at the I marker to the

a unique name.
constraint 167
yourself.
z axes.
coordinate system.
7. Adams/View will assign an arbitrary rotation about the axis.
You may enter either one or two locations to direct the axis. If you enter one location, the axis will
constraint 169
coordinate system.
locations.
coordinate system.
10. A revolute joint is a single-degree-of-freedom joint that allows rotation of one part with respect
to another about a common axis. For a revolute joint, Adams superimposes the origins of the I and
J markers and keeps their z-axes parallel and co-directed. Relative motion occurs about the
common z-axis. Adams measures the angle of the x-axis of the I marker relative to the x-axis of
the J marker to determine the rotational displacement. Adams measures positive rotation
according to the right-hand rule.
Cautions:
1. “No_rotational_ic” and “no_angular_velocity_ic” being set to True is not the same as setting the
value to zero. A zero velocity is not the same as "no" velocity. Therefore, by setting this parameter
to true there is no longer a velocity initial condition for this element.
constraint modify joint screw

Allows the modification of an existing screw joint.
Format:

adams_id = integer
comments = string
pitch = real number
Example:
constraint modify joint screw &

adams_id = 2 &
pitch = 0.22
Description:

new_joint_name A New Joint Specifies the name of the new joint. You may use this name
Adams data file.
modified.
constraint 171

pitch Length Specifies the pitch of the scew joint.
1. For a screw joint, the z-axis of the I marker and the z-axis of the J marker must always be parallel
and co-directed. Although the screw joint does not enforce this parallelism, the chain of parts and
joints that connects the two markers should.
During simulation, the I marker displacement along the J marker z-axis is a function of the relative
angle of the x-axis of the I marker with respect to the x-axis of the J marker. Adams measures a
positive rotation according to the righthand rule. For every full rotation, the displacement of the I
marker along the z-axis of the J marker is equal to the value of the screw pitch. If phi is zero, the
translational displacement may be zero or any multiple of the pitch.
6. A screw joint is a five-degree-of-freedom joint that constrains the rotational and translational
displacement of the I marker as it spins about the z-axis of the J marker.
Tips:
1. If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the joints available by default.
2. Use the joint_name parameter to identify the existing joint to affect with this command.
a unique name.
constraint 173
constraint modify joint spherical

Allows the modification of a spherical joint.
Format:

new_joint_name = new_joint
adams_id = geom._id
comments = string
i_marker_name = Existing marker
Example:
constraint create joint Spherical &

new_joint_name = My_joint &
adams_id = 6 &
Description:

joint_name Existing joint name Specifies the name of an existing joint.
New_joint_name New joint Specifies new name of the joint. You may use this name
Adams data file.
modified.
this joint.
by this joint.
a unique name.
yourself.
3. A spherical joint is a three-degree-of-freedom joint. While permitting all three rotations, a
spherical joint superimposes the I and the J markers.
Tips:
constraint 175
constraint modify joint translational

Allows the modification of an existing translational joint.
Format:

new_joint_name = a new joint name
adams_id = integer
comments = string
velocity_ic = real
delta_v = real
mu_dyn_trans = real
mu_stat_trans = real
max_fric_trans = real
preload_x = real
preload_y = real
height = real
width = real
location = location
Example:
constraint create joint translational &

adams_id = 2 &
translational_ic = 1.2 &
velocity_ic = 1.4 &
friction_enabled = preload_only &
delta_v = 1.4 &
maximum_deformation = 0.02 &
mu_dyn_trans = 0.4 &
mu_stat_trans = 0.8 &
max_fric_trans = 0.15 &
preload_x = 1 &
preload_y = 1.2 &
height = 1.5 &
width = 0.8 &
location = 10 , 10 , 5 &
Description:

joint_name An Existing Joint Specifies the joint to modify. You use this parameter
to identify the existing joint to affect with this
command.
new_joint_name A New Joint
constraint 177

modified.
no_translational_ic True_only Specifies that if a "translational" velocity initial
"translational" velocity initial condition for the
no_velocity_ic True_only Specifies that if a VELOCITY_IC has been set via
condition.
friction_enabled Enable_friction
delta_v Real
maximum_deformation Real
mu_dyn_trans Real
mu_stat_trans Real
max_fric_trans Real
preload_x Force
preload_y Force
height Real Specify a height for the info window.
width Real Specify a width for the info window.
part at the J marker to the other at the I marker.

position of a constraint during its creation. The I and
J markers will be automatically created at this
location on the I_PART_NAME and
automatically.
the axis.
locating one of the
coordinate planes.
to.
i_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies a marker on the first of two parts
1. A translational joint is a single-degree-of-freedom joint that allows translational displacement of
one part relative to another. For a translational joint, Adams keeps all the axes of the I and the J
markers parallel and keeps the origin of the I marker on the z-axis of the J marker so that the two
markers have a common z-axis. To determine the translational displacement of the I marker with
respect to the J marker, Adams measures the origin of the I marker with respect to the origin of
the J marker along their common z-axis.
constraint 179
to type the name even if the joint is displayed. If you created the joint by reading an Adams data
set or graphics file, the joint name is the letters JOI followed by the Adams data set joint ID
number. The name of Adams JOINT/101 is JOI101, for example. If you created the joint during
preprocessing, you gave it a name at that time. If a joint is available by default, you may identify
it by entering its name only. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a joint under a
model, for instance, you may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify
joint 'lower_pivot' in model 'links' by entering ".links.lower_pivot". You must separate multiple
joint names by commas. If the joint is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking
on any of the graphics associated with it. You need not separate multiple joint picks by commas.
3. For a translational joint, Adams keeps all the axes of the I and the J markers parallel and keeps
the origin of the I marker on the z-axis of the J marker so that the two markers have a common z-
axis. To determine the translational displacement of the I marker with respect to the J marker,
Adams measures the origin of the I marker with respect to the origin of the J marker along their
common z-axis.
identifier, either explicitly or by default. The next time you write an Adams file,
AdamsAdams/View will replace the zero with a unique, internally-generated identifier.
yourself. Normally, you would let all identifiers default to zero, and Adams/View would generate
the identifiers for you. You are never required to enter a non-zero identifier. You only need to
specify it if, for some reason, you wish to control the Adams file output.
common z-axis of the I and the J markers with respect to the origin of the J marker. If you specify
TRANSLATIONAL_IC, but not VELOCITY_IC, Adams/View will set VELOCITY_IC to zero.
subsequent analyses. If you impose initial conditions on the joint that are inconsistent with those
on a part in the joint, the initial conditions on the joint have precedence over those on the part.
here.
8. Setting the no_translational_ic is not the same as setting the value to zero. A zero velocity is not
the same as "no" velocity. Therefore, by setting this parameter to true there is no longer a velocity
z-axis of the I and the J markers with respect to the origin of the J marker. If you specify
VELOCITY_IC, but not TRANSLATIONAL_IC, Adams/View will set TRANSLATIONAL_IC
to zero. Joint initial conditions impose constraints that are active only during initial conditions
analysis (not at the time of the initial configuration). Adams does not impose initial conditions
during subsequent analyses. If you impose initial conditions on the joint that are inconsistent with
those on a part in the joint, the initial conditions on the joint have precedence over those n the part.
here.
10. Setting the no_velocity_ic parameter is not the same as setting the value to zero. A zero velocity
is not the same as "no" velocity. Therefore, by setting this parameter to true there is no longer a
11. The height and the width values should be a real number between 0.0 and 2.0, where 2.0
12. By default, you supply Cartesian (x, y, z) coordinates for the location parameter. You may use the
'defaults units coordinate_system_type =' command to change this convention. For example,
selecting 'cylindrical' means you will subsequently be supplying r, theta, and z coordinates.
constraint 181
axes.
coordinate system.
Tips:
1. If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the joints available by default.
constraint modify joint universal

Allows you to modify a universal joint.
Format:

joint_name= existing joint
new_joint_name = new joint name
adams_id = geom_id
comments = String
Example:
constraint modify joint universal &

new_joint_name = MY_JOINT &
adams_id = 4 &
Description:

joint_name Existing joint name Specifies the name of an existing joint.
New_joint_name New joint name Specifies a new name for the joint. You may use this name
Adams data file.
modified.
this joint.
by this joint.
constraint 183
a unique name.
yourself.
it if, for some reason, you wish to control the Adams file output system.
3. A universal joint is a joint that allows two degrees of rotational freedom.
For a universal joint, Adams superimposes the origins of I and J and keeps their z-axes
perpendicular, so that they outline the crosspiece of the joint. The origins of the I and the J markers
are at the center of the crosspiece.
Tips:
constraint modify motion_generator

Allows the modifcation of a motion generator in a model.
Format:

motion_name = an existing motion
new_motion_name = new name for the motion
adams_id = geom._id
comments = string,
type_of_freedom = freedom type
axis = motion_axes
function = function
time_derivative = displacement/ velocity/ acceleration
rotational_displacement_ic = angle
rotational_velocity_ic = angular_velocity
Routine = string
Example:
constraint modify motion_generator &

motion_name = ROT_MOTION &
new_motion_name = ROTATIONAL_MOT &
type_of_freedom = rotational &
function = time &
rotational_velocity_ic = 25.9 &
rotational_displacement_ic = 25.4
constraint 185
The above command will apply a rotational motion to the specified joint which is a function of time. Its
rotational velocity would be 25.9 and its rotational displacement would be 25.4.
Description:

motion_name Existing motion name Specifies the name of the motion generator to be
modified.
New_motion_nameAd New motion Specifies the new name for the motion. You may
ams use this name later to refer to this motion
generator.
or modified.
joint_name Existing joint Specifies the translational, revolute, or
Some entities constrain motion at, or are
otherwise associated with, specific joints. You
use this parameter to identify that joint.
type_of_freedom Translational/rotational Specifies translational or a rotational motion if
you attach this motion generator to a cylindrical
joint.
i_marker_name Existing marker Specify an existing I marker
j_marker_name Existing marker Specify an existing J marker
axis X/Y/ Z/ B1/ B2/ B3 Allows you to create and modify additional axes
on a plot to effect multiple axis plotting.
constants to a user-written subroutine to define
the motion.
Routine String
time_derivative VELOCITY/DISPLACE Specifies that the FUNCTION argument defines
MENT/ACCELERATIO the motion displacement, velocity, or
N acceleration.
displacement_ic Length Specifies the initial displacement of the motion,
when the motion is defined in terms of velocity
or acceleration.

velocity_ic Velocity Specifies the initial velocity of the motion, when
the motion is defined in terms of acceleration.
rotational_displacemen Angle Specifies the rotational displacement.
t_ic
rotational_velocity_ic Real Specifies the rotational velocity.
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two motion generators with the same full name, so you
will use it in the corresponding statement in the AdamsAdams data file.
yourself.
constraint 187
associated with it.
4. The “type_of_freedom” parameter is necessary only when you apply motion to a cylindrical joint.
For a translational joint or a revolute joint, Adams assumes you want translational motion or
rotational motion, respectively.
5. When you create a plot template, Adams/View creates two axes by default, one horizontal and
one vertical. These are the plot's primary axes which Adams/View uses to perform cursor tracking
and to draw the grid. The plot TEMPLATE commands also operate on the plot's primary axes.
Each axis consists of an axis line, tic marks, numbers and a label. Use the axis ATTRIBUTES to
change visibility and color attributes for the axis entities.
To plot a curve against the new axes, specify the axis names when you create the curve.
You can make the new axes the plot's primary axes by modifying the plot's template and
specifying the desired axes as the PRIMARY_HAXIS and PRIMARY_VAXIS. The grid will
then reflect the divisions of the new axes and cursor tracking will reflect the new axes' coordinate
system.
6. The motion must be a function of time only and not a function of the state variables.
Adams/View treats this parameter as a series of literal strings. When you write an Adams data set,
If you want to define the motion with an expression, enclose the expression in quotes and enter it
just as you would in the data set. See the Adams User's Manual for information on writing
function expressions. If your expression is longer than 65 characters, you should break it up into
separate strings so it does not extend past the Adams 80-character line-length limit. Adams/View
will write each string on a separate line in the data set.
If you want to define the motion with a user-written subroutine, enter the character string
"USER(r1[,...,r30])", where r1[,...,r30] are the values you want Adams to pass to your user-written
subroutine MOTSUB. If you enter "USER(1.,2.,3.)", for instance, Adams will call your
MOTSUB with values 1, 2, and 3. See the Adams User's Manual for more information on using
MOTSUBs.
7. A MOTION_GENERATOR determines a translational or a rotational motion as a function of
time. In Adams you can apply a motion to a translational, to a revolute, or to a cylindrical joint.
You can define the motion with a FUNCTION expression or with a user-written subroutine.
You can assign a translational motion at either a translational or a cylindrical joint, and you can
assign a rotational motion at either a revolute or a cylindrical joint. Adams uses the two markers
that specify the joint to define the motion. In other words, Adams controls the rotational or the
translational displacement of the I marker in the joint with respect to the J marker in the joint.
For a translational motion, Adams moves the I marker along the z-axis of the J marker. The J
marker origin represents zero displacement, while the z-axis of the J marker defines the positive
direction. For a rotational motion, Adams rotates the I marker about the z-axis of the J marker.
Positive rotations are positive according to the right-hand rule. The z-axis of the I marker must be
collinear with the z-axis of the J marker at all times. The angle is zero when the x-axis of the I
marker is also collinear with the x-axis of the J marker.
constraint 189
constraint modify primitive_joint inplane

Allows the modification of an existing inplane joint primitive.
Format:

jprim_name = an existing primitive joint name
new_jprim_name = a new primitive joint name
adams_id = integer
comments = string
Example:
constraint modify primitive_joint inplane &

new_jprim_name = JPRIM__2 &
adams_id = 2 &
Description:

jprim_name An Existing Specifies the jprim to modify.
Primitive Joint
new_jprim_name A New Primitive Specifies the name of the new jprim.
Joint
or modified.

1. An inplane joint primitive indicates a five-degree-of-freedom joint primitive that allows both
translational and rotational motion of one part with respect to another.For an inplane primitive,
Adams imposes one translational constraint, which confines the translational motion of the I
marker to the x-y plane of the J marker.
2. You may identify a jprim by typing its name or by picking it from the screen. If the jprim is not
even if the jprim is displayed. If you created the jprim by reading an Adams data set or graphics
file, the jprim name is the letters JPR followed by the Adams data set jprim ID number. The name
of Adams JPRIM/101 is JPR101, for example. If you created the jprim during preprocessing, you
gave it a name at that time. If a jprim is available by default, you may identify it by entering its
name only. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a jprim under an analysis, for
instance, you may need to enter the analysis name as well. For example, you may specify jprim
101 from the analysis named test by entering ".test.jpr101". You must separate multiple jprim
names by commas. If the jprim is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on
any of the graphics associated with it. You need not separate multiple jprim picks by commas.
constraint 191
Tips:
1. If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the jprims available by default.
2. You use the jprim_name parameter to identify the existing jprim to affect with this command.
3. You may use the newjprim_name later to refer to this jprim. Adams/View will not allow you to
have two jprims with the same full name, so you must provide a unique name.
constraint modify primitive_joint orientation

Allows the modification of an existing orientation joint primitive.
Format:

adams_id = integer
comments = string
Example:
constraint modify primitive_joint orientation &

adams_id = 2 &
Description:

Primitive Joint
new_jprim_name A New Primitive Specifies the name of the new jprim. You may
Joint use this name later to refer to this jprim.
or modified.
constraint 193

1. An orientation joint primitive indicates a three-degree-of-freedom joint primitive that allows only
translational motion of one part with respect to another. For an orientation primitive, Adams
imposes three rotational constraints to keep the orientation of the I marker identical to the
orientation of the J marker.
Tips:
2. You use this parameter to identify the existing jprim to affect with this command.
a unique name.
constraint 195
constraint modify primitive_joint parallel_axis

Allows modification of an existing parallel axis joint primitive.
Format:

adams_id = integer
comments = string
Example:
constraint modify primitive_joint parallel_axis &

adams_id = 2 &
Description:

Primitive Joint
new_jprim_name A New Primitive Specifies the name of the new jprim.
Joint
Adams data file.
modified.

this joint.
this joint.
1. A parallel joint primitive is a four-degree-of-freedom joint primitive that allows both translational
and rotational motion of one part with respect to another. For a parallel axis primitive, Adams
imposes two rotational constraints so that the z-axis of the I marker stays parallel to the z-axis of
the J marker. This primitive permits relative rotation about the common z-axis of I and J and
permits all relative displacements.
constraint 197
Tips:
3. You may use the new_jprim_name later to refer to the jprim. Adams/View will not allow you to
constraint modify primitive_joint perpendicular

Allows the modifcation of a perpendicular joint primitive.
Format:
Constraint modify primitive_joint perpendicular

jprim_name = existing primitive joint name
new_jprim_name = new name for existing jprim
adams_id = geom_id
comments = string
Example:
constraint modify primitive_joint perpendicular &

new_jprim_name = MY_JPRIM &
Description:

Jprim_name Existing primitive joint Specifies the name of the jprim to be modified.
name
New_jprim_name New name for jprim Specifies the name of the new jprim. You may use this
name later to refer to this jprim.
Adams data file.
modified.
i_marker_name Existing marker name Specifies a marker on the first of two parts connected
by this joint.
j_marker_name Existing marker name Specifies a marker on the second of two parts
constraint 199
a unique name.
yourself.
3. A perpendicular joint primitive is a five-degree-of-freedom joint primitive that allows both
For a perpendicular primitive, Adams imposes a single rotational constraint on the I and the J
markers so that their z-axes remain perpendicular. This allows relative rotations about either z-
axis, but does not allow any relative rotation in the direction perpendicular to both z-axes.
Tips:
constraint modify primitive_joint point_point

Allows the modification of an existing point_point joint primitive.
Format:

adams_id = integer
comments = string
offset = length
Example:
constraint modify primitive_joint point_point &

adams_id = 2 &
offset = 2
Description:

jprim_name An Existing Primitive Specifies the jprim to modify.
Joint
new_jprim_name A New Primitive Joint Specifies the name of the new jprim.
Adams data file.
modified.
constraint 201
by this joint.
offset Length Specifies the prescribed distance between the two
points.
1. An point_point joint primitive constrains three translational DOF and allows three rotational DOF.
This jprim is diferent from a conventional spherical joint as it allows a constant non-zero distance
between i_marker and j_marker. This is similar to a dummy bar having spherical and hookes joint
at respective ends, but it does not specifically constrain any direction, just the total distance
between I and J.
a marker or a geometry element) when you CREATE it by changing the name. If you enter just the
of a full name is:
"...._NAME.GRAND_PARENT_NAME.PARENT_NAME.ENTITY_NAME". The number of
levels used varies from case to case and the parentage must exist before an entity can be assigned
to it.
4. When you use the FILE ADAMS_DATA_SET WRITE command, Adams/View writes an Adams
it in the corresponding statement in the Adams data file. You may also enter zero as an identifier,
either explicitly or by default. The next time you write an Adams file, Adams/View will replace
the zero with a unique, internally-generated identifier. Adams/View will permanently store this
identifier with the element just as if you had entered it yourself. Normally, you would let all
identifiers default to zero, and Adams/View would generate the identifiers for you. You are never
required to enter a non-zero identifier. You only need to specify it if, for some reason, you wish
to control the Adams file output.
must follow the title statement and be followed by the comment 'END OF MODEL COMMENTS'.
This string must be uppercase. When an Adams/Solver data file is written, the comments for an
object are written before the statement corresponding to the object.
Tips:
constraint 203
constraint modify user_defined

Allows the user to modify a USER DEFINED constraint.
Format:

user_constraint_name = existing user constraint
new_user_constraint_name = new name for the user constraint
adams_id = geom._id
comments = string
user_function = function
Description:

user_constraint_name Existing user defined Allows the user to modify a USER DEFINED
constraint constraint.
New_user_constraint_na New name for the user Specify the new name for the user defined
me defined constraint constraint.
or modified.
yourself.
2. A user-defined constraint describes a system constraint as a function of time and as many as thirty
variables. Each of these variables must be the displacement or the velocity of a part. For any part
at any point in time, six displacements define its position, and six velocities define its velocity.
The six displacements are the x, y, and z translations and the three Euler angle rotations. The six
velocities are the x, y, and z translational velocities and the time derivatives of the three Euler
angles. Adams measures all of these displacements and velocities at the origin of the principal
axes with respect to the global coordinate system. A USER DEFINED constraint is only used
when a constraint is needed that is not definable by any of the other constraint types.
contact 1
contact
contact copy
contact copy
Allows you to copy an existing contact and creates an identical new contact with a different name, which
is to be specified by the user.
Format:
contact copy
contact_name = An existing contact
new_contact_name = A new contact
Example:
contact copy &

contact_name = contact__1 &
new_contact_name = contact__2
Description:

Contact_name An Existing Specifies the contact to be deleted.
Contact
New_contact_name A New Contact Specifies the new contact which will be a copy of the
existing one.
Tips:
1. On typing “contact delete” followed by a “?” in the command window, the option “contact_name
=” is automatically displayed. If you need to find out the various contacts already present, type ?
once again. This will result in all the existing contact names that can be deleted being displayed
in the command window.
contact 3
contact create
contact create
Allows you to create a contact force between two geometries. You will need to specify the two
parts/geometries/flexible bodies using their marker, geometry or flexible body names.
Format:
contact create
contact_name = a new contact
adams_id = integer
comments = string
i_geometry_name = an existing geometry
j_geometry_name = an existing geometry
i_flex = an existing flexible body
j_flex = an existing flexible body
i_edge = an existing edge
j_edge = an existing edge
i_edge_index = an existing edge index
j_edge_index = an existing edge index
i_flip_normal = string
j_flip_normal = string
i_flip_geometry_name = existing contact_curve
j_flip_geometry_name = existing contact_curve
geometry_routines = string
stiffness = real
damping = real
dmax = real
exponent = real
penalty = real
restitution_coefficient = real
normal_function = real
normal_routine = string
augmented_lagrangian_formulation = yes/no
coulomb_friction = real
contact create
contact create
mu_static = real
mu_dynamic = real
friction_transition_velocity = real
friction_function = real
friction_routine = string
no_friction = true_value
stiction_transition_velocity = real
Example:
contact create &

adams_id = 1 &
j_geometry_name = link_1 &
i_flip_normal = yes &
j_flip_normal = no &
geometry_routines = "routine 1" &
stiffness = 0.12 &
damping = 0.18 &
dmax = 0.11 &
exponent = 0.13 &
augmented_lagrangian_formulation = no &
mu_static = 0.15 &
mu_dynamic = 0.16 &
coulomb_friction = dynamics_only &
friction_transition_velocity = 0.15 &
stiction_transition_velocity = 0.15
contact 5
contact create
Description:
Parameter Value Description

contact_name A New Specifies the name of the contact to be created.
Contact
adams_id Integer If this ID is not entered, Adams/View will automatically
create an Adams ID for the contact.
comments String Enters any relevant comments to describe the contact.
i_marker_name An Existing Either the I marker or the I geometry name needs to be
Marker specified to indicate the geometry participating in the
contact.
i_geometry_name An Existing Specifies the name of the geometry participating in the
Geometry contact.
j_geometry_name An Existing Specifies the name of the other geometry participating in
Geometry the contact.
i_flex An Existing Specifies the name of the first flexible body participating in
Flexible Body the contact. This parameter should be used only with
Adams/Solver (C++).
j_flex An Existing Specifies the name of the other flexible body participating
Flexible Body in the contact. This parameter can only exist if the I_flex
parameter is specified and used with Adams/Solver (C++).
i_edge An Existing Specifies the name of the edge on the first flexible body
edge on participating in the contact. This parameter should be used
Flexible Body only with Adams/Solver C++.
j_edge An Existing Specifies the name of the edge on the other flexible body
edge on participating in the contact. This parameter can only exist if
Flexible Body the i_edge parameter is specified and used with
Adams/Solver C++.
i_edge_index An Existing Specifies edge index of the first edge participating in the
edge index contact. This parameter can only exist if the i_edge
parameter is specified and used with Adams/Solver C++.
j_edge_index An Existing Specifies edge index of the other edge participating in the
edge index contact. This parameter can only exist if the j_edge
i_flip_normal String Boolean value, specifying whether the normal is to be
flipped or not. Takes values, Yes or No.
j_flip_normal String Boolean value, specifying whether the normal is to be
i_flip_geometry_name Existing Specifies the geometry name at which the contact should be
Contact_curve flipped on the I body.
contact create

j_flip_geometry_name Existing Specifies the geometry name at which the contact should be
Contact_curve flipped on the J body.
geometry_routines String Takes a string value
stiffness Real Specifies a material stiffness that you can use to calculate
the normal force for the impact model.
damping Real Used when you specify the IMPACT model for calculating
normal forces. DAMPING defines the damping properties
of the contacting material. You should set the damping
coefficient to about one percent of the stiffness coefficient.
Range: DAMPING >0
dmax Real Used when you specify the IMPACT model for calculating
normal forces.
Range: DMAX > 0
exponent Real Used when you specify the IMPACT model for calculating
normal forces.
Range: EXPONENT >1
penalty Real Used when you specify a restitution model for calculating
normal forces. PENALTY defines the local stiffness
properties between the contacting material.
restitution_coefficient Real The coefficient of restitution models the energy loss during
contact. This field is not available when I_flex and J_flex
parameters are specified. Range: 0 <
RESTITUTION_COEFFICIENT < 1
normal_function Real Specifies up to thirty user-defined constants to compute the
contact normal force components in a user-defined
subroutine
normal_routine String Specifies a library and a user-written subroutine in that
library that calculates the contact normal force.
augmented_lagrangian Boolean Refines the normal force between two sets of rigid
_formulation geometries that are in contact.
coulomb_friction Real Models friction effects at the contact locations using the
Coulomb friction model to compute the frictional forces.
mu_static Real Specifies the coefficient of friction at a contact point when
the slip velocity is smaller than the
STICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY. Range:
MU_STATIC > 0
contact 7
contact create

mu_dynamic Real Specifies the coefficient of friction at a contact point when
the slip velocity is larger than the
FRICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY. Range:0 <
MU_DYNAMIC < MU_STATIC
friction_transition_vel Real Used in the COULOMB_FRICTION model for calculating
ocity frictional forces at the contact locations. Range:
FRICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY >
STICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY > 0
friction_function Real Specifies up to thirty user-defined constants to compute the
contact friction force components in a user-defined
subroutine
friction_routine String Specifies a library and a user-written subroutine in that
library that calculates the contact friction force.
no_friction True Will take Boolean values of true or false, based on whether
friction is present or not.
stiction_transition_vel Real Used in the COULOMB_FRICTION model for calculating
ocity frictional forces at the contact locations. Range: 0 <
STICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY <
FRICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY
1. In general, the higher the stiffness, the more rigid or hard are the bodies in contact. Also note that
the higher the stiffness, the harder it is for an integrator to solve through the contact event.
2. Parameter dmax defines the penetration at which Adams/Solver turns on full damping.
Adams/Solver uses a cubic STEP function to increase the damping coefficient from zero, at zero
penetration, to full damping when the penetration is dmax. A reasonable value for this parameter
is 0.01 mm. For more information, refer to the IMPACT function.
3. Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) models normal force as a nonlinear spring-damper. If PEN is the
instantaneous penetration between the contacting geometry, Adams/Solver calculates the
contribution of the material stiffness to the instantaneous normal forces as STIFFNESS *
(PENALTY)**EXPONENT. For more information, see the IMPACT function. Exponent should
normally be set to 1.5 or higher.
4. A large value of penalty ensures that the penetration, of one geometry into another, will be small.
Large values, however, will cause numerical integration difficulties. A value of 1E6 is appropriate
for systems modeled in Kg-mm-sec. For more information on how to specify this value, see
Extended Definition.
Range: PENALTY > 0
contact create
5. A value of zero for the restitution_coefficient specifies a perfectly plastic contact between the two
colliding bodies. A value of one specifies a perfectly elastic contact. There is no energy loss. The
coefficient of restitution is a function of the two materials that are coming into contact. For
information on material types versus commonly used values of the coefficient of restitution, refer
to the Material Contact Properties table.
6. The augmented_lagrangian_formulation parameter uses iterative refinement to ensure that
penetration between the geometries is minimal. It also ensures that the normal force magnitude is
relatively insensitive to the penalty or stiffness used to model the local material compliance
effects. You can use this formulation only with the POISSON model for normal force.
7. The friction model in CONTACT models dynamic friction, but not stiction. The argument values,
on/off/dynamics_only, specify at run time whether the friction effects are to be included.
8. For information on material types versus commonly used values of the coefficient of static
friction, see the Material Contact Properties table. Excessively large values of mu_static can cause
integration difficulties.
9. For information on material types versus commonly used values of the coefficient of the dynamic
coefficient of friction, see the Material Contact Properties table. Excessively large values of
mu_dynamic can cause integration difficulties.
10. Adams/Solver gradually transitions the coefficient of friction from mu_static to mu_dynamic as
the slip velocity at the contact point increases. When the slip velocity is equal to the value
specified for friction_transition_velocity, the effective coefficient of friction is set to
mu_dynamic. For more details, see Extended Definition.
11. Specifying i_flex and j_flex parameters for Adams/Solver (Fortran) will result in a warning
message that the created contact is no longer compatible with the solver.
12. i_edge and j_edge are the matrices consisting of the nodes of the free edges identified by the edge
index. You have to first, select a flexible body and then you will be asked to pick one of the free
edges generated (more than one free edge can exists) on the flexible body.
13. edge_index is an optional parameter. If you do not specify, it will be calculated internally.
Tips:
1. Small values for FRICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY cause the integrator difficulties. You
should specify this value as:
FRICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY > 5 * ERROR
where ERROR is the integration error used for the solution. Its default value is 1E-3.
contact 9
contact delete
contact delete
Allows you to delete an existing contact.
Format:
contact delete
contact_name = An existing contact
Example:
contact delete &

contact_name = contact_1
Description:

Contact_name An Existing Contact Specifies the contact to be deleted
Tips:
1. On typing “contact delete” followed by a “?” in the command window, the option “contact_name
=” is automatically displayed. If you need to find out the various contacts already present, type ?
once again. This will result in all the existing contact names that can be deleted being displayed
on the command window.
contact modify
contact modify
Allows you to modify a contact force between two geometries/flexible bodies.
Format:
contact modify
contact_name = existing contact
new_contact_name = a new contact
adams_id = integer
comments = string
i_geometry_name = an existing geometry
j_geometry_name = an existing geometry
i_flex = an existing flexible body
j_flex = an existing flexible body
i_edge = an existing edge
j_edge = an existing edge
i_edge_index = an existing edge index
j_edge_index = an existing edge index
i_flip_normal = string
j_flip_normal = string
i_flip_geometry_name = existing contact_curve
j_flip_geometry_name = existing contact_curve
geometry_routines = string
stiffness = real
damping = real
dmax = real
exponent = real
penalty = real
restitution_coefficient = real
normal_function = real
normal_routine = string
augmented_lagrangian_formulation = yes/no
coulomb_friction = real
contact 11
contact modify
contact modify
mu_static = real
mu_dynamic = real
friction_transition_velocity = real
friction_function = real
friction_routine = string
no_friction = true_value
Example:
contact modify &

new_contact_name = contact__2 &
adams_id = 1 &
i_marker_name = Marker_1 &
j_geometry_name = Link_1 &
i_flip_normal = yes &
j_flip_normal = no &
geometry_routines = "routine 1" &
stiffness = 0.12 &
damping = 0.18 &
dmax = 0.11 &
exponent = 0.13 &
augmented_lagrangian_formulation = no &
mu_static = 0.15 &
mu_dynamic = 0.16 &
coulomb_friction = dynamics_only &
friction_transition_velocity = 0.15 &
stiction_transition_velocity = 0.15
contact modify
Description:

contact_name Existing Specifies the name of the contact to be created.
Contact
new_contact_name A New Specify a new contact name
Contact
adams_id Integer If this ID is not entered, Adams/View will automatically
create an Adams ID for the contact.
comments String Enters any relevant comments to describe the contact.
i_marker_name An Existing Either the I marker or the I geometry name needs to be
Marker specified to indicate the geometry participating in the
contact.
i_geometry_name An Existing Specifies the name of the geometry participating in the
Geometry contact.
j_geometry_name An Existing Specifies the name of the other geometry participating in
Geometry the contact.
i_flex An Existing Specifies the name of the first flexible body participating in
Flexible Body the contact. This parameter should be used only with
Adams/Solver (C++).
j_flex An Existing Specifies the name of the other flexible body participating
Flexible Body in the contact. This parameter can only exist if the I_flex
parameter is specified and used with Adams/Solver (C++).
i_edge An Existing Specifies the name of the edge on the first flexible body
edge on participating in the contact. This parameter should be used
Flexible Body only with Adams/Solver C++.
j_edge An Existing Specifies the name of the edge on the other flexible body
edge on participating in the contact. This parameter can only exist if
Flexible Body the i_edge parameter is specified and used with
Adams/Solver C++.
i_edge_index An Existing Specifies edge index of the first edge participating in the
edge index contact. This parameter can only exist if the i_edge
j_edge_index An Existing Specifies the edge index of the other edge participating in
edge index the contact. This parameter can only exist if the j_edge
i_flip_normal String Boolean value, specifying whether the normal is to be
j_flip_normal String Boolean value, specifying whether the normal is to be
contact 13
contact modify

i_flip_geometry_name Existing Specifies the geometry name at which the contact should be
Contact_curve flipped on the I body.
j_flip_geometry_name Existing Specifies the geometry name at which the contact should be
Contact_curve flipped on the J body.
geometry_routines String Takes a string value
stiffness Real Specifies a material stiffness that you can use to calculate
the normal force for the impact model.
damping Real Used when you specify the IMPACT model for calculating
normal forces. DAMPING defines the damping properties
of the contacting material. You should set the damping
coefficient to about one percent of the stiffness coefficient.
Range: DAMPING >0
dmax Real Used when you specify the IMPACT model for calculating
normal forces.
Range: DMAX > 0
exponent Real Used when you specify the IMPACT model for calculating
normal forces.
Range: EXPONENT >1
penalty Real Used when you specify a restitution model for calculating
normal forces. PENALTY defines the local stiffness
properties between the contacting material.
restitution_coefficient Real The coefficient of restitution models the energy loss during
contact. This field is not available when I_flex and J_flex
parameters are specified. Range: 0 <
RESTITUTION_COEFFICIENT < 1
normal_function Real Specifies up to thirty user-defined constants to compute the
contact normal force components in a user-defined
subroutine
normal_routine String Specifies a library and a user-written subroutine in that
library that calculates the contact normal force.
augmented_lagrangian Boolean Refines the normal force between two sets of rigid
_formulation geometries that are in contact.
coulomb_friction Real Models friction effects at the contact locations using the
Coulomb friction model to compute the frictional forces.
mu_static Real Specifies the coefficient of friction at a contact point when
the slip velocity is smaller than the
STICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY. Range:
MU_STATIC > 0
contact modify

mu_dynamic Real Specifies the coefficient of friction at a contact point when
the slip velocity is larger than the
FRICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY. Range:0 <
MU_DYNAMIC < MU_STATIC
friction_transition_vel Real Used in the COULOMB_FRICTION model for calculating
ocity frictional forces at the contact locations. Range:
FRICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY >
STICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY > 0
friction_function Real Specifies up to thirty user-defined constants to compute the
contact friction force components in a user-defined
subroutine
friction_routine String Specifies a library and a user-written subroutine in that
library that calculates the contact friction force.
no_friction True Will take Boolean values of true or false, based on whether
friction is present or not.
stiction_transition_vel Real Used in the COULOMB_FRICTION model for calculating
ocity frictional forces at the contact locations. Range: 0 <
STICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY <
FRICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY
1. For solids and curves, you can select more than one geometry as long as the geometry belongs to
the same part. The first geometry is called the I geometry and the second geometry is called the J
geometry. For sphere-to-sphere contacts, you can specify whether the contact should be inside or
outside the sphere.
2. In general, the higher the stiffness, the more rigid or hard are the bodies in contact. Also note that
the higher the stiffness, the harder it is for an integrator to solve through the contact event.
3. Parameter dmax defines the penetration at which Adams/Solver turns on full damping.
Adams/Solver uses a cubic STEP function to increase the damping coefficient from zero, at zero
penetration, to full damping when the penetration is dmax. A reasonable value for this parameter
is 0.01 mm. For more information, refer to the IMPACT function.
4. Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) models normal force as a nonlinear spring-damper. If PEN is the
instantaneous penetration between the contacting geometry, Adams/Solver calculates the
contribution of the material stiffness to the instantaneous normal forces as STIFFNESS *
(PENALTY)**EXPONENT. For more information, see the IMPACT function. Exponent should
normally be set to 1.5 or higher.
5. A large value of PENALTY ensures that the penetration, of one geometry into another, will be
small. Large values, however, will cause numerical integration difficulties. A value of 1E6 is
appropriate for systems modeled in Kg-mm-sec. For more information on how to specify this
value, see Extended Definition. Range: PENALTY > 0
contact 15
contact modify
6. A value of zero for the restitution_coefficient specifies a perfectly plastic contact between the two
colliding bodies. A value of one specifies a perfectly elastic contact. There is no energy loss. The
coefficient of restitution is a function of the two materials that are coming into contact. For
information on material types versus commonly used values of the coefficient of restitution, see
the Material Contact Properties table.
7. The augmented_lagrangian_formulation parameter uses iterative refinement to ensure that
penetration between the geometries is minimal. It also ensures that the normal force magnitude is
relatively insensitive to the penalty or stiffness used to model the local material compliance
effects. You can use this formulation only with the POISSON model for normal force.
8. The friction model in CONTACT models dynamic friction but not stiction. The argument values,
on/off/dynamics_only, specify at run time whether the friction effects are to be included.
9. For information on material types versus commonly used values of the coefficient of static
friction, seethe Material Contact Properties table. Excessively large values of mu_static can cause
integration difficulties.
10. For information on material types versus commonly used values of the coefficient of the dynamic
coefficient of friction, see the Material Contact Properties table. Excessively large values of
mu_dynamic can cause integration difficulties.
11. Adams/Solver gradually transitions the coefficient of friction from mu_static to mu_dynamic as
the slip velocity at the contact point increases. When the slip velocity is equal to the value
specified for friction_transition_velocity, the effective coefficient of friction is set to
mu_dynamic. For more details, see Extended Definition.
12. Specifying i_flex and j_flex parameters for Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) will result in a warning
message that the created contact is no longer compatible with the solver.
13. i_edge and j_edge are the matrices consisting of the nodes of the free edges identified by the edge
index. You have to first, select a flexible body and then you will be asked to pick one of the free
edges generated (more than one free edge can exists) on the flexible body.
14. edge_index is an optional parameter. If you do not specify, it will be calculated internally.
Tips:
1. Small values for FRICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY cause difficulties for the integrator .
You should specify this value as:
FRICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY > 5 * ERROR
where ERROR is the integration error used for the solution. Its default value is 1E-3.
contact modify
continue 1
continue
Allows you to skip commands inside the innermost FOR or WHILE loop and continue with the next
iteration of the loop.
When Adams/View encounters a CONTINUE command inside a loop, it skips over the remaining
commands of the loop and goes directly to the END of the innermost loop. Adams/View tests the loop
condition and continues looping if the condition is still valid.
The CONTINUE command affects only the innermost FOR or WHILE loop.
Format:
CONTINUE
Example:
while condition=(ip < 5)
variable modify variable_name=ip integer_value=(eval(ip+1))
if condition=(ip == 3)
continue
end
marker create marker_name=(eval("MAR"//ip)) &
location=(eval(ip-1)),0,0
end
In this example, Adams/View creates four markers on the default part: MAR1, MAR2, MAR4, and
MAR5. Adams/View skips MAR3, because when IP evaluates to 3, Adams/View encounters the
CONTINUE command and skips to the END of the WHILE loop.
Results of CONTINUE Example
Name Loc_X Loc_Y Loc_Z

MAR1 0.0 0.0 0.0
MAR2 1.0 0.0 0.0
MAR4 3.0 0.0 0.0
MAR5 4.0 0.0 0.0
contour_plot legend 1
contour_plot legend
contour_plot legend create

Allows you to create a legend in the animation dashboard for a contoured plot of deformation,
stress/strain or modal forces while in Adams/Flex, Adams/Vibration or Adams/Durability.
The dashboard in animation mode lets you play and control time and frequency_domain animations,
record them, and view contour and vector plots.
Depending on the Adams product you use to create and simulate your model, you display different types
of data as contour or vector plots: deformations, stress/strain, or modal forces. Contour plots display
scalar data a component at a time, such as a stress. You can select to animate the deformations, modal
forces (MFORCEs), or the stresses and strain acting on the flexible body as contour plots to better
visualize a result that is defined by its position on a body.
For example, when you analyze flexible bodies using Adams/Flex, you can contour deformations using
Adams/View or Adams/PostProcessor.
In the Animation Dashboard - Contour Plots setting, you can set up the options for displaying
contour_plots. For each viewport, you can change the way contour plots display colors and values. Note
that this allows you to display different viewports at the same time but with different color values, which
can be confusing because a color value in one viewport may not be the same as in another.
Format:

legend_name = a new contour_plot legend
title= string
placement = placement_option
minimum_value = real
maximum_value = real
gradients = integer
colors= integer
visibility= on_off
scientific_notation= sci_notation
trailing_zeros = boolean
decimal_places = integer
Example:
contour_plot legend create &

legend_name= contour_legend__1 &
title = this_is_title &
placement= bottom &
minimum_value = 0.1 &
maximum_value = 10 &
gradients = 10 &
colors = 255 &
visibility = on &
scientific_notation = 10 , 10 &
trailing_zeros = on &
decimal_places = 2
Description:

legend_name A New Contour_plot Legend Specifies the name of a new contour_plot
legend
animation_name An Existing Animation Specifies an existing animation
title String Specifies title for the legend
placement Placement_options Specifies the placement location of the legend
minimum_value Real Specifies the minimum value of the legend
maximum_value Real Specifies the maximum value of the legend
gradient Integer Specifies the number of gradients for the legend
to be split
colors Integer Specifies the number of colors used to display
legend contours
visibility On_off Specifies the default visibility of the legend
scientific_notation Sci_notation Specifies the exponential form of scientific
notation

trailing_zeros On_off Sets the default status for displaying trailing
zeros
decimal_places Integer Specifies the number of decimal places to
display legend numbers
1. The title name to appear on the top of the legend can be specified by ‘title’. The existing animation
for which the contoured plot is to be shown is entered as ‘animation_name’. The legend_name
should be specified for creating a new legend.
2. The placement of the legend on the animation window can be on the left, right, top, or bottom,
specified by the parameter, ‘placement’.
3. Specify the minimum and maximum numbers for the legend range to be shown.
4. Similarly, the legend can be split into gradients where the number of gradients can be more than
two and less than or equal to 255. The number of colors used to show the contour can be chosen
by the parameter, ‘color’, which cannot be more than 255.
5. The default visibility of the legend bar is set to ON or OFF by the parameter ‘visibility’.
6. The scientific notation specifies the exponential form for scientific notation.
7. Adams/PostProcessor display zeros after the numbers in the legend, if the ‘trailing_zeros’ is set
to ‘yes’. The number of zeros depends on the number of decimal points you selected for
‘decimal_places’.
contour_plot legend delete

Allows you to delete a legend in the animation dashboard for a contoured plot of deformation,
This command deletes an existing contour_plot legend.
Format:

legend_name = an exisitng contour_plot legend
Example:
contour_plot legend delete &

legend_name= contour_legend__1
Description:

legend_name An Existing Contour_plot Specifies the name of an existing
Legend contour_plot legend
This command deletes an existing contour_plot legend.
contour_plot legend modify

Allows you to modify a legend in the animation dashboard for a contoured plot of deformation,
record them, and view contour and vector plots.
Depending on the Adams product you use to create and simulate your model, you display different types
of data as contour or vector plots: deformations, stress/strain, or modal forces. Contour plots display
scalar data, one component at a time, such as a stress. You can select to animate the deformations, modal
forces (MFORCEs), or the stresses and strain acting on the flexible body as contour plots to better
visualize a result that is defined by its position on a body.
Adams/View or Adams/PostProcessor.
In the Animation Dashboard - Contour Plots setting, you can set up the options for displaying
contour_plots. For each viewport, you can change the way contour plots display colors and values. Note
that this allows you to display different viewports at the same time but with different color values, which
can be confusing because a color value in one viewport may not be the same as in another.
Format:

legend_name= an exisitng contour_plot legend
new_legend_name = a new contour_plot legend
title = string
placement = placement_option
minimum_value = real
maximum_value = real
gradients = integer
colors = integer
visibility = on_off
scientific_notation = sci_notation
trailing_zeros = boolean
Example:
contour_plot legend modify &

legend_name= contour_legend__1 &
new_legend_name = modified_legend &
title = new_legend &
placement = right &
minimum_value = 0 &
minimum_value = 2.5 &
gradients = 5 &
colors = 10 &
visibility = on &
scientific_notation = 1,2 &
decimal_places = 2
Description:

legend_name An Existing Contour_plot Legend Specifies the name of an existing
contour_plot legend
new_legend_name A New Contour_plot Legend Specifies a new name for the contour plot
legend
title String Specifies title for the legend
placement Placement_options Specifies the placement location of the
legend
minimum_value Real Specifies the minimum value of the legend
maximum_value Real Specifies the maximum value of the legend
gradient Integer Specifies the number of gradients for the
legend to be split
colors Integer Specifies the number of colors used to
display legend contours
visibility On_off Specifies the default visibility of the legend
scientific_notation Sci_notation Specifies the exponential form of scientific
notation

trailing_zeros On_off Sets the default status for displaying
trailing zeros
decimal_places Integer Specifies the number of decimal places to
display legend numbers
1. The title name to appear on the top of the legend can be specified by ‘title’. The
‘new_legend_name’, if specified, replaces the existing legend name.
2. The placement of the legend on the animation window can be on the left, right, top, or bottom,
specified by the parameter, ‘placement’.
3. Specify the minimum and maximum numbers for the legend range to be shown.
two and les than or equal to 255. The number of colors used to show the contour can be chosen
by parameter, ‘color’, which cannot be more than 255.
5. The default visibility of the legend bar is set to ON or OFF by the parameter, ‘visibility’.
6. The scientific notation specifies the the exponential form for scientific notation.
7. Adams/PostProcessor displays zeros after the numbers in the legend, if the ‘trailing_zeros’ is set
to ‘yes’. The number of zeros depends on the number of decimal points you selected for
‘decimal_places’.
contour_plot legend reset

Allows you to modify a legend in the animation dashboard for a contoured plot of deformation,
This command reset the legend values based on the flexible bodies in the active view.
record them, and view contour and vector plots. Depending on the MSC ADAMS product you use to
create and simulate your model, you display different types of data as contour or vector plots:
deformations, stress/strain, or modal forces. Contour plots display scalar data a component at a time, such
as a stress. You can select to animate the deformations, modal forces (MFORCEs), or the stresses and
strain acting on the flexible body as contour plots to better visualize a result that is defined by its position
on a body.
Adams/View or Adams/PostProcessor. In the Animation Dashboard - Contour Plots setting, you can set
up the options for displaying contour_plots. For each viewport, you can change the way contour plots
display colors and values. Note that this allows you to display different viewports at the same time but
with different color values, which can be confusing because a color value in one viewport may not be the
same as in another.
Format:

legend_name = an exisitng contour_plot legend
Example:
contour_plot legend reset &

legend_name = contour_legend__1
Description:

legend_name An Existing Contour_plot Legend Specifies the name of an existing contour_plot
legend
This command resets the legend values based on the flexible bodies in the active view.
data_element 1
data_element
data_element attributes
Allows the specification of attributes to be set on an individual data_elements or a group of
data_elements.
Format:
data_element_name = an existing var
visibility = on_off_with_toggle
color = an existing color
active = on_off_no_opinion
dependents_active = on_off_no_opinion
Example:
data_element attributes &

data_element_name = shaft_genstiff &
visibility = on &
color = blue &
active = on &
dependents_active = on
Description:

data_element_name An Existing Var Specifies an existing data_element.
visibility On_off_with_toggle Specifies the visibility of graphic entities.
color An Existing Color Specifies the color the modeling entity should be
drawn in.
active On_off_no_opinion Set the activation of the element
dependents_active On_off_no_opinion Set the activation of the dependants of an element
1. You can set the following attributes on a data_element.
VISIBILITY. You may set a data_element's visibility ON, OFF or TOGGLE the current setting.
When you set a data_element's visibility OFF, the data_element will not be drawn.
data_element 3
When you set a data_element's visibility ON, you allow that data_element to be drawn.
COLOR. You may set the color of a data_element with this parameter.
ATTRIBUTE may be inherited from another entity. INHERITANCE may be either TOP_DOWN
or BOTTOM_UP.
2. BOTTOM_UP and TOP_DOWN refer to the natural hierarchy of the Adams model. The
their own size.
3. You may identify a data_element by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
Since data_element do not have a geometric position, Adams/View displays data_element icons
at or near the model origin. If the data_element icon is not visible on the screen, you must type
the name. You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the data_element icon is
displayed.
You must separate multiple data_element names by commas.
If the data_element is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
You need not separate multiple data_element picks by commas.
parts, are to be drawn in an Adams/View viewport.The legal values for this parameter are: ON,
Specifying 'NO_COLOR' for a modeling entity, instructs Adams/View to use the default color
for this entity, if there is no color present in its parent modeling entity.
Example 1:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- RED
Example 2:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- RED
Example 3:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- NO_COLOR
6. When you set ACTIVE=NO, that element is written to the data set as a comment. When you set
the ACTIVE attribute on an object, you are also setting it on the children of the object. If you set
ACTIVE=NO on a part, but wish for a marker on that part to be on, then you must explicitly set
ACTIVE=YES on the marker, after setting activation on the part.
following command:
• Group
• Part
• Marker
• Geometry
• Constraints
• Forces
• Data Elements
• Output Control
data_element 5
data_element copy
data_element copy
Allows you to create a replica DATA_ELEMENT within the same model.
Format:
data_element copy
data_element_name = an existing data_element
new_data_element_name = a new data_element
Example:
data_element copy &

data_element_name = string__1 &
new_ data_element_name = string__2
Description:

new_data_element_name A New Var Specifies the name of the new data_element. You may
use this name later to refer to this data_element.
1. The replica DATA_ELEMENT will be identical to the original with the exception of the
DATA_ELEMENT name. DATA_ELEMENTs must have unique names relative to other
DATA_ELEMENTs in a given model. The replica will be completely independent of the
original, and may be modified without effecting the original.
2. Since data_element do not have a geometric position, Adams/View displays data_element
icons at or near the model origin. If the data_element icon is not visible on the screen, you must
type the name. You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the data_element icon
is displayed.
data_element copy
name. The default name that Adams/View provides will specify the parentage that it has
assumed.
Tips:
1. You may reverse this deletion at a later time with an UNDO command.
2. If the data_element is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
3. You need not separate multiple data_element picks by commas.
data_element 7
data_element create array general_array

Allows you to create a general_array. Creates a one-dimensional array of real numbers that can be
accessed in user-written subroutines. This array is identical in definition to the IC_ARRAY. The
GENERAL_ARRAY has been provided to maintain consistency with the ARRAY available in Adams
version 5.2.1.
Format:

array_name = array_name
adams_id = integer
comments = string
size = integer
numbers = real
Example:
data_element create array general_array &

array_name = .model_1.array_1 &
adams_id = 1 &
size = 3 &
numbers = 2.1,3.4,5
Description:

array_name, Array name Specifies the name of the new array. You may use this name later
to refer to this array.
data file.
Size Integer Specifies the size of an array.
numbers Real Allows you to enter a one dimensional array of real numbers when
using the IC_ARRAY of the GENERAL_ARRAY. The number of
entries should match the value of the SIZE parameter.
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two arrays with the same full name, so you must provide
a unique name.
assumed.
yourself.
identifiers for you. You are never required to enter a non-zero identifier. You only need to
3. In cases where Adams calculates the SIZE differently from the SIZE that the user supplies, Adams
returns an error or warning message.
For the X_STATE_ARRAYs and Y_OUTPUT_ARRAYs, the corresponding systems modeling
element automatically determines the size of the array and checks it against the ARRAY
command SIZE parameter value (if given).
For the IC_ARRAY, the SIZE parameter is optional and Adams determines the actual size of the
array during parsing, as it counts the NUMBERS values. However, if you provide a value for
SIZE , Adams checks the count for consistency.
data_element 9
The SIZE argument, if used, should match the number of entries in the VARIABLE_NAME
parameter, the NUMBERS parameters, or the size needed for the associated systems element.
Adams/View provides the SIZE parameter mainly for user convenience in model creation (it is
not required). For LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION arrays, the X_STATE_ARRAY size is the
row dimension of the A_STATE_MATRIX, and the Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY size is the row
dimension of the C_OUTPUT_MATRIX or the D_FEEDFORWARD_MATRIX. For
TRANSFER_FUNCTION arrays, the transformation from polynomial ratio type to canonical
state space type internally determines the X_STATE_ARRAY size; the Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY
size is always 1. For GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION arrays, the X_STATE_ARRAY size is
the STATE_EQUATION_COUNT as defined in the matching
GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION definition and Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY size is the
OUTPUT_EQUATION_COUNT, as defined in the same GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION
definition.
data_element create array ic_array

Allows you to create an ic_array. This element creates a one-dimensional array of real numbers that can
be accessed in user-written subroutines. You can use an IC_ARRAY to designate define initial conditions
array for an LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION or GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION. In that case, you
should ensure that the value of the SIZE parameters the same as the X_STATE_ARRAY (state variable)
of the associated LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION or GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION.
Format:

adams_id = integer
comments = string
size = integer
numbers = real
Example:
data_element create array ic_array &

adams_id = 1 &
size = 3 &
numbers = 2.1,3.4,5
Description:

array_name, Array name Specifies the name of the new array. You may use this name later to
refer to this array.
adams_id Integer Specifies an integer used to identify this element in the Adams data
file.
numbers Real Allows you to enter a one dimensional array of real numbers when
using the IC_ARRAY of the GENERAL_ARRAY. The number of
entries should match the value of the SIZE parameter.
data_element 11
a unique name.
assumed. You may, or course, delete this name and use your own. The form of a full name is:
yourself.

definition.
data_element 13
data_element create array u_input_array

Allows you to create a u_input_array.
Format:

array_name = a new array
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
size = integer
variable_name = an existing variable
Example:
data_element create array u_input_array &

array_name = array__2 &
adams_id = 2 &
comments = " a new u_input array" &
size = 1 &
variable_name = variable_1
Description:

array_name A New Array Specifies the name of the new array. You may use this name
later to refer to this array.
adams_id Adams_id Specifies an integer used to identify this element in the Adams
data file.
size Integer Specifies the size of an array. In cases where Adams
calculates the SIZE differently from the SIZE that the user
supplies, Adams returns an error or warning message.
variable_name An Existing Variable Specifies an existing variable.
1. The U_INPUT_ARRAY command groups together a set of VARIABLE_NAMEs , normally to
define the inputs for a systems element, either LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION,
GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION , or TRANSFER_FUNCTION. When the you create a
U_INPUT_ARRAY, SIZE and VARIABLE_NAME are the only parameters available.
a unique name.
assumed.
yourself.
stored with the object. Comments in the data file can be associated with model.
These comments must follow the title statement and be followed by the comment 'END OF
MODEL COMMENTS'. This string must be uppercase.
When an Adams/Solver data file is written, the comments for an object are written before the
statement corresponding to the object.
data_element 15
5. For the X_STATE_ARRAYs and Y_OUTPUT_ARRAYs, the corresponding systems modeling

definition.
6. You enter variable names as input parameters for array elements (U_INPUT_ARRAY), plant
input and output definitions, and in function expressionsYou may identify a variable by typing
Since variable do not have a geometric position, Adams/View displays variable icons at or near
the model origin. If the variable icon is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You
may also find it convenient to type the name even if the variable icon is displayed.
If you created the variable by reading an Adams data set, the variable name is the letters VAR
followed by the Adams data set variable ID number. The name of Adams VARIABLE/101 is
VAR101, for example. If you created the variable during preprocessing, you gave it a name at
that time.
If a variable is owned by the default model, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is
not, you must enter its full name. To identify a variable under a different model, for instance, you
may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify variable 'fluid_volume'
from model 'hydro' by entering ".hydro.fluid_volume'". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list
the variable available by default.
You must separate multiple variable names by commas.
Tips:
1. If the variable is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
2. You need not separate multiple variable picks by commas.
data_element create array x_state_array

Allows you to create an x_state_array.
Format:

adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
size = integer
Example:
data_element create array x_state_array &

adams_id = 1 &
comments = "a new x-state array" &
size = 4
Description:

array_name A New Array Specifies the name of the new array. You may use this name
data file.
1. An X_STATE_ARRAY defines a list of state variables (X) associated with system modeling
elements such as GSE , LSE , and TFSISO. To use this array, you must reference the array name
as the state variable array in a system element definition. You can use each X_STATE_ARRAY
with only one systems element in your model. When you define an X_STATE_ARRAY , the
only other parameter is SIZE. When you do not specify SIZE , the associated systems element
automatically sets the size.
data_element 17
a unique name.
3. When you use the FILE ADAMS_DATA_SET WRITE command, Adams/View
writes an Adams data file for your model. Adams requires that each modeling element be
identified by a unique integer identifier. If you use this parameter to specify a non-zero identifier,
Adams/View will use it in the corresponding statement in the Adams data file.
yourself.
definition.
data_element 19
data_element create array y_output_array

Allows you to create a y_output_array.
Format:

adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
size = integer
Example:
data_element create array y_output_array &

adams_id = 2 &
comments = "a new y_output_array" &
size = 1
Description:

array_name A New Array Specifies the name of the new array. You may use this name later to
refer to this array.
adams_id Adams_id Specifies an integer used to identify this element in the Adams data
file.
size Integer Specifies the size of an array. In cases where Adams calculates the
SIZE differently from the SIZE that the user supplies, Adams returns
an error or warning message.
1. A Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY specifies the output array for a systems element, either a
LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION, GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION, or
TRANSFER_FUNCTION. To use these arrays, the user must reference the array name as the
output array in the system element definition in the model. When you create a
Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY, SIZE is the only other parameter available. You can use each
Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY with only a single systems element. The SIZE value, if supplied, must be
consistent with the associated systems element. When you do not specify SIZE , the associated
systems element automatically sets it.
a unique name.
assumed.
yourself.
data_element 21

the STATE_EQUATION_COUNT as defined in the matchingGENERAL_STATE_EQUATION
definition and Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY size is the OUTPUT_EQUATION_COUNT, as defined in
the same GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION definition.
data_element create curve

Allows you to create a curve.
Format:

curve_name = a new acurve
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
closed = boolean
matrix_name = an existing matrix
fit_type = fit_type
segment_count = integer
minimum_parameter = real
maximum_parameter = real
Example:
data_element create curve &

curve_name = curve__1 &
adams_id = 1 &
comments = "a new curve" &
closed = yes &
matrix_name = biele_selnod &
fit_type = curve_points &
segment_count = 10
Description:

curve_name A New Acurve Specifies the name of the new curve. You may use this
name later to refer to this curve.
Adams data file.
data_element 23

modified.
closed Boolean Specifies if the curve meets at the ends.
matrix_name An Existing Matrix Specifies the name of an existing MATRIX containing
the data for the curve.
fit_type Fit_type Specifies the way the curve is to be fit through the points
contained in the MATRIX.
segment_count Integer Specifies the number of polynomial segments Adams
uses for fitting the curve points when FIT_TYPE is set
to CURVE_POINTS.
written subroutine.
minimum_parameter Real Specifies the minimum value of the curve parameter
only for a user-written curve.
maximum_parameter Real Specifies the maximum value of the curve parameter
1. A CURVE element defines a three-dimensional parametric curve that may be referenced by
POINT_CURVE or CURVE_CURVE constraints, a geometry element called a BSPLINE, as
well as by FUNCTION expressions.
The x, y, and z coordinates of a point on a parametric curve are functions of an independent
parameter, u. As u varies from its minimum value to its maximum value, the functions x(u), y(u),
and z(u) sweep out points on the curve. A simple example of a parametric curve is the helix
defined by the following equations:
x = cos(u)
y = sin(u)
z = u
2. Adams/View allows you to create curves in three ways: by entering control points for a uniform
cubic B-spline (FIT_TYPE=CONTROL_POINTS), by entering curve points that Adams will fit
a curve to (FIT_TYPE=CURVE_POINTS), or by writing a CURSUB evaluation subroutine to
compute the curve coordinates and derivatives.
3. A uniform B-spline is a piecewise cubic polynomial spline used in many CAD (computer-aided-
design) applications. A uniform B-spline is defined by control points which form a polygon in
space. The curve starts at the first control point and ends at the last. In between, it is attracted to,
but does not necessarily hit the intermediate control points. Adams parameterizes a B-spline
starting at -1 and ending at +1.
Generally, you will not create control points directly, but will construct the curve in another
application, such as a CAD program, and then transfer the control points to Adams.
4. A more direct way to define the curve is to supply curve points.

Adams will compute a uniform B-spline that will fit the curve points.
Again, Adams parameterizes the curve from -1 to +1. If you specify the number of spline
segments (SEGMENT_COUNT) as three less than the number of curve points, the computed
curve will exactly match the curve points. If you specify fewer segments, Adams will use a least-
squares fit to compute the closest fit to the points. In general, fewer segments give a smoother
curve, but do not come as close to the data points.
5. In order to use a different type of curve, or to model an analytically-defined curve such as the
helix, you may write a CURSUB evaluation subroutine. When providing a CURSUB, you may
also specify MINPAR and MAXPAR to define the limits of the curve. These default to -1 and
+1, respectively.
A curve can be open or closed. A CLOSED curve meets at the ends, connecting the curve at
minimum and maximum parameter values. Note for a closed curve defined by curve points, you
can specify a maximum of 5 segments less that the number of curve points. Note that because
three segments less than the number of curve points are required for an exact fit, a closed curve
will not exactly fit the curve points.
Adams will automatically move a POINT_CURVE or CURVE_CURVE contact point across the
closure of a CLOSED curve, if needed. For instance, you may model a cam profile as a CLOSED
curve, and Adams will allow the follower to move across the closure as the cam rotates.
Adams will stop the simulation if a POINT_CURVE or CURVE_CURVE contact point moves
off the end of curve. You should ensure that the curve defined includes the expected range of
contact.
assumed.
data_element 25
yourself.
9. If you set the parameter CLOSED to YES and you use the CURVE_POINTS FIT_TYPE,
AdamsAdams will attempt to compute a curve that meets at the ends and has continuous first and
second derivatives across the closure. If you set CLOSED to YES and use the
CONTROL_POINTS FIT_TYPE or a user-defined FUNCTION is specified, you must ensure
that the defined curve meets at the ends and has continuous first and second derivatives across the
closure. During a simulation, Adams will move a POINT_CURVE or CURVE_CURVE contact
point across the closure, if necessary. Any discontinuity could cause integration failure.
By setting CLOSED to NO, you specify that the curve does not meet at the ends. Adams will not
allow a POINT_CURVE or CURVE_CURVE contact point to move beyond the end of the curve.
10. If CONTROL_POINTS is specified, the matrix contains the x, y, and z coordinates of control
points for a uniform B-spline. (Adams uses a uniform knot vector with quadruple multiplicity at
both ends, ensuring that the curve will pass through starting and ending points.)
If CURVE_POINTS is specified, the matrix contains the x, y, and z coordinates of curve points
which the curve will pass through or near.
The matrix should have a row for each point and three columns containing the x, y, and z,
coordinates of the points. You must supply at least four control points or curve points.
You may identify a matrix by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
Since a matrix does not have a geometric position, Adams/View displays matrix icons at or near
the model origin. If the convenient to type the name even if the matrix icon is displayed.
If you created the matrix by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the matrix name is the
letters MAT followed by the Adams data set matrix ID number. The name of Adams
MATRIX/101 is MAT101, for example. If you created the matrix during preprocessing, you gave
it a name at that time.
If a matrix is owned by the default model, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is
not, you must enter its full name.
To identify a matrix under a different model, for instance, you may need to enter the model name
as well. For example, you may specify matrix 'control_points' from model 'road_surface' by
entering ".road_surface.control_points'". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the matrix
available by default.
You must separate multiple matrix names by commas.
11. If FIT_TYPE=CONTROL_POINTS then the MATRIX contains control points to will not
necessarily pass through the points). Specifically, the matrix contains the x, y, and z coordinates
of control points for a uniform B-spline. (Adams uses a uniform knot vector with quadruple
multiplicity at both ends, ensuring that the curve will pass through starting and ending points.)
If FIT_TYPE=CURVE_POINTS then the MATRIX contains data points on the curve and the
curve will be fit directly through the points (depending on the value of the SEGMENT_COUNT
parameter). Specifically, the matrix contains the x, y, and z coordinates of curve points which the
curve will pass through or near. The matrix should have a row for each point and three columns
containing the x, y, and z, coordinates of the points. You must supply at least four control points
or curve points.
12. Adams will default the segment_count to three segments less than the number of curve points,
which gives an exact fit to the curve points. Specifying fewer segments will result in a smoother
curve, but the curve will not pass exactly through the curve points.
More specifically, if you specify the SEGMENT_COUNT such that the spline segments is three
less than the number of curve points, the computed curve will exactly match the curve points. If
you specify fewer segments, Adams will use a least-squares fit to compute the closest fit to the
points. In general, fewer segments give a smoother curve, but do not come as close to the data
points.
13. Adams uses the minimum_parameter value when drawing a curve graphic. For curves defined by
control points or curve points, the minimum parameter value is always -1.0.
Adams uses the maximum_parameter value when drawing a curve graphic. For curves defined
by control points or curve points, the maximum parameter value is always 1.0.
Cautions:
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two curves with the same full name, so you must provide
a unique name.
Tips:
1. If the matrix is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
2. You need not separate multiple matrix picks by commas.
data_element 27
data_element create matrix file

Allows you to direct Adams to read a MATRIX definition from a file.
The FILE keyword allows you to read large matrices into Adams using an external file. There is no limit
on the size of an array read from a file.
The first record in the file contains an 80 character header of which the first seven or eight characters are
meaningful. If the first record begins with the characters ADAMSMAT, then the file is assumedto be in
a format used by Adams. If the first record begins with the characters MATRIXx, then the file is assumed
to be in the FSAVE format of the MATRIXx software package. If the first record begins with the
characters MATSAVE, then the file is assumed to be in the MATSAVE format of the MATRIXx software
package.
No other kinds of files are currently supported. However, the ADAMSMAT option is fairly general since
the format for reading in the data is specified within the file. See the section in the Adams Reference
Manual on the MATRIX statement for a description of the file format.
Format:

matrix_name= new matrix
adams_id= integer
comments= string
file_name= string
name_of_matrix_in_file= string
units= string
Example:
data_element create matrix file &

matrix_name= matrix_read_from_file &
adams_id= 12 &
comments= ”example of a matrix read from a file” &
file_name= /home/staff/demo/prob.dat &
name_of_matrix_in_file= “trf” &
units= string
In the above command, the prob.dat is in the directory, /home/staff/demo, and contains the following
data:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
ADAMSMAT Floating platform example
3
TRF VALK STL
TRF FULL RORDER 4 2 8 ( 8F8.5 )
1.36400 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 -3.54600 4.00800 0.00000 0.79900
VALK FULL CORDER 3 3 9 ( 3F6.3 )
1.970 0.000-3.440
0.000 4.510 6.020
-3.440 6.020 2.110
STL SPARSE 6 1 4 ( 2( 2I5, E14.6 ) )
1 1 0.169805E+02 2 1 -0.230745E+02
4 1 0.016390E+00 5 1 0.011271E+00
The second and third records are read with format I5 and 4(A8,10X), respectively. Then, the first record
of each of the blocks corresponding to the three matrices TRF, VALK, and STL is read with the format
3A8, 3I5, A41. Finally, as can be seen in the copy of the file shown above between the two strings of 80
characters that mark the columns (which, of course, are not part of the file), the single record of data for
the matrix TRF is read with the format 8F8.5; the three records for VALK are read with 3F6.3; and the
two records for STL with 2(2I5,E14.6).
Description:

matrix_name New matrix Specifies the name of the new matrix.
Adams data file.
modified.
file_name String Specifies the name of a file that contains the values of the
matrix.
name_of_matrix_in_file String Specifies the name of a MATRIX to be read from the file
identified by the FILE_NAME parameter.
units String Allows you to specify the type of units to be used for this
object.
1. You may use this name later to refer to this matrix. Adams/View will not allow you to have two
matrices with the same full name, so you must provide a unique name.
data_element 29
name. The default name that AdamsAdams/View provides will specify the parentage that it has
assumed.
yourself.
3. The FILE argument may be used to read large matrices into Adams. There is no limit on the size
of an array read from a file.
The proper extension is the default but can be overridden by simply supplying a different
extension.
The first record in the file contains an 80 character header of which the first seven or eight
characters are meaningful. If the first record begins with the characters ADAMSMAT, then the
file is assumed to be in a format used by Adams. If the first record begins with the characters
MATRIXx, then the file is assumed to be in the FSAVE format of the MATRIXx software
package. If the first record begins with the characters MATSAVE, then the file is assumed to be
in the MATSAVE format of the MATRIXx software package.
Note that the three specifications for the format of the data file are case sensitive. Capital letters
and a lower case x must be used to make a selection.
No other kinds of files are currently supported. However, the ADAMSMAT option is fairly
general since the format for reading in the data is specified within the file. See the section in the
Adams Reference Manual on the MATRIX statement for a description of the file format.
4. All three kinds of files, ADAMSMAT, MATRIXx, and MATSAVE, can contain data for more
than one matrix. The NAME_OF_MATRIX_IN_FILE parameter is used to select a particular
matrix from a file even if the file contains only one MATRIX. You must create additional
MATRIX elements in your Adams/View model if multiple matrices are to be read from the same
file.
data_element 31
data_element create matrix full

Allows you to create a FULL MATRIX.
The MATRIX to be defined is FULL therefore, the VALUES parameter specifies all of the M times N
entries in the matrix. The sequence of the values depends on the value of the INPUT_ORDER parameter.
If BY_ROW is specified, you enter the values row-by-row. If BY_COLUMN is specified, you enter the
values column-by-column.
Format:

matrix_name= new matrix
adams_id= integer
comments= string
row_count= integer
column_count= integer
values= real
result_set_component_names= existing component
input_order= matrix_input_order
units= string
Example:
If you want to enter the following matrix of values in full format:
data_element create matrix full &

matrix_name = matrix_1 &
comments = "matrix example in full format" &
row_count = 4 &
column_count = 2 &
values = 1.364,0.000,0.000,0.000,-3.546,4.008,0.000,0.7999 &
input_order = by_column
Description:

matrix_name Matrix name Specifies the name of the new matrix. You
may use this name later to refer to this matrix.
adams_id Integer Specifies an integer used to identify this
comments String Specifies comments for the object being
created or modified.
row_count Integer Specifies the number of rows (M) in the
matrix.Used in the definition of a full matrix.
column_count Integer Specifies the number of columns (N) in the
matrix used in the definition of a full matrix.
values Real Specifies the real number values that you enter
to populate a FULL MATRIX.
result_set_component_names Existing component You can only use a result set component as
matrix values using full format and entering all
the values stored in the result set component.
input_order By_column,by_row Specifies the order the values that you input
will appear in for a FULL MATRIX format (all
of the M by N entries will be specific numeric
values
units String Allows you to specify the type of units to be
used for this object.
1. A data element matrix is a general M x N array that can be a rectangular or square two-
dimensional matrix or a row or column matrix. You can enter the data in:
Full format - You list all the M x N values or specify the results of a simulation (result set
components).
Sparse format - You list the row position, column position, and value for only nonzero entry
values.
External file - Enter a file containing a matrix.
If one-third or more of the entries in a matrix are nonzero, we recommend that you use full format
since it takes less time to create. If the matrix is mostly empty and entering each nonzero entry's
row position, column position, and value takes less time than entering all of the values, you should
use the sparse format.
2. Adams/View will not allow you to have two matrices with the same full name, so you must
data_element 33
ride the default parent. In most cases, when creating an entity, Adams/View will provide a
assumed.
3. The MATRIX to be defined is FULL therefore, the VALUES parameter specifies all of the M
times N entries in the matrix. The sequence of the values depends on the value of the
INPUT_ORDER parameter. If BY_ROW is specified, you enter the values row-by-row.
If BY_COLUMN is specified, you enter the values column-by-column.
4. A result set is a basic set of state variable data that Adams/Solver calculates during a simulation.
Adams/Solver outputs the data at each simulation output step. A component of a result set is a
time series of a particular quantity (for example, the x displacement of a part or the y torque in a
joint).
5. The input_order parameter can take two values:
a. BY_ROW indicates the values are listed by row in the VALUES parameter (i.e. starting with
the first row and proceeding to the second, and so on until the entire matrix is completely
defined).
b. BY_COLUMN indicates the values are listed by column (i.e. starting with the first column
and proceeding to the second, and so on).
Default value is BY_COLUMN
3. Since this object can be used in a variety of contexts, Adams/View can not determine what type
of units it should have. By telling Adams/View what the unit type for this object is Adams/View
can perform the proper conversions on the values you specify.
data_element create matrix sparse

Allows you to create a SPARSE MATRIX.
The MATRIX to be defined is SPARSE therefore, the VALUES parameter specifies only the entries that
may be non zero. That is, all entries in the M by N array not assigned values by the ROW_INDEX,
COLUMN_INDEX, and VALUES parameters are assumed to be equal to zero in ADAMS. Therefore,
the kth entry in the VALUES parameter is assigned to the row identified by the kth entry in
ROW_INDEX and to the column identified by the kth entry in COLUMN_INDEX for k=1,2,...,n.
Format:

matrix_name= New Sparse matrix
adams_id= integer
comments= String
row_index= integer
column_index= integer
values= real
units= String
Example:
data_element create matrix sparse &

matrix_name = MATRIX__1 &
row_index = 2,3 &
column_index = 1,1 &
values = 3.456,4.567
This will create a matrix will looks like the following:

0.000, 0.000 ,0.000
3.456, 0.000, 0.000
4.567, 0.000, 0.000
data_element 35
Description:

matrix_name Matrix_name Specifies the name of the new matrix.
adams_id Integer Specifies an integer used to identify this element in the ADAMS data
file.
Comments String Specifies comments for the object being created or modified.
row_index Integer Specifies the row position of each of the N entries in the VALUES
parameter for a SPARSE MATRIX.
column_inde Integer Specifies the column position of each of the M entries in the VALUES
x parameter for a SPARSE MATRIX.
Values Real Specifies the real number values that you enter to populate a SPARSE
MATRIX.
units String Allows you to specify the type of units to be used for this object.
1. ADAMS/View will not allow you to have two matrices with the same full name, so you must
default parent will be assigned by ADAMS/View. If you type in the full name, then you may over
ride the default parent. In most cases, when creating an entity, ADAMS/View will provide a
default name. The default name that ADAMS/View provides will specify the parentage that it
has assumed. You may, or course, delete this name and use your own. The form of a full name is:
2. When an ADAMS/Solver data file (.adm) is read into ADAMS/View, all comments associated
with a statement (from the end of the previous statement through the end of the current statement)
are stored with the object. Comments in the data file can be associated with model. These
comments must follow the title statement and be followed by the comment 'END OF MODEL
COMMENTS'. This string must be uppercase.
When an ADAMS/Solver data file is written, the comments for an object are written before the
3. For each non-zero value in the SPARSE MATRIX each entry for this parameter defines to the
position in the matrix of the corresponding entry in the VALUES parameter. For example, the
third value entered for the ROW_INDEX parameter defines what matrix row the third value
entered for the VALUES parameter is located on.
forth value entered for the COLUMN_INDEX parameter defines what matrix column the forth
value entered for the VALUES parameter is located on.
5. The MATRIX to be defined is SPARSE therefore, the VALUES parameter specifies only the
entries that may be non zero. That is, all entries in the M by N array not assigned values by the
ROW_INDEX, COLUMN_INDEX, and VALUES parameters are assumed to be equal to zero in
ADAMS. Therefore, the kth entry in the VALUES parameter is assigned to the row identified by
the kth entry in ROW_INDEX and to the column identified by the kth entry in
COLUMN_INDEX for k=1,2,...,n.
data_element 37
data_element create plant input

Allows you to create a PLANT INPUT element.
Format:

plant_input_name = a new pinput
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
Example:
data_element create plant input &

plant_input_name = pinput__1 &
adams_id = 1 &
comments = " a new plant input" &
Description:
:

plant_input_name A New Pinput Specifies the name of the new plant_input. You may use
this name later to refer to this plant_input.
Adams data file.
modified.
variable_name An Existing Variable Specifies an existing variable.
1. A PLANT INPUT element, along with a PLANT OUTPUT element, is required by the Adams
LINEAR/STATEMAT analysis.
\
Note: This analysis can be requested in Adams/View through the use of the
ADAMS_COMMAND_FILE parameter with the analysis SUBMIT command. Use the
"ACF" button on the text editor and select the GENERATE_STATE_MATRIX option.
You will finally use a panel to select the PLANT INPUTs, PLANT OUTPUTs, and the
format that the state matrices should be generated in
A PLANT INPUT defines a set of inputs to the mechanical system and PLANT OUTPUT defines
the set of measured outputs from the system. The LINEAR/STATEMAT analysis linearizes the
system equations to the following form:
{x}= [A] {x} + [B] {u}
{y}= [C] {x} + [D] {u}
where x is the linearized system state, u is the system inputs defined by the PLANT INPUT
element, and y is the system outputs defined by the PLANT OUTPUT element. This form is
commonly referred to as the state space form of the system equations in control theory. Adams
outputs the A, B, C, and D matrices for use in a control-system design or any other linear system
analysis software.
When you run an analysis type other than LINEAR/STATEMAT , the PLANT INPUT element
acts only as a pointer to the list of the specified VARIABLEs.
2. Both FUNCTION expressions and user-written subroutines can access the PLANT INPUT
information. FUNCTION expressions access the values by using the internal Adams function
PINVAL(i1 ,i2) where i1 specifies the PLANT INPUT name , and i2 specifies the i2-th
VARIABLE in the PLANT INPUT statement list. Note that i2 is not the name of the
VARIABLE.
User-written subroutines call the subroutine SYSFNC to access single elements of the PLANT
INPUT list and call the subroutine SYSARY to access all values for a PLANT INPUT.
data_element 39
yourself.
input and output definitions, and in function expressions
You may identify a variable by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
that time.
To identify a variable under a different model, for instance, you may need to enter the model name
as well. For example, you may specify variable 'fluid_volume' from model 'hydro' by entering
".hydro.fluid_volume'". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the variable available by default.
Cautions:
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two plant_inputs with the same full name, so you must
Tips:
associated with it.
data_element 41
data_element create plant output

Allows you to create a PLANT OUTPUT element.
Format:

plant_output_name = a new poutput
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
Example:
data_element create plant output &

plant_output_name = poutput__1 &
adams_id = 1 &
comments = "a new plant output element" &
Description:
:

plant_output_name A New Poutput Specifies the name of the new plant_output. You may use
this name later to refer to this plant_output.
Adams data file.
variable_name An Existing Specifies an existing variable.
Variable
1. A PLANT OUTPUT element, along with a PLANT INPUT element, is required by the Adams
PLANT OUTPUT defines the set of measured outputs from the mechanical system and PLANT
INPUT defines a set of inputs to the mechanical system. The LINEAR command linearizes the
{x}= [A] {x} + [B] {u}
{y}= [C] {x} + [D] {u}
where x is the linearized system state (X_STATE_ARRAY), u is the system inputs defined by the
PLANT INPUT element (U_INPUT_ARRAY), and y is the system outputs defined by the
PLANT OUTPUT element (Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY). This form is commonly referred to as the
state space form of the system equations in control theory. Adams outputs the A, B, C, and D
matrices (i.e. A_STATE_MATRIX, B_INPUT_MATRIX, C_OUTPUT_MATRIX, and
D_FEEDFORWARD_MATRIX) for use in a control-system design or any other linear system
analysis software.
When the user runs an analysis type other than LINEAR , the PLANT OUTPUT element acts
only as a pointer to the list of VARIABLE specified.
2. Both FUNCTION expressions and user-written subroutines can access the PLANT OUTPUT
element. FUNCTION expressions access the values by using the internal Adams function
POUVAL(i1 ,i2) where i1 specifies the PLANT OUTPUT name , and i2 specifies the i2-th
VARIABLE entry in the PLANT INPUT parameter list. Note that i2 is not the name of the
VARIABLE.
User-written subroutines access single elements of the PLANT OUTPUT list and call the
subroutine SYSFNC to access all values for a PLANT OUTPUT by calling the subroutine
SYSARY.
data_element 43
assumed.
yourself.
specify it
if, for some reason, you wish to control the Adams file output.
Since variable do not have a geometric osition, Adams/View displays variable icons at or near the
model origin. If the variable icon is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may
also find it convenient to type the name even if the variable icon is displayed.
that time.
If a variable is owned by the default model, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it
is not, you must enter its full name.
Cautions:
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two plant_outputs with the same full name, so you must
Tips:
associated with it.
data_element 45
data_element create plant state

Allows you to create a PLANT STATE element.
Format:

plant_state_name = a new plant state
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
Example:
data_element create plant state &

plant_state_name = pstate__1 &
adams_id = 1 &
comments = "a new plant state element " &
Description:

plant_state_name A New Plant State Specifies the name of the new plant_state. You may use this
name later to refer to this plant_state.
data file.
Variable
yourself.
input and output definitions, and in function expressions You may identify a variable by typing
that time.
data_element 47
Cautions:
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two plant_states with the same full name, so you must
Tips:
associated with it.
data_element create spline

Allows for creation of the spline object.
Format:

spline_name = a new spline
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
x_result_set_component_name = an existing component
x = real
y_result_set_component_name = an existing component
y= real
z_result_set_component_name = an existing component
z = real
linear_extrapolate = boolean
units = string
file_name = string
Example:
data_element create spline &

spline_name = spline__1 &
adams_id = 2 &
comments = "a new spline" &
linear_extrapolate = yes &
units = mm &
file_name = "c:\spline.txt"
Description:

spline_name A New Spline Specifies the name of the new spline. You may
use this name later to refer to this spline.
data_element 49

or modified.
x_result_set_component_name An Existing Specifies the result set component containing
Component values for the spline X (independent) variable.
x Real
y_result_set_component_name An Existing Specifies the result set component containing
Component values for the spline Y (dependent) variable.
y Real
z_result_set_component_name An Existing Specifies the result set component containing
Component values for the spline Z (independent) variable.
z Real
linear_extrapolate Boolean
units String Allows you to specify the type of units to be used
for this object.
file_name String
1. A spline interpolates between discrete data for a user-provided function or a utility subroutine
called by a user-written subroutine.
You use the spline to provide one or two independent variables and one dependent variable for
each data point you want to enter. Adams uses curve fitting techniques to interpolate between data
points to create a continuous function. If the spline data has one independent variable, Adams uses
a cubic polynomial to interpolate between points.
If the spline data has two independent variables, Adams first uses a cubic interpolation method to
interpolate between points of the first independent variable and then uses a linear method to
interpolate between curves of the second independent variable.
2. To use the discrete data input with a spline, you must write either a function expression that
includes one of the two Adams spline functions (AKISPL function and CUBSPL function) or a
user-written subroutine that calls one of the two spline utility subroutines (AKISPL subroutine
and CUBSPL subroutine).
3. These spline functions and utility subroutines use two different interpolation methods. The
AKISPL function and the AKISPL subroutine use the Akima method of interpolation. The Akima
method is a local cubic curve fitting technique. The CUBSPL function and the CUBSPL
subroutine use the traditional cubic method of interpolation. The traditional cubic method is a
global cubic curve fitting technique.
Both the Akima method and the traditional cubic method use cubic polynomials to interpolate
values that fall between two adjacent points on a curve. Both provide closer approximations than
other curve fitting techniques (for example, Lagrange polynomials, difference tables, and Fourier
series). For data with two independent variables, Adams uses a linear interpolation technique to
interpolate values that fall between curves.
4. If you have created a spline in Adams/View, you may wish to plot the data points or the
interpolated curve to verify that you entered the data correctly and that the spline interpolates
smoothly. To do this, first use the 'NUMERIC_RESULTS CREATE SPLINE' command to create
a result set from the spline. This result set will contain components composed of the spline data
points. You can then plot the result set (i.e. the spline data points) with the XY_PLOTS
command. You may also use the 'NUMERIC_RESULTS CREATE INTERPOLATION'
command to interpolate more points from the data-point result set, and then plot those.The
Adams/View CUBIC and AKIMA interpolation options use the same methods as the Adams
CUBSPL and AKISPL functions, respectively.
assumed.
yourself.
data_element 51
8. You must supply a Y value corresponding to each combination of X and Z values. First list the
component with values for each X value at the first Z value, then the component with values for
each X value at the second Z value, and so on.
9. Since this object can be used in a variety ov contexts, AdamsAdams/View can not determine what
type of units it should have. By telling Adams/View what the unit type for this object is
Adams/View can preform the proper conversions on the values you specify.
Cautions:
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two splines with the same full name, so you must provide
a unique name.
data_element create string

Allows you to create a character string.
Format:

string_name = a new astring
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
string = string
Example:
data_element create string &

string_name = string__1 &
adams_id = 1 &
comments = " a new string" &
string = "sample string"
Description:

string_name A New Astring Specifies the name of the new string. You may use this name later to
refer to this string.
adams_id Adams_id Specifies an integer used to identify this element in the Adams data
file.
string String A STRING element defines a character string that may be referred to
later in the execution of Adams.
1. A STRING element defines a character string that may be referred to later in the execution of
Adams. The character string cannot be broken and continued on the following line; however, the
STRING element can be longer than a single line. A GTSTRG subroutine can be used to retrieve
this character string in a user-written subroutine.
data_element 53
assumed.
yourself.
5. The character string cannot be broken and continued on the following line; however, the STRING
element can be longer than a single line. An Adams interactive STRING command can be used
to alter or review this character string. A GTSTRG subroutine can be used to retrieve this
character string in a user-written subroutine.
Cautions:
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two strings with the same full name, so you must provide
a unique name.
data_element create variable

Allows you to create a variable.
Format:

variable_name = a new solvar
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
initial_condition = real
function = function
routine = string
Example:
data_element create variable &

variable_name = variable__10 &
adams_id = 5 &
initial_condition = 0.121 &
function = cos( 10 )
Description:

variable_name A New Solvar Specifies the name of the new variable. You may use this name
later to refer to this variable.
data file.
initial_condition Real Specifies the initial value of the user_defined differential
variable and, optionally, an approximate value of the initial time
derivative.
function Function Specifies the function expression definition that is used to
compute the value of this variable.
data_element 55

user_function Real Specifies up to 30 values for Adams to pass to a user-written
subroutine.
routine String
1. You create VARIABLEs to define scalar algebraic equations for independent use, or as part of
the PLANT INPUT, PLANT OUTPUT, or ARRAY elements. The computed value of the
VARIABLE may depend on almost any Adams system variable. Note that you cannot access
reaction forces from user defined, POINT_CURVE, and CURVE_CURVE constraints (Adams
UCONs, PTCV, CVCV statements). You can define the computed value of a VARIABLE by
either writing a FUNCTION expression in the model or by calling a VARSUB user-written
subroutine. The Adams Reference Manual chapter on "Function Expressions," discusses the
attributes of FUNCTION expressions, and the chapter on "Subroutines," discusses user-written
subroutines and accessible utility subroutines.
2. FUNCTION expressions and user-written subroutines can access the computed value of the
VARIABLE with the Adams/View function VARVAL(variable_name) to represent the value,
where variable_name specifies the name you gave the VARIABLE when it was created. User-
written subroutines access single VARIABLE statement values by calling the subroutine
SYSFNC.
Caution should be used when defining VARIABLEs that are dependent on other VARIABLEs or
on Adams/View elements that contains functions. If a defined system of equations does not have
a stable solution, convergence may fail for the entire Adams model. The following example refers
to this type of VARIABLE statement:
VARIABLE/1, FUNCTION= VARVAL(1)+1
When looked at as an algebraic equation, it looks like the following:
V=V+1.
However, when Adams tries to solve this equation using the Newton-Raphson iteration, the
solution diverges and a message appears on the screen indicating that the solution has failed to
converge.
3. Adams/View will not allow you to have two variables with the same full name, so you must
assumed.
yourself.
5. When an Adams/Solver data file (.adm) is read into AdamsAdams/View, all comments
associated with a statement (from the end of the previous statement through the end of the current
statement) are stored with the object. Comments in the data file can be associated with model.
6. The first value is the value of the user- defined variable at the start of the simulation. If you have
entered an implicit equation, the second value may also need to be specified, which is an
approximate value of the time derivative of the user-defined variable at the start of the simulation.
Adams may adjust the value of the time derivative when it performs an initial conditions analysis.
Entering an initial value for the time derivative may help Adams converge to an initial
conditions solution. If you enter an explicit equation, you do not need to supply the second value
since Adams can compute the initial time derivative directly from the equation.
7. To enter a function expression you enter a series of quoted strings.
The easiest way to enter a function expression in Adams/View is to use the text editor in
combination with the function builder. To invoke the text editor for entering a function
expression, highlight the function field and then either pick the "EDIT" button at the top of the
panel or type a ^t (control-t). The Adams/View "function builder" is discussed below.
data_element 57
The syntactical correctness of a function expression can be investigated by using the "VERIFY"
button at the upper right of the text editor. If there is a syntax error, a message is printed and the
cursor is put near the problem. Proper unit consistency is not checked during function expression
verification.
Tips:
data_element delete
data_element delete
Allows you to delete an existing DATA_ELEMENT.
Format:
data_element delete
data_element_name = an existing data_element
Example:
data_element delete &

data_element_name = string__1
Description:

1. You must enter the name of the DATA_ELEMENT you wish to delete by either picking it from
the screen or specifying the full name.
2. Since data_element do not have a geometric position, Adams/View displays data_element icons
at or near the model origin. If the data_element icon is not visible on the screen, you must type
the name. You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the data_element icon is
displayed.
Tips:
2. If the data_element is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
3. You need not separate multiple data_element picks by commas.
data_element 59
data_element modify array general_array

Allows you to modify a general_array.
Modifies a one-dimensional array of real numbers that can be accessed in user-written subroutines. This
array is identical in definition to the IC_ARRAY. The GENERAL_ARRAY has been provided to
maintain consistency with the ARRAY available in Adams version 5.2.1.
Format:

new_array_name = new array_name
adams_id = integer
comments = string
size = integer
numbers = real
Example:
data_element modify array general_array &

new_array_name = .model.real_array_1 &
adams_id = 1 &
size = 3 &
numbers = 2.1,3.4,5
Description:

array_name, Array name Specifies the name of the array to be modified.
new_array_name Array name Specifies the new name of the array. You may use this name later
data file.

numbers Real Allows you to enter a one dimensional array of real numbers
when using the IC_ARRAY of the GENERAL_ARRAY. The
number of entries should match the value of the SIZE parameter.
a unique name.
assumed.
yourself.
data_element 61
definition.
data_element modify array ic_array

Allows you to modify an ic_array.
This element creates a one-dimensional array of real numbers that can be accessed in user-written
subroutines. You can use an IC_ARRAY to designate define initial conditions array for an
LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION or GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION. In that case, you should ensure
that the value of the SIZE parameters the same as the X_STATE_ARRAY (state variable) of the
associated LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION or GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION.
Format:

array_name= array_name
new_array_name = new array_name
adams_id= integer
comments= string
size= integer
numbers= real
Example:
data_element modify array ic_array &

new_array_name = .model.real_array_1 &
adams_id = 1 &
size = 3 &
numbers = 2.1,3.4,5.9
Description:

array_name Array name Specifies the name of the array that has to be modified.
new_array_name New Array name Specify the new name for the array. You may use this name later
ADAMS data file.
data_element 63

numbers Real Allows you to enter a one dimensional array of real numbers
when using the IC_ARRAY of the GENERAL_ARRAY. The
number of entries should match the value of the SIZE
parameter.
a unique name.
assumed.
ADAMS data file for your model. ADAMS requires that each modeling element be identified by
a unique integer identifier. If you use this parameter to specify a non-zero identifier, Adams/View
will use it in the corresponding statement in the ADAMS data file.
an ADAMS file, Adams/View will replace the zero with a unique, internally-generated identifier.
yourself.
specify it if, for some reason, you wish to control the ADAMS file output.
3. In cases where ADAMS calculates the SIZE differently from the SIZE that the user supplies,
ADAMS returns an error or warning message.

For the IC_ARRAY, the SIZE parameter is optional and ADAMS determines the actual size of
the array during parsing, as it counts the NUMBERS values. However, if you provide a value for
SIZE , ADAMS checks the count for consistency.
definition.
data_element 65
data_element modify array u_input_array

Allows you to modify an existing u_input_array.
Format:

array_name = an existing array
new_array_name = a new array
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
size = integer
Example:
data_element modify array u_input_array &

new_array_name = array__2 &
adams_id = 2 &
comments = " a modified u_input array" &
size = 1 &
Description:

array_name An Existing Array Specifies the name of an existing array.
new_array_name A New Array Specifies the name of the new array. You may use this
name later to refer to this array.
Adams data file.
modified.

calculates the SIZE differently from the SIZE that the
user supplies, Adams returns an error or warning
message.
Variable
1. The U_INPUT_ARRAY command groups together a set of VARIABLE_NAMEs , normally to
define the inputs for a systems element, either LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION,
GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION , or TRANSFER_FUNCTION. When the you create a
U_INPUT_ARRAY, SIZE and VARIABLE_NAME are the only parameters available.
a unique name.
assumed.
yourself.
data_element 67
command SIZE parameter value (if given). For the IC_ARRAY, the SIZE parameter is optional
and Adams determines the actual size of the array during parsing, as it counts the NUMBERS
values. However, if you provide a value for SIZE , Adams checks the count for consistency.
definition.
that time.
Tips:
associated with it.
data_element 69
data_element modify array x_state_array

Allows you to modify an existing x_state_array.
Format:

new_array_name = an existing array
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
size = integer
Example:
data_element modify array x_state_array &

adams_id = 1 &
comments = "modified x-state array" &
size = 4
Description:
::

array_name An Existing Array Specifies the name of an existing array
new_array_name A New Array Specifies the name of the new array. You may use this name
data file.
size Integer Specifies the size of an array. In cases where Adams calculates
the SIZE differently from the SIZE that the user supplies,
Adams returns an error or warning message.
1. An X_STATE_ARRAY defines a list of state variables (X) associated with system modeling
elements such as GSE , LSE , and TFSISO. To use this array, you must reference the array name
as the state variable array in a system element definition. You can use each X_STATE_ARRAY
with only one systems element in your model. When you define an X_STATE_ARRAY , the
only other parameter is SIZE. When you do not specify SIZE , the associated systems element
automatically sets the size.
a unique name.
assumed.
yourself.
data_element 71
the STATE_EQUATION_COUNT as defined in the matching ENERAL_STATE_EQUATION
definition and Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY size is the OUTPUT_EQUATION_COUNT, as defined in
the same GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION definition.
data_element modify array y_output_array

Allows you to modify an existing y_output_array.
Format:

array_name = an existing array
new_array_name = a new array
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
size = integer
Example:
data_element modify array y_output_array &

new_array_name = array__2 &
adams_id = 2 &
comments = "a modified y_output_array" &
size = 2
Description:

array_name An Existing Array Specifies the name of an existing array.
new_array_name A New Array Specifies the name of the new array. You may use this name
data file.
data_element 73
1. A Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY specifies the output array for a systems element, either a
LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION, GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION, or
TRANSFER_FUNCTION. To use these arrays, the user must reference the array name as the
output array in the system element definition in the model. When you create a
Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY, SIZE is the only other parameter available. You can use each
Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY with only a single systems element. The SIZE value, if supplied, must be
consistent with the associated systems element. When you do not specify SIZE , the associated
systems element automatically sets it.
a unique name.
assumed.
yourself.
definition.
data_element 75
data_element modify curve

Allows you to modify an existing curve.
Format:

curve_name = an existing curve
new_curve_name = a new acurve
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
closed = boolean
matrix_name = an existing matrix
fit_type = fit_type
minimum_parameter = real
maximum_parameter = real
Example:
data_element modify curve &

curve_name = curve__1 &
new_curve_name = curve__2 &
adams_id = 1 &
comments = "a modified curve" &
closed = yes &
matrix_name = biele_selnod &
fit_type = curve_points &
segment_count = 10
Description:

curve_name An Existing Curve Specifies an existing curve object
new_curve_name A New Acurve Specifies the name of the new curve. You may use this
name later to refer to this curve.
Adams data file.
modified.
closed Boolean Specifies if the curve meets at the ends.
matrix_name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing MATRIX containing
Matrix the data for the curve.
fit_type Fit_type Specifies the way the curve is to be fit through the points
contained in the MATRIX.
segment_count Integer Specifies the number of polynomial segments Adams
uses for fitting the curve points when FIT_TYPE is set to
CURVE_POINTS.
written subroutine.
minimum_parameter Real Specifies the minimum value of the curve parameter
maximum_parameter Real Specifies the maximum value of the curve parameter
1. A CURVE element defines a three-dimensional parametric curve that may be referenced by
x = cos(u)
y = sin(u)
z = u
2. Adams/View allows you to create curves in three ways: by entering control points for a uniform
data_element 77
3. A uniform B-spline is a piecewise cubic polynomial spline used in many CAD (computer-aided-
4. A more direct way to define the curve is to supply curve points.
5. In order to use a different type of curve, or to model an analytically-defined curve such as the
+1, respectively.
contact.
assumed.
yourself.
8. When an Adams/Solver data file (.adm) is read into Adams/View,all comments associated with a
statement (from the end of the previous statement through the end of the current statement) are
9. If you set the parameter CLOSED to YES and you use the CURVE_POINTS FIT_TYPE, Adams
will attempt to compute a curve that meets at the ends and has continuous first and second
derivatives across the closure. If you set CLOSED to YES and use the CONTROL_POINTS
FIT_TYPE or a user-defined FUNCTION is specified, you must ensure that the defined curve
meets at the ends and has continuous first and second derivatives across the closure. During a
simulation, Adams will move a POINT_CURVE or CURVE_CURVE contact point across the
closure, if necessary. Any discontinuity could cause integration failure.
By setting CLOSED to NO, you specify that the curve does not meet at the ends. Adams will not
allow a POINT_CURVE or CURVE_CURVE contact point to move beyond the end of the curve.
10. If CONTROL_POINTS is specified, the matrix contains the x, y, and z coordinates of control
points for a uniform B-spline. (Adams uses a uniform knot vector with quadruple multiplicity at
both ends, ensuring that the curve will pass through starting and ending points.)
If CURVE_POINTS is specified, the matrix contains the x, y, and z coordinates of curve points
which the curve will pass through or near.
The matrix should have a row for each point and three columns containing the x, y, and z,
coordinates of the points. You must supply at least four control points or curve points.
You may identify a matrix by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
Since a matrix does not have a geometric position, Adams/View displays matrix icons at or near
the model origin. If the matrix icon is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You
may also find it convenient to type the name even if the matrix icon is displayed.
data_element 79
If you created the matrix by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the matrix name is the
letters MAT followed by the Adams data set matrix ID number. The name of Adams
MATRIX/101 is MAT101, for example. If you created the matrix during preprocessing, you gave
If a matrix is owned by the default model, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is
To identify a matrix under a different model, for instance, you may need to enter the model name
as well. For example, you may specify matrix 'control_points' from model 'road_surface' by
entering ".road_surface.control_points'". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the matrix
You must separate multiple matrix names by commas.
11. If FIT_TYPE=CONTROL_POINTS then the MATRIX contains control points to define a
uniform B-spline based on cubic polynomials (i.e. the curve will not necessarily pass through the
points). Specifically, the matrix contains the x, y, and z coordinates of control points for a uniform
B-spline. (Adams uses a uniform knot vector with quadruple multiplicity at both ends, ensuring
that the curve will pass through starting and ending points.)
If FIT_TYPE=CURVE_POINTS then the MATRIX contains data points on the curve and the
curve will be fit directly through the points (depending on the value of the SEGMENT_COUNT
parameter). Specifically, the matrix contains the x, y, and z coordinates of curve points which the
curve will pass through or near. The matrix should have a row for each point and three columns
containing the x, y, and z, coordinates of the points. You must supply at least four control points
or curve points.
12. Adams will default the segment_count to three segments less than the number of curve points,
which gives an exact fit to the curve points. Specifying fewer segments will result in a smoother
curve, but the curve will not pass exactly through the curve points.
less than the number of curve points, the computed curve will exactly match the curve points. If
you specify fewer segments, Adams will use a least-squares fit to compute the closest fit to the
points. In general, fewer segments give a smoother curve, but do not come as close to the data
points.
13. Adams uses the minimum_parameter value when drawing a curve graphic. For curves defined by
control points or curve points, the minimum parameter value is always -1.0.
Adams uses the maximum_parameter value when drawing a curve graphic. For curves defined
by control points or curve points, the maximum parameter value is always 1.0.
Cautions:
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two curves with the same full name, so you must provide
a unique name.
Tips:
1. If the matrix is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.

data_element 81
data_element modify matrix file

Allows you to modify the name of the MATRIX or FILE_NAME which Adams is to read.
The FILE keyword allows you to read large matrices into Adams using an external file. There is no limit
on the size of an array read from a file.
The first record in the file contains an 80 character header of which the first seven or eight characters are
meaningful. If the first record begins with the characters ADAMSMAT, then the file is assumed to be in
a format used by Adams. If the first record begins with the characters MATRIXx, then the file is assumed
to be in the FSAVE format of the MATRIXx software package. If the first record begins with the
characters MATSAVE, then the file is assumed to be in the MATSAVE format of the MATRIXx software
package.
No other kinds of files are currently supported. However, the ADAMSMAT option is fairly general since
the format for reading in the data is specified within the file. See the section in the Adams Reference
Manual on the MATRIX statement for a description of the file format.
Format:

matrix_name= existing matrix
new_matrix_name = new matrix name
adams_id= integer
comments= string
file_name= string
name_of_matrix_in_file= string
units= string
Example:
:
data_element modify matrix file &

matrix_name= MATRIX_READ_FROM_FILE &
adams_id= 12 &
comments= ”Example of a matrix read from a file” &
file_name= /home/staff/demo/prob.dat &
name_of_matrix_in_file= “VALK” &
Units= String
In the above command, the prob.dat is in the directory, /home/staff/demo, and contains the following
data:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
ADAMSMAT Floating platform example
3
TRF VALK STL
TRF FULL RORDER 4 2 8 ( 8F8.5 )
1.36400 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 -3.54600 4.00800 0.00000 0.79900
VALK FULL CORDER 3 3 9 ( 3F6.3 )
1.970 0.000-3.440
0.000 4.510 6.020
-3.440 6.020 2.110
STL SPARSE 6 1 4 ( 2( 2I5, E14.6 ) )
1 1 0.169805E+02 2 1 -0.230745E+02
4 1 0.016390E+00 5 1 0.011271E+00
The second and third records are read with format I5 and 4(A8,10X), respectively. Then, the first record
of each of the blocks corresponding to the three matrices TRF, VALK, and STL is read with the format
3A8, 3I5, A41. Finally, as can be seen in the copy of the file shown above between the two strings of 80
characters that mark the columns (which, of course, are not part of the file), the single record of data for
the matrix TRF is read with the format 8F8.5; the three records for VALK are read with 3F6.3; and the
two records for STL with 2(2I5,E14.6).
Description:

matrix_name Existing matrix Specifies the name of the existing matrix.
New_matrix_name New matrix name Specifies the new name of the matrix.
modified.
file_name String Specifies the name of a file that contains the values
of the matrix.
name_of_matrix_in_file String Specifies the name of a MATRIX to be read from
the file identified by the FILE_NAME parameter.
units String Allows you to specify the type of units to be used for
this object.
1. You may use this name later to refer to this matrix. Adams/View will not allow you to have two
matrices with the same full name, so you must provide a unique name.
data_element 83
assumed.
yourself.
3. The FILE argument may be used to read large matrices into Adams. There is no limit on the size
of an array read from a file.
The proper extension is the default but can be overridden by simply supplying a different
extension.
The first record in the file contains an 80 character header of which the first seven or eight
characters are meaningful. If the first record begins with the characters ADAMSMAT, then the
file is assumed to be in a format used by Adams. If the first record begins with the characters
MATRIXx, then the file is assumed to be in the FSAVE format of the MATRIXx software
package. If the first record begins with the characters MATSAVE, then the file is assumed to be
in the MATSAVE format of the MATRIXx software package.
Note that the three specifications for the format of the data file are case sensitive. Capital letters
and a lower case x must be used to make a selection.
No other kinds of files are currently supported. However, the ADAMSMAT option is fairly
general since the format for reading in the data is specified within the file. See the section in the
Adams Reference Manual on the MATRIX statement for a description of the file format.
4. All three kinds of files, ADAMSMAT, MATRIXx, and MATSAVE, can contain data for more
than one matrix. The NAME_OF_MATRIX_IN_FILE parameter is used to select a particular
matrix from a file even if the file contains only one MATRIX. You must create additional
MATRIX elements in your Adams/View model if multiple matrices are to be read from the same
file.
data_element 85
data_element modify matrix full

Allows you to modify an existing FULL MATRIX.
The MATRIX to be defined is FULL therefore, the VALUES parameter specifies all of the M times N
entries in the matrix. The sequence of the values depends on the value of the INPUT_ORDER parameter.
If BY_ROW is specified, you enter the values row-by-row. If BY_COLUMN is specified, you enter the
values column-by-column.
Format:

matrix_name= existing matrix
new_matrix_name = new name for the matrix
adams_id= integer
comments= string
row_count= integer
column_count= integer
values= real
result_set_component_names= existing component
input_order= matrix_input_order
units= string
Example:
If you want to modify the following matrix of values in full format such that the second row second
column will have value 1.200 instead of 0.000 then you can use the following commands:
data_element modify matrix full &

matrix_name = matrix_1 &
comments = "matrix example in full format" &
row_count = 4 &
column_count = 2 &
data_element modify matrix full &

values = 1.364,0.000,0.000,1.200,-3.546,4.008,0.000,0.7999 &
input_order = by_column
Description:

matrix_name Matrix name Specifies the name of the existing matrix.
New_matrix_name New name for the Specifies the name of the new matrix. You
matrix may use this name later to refer to this
matrix.
row_count Integer Specifies the number of rows (M) in the
matrix used in the definition of a full
matrix.
column_count Integer Specifies the number of columns (N) in the
matrix used in the definition of a full
matrix.
value Real Specifies the real number values that you
enter to populate a FULL MATRIX.
result_set_component_names Existing component You can only use a result set component as
matrix values using full format and
entering all the values stored in the result
set component.
input_order By_column,by_row Specifies the order the values that you input
will appear in for a FULL MATRIX format
(all of the M by N entries will be specific
numeric values
1. A data element matrix is a general M x N array that can be a rectangular or square two-
dimensional matrix or a row or column matrix. You can enter the data in:
• Full format - You list all the M x N values or specify the results of a simulation (result set
components).
data_element 87
• Sparse format - You list the row position, column position, and value for only nonzero entry
values.
• External file - Enter a file containing a matrix.
If one-third or more of the entries in a matrix are nonzero, we recommend that you use full format
since it takes less time to create. If the matrix is mostly empty and entering each nonzero entry's
row position, column position, and value takes less time than entering all of the values, you should
use the sparse format.
ride the default parent. In most cases, when creating an entity, Adams/View will provide a
assumed.
3. The MATRIX to be defined is FULL therefore, the VALUES parameter specifies all of the M
times N entries in the matrix. The sequence of the values depends on the value of the
INPUT_ORDER parameter. If BY_ROW is specified, you enter the values row-by-row.
If BY_COLUMN is specified, you enter the values column-by-column.
4. A result set is a basic set of state variable data that Adams/Solver calculates during a simulation.
joint).
5. The input_order parameter can take two values:
a. BY_ROW indicates the values are listed by row in the VALUES parameter (i.e. starting with
the first row and proceeding to the second, and so on until the entire matrix is completely
defined).
b. BY_COLUMN indicates the values are listed by column (i.e. starting with the first column
and proceeding to the second, and so on).
Default value is BY_COLUMN
3. Since this object can be used in a variety of contexts, Adams/View can not determine what type
data_element 89
data_element modify matrix sparse

Allows you to modify a SPARSE MATRIX.
The MATRIX to be defined is SPARSE therefore, the VALUES parameter specifies only the entries that
may be non zero. That is, all entries in the M by N array not assigned values by the ROW_INDEX,
COLUMN_INDEX, and VALUES parameters are assumed to be equal to zero in Adams. Therefore, the
kth entry in the VALUES parameter is assigned to the row identified by the kth entry in ROW_INDEX
and to the column identified by the kth entry in COLUMN_INDEX for k=1,2,...,n.
Format:

matrix_name= existing sparse matrix
new_matrix_name= new name for the matrix
new_matrix_name = new name for the matrix
adams_id= integer
comments= string
row_index= integer
column_index= integer
values= real
units= string
Example:
data_element modify matrix sparse &

matrix_name = matrix__1 &
new_matrix_name = sparse_matrix_ex &
row_index = 2,3 &
column_index = 1,1 &
values = 3.456,4.567
Description:

matrix_name, Matrix_name Specifies the name of the matrix to modify.
New_matrix_name New matrix_name Specifies the new name of the matrix.

adams_id, Integer Specifies an integer used to identify this element in the
Adams data file.
modified.
row_index, Integer Specifies the row position of each of the N entries in the
VALUES parameter for a SPARSE MATRIX.
column_index Integer Specifies the column position of each of the M entries in the
VALUES parameter for a SPARSE MATRIX.
Values Real Specifies the real number values that you enter to populate
a SPARSE MATRIX.
object.
assumed.
data_element 91
third value entered for the ROW_INDEX parameter defines what matrix row the third value
entered for the VALUES parameter is located on.
forth value entered for the COLUMN_INDEX parameter defines what matrix column the forth
value entered for the VALUES parameter is located on.
5. The MATRIX to be defined is SPARSE therefore, the VALUES parameter specifies only the
entries that may be non zero. That is, all entries in the M by N array not assigned values by the
ROW_INDEX, COLUMN_INDEX, and VALUES parameters are assumed to be equal to zero in
Adams. Therefore, the kth entry in the VALUES parameter is assigned to the row identified by
the kth entry in ROW_INDEX and to the column identified by the kth entry in
COLUMN_INDEX for k=1,2,...,n.
data_element modify plant input

Allows you to modify an existing PLANT INPUT element.
Format:

plant_input_name = an existing pinput
new_plant_input_name = a new pinput
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
Example:
data_element modify plant input &

new_plant_input_name = pinput__2 &
adams_id = 1 &
comments = " a modified plant input" &
Description:

plant_input_name An Existing Pinput Specifies the name of an existing plant_input.
new_plant_input_name A New Pinput Specifies the name of the new plant_input. You may
use this name later to refer to this plant_input.
modified.
Variable
data_element 93
1. A PLANT INPUT element, along with a PLANT OUTPUT element, is required by the Adams
A PLANT INPUT defines a set of inputs to the mechanical system and PLANT OUTPUT defines
the set of measured outputs from the system. The LINEAR/STATEMAT analysis linearizes the
{x}= [A] {x} + [B] {u}
{y}= [C] {x} + [D] {u}
where x is the linearized system state, u is the system inputs defined by the PLANT INPUT
element, and y is the system outputs defined by the PLANT OUTPUT element. This form is
commonly referred to as the state space form of the system equations in control theory. Adams
outputs the A, B, C, and D matrices for use in a control-system design or any other linear system
analysis software.
When you run an analysis type other than LINEAR/STATEMAT , the PLANT INPUT element
acts only as a pointer to the list of the specified VARIABLEs.
2. Both FUNCTION expressions and user-written subroutines can access the PLANT INPUT
information. FUNCTION expressions access the values by using the internal Adams function
PINVAL(i1 ,i2) where i1 specifies the PLANT INPUT name , and i2 specifies the i2-th
VARIABLE in the PLANT INPUT statement list. Note that i2 is not the name of the
VARIABLE.
User-written subroutines call the subroutine SYSFNC to access single elements of the PLANT
INPUT list and call the subroutine SYSARY to access all values for a PLANT INPUT.
assumed.
yourself.
that time.
data_element 95
Cautions:
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two plant_inputs with the same full name, so you must
Tips:
associated with it.
data_element modify plant output

Allows you to modify an existing PLANT OUTPUT element.
Format:

plant_output_name= an existing poutput
new_plant_output_name = a new poutput
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
Example:
data_element modify plant output &

plant_output_name = poutput__1 &
new_plant_output_name = poutput__2 &
adams_id = 1 &
comments = "a modified plant output element " &
Description:

plant_output_name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing plant_output.
Poutput
new_plant_output_name A New Poutput Specifies the name of the new plant_output. You may
use this name later to refer to this plant_output.
Adams data file.
modified.
Variable
data_element 97
1. A PLANT OUTPUT element, along with a PLANT INPUT element, is required by the Adams
PLANT OUTPUT defines the set of measured outputs from the mechanical system and PLANT
INPUT defines a set of inputs to the mechanical system. The LINEAR command linearizes the
{x}= [A] {x} + [B] {u}
{y}= [C] {x} + [D] {u}
where x is the linearized system state (X_STATE_ARRAY), u is the system inputs defined by the
PLANT INPUT element (U_INPUT_ARRAY), and y is the system outputs defined by the
PLANT OUTPUT element (Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY). This form is commonly referred to as the
state space form of the system equations in control theory. Adams outputs the A, B, C, and D
matrices (i.e. A_STATE_MATRIX, B_INPUT_MATRIX, C_OUTPUT_MATRIX, and
D_FEEDFORWARD_MATRIX) for use in a control-system design or any other linear system
analysis software.
When the user runs an analysis type other than LINEAR , the PLANT OUTPUT element acts only
as a pointer to the list of VARIABLE specified.
2. Both FUNCTION expressions and user-written subroutines can access the PLANT OUTPUT
element. FUNCTION expressions access the values by using the internal Adams function
POUVAL(i1 ,i2) where i1 specifies the PLANT OUTPUT name , and i2 specifies the i2-th
VARIABLE entry in the PLANT INPUT parameter list. Note that i2 is not the name of the
VARIABLE.
User-written subroutines access single elements of the PLANT OUTPUT list and call the
subroutine SYSFNC to access all values for a PLANT OUTPUT by calling the subroutine
SYSARY.
assumed.
yourself.
that time.
data_element 99
not, you must enter its full name.To identify a variable under a different model, for instance, you
may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify variable 'fluid_volume'
the variable available by default.
Cautions:
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two plant_outputs with the same full name, so you must
Tips:
associated with it.
data_element modify plant state

Allows you to modify an existing PLANT STATE element.
Format:

adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
plant_state_name = a new plant state
Example:
data_element modify plant state &

plant_state_name = pstate__1 &
adams_id = 1 &
comments = "a modified plant state element " &
Description:

plant_state_name An Existing Plant Specifies the name of an existing plant_state.
State
new_plant_state_name A New Plant State Specifies the name of the new plant_state. You may
use this name later to refer to this plant_state.
Adams data file.
modified.
Variable
data_element 101
assumed.
yourself.
that time.
Cautions:
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two plant_states with the same full name, so you must
Tips:
1. if the variable is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
data_element 103
data_element modify spline

Allows for modification of an existing spline object.
Format:

spline_name = an existing spline
new_spline_name = a new spline
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
x = real
y = real
z_result_set_component_name = an existing component
z= real
linear_extrapolate = boolean
units = string
file_name = string
Example:
data_element modify spline &

new_spline_name = spline__2 &
adams_id = 2 &
comments = "a modified spline" &
linear_extrapolate = yes &
units = mm &
file_name = "c:\spline.txt"
Description:

spline_name An Existing Specifies the name of the an existing spline
Spline
new_spline_name A New Spline Specifies the name of the new spline. You may use this
name later to refer to this spline.
Adams data file.
modified.
x_result_set_compone An Existing Specifies the result set component containing values for
nt_name Component the spline X (independent) variable.
x Real
y_result_set_compone An Existing Specifies the result set component containing values for
nt_name Component the spline Y (dependent) variable.
y Real
z_result_set_compone An Existing Specifies the result set component containing values for
nt_name Component the spline Z (independent) variable.
z Real
linear_extrapolate Boolean
object.
file_name String
1. A spline interpolates between discrete data for a user-provided function or a utility subroutine
called by a user-written subroutine.
You use the spline to provide one or two independent variables and one dependent variable for
each data point you want to enter. Adams uses curve fitting techniques to interpolate between data
points to create a continuous function. If the spline data has one independent variable, Adams uses
a cubic polynomial to interpolate between points.
If the spline data has two independent variables, Adams first uses a cubic interpolation method to
interpolate between points of the first independent variable and then uses a linear method to
interpolate between curves of the second independent variable.
2. To use the discrete data input with a spline, you must write either a function expression that
includes one of the two Adams spline functions (AKISPL function and CUBSPL function) or a
user-written subroutine that calls one of the two spline utility subroutines (AKISPL subroutine
and CUBSPL subroutine).
data_element 105
3. These spline functions and utility subroutines use two different interpolation methods. The
AKISPL function and the AKISPL subroutine use the Akima method of interpolation. The Akima
method is a local cubic curve fitting technique. The CUBSPL function and the CUBSPL
subroutine use the traditional cubic method of interpolation. The traditional cubic method is a
global cubic curve fitting technique.
Both the Akima method and the traditional cubic method use cubic polynomials to interpolate
values that fall between two adjacent points on a curve. Both provide closer approximations than
other curve fitting techniques (for example, Lagrange polynomials, difference tables, and Fourier
series). For data with two independent variables, Adams uses a linear interpolation technique to
interpolate values that fall between curves.
4. If you have created a spline in Adams/View, you may wish to plot the data points or the
interpolated curve to verify that you entered the data correctly and that the spline interpolates
smoothly. To do this, first use the 'NUMERIC_RESULTS CREATE SPLINE' command to create
a result set from the spline. This result set will contain components composed of the spline data
points. You can then plot the result set (i.e. the spline data points) with the XY_PLOTS
command. You may also use the 'NUMERIC_RESULTS CREATE INTERPOLATION'
command to interpolate more points from the data-point result set, and then plot those. The
Adams/View CUBIC and AKIMA interpolation options use the same methods as the Adams
CUBSPL and AKISPL functions, respectively.
assumed.
6. . When you use the FILE ADAMS_DATA_SET WRITE command, Adams/View writes an
yourself.
8. You must supply a Y value corresponding to each combination of X and Z values. First list the
component with values for each X value at the first Z value, then the component with values for
each X value at the second Z value, and so on.
9. Since this object can be used in a variety ov contexts, Adams/View can not determine what type
can preform the proper conversions on the values you specify.
Cautions:
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two splines with the same full name, so you must provide
a unique name.
data_element 107
data_element modify string

Allows you to modify an existing character string.
Format:

string_name = an existing astring
new_string_name = a new astring
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
string = string
Example:
data_element modify string &

adams_id = 1 &
comments = " a modified string" &
string = "sample string modified"
Description:

string_name An Existing Astring Specifies the name of an existing string.
new_string_name A New Astring Specifies the name of the new string. You may use this
name later to refer to this string.
Adams data file.
comments Strings Specifies comments for the object being created or
modified.
string Strings A STRING element defines a character string that may be
referred to later in the execution of Adams.
1. A STRING element defines a character string that may be referred to later in the execution of
Adams. The character string cannot be broken and continued on the following line; however, the
STRING element can be longer than a single line. A GTSTRG subroutine can be used to retrieve
this character string in a user-written subroutine.
assumed.
yourself.
data_element 109
5. The character string cannot be broken and continued on the following line; however, the STRING
element can be longer than a single line. An Adams interactive STRING command can be used
to alter or review this character string. A GTSTRG subroutine can be used to retrieve this
character string in a user-written subroutine.
Cautions:
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two strings with the same full name, so you must provide
a unique name.
data_element modify variable

Allows you to modify an existing variable.
Format:

variable_name= an existing solvar
new_variable_name= a new solvar
adams_id= adams_id
comments = string
function = function
routine = string
Example:
data_element modify variable &

variable_name= variable__10 &
adams_id= 5 &
initial_condition = 0.121 &
function = cos( 10 )
Description:

variable_name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing variable
Solvar
new_variable_name A New Solvar Specifies the name of the new variable. You may use this
name later to refer to this variable.
Adams data file.
modified.
data_element 111

initial_condition Real Specifies the initial value of the user_defined differential
variable and, optionally, an approximate value of the
initial time derivative.
function Function Specifies the function expression definition that is used to
compute the value of this variable.
written subroutine.
routine String
1. You create VARIABLEs to define scalar algebraic equations for independent use, or as part of
the PLANT INPUT, PLANT OUTPUT, or ARRAY elements. The computed value of the
VARIABLE may depend on almost any Adams system variable. Note that you cannot access
reaction forces from user defined, POINT_CURVE, and CURVE_CURVE constraints (Adams
UCONs, PTCV, CVCV statements). You can define the computed value of a VARIABLE by
either writing a FUNCTION expression in the model or by calling a VARSUB user-written
subroutine. The Adams Reference Manual chapter on "Function Expressions," discusses the
attributes of FUNCTION expressions, and the chapter on "Subroutines," discusses user-written
subroutines and accessible utility subroutines.
2. FUNCTION expressions and user-written subroutines can access the computed value of the
VARIABLE with the Adams/View function VARVAL(variable_name) to represent the value,
where variable_name specifies the name you gave the VARIABLE when it was created.
User-written subroutines access single VARIABLE statement values by calling the subroutine
SYSFNC.
Caution should be used when defining VARIABLEs that are dependent on other VARIABLEs or
on Adams/View elements that contains functions. If a defined system of equations does not have
a stable solution, convergence may fail for the entire Adams model. The following example refers
to this type of VARIABLE statement:
VARIABLE/1, FUNCTION= VARVAL(1)+1
When looked at as an algebraic equation, it looks like the following:
V=V+1.
However, when Adams tries to solve this equation using the Newton-Raphson iteration, the
solution diverges and a message appears on the screen indicating that the solution has failed to
converge.
3. Adams/View will not allow you to have two variables with the same full name, so you must
assumed.
yourself.
6. The first value is the value of the user- defined variable at the start of the simulation. If you have
entered an implicit equation, the second value may also need to be specified, which is an
approximate value of the time derivative of the user-defined variable at the start of the simulation.
Adams may adjust the value of the time derivative when it performs an initial conditions analysis.
Entering an initial value for the time derivative may help Adams converge to an initial conditions
solution. If you enter an explicit equation, you do not need to supply the second value since
Adams can compute the initial time derivative directly from the equation.
data_element 113
cursor is put near the problem.Proper unit consistency is not checked during function expression
verification.
Tips:
defaults 1
defaults
defaults adams_output
The ADAMS_OUTPUT command is used to set parameters that control the organization and statement
format of Adams datasets written by VIEW.
Format:
statement_order= statement_order
arguments_per_line= argument_count
text_case= text_case
indent_spaces= integer
write_default_values= on/off
scientific_notation= integer
trailing_zeros= on/off
decimal_places= integer
zero_threshold= real
round_off= on/off
significant_figures= integer
Example:
Defaults adams_output &

statement_order= markers_with_parts &
arguments_per_line= single
This statement specifies that in the dataset markers are written as a group after the part to which they
belong. Graphics that belong to a single part are written after the markers for that part, and graphics that
connect one or more parts are written after all the parts are written. Also only one argument will be
written in one line as shown below.
PART/1 , QG = 0.5, 0, 0 , REULER = 0D, 90D, 0D , MASS = 1.2
MARKER/101 , PART = 1 , QP = -0.5, 0, 0

defaults 3
Description:

statement_order Markers_with_parts, This controls the organization of the statements
Markers_where_used, within the dataset.
As_found_in_file
arguments_per_line Single/multiple This controls how many arguments are written on
each line of an Adams dataset statement. The default
is a single argument per line.
text_case Upper/lower/mixed This controls the case of the text written for the
statement's keywords and parameters.
indent_spaces Integer This controls the number of spaces after the comma
in column one used to indent a continuation line of a
statement.
write_default_values On/off This controls whether or not arguments that have
default values are written explicitly into the dataset.
The default is that the arguments with default values
are not written into the datset.
scientific_notation Integer This controls the lower and upper powers of ten
where the format for real numbers switches from a
fixed point format to scientific notation.
trailing_zeros On/off This controls whether or not trailing zeros are
printed for real numbers.
decimal_places Integer This controls how many places are written after the
decimal point for real numbers. The default value is
ten decimal places.
zero_threshold Real This specifies the threshold value for numbers being
written to an Adams data set.
round_off On/off This turns the round off feature for real numbers on
or off. The actual numbers of places retained during
rounding off is controlled by the
SIGNIFICANT_FIGURES argument.
significant_figures Integer This controls how many significant figures of a real
number are retained during round off when it is
enabled by setting the value of the ROUND_OFF
argument to ON.
active_only On/off
1. The default for statement order is AS_FOUND_IN_FILE, unless the model was originally created
in view, in which case the default is MARKERS_WITH_PARTS. Note that the order of the
arguments within a statement are written in a fixed order.
AS_FOUND_IN_FILE
The order of the statements in the original dataset is maintained when the model is written back
to a dataset. Any new statements added to the original model are written after all the original
statements, and both sections are labelled to indicate which statements came from the original
dataset and which statements are new.
MARKERS_WITH_PARTS
Markers are written as a group after the part to which they belong. Graphics that belong to a single
part are written after the markers for that part, and graphics that connect one or more parts are
written after all the parts are written.
Statements of the same type, such as JOINTs, JPRIMs, BUSHINGs, etc., are written as a group,
in order of ascending Adams id number.
In general, statements are written before other statements that depend on them. For example,
markers are written before the joints that use them, joints are written before any couplers that
connect them, etc.
MARKERS_WHERE_USED
Markers are written immediately after certain types of statements that depend on the existance of
those markers. The types of statements for which this is done is as follows:
BEAM BUSHING FIELD SFORCE SPRINGDAMPER VFORCE VTORQUE GFORCE
NFORCE JOINT JPRIM REQUEST MREQUEST CVCV PTCV
If a marker is not used by any of these statements, it is written after the part to which it belongs.
Graphics that belong to a single part are written after the markers for that part, and graphics that
connect one or more parts are written after all the parts are written.
Statements of the same type, such as JOINTs, JPRIMs, BUSHINGs, etc., are written as a group,
in order of ascending Adams id number.
In general, the order in which the different types of statements are written into the dataset is
similar to the order used in View 1.0 and 6.0.
2. For the arguments_per_line parameter,there are 2 choices:
SINGLE
Write only one argument and its values for each line of the statement. An example of how this
would look is as follows:
PART/1 , QG = 0.5, 0, 0 , REULER = 0D, 90D, 0D , MASS = 1.2
MARKER/101 , PART = 1 , QP = -0.5, 0, 0
MULTIPLE
Write as many arguments and their values that will fit within 80 columns for each line of the
statement. An example of how this would look is as follows:
defaults 5
PART/1, QG = 0.5, 0, 0, REULER = 0D, 90D, 0D, MASS = 1.2

MARKER/101, PART = 1, QP = -0.5, 0, 0
3. The text_case parameter does not affect comments, function expressions, titles, or filenames that
are used as values of arguments. The default is UPPER.
• UPPER Text for keywords and parameters in the dataset are written in upper case.
• LOWER Text for keywords and parameters in the dataset are written in lower case.
• MIXED Text for keywords and parameters in the dataset are written in mixed case. The first
character of each word is in upper case, and the remaining characters are in lower case.
The text case control will not affect certain types of string valued arguments. They following
arguments will be written into the dataset the way they are stored in the database.
TIRE: TPF and RDF RESULTS: COMMENT MATRIX:

FILE and NAME MADATA: COMMENT STRING: STRING REQUEST:
TITLE, COMMENT, FUNCTION, and F1 to F8 MREQUEST: COMMENT UCON:
FUNCTION MOTION: FUNCTION FIELD: FUNCTION SFORCE:
FUNCTION GFORCE: FUNCTION VFORCE: FUNCTION VTORQUE:
FUNCTION VARIABLE: FUNCTION CURVE: FUNCTION DIFF:
FUNCTION GSE: FUNCTION SENSOR: FUNCTION
4. The allowed values for indent_spaces are between zero and four spaces. Five or more spaces
would make the subsequent text on the line a comment. The default is one space.
The text for function expressions is not indented for continuation lines. It is assumed that the user
will add any leading spaces that they wish for indentation. Any indentation added by the dataset
writer would interfer with the the user's, often used to show nesting of IF functions. The argument
list for a user function will be indented if it requires more than one line.
The values of an argument that has multiple string values separated by colons will be preceded by
a comma and indented if it has to be placed on a continuation line. This applies to the
PART/EXACT and COUPLER/TYPE arguments. The exception is the REQUEST/TITLE
argument that doesn't allow imbedded blanks. This will be preceded by a comma, but not
indented.
5. The default values are -4 and 5, meaning that any number less than or equal to 1.0E-04 or greater
than or equal to 1.0E+05 will be written in scientific notation.
6. When enabled, all the digits after the decimal point will be printed, whether they are zero or not.
When disabled, any zeros at the end of the fractional part of the number will be dropped, leaving
the last digit as a non-zero digit.
7. If a number has an absolute value smaller than the zero threshold value, the it will be written out
as zero. This value is independent of units.
8. The default for significant_figures parameter is to use ten significant figures.
This number is distinct from the number of places actually printed for a real number, controlled
by the DECIMAL_PLACES argument.
9. The values assigned to the parameters will remain in effect until reassigned or the end of program
execution.
defaults analysis
defaults analysis
The DEFAULTS ANALYSIS command assigns a value to ANALYSIS_NAME which will be used as the
default for subsequent commands.
This default value is reset when a new file is read. Each time the file is read in (.GRA, .REQ, or .RES)
the ANALYSIS_NAME is set to the file name minus the extension (any preceding path is also stripped
off).
Format:
defaults analysis
defaults analysis analysis_name= existing_analysis
Example:
defaults analysis &

defaults analysis analysis_name = my_analysis
Description:

Analysis_name Existing analysis This parameter specifies the name of an analysis name.
1. When Adams/View reads a graphics file (.GRA), a request file (.REQ), or a results file (.RES)
an analysis name is created. By default, the name of the analysis is the file name excluding the
extension.
Adams/View requires that Adams simulations have unique names and the default name of an
analysis may be overridden when reading the file(s) using the file_name parameter. When
referring to an analysis name that already exists quotes are not necessary. When processing any
command that requires an analysis name the system will default to the default analysis name. The
default analysis name is set to the last analysis file read in (.GRA, .REQ, .RES, or all three). To
change the default analysis name without reading in an analysis file use the "defaults analysis"
command.
Cautions:
1. Default name of an analysis may be overridden when reading the file(s) using the file_name
parameter.
defaults 7
defaults attributes
defaults attributes
This command allows you to specify the GRAPHIC ATTRIBUTES INHERITANCE algorithm used by
Adams/View.
Format:
defaults attributes
inheritance = up_down
icon_visibility = on/off
size_of_icons = real number
grid_visibility = on/off
endcap_visibility = on/ off
spacing_for_grid = real number
screen_font = font name
postscript_font = font name
dimming_factor = real number
Example:
defaults attributes &

inheritance = bottom_up &
icon_visibility = on &
size_of_icons = 0.2 &
grid_visibility = on &
endcap_visibility = off &
spacing_for_grid = 0.2 &
screen_font = "--Arial-Normal " &
postscript_font= times_roman &
dimming_factor= 0.2
Description:

inheritance Up_down Specifies the graphics attributes INHERITANCE
algorithm to be used by Adams/View.
icon_visibility On_off Specifies whether or not to display icons.
defaults attributes

size_of_icons Length Allows you to specify the size the Adams/View icons
will appear.
grid_visibility On_off_with_toggle2 The GRID_VISIBILITY parameter provides control
over the visibility of the grid in all views.
endcap_visibility On_off_with_toggle2
spacing_for_grid Length The SPACING_FOR_GRID parameter provides
control over the spacing between the individual grid
points for all views.
screen_font String This parameter controls the device dependent font to be
used when drawing any bitmapped text on the screen.
postscript_font Postscript_fonts This parameter controls the font to be used when
drawing any bitmapped text for a hardcopy output.
dimming_factor Real Sets the level of dimming desired for objects which
have been deactivated via the ACTIVE attribute.
1. GRAPHIC ATTRIBUTES may be applied to almost any entity that may be created in
Adams/VIEW. If an entity does not have a GRAPHICS ATTRIBUTE setting, the value for that
GRAPHIC ATTRIBUTE may be inherited from another entity.
2. The rules of INHERITANCE are either TOP_DOWN or BOTTOM_UP. This means that the
attributes are assumed from the children up to the parents (i.e. BOTTOM_UP), or, from the
parents down to the children (i.e. TOP_DOWN). For example, in
INHERITANCE=BOTTOM_UP, if the visibility of a marker is set on, it will override the
visibility of the markers parent part when the part visibility is set to off. Also, in
INHERITANCE=TOP_DOWN, if the color of a part is set to red, it will override the color set for
a green marker and the marker will appear red.
3. GRAPHICS ATTRIBUTES include color, visibility, name visibility, render mode, and icon size.
4. Turning the default icon visibility off will result in no icons being displayed, even if they are set
to ON individually. If the default icon visibility is OFF, the visibility of each icon will be
determined by the visibility on that ICON.
5. If you set ICON_SIZE at the model level or at the lower modeling levels of part, marker,
constraint, and force, that values will take precedence.
6. If the visibility of the grid is set for a particular view with the VIEW MANAGE MODIFY
GRID_VISIBILITY command, that setting will be used instead of the default setting. To specify
that the default grid visibility is to be used, enter the command VIEW MANAGE MODIFY
GRID_VISIBILITY=NO_OPINION
defaults 9
defaults attributes
7. If the spacing of the grid is set for a particular view with the VIEW MANAGE MODIFY
SPACING_FOR_GRID command, that setting will be used instead of the default setting. To
specify that the default grid visibility is to be used, enter the command VIEW MANAGE
MODIFY SPACING_FOR_GRID=0
8. Using question mark help (typing a '?' or selecting the ? button) for this parameter will display a
list of the available fonts. This parameter does not control the type of font that will be used for
hardcopy output. See the POSTSCRIPT_FONT parameter for information on controlling fonts
for hardcopy output.
9. A zero value for the dimming factor will make the objects black, while a dimming factor of 1.0
will cause deactivated objects to appear the same color as active objects.
defaults command_file
The DEFAULTS COMMAND_FILE command is used to specify what happens when an error is
encountered while reading a command file.
Format:
on_error = error_action
echo_commands = on.off
update_screen = on/off
Example:
defaults command_file &

on_error = continue_command &
echo_commands = on &
update_screen = on
Description:

echo_commands On_off Specifies whether or not Adams/View will echo commands while
executing command files.
update_screen On_off Specifies whether Adams/View will update the screen while
executing command files.
1. The three legal values for the on_error parameter are CONTINUE_COMMAND,
IGNORE_COMMAND, and ABORT_FILE. CONTINUE_COMMAND continues processing
the line as if it were typed interactively. This can be dangerous if there is no correction later on
the line, since the parser will keep issuing errors until a correction is made. The errors may
continue beyond the end of the line, even to the end of the file, if carriage-returns are invalid.
CONTINUE_COMMAND should only be used if the command file is a literal recording of your
key strokes, complete with backspaces, or other corrections, after mistakes.
IGNORE_COMMAND ignores the line the error was found on, and starts processing the next line
as a new command. The parser can usually recover and execute subsequent commands in the file.
defaults 11
If subsequent commands depend on the results of the invalid command, however, they may fail
or give unexpected results. ABORT_FILE immediately closes all the command files and returns
to interactive input. This is the most conservative setting, since it guarantees subsequent
commands will cause no further errors or unexpected results.
IGNORE_COMMAND is the default action.
2. If you select ON, for the echo_commands, the default, the commands will scroll through the
Dialog area and will be recorded as comments in the log file. If you select OFF, the commands
will not be displayed or logged. As a result, the command file will execute more quickly, and the
log file will be smaller.
3. For the update_screen parameter, if you select ON, the default, Adams/View will update the
display after each command. If ECHO_COMMANDS is ON, you will see commands scrolling
through the Dialog area. If the command file changes the displayed geometry or plots, you will
see the display change as the commands are executed. If you select OFF, the display will not be
updated until the command file is finished executing. You will only see the final result. If the
command file normally generates many screen updates, especially of solid or shaded views,
selecting OFF will make it execute more quickly.
Tips:
1. The ON_ERROR parameter is useful to set modes for debugging command files.
defaults coordinate_system
Allows you to select the coordinate system that location coordinates and orientation angles are with
respect to by default.
Format:
default_coordinate_system= an existing model, part or marker
Example:
defaults coordinate_system &

default_coordinate_system = ground
Description:

default_coordinate_system An Existing Model, Specifies the coordinate system that location
Part Or Marker coordinates and orientation angles are with
respect to by default.
1. You may also change this default by using the RELATIVE_TO parameter on commands that take
location and orientation parameters. If you do not use the RELATIVE_TO parameter,
Adams/View assumes the coordinates and angles you enter are in the default coordinate system.
2. Initially, the default is the model, which is the global coordinate system. This is true for orienting
markers as well as parts. Note that this is different than Adams, where markers are specified
relative to the part, not the global system.
3. You use this command to change the default to any model, part, or marker.
Choosing any model as the default is the same as using global coordinates. By choosing a part or
marker, you may enter locations and orientations relative to that part or marker.
4. If you select a part as the default coordinate system, you then enter marker coordinates relative to
that part, just as in Adams. You can locate other parts relative to that part, as well, or choose a
marker to locate from.
Tips:
1. You may also change the default_coordinate_system by using the RELATIVE_TO parameter on
commands that take location and orientation parameters.
defaults 13
defaults expert_fields
Control the displaying of expert fields on panels.
Format:
expert_mode = on/off
Example:
defaults expert_fields &

expert_mode = off
Description:

expert_mode ON_OFF This parameter controls the global default for displaying expert
fields on panels.
1. The DEFAULTS command is used set various parameters of the system. The values assigned to
these parameters will be the default for commands that use them throughout the system.Some of
these parameters are not allowed to default in every case where they are used. If this is true the
user is informed.
2. When expert_mode is on, all panel fields are displayed. When expert_mode is off, any panel fields
that are designated as expert fields will not be initially displayed. They may be displayed by
selecting the MORE button that is in the lower right corner of the panel.
defaults force_graphics
This command sets the defaults for the display of force graphics during an animation.
Format:
force_scale = real
torque_scale = real
display_text = boolean
display_wireframe = boolean
always_in_front = boolean
Example:
defaults force_graphics &

force_scale = 1.5 &
torque_scale = 2.5 &
decimal_places = 3 &
always_in_front = no &
display_text = yes
Description:

force_scale Real Specify the default size of the force scale to be used for the force
graphics.
torque_scale Real Specify the default size of the torque scale to be used for the force
graphics
display_text Yes/No Specify whether text has to be displayed by default in the force
graphics
decimal_places Integer Specify how many places are written after the decimal point for
force graphics text. The default value is 4.
defaults 15

display_wireframe Yes/No Specify whether wireframe has to be displayed by default in the
force graphics
always_in_front Yes/No Specify if you want Adams/View to show force graphics in the
foreground of the model so model geometry does not obscure
them.
1. The scale value will have a multiplicative effect on the current size of the force graphics. For
example, a scale value of 0.25 will make the force graphics appear one-fourth as large. A scale
value of 2.0 will make the force graphics appear twice as large.
defaults hardcopy
defaults hardcopy
Allows the user to send screen output to hard copy file.
Format:
defaults hardcopy
paper_type= hardcopy paper
orientation = hardcopy_orientation
send_to_printer= boolean
file_name= string
print_command= string
black_and_white_graphics= boolean
black_and_white_plot= boolean
language= hardcopy_language
image_height= real
image_width= real
Example:
defaults hardcopy &

paper_type = a1 &
orientation= portrait &
file_name = printtofile
Description:

paper_type Default/ Eight_by_eleven/ Specify the kind of default paper type to be
A0/ A1/ A2/ A3/ A4/ B5/ used.
B/ C/ D/ E/ F
orientation Landscape/ Portrait Specify the default orientation to be used.
send_to_printer Yes/no
file_name String Specifies the name of the file that is to be
read, written, or executed.
print_command String
defaults 17
defaults hardcopy

black_and_white_graph Yes/no Specifies if black and white graphics is
ics required.
black_and_white_plot Yes/no Specifies if black and white plot is required.
Language Hpgl/ Postscript/ The LANGUAGE parameter is used to
Windows_native/ Bmp/ Xpm/ specify plotting language is to be used for
Jpg/ Tiff/ Png the image sent to a hardcopy file.
image_height Real Specify the default image height
image_width Real Specify the default image width
Include_toolbars Yes/no
1. You do not need to enclose the file name in quotes if it only contains alpha-numeric characters
2. There are three legal values for this parameter: POSTSCRIPT, HPGL, and PICT. The
POSTSCRIPT value will cause the image to be written in color compatible postscript. If an
explicit filename is provided with an extension of '.eps', then the image will be written in
encapsulated postscript. The HPGL (Hewlett Packard Graphics Language(tm)) value will cause
the image to be written in color compatible HPGL. The PICT value will cause the image to be
written out as an Extended Format Version 2 PICT file, which is readable by many Macintosh
programs. The resulting file should be printable on any device supporting those languages.
The LANGUAGE parameter is optional and if not entered, will be set to POSTSCRIPT.
3. The proper extensionof a file_name is the default but can be overridden by simply supplying a
different extension.
Cautions:
1. Care should be taken when performing a hardcopy. The choice of draw modes in the view
(wireframe, solid, shaded, set in the view manage modify command or from the control panel)
will have impact on the image sent to the hard copy file. If solid or shaded mode is "on" in the
desired view, some graphics may "seem" to disappear. This happens if the image of an entity is
such that the edges of the shaded entity obscured the shaded or filled area. To avoid this use
wireframe draw mode or assure "facet" interiors are visible before the hardcopy is attempted. The
choice of background colors can have a similar effect.
Tips:
1. The user may specify the view_name to be sent to the desired hardcopy file name. The
FILE_NAME parameter provides a means to specify the name of the hardcopy file the screen
image(s) selected by the user will be written to. The FILE_NAME is an optional parameter and
if not entered, a default name will be constructed. If entered file name must be enclosed in quotes.
defaults hardcopy
2. The ORIENTATION parameter is used to specify how to orient the image sent to a hardcopy file.
There are two legal values for this parameter: LANDSCAPE and PORTRAIT.
3. The LANGUAGE parameter is used to specify plotting language is to be used for the image sent
to a hardcopy file. There are two legal values for this parameter: POSTSCRIPT and HPGL.
defaults 19
default lights
default lights
This command sets the default settings for the lighting.
You can enhance the quality and realism of your animations by using focused lighting that comes from
different directions, and define the angle of that lighting (how far it is from the centerline). You can think
of this as if you were swinging a light boom across your model.
Format:
Default lights
Light = top_left, top, top_right, left, center, right,
bottom_left, bottom, bottom_right
Enable_light= boolean
Example:
Default lights &

Light = top_right &
Enable_light = yes
Description:

Light top_left, top, top_right, left, center, right, bottom_left, Defines the angle of the lighting.
bottom, bottom_right
Enable_light Yes/No Turns the light on or off
1. Following are the various angles that can be used to define the lighting:
Figure 1 A. “Top_left” sets the light from upper left corner top as illustrated in the example
below.
default lights
Figure 2 B. Top sets the light from the top as illustrated in the example below.
Figure 3 C. “Top_right” sets the light from the top right as illustrated in the example
below
defaults 21
default lights
Figure 4 D. “left” sets the light from the left as illustrated in the example below.
Figure 5 E. “Right” sets the light from the right as illustrated in the example below.
default lights
Figure 6 F. “BOTTOM_LEFT” sets the light from the bottom left as illustrated in the
example below.
Figure 7 F. “BOTTOM” sets the light from the bottom as illustrated in the example below.
defaults 23
default lights
Figure 8 G. “BOTTOM_RIGHT” sets the light from the bottom right as illustrated in the
example below.
defaults model
defaults model
The defaults model command is used to set the location the parser uses when it is validating some
object name (that is marker, joint, and so on) when the user does not start at the root node.
Format:
defaults model
model_name = existing model
part_name = existing part
flexible_body_name = existing flex body
point_mass_name = existing point mass
marker_name = existing marker
joint_name = existing joint,
geometry_name = existing geometry
Example:
defaults model &

model_name = model_1 &
part_name = cam_part &
marker_name = marker_1
Description:

model_name Existing model Specifies an existing model
part_name Existing part Specifies an existing part
flexible_body_name Existing flex body Specifies the name of a flexible body
point_mass_name Existing point mass Specifies an existing point_mass
marker_name Existing marker Specifies an existing marker
joint_name Existing joint Specifies an existing joint
geometry_name Existing geometry Specifies an existing geometry
1. You may identify a model by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
2. If the model is not visible on the screen, you must type the name.
defaults 25
defaults model
3. You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the model is displayed.
• You must separate multiple model names by commas.
• If the model is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
• You need not separate multiple model picks by commas. This also applies to identification of
parts, flexible bodies, point masses, markers, joints and geometries.
Caution: 1. If an entity of the specific type is created it becomes the default setting.
2. A flexible body may not have the same name as another flexible body in the same
model.
3. If you set some model default values in a model, for example, Model_1, then create
and navigate to another model, for example, Model_2, the default settings of
Model_1 will be replaced by those of Model_2. On navigating back to Model_1, the
first part, flexible body, and so on within Model_1 will be set as the default values
and the original default values set will be lost.
defaults name_generation constraint

Allows you to set the name-generation prefixes for constraints.
Format:

coupler_prefix= string
gear_prefix= string
joint_prefix= string
jprim_prefix= string
motion_prefix= string
user_constraint_prefix= string
point_curve_prefix= string
curve_curve_prefix= string
Example:
defaults name_generation constraint &

coupler_prefix= my_coupler
After this command is executed all couplers created will have names My_COUPLER_2,
MY_COUPLER_3 and so on.
Description:

coupler_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a coupler.
gear_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a gear.
joint_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a joint.
jprim_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a jprim.
motion_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a motion.
defaults 27

user_constraint_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a user_constraint
point_curve_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a point_constraint.
curve_curve_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a curve_curve.
1. Normally, text strings are composed of alphabetic, numeric, or '_' (underscore) characters, and
By enclosing the text string in double quotes, you may use other printable characters, or start the
name with a numeral. If a text string contains other printable characters, or starts with a numeral,
you must always quote the text string when entering it.
defaults name_generation data_element

Allows you to set the name-generation prefixes for data_element entities.
Format:

curve_prefix= string
spline_prefix= string
variable_prefix= string
array_prefix= string
matrix_prefix= string
plant_input_prefix= string
plant_output_prefix= string
string_prefix= string
Example:
Defaults name_generation data_element &

curve_prefix= my_curve
Description:

curve_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a curve data
element.
spline_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a spline data
element.
variable_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a variable data
element.
array_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for an array data
element.
matrix_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a matrix data
element.
defaults 29

plant_input_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a plant_input data
element.
plant_output_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a plant_output
data element.
string_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a string data
element.
defaults name_generation force

Allows you to set the name-generation prefixes for forces.
Format:

beam_prefix= string
bushing_prefix= string
field_prefix= string
single_component_force_prefix= string
spring_damper_prefix= string
multi_point_force_prefix= string
force_vector_prefix= string
torque_vector_prefix= string
general_force_prefix= string
Example:
defaults name_generation force &

beam_prefix = my_beam &
bushing_prefix = bush
Beams created will have names my_beam_2, my_beam_3, etc. and tires created will have names bush_2,
bush_3, etc.
Description:

beam_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a beam.
bushing_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a bushing.
field_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a field.
single_component_force String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
_prefix Adams/View generates names for a
single_component_force.
defaults 31

spring_damper_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a spring_damper.
multi_point_force_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a multi_point_force.
force_vector_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a force_vector.
torque_vector_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a torque_vector.
general_force_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a general_force.
defaults name_generation geometry

Allows you to set the name-generation prefixes for geometric entities.
Format:

arc_prefix= string
block_prefix= string
circle_prefix= string
cylinder_prefix= string
ellipsoid_prefix= string
frustum_prefix= string
force_prefix= string
spring_damper_prefix= string
torus_prefix= string
revolution_prefix= string
extrusion_prefix= string
note_prefix= string
polyline_prefix= string
bspline_prefix= string
outline_prefix= string
Example:
defaults name_generation geometry &

arc_prefix= my_arc &
block_prefix= my_block &
torus_prefix= my_torus
After the above command is executed, all arcs created will have names MY_ARC_2, MY_ARC_3 and
so on, all blocks will have names MY_BLOCK_2, MY_BLOCK_3 and so on, and all toruses created will
have names MY_TORUS_2, MY_TORUS_3 and so on.
defaults 33
Description:

circle_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a circle.
arc_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for an arc.
block_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a block.
cylinder_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a cylinder.
ellipsoid_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for an ellipsoid.
frustum_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a frustrum.
force_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a force.
spring_damper_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a spring damper.
torus_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a torus.
revolution_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a revolution.
extrusion_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for an extrusion.
note_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a note.
polyline_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a polyline.
bspline_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a bspline.
outline_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for an outline.
defaults 35
defaults name_generation layout

Defaults Name_generation layout allows you to control the layout of default names.
Format:

prefix_active= yes/no
prefix_text= string
entity_prefix= yes/no
integer_id= yes/no
suffix_active= yes/no
suffix_text= string
Example:
defaults name_generation layout &

prefix_active= yes &
prefix_text= abc &
entity_prefix= yes &
integer_id= yes &
suffix_active= yes &
suffix_text= def
Description:

prefix_active Boolean Specifies whether or not to add the PREFIX_TEXT string
to the beginning of a modeling entity's name.
prefix_text String Specifies a text string to start all modeling entity names
with.
entity_prefix Boolean Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a database entity.
integer_id Boolean Specifies whether or not Adams/View should append an
integer ID to the end of database names, when generating
them.
suffix_text String Specifies whether or not to append the SUFFIX_TEXT

string to the end of a modeling entity's name
suffix_active Boolean Specifies whether or not to append the SUFFIX_TEXT
string to the end of a modeling entity's name.
1. Adams/View combines four components when automatically generating a name:
• a general prefix
• an entity-specific prefix
• an integer entity identifier
• a general suffix
You use this command to specify the general prefix and suffix, and to control which components
are included in the name. By default, Adams/View uses only the entity-specific prefix and integer
entity identifier.
2. PREFIX_TEXT is a string that Adams/View will add to the start of a database name.
Example
PREFIX_TEXT = "sla_"
PART_NAME = "wheel"
The resultant name would be "sla_wheel"
3. By enclosing the string for prefix_text in double quotes, you may use other printable characters,
or start the name with a numeral. If a name contains special characters, or starts with a numeral,
you must always quote the string when entering it.
start with an alphabetic or '_' character. They may be of any length. By enclosing the text string
in double quotes, you may use other printable characters, or start the name with a numeral. If a
text string contains other printable characters, or starts with a numeral, you must always quote the
text string when entering it.
5. In the case of Adams modeling entities, this integer ID will be the ADAMS_ID. In the case of
post-processing entities, like plots, the integer ID is just an integer to make the name more unique.
Entering YES, will instruct Adams/View to append integer IDs to all database names. Entering
NO, will instruct Adams/View NOT to append integer IDs to all database names.
6. SUFFIX_TEXT is a string that Adams/View will append at the end of a database name.
Example
SUFFIX_TEXT = "_sla"
PART_NAME = "wheel"
The resultant name would be "wheel_sla"
7. SUFFIX_TEXT is a string that Adams/View will append at the end of a database name.
defaults 37
Example:
SUFFIX_TEXT = "_sla"
PART_NAME = "wheel"
The resultant name would be "wheel_sla"
defaults name_generation marker

Allows you to set the name-generation prefix for markers.
Format:

marker_prefix= string
floating_marker_prefix= string
Example:
defaults name_generation marker &

marker_prefix= my_mar &
floating_marker_prefix= my_float_mar
After this command is executed, all new markers created will be named My_MAR_2, MY_MAR_3, and
so on, and all new floating markers will be named MY_FLOAT_MAR_2, MY_FLOAT_MAR_3, and so
on.
Description:

Marker_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a marker.
Floating_marker_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a
floating_marker.
defaults 39
defaults name_generation model

Allows you to set the name-generation prefixes for model entities.
Format:

model_prefix= string
gravity_field_prefix= string
sensor_prefix= string
Example:
defaults name_generation model &

model_prefix= my_car_model
Once this command is executed, if we create a new model, the model will get the name,
MY_CAR_MODEL2. New models created after that get the names My_CAR_MODEL_3 and so on. If
the generated name is not unique, Adams/View appends a '_2' to the name. If the name is still not unique,
Adams/View increments the '2' to a '3'. Adams/View will continue incrementing until it finds a unique
name.
Description:

Model_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a model.
Gravity_field_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a gravity_field.
Sensor_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a sensor.
defaults name_generation part

Allows you to set the name-generation prefixes for part entities.
Format:

part_prefix= string
diff_prefix= string
transfer_function_prefix= string
linear_state_equation_prefix= string
general_state_equation_prefix= string
Example:
defaults name_generation part &

part_prefix= my_part
After this command is executed, all the parts will have part names with prefix “MY_PART”. For
example, MY_PART_2, MY_PART_3, and so on.
Description:

Part_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a part.
Diff_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a differential
equation.
transfer_function_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a transfer
function.
linear_state_equation_pr String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
efix Adams/View generates names for a linear state
equation.
general_state_equation_p String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
refix Adams/View generates names for a general state
equation.
defaults 41
defaults name_generation postprocessing

Allows you to set the name-generation prefixes for postprocessing entities.
Format:

plot_prefix string
curve_prefix string
complex_scatter_prefix string
eigen_solution_prefix string
request_prefix string
femdata_prefix string
mrequest_prefix string
Example:
defaults name_generation postprocessing &

plot_prefix= plot &
mrequest_prefix= mreq
Description:

plot_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a plot.
curve_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a curve.
complex_scatter_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a
complex_scatter.
eigen_solution_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for an eigen
solution.
request_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for a request.
defaults 43
femdata_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when

Adams/View generates names for femdata.
mrequest_prefix String Specifies the text string to be used as a prefix when
Adams/View generates names for an mrequest.
defaults orient_axis_and_plane
Allows you to select the axis and plane controlled by the ALONG_AXIS_ORIENTATION and
IN_PLANE_ORIENTATION parameters.
Format:
axis_and_plane_setting = axis_setting
Example:
defaults orient_axis_and_plane &

axis_and_plane_setting= z_axis_zx_plane
Description:

axis_and_plane_setting Axis_settings Specifies the axis and plane controlled by the
ALONG_AXIS_ORIENTATION and
IN_PLANE_ORIENTATION parameters.
1. You use ALONG_AXIS_ORIENTATION to specify a part or marker coordinate axis,and use
IN_PLANE_ORIENTATION to specify an axis and coordinate plane.
2. You use this command to set which axis and plane you wish to control. The default is the Z axis
and XZ plane, meaning that ALONG_AXIS_ORIENTATION and IN_PLANE_ORIENTATION
work, as does the Adams x-point-z-point method. You direct the Z axis and, with
IN_PLANE_ORIENTATION, locate the XZ plane.
3. You may find it convenient to specify other combinations of axes and planes. However, it is the
X axis of a beam J marker, for example, that defines the centroidal axis of the beam. In this case,
you may wish to direct the X axis when creating the J marker.
You may choose to orient any axis, and either planes adjacent to that axis. For example, selecting
X_AXIS_XY_PLANE means you will subsequently be directing the X axis and locating the XY
plane.
defaults 45
defaults page
defaults page
Specifies the default page name that will be used when a page name is not specified.
Format:
defaults page
page_name= existing page
Example:
defaults page &

page_name= page_1
Now in subsequent commands even if page name is not specified, PAGE_1 will be used by default.
Description:

Page_name Existing page Specify an existing page name.
defaults plot
defaults plot
The DEFAULTS PLOT command is used to set the default plot or curve for subsequent xy plot template,
or curve commands.
Format:
defaults plot
plot_name= existing plot
curve_name= existing curve
Example:
defaults plot &

defaults plot plot_name = test &
xy_plots template modify hlim = 1,50
Note, in the template modify command, no plot name was given to override the default set in the previous
command.
Description:

Plot_name Existing plot name A plot name is a string of characters that identifies a plot.
Curve_name Existing curve name A curve name is a string of characters that identifies a
curve.
1. Plot names are assigned when plots are created. After a plot has been created, it may be
referenced by its name until it is deleted. A plot may NOT have the same name as another plot.
A plot_name may be arbitrarily long and a combination of letters of the alphabet and numbers
may be used. The leading character must be a letter.
2. Curve names are assigned by the user when curves are created. After a curve has been created, it
may be referenced by its name until it is deleted. A curve may not have the same name as another
curve on the same plot. A curve is associated to a plot and may be referenced at any time with
respect to the plot. For example, a curve named "c1" on plot "p1" may be referenced by the full
specification of ".p1.c1". This type of full name specification avoids the need to force a given plot
defaults 47
defaults plot
to be the "current" or "default" to the reference data (i.e. a curve) associated with it. This is very
useful when copying a curve from one plot to another, etc. A curve_name may be arbitrarily long
and a combination of letters of the alphabet and numbers may be used. The leading character must
be a letter.
defaults plt_attributes
This command allows the user to control various global attributes for XY plots.
Format:
grid_visibility= on_off
secondary_grid_visibility = on_off
tic_visibility= on_off
legend_visibility = on_off
simulation_legend_visibility = on_off
legend_border_visibility = on_off
simulation_legend_border_visibility = on_off
axis_label_visibility = on_off
symbol_visibility= on_off
border_line_type = line_style
border_thickness = real
title_color = an existing color
subtitle_color = an existing color
haxis_label_color = an existing color
vaxis_label_color = an existing color
axis_numbers_color = an existing color
grid_color = an existing color
secondary_grid_color = an existing color
tic_color = an existing color
border_color = an existing color
legend_border_color = an existing color
simulation_legend_border_color = an existing color
axis_color = an existing color
scientific_notation = integer
trailing_zeros = on_off
legend_placement = plot_legend_place
simulation_legend_placement = plot_legend_place
defaults 49
legend_fill = on_off
simulation_legend_fill = on_off
legend_border_color =
simulation_legend_border_color =
legend_border_line_type = line_style
simulation_legend_border_line_type = line_style
graph_area = real
title_font_size = real
subtitle_font_size = real
legend_font_size = real
strip_chart_font_size = real
zero_line = on_off
Example:
defaults plt_attributes &

grid_visibility = on &
secondary_grid_visibility = off &
tic_visibility = on &
legend_visibility = on &
simulation_legend_visibility = on &
legend_border_visibility = on &
simulation_legend_border_visibility = off &
axis_label_visibility = on &
symbol_visibility = on &
border_line_type = solid &
border_thickness = 0.2 &
title_color = RED &
subtitle_color = GREEN &
haxis_label_color = BLACK &
vaxis_label_color = BLACK &
axis_numbers_color = BLUE &
grid_color = YELLOW &
defaults plt_attributes &

secondary_grid_color = NO_COLOR &
tic_color = NO_COLOR &
border_color = BLACK &
legend_border_color = NO_COLOR &
simulation_legend_border_color= NO_COLOR &
axis_color = BLACK &
scientific_notation = -5 , 5 &
decimal_places = 4 &
legend_placement = top_right &
simulation_legend_placement = top_left &
legend_fill = on &
simulation_legend_fill = off &
use_matlab = no &
legend_border_line_type = solid
Description:

grid_visibility On_off The GRID_VISIBILITY parameter provides
control over the visibility of the grid of a given
view.
secondary_grid_visibility On_off
tic_visibility On_off This parameter controls the default visibility of
axis tic marks for all subsequently created XY
plots.Tic marks are the small lines intersecting
the axis.
legend_visibility On_off This parameter controls the default visibility of
legends for all subsequently created XY plots.
simulation_legend_visibility On_off
legend_border_visibility On_off
simulation_legend_border_vi On_off
sibility
defaults 51

axis_label_visibility On_off This parameter controls the default visibility of
axis labels for all subsequently created XY
plots.
symbol_visibility On_off This parameter controls the default visibility of
xy_plot curve symbols for all subsequently
created XY plots.
border_line_type Line_style
border_thickness Real
title_color An Existing Color This parameter controls the default color of the
title for all subsequently created XY plots.
subtitle_color An Existing Color This parameter controls the default color of the
subtitle for all subsequently created XY plots.
haxis_label_color An Existing Color This parameter controls the default color of the
horizontal axis label for all subsequently
created XY plots.
vaxis_label_color An Existing Color This parameter controls the default color of the
vertical axis label for all subsequently created
XY plots.
axis_numbers_color An Existing Color This parameter controls the default color of the
axis numbers for all subsequently created XY
plots.
grid_color An Existing Color This parameter controls the default color of the
plot grid for all subsequently created XY plots.
secondary_grid_color An Existing Color
tic_color An Existing Color
border_color An Existing Color
legend_border_color An Existing Color
simulation_legend_border_co An Existing Color
lor
axis_color An Existing Color This parameter controls the default color of the
axis line for all subsequently created plot axes.
scientific_notation Integer This controls the lower and upper powers of ten
where the format for real numbers switches
from a fixed point format to scientific notation.
trailing_zeros On_off This controls whether or not trailing zeros are
printed for real numbers.

decimal_places Integer This controls how many places are written after
the decimal point for real numbers. The default
value is ten decimal places.
legend_placement Plot_legend_place This parameter controls the default placement
of legends for all subsequently created XY
plots. Legends may be placed at the top,bottom,
or right side of a plot.
simulation_legend_placement Plot_legend_place
legend_fill On_off
simulation_legend_fill On_off
legend_border_color An Existing Color
simulation_legend_border_co An Existing Color
lor
legend_border_line_type Line_style
simulation_legend_border_li Line_style
ne_type
graph_area Real Specifies the size and shape of the graph for all
subsequently created plots. The four graph area
values are the x, y coordinates of the lower left
and upper right corners of the graph.
title_font_size Real
subtitle_font_size Real
legend_font_size Real
strip_chart_font_size Real
zero_line On_off
1. The attributes set using this command will be used for any subsequently created plots. The
attributes that may be controlled are:
• VISIBILITY for grid lines, tic marks, legends, axis labels, and plot curve symbols.
• COLOR for the plot title, plot subtitle, horizontal and vertical axis labels, axis numbers, plot
grid, tic marks, and plot border.
• NUMERICAL_FORMAT for controlling the limits for displaying numerical values in scientific
notation, whether trailing zeroes are displayed, and how many decimal places to display.
• CONFIGURATION for the placement of legends and whether or not to display the zero line.
2. You may modify these attributes on an existing plot with the XY_PLOTSATTRIBUTES
command.
defaults 53
3. Symbols are the graphic markers on a curve identifying the data points.
4. The default values for the scientific_notation parameter are -4 and 5, meaning that any number
less than or equal to 1.0E-04 or greater than or equal to 1.0E+05will be written in scientific
notation.
5. When the trailing_zeros parameter is enabled, all the digits after the decimal point will be printed,
whether they are zero or not. When disabled, any zeros at the end of the fractional part of the
number will be dropped, leaving the last digit as a non-zero digit.
defaults prompting_level
The DEFAULTS PROMPTING_LEVEL command is used to set the amount of prompting the parser
does, and whether it echoes defaults.
Format:
level= prompting_level
echo_defaults = on/off
wildcard_messages = wldchar_msgs
Example:
defaults prompting_level &

level = required_only &
echo_defaults = on &
wildcard_messages = all
Description:

level Prompting_level Specifies which command parameters Adams/View will
prompt for when you give only the keywords for a
command.
echo_default On_off The ECHO_DEFAULTS parameter controls whether
Adams/View echoes the default parameter values it assumes
for a command.
wildcard_messages Wldcrd_msgs The WILDCARD_MESSGES parameter controls the
severity of messages output when using wildcards on FOR
commands.
1. The LEVEL parameter is used to specify which of the command parameters the parser will
prompt for when only the keywords for a command is given. If one or more parameter is specified
when the command is entered, the parser will prompt for required parameters only, regardless of
what the prompting level is set at.
defaults 55
2. The default for LEVEL is REQUIRED, which means that if only keywords are entered (no
parameters), then only the required parameters are prompted for. If FULL is specified, then all
parameters will be prompted for when only keywords are entered before the carriage return. If
DEFAULT_ONLY is specified then the required parameters and parameters which have default
values will be prompted for when only keywords are entered before the carriage return.
3. The ECHO_DEFAULTS parameter controls whether Adams/View echoes the default parameter
values it assumes for a command. The default is OFF. If you set it ON, Adams/View will list any
assumed defaults after you enter each command.
4. If you enter one or more parameter with the command, Adams/View will prompt for required
parameters only. The default is REQUIRED, which means that if you enter only keywords (no
parameters), then Adams/View prompts you for the required parameters only. If you specify
FULL, Adams/View will prompt for all parameters. If you specify DEFAULT_ONLY,
Adams/View will prompt for the required parameters and parameters which have default values.
5. For the echo_default parameter, the default is OFF. If you set it toON, Adams/View will list any
assumed defaults after you enter each command.
6. The default for wildcard_messages is ALL, which causes all messages generated by the use of
wildcards to be output. If you set it to ERRORS_ONLY, only error messages will be output.
NONE will suppress all messages generated by wildcards on FOR commands.
defaults report
defaults report
This command can be used to specify the default base font size to be used in reports.
Format:
defaults report
base_font_size= integer
Example:
defaults report &

base_font_size= 10
Description:

Base_font_size Integer Specify the default size of the font size to be used
in reports.
defaults 57
defaults units
defaults units
Allows you to set the default length, angle, force, mass, time units, as well as the conventions for
coordinates and orientation angles.
Format:
defaults units
force = force_units
mass= mass_units
length = linear_units
time = time_units
angle = angular_units
frequency = frequency_units
coordinate_system_type = coordinate_system_type
orientation_type = orientation_type
Example:
defaults units &

force = newton &
mass = kg &
length = meter &
time= second &
angle = degrees &
frequency = hz &
coordinate_system_type = cartesian &
orientation_type = space313
Description:

force Force_units Specifies the default force units
mass Mass_units Specifies the default mass units
length Linear_units Specifies the default length units
Time Time_units Specifies the default time units
defaults units
units_consistency_fac Real Specifies a conversion factor to make your force,

tor mass, length, and time units consistent
angle Angular_units Specifies the default angle units
frequency Frequency_units Specifies the default frequency units
coordinate_system_ty Coordinate_system_type Specifies a Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical
pe coordinate system as the default
orientation_type Rotation_sequence Specifies the axes and axis rotation order that
Adams/View should use when interpreting
orientation angles
1. Adams/View will use these units for any values you enter and any values it displays. Adams/View
also assumes these units for values read from or written to a file, unless you override them with
parameters on the file read or write command. Adams/View uses the coordinate and orientation
conventions to interpret values you enter for location and orientation parameters, such as
LOCATION and ORIENTATION on the 'MARKER CREATE' command.
2. You may select any force, mass, length, or time units you wish. For Adams results to be
meaningful, however, you or Adams/View must compute a factor such that the equation
Force = (Mass / UNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR) * Acceleration is
satisfied.
For example, if you use Newtons, kilograms, millimeters, and seconds,
UNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR is 1000. Adams documentation and Data Set Language
refer to this factor as GC, on the ACCGRAV card.
3. By default, Adams/View will compute the proper factor when you write an Adams data set. You
may, if you wish, specify it yourself using the 'FORCE CREATE BODY GRAVITATIONAL'
command.
4. Adams/View will use these units for any values you enter and any values it displays. Adams/View
also assumes these units for values read from or written to a file, unless you override them with
parameters on the file read or write command.
5. If you do not specify UNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR, or specify it as zero, Adams/View
will calculate it for you when it writes the Adams data set. You may select any force, mass, length,
or time units you wish. For Adams results to be meaningful, however, you or Adams/View must
compute a factor such that the Equation
Force = (Mass / UNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR) * Acceleration is
satisfied.
For example, if you use Newtons, kilograms, millimeters, and seconds,
UNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR is 1000. Adams documentation and Data Set Language
refer to this factor as GC, on the ACCGRAV card. The only case in which you should set
UNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR yourself is when you are using a set of units Adams/View
does not support. Otherwise, you should probably let Adams/View compute it for you.
defaults 59
defaults units
6. If you do use this command to set UNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR to a non-zero value,

Adams/View will write your value to an Adams data set. Adams/View will not change your value,
even if you later change your force, mass, length, or time units. If you explicitly set
UNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR, then later change your units, remember to update
UNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR.
7. When specifying a location, in order to specify the coordinate system, you provide three
coordinates with respect to the X, Y, and Z axes of a model, part, or marker. In a Cartesian
coordinate system, you specify x, y, and z. These are distances from the coordinate system origin
to the point along the X, Y, and Z axes. In a cylindrical coordinate system, you specify r, theta,
and z. R is the distance in the XY plane to the point. R is measured from the origin to the point
projected onto the XY plane. Theta is the angle in the XY plane to the point. Theta is measured
from the X axis to the line connecting the origin and the point projected into the XY plane. Theta
is positive towards the Y axis (i.e. the right-hand rule about the Z axis). Z is the distance to the
point along the Z axis.
In a spherical coordinate system, you specify rho, phi, theta. Rho is the distance from the origin
to the point. Phi is the angle between the Z axis and the line connecting the origin and the point.
Theta is the angle in the XY plane to the point, as in cylindrical coordinates. Distances are in the
length units you have chosen. Angles are in the angle units you have chosen.
8. Adams/View uses the three orientation angles to do three rotations about the axes of the
coordinate system involved. These rotations may be space-fixed or body-fixed, and in any
sequence. You specify the rotation sequence as three digits which determine which axes are
rotated about, and in what order.The numbers 1,2,3 correspond to X, Y, Z axes. A rotation order
of '312', for example, produces rotations about the Z, then X, then Y axes. If you select body-fixed
rotations, Adams/View applies the rotations about axes that move with the body as it rotates. The
first rotation produces a new set of axes. The second rotation is applied about one of the new axes,
producing another set of axes. The third rotation is applied about one of the 'new-new' axes, and
produces the final orientation. If you select space-fixed rotations, Adams/View applies the
rotations about axes that remain in their original orientation.
Example: body313
• 'body' indicates a progressive set of rotations.
• '313' indicates the axis rotation order is ZXZ.
• The first rotation will be about the existing Z-axis.
This produces new X and Y axes.
• The second rotation will be about the new X-axis.
This produces new Z and Y axes.
• The third rotation will be about the new Z-axis.
Example: space313
• 'space' indicates a fixed set of rotations.
• '313' indicates the axis rotation order is ZXZ.
• The first rotation will be about the original Z-axis.
defaults units
• The second rotation will be about the original X-axis.

• The third rotation will be about the original Z-axis.
defaults 61
defaults vector_plots
Format:
scale= real
display_torque = boolean
Example:
defaults vector_plots &

scale = 1.5 &
display_torque = yes
Description:

display_torque Yes/No Specifies whether the torque has to be displayed by
default in the vector plots
Scale Real Specifies the default scale to be used in the vector
plots
defaults view
defaults view
The DEFAULTS command is used to set various parameters of the system. The values assigned to these
parameters will be the default for commands that use them throughout the system. Some of these
parameters are not allowed to default in every case where they are used. If this is true, the user is
informed.
Format:
defaults view
view_name = name of an existing view
Example:
defaults view &

view_name = .gui.def_view.view_1
Description:

view_name An Existing View Name of an existing view
indicates "all displayed views".
2. There are eight standard views available when the Adams/View is started. These views are: front,
top, right, iso, bottom, left, and back. The first four of these standard views are displayed by
default when Adams/View is started. The user may create new views using the 'VIEW
MANAGEMENT CREATE' command, and save/restore their attributes.
3. If the VIEW_NAME parameter is used, the desired view can be identified by picking in the
window or entering the name from the keyboard. Typing the name is the only way to identify a
stored view that is not displayed.
display_attributes 1
display_attributes
display_attributes color constraint

The CONSTRAINT keyword indicates that you can specify a default color for all graphics associated
with a constraint.
Color set on a modeling entity will be enforced down the model hierarchy to any lower entities in the
hierarchy.
If an entity at a lower level has a color applied to it, and an entity above it in the model hierarchy has the
same attribute, the highest level entity's color will take precedence.
For example:
.model --------------- color = red
.part ------------ color = no_color
.marker ------- color = blue
The model's color attribute will be enforced on the entities below it, cancelling out the color attribute set
on the marker. Both, the part which has no color attribute and the marker's color, will be red.
Note: Adams/View will issue a warning message, reminding you that the attribute has been
stored, but the attribute from an entity at a higher level will take precedence.
In the example, if the attribute is removed from the model, the attribute stored with the marker will be
enforced.
You remove a color attribute from a database entity by setting its color to NO_COLOR.
.model --------------- color = no_color
The marker color will now be blue.
Format:

constraint_name= existing constraint
color= existing color
Example:
display_attributes color constraint &

color = violetred &
Description:

Constraint_name Existing constraint Specifies the constraint to be modified.
color Existing color Specifies the color the modeling entity should be drawn in.
1. You may identify constraint by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the constraint is not visible on the screen, you must type the name.
You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the constraint is displayed.
If constraint is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify constraint under another model, for instance, you may need
to enter the model and part names as well. For example, you may specify arc 'end' on part 'arm'
in model 'susp' by entering ".susp.arm.end".
If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the constraints available by default.
You must separate multiple constraint names by commas.
If the constraint is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
You need not separate multiple constraint picks by commas.
2. Adams/View allows you to specify the following colors amongst others for modeling entities:
BLACK, WHITE, RED, GREEN, BLUE, CYAN, MAGENTA, YELLOW, and NO_COLOR
Example 1: .
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- RED
Example 2:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- RED
Example 3:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- NO_COLOR
display_attributes color force

The FORCE keyword indicates that you can specify a default color for all graphics associated with a
constraint.
Color set on a modeling entity will by enforced down the model hierarchy, to any lower entities in the
hierarchy.
same attribute, the highest level entity's color will take precedence.
An example:
.model --------------- color = red
on the marker. Both the part, which has no color attribute, and the marker's color will be red.
enforced.
Format:

Example:
display_attributes color force &

constraint_name = force_2 &
color = violetred &
Description:

Constraint_name Existing constraint Specifies the force to be modified.
color Existing color Specifies the color the modeling entity should be drawn in.
1. You may identify the force by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the force is not visible on the screen, you must type the name.
You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the constraint is displayed.
If force is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you must
enter its full name. To identify force under another model, for instance, you may need to enter the
model and part names as well. For example, you may specify arc 'end' on part 'arm' in model 'susp'
by entering ".susp.arm.end". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the constraints available by
default.
You must separate multiple force names by commas.
If the force is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
You need not separate multiple force picks by commas.
2. Adams/View allows you to specify the following colors amongst others for modeling entities:
Example 1:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- RED
Example 2:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- RED
Example 3:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- NO_COLOR
display_attributes color geometry

The GEOMETRY keyword indicates that you can specify a default color for a geometry entity.
You can specify a "scope" for the color you select using the ENTITY_SCOPE parameter. This scope will
limit the color's application to: FILL_COLOR, EDGE_COLOR, OUTLINE_COLOR, or ALL_COLOR.
Color set on a modeling entity will by enforced down the model hierarchy to any lower entities in the
hierarchy.
same attribute, the highest level entity's color will take precedence. For example:
.model --------------- color = red
on the marker. Both, the part which has no color attribute and the marker's color, will be red.
enforced.
Format:

geometry_name= existing geometric entity
entity_scope= color_scope
Example:
display_attributes color geometry &

geometry_name = link_2 &
color = violetred &
entity_scope = fill_color
Color of link_2 will be VioletRed when it is shaded or viewed in the rendered mode.
Description:

geometry_name, Existing Geometry Specifies the geometry to be modified. You use
this parameter to identify the existing geometry to
be affected with this command.
color, Existing Color Specifies the color the modeling entity should be
drawn in.
entity_scope Fill_color, Edge_color, The ENTITY_SCOPE parameter is used to
Outline_color, Text_color, control how a color modification is to affect a
All_color particular graphic entity.
1. You may identify geometry by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the geometry is not visible on the screen, you must type the name.
You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the geometry is displayed.
If geometry is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify geometry under another model, for instance, you may need
in model 'susp' by entering ".susp.arm.end". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the geometrys
You must separate multiple geometry names by commas.
If the geometry is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
You need not separate multiple geometry picks by commas.
2. Adams/View allows you to specify the following colors, among others, for modeling entities:
Example 1:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- RED
Example 2:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- RED
Example 3:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- NO_COLOR
3. The legal values for this parameter are FILL_COLOR, EDGE_COLOR, OUTLINE_COLOR,
and ALL.
FILL_COLOR is the color of those areas of a graphic that can be shaded (they include sides of a
cylinders, frustums, boxes, etc.). The EDGE_COLOR is the color of the lines making up the
edges of the facets (or areas filled by the FILL_COLOR) of a graphic that can be shaded.
The OUTLINE_COLOR represents the color of the lines that make up those graphics that cannot
be shaded or filled, like an outline graphic statement consisting of two points or the coil of a
springdamper.
Finally, the ALL value indicates that all three entity types, FILL_COLOR, EDGE_COLOR, and
OUTLINE_COLOR will be affected by the color change.
The ENTITY_SCOPE parameter is optional and if not entered, will be set to FILL_COLOR.
display_attributes color marker

Allows you to control the color of graphic entities associated with a marker.
Format:

marker_name = an existing par
Example:
display_attributes color marker &

marker_name = part__1 &
color = BLUE
Description:

marker_name An Existing marker Specifies the marker to be modified. You use this parameter
to identify the existing marker to be affected with this
command.
COLOR An Existing Color Specifies the color the modeling entity should be drawn in.
1. The MARKER keyword indicates that you can specify a default color for all graphics associated
with a marker.
You can specify a "scope" for the color you select using the ENTITY_SCOPE parameter. This
scope will limit the color's application to: FILL_COLOR, EDGE_COLOR, OUTLINE_COLOR,
or ALL_COLOR.
Color set on a modeling entity will be enforced down the model hierarchy, to any lower entities
in the hierarchy.
If an entity at a lower level has a color applied to it, and an entity above it in the model hierarchy
has the same attribute, the highest level entity's color will take precedence.
An example:
.model --------------- color = red
The model's color attribute will be enforced on the entities below it, cancelling out the color
attribute set on the marker. Both the part, which has no color attribute, and the marker's color will
be red.
stored, but the attribute from an entity at a higher level will take precedence
In the example, if the attribute is removed from the model, the attribute stored with the marker
will be enforced.
2. You may identify a marker by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
letters MAR followed by the Adams data set marker ID number. For example, the name of Adams
MARKER/101 is MAR101. If you created the marker during preprocessing, you will have given
If a marker is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you
3. Adams/View allows you to specify the following colors for modeling.
entities: BLACK, WHITE, RED, GREEN, BLUE, CYAN, MAGENTA, YELLOW, and
NO_COLOR
Example 1:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- RED
Example 2:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- RED

Example 3:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- NO_COLOR
4. The legal values for the entity_scope parameter are FILL_COLOR, EDGE_COLOR,
OUTLINE_COLOR, and ALL.
cylinders, frustums, boxes, etc.) The EDGE_COLOR is the color of the lines making up the edges
of the facets (or areas filled by the FILL_COLOR) of a graphic that can be shaded.
springdamper.
Tips:
1. 1. If the part is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
2. You need not separate multiple part picks by commas.
display_attributes color model

Allows you to control the color of graphic entities associated with a model.
Format:

model_name = an existing model
entity_scope = color_scope
Example:
display_attributes color model &

model_name = crankshaft &
color = blue &
entity_scope = edge_color
Description:

model_name An Existing Model Specifies the model to be modified. You use this parameter to
identify the existing model to be affected with this command.
entity_scope Color_Scope The ENTITY_SCOPE parameter is used to control how a
color modification is to affect a particular graphic entity.
1. The MODEL keyword indicates that you can specify a default color for all graphics associated
with the model.
You can specify a "scope" for the color you select using the ENTITY_SCOPE parameter. This
scope will limit the color's application to: FILL_COLOR, EDGE_COLOR, OUTLINE_COLOR,
or ALL_COLOR.
Color set on a modeling entity will be enforced down the model hierarchy, to any lower entities
in the hierarchy.
If an entity at a lower level has a color applied to it, and an entity above it in the model hierarchy
has the same attribute, the highest level entity's color will take precedence.
For example:
.model --------------- color = red

The model's color attribute will be enforced on the entities below it, cancelling out the color
attribute set on the marker. Both the part, which has no color attribute, and the marker's color will
be red.
In the example, if the attribute is removed from the model, the attribute stored with the marker
will be enforced.
The marker color will now be blue
If the model is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it convenient
to type the name even if the model is displayed.
You must separate multiple model names by commas.
If the model is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
You need not separate multiple model picks by commas.
Example 1:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part---------------------- RED
Example 2:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part---------------------- RED
Example 3:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- NO_COLOR
OUTLINE_COLOR, and ALL.
edges of the facets (or areas filled by the FILL_COLOR) of a graphic that can be shaded.
The OUTLINE_COLOR represents the color of the lines that make up those graphics that can not
springdamper.
display_attributes color part

Allows you to control the color of graphic entities associated with a part.
Format:

part_name = an existing part
equation_name = an existing equ
Example:
display_attributes color part &

part_name = part__1 &
color = blue &
entity_scope = edge_color
Description:

model_name An Existing Part Specifies the part to be modified. You use this parameter to
identify the existing part to be affected with this command.
equation_name An Existing Equ Specifies the equation to be modified. You use this parameter
to identify the existing equation to be affected with this
command.
entity_scope Color_Scope The ENTITY_SCOPE parameter is used to control how a color
modification is to affect a particular graphic entity.
1. The PART keyword indicates that the color of the graphic components associated to a particular
part are to be affected by the current command. The color of the graphics associated to a part can
be affected all at once or individually (The smallest graphic entity that can be affected is that
defined by the Adams GRAPHICS statement). The scope of the color change to a particular
graphic entity can be controlled as well. The ENTITY_SCOPE can be set to the FILL_COLOR,
the EDGE_COLOR, the LINE_COLOR, or ALL.
The part or graphic entity is identified by the ID label associated to the Adams PART or
GRAPHICS statement respectively. The desired part or graphic is communicated to the
application either by entering the label from the keyboard or picking the particular graphic from
the terminal screen using the cursor (mouse).
2. You may identify a part by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
PAR followed by the Adams data set part ID number. For example, the name of Adams
PART/101 is PAR101. If you created the part during preprocessing, you will have given it a name
at that time.
If a part is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you must
3. You may identify an equation by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
Since equations do not have a geometric position, Adams/View displays equation icons at the
model origin. If the equation icon is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may
also find it convenient to type the name even if the equation icon is displayed.
If you created the equation by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the equation name is
the letters DIF followed by the Adams data set equation ID number. For example, the name of
Adams DIFF/101 is DIF101. If you created the equation during preprocessing, you will have
given it a name at that time.
If a equation is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not,
you must enter its full name. To identify a equation under a different model, for instance, you may
need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify equation 'fluid_volume'
the equations available by default.
You must separate multiple equation names by commas.
Example 1:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part---------------------- RED
Example 2: .
model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part---------------------- RED
Example 3:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- NO_COLOR
OUTLINE_COLOR, and ALL. FILL_COLOR is the color of those areas of a graphic that can be
shaded (they include sides of a cylinders, frustums, boxes, etc.). The EDGE_COLOR is the color
of the lines making up the edges of the facets (or areas filled by the FILL_COLOR) of a graphic
that can be shaded.
The OUTLINE_COLOR represents the color of the lines that make up those graphics that can not
springdamper.
Tips:
1. If the part is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
display_attributes icon_size constraint

Allows you to specify the size the Adams/View constraint icons will appear.
Format:

constraint_name = an existing constraint
Example:
display_attributes icon_size constraint &

constraint_name = .crankshaft.drivermotion.motion_r2 &
size_of_icons = 0.9
Description:

constraint_name An Existing Constraint Specifies the constraint to be modified. You use this
parameter to identify the existing constraint to be affected
with this command.
scale_of_icons Real Specifies a unit-less scale factor to be applied to the
current icon size.
size_of_icons Length Specifies the size, in modeling units, the Adams/View
icons will appear in.
1. You may set a specific size for icons in modeling units, or scale their present size with a unit-less
scale factor.
If no initial size is specified for Adams/View icons, the default size will be one modeling
LENGTH unit. For example, if the modeling units are K/M/S, a revolute joint icon will be one
meter in diameter.
When you specify an ICON_SCALE, a new size is calculated by multiplying the current size, by
the scale, and storing the product as the new ICON_SIZE.
If a model has an ICON_SIZE set, and a constraint under that model has a different ICON_SIZE,
the model's ICON_SIZE will take precedence.
For Example:
.model ---------------------- ICON_SIZE = .25 meters

.constraint-------------- ICON_SIZE = .125 meters
If the model has an ICON_SIZE of 0.0 set, and a constraint under the model has an ICON_SIZE
of .125, the constraint's ICON_SIZE will be used.
For Example:
.model ---------------------- ICON_SIZE = 0.0 meters
.constraint-------------- ICON_SIZE = .125 meters
If the constraint is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it
If you created the constraint by reading an Adams data set, the constraint name is the first three
letters of the Adams statement type followed by the Adams data set constraint ID number. For
example, the name of Adams JOINT/101 is JOI101. If you created the constraint during
preprocessing, you will have given it a name at that time.
If a constraint is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not,
To identify a constraint under a different model, for instance, you may need to enter the model
entering ".test.servo_motor". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the constraints available by
default.
For Example:
.part-------------------- SIZE_OF_ICONS = .125 meters
The part's icon will be 1.5 meters is size.
If the model has SIZE_OF_ICONS of set to 0.0 , and a part under that model has a
SIZE_OF_ICONS set to .125, the part's icon size will be used.
An Example:
The part's icon will be .125 meters is size.
Tips:
1. If the constraint is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
2. You need not separate multiple constraint picks by commas.
display_attributes icon_size force

Allows you to specify the size the Adams/View force icons will appear.
Format:

force_name = an existing constraint
Example:
display_attributes icon_size force &

force_name = .crankshaft.DriverMotion.motion_r2 &
size_of_icons = 0.9
Description:

force_name An Existing Force Specifies the force to be modified. You use this parameter to
identify the existing force to be affected with this command.
scale_of_icons Real Specifies a unit-less scale factor to apply to the current icon size.
size_of_icons Length Specifies the size, in modeling units, the Adams/View icons will
appear.
scale factor. If no initial size is specified for Adams/View icons, the default size will be one
modeling LENGTH unit. For example, if the modeling units are K/M/S, a translational force icon
will be one meter in length.
When you specify an ICON_SCALE, a new size is calculated by multipling the current size, by
If a model has an ICON_SIZE set, and a force under that model has a different ICON_SIZE, the
model's ICON_SIZE will take precedence.
For Example:
.force------------------- ICON_SIZE = .125 meters
The force's icon will be .25 meters is size.
If the model has an ICON_SIZE of 0.0 set, and a force under the model has a ICON_SIZE of .125,
the force's ICON_SIZE will be used.
For Example:
.force------------------- ICON_SIZE = .125 meters
The force's icon will be .125 meters is size.
2. You may identify a force by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the force is displayed.
If you created the force by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the force name is the first
three letters of the Adams statement followed by the Adams data set force ID number. For
example, the name of Adams SFORCE/101 is SFO101. If you created the force during
If a force is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify a force under a preprocessing model, for instance, you may
need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify the force named 'bumper'
from the model named 'test' by entering ".test.bumper". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list
the forces available by default.
5. When you set SIZE_OF_ICONS at the model level, all Adams/View icons used in creating a
If the model has a SIZE_OF_ICONS set, and a part under that model has a different
For Example:
For Example:
Tips:
1. If the force is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
2. You need not separate multiple force picks by commas.
display_attributes icon_size marker

Allows you to specify the size the Adams/View marker icon will appear in.
Format:

marker_name = an existing constraint
Example:
display_attributes icon_size marker &

marker_name = marker__1 &
size_of_icons = 0.9
Description:

marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies the marker to be modified. You use this parameter
command.
scale_of_icons Real Specifies a unit-less scale factor to be applied to the current
icon size.
size_of_icons Length Specifies the size, in modeling units, the Adams/View icons
will appear in.
scale factor.
LENGTH unit. For example, if the modeling units are K/M/S, a marker axes icon will have triad
legs of one meter in length.
If a part has an ICON_SIZE set, and a marker under that part has a different ICON_SIZE, the
part's ICON_SIZE will take precedence.
An Example:

.part -------------------- ICON_SIZE = .125 meters
.marker ---------------- ICON_SIZE = .2 meters
The marker's icon will be .125 meters is size.
If the model, and part have an ICON_SIZE of 0.0 set, and a marker under the part has a
ICON_SIZE of .125, the marker's ICON_SIZE will be used.
For Example:
.part -------------------- ICON_SIZE = 0.0 meters
.marker ---------------- ICON_SIZE = .2meters
The marker's icon will be .2 meters is size.
For Example:
model ---------------------- SIZE_OF_ICONS = .15 meters
part -------------------- SIZE_OF_ICONS = .125 meters
An Example:
.part -------------------- SIZE_OF_ICONS = .125 meters
Tips:
1. If the marker is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on it.
2. You need not separate multiple marker picks by commas.
display_attributes icon_size model

Allows you to specify the size all Adams/View icons in a model will appear in.
Format:

Example:
display_attributes icon_size model &

model_name = piston &
size_of_icons = 0.9
Description:

model_name An Existing Model Specifies the model to be modified. You use this parameter to
icon size.
will appear in.
scale factor.
When you set ICON_SIZE at the model level, all Adams/View icons used in creating a model will
use the size specified.
If the model has an ICON_SIZE set, and a part under that model has a different ICON_SIZE, the
model's ICONS_SIZE will take precedence.
For Example:
.part-------------------- ICON_SIZE = .125 meters
If the model has an ICON_SIZE of 0.0 set, and a part under that model has a ICON_SIZE of .125,
the part's ICON_SIZE will be used.
For Example:
associated with it.
For Example:
For Example:
Tips:
1. If the model is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
2. You need not separate multiple model picks by commas.
display_attributes icon_size part

Allows you to specify the size the Adams/View part icon will appear in.
Format:

Example:
display_attributes icon_size part &

part_name = piston &
size_of_icons = 0.9
Description:

part_name An Exisisting Part Specifies the part to be modified. You use this parameter to
icon size.
will appear in.
scale factor.
If a model has an ICON_SIZE set, and a part under that model has a different ICON_SIZE, the
model's ICON_SIZE will take precedence.
For Example:

If the model has an ICON_SIZE of 0.0 set, and a part under the model has an ICON_SIZE of .125,
the part's ICON_SIZE will be used.
For Example:
For Example:
For Example:

Tips:
associated with it.
display_attributes rendering_mode
This command specifies the rendering mode of individual or groups of graphic objects.
Format:
geometry_name = an existing geometric entity
type_of_geometry = geometry_type
render_mode = render_mode
Example:
display_attributes rendering_mode &

geometry_name = solid3 &
type_of_geometry = block &
render_mode = wireframe
Description:

geometry_name An Existing Geometric Entity Specifies the geometry to be modified. You use
this parameter to identify the existing geometry
to be affected with this command.
type_of_geometry Geometry_Types Specifies the type of geometry that is to have its
rendering mode modified.
render_mode Render_Modes The render mode is an attribute that is attached to
each of the specific graphic entities and works in
tandem with a view's RENDER attribute (see
below).
1. This render mode is an attribute that is attached to each of the specific graphic entities and works
in tandem with a view's RENDER attribute.
There are two possible values for the RENDERING_MODE parameter:
WIREFRAME - Graphic objects that have a WIREFRAME rendering mode will ALWAYS be
drawn as wireframe geometry, regardless of how views are rendered (wireframe, solid, or
shaded).
FILLED - Graphic objects that have a FILLED rendering mode will be drawn based upon the
view's RENDER parameter that the graphic is drawn in (wireframe, solids, shaded).
If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the geometrys available by default.
3. This parameter acts as a filter to decide which of the selected geometry objects will have their
The possible values are: ARC, BOX, FRUSTUM, SPRINGDAMPER, OUTLINE, or ALL. The
ARC setting includes both arc and circle geometry. The FRUSTUM setting includes both,
frustum and cylinder geometry.
4. Graphic objects that can have their rendering mode altered include: arcs, outlines, boxes, circles,
cylinders, frustums, and spring damper graphics.
The selection of graphic objects can be based on association to a particular analysis, part, or by
individual graphic name. When the rendering mode of a part is specified, all graphic objects fixed
to that part are drawn with the rendering mode of the part. Graphics that span parts can only be
selected by graphic name.
Adams/View supports WIREFRAME and FILLED rendering modes.
This command should not be confused with the VIEW MANAGEMENT... RENDER parameter.
The RENDER parameter in view control sets an attribute associated with a particular view. So,
if the view render mode is wireframe, all the graphics will be drawn in wireframe mode regardless
of the value of a specific graphic object's render mode attribute. However, if the view render
mode is set to SOLIDS or SHADED, then a specific graphic entity will be drawn in the mode
specified by the DISPLAY_ATTRIBUTES RENDER_MODE command. In other words, the
view RENDER parameter is an attribute of the view and the display_attribute render mode is an
attribute of the specific graphic element. Or, WIREFRAME is the dominant mode and regardless
of how it is set (either RENDER by view or RENDERING_MODE by graphic object).
Tips:
1. If the geometry is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
2. You need not separate multiple geometry picks by commas.
display_attributes scale force_graphics

The FORCE_GRAPHICS command indicates that all translational force graphics associated with a
specified analysis are to be scaled. The scale value will have a multiplicative effect on the current size
of the force graphics. For example, a scale value of 0.25 will make the force graphics appear one-fourth
as large. A scale value of 2.0 will make the force graphics appear twice as large.
Format:

analysis_name= existing analysis
scale= real
Example:
display_attributes scale force_graphics &

analaysis_name = analysis_1 &
scale = 2.0
Force graphics in the analysis ANALYSIS_1 will appear twice as large as they used to, once the above
command is executed.
Description:

analysis_name Existing Analysis This parameter specifies an analysis name.
scale Real The scale parameter is used to control the size of the marker,
force, or torque graphic symbols.
1. When Adams/View reads a graphics file (.GRA), a request file (.REQ), or a results file (.RES),
extension.
referring to an analysis name that already exists, quotes are not necessary. When processing any
command that requires an analysis name, the system will default to the default analysis name. The
command.
2. The scale value will have a multiplicative effect on the current size of the graphic symbols. For
example, a scale value of 0.25 will make the graphic symbol appear one-fourth as large. A scale
value of 2.0 will make the graphic symbol appear twice as large. The scale value is a real number
and must be greater than zero. This parameter is optional and if not entered will default to 1.0.
display_attributes scale torque_graphics

The TORQUE_GRAPHICS command indicates that all rotational force graphics associated with a
specified analysis are to be scaled. The scale value will have a multiplicative effect on the current size
of the rotational force graphic symbol. For example, a scale value of 0.25 will make the rotational force
graphic symbols appear one-fourth as large. A scale value of 2.0 will make the rotational force graphic
symbols appear twice as large.
Format:

scale= real
Example:
display_attributes scale torque_graphics &

analaysis_name = analysis_1 &
scale = 2.0
Torque graphic symbol in the analysis ANALYSIS_1 will appear twice as large as they used to, once the
above command is executed.
Description:

Analysis_name Existing Analysis This parameter specifies an analysis name.
Scale Real The scale parameter is used to control the size of marker, force,
or torque graphic symbols.
1. When Adams/View reads a graphics file (.GRA), a request file (.REQ), or a results file (.RES) an
analysis name is created. By default, the name of the analysis is the file name excluding the
extension.
change the default analysis name without reading in an analysis file, use the "defaults analysis"
command.
2. The scale value will have a multiplicative effect on the current size of the graphic symbols. For
example, a scale value of 0.25 will make the graphic symbol appear one-fourth as large. A scale
value of 2.0 will make the graphic symbol appear twice as large. The scale value is a real number
and must be greater than zero. This parameter is optional and if not entered, will default to 1.0.
display_attributes visibility constraint

Allows you to set the visibility of an existing constraint in Adams/View.
Format:

constraint _name = an existing constraint
name_visibility = on_off_with_toggle
Description:

constraint _name An Existing Constraint Specifies the constraint to be modified. You use this
parameter toidentify the existing constraint to be affected
with this command.
name_visibility On_off_with_toggle The NAME_VISIBILITY parameter provides control
over the visibility of the view name displayed at the top
center position of a given view.
1. When you set an attribute on a modeling entity, that attribute gets stored with the entity in the
database. There are rules for the application of these attributes.
Visibility applied to any modeling entity will be enforced down the modeling hierarchy in the
following fashion.
A visibility attribute setting of ON, allows that entity to be drawn.
This means if you set visibility=on for a marker, but its parent part has a visibility setting of off,
the marker will not be visible.
A visibility setting of OFF, turns that entity's visibility off and, has the effect of turning visibility
off for all modeling entities below it.
For Example:
.model ---------------- visibility = on
.part ------------- visibility = off
.marker -------- visibility = on
The marker will not be visible because the part is not visible.
By default, all entities have a visibility attribute of ON, when created.
To identify a constraint under a different model, for instance, you may need to enter the model
entering ".test.servo_motor". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the constraints available by
default.
parts, are to be drawn in an Adams/View viewport.
The legal values for this parameter are: ON, OFF, and TOGGLE. ON will make the desired entity
visible. OFF will make the desired entity invisible. TOGGLE will take the current state of an
entities visibility and reverse it.
4. The legal values of the name_visibility parameter are ON and OFF. This is an optional parameter
and if not entered, the name will be visible (i.e. will be ON).
Note that if the visibility of the view name is turned off, the only indication that a view is "active"
will be the color of the viewport border. This would be a problem on a black and white monitor.
Tips:
1. If the constraint is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
2. You need not separate multiple constraint picks by commas.
display_attributes visibility force

Allows you to set the visibility of an existing force in Adams/View.
Format:

force_name = an existing force
Example:
display_attributes visibility force &

force_name = force__1 &
visibility = on &
name_visibility = on
Description:

force_name An Existing Force Specifies the force to be modified. You use this parameter to
identify the existing force to be affected with this command.
name_visibility On_off_with_toggle The NAME_VISIBILITY parameter provides control over
the visibility of the view name displayed at the top center
Visibility applied to any modeling entity will be enforced down the modeling hierarchy, in the
following fashion.
This means if you set visibility on for a marker, but its parent part has a visibility setting of off,
A visibility setting of OFF, turns that entity's visibility off and, has the effect of turning visibility
For Example:
You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the force is displayed.
Tips:
1. If the force is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
2. You need not separate multiple force picks by commas.
display_attributes visibility geometry

Allows you to set the visibility of an existing geometric entity in Adams/View.
Format:

Example:
display_attributes visibility geometry &

geometry_name = solid3 &
visibility = on
Description:

1. The GEOMETRY keyword indicates that you can specify the visibility for a geometry entity.
When you set an attribute on a modeling entity, that attribute gets stored with the entity in the
Visibility applied to any modeling entity will be enforced down the modeling hierarchy, in the
following fashion.
A visibility setting of OFF, turns that entity's visibility off and has the effect of turning visibility
For Example:
If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the geometrys available by default.
entity’s visibility and reverse it.
Tips:
1. If the geometry is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
display_attributes visibility marker

Allows you to set the visibility of an existing marker in Adams/View.
Format:

marker_name = an existing marker
Example:
display_attributes visibility marker &

marker_name = marker_1 &
visibility = on &
Description:

marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies the marker to be modified. You use this parameter
command.
1. The MARKER keyword is used to control whether a particular (or group of) markers(s) are to be
drawn in an Adams/View viewport. The visibility of markers can be set using this command. The
scope of a particular marker visibility change can be controlled. This means that a single visibility
change can affect all markers in a particular analysis, on a particular part, or marker visibility can
be controlled individually.
Tips:
1. If the marker is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on it.
display_attributes visibility model

Allows you to set the visibility of an existing model in Adams/View.
Format:

Example:
display_attributes visibility model &

visibility = on &
Description:

model_name An Existing Model Specifies the model to be modified. You
use this parameter to identify the existing
model to be affected with this command.
visibility On_Off_With_Toggle Specifies the visibility of graphic entities.
name_visibility On_Off_With_Toggle The NAME_VISIBILITY parameter
provides control over the visibility of the
view name displayed at the top center
Visibility applied to any modeling entity will be enforced down the modeling hierarchy in the
following fashion.
A visibility setting of OFF, turns that entity's visibility off and has the effect of turning visibility
An Example:
If the model is not visible on the screen, you must type the name.
You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the model is displayed.
associated with it.
display_attributes visibility part

Allows you to set the visibility of an existing part in Adams/View.
Format:

Example:
display_attributes visibility part &

visibility = on &
Description:

part_name An Existing Part Specifies the part to be modified. You use this parameter to
equation_name An Existing Equ Specifies the equation to be modified.You use this
parameter to identify the existing equation to be affected
with this command.
1. The PART keyword indicates that the visibility of the graphic components associated to a
particular part are to be affected by the current command. The visibility of the graphics associated
to a part can only be affected all at once (not individually).
The part is identified by the ID label associated to the Adams PART statement. The desired part
is communicated to the application either by entering the label from the keyboard or picking the
particular graphic from the terminal screen using the cursor (mouse).
at that time.
also find it convenient to type the name even if the equation icon is displayed.
If you created the equation by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the equation name is the
letters DIF followed by the Adams data set equation ID number. For example, the name of Adams
DIFF/101 is DIF101. If you created the equation during preprocessing, you will have given it a
name at that time.
If a equation is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify a equation under a different model, for instance, you may
need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify equation 'fluid_volume'
the equations available by default.
You must separate multiple equation names by commas.
If the equation is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
You need not separate multiple equation picks by commas.
Tips:
associated with it.
display_attributes visibility plot

This command allows the user to control the visibility of objects on an XY plot. These objects include
notes, grid_lines, tic_marks, legend, axis_labels, and symbols. By changing the visibility of these
objects, you can alter the appearance of the plot without deleting them.
Format:

plot_name = an existing plot
grid_lines = on /off
tic_marks = on/ off
legend = on / off
axis_labels = on /off
symbol = on / off
Example:
display_attributes visibility plot &

plot_name = plot_1 &
grid_lines = on &
tic_marks = on &
legend = off &
axis_labels = on &
symbol = off
Description:

plot_name An Existing Plot A plot name is a string of characters that identifies a plot
grid_lines On_off This parameter controls the visibility of the plot grid lines
tic_marks On_off This parameter controls the visibility of axis tic marks
legend On_off This parameter controls the visibility of the XY plot legend
axis_labels On_off This parameter allows the visibility of the axis labels to be turned ON
or OFF
symbol On_off This parameter controls the visibility of xy_plot curve symbols
1. Plot names are assigned when plots are created. After a plot has been created, it may be
referenced by its name until it is deleted. A plot may NOT have the same name as another plot.
A plot_name may be arbitrarily long and a combination of letters of the alphabet and numbers
2. Grid lines are a set of vertical and horizontal lines that are extensions of the tic marks on the
vertical and horizontal axes. Grid lines provide for more accurate interpretation of the data on an
XY plot. ON indicates that the grid lines will be visible, OFF indicates that the grid lines will be
invisible. This parameter is optional and if not entered, grid lines will be displayed on the xy_plot.
3. Tic marks are the small lines intersecting the axis. ON, the default, indicates that the tic marks
will be visible; OFF indicates that the tic marks will be invisible.
4. The XY plot legend displays a label beside a key describing that curve. The label will be the
Adams request statement comment, if one is found. If no request comment is found, a label is
created by concatenating the data specified in the haxis_data and vaxis_data parameters that
comprise that curve. The key will look like the curve with respect to color, line type, and line
thickness. The plot legend is displayed at the top of the XY plot template. This parameter is
optional and ON (the default) indicates that the legend will be visible, OFF indicates that the
legend will be invisible.
5. For the axis_labels parameter, ON indicates that the labels are to be visible; OFF indicates that
the labels are to be invisible. The vertical and horizontal axis labels are controlled by this
parameter. This parameter is optional and if not entered, axis_labels will be displayed on the
xy_plot.
6. Symbols are the graphic markers on a curve, identifying the data points. ON, the default, indicates
that the symbols on a particular curve will be visible, OFF indicates that the symbols will be
invisible.
else 1
else
Allows you to use the IF, ELSE, ELSEIF, and END commands to execute a group of commands
conditionally. The execution of commands bracketed by IF and END depends on the value of an
expression.
You can use the IF command with or without the ELSE command.
Format:
else
if condition= (expression)...end
if condition= (expression)...else...end
Example:
if condition=(DB_EXISTS ("MAR1"))
marker modify marker=mar1 location=2,0,0
else
marker create marker=mar1 location=2,0,0
end
In the above example, if the marker MAR1 exists, Adams/View modifies its location. If the marker does
not exist, Adams/View creates it and sets its location.
1. The question-mark/colon (?:) operator, used in a conditional expression, replaces an IF/ELSE
command that distinguishes one of two values. The expression consists of three parts: a condition
whose truth determines which value is selected, and two expressions for the values.
condition expression ? expression a : expression b
When evaluated, the conditional operator takes on one of the two values. The expression that
comes before the question-mark is interpreted as boolean-valued. If it is true (non-zero), then
expression a is used as the value of the conditional operator, otherwise expression b is used as the
value.
For example, consider the commands below:
if condition = (variable_a < variable_b)
variable set variable = variable_min real = (EVAL(variable_a))
else
variable set variable = variable_min real = (EVAL(variable_b))
end
This can be expressed more concisely by using a ?: conditional operator:
variable set variable = variable_min &
real = (EVAL((variable_a < variable_b)? variable_a :
variable_b))
elseif 1
elseif
expression.
You can nest any combination of looping (FOR/END, WHILE/END) and conditional constructs
(IF/ELSEIF/ELSE/END).
Note: As with all Adams/View commands, you can use the IF, ELSE, ELSEIF, and END
commands on the command line, in macros, and in command files.
Format:
elseif
if condition= (expression)
elseif condition= (expression)
else
(optional)
....
end
Example:
! Bodies
variable create variable=object_type string=(eval(DB_TYPE(.MDI.obj)))
if condition=(object_type == "marker")
interface command_builder command="marker modify marker" initial=(.MDI.obj)
elseif condition=(object_type == "point")
interface dialog display dialog=.gui.main_objecttable parameter="Points"
elseif condition=(object_type == "flexible_body")
interface dialog display dialog=.gui.flx_dia_panel parameter=(.MDI.obj)
! Constraints - complex joints
elseif condition=(object_type == "coupler" )
interface dialog display dialog=.gui.coupler_cremod parameter=(.MDI.obj)
elseif condition=(object_type == "gear" )
interface command_builder command="constraint modify complex_joint gear"
initial=(.MDI.obj)
! Constraints - Higher Pair contact

elseif condition=(object_type == "curve_curve" )
interface command_builder command="constraint modify higher_pair_contact
curve_curve" init=(.MDI.obj)
elseif condition=(object_type == "point_curve" )
point_curve" init=(.MDI.obj)
end
The above example illustrates how to use ELSEIF to determine the type of object and then perform an
operation on the object, based on the object's type. The example assumes that an Adams/View variable
named .mdi.org exists and its type is database object.
Description:

Condition Expression If the expression evaluates to a non-zero value,
Adams/View executes the commands following the IF or
ELSEIF command up to the ELSE, when present, or the
END, if you do not use the ELSE. If the expression
evaluates to zero and you used ELSE, Adams/View
executes the commands between the ELSE and the END
commands.
Tips:
1. You can have any number of ELSEIF CONDITION commands.
value.
else
end
variable_b))
end 1
end
expression.
Note: As with all Adams/View commands, you can use the IF, ELSE, ELSEIF, and END
commands on the command line, in macros, and in command files.
Format:
end
elseif condition= (expression)
else
(optional)
end
Example:
! Bodies
variable create variable=object_type string=(eval(DB_TYPE(.MDI.obj)))
if condition=(object_type == "marker")
interface command_builder command="marker modify marker" initial=(.MDI.obj)
elseif condition=(object_type == "point")
interface dialog display dialog=.gui.main_objecttable parameter="Points"
elseif condition=(object_type == "flexible_body")
interface dialog display dialog=.gui.flx_dia_panel parameter=(.MDI.obj)
! Constraints - complex joints
elseif condition=(object_type == "coupler" )
interface dialog display dialog=.gui.coupler_cremod parameter=(.MDI.obj)
elseif condition=(object_type == "gear" )
interface command_builder command="constraint modify complex_joint gear"
initial=(.MDI.obj)
! Constraints - Higher Pair contact
elseif condition=(object_type == "curve_curve" )
curve_curve" init=(.MDI.obj)
elseif condition=(object_type == "point_curve" )
point_curve" init=(.MDI.obj)
end
The above example illustrates how to use ELSEIF to determine the type of object and then perform an
operation on the object based on the object's type. The example assumes that an Adams/View variable
named .mdi.org exists and its type is database object.
entity 1
entity
entity attributes
entity attributes
Allows you to modify the attributes of an entity in the model database.
The display attributes of the entities in the model database like icon size, visibility, name_visibility,
transparency, color, line properties, and dependent properties are edited using this command.
Format:
entity attributes
entity_name = an existing entity
type_filter = ent
expr_visibility = integer
transparency = integer
lod = integer
color = an_exisitng_color
line_thickness = real
line_type = line_style
Example:
entity attributes &

entity_name = .copy_of_model.pendulum &
type_filter = part &
size_of_icons = 20&
visibility = on &
name_visibility = on &
transparency = 50 &
lod = 100 &
color = .colors.CYAN &
entity 3
entity attributes
entity attributes &

entity_scope = all_color &
line_thickness = .1 &
line_type = dotdash &
active = on &
Description:

entity_name An Existing Entity Specifies the name of an existing
entity
type_filter Ent Specifies the types of objects allowed
size_of_icons Length Specifies the size of icon in modeling
units
scale_of_icons Real Specifies unit-less scale factor for
existing size of icons
expr_visibility Integer
visibility On_off_with_toggle Specifies the visibility of graphic
icons
name_visibility On_off_with_toggle Specifies the visibility of the entity
names
transparency Integer Specifies the transparency level for
graphic entities
lod Integer Specifies the level of details for shells
color An_exisitng_color Specifies the color of the modeling
entities
entity_scope Color_scope Specifies the control of color
modification for graphic entity
line_thickness Real Specifies the line thickness for entity
outline
line_type Line_style Specifies the line type for a curve
active On_off_no_opinion Specifies whether or not the element is
active
dependents_active On_off_no_opinion Specifies the dependent element’s
active status
entity attributes
1. The ‘entity_name’ specifies any existing database entity. You may identify a database entity by
typing its name or by picking it from the screen. If the database entity is not visible on the screen,
you must type the name. You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the database
entity is displayed. If you created the database entity by reading an Adams data set or graphics
file, the database entity name is the first three letters of the Adams object, followed by the Adams
data set database entity ID number. For example, the name of ADAMS PART/101 is PAR101.
If you created the database entity during preprocessing, you will have given it a name at that time.
If the database entity is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it
is not, you must enter its full name. For example, to identify a part under an analysis, you may
need to enter the analysis name as well. You may specify the part named par101 from the analysis
named test by entering "/test/par101". If you type a "?", Adams/Adams/View will list the database
entities available by default. You must separate multiple database entity names by commas. If the
database entity is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
graphics associated with it. You need not separate multiple database entity picks by commas.
2. The ‘type_filter’ specifies the type of objects allowed. When specifying the objects for this
operation a wild cards can be used, which may result in too many objects being found. For
example, if all the parts for model MOD1 are desired, specifying .MOD1.* will get not only the
parts, but all children of the model, like joints, forces, etc. Using the parameter
TYPE_FILTER=part will result in only the parts being processed by this command.
3. Size of icons specifies the size, in modeling units, the Adams/View icons will appear in. If no
initial size is specified for Adams/View icons, the default size will be one modeling LENGTH
unit. For example, if the modeling units are K/M/S, a part axes icon will have triad legs of one
meter in length. When you set SIZE_OF_ICONS at the model level, all Adams/View icons used
in creating a model will use the size specified. If the model has an SIZE_OF_ICONS set, and a
part under that model has a different SIZE_OF_ICONS, the model's ICONS_SIZE will take
precedence. For Example:
For Example:
4. Scale of icons specifies a unit-less scale factor to apply to the current icon size.If no initial size is
specified for Adams/View icons, the default size will be one modeling LENGTH unit. For
example, if the modeling unitsare K/M/S, a part axes icon will have triad legs of one meter in
length. When you specify SCALE_OF_ICONS, a new size is calculated by multipling the current
size, by the scale, and storing the product as the new ICON_SIZE.
entity 5
entity attributes
5. Visibility specifies the visibility of graphic entities. The visibility parameter is used to control
whether graphic entities, such as markers, joints, and parts, are to be drawn in an Adams/View
viewport. The legal values for this parameter are: ON, OFF, and TOGGLE. ON will make the
desired entity visible. OFF will make the desired entity invisible. TOGGLE will take the current
state of an entity’s visibility and reverse it.
6. The NAME_VISIBILITY parameter provides control over the visibility of the view name
displayed at the top center position of a given view. The legal values of this parameter are ON and
OFF. This is an optional parameter and if not entered, the name will be visible (i.e. will be ON).
will be the color of the viewport border. This could be a problem on a black and white monitor.
7. The ‘transparency’ sets the level of transparency of a graphic entity. The legal values range from
0 to 100, where a value of 100 will make the graphic entity fully transparent. The ‘lod’ gives the
level of details for a shell object. The range of values is from 0 to 100.
8. The color specifies the color the modeling entity should be drawn in. Adams/View allows you to
specify the following colors for modeling entities: BLACK, WHITE, RED, GREEN, BLUE,
CYAN, MAGENTA, YELLOW, and NO_COLOR Specifying 'NO_COLOR' for a modeling
entity, instructs Adams/View to use the default color for this entity, if there is no color present in
its parent modeling entity.
Example 1:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part---------------------- RED
Example 2:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part---------------------- RED
Example 3:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part---------------------- NO_COLOR
9. The ENTITY_SCOPE parameter is used to control how a color modification is to affect a
particular graphic entity. The legal values for this parameter are FILL_COLOR, EDGE_COLOR,
shaded (they include sides of a cylinders, frustums, boxes, etc.). The EDGE_COLOR is the color
that can be shaded. The OUTLINE_COLOR represents the color of the lines that make up those
entity attributes
graphics that cannot be shaded or filled, like an outline graphic statement consisting of two points
or the coil of a springdamper. Finally, the ALL value indicates that all three entity types,
FILL_COLOR, EDGE_COLOR, and OUTLINE_COLOR will be affected by the color change.
10. The line thickness specifies the thickness of the line, whereas, the ‘line type’ parameter allows the
selection of the line type for a curve. The line type describes how the line will look when
displayed on a plot. Adams/View supports solid, dash, dotdash, and dot.
Line Type Appearance
solid _______________
dash _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
dotdash . _ . _ . _ . _
dot . . . . . . . .
ACTIVE=YES on the marker, after setting activation on the part. The DEPENDENTS_ACTIVE
parameter acts in the same fashion, but sets the ACTIVE attribute for the dependents all the way
down the dependency chain. For example, if you execute the following command:
MAR2), then JOI1 will be deactivated. Also, if the joint JOI1 is referenced in a request function,
or if the I marker is referenced by a request, then the request will be deactivated. Propagation of
activation status through groups is as if each element were to have its activation status changed
indvidually.
• Group
• Part
• Marker
• Geometry
• Constraints
• Forces
• Data Elements
• Output Control
12. EXPR_ACTIVE allows you to set the activity of the group using an integer value, which allows
parameterization. Adams/View at this time does not allow expressions when specifying option
lists. To allow the activity of a group to be set parametrically, the parameter EXPR_ACTIVE was
added to the GROUP CREATE and GROUP MODIFY commands. This parameter takes an
integer value. If the value is not set, either because the parameter was never used, or it was unset
entity 7
entity attributes
with the (none) expression, then the standard activity rules apply. If the EXPR_ACTIVE is set to
an expression that evaluates to zero (FALSE), the objects in the group will be in active (and will
not be included by Adams/Solver in any simulation). If the value is the default or non-zero
(TRUE), then the objects will be active (and will be included in simulations).
entity copy
entity copy
Allows you to copy the entities from a model database.
The entities in the model database like system_defaults, gui, sim_preferences, colors, icons, MDI,
SELECT_LIST, materials, VISIBILITY_LIST, model and plots can be copied as a new entity.
Format:
entity copy
new_entity_name = a new entity
Example:
entity copy &

entity_name = model_1 &
new_entity_name = copy_of_model
Description:

entity_name An Existing Entity Specifies the name of an existing entity
new_entity_name A New Entity Specifies a new name for an existing entity
data set database entity ID number. For example, the name of Adams PART/101 is PAR101. If
you created the database entity during preprocessing, you will have given it a name at that time.
If the database entity is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it
is not, you must enter its full name. For example, to identify a part under an analysis, you may
need to enter the analysis name as well. You may specify the part named par101 from the analysis
named test by entering "/test/par101". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the database entities
available by default. You must separate multiple database entity names by commas. If the
2. The ‘new_entity_name’ is the name of a new entity to which the existing entity is copied.
entity 9
entity delete
entity delete
Allows you to delete the entity in the model database.
The entities in the model database like parts, joints, forces, markers, etc. can be deleted by using this
command applying a type filter as needsed
Format:
entity delete
type_filter = ent
Example:
entity delete &

entity_name = pendulum &
type_filter = part
Description:

file, the database entity name is the first three letters of the Adams object, followed by the
ADAMS data set database entity ID number. For example, the name of Adams PART/101 is
PAR101. If you created the database entity during preprocessing, you will have given it a name
at that time. If the database entity is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its
name. If it is not, you must enter its full name. For example, to identify a part under an analysis,
you may need to enter the analysis name as well. You may specify the part named par101 from
the analysis named test by entering "/test/par101". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the
database entities available by default. You must separate multiple database entity names by
commas. If the database entity is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on
any of the graphics associated with it. You need not separate multiple database entity picks by
commas.
entity delete
2. The ‘type_filter’ specify the type of objects allowed. When specifying the objects for this
entity 11
entity modify
entity modify
Allows you to modify the entity in the model database.
The entities in the model database like parts, joints, simulation, measures, etc. can be modified or
renamed by using this command.
Format:
entity modify
new_entity_name = a new entity
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
Example:
entity modify &

entity_name = .model_1.PART_3 &
new_entity_name = pendulum &
adams_id = 3 &
comments = simple_pendulum
Description:

new_entity_name A New Entity Specifies a new name for an existing entity
Adams database
comments String Specifies comments on the element, if any
1. The ‘entity_name’ specifies any existing database entities. You may identify a database entity by
data set database entity ID number. For example, the name of Adams Part/101 is PAR101. If you
created the database entity during preprocessing, you will have given it a name at that time. If the
entity modify
database entity is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not,
you must enter its full name. For example, to identify a part under an analysis, you may need to
enter the analysis name as well. You may specify the part named par101 from the analysis named
test by entering "/test/par101". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the database entities
available by default. You must separate multiple database entity names by commas. If the
2. The ‘new_entity_name’ will rename the existing entity.
3. The ‘adams_id’ specifies an integer used to identify this element in the Adams data file. When
you use the FILE ADAMS_DATA_SET WRITE command, Adams/View writes an Adams data
4. The parameter ‘comments’ specifies comments for the object being created or modified. When an
Adams/Solver data file (.adm) is read into Adams/View, all comments associated with a statement
(from the end of the previous statement through the end of the current statement) are stored with
the object. Comments in the data file can be associated with model. These comments must follow
the title statement and be followed by the comment 'END OF MODEL COMMENTS'. This string
must be uppercase. When an Adams/Solver data file is written, the comments for an object are
written before the statement corresponding to the object.
executive_control 1
executive_control
executive_control attributes sensor

Allows you to change the color and visibility of a sensor icon.
Format:

Sensor_name = existing sensor
Visbility = on/off/no_opinion/toggle
Color = an existing color
Active = on/off/no_opinion/toggle
Dependents_active = on/off/no_opinion/toggle
Example:
Executive_control attributes sensor &

Sensor_name = SENSOR_1 &
Visbility = on &
Color = RED &
Active = on &
Dependents_active = off
Description:

Sensor_name Existing sensor name Specifies an existing sensor.
Visibility On/off/no_opinion/toggle Specifies the visibility of graphic entities.
Color Existing color Specifies the color the modeling entity should
be drawn in.
Active On/off/no_opinion/toggle When you set ACTIVE=NO, that element is
written to the data set as a comment.
Dependents_active On/off/no_opinion/toggle Sets the active attributes for the dependents,
all the way down the dependency chain.
1. You may identify a sensor by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
executive_control 3
Since sensors do not have a geometric position, Adams/View displays sensor icons at or near the
model origin. If the sensor icon is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may
also find it convenient to type the name even if the sensor icon is displayed.
If you created the sensor by reading an Adams data set, the sensor name is the letters SEN
followed by the Adams data set sensor ID number. The name of Adams SENSOR/101 is SEN101,
for example. If you created the sensor during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that time.
If a sensor is owned by the default model, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is
not, you must enter its full name. To identify a sensor under a different model, for instance, you
may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify sensor
'fluid_volume_limit' from model 'hydro' by entering ".hydro.fluid_volume_limit'". If you type a
"?", Adams/View will list the sensor available by default.
You must separate multiple sensor names by commas.
If the sensor is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
You need not separate multiple sensor picks by commas.
Example 1: .model -------------------------NO_COLOR .part
---------------------- RED .geometry(circle) ------- NO_COLOR
---------------------- RED .geometry(circle) ------- BLUE
---------------------- NO_COLOR .geometry(circle) ------- BLUE
4. When you set the ACTIVE attribute on an object, you are also setting it on the children of the
object. If you set ACTIVE=NO on a part, but wish for a marker on that part to be on, then you
must explicitly set ACTIVE=YES on the marker, after setting activation on the part.
following command:
• Group
• Part
• Marker
• Geometry
• Constraints
• Forces
• Data Elements
• Output Control
executive_control 5
executive_control copy sensor

Allows you to copy a sensor.
Format:

sensor_name = Name of existing sensor
sew_sensor_name = Name of new sensor
Example:
executive_control copy sensor &

sensor_name = SENSOR_1 &
sew_sensor_name = My_Copied_Sensor
Description:

Sensor_name Existing sensor name Specifies the sensor to be copied
New_sensor_name Name of new sensor Specifies the name of the new sensor. You may use
this name later to refer to this sensor.
followed by the Adams data set sensor ID number. For example, the name of Adams
SENSOR/101 is SEN101. If you created the sensor during preprocessing, you will have given it
a name at that time.
If a sensor is owned by the default model, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is
associated with it.
executive_control 7
executive_control create sensor

Allows you to create a sensor. You may reverse this creation at a later time with an UNDO command.
Sensors are contained in a model. Before creating sensors, you must use the 'MODEL CREATE'
command to create a model.
A SENSOR monitors the Adams simulation for a user-defined event and effects a set of simulation
controls when the event occurs. The simulation controls and modifies the integration and the output step
sizes, to output additional diagnostic information, and to alter the simulation end time.
You define the event by creating a function and comparing it against a given value. The function the
SENSOR uses may depend on distance, velocity, acceleration, and force between markers, on user-
defined variables, and on simulation time. Adams evaluates the function after every successful
integration step when doing dynamic analysis and after every successful solution step when doing other
types of analysis. To define the function, use a FUNCTION expression or a user-written subroutine.
Format:

sensor_name= String
adams_id = geom._id
comments = string
compare = GE/EQ/LE
codgen = on/off
dt= real
halt = on/off
bisection= real
time_error= real
value= real
error = real
angular_value= real
angular_error= real
print= on/off
restart= on/off
return= on/off
stepsize= real
yydump= on/off
function= Function

user_function= real
routine= string
evaluate= Run time function
user_evaluate= real
evaluate_routine= string
Example:
executive_control create sensor &

sensor_name = MY_SENSOR &
function = "1E2+3.4+6" &
comments = "Example Sensor" &
compare = ge &
codgen = on &
halt = on &
value = 50.9
Description:

sensor_name String Specifies the name of the new sensor. You may use this
name later to refer to this sensor.
Adams data file.
modified.
compare GE, EQ, LE Specifies what kind of comparison is to be made to initiate
the action by the SENSOR.
codgen ON/OFF Specifies that Adams is to generate a new pivot sequence for
matrix factorization when the event Adams is sensing has
the specified relationship to VALUE.
Dt Real Specifies that the time between consecutive output steps
should be redefined. This is done when Adams first senses
that the FUNCTION specified has the same relationship as
specified to VALUE. Adams uses this value until it is
changed.
executive_control 9

halt On/OFF Specifies that execution should be terminated when the
FUNCTION that Adams is sensing, has the specified
relationship to VALUE.
value Real Specifies the non-angular VALUE you want to relate to the
FUNCTION that Adams is sensing.
error Real Specifies the absolute non-angular value of allowable error
between VALUE and the value of the FUNCTION that
Adams is sensing.
angular_value Real Specifies the angular VALUE you want to relate to the
angular_error Real Specifies the absolute angular value of allowable error
Adams is sensing.
Print On/OFF Specifies that Adams should write data to the request,
graphics, and output files when the FUNCTION that Adams
is sensing, has the specified relationship to VALUE.
restart On/OFF Specifies that Adams should restart the integration when the
FUNCTION that Adams is sensing has the specified
relationship to VALUE. Adams reinitializes the integration
step size to HINIT and reduces the integration order to one.
return On/OFF Specifies that Adams should stop the simulation and return
to the command level, when the FUNCTION that Adams is
sensing has the specified relationship to VALUE.
stepsize Real Specifies that Adams should redefine the trial integration
step size when the FUNCTION that Adams is sensing has
the specified relationship to VALUE. This change is
temporary and lasts only for the next step. If this step size is
unsatisfactory for convergence or if it generates too much
error, Adams tries one or more different step sizes.
Yydump On/OFF Specifies that Adams should dump the state variable vector
when the FUNCTION that Adams is sensing has the
specified relationship to VALUE.
function Function Specifies a FUNCTION expression to define the sensor.
user_function Real Specifies a list of constants that are to be passed to a user-
written subroutine to define the sensor.
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two sensors with the same name, so you must provide a
unique name.
assumed. You may, ofcourse, delete this name and use your own. The form of a full name is:
yourself.
3. The COMPARE type can take on the values EQ, GE, or LE:
EQ initiates action when the FUNCTION that Adams is sensing is from (VALUE - ERROR) to
(VALUE + ERROR).
GE initiates action when the FUNCTION that Adams is sensing is greater than VALUE -
ERROR.
LE initiates action when the FUNCTION that Adams is sensing is less than VALUE + ERROR.
4. The Codgen parameter may help the integrator to produce more accurate data or to proceed more
smoothly at troublesome points in time. Adams generates a pivot sequence for matrix
factorization before starting the simulation. Then Adams does not generate a new pivot sequence
unless the CODGEN argument is used or it is necessary to reach convergence.
5. The easiest way to enter a function expression in Adams/View is to use the text editor in
executive_control 11
button at the upper right side of the text editor. If there is a syntax error, a message is printed and
the cursor is put near the problem. Proper unit consistency is not checked during function
expression verification.
The remainder of this explanation will cover the components of FUNCTION expressions as
summarized in the following table.
Components Examples
Numbers FUNCTION = 1E2 + 3.4 + 6
Operators FUNCTION = 3*6/2 + 3 - 2**2
System Constants FUNCTION = PI + 20
System Variabless FUNCTION = AX(1040, 2010)
Arithmetic Ifs FUNCTION = IF(DX(3, 5): -1, 0, 1)
Fortran-77 Functions FUNCTION = ABS(NUM) - 6
Blanks FUNCTION = 1 + 2
Continuation Commas FUNCTION = 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 , + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1
Adams Functions FUNCTION = POLY(0, 0, 6.28)
NUMBERS
FUNCTION expressions can include integers, real numbers, and exponents. In other words, any
numbers that are legal in Adams are legal in a FUNCTION expression.
OPERATORS
In a FUNCTION expression, Adams allows any of the operators **, *, /, +, and -. Adams executes
these operators according to the following precedence rules:
• From greatest to least, the operators have the following priorities. ** then * / then + -. In other
words, Adams executes exponentiation (**) before all other operators and executes
multiplication (*) and division (/) before addition (+) and subtraction (-).
• When a statement has operators of the same priority, Adams executes them from left to right.
• You can use parentheses to alter the precedence of operators. For example, in the equation
FUNCTION = (1-TIME)*30/PI
Adams subtracts TIME from one before it performs multiplication and division.
SYSTEM CONSTANTS
You can include the following system constants in a FUNCTION expression:
• PI Value of pi (to eighteen significant digits)
• DTOR Value of pi/180 for converting degrees to radians
• RTOD Value of 180/pi for converting radians to degrees
The following example of a FUNCTION with a system constant, multiplies the system constant
PI by the displacement of marker 10 with respect to marker 14:
FUNCTION = PI*DM(10,14)
BLANKS
A FUNCTION expression can contain any number of blank spaces. Five consecutive blank spaces
in an expression do not terminate input of the expression (by indicating that what follows is a
comment) as they do in an Adams statement. However, you should remember these two
restrictions.
• You cannot put a blank space in the middle of a number.
• Adams does not accept a blank space between a function and its left bracket. (This is true for
both, FORTRAN-77 functions and Adams functions.)
CONTINUATION COMMAS
You can use a comma to continue FUNCTION expressions. You can break the expression
anywhere except in the middle of a number, in the middle of a name, or between a function and
its left bracket. Put a continuation comma in column one of the following line before the rest of
the expression. If you break the expression at a comma that is part of the expression, you must
use both, the expression comma and the continuation comma. You may use more than one
continuation comma to extend an expression over several lines.
FUNCTION BUILDER
The FUNCTIONS button at the right side of the Adams/View text editor provides a means for
constructing an Adams function string. These functions are briefly described below. Upon
picking the FUNCTIONS button, you will be presented with the list of available functions in the
"selection window". After you select the desired function, a panel will appear with fields
representing the various parameters for the function. You will have full access to on-line help
with this panel just like you have with regular panels. After you have completed the panel and
selected the DONE button on the panel, the function string will be constructed and inserted at the
current text cursor location in the text edit window.
SYSTEM VARIABLES
A FUNCTION expression may access the current value of a system variable and use the value in
computations. These values are accessed through a collection of functions. The accessible
system variables include the following: Time, Mode, Displacements (Translational and
Rotational), Velocities (Translational and Rotational), Accelerations (Translational and
Rotational), Forces (Translational and Rotational), and User-defined variables. Invoke the text
edit window and pick the FUNCTIONS button to get a list of functions that can be accessed.
In general, you use a function character string (such as DM, VX, or FZ) and a list of values (e.g.
i1, i2, and i3) to access a system variable in an expression. For example, the value i1 may be the
name of the marker for which you want to measure a quantity (such as displacement, velocity,
acceleration, or force), i2 is the name of the marker with respect to which you want to measure
the quantity, and i3 is the name of the marker you want to use to resolve the components of the
quantity. If you do not specify marker i3, Adams computes the result in the ground reference
frame.
ARITHMETIC IFS
Arithmetic IFs allow you to conditionally define FUNCTION. The format for arithmetic IFs is
as follows:
IF (expression 1: expression 2, expression 3, expression 4)
Adams evaluates expression 1. If expression 1 is less than zero, the arithmetic IF equals
expression 2; if expression 1 equals zero, the arithmetic IF equals expression 3; and if expression
1 is greater than zero, the arithmetic IF equals expression 4.
A FUNCTION expression with an arithmetic IF and its four expressions, is given below:
FUNCTION = 6 * IF(VR(10,31): 0 , 0 , 100)
If the radial velocity between markers 10 and 31 is less than or equal to zero, the value of the
FUNCTION expression is zero; but if the radial velocity between markers 10 and 31 is greater
than zero, the value of the FUNCTION expression is six hundred.
In some ways, you may treat IF as a variable. For example, you can place it anywhere in the
expression. In addition, you can nest arithmetic IFs nine levels deep.
FORTRAN-77 FUNCTIONS
You can use the FORTRAN functions ABS, ATAN, ATAN2, COS, EXP, LOG, LOG10, MIN,
MAX, SIN, SQRT, and TAN in your expression. For more information about these functions, see
a FORTRAN reference manual. Invoke the text edit window and pick the FUNCTIONS button to
get a list of functions that can be accessed.
ADAMS FUNCTIONS
In general, an Adams function evaluates a mathematical equation and returns a value to your
FUNCTION expression. The following table lists all the Adams functions and their purposes.
Invoke the text edit window and pick the FUNCTIONS button to make a list of functions that can
be accessed.
Names Purposes
AKISPL Accesses the data in a SPLINE statement and uses the Akima cubic method
to fit a cubic curve(a spline) to the data.
BISTOP Evaluates a force restricting displacement of a part in two opposite directions
CHEBY Evaluates a Chebyshev polynomial
CUBSPL Accesses the data in a SPLINE statement and uses the traditional cubic
method to fit a cubic curve (a spline) to the data.
FORCOS Evaluates a Fourier cosine series
FORSIN Evaluates a Fourier sine series
HAVSIN Evaluates a haversine function
IMPACT Evaluates a force restricting displacement of a part in one direction
POLY Evaluates a polynomial
SHF Evaluates a simple harmonic function

STEP Approximates a step function with a cubic polynomial
6. To define the sensor with a user-written subroutine, enter the values (r1[,...,r30]) that you want
Adams to pass to the user-written subroutine SENSUB. The Adams Users Manual discusses
more details about the use of the "SENSUB" subroutine.
Cautions:
1. The SENSOR function must be continuous because Adams tries to adjust the step size to find the
exact time the sensor becomes active. This process is inaccurate and time consuming when the
function is discontinuous. For that reason, functions of time or displacements work best for
sensors; functions of velocities, accelerations, and forces are less desirable.
Any sensor will set the simulation control each time Adams tests the sensor and finds it to be
active. Adams tests the sensor after every successful time step. If the sensor becomes active,
Adams sets the simulation control and does not test the sensor again until it has taken three
successful time steps. Then Adams again tests the sensor after every successful time step.
If you want Adams to take an action, you should be sure to include one of the action arguments
(CODGEN, DT, HALT, PRINT, RESTART, RETURN, STEPSIZE, and YYDUMP) in the
SENSOR definition. The sensor can become active even if one of the action arguments is not
included. However, Adams does not, of course, take any action unless one is specified.
executive_control delete sensor

Allows you to delete a sensor. You must enter the name of the sensor you wish to delete by either picking
it from the screen or specifying the full name.
Format:

Sensor_name= Name of existing sensor
Example:
executive_control delete sensor &

Sensor_name = SENSOR_1
Description:

Sensor_name Existing sensor name Specifies the sensor to delete
followed by the Adams data set sensor ID number. For example, the name of Adams
SENSOR/101 is SEN101. If you created the sensor during preprocessing, you will have given it
a name at that time.
If a sensor is owned by the default model, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is
associated with it.
executive_control modify sensor

Allows you to modify a sensor. You may reverse this creation at a later time with an UNDO command.
Sensors are contained in a model. Before creating sensors, you must use the 'MODEL CREATE'
command to create a model.
A SENSOR monitors the Adams simulation for a user-defined event and effects a set of simulation
controls when the event occurs. The simulation controls and modifies the integration and the output step
sizes, to output additional diagnostic information, and to alter the simulation end time.
You define the event by creating a function and comparing it against a given value. The function the
SENSOR uses may depend on distance, velocity, acceleration, and force between markers, on user-
defined variables, and on simulation time. Adams evaluates the function after every successful
integration step when doing dynamic analysis, and after every successful solution step when doing other
types of analysis. To define the function, use a FUNCTION expression or a user-written subroutine.
Format:

sensor_name= String
new_sensor_name = string
adams_id = geom._id
comments = string
compare = GE/EQ/LE
codgen = on/off
dt = real
halt = on/off
bisection= real
time_error= real
value= real
error = real
angular_value= real
angular_error= real
print= on/off
restart= on/off
return= on/off
stepsize= real
yydump= on/off

function= Function
user_function= real
routine= string
evaluate= Run time function
user_evaluate= real
evaluate_routine= string
Example:
executive_control modify sensor &

sensor_name = MY_SENSOR &
new_sensor_name = HALT_WHEN_F1_REACHED&
function = "1E2+3.4+6" &
comments = "Example Sensor" &
compare = ge&
codgen = on &
halt = on &
value = 50.9
Description:

sensor_name String Specifies the name of the sensor you wish to modify
New_sensor_name String Specifies the name of the new sensor. You may use this name
later to refer to this sensor.
data file.
comments String Specifies comments for the object being created or modified
compare GE, EQ, LE Specifies what kind of comparison is to be made to initiate the
action by the SENSOR.
codgen ON/OFF Specifies that Adams is to generate a new pivot sequence for
matrix factorization when the event that Adams is sensing has
the specified relationship to VALUE.

Dt Real Specifies that the time between consecutive output steps
should be redefined. This is done when Adams first senses
that the FUNCTION specified has the same relationship as
specified to VALUE. Adams uses this value until it is
changed.
halt On/OFF Specifies that execution should be terminated when the
value Real Specifies the non-angular VALUE you want to relate to the
error Real Specifies the absolute non-angular value of allowable error
Adams is sensing.
angular_value Real Specifies the angular VALUE you want to relate to the
angular_error Real Specifies the absolute angular value of allowable error
Adams is sensing.
Print On/OFF Specifies that Adams should write data to the request,
graphics, and output files when the FUNCTION that Adams
is sensing has the specified relationship to VALUE.
restart On/OFF Specifies that Adams should restart the integration when the
relationship to VALUE. Adams reinitializes the integration
step size to HINIT and reduces the integration order to one.
return On/OFF Specifies that Adams should stop the simulation and return to
the command level when the FUNCTION that Adams is
sensing has the specified relationship to VALUE.
stepsize Real Specifies that Adams should redefine the trial integration step
size when the FUNCTION that Adams is sensing has the
specified relationship to VALUE. This change is temporary
and lasts only for the next step. If this step size is
unsatisfactory for convergence or if it generates too much
error, Adams tries one or more different step sizes.
Yydump On/OFF Specifies that Adams should dump the state variable vector
when the FUNCTION that Adams is sensing has the specified
function Function Specifies a FUNCTION expression to define the sensor.
user_function Real Specifies a list of constants that are to be passed to a user-
written subroutine to define the sensor.
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two sensors with the same name, so you must provide a
unique name.
assumed. You may, of course, delete this name and use your own. The form of a full name is:
yourself.
3. The COMPARE type can take on the values EQ, GE, or LE:
EQ initiates action when the FUNCTION that Adams is sensing is from (VALUE - ERROR) to
(VALUE + ERROR).
GE initiates action when the FUNCTION that Adams is sensing is greater than VALUE -
ERROR.
LE initiates action when the FUNCTION that Adams is sensing is less than VALUE + ERROR.
4. The Codgen parameter may help the integrator to produce more accurate data or to proceed more
smoothly at troublesome points in time. Adams generates a pivot sequence for matrix
factorization before starting the simulation. Then Adams does not generate a new pivot sequence
unless the CODGEN argument is used or it is necessary to reach convergence.
summarized in the following table:
Components Examples
System Variables FUNCTION = AX(1040, 2010)
NUMBERS
OPERATORS
• From greatest to the least, the operators have the following priorities. ** then * / then + -. In
other words, Adams executes exponentiation (**) before all other operators and executes
• You can use parentheses to alter the precedence of operators. For example, in the equation,
SYSTEM CONSTANTS

The following example of a FUNCTION with a system constant multiplies the system constant
BLANKS
restrictions.
CONTINUATION COMMAS
FUNCTION BUILDER
SYSTEM VARIABLES
frame.
ARITHMETIC IFS
Arithmetic IFs allow you to conditionally define FUNCTION. The format for arithmetic IFs
follows.
A FUNCTION expression with an arithmetic IF and its four expressions is as given below:
FUNCTION = 6 * IF(VR(10,31): 0 , 0 , 100)
ADAMS FUNCTIONS
be accessed.
Names Purposes
AKISPL Accesses the data in a SPLINE statement and uses the Akima cubic method to fit a
cubic curve(a spline) to the data.
CUBSPL Accesses the data in a SPLINE statement and uses the traditional cubic method to fit
a cubic curve (a spline) to the data.
Names Purposes
IMPACT Evaluates a force restricting displacement of a part in one direction.
6. To define the sensor with a user-written subroutine, enter the values (r1[,...,r30]) that you want
Adams to pass to the user-written subroutine SENSUB. The Adams Users Manual discusses
more details about the use of the "SENSUB" subroutine.
Cautions:
1. The SENSOR function must be continuous because Adams tries to adjust the step size to find the
exact time the sensor becomes active. This process is inaccurate and time consuming when the
function is discontinuous. For that reason, functions of time or displacements work best for
sensors; functions of velocities, accelerations, and forces are less desirable.
Any sensor will set the simulation control each time Adams tests the sensor and finds it to be
active. Adams tests the sensor after every successful time step. If the sensor becomes active,
Adams sets the simulation control and does not test the sensor again until it has taken three
successful time steps. Then Adams again tests the sensor after every successful time step.
If you want Adams to take an action, you should be sure to include one of the action arguments
(CODGEN, DT, HALT, PRINT, RESTART, RETURN, STEPSIZE, and YYDUMP) in the
SENSOR definition. The sensor can become active even if one of the action arguments is not
included. However, Adams does not, of course, take any action unless one is specified.
executive_control set dynamics_parameters bdf_parameters
executive_control set dynamics_parameters

bdf_parameters
The BDF_PARAMETERS arguments allow you to control the corrector algorithm for all three types of
BDF integrators from a single statement. The BDF_PARAMETERS arguments affect integration
whenever Adams is solving the full set of differential and algebraic equations with a BDF integrator.
Description:

model_name Existing model Specifies the model to be modified. You use this
parameter to identify the existing model to be affected
with this command.
predictor_coefficients Fixed/Leading/Vari Specifies a BDF coefficient
able
high_order_bias Real Biases the selection of the integration order in favor of
higher orders. Under the right circumstances, this
promotes more accurate accelerations and forces, but
requires more effort.
low_order_bias Real Biases the selection of the integration order in favor of
lower orders. This may result in less accurate
accelerations and forces, but requires less effort.
same_order_bias Real Biases the selection of the integration order in favor of
selecting the same integration order. This requires the
least effort.
stability Real Specifies the fraction of the mass and damping
matrices Adams is to add to the stiffness matrix.

Cr_adapt_tolerance Real Expands the corrector error tolerance to include a term
that is proportional to the integration step size. This is
intended to loosen the corrector tolerance when the step
size get small, in cases where there are many corrector
failures at small integration steps. The corrector
tolerance will be computed based on
CR_ADAPT_TOL, CRREL_ERROR, the integration
step size (h) , and the integration ERROR:
corrector tolerance = ERROR *

(CRREL_ERROR + CR_ADAPT_TOL/h)
Hint: To force the integrator to loosen the
corrector tolerance when the step size get
small, set CRREL_ERROR = 0 and select
CR_ADAPT_TOL > 0. It is
recommended that you try
CR_ADAPT_TOL = 1e-4 first. If you
wish to reset the corrector tolerance, reset
CRREL_ERROR=1e-7 and
CR_ADAPT_TOL = 0.
Cr_relative_error Real Specifies the relative error tolerance for convergence of
the corrector during BDF integration.
cr_absolute_error Real Specifies the absolute error tolerance for convergence
of the corrector during BDF integration.
Cr_error_scaling Real Scales the sum of the relative and absolute error
tolerances for the corrector.
Cr_maximum_iteratio integer Specifies the maximum number of iterations allowed
ns for the corrector to converge to the solution.
cr_pattern_for_jacobi boolean Indicates the pattern of yes's and no's for reevaluating
an the Jacobian matrix in the correction algorithm.
watch_corrector_perf ERROR_IN_CORR Provides the user with a means for observing the
ECTOR, progress of the simulation by causing Adams to write
NO_ERROR_IN_C information about the performance of the corrector
ORRECTOR, onto the screen.
FAILURE_IN_CO
RRECTOR,
NO_FAILURE_IN_
CORRECTOR,
CONDITION,
NO_CONDITION,
ALL, NONE
associated with it.
2. If the predictor_coefficient parameter is not specified, default value will be Fixed.
3. For the high_order_bias, the BDF integrators use the following formula to estimate the largest
integration step (h) that will not violate the integration ERROR tolerance:
h = (1+0.4*(1-HIGH_ORDER_BIAS))*(ERROR*(k+2)!/||YY(k+2)||
where k is the current order of the integrator, YY(k+2) is an estimate of the k+2nd derivatives of
YY, and the symbol ||.|| indicates the maximum norm of the array of numbers. Similar formulas
are applied to evaluate other orders. The integrator will select the order that gives the largest value
of h. If HIGH_ORDER_BIAS is significantly higher than LOW_ORDER_BIAS and
SAME_ORDER_BIAS, the integrator will raise the order, if at all possible.
4. For the low_order_bias, the BDF integrators use the following formula to estimate the largest
h = (1+0.3*(1-LOW_ORDER_BIAS))*(ERROR*(k+2)!)/||YY(k+2)||
where k is the current order of the integrator, YY(k) is an estimate of the kth derivatives of YY,
and the symbol ||.|| indicates the maximum norm of the array of numbers. Similar formulas are
applied to evaluate other orders. The integrator will select the order that gives the largest value
of h. If LOW_ORDER_BIAS is significantly higher than HIGH_ORDER_BIAS and
SAME_ORDER_BIAS, the integrator will lower the order, if at all possible.
5. For the same_order_bias, the BDF integrators use the following formula to estimate the largest
h = (1+0.2*(1-SAME_ORDER_BIAS))*(ERROR*(k+2)!)/||YY(k+2)||
where k is the current order of the integrator, YY(k+1) is an estimate of the k+1st derivatives of
YY, and the symbol ||.|| indicates the maximum norm of the array of numbers. Similar formulas
are applied to evaluate other orders. The integrator will select the order that gives the largest value
of h. If SAME_ORDER_BIAS is significantly higher than HIGH_ORDER_BIAS and
LOW_ORDER_BIAS, the integrator will keep the same order, if at all possible.
6. Adding a fraction of the mass and damping matrices to the stiffness matrix can stabilize the
iteration process and prevent the iteration from diverging. Often the stiffness matrix is singular
for a system because the system can move in certain directions without affecting the potential
energy. Adding a fraction of the mass and damping matrices to the stiffness matrix removes this
singularity and makes it possible to solve for equilibrium positions even in this case. The value
of STABILITY does not affect the accuracy of the solution, but it does affect the rate of
convergence of the iteration process.
7. The relative error will be bounded by a minimum of:

• CR_RELATIVE_ERROR, if a value is specified for it.
• (r/10), where r is the value specified by the command
>> EXECUTIVE_CONTROL SET DYNAMICS_PARAMETERS
INTEGRATOR_PARAMETERS &
>& MODEL_NAME = <model_name> &
>& RELATIVE_ERROR = r
• (5.0 * 0.1**r), where r is the value specified by
>> EXECUTIVE_CONTROL SET EASY_DYNAMICS &
>& DIGITS_OF_PRECISION = r
8. The absolute error will be bounded by a minimum of:
• CR_ABSOLUTE_ERROR, if a value is specified for it.
• (r/10), where r is the value specified by
>> EXECUTIVE_CONTROL SET DYNAMICS_PARAMETERS &
>& INTEGRATOR_PARAMETERS &
>& ABSOLUTE_ERROR = r
9. For error scaling, if T is the sum of the relative and absolute error tolerances applied to the state
vector, then
A tolerance of r1 * T is applied to the displacement variables
A tolerance of r2 * T is applied to the velocities
A tolerance of r3 * T is applied to the state variables defined by LSE's, GSE's, and TFSISO's and
to the DIFF variables
A tolerance of r4 * T is applied to the algebraic variables
A tolerance of r5 * T is applied to the Lagrange multipliers (i.e. constraint forces)
10. The WATCH_CORRECTOR_PERF argument only affects diagnostics, not results. These are the
definitions of the values:
ERROR_IN_CORRECTOR: The value of the error and the component of the state vector
contributing the most to the size of the error after every iteration of the corrector.
FAILURE_IN_CORRECTOR: The value of the error and the component of the state vector
contributing the most to the size of the error when the corrector fails to converge.
CONDITION: An estimate of the condition number of the Jacobian matrix for the corrector
algorithm each time it is reevaluated.
ALL: All options are on.
NONE: All options are off.
executive_control set dynamics_parameters coord_partitioning_parameters

coord_partitioning_parameters
The COORD_PARTITIONING_PARAMETERS command allows you to control the coordinate
partitioning algorithm for the Adams-Bashforth-Moulton integrator. This command affects the
coordinate partitioning as well as the iterative solutions for the dependent displacements and the
accelerations and Lagrange multipliers.
Description:

model_name An existing model Specifies the model to be modified. You use this
with this command.
dd_relative_error Real Specifies the relative error tolerance for the iterative
solution of the displacements of the dependent
coordinates. The relative error for the displacements will
be bounded by a minimum of DD_RELATIVE_ERROR
and the integration error tolerance.
dd_absolute_error Real Specifies the absolute error tolerance for the iterative
solution of the displacements of the dependent
coordinates. The absolute error for the displacements
will be bounded by a minimum of dd_absolute_error and
1/100-th of the integration error tolerance.
dd_maximum_iterati Integer Specifies the maximum number of iterations allowed for
ons the modified Newton-Raphson algorithm to converge to
the displacements for the dependent coordinates.
dd_pattern_for_jaco Yes/No Indicates the pattern of yes’s and no’s for reevaluating
bian the Jacobian matrix during the modified Newton-
Raphson iterative solution for the displacements of the
dependent coordinates.
repartition_threshold Real Allows some control over the re-partitioning of
coordinates into independent and dependent coordinates.
al_relative_error Real Specifies the relative error tolerance for the iterative
solution of the accelerations and the Lagrange
multipliers (i.e. constraint forces).
al_absolute_error Real Specifies the absolute error tolerance for the iterative
solution of the accelerations and the Lagrange
multipliers (i.e. constraint forces).

al_maximum_iterati Integer Specifies the maximum number of iterations allowed for
ons the modified Newton-Raphson algorithm to converge to
the accelerations and the Lagrange multipliers.
al_pattern_for_jacob Yes/No Indicates the pattern of yes's and no's for reevaluating the
ian Jacobian matrix during the modified Newton-Raphson
iterative solution for the accelerations and the Lagrange
multipliers.
scaling Yes/No No action will be taken if this parameter is not specified.
scale_factor Real Allows you to specify the amount to scale the geometry
that is read in from a Wavefront .obj file. The geometry
will be scaled uniformly in the x, y, and z directions.
watch_partitioning_p ERROR_IN_ITER Provides the user with a means for observing the
erf ATION, progress of the simulation by causing Adams to write
NO_ERROR_IN_I information about the performance of coordinate
TERATION, partitioning calculations onto the screen.
FAILURE_IN_IT
ERATION,
NO_FAILURE_IN
_ITERATION,
CONDITION,
NO_CONDITION,
REPARTITION,
NO_REPARTITIO
N, DOF, NO_DOF,
ALL, NONE
associated with it.
2. In general, for efficiency reasons, the coordinates are re-partitioned whenever:
• A matrix inverse condition number gets too small
• The displacment iterations do not converge
• A part rotation occurs

• A matrix becomes numerically singular, or
• The unit energy ratio is less than its original value times the value of
REPARTITION_THRESHOLD.
3. The relative error will be bounded by a minimum of AL_RELATIVE_ERROR and one tenth of
the integration error tolerance.
4. The absolute error will be bounded by a minimum of AL_ABSOLUTE_ERROR and one tenth of
the integration error tolerance.
5. The WATCH_PARTITIONING_PERF only affects diagnostics, not results.
ERROR_IN_ITERATION: The value of the error and the component of the state vector,
contributing the most to the size of the error after every iteration of the algorithm of the dependent
displacements and for the accelerations and the constraint forces.
FAILURE_IN_ITERATION: The value of the error and the component of the state vector,
contributing the most to the size of the error when the algorithm for the dependent displacements
and for the accelerations and the constraint forces fails to converge.
CONDITION: An estimate of the condition number of the Jacobian matrix for the corrector
algorithm each time it is reevaluated.
REPARTITION: An indication that the current choice for the independent coordinates is no
longer acceptable and the coordinates will be re-partitioned.
DOF: A list of the degrees-of-freedom (i.e. the independent coordinates) each time the
partitioning is done.
executive_control set dynamics_parameters dynamic_solver

dynamic_solver
The EXECUTIVE_CONTROL SET DYNAMICS_PARAMETERS DYNAMIC_SOLVER command
defines the two fundamental components of the mathematical methods for a dynamic solution: the form
of the equations and the integration algorithm.
Description:

model_name An existing model Specifies the model to be modified. You use
this parameter to identify the existing model
ordinary_differential Ode-type Causes Adams to reduce the equations
_equations governing the dynamics of the problem to a
system of ordinary differential equations. The
value assigned to the argument specifies the
algorithm for doing the reduction. For the 7.0
release, COORDINATE_PARTITIONING is
the only option available.
ode_integrator ODE_INTEGRATOR Specifies the numerical method for
integrating the ODEs. For the 7.0 release, the
value, Adams, is the only option available.
differential_and_alg STANDARD_INDEX_THRE Causes Adams to integrate the full set of
ebraic_equations E/LAGRANGIAN_CONSTR Euler-Lagrange differential and algebraic
AINED/ equations. The value assigned to this
STABILIZED_INDEX_TWO/ argument indicates the form of the equations.
PENALTY
dae_integrator BDF/BDF_FIXED Specifies the numerical method for
integrating the DAEs. For the 7.0 release, the
value, BDF, is the only option available.
associated with it.
executive_control set dynamics_parameters dynamic_solver
2. For the 7.0 release, STANDARD_INDEX_THREE is the only option. The full system of 2n + m
+ p differential equations consists of the following:
n Euler-Lagrange differential equations (one for each generalized coordinate);
m constraint equations;
n equations of the form x - u = 0 (one for each generalized coordinate) to reduce the differential
equations to first order; and
p state equations, first-order differential equations, or other algebraic equations that may have
been added to the problem.
executive_control set dynamics_parameters integrator_parameters

integrator_parameters
The EXECUTIVE_CONTROL SET DYNAMICS_PARAMETERS INTEGRATOR_PARAMETERS
command controls parameters common to multiple integrators.
Description:

model_name AN EXISTING Specifies the model to be modified. You use this
MODEL parameter to identify the existing model to be affected
with this command.
relative_error Real Specifies a relative error tolerance for the integrator
absolute_error Real Specifies the absolute error tolerance for the integrator.
The absolute error tolerance will by bounded by the
value of ABSOLUTE_ERROR.
error_scaling Real number Real number should be > 0. Can take 1-16 values.
continue_on_failure Yes/no When the CONTINUE_ON_FAILURE argument is set
to YES, it allows the code to continue the simulation
with a set of relaxed error tolerances when the specified
conditions cannot be met. Otherwise, when set to NO,
the control of the Adams simulation will be returned to
the command level.
step_maximum Integer The maximum number of integration steps that the code
will take between output steps.
init_time_step Real number Real number should be > 0
max_time_step Real number Real number should be > 0
min_time_step Real number Real number should be > 0
max_integrator_orde Integer Integer should be greater than 0 and less than or equal
r to 12
interpolate Yes/No Indicates whether interpolation is allowed. That is,
indicates whether the integrator can choose integration
steps independent of output steps and the interpolate
results for the output step times.

watch_integrator_pe MONITOR, Provides the user with a means for observing the
rf NO_MONITOR, progress of the simulation by causing Adams to write
ERROR_IN_INTE information about the status and performance of the
GRATOR, integration to the screen.
NO_ERROR_IN_I
NTEGRATOR,
FAILURE_IN_INT
EGRATOR,
NO_FAILURE_IN
_INTEGRATOR,
STEPSIZE,
NO_STEPSIZE,
NEWSTEP,
NO_NEWSTEP,
OUTPUT,
NO_OUTPUT,
ALL, NONE
reconcile ALL, Corrects interpolated results before Adams writes them
DISPLACEMENT to the output files to satisfy the constraint equations.
S, NONE
associated with it.
2. The relative error tolerance will be bounded by a minimum of:
• RELATIVE_ERROR, if a value is specified for it.
• (5.0 * 0.1**r), where r is the value specified by the command
>> EXECUTIVE_CONTROL SET EASY_DYNAMICS &
>& DIGITS_OF_PRECISION = r
if no value is specified for RELATIVE_ERROR.
3. After STEP_MAXIMUM integration steps, the simulation will stop and return to the command
level. This feature is provided as a precaution against a simulation that is taking too much CPU
time.
4. The WATCH_INTEGRATOR_PERF argument only affects diagnostics, not results.
The values can be:
MONITOR: The time, step size, and function-evaluation count at ten equally spaced output times
during the simulation.
ERROR_IN_INTEGRATOR: The integration error after every time step.
FAILURE_IN_INTEGRATOR: The integration error when the code has to repeat the step
because the calculated solution failed to meet the error criteria.
STEPSIZE: The step size and order after every integration step.
NEWSTEP: The step size and order only when the values are changed.
OUTPUT: An indication that another output record is being written to the output files.
5. The values for RECONCILE can be:
DISPLACEMENTS: Only the displacements are corrected to satisfy the constraints.
ALL: The displacements are corrected to satisfy the constraints and the velocities and
accelerations are corrected to satisfy the constraint derivatives.
NONE: The integration step size is adjusted to force the integrator to compute the solution at
every output step. In this situation, INTERPOLATE must be set to NO.
Cautions:
1. Note that interpolation is not yet available when the EXECUTIVE_CONTROL SET
DYNAMICS_PARAMETERS BDF_PARAMETER command specifies FIXED or VARIABLE
coefficients for the PREDICTOR_COEFFICIENTS argument.
executive_control set equilibrium_parameters

Controls the error tolerance and other parameters for execution of static equilibrium and quasi-static
equilibrium analyses.
You would set these parameters only when you are requesting a static equilibrium or a quasi- static
equilibrium analysis and you want to change one or more of the tolerances and other parameters from the
default values.
Format:

dynamic = yes/no
alimit = real
error = real
imbalance = real
maxit = integer
pattern_for_jacobian = string
stability = real
tlimit = real
global_damping = real
settling_time = real
acceleration_error = real
kinetic_energy_error = real
static_method = original/advanced/aggressive/all
atol = real
rtol = real
maxitl = integer
etamax = real
eta = real
Example:
executive_control set equilibrium_parameters &

model_name = .model_1 &
dynamic = no &
static_method = all &

atol = 1.0e-005 &
rtol = 1.0e-007 &
maxitl = 30 &
etamax = 0.8 &
eta = 1.0e-003
Description:

model_name An existing model Specify an existing model.
dynamic yes/no Specifies if dynamic simulation needs to be performed or
not to find the static equilibrium.
alimit real Specifies the maximum angular increment allowed per
iteration.
error real Specifies the relative correction convergence threshold.
imbalance real Specifies the equation imbalance convergence threshold.
maxit integer Specifies the maximum number of iterations allowed for
finding static equilibrium.
pattern_for_jacobian string Specifies the pattern for evaluating Jacobian matrix.
stability real Specifies the fraction of mass and damping matrices to be
added to stiffness matrix to stabilize the iteration process.
tlimit real Specifies the maximum translational increment allowed
per iteration during static simulations.
global_damping real Specifies the coefficient for global damping applied to all
bodies during static simulations performed using dynamic
analyses.
settling_time real Specifies the maximum time allowed to reach equilibrium
during static simulations performed using dynamic
analyses.
acceleration_error real Specifies the maximum acceleration error allowed during
static simulations performed using dynamic analyses.
kinetic_energy_error real Specifies the maximum kinetic energy error allowed in
static simulations performed using dynamic analyses.
static_method original/advanced Specifies the type of static method to be selected to
/aggressive/all perform static equilibrium analyses.
atol real Specifies the absolute tolerance value.

rtol real Specifies the relative tolerance value.
maxitl integer Specifies the maximum number of allowed inner non-
linear iterations.
etamax real Specifies the maximum error tolerance for residual in the
inner iteration.
eta real Specifies the inner iteration error control parameter.
1. You use model_name parameter to identify the existing model to be affected with this command.
You may identify a model by typing its name or by picking it from the screen. If the model is not
even if the model is displayed. You must separate multiple model names by commas. If the model
is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics associated
with it.
2. The default for alimit parameter is 100 and the range is alimit > 0. You should specify the value
in current modeling units (degrees by default).
3. The iterative process carried out during the equilibrium analysis can not converge prior to all
relevant relative corrections being smaller than the value specified by error parameter. The
default for this parameter is 1.0E-04 and the range is error > 0.
4. The iterative process carried out during the equilibrium analysis can not converge prior to each
equation imbalance being smaller than the value specified by imbalance parameter. The default
for this parameter is 1.0E-04 and the range is imbalance > 0.
5. The default for maxit parameter is 25 and the range is maxit > 0.
6. Often the stiffness matrix is singular for a system because the system is neutrally stable (for
example, the system moves in certain directions without affecting the potential energy). Adding
a fraction of the mass and damping matrices to the stiffness matrix removes this singularity and
makes it possible to solve for equilibrium positions. The value of parameter stability does not
affect the accuracy of the solution, but it does affect the rate of convergence of the iteration
process. The default is 1.0E-05 and the range is stability  0 .
7. The default for tlimit parameter is 20 and the range is tlimit > 0.
8. The default for global_damping parameter is 0 and the range is global_damping  0 .
9. The default for settling_time is 100 and the range is > 0.
10. The default for acceleration_error is 1.0e-2 and the range is > 0.
11. The default for kinetic_energy_error is 1.0e-2 and the range is > 0.
12. The static_method parameter chooses the method to perform static equilibrium analysis as
follows:
• ORIGINAL, for running only the ORIGINAL Solver
• ADVANCED, runs, in order, the following methods until one shows progress:
ORIGINAL
ORIGINAL+Krylov
ORIGINAL+UMF
Newton+Krylov
Tensor-Krylov block-3
Tensor-Krylov block-2+
• AGGRESSIVE, runs, in order, the following methods until one shows progress:
ORIGINAL
ORIGINAL+Krylov
ORIGINAL+UMF
Newton+Krylov
Broyden-Armijo
Trust-Region
• ALL, runs, in order, all the available methods, until one shows progress:
ORIGINAL
ORIGINAL+Krylov
ORIGINAL+UMF
Newton+Krylov
Broyden-Armijo
Trust-Region
Hooke-Jeeves
Default: ORIGINAL
13. The default for atol is 1.0e-6 and the range is 0.0  atol  1.0 .
14. The default for rtol is 0.0 and the range is 0.0  rtol  1.0 .
15. For all solvers, except ORIGINAL and ORIGINAL+Krylov, the tolerance is defined as :
TOL=ATOL+||xIC||*RTOL.
For ORIGINAL and ORIGINAL+Krylov solvers the tolerance is equal to error.

16. ORIGINAL, ORIGINAL+Krylov and ORIGINAL+UMF solver methods ignore maxitl
parameter. For Hooke-Jeeves method, allowed budget of function evaluations is set to maxitl*N,
where N is the size of the problem (number of unknowns).
17. The default for maxitl is 40 and the range is maxitl  1 .
18. The parameter etamax specifies the maximum threshold for the error tolerance of the linear
Krylov solver (for Newton+Krylov and Tensor-Krylov methods) that solves the linear systems
required by Krylov algorithm. Maximum error tolerance for residual in inner iteration. The inner
iteration terminates when the relative linear residual is smaller than eta*| F(x_c) |. eta is
determined by the modified Eisenstat-Walker formula if etamax > 0. If etamax < 0, then eta =
|etamax| for the entire iteration.
19. The default for etamax is 0.9 and the range is 0.0  etamax  1.0 .
20. The parameter eta specifies the initial residual tolerance for the linear Krylov Solver for
Tensor_Krylov method. The Tensor-Krylov eta parameter is maintained adaptively by the Krylov
algorithm but eta is the indicated starting value, while etamax is the maximum threshold for eta.
The default for eta is 1.0e-4 and the range is 0.0  eta  1.0 .
21. The parameter eta specifies the dimensionless radius of the trust-region for Trust-region method.
The smaller the value, the more the refinement of Trust-region solution (hence more work). The
range is 0.0  eta  0.25 .
executive_control set easy_dynamics

The EXECUTIVE_CONTROL SET EASY_DYNAMICS command provides an automatic way to
select integration attributes with a single command. In addition, this command provides an easy-to-
understand method for controlling the error.
Format:

Model_name = string
Significant_digits = real
Dynamic_attribute = stiff/high_frequencies/smooth
Description:

Model_name An existing model Specifies the model to be modified. You use
this parameter to identify the existing model to
SIGNIFICANT_DIGITS real Defines the tolerance of the integration error in
decimal digits of accuracy. The relative, local
truncation errors for the integrator will be
bounded by 5 * (0.1 ** r), where r is the
specified value for the
SIGNIFICANT_DIGITS argument.
dynamic_attribute STIFF/HIGH_FREQUE Indicates the characteristics of the mechanism
NCIES/ SMOOTH to be simulated.
associated with it.
2. The value of DYNAMIC_ATTRIBUTE can be:
STIFF: Causes Adams to begin integration with the BDF integrator with VARIABLE
coefficients.
HIGH_FREQUENCIES: Causes Adams to begin integration with coordinate partitioned

equations and the Adams-Bashforth-Moulton integrator. If you specify PERSISTENCE on the
SOLUTION_PRIORITY argument, Adams switches integrators after a convergence failure,
regardless of the value of DYNAMIC_ATTRIBUTE.
executive_control set integrator_parameters dstiff

The DSTIFF command specifies the integration error tolerance and other parameters for a dynamic
analysis using the DASSL computer code.
The principal distinctions among the various ways that the backward differentiation formulas can be
implemented in an integration code involve the method of incorporating the variable step size in
prediction scheme. The DASSL integrator uses a fixed leading coefficient formulation for the finite
difference approximations to the derivatives.
While not as computationally efficient, the approach used by DASSL should be more stable numerically
than the fixed-coefficient method in GSTIFF. The trade-off works in reverse order in comparison to the
variable coefficients computed for the WSTIFF integrator in Adams. In general, for problems with
behavior that do not exhibit severe gradients in the solution, the savings in CPU time need not be
sacrificed for the more stable methods.
A second distinguishing feature of DSTIFF is that it is able to interpolate output data between integration
steps. By default, DSTIFF also corrects the interpolated output data to be consistent with the system
constraints (see the RECONCILE_VEL_AND_ACC parameter). While GSTIFF and WSTIFF must
integrate exactly to an output step in order to generate output data, DSTIFF may take an integration step
past an output time and interpolate the output data. This allows DSTIFF to adjust the integration step
based solely on the error criteria, and take larger integration step than output step when possible. As a
result, DSTIFF may be able to complete a simulation with fewer integration steps than would GSTIFF
or WSTIFF. This may result in speed improvement (although the interpolation and correction require
some computation as well).
As described in the various sections covering the ERROR_TOLERANCE parameter for the GSTIFF,
DSTIFF, and WSTIFF commands, the only other significant differences between the integrators in
Adams involve the error control algorithms.
For an analysis with the EQUILIBRIUM, IC, or KINEMATICS commands, the ALIMIT parameter
controls the maximum angular increment per iteration and the TLIMIT parameter controls the maximum
translational increment per iteration. The DSTIFF, GSTIFF, and WSTIFF commands do not allow you
to control either the maximum angular increment per iteration or the maximum translational increment
per iteration. Because large rotational displacements often cause problems for dynamic simulations,
Adams limits the maximum angular increment per iteration to 0.5 rads (~ 29 deg.). However, because
large translational displacements do not generally cause problems during dynamic simulations, Adams
imposes no limit on the maximum translational increment per iteration. Format:
Description:

model_name An existing Specifies the model to be modified. You use this
model parameter to identify the existing model to be affected
with this command.
error_tolerance Real Specifies the integration error tolerance. The
ERROR_TOLERANCE parameter is also used to
determine the convergence criterion for the corrector. The
convergence tolerance is the value of
ERROR_TOLERANCE parameter divided by 1000.
hinit_time_step Real number Specifies the initial time step to be attempted in the
integrator.
hmax_time_step Real number Specifies the maximum integration step size Adams is to
allow.
kmax_integrator_orde Integer Specifies the maximum order of the integrator. Reducing
r KMAX may speed integration when damping is light and
the equations are numerically stiff.
maxit_corrector_itera Integer Specifies the maximum number of iterations that the
tions corrector will take before the integrator backs off on the
current value of the time step and tries a smaller value to
achieve further progress.
pattern_for_jacobian Yes/No Specifies as many as ten character strings that together
establish the pattern for evaluating the Jacobian matrix
during Newton-Raphson iteration.

watch_integrator_perf MONITOR, Specifies as many as nine character strings that together
NO_MONITOR, establish the aspects of integrator performance you want
INTERR, to watch.
NO_INTERR,
CORERR,
NO_CORERR,
INTFAIL,
NO_INTFAIL,
CORFAIL,
NO_CORFAIL,
MATRIX,
NO_MATRIX,
STEPSIZE,
NO_STEPSIZE,
NEWSTEP,
NO_NEWSTEP,
OUTPUT,
NO_OUTPUT,
ALL, NONE
reconcile_vel_and_ac YES/NO Reconciles the values of the displacements with the
c constraint equations in the problem.
associated with it.
2. A predictor-corrector scheme is implemented in DASSL to integrate the system of differential and
algebraic equations. The predictor algorithm uses a polynomial fit to the previous values of each
component of state vector to estimate its value at the next time step. The corrector algorithm
begins with the set of predicted values and uses a modified Newton-Raphson iteration scheme to
find a solution that satisfies the equations to within the convergence tolerance.
The convergence criterion imposed on the DASSL integrator in Adams uses the maximum norm
over the relative errors in all of the components of the state vector. The result must be bounded
by .001r, i.e. by thousandth of the specified integration error tolerance r.
3. HINIT_TIME_STEP is not specified or if it is set equal to 0, then the integrator will attempt to
get started with the default value. The initial step actually used by the integrator is determined by
the error tolerance.
4. For the pattern_for_jacobian for each iteration, T or TRUE indicates that Adams is to evaluate the
Jacobian, or F or FALSE indicates that Adams is not to evaluate the Jacobian. Thus cj determines
whether or not Adams is to evaluate the Jacobian at the jth iteration. If necessary, Adams repeats
the pattern of evaluation until it reaches the maximum number of iterations (MAXIT). The
number of Y's or Yes’s and N's or No's, together, must be at least one and no more than ten.
PATTERN defaults to Y:N:N:N:Y:N:N:N:Y:N, i.e. to evaluating the Jacobian at every fourth
iteration.
5. For the watch_integrator_perf parameter, the items you can watch and the defaults are as follows:
(NO) CORERR - (Do Not) Print the maximum corrector error and the equation in which it
occurs, and the largest variable change and the equation in which it occurs. The default is no
CORERR.
(NO) CORFAIL - (Do Not) Print every time the corrector does not converge within the number
of iterations set by MAXIT. The default is no CORFAIL
(NO) INTERR - (Do Not) Print the maximum integration error at each integration step and the
variable in which it occurs. The default is no INTERR.
(NO) INTFAIL - (Do Not) Print every time Adams tries a step that exceeds the integration error
tolerance. The default is no INTFAIL.
(NO) MATRIX - (Do Not) Print the inverse condition number of the Jacobian matrix for teach
factorization. The default is no MATRIX.
(NO) MONITOR - (Do Not) Print the general statistics ten times during the simulation period.
The default is no MONITOR.
(NO) OUTPUT - (Do Not) Print each time Adams sends results to the output files. The default
is no OUTPUT.
(NO) NEWSTEP - (Do Not) Print the new step size and order at the beginning of each trial step.
The default is no NEWSTEP.
(NO) STEPSIZE - (Do Not) Print the statistics when changing the integration step size. The
default is no STEPSIZE.
In addition, the following items affect all aspects:
ALL - Print all of the aspects of the integration process.
NONE - Print none of the aspects of the integration process.
Watch defaults to : NO_CORERR, NO_CORFAIL, NO_INTERR, NO_INTFAIL,
NO_MATRIX, MONITOR, NO_OUTPUT, NO_NEWSTEP, NO_STEPSIZE.
6. The interpolated values of the velocities and accelerations are also corrected to satisfy the
derivatives of the constraint equations only when RECONCILE_VEL_AND_ACC is turned on.
Otherwise, the output values for the velocities and accelerations are the interpolated results. Since
the integration step is determined solely by the error tolerance, the DASSL integrator generally
does not compute the solution at the output points. Therefore, the output values of the solution are
interpolated from the computed values at the integration steps. Thus, Adams must correct the
displacements for the output values to satisfy the constraints.
executive_control set kinematics_parameters

KINEMATICS_PARAMETERS allow control over the kinematic simulation in Adams. Kinematics
parameters include error tolerances and other parameters for kinematic analyses. You would set these
parameters only when you are requesting a kinematic analysis and you want to change one or more of
the tolerances and parameters from the default values.
Format:

model_name= model_name
alimit = real_number
error = real_number
maxit = integer_number
aerror = real_number
amaxit = integer_number
tlimit = real_number
hmax = real_number
pattern_for_jacobian = yes/no
apattern_for_jacobian = yes/no
Example:
executive_control set kinematics_parameters &

model_name= model_1 &
pattern_for_jacobian = yes &
apattern_for_jacobian = yes
Description:

model_name String Specifies the model to be modified. You use this parameter
to identify the existing model to be affected with this
command.
alimit Real number Specifies the maximum angular increment Adams is to
allow per iteration. Can take a real value greater than zero.
error Real number Specifies the maximum relative displacement error Adams
is to allow. Can take a real value greater than zero.

maxit Integer number Specifies the maximum number of iterations Adams is to
allow for finding static equilibrium in a static equilibrium
analysis. Can take an integer value greater than zero.
aerror Real number Specifies the maximum acceleration error Adams is to
allow for each time step during a kinematic solution.
amaxit Integer number Specifies the maximum number of iterations Adams is to
allow for finding accelerations at a point in time during a
kinematics solution.
tlimit Real number Specifies the maximum translational increment Adams is
to allow per iteration.
hmax Real number
pattern_for_jacobian Yes/No Specifies as many as ten character strings that together
establish the pattern for evaluating the Jacobian matrix
during Newton-Raphson iteration.
apattern_for_jacobia Yes/No Specifies as many as ten character strings that together
n establish the pattern for Jacobian evaluations during
acceleration solution.
1. Kinematics parameters include error tolerances and other parameters for kinematic analyses. You
would set these parameters only when you are requesting a kinematic analysis and you want to
change one or more of the tolerances andparameters from the default values.
2. A kinematic analysis is only appropriate when a system has zero degrees-of-freedom. A kinematic
analysis solves for the displacements, velocities, accelerations, and forces (if any) at a series of
points in time. To find the displacements, Adams uses Newton-Raphson iteration to solve a
nonlinear set of algebraic equations. After finding the displacements, Adams solves linear
equations without iteration to find the velocities, accelerations, and forces. Adams repeats this
procedure at successively later times until it obtains results over the period of time specified in
the Adams SIMULATE command.
3. You may identify a model by typing its name or by picking it from the screen. If the model is not
with it.
4. The parameter PATTERN_FOR_JACOBIAN specifies as many as ten character strings that
together establish the pattern for evaluating the Jacobian matrix during Newton-Raphson
iteration. For each iteration, T or TRUE indicates that Adams is to evaluate the Jacobian, or F or
FALSE indicates that Adams is not to evaluate the Jacobian. Thus cj determines whether or not
Adams is to evaluate the Jacobian at the jth iteration. If necessary, Adams repeats the pattern of
evaluation until it reaches the maximum number of iterations (MAXIT). The number of Y's or
Yes’s and N's or No's, together, must be at least one and no more than ten. PATTERN defaults to
Y:Y:Y:Y:Y:Y:Y:Y:Y:Y, i.e. to evaluating the Jacobian at every iteration.
5. The parameter APATTERN_FOR_JACOBIAN specifies as many as ten character strings that
together establish the pattern for Jacobian evaluations during acceleration solution. For each
iteration, T or TRUE indicates that Adams is to evaluate the Jacobian, or F or FALSE indicates
that Adams is not to evaluate the Jacobian. Thus cj determines whether or not Adams is to
evaluate the Jacobian at the jth iteration. If necessary, Adams repeats the pattern of evaluation
until it reaches the maximum number of iterations (AMAXIT). The number of Y's or Yes’s and
N's or No's, together, must be at least one and no more than ten. PATTERN defaults to
Y:Y:Y:Y:Y:Y:Y:Y:Y:Y, i.e. to evaluating the Jacobian at every iteration.
Cautions:
1. AERROR must be greater than zero, and defaults to 1.0E-04.
executive_control set numerical_integration_parameters
executive_control set
numerical_integration_parameters
Description:

model_name Existing model Specifies the model to be modified. You use this
parameter to identify the existing model to be
affected with this command.
integrator_type GSTIFF, WSTIFF, Specifies the integrator type to be used
DSTIFF, ABAM,
CPBDF, HASTIFF,
SI2_GSTIFF
solver_type CALAHAN, Specifies the Solver type
HARWELL
error_tolerance Real Specifies the error tolerance. Should be greater
than 0.
pattern_for_jacobian Yes/No Specifies the pattern for jacobian. Can take up to
10 boolean values.
maxit_corrector_iterati Integer Should be an integer greater than 0
ons
hinit_time_step Real Should be a real number greater than 0
hmin_time_step Real Should be a real number greater than 0
hmax_time_step Real Should be a real number greater than 0
adaptivity Real Specify the adaptivity
scale Real Specify the scale
kmax_integrator_order Integer Specify the integrator order. Integer specified
should be greater than 0 and less than or equal to
12.
interpolate Yes/No Indicates whether interpolation is allowed. That is,
indicates whether the integrator can choose
integration steps independent of output steps and
the interpolate results for the output step times.
reconcile ALL, Corrects interpolated results before Adams writes
DISPLACEMENTS, them to the output files to satisfy the constraint
NONE equations.
executive_control set numerical_integration_parameters

repartition_threshold Real number Allows some control of the re-partitioning of
coordinates into independent and dependent
coordinates.
corrector_resolution_fa Real Specifies the corrector resolution factor
ctor
associated with it.
2. The values for RECONCILE can be:
DISPLACEMENTS: Only the displacements are corrected to satisfy the constraints.
ALL: The displacements are corrected to satisfy the constraints and the velocities and
accelerations are corrected to satisfy the constraint derivatives.
NONE: The integration step size is adjusted to force the integrator to compute the solution at
every output step. In this situation,
INTERPOLATE must be set to NO.
3. In general, for efficiency reasons, the coordinates are re-partitioned whenever:
• A matrix inverse condition number gets too small
• The displacement iterations do not converge
• A part rotation occurs
• A matrix becomes numerically singular, or
• The unit energy ratio is less than its original value times the value of
REPARTITION_THRESHOLD.
Cautions:
1. Note that interpolation is not yet available when the EXECUTIVE_CONTROL SET
DYNAMICS_PARAMETERS BDF_PARAMETER command specifies FIXED or VARIABLE
coefficients for the PREDICTOR_COEFFICIENTS argument.
executive_control set preferences

This command allows you to set preferences for Adams/Solver.
Format:

model_name = Name of existing model
status_message = on/off
contact_geometry_library = default library/parasolids
contact_faceting_tolerance = real_number
thread_count = integer_number
library_path = string
flex_limit_check = none/skin/selnod
flex_limit_check_action = halt/return/message_only
Example:
executive_control set preferences &

status_message = on &
contact_geometry_library = default_library &
flex_limit_check = none &
flex_limit_check_action = halt
Description:

model_name Existing Model Name Specifies an existing model.
status_message on/off Specifies the status message to be on or off.
contact_geometry_library default_library/ Specifies the geometry library to be used for
parasolid contact operations.
contact_faceting_tolerance Real Specifies the resolution of the mesh that is to be
created from the solid geometries in the model.
thread-count Integer Specifies the number of parallel threads that
Adams/Solver (C++) will use when performing
the simulation.

library_path String Specifies a colon-separated list of directories
which are to be searched for user subroutine
plug-in libraries before searching in the default
locations.
flex_limit_check none/skin/selnod Specifies flexible body linear limit checking on
all the flexible bodies.
flex_limit_check_action halt/return/ Specifies what action Adams/Solver (C++)
message_only should take if a flexible body exceeds its linear
limit.
1. Status_message controls the presence of two status messages in the .msg file produced by
Adams/Solver (C++). These status messages mimic status messages produced by Adams/Solver
(FORTRAN). This preference has no effect on Adams/Solver (FORTRAN).
If it is set to ON, the first status message is sent after every simulation and has the form “Simulate
status =i”. The second message is sent when Adams/Solver (C++) terminates and has the form
“Termination status = i”. In both cases, “i” is an integer number reporting the status.
2. For many models, the Default Library can substantially reduce simulation time for contact
operations. Because it is polygon-based, however, it is not always as accurate as the Parasolid
geometry engine. Parasolid is an exact boundary-representation geometric modeler, which makes
it highly accurate, but not as fast as a polygon-based engine. For these reasons, you can switch
from one to the other depending on your needs.
3. The faceting tolerance is defined as the maximum error between the true surface and the surface
of the faceted representation of the geometry. The maximum error is guaranteed not to exceed
(1/value) * the minimum dimension of each geometry's bounding box.
The default value of this parameter is 300.
4. The number of threads, must be an integer in the range of 1 to 8. The default value is 1.
By executing multiple threads in parallel across multiple processors, Adams/Solver (C++) can
reduce the wall time required for a simulation. Typically, the optimal number of threads is
between N and 2N, where N is the number of processors (including virtual processors, such as
Pentium processors supporting HyperThreading). Note that this option has no effect on IRIX
architectures.
5. By setting flex_limit_check parameter to:
skin - Adams/Solver (C++) will check the deformation of all the nodes on the skin to see whether
they exceed the linear limit. To use this option, MNF_FILE or DB_FILE need to be specified in
FLEX_BODY statement.
SELNOD - Adams/Solver (C++) will only check the nodes specified in SELNOD section in
MTX file.
The linear limit is defined as 10% of the characteristic length of the flexible body. User can use
CHAR_LEN in FLEX_BODY statement to specify the characteristic length. If CHAR_LEN is
not specified, Adams/Solver (C++) will try to calculate the characteristic length use MNF or MD
DB if MNF_FILE or DB_FILE is specified. Otherwise, Adams/Solver (C++) will issue a
warning.
6. Setting the flex_limit_check_action to:
HALT - Terminates execution of Adams/Solver (C++).
RETURN - Stops the simulation and returns to the command level.
MESSAGE_ONLY - Issue a warning message only (Default).
For more information see PREFERENCES statement in Adams/Solver online help.
executive_control set solver_parameters

This command provides a means to select between the harwel, calahan, umf and auto integration solvers
in Adams. This selection is made on a model by model basis.
Therefore, each time you submit the model, the chosen solver will be used until this command is used to
select the alternative. For a complete description of these solvers, see the Adams documentation.
Format:

model_name= model_name
solver_type = solver_identifer_string
Example:
executive_control set solver_parameters &

solver_type = calahan
Description:

model_name String Specifies the model to be modified. You use this parameter to identify
the existing model to be affected with this command.
solver_type String Specifies that the HARWELL, CALAHAN, UMF or AUTO integration
solvers is to be used in Adams for simulation of the model specified in
the MODEL_NAME parameter. Each time you submit the model to be
analyzed, the chosen solver will be used until this command is used to
select the alternative.
1. Specifies the model that is to be modified. You use this parameter to identify the existing model
to be affected with this command. You may identify a model by typing its name or by picking it
from the screen. If the model is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also
find it convenient to type the name even if the model is displayed. You must separate multiple
model names by commas. If the model is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by
picking on any of the graphics associated with it.
2. Solver types
a. CALAHAN
Specifies that Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) is to use the CALAHAN solver exclusively. The
Calahan solver is usually faster than the Harwell solver, but it cannot analyze systems with
redundant constraints.
b. HARWELL
Specifies that Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) is to use the HARWELL solver exclusively. The
Harwell solver can analyze systems with redundant constraints, but is usually slower than the
Calahan solver. The CALAHAN and HARWELL solvers use somewhat different strategies
for picking pivots during the linear solution.
If one solver is experiencing difficulties solving an ill-conditioned model, you may try the
other solver. One may work better on a particular model than the other. Even though you
deactivate all your redundant constraints, Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) does not allow you to
use the Calahan solver. If (under these circumstances) you issue the LSOLVER/CALAHAN
command, Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) returns the message: “Changing to the CALAHAN
solver is not allowed for this model due to the presence of redundant constraints.” To avoid
this problem, deactivate all your redundant constraints, run a short simulation, and then issue
the LSOLVER/CALAHAN command.
c. UMF
Specifies that Adams/Solver (C++) is to use the UMF solver exclusively. The UMF solver is
typically faster for models with very large number of equations (>4000).
d. AUTO
Specifies that Adams/Solver(C++) is permitted to decide which solver to use based on the
number of equations in the model and the amount of Jacobian fill.
file 1
file
file adams_data_set merge

Allows you to merge one Adams data set file or model with another Adams data set file.
Format:

file_name= string
model_name= an existing model
length= linear_units
force= force_units
mass= mass_units
time= time_units
Example:
file adams_data_set merge &

file_name= "c:\mydir\desktop\merge1" &
model_name= model_2
Description:

file_name String Specifies the name of the file that is to be read, written, or
executed
model_name An Existing Model Specifies an existing model in Adams/View with which to merge
the Adams dataset file
length Linear_units Specifies the length units in the file, if different than the current
default
force Force_units Specifies the force units in the file, if different than the current
default
mass Mass_units Specifies the mass units in the file, if different than the current
default
time Time_units Specifies the time units in the file, if different than the current
default
file 3
1. Adams/Solver IDs, referenced but not defined in the Adams/Solver dataset file being merged, are
assumed to be already existing in that file. For example, the following marker definition
references to a part, Adams/Solver ID 99. If there is a part 99 in the Adams/Solver dataset file, it
is assumed that the reference is to that part. If, however, there is no such part in the Adams/Solver
dataset file, Adams/View will use the part, Adams/Solver ID 99, in the model as the parent of this
marker. References to Adams/Solver IDs in the model may also be used for the definition of
constraints and forces.
****** adams_view_name='rocker_1' ******
MARKER/9901 , PART = 99 , QP = 100, 75, 0 , REU = 3.14159, 0, 0
Adams/View names, that are specified in the Adams/Solver dataset file and are not unique with
respect to the model, will be ignored. Adams/View will provide a name for the entity using the
default name generation. See the DEFAULT NAME_GENERATION command for more
information. For example, if you read an Adams/Solver dataset file with the following marker
defined:
****** adams_view_name='rocker_1' ******
MARKER/9901 , PART = 99 , QP = 100, 75, 0 , REU = 3.14159, 0, 0
and the model already existing in Adams/View contained an entity named rocker_1 on the PART
with Adams/Solver ID 99, the marker would be named using the default name generation. Instead
of being named .MOD1.PAR99.rocker_1, it would be named .MOD1.PAR99.MAR9901. If the
Adams/Solver ID specified for the marker 9901 was not unique, a default Adams/Solver ID would
be assigned. The default Adams/Solver ID is one more (greater by 1) than the highest
Adams/Solver ID already in the model.
You cannot merge two existing models in Adams/View. To merge two models in Adams/View,
you must first write one to an Adams/Solver dataset file using the FILE ADAMS_DATA_SET
WRITE command, then read the file back in, using the FILE ADAMS_DATA_SET MERGE
command.
2. The proper extension is the default, but can be overridden simply by supplying a different
extension.
You do not need to enclose the file name in quotes if it contains only alpha-numeric characters
3. The model specified is considered the parent model and all Adams IDs and Adams/View names
in this model will take precedence over the Adams IDs and the Adams/View names specified in
the Adams dataset file.
You may identify a model by typing its name or by picking it from the screen. If the model is not
even if the model is displayed. You must separate multiple model names by commas.
associated with it.
4. If you do not use the length parameter, Adams/View will read or write the file using your default
modeling units. You only need to enter this parameter when you wish to read or write a file with
different units than those you are currently using.
Specifying this parameter does not change your default modeling units, it only overrides them
during the file read or write operation. Use the DEFAULT UNITS command if you wish to
change your default modeling units.
5. If you do not use the force parameter, Adams/View will read or write the file using your default
units different than those you are currently using.
6. If you do not use the mass parameter, Adams/View will read or write the file using your default
7. If you do not use the time parameter, Adams/View will read or write the file using your default
file 5
file adams_data_set write

Allows you to write an Adams data set from an existing Adams/View model.
Format:

file_name= string
write_to_terminal= the constant default value will be used if this
parameter is omitted=
angle= angular_units
force= force_units
mass= mass_units
time=
Example:
file adams_data_set write &

file_name = "c:\model.adm" &
length = mm
Description:

model_name An Existing Model Specifies an existing model
file_name String Specifies the name of the file that is to be read,
written, or executed.
write_to_terminal The Constant Default Value Specifies whether or not the information
will be used if this requested is to be sent to the informational
parameter is omitted. window
anglle Angular_units Specifies the angle units in the file, if different
from the current default.
length Linear_units Specifies the length units in the file if different

force Force_units Specifies the force units in the file, if different
mass Mass_units Specifies the mass units in the file, if different
Time Time_units Specifies the time units in the file, if different
1. Adams/View will preserve the database names you have chosen, by writing them as comments in
the Adams data set. This will allow you to read the data set at a later date, and still have the
original database names.
The AdamsAdams/View model does not have to be complete to be written out in the form of an
Adams data set. If you want to check your model for completeness and consistency, use the
'MODEL VERIFY' command before writing the data set.
Writing an Adams data set is a convenient method to transfer a Adams/View model from one
computing platform to another computing platform from a different hardware vendor.
associated with it.
3. The proper extension is the default but can be overridden by simply supplying a different
extension.
4. Specify whether the information requested is to be sent to the informational window or not.
This parameter is most likely be used in conjunction with the FILE_NAME parameter to get the
information put into a file.
5. If you do not use the angle parameter, Adams/View will read or write the file using your default
units different from those you are currently using.
file 7
6. If you do not use the length parameter, Adams/View will read or write the file using your default
7. If you do not use the force parameter, Adams/View will read or write the file using your default
8. If you do not us the mass parameter, Adams/View will read or write the file using your default
9. If you do not use the time parameter, Adams/View will read or write the file using your default
file analysis read
file analysis read

Allows you to read a set of analysis files, which is a set of output files that Adams/Solver generates during
a simulation. The files include:
• Graphics
• Request
• Results
You can import multiple files if you associate and store the files with a model. Adams/View reads and
creates all analyses under the specified model. If you do not provide a model name, Adams/View reads
each analysis into its own model. For request files, when you specify multiple files, the Request IDs
button only displays the requests from the first file listed. The list of IDs will, however, be applied to all
files.
If you select to associate the files with a particular simulation, you can only import one set of output files
generated from the same Adams/Solver simulation. Adams/View uses the time-date stamp placed at the
beginning of each output file to determine if the files were generated by the same simulation run
.
Note: If you choose to edit the time-date stamps, make sure that the output files came from
similar simulations. Otherwise, result processing may lead to erroneous information.
Format:
file analysis read

file_name= string
model_name= new or existing analysis
analysis_name= new or existing analysis
force= force_units
mass= mass_units
time= time_units
Example:
file analysis read&

file_name = “c:\analysis_files\my_analysis_1.gra” &
model_name = my_model &
length = mm &
time = second &
file 9
file analysis read
file analysis read&

force = newton &
mass = kg
Description:

file_name String Specifies the name of the file or files to be
read.
model_name New Model Enter the model name under which you want
to store the analysis files in the modeling
database.
analysis_name New or Existing Analysis Specifies the name of the analysis in which to
store output files.
length(optional) mm, cm, meter, km, inch, Specifies the length units in the file, if
foot, mile. different from the current default.
force(optional) newton, knewton, dyne, Specifies the force units in the file, if different
pound_force, kpound_force, from the current default.
kg_force, ounce_force,
millinewton, centinewton,
poundal.
mass(optional) kg, gram, pound_mass, Specifies the mass units in the file, if different
kpound_mass, slug, from the current default.
ounce_mass, and tonne.
time(optional) millisecond, second, minute, Specifies the time units in the file, if different
and hour. from the current default.
1. The proper extension is the default, but you can override it by supplying a different extension.
You can only read in multiple files if you associate them with a model.
It is not necessary to enclose the file name in quotes if it only contains alphanumeric characters
or '[]' for directory paths, you must enclose the file name in quotes.
2. You can enter multiple files in the file_name parameter if you select to store them under a model.
file analysis read
Adams/View requires that simulations have unique names. Therefore, if an analysis already exists
with the same name as your files, use this parameter to assign a unique name at the time of reading
the file(s).
4. If you do not specify the length parameter, Adams/View reads or writes the file using your default
modeling units.
If you want to read or write a file with units other than those you are currently using, you must
specify this parameter. Specifying this parameter, however, does not change your default
modeling units; it only overrides them during the file read or write operation.
If you want to change your default modeling units, use the defaults units command.
file 11
file analysis write
file analysis write

Allows you to write a set of output files generated from the same analysis.
Format:
file analysis write

file_name = string
entity_name = existing entity
Example:
file analysis_write &

file_name = “c:\analysis\analysis_1”
Description:

analysis_name Existing analysis Specifies the name of the analysis in which to store output
files.
file_name(optional) String Specifies the name of the file that is to be read, written, or
executed.
Entity_name Existing entity Specifies the objects to be written to a partial binary file.
(Rarely used except internally by vertical applications, such
as Adams/Car)
is the file name, excluding the extension. Adams/View requires that simulations have unique
names. Therefore, if an analysis already exists with the same name as your files, use this
parameter to assign a unique name at the time of reading the file(s).
2. The proper extension for the file_name parameter is the default, but you can override it by
file binary read
file binary read

Allows you to read an Adams/View binary file.
When you read an AdamsAdams/View binary file, the contents of that file replace the current
Adams/View database. Any model that exists at the time of the read, will be over-written by the database
in the file.
Format:
file binary read

file_name= string
alert= boolean
Example:
file binary read &

file_name = "c:\mydir\desktop\model_1.bin" &
alert = yes
Description:

file_name String Specifies the name of the file that is to be read, written, or executed
alert Boolean Alerts the user if data has been modified
extension.
2. Specifies whether or not to alert the user before reading the binary file if there is data that has been
modified since the last save operation. The alert box provides the user with the options to continue
with the read or to cancel the read.
file 13
file binary write
file binary write

Allows you to writes an Adams/View binary database file.
All information stored in the database is written to a binary file. That is, all preprocessing modeling
entities, customized menus and panels, view orientations, and postprocessing analyses are written to a
binary file.
Binary files do not include current counters for postscript and HPGL file names, nor do they store the
current size of the menus.
Format:
file binary write

file_name= string
demo_version= real
alert_if_exists= boolean
Example:
file binary write &

file_name = "c:\mydir\desktop\model_1.bin" &
alert_if_exists = yes
Description:

file_name String Specifies the name of the file that is to be read, written, or executed.
demo_version Real Specifies that the binary file to be written should be for use with the
Mechanical Dynamics, Inc. "Adams Demonstration System".
alert_if_exists Boolean Specifies whether or not to issue an alert before writing the file, if a file
with the same name already exists
1. IT IS IMPORTANT TO NOTE that the binary file is not transferable to different machines from
different hardware vendors. For example, you cannot read in an Adams/View binary file written
on a Silicon Graphics workstation, into Adams/View on a Digital Equipment Corp. VaxStation.
Also some machines from the same hardware vendor write incompatible binary files. An example
file binary write
of this is a binary file written on a SUN 4/x and a binary file written on SUN 3/x. To transfer
preprocessing models from Adams/View on one hardware vendor’s machine to a different
hardware vendor’s machine, you should use the FILE COMMAND WRITE command. The
default extension for the binary file is ".bin", but this is not necessary.
2. The proper extension is the default, but you can override it by supplying a different extension.
3. Specifies whether or not to issue an alert before writing the file, if a file with the same name
already exists. The alert box provides you with the options to cancel the write, overwrite the
existing file, or to back up the existing file, and then perform the write.
file 15
file command read
file command read

Reads a command file and executes the commands contained within. The commands will be executed as
if they were typed at the command line. Control will be returned after all the commands have been
executed. If an error is detected in one of the commands and Adams/View is unable to process the
command, the system can react in one of several ways. This can be specified using the defaults
command_file command, the default being to abort the file.
Format:
file command read

file_name = string
Example
file command read &

file_name = “C:\mydir\mymodel_1.cmd”
Description:

file_name String Specifies the name of the file that is to be read and executed.
1. The proper extension for the file_name parameter is the default (.cmd), but you can override it by
2. It is not necessary to enclose the file name in quotes if it only contains alpha-numeric characters
or '[ ]' for directory paths, you must enclose the file name in quotes.
file command write
file command write

Allows you to write a command file from an existing Adams/View model.
Adams/View will create a file that contains all the commands necessary to create the model you specify
with the parameter entity_name. This will allow you to move the model from the computing platform you
are currently on, to another computer from a different hardware vendor.
Format:
file command write

entity_name = an existing model
file_name = string
use_parasolid = as_is/full
Example
file command write &

entity_name = .model_1 &
file_name = mymodel_1.cmd &
use_parasolid = as_is
Description:

entity_name an existing model Specifies an existing model to be written as Adams/View
command file.
file_name string Specifies the name of the file that is to be written.
use_parasolid as_is/full Allows you to write the geometric definition of an Adams model
in Parasolids file format or in Adams/View command language
format.
1. The proper extension in the file_name parameter is the default (.cmd), but you can override it by
It is not necessary to enclose the file name in quotes if it only contains alpha-numeric characters
or '[ ]' for directory paths, you must enclose the file name in quotes.
file 17
file command write
even if the model is displayed.
You must separate multiple model names by commas. If the model is visible in one of your views,
you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics associated with it. You need not separate
multiple model picks by commas.
3. For the use_parasolid value select either:
a. As is - Adams/View exports any geometry that was imported from a Parasolid file out to a
Parasolid file when it writes the command file. The command file references the newly created
Parasolid file. All other geometry (for example, cylinder, shell, and spring-dampers) are
defined using Adams/View command language and included in the command file.
b. Full - Adams/View exports all static geometry to Parasolid files instead of using Adams/View
command language. This includes cylinders, shells, Parasolid, solids, and so on. It does not
include dynamic outlines, spring-damper graphics, and graphic force vectors. These graphics
continue to be defined in the Adams/View command language.
3. The commands written to the file may or may not be in the order you originally entered them.
Adams/View writes out the commands in the following order.
a. Units for the model.
b. The model create command.
c. The Parts
The attributes of the part.
The markers belonging to the part.
The attributes of the marker.
The geometry belonging to the part.
The attributes of the geometry.
d. The constraints.
The attributes of the constraint.
e. The Forces.
The attributes of the force.
f. The Dynamic geometry. Geometry that spans two different parts.
The attributes of the geometry.
g. Acceleration due to gravity.
h. Adams Analysis Settings.
file dac read
file dac read

Allows you to import DAC files.
nCode International created the DAC file format. This DAC format supports single-parameter (time
series), two-parameter (x-y), and three-parameter (histogram) files. Adams/Durability supports the time
series format. With this DAC format, you can input data from durability test machines and output data to
nSoft and other DAC-compatible programs. This topic contains an overview of the DAC format. For a
detailed description of the DAC format, see the nSoft data File Formats document from nCode
International.
DAC files are binary, sequential, and fixed-length with 512-byte records. The data represents a fixed
sample rate or time step. Real numbers are single-precision (4-byte) values. Each file has header, data,
and footer regions. Adams/Durability supports both old (pre version 5.0) and new (version 5.0+) DAC
formats with a single channel of time series data.
In general, DAC files are not portable from platform to platform. For example, files created by
Adams/Durability on a Windows platform are not readable by Adams/Durability or other programs on
UNIX platforms. nCode provides an nSoft utility to convert DAC files from one platform to another.
However, this utility does not have a specification for the Linux platform. When using Adams/Durability
or Adams/View on a Linux platform, use DAC files that have been converted to Windows or INTEL
(Windows DAC files are compatible with Linux). Note that Linux-generated DAC files can be processed
on Windows and vice versa.
Format:
file dac read

file_name = file_name
dac_object_name = dac_file_object_name
Description:

File_name String Specifies the name of the file that is to be read, written, or
executed.
dac_object_name Dac_file_object_name Specifies the name of the dac_file object that will contain
the data from the file. Default is the file name.
The proper extension in the file_name parameter is the default, but you can override it by supplying a
file 19
file dac read
It is not necessary to enclose the file name in quotes if it only contains alphanumeric characters and starts
paths, you must enclose the file name in quotes.
file dac write
file dac write

Allows you to export DAC-format request files from Adams/View after a simulation completes. This
technique does not require you to set up requests before running the simulation.
nCode International created the DAC file format. This DAC format supports single-parameter (time
series), two-parameter (x-y), and three-parameter (histogram) files. Adams/Durability supports the time
series format. With this DAC format, you can input data from durability test machines and output data to
nSoft and other DAC-compatible programs. This topic contains an overview of the DAC format. For a
detailed description of the DAC format, see the nSoft data File Formats document from nCode
International.
DAC files are binary, sequential, and fixed-length with 512-byte records. The data represent a fixed
sample rate or time step. Real numbers are single-precision (4-byte) values. Each file has header, data,
and footer regions. Adams/Durability supports both old (pre version 5.0) and new (version 5.0+) DAC
formats with a single channel of time series data.
In general, DAC files are not portable from platform to platform. For example, files created by
Adams/Durability on a Windows platform are not readable by Adams/Durability or other programs on
UNIX platforms. nCode provides an nSoft utility to convert DAC files from one platform to another.
However, this utility does not have a specification for the Linux platform. When using Adams/Durability
or Adams/View on a Linux platform, use DAC files that have been converted to Windows or INTEL
(Windows DAC files are compatible with Linux). Note that Linux-generated DAC files can be processed
on Windows and vice versa.
Format:
file dac write

result_set_component = existing result_set
Example:
file dac write &

file_name = c:\data\dac_format &
result_set_component = my_result_set
file 21
file dac write
Description:

File_name String Specifies the name of the file that is to be read, written,
or executed.
Result_set_component Existing Result Set Identifies the components of an existing result set. The
components must be in an existing result set and
reference to the component must include the result set
name.
1. The proper extension in the file_name parameter is the default, but you can override it by
2. For example, assume you read a request file named shift.req, and this request file contains the
result set REQ1. If you want to refer to the X component in the result set REQ1, enter
.SHIFT.REQ1.X (you can omit .SHIFT. if SHIFT is the current analysis_name). SHIFT refers to
the analysis name from which the result set came (or is stored under).
Result sets are associated with an analysis and can be identified as such. A result set associated
with request 101 from an analysis named test can be referred to as .test.req101.
The table illustrates the default names assigned to result sets and result set components read from
request (.req) and results (.res) files.
Result set naming
Result set type: Result set name: Component names: File that result is from:
part PARxxx... x y z e1 e2 e3 e4 mag results file
vx vy vz wx wy wz
accx accy accz wdx wdy

wdz
diff DIFxxx... q dq results file
joint JOIxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag tmag results file
jprim JPRxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag tmag results file
motion MOTxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag tmag results file
gear GEAxxx... fx fy fz results file
file dac write
Result set type: Result set name: Component names: File that result is from:
coupler COUxxx... fx1 fy1 fz1 tx1 ty1 tz1 results file
fmag1 tmag1
fx2 fy2 fz2 tx2 ty2 tz2

fmag2 tmag2

fmag3 tmag3
sforce SFOxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag tmag results file
spring damp SPRxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag tmag results file
bushing BUSxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag tmag results file
beam BEAxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag tmag results file
field FIExxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag tmag results file
user request UREQxxx... u1 u2 u3 u4 u5 u6 u7 u8 results file
request REQxxx... x y z r1 r2 r3 mag amag request file
ucon (not implemented)
file 23
file geometry read
file geometry read

Allows you to import CAD geometry (IGES, STEP, DXF, DWG, or Parasolid).
Format:
file geometry read

type_of_geometry = geometry_file_type
file_name = string
geometry_type = iges_geometry_type
blanked_entities = boolean
level = integer
create_geometry = geom_create_type
scale = real
mesh_density = integer
tolerance = real
single_shell = shell_opt
location = location
Example:
file geometry read &

type_of_geometry = igs &
file_name = "c:\data.igs" &
part_name = part_2 &
mesh_density = 10 &
blanked_entities = yes &
tolerance = 0.001
file geometry read
Description:
Parameter Type Description

type_of_geometry Geometry_file_type Specifies the type of geometry that is to have its
file_name String Specifies the name of the file that is to be read, written,
or executed.
part_name An Existing Part Specifies the name of the part with which you want to
associate the imported geometry.
geometry_type Iges_geometry_type Specifies the type of geometric entities to be translated
from the IGES file to /View.
blanked_entities Boolean Specifies if invisible geometry is to be converted.
level Integer Enter the level or levels to be translated in the CAD file
for IGES, DXF, and DWG files.
create_geometry Geom_create_type Specifies the type of /View geometry created when
geometry is translated from the IGES file to /View.
scale Real Enter the factor by which you want to scale the size of
the geometry created in /Exchange.
mesh_density Integer Specifies the number of rulings on a surface in each
parametric (U/V) direction.
tolerance Real Enter the tolerance for the geometry.
single_shell Shell_opt Values are: yes, no, and wireframe_only.
location Location Specifies the translational position where the geometry
in the CAD file is to be located, relative to the MSC. part
coordinate system.
orientation Orientation Specifies the angular position where the geometry in the
CAD file is to be oriented, relative to the MSC. part
coordinate system.
relative_to An Existing Model, Specifies the coordinate system relative to which the
Part Or Marker location coordinates and orientation angles exist.
1. The type_of_geometry parameter acts as a filter to decide which of the selected geometry objects
will have their rendering mode modified. The possible values are: arc, box, frustum,
springdamper, outline, or all. The arc setting includes both arc and circle geometry. The frustum
setting includes both frustum and cylinder geometry.
Values are: igs, stp, dxf, and dwg.
2. The proper extension of the file is the default, but you can override it by supplying a different
extension.
file 25
file geometry read
3. You can specify any combination of these values for the geometry_type parameter:
• Point - Only include vertices of geometric entities
• Wireframe - Include lines, arcs, curves, and splines
• Surface - Include surfaces. The IGES translator supports all the standard surfaces. In the case
of trimmed and bounded surfaces, the untrimmed surfaces and the associated model space
trimming curves are processed, but no trimming is performed.
• Text - Include annotation entities including leader lines, arrows, dimensions, and
alphanumeric characters. The entire annotation data is stroked, so the relative size of most
fonts is represented accurately. Stroked text is translated to /View as polylines, allowing for a
more accurate representation of the size of the text in the IGES file, but requires more memory
than translating all text to one font. Large amounts of text may adversely affect performance
of the IGES translator and /View.
• All - Include all entities.
Example: The following command translates surfaces and text from the IGES file to /View:
file iges read file

"cylinder.igs geometry_type= surface,text .mod1.ground
" &= part_name
4. Any IGES entity encountered in the IGES file can be blanked by the program that created the
IGES file. This is similar to /View visibility.
If you specify No for the blanked_entities parameter, the blanked entities are not translated to
/View. If you specify Yes, the blanked entities are translated to /View and are made invisible.
The IGES entities that are blanked are typically construction entities that are used in the definition
of another geometric entity. For example, a line may be used as the center of rotation of another
line in the definition of a cylinder. The center line, and the sweep line rotated about the center line,
would both be blanked because they are temporary entities used in the construction of the
cylinder.
Once you translated blanked entities to /View, there is no distinction between construction entities
and other geometry. You can use the display_attributes command to turn on the visibility of the
blanked entities.
Values are: yes and no.
file geometry read
5. Levels let you associate geometry into a group. These groups can be manipulated as a single entity
for purposes of visibility and color. The CAD program that generated the CAD file defines the
levels and are labeled with integers greater than or equal to 0. Levels are typically used to organize
data for viewing and are similar to layers. If you do not specify the levels you want translated,
/Exchange reads all levels.
You can specify a single level or a range of levels. Separate the range with a comma (,). For
example, enter 10, 15 to translate levels 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15.
6. You can convert a subset of the geometric entities read by the IGES translator to outlines and
markers in /View.
If you specify the create_geometry parameter with the value outline, the entities listed below will
be translated into /View outlines with a marker created at each vertex. These markers will have
an orientation parallel to the lprf of the part selected in the part_name parameter.
If you specify this parameter with the value polyline, the above-mentioned entities will be
translated into /View polylines. No markers are created when polylines are generated.
Generating outlines has the advantage of having markers created at each vertex. These markers
are standard /View markers that may be used for the definition of constraints, forces, mass
properties, and other /View geometry. The outlines and markers may also be written to an /Solver
dataset file. The disadvantage of using outlines is the increased memory requirements. Geometry
translated to polylines will not have markers and requires about one third of the memory to store
the equivalent outline. Polylines are not written to an /Solver dataset file.
Values are: solid and polyline.
7. The default scale factor is 1.0, meaning that the geometry in /Exchange will be the same size as
the geometry in the CAD file. A scale factor less than 1.0 reduces the size of geometry and a scale
factor greater than 1.0 increases the size of the geometry.
For example, if you specify a scale factor of 0.5, /Exchange translates a cylinder of length 2 meters
and diameter of .5 meters to a length of 1 meter and diameter of .25 meters. /Exchange also scales
the distance from the geometry to the coordinate system specified in the Relative To text box
according to the scale value. If the cylinder was located at 3, 2, 0 in the file, it would be located
at 1.5, 1, 0 after it is translated to MSC.. The orientation of the geometry is not effected by scale
value.
8. The minimum mesh is a 2 X 2 that will display only the boundaries of the surface.
If you do not specify the mesh_density parameter, the iges translator calculates the mesh values
based on the tolerance specified with the tolerance parameter, and polygonizes the surface.
For polygonalization, the surface is sampled at several U/V rulings based on the surface type. The
ruling that generates the most points at the specified tolerance in the U and V direction determines
the polygon density for the surface.
For certain surface types (for example, NURBS) a maximum sample is used to reduce the
approximation time for polygonalizing high-order surfaces. This maximum is currently being set
to 4 in each U/V direction.
file 27
file geometry read
Note that specifying a mesh requires less computation than letting the translator default to a
polygonalization (i.e. not setting the mesh_density parameter), but the polylines generated for a
mesh may not be shaded in /View. The polylines generated for a polygonalization are closed
(polygons) and therefore may be shaded in /View.
9. The tolerance value is the measure of the midpoint chordal distance from the approximated
curve/surface to the true curve/surface.
10. The coordinates specified by the location parameter can be relative to any other coordinate system
defined in the model.
By default, you enter Cartesian (x,y,z) coordinates. You can change the convention for entering
translational positions.
11. 11. The orientation coordinates can be relative to any other coordinate system defined in the
model.
/View orients the coordinate system starting from the initial coordinate system and applying three
successive rotations. By default, you supply body-fixed 313 angles. You can change the
convention for entering orientation angles.
12. If you do not specify the ‘relative_to’ parameter, /View uses the default coordinate system. The
default coordinate system is initially your model, i.e. the global coordinate system. You can
change the default coordinate system using the default coordinate_system command.
Cautions:
1. Be careful when specifying the tolerance. You should have advanced knowledge of the units and
size of the geometry in the CAD file before setting the tolerance. If you do not know the size of
the geometry in the file, /Exchange may translate the geometry so it is too coarse, or too fine. A
tolerance that is too fine can potentially cause /Exchange to use excessive computing power and
memory.
file geometry write
file geometry write

Allows you to export CAD data (IGES, STEP, DXF, DWG, or Parasolid).
Format:
file geometry write

type_of_geometry = geometry_file_type
file_name = string
explode = boolean
part_name = an existing body
Example:
file geometry write &

type_of_geometry = stp &
file_name = "c:\data.stp" &
explode = yes &
frame_number = 10
Description:

type_of_geometry Geometry_file_type Specifies the type of geometry that is to have
(required) its rendering mode modified.
file_name(required) String Specifies the name of the file that is to be read,
explode(optional) Boolean Values are: yes and no.
model_name(required) An Existing Model Specifies the Adams/View model to be
written to the CAD file. Adams/Exchange
places each rigid body in the model on a
separate level.
analysis_name(required An Existing Analysis Specifies a model at a particular simulation
) frame (time) of a particular analysis.
file 29
file geometry write

frame_number(required Integer Specifies the frame number (simulation
) output time step) at which to configure a
model during the file geometry write
command
part_name(required) An Existing Body Specifies the name of the Adams part from
which the geometry is written to the iges file.
1. The ‘type_of_geometry’ parameter acts as a filter to decide which of the selected geometry
objects will have their rendering mode modified. The possible values are: arc, box, frustum,
springdamper, outline, or all. The arc setting includes both arc and circle geometry. The frustum
setting includes both frustum and cylinder geometry.
Values are: igs, stp, dxf, and dwg.
2. 2. The proper extension for the file specified by the ‘file_name’ parameter is the default, but you
can override it by supplying a different extension.
3. All geometry written to the IGES file is defined with respect to the global coordinate system of
the Adams/View model.
4. This analysis_name parameter is helpful for transferring position data of an Adams/View model
to a drafting program to prepare drawings of the mechanism at various states of operation.
Adams/Exchange writes all parts and geometry to the CAD file in the same relative position as
they appear in a single frame
5. If you specify the ‘frame_number’ parameter, it must be a positive integer corresponding to the
desired frame (output time step), and the default value is initially 1. If you enter a new value, it
will be remembered and will be the default next time the command is used. If you enter a value
greater than the last frame number, MSC Adams displays the last frame.
6. The geometry will be defined with respect to the global reference frame within the geometry file.
You can identify a part by typing its name or by picking it from the screen:
If the part is not visible on the screen, you must type the name (you may find it convenient to type
the name even if the part is visible). If you created the part by reading a dataset or graphics file,
the part name is the letters par followed by the dataset part ID number. For example, the name of
Adams PART/101 is PAR101. If you created the part during preprocessing, you will have given
it a name at that time. If a part is available by default, you can identify it by entering only its name.
If it is not, you must enter its full name.
To identify a part under another model, for example, you may need to enter the model name, as
well. For example, you may specify part arm from model robot by entering .robot.arm. If you
type a ?, Adams/View will list the parts available by default.
file geometry write
You must separate multiple part names with commas.

If the part is visible in one of your views, you can identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it. It is not necessary to separate multiple part picks with commas.
7. The FRAME_NUMBER parameter is used to specify the frame number (Adams simulation
output time step) at which to configure a model during the single_frame_display command. If
entered, the frame_number must be a positive integer corresponding to the desired frame (output
any views that contain the model indicated by analysis_name will be affected.
8. Specifies the name of the Adams PART from which the geometry is written to the IGES file. The
geometry will be defined with respect to the global reference frame within the IGES file.
to type the name even if the part is displayed. If you created the part by reading an Adams data
set or graphics file, the part name is the letters PAR followed by the Adams data set part ID
number. For example, the name of Adams PART/101 is PAR101. If you created the part during
".robot.arm".
associated with it.
Tips:
1. If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the parts available by default.
file 31
file graphics read
file graphics read

Allows you to read a graphics file into Adams/View, so the information contained may be animated,
manipulated or viewed. When specifying the name of the graphics file to be read, the extension .GRA
will be appended by default. This may be overridden by specifying a different extension.
Format:
file graphics read

file_name = string
mass = mass_units
time = time_units
force = force_units
Example:
file graphics read &

file_name = "c:\model_1.gra" &
analysis_name= last_run &
disk_based_results = yes
Description:

analysis_name An Existing Analysis Specifies the name of the analysis to store the Adams output in.
executed.
length Linear_units Specifies the length units in the file, if different from the
current default.
mass Mass_units Specifies the mass units in the file, if different from the current
default.
file graphics read

time Time_units Specifies the time units in the file, if different from the current
default.
force Force_units Specifies the force units in the file, if different from the current
default.
associated with it.
2. When Adams/View reads a graphics file (.GRA), a request file (.REQ), a results file (.RES), or
all three with the FILE ANALYSIS READ, it stores them in an analysis. By default, the name of
the analysis is the file name excluding the extension.
Adams/View requires that Adams simulations have unique names, therefore, if an analysis
already exists with the same name as your files, use this parameter to assign a unique name at the
time of reading the file(s).
3. The proper extension for the file is the default but can be overridden by simply supplying a
4. If you do not use the length/mass/time parameter, Adams/View will read or write the file using
your default modeling units. You only need to enter this parameter when you wish to read or write
a file with different units than those you are currently using.
file 33
file graphics write
file graphics write

Allows you to write a graphics (.gra) file, so you can use the graphics data in Adams/PostProcessor or
other postprocessor.
Format:
file graphics write

file_name = string
Example:
file graphics write &

file_name = "c:\model_1.gra"
Description:

analysis_name(required) An Existing Analysis Specifies the name of the analysis from which data
should be extracted to write the graphics file.
file_name(required) String Specifies the name of the file that is to be written.
1. The analysis_name parameter specifies the name of the analysis to store the Adams output in.
When Adams/View reads a graphics file (.GRA), a request file (.REQ), a results file (.RES), or
Adams/View requires that Adams simulations have unique names, therefore if an analysis already
exists with the same name as your files, use this parameter to assign a unique name at the time of
reading the file(s).
2. The file has a .gra extension by default, but you can override it by supplying a different
extension.It's not necessary to enclose the file name in quotes if it only contains alphanumeric
characters and starts with a letter. If you want to include other characters, such as a '.' for an
extension or '/' or '[]' for directory paths, you must enclose the file name in quotes.
file html write
file html write

Allows you to export the Adams/PostProcessor data in the current session of Adams/PostProcessor as an
HTML report for viewing by others in your organization.
Format:
file html write

file_name = file
output_directory = string
title = string
author = string
date = date
comment = string
page_name = existing page
title_image_file_name = file
image_width = integer
image_height = integer
image_format = png/jpg
movie_format = png/ jpg/ avi/mpg
export_animations = boolean
avi_frames_per_second = integer
avi_quality = integer
avi_keyframe_every = integer
mpeg_ngop = integer
mpeg_round_size = boolean
include_points = boolean
include_markers = boolean
Example:
File Html Write &

File=(.gui.ppt_file_export.c_html.c_tabs.c_file.file_var.string_value
) &
Output_directory =(.gui.ppt_file_export.c_html.c_tabs.c_file.dir_var)
&
Page_name =Page_1 &
Title=(.gui.ppt_file_export.c_html.c_tabs.c_title.title_var) &
file 35
file html write
Model_name=.model_1 &
Comment="This Report Is For Analysis_1 In Model Model_1" &
Date=(.gui.ppt_file_export.c_html.c_tabs.c_title.date_var) &
Author=(.gui.ppt_file_export.c_html.c_tabs.c_title.author_var) &
Title_image_file_name=(.gui.ppt_file_export.c_html.c_tabs.c_title.ima
ge_var) &
Image_format =Png &
Image_height =423 &
Image_width =834 &
Export_animations =Yes &
Movie_format =Avi &
Avi_compression=(Eval(.gui.ppt_file_export.c_html.c_tabs.c_pages.o_mo
vie_format.current_choice) == "Compressed Avi" ? "Yes" : "No") &
Avi_keyframe_every = 500 &
Avi_frames_per_sec = 10 &
Avi_quality = 75
Include_markers = Yes
Description:

file_name File name Specifies the name of the top-level file that is to be
written.
output_directory String Specifies where you want the resulting HTML files and
folders to be stored. This directory may not exist yet.
title String Specifies a title for the published data. It will be used as
the title in the top HTML file, and appear on the title
page.
author String Specifies the author of the data. It will appear on the title
page.
date Date Specifies the date the data was published. It will appear
on the title page.
comment String Specifies any comments about the data. It will appear on
the title page.
model_names Existing model Specifies the models for which you want to export
information.
page_name Existing page Specifies the pages of plots and animations you want
exported.
title_image_file_name File Specifies the path and file of an image to appear in the
upper right corner.
image_width Integer Enter the pixel size width of the exported pages.
image_height Integer Enter the pixel size height of the exported pages.
file html write

image_format Png/jpg For the pages of plots, enter the image format in which
to store the pages of plots.
movie_format Png/ jpg/ avi/mpg. Specifies the type of movie to export the animation as.
(AVI format is only available on Windows.)
export_animations Yes/No Values are:
yes - Export any page with animations as movies.
no - For all pages, export each as a single image file.

avi_frames_per_second Integer If you select compressed AVI format, set the frame rate.
The default is a frame rate of 10 seconds per frame.
avi_compression Yes/no Specifies whether or not to compress an AVI file. Values
are: yes and no. The default is yes.
avi_quality Integer Specifies quality as a percent_integer from 1 to 100.
Larger the number, better the quality and larger the AVI
file. The default is 75% compression.
avi_keyframe_every Integer Indicates how often a complete frame (keyframe) is
written to the AVI file; the smaller the number, the larger
the file. The default is each key frame 500 frames apart.
mpeg_ngop Integer Indicates how often a complete frame (keyframe) is
written to the MPEG file
mpeg_round_size Yes/no Some playback programs require the pixel height and
width to be multiplies of 16. Set this option to yes to
ensure that your movie plays in many playback
programs.
Include_points Yes/No Specifies whether Points information needs to be
included in the HTML report
Include_markers Yes/No Specifies whether Marker information needs to be
included in the HTML report
1. For the file_name parameter,the proper extension is the default .htm, but you can override it by
supplying a different extension. There will be several other files and subdirectoreis exported in
the report.
file 37
file html write
2. When you export model information, you output information about the model objects: parts,
constraints, forces, measures, requests, and assembly objects. Adams/View creates a folder for
each model and objects in the model, grouped by type.
3. By default, Adams/PostProcessor maintains the aspect ratio of the images so if you enter a value
for image_width, Adams/PostProcessor automatically calculates the height based on the current
aspect ratio, and the reverse.
If you leave image_width and image_height blank, Adams/View uses their default size in
Adams/PostProcessor.
4. For the movie_format parameter,
• If you select jpg or png, Adams/Processor, exports each frame as an png or jpg file, and then
plays them as a movie.
• If you select compressed AVI format, set avi_frames_per_second.
• If you select .mpg, you can also set mpeg_ngop or mpeg_round_size.
5. For the “mpeg_ngop” parameter, the smaller the number, the larger the file. Some movie players
cannot handle compression; in that case, set to 1.
file iges read
file iges read

Allows you to read an IGES geometry file.
Format:
file iges read

file_name = string
part_name= an existing part
geometry_type= iges_geometry_type
blanked_entities= boolean
level= integer
create_geometry = iges_create_type
scale = real
mesh_density = integer
tolerance = real
single_shell = shell_opt
location = location
Example:
file iges read &

file_name = "c:\data.igs" &
geometry_type = all &
location = 10 , 10 , 10 &
orientation = 0 , 0 , 0&
relative_to = ground
file 39
file iges read
Description:

file_name String Specifies the name of the IGES file containing the
geometry, to be imported into Adams/View for the FILE
IGES READ command, or the name of the IGES file to
be generated for the FILE IGES WRITE command.
part_name An Existing Part Specifies the name of an existing Adams/View PART
onto which the translated geometry will be placed.
geometry_type Iges_geometry_type Specifies the type of geometric entities to be translated
from the IGES file to Adams/View.
blanked_entities Boolean Specifies if invisible geometry is to be converted.
level Integer Specifies the IGES levels that are to be converted during
the file read.
create_geometry Iges_create_type Specifies the type of Adams/View geometry created
when geometry is translated from the IGES file to
Adams/View.
scale Real Specifies the scale factor to be applied to the size of the
geometry created in Adams/View
mesh_density Integer The mesh density specifies the number of rulings on a
surface in each parametric (U/V) direction.
tolerance Real Specifies the tolerance value used in the approximation
of curves and surfaces when they are translated into
Adams/View.
single_shell Shell_opt
location Location Specifies the translational position where the geometry
in the IGES file is to be located relative to the
Adams/View part lprf.
IGES file is to be oriented relative to the Adams/View
part lprf.
relative_to An Existing Model, Part Specifies the coordinate system that location
Or Marker coordinates and orientation angles correspond to.
1. The Adams/IGES translator is an optional module for Adams/View. Adams/IGES imports
standard IGES geometry files from any CAD software package and operates on this data to
convert it into a set of Adams/View geometry elements. These elements can correspond either to
standard Adams GRAPHICS statements or polylines. You associate the IGES geometry with any
rigid body part of the Adams/View model prior to, or subsequent to an Adams simulation.
file iges read
2. Include the complete path name unless the file currently resides in the directory from which you
are running Adams/View.
If the files that you want to read into Adams/View are not in the directory in which you are
running AdamsAdams/View, use the complete path name of the files. Enclose the full path name
in double quotation marks ("") because the full path name includes special characters; characters
other than alphabetic, numeric, or underscore characters.
If you want to include other characters, such as a '.' for an extension or '/' or '[]' for directory paths,
you must enclose the name in quotes.
Adams/View assumes that the file extension is ".igs." Therefore, you do not have to include the
file extension if it is ".igs."
3. The geometry may be placed upon a part and used for preprocessing and postprocessing. Markers
created by the IGES translator will be located on the part specified in this parameter.
at that time.
model name, as well. For example, you may specify part 'arm' from model 'robot' by entering
".robot.arm".
associated with it.
4. Admissible values for the geometry_type parameter are:
Wireframe - This general type of geometry includes lines, arcs, curves, and splines.
Surface--The IGES translator supports all the standard surfaces. In the case of trimmed and
bounded surfaces, the untrimmed surfaces and the associated model space trimming curves are
processed, but no trimming is performed.
Text-Text implies annotation entities including leader lines, arrows, dimensions as well as alpha-
numeric characters. All annotation data is stroked, so the relative size of most fonts is represented
accurately. Stroked text is translated to Adams/View as polylines. This allows for a more accurate
representation of the size of the text in the IGES file but requires more memory than translating
all text to one font.
Large amounts of text may adversely affect the performance of the IGES translator and
Adams/View.
All-All supported entities are translated to Adams/View.
file 41
file iges read
Any combination of these values may be specified. For example, the following command will
translate surfaces and text from the IGES file to Adams/View.
FILE IGES READ FILE="cylinder.igs"&
GEOMETRY_TYPE=Surface,Text PART_NAME=.mod1.ground
5. Any IGES entity encountered in the IGES file may be blanked by the program that created the
IGES file. This is similar to Adams/View visibility. If you specify No for the
BLANKED_ENTITIES parameter, then the blanked entities are not translated to Adams/View. If
you specify Yes for the BLANKED_ENTITIES parameter, then the blanked entities are
translated to Adams/View and they are made to be invisible.
IGES entities that are blanked are typically construction entities that are used in the definition of
another geometric entity. For example, a line may be used as the center of rotation of another line
in the definition of a cylinder. The center line, and the sweep line rotated about the center line,
would both be blanked because they are temporary entities used in the construction of the
cylinder.
Once blanked entities have been translated to Adams/View, there is no distinction between
construction entities and other geometry. The DISPLAY_ATTRIBUTES commands may be used
to turn the visibility of the blanked entities on.
6. An IGES level is a means of associating geometry into a group. These groups may be manipulated
as a single entity for purposes of visibility and color. IGES levels are defined by the program that
generates the IGES file and are labeled with integers greater than or equal to zero. Levels are
typically used to organize data for viewing and are similar to layers in the CAD sense.
Adams/View will read all levels by default if the LEVEL parameter is not specified.
Adams/View allows specification of one level or a range of levels to be translated from the IGES
file. The following command translates levels 10,11,12,13,14, and 15 from the IGES file to
Adams/View.
FILE IGES READ FILE="engine.igs"LEVEL=10,15&
PART_NAME=.coupe.block
7. A subset of the geometric entities read by the IGES translator may be converted to outlines and
markers in Adams/View. Refer to the table below for a complete list of entities that may be
translated into outlines and markers or polylines.
If CREATE_GEOMETRY is specified with the value 'outline', the entities listed below will be
translated into Adams outlines with a marker created at each vertex. These markers will have an
orientation parallel to the lprf of the PART selected in the PART_NAME parameter.
If CREATE_GEOMETRY is specified with the value of 'polyline', the above mentioned entities
will be translated into Adams/View polylines. No markers are created when polylines are
generated.
Generating outlines has the advantage of having markers created at each vertex. These markers
are standard Adams/View markers that may be used for the definition of constraints, forces, mass
properties, and other Adams/View geometry. The outlines and markers may also be written to an
Adams data set file. The disadvantage of using outlines is the increased memory requirements.
Geometry translated to polylines will not have markers and requires about one third of the
memory to store the equivalent outline. Polylines are not written to an Adams data set file.
file iges read
In addition to the entities listed below, outlines may be created for any geometry or annotation
entity that results in a linear approximation of two points. In this case, a line is created.
Outlines may also be created for surfaces that are polygonalized.
IGES ENTITY TYPE NO. CONVERTED TO Adams/View Object

Circular Arc 100 Arc, Circle
Composite Curve 102 Polyline
Conic Arc 104 Polyline
Copious Data 106 Outline or Polyline
Centerline 106 (20-21) Polyline
Section 106 (31-38) Polyline
Witness Line 106 (40) Polyline
Plane 108 Outline or Polyline
Line 110 Outline or Polyline
Parametric Spline Curve 112 Polyline
Parametric Spline Surface 114 Polyline
Point 116 Marker
Ruled Surface 118 Outline or Polyline
Surface of Revolution 120 Cylinder, Outline, or Polyline
Tabulated Cylinder 122 Cylinder, Frustum, Outline, or Polyline
Rational B-Spline Curve 126 Polyline
Rational B-Spline Surface 128 Outline or Polyline
Offset Curve 130 Polyline
Offset Surface 140 Outline or Polyline

Boundary 141 Polyline
Curve on a Parametric 142 Polyline
Surface
Bounded Surface 143 Outline or Polyline
Trimmed (Parametric) 144 Outline or Polyline
Surface
Angular Dimension 202 Polyline
Curve Dimension 204 Polyline
Diameter Dimension 206 Polyline
file 43
file iges read

Flag Note 208 Polyline
General Label 210 Polyline
General Note 212 Polyline
New General Note 213 Polyline
Leader (Arrow) 214 Polyline
Linear Dimension 216 Polyline
Ordinate Dimension 218 Polyline
Point Dimension 220 Polyline
Radius Dimension 222 Polyline
General Symbol 228 Polyline
Sectioned Area 230 Polyline
8. The default scale factor is 1.0. If the scale factor of 1.0 is used, the geometry created in the
Adams/VIEW will be the same size as the geometry in the IGES file. A scale factor less than 1.0
will reduce the size of geometry and a scale factor greater than 1.0 will increase the size of the
geometry. For example, assume the scale factor specified is 0.5, a cylinder of length 2 meters and
diameter .5 meters would be translated to Adams/View with the length of 1 meter and diameter
of .25 meters. The distance from geometry to the RELATIVE_TO coordinate system will be
scaled accordingly. If the previously mentioned cylinder was located at 3,2,0 in the IGES file, it
would be located at 1.5,1,0 after it is translated to Adams/View.
The orientation of the geometry is not affected by the SCALE parameter.
9. The following is an example of a 5 X 3 mesh.
_____________________
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
:_______:_____:____:____:
: : : : :
: : : : :
:______:____:____:___:
file iges read
The minimum mesh is a 2 X 2 which will display only the boundaries of the surface. If the
MESH_DENSITY parameter is not specified, the mesh values will be calculated by the IGES
translator based upon the tolerance specified with the TOLERANCE parameter and the surface
will be polygonalized. For polygonalization, the surface is sampled at several U/V rulings based
on the surface type. The ruling that generates the most points at the specified tolerance in the U
and V direction determines the polygon density for the surface. For certain surface types (e.g.
NURBS) a maximum sample is used to reduce the approximation time for polygonalizing high
order surfaces. This maximum is currently being set to 4 in each U/V direction.
It should be noted that specifying a mesh requires less computation than letting the translator
default to a polygonalization (i.e. not setting the MESH_DENSITY parameter), but the polylines
generated for a mesh may not be shaded in Adams/View. The polylines generated for a
polygonalization are closed (polygons) and therefore, may be shaded in Adams/View.
10. This tolerance is the measure of the midpoint chordal distance from the approximated
curve/surface to the true curve/surface.
+++
+ | +
+ |tolerance +
+ ___________|_____________+
+ /
+ /
+ /
+ / + = true curve
/
+ / __ = approximate curve
/ /
+ /
/
+/
Caution should be used when specifying the TOLERANCE parameter. Since you specify the
tolerance value, advance knowledge of the units and size of the geometry in the IGES file is
necessary. If the size of the geometry in the IGES file is not known the geometry translated to
Adams/View may be created too coarse, or worse, too fine. A tolerance that is too fine can
potentially cause the IGES translator to use excessive CPU and memory.
file 45
file iges read
The TOLERANCE parameter becomes more significant if the MESH_DENSITY parameter is

not specified. If the MESH_DENSITY parameter is not specified, the IGES translator will
polygonalize any surfaces encountered in the IGES file. If the IGES file contains a large number
of surfaces, the IGES translator might generate a large amount of data, degrading the performance
of Adams/View.
If the translation appears to be taking too much time, try increasing the value specified for the
TOLERANCE. Try reading the IGES file with the TOLERANCE increased by a factor of 10. If
the speed degradation is caused by a tolerance that is too fine, you will see a dramatic
improvement with a larger value specified for the TOLERANCE parameter.
The tolerance reported in the log file and in the LIST_INFO is the tolerance of the data defined
in the IGES file. This is the maximum tolerance available in the IGES file and is usually too fine
for efficient translation to Adams/View. It is recommended to try a tolerance several orders of
magnitude greater than the tolerance specified in the IGES file.
11. The coordinates specified by the LOCATION parameter can be relative to any other coordinate
system defined in the Adams/View model (See the RELATIVE_TO parameter for this
command).
12. The orientation coordinates can be relative to any other coordinate system defined in the
Adams/View model (See the RELATIVE_TO parameter for this command).
By default, you supply Euler (known as body313, or body-fixed z, x, z) angles. You may change
this convention with the 'DEFAULTS UNITS ORIENTATION_TYPE=' command. For example,
selecting SPACE123 means you will subsequently be supplying space-fixed x, y, and z, angles.
AdamsAdams/View applies your orientation angles starting from the coordinate system you
identify with the RELATIVE_TO parameter. The default for the RELATIVE_TO parameter is
the default coordinate system.
Refer to the Appendix on "Specifying Locations and Orientations in Adams/View" in the
Adams/View Users Manual for more information on the ORIENTATION parameter.
Tips:
file log_file
file log_file
The log_file is an ASCII file Adams/View creates, that becomes a record of Adams/View session.
Format:
file log_file
file_name= string
write_switch= on_off
messages_include= on_off
commands_include= on_off
expand_commands= on_off
Example:
file log_file &

write_switch = on &
messages_include = on &
commands_include = on
Description:

executed.
write_switch On_Off This parameter controls whether or not Adams/View generates a
log file.
messages_include On_Off Allows you to specify the inclusion or exclusion of diagnostic
messages, produced by Adams/View, into the log file
commands_include On_Off COMMANDS_INCLUDE is a parameter to the "file log_file"
command
expand_commands On_Off EXPAND_COMMANDS is a parameter on the "file log_file"
command
1. All commands, messages, and prompts are sent to the log file. The name of this file is defaulted
to aview.log.
The default name may be overridden using the file_name parameter of the LOG_FILE command.
file 47
file log_file
The log_file command allows modification of the behavior of the log file that is generated when
Adams/View is running. These modifications include:
• Specification of the name of the log file
• A switch to turn off the log file write (slight system performance improvement)
• A switch for inclusion or exclusion of system messages
• A switch to include or exclude commands entered
• A switch for the expansion of abbreviated commands
The log file is also useful for reproducing a session (e.g. recreating a session after a system crash
or other such catastrophic failure) and for creation of command macros (see help for the
expand_commands parameter). Log files are command files generated by the Adams/View
containing all commands executed as well as diagnostics generated (All diagnostics and messages
are written to the log file as comments.
This allows the log file to be executed directly as a command file).
Log files may be read in and executed in the same fashion as other command files. Each time
Adams/View is run, a new log file is generated. If you wish to save the log file after finishing a
session, make sure the log file is renamed, otherwise it may be replaced the next time the
application is started.
extension.
3. Turning off the log file will result in a slight performance improvement. The name of the log file
is defaulted to aview.log. The default name may be overridden using the file_name parameter. By
default, Adams/View generates a log file that may be played back at a later time. Each time
Adams/View is run a new log file is generated.
If this parameter is turned Off, Adams/View will not generate a log file. It is recommended that
the log file remain activated because it represents a record of the session. A log file may be
executed as a command file in order to reproduce a session. This is useful in recreating a session
after a system crash or other such catastrophic failure.
4. By default, all messages from Adams/View are sent to the log file. This allows a more complete
representation of the session in the log file and provides more information to someone who is
reading the log file.
Messages are stored as comments in the log file, and are therefore ignored by the command
processor if the log file is read in as a command file.
5. commands_include parameter allows you to specify whether the command entered during an
Adams/View session should be echoed to the log file. If the value of the
COMMANDS_INCLUDE parameter is Off, no commands entered by the user or a command file
will be printed to the log file. ON, the default, indicates all commands will be echoed to the log
file.
file log_file
If the user wishes to use the log file as a command file, this parameter should be set to ON. Also,
the EXPAND_COMMANDS parameter should be set as well.
Note: If a command file is executed, these commands will be sent to the log file as comments.
This is because if the command that executes the command file, as well as the commands
in the command file are both left as executable in the log file, then the commands will be
executed twice! Once, by calling the same command file, and next, as logged when the file
was read the first time.
6. expand_commands allows you to specify whether the commands entered should be written to the
log file as they are entered (possibly abbreviated) or expanded to full length. If
EXPAND_COMMANDS is turned ON, entire command keywords and parameter names are
written to the log file even if only abbreviations are entered. The default setting is OFF. This
provides a very efficient way to create command procedures. For example, the user can
interactively enter the abbreviated commands to quickly create an xy plot. (Entering the
abbreviated commands is much faster but can create a log file that is not very readable.) With the
EXPAND_COMMANDS parameter set to "on", the fully expanded commands are written to the
log file. This log file can be renamed and executed as a command file to repeat a given action,
such as recreating the xy plot for subsequent analysis runs. Also, once created, the converted log
file can be edited to perform similar yet different functions. You may expand commands in an
existing command file by first placing the command "file log_file expand_commands=on
commands_include=on" at the beginning of the file. If you then execute the command file, the
resulting log file will contain an expanded copy of the commands.
file 49
file mnfxform mirror

Allows you to mirror a flexible body. You need to specify an existing Flexible Body / Modal Neutral File
(MNF) / MD DB file, a plane for mirroring. The flexible body will be mirrored with respect to the
specified plane. You can also specify offset/ new interface node ids which will increment/replace the
current interface node ids of the flexible body respectively. You can also optimize the MNF by using the
option MNF Write Option, which corresponds to the parameters in the MDI_MNFWRITE_OPTIONS
environment variable. For more information on the MDI_MNFWRITE_OPTIONS, see Setting Up
Translation Options through the MNF Toolkit.

flexible_body_name = existing flexible body
modal_neutral_file_name = string
md_db_file_name = string
index_in_database = integer
output_file_type = mnf/md db
output_file_name = string
orientation = Global X/Global Y/Global Z/
X Axis/Y Axis/Z Axis/User
Defined
marker = existing model marker
user_input = orientation
location = location
pl_point_1 = location
point_1 = location
point_2 = location
node_number_offset = integer
id_list = integer array
mnfwrite_options = string
Example:
file mnfxform mirror &

modal_neutral_file_name = "D:\MSC.Software\MD_Adams\flex\examples\
mnf\link.mnf" &
output_file_type = mnf &
output_file_name = "D:\mirroring.mnf" &
orientation = Global Z &
location = 0,0,100 &
mnfwrite_options = single

flexible_body_name Existing flexible This parameter is mutually exclusive to the MNF file
body and MD DB File.Specifies the flexible body that
needs to be mirrored.
modal_neutral_file_name String This parameter is mutually exclusive to the flexible
body name and MD DB File. It specifies the name of
the MNF file name to be mirrored.
md_db_file_name String This parameter is mutually exclusive to the MNF file
and flexible body name. It specifies the name of the
MD DB file to mirror.
index_in_database Integer This parameter applies only, when the user has
selected md_ db_ file_name for mirroring a flexible
body. This parameter specifies the index of the
flexible body in the specified MD DB. It is optional.
If not specified, it is assumed to have the value 1.
output_file_type mnf, md db Specifies what kind of output file will be created
either MNF/ MD DB.
output_file_name String Specifies the name of MNF/MD DB file to be created
after mirroring.
orientation Global X, Global Y, Specifies the orientation for mirroring. If orientation
Global Z, X Axis,Y is X Axis, Y Axis or Z Axis then marker needs to be
Axis, Z Axis, User specified as these axis are marker's axis. If orientation
Defined is user defined then you need to enter user_input.
marker Existing Model, Specifies an existing marker on the model. This
Marker option is only available when orientation is X Axis, Y
Axis, Z Axis.
file 51

user_input Orientation Specifies any arbitrary orientation about which you
want to mirror the flexible body.
location location Specifies the location for mirroring.
pl_point_1 location This parameter and the next parameters (pl_point_2
& pl_point_3) are mutually exclusive to the
parameters (orientation, marker and location). It
specifies x, y, and z coordinates of first point that lies
on a plane.
pl_point_2 location Specifies x, y, and z coordinates of second point that
lies on a plane.
pl_point_3 location Specifies x, y, and z coordinates of third point that lies
on a plane.
point_1 location This parameter and the next parameters (point_2) are
mutually exclusive to the parameters (orientation,
marker, location, pl_point_1, pl_point_2 and
pl_point_3). It specifies x, y, and z coordinates of one
of the end points.
point_2 location Specifies x, y, and z coordinates of one of the end
points.
node_number_offset integer This parameter is mutually exclusive to the id_list.
Specifies offset value by which the current interface
node ids will be incremented. It is optional parameter.
id_list integer array This parameter is mutually exclusive to the
node_number_offset. It specifies a list of new
interface node ids that will replace the current
interface node ids. It is optional parameter.
mnfwrite_options parameters in Specifies a list of parameters in
MDI_MNFWRITE_ MDI_MNFWRITE_OPTIONS environment variable.
OPTIONS
environmental It optimizes the MNF through Adams/Flex Toolkit. It
variable is optional parameter.
file mnfxform rotate

Allows you to rotate a flexible body. You need to specify an existing Flexible Body / Modal Neutral File
(MNF) / MD DB file, an axis for rotation and angle. The flexible body will be rotated about the specified
axis by specified angle. You can also specify offset/ new interface node ids which will increment/replace
the current interface node ids of the flexible body respectively. You can also optimize the MNF by using
the option MNF Write Option, which corresponds to the parameters in the MDI_MNFWRITE_OPTIONS
environment variable. For more information on the MDI_MNFWRITE_OPTIONS, see Setting Up
Translation Options through the MNF Toolkit.

Defined
location = location
point_1 = location
point_2 = location
angle = real
file 53
Example:
file mnfxform rotate &

MSCNASTRAN\demo\plate.MASTER" &
output_file_type = md db &
output_file_name = "D:\rotation.MASTER" &
orientation = Global Z &
location = 0,0,100 &
angle = 60 &
id_list = 10,50,70

body and MD DB File. Specifies the flexible body that
needs to be rotated.
the MNF file name to be rotated.
MD DB file to rotate.
selected md_ db_ file_name for rotating a flexible
either MNF/ MD DB.
after rotation.
orientation Global X, Global Y, Specifies orientation for rotation. If orientation is X
Global Z, X Axis,Y Axis, Y Axis or Z Axis then marker needs to be
Axis, Z Axis, User specified as these axis are marker's axis. If orientation
Defined is user defined then you need to enter user_input.
Axis, Z Axis.

user_input Orientation Specifies any arbitrary orientation about which you
want to rotate the flexible body.
location location Specifies the location for rotation.
and pl_point_3) are mutually exclusive to the
on a plane.
lies on a plane.
on a plane.
marker, location, pl_point_1, pl_point_2 and
of the end points.
points.
angle real Specifies the angle for rotation.
OPTIONS
file 55
file mnfxform translate

Allows you to translate a flexible body. You need to specify an existing Flexible Body / Modal Neutral
File (MNF) / MD DB file, direction for translation and distance. The flexible body will be translated in
the specified direction by specified distance. You can also specify offset/ new interface node ids which
will increment/replace the current interface node ids of the flexible body respectively. You can also
optimize the MNF by using the option MNF Write Option, which corresponds to the parameters in the
MDI_MNFWRITE_OPTIONS environment variable. For more information on the
MDI_MNFWRITE_OPTIONS, see Setting Up Translation Options through the MNF Toolkit.

Defined
v_distance = real
pl_distance = real
point_1 = location
point_2 = location
ep_distance = real
Example:
file mnfxform translate &

mnf\link.mnf" &
output_file_type = mnf &
output_file_name = "D:\translation.mnf" &
orientation = Global Y &
v_distance = 100 &
node_number_offset = 1000 &
mnfwrite_options = fast_invar, MKS, strip_face

body and MD DB File. Specifies the flexible body that
needs to be translated.
the MNF file name to be translated.
MD DB file to translate.
selected md_ db_ file_name for translating a flexible
either MNF/ MD DB.
after translation.
orientation Global X, Global Y, Specifies the orientation for translation. If orientation
Global Z, X Axis, is X Axis, Y Axis or Z Axis then marker needs to be
Y Axis, Z Axis, specified as these axis are marker's axis. If orientation
User Defined is user defined then you need to enter user_input.
Axis, Z Axis.
file 57

user_input Orientation Specifies any arbitrary direction in which you want to
translate the flexible body.
v_distance real Specifies the distance for translation.
& pl_point_3) are mutually exclusive to the
on a plane.
lies on a plane.
on a plane.
pl_distance real Specifies the distance for translation.
marker location, pl_point_1, pl_point_2 and
of the end points.
points.
ep_distance real Specifies the distance for translation. It is optional. In
case distance is not specified then distance is length of
segment (point_1point_2).
OPTIONS
file parasolid write

Allows you to write the geometric definition of an MSC Adams model or part from to the Parasolids file
format. You can then read the Parasolid file into a CAD program. Requires Adams/Exchange which is
MSC’s optional software to Adams/View that lets you import and export geometric data in CAD format.
You can export an entire model, an individual part of a model, or a model as it exists at a particular
simulation time. Exporting the model at a particular simulation time is helpful for transferring position
data of an MSC Adams model to a CAD program to prepare drawings of the mechanism at various states
of operation.
Format:

file_name = string
type = ascii/binary/neutral
Description:

File_name String Specifies the name of the file that is to be read. The proper
extension is the default, but you can override it by supplying a
Type Ascii/binary/neutral Specifies the type of file
Model_name Existing model Specifies the Adams/View model to be written to the CAD file.
Adams/Exchange places each rigid body in the model on a
separate level.
Analysis_name Existing analysis Specifies the model at a particular simulation frame (time) of a
particular analysis to export.
frame_number Integer Specifies the frame number (simulation output time step) at
which to configure a model during the single_frame_display
command.
part_name Existing Part Specifies the name of the Adams part from which the geometry
is written to the iges file.
file 59
1. It is not necessary to enclose the file name in quotes if it only contains alphanumeric characters
2. The analysis_name parameter is helpful for transferring position data of an Adams/View model
to a drafting program to prepare drawings of the mechanism at various states of operation.
Adams/Exchange writes all parts and geometry to the CAD file in the same relative position as
they appear in a single frame display.
3. If you specify the frame_number parameter, it must be a positive integer corresponding to the
desired frame (output time step), and the default value is initially 1. If you enter a new value, it
will be remembered and be the default next time the command is used. If you enter a value greater
than the last frame number, the system will display the last frame.
parameters. If none of the three are entered, the first frame will be displayed
Note: Even if you only provide one view_name, the frame number will be applied to the specified
view and any other views that contain the same model (the model indicated by the
analysis_name parameter). If you only provide analysis_name (view_name parameter is
omitted), any views that contain the model indicated by analysis_name will be affected.
4. The geometry specified in the part_name parameter will be defined with respect to the global
reference frame within the iges file.
You can identify a part by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the part is not visible on the screen, you must type the name (you may find it convenient to type
the name even if the part is visible). If you created the part by reading a dataset or graphics file,
the part name is the letters par followed by the dataset part ID number.
For example, the name of Adams PART/101 is PAR101. If you created the part during
preprocessing, you will have given it a name at that time. If a part is available by default, you can
identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you must enter its full name.
To identify a part under another model, for example, you may need to enter the model name as
well. For example, you may specify part arm from model robot by entering .robot.arm. If you
type a ?, Adams/View will list the parts available by default.
file parasolid read
file parasolid read

Imports Parasolids geometry. Requires Adams/Exchange.
When you import Parasolids geometry, Adams/Exchange reads the file and converts the geometry into a
set of Adams geometric elements. By importing geometry from standard CAD packages you can reduce
the need to recreate geometry primitives within Adams, and you can enhance your ability to realistically
view the behavior of complicated mechanical systems.
You can associate the geometry that you import with an existing part or create a new part with which to
associate it.
Format:
file parasolid read

file_name= string
type= parasolid_file_type
model_name= new or existing model
part_name= new or existing body
location= location
orientation= orientation
relative_to= existing model,part or marker
Example:
file parasolid read &

file_name = "d:/examples/engine/crankshaft.xmt_txt" &
type = ascii &
explode_assemblies = boolean
Description:

file_name(required) String Specifies the name of the file that is to be read.
type(optional) Ascii/binary/neutral Specifies the internal format. The options are:
ASCII, binary, and neutral.
model_name(required) New Or Existing Model Enter the model name under which you want to
store the geometry.
file 61
file parasolid read

part_name(required) New Or Existing Body Enter the part name under which you want to
store the geometry.
location(optional) Location Specifies the translational position where the
geometry in the imported file is to be located
relative to the Adams/View part lprf.
orientation(optional) Orientation Specifies the angular position where the
geometry in the imported file is to be oriented
relative to the Adams/View part lprf.
relative_to(optional) Existing Body,part Or Specifies the coordinate system relative to
Marker which the location coordinates and orientation
angles exist.
explode_assemblies(opti Yes/no Specifies whether or not each geometric entity
onal) in an assembly is created as an separate marker
(yes) or consolidated into one (no). no is the
default.
It's not necessary to enclose the file name in quotes if it only contains alphanumeric characters
2. The coordinates specified in the location parameter can be relative to any other coordinate system
defined in the Adams/View model.
By default, you supply Cartesian (x, y, z) coordinates. You can use the defaults units
coordinate_system_type = command to change this convention. For example, selecting
cylindrical means that you will subsequently be supplying r, theta, and z coordinates.
3. Adams/View orients the coordinate system by starting from the initial coordinate system and
may occur about space-fixed or body-fixed axes in any meaningful combination of the x-, y-, and
z-axes.
By default, you supply Euler (known as body313, or body-fixed z, x, z) angles. You can change
this convention with the defaults units orientation_type = command. For example, selecting
space123 means you will subsequently be supplying space-fixed x, y, and z, angles.
with the relative_to parameter. The default for the relative_to parameter is the default coordinate
system.
file parasolid read
4. If you don't specify the “relative_to” parameter, Adams/View uses the default coordinate system.
The default coordinate system is initially your model, that is, the global coordinate system. You
can change the default coordinate system using the defaults coordinate_system command.
file 63
file postprocessing
file postprocessing
Allows you to export data from Adams/View for use with a stand-alone version of Adams/PostProcessor.
When you export Adams/PostProcessor files, Adams/View generates a command file (.cmd) and all
required supporting files, including:
• Dataset (.adm) file
• Shell (.shl) files needed for geometry representation
• Matrix (.mtx) files for use with the .adm file, if needed
The command file also contains commands to read in the other files when you import the command file
into Adams/PostProcessor.
Adams/View names the command file ModelName_to_ppt.cmd, where ModelName is the name of the
model.
Format:
file postprocessing
model_names = existing models
Example:
file postprocessing &

model_names = suspension14
This will create a file called suspension14_to_ppt.cmd which can be used with Adams postprocessor.
Description:

Model_names Existing model Specifies the models for which you want to export
information.
Cautions:
The simulation results are not referenced in the command file. You must import the analysis files
(graphics, request, and results files) separately into Adams/PostProcessor.
file render read
file render read

Format:
file render read

file_name= string
scale= real
location= location
relative_to= an existing model, part or marker
Example:
file render read &

file_name = “c:\users\ashish\render” &
part_name = ground &
scale = 2
Description:

file_name String Specifies the name of the file that is to be read
part_name An Existing Part Specifies the name of an existing Adams/View part onto which the
translated geometry will be placed
scale Real Specifies the scale factor to be applied to the size of the geometry
created in Adams/View
location Location Specifies the translational position where the geometry in the
imported file is to be located, relative to the Adams/View part lprf
orientation Orientation Specifies the angular position where the geometry in the imported
file is to be oriented, relative to the Adams/View part lprf
relative_to An Existing Specifies the coordinate system, relative to which the location
Model, Part Or coordinates and orientation angles exist.
Marker
file 65
file render read
1. It is not necessary to enclose the file name in quotes if it only contains alphanumeric characters
2. You can place the geometry upon a part and use it for preprocessing and postprocessing. Markers
created by the iges translator will be located on the part you specify in this parameter.
You can identify a part by typing its name or by picking it from the screen. If the part is not visible
on the screen, you must type the name (you may find it convenient to type the name even if the
part is visible).
If you created the part by reading a dataset or graphics file, the part name is the letters par followed
by the dataset part ID number. For example, the name of Adams PART/101 is PAR101. If you
created the part during preprocessing, you will have given it a name at that time.
If a part is available by default, you can identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you must
enter its full name. To identify a part under another model, for example, you may need to enter
the model name as well. For example, you may specify part arm from model robot by entering
.robot.arm. If you type a ?, Adams/View will list the parts available by default.
3. The default scale factor is 1.0.
Scale factor influences geometry created in Adams/View with respect to the geometry in the
imported file, as follows:
• A scale factor of 1.0 - Geometry will be the same size.
• A scale factor of less than 1.0 - Reduces the size of geometry.
• A scale factor greater than 1.0 - Increases the size of geometry.
For example, assume that the scale factor is 0.5. Then, a cylinder of length 2 m and diameter .5 m
would be translated to Adams/View with the length of 1 m and diameter of .25 m. The distance
from geometry to the realtive_to coordinate system will be scaled accordingly. If the previously
mentioned cylinder was located at 3,2,0 in the iges file, it would be located at 1.5,1,0 after it is
translated to Adams/View.
This parameter does not affect the orientation of geometry.
4. These coordinates can be relative to any other coordinate system defined in the Adams/View
model.
By default, you supply Cartesian (x, y, z) coordinates. You can use the defaults units
coordinate_system_type = command to change this convention. For example, selecting
cylindrical means that you will subsequently be supplying r, theta, and z coordinates.
5. These orientation coordinates can be relative to any other coordinate system defined in the
Adams/View model.
file render read
Adams/View orients the coordinate system by starting from the initial coordinate system and
may occur about space-fixed or body-fixed axes in any meaningful combination of the x-, y-, and
z-axes.
By default, you supply Euler (known as body313, or body-fixed z, x, z) angles. You can change
this convention with the defaults units orientation_type = command. For example, selecting
space123 means you will subsequently be supplying space-fixed x, y, and z, angles.
with the relative_to parameter. The default for the relative_to parameter is the default coordinate
system.
6. If you do not specify the relative_to parameter, Adams/View uses the default coordinate system.
The default coordinate system is initially your model, i.e. the global coordinate system. You can
change the default coordinate system using the defaults coordinate_system command.
file 67
file request read
file request read

Allows you to read a request file into Adams/View so the information contained may be plotted,
manipulated or viewed. When specifying the name of the request file to be read, the extension .REQ will
be appended by default. This may be overridden by specifying a different extension.
You can import multiple files if you associate and store the files with a model. Adams/View reads and
creates all analysis files under the specified model. If you do not provide a model name, Adams/View
reads each analysis file into its own model.
If you select to associate the files with a particular simulation, you can only import one set of output files
generated from the same Adams/Solver simulation. Adams/View uses the time-date stamp placed at the
beginning of each output file to determine if the files were generated by the same simulation run.
When Adams/View reads a request file, it creates a new analysis. Each block of data in the request file
that corresponds to a request statement in the Adams/View input data is stored as result set in the analysis.
The default name of the analysis will be the name of the request file, excluding the extension.
You can overwrite the default analysis name using the file_name parameter. The name of each result set
will be req with the request statement ID appended to it. For example, request/1508 would produce a
result set name of req1508.
Format:
file request read

file_name= string
analysis_name= new or existing analysis
force= force_units
mass= mass_units
time= time_units
request_ids= integer
disk_based_results= boolean
Example:
file request read &

file_name = "c:\\my documents\last_run.req" &
disk_based_results = yes &
file request read
file request read &

request_ids = 5 &
time_step_skip = 1 &
length = meter &
mass = kg &
time = millisecond &
force = newton
Description:

file_name(required) String Specifies the name of the file that is to
be read.
model_name(optional) New or Existing Model Specifies a new or an existing model.
analysis_name(optional) New or Existing Analysis Specifies the name of the analysis in
which to store output files.
length(optional) Mm, Cm, Meter, Km, Inch, Specifies the length units in the file, if
Foot,mile. different than the current default.
force(optional) Newton, Knewton, Dyne, Specifies the force units in the file, if
Pound_force, Kpound_force, different from the current default.
Kg_force, Ounce_force,
Millinewton, Centinewton,
Poundal.
mass(optional) Kg, Gram, Pound_mass, Specifies the mass units in the file, if
Kpound_mass, Slug, different from the current default.
Ounce_mass, And Tonne.
time(optional) Millisecond, Second, Minute, Specifies the time units in the file, if
and Hour. different from the current default.
disk_based_results Yes/No Specifies whether or not to store data
(optional) on disk. Enter either yes or no.
request_ids(optional) Integer Specifies a list of integers
corresponding to the Adams IDs of the
requests you want read from the file. If
blank, then Adams reads all requests
from the file.
time_step_skip Integer Specifies whether or not to skip time
(optional) steps by specifying a pattern of time
steps to skip.
file 69
file request read
1. For the filename parameter, The .req extension is the default, but you can override it by supplying
a different extension.
2. You can identify a model by typing its name or by picking it from the screen:
If the model is not visible on the screen, you must type the name (you may find it convenient to
type the name even if the model is visible). You must separate multiple model names with
commas.
If the model is visible in one of your views, you can identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it. It is not necessary to separate multiple model picks with commas.
3. When Adams/View reads a request, graphics, and results file (.req, .gra, and .res, respectively)
Adams/View requires that simulations have unique names. Therefore, if an analysis already exists
with the same name as your files, use this parameter to assign a unique name at the time of reading
the file(s).
4. If you do not specify the “length”,”mass”,”time” or “force” parameter, Adams/View reads or
writes the file using your default modeling units.
If you want to read or write a file with units other than those you are currently using, you must
specify this parameter. Specifying this parameter, however, does not change your default
modeling units; it only overrides them during the file read or write operation.
If you want to change your default modeling units, use the defaults units command.
5. If you specify yes for the “disk_based_results” parameter, only the header information
from the file is made memory resident, the bulk of the data remains on disk. This can significantly
slow down operations for small files where leaving on disk merely adds overhead, but for very
large files, it can have the opposite effect and improve performance due to the reduced memory
footprint.
6. If you have a large request file with unnecessary fine time resolution, specifying a time_step_skip
can significantly reduce the amount of memory used to store the data.
For example, if you specify time_step_skip = 1, the pattern starts at 1, skips one, takes step 3, and
so on: 1,3,5,7,... A value of 2 would result in 1,4,7,10,13,...
file request write
file request write

Allows you to export a request file from Adams/View. A Request file contains requests for standard
displacement, velocity, acceleration, or force information. You can also define other quantities (such as
pressure, work, energy, momentum, and more) that you want as output during a simulation.
Format:
file request write

file_name= string
Example:
file analysis_write &

analysis_nam e= last_run &
file_name = “c:\analysis\analysis_1”
Description:

analysis_name Existing Analysis Specifies the name of the analysis from which data should
be extracted to write the request file.
file_name String Specifies the name of the file that is to be written.
file 71
file results read
file results read

Allows you to read a results file into Adams/View so the information contained may be plotted,
manipulated or viewed. When specifying the name of the results file to be read the extension RES will
be appended by default. This may be overridden by specifying a different extension.
Format:
file results read

file_name = string
mass = mass_units
time = time_units
force = force_units
Skip_time_interval = integer
Skip_contact_interval = integer
Example:
file results read &

file_name = "c:\model_1.res" &
disk_based_results = yes
Description:

model_name An Existing Specifies an existing model
Model
analysis_name An Existing Specifies the name of the analysis to store the Adams
Analysis output in.
executed.
length Linear_units Specifies the length units in the file, if different from the
current default.
file results read

mass Mass_units Specifies the mass units in the file, if different from the
current default.
time Time_units Specifies the time units in the file, if different from the
current default.
force Force_units Specifies the force units in the file, if different from the
current default.
Skip_time_interval Integer Specifies whether or not to skip time steps by specifying
a pattern of time steps to skip in the result file. This should
be greater than or equal to 0.
Skip_contact_interval Integer Specifies whether or not to skip contact steps by
specifying a pattern of time steps to skip in the result file.
This should be greater than or equal to 0.
associated with it.
2. When Adams/View reads a graphics file (.GRA), a request file (.REQ), a results file (.RES), or all
three with the FILE ANALYSIS READ, it stores them in an analysis. By default, the name of the
analysis is the file name excluding the extension.
3. The proper extension for the file is the default but can be overridden by simply supplying a
4. If you do not use the length/mass/time parameter, Adams/View will read or write the file using
your default modeling units. You only need to enter this parameter when you wish to read or write
a file with different units than those you are currently using.
file 73
file results read
5. If you have a large result file with unnecessary fine time resolution, specifying a
skip_time_interval and skip_contact_interval can significantly reduce the amount of memory
used to store the data as well as reduce the reading time.
If the skip_time_interval and skip_contact_interval are not provided or if their values are both 1
then the entire result file is read as usual. If the skip_time_interval is for example 3, and the
skip_contact_interval is 4 for a result file with the name test.res, then every 3rd step (not including
initialCondition, input and contact step) and every fourth contact step is included in the new
results file with the name test_3_4.res. This file after shrinking is read into Adams/View instead
of the original file. This file is stored in the same location as the original result file.
file results write
file results write

Allows you to write results to a results (.res) file.
Format:
file results write

analysis_name= an existing analysis
file_name= string
Example:
file results write &

file_name = "c:\model_1.res"
Description:

analysis_name(required) An Existing Analysis Specifies the name of the analysis from which
data should be extracted to write the graphics file.
file_name(required) String Specifies the name of the file that is to be written.
1. The analysis_name parameter specifies the name of the analysis to store the Adams output in.
When Adams/View reads a graphics file (.GRA), a request file (.REQ), a results file (.RES), or
2. The results file has a .res extension by default, but you can override it by supplying a different
extension.
file 75
file rpc read
file rpc read

Allows you to read RPC III files into Adams/View.
MTS Systems Corporation created the Remote Parameter Control (RPC) III file format. This format has
become a standard for writing time history information of loads, forces, and accelerations. With RPC III,
you can input data from durability test machines and output data to any RPC III-compatible programs.
This topic contains an overview of the RPC III format. For a detailed description of the RPC III format,
see www.mts.com.
RPC III files are sequential and fixed-length with 512-byte records. The files begin with a standard
header that describes the file contents. The header includes a FORMAT flag that specifies one of four
data formats:
• BINARY_IEEE_LITTLE_END - used on Windows systems
• BINARY_IEEE_BIG_END - used on UNIX systems
• BINARY - used on VAX systems
• ASCII
Adams/View and Adams/Durability can read any of the binary formats, so from the point of view of an
MSC Adams user, these files are portable between platforms. These products can also write RPC III files
in the BINARY_IEEE_LITTLE_END format because MTS only provides RPC III software for the
Windows platform.
The RPC III file format supports multi-channel time history data with a fixed sample rate or time step.
Adams/View and Adams/Durability support an unlimited number of channels. These binary files map
real data into a short (2-byte) signed integer with the header providing a scaling factor for each channel.
Because the scaling factor essentially determines where the decimal point appears in these signed
numbers, the maximum resolution of data in an RPC III file is 0.0000305 () when the scaling factor is 1.
A key point to remember is that data that varies less than the magnitude of the channel resolution will not
be reflected in an RPC III file. For example, with a scaling factor of 1, changes less than ±0.0000305 will
not register in the RPC III data file.
Format:
file rpc read

rpc_object_name = dac_file_object_name
file rpc read
Description:

File_name String Specifies the name of the file that is to be read,
Rpc_object_name RPC_file_object_name Specifies the name of the RPC object that is to
hold the RPC data. If unspecified, uses the file
name.
The proper extension in the file_name parameter is the default, but you can override it by supplying a
file 77
file rpc write
file rpc write

Allows you to write out RPC III files from Adams/View. This technique does not require you to set up
requests before running the simulation.
By definition, results output to an RPC III must have constant time steps. If the results data being output
includes non-constant time steps, Adams/View issues a warning and the time axis of the data will be
warped so that the time interval is constant.
MTS Systems Corporation created the Remote Parameter Control (RPC) III file format. This format has
become a standard for writing time history information of loads, forces, and accelerations. With RPC III,
you can input data from durability test machines and output data to any RPC III-compatible programs.
This topic contains an overview of the RPC III format. For a detailed description of the RPC III format,
see www.mts.com.
RPC III files are sequential and fixed-length with 512-byte records. The files begin with a standard
header that describes the file contents. The header includes a FORMAT flag that specifies one of four
data formats:
• BINARY_IEEE_LITTLE_END - used on Windows systems
• BINARY_IEEE_BIG_END - used on UNIX systems
• BINARY - used on VAX systems
• ASCII
Adams/View and Adams/Durability can read any of the binary formats, so from the point of view of an
MSC Adams user, these files are portable between platforms. These products can also write RPC III files
in the BINARY_IEEE_LITTLE_END format because MTS only provides RPC III software for the
Windows platform.
The RPC III file format supports multi-channel time history data with a fixed sample rate or time step.
Adams/View and Adams/Durability support an unlimited number of channels. These binary files map
real data into a short (2-byte) signed integer with the header providing a scaling factor for each channel.
Because the scaling factor essentially determines where the decimal point appears in these signed
numbers, the maximum resolution of data in an RPC III file is 0.0000305 () when the scaling factor is 1.
A key point to remember is that data that varies less than the magnitude of the channel resolution will not
be reflected in an RPC III file. For example, with a scaling factor of 1, changes less than ±0.0000305 will
not register in the RPC III data file.
Format:
file rpc write

result_set_component = existing result_set
file rpc write
Example:
file rpc write &

file_name = c:\data\rpc_format &
result_set_component = my_result_set
Description:

File_name String Specifies the name of the file that is to be read, written,
or executed.
Result_set_component Existing result set Identifies the components of an existing result set. The
components must be in an existing result set and
reference to the component must include the result set
name.
1. The proper extension in the file_name parameter is the default, but you can override it by
2. For example, assume you read a request file named shift.req, and this request file contains the
result set REQ1. If you want to refer to the X component in the result set REQ1, enter
.SHIFT.REQ1.X (you can omit .SHIFT. if SHIFT is the current analysis_name). SHIFT refers to
the analysis name from which the result set came (or is stored under).
with request 101 from an analysis named test can be referred to as .test.req101.
The table illustrates the default names assigned to result sets and result set components read from
file 79
file rpc write
Result set naming
File that result is

Result set type: Result set name: Component names: from:
vx vy vz wx wy wz

wdz
joint JOIxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag results file
tmag
jprim JPRxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag results file
tmag
motion MOTxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag results file
tmag
fmag1 tmag1

fmag2 tmag2

fmag3 tmag3
sforce SFOxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag results file
tmag
spring damp SPRxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag results file
tmag
bushing BUSxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag results file
tmag
beam BEAxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag results file
tmag
field FIExxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag results file
tmag
file shell write
file shell write

Allows you to export shell geometry from existing geometry in your model.
Format:
file shell write

file_name= string
shell_name= existing shell
Example:
file shell write &

file_name = "c:\mydir\desktop\shell"
Description:

file_name String Specifies the name of the file that is to be written
shell_name Existing Shell Name of the shell object in your model that you want to write to a file.
The proper extension is the default, but you can override it by supplying a different extension.
file 81
file spread_sheet write

Allows you to write out a tab delimited file from an existing Adams/View result set.
Format:

file_name= string
result_set_name= an existing result set
Example:
file spread_sheet write &
Description:

executed.
result_set_name An Existing Result Set This parameter allows you to identify a result set name.
1. Any result set in Adams/View that was created by reading in a REQUEST, or RESULTS file can
be output into tab delimited spread sheet format.
You will be required to specify a file name and the result set name you wish to be written out.
Example:
FILE SPREAD_SHEET WRITE FILE_NAME=REQ5.sps RESULT_SET_NAME=REQ5
extension.You do not need to enclose the file name in quotes if it only contains alpha-numeric
characters and starts with a letter. If you want to include other characters, such as a '.' for an
extension or '/' or '[]' for directory paths, you must enclose the name in quotes.
3. A result set is a storage place for any kind of numeric tabular data. A result set can contain "n"
components. A component is most usually set up to contain vector components of values like
displacement, velocity, acceleration, force, etc. However, in this case, a result set is completely
general and can store any numeric value in a component with only a few exceptions. These
exceptions are those cases when the user asks the system to mix incompatible value types like
complex in the same component as real values.
This is a required parameter and the result set name given must be within a particular analysis. A
result set name may be arbitrarily long and a combination of letters of the alphabet and numbers
Result Sets are associated with an analysis run and can be identified as such. A result set
associated with request 101 from an analysis named "test" is referred to as .test.req101.
Several predefined result set types are created when Adams request and result files are read into
Adams/View. For example, assume you have read a request file called "SHIFT.REQ", and this
request file contains the result information for the Adams statement REQUEST/1. The result set
will be named REQ1, and may also be referred to relative to the analysis name .shift.req1. If you
wish to refer to a component in the same result set the full name for the X component would be
.SHIFT.REQ1.X.
The following table illustrates the default names assigned to result sets and result set components read
from request (.REQ) and results (.RES) files.
Component
Result set type: Result set name: names: File that result is from:
part PARxxx... x y z e1 e2 e3 e4 results file
mag
vx vy vz wx wy wz
accx accy accz wdx

wdy wdz
joint JOIxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag results file
tmag
jprim JPRxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag results file
tmag
motion MOTxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag results file
tmag
coupler COUxxx... fx1 fy1 fz1 tx1 ty1 results file
tz1 fmag1 tmag1
fx2 fy2 fz2 tx2 ty2

tz2 fmag2 tmag2
fx3 fy3 fz3 tx3 ty3

tz3 fmag3 tmag3
sforce SFOxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag results file
tmag
file 83
Component
Result set type: Result set name: names: File that result is from:
spring damp SPRxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag results file
tmag
bushing BUSxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag results file
tmag
beam BEAxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag results file
tmag
field FIExxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag results file
tmag
user request UREQxxx... u1 u2 u3 u4 u5 u6
u7 u8
request REQxxx... x y z r1 r2 r3 mag
amag
file stereo_lithography read

Allows you to import stereo lithography (SLA) geometry into MSC Adams. As you import the SLA
geometry, you associate the geometry with an existing part or you create a new part with which to
associate it.
Format:

file_name = string
scale = real
relative_to= an existing model, part or marker
location= location
Example:
file stereo_lithography read &

file_name = "c:\mydir\desktop\steriolitho" &
scale = 2 &
location = 2,90,50
Description:

File_name String Specifies the name of the file that is to be read, written, or
executed
part_name An Existing Partf Specifies the name of an existing Adams/View PART onto
which the translated geometry will be placed
scale Real Specifies the scale factor to be applied to the size of the
geometry created in Adams/View
location Location Specifies the translational position where the geometry in
the IGES file is to be located relative to the Adams/View
part lprf
file 85

IGES file is to be oriented relative to the Adams/View part
lprf
relative_to An Existing Model, Specifies the coordinate system that location coordinates
Part Or Marker and orientation angles correspond to
extension.
2. The geometry may be placed upon a part and used for preprocessing and postprocessing. Markers
created by the IGES translator will be located on the part specified in this parameter.
at that time.
associated with it.
3. The default scale factor is 1.0. If the scale factor of 1.0 is used the geometry created in the
Adams/VIEW will be the same size as the geometry in the IGES file. A scale factor less than 1.0
will reduce the size of geometry and a scale factor greater than 1.0 will increase the size of the
geometry. For example, assume the scale factor specified is 0.5, a cylinder of length 2 meters and
diameter .5 meters would be translated to Adams/View with the length of 1 meter and diameter
of .25 meters. The distance from geometry to the RELATIVE_TO coordinate system will be
scaled accordingly. If the previously mentioned cylinder was located at 3,2,0 in the IGES file, it
would be located at 1.5,1,0 after it is translated to Adams/View.
The orientation of the geometry is not affected by the SCALE parameter.
4. These coordinates can be relative to any other coordinate system defined in the Adams/View
model (See the RELATIVE_TO parameter for this command).
5. These orientation coordinates can be relative to any other coordinate system defined in the
Adams/View model (See the RELATIVE_TO parameter for this command).
z axes.
By default, you supply Euler (known as body313, or body-fixed z, x, z) angles. You may change
this convention with the 'DEFAULTS UNITS ORIENTATION_TYPE=' command. For example,
selecting SPACE123 means you will subsequently be supplying space-fixed x, y, and z, angles.
coordinate system.
6. Refer to the Appendix on "Specifying Locations and Orientations in Adams/View" in the
Adams/View Users Manual for more information on the ORIENTATION parameter.
7. If relative_to parameter is not specified, the default coordinate system is used. The default
default coordinate system using the 'defaults coordinate_system' command
.
Caution: File name required for file stereo_lithography read part_name

file 87
file table write
file table write

Allows you to write a plot out as a table.
Format:
file table write

plot_name= existing plot
file_name= string
format= string
Example:
file table write &

write plot_name = plot_1 &
file_name = "c:\mydir\desktop\table" &
format = html
Description:

plot_name Existing Plot Specifies the name of the plot from which the curves are to be extracted
as the source for the table's data.
file_name String Specifies the name of the file in which to store the table. If blank, uses
the name of the plot.
format String Specifies the format of the table (HTML or spreadsheet)
1. HTML is the default. If you specify spreadsheet, then the command is the same as the file
spreadsheet write command except that it takes its data from a plot curve.
file testdata read measures

Allows you to import test data as measures
Format:

model_name = a new or existing model
analysis_name= a new or existing analysis
use_file_column_labels= boolean
units= string
independent_column_index= integer
output_type= test_data_output
file_name= string
Example:
file testdata read measures &

use_file_column_labels = yes &
output_type = measure
Description:

model_name A New or Existing Model Specifies an existing model
analysis_name A New or Existing Analysis Specifies an existing analysis
use_file_column_labels Boolean Specifies how to define the names of the
measures
units String Allows you to specify the type of units to
be used for this object.
independent_column_index Integer Specifies which column in the data file
contains the x-axis data.
output_type, file_name Test_data_output Specifies whether you want the request to
output displacement, velocity,
acceleration, force, or user data.
file_name String Specifies the name of the file that is to be
read, written, or executed
file 89
associated with it.
2. You may identify an analysis by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
An analysis may be picked from the screen if you have read an Adams Graphics file, and use the
GRAPHIC_RESULTS command to display it. If the analysis is not visible on the screen, you
must type the name. You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the analysis is
displayed.
You may have explicitly named the analysis when you created it by reading one or more Adams
output files. By default, the name of the analysis is the root name of the Adams output files. If you
created the analysis by reading an Adams Graphics file, for instance, the analysis name is the
name of the graphics file without the .gra extension.
You may get a list of analysis by typing a "?" in response to a parameter that requires an analysis
name be entered.
You must separate multiple analysis names by commas.
If the analysis is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
You need not separate multiple analysis picks by commas.
See Also getting_started - for naming syntax and wildcards.
3. If there are textual column headers in the file, select yes. MSC Adams uses the column header text
as the names of each measure. Values are: yes and no.
4. Since this object can be used in a variety ov contexts, Adams/View cannot determine what type
5. Enter the column number. MSC Adams uses all other columns as the y-axis data. It is used as the
independent data for the measure.
6. You may choose one of the following values.
DISPLACEMENT
Adams outputs the displacement of the I marker with respect to the J marker. This argument
generates eight headings and eight columns of output. The columns include the time (Time), the
translational magnitude (Mag), the x component (X), the y component (Y), the z component (Z),
the psi angle (Psi), the theta angle (Theta), and the phi angle (Phi).
The psi, theta, and phi angles are the Euler angle displacements of the I marker with respect to the
J marker. Adams calculates this displacement data in the global coordinate system. If you specify
R_MARKER_NAME, Adams resolves the translational x component, the translational y
component, and the translational z component in the coordinate system of the R marker. The R
marker does not affect psi, theta, and phi.
If you enter the OUTPUT_CONTROL SET OUTPUT YPR=ON command, psi, theta, and phi
rotations become yaw, pitch, and roll rotations.
Rotational displacement information differs from all other standard output. Whether this
information is in psi, theta, and phi coordinates or in yaw, pitch, and roll coordinates, the rotation
sequence is not a vector. As a result, Adams outputs no magnitude column. In addition, the
sequence of coordinates is independent of any frame external to the I and the J markers. Therefore,
the R_MARKER_NAME parameter has no effect on the angular coordinates.
VELOCITY
Adams outputs the velocity of the I marker with respect to the J marker. This argument generates
nine headings and nine columns of data for velocity. The nine columns include the time (Time),
the translational magnitude (Vm), the translational x component (Vx), the translational y
component (Vy), the translational z component (Vz), the rotational magnitude (Wm), the
rotational x component (Wx), the rotational y component (Wy), and the rotational z component
(Wz).
Adams calculates this velocity data (the first derivative of the displacement of the I marker with
respect to the J marker) in the global coordinate system. If you specify R_MARKER_NAME,
Adams resolves the translational x component, the translational y component, the translational z
component, the rotational x component, the rotational y component, and the rotational z
component in the coordinate system of the R marker.
ACCELERATION
Adams outputs the acceleration of the I marker with respect to the J marker. This argument
generates nine headings and nine columns of output. The columns include the time (Time), the
magnitude of translational acceleration (Accm), the translational x component (Accx), the
translational y component (Accy), the translational z component (Accz), the magnitude of
rotational acceleration (Wmdot), the rotational x component (Wxdot), the rotational y component
(Wydot), and the rotational z component (Wzdot). Adams calculates this acceleration data (the
second derivative of the displacement of the I marker with respect to the J marker) in the global
coordinate system. If you specify R_MARKER_NAME, Adams resolves the translational x
component, the translational y component, the translational z component, the rotational x
component, the rotational y component, and the rotational z component in the coordinate system
of the R marker.
FORCE
Adams outputs the force associated with the I and the J markers or, if only the I marker is given,
outputs the action-only forces on the I marker. When both the I and the J markers are given,
Adams sums the forces on the I marker of those forces associated with the I and the J markers.
These forces can include both applied forces (such as SPRINGDAMPERs and BUSHINGs) and
file 91
reaction forces from constraint elements (such as JOINTs and MOTIONs). When only the I
marker is given, Adams sums all of the action-only forces that are applied to the I marker.
AdamsAdams reports the components of the resulting vectors in the reference frame of the R
marker if you specify R_MARKER_NAME.
If you do not specify R_MARKER_NAME, Adams reports the components in the ground
reference frame. This argument generates nine columns of output. The columns include the time,
the translational force magnitude, the three components of the translational force, the rotational
force (torque) magnitude, and the three components of the torque.
Applied forces and torques are those generated by beams, bushings, fields, single-component
forces, and spring-dampers. Adams outputs the applied forces and torques acting at the request I
marker (which may be either the applied force I marker or the applied force J marker). The
magnitude and point of force application on the part containing the applied force J marker varies
according to the type and source of the force. For spring-dampers and action-reaction single-
component forces, the forces and torques acting at the J marker are equal and opposite to the
forces and torques acting at the I marker. For action-only single-component forces, there is no
force or torque acting at the applied force J marker. For beams, fields, and bushings, the forces
acting at the applied force J marker are equal and opposite to the forces acting at the applied force
I marker. As long as the applied force I marker and the applied force J marker are coincident, the
torques acting at the applied force J marker are equal and opposite to the torques acting at the
applied force I marker. If there is a finite separation between the I and the J markers, the torques
acting at the applied force J marker are opposite, but not equal to the torques acting at the applied
force I marker.
Reaction forces and torques are those generated by constraint-inducing elements. For revolute,
spherical, and universal joints and for atpoint, orientation, parallel axes, and perpendicular joint
primitives, Adams outputs the reaction forces and torques acting at the request I marker (which
may be either the constraint I marker or the constraint J marker). The force and torque acting at
the request J marker are equal and opposite to the force and torque acting at the request I marker.
Depending on the type of constraint, some or all of the torques acting at the I marker are zero.
You must be careful when requesting a force with the I and the J markers reversed from those
specified in the force-producing element.
Adams reports the force as if it were applied to the J marker of the force-producing element. The
translational force on the J marker of the force element will be equal and opposite to the
translational force on the I marker of the force element if it is not action only.
The force will be zero if it is action only. The torque on the J marker of the force element has an
extra component that may have significance. The torque is the sum of two contributions. The first
contribution is the opposite of the torque on the I marker. The second contribution is due to the
force acting across the separation between the I and the J markers. If the force acts along the line
of sight of the two markers, this extra torque will be zero. To minimize misunderstandings, attach
your REQUEST markers in the same order as the markers on the force-producing element.
USER
Adams will output the values computed by the user-written subroutine REQSUB. If you choose
a USER request type, you must also supply the USER_FUNCTION parameter to define the
constants Adams will pass to the REQSUB.
extension.
file 93
file testdata read splines

Format:

model_name= a new or existing model
use_file_column_labels= boolean
units= string
independent_column_index= integer
file_name= string
Example:
file testdata read splines &

use_file_column_labels = yes &
independent_column_index = 3
Description:

model_name A New Or Existing Specifies an existing model
Model
use_file_column_labels Boolean Specifies how to define the names of the splines
independent_column_index Integer Specifies the column number to indicate which
column in the file to use for the independent data
(X parameter) in the MSC Adams spline.
written, or executed
associated with it.
2. If there are textual column headers in the file, select yes. MSC Adams uses the column header text
as the names of each spline.Values are: yes and no. The default is no.
3. Since this object can be used in a variety of contexts, Adams/View cannot determine what type
of units it should have. By telling Adams/View what the unit type for this object is, Adams/View
can preform the proper conversions on the values you specify.
4. The columns are numbered sequentially from left to right starting with 1, 2, 3, and so on.
If you specify an independent data index for splines, MSC Adams does not create a spline for the
column of the file with that index. Instead, that column of data is used as the x data for all splines.
If you do not include an independent column index, then the series of numbers 1, 2, 3, and so on
is used for the x data of all splines.
extension.
file 95
file text close
file text close

Indicates that the text file is to be closed.
Format:
file text close

file_name = string
Example:
file text close &

file_name= “C:\Model_Data.txt”
Description:

file_name String Specifies the name of the input or output text file to be closed.
1. If you do not specify a file_name parameter, then the last opened, or written file is assumed. After
a file has been closed, any attempts to write to it will cause an error.
2. The proper extension for file_name parameter is the default (.txt) but can be overridden by simply
file text open
file text open

Allows you to open a text file for writing.
Format:
file text open

file_name= string
open_mode= open_mode
Example:
file text open &

file_name= "c:\data.txt" &
open_mode = append
Description:

file_name String Specifies the name of the input or output text file.
open_mode Open_mode Specifies the mode in which the file is to be opened, thereby determining
which operations are valid for this file. Available values are: APPEND
and OVERWRITE.
1. Depending upon the open_mode the file can either be overwritten completely or appended.
2. You may use the file_name later in file text write or file text close commands
to indicate which file you wish to operate upon.
The proper extension for file_name parameter is the default (.txt) but can be overridden simply by
3. If the file is opened with open_mode=OVERWRITE, any existing file with the name given in the
file_name parameter is deleted at the time of the OPEN. If the file is opened with
open_mode=APPEND, then any existing file is appended by subsequent WRITEs (the file need
not exist for the APPEND mode to work).
file 97
file text write
file text write

Indicates that output composed of the values_for_output is to be sent to the specified destination, using
the given format.
Format:
file text write

file_name= string
variable_name = an existing vvar
format_for_output = string
values_for_output = string
newline = boolean
Example:
file text write &

format_for_output = "the varmint is a %s, kill it %s." &
values_for_output = "snake", "now"
Description:

file_name String Specifies the name of the output text file.
variable_name An Existing Vvar Specifies a variable to which Adams/View stores a
formatted string.
format_for_output String Specifies the format for the output text.
values_for_output String Specifies the values that are to be placed in the output
string.
newline Boolean Controls whether or not the command causes the
output to terminate the line with this write command.
1. The destination depends on what you specify, a file_name or a variable_name. You may specify
neither, one, or both destinations. If writing to a file, you must open it first.
If you specify neither, Adams/View assumes the last opened or written file as the intended
destination. If you specify just the file_name, Adams/View writes the output to that file. If you
specify just the variable_name, Adams/View assigns the text string to that variable. If you specify
both, Adams/View performs both actions.
file text write
2. The proper extension for file_name parameter is the default (.txt) but can be overridden by simply
3. Output formats are a mixture of text and conversion specifications. Each conversion specification
usually has a matching argument in the values_for_output parameter. A conversion specification
begins with a percent sign, '%', and is terminated by a letter or another percent sign.
FILE TEXT WRITE &
FORMAT_FOR_OUTPUT="The varmint is a %s, kill it %s." &
VALUES_FOR_OUTPUT="snake", "now"
Generates the string "The varmint is a snake, kill it now." to be written to the
appropriate file or variable. Note that there are two conversion specifications (both '%s') and two
values for output.
The conversion specifications provided by Adams/View are a subset of those used in the ANSI-
C programming language.
Valid conversion specifiers are:
• % literal percent sign ("%%" is output as "%")
• d integer in base 10, 1 or 123
• e exponential floating point, 1.23e-04
• E exponential floating point, 1.23E-04
• f fixed point real, 345.67
• g general fixed or floating point (depending upon magnitude)
• G general fixed or floating point (depending upon magnitude)
• i same as d, above
• o unsigned integer in base 8 (o is for octal)
• s character string
• u unsigned integer in base 10
• x unsigned integer in base 16 (decimal 10 is 'a', 11 is 'b', etc.)
• X unsigned integer in base 16 (decimal 10 is 'A', 11 is 'B', etc.)
Most conversion specifications may contain flags between the leading percent sign and the
terminating conversion specifier. These flags allow you to tune the format of your output further.
Some of the valid flags are:
- Indicates that the output is to be left justified in the field, with the default being right
justification. This is only useful when the field width is specified, see below.
+ Force a sign to be output for all numeric values.
... FORMAT="%+d %+d" VALUES=(-1), (1)produces -1 +1
0 Forces output of leading zeros when a field width is specified.
file 99
file text write
Field width is specified by prefixing the conversion specifier with a number. It determines how
much space is to be reserved for the output text. The following format and values
... FORMAT="%03d%6d" VALUES=(5),(6) generates"005.....6"as
output, where '.' denotes blank space (in this example only).
You specify precision with a number and decimal point following the field width prefix. For
instance,
... FORMAT="%5.2f %010.3e" VALUES=(2.3),(5.4)produces the
output:
" 2.30 05.400e+00"
Adams/View converts the values for output to the appropriate type for the conversion specifier.
Use of expressions is extremely useful here.
4. If newline is NO, then subsequent WRITEs will produce output along the same line. If newline is
YES , then any succeeding WRITE command will write on a new line. This parameter is optional
and has a default value of YES.
file wavefront read
file wavefront read

Allows you to read a Wavefront .obj file into Adams/View. Adams/View only interprets vertex, face, and
group information. Smoothing groups, textures, and material properties are ignored.
If you want the .obj file to be read such that its contents belong to a single Adams/View part, use the
PART_NAME parameter. Adams/View will then create a separate shell graphic object for each
occurrence of a group in the .obj file.
If you want the .obj file to be read such that its contents belong to an Adams/View mechanism, use the
MODEL_NAME parameter.
Adams/View will create a new part for each unique group name in the .obj file. If the same group name
appears more than once, a separate shell object will be added to the part with the same name as the group.
Format:
file wavefront read

file_name= string
part_name= new or existing body
geometry_placed= wave_geom_place
scale_factor= real
set_read_only= boolean
Description:

file_name String Specifies the name of the file that is to be read, written,
or executed.
Model_name New or Existing Model Specifies the name of a new or existing Adams/View
MODEL onto which the geometry created from reading
a Wavefront .obj will be placed.
part_name New or Existing Body Specifies the name of a new or existing Adams/View
PART onto which the geometry created from reading a
Wavefront .obj will be placed.
geometry_placed, Relative_to_part, Allows you specify whether the coordinates in the
Relative_to_ground wavefront file are to be interpreted as relative to the part
or relative to ground. Adams/View writes wavefront
files with the coordinates relative to the parts.
file 101
file wavefront read

scale_factor, Real Allows you to specify the amount to scale the geometry
that is read in from a Wavefront .obj file. The geometry
will be scaled uniformly in the x, y, and z directions.
set_read_only Yes/No Allows you to specify that all shells created as a result
of reading in a wavefront file are to be tagged as read-
only. This means that any file writing commands (such
as file wavefront write or file iges write) will not
output the read-only shells. There is no way to remove
the read-only setting once the shells have been created.
extension.
2. Adams/View will create a new part for each unique group name in the .obj file. If the same group
name appears more than once, a separate shell object will be added to the part with the same name
as the group.
at that time.
associated with it.
3. Adams/View will create a separate shell graphic object on the part for each occurrence of a group
in the .obj file.
file wavefront read
at that time.
associated with it.
file 103
file wavefront write

Generates a set of input files that are read by the Advanced Visualizer developed by Wavefront
Technologies. The Advanced Visualizer provides high quality rendering and animation for improved
visualization of analysis results.
Adams/View generates four types of files with the following extensions:
obj
Each file contains a list of points and polygons that collectively define the geometry on a part. The file
name will be the name of the part with a .obj extension. For example, a part named 'crank' would have
an object file crank.obj. Icons such as markers and center of mass are not written to this file. There will
be one object file created for each part in your analysis.
.chnl
This file contains channel data. Channel data is the translation and orientation of the part for the duration
of the simulation.
The values in the channel file are x, y, and z translation and body 123 rotation. Note that the orientation
of the parts are not defined in body 323 (Euler angles). The file name will be the name of the part with
the .chnl extension. For example, the part named 'crank' would have a channel file crank.chnl. There will
be one channel file created for each part in your analysis.
.set
The set file contains information to initialize the Advanced Visualizer including camera and lights. The
file name will be the name of the model with a .set extension. For example, a model named 'piston' would
have a set file piston.set. There will only be one set file created.
.cmd
This file is the Advanced Visualizer command file that will load the object files and channel files into the
Advanced Visualizer when executed. Note that this command file is not compatible with Adams/View.
The file name will be the name of the model with the .cmd extension. For example, a model named
'piston' would have a command file 'piston.cmd'. There will only be one command file created.
The graphic Spring Damper, Graphic Force and Outlines that connect markers on more than one part are
not supported.
Graphic attributes associated with geometry, parts, and models are not supported.
Format:

model_name = existing_model
Example:
file wavefront write &

model_name = model_1
Description:

model_name Existing model Specifies an existing model
Analysis_name Existing analysis Specifies an existing analysis
1. You can identify a model by typing its name or by picking it from the screen:
• If the model is not visible on the screen, you must type the name (you may find it convenient
to type the name even if the model is visible). You must separate multiple model names with
commas.
If the model is visible in one of your views, you can identify it by picking on any of the
graphics associated with it. It is not necessary to separate multiple model picks with commas.
2. You can identify an analysis by typing its name or by picking it from the screen:
• You can pick an analysis from the screen if you have read a graphics file, and use the
graphic_results command to display it. If the analysis is not visible on the screen, you must
type the name (you may find it convenient to type the name even if the analysis is displayed).
• You may have explicitly named the analysis when you created it by reading one or more
output files. By default, the name of the analysis is the root name of the output files. If you
created the analysis by reading a graphics file, for example, the analysis name is the name of
the graphics file without the .gra extension.
• You can get a list of analyses by typing a ? in response to a parameter that requires an analysis
name.You must separate multiple analysis names with commas.
• If the analysis is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
graphics associated with it. It is not necessary to separate multiple analysis picks with
commas.
floating_marker 1
floating_marker
floating_marker copy
Allows copying an existing floating marker.
Floating marker specifies a site for applying forces or constraints to parts. The force or constraint dictates
the location and orientation of the floating marker. Therefore, you do not specify a position for a floating
marker. This allows the floating marker’s location and orientation to change with respect to its body
coordinate system during the simulation, as dictated by the force or constraint.
The marker can be copied by using this command.
Format:
floating_marker_name= an existing fmarker
new_floating_marker_name = a new fmarker
Example:
floating_marker copy &

floating_marker_name = FMARKER_12 &
new_floating_marker_name = fmarker_121
Description:

floating_marker_name An Existing Fmarker Specifies the name of an existing floating
marker
new_floating_marker_name A New Fmarker Specifies a new name for the copied floating
marker
1. The floating marker has no position or orientation specified. The position and orientation of the
floating marker changes while simulation according to the mode of application of force or
constraint or location of the force on the moving body. For example, the orientation of the force
may be set as moving with the body, fixed in space or between two bodies, which decides the
position and orientation of the force while simulation.
2. The floating marker can be copied to a new floating marker, where a new name can be specified
for the same.
floating_marker 3
floating_marker create
Allows creation of a floating marker.
Format:
floating_marker_name= a new fmarker
adams_id = adams_id
node_ID = integer
comments = string
Example:
floating_marker create &

floating_marker_name = .model_1.PART_3.FMARKER_12 &
adams_id = 12 &
node_id = 10 &
comments = floating_marker_for_part_3
Description:

floating_marker_name A New Fmarker Specifies the name of a new floating marker
adams_id Adams_id Specifies an integer used to identify this
element in Adams database
node_id Integer Specifies an integer used to identify a node
for a flexible body
comments String Specifies the comments if any for the new
floating marker
1. 1. The floating marker has no position specified. The position and orientation of the floating
marker changes while simulation according to the mode of application of force or constraint or
location of the force on the moving body. For example, the orientation of the force may be set as
moving with the body, fixed in space or between two bodies, which decides the position and
orientation of the force while simuation.
The ‘adams_id’ specifies an integer used to identify this element in the Adams data file. When
identifier. If you use this parameter to specify a non-zero identifier, Adams/View will use it in
the corresponding statement in the Adams data file.
2. The ‘comment’ specifies comments for the object being created or modified. When an
Adams/Solver data file (.adm) is read into Adams/View, all comments associated with a
comments for an object are written before the statement corresponding to the object. The
‘node_id’ refers to the attachement point of node on a flexible body.
floating_marker 5
floating_marker delete
Allows deleting a floating marker.
Format:
Example:
floating_marker delete &

floating_marker_name = FMARKER_11
Description:

floating_marker_name An Existing Fmarker Specifies the name of an existing floating marker
1. The floating marker has no position or orientation specified. The position and orientation of the
floating marker changes while simulation according to the mode of application of force or
constraint or location of the force on the moving body. For example, the orientation of the force
may be set as moving with the body, fixed in space or between two bodies, which decides the
position and orientation of the force while simulation.
2. The floating marker can be deleted by providing the appropriate floating marker name while the
‘delete’ command
floating_marker modify
Allows modifying of a floating marker.
Format:
new_floating_marker_name = a new floating marker
adams_id = adams_id
node_ID = integer
comments = string
Example:
floating_marker modify &

floating_marker_name = .model_1.PART_3.FMARKER_12 &
new_floating_marker_name = .model_1.PART_3.FMARKER_13 &
adams_id = 12 &
node_id = 10 &
comments = floating_marker_for_part_3
Description:

floating_marker_name An Existing Fmarker Specifies the name of an existing floating
marker
new_floating_marker_name A New Fmarker Specifies a new name for an existing floating
marker
in Adams database
floating_marker 7

node_id Integer Specifies an integer used to identify a node for a
flexible body
comments String Specifies the comments if any for the new
floating marker
1. The floating marker has no position specified. The position and orientation of the floating marker
changes while simulation according to the mode of application of force or constraint or location
of the force on the moving body. For example, the orientation of the force may be set as moving
with the body, fixed in space or between two bodies, which decides the position and orientation
of the force while simuation.
The ‘adams_id’ specifies an integer used to identify this element in the Adams data file. When
identifier. If you use this parameter to specify a non-zero identifier, Adams/View will use it in
the corresponding statement in the Adams data file.
comments for an object are written before the statement corresponding to the object. The
‘node_id’ refers to the attachement point of node on a flexible body.
for 1
for
The FOR and END commands allow you to execute a group of commands a fixed set of times. You can
use FOR either to perform numeric iteration or to operate on a set of Adams/View objects, such as
markers or parts. Adams/View executes the commands bracketed by FOR and END for each value of a
variable in the specified range or upon the specified set of objects.
Format:
for
variable_name= variable
object_name = existing object
start_value= real
end_value= real
type_filter = object_type
group_name = existing group
echo_all_loops = yes/no
end
Example:
for variable_name=tempreal start_value=1 end_value=10

marker create marker_name=(eval("MAR" // RTOI(tempreal))) &
location=(eval(tempreal-1)), 0, 0
end
In this example, Adams/View creates 10 markers, MAR1 through MAR10, on the default part, and
locates them one unit apart on the x-axis of the part's coordinate system.
Description:

variable_name New Variable Specifies the name of the temporary variable to be
created within the loop
object_names Existing Object Specifies an existing object. This is used when
FOR is to be operated on a set of objects.

type_filter Object Type The TYPE parameter applies a filter to the set of
objects.
start_value Real Expression Specifies the starting value of the variable in the
loop.
end_value Real Expression Specifies the last value of the variable in the loop.
Once the loop is executed for this value, it
terminates.
increment_value Real Expression Specifies the increment for the value of the
variable for each iteration in the loop. This can be
either positive or negative.
group_name Existing Group Specifies a group name
echo_all_loops Yes/No Specifies a Boolean value
1. When the FOR statement is operated on objects, the object_name parameter is used.
FOR VARIABLE_NAME=var OBJECT_NAMES=objects &
TYPE=database_object_type
...
END
For this type of FOR loop, Adams/View creates a temporary Adams/View variable named var of
type OBJECT and successively assigns the value of each object in the set to the variable. The
commands inside the FOR/END pair can use var as they would any other Adams/View variable
of type OBJECT. Adams/View deletes the variable when the loop terminates.
2. Consider the following example in which Adams/View renumbers the Adams IDs of markers
belonging to the part follower, starting at 5000, and incrementing by one for each marker in the
set.
for variable_name=the_marker object_names=.fourbar.follower.*
type=marker
marker modify marker_name=(eval(the_marker)) adams_id=(eval(ip))
variable modify variable_name=ip integer_value=(eval(ip+1))
end
You can use the EVAL function to get the instantaneous value of an expression rather than
assigning the expression itself. An expression's value changes whenever the value of any variable
in it changes. Sometimes you want this behavior; other times you do not. Using EVAL avoids this
behavior.
As shown, you can use wildcards to specify the objects for the OBJECT_NAME parameter. The
TYPE parameter applies a filter to the set of objects, in this case, matching only children of the
part that are markers.
for 3
If you use a more general wildcard, Adams/View may execute the command more slowly than if
you use a more specific wildcard. For example, if you want all the markers in the model MOD1,
use OBJECT_NAME=.MOD1.* type=MARKER instead of OBJECT_NAME=*
type=MARKER.
force 1
force
force attributes
force attributes
Allows you to specify the attributes to be set on an individual force or a group of forces.
You can set the following attributes on a force:
• SIZE_OF_ICONS / SCALE_OF_ICONS: These two parameters are mutually exclusive. You
may set the size of an icon used for the force representation in modeling units, or you may scale
the size of the icon by a non-unit scale factor.
• VISIBILITY: You may set the visibility of a force ON, OFF or TOGGLE the current setting.
When you set the visibility OFF, the force will not be drawn. When you set the visibility ON,
you allow that force to be drawn.
• NAME_VISIBILITY: You may set the name label visibility of a force ON, OFF or TOGGLE the
• COLOR: You may set the color of a force with this parameter.
If an entity does not have a GRAPHICS ATTRIBUTE setting, the value for that GRAPHIC ATTRIBUTE
may be inherited from another entity. INHERITANCE may either be TOP_DOWN or BOTTOM_UP.
BOTTOM_UP and TOP_DOWN refer to the natural hierarchy of the Adams model. The hierarchy is a
tree structure with the model at the apex. Parts exist beneath the model, and markers exist beneath the
parts. If the icon size of the model is set to 0.1, and the default INHERITANCE is set to TOP_DOWN,
then all icons displayed within the model will be displayed at this size. However, if the icon size of a
model is set to 0.1, and then the default INHERITANCE is set to BOTTOM_UP, then any icons set to a
size other than the model's icon size will be displayed at their own size.
Format:
force attributes
force_name = existing force
scale_of_icons = real number
size_of_icons = real number
name_visibility = on/off/no_opinion/toggle
active = on/off/no_opinion
dependents_active = on/off/no_opinion
force 3
force attributes
Example:
force attributes &

Force_name = FORCE_1 &
Color = RED &
Name_visibility = OFF &
Active = On &
Dependents_active = OFF
Description:

force_name Existing force Specifies the force to be modified. You use this
parameter to identify the existing force to be
scale_of_icons Real Specifies a unit-less scale factor to apply to the
current icon size.
size_of_icons Real Specifies the size, in modeling units, the
Adams/View icons will appear in.
Visibility ON/ OFF/ Specifies the visibility of graphic entities.
NO_OPINION/ TOGGLE
name_visibility ON/ OFF/ The NAME_VISIBILITY parameter provides
NO_OPINION/ TOGGLE control over the visibility of the view name
displayed at the top center position of a given
view.
color Existing color Specifies the color the modeling entity should
be drawn in.
Active On/OFF/NO_OPINION When you set ACTIVE=NO, that element is
dependents_active On/OFF/NO_OPINION When you set ACTIVE=NO, that element is
If the force is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it convenient
to type the name even if the force is displayed.
force attributes
associated with it.
SIZE_OF_ICONS, the ICONS_SIZE of the model will take precedence.
An Example:
model ---------------------- SIZE_OF_ICONS = .15 meters .part
-------------------- SIZE_OF_ICONS = .125 meters
The icon of the part will be 1.5 meters is size.
If the model has SIZE_OF_ICONS set to 0.0 , and a part under that model has a SIZE_OF_ICONS
set to .125, the icon size of the part will be used.
An Example:
model ---------------------- SIZE_OF_ICONS = 0.0 meters .part
-------------------- SIZE_OF_ICONS = .125 meters
The icon of the part will be .125 meters is size.
invisible. TOGGLE will take the current state of visibility of an entity and reverse it.
force 5
force attributes
Example 1:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part---------------------- RED
Example 2:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part---------------------- RED
Example 3:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part---------------------- NO_COLOR

following command:
force attributes
• Group
• Part
• Marker
• Geometry
• Constraints
• Forces
• Data Elements
• Output Control
force 7
force copy
force copy
Allows you to create a replica force within the same model.
This replica force will be identical to the original with the exception of the force name. Forces must have
unique names relative to other forces in a given model. The replica will be completely independent of
the original, and may be modified without affecting the original.
The replica force will use the same markers to define it. The first step after the copy operation may be
to modify the replica to use different markers.
Forces may not be copied from model to model.
Format:
force copy
force_name = Existing force
new_force_name = new force name
Example:
force copy &

force_name = FORCE_1 &
New_force_name = FORCE_1_COPY
Description:

Force_name Existing Force Specifies the force to be copied
New_force_name New force name Specifies the name of the new force
force copy
associated with it.
2. You may use this new_force_name later to refer to this force. Adams/View will not allow you
to have two forces with the same name, so you must provide a unique name.
Tips:
force 9
force create body gravitational

Allows you to create a gravitational body object.
Format:

gravity_field_name = new_grav_field_na,e
comments = string
units_consistency_factor = real_number
x_component_gravity = real_number
y_component_gravity = real_number
z_component_gravity = real_number
Example:
force create body gravitational &

gravity_field_name = ACCGRAV__1 &
comments = “” &
units_consistency_factor = 0 &
x_component_gravity = 0.8 &
y_component_gravity = 0.8 &
z_component_gravity = 0.7
Description:

gravity_field_name String Specifies the name of the new gravity field.
modified.
units_consistency_factor Real Specifies a conversion factor to make your force, mass,
length, and time units consistent
x_component_gravity Real Specifies the x component of gravitational acceleration
with respect to the ground reference frame.

y_component_gravity Real Specifies the y component of gravitational acceleration
z_component_gravity Real Specifies the z component of gravitational acceleration
1. In conjunction with the part masses, the gravitational field defines a body force at the center of
gravity of each part. The force direction is defined by the X_COMPONENT_GRAVITY,
Y_COMPONENT_GRAVITY, and Z_COMPONENT_GRAVITY parameters. The force
magnitude is the part mass multiplied by the magnitude of the gravity vector. Each gravity field
is written as an Adams ACCGRAV statement. Although Adams/View allows you to create more
than one gravity field, you should only use one, since Adams only allows one ACCGRAV
statement. You may also specify UNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR in a gravity field.
Adams/View writes this as the GC parameter in the ACCGRAV statement. Although
UNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR affects the reporting of all forces, not just gravitational, it is
included here because it also appears in the ACCGRAV statement.
2. You may use the gracity_field_name name later to refer to this gravity field. Adams/View will
not allow you to have two gravity fields with the same name, so you must provide a unique name.
start with an alphabetic or '_' character. They may be of any length. By enclosing the name in
double quotes, you may use other printable characters, or start the name with a numeral. If a name
contains characters, or starts with a numeral, you must always quote the name when entering it.
Note that you can specify the parentage of an entity (e.g. what part “owns" a marker or a geometry
3. You may select any force, mass, length, or time units you wish. In order for Adams results to be
meaningful, however, you or Adams/View must compute a factor such that the equation Force =
(Mass / UNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR) * Acceleration is satisfied. For example, if you use
Newtons, kilograms, millimeters, and seconds, UNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR is 1000.
Adams documentation and Data Set Language refer to this factor as GC, on the ACCGRAV card.
The only case in which you should set UNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR yourself is when you
are using a set of units Adams/View does not support. Otherwise, you should probably let
Adams/View compute it for you. If you do use this command to set
force 11
UNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR to a non-zero value, Adams/View will write your value to

an Adams data set. Adams/View will not change your value, even if you later change your force,
mass, length, or time units. If you explicitly set UNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR, and then
later change your units, remember to updateUNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR.
Tips:
1. If you do not specify UNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR, or specify it as zero, Adams/View will
calculate it for you when it writes the Adams data set.
force create direct force_vector

Allows you to create a vector force.
The FORCE_VECTOR is a translational vector force that is specified using three orthogonal
components. The resultant vector determines the direction of the force action. This resultant vector is
formed by the three component forces that the user defines along the "reference marker" axes. The
reaction is equal and opposite to the action. The user may define the FORCE_VECTOR components in
Adams/View through user-specified function expressions or by specifying up to 30 user-defined
parameters that are passed to a user-written subroutine (a "VFOSUB") linked to Adams.
The FORCE_VECTOR corresponds to the Adams VFORCE statement.
The FORCE_VECTOR creates an Adams translational vector force element that applies the forces
between two parts of the system. The element applies an action force to the part that contains the I marker
and a corresponding reaction force to the part to which the "floating" J marker belongs. This "floating
marker" is automatically created by Adams/View and is positioned to be coincident with the I marker.
Subsequently, the FORCE_VECTOR establishes the position of the "floating" J marker. As the system
moves, Adams moves the "floating" J marker on its part to keep the "floating" J and I markers
superimposed. Thus, Adams applies the reaction force to the "floating" J markers part at the
instantaneous position of the I marker.
The total vector force that Adams supplies is the vector sum of the individual force components that the
user specifies. The magnitude of the total vector force is the square root of the sum of the components
squared. Its value will be the resultant (i.e. the square root of the sum of the squares) of the three
mutually-orthogonal force components.
Format:

force_vector_name= new V force name
Adams_id= geom._id
comments= String
i_marker_name= Existing Marker name
j_floating_marker_name= Existing J floating marker name
j_part_name= Existing body
j_marker_id= integer
ref_marker_name= existing marker
error= real number
x_force_function= Function
y_force_function= Function
z_force_function= Function
force 13

xyz_force_function= Function
user_function= Real
routine= String
Description:

force_vector_name New V Force Specifies the name of the new force_vector. You
may use this name later to refer to this force_vector.
Adams_id Geom_id Specifies an integer used to identify this element in
modified.
i_marker_name Existing marker Specifies the marker at which Adams applies the
forces and/or torques.
j_floating_marker_name Existing marker Specify the J floating marker name.
j_part_name Existing body Specifies the part on which Adams/View creates a
floating marker.
floating marker in a request or function by the ID
generate one.
ref_marker_name Existing marker Specifies a marker that acts as a coordinate
reference for the definition of three orthogonal
force and/or torque components. These
components make up the force and/or torque being
defined. The user must ensure that the
reference_marker is fixed on a part (i.e. not a
"floating" marker). The reference_marker may be
the same as the I marker and may be on any part of
the model.
Error Real
x_force_function Function Specifies the x component of the translational force
for this element. Adams applies this force parallel
to the x axis of the reference marker specified in the
REF_MARKER_NAME parameter.

y_force_function Function Specifies the y component of the translational force
to the y axis of the reference marker specified in the
z_force_function Function Specifies the z component of the translational force
to the z axis of the reference marker specified in the
xyz_force_function Function
user-written subroutine. See the Adams User's
subroutines.
routine String
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two force_vectors with the same name, so you must
start with an alphabetic or '_' character. They may of be any length.
force 15
yourself.
4. The user must ensure that the I marker is a fixed marker and on a different part than the part
specified in the J_PART_NAME parameter. Because the I marker is a fixed marker, and the
"floating" marker will move around on the j_part to remain coincident with the I marker, Adams
always applies the force action at a fixed point on the part containing the I marker. The reaction
force is applied to the j_part at a point coincident with the I marker.
The "floating" marker is automatically created by Adams/View on the part specified in the
J_PART_NAME parameter.
5. Adams subsequently applies the reaction forces and/or torques to this "floating" J marker. The
user must ensure that the j_part is a different part than the part containing the I marker. Adams
will move the "floating" J marker around on the j_part to keep it superimposed on the I marker,
meaning the point of application of the reaction force may move around on the j_part. Reaction
forces are not calculated when the "floating" J marker is on the ground part.
Components Examples
NUMBERS
OPERATORS
SYSTEM CONSTANTS
force 17

BLANKS
restrictions.
CONTINUATION COMMAS
FUNCTION BUILDER
SYSTEM VARIABLES
frame.
ARITHMETIC IFS
follows.
FUNCTION = 6 * IF(VR(10,31): 0 , 0 , 100)
Adams FUNCTIONS
be accessed.
Names Purposes
force 19
Names Purposes
force create direct general_force

Allows you to create a general force. A GENERAL_FORCE defines a complete force element,
consisting of three mutually orthogonal translational force components and three orthogonal torque
components.
Format:

general_force_name= .model_1.GFORCE_1
Adams_id = 1
i_marker_name = .model_1.part_1.marker_1
j_floating_marker_name = .model_1.part_2.marker_2
ref_marker_name = .model_1.part11.marker_1
Description:

general_force_name String Specifies the name of the new general_force. You may use
this name later to refer to this general_force.
Adams_id Integer Specifies an integer used to identify this element in the
Adams data file.
modified.
i_marker_name String Specifies the marker at which Adams applies the forces
and/or torques.
j_floating_marker_name String
j_part_name String Specifies the part on which Adams/View creates a floating
marker. Adams subsequently applies the reaction forces
and/or torques to this "floating" J marker.
j_marker_id Integer Specifies the Adams ID for the floating marker which is
automatically created on the J part by Adams/View.
ref_marker_name String Specifies a marker that acts as a coordinate reference for the
definition of three orthogonal force and/or torque
components.
x_force_function String Specifies the x component of the translational force for this
element. Adams applies this force parallel to the x axis of
the reference marker specified in the
force 21

y_force_function String Specifies the y component of the translational force for this
element. Adams applies this force parallel to the y axis of
z_force_function String Specifies the z component of the translational force for this
element. Adams applies this force parallel to the z axis of
To enter a function expression, you enter a series of quoted

strings.
x_torque_function String Specifies the x component of the rotational torque for this
element.
y_torque_function String Specifies the y component of the rotational torque for the
element.
z_torque_function String Specifies the z component of the rotational torque for this
element.
user_function String Specifies up to 30 values for Adams to pass to a userwritten
subroutine. See the Adams User's Manual for information
on writing user-written subroutines.
Routine String
1. A GENERAL_FORCE defines a complete force element, consisting of three mutually orthogonal
translational force components and three orthogonal torque components. The two resultant
vectors formed by the three component forces and the three component torques determine the
direction of the force and torque actions, respectively. The user defines these force and torque
components along and about the "reference" marker axes. The reactions are equal and opposite to
the action. The user may define the GENERAL_FORCE in Adams/View through user-specified
function expressions or by specifying up to 30 user-defined parameters that are passed to a user-
written subroutine (a "GFOSUB") the user links with Adams.
2. The GENERAL_FORCE corresponds to the Adams GFORCE statement.
3. A GENERAL_FORCE creates a six component force element that applies the forces between two
parts of the system. Here, force means three orthogonal translational components and three
orthogonal rotational components. The element applies actions to the part to which the I marker
belongs and corresponding reactions to the part to which a "floating_marker" belongs. This
"floating marker" is automatically created by Adams/View and is positioned to be coincident with
the I marker. Subsequently, the GENERAL_FORCE internally establishes the position of the
"floating_marker". As the system moves, Adams moves the "floating_marker"on its part to keep
the "floating_marker" and I markers always superimposed. Thus, Adams applies the reaction
force to the part containing the "floating_marker" marker at the instantaneous position of the I
marker.
4. The magnitude of the force depends on expressions or subroutines that the user supplies. The
value of the force is the resultant (i.e. the square root of the sum of the squares) of (up to) three
mutually orthogonal force components together with the resultant (i.e. the square root of the sum
of the squares) of (up to) three mutually orthogonal torque components.
5. The resultant vector formed by the three user-defined component forces along the reference
marker axes defines the direction of the translational force action. The reaction is equal and
opposite to the action. The resultant vector formed by the three component torques determines the
direction of the rotational torque action. The user defines these torques about the reference marker
axes. The reaction is equal and opposite to the action.
6. The general_force_name parameter specifies the name of the new general_force. You may use
this name later to refer to this general_force. Adams/View will not allow you to have two
general_forces with the same name, so you must provide a unique name. Normally, entity names
are composed of alphabetic, numeric, or '_' (underscore) characters, and start with an alphabetic
or '_' character. They may be of any length. By enclosing the name in double quotes, you may use
other printable characters, or start the name with a numeral. If a name contains characters, or starts
with a numeral, you must always quote the name when entering it. Note that you can specify the
parentage of an entity (e.g. what part "owns" a marker or a geometry element) when you CREATE
it by changing the name. If you enter just theentity name, then the default parent will be assigned
by Adams/View. If you type in the full name, then you may override the default parent. In most
cases, when creating an entity, Adams/View will provide a default name. The default name that
Adams/View provides will specify the parentage that it has assumed. You may, of course, delete
this name and use your own. The form of a full name is:
7. Specifies an integer used to identify this element in the Adams data file. When you use the FILE
Adams_DATA_SET WRITE command, Adams/View writes an Adams data file for your model.
Adams requires that each modeling element be identified by a unique integer identifier. If you use
this parameter to specify a non-zero identifier, Adams/View will use it in the corresponding
statement in the Adams data file. You may also enter zero as an identifier, either explicitly or by
default. The next time you write an Adams file, Adams/View will replace the zero with a unique,
internally generated identifier. Adams/View will permanently store this identifier with the
element just as if you had entered it yourself. Normally, you would let all identifiers default to
zero, and Adams/View would generate the identifiers for you. You are never required to enter a
non-zero identifier. You only need to specify it if, for some reason, you wish to control the Adams
file output.
force 23
stored with the object. Comments in the data file can be associated with the model. These
force is applied to the j_part at a point coincident with the I marker. The "floating" marker is
automatically created by Adams/View on the part specified in the J_PART_NAME parameter.
11. Specifies the Adams ID for the floating marker which is automatically created on the J part by
Adams/View. This allows you to reference the floating marker in a request or function by the ID
you specify, instead of letting Adams/View generate one.
12. The x-force function specifies the x component of the translational force for this element. Adams
applies this force parallel to the x axis of the reference marker specified in the
REF_MARKER_NAME parameter. To enter a function expression, you enter a series of quoted
strings. The easiest way to enter a function expression in Adams/View is to use the text editor in
panel or type a ^t (control-t). The Adams/View "function builder" is discussed below. The
syntactical correctness of a function expression can be investigated by using the "VERIFY"
verification.
13. The y-force function specifies the y component of the translational force for this element. Adams
applies this force parallel to the y axis of the reference marker specified in the
REF_MARKER_NAME parameter. To enter a function expression, you enter a series of quoted
verification.
14. The z-force function specifies the z component of the translational force for this element. Adams
applies this force parallel to the z axis of the reference marker specified in the
REF_MARKER_NAME parameter. To enter a function expression you enter a series of quoted
verification.
15. The user_function parameter specifies up to 30 values for Adams to pass to a user-written
subroutine. See the Adams User's Manual for information on writing user-written subroutines.
force 25
force create direct multi_point_force

Allows you to create a multiple point force. A MULTI_POINT_FORCE creates a multi-point force
element which establishes linear force-displacement (stiffness) and/or force-velocity (damping)
relationships between (up to) 351 markers in the model. This force corresponds to the Adams NFORCE
statement.
Format:

multi_point_force_name = model_name.force_name
Adams_id = integer
i_marker_name = model_name_.part_name.marker_name
j_marker_name = model_ name.part_name.marker_name
stiffness_matrix_name = model_name.stiffness_matrix_name
damping_matrix_name = model_name.damping_matrix_name
damping_ratio = real_number
length_matrix_name = model_name.length_matrix_name
force_matrix_name = model_name.force_matrix_name
Example:
force create direct multi_point_force &

multi_point_force_name = FORCE_11 &
Adams_id = 1 &
i_marker_name = model1_i_marker_1 &
j_marker_name = model1.part1.marker_2 &
stiffness_matrix_name = model1_name.stf_1 &
damping_matrix_name = model1_name.dp_1 &
damping_ratio = 0.5 &
length_matrix_name = model_1.lm_1 &
force_matrix_name = model_name.fm_1
Description:

Multi_point_force_nam String Specifies the name of the new multi_point_force. You may
e use this name later to refer to this multi_point_force.
Adams/View will not allow you to have two
multi_point_forces with the same name, so you must
Adams data file.
modified.
i_marker_name String Specifies a marker on the first of two parts connected by this
force element.
j_marker_name Specifies a marker on the second of two parts connected by
this force element.
Stiffness_matrix_name String Specifies the name of the matrix that the multi_point_force
uses as its stiffness matrix.
Damping_matrix_name String Specifies the name of the matrix that the multi_point_force
uses as its damping matrix.
Damping_ratio Real Specifies the proportional damping ratio for the
MULTI_POINT_FORCE.
Length_matrix_name String Specifies the name of the matrix that defines a reference
location for each of the I markers with respect to the J
marker, measured in the coordinate system of the J marker.
Force_matrix_name String Specifies the name of the matrix that contains the forces and
torques that the multi_point_force would produce if all the I
markers were at the positions given in the length_matrix.
1. The MULTI_POINT_FORCE supplies a three-component force and a three component torque at
each of the markers that define it. The force is a linear function of the relative displacement and
of the relative velocity of the markers.These linear relationships are defined by using a stiffness
and/or damping matrix, or by using a stiffness matrix and a proportional (viscous) damping factor.
Most typically, the MULTI_POINT_FORCE relationships will be defined as finite element
stiffness and damping relationships. For each MULTI_POINT_FORCE, one of the markers (the
J marker) must be specified as the datum or reference location (and orientation) for the forces
defining the MULTI_POINT_FORCE. The stiffness matrix used by Adams is the equilibrated
stiffness matrix and corresponds to the finite element stiffness matrix with the rows and columns
corresponding to the J marker freedoms eliminated.
force 27
2. Formulation The MULTI_POINT_FORCE creates a set of forces and torques, which act between
the I and J markers, which appear in the MULTI_POINT_FORCE. These forces and torques are
linear functions of the relative displacements and velocities of the markers, in a manner equivalent
to the finite element method. For each MULTI_POINT_FORCE, one marker (J) is used as the
reference marker. The velocities are resolved into the J markers reference frame and expressed in
the J markers coordinate system. The force and torque components computed by the
MULTI_POINT_FORCE are also given in the J markers coordinate system. The force-
displacement and force-velocity relationships are specified using stiffness and damping matrices,
or by using a stiffness matrix and a proportional damping ratio. These matrices are defined using
MATRIX statements in the data set. The stiffness and damping matrices that Adams requires are
defined for the I markers only, i.e. they should be derived normally using the (6n+1) J marker and
I marker degrees-of-freedom, but are input using only the rows and columns corresponding to the
I marker degrees-of-freedom. This is equivalent, in finite element terminology, to applying fixed
boundary conditions at the J marker by simply removing the corresponding rows and columns
from the matrices. Adams will automatically compute and apply the correct reaction forces at the
J marker based on the I markers responses.
assumed. You may, of course, delete this name and use your own.
the zero with a unique, internally generated identifier. Adams/View will permanently store this
Values are:AN INTEGER GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 0 LESS THAN OR EQUAL
TO 99999999
6. The i_marker_name specifies a marker on the first of two parts connected by this force element.
Adams/View connects this element to one part at the I marker and to the other at the J marker.
7. The j_marker_name specifies a marker on the second of two parts connected by this force
element. Adams/View connects this element to one part at the I marker and to the other at the J
marker.
8. This stiffness matrix is a 6n x 6n matrix (n is the number of I markers) that defines the linear
relationships between the I marker displacements relative to the J marker and elastic forces
generated by the multi_point_force. The stiffness matrix is derived in the J markers coordinate
system. Marker translational and rotational displacements appear sequentially in DX-DY-DZ-
AX-AY-AZ order, while the markers appear in the same sequence as in the i_marker_name
parameter. You may identify a matrix by typing its name or by picking it from the screen. Since
a matrix does not have a geometric position, Adams/View displays matrix icons at or near the
model origin. If the matrix icon is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may
also find it convenient to type the name even if the matrix icon is displayed. If you created the
matrix by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the matrix name is the letters MAT followed
by the Adams data set matrix ID number. For example, the name of Adams MATRIX/101 is
MAT101. If you created the matrix during preprocessing, you will have given it a name at that
time. If a matrix is owned by the default model, you may identify it by entering only its name. If
it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a matrix under a different model, for instance,
you may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify matrix
'control_points' from model 'road_surface' by entering ".road_surface.control_points'". If you
type a "?", Adams/View will list the matrix available by default. You must separate multiple
matrix names by commas. If the matrix is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by
picking on any of the graphics associated with it. You need not separate multiple matrix picks by
commas.
9. The damping matrix is a 6n x 6n matrix (n is the number of I markers) that defines the linear
relationships between the I marker velocities relative to the J marker and the viscous forces
generated by the multi_point_force. The damping matrix is derived in the J markers coordinate
system. If neither damping matrix nor the damping ratio is given, the multi_point_force will be
undamped. Marker translational and rotational velocities appear sequentially in VX-VY-VZ-
WX-WY-WZ order, while the markers appear in the same sequence as in the i_marker_name
parameter. You may identify a matrix by typing its name or by picking it from the screen. Since
a matrix does not have a geometric position, Adams/View displays matrix icons at or near the
force 29
picking on any of the graphics associated with it. You need not separate multiple matrix picks by
commas.
10. The elements of the damping matrix are determined by multiplying the corresponding stiffness
matrix element value by this number. If direct input of the damping properties is desired, the
DAMPING_MATRIX_NAME parameter may be used. If neither
DAMPING_MATRIX_NAME nor DAMPING_RATIO is given, the MULTI_POINT_FORCE
will be undamped. The user must specify a STIFFNESS_MATRIX_NAME with the
DAMPING_RATIO parameter.
11. The length matrix is a 3n x 1 matrix (n is the number of I markers) of translational displacements
only, in DX-DY-DZ order. Usually, the length matrix will be used to specify the system's free (no
internal force) lengths when they differ from the input positions. If the length matrix is not given,
the multi_point_force assumes that the input positions of the I markers are at the reference
locations. You may identify a matrix by typing its name or by picking it from the screen. Since a
matrix does not have a geometric position, Adams/View displays matrix icons at or near the
12. The force_matrix is a 6n x 1 matrix (n is the number of I markers) of forces and torques, appearing
sequentially for each marker in FXFY- FZ-TX-TY-TZ order, while the markers appear in the
same sequence as in the I_MARKER_NAME parameter. The force and torque components are
expressed in the coordinate system of the J marker. When the LENGTH_MATRIX_NAME will
be used to specify the system's free lengths, the FORCE_MATRIX_NAME gives the matrix of
external preloads. If the FORCE_MATRIX_NAME is not given, the multi_point_force acts as
though a matrix of zeros were input. You may identify a matrix by typing its name or by picking
it from the screen. Since a matrix does not have a geometric position, Adams/View displays
matrix icons at or near the model origin. If the matrix icon is not visible on the screen, you must
type the name. You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the matrix icon is
displayed. If you created the matrix by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the matrix name
is the letters MAT followed by the Adams data set matrix ID number. For example, the name of
Adams MATRIX/101 is MAT101. If you created the matrix during preprocessing, you will have
given it a name at that time. If a matrix is owned by the default model, you may identify it by
entering only its name. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a matrix under a
different model, for instance, you may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you
may specify matrix 'control_points' from model 'road_surface' by entering
".road_surface.control_points'". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the matrix available by
default. You must separate multiple matrix names by commas. If the matrix is visible in one of
your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics associated with it.
Tips:
force 31
force create direct single_component_force

Allows you to create a single component force object.
A single-component force applies force or a torque to two parts. You specify a marker on each part for
force or torque application. You may define the magnitude of the force as a function of any combination
of displacements, velocities, other applied forces, user-defined variables, and time. The force applied can
be action-reaction forces or action-only forces.
For translational action-reaction forces, Adams applies the user-defined force along the line connecting
the I and the J markers. The force exerted on I is directed from J towards I, while the force exerted on J
is directed from I towards J.
For translational action-only forces, Adams applies the force on the I marker only. There is no reaction
on the J marker. The force on the I marker is directed along the z axis of the J marker.
For rotational action-reaction forces, Adams applies the torque on the I marker about the z axes of the J
marker. Furthermore, Adams assumes that the z axes of the I and the J markers are constrained to always
be parallel for this type of single-component force.
For rotational action-only forces, Adams applies the torque only on the I marker. There is no reaction on
the J marker. The torque on the I marker is directed along the z axis of the J marker.
You write a FUNCTION expression or a user-written subroutine (an SFOSUB) to define the constitutive
equation for the force applied at the I marker. Adams evaluates the reaction forces at the J marker.
Format:

single_component_force_name= new single component force
Adams_id= geom_id
comments= string
type_of_freedom= translational/rotational
action_only= on/off
function= function
user_function= Real
routine= string
error= real
i_part_name= an existing body
j_part_name= an existing body
location= location
along_axis_orientation= location

in_plane_orientation= location
relative_to= existing model or part or
marker
i_marker_name= existing marker
j_marker_name= existing marker
Example:
force create direct single_component_force &

single_component_force_name = MY_FORCE &
function = "PI+10" &
j_part_name = PART_2 &
Description:

single_component_force New single_component Specifies the name of the new
_name force single_component_force. You may use this
name later to refer to this
single_component_force.
Adams_id Geom_id Specifies an integer used to identify this
or modified.
type_of_freedom Rotational/Translational Specifies the type of force (rotation or
translation) to be applied.ROTATIONAL
designates a rotational force, i.e. a
torque.TRANSLATIONAL designates a
translational force.
force 33

action_only On/Off Specifies whether the force is action-only or
action-reaction. For an action-reaction force,
Adams applies a force between the I and J
markers. For an action-only force, Adams
applies a force on the I marker directed by the Z
axis of the J marker, but does not apply a
reaction force at the J marker.
function Function Specifies the function expression definition that
is used to compute the value of this variable. To
enter a function expression, you enter a series of
quoted strings.
user_function Real Specifies up to 30 values for Adams to pass to
a user-written subroutine. See the Adams User's
subroutines.
routine String
Error Real
i_part_name Existing body Specifies the part, that is the first of the two
parts that this force acts between. Adams/View
applies the force on one part at the I marker and
the other at the J marker. These markers are
automatically generated using this method of
force creation.
j_part_name Existing body Specifies the part, that is the second of the two
parts that this force acts between. Adams/View
applies the force on one part at the J marker and
the other at the I marker. These markers are
automatically generated using this method of
force creation.
position of a force during its creation.
force being created using three rotation angles.
orientation and the requirements of the
particular force being created. These markers
are created automatically.
(e.g. marker or part) by directing one of the
axes. Adams/View will assign an arbitrary

relative_to AN EXISTING Specifies the coordinate system that location
MODEL, PART OR coordinates and orientation angles correspond
MARKER to.
i_marker_name Existing marker Specifies a marker on the first of the two parts
connected by this force element. Adams/View
connects this element to one part at the I marker
and to the other at the J marker.
Components Examples
force 35
NUMBERS
OPERATORS
SYSTEM CONSTANTS
BLANKS
restrictions.
CONTINUATION COMMAS
FUNCTION BUILDER
SYSTEM VARIABLES
frame.
ARITHMETIC IFS
follows.
FUNCTION = 6 * IF(VR(10,31): 0 , 0 , 100)
force 37
Adams FUNCTIONS
be accessed.
Names Purposes
2. Adams/View will not allow you to have two single_component_forces with the same name, so
you must provide a unique name.
yourself.
z axes.
coordinate system.
7. You may enter either one or two locations to direct the axis. If you enter one location, the axis
will point toward the location. If you specify two locations, the axis will be parallel to, and
pointing the same way as, the vector from the first location to the second.
force 39
coordinate system.
8. If the “RELATIVE_TO” parameter is not specified, the default coordinate system is used. The
default coordinate system is initially your model, i.e. the global coordinate system. You may
change the default coordinate system using the 'defaults coordinate_system' command.
force create direct torque_vector

Allows you to create a vector torque.
The TORQUE_VECTOR is a rotational force (i.e. a torque) that consists of three orthogonal
components. The direction of the torque action is determined by the resultant vector formed by the three
component torques defined by the user along the "reference marker" axes. The reaction is equal and
opposite to the action. The user may define the TORQUE_VECTOR components in Adams/View
through user-specified function expressions, or by specifying up to 30 user-defined parameters that are
passed to a user-written subroutine (a "VTOSUB") the user links with Adams.
The TORQUE_VECTOR corresponds to the Adams VTORQUE statement.
The TORQUE_VECTOR creates an Adams rotational force element (i.e. torque) that applies the forces
between two parts of the system. The element applies an action to the part to which the I marker belongs
and a corresponding reaction to the part to which the "floating" J marker belongs. This "floating marker"
is automatically created by Adams/View and is positioned to be coincident with the I marker.
Subsequently, the TORQUE_VECTOR establishes the position of the "floating" J marker. As the system
moves, Adams moves the "floating" J marker on its part to keep the "floating" J and I markers
superimposed. Thus, Adams applies the reaction torque to the "floating" J markers part.
The components of the torque depends on expressions or subroutines that the user supplies. Its value will
be the resultant (i.e. the square root of the sum of the squares) of the three mutually orthogonal torque
components.
Format:

torque_vector_name= New torque name
Adams_id= geom._id
comments= String
i_marker_name= existing marker name
j_floating_marker_name= existing marker name
j_part_name= existing body
j_marker_id= integer
error= real number
x_torque_function= Function
y_torque_function= Function
z_torque_function= Function
xyz_torque_function= Function
force 41

user_function= Real
routine= String
Description:

torque_vector_name String Specifies the name of the new torque_vector
Adams_id Geom_id Specifies an integer used to identify this element
or modified.
i_marker_name Existing marker name Specifies the marker at which Adams applies the
j_floating_marker_name Existing marker name Specifies marker for j floating marker.
j_part_name An existing body Specifies the part on which Adams/View creates
a floating marker.
floating marker in a request or function by the ID
generate one.
components make up the force and/or torque
being defined.
error Real
x_torque_function Function Specifies the x component of the rotational
torque for this element. Adams applies this
torque parallel to the x axis of the reference
marker in the sense of the right-hand rule, i.e. a
positive torque causes a counterclockwise
rotation if you are looking along the axis from
positive to negative.

y_torque_function Function Specifies the y component of the rotational
torque for the element.
Adams applies this torque parallel to the y axis

of the reference marker in the sense of the right-
hand rule, i.e. a positive torque causes a
counterclockwise rotation if you are looking
along the axis from positive to negative.
z_torque_function Function Specifies the z component of the rotational
torque for the element.
Adams applies this torque parallel to the z axis of

the reference marker in the sense of the right-
hand rule, i.e. a positive torque causes a
counterclockwise rotation if you are looking
xyz_torque_function Function
subroutines.
routine String
1. You may use this name later to refer to this torque_vector. Adams/View will not allow you to
have two torque_vector with the same name, so you must provide a unique name.
force 43
yourself.
stored with the object. Comments in the data file can be associated with the model. These
meaning, the point of application of the reaction force may move around on the j_part. Reaction
6. The user must ensure that the reference_marker is fixed on a part (i.e. not a "floating" marker).
The reference_marker may be the same as the I marker and may be on any part in the model.
Components Examples
NUMBERS
OPERATORS
force 45
SYSTEM CONSTANTS
BLANKS
restrictions.
CONTINUATION COMMAS
FUNCTION BUILDER
SYSTEM VARIABLES
frame.
ARITHMETIC IFS
follows.
FUNCTION = 6 * IF(VR(10,31): 0 , 0 , 100)
Adams FUNCTIONS
force 47
be accessed.
Names Purposes
force create element_like beam

Allows you to create a beam object.
Example:
force create element_like beam &

beam_name = BEAM_1 &
adams_id = 2 &
Comments = “” &
Ixx = 2.11 &
Iyy = 1.8 &
Izz = 1.9 &
Length = 10
Description:

beam_name String Specifies the name of the new beam. You may use this name
later to refer to this beam. View will not allow you to have
two beams with the same name, so you must provide a
unique name.
Adams data file.
modified.
Ixx Real number Specifies the polar area moment of inertia about the X axis
greater than 0 of a cross section perpendicular to the length of the beam.
Iyy Real number Specifies the principal area moment of inertia about the Y
greater than 0 axis of a cross section perpendicular to the length of the
beam.
Izz Real number Specifies the principal area moment of inertia about the z
greater than 0 axis of a cross section perpendicular to the length of the
beam.
y_shear_area_ratio Real number Specifies the shear area ratio in the y direction. This is the
greater than 0 correction factor for shear deflection in the y direction for
Timeshenko beams.
force 49

z_shear_area_ratio Real number Specifies the shear area ratio in the y direction. This is the
greater than 0 correction factor for shear deflection in the z direction for
Timeshenko beams.
Youngs_modulus Real number Specifies Young's modulus of elasticity for the beam
greater than 0 material.
Shear_modulus Real number Specifies the shear modulus of elasticity for the beam
length Real number Specifies the undeformed length of the beam along the x
greater than 0 axis of the J marker.
area_of_cross_secti Real number Specifies the uniform area of the beam cross section.
on greater than 0
Damping ratio Real number Specifies a ratio for calculating the structural damping
greater than 0 matrix for the beam. Adams multiplies the stiffness matrix
by the value of DAMPING_RATIO to obtain the damping
matrix.
matrix_of_damping Specifies a six-by-six structural damping matrix for the
_terms beam.
location Specifies the locations to be used to define the position of a
force during its creation.
Orientation Specifies the orientation of the J marker for the force being
created using three rotation angles.
Along_axis_orientat Specifies the orientation of a coordinate system (e.g. marker
ion or part) by directing one of the axes. Adams/View will
assign an arbitrary rotation about the axis.
in_plane_orientation Specifies the orientation of a coordinate system (e.g. marker
or part) by directing one of the axes and locating one of the
coordinate planes.
i_part_name Specifies the part that is the first of the two parts that this
force acts between.
(Required)
j_part_name Specifies the part that is the second of the two parts that this
force acts between. Adams/View applies the force on one
(Required) part at the J marker and the other at the I marker. These
markers are automatically generated using this method of
force creation.

i_marker_name Specifies a marker on the first of two parts connected by this
force element. Adams/View connects this element to one
(Required) part at the I marker and to the other at the J marker.
j_marker_name Specifies a marker on the second of two parts connected by
this force element. Adams/View connects this element to
one part at the I marker and to the other at the J marker.
1. The beam, which is massless and has a uniform cross section, is modeled as a linear translational
and a linear rotational action-reaction force between two markers. The forces the beam produces
are linearly dependent on the relative displacements and the relative velocities of the markers at
its endpoints. The x-axis of the J marker defines the centroidal axis of the beam. The y-axis and
the z-axis of the J marker are the principal axes of the cross section. They are perpendicular to the
x-axis and to each other. When the beam is in an undeflected position, the I marker has the same
angular orientation as the J marker, and the I marker lies on the x-axis of the J marker. The
following constitutive equations define how Adams uses the data you input for a beam to apply a
force and a torque to the I marker depending on the displacement and velocity of the I marker
relative to the J marker. Adams applies a force of equal magnitude and opposite direction to the J
marker.
[Fx] [K11 0 0 0 0 0 ] [x]
[Fy] [0 K22 0 0 0 K26] [y]
[Fz] = - [0 0 K33 0 K35 0 ] [z]
[Tx] [0 0 0 K44 0 0 ] [a]
[Ty] [0 0 K35 0 K55 0 ] [b]
[Tz] [0 K26 0 0 0 K66] [c]
[C11 C21 C31 C41 C51 C61] [Vx]
[C21 C22 C32 C42 C52 C62] [Vy]
-[C31 C32 C33 C43 C53 C63] [Vz]
[C41 C42 C43 C44 C54 C64] [Wx]
[C51 C52 C53 C54 C55 C65] [Wy]
[C61 C62 C63 C64 C65 C66] [Wz]
Note that both matrices, Cij and Kij, are symmetric, i.e. Cij=Cji and Kij=Kji. You define the
twenty-one unique damping coefficients when you write the BEAM statement. Adams defines the
Kij's in the following way:
K11 = E A / L
K22 = 12 E Izz /[L**3 (1+Py)]
K26 = -6 E Izz /[L**2 (1+Py)]
K33 = 12 E Iyy /[L**3 (1+Pz)]
K35 = 6 E Iyy /[L**2 (1+Pz)]
K44 = G Ixx / L
K55 = (4+Pz) E Iyy /[L (1+Pz)]
K66 = (4+Py) E Izz /[L (1+Py)]
where Py = 12 E Izz ASY/(G A L**2) and Pz = 12 E Iyy ASZ/(G A
L**2)
force 51
2. The BEAM statement implements a force in the same way the FIELD statement does, but the
BEAM statement requires you to input only the values of the beam's physical properties, which
Adams uses to calculate the matrix entries. For a force request, the forces returned are the forces
the J marker exerts upon the I marker.
3. The constitutive equations shown above define the forces and moments exerted on the I marker.
These forces and moments are due to relative displacements and velocities of the I marker with
respect to the J marker. Because of force transfer, the reaction moments at the J marker are usually
not the same as the applied moments at the I marker.
replace the zero with a unique, internally generated identifier. Adams/View will permanently
6. By definition, the beam lies along the positive X axis of the J marker. You should compute IXX
about the X axis of the J marker. Values for the Ixx parameter are:A REAL NUMBER
GREATER THAN 0
7. By definition, the beam lies along the positive X axis of the J marker. You should compute IYY
about the Y axis of the J marker.
8. By definition, the beam lies along the positive X axis of the J marker. You should compute IZZ
about the Z axis of the J marker.
9. The y_shear_ratio is the area of the beam cross section divided by the area of the beam cross
section that resists y-direction shear forces. If you want to neglect the deflection due to y-direction
shear, set the ratio to zero.
10. The z_shear_ratio specifies the shear area ratio in the z direction. This is the correction factor for
shear deflection in the z direction for Timeshenko beams.
11. Because the ‘matrix_of_damping _terms’ matrix is symmetric, you need to specify only one-half
of it. The following matrix shows the values to input:
[r01 ] [r02 r07 ] [r03 r08 r12 ]
[r04 r09 r13 r16 ] [r05 r10 r14 r17 r19 ] [r06 r11 r15
r18 r20 r21]
Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to right. If you do not use either
CMATRIX or CRATIO, CMATRIX defaults to a matrix with thirty-six zero entries; i.e. r1
through r21, each default to zero.
12. The I and J markers will be automatically created at the location specified by the ‘location’
parameter on the I_PART_NAME and J_PART_NAME respectively. By default, you supply
Cartesian (x, y, z) coordinates. You may use the 'defaults units coordinate_system_type ='
command to change this convention. For example, selecting 'cylindrical' means you will
subsequently be supplying r, theta, and z coordinates. Adams/View applies your location
coordinates in the coordinate system you identify with the RELATIVE_TO parameter. The
default for the RELATIVE_TO parameter is the default coordinate system. (See the
RELATIVE_TO parameter for this command).
force being created. These markers are created automatically.
z axes. By default, you supply Euler (body313, or body-fixed z, x, z) angles. You may change this
coordinate system.
the same way as the vector from the first location to the second. Note that this does not completely
dictate the orientation of the coordinate system. Adams/View will position the coordinate system
with an arbitrary rotation about the axis. If you must completely control the coordinate system
orientation, use ORIENTATION or IN_PLANE_ORIENTATION. By default, you direct the z-
axis of the coordinate system. You may change this convention with the 'DEFAULTS
ORIENT_AXIS_AND_PLANE AXIS_AND_PLANE_SETTING=' command. For example,
selecting either X_AXIS_XY_PLANE or X_AXIS_XZ_PLANE means you will subsequently be
directing the x-axis. The plane-convention setting does not affect this parameter. Adams/View
applies your location coordinates in the coordinate system you identify with the RELATIVE_TO
parameter. The default for the RELATIVE_TO parameter is the default coordinate system.
force 53
15. You may enter either two or three locations for the in_plane_orientation parameter. If you enter
you specify three locations, the axis will be parallel to, and pointing the same way as the vector
locations. By default, you direct the z-axis of the coordinate system and locate the ZX plane. You
will subsequently be directing the x-axis and locating the XY plane. Adams/View applies your
Cautions:
1. The centroidal axis must be orthogonal to the cross section specified by the area_of_cross_section
parameter.
force create element_like bushing

Allows you to create a bushing object.
Description:

bushing_name String Specifies the name of the new bushing. You may use this
name later to refer to this bushing. Adams/View will not
allow you to have two bushings with the same name, so
Adams data file.
modified.
damping Real number Specifies three viscous damping coefficients for the
greater than or bushing force.
equal to 0
stiffness Real number Specifies three stiffness coefficients for the bushing
greater than 0 force.
force_preload Real number Specifies a vector of three constant terms for the bushing
force.
tdamping Real number Specifies three viscous damping coefficients for the
greater than or bushing torque.
equal to 0
shear_modulus Real number Specifies the shear modulus of elasticity for the beam
length Real number Specifies the undeformed length of the beam along the x-
greater than 0 axis of the J marker.
location Specifies the locations to be used to define the position of
a force during its creation.
Orientation Specifies the orientation of the J marker for the force
Along_axis_orientation Specifies the orientation of a coordinate system (e.g.
marker or part) by directing one of the axes. Adams/View
will assign an arbitrary rotation about the axis.
in_plane_orientation Specifies the orientation of a coordinate system (e.g.
force 55

relative_to Specifies the coordinate system that location coordinates
and orientation angles correspond to.
i_marker_name Specifies a marker on the first of two parts connected by
this force element. Adams/View connects this element to
(Required) one part at the I marker and to the other at the J marker.
j_marker_name Specifies a marker on the second of two parts connected
by this force element. Adams/View connects this element
to one part at the I marker and to the other at the J marker.
1. Bushing is a massless force with linear stiffness and damping properties. It applies a force and a
torque to two parts. You specify a marker on each part for force or torque application. Each force
consists of three components in the coordinate system of the J marker, one in the x-axis direction,
one in the y-axis direction, and one in the z-axis direction. Likewise each torque consists of three
components in the coordinate system of the J marker, one about the x-axis, one about the y-axis,
and one about the z-axis. The magnitude of the force is linearly dependent upon the relative
displacement and the relative velocity of the two markers. The magnitude of the torque is
dependent upon the relative angle of rotation and the relative rotational velocity of the parts
containing the specified markers.
2. A bushing has the same constitutive relation forms as a field. The primary difference between the
two forces is that certain coefficients (Kij and Cij, where i is not equal to j) are zero for the
bushing. You define only the diagonal coefficients (Kii and Cii) when you write the bushing. The
following constitutive equations define how Adams uses the data you input for a bushing to apply
a force and a torque to the I marker depending on the displacement and velocity of the I marker
relative to the J marker. Adams applies a force of equal magnitude and opposite direction to the J
marker.
[Fx] [K11 0 0 0 0 0 ] [x]
[Fy] [0 K22 0 0 0 0 ] [y]
[Fz] = - [0 0 K33 0 0 0 ] [z]
[Tx] [0 0 0 K44 0 0 ] [a]
[Ty] [0 0 0 0 K55 0 ] [b]
[Tz] [0 0 0 0 0 K66] [c]
[C11 0 0 0 0 0 ] [Vx] [F1]
[0 C22 0 0 0 0 ] [Vy] [F2]
- [0 0 C33 0 0 0 ] [Vz] + [F3]
[0 0 0 C44 0 0 ] [Wx] [T1]
[0 0 0 0 C55 0 ] [Wy] [T2]
[0 0 0 0 0 C66] [Wz] [T3]
3. Fx, Fy, and Fz are the measure numbers of the translational force components parallel to the axes
of the Cartesian coordinate system of the J marker. The terms x, y, and z are the translational
displacements of the I marker with respect to the J marker measured in the Cartesian coordinate
system of the J marker. The terms Vx, Vy, and Vz are the time derivatives of x, y, and z,
respectively. The terms F1, F1, and F3 represent the measure numbers of any constant force
components parallel to the axes of the Cartesian coordinate system of the J marker. Tx, Ty, and
Tz are the rotational force components parallel to the axes of the Cartesian coordinate system of
the J marker. The terms a, b, and c are the rotational displacements of the I marker about the x-
axis, the y-axis, and the zaxis, respectively, of the J marker. The terms Wx, Wy, and Wz are the
time derivatives of a, b, and c, respectively, in the J marker reference frame. The terms T1, T2,
and T3 are the measure numbers of any constant torque components acting parallel to the axes of
the Cartesian coordinate system of the J marker.
4. For the rotational constitutive equations (K1, K2, and K3) to be accurate, at least two of the
rotations (a, b, c) must be small. Therefore, the bushing force calculations may not be accurate
unless two of the three values remain small (i.e. smaller than 10 degrees). It does not matter which
rotation is largest.
the zero with a unique, internally generated identifier. Adams/View will permanently store this
force 57
8. The three damping coefficients multiply the translational velocity components of the I marker
along the x-axis, the y-axis, and the z-axis of the J marker. The force due to damping is zero when
there is no relative translational velocity between the two markers. DAMPING must be in units
of force per unit of displacement per unit of time.
9. The three stiffness coefficients multiply the three translational displacement components of the
origin of the I marker along the x-axis, the y-axis, and the z-axis of the J marker. STIFFNESS
must be in units of force per unit of displacement.
10. The force pre-load terms are the constant force components along the x-axis, the y-axis, and the
z-axis of the J marker.
11. The three tdamping coefficients multiply the rotational velocity components of the body in which
the I marker is fixed about the x-axis, the y-axis, and the z-axis of the J marker. The torque due to
damping is zero when there is no relative rotational velocity between the two markers.
12. The I and J markers defined by the location parameter will be automatically created at this
location on the I_PART_NAME and J_PART_NAME respectively. By default, you supply
Cartesian (x, y, z) coordinates. You may use the 'defaults units coordinate_system_type ='
command to change this convention. For example, selecting 'cylindrical' means you will
subsequently be supplying r, theta, and z coordinates. Adams/View applies your location
coordinates in the coordinate system you identify with the RELATIVE_TO parameter. The
default for the RELATIVE_TO parameter is the default coordinate system. (See the
RELATIVE_TO parameter for this command).
force being created. These markers are created automatically.
z axes. By default, you supply Euler (body313, or body-fixed z, x, z) angles. You may change this
coordinate system.
14. For the ‘along_axis_parameter’, you may enter either one or two locations to direct the axis. If
you enter one location, the axis will point toward the location. If you specify two locations, the
axis will be parallel to, and pointing the same way as the vector from the first location to the
Adams/View will position the coordinate system with an arbitrary rotation about the axis. If you

15. You may enter either two or three locations for the ‘referencein_plane_orientation’ parameter. If
you enter two locations, the axis will point toward the first location and the plane will fall on the
second. If you specify three locations, the axis will be parallel to, and pointing the same way as,
the vector from the first location to the second and the plane will be parallel to the plane defined
by the three locations. By default, you direct the Z axis of the coordinate system and locate the
ZX plane. You may use the 'DEFAULTS ORIENT_AXIS_AND_PLANE
AXIS_AND_PLANE_SETTING=' command to change this convention. For example, selecting
X_AXIS_XY_PLANE means you will subsequently be directing the X axis and locating the XY
plane. Adams/View applies your location coordinates in the coordinate system you identify with
the RELATIVE_TO parameter. The default for the RELATIVE_TO parameter is the default
coordinate system.
16. If this parameter is not specified, the default coordinate system is used. The default coordinate
system is initially your model, i.e. the global coordinate system. You may change the default
force 59
force create element_like friction

Format:

Friction_name= new friction name
Adams_id = geom._id
Comments = string
Joint_name = existing joint
Yoke = i_yoke/j_yoke
Mu_static = real
Mu_dynamic = real
Reaction_arm = real
Friction_arm = real
Initial_overlap = real
Pin_radius = real
Ball_radius = real
max_stiction_deformation= real
friction_force_preload= real
max_friction_force= real
max_friction_torque= real
overlap_delta = INCREASE/ DECREASE/ CONSTANT
effect = ALL/ STICTION/ SLIDING
smooth = real
torsional_moment = on/off
bending_moment = on/off
preload= on/off
reaction_force = on/off
Description:

friction_name A new friction
Adams_id Adams_id Specifies an integer used to identify this element in
modified.
joint_name Existing joint name Specifies the translational, revolute, or cylindrical
yoke I_yoke/J_yoke
mu_static Real Specifies a real number greater than zero
mu_dynamic Real Specifies a real number greater than zero
reaction_arm Real Specifies a real number greater than zero
friction_arm Real Specifies a real number greater than zero
initial_overlap Real
pin_radius Real Specifies a real number greater than zero
ball_radius Real Specifies a real number greater than zero
stiction_transition_v Real Specifies a real number greater than zero
elocity
max_stiction_deform Real Specifies a real number greater than zero
ation
friction_force_preloa Real Specifies a real number greater than or equal to zero
d
friction_torque_prelo Real Specifies a real number greater than or equal to zero
ad
max_friction_force Real Specifies a real number greater than zero
max_friction_torque Real Specifies a real number greater than zero
overlap_delta INCREASE, Can take the values INCREASE, DECREASE,
DECREASE, CONSTANT
CONSTANT
effect ALL, STICTION, Specifies the friction effect required
SLIDING
Smooth Real
force 61

torsional_moment On/Off
bending_moment On/Off
preload On/Off
reaction_force On/Off
yourself.
JOI followed by the Adams data set joint ID number. For example, the name of Adams
JOINT/101 is JOI101. If you created the joint during preprocessing, you will have given it a name
at that time.
If a joint is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify a joint under a model, for instance, you may need to enter the
associated with it.

force 63
force create element_like rotational_spring_damper

Allows you to create a rotational spring damper object.
The spring damper force applies a rotational or a translational spring damper between two markers. For
a rotational spring damper, the z-axis of the I marker and the z-axis of the J marker must be parallel and
must point in the same direction. Because the spring- damper force is always an action-reaction force,
the direction of the translational force is the line of sight between the I and the J markers. Thus, if the
force is positive, the markers experience a repelling force along this line, and if the force is negative, the
markers experience an attracting force. The magnitude of the translational force applied to the parts
containing the two markers is linearly dependent upon the relative displacement and velocity of the two
markers. The following linear constitutive equation describes the force applied at the I marker:
force = -C*db/dt - K*(b-LENGTH) + FORCE
Adams automatically computes the terms db/dt and b. The force value is the force on the I marker from
the J marker; the force on the J marker is equal and opposite. The term b is the distance between the I and
the J markers. Adams assumes that b is always greater than zero. The following linear constitutive
equation describes the torque applied at the I marker:
torque = -CT*da/dt - KT*(a-ANGLE) + TORQUE
Adams automatically computes the terms da/dt and a. The torque is applied to the I marker about the
positive z-axis of the I marker; the torque on the J marker is equal and opposite to the torque on the I
marker. The right-hand rule defines a positive torque. The term a is the angle between the x-axes of the
I and the J markers. Adams takes into account the total number of complete turns.
Considerations:
• If the z-axis of the I marker is not parallel to, and/or not pointed in the same direction as, the z-
axis of the J marker for a rotational spring-damper, the results are unpredictable.
• Since the line-of-sight method determines the direction of a translational spring damper force,
the I and the J markers cannot be coincident.
Format:

spring_damper_name= New spring damper force name
Adams_id= geom._id
comments= string
damping= TORSION_DAMP
stiffness= TORSION_STIFF
preload= torque(real)
displacement_at_preload= angle(integer)
i_part_name= an existing body

j_part_name= an existing body
location= location
relative_to= existing model,part or marker
i_marker_name= an existing marker
j_marker_name= an existing marker
Example:
force create element_like rotational_spring_damper &

spring_damper_name = FORCE_1 &
j_part_name = PART_2
Description:

spring_damper_name String Specifies the name of the new spring damper force. You
may use this name later to refer to this spring damper.
Adams_id Geom_id Specifies an integer used to identify this element in the
Adams data file.
modified.
Damping Real number Specifies the viscous damping coefficient for the spring
damper.
stiffness Real number Specifies the spring stiffness coefficient for the spring
damper.
preload Real Specifies the reference force or torque for the spring.
This is the force the spring exerts when the displacement
between the I and J markers is equal to
DISPLACEMENT_AT_PRELOAD (the reference
length of the spring).
force 65

displacement_at_preload real Specifies the reference length for the spring. If
PRELOAD (the reference force of the spring) is zero,
DISPLACEMENT_AT_PRELOAD equals the free
length.
i_part_name Existing body Specifies the part that is the first of two parts that this
force acts between. Adams/View applies the force on
one part at the I marker and the other at the J marker.
These markers are automatically generated using this
method of force creation.
j_part_name Existing body Specifies the part that is the second of the two parts that
this force acts between. Adams/View applies the force
on one part at the J marker and the other at the I marker.
These markers are automatically generated using this
method of force creation.
location Location Specifies the locations to be used to define the position
of a force during its creation. The I and J markers will be
automatically created at this location on the
orientation orientation Specifies the orientation of the J marker for the force
being created using three rotation angles. The I marker
is oriented based on the J marker orientation and the
requirements of the particular force being created.
These markers are created automatically.
along_axis_orientation location Specifies the orientation of a coordinate system (e.g.
axis.
relative_to An existing Specifies the coordinate system that location coordinates
model, part or and orientation angles correspond to.
marker
i_marker_name An existing Specifies a marker on the first of the two parts connected
marker by this force element. Adams/View connects this element
to one part at the I marker and to the other at the J marker.
j_marker_name An existing Specifies a marker on the second of two parts connected
marker by this force element. Adams/View connects this
element to one part at the I marker and to the other at the
J marker.
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two spring dampers with the same name, so you must
yourself.
force 67
z axes.
coordinate system.
6. You may enter either one or two locations to direct the axis. If you enter one location, the axis
will point toward the location. If you specify two locations, the axis will be parallel to, and
pointing the same way as the vector from the first location to the second.
By default, you direct the z-axis of the coordinate system. You may change this convention with
subsequently be directing the x- axis. The plane convention setting does not affect this parameter.
coordinate system.
7. For the plane orientation, you may enter either two or three locations. If you enter two locations,
the axis will point toward the first location and the plane will fall on the second. If you specify
three locations, the axis will be parallel to, and pointing the same way as the vector from the first
location to the second and the plane will be parallel to the plane defined by the three locations.
By default, you direct the z-axis of the coordinate system and locate the ZX plane. You may use
subsequently be directing the x-axis and locating the XY plane.
coordinate system.
coordinate system is your model, i.e. the global coordinate system. You may change the default
force delete
force delete
Allows you to delete an existing force.
You must enter the name of the force you wish to delete by either picking it from the screen or specifying
the full name.
Format:
force delete
force delete force_name= Existing force
Example:
force delete &

force delete force_name= gravity
Description:

Force_name Existing Force Specifies the force to be deleted
associated with it.
force 69
force delete
Tips:
fixed menu entry, 'UNDO'.
force modify body gravitational

Allows modification of the gravitational body object.
Format:

gravity_field_name = existing_gravity_field_name
new_gravity_field_nam= new_gravity_field_name
comments = comment_string
units_consistency_factor = real_number
x_component_gravity = real_number
y_component_gravity = real_number
z_component_gravity = real_number
Example:
force modify body gravitational &

gravity_field_name = gravity &
new_gravity_field_name = ACCGRAV__1 &
comments = comment_string &
units_consistency_factor = 0.1 &
x_component_gravity = 0.99 &
y_component_gravity = 0.88 &
z_component_gravity = 0.9
Description:

gravity_field_name An Existing Specifies the gravity field to modify. You use this
Gravity Field parameterto identify the existing gravity field to affect
with thiscommand.
new_gravity_field_name A New Gravity Specifies the name of the new gravity field. You may
Field use this name later to refer to this gravity field.
Adams/Viewwill not allow you to have two gravity
fields with the same full name, so you must provide a
unique name.
force 71

modified.
units_consistency_factor Real Specifies a conversion factor to make your force, mass,
length, and time units consistent. If you do not specify
UNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR, or specify it as
zero, Adams/View will calculate it for you when it
writes theAdams data set.
x_component_gravity Acceleration Specifies the x component of gravitational acceleration
with respect to the ground reference frame
y_component_gravity Acceleration Specifies the y component of gravitational acceleration
z_component_gravity Acceleration Specifies the z component of gravitational acceleration
1. In conjunction with the part masses, the gravitational field defines a body force atthe center of
gravity of each part. The force direction is defined by the X_COMPONENT_GRAVITY,
Y_COMPONENT_GRAVITY, and Z_COMPONENT_GRAVITY parameters. The force
magnitude is the part mass multiplied by the magnitude of the gravity vector. Each gravity field
is written as an Adams ACCGRAV statement. Although Adams/View allows you to create more
than one gravity field, you should only use one, since Adams only allows one ACCGRAV
statement.
2. You may also specify UNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR in a gravity field.Adams/View writes
this as the GC parameter in the ACCGRAV statement.
AlthoughUNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR affects the reporting of all forces, not
justgravitational, it is included here because it also appears in the ACCGRAVstatement.
3. You may identify a gravity field by typing its name or by picking it from the screen. If the gravity
field is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it convenient to type
the name even if the gravity field is displayed.
If you created the gravity field by reading an Adams data set file, the gravity field name is 'acc'.
If you created the gravity field during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that time. If a gravity
field is available by default, you may identify it.
by entering its name only. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a gravity field under
a different model, for instance, you may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you
may specify gravity field 'grav' from model 'robot' by entering ".robot.grav". You must separate
multiple gravity-field names by commas.
If the gravity field is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
graphics associated with it. You need not separate multiple gravity-field picks by commas.
5. The number of levels used varies from case to case and the parentage must exist before an entity
7. You may select any force, mass, length, or time units you wish. In order for Adams results to be
meaningful, however, you or Adams/View must compute a factor such that the equationForce =
(Mass / UNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR) * Accelerationis satisfied. For example, if you use
Newtons, kilograms, millimeters, and seconds, UNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR is 1000.
Adams documentation and Data Set Language refer to this factor as GC, on the ACCGRAV card.
The only case in which you should set UNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR yourself is when you
are using a set of units Adams/View does not support. Otherwise, you should probably let
Adams/View compute it for you. If you do use this command to set
UNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR to a non-zero value, Adams/View will write your value to
an Adams data set.Adams/View will not change your value, even if you later change your force,
mass, length, or time units. If you explicitly set UNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR, then later
change your units, remember to updateUNITS_CONSISTENCY_FACTOR.
Tips:
1. If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the gravity fields available by default.
force 73
force modify direct force_vector

Allows you to modify an existing vector force.
Format:

force_vector_name= existing vforce
new_force_vector_name= new vforce
Adams_id = geom._id
comments = string
j_floating_marker_name= existing marker
x_force_function = function
y_force_function = function
z_force_function = function
user_function= real
Description:

force_vector_name An existing vforce Specifies the force_vector to modify.
new_force_vector_name A new vforce Specifies the name of the new force_vector.
Adams_id integer Specifies an integer used to identify this element in
modified.
j_floating_marker_name Existing marker
floating marker.

components make up the force and/or torque being
defined.
x_force_function, Function Specifies the x component of the translational
force for this element. Adams applies this force
parallel to the x axis of the reference marker
specified in the REF_MARKER_NAME
parameter.
y_force_function, Function Specifies the y component of the translational
parallel to the y axis of the reference marker
parameter.
z_force_function Function Specifies the y component of the translational
parallel to the y axis of the reference marker
parameter.
1. The FORCE_VECTOR is a translational vector force that is specified using three orthogonal
components. The resultant vector determines the direction of the force action. This resultant
vector is formed by the three component forces that the user defines along the "reference marker"
axes. The reaction is equal and opposite to the action. The user may define the FORCE_VECTOR
components in Adams/View through user-specified function expressions or by specifying up to
30 user-defined parameters that are passed to a user-written subroutine (a "VFOSUB") linked to
Adams.
The FORCE_VECTOR corresponds to the Adams VFORCE statement.
The FORCE_VECTOR creates an Adams translational vector force element that applies the
forces between two parts of the system. The element applies an action force to the part that
contains the I marker and a corresponding reaction force to the part to which the a "floating" J
marker belongs. This "floating marker" is automatically created by Adams/View and is positioned
to be coincident with the I marker. Subsequently, the FORCE_VECTOR establishes the position
of the "floating" J marker. As the system moves, Adams moves the "floating" J marker on its part
to keep the "floating" J and I markers superimposed. Thus, Adams applies the reaction force to
the "floating" J markers part at the instantaneous position of the I marker.
force 75
The total vector force that Adams supplies is the vector sum of the individual force components
that the user specifies. The magnitude of the total vector force is the square root of the sum of the
components squared. Its value will be the resultant (i.e., the square root of the sum of the squares)
of the three mutually-orthogonal force components.
2. You may identify a force vector by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the force vector is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it
convenient to type the name even if the force vector is displayed.
If you created the force vector by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the force vector name
is the letters VFO followed by the Adams data set force vector ID number. The name of Adams
VFORCE/101 is VFO101, for example. If you created the force vector during preprocessing, you
If a force vector is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not,
you must enter its full name. To identify a force vector under another model, for instance, you
may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify force vector 'spring'
from the model 'suspension' by entering ".suspension.spring". If you type a "?", Adams/View will
list the force vector available by default.
You must separate multiple force vector names by commas.
If the force vector is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
You need not separate multiple force vector picks by commas.
yourself.
verification.
Components Examples
force 77
Components Examples
NUMBERS
OPERATORS
SYSTEM CONSTANTS
BLANKS
restrictions.
You cannot put a blank space in the middle of a number.
Adams does not accept a blank space between a function and its left bracket. (This is true for both,
FORTRAN-77 functions and Adams functions.)
CONTINUATION COMMAS
FUNCTION BUILDER
SYSTEM VARIABLES
frame.
ARITHMETIC IFS
follows.
FUNCTION = 6 * IF(VR(10,31): 0 , 0 , 100)
force 79
Adams FUNCTIONS
be accessed.
Names Purposes
Cautions:
Tips:
1. You use the force vector name parameter to identify the existing force_vector to affect with this
command.
2. You may use the new force vector name later to refer to this force_vector. Adams/View will not
allow you to have two force_vectors with the same full name, so you must provide a unique name.
force modify direct general_force

Allows you to modify an existing general force.
Format:

General_force_name= existing genforce
new_general_force_name= new genforce
Adams_id= geom._id
comments= string
, j_part_name= existing body
x_torque_function= function
y_torque_function= function
z_torque_function= function
user_function= real
x_force_function = function
y_force_function = function
z_force_function = function
Description:

General_force_name Existing genforce Specifies the general force to modify.
new_general_force_name New genforce Specifies the name of the new general_force.
Adams_id integer Specifies an integer used to identify this
i_marker_name Existing marker Specifies the marker at which Adams applies
the forces and/or torques.
j_part_name Existing body Specifies the part on which Adams/View
creates a floating marker.
force 81

components make up the force and/or torque
being defined.
x_torque_function Function Specifies the x component of the rotational
torque for this element.
y_torque_function Function Specifies the y component of the rotational
z_torque_function Function Specifies the y component of the rotational
user_function Real Specifies up to 30 values for Adams to pass to
a user-written subroutine. See the Adams
User's Manual for information on writing user-
written subroutines.
X_force_function Function Specifies the x component of the translational
force for this element. Adams applies this
force parallel to the x axis of the reference
marker specified in the
Y_force_function Function Specifies the y component of the translational
force parallel to the y axis of the reference
z_force_function Function Specifies the z component of the translational
force parallel to the z axis of the reference
vectors formed by the three component forces and the three component torques determines the
components along and about the "reference" marker axes. The reactions are equal and opposite
to the action. The user may define the GENERAL_FORCE in Adams/View through user-
specified function expressions or by specifying up to 30 user-defined parameters that are passed
to a user-written subroutine (a "GFOSUB") the user links with Adams.
The GENERAL_FORCE corresponds to the Adams GFORCE statement.

A GENERAL_FORCE creates a six component force element that applies the forces between two
"floating_marker". As the system moves, Adams moves the "floating_marker" on its part to keep
marker. The magnitude of the force depends on expressions or subroutines that the user supplies.
The value of the force is the resultant (i.e., the square root of the sum of the squares) of (up to)
three mutually orthogonal force components together with the resultant (i.e., the square root of the
sum of the squares) of (up to) three mutually orthogonal torque components.
The resultant vector formed by the three user-defined component forces along the reference
opposite to the action.
The resultant vector formed by the three component torques determines the direction of the
rotational torque action. The user defines these torques about the reference marker axes. The
reaction is equal and opposite to the action.
2. You may identify a general force by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the general force is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it
convenient to type the name even if the general force is displayed.
If you created the general force by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the general force
name is the letters GFO followed by the Adams data set general force ID number. The name of
Adams GFORCE/101 is GFO101, for example. If you created the general force during
If a general force is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not,
you must enter its full name. To identify a general force under another model, for instance, you
may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify general force 'spring'
list the general force available by default.
You must separate multiple general force names by commas.
If the general force is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
You need not separate multiple general force picks by commas.
force 83
yourself.
verification.
Components Examples
NUMBERS
OPERATORS
force 85
From greatest to the least, the operators have the following priorities. ** then * / then + -. In other
When a statement has operators of the same priority, Adams executes them from left to right.
You can use parentheses to alter the precedence of operators. For example, in the equation,
SYSTEM CONSTANTS
BLANKS
restrictions.
CONTINUATION COMMAS
FUNCTION BUILDER
SYSTEM VARIABLES
frame.
ARITHMETIC IFS
follows.
FUNCTION = 6 * IF(VR(10,31): 0 , 0 , 100)
Adams FUNCTIONS
force 87
be accessed.
Names Purposes
Cautions:
Tips:
1. You use the General force name parameter to identify the existing torque _vector to affect with
this command.
2. You may use the new general force name later to refer to this general_force. Adams/View will
not allow you to have two general_forces with the same full name, so you must provide a unique
name.
3. Adams applies x_torque_function parallel to the x axis of the reference marker in the sense of the
right-hand rule, i.e., a positive torque causes a counterclockwise rotation if you are looking along
the axis from positive to negative.
4. Adams applies this y_torque_function parallel to the y axis of the reference marker in the sense
of the right-hand rule, i.e., a positive torque causes a counterclockwise rotation if you are looking
5. Adams applies this z_torque_function parallel to the z axis of the reference marker in the sense of
the right-hand rule, i.e., a positive torque causes a counterclockwise rotation if you are looking
force modify direct single_component_force

Allows modification of the single component force object.
Format:
Force modify direct single_component_force

single_component_force_name= an existing single-component force
new_single_component_force_name= a new single-component force
Adams_id= geom_id
comments= string
type_of_freedom= translational/rotational
action_only= on/off
function= function
user_function= real
routine= string
error= real
Description:

single_component_force_n AN EXISTING Specifies the single_component_force to modify.
ame SINGLE-
COMPONENT
FORCE
new_single_component_for A NEW SINGLE- Specifies the name of the new
ce_name COMPONENT single_component_force.
FORCE
Adams_id Integer Specifies an integer used to identify this element
or modified.
type_of_freedom translational/rotatio Specifies what type of force (rotation or
nal translation) to apply.
action_only On/off Specifies whether the force is action-only or
action-reaction.
force 89
Function Function Specifies the function expression definition that is

used to compute the value of this variable.
subroutines.
I_marker_name Existing marker Specifies a marker on the first of two parts
Error Real
routine String
1. A single-component force applies a force or a torque to two parts. You specify a marker on each
part for force or torque application. You may define the magnitude of the force as a function of
any combination of displacements, velocities, other applied forces, user-defined variables, and
time. The force applied can be action-reaction forces or action-only forces.
For translational action-reaction forces, Adams applies the user-defined force along the line
connecting the I and the J markers. The force exerted on I is directed from J toward I, while the
force exerted on J is directed from I toward J.
For translational action-only forces, Adams applies the force on the I marker only. There is no
reaction on the J marker. The force on the I marker is directed along the z axis of the J marker.
For rotational action-reaction forces, Adams applies the torque on the I marker about the z axes
of the J marker. Furthermore, Adams assumes that the z axes of the I and the J markers are
constrained to always be parallel for this type of single-component force.
For rotational action-only forces, Adams applies the torque on the I marker only. There is no
reaction on the J marker. The torque on the I marker is directed along the z axis of the J marker.
You write a FUNCTION expression or a user-written subroutine (an SFOSUB) to define the
constitutive equation for the force applied at the I marker. Adams evaluates the reaction forces at
the J marker.
2. You may identify a single-component force by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the single-component force is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also
find it convenient to type the name even if the single-component force is displayed.
If you created the single-component force by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the
single-component force name is the letters SFO followed by the Adams data set single-component
force ID number. The name of Adams SFORCE/101 is SFO101, for example. If you created the
single-component force during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that time.
If a single-component force is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only.
If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a single-component force under another
single-component force 'spring' from the model 'suspension' by entering ".suspension.spring". If
you type a "?", Adams/View will list the single-component forces available by default.
You must separate multiple single-component force names by commas.
If the single-component force is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on
any of the graphics associated with it.
You need not separate multiple single-component force picks by commas.
3. Adams/View will not allow you to have two single_component_forces with the same full name,
yourself.
force 91
5. For an action-reaction force, Adams applies a force between the I and J markers. For an action-
only force, Adams applies a force on the I marker directed by the Z axis of the J marker, but does
not apply a reaction force at the J marker.
verification.
Components Examples
System constants FUNCTION = PI + 20
System variables FUNCTION = AX(1040, 2010)
Arithmetic IFs FUNCTION = IF(DX(3, 5): -1, 0, 1)
FORTRAN-77 functions FUNCTION = ABS(NUM) - 6
Continuation commas FUNCTION = 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 , + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1
Adams functions FUNCTION = POLY(0, 0, 6.28)
NUMBERS
OPERATORS
• From greatest to least, the operators have the following priorities. ** then * / then + -. In other
• You can use parentheses to alter the precedence of operators.
For example, in the equation

SYSTEM CONSTANTS
PI Value of pi (to eighteen significant digits)

DTOR Value of pi/180 for converting degrees to radians
RTOD Value of 180/pi for converting radians to degrees
The following example of a FUNCTION with a system constant multiplies the system
constant PI by the displacement of marker 10 with respect to marker 14:
BLANKS
restrictions.
both FORTRAN-77 functions and Adams functions.)
CONTINUATION COMMAS
use both the expression comma and the continuation comma. You may use more than one
FUNCTION BUILDER
The FUNCTIONS button at the right side of the Adams/View text editor provides a means of
SYSTEM VARIABLES
force 93
computations. These values are access through a collection of functions. The accessible system
variables include the following: Time, Mode, Displacements (Translational and Rotational),
Velocities (Translational and Rotational), Accelerations (Translational and Rotational), Forces
(Translational and Rotational), and User-defined variables. Invoke the text edit window and pick
the FUNCTIONS button to ge a list of functions that can be accessed.
frame.
ARITHMETIC IFS
follows.
expression 2; if expression 1 equals zero, the arithmetic IF equals expression 3; and if
expression 1 is greater than zero, the arithmetic IF equals expression 4.
A FUNCTION expression with an arithmetic IF and its four expressions is below.
FUNCTION = 6 * IF(VR(10,31): 0 , 0 , 100)
ge a list of functions that can be accessed.
Adams FUNCTIONS
Invoke the text edit window and pick the FUNCTIONS button to be a list of functions that can be
accessed.
Names Purposes
AKISPL Accesses the data in a SPLINE statement and uses the Akima cubic method to fit a cubic
curve(a spline) to the data.
BISTOP Evaluates a force restricting displacement of a part in two opposite directions.
CUBSPL Accesses the data in a SPLINE statement and uses the traditional cubic method to fit a
cubic curve (a spline) to the data.
HAVSIN Evaluates a haversine function.
POLY Evaluates a polynomial.
SHF Evaluates a simple harmonic function.
STEP Approximates a step function with a cubic polynomial.
Tips:
1. ROTATIONAL designates a rotational force, that is, a torque.
2. TRANSLATIONAL designates a translational force.
3. You use the single component force parameter to identify the existing single_component_force
to affect with this command.
4. You may use the new single component force name later to refer to this single_component_force.
force 95
force modify direct_torque_vector

Allows you to modify an existing vector torque.
Format:

torque_vector_name= existing vtorque
new_torque_vector_name= new vtorque
Adams_id= geom._id
comments= string
j_part_name= existing body
x_torque_function= function
y_torque_function= function
z_torque_function= function
user_function= real
Description:

torque_vector_name Existing vtorque Specifies the torque_vector to modify.
new_torque_vector_name New Vtorque Specifies the name of the new torque_vector.
Adams_id integer Specifies an integer used to identify this element in
modified.
floating marker.

ref_marker_name Existing marker Specifies a marker that acts as a coordinate reference
for the definition of three orthogonal force and/or
torque components. These components make up the
force and/or torque being defined.
x_torque_function Function Specifies the x component of the rotational torque for
this element. Adams applies this torque parallel to
the x axis of the reference marker in the sense of the
right-hand rule, i.e., a positive torque causes a
counterclockwise rotation if you are looking along
y_torque_function Function Specifies the y component of the rotational torque for
the y axis of the reference marker in the sense of the
z_torque_function Function Specifies the y component of the rotational torque for
the y axis of the reference marker in the sense of the
written subroutine. See the Adams User's Manual for
information on writing user-written subroutines.
1. The TORQUE_VECTOR is a rotational force (i.e, a torque) that consists of three orthogonal
components. The direction of the torque action is determined by the resultant vector formed by
the three component torques defined by the user along the "reference marker" axes. The reaction
is equal and opposite to the action. The user may define the TORQUE_VECTOR components in
Adams/View through user-specified function expressions or by specifying up to 30 user-defined
parameters that are passed to a user-written subroutine (a "VTOSUB") the user links with Adams.
The TORQUE_VECTOR corresponds to the Adams VTORQUE statement.
The TORQUE_VECTOR creates an Adams rotational force element (i.e., torque) that applies the
forces between two parts of the system. The element applies an action to the part to which the I
marker belongs and a corresponding reaction to the part to which the "floating" J marker belongs.
This "floating marker" is automatically created by Adams/View and is positioned to be coincident
force 97
with the I marker. Subsequently, the TORQUE_VECTOR establishes the position of the
"floating" J marker. As the system moves, Adams moves the "floating" J marker on its part to
keep the "floating" J and I markers superimposed. Thus, Adams applies the reaction torque to the
"floating" J markers part.
The components of the torque depends on expressions or subroutines that the user supplies. Its
value will be the resultant (i.e., the square root of the sum of the squares) of the three mutually
orthogonal torque components.
2. You may identify a torque vector by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the torque vector is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it
convenient to type the name even if the torque vector is displayed.
If you created the torque vector by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the torque vector
name is the letters VTO followed by the Adams data set torque vector ID number. The name of
Adams VTORQUE/101 is VTO101, for example. If you created the torque vector during
If a torque vector is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not,
you must enter its full name.To identify a torque vector under another model, for instance, you
may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify torque vector 'spring'
list the torque vector available by default.
You must separate multiple torque vector names by commas.
If the torque vector is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
You need not separate multiple torque vector picks by commas.
yourself.
force 99
verification.
Components Examples
NUMBERS
OPERATORS
SYSTEM CONSTANTS
BLANKS
restrictions.
CONTINUATION COMMAS
FUNCTION BUILDER
SYSTEM VARIABLES
frame.
force 101
ARITHMETIC IFS
follows.
FUNCTION = 6 * IF(VR(10,31): 0 , 0 , 100)
Adams FUNCTIONS
be accessed.
Names Purposes
Names Purposes
Cautions:
1. You must ensure that the reference_marker is fixed on a part (i.e. not a "floating" marker). The
reference_marker may be the same as the I marker and may be on any part in the model.
Tips:
1. You use the torque vector name parameter to identify the existing torque _vector to affect with
this command.
2. You may use the new torque vector name later to refer to this torque_vector. Adams/View will
not allow you to have two torque_vectors with the same full name, so you must provide a unique
name.
force 103
force modify element_like beam

Allows modification of the beam object.
Format:

beam_name = beam1
new_beam_name = beam2
Adams_id = integer
ixx= real number
iyy = real number
izz= real number
y_shear_area_ratio= real number
z_shear_area_ratio= real number
youngs_modulus = real number
shear_modulus = real number
length = real number
area_of_cross_section = real number
damping_ratio = real number
matrix_of_damping_terms = a 6x6 matrix
i_marker_name = existing_marker_name
j_marker_name = existing_marker_name
Example:
force modify element_like beam &

beam_name = beam1 &
new_beam_name = beam2 &
Adams_id = 1 &
ixx = 4 &
iyy = 2 &
izz = 3 &
y_shear_area_ratio = 0.9 &
z_shear_area_ratio = 0.8 &
youngs_modulus = 0.4&
force modify element_like beam &

shear_modulus = 0.2 &
length = 2 &
area_of_cross_section = 1.5 &
damping_ratio = 2 &
matrix_of_damping_terms = a 6x6 matrix &
Description:

beam_name An Existing Beam Specifies the name of the new beam. You may use this
name later to refer to this beam.
new_beam_name A New Beam Specifies the name of the new beam. You may use this
name later to refer to this beam. Adams/View will not
allow you to have two beams with the same full name,
Adams_id Integer Specifies an integer used to identify this element in
theAdams data file.
modified.
ixx Area_inertia Specifies the polar area moment of inertia about the X
axis of a cross section perpendicular to the length of the
beam.By definition, the beam lies along the positive X
axis of the J marker. You should compute IXX about
the X axis of the J marker.
Iyy Area_inertia Specifies the principal area moment of inertia about the
Y axis of a cross section perpendicular to the length of
thebeam. By definition, the beam lies along the
positive X axis of the J marker. You should compute
IYY about the Y axisof the J marker.
Izz Area_inertia Specifies the principal area moment of inertia about the
Z axis of a cross section perpendicular to the length of
thebeam. By definition, the beam lies along the
positive X axis of the J marker. You should compute
IZZ about the Z axisof the J marker.
y_shear_area_ratio Real Specifies the shear area ratio in the y direction.
z_shear_area_ratio Real Specifies the shear area ratio in the z direction.
force 105

youngs_modulus Pressure Specifies Young's modulus of elasticity for the beam
material.
shear_modulus Pressure Specifies the shear modulus of elasticity for the beam
material.
length Length Specifies the undeformed length of the beam along the
xaxis of the J marker.
area_of_cross_section Area Specifies the uniform area of the beam cross section.
The centroidal axis must be orthogonal to this cross
section.
damping_ratio Time Specifies a ratio for calculating the structural damping
matrix for the beam. Adams multiplies the stiffness
matrixby the value of DAMPING_RATIO to obtain the
damping matrix.
matrix_of_damping_ter Real Specifies a six-by-six structural damping matrix for the
ms beam.
i_marker_name An Existing Specifies a marker on the first of two parts connected
Marker by this force element. Adams/View connects this
element toone part at the I marker and to the other at the
J marker.
j_marker_name An Existing Specifies a marker on the second of two parts
Marker connected by this force element. Adams/View
connects this element toone part at the I marker and to
1. The beam, which is massless and has a uniform cross section, is modeled as alinear translational
and a linear rotational action-reaction force between twomarkers. The forces the beam produces
are linearly dependent on the relativedisplacements and the relative velocities of the markers at
its endpoints. The xaxisof the J marker defines the centroidal axis of the beam. The y-axis and the
zaxisof the J marker are the principal axes of the cross section. They areperpendicular to the x-
axis and to each other. When the beam is in an undeflectedposition, the I marker has the same
angular orientation as the J marker, and the Imarker lies on the x-axis of the J marker.
The following constitutive equations define how Adams uses the data you input for a beam to
apply a force and a torque to the I marker depending on the displacement and velocity of the I
marker relative to the J marker. Adams appliesa force of equal magnitude and opposite direction
to the J marker.
[Fx] [K11 0 0 0 0 0 ] [x]
[Fy] [0 K22 0 0 0 K26] [y]
[Fz] = - [0 0 K33 0 K35 0 ] [z]
[Tx] [0 0 0 K44 0 0 ] [a]
[Ty] [0 0 K35 0 K55 0 ] [b]
[Tz] [0 K26 0 0 0 K66] [c]

[C11 C21 C31 C41 C51 C61] [Vx]
[C21 C22 C32 C42 C52 C62] [Vy]
- [C31 C32 C33 C43 C53 C63] [Vz]
[C41 C42 C43 C44 C54 C64] [Wx]
[C51 C52 C53 C54 C55 C65] [Wy]
[C61 C62 C63 C64 C65 C66] [Wz]
Note that both matrices, Cij and Kij, are symmetric, that is, Cij=Cji and Kij=Kji. You define the
twenty-one unique damping coefficients when you write the BEAMstatement. Adams defines the
Kij's in the following way:
K11 = E A / L
K22 = 12 E Izz /[L**3 (1+Py)]
K26 = -6 E Izz /[L**2 (1+Py)]
K33 = 12 E Iyy /[L**3 (1+Pz)]
K35 = 6 E Iyy /[L**2 (1+Pz)]
K44 = G Ixx / L
K55 = (4+Pz) E Iyy /[L (1+Pz)]
K66 = (4+Py) E Izz /[L (1+Py)]
where Py = 12 E Izz ASY/(G A L**2) and
Pz = 12 E Iyy ASZ/(G A L**2)
2. The BEAM statement implements a force in the same way the FIELD statementdoes, but the
BEAM statement requires you to input only the values of the beam'sphysical properties, which
Adams uses to calculate the matrix entries. For a forcerequest, the forces returned are the forces
the J marker exerts upon the I marker.
3. The constitutive equations shown above define the forces and moments exerted on the I marker.
These forces and moments are due to relative displacements andvelocities of the I marker with
respect to the J marker. Because of force transfer,the reaction moments at the J marker are usually
not the same as the appliedmoments at the I marker.
name, then you may over ride the default parent. In most cases, when creatingan entity,
force 107
name, then you may over ride the default parent. In most cases, when creatingan entity,
6. Specifies an integer used to identify this element in the Adams data file. When you use the FILE
Adams_DATA_SET WRITE command, Adams/View writes an Adams data file for your model.
Adams requires that each modeling element be identified by a unique integer identifier. If you use
this parameter to specify a non-zero identifier,Adams/View will use it in the corresponding
statement in the Adams data file. You may also enter zero as an identifier, either explicitly or by
default. The next time you write an Adams file, Adams/View will replace the zero with a unique,
internallygenerated identifier. Adams/View will permanently store this identifier with the element
just as if you had entered it yourself. Normally, you would let all identifiers default to zero, and
Adams/View would generate the identifiers for you. You are never required to enter a non-zero
identifier. You only need to specify it if, for some reason, you wish to control the Adams file
output.
8. The y_shear_area_ratio is a correction factor for shear deflection in the y direction for
Timeshenko beams. (Oden, J.T., and E. Ripperger. Mechanics of Elastic Structures, Second
Edition, p. 351. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1981). This ratio is the area of the beam cross section
divided by the area of the beam cross section that resists y-direction shear forces. If you want to
neglect the deflection due toy-direction shear, set the ratio to zero.
9. z_shear_area_ratio is the correction factor for shear deflection in the z direction for Timeshenko
beams. (Oden, J.T., and E. Ripperger. Mechanics of Elastic Structures, Second Edition, p. 351.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 1981). This ratio is the area of the beam cross section divided by the
area of the beam cross section that resists z-direction shear forces. If you want to neglect the
deflection due to directionshear, set the ratio to zero.
10. Specifies Young's modulus of elasticity for the beam material.
11. Because the matrix_of_damping_terms matrix is symmetric, you need to specify only one-half
of it. The following matrix shows the values to input:
[r01 ]
[r02 r07 ]
[r03 r08 r12 ]
[r04 r09 r13 r16 ]
[r05 r10 r14 r17 r19 ]
[r06 r11 r15 r18 r20 r21]
CMATRIX or CRATIO, CMATRIX defaults to a matrix with thirty-six zeroentries; that is, r1
through r21 each default to zero.
Cautions:
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two beams with the same full name, so you must provide
a unique name.
Tips:
force 109
force modify element_like bushing

Allows you to modify of the bushing object.
Format:

bushing_name= existing bushing name
new_bushing_name = new bushing name
Adams_id = integer
comments = string
damping= damping coeff matrix
stiffness = stiffness coeff matrix
tdamping = tdamping coeff matrix
tstiffness = tstiffness coeff matrix
force_preload = force preload coeff matrix
torque_preload = toruqe preload coeff matrix
Example:
force modify element_like bushing &

bushing_name = BUSHING__1 &
new_bushing_name = BUSHING__2 &
Adams_id = 1 &
comments = comment &
damping = 0.1 , 0.2, 0.1 &
stiffness = 0.1, 0.2, 0.1 &
tdamping = 0.1 , 0.2 , 0.1 &
tstiffness = 0.1 , 0.2 , 0.1 &
force_preload = 0.1 , 0.2 , 0.1 &
torque_preload = 0.1 , 0.2 , 0.2 &
Description:

bushing_name An Existing Bushing Specifies the name of the existing bushing.
new_bushing_name A New Bushing Specifies the name of the new bushing.
Adams data file.
modified.
damping Damping Specifies three viscous damping coefficients for the
bushing force. The three coefficients multiply the
translational velocity components of the I marker along
the x-axis, the y-axis, and the z-axis of the J marker. The
force due to damping is zero when there is no relative
translational velocity between the two markers.
DAMPING must be inunits of force per unit of
displacement per unit of time.
stiffness Stiffness Specifies three stiffness coefficients for the bushing
force.
force_preload Force Specifies a vector of three constant terms for the
bushing force. These terms are the constant force
components along the x-axis, the y-axis, and the z-axis
of the J marker.
tdamping Torsion_damp Specifies three viscous damping coefficients for the
bushing torque.
tstiffness Torsion_stiff Specifies three stiffness coefficients for the bushing
torque. The three coefficients multiply the three
rotationaldisplacement components of the body in
which the I marker is fixed about the x-axis, the y-axis,
and the z-axis of the Jmarker.
torque_preload Torque Specifies a vector of three constant terms for the
bushing torque. These terms are the constant torque
components about the x-axis, the y-axis, and the z-axis
of the J marker.
force 111

this force element. Adams/View connects this element
toone part at the I marker and to the other at the J
marker.
j_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies a marker on the second of two parts connected
by this force element. Adams/View connects this
J marker.
1. The bushing is a massless force with linear stiffness and damping properties. Abushing applies a
force and a torque to two parts. You specify a marker on eachpart for force or torque application.
Each force consists of three components in the coordinate system of the J marker, one in the x-
axis direction, one in the y-axis direction, and one in the z-axis direction. Likewise each torque
consists of threecomponents in the coordinate system of the J marker, one about the x-axis,
oneabout the y-axis, and one about the z-axis. The magnitude of the force is linearlydependent
upon the relative displacement and the relative velocity of the twomarkers. The magnitude of the
torque is dependent upon the relative angle ofrotation and the relative rotational velocity of the
parts containing the specifiedmarkers.
2. A bushing has the same constitutive relation forms as a field. The primarydifference between the
two forces is that certain coefficients (Kij and Cij, where i isnot equal to j) are zero for the bushing.
You define only the diagonal coefficients(Kii and Cii) when you write the bushing. The following
constitutive equations define how Adams uses the data you input for a bushing to apply a force
and a torque to the I marker depending on the displacement and velocity of the I marker relative
to the J marker. Adams appliesa force of equal magnitude and opposite direction to the J marker.
[Fx] [K11 0 0 0 0 0 ] [x]
[Fy] [0 K22 0 0 0 0 ] [y]
[Fz] = - [0 0 K33 0 0 0 ] [z]
[Tx] [0 0 0 K44 0 0 ] [a]
[Ty] [0 0 0 0 K55 0 ] [b]
[Tz] [0 0 0 0 0 K66] [c]
[C11 0 0 0 0 0 ] [Vx] [F1]
[0 C22 0 0 0 0 ] [Vy] [F2]
- [0 0 C33 0 0 0 ] [Vz] + [F3]
[0 0 0 C44 0 0 ] [Wx] [T1]
[0 0 0 0 C55 0 ] [Wy] [T2]
[0 0 0 0 0 C66] [Wz] [T3]
Fx, Fy, and Fz are the measure numbers of the translational forcecomponents parallel to the axes
of the Cartesian coordinate system of the J marker.
The terms x, y, and z are the translational displacements of the I marker withrespect to the J
marker measured in the Cartesian coordinate system of the Jmarker. The terms Vx, Vy, and Vz
are the time derivatives of x, y, and z,respectively. The terms F1, F1, and F3 represent the measure
numbers of anyconstant force components parallel to the axes of the Cartesian coordinate
systemof the J marker.
3. . Tx, Ty, and Tz are the rotational force components parallel to the axes of theCartesian coordinate
system of the J marker. The terms a, b, and c are therotational displacements of the I marker about
the x-axis, the y-axis, and the zaxis,respectively, of the J marker. The terms Wx, Wy, and Wz are
the time derivatives of a, b, and c, respectively, in the J marker reference frame. The termsT1, T2,
and T3 are the measure numbers of any constant torque components actingparallel to the axes of
the Cartesian coordinate system of the J marker.
For the rotational constitutive equations (K1, K2, and K3), to be accurate, at leasttwo of the
rotations (a, b, c) must be small. Therefore, the bushing forcecalculations may not be accurate
unless two of the three values remain small (thatis, smaller than 10 degrees). It does not matter
which rotation is largest.
4. You may use this name later to refer to this bushing. Adams/View will notallow you to have two
bushings with the same full name, so you must provide a unique name. Normally, entity names
are composed of alphabetic, numeric, or '_' (underscore) characters, and start with an alphabetic
or '_' character. They may be any length. By enclosing the name in double quotes, you may use
other printable characters, or start the name with a numeral. If a name contains characters, or starts
with a numeral, you must always quote the name when entering it. Note that you can specify the
it by changing the name. If you enter just theentity name, then the default parent will be assigned
by Adams/View. If you type in the full name, then you may over ride the default parent. In most
Adams/View provides will specify the parentage that it has assumed. You may, or course, delete
integer identifier. If you use this parameter to specify a non-zero identifier,Adams/View will use
the zero with a unique, internallygenerated identifier. Adams/View will permanently store this
force 113
7. The three stiffness coefficients multiply the three translational displacement components of the
origin of the I marker along the x-axis, the y-axis, and the z-axis of the J marker. STIFFNESS
must be in units of force per unit of displacement.
8. The three stiffness coefficients multiply the rotational velocity components of the body in which
the I marker is fixed about the x-axis, the y-axis, and the z-axis of the J marker. The torque due to
damping is zero when there is no relative rotational velocity between the two markers.
Cautions:
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two bushings with the same full name, so you must
force modify element_like field

Allows you to modify of the field object.
Format:

field_name= model_1.field1
new_field_name = FIELD__1
Adams_id = 1
comments = comment1
i_marker_name = marker_1
translation_at_preload = matrix of 3 values
rotation_at_preload = matrix of 3 values
force_preload = matrix of 3 values
torque_preload = matrix of 3 values
stiffness_matrix = matrix of 6x6 values
damping_ratio = real_number
matrix_of_damping_terms = 6x6 matrix of real values
user_function = real number
Example:
force modify element_like field &

field_name = model_1.field1 &
new_field_name = FIELD__1 &
Adams_id = 1 &
comments = comment1 &
translation_at_preload = 0.5, 0.2, 0.5 &
rotation_at_preload = 0.5, 0.2, 0.4 &
force_preload = 0.2, 0.1, 0.5 &
torque_preload = 0.4, 0.1, 0.8
force 115
Description:

field_name An Existing Field Specifies the field to modify. You use this parameter to
identify the existing field to affect with this command.
new_field_name A New Field Specifies the name of the new field. You may use this
name later to refer to this field.
Adams_id Integer Specifies an integer used to identify this element in
theAdams data file.
modified.
J marker.
Marker connected by this force element. Adams/View connects
this element toone part at the I marker and to the other
at the J marker.
translation_at_preload Length Defines a vector of reference translations.
rotation_at_preload Angle Defines a vector of reference rotations.
force_preload Force Specifies a vector of three constant terms for the
bushing force. These terms are the constant force
components along the x-axis, the y-axis, and the z-axis
of the J marker.
torque_preload Torque Defines a vector of reference torques at the angular
displacement specified in the parameter
ROTATION_AT_PRELOAD. The values r1, r2, r3 are
the torque components about the x-axis, the y-axis, and
the zaxis of the J marker.
stiffness_matrix Real Specifies a six-by-six matrix of stiffness coefficients.
damping_ratio Real Specifies the ratio of MATRIX_OF_DAMPING to
STIFFNESS_MATRIX. If you input
DAMPING_RATIO, Adams multiplies
STIFFNESS_MATRIX by this parameter to obtain
MATRIX_OF_DAMPING_TERMS.

matrix_of_damping_ter Real Specifies a six-by-six matrix of viscous damping
ms coefficients.
userwritten subroutine. See the Adams User's Manual
for information on writing user-written subroutines.
1. A field is a translational and a rotational action-reaction force applied between twomarkers. If you
want to specify a linear field, use the arguments in the commandto specify constants for the six-
by-six stiffness matrix, a six-element referencelengthvector, and a six-by-six damping matrix.
The stiffness and dampingmatrices must be positive semidefinite, but need not be symmetric. If
you want tospecify a nonlinear field, use the Adams user-written subroutine FIESUB to definethe
three force components and the three torque components and use theAdams/View parameter
USER_FUNCTION=r1[,...,r30] to pass constants toFIESUB. The following constitutive
equations define how Adams uses the data you input for a linear field to apply a force and a torque
to the I marker depending on thedisplacement and velocity of the I marker relative to the J marker.
Adams appliesa force of equal magnitude and opposite direction to the J marker. The torque onthe
J marker has two components. The first component is equal and opposite to thetorque on the I
marker. The second component is due to the couple generated by the equal and opposite forces
acting at the I and J markers.
[Fx] [K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16] [x-xo]
[Fy] [K21 K22 K23 K24 K25 K26] [y-yo]
[Fz] = - [K31 K32 K33 K34 K35 K36] [z-zo]
[Tx] [K41 K42 K43 K44 K45 K46] [a-ao]
[Ty] [K51 K52 K53 K54 K55 K56] [b-bo]
[Tz] [K61 K62 K63 K64 K65 K66] [c-co]
[C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16] [Vx] [F1]
[C21 C22 C23 C24 C25 C26] [Vy] [F2]
- [C31 C32 C33 C34 C35 C36] [Vz] + [F3]
[C41 C42 C43 C44 C45 C46] [Wx] [T1]
[C51 C52 C53 C54 C55 C56] [Wy] [T2]
[C61 C62 C63 C64 C65 C66] [Wz] [T3]
For a nonlinear field, you define the following constitutive equations in the FIESUB
subroutine:
Fx = f (x,y,z,a,b,c,Vx,Vy,Vz,Wx,Wy,Wz)
1
Fy = f (x,y,z,a,b,c,Vx,Vy,Vz,Wx,Wy,Wz)
2
Fz = f (x,y,z,a,b,c,Vx,Vy,Vz,Wx,Wy,Wz)
3
Tx = f (x,y,z,a,b,c,Vx,Vy,Vz,Wx,Wy,Wz)
4
Ty = f (x,y,z,a,b,c,Vx,Vy,Vz,Wx,Wy,Wz)
5
Tz = f (x,y,z,a,b,c,Vx,Vy,Vz,Wx,Wy,Wz)
force 117
6
Adams applies the defined forces and torques at the I marker. In the linear and thenonlinear
equations, Fx, Fy, and Fz are the three translational force measure numbers, and Tx, Ty, and Tz
are the three rotational force measure numbers associated with unit vectors directed along the x-
axis, the y-axis, and the z-axis ofthe coordinte system fixed in the J marker reference frame; K is
the stiffness matrix; xo,yo, zo, ao, bo, and co are the free lengths; x, y, z, a, b, and c are the
translational and the rotational displacements of the I marker with respect to the Jmarker
expressed in the reference frame of the J marker; Vx, Vy, Vz, Wx, Wy, and Wz are the scalar time
derivatives of x, y, z, a, b, and c, respectively; C is the damping matrix; and F1, F2, F3, T1, T2,
and T3 are the translational and the rotational pre-tensions. All variables and time derivatives are
computed in the Jmarker coordinate system.
2. You may identify a field by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the field is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it convenient
to type the name even if the field is displayed. If you created the field by reading an Adams data
set file, the field name is 'FIE'. If you created the field duringpreprocessing, you gave it a name at
that time. If a field is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is
not, you must enter its fullname. To identify a field under a different model, for instance, you may
need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify field 'fld1' from model 'robot'
by entering ".robot.fld1". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the fields available by default.
You must separate multiple field names by commas. If the field is visible in one of your views,
multiple field picks by commas..
a marker or a geometry element) when you CREATE it by changing the name. If you enter just the
of a full name is:
6. The ‘translation_at-preload’ parameter defines a vector of reference translations. This is
thenominal position of the I marker with respect to the J marker, resolved in the J marker
coordinate system. The values r1, r2, r3 are the x, y, and z translationalcomponents of the
translation. Adams uses the translational distance specified in TRANSLATION_AT_PRELOAD
to calculate the resultant torque on the J marker. If the reference force is zero,
TRANSLATION_AT_PRELOAD is the same as the freetranslation.
7. The rotation_at_preload parameter defines a vector of reference rotations. This defines the
nominal orientation of the I marker with respect to the J marker, resolved in the J marker
coordinate system. The terms r1, r2, r3 the x, y, and z rotational components. Adams uses the
angular displacements specified inROTATION_AT_PRELOAD to calculate the resultant torque
on the J marker. If the reference force is zero, ROTATION_AT_PRELOAD is the same as the
free rotation.entries.
8. The stiffness_matrix parameter specifies a six-by-six matrix of stiffness coefficients. The
following matrix shows the values to input:
[r01 r07 r13 r19 r25 r31]
[r02 r08 r14 r20 r26 r32]
[r03 r09 r15 r21 r27 r33]
[r04 r10 r16 r22 r28 r34]
[r05 r11 r17 r23 r29 r35]
[r06 r12 r18 r24 r30 r36]
Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to right. If you do not use both
CRATIO and KMATRIX, Adams cannot calculate the damping coefficients; in that case, you
must define CMATRIX if you want to include damping coefficients in the calculation of the field
forces. KMATRIX defaults to a matrix with thirtysix zero entries.
9. The matrix_of_damping_terms parameter specifies a six-by-six matrix of viscous damping
coefficients. The following matrix shows the values to input:
[r01 r07 r13 r19 r25 r31]
[r02 r08 r14 r20 r26 r32]
[r03 r09 r15 r21r27 r33]
[r04 r10 r16 r22 r28 r34]
[r05 r11 r17 r23 r29 r35]
[r06 r12 r18 r24 r30 r36]
force 119
CMATRIX or both CRATIO and KMATRIX, CMATRIX defaults to a matrix with thirty-six zero
entries.
Cautions:
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two fields with the same full name, so you must provide
a unique name.
2. Do not use the ‘damping_ratio’ parameter without also using STIFFNESS_MATRIX.
Tips:
force modify element_like friction

Format:

Friction_name= existing friction name
New_friction_name = new friction name
Adams_id = geom._id
Comments = string
Joint_name = existing joint
Yoke = i_yoke/j_yoke
Mu_static = real
Mu_dynamic = real
Reaction_arm = real
Friction_arm = real
Initial_overlap = real
Pin_radius = real
Ball_radius = real
max_stiction_deformation= real
friction_force_preload= real
max_friction_force = real
max_friction_torque = real
overlap_delta = INCREASE/ DECREASE/ CONSTANT
effect = ALL/ STICTION/ SLIDING
smooth = real
torsional_moment = on/off
bending_moment = on/off
preload= on/off
reaction_force = on/off
force 121
Description:

friction_name An existing friction name
New_friction_name New friction name
Adams_id Adams_id Specifies an integer used to identify this
joint_name Existing joint name Specifies the translational, revolute, or
Some entities constrain motion at, or are
otherwise associated with, specific joints.
You use this parameter to identify that
joint.
yoke I_yoke/J_yoke
mu_static Real Specify a real number greater than zero.
mu_dynamic Real Specify a real number greater than zero.
reaction_arm Real Specify a real number greater than zero.
friction_arm Real Specify a real number greater than zero.
initial_overlap Real
pin_radius Real Specify a real number greater than zero.
ball_radius Real Specify a real number greater than zero.
stiction_transition_veloc Real Specify a real number greater than zero.
ity
max_stiction_deformati Real Specify a real number greater than zero.
on
friction_force_preload Real Specify a real number greater than or equal
to zero.
friction_torque_preload Real Specify a real number greater than or equal
to zero.
max_friction_force Real Specify a real number greater than zero.
max_friction_torque Real Specify a real number greater than zero.
overlap_delta INCREASE, DECREASE, Can take the values INCREASE,
CONSTANT DECREASE, CONSTANT
effect ALL, STICTION, SLIDING Specify the friction effect required.
Smooth Real

torsional_moment On/off
bending_moment On/off
preload On/off
reaction_force On/off
yourself.
If a joint is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you
associated with it.
force 123
force modify element_like rotational_spring_damper

Allows modification of the rotational spring damper object.
Format:

spring_damper_name= existing spring damper force
new_spring_damper_name= new spring damper force
Adams_id= integer
comments = string
damping = real number
stiffness = real number
preload = real number
displacement_at_preload = real number
Example:
force modify element_like rotational_spring_damper &

spring_damper_name = SPRING_1 &
new_spring_damper_name = SPRING_2 &
Adams_id = 2 &
damping = 0.5 &
stiffness = 0.2 &
preload = 1.2 &
displacement_at_preload = 0.02 &
Description:

spring_damper_name An Existing Spring- Specifies the spring-damper force to
damper Force modify. You use this parameter to identify
the existing spring-damper to affect with
this command. You may identify a spring-
damper force by typing its name or by
picking it from the screen.
new_spring_damper_name A New Spring-damper Specifies the name of the new spring-
Force damper force. You may use this name
later to refer to this spring-
damper.Adams/View will not allow you
to have two spring-dampers with the same
full name, so you must provide a unique
name.
Adams_id Integer Specifies an integer used to identify this
damping Damping Specifies the viscous damping coefficient
for the springdamper.
stiffness Stiffness Specifies the spring stiffness coefficient
for the springdamper.
preload Force Specifies the reference force or torque for
the spring. This is the force the spring
exerts when the displacementbetween the
I and J markers is equal to
DISPLACEMENT_AT_PRELOAD (the
reference length of the spring).
displacement_at_preload Length Specifies the reference length for the
spring. If PRELOAD (the reference force
of the spring) is zero,
DISPLACEMENT_AT_PRELOAD
equals the free length
force 125

connected by this force element.
Adams/View connects this element toone
part at the I marker and to the other at the
J marker.
j_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies a marker on the second of two
parts connected by this force element.
Adams/View connects this element toone
part at the I marker and to the other at the
J marker.
1. The springdamper force applies a rotational or a translational spring-damperbetween two
markers. For a rotational spring-damper, the z-axis of the I markerand the z-axis of the J marker
must be parallel and must point in the samedirection. Because the spring- damper force is always
an action-reaction force, thedirection of the translational force is the line of sight between the I
and the Jmarkers. Thus, if the force is positive, the markers experience a repelling forcealong this
line, and if the force is negative, the markers experience an attractingforce. The magnitude of the
translational force applied to the parts containing thetwo markers is linearly dependent upon the
relative displacement and velocity ofthe two markers. The following linear constitutive equation
describes the forceapplied at the I marker:
2. Adams automatically computes the terms db/dt and b. The force value is the force on the I marker
from the J marker; the force on the J marker is equal and opposite. The term b is the distance
between the I and the J markers. Adams assumes that b is always greater than zero. The following
linear constitutive equation describes the torque applied at the I marker:
3. Adams automatically computes the terms da/dt and a. The torque is applied to the I marker about
the positive z-axis of the I marker; the torque on the J marker isequal and opposite to the torque
on the I marker. The right-hand rule defines apositive torque. The term a is the angle between the
x-axes of the I and the Jmarkers. Adams takes into account the total number of complete turns.
Considerations:
If the z-axis of the I marker is not parallel to, and/or not pointed in the samedirection as, the z-axis
of the J marker for a rotational spring-damper, theresults are unpredictable.
Since the line-of-sight method determines the direction of a translationalspring-damper force, the
I and the J markers cannot be coincident.
4. You may identify a spring-damper force by typing its name or by picking it from the screen. If the
spring-damper force is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it
convenient to type the name even if the spring-damper is displayed. If you created the spring-
damper force by reading an Adams data set, the spring-damper name is the letters SPR followed
by the Adams data set spring-damper ID number. The name of Adams SPRINGDAMPER/101 is
SPR101, forexample. If you created the spring-damper during preprocessing, you gave it a name
at that time. If a spring-damper is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name
only. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a spring-damper under a different model,
for instance, you may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify spring-
damper 'left' from model 'sla' by entering ".sla.left". You must separate multiple spring-damper
names by commas. If the spring-damper is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by
picking on any of the graphics associated with it. You need not separate multiple spring-damper
picks by commas.
Tips:
1. If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the spring-dampers available by default.
force 127
force modify element_like translational_spring_damper
force modify element_like

translational_spring_damper
Allows modification of the translational spring damper object.
Format:

spring_damper_name = existing spring damper force
new_spring_damper_name= new spring damper force
Adams_id == integer
comments string
damping = real number
stiffness = real number
preload = real number
displacement_at_preload = real number
Example:
Force modify element_like translational_spring_damper &

spring_damper_name = SPRING_1 &
new_spring_damper_name = SPRING_2 &
Adams_id = 2 &
damping = 0.5 &
stiffness = 0.2 &
preload = 1.2 &
displacement_at_preload = 0.02 &
Description:

spring_damper_name An Existing Specifies the spring-damper force to modify. You use
Spring-damper this parameter to identify the existing spring-damper to
Force affect with this command.
new_spring_damper_name A New Spring- Specifies the name of the new spring-damper force.
damper Force You may use this name later to refer to this spring-
damper.
Adams/View will not allow you to have two spring-

dampers with the same full name, so you must provide
a unique name.
Adams data file.
modified.
damping Damping Specifies the viscous damping coefficient for the
springdamper.
stiffness Stiffness Specifies the spring stiffness coefficient for the
springdamper.
preload Force Specifies the reference force or torque for the spring.
This is the force the spring exerts when the
displacementbetween the I and J markers is equal
toDISPLACEMENT_AT_PRELOAD (the reference
length of the spring).
displacement_at_preload Length Specifies the reference length for the spring. If
PRELOAD (the reference force of the spring) is zero,
DISPLACEMENT_AT_PRELOAD equals the free
length
element toone part at the I marker and to the other at
the J marker.
Marker connected by this force element. Adams/View
connects this element toone part at the I marker and to
force 129
1. The spring damper force applies a rotational or a translational spring-damperbetween two
markers. For a rotational spring-damper, the z-axis of the I markerand the z-axis of the J marker
must be parallel and must point in the samedirection. Because the spring- damper force is always
an action-reaction force, thedirection of the translational force is the line of sight between the I
and the Jmarkers. Thus, if the force is positive, the markers experience a repelling forcealong this
line, and if the force is negative, the markers experience an attractingforce. The magnitude of the
translational force applied to the parts containing thetwo markers is linearly dependent upon the
relative displacement and velocity ofthe two markers. The following linear constitutive equation
describes the forceapplied at the I marker:
2. Adams automatically computes the terms db/dt and b. The force value is the force on the I marker
from the J marker; the force on the J marker is equal and opposite. The term b is the distance
between the I and the J markers. Adams assumes that b is always greater than zero. The following
linear constitutive equation describes the torque applied at the I marker:
3. Adams automatically computes the terms da/dt and a. The torque is applied to the I marker about
the positive z-axis of the I marker; the torque on the J marker isequal and opposite to the torque
on the I marker. The right-hand rule defines apositive torque. The term a is the angle between the
x-axes of the I and the Jmarkers. Adams takes into account the total number of complete
turns.Considerations:
• If the z-axis of the I marker is not parallel to, and/or not pointed in the samedirection as, the z-
axis of the J marker for a rotational spring-damper, the results are unpredictable.
• Since the line-of-sight method determines the direction of a translationalspring-damper force,
the I and the J markers cannot be coincident.
4. You may identify a spring-damper force by typing its name or by picking it from the screen. If the
spring-damper force is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it
convenient to type the name even if the spring-damper is displayed. If you created the spring-
damper force by reading an Adams data set, the spring-damper name is the letters SPR followed
by the Adams data set spring-damper ID number. The name of Adams SPRINGDAMPER/101 is
SPR101, forexample. If you created the spring-damper during preprocessing, you gave it a name
at that time. If a spring-damper is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name
only. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a spring-damper under a different model,
for instance, you may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify spring-
damper 'left' from model 'sla' by entering ".sla.left". You must separate multiple spring-damper
names by commas. If the spring-damper is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by
picking on any of the graphics associated with it. You need not separate multiple spring-damper
picks by commas.
Tips:
1. If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the spring-dampers available by default.
function 1
function
function create
function create
A function allows you to define a new function in terms of an Adams/View expression. The function
create command allows you to create a function. You may reverse this creation at a later time with an
UNDO command.
Format:
function create
function_name= new expr_function
text_of_expression= string
argument_names= string
type= result_type
comments= string
category= func_category
Example:
As a simple example, we write a function which adds two numbers together
function create function_name=SUM argument_names=x,y &
text_of_expression="x + y"
Now we use this function to compute the sum of two numbers:
marker create marker=mar1 location=(SUM(1, 2)), 0, 0
If we examine the location of the marker mar1 we find that its location is 3,0,0 as expected.
Here we have a little more sophisticated example which computes the distance between two points:
function create function_name=DISTANCE argument_names=p1, p2 &
text_of_expression="sqrt((p1[1]-p2[1])**2 + (p1[2]-p2[2])**2 +
(p1[3]-p2[3])**2)"
You could then use the distance function in any appropriate context (assuming the existence of a model
containing par1 and par2).
variable create variable=dist1 real=(DISTANCE(par1.location,
par2.location))
function 3
function create
Description:

function_name New Expr_function Specifies the name of the user-written function
you are creating or modifying. You should
choose a name which is meanifully related to the
operation that the function is performing.
text_of_expression String The TEXT_OF_EXPRESSION parameter
defines the computation to be performed by the
function.
argument_names String The ARGUMENT_NAMES parameter allows
you to specify the names of the formal
arguments in your function.
type Array, Integer, The TYPE parameter of a function indicates the
Location_orientation, Object, type of the returned value.
Real, String
comments String Allows you to add comments to the function for
documentation purposes. The strings are stored
in the database and written to command files.
category User, String, Math, Specifies which category this function should be
Modelling, Loc_ori, classified under.
Matrix_array,database_objec
t, Misc
1. Remember that the value of the argument “text_of_expression” should be a character string, NOT
an expression.
FUNCTION CREATE FUNCTION_NAME=SSQDIF &
ARGUMENT_NAMES=Array1, Array2 &
TEXT_OF_EXPRESSION="SSQ(Array1-Array2)" &
COMMENT_STRING="Compute sum of squares of differences between
arguments" &
TYPE=real
2. The argument_names you specify are associated by position with the actual arguments when you
invoke the function, using the following as an example:
FUNCTION CREATE FUNCTION_NAME=MyFunc ARGUMENT_NAMES=Arg1, Fred &
TEXT_OF_EXPRESSION="sqrt(Fred) * Arg1"
VARIABLE CREATE VARIABLE_NAME=TestVariable &
REAL_VALUE=(MyFunc(1+1, 9) + 4)
The first formal argument "Arg1" is associated with the value 2 (computed from 1+1); the second
argument, "Fred", is associated with the value 9. The resulting value for "TestVariable" is sqrt(9)
* 2 + 4 = 10.
function delete
function delete
Allows you to delete an existing function.
You must enter the name of the function you wish to delete by specifying the full name.
Format:
function delete
function_name = existing expr_function
Example:
If function get_name already exists
function delete &

function_name = get_name
This will delete the function get_name.
Description:

Function_name Existing Expr_function FUNCTION_NAME is a required parameter, in which
you specify the name of the user-written function you are
deleting.
function 5
function modify
function modify
A function allows you to define a new function in terms of an Adams/View expression. The function
modify command allows you to modify an existing user written function.
You may reverse this modification at a later time with an UNDO command.
Format:
function modify
function_name= existing expr_function
new_function_name = new expr_function
argument_names= string
type= result_type
comments= string
category= func_category
Example:
! Already have a function named "This"

VARIABLE CREATE VARIABLE_NAME=Example REAL_VALUE=(This(1))
FUNCTION MODIFY FUNCTION_NAME=This NEW_FUNCTION_NAME=That
LIST_INFO VARIABLE VARIABLE_NAME=Example
! You will see that the real value is (That(1))
Description:

function_name, Existing Expr_function Specifies the name of the user-written function you
are modifying. You should choose a name which is
meanigfully related to the operation that the
function is performing.
New_function_name New Expr_function Allows you to change the name of an already
existing function. When you change the function's
name, all references to it also change.
text_of_expression, String The TEXT_OF_EXPRESSION parameter defines
the computation to be performed by the function.
argument_names String The ARGUMENT_NAMES parameter allows you
to specify the names of the formal arguments in
your function.
function modify

type Array, Integer, The TYPE parameter of a function indicates the
Location_orientation, type of the returned value.
Object, Real, String
omments String The COMMENTS parameter allows you to add
comments to the function for documentation
purposes. The strings are stored in the database
and written to command files.
category User, String, Math, Specifies which category this function should be
Modelling, Loc_ori, classified under.
Matrix_array,
Database_object, Misc
1. Remember that the value of the argument “text_of_expression” should be a character string, NOT
an expression.
FUNCTION CREATE FUNCTION_NAME=SSQDIF &
ARGUMENT_NAMES=Array1, Array2 &
TEXT_OF_EXPRESSION="SSQ(Array1-Array2)" &
COMMENT_STRING="Compute sum of squares of differences between
arguments" &
TYPE=real
2. The argument_names you specify are associated by position with the actual arguments when you
invoke the function.
Using the following as an example:
FUNCTION CREATE FUNCTION_NAME=MyFunc ARGUMENT_NAMES=Arg1, Fred &
TEXT_OF_EXPRESSION="sqrt(Fred) * Arg1"
VARIABLE CREATE VARIABLE_NAME=TestVariable &
REAL_VALUE=(MyFunc(1+1, 9) + 4)
The first formal argument "Arg1" is associated with the value 2 (computed from 1+1); the second
argument "Fred" is associated with the value 9. The resulting value for "TestVariable" is sqrt(9)
* 2 + 4 = 10.
geometry 1
geometry
geometry attributes
geometry attributes
Allows the specification of attributes to be set on individual pieces of geometry or a group of geometry.
Format:
geometry attributes
render_mode = render_mode
Example:
geometry attributes &

geometry attributes geometry_name = link_56 &
geometry attributes visibility = on &
geometry attributes transparency = 20 &
geometry attributes color = black &
geometry attributes render_mode = filled
Description:

geometry_name An Existing Geometric Entity Specifies the geometry to modify.
color An Existing Color Specifies the color the modeling entity should be
drawn in.
entity_scope Color_scope The ENTITY_SCOPE parameter is used to
control how a color modification is to affect a
particular graphic entity.
render_mode Render_mode This command specifies the rendering mode of
individual or groups of graphic objects
geometry 3
geometry attributes

active On_off_no_opinion When you set ACTIVE=NO, that element is
written to the data set as a comment
dependents_active On_off_no_opinion When you set ACTIVE=NO, that element is
1. You can set the following attributes on a marker.
- VISIBILITY. You may set an individual geometric entity's visibility ON, OFF or TOGGLE
the current setting. When you set a piece of geometry's visibility OFF, the geometry will not be
drawn. When you set a piece of geometry's visibility ON, you allow that geometry to be drawn.
- COLOR. You may set the color of a piece of geometry with this parameter.
- ENTITY_SCOPE. This parameter is used in conjunction with COLOR, to limit the application
of the color.
- RENDER_MODE. You may choose a rendering mode for geometry. When you choose a
render_mode of FILLED, the geometry chosen can be displayed as shaded, filled or in wireframe;
depending on the render_mode of the view in which it is displayed. When you choose
WIREFRAME, you limit the rendering of this piece of geometry to only wireframe.
ATTRIBUTE may be inherited from another entity.
INHERITANCE may be either TOP_DOWN or BOTTOM_UP.
their own size.
2. You use this parameter to identify the existing geometry to affect with this command.
You may identify geometry by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the geometry is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it
convenient to type the name even if the geometry is displayed.
If geometry is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you
geometry attributes
Example 1:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- RED
Example 2:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- RED
Example 3:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- NO_COLOR
and ALL.
edges of the facets (or areas filled by the FILL_COLOR) of a graphic that can be shaded. The
OUTLINE_COLOR represents the color of the lines that make up those graphics that can not be
shaded or filled, like an outline graphic statement consisting of two points or the coil of a
springdamper. Finally, the ALL value indicates that all three entity types, FILL_COLOR,
EDGE_COLOR, and OUTLINE_COLOR will be affected by the color change.
6. The render mode is an attribute that is attached to each of the specific graphic entities and works
in tandem with a view's RENDER attribute (see below).
Graphic objects that can have their rendering mode altered include:
arcs, outlines, boxes, circles, cylinders, frustums, and spring damper graphics.
geometry 5
geometry attributes
The selection of graphic objects can be based on association to a particular analysis, part, or by
individual graphic name. When the rendering mode of a part is specified, all graphic objects fixed
to that part are drawn with the rendering mode of the part. Graphics that span parts can only be
selected by graphic name.
Adams/View supports WIREFRAME and FILLED rendering modes.
This command should not be confused with the VIEW MANAGEMENT... RENDER parameter.
The RENDER parameter in view control sets an attribute associated with a particular view. So,
if the view render mode is wireframe, all the graphics will be drawn in wireframe mode regardless
of the value of a specific graphic object's render mode attribute. However, if the view render
mode is set to SOLIDS or SHADED, then a specific graphic entity will be drawn in the mode
specified by the DISPLAY_ATTRIBUTES RENDER_MODE command. In other words, the
view RENDER parameter is an attribute of the view and the display_attribute render mode is an
attribute of the specific graphic element. Or, WIREFRAME is the dominant mode and regardless
of how it is set (either RENDER by view or RENDERING_MODE by graphic object).
following command:
• Group
• Part
• Marker
• Geometry
• Constraints
• Forces
• Data Elements
• Output Control
geometry attributes
following command:
• Group
• Part
• Marker
• Geometry
• Constraints
• Forces
• Data Elements
• Output Control
Cautions:
Tips:
1. The ENTITY_SCOPE parameter is optional and if not entered, will be set to FILL_COLOR.
geometry 7
geometry copy
geometry copy
Allows you to create replica geometry.
Format:
geometry copy
new_geometry_name = a new geometric entity
Example:
geometry copy &

geometry_name = link_56
Description:

geometry_name An Existing Geometric Entity Specifies an existing geometry.
new_geometry_name A New Geometric Entity Specifies the name of the new geometry
1. This replica geometry will be identical to the original with the exception of the geometry name.
Geometry must have unique names relative to other geometry in a given model. The replica will
be completely independent of the original, and may be modified without effecting the original.
The replica geometry will have replica markers created for it. The replica markers will be copies
of the markers on the original geometry object.
Dynamic geometry objects (springdampers, gforces, and outlines whose markers span multiple
parts) may not be copied from model to model.
geometry copy
3. Specifies the name of the new geometry. You may use this name later to refer to this geometry.
Adams/View will not allow you to have two pieces of geometry with the same full name, so you
Cautions:
Tips:
1. The number of levels used varies from case to case and the parentage must exist before an entity
geometry 9
geometry create curve arc

Allows for creation of the arc object.
Format:

arc_name = a new arc
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
center_marker = an existing marker
angle_extent = angle
radius = length
ref_radius_by_marker = an existing marker
close = arc_closure
Example:
geometry create curve arc &

arc_name = arc__1 &
adams_id = 2 &
comments = "a new arc" &
center_marker = origin &
angle_extent = 150 &
radius = 10 &
segment_count = 10 &
close = sector
Description:

arc_name A New Arc Specifies the name of the new arc.
Adams data file.
modified.

center_marker An Existing Marker Specifies the marker at the center of a circle, an arc, the
bottom of a cylinder, or the bottom of a frustum.
angle_extent Angle Specifies a subtended angle measured positive (according
to the right-hand rule) about the z-axis of the center
marker
radius Length Specifies the radius of a circle, an arc, or a cylinder.
ref_radius_by_marker An Existing Marker Specifies the radius of a circle, an arc, or a cylinder to be
the distance from the center marker Z axis to this radius
marker.
segment_count Integer Specifies the number of straight line segments
Adams/View uses to draw a circle or an arc.
close Arc_closure Specifies the type of closure to perform when
Adams/View creates the arc.
1. Arcs are truncated circles that can be closed into a pie shape or using a cord between the end
points.
An arc is a 2 dimensional graphics image which is defined as a curve with a specified radius drawn
around a center marker. The length of the arc is determined by the angle_extent, and its
smoothness by the number of segments in the arc. The radius can be given explicitly by using the
'RADIUS=' parameter, or by using the 'ref_radius_by_marker' parameter, If
'REF_RADIUS_BY_MARKER' is used, a radius will be calculated from the center marker. An
arc will move with the center marker given in the parameter 'CENTER_MARKER'.
2. You may use this name later to refer to this arc. Adams/View will not allow you to have two
arcs with the same full name, so you must provide a unique name.
geometry 11
yourself.
4. If you are creating a circle or an arc, orient the center marker so that its z-axis is normal to the
plane of the circle or to the plane of the arc. Similarly, if you are defining a cylinder or a frustum,
orient the center marker so that its z-axis is normal to the bottom of the cylinder or the frustum.
5. The angle starts at the positive x-axis of the center marker and subtends the arc, the arc of the
cylinder, or the arc of the cone frustum.
6. When you specify 'NO' for the ‘close’ parameter, Adams/View will create a 2 dimensional arc.
'NO' is the default value. When you specify 'CHORD' for this parameter, Adams/View will close
the arc from the starting point, to the ending point on the arc.
When you specify 'SECTOR' for this parameter, Adams/View will close the arc, such that a "pie"
shape is created.
Cautions:
1. Adams/View stores the radius value, not the marker name. If you later move the marker specified
by the ref_radius_by_marker, the radius will not change.
geometry create curve bspline

Allows you to create a bspline.
Format:

bspline_name = a new gcurve
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
ref_curve_name = an existing acurve
ref_marker_name = an existing marker
ref_profile_name = an existing Wire_Geometry
spread_points = boolean
closed = boolean
num_new_pts = integer
Examples:
geometry create curve bspline &

bspline_name = gcurve__1 &
adams_id = 100 &
comments = "a new bspline" &
ref_marker_name = origin &
ref_curve_name = curve__1 &
segment_coun t = 100

adams_id = 100 &
comments = "a new bspline" &
ref_profile_name = CHAIN_1 &
geometry 13

closed = yes &
num_new_pts = 150
Description:

bspline_name A New Gcurve Specifies the name of the new BSPLINE.
Adams data file.
ref_curve_name An Existing Specifies an existing CURVE that will be used to create and
Acurve display the BSPLINE geometric element.
ref_profile_name An Existing Wire Specifies an existing GWire geometry, from which to create
Geometry and display the BSPLINE geometric element.
ref_marker_name An Existing Specifies an existing MARKER that will be used to locate
Marker and orient the BSPLINE geometric element.
spread_points Boolean Specifies whether the bspline be created in a way that the
points (as defined by a reference profile) are equally spaced
or otherwise. The parameter will be ignored if a
ref_curve_name is specified.
closed Boolean Specifies whether that the generated bspline is a closed one or
otherwise.
num_new_pts Integer Specifies the number of points on the created bspline. The
parameter is valid only if the spread_points parameter is set
to 'yes' (and as such can be valid only when a reference
profile is specified).
segment_count Integer Specifies the number of polynomial segments Adams/View
uses for fitting the CURVE_POINTS when FIT_TYPE is set
to CURVE_POINTS.
1. To create a BSPLINE you must first create a CURVE DATA_ELEMENT or specify an existing
GWire geometry. The CURVE definition depends on first creating a MATRIX of control points
or a user-subroutine.
A BSPLINE is the geometric counterpart to the CURVE data_element. The difference being that
the BSPLINE is displayed with the Adams/View model and the CURVE is not. The BSPLINE
references a CURVE for its definition and a REF_MARKER for it position. A single CURVE can
be referenced by multiple BSPLINEs.
For completeness the CURVE definition is repeated below.

A CURVE element defines a three-dimensional parametric curve that may be referenced by
x = cos(u)
y = sin(u)
z = u
Adams/View allows you to create curves in three ways: by entering control points for a uniform
A uniform B-spline is a piecewise cubic polynomial spline used in many CAD (computer-aided-
A more direct way to define the curve is to supply curve points. Adams will compute a uniform
B-spline that will fit the curve points. Again, Adams parameterizes the curve from -1 to +1. If you
specify the number of spline segments (SEGMENT_COUNT) as three less than the number of
curve points, the computed curve will exactly match the curve points. If you specify fewer
segments, Adams will use a least-squares fit to compute the closest fit to the points. In general,
fewer segments give a smoother curve, but do not come as close to the data points.
In order to use a different type of curve, or to model an analytically-defined curve such as the
also specify MINPAR and MAXPAR to define the limits of the curve. These default to -1 and +1,
respectively.
geometry 15
contact.
2. You may use the name specified by the bspline_name parameter, later to refer to this BSPLINE.
Adams/View will not allow you to have two BSPLINEs with the same full name, so you must
yourself.
5. A BSPLINE is the geometric counterpart to the CURVE data_element. The difference being that
references a CURVE for its definition and a REF_MARKER for it position. A single CURVE
can be referenced by multiple BSPLINEs.
You may identify a curve by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
Since curves do not have a geometric position, Adams/View displays curve icons at or near the
model origin. If the curve icon is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may
also find it convenient to type the name even if the curve icon is displayed.
Curves can be draw by referencing a curve name in the definition of a BSPLINE geometry
element. Therefore, the BSPLINE element is the geometric counterpart of the CURVE data
element.
If you created the curve by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the curve name is the letters
CUR followed by the Adams data set curve ID number. The name of Adams CURVE/101 is
CUR101, for example. If you created the curve during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that
time.
If a curve is owned by the default model, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is
not, you must enter its full name. To identify a curve under a different model, for instance, you
may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify curve
'CAM_PROFILE' from model 'VALVE_TRAIN' by entering
".VALVE_TRAIN.CAM_PROFILE'". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the curve
You must separate multiple curve names by commas.
If the curve is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
You need not separate multiple curve picks by commas.
6. The reference marker must exist before the BSPLINE can be created.
This marker acts as a coordinate reference for the coordinate values used to define the CURVE
that acts as a template for the creation of the bspline.
geometry 17

element.
time.
associated with it.
8. The segment_count parameter is not used if you have specified the FIT_TYPE as
CONTROL_POINTS.
For an open CURVE, Adams/View will default to a SEGMENT_COUNT that is three less than
the number of CURVE_POINTS, which gives an exact fit to the CURVE_POINTS. Specifying
fewer segments will result in a smoother curve, but the curve will not pass exactly through the
CURVE_POINTS. You must specify at least four CURVE_POINTS to create an open curve.
less than the number of CURVE_POINTS, the computed curve will exactly match the curve
points. If you specify fewer segments, Adams will use a least-squares fit to compute the closest
fit to the points.
Closed curves must be defined by at least eight CURVE_POINTS, and may have a maximum of
five segments less than the number of CURVE_POINTS.
For a closed curve defined by CURVE_POINTS, Adams will default a SEGMENT_COUNT of

five segments less than the number of CURVE_POINTS.
Note that because three segments less than the number of curve points are required for an exact
fit, a closed curve will not exactly fit the curve points.
9. The 'spread_points' parameter when specified to ‘yes’, in conjunction with a reference profile
(otherwise the parameter is invalid and will be ignored) specifies that the set of points generated
for the bspline are such that they are equally spaced. Thus specifying the parameter to ‘yes’,
means use of a different algorithm for generating a bspline (from the gwire geometry), wherein
all the points on the bspline are equally spaced).
10. The 'num_new_pts' is valid only when the spread points parameter is set to ‘yes’ (otherwise the
parameter will be ignored). The parameter defines the number of points generated for the bspline
using the new algorithm. Note that the points will be equally spaced.
11. The 'closed' parameter is a Boolean value that specifies whether the generated bspline is a closed
curve or otherwise.
geometry 19
geometry create curve chain

Links together wire construction geometry to create a complex profile, which you can then extrude.
Format:

chain_name = a new chain
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
objects_in_chain = an existing gwire
Example:
geometry create curve chain &

chain_name = chain__1 &
adams_id = 12376
Description:

chain_name A New Chain Specifies the name of the chain you want to create or modify
data file.
objects_in_chain An Existing Gwire Specifies the geometry to be chained together
1. The geometry to be chained together must touch at one endpoint and cannot be closed geometry.
It adds the final chained geometry to the part that owns the first geometry that you selected.
yourself.
geometry 21
geometry create curve circle

Allows for creation of the circle object.
Format:

circle_name = a new circle
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
radius = length
Example:
eometry create curve circle &

circle_name = circle__1 &
adams_id = 10 &
comments = "a new circle" &
radius = 10 &
segment_count = 10
Description:

circle_name A New Circle Specifies the name of the new circle.
Adams data file
modified.
center_marker An Existing Specifies the marker at the center of a circle, an arc, the
Marker bottom of a cylinder, or the bottom of a frustum.

ref_radius_by_marker An Existing Specifies the radius of a circle, an arc, or a cylinder to be
Marker the distance from the center marker Z axis to this radius
marker.
1. The circle is segmented and therfore can look like a square or triangle if needed.
The circle is defined as a radius drawn around a center marker. The circle's orientation is
dependent upon the orientation of its center marker. Its radius is determined by either the
'REF_RADIUS_BY_MARKER' or 'RADIUS=' parameter. The number of sides on the circle is
controlled by the 'SEGMENT_COUNT=' parameter. A circle will move with the part its center
marker is located on.
2. You may use the name specified by the circle_name parameter later to refer to this circle.
Adams/View will not allow you to have two circles with the same full name, so you must provide
a unique name.
yourself.
geometry 23
Cautions:
geometry create curve curve_trace

Creates traces that follow the motion of a curve as it moves relative to a second part
Format:

curve_type = curve_type
close = yes_no_auto
Example:
geometry create curve curve_trace &

geometry_name = LINK_56 &
base_marker = MARKER_84 &
curve_type = polyline
Description:

geometry_name An Existing Geometric Specifies an existing geometry.
Entity
base_marker An Existing Marker This parameter is used to specify a marker whose
position will be frozen in the view as the model
animates
curve_type Curve_type Specifies the type of curve to be created, either
bspline or polyline
close Yes_no_auto Causes the info window to close down.
analysis_name An Existing Analysis Specifies an existing analysis
1. A trace that follows a curve creates a two-dimensional spline. The point can move in any direction
relative to the part on which the trace was created. Adams/View creates the curve in the xy plane
of the base marker(the marker on the part on which the trace was created). Adams/View assumes
the circle is parallel to the plane or the cylinder is perpendicular to the plane, and that the motion
is in this plane.
geometry 25
3. base_marker is particularly useful when a relatively small object undergoes both small
configuration changes as well as large overall gross motion. For example, the flight path of a jet
is very large over time relative to the motion of the control surfaces on the jet. In this case
selecting the BASE_MARKER to be on the jet would be appropriate.
the BASE_MARKER position. In addition the "up" direction of the view is computed based on
the direction of the CAMERA_REF_MARKER "y" axis (i.e. the y axis is projected into a
direction perpendicular to the viewing direction defined by the two markers). This viewing
direction is recomputed between each frame of the animation. This feature allows the effect of
watching an object come from a distance pass by and proceed into the distance.
Specifies an existing marker.
4. Any text that was in the info window while open, will be flushed out. The next time the info
window is opened, only the new text will be present.
Closing the info window does not change its size. The next time the info window is opened, its
size will be the same as the previous time.
All scroll positions are returned to the first line in the info window.
5. You may identify a analysis by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
displayed.
output files. By default, the name of the analysis is the root name of the Adams output files. If
you created the analysis by reading an Adams Graphics file, for instance, the analysis name is the
name of the graphics file without the '.gra' extension.
name be entered.
associated with it.
geometry 27
geometry create curve ellipse

Allows for creation of the ellipse object.
Format:

ellipse_name = a new ellipse
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
major_radius = length
minor_radius = length
start_angle = angle
end_angle = angle
Example:
geometry create curve ellipse &

ellipse_name = ellipse__1 &
comments = "a new ellipse" &
major_radius = 10 &
minor_radius = 6 &
start_angle = 0 &
end_angle = 180
Description:

ellipse_name A New Ellipse Specifies a new ellipse object
data file.
center_marker An Existing Specifies the marker at the center of a circle, an arc, the bottom
Marker of a cylinder, or the bottom of a frustum.

major_radius Length The MAJOR_RADIUS parameter is used to specify the radius
for the circular spine of the torus.
minor_radius Length The MINOR_RADIUS parameter is used to specify the radius
for the circular cross-sections of the torus.
start_angle Angle
end_angle Angle
yourself.
geometry 29
geometry create curve nurb_curve

Format:

nurb_curve_name = a new nurb_curve
comments = string
degree = integer
rational = boolean
periodic = boolean
control_points = location
weights = real
knots = real
Example:
geometry create curve nurb_curve &

nurb_curve degree = 3 &
nurb_curve rational = yes &
nurb_curve periodic = yes &
nurb_curve control_points = 1,5,3 &
nurb_curve knots = 5
Description:

nurb_curve_name A New Nurb_curve
modified.
degree Integer
rational Boolean
periodic Boolean
control_points Location
weights Real
knots Real
geometry 31
geometry create curve outline

Allows for creation of the outline object.
Format:

outline_name = a new outline
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
visibility_between_markers = on_off
image_file_name = string
horizontal = clamp_repeat
vertical = clamp_repeat
close = boolean
Example:
:
geometry create curve outline &

outline_name = OUTLINE__1 &
adams_id = 1 &
comments = " a new outline" &
marker_name = Origin , CM &
visibility_between_markers = on &
close = yes
Description:

outline_name A New Outline Specifies the name of the new outline
or modified.
marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies the marker associated with this entity.

visibility_between_markers On_off Specifies whether the outline is visible between
two markers.
image_file_name String Specifies the name of an image file on disk. File
types supported include .bmp, .jpg, .gif, and .png.
horizontal Clamp_repeat Controls how the desired polygon is horizontally
filled with the image
vertical Clamp_repeat Controls how the desired polygon is vertically
close Boolean Specifies the whether or not Adams/View should
close the outline when it is created.
1. Outlines are line segments (open or closed) that are define by a series of markers.
An outline is composed of at least two and not more than 2500 markers.
These markers are connected by line segments to form the outline.
If all of the markers of an outline lie on the same part, the parent of the outline is this part, and the
outline moves with this part.
If some of the markers lie on different parts, the parent of the outline is the model. As the parts
move, the outline is stretched or "rubber-banded" to fit the new marker locations.
2. You may use this name later to refer to this graphic. Adams/View will not allow you to have two
outlines with the same full name, so you must provide a unique name.
assumed.
geometry 33
yourself.
5. Many entities are attached to, or otherwise associated with, a specific marker. You use this
parameter to identify that marker.
6. When you create an outline, by default a line will be drawn between each of the markers specified.
Using the VISIBILITY_BETWEEN_MARKERS parameter, you can turn turn off the visibility
between desired markers. For example, the following commands:
model create model_name=MOD1 marker create marker=MAR1
location=1,1,0
marker create marker=MAR2 location=2,1,0 marker create

marker=MAR3
location=2,2,0 marker create marker=MAR4 location=1,2,0
geometry
create curve outline outline_name=.MOD1.ground.OUT1 &
marker_name=MAR1,MAR2,MAR3,MAR4 &
visibility_between_markers=ON,ON,OFF,ON
will draw lines from MAR1 to MAR2, and from MAR3 to MAR4 there will be no line segment
from MAR2 to MAR3.
If you specify the VISIBILITY_BETWEEN_MARKERS parameter with less values than the
number of markers, the rest of the visibilities will default to ON. If for example you have an
outline with some of the visibilities turned off and you want to turn them all on, you can specify
a single ON value.
When you render the outline in solid or shaded mode, each of the contiguously visible segments
will be rendered as objets. In the above example, the outline would not be draw as a solid object,
but as two lines.
Setting the visibility to OFF for a marker is equivalent to using a negative marker id on the
OUTLINE statement in the Adams DATA SET.
7. When you specify 'NO' for the ‘close’ parameter, Adams/View will create a outline through the
markers specified, and will not attempt to close the start and end points with an additional line
segment. 'NO' is the default value.
When you specify 'YES' for this parameter, Adams/View will create the outline, through the
markers specified, and add an additional line segment from the end marker to the starting marker.
geometry 35
geometry create curve point_trace

Creates traces that follow the motion of a point as it moves relative to a second part
Format:

trace_marker = an existing marker
curve_type = curve_type
close = yes_no_auto
Example:
geometry create curve point_trace &

trace_marker = marker_71 &
base_marker = marker_84 &
curve_type = polyline
Description:

trace_marker An Existing Marker Specifies the names of one or more markers for which you
want Adams/View to create traces
base_marker An Existing Marker This parameter is used to specify a marker whose position will
be frozen in the view as the model animates
curve_type Curve_type Specifies the type of curve to be created, either bspline or
polyline
close Yes_no_auto Causes the info window to close down.
analysis_name An Existing Analysis Specifies an existing analysis
1. A trace that follows a point creates a three-dimensional spline. The point can move in any
direction relative to the part on which the trace was created.
2. base_marker is particularly useful when a relatively small object undergoes both small
configuration changes as well as large overall gross motion. For example, the flight path of a jet
is very large over time relative to the motion of the control surfaces on the jet. In this case
selecting the BASE_MARKER to be on the jet would be appropriate.
In addition the "up" direction of the view is computed based on the direction of the
distance pass by and proceed into the distance.
Specifies an existing marker.
3. Any text that was in the info window while open, will be flushed out. The next time the info
window is opened, only the new text will be present.
Closing the info window does not change its size. The next time the info window is opened, its
size will be the same as the previous time.
All scroll positions are returned to the first line in the info window.
displayed.
geometry 37
name be entered.
associated with it.
geometry create curve polyline

Allows you to create a polyline.
Format:

polyline_name = a new polyline
comments = string
location = location
path_curve = an existing gwire
close = boolean
Example:
geometry create curve polyline &

polyline_name = polyline__1 &
location = 1,5,3 &
image_file_name = "c:\users\ashish\image"
Description:

polyline_name A New Polyline Specifies the name of the new POLYLINE
modified.
polyline.
path_curve An Existing Gwire Specifies the locations to be used to define the
polyline from an existing graphical object.
relative_to An Existing Model, Part Or Specifies the coordinate system that location
Marker coordinates are with respect to.
close Boolean Specifies if the polyline is to be open or closed
geometry 39
1. The POLYLINE command provides a means to create a segmented curve that may be open or
closed. If closed, the POLYLINE becomes a polygon that can be filled (i.e. shaded). The end
points of the POLYLINE do not need to be coincident for you to close it. By setting the CLOSED
parameter to "YES" the two end points will be connected with a straight line segment.
The POLYLINE is displayed by connecting any number of LOCATIONS together, in the order
in which the LOCATIONS are input, using straight line segments.
The POLYLINE differs from the OUTLINE Adams/View geometric element in that the outline
requires that you provide a series of markers to define the locations to be connected. The
OUTLINE can span multiple parts and the POLYLINE cannot. POLYLINEs are more space
efficient than OUTLINEs, taking approximately 40% of the memory required when compared to
storing OUTLINEs. Finally, POLYLINEs are not written to the Adams data set, and therefore,
do not appear in the Adams graphics file. POLYLINE definitions can be stored in a command
file, written to a WaveFront file, and, of course, the binary Adams/View file.
In light of being more memory efficient, POLYLINEs are the most efficient means of storing
geometry translated from IGES files.
2. Specifies the name of the new POLYLINE. You may use this name later to refer to this
POLYLINE. Adams/View will not allow you to have two POLYLINE with the same full name,
5. The PATH_CURVE is any member of the WIRE_GEOMETRY class (which includes arcs,
circles, spline curves, polylines and outlines). When you specify a PATH_CURVE, the values of
the vertices are extracted from the specified object and used to compose the polyline.
7. If closed, the polyline can be filled (i.e. shaded). The end points of the polyline do not need to be
coincident for you to close it. By setting the CLOSED parameter to "YES" the two end points
will be connected with a line segment. If the CLOSE parameter is set to "NO" the polyline will
appear as a segmented curve.
geometry 41
geometry create feature blend

Creates a chamfer or fillet (blend) on a vertex or edge on a rigid body.
Format:

blend_name = a new blend
subtype = sub_type
subids = integer
chamfer = boolean
radius1= length
radius2 = length
reference_marker = an existing marker
locations = location
Example:
geometry create feature blend &

blend_name = BLEND__1 &
subtype = edge &
subids = 10 &
chamfer = yes &
radius1 = 0.15 &
reference_marker = Origin
Description:

blend_name A New Blend Specifies the name of the blend to be created or modified.
subtype Sub_type Specifies whether you are creating the blend on an edge or
vertex:
subids Integer Specifies the Parasolid tags identifying the vertices or edges
based on the selected subtype.
chamfer Boolean Specifies whether or not to chamfer the edge or vertex
radius1 Length Specifies the width of the chamfer bevel or radius of the
fillet.

radius2 Length Specifies the end radius for a fillet. Adams/View uses the
value you enter for radius1 as the starting radius of the
variable fillet.
reference_marker An Existing Marker Specifies the marker that is used to define the location of the
blend.
locations Location Specifies the location of the vertices or edges used to define
the blend relative to the reference marker.
1. The subtype parameter specifies whether you are creating the blend on an edge or vertex:
• edge - Creates the blend on the edge of an object.
• vertex - Creates the blend on the vertex of an object.
2. The chamfer parameter specifies whether or not to chamfer the edge or vertex:
• no - Creates a fillet instead of a chamfer.
• yes - Creates a chamfer.
Tips:
1. 1. If you do not specify a reference marker, Adams/View uses the reference marker of the
geometry.
geometry 43
geometry create feature hole

Allows you to create a hole feature.
Format:

hole_name = a new hole
subid = integer
center = location
countersink= boolean
radius = length
depth = length
Example:
geometry create feature hole &

hole_name = hole__1 &
subid = 12 &
center = 10 , 2 , 1 &
countersink = yes &
radius = 3 &
depth = 4
Description:

hole_name A New Hole Specifies the name of the hole to be created
subid Integer Specifies the Parasolid tag identifying the face on which the hole or boss
will be created.
center Location Specifies the location of the center of the hole or boss on the object.
countersink Boolean Specifies whether to create a hole or a boss:
radius Length Specifies radius of the hole or boss.
depth Length Specifies depth of the hole or the height of the boss.
1. You can use the name specified by the hole_name parameter, later to refer to this entity.
Adams/View does not allow you to have two entities with the same name, so you must provide a
unique name. Normally, entity names are composed of alphabetic, numeric, or '_' (underscore)
characters, and start with an alphabetic or '_' character. They may be of any length.
2. The countersink parameter specifies whether to create a hole or a boss:
• yes - Creates a boss.
• no - Creates a hole.
Cautions:
1. You cannot specify the radius and depth of a hole so that it splits the current geometry into two
separate geometries.
geometry 45
geometry create feature thinshell

Allows you to hollow out one or more faces of a solid object to create a shell.
Format:

thin_shell_name = a new thin_shell
subids = integer
thickness = length
Example:
geometry create feature thinshell &

thin_shell_name = thin_shell__1 &
subids= 10 &
thickness= 0.15
Description:

thin_shell_name A New Thin_shell Specifies the name of the thinshell to be created or modified.
subids Integer Specifies the Parasolid tag(s) identifying the face(s) that will
be removed to create the thinshell.
thickness Length Specifies the thickness of the remaining shell after you hollow
the object.
locations Location Specifies the location(s) of the face(s) that will be removed to
create the thinshell.
1. You can use the name specified by the thin_shell_name parameter, later to refer to this entity.
geometry 47
geometry create point

Defines locations in three-dimensional space upon which you can build your model.
Format:

point_name = a new point
adams_id = integer
comments = string
Example:
geometry create point &

point_name = point__1 &
adams_id = 1 &
comments = " a new point" &
ref_marker_name = marker_1
Description:

point_name A New Point Specifies the name of the point to create or modify.
adams_id Adams_id Assigns a unique ID number to the geometry.
comments String Adds any comments about the geometry to help you manage and
identify it.
ref_marker An Existing Specifies a marker that defines the location of the point
Marker
geometry create shape block

Allows for creation of the block object.
Format:

block_name = a new block
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
corner_marker = an existing marker
diag_corner_coords = length
Example:
geometry create shape block &

block_name = box__1 &
corner_marker = marker_82 &
diag_corner_coords = 2,4,6
Description:

block_name A New Block Specifies the name of the new block.
Adams data file
modified.
corner_marker An Existing Marker Specifies the marker that defines the anchor point for the
definition of a block.
diag_corner_coords Length Specifies the location (x, y, z) of the opposite diagonal
corner from the corner_marker for a block. These
coordinates are with respect to the corner marker x, y, and
z axes. This location, along with the corner_marker,
define the boundaries of the block.
geometry 49
1. A block is a box with parallel edges and orthogonal vertices. You position and orient a block by
means of a corner marker. You specify the dimensions of the box by supplying three coordinates
for the opposite corner.
2. Specifies the name of the new block. You may use this name later to refer to this block.
Adams/View will not allow you to have two blocks with the same full name, so you must provide
a unique name.
yourself.
5. These coordinates are with respect to the corner marker x, y, and z axes. This location, along with
the corner_marker, define the boundaries of the block.
geometry create shape cylinder

Allows for creation of the cylinder object.
Format:

cylinder_name = a new cylinder
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
length = length
radius = length
side_count_for_body = integer
segment_count_for_ends = integer
Example:
geometry create shape cylinder &

cylinder_name = CYLINDER__1 &
center_marker = MARKER_82 &
angle_extent = 60 &
length = 25 &
ref_radius_by_marker = MARKER_72
Description:

cylinder_name A New Cylinder Specifies the name of the new cylinder.
modified.
center_marker An Existing Marker Specifies the marker at the center of a circle, an arc,
the bottom of a cylinder, or the bottom of a frustum
geometry 51

angle_extent Angle Specifies a subtended angle measured positive
(according to the right-hand rule) about the z-axis of
the center marker.
length Length Specifies the height of a cylinder or a frustum.
Radius Length Specifies the radius of a circle, an arc, or a cylinder.
ref_radius_by_marker An Existing Marker Specifies the radius of a circle, an arc, or a cylinder to
be the distance from the center marker Z axis to this
radius marker.
side_count_for_body Integer Specifies the number of flat sides Adams/View draws
on a cylinder or a frustum.
segment_count_for_ends Integer Specifies the number of straight line segments
Adams/View uses to draw the circles at the ends of a
cylinder or a frustum.
1. A cylinder is an extruded circle whose top and bottom are perpendicular to the cylinder central
axis. The cylinder is placed at the marker named 'CENTER_MARKER='. The circles at the top
and at the bottom of the cylinder have a radius specified by a radius, or radius reference marker.
The cylinder length is along the the positive z-axis of the center marker, and is specified by
'LENGTH='. The number of sides can be chosen using the 'SIDE_COUNT_FOR_BODY'
parameter. The number of edges on the end circles can be specified using the
'SEGMENT_COUNT_FOR_END=' parameter. The cylinder will move with the part who owns
the center marker.
2. Specifies the name of the new cylinder. You may use this name later to refer to this cylinder.
Adams/View will not allow you to have two cylinders with the same full name, so you must
yourself.
7. Because the two circles at the ends of a cylinder or a frustum are both perpendicular to the z-axis
of the center marker, they are parallel. Adams/View uses the value of LENGTH to specify the z
distance between the two circles. A positive value specifies a cylinder or a frustum along the
positive z-axis of the center marker, and a negative value specifies a cylinder or a frustum along
the negative z-axis of the center marker.
8. Adams/View stores the radius value, not the marker name. If you later move this marker, the
radius will not change.
Cautions:
1. cylinder_name= The number of levels used varies from case to case and the parentage must exist
before an entity can be assigned to it.
geometry 53
geometry create shape ellipsoid

Allows for creation of the ellipsoid object.
Format:

ellipsoid_name = a new ellipsoid
comments = string
x_scale_factor = length
y_scale_factor = length
z_scale_factor = length
Example:
geometry create shape ellipsoid &

ellipsoid_name = ELLIPSOID__1 &
center_marker = MARKER_74 &
x_scale_factor = 2
Description:

ellipsoid_name A New Ellipsoid Specifies the name of the new ellipsoid
center_marker An Existing Marker Specifies the marker at the center of a circle, an arc, the bottom
of a cylinder, or the bottom of a frustum
x_scale_factor Length The X_SCALE_FACTOR parameter is used to specify the
scaling of the initial unit sphere along the center marker's x
axis.
y_scale_factor Length The Y_SCALE_FACTOR parameter is used to specify the
scaling of the initial unit sphere along the center marker's y
axis.
z_scale_factor Length The Z_SCALE_FACTOR parameter is used to specify the
scaling of the initial unit sphere along the center marker's z
axis.
1. An ellipsoid is a unit sphere that has been scaled in the x, y, and z directions. The ellipsoid is
placed at the marker named 'CENTER_MARKER='. The X_SCALE_FACTOR,
Y_SCALE_FACTOR, and Z_SCALE_FACTOR parameters are used to specify the scaling of the
initial unit sphere along the center marker's x, y, z axes. The ellipsoid will move with the part
which owns the center marker.
2. Specifies the name of the new ellipsoid. You may use this name later to refer to this ellipsoid.
Adams/View will not allow you to have two ellipsoids with the same full name, so you must
assumed.
4. Specifies the marker at the center of a circle, an arc, the bottom of a cylinder, or the bottom of a
frustum. If you are creating a circle or an arc, orient the center marker so that its z-axis is normal
to the plane of the circle or to the plane of the arc. Similarly, if you are defining a cylinder or a
frustum, orient the center marker so that its z-axis is normal to the bottom of the cylinder or the
frustum.
geometry 55
geometry create shape extrusion

Allows for creation of the extrusion object.
Format:

extrusion_name = a new extrusion
adams_id = adams id
comments = string
profile_curve = an existing gwire
points_for_profile = location
path_points = location
length_along_z_axis = length
analytical = boolean
Example:
geometry create shape extrusion &

extrusion_name = extrusion__1 &
comments = "a new extrusion" &
reference_marker = origin &
profile_curve = arc__1 &
path_curve = circle__1 &
analytical = no
Description:

extrusion_name A New Extrusion Specifies the name of the new extrusion.
Adams data file.

modified.
reference_marker An Existing Specifies the marker used to place and orient an
Marker extrusion.
profile_curve An Existing Specifies the object used to define the profile of the
Gwire extrusion.
points_for_profile Location Specifies the points used to define the profile of the
extrusion. The points are relative to the extrusion's
reference marker.
path_curve An Existing Specifies the object used to define the path of the
Gwire extrusion.
path_points Location Specifies the points used to define the path of the
extrusion.
length_along_z_axis Length Specifies the legth along the Z axis of the reference
marker to extrude the profile curve of the extrusion.
relative_to An Existing Specifies the coordinate system that location
Model, Part Or coordinates are with respect to.
Marker
analytical Boolean
1. An extrusion is defined by a path polyline curve and a profile curve, which may be either a
polyline or a data element curve. The profile curve is in the X-Y plane of its parent part. Z
coordinate values of the profile curve are ignored. The path curve is a polyline that describes how
the profile will be swept along. The extrusion is placed with respect to the marker named
'REFERENCE_MARKER=' using the same orientation that the path curve has with respect to its
parent part. The extrusion will move with the part which owns the reference marker.
2. You may use the name specified by the extrusion_name parameter, later to refer to this extrusion.
Adams/View will not allow you to have two extrusions with the same full name, so you must
geometry 57
assumed.
4. You may specify an arc, circle, spline curve, polyline, or outline for the path_curve parameter.
The object defines the path along which the profile curve will be swept.
5. The points specified by the path_points parameter are relative to the extrusion's reference marker.
The points defines the path along which the profile curve will be swept.
Tips:
1. You may specify an arc, circle, spline curve, polyline, or outline for the profile_curve parameter
The object should be in the X-Y plane of the extrusions reference marker.
geometry create shape force

Allows you to create a force graphic on an element. Force graphics are arrows whose magnitudes and
directions reflect the scaled, relative magnitudes and directions of the force vectors acting on your model
during a simulation.
Force graphics help you gauge how large your forces become and in what directions they are applied
Figure 1 Force Graphics on an Animation
To see force graphics during animations, you must specify those force elements in your model for which
you would like to see the associated force graphics. To turn force graphics on or off for particular forces,
refer to the Adams/View documentation that describe how to modify a force or a motion.
You can specify the following for the display of force graphics during an animation:
• Scale factor used to control the graphic’s relative size compared to the objects in the model.
• Whether or not the force magnitudes are displayed numerically. The numerical values appear
near the arrowheads.
• Whether or not the force graphics are drawn in wireframe or shaded mode when the model is
animated in shaded mode.
• Whether the force graphic is always drawn in front of other geometry. This is particularly useful
when viewing forces inside geometry, such as three-dimensional contacts.
There are two different scale factors: one for forces and one for torques. Adams applies the force scale
factor to all force graphics in your model to maintain their proper relative sizing, while it applies the
torque scale factor to all torque graphics in your model.
Finding force and torque scale factors that are good for the entire animation might require some trial and
error. It is often useful to set your scale factors while viewing the frame for which the largest force reaches
its peak value.
geometry 59
Format:

force_name = new force symbol
adams_id = integer
comments = string
force_element_name = existing force
jprim_name = existing primitive joint
curve_curve_name = existing ccurve
point_curve_name = existing pcurve
all_force_elements = true_only
applied_at_marker_name = existing triad
Example:
geometry create shape force &

force_name = force_1_1 &
force_element_name = vforce_1 &
applied_at_marker_name = marker_4
Description:

Force_name New Force Symbol Specifies the name of the force graphic to be
created
Adams_id Integer Specifies a new name for the geometry. Assigns
a unique ID number to the geometry.
Comments String Adds any comments about the geometry to help
you manage and identify it.
Force_element_name Existing Force Specifies the name of the force element whose
force is to be displayed by the force graphic.
Joint_name Existing Joint Specifies the name of the joint element whose
Jprim_name Existing Primitive Joint Specifies the name of the joint primitive
element whose force the force graphic is to
display.

Curve_curve_name Existing Ccurve Specifies the name of the curve_curve element
whose force the force graphic is to display.
Point_curve_name Existing Pcurve Specifies the name of the point_curve element
whose force the force graphic is to display.
All_force_elements True Specifies that all the forces from all the force
elements acting on the marker that
applied_at_marker_name specifies, are
summed together to determine the force that the
force graphic displays. The only value allowed
is true. There must be at least one force element
acting on the marker.
Applied_at_marker_name Existing Triad Specifies the name of the marker where
Adams/View displays the force graphic.
to refer to this entity. Adams/View does not allow you to have two entities with the same full
name, so you must provide a unique name. Normally, entity names are composed of alphabetic,
numeric, or '_' (underscore) characters, and start with an alphabetic or '_' character. They may be
of any length.
2. The force element can be:
• Beam
• Bushing
• Field
• Translational spring damper
• Rotational spring damper
• Tire
geometry 61
• Single-component force
• Force vector
• Torque vector
• General force
• Multi-point force
3. The joint element can be:
• Translational
• Revolute
• Cylindrical
• Univesal
• Spherical
• Planar
• Rackpin
• Screw
4. The joint primitive element can be:
• At point
• Inline
• Inplane
• Orientation
• Parallel_axis
• Perpendicular
5. If you use the all_force_elements=true argument, the marker must have at least one force applied
to it. If you enter a specific force type using joint_name, jprim_name, force_element_name,
point_curve_name, or curve_curve_name parameters, then the marker named in this parameter
must be one of the markers on which the specified force acts.
geometry create shape frustum

Allows for creation of the frustum object.
Format:

frustum_name = a new frustum
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
length= length
side_count_for_body= integer
top_radius= length
bottom_radius = length
Example:
geometry create shape frustum &

frustum_name = frustum__1 &
adams_id = 101 &
comments = "a new frustum" &
center_marker= origin &
angle_extent= 150 &
length= 10 &
side_count_for_body = 10
Description:

frustum_name A New Frustum Specifies the name of the new frustum
Adams data file
modified.
geometry 63

the center marker.
side_count_for_body Integer Specifies the number of flat sides Adams/View draws
on a cylinder or a frustum.
top_radius Length Specifies the radius at the top of a frustum.
bottom_radius Length Specifies the radius at the bottom of a frustum.
Adams/View uses to draw the circles at the ends of a
cylinder or a frustum.
1. A frustum is a specialized cone whose top and bottom are perpendicular to the cone central axis.
A frustum will move with the part that the center marker belongs to.
2. You may use the name specified by the frustum_name parameter later to refer to this frustum.
Adams/View will not allow you to have two frustums with the same full name, so you must
yourself.
7. The top of the furstum is perpendicular to the center marker z-axis, and the center of the top is at
the position on the center marker z-axis that LENGTH specifies. Also, The bottom is
perpendicular to the center marker z-axis, and the center of the bottom is at the center marker
origin.
geometry 65
geometry create shape gcontact

Allows you to create a new contact force graphic object.
Format:

contact_force_name = a new contact_force_graphic
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
contact_element_name = an existing contact element
force_display= force_display_options
Example:
geometry create shape gcontact &

contact_force_name = gcontact__1 &
adams_id = 1 &
comments = "a new contact force graphic" &
contact_element_name = sphere_plane_contact_5 &
force_display = both
Description:

contact_force_name A New Contact_force_graphic Specifies the name of the contact force
graphic to be created
adams_id Adams_id Assigns a unique ID number to the
geometry
comments String Adds any comments about the geometry to
help you manage and identify it.
contact_element_name An Existing Contact Element Specifies the name of the contact element
whose force is to be displayed by the force
graphic.
force_display Force_display_options Specifies the options for displaying the
force graphics
1. A gcontact is a force graphic for a contact element. The gcontact can display graphics for
component or aggregate forces of a contact.
• none - Displays no force graphics.
• components - Displays force graphics for the normal force, friction force, and torque at each
incident of a contact for each frame. Multiple incidents at a frame display multiple force
graphics.
• aggregate - Displays force graphics for the sum of all forces (normal and friction) and all
torques on the contact at each frame. Sums multiple incidents at a frame and displays one force
graphic.
• both - Displays both component and aggregate force graphics.
geometry 67
geometry create shape link

Allows for creation of the link object.
Format:

link_name = a new glink
comments = string
i_marker = an existing marker
j_marker = an existing marker
width = length
depth = length
Example:
geometry create shape link &

link_name = LINK__1 &
comments = "a new link" &
i_marker = MK124 &
j_marker = MK112 &
width = 25 &
depth = 5
Description:

link_name A New Glink Specifies the name of the new link
i_marker An Existing Marker Specifies the marker at one end of a link object.
j_marker An Existing Marker Specifies the marker at one end of a link object.
width Length Specifies the width of the link.
depth Length Specifies the depth of the link.
1. A link is a three-dimensional object used to represent a connecting part. It has its length defined
by the distance between I_MARKER and the J_MARKER. It also has a WIDTH and DEPTH
that may be specified. The ends of the link are semi-circular. The J_MARKER must lie in the XY
plane of the I_MARKER.
2. You may use the name specified by the link_name parameter later, to refer to this link.
Adams/View will not allow you to have two links with the same full name, so you must provide
a unique name.
Cautions:
1. The j_marker must lie along the i_marker's x-axis and it must have the same orientation as the
i_marker.
i_marker.
geometry 69
geometry create shape nurb_surf

Format:

nurb_surf_name = new surf_name
comments = string
udegree = integer
vdegree = integer
rational = boolean
uperiodic = boolean
vperiodic = boolean
num_uctrlpts = integer
num_vctrlpts = integer
control_points = location
weights = real
uknots = real
vknots = real
Description:

nurb_surf_name New Surface Name Specifies the name of the nurb surface created. You can refer
to this geometry in future using this name.
comments String Specifies any comments to be associated with the nurb
surface geometry created.
udegree Integer Specifies an integer greater than 0 and less than or equal to
20.
vdegree Integer Specifies an integer greater than 0 and less than or equal to
20.
rational Yes/no Specifies a Boolean value
uperiodic Yes/no Specifies a Boolean value
vperiodic Yes/no Specifies a Boolean value
num_uctrlpts Integer Specifies the number of control points.
num_vctrlpts Integer Specifies the number of control points.
control_points Location Specifies the location of the control points.

weights Real Specifies the weight.
uknots Real Specifies a real number
vknots Real Specifies a real number
geometry 71
geometry create shape picture

Allows you to create a picture.
Format:

picture_name = new picture
image_file_name = name of image
height = integer
location = location
Example:
geometry create shape picture &

picture_name = picture_1 &
image_file_name = "c:\documents and settings\car.jpg" &
height = 50
Description:

picture_name New Picture Specifies the new picture to be created.
image_file_name String Specifies the file name containing the image.
height Integer Specifies the height of the picture.
location Location Specifies the location of the picture.
geometry create shape plane

Allows you to create a two-dimensional box.
Plane Tool is a two-dimensional box that gets created. You can draw a plane’s length and width in
the plane of the screen or the working grid, if it is turned on. You will find planes most useful when you
are creating contact forces between objects
When you create a plane, you can select to create a new part consisting of the plane geometry or add the
plane geometry to an existing part or ground. If you create a new part, it has no mass since it is composed
of only wire geometry.
Format:

plane_name = new plane
adams_id = integer
comments = string
x_minimum = real
x_maximum = real
y_minimum = real
y_maximum = real
Example:
geometry create shape plane &

plane_name = plane_1 &
ref_marker_name = marker_5 &
x_minimum = 100 &
x_maximum = 500.9 &
y_minimum = 100 &
y_maximum = 788
geometry 73
Description:

plane_name New Plane Name Specifies the name of the plane to be created.
adams_id Integer Assigns a unique ID number to the plane.
Comments String Adds any comments about the plane that you want to enter to
help you manage and identify it.
ref_marker_name Existing Marker Specifies the reference marker used to locate and orient the
plane.
x_minimum Real Specifies the location of one corner of the plane in coordinates
relative to the reference marker
x_maximum Real Specifies the location of the opposite corner of the plane in
coordinates relative to the reference marker.
y_minimum Real Specifies the location of one corner of the plane in coordinates
relative to the reference marker. If all values are positive, the
values indicate the lower left corner of the plane.
y_maximum Real Specifies the location of the opposite corner of the plane in
coordinates relative to the reference marker.
of any length.
2. An Adams/Solver ID is an integer used to identify the element in the Adams/Solver dataset (.adm)
file. You only need to specify an ID number if you have user-written subroutines.
3. Enter a 0 to have Adams/Solver assign the ID for you.
4. For comments, you can enter any alphanumeric characters. The comments that you create appear
in the Information window when you select to display information about the object, in the
Adams/View log file, and in a command or dataset file when you export your model to these types
of files. (Note that design variables are not output to datasets; therefore, neither are their
comments.)
5. If all values of x_minimum,y_minimum,x_maximum,y_maximum are positive, the values
indicate the lower left corner of the plane. For example, the values of x_minimum = 10 and
y_minimum = 20, place the lower left corner at 10,20 in the reference marker's coordinate system.
geometry 75
geometry create shape plate

Allows you to create a plate object.
Format:

plate_name = a new plate
comments = string
width = length
radius = length
Example:
geometry create shape plate &

plate_name = plate__1 &
comments = "a new plate" &
marker_name = mk112 , mk124 , cm &
width = 15 &
radius = 5
Description:

plate_name A New Plate Specifies a new plate object
width Length Specifies the width of the plate
radius Length Specifies the plate radius
2. Many entities are attached to, or otherwise associated with, a specific marker. You use the
marker_name parameter to identify that marker. You may identify a marker by typing its name or
by picking it from the screen.
geometry 77
geometry create shape revolution

Allows for creation of the revolution object.
Format:

revolution_name = a new revolution
adams_id = Adams id
comments = string
number_of_sides = integer
Example:
geometry create shape revolution &

revolution_name = revolution__1 &
comments = "a new revolution" &
profile_curve = circle__1 &
angle_extent = 50 &
number_of_sides = 10 &
analytical = no
Description:

revolution_name A New Specifies the name of the new revolution.
Revolution
data file.
reference_marker An Existing Specifies the marker used to place and orient a revolution.
Marker
Gwire revolution.
revolution.
angle_extent Angle Specifies a subtended angle measured positive (according to
the right-hand rule) about the z-axis of the center marker.
number_of_sides Integer Specifies the number of flat sides Adams/View draws on a
revolution.
relative_to An Existing Specifies the coordinate system that location coordinates are
Model, Part Or with respect to.
Marker
analytical Boolean
1. A revolution is defined by a profile polyline curve which is revolved about the Z axis of the
marker named 'REFERENCE_MARKER='. The profile curve is a polyline that is in the X-Y
plane of its parent part. Z coordinate values of the profile curve are ignored. The revolution will
move with the part which owns the reference marker.
2. You may use the name specified by the revolution_name parameter, later to refer to this
revolution. Adams/View will not allow you to have two revolutions with the same full name, so
geometry 79
4. For the profile_curve parameter, you may specify an arc, circle, spline curve, polyline, or outline.
The coordinates of the object points, relative to the object's parent part, will be used to define a
profile relative to the revolution's reference marker. The profile defined by the points will be
swept around the reference marker's z-axis.
Tips:
geometry create shape shell

Allows you to create the shell object.
Format:

shell_name = a new shell
comments= string
file_name= string
wireframe_only= boolean
Example:
geometry create shape shell &

shell_name = shell__1 &
comments = " a new shell" &
reference_marker= mk112 &
file_name= "c:\shell1.shl" &
wireframe_only = no
Description:

shell_name A New Shell Specifies the name of the new shell.
reference_marker An Existing Specifies the marker used to place and orient a shell.
Marker
file_name String Specifies the name of a file that contains the definition of the
shell.
wireframe_only Boolean
1. A shell is defined by a number of node points and the connectivity between those node points.
The shell is represented as polygons defined by connecting node points with straight line
segments.
geometry 81
Polygons are not necessarily flat. The points and connectivety are read from a file named
"FILE_NAME=". The shell is placed at the marker named "REFERENCE_MARKER=". The
shell will move with the part that owns the reference marker.
2. You may use the name specified by the shell_name parameter later to refer to this shell.
Adams/View will not allow you to have two shells with the same name, so you must provide a
unique name.
Shell file format: The first line in a shell file has the form: int int float. The first integer represents
the number of points in the shell file. The second integer represents the number of polygons are
described in the file. The float value represent a scaling factor which is applied to all of the point
coordinates.
The lines immediately following the first line consist of the x, y, and z coordinate floating point
values for the points. There is one xyz triplet per line. You may use multiple spaces or tabs to
separate the x, y, and z values.
Immediately following the coordinate values are the lines for defining the polygon connectivity.
The first number on one of these lines is the number of vertices that should be connected to form
the polygon. The following integers are the offsets into the list of points. For example, 4 5 6 2
1 means that the polygon will be formed by 4 points and those points are the 5th, 6th, 2nd, and
1st points in the list of points in the shell file. Note that it is not necessary to explicitly close each
polygon by going back to the start point. You may use multiple spaces or tabs to separate the
values.
A sample shell file for a cube:
861.0
-1.0-1.01.0
-1.0 1.0 1.0
1.0 1.0 1.0
1.0 -1.01.0
-1.0-1.0 -1.0
-1.0 1.0 -1.0
1.0 1.0 -1.0
1.0 -1.0 -1.0
41234
45621
3267
43784
41485
48765
geometry 83
geometry create shape solid_shell

Allows you to create a solid shell. A solid shell is an internal function used to map STEP and IGES faces
to view. The solid shell object was created to combine a number of these faces as a solid.
Surface-based solid modeling is the least common modeling method used to define solids. Using this
method, the solid is defined as the internal volume surrounded by the defining surfaces.
Format:

solid_shell_name = new solid_shell
faces = existing face
Example:
geometry create shape solid_shell &

solid_shell_name = solid_shell_1 &
faces = face_1
Description:

Solid_shell_name New solid shell Specifies the name of the solid to be created
faces Existing face Specifies the faces making up the solid shell.
of any length.
during preprocessing, you will have given it a name at that time.
more MSC Adams output files (graphics (.gra), request (.req), or results (.res)). By
default, the name of the analysis is the root name of the MSC Adams output files
without the extension. If you created the analysis by reading an MSC Adams
graphics file, for example, the analysis name is the name of the graphics file
without the .gra extension
geometry 85
geometry create shape spring_damper

Allows you to create the graphics spring damper object.
A spring-damper is a graphic representation of a spring and damper drawn between two markers. The
spring damper stretches along the axis created by its I and J markers.
The figure below illustrates the display options you can set.
The diameter_of_spring parameter defines the diameter of the spring, while damper_diameter_at_ij
defines the diameters of the dampers at the I and J markers.
The number of coils drawn in the spring is defined using coil_count. The distances between the ends of
the dampers and the I and J markers is defined using tip_length_at_ij. The lengths of the damper caps at
the I and J markers is defined using cup_length_at_ij.
Format:

spring_damper_name = new spring damper
adams_id = integer
comments = string
coil_count = integer
diameter_of_spring = length
damper_diameter_at_ij = length
tip_length_at_ij = length
cup_length_at_ij = length
Description:

spring_damper_name New Spring Damper Specifies the name of the spring-damper graphic to be
created
adams_id Integer Assigns a unique ID number to the geometry.
comments String Adds comments about the graphic that you want to
enter to help you manage and identify it.
i_marker_name Existing Marker Specifies a marker on the first of two parts connected
by this spring-damper graphic.
j_marker_name Existing Marker Specifies a marker on the second of two parts
connected by this spring-damper graphic.
coil_count Integer Enter the number of coils drawn in the spring.
diameter_of_spring Length Specifies the diameter of the spring.
damper_diameter_at_ij Length Specifies the diameters of the damper cups in a spring-

damper graphic.
tip_length_at_ij Length Specifies the distances between the ends of the
dampers and the I and J markers.
cup_length_at_ij Length Specifies the length of the damper cups in a spring-
damper graphic.
of any length.
geometry 87
Enter a 0 to have Adams/Solver assign the ID for you.
3. Adams/View draws this graphic between one part at the I marker and the other at the J marker.
4. For the damper_diameter_at_ij, the first value defines the diameter of the cup at the I marker. The
second value defines the diameter of the cup at the J marker.
5. For the cup_length_at_ij parameter, the first value defines the length of the cup at I marker.
AdamsAdams/View measures the length from the bottom of the cup to its top along the line that
I and J define.
The second value defines the length of the cup at J. Adams/View measures the length from the
bottom of the cup to the top along the line that I and J define.
geometry create shape torus

Allows for creation of the torus object.
Format:

torus_name = a new torus
adams_id = Adams id
comments = string
side_count_for_perimeter = integer
Example:
geometry create shape torus &

torus_name = torus__1 &
comments= "a new torus" &
major_radius= 10 &
minor_radius = 5 &
side_count_for_perimeter = 10 &
segment_count = 10
Description:

torus_name A New Torus Specifies the name of the new torus
Adams data file.
modified.
geometry 89

the center marker.
major_radius Length The parameter is used to specify the radius for the
circular spine of the torus.
minor_radius Length The parameter is used to specify the radius for the
circular cross-sections of the torus.
side_count_for_perime Integer The parameter is used to specify the number
ter
of circular cross-sections to create along the spine of
the torus.
segment_count Integer The SEGMENT_COUNT parameter is used to specify
the number of sides for
each of the circular cross-sections of the torus.
1. A torus is defined by a circular spine with a circular cross-section at each point on the spine. The
torus is placed at the marker named 'CENTER_MARKER='. The radius for the circular spine of
the torus is defined by the MAJOR_RADIUS parameter. The radius for the circular cross-
sections is defined by the MINOR_RADIUS parameter. The number of circular cross-sections to
create along the spine may be specified with the SIDE_COUNT_FOR_PERIMETER parameter.
The number of sides for each of the circular cross-sections may be specified with the
SEGMENT_COUNT parameter. The torus will move with the part which owns the center
marker.
2. You may use the name specified by the torus_name parameter, later to refer to this torus.
Adams/View will not allow you to have two tori with the same full name, so you must provide a
unique name.
5. The angle specified by the angle_extent parameter starts at the positive x-axis of the center marker
and subtends the arc, the arc of the cylinder, or the arc of the cone frustum.
Tips:
geometry 91
geometry delete
geometry delete
Allows you to delete an existing piece of geometry.
Format:
geometry delete
geometry_name= an existing geometric entity
Example:
geometry delete &

geometry_name = LINK_56
Description:

geometry_name An Existing Geometric Entity Specifies the geometry to delete.
1. You must enter the name of the geometry you wish to delete by either picking it from the screen
You may identify geometry by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
Cautions:
geometry delete
Tips:
geometry 93
geometry modify curve arc

Allows for modification of the arc object.
Format:

arc_name = an existing arc
new_arc_name = a new arc
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
radius = length
close = arc_closure
Example:
geometry modify curve arc &

arc_nameb = ARC__1 &
new_arc_name = ARC__2 &
adams_id = 2 &
comments = "a new arc" &
center_marker = Origin &
radius = 10 &
segment_count = 10 &
close = sector
Description:

arc_name An Existing Arc Specifies the name of an existing arc.
new_arc_name A New Arc Specifies the name of the new arc.

Adams data file.
modified.
(according to the
right-hand rule) about the z-axis of the center marker

ref_radius_by_marker An Existing Specifies the radius of a circle, an arc, or a cylinder to
Marker be the distance from the center marker Z axis to this
radius marker.
close Arc_closure Specifies the type of closure to perform when
Adams/View creates the arc.
1. Arcs are truncated circles that can be closed into a pie shape or using a cord between the end
points.
An arc is a 2 dimensional graphics image which is defined as a curve with a specified radius drawn
around a center marker. The length of the arc is determined by the angle_extent, and its
smoothness by the number of segments in the arc. The radius can be given explicitly by using the
'RADIUS=' parameter, or by using the 'ref_radius_by_marker' parameter, If
'REF_RADIUS_BY_MARKER' is used, a radius will be calculated from the center marker. An
arc will move with the center marker given in the parameter 'CENTER_MARKER'.
2. You may use this name later to refer to this arc. Adams/View will not allow you to have two arcs
with the same full name, so you must provide a unique name.
geometry 95
yourself.
7. When you specify 'NO' for the ‘close’ parameter, Adams/View will create a 2 dimensional arc.
'NO' is the default value. When you specify 'CHORD' for this parameter, Adams/View will close
the arc from the starting point, to the ending point on the arc.
When you specify 'SECTOR' for this parameter, Adams/View will close the arc, such that a "pie"
shape is created.
Cautions:
geometry modify curve bspline

Allows you to modify an existing bspline.
Format:

bspline_name = a new gcurve
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
ref_curve_name = an existing acurve
ref_profile_name = an existing Wire_Geometry
spread_points = boolean
close = boolean
Examples:
geometry modify curve bspline &

new_bspline_name = gcurve__2 &
adams_id = 100 &
comments = "a modifed bspline" &
ref_marker_name = origin&
ref_curve_name = curve__1&
segment_count = 100
geometry modify curve bspline &

adams_id = 100 &
ref_profile_name = CHAIN_1 &
closed = yes &
geometry 97
Description:

bspline_name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing BSPLINE to modify
Gcurve
new_bspline_name A New Gcurve Specifies the name of the new BSPLINE.
modified.
ref_curve_name An Existing Specifies an existing CURVE that will be used to
Acurve create and display the BSPLINE geometric element.
ref_marker_name An Existing Specifies an existing MARKER that will be used to
Marker locate and orient the BSPLINE geometric element.
ref_profile_name An Existing Wire Specifies an existing GWire geometry, from which to
Geometry create and display the BSPLINE geometric element.
spread_points Boolean Specifies whether the bspline be created in a way that
the points (as defined by a reference profile) are
equally spaced or otherwise. The parameter will be
ignored if a ref_curve_name is specified.
closed Boolean Specifies whether that the generated bspline is a
closed one or otherwise.
num_new_pts Integer Specifies the number of points on the created bspline.
The parameter is valid only if the spread_points
parameter is set to 'yes' (and as such can be valid only
when a reference profile is specified).
segment_count Integer Specifies the number of polynomial segments
Adams/View uses for fitting the CURVE_POINTS
when FIT_TYPE is set to CURVE_POINTS.
1. To create a BSPLINE you must first create a CURVE DATA_ELEMENT or specify an existing
GWire geometry. The CURVE definition depends on first creating a MATRIX of control points
or a user-subroutine.
references a CURVE for its definition and a REF_MARKER for it position. A single CURVE can
be referenced by multiple BSPLINEs.
For completeness the CURVE definition is repeated below.
A CURVE element defines a three-dimensional parametric curve that may be referenced by

x = cos(u)
y = sin(u)
z = u
Adams/View allows you to create curves in three ways: by entering control points for a uniform
A uniform B-spline is a piecewise cubic polynomial spline used in many CAD (computer-aided-
A more direct way to define the curve is to supply curve points.
In order to use a different type of curve, or to model an analytically-defined curve such as the
+1, respectively.
geometry 99
contact.
2. You may use the name specified by the bspline_name parameter, later to refer to this BSPLINE.
Adams/View will not allow you to have two BSPLINEs with the same full name, so you must
yourself.
element.
time.
associated with it.
6. The reference marker must exist before the BSPLINE can be created.
This marker acts as a coordinate reference for the coordinate values used to define the CURVE
that acts as a template for the creation of the bspline.
A BSPLINE is the geometric counterpart to the CURVE data_element.The difference being that
geometry 101

element.
time.
associated with it.
8. The segment_count parameter is not used if you have specified the FIT_TYPE as
CONTROL_POINTS.
For an open CURVE, Adams/View will default to a SEGMENT_COUNT that is three less than
the number of CURVE_POINTS, which gives an exact fit to the CURVE_POINTS. Specifying
fewer segments will result in a smoother curve, but the curve will not pass exactly through the
CURVE_POINTS. You must specify at least four CURVE_POINTS to create an open curve.
less than the number of CURVE_POINTS, the computed curve will exactly match the curve
points. If you specify fewer segments, Adams will use a least-squares fit to compute the closest
fit to the points.
Closed curves must be defined by at least eight CURVE_POINTS, and may have a maximum of
five segments less than the number of CURVE_POINTS. For a closed curve defined by
CURVE_POINTS, Adams will default a SEGMENT_COUNT of five segments less than the
number of CURVE_POINTS.
Note that because three segments less than the number of curve points are required for an exact
fit, a closed curve will not exactly fit the curve points.
9. The 'spread_points' parameter when specified to ‘yes’, in conjunction with a reference profile
(otherwise the parameter is invalid and will be ignored) specifies that the set of points generated
for the bspline are such that they are equally spaced. Thus specifying the parameter to ‘yes’,
means use of a different algorithm for generating a bspline (from the gwire geometry), wherein
all the points on the bspline are equally spaced).
10. The 'num_new_pts' is valid only when the spread points parameter is set to ‘yes’ (otherwise the
parameter will be ignored). The parameter defines the number of points generated for the bspline
using the new algorithm. Note that the points will be equally spaced.
11. The 'closed' parameter is a Boolean value that specifies whether the generated bspline is a closed
curve or otherwise.
geometry 103
geometry modify curve chain

Format:

chain_name = a new chain
new_chain_name = a new chain
comments = string
objects_in_chain = an existing gwire
Example:
geometry modify curve chain &

chain_name = CHAIN__1 &
new_chain_name = CHAIN__2
Description:

chain_name A New Chain Specifies the name of the chain you want to create
or modify
new_chain_name A New Chain Specifies a new name for the geometry
modified.
objects_in_chain An Existing Gwire Specifies the geometry to be chained together
1. The geometry to be chained together must touch at one endpoint and cannot be closed geometry.
It adds the final chained geometry to the part that owns the first geometry that you selected.
geometry modify curve circle

Allows for modification of an existing circle object.
Format:

circle_name = an existing circle
new_circle_name = a new circle
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
radius = length
Example:
geometry modify curve circle &

circle_name= circle__1 &
new_circle_name = circle__2 &
adams_id = 10 &
comments = "a modified circle" &
radius= 10 &
segment_count= 10
Description:

circle_name An Existing Specifies the name of the new circle.
Circle
new_circle_name A New Circle Specifies the name of the new circle.
the Adams data file
modified.
geometry 105

center_marker An Existing Specifies the marker at the center of a circle, an arc,
Marker the bottom of a cylinder, or the bottom of a frustum.
ref_radius_by_marker An Existing Specifies the radius of a circle, an arc, or a cylinder to
Marker be the distance from the center marker Z axis to this
radius marker.
1. The circle is segmented and therfore can look like a square or triangle if needed.
The circle is defined as a radius drawn around a center marker. The circle's orientation is
dependent upon the orientation of its center marker. Its radius is determined by either the
'REF_RADIUS_BY_MARKER' or 'RADIUS=' parameter. The number of sides on the circle is
controlled by the 'SEGMENT_COUNT=' parameter. A circle will move with the part its center
marker is located on.
2. You may use the name specified by the circle_name parameter later to refer to this circle.
Adams/View will not allow you to have two circles with the same full name, so you must provide
a unique name.
yourself.
Cautions:
geometry 107
geometry modify curve ellipse

Allows for modification of an existing ellipse object.
Format:

ellipse_name = an existing ellipse
new_ellipse_name= a new ellipse
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
start_angle = angle
end_angle = angle
Example:
geometry modify curve ellipse &

ellipse_name= ELLIPSE__1 &
new_ellipse_name = ELLIPSE__2 &
comments = "a modified ellipse" &
center_marker = Origin &
major_radius = 10 &
minor_radius = 6 &
start_angle = 0 &
end_angle = 180
Description:

ellipse_name An Existing Specifies an existing ellipse object
Ellipse
new_ellipse_name A New Ellipse Specifies a new ellipse object

modified.
center_marker An Existing Specifies the marker at the center of a circle, an arc,
Marker the bottom of a cylinder, or the bottom of a frustum.
major_radius Length The MAJOR_RADIUS parameter is used to specify
the radius for the circular spine of the torus.
minor_radius Length The MINOR_RADIUS parameter is used to specify
the radius for the

start_angle Angle
end_angle Angle
yourself.
geometry 109
geometry modify curve outline

Allows for modification of an existing outline object.
Format:

outline_name = an existing outline
new_outline_name = a new outline
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
visibility_between_markers = on_off
image_file_name = string
horizontal= clamp_repeat
vertical= clamp_repeat
close= boolean
Example:
geometry modify curve outline &

outline_name = OUTLINE__1 &
new_outline_name = OUTLINE__2 &
adams_id = 1 &
comments = "modifying an existing outline" &
marker_name = Origin , CM &
visibility_between_markers = on &
close = yes
Description:

outline_name An Existing Outline Specifies the name of an existing outline
new_outline_name A New Outline Specifies the name of a new outline

modified.
visibility_between_mark On_off Specifies whether the outline is visible between two
ers markers.
image_file_name String Specifies the name of an image file on disk. File
types supported include .bmp, .jpg, .gif, and .png.
horizontal Clamp_repeat Controls how the desired polygon is horizontally
vertical Clamp_repeat Controls how the desired polygon is vertically filled
with the image
close Boolean Specifies the whether or not Adams/View should
close the outline when it is created.
1. Outlines are line segments (open or closed) that are define by a series of markers.
An outline is composed of at least two and not more than 2500 markers. These markers are
connected by line segments to form the outline.
If all of the markers of an outline lie on the same part, the parent of the outline is this part, and the
outline moves with this part.
If some of the markers lie on different parts, the parent of the outline is the model. As the parts
move, the outline is stretched or "rubber-banded" to fit the new marker locations.
2. You may use the name specified by the new_outline_name later, to refer to this graphic.
Adams/View will not allow you to have two outlines with the same full name, so you must
geometry 111
3. Specifies the outline to modify. You use this parameter to identify the existing outline to affect
with this command.
You may identify an outline by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the outline is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it convenient
to type the name even if the outline is displayed.
If you created the outline by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the outline name is the
letters OUT followed by the Adams data set outline ID number. The name of Adams
GRAPHIC/101, OUTLINE is OUT101, for example. If you created the outline during
If an outline is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify a outline under another part, for instance, you may need to
enter the model and part names as well. For example, you may specify outline 'profile' on part
'cam' from model 'gizmo' by entering ".gizmo.cam.profile". If you type a "?", Adams/View will
list the outlines available by default.
Note that outlines may be children of models or parts, depending on whether all the markers are
on the same part.
You must separate multiple outline names by commas.
If the outline is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
You need not separate multiple outline picks by commas.
yourself.
6. Many entities are attached to, or otherwise associated with, a specific marker. You use this
parameter to identify that marker.
7. When you create an outline, by default a line will be drawn between each of the markers specified.
Using the VISIBILITY_BETWEEN_MARKERS parameter, you can turn turn off the visibility
between desired markers. For example, the following commands:
model create model_name=MOD1 marker create marker=MAR1
location=1,1,0
marker create marker=MAR2 location=2,1,0 marker create
marker=MAR3
location=2,2,0 marker create marker=MAR4 location=1,2,0
geometry
create curve outline outline_name=.MOD1.ground.OUT1 &
marker_name=MAR1,MAR2,MAR3,MAR4 &
visibility_between_markers=ON,ON,OFF,ON
will draw lines from MAR1 to MAR2, and from MAR3 to MAR4 there will be no line segment
from MAR2 to MAR3.
If you specify the VISIBILITY_BETWEEN_MARKERS parameter with less values than the
number of markers, the rest of the visibilities will default to ON. If for example you have an
outline with some of the visibilities turned off and you want to turn them all on, you can specify
a single ON value.
When you render the outline in solid or shaded mode, each of the contiguously visible segments
will be rendered as objets. In the above example, the outline would not be draw as a solid object,
but as two lines.
Setting the visibility to OFF for a marker is equivalent to using a negative marker id on the
OUTLINE statement in the Adams DATA SET.
geometry 113
8. When you specify 'NO' for the ‘close’ parameter, Adams/View will create a outline through the
markers specified, and will not attempt to close the start and end points with an additional line
segment. 'NO' is the default value.
When you specify 'YES' for this parameter, Adams/View will create the outline, through the
markers specified, and add an additional line segment from the end marker to the starting marker.
geometry modify curve polyline

Specifies the POLYLINE to modify.
Format:

polyline_name = a existing polyline
new_polyline_name = a new polyline
comments = string
location = location
close = boolean
Example:
geometry modify curve polyline &

polyline_name = POLYLINE__1 &
location = 1,5,3 &
image_file_name = "C:\users\ashish\image"
Description:

polyline_name Existing Polyline Specifies an existing POLYLINE.
NEW_POLYLINE_NAME A New Polyline Specifies the name of the new POLYLINE.
location Location Specifies the locations to be used to define
the polyline.
path_curve An Existing Gwire Specifies the locations to be used to define
the polyline from an existing graphical
object.
relative_to An Existing Model, Part Or Specifies the coordinate system that
Marker location coordinates are with respect to.
close Boolean Specifies if the polyline is to be open or
closed
geometry 115
1. Specifies the POLYLINE to modify. You use this parameter to identify the existing POLYLINE
to affect with this command.
You may identify a POLYLINE by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the POLYLINE is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it
convenient to type the name even if the POLYLINE is displayed.
Since a POLYLINE can not be defined in an Adams data set or graphics file, the POLYLINE can
not be created by reading in one of these files. The only way to create a POLYLINE is to do it
interactively, by reading a command file, or by reading an IGES file. POLYLINEs are owned
by parts.
If a POLYLINE is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. You may
need to enter the full name of the POLYLINE if you wish to identify a POLYLINE that is not on
the default PART. For example, you may specify POLYLINE "front_face" on the part named
"shell" from the model named "test" by entering ".test.shell.front_face". If you type a "?",
Adams/View will list the POLYLINEs available by default.
You must separate multiple POLYLINE names by commas.
If the POLYLINE is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
2. You may identify a POLYLINE by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the POLYLINE is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it
convenient to type the name even if the POLYLINE is displayed.
Since a POLYLINE can not be defined in an Adams data set or graphics file, the POLYLINE can
not be created by reading in one of these files. The only way to create a POLYLINE is to do it
interactively, by reading a command file, or by reading an IGES file. POLYLINEs are owned
by parts.
If a POLYLINE is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. You may
You need not separate multiple POLYLINE picks by commas.
3. Specifies the name of the new POLYLINE. You may use this name later to refer to this
POLYLINE. Adams/View will not allow you to have two POLYLINE with the same full name,
6. The PATH_CURVE is any member of the WIRE_GEOMETRY class (which includes arcs,
circles, spline curves, polylines and outlines). When you specify a PATH_CURVE, the values of
the vertices are extracted from the specified object and used to compose the polyline.
8. If closed, the polyline can be filled (i.e. shaded). The end points of the polyline do not need to be
coincident for you to close it. By setting the CLOSED parameter to "YES" the two end points
will be connected with a line segment. If the CLOSE parameter is set to "NO" the polyline will
appear as a segmented curve.
Cautions:
1. You need not separate multiple POLYLINE picks by commas.
geometry 117
geometry modify feature blend

Allows you to modify a chamfer or fillet (blend) on a vertex or edge on a rigid body.
Format:

blend_name= an existing blend
new_blend_name = a new blend
radius1= length
radius2= length
Example:
geometry modify feature blend &

blend_name = blend__1 &
blend_name = blend__2 &
radius1 = 0.15
Description:

blend_name An Existing Blend Specifies the name of an existing blend to be
modified.
new_blend_name A New Blend Specifies the new name of the blend being modified
radius1 Length Specifies the width of the chamfer bevel or radius of
the fillet.
radius2 Length Specifies the end radius for a fillet. Adams/View uses
the value you enter for radius1 as the starting radius of
the variable fillet.
geometry modify feature hole

Allows you to modify a hole feature.
Format:

hole_name = an existing hole
new_hole_name = a new hole
subid = integer
center = location
countersink = boolean
radius = length
depth = length
Example:
geometry modify feature hole &

hole_name = hole__1 &
subid = 12 &
center = 10 , 2 , 1 &
countersink = yes &
radius = 3 &
depth = 4
Description:

hole_name An Existing Hole Specifies the name of an existing hole to be modified
new_hole_name A New Hole Specifies a new name for the hole being modified
subid Integer Specifies the Parasolid tag identifying the face on which
the hole or boss will be created.
center Location Specifies the location of the center of the hole or boss on
the object.
countersink Boolean Specifies whether to create a hole or a boss
radius Length Specifies radius of the hole or boss.
depth Length Specifies depth of the hole or the height of the boss.
geometry 119
1. You can use the name specified by the hole_name parameter, later to refer to this entity.
2. The countersink parameter specifies whether to create a hole or a boss:
• yes - Creates a boss.
• no - Creates a hole.
Cautions:
1. You cannot specify the radius and depth of a hole so that it splits the current geometry into two
separate geometries.
geometry modify feature thinshell

Allows you to modify an existing thinshell.
Format:

thin_shell_name= a new thin_shell
subids= integer
thickness = length
Example:
geometry modify feature thinshell &

thin_shell_name = thin_shell__1 &
subids= 10 &
thickness= 0.15
Description:

thin_shell_name An Existing Thin_shell Specifies the name of an existing thin shell to
be modified.
new_thin_shell_nam A New Thin_shell Specifies the new name for the thinshell
e being modified.
thickness Length Specifies the thickness of the remaining shell
after you hollow the object.
1. You can use the name specified by the thin_shell_name parameter, later to refer to this entity.
geometry 121
geometry modify point

Modifies an existing location in three-dimensional space upon which you can build your model.
Format:

point_name= an existing point
new_point_name = a new point
adams_id = integer
comments = string
Example:
geometry modify point &

point_name= point__1 &
new_point_name= point__2 &
adams_id = 1 &
comments = “modifying a point” &
ref_marker_name = marker_1
Description:

point_name An Existing Point Specifies the name of the point to create or modify.
new_point_name A New Point Specifies the ‘new name’ for an existing point.
adams_id Adams_id Assigns a unique ID number to the geometry.
comments String Adds any comments about the geometry to help you
manage and identify it.
ref_marker An Existing Specifies a marker that defines the location of the point
Marker
geometry 123
geometry modify shape block

Allows modification of the block object
Format:

block_name= an existing block
new_block_name= a new block
comments= string
corner_marker= an existing marker
diag_corner_coords= length
Example:
geometry modify shape block &

block_name = box__1 &
new_block_name = box__2 &
corner_marker = marker_82 &
diag_corner_coords = 2,4,6
Description:

block_name An Existing Block Specifies the block to modify
new_block_name A New Block Specifies the name of the new block
modified.
corner_marker An Existing Marker Specifies the marker that defines the anchor point for the
definition of a block.
diag_corner_coords Length Specifies the location (x, y, z) of the opposite diagonal
corner from the corner_marker for a block. These
coordinates are with respect to the corner marker x, y, and
z axes. This location, along with the corner_marker,
define the boundaries of the block.
1. A block is a box with parallel edges and orthogonal vertices. You position and orient a block by
means of a corner marker. You specify the dimensions of the box by supplying three coordinates
for the opposite corner.
2. Specifies the block to modify. You use this parameter to identify the existing block to affect with
this command.
You may identify a block by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the block is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it convenient
to type the name even if the block is displayed.
If you created the block by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the block name is the letters
BOX followed by the Adams data set block ID number. The name of Adams GRAPHIC/101,
BOX is BOX101, for example. If you created the block during preprocessing, you gave it a name
at that time.
If a block is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify a block under a different part, for instance, you may need to
enter the model and part names as well. For example, you may specify block 101 from the model
named test, on the part name arm, by entering ".test.arm.box101". If you type a "?", Adams/View
will list the blocks available by default.
You must separate multiple block names by commas.
If the block is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking it.
3. Specifies the name of the new block. You may use this name later to refer to this block.
Adams/View will not allow you to have two blocks with the same full name, so you must provide
a unique name.
4. These coordinates are with respect to the corner marker x, y, and z axes. This location, along with
the corner_marker, define the boundaries of the block.
geometry 125
Cautions:
1. You need not separate multiple block picks by commas.
geometry modify shape cylinder

Allows modification of the cylinder object.
Format:

cylinder_name= an existing cylinder
new_cylinder_name= a new cylinder
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
center_marker= an existing marker
angle_extent= angle
length = length
radius= length
ref_radius_by_marker= an existing marker
side_count_for_body= integer
segment_count_for_ends= integer
Example:
geometry modify shape cylinder &

cylinder_name = CYLINDER__1 &
new_cylinder_name = CYLINDER__2 &
center_marker= MARKER_82 &
angle_extent = 60 &
length = 25 &
ref_radius_by_marker = MARKER_72
Description:

cylinder_name An Existing Cylinder Specifies the cylinder to modify
new_cylinder_name A New Cylinder A NEW CYLINDER
geometry 127

modified.
the bottom of a cylinder, or the bottom of a frustum
(according to the right-hand rule) about the z-axis
of the center marker.
Radius Length Specifies the radius of a circle, an arc, or a cylinder.
ref_radius_by_marker An Existing Marker Specifies the radius of a circle, an arc, or a cylinder
to be the distance from the center marker Z axis to
this radius marker.
side_count_for_body Integer Specifies the number of flat sides Adams/View
draws on a cylinder or a frustum.
Adams/View uses to draw the circles at the ends of
a cylinder or a frustum.
1. A cylinder is an extruded circle whose top and bottom are perpendicular to the cylinder central
axis. The cylinder is placed at the marker named 'CENTER_MARKER='. The circles at the top
and at the bottom of the cylinder have a radius specified by a radius, or radius reference marker.
The cylinder length is along the the positive z-axis of the center marker, and is specified by
'LENGTH='. The number of sides can be chosen using the 'SIDE_COUNT_FOR_BODY'
parameter. The number of edges on the end circles can be specified using the
'SEGMENT_COUNT_FOR_END=' parameter. The cylinder will move with the part who owns
the center marker.
2. Specifies the cylinder to modify. You use this parameter to identify the existing cylinder to affect
with this command.
You may identify a cylinder by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the cylinder is not visible on the screen, you must type the name.You may also find it
convenient to type the name even if the cylinder is displayed.
If you created the cylinder by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the cylinder name is the
letters CYL followed by the Adams data set cylinder ID number. The name of Adams
GRAPHIC/101, CYLINDER is CYL101, for example. If you created the cylinder during
If a cylinder is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify a cylinder under a different part, for instance, you may need
to enter the part and model names as well. For example, you may specify cylinder 'rod' on part
'arm' in model 'test' by entering ".test.arm.rod". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the
cylinders available by default.
You must separate multiple cylinder names by commas.
If the cylinder is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
3. Specifies the name of the new cylinder. You may use this name later to refer to this cylinder.
Adams/View will not allow you to have two cylinders with the same full name, so you must
assumed.You may, or course, delete this name and use your own. The form of a full name is:
yourself.
geometry 129
9. Adams/View stores the radius value, not the marker name. If you later move this marker, the
radius will not change.
Cautions:
1. You need not separate multiple cylinder picks by commas.
geometry modify shape ellipsoid

Allows modification of the ellipsoid object.
Format:

ellipsoid_name= existing ellipsoid
new_ellipsoid_name= a new ellipsoid
comments = string
center_marker= an existing marker
x_scale_factor= length
y_scale_factor = length
z_scale_factor= length
Example:
geometry modify shape ellipsoid &

ellipsoid_name = ellipsoid__1 &
new_ellipsoid_name = ellipsoid__2 &
center_marker = marker_74 &
x_scale_factor = 2
Description:

ellipsoid_name An Existing Ellipsoid Specifies the ellipsoid to modify.
new_ellipsoid_name A New Ellipsoid Specifies the name of the new ellipsoid
modified.
bottom of a cylinder, or the bottom of a frustum
x_scale_factor Length The X_SCALE_FACTOR parameter is used to specify
the scaling of the initial unit sphere along the center
marker's x axis.
geometry 131

y_scale_factor Length The Y_SCALE_FACTOR parameter is used to specify
marker's y axis.
z_scale_factor Length The Z_SCALE_FACTOR parameter is used to specify
marker's z axis.
1. An ellipsoid is a unit sphere that has been scaled in the x, y, and z directions. The ellipsoid is
placed at the marker named 'CENTER_MARKER='. The X_SCALE_FACTOR,
Y_SCALE_FACTOR, and Z_SCALE_FACTOR parameters are used to specify the scaling of the
initial unit sphere along the center marker's x, y, z axes. The ellipsoid will move with the part
which owns the center marker.
2. You use this parameter to identify the existing ellipsoid to affect with this command.
You may identify a ELLIPSOID by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the ELLIPSOID is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it
convenient to type the name even if the ELLIPSOID is displayed.
Since a ELLIPSOID can not be defined in an Adams data set or graphics file, the ELLIPSOID can
not be created by reading in one of these files. The only way to create a ELLIPSOID is to do it
interactively or by reading a command file. ELLIPSOIDs are owned by parts.
If a ELLIPSOID is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. You may
need to enter the full name of the ELLIPSOID if you wish to identify a ELLIPSOID that is not
on the default PART. For example, you may specify ELLIPSOID "blimp" on the part named
"par1" from the model named "test" by entering ".test.par1.blimp". If you type a "?",
Adams/View will list the ELLIPSOIDs available by default.
You must separate multiple ELLIPSOID names by commas.
If the ELLIPSOID is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
3. Specifies the name of the new ellipsoid. You may use this name later to refer to this ellipsoid.
Adams/View will not allow you to have two ellipsoids with the same full name, so you must
assumed.
5. Specifies the marker at the center of a circle, an arc, the bottom of a cylinder, or the bottom of a
frustum. If you are creating a circle or an arc, orient the center marker so that its z-axis is normal
to the plane of the circle or to the plane of the arc. Similarly, if you are defining a cylinder or a
frustum, orient the center marker so that its z-axis is normal to the bottom of the cylinder or the
frustum.
Cautions:
1. You need not separate multiple ELLIPSOID picks by commas.
geometry 133
geometry modify shape extrusion

Allows for modification of the extrusion object.
Format:

extrusion_name = an existing extrusion
new_extrusion_name = a new extrusion
adams_id = adams id
comments = string
path_points = location
length_along_z_axis = length
Example:
geometry modify shape extrusion &

extrusion_name = extrusion__1 &
new_extrusion_name = extrusion__2&
comments = “a modified extrusion” &
profile_curve = arc__1 &
path_curve= circle__1 &
analytical= no
Description:

extrusion_name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing extrusion.
Extrusion
new_extrusion_name A New Extrusion Specifies the name of the new extrusion.
modified.
reference_marker An Existing Specifies the marker used to place and orient an
Marker extrusion.
Gwire extrusion.
extrusion. The points are relative to the extrusion's
reference marker.
path_curve An Existing Specifies the object used to define the path of the
Gwire extrusion.
path_points Location Specifies the points used to define the path of the
extrusion.
length_along_z_axis Length Specifies the legth along the Z axis of the reference
marker to extrude the profile curve of the extrusion.
Marker
analytical Boolean
1. An extrusion is defined by a path polyline curve and a profile curve, which may be either a
polyline or a data element curve. The profile curve is in the X-Y plane of its parent part. Z
coordinate values of the profile curve are ignored. The path curve is a polyline that describes how
the profile will be swept along. The extrusion is placed with respect to the marker named
'REFERENCE_MARKER=' using the same orientation that the path curve has with respect to its
parent part. The extrusion will move with the part which owns the reference marker.
2. You may use the name specified by the extrusion_name parameter, later to refer to this extrusion.
Adams/View will not allow you to have two extrusions with the same full name, so you must
geometry 135
4. You may specify an arc, circle, spline curve, polyline, or outline for the path_curve parameter.
The object defines the path along which the profile curve will be swept.
5. The points specified by the path_points parameter are relative to the extrusion's reference marker.
The points defines the path along which the profile curve will be swept.
7. The extrusion can be created by selecting points on screen, Gwire, polyline or a Gcurve. But, in
Adams/Solver data file, it is necessary to represent the profile/path in the form of a unique curve
for each profile and path. If the selected profile/path is other than a Gcurve (points_on_screen,
Gwire, polyline, length_along_Z) Adams creates two Gcurves (generator_profile and
generator_path respectively) from the selected profile/path. If the selected profile/path is a Gcurve
then generator_profile/generator_path refer to the same. These Gcurves are replica of the user-
selected geometry and are superimposed on the same. The visibility attribute of the Gcurve is
adjusted to be off to avoid the user from selecting hot-points on Gcurves. This setting will enable
the user to select the hot-points on profile/path geometry.
Tips:
1. You may specify an arc, circle, spline curve, polyline, or outline for the profile_curve parameter
The object should be in the X-Y plane of the extrusions reference marker.
geometry modify shape force

Allows you to modify a force graphic on an element. Force graphics are arrows whose magnitudes and
directions reflect the scaled relative magnitudes and directions of the force vectors acting on your model
Force graphics help you gauge how large your forces become and in what directions they are applied
Figure 2 Force Graphics on an Animation
To see force graphics during animations, you must specify those force elements in your model for which
you would like to see the associated force graphics. To turn force graphics on or off for particular forces,
refer to the Adams/View documentation that describe how to modify a force or a motion.
You can specify the following for the display of force graphics during an animation:
• Scale factor used to control the graphic’s relative size compared to the objects in the model.
• Whether or not the force magnitudes are displayed numerically. The numerical values appear
near the arrowheads.
• Whether or not the force graphics are drawn in wireframe or shaded mode when the model is
animated in shaded mode.
• Whether the force graphic is always drawn in front of other geometry. This is particularly useful
when viewing forces inside geometry, such as three-dimensional contacts.
There are two different scale factors: one for forces and one for torques. Adams applies the force
scale factor to all force graphics in your model to maintain their proper relative sizing, while it
applies the torque scale factor to all torque graphics in your model.
Finding force and torque scale factors that are good for the entire animation might require some
trial and error. It is often useful to set your scale factors while viewing the frame for which the
largest force reaches its peak value.
geometry 137
Format:

force_name= existing force symbol
new_force_name = new name for force symbol
adams_id= integer
comments= string
force_element_name= existing force
jprim_name= existing primitive joint
curve_curve_name= existing ccurve
point_curve_name= existing pcurve
all_force_elements= true_only
applied_at_marker_name= existing triad
Example:
geometry modify shape force &

force_name = force_1_1 &
new_force_name = force_graphics_1 &
force_element_name= vforce_1 &
applied_at_marker_name= marker_4
Description:

Force_name Existing Force Symbol Specifies the name of the force graphic to be
modified
New_force_name New Name For Force Specifies the new name of the force symbol.
Symbol
Adams_id Integer Specifies a new name for the geometry. Assigns
a unique ID number to the geometry.
Comments String Adds comments about the geometry to help you
Force_element_name Existing Force Specifies the name of the force element whose

Joint_name Existing Joint Specifies the name of the joint element whose
Jprim_name Existing Primitive Joint Specifies the name of the joint primitive
element whose force the force graphic is to be
displayed.
Curve_curve_name Existing Ccurve Specifies the name of the curve_curve element
whose force the force graphic is to be displayed.
Point_curve_name Existing Pcurve Specifies the name of the point_curve element
whose force the force graphic is to be displayed.
All_force_elements True Specifies that all the forces from all the force
elements acting on the marker that
applied_at_marker_name specifies are summed
together to determine the force that the force
graphic displays. The only value allowed is
true. There must be at least one force element
acting on the marker.
Applied_at_marker_name Existing Triad Specifies the name of the marker where
Adams/View displays the force graphic.
of any length.
2. The force element can be:
• Beam
geometry 139
• Bushing
• Field
• Translational spring damper
• Rotational spring damper
• Tire
• Single-component force
• Force vector
• Torque vector
• General force
• Multi-point force
3. The joint element can be:
• Translational
• Revolute
• Cylindrical
• Univesal
• Spherical
• Planar
• Rackpin
• Screw
4. The joint primitive element can be:
• At point
• Inline
• Inplane
• Orientation
• Parallel_axis
• Perpendicular
5. If you use the all_force_elements=true argument, the marker must have at least one force applied
to it. If you enter a specific force type using joint_name, jprim_name, force_element_name,
point_curve_name, or curve_curve_name parameters, then the marker named in this parameter
must be one of the markers on which the specified force acts.
geometry modify shape frustum

Allows for the modification of the frustum object.
Format:

frustum_name= an existing frustum
new_frustum_name = a new frustum
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
length = length
side_count_for_body = integer
top_radius = length
bottom_radius = length
Example:
geometry modify shape frustum &

frustum_name = frustum__1 &
new_frustum_name = frustum__2&
adams_id = 101 &
comments = "a modified frustum" &
angle_extent= 150 &
length = 10 &
side_count_for_body = 10
Description:

frustum_name An Existing Frustum Specifies the name of an existing frustum
new_frustum_name A New Frustum Specifies the name of the new frustum
geometry 141

the Adams data file
modified.
the bottom of a cylinder, or the bottom of a frustum.
(according to the right-hand rule) about the z-axis
of the center marker.
side_count_for_body Integer Specifies the number of flat sides Adams/View
draws on a cylinder or a frustum.
top_radius Length Specifies the radius at the top of a frustum.
bottom_radius Length Specifies the radius at the bottom of a frustum.
Adams/View uses to draw the circles at the ends of
a cylinder or a frustum.
1. . A frustum is a specialized cone whose top and bottom are perpendicular to the cone central axis.
A frustum will move with the part that the center marker belongs to.
2. You may use the name specified by the frustum_name parameter later to refer to this frustum.
Adams/View will not allow you to have two frustums with the same full name, so you must
yourself.
7. The top of the furstum is perpendicular to the center marker z-axis, and the center of the top is at
the position on the center marker z-axis that LENGTH specifies. Also, The bottom is
perpendicular to the center marker z-axis, and the center of the bottom is at the center marker
origin.
geometry modify shape gcontact

Allows you to modify an existing contact force graphic object.
Format:

contact_force_name= an existing contact_force_graphic
new_contact_force_name = a new contact_force_graphic
adams_id= adams_id
comments = string
contact_element_name= an existing contact element
force_display = force_display_options
Example:
geometry modify shape gcontact &

contact_force_name = gcontact__1 &
new_contact_force_name= gcontact__2 &
adams_id= 1 &
comments= "a modified contact force graphic" &
contact_element_name= sphere_plane_contact_5 &
force_display= both
Description:

contact_force_name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing contact
Contact_force_graphic force graphic to be modified
new_contact_force_name A New Contact_force_graphic Specifies the name of a new contact
force graphic
adams_id Adams_id Assigns a unique ID number to the
geometry
comments String Adds any comments about the geometry
to help you manage and identify it.

contact_element_name An Existing Contact Element Specifies the name of the contact
element whose force is to be displayed
by the force graphic.
force_display Force_display_options Specifies the options for displaying the
force graphics
A gcontact is a force graphic for a contact element. The gcontact can display graphics for component or
aggregate forces of a contact.
• none - Displays no force graphics.
• components - Displays force graphics for the normal force, friction force, and torque at each
incident of a contact for each frame. Multiple incidents at a frame display multiple force
graphics.
• aggregate - Displays force graphics for the sum of all forces (normal and friction) and all
torques on the contact at each frame. Sums multiple incidents at a frame and displays one force
graphic.
• both - Displays both component and aggregate force graphics.
geometry modify shape link

Allows for creation of the link object.
Format:

link_name= an existing glink
new_link_name = a new glink
comments = string
i_marker = an existing marker
j_marker = an existing marker
width = length
depth length
Example:
geometry modify shape link &

link_name = link__1 &
comments = "a modified link" &
i_marker = mk124 &
j_marker = mk112 &
width = 25 &
depth = 5
Description:

link_name An Existing Glink Specifies the name of an existing link
new_link_name A New Glink Specifies the name of the new link
modified.
i_marker An Existing Specifies the marker at one end of a link object.
Marker
j_marker An Existing Specifies the marker at one end of a link object.
Marker

width Length Specifies the width of the link.
depth Length Specifies the depth of the link.
1. A link is a three-dimensional object used to represent a connecting part. It has its length defined
by the distance between I_MARKER and the J_MARKER. It also has a WIDTH and DEPTH
that may be specified. The ends of the link are semi-circular. The J_MARKER must lie in th XY
plane of the I_MARKER.
2. You may use the name specified by the link_name parameter later, to refer to this link.
Adams/View will not allow you to have two links with the same full name, so you must provide
a unique name.
Cautions:
i_marker.
i_marker.
geometry modify shape nurb_surf

Modifies an existing nurb surface.
Format:

nurb_surf_name= existing surf_name
new_nurb_surf_name = new surf_name
comments= string
udegree= integer
vdegree= integer
rational= boolean
uperiodic= boolean
vperiodic= boolean
num_uctrlpts= integer
num_vctrlpts= integer
control_points= location
weights= real
uknots= real
vknots= real
Description:

nurb_surf_name Existing Surface Specify an existing nurb surface that has to be
modified.
New_nurb_surf_name New Name For The Surface Specify the new name for the nurb surface.
comments String Specify any comments to be associated with the
nurb surface geometry created.
udegree Integer Specify an integer greater than 0 and less than
or equal to 20.
vdegree Integer Specify an integer greater than 0 and less than
or equal to 20.
rational Yes/no Specify a Boolean value
uperiodic Yes/no Specify a Boolean value
vperiodic Yes/no Specify a Boolean value

num_uctrlpts Integer Specify the number of control points.
num_vctrlpts Integer Specify the number of control points.
control_points Location Specify the location of the control points.
weights Real Specify the weight.
uknots Real Specify a real number
vknots Real Specify a real number
geometry modify shape picture
geometry modify shape picture

Allows you to modify a picture.
Format:
geometry modifies shape picture

picture_name = existing picture
new_picture_name = new picture
image_file_name = name of image
height = integer
location = location
Example:
geometry modify shape picture &

picture_name = picture_1 &
image_file_name= "c:\documents and settings\car.jpg" &
height= 50
Description:

picture_name Existing Picture Specifies the picture to be modified
New_picture_name New Name For The Picture Specifies the new name for the picture.
image_file_name String Specifies the file name containing the
image.
height Integer Specifies the height of the picture
location Location Specifies the location of the picture
geometry modify shape plane

Allows you to modify a two-dimensional box.
Plane Tool is a two-dimensional box that gets created. You can draw a plane’s length and width in
the plane of the screen or the working grid, if it is turned on. You will find planes most useful when you
are creating contact forces between objects
When you create a plane, you can select to create a new part consisting of the plane geometry or add the
plane geometry to an existing part or ground. If you create a new part, it has no mass since it is composed
only of wire geometry.
Format:

plane_name= existing plane
new_plane_name= new name for the plane
adams_id= integer
comments= string
x_minimum= real
x_maximum= real
y_minimum= real
y_maximum= real
Example:
geometry modify shape plane &

plane_name = plane_1 &
ref_marker_name = marker_5 &
x_minimum = 100 &
x_maximum = 500.9 &
y_minimum = 100 &
y_maximum = 788
Description:

plane_name Existing Plane Name Specifies the name of the plane to be modified
new_plane_name New Name For The Plane Specifies a new name for the geometry.
adams_id Integer Assigns a unique ID number to the plane.
Comments String Adds comments about the plane that you want to enter
to help you manage and identify it.
ref_marker_name Existing Marker Specifies the reference marker used to locate and
orient the plane.
x_minimum Real Specifies the location of one corner of the plane in
coordinates relative to the reference marker
x_maximum Real Specifies the location of the opposite corner of the
plane in coordinates relative to the reference marker.
y_minimum Real Specifies the location of one corner of the plane in
coordinates relative to the reference marker. If all
values are positive, the values indicate the lower left
corner of the plane.
y_maximum Real Specifies the location of the opposite corner of the
plane in coordinates relative to the reference marker.
of any length.
comments.)
4. If all values of x_minimum,y_minimum,x_maximum,y_maximum are positive, the values
indicate the lower left corner of the plane. For example, the values of x_minimum = 10 and
y_minimum = 20, place the lower left corner at 10,20 in the reference marker's coordinate system.
geometry modify shape plate

Allows you to modify a plate object.
Format:

plate_name = an existing plate
new_plate_name = a new plate
comments = string
marker_name= an existing marker
width= length
radius = length
Example:
geometry modify shape plate &

plate_name = plate__1 &
new_plate_name= plate__2 &
comments = "a new plate" &
marker_name= mk112 , mk124 , cm &
width = 15 &
radius = 5
Description:

plate_name An Existing Plate Specifies an existing plate object
new_plate_name A New Plate Specifies a new plate object
modified.
width Length Specifies the width of the plate
radius Length Specifies the plate radius
2. Many entities are attached to, or otherwise associated with, a specific marker. You use the
marker_name parameter to identify that marker.
geometry modify shape revolution

Allows for modification of the revolution object.
Format:

revolution_name = an exsiting revolution
new_revolution_name = a new revolution
adams_id = adams id
comments = string
number_of_sides = integer
Example:
geometry modify shape revolution &

revolution_name = revolution__1 &
new_revolution_name = revolution__2 &
comments = “a modified revolution” &
profile_curve = circle__1 &
angle_extent = 50 &
number_of_sides = 10 &
analytical= no
Description:

revolution_name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing revolution.
Revolution
new_revolution_name A New Specifies the name of the new revolution.
Revolution
Adams data file.
modified.
reference_marker An Existing Specifies the marker used to place and orient a
Marker revolution.
Gwire revolution.
revolution.
the center marker.
number_of_sides Integer Specifies the number of flat sides Adams/View draws
on a revolution.
Marker
analytical Boolean
1. A revolution is defined by a profile polyline curve which is revolved about the Z axis of the
marker named 'REFERENCE_MARKER='. The profile curve is a polyline that is in the X-Y
plane of its parent part. Z coordinate values of the profile curve are ignored. The revolution will
move with the part which owns the reference marker.
2. You may use the name specified by the revolution_name parameter, later to refer to this
revolution. Adams/View will not allow you to have two revolutions with the same full name, so
4. For the profile_curve parameter, you may specify an arc, circle, spline curve, polyline, or outline.
The coordinates of the object points, relative to the object's parent part, will be used to define a
profile relative to the revolution's reference marker. The profile defined by the points will be
swept around the reference marker's z-axis.
Tips:
geometry modify shape shell

Allows you to modify an existing shell object.
Format:

shell_name = an existing shell
new_shell_name= a new shell
comments = string
file_name = string
wireframe_only = boolean
Example:
geometry create shape shell &

shell_name = shell__1 &
comments = "a new shell" &
reference_marker = mk112&
file_name = "c:\shell1.shl"&
wireframe_only = no
Description:

shell_name An Existing Shell Specifies the name of an existing shell.
new_shell_name A New Shell Specifies the name of the new shell.
or modified.
reference_marker An Existing Marker Specifies the marker used to place and orient a
shell.
file_name String Specifies the name of a file that contains the
definition of the shell.
wireframe_only Boolean
1. A shell is defined by a number of node points and the connectivity between those node points.
The shell is represented as polygons defined by connecting node points with straight line
segments.
Polygons are not necessarily flat. The points and connectivety are read from a file named
"FILE_NAME=". The shell is placed at the marker named "REFERENCE_MARKER=". The
shell will move with the part that owns the reference marker.
2. You may use the name specified by the shell_name parameter, later to refer to this shell.
Adams/View will not allow you to have two shells with the same name, so you must provide a
unique name.
assumed.
Shell file format: The first line in a shell file has the form: int int float. The first integer represent
how many points are in the shell file. The second integer represents how many polygons are
described in the file. The float value represent a scaling factor which is applied to all of the point
coordinates.
The lines immediately following the first line consist of the x, y, and z coordinate floating point
values for the points. There is one xyz triplet per line. You may use multiple spaces or tabs to
separate the x, y, and z values.
Immediately following the coordinate values are the lines for defining the polygon connectivity.
The first number on one of these lines is the number of vertices that should be connected to form
the polygon.
The following integers are the offsets into the list of points. For example, 4 5 6 2 1 means
that the polygon will be formed by 4 points and those points are the 5th, 6th, 2nd, and 1st points
in the list of points in the shell file. Note that it is not necessary to explicitly close each polygon
by going back to the start point. You may use multiple spaces or tabs to separate the values.
A sample shell file for a cube:
861.0
-1.0-1.01.0
-1.0 1.0 1.0
1.0 1.0 1.0
1.0 -1.01.0
-1.0-1.0 -1.0
-1.0 1.0 -1.0
1.0 1.0 -1.0
1.0 -1.0 -1.0
41234
45621
3267
43784
41485
48765
geometry modify shape solid_shell

Allows you to modify a solid shell. A solid shell is an internal function used to map STEP and IGES faces
to view. The solid shell object was created to combine a number of these faces as a solid.
Surface-based solid modeling is the least common modeling method used to define solids. Using this
method, the solid is defined as the internal volume surrounded by the defining surfaces
Format:

solid_shell_name = existing solid_shell
new_solid_shell_name = new name for the solid_shell
faces = existing face
Example:
geometry modify shape solid_shell &

solid_shell_name= solid_shell_1 &
faces = face_1
Description:

solid_shell_name Existing Solid Shell Specifies the name of the solid to be modified
new_solid_shell_name New Solid_shell Name Specify new name for the solid shell
faces Existing Face Specifies the faces making up the solid shell.
of any length.
geometry modify shape spring_damper

Allows you to modify the graphics spring damper object.
A spring-damper is a graphic representation of a spring and damper drawn between two markers. The
spring damper stretches along the axis created by its I and J markers.
The figure below illustrates the display options you can set.
Thediameter_of_spring parameter defines the diameter of the spring, while damper_diameter_at_ij

defines the diameters of the dampers at the I and J markers.
The number of coils drawn in the spring is defined using coil_count. The distances between the ends of
the dampers and the I and J markers is defined using tip_length_at_ij. The lengths of the damper caps at
the I and J markers is defined using cup_length_at_ij.
Format:

spring_damper_name= existing spring damper
new_spring_damper_name = new name for damper
adams_id= integer
comments= string
coil_count= integer
diameter_of_spring= length
damper_diameter_at_ij= length
tip_length_at_ij= length
cup_length_at_ij= length
Description:

spring_damper_name Existing spring damper Specifies the name of the spring-damper
graphic to be modified
New_spring_damper_name New spring damper Specifies the new name of the spring-
damper graphic.
adams_id Integer Assigns a unique ID number to the
geometry.
comments String Adds any comments about the graphic that
you want to enter to help you manage and
identify it.
connected by this spring-damper graphic.
j_marker_name Existing marker Specifies a marker on the second of two
parts connected by this spring-damper
graphic.
coil_count Integer Enter the number of coils drawn in the
spring.
diameter_of_spring Length Specifies the diameter of the spring.
damper_diameter_at_ij Length Specifies the diameters of the damper cups

in a spring-damper graphic.
tip_length_at_ij Length Specifies the distances between the ends of
the dampers and the I and J markers.
cup_length_at_ij Length Specifies the length of the damper cups in
a spring-damper graphic.
of any length.
3. Adams/View draws this graphic between one part at the I marker and the other at the J marker.
4. For the damper_diameter_at_ij, the first value defines the diameter of the cup at the I marker. The
second value defines the diameter of the cup at the J marker.
5. For the cup_length_at_ij parameter, the first value defines the length of the cup at I marker.
Adams/View measures the length from the bottom of the cup to its top along the line that I and J
define.
The second value defines the length of the cup at J. Adams/View measures the length from the
bottom of the cup to the top along the line that I and J define.
geometry modify shape torus

Allows for modification of an existing torus object.
Format:

torus_name = an existing torus
new_torus_name = a new torus
adams_id = Adams id
comments = string
side_count_for_perimeter = integer
Example:
geometry modify shape torus &

torus_name = torus__1 &
new_torus_name = torus__2 &
comments = "a modified torus" &
major_radius = 10 &
minor_radius = 5 &
side_count_for_perimeter = 10 &
segment_count = 10
Description:

torus_name An Existing Torus Specifies the name of the new torus
new_torus_name A New Torus Specifies the name of the new torus
geometry 167

Adams data file.
modified.
(according to the right-hand rule) about the z-axis of the
center marker.
major_radius Length The parameter is used to specify the radius for the
circular spine of the torus.
minor_radius Length The parameter is used to specify the radius for the
side_count_for_perimet Integer The parameter is used to specify the number of circular
er cross-sections to create along the spine of the torus.
segment_count Integer The SEGMENT_COUNT parameter is used to specify
the number of sides for each of the circular cross-
sections of the torus.
1. A torus is defined by a circular spine with a circular cross-section at each point on the spine. The
torus is placed at the marker named 'CENTER_MARKER='. The radius for the circular spine of
the torus is defined by the MAJOR_RADIUS parameter. The radius for the circular cross-
sections is defined by the MINOR_RADIUS parameter. The number of circular cross-sections to
create along the spine may be specified with the SIDE_COUNT_FOR_PERIMETER parameter.
The number of sides for each of the circular cross-sections may be specified with the
SEGMENT_COUNT parameter. The torus will move with the part which owns the center
marker.
2. You may use the name specified by the torus_name parameter, later to refer to this torus.
Adams/View will not allow you to have two tori with the same full name, so you must provide a
unique name.
5. The angle specified by the angle_extent parameter starts at the positive x-axis of the center marker
and subtends the arc, the arc of the cylinder, or the arc of the cone frustum.
Tips:
graphic_results 1
graphic_results
graphic_results animate
Allows you to view a pseudo dynamic representation of the model motion simulated with Adams.
Format:
time_range = time
offset = location
fullscreen_animation = on_off
bitmap_animation = bitmap_opts
record_to_laser_disc = on_off
animate_page = boolean
Example:
graphic_results animate &

increment_frame_by = 2 &
base_marker = psmar &
fullscreen_animation = on &
icon_visibility = on &
colors = plum &
graphic_results 3
graphic_results animate &

contour_plots = off &
superimposed = on
Description:

analysis_name An Existing Analysis This parameter specifies an analysis name. When
Adams/View reads a graphics file (.GRA), a
request file (.REQ), or a results file (.RES) an
analysis name is created. By default, the name of
the analysis is the file name excluding the
extension.
view_name An Existing View Specifies the view for the display
number_of_cycles Integer Parameter used to specify the number of complete
cycles to animate. This means, based on this
parameter, the animation will continuously run
through all the specified frames, the specified
number of times.
increment_frame_by Integer Parameter used to specify the number of frames to
skip between each animation step. This allows the
user to speed up the viewing of motions that take
many frames to develop (that move slowly). If a
negative value is entered, the animation will play in
reverse.
time_range Time Parameter to specify the analysis output Adams
simulation output time steps at which to start and
stop the animation (in that respective order).
frame_range Integer Parameter to specify the analysis frame number
(output time step) at which to start and stop the
animation (in that respective order).
superimposed On_Off Parameter used with the animation command to
specify whether or not to show each frame of the
animation individually or superimposed on top of
one another.
base_marker An Existing Marker This parameter is used to specify a marker whose
animates

camera_ref_marker An Existing Marker This parameter is used to identify a marker which
specifies the viewing direction as the model
animates.
point_trace_marker An Existing Marker This parameter is used to specify marker(s) whose
position will be traced in the view as the model
animates.
icon_visibility On_Off Specifies whether or not to display icons during an
animation.
offset Location Specifies the offset of the axis line from the plot
border.
colors An Existing Color Modify the red, green, and blue components of
existing colors.
fullscreen_animation On_Off Specifies the animation should be done using the
entire application window.
bitmap_animation Bitmap_Opts Specifies options regarding generating and
replaying a bitmap animation.
record_to_laser_disc On_Off Causes a single video frame to be recorded on the
laser disc.
animate_page Boolean
1. Animation is created by requesting a series of "frames" (or a "time range" corresponding to a
series of frames) to be displayed in rapid succession. These frames correspond to pictures of the
model at each output time step in the Adams simulation. The speed of the animation depends on
the hardware Adams/View is running on, the complexity of the graphics being displayed, and the
draw mode of the graphics being displayed (wireframe, solid filled, or shaded; wireframe being
the fastest).
2. Adams/View provides various options for specifying how the animation frames are to be
displayed. These options include starting and ending frame number or time, the number of frames
(simulation output time steps) to be skipped between displayed frames, the number of complete
cycles the animation should go through, etc. If none of these options are specified, the system will
animate in the active view, use all frames, and cycle through them once. Other advanced features
are provided such as BASE_MARKER, SUPERIMPOSE, CAMERA_REF_MARKER, and
POINT_TRACE_MARKER, which are not used unless specified. These options provide:
- BASE_MARKER - a way to freeze a model position in the view during the animation
- SUPERIMPOSE - overlaying the frames of the animation,
- CAMERA_REF_MARKER - a model mounted viewing position,
- POINT_TRACE_MARKER - tracing marker paths during the animation in respective order,
and
graphic_results 5
- CAMERA_REF_MARKER + BASE_MARKER - a view direction from the camera marker to

the base marker.
3. Adams/View requires that Adams simulations have unique names and the default name of an
analysis may be overridden when reading the file(s) using the file_nameparameter. When
referring to an analysis name that already exists quotes are not necessary. When processing any
command that requires an analysis name the system will default to the default analysis name. The
command.
standard views are displayed by default when Adams/View is started. The user may create new
views using the 'VIEW MANAGEMENT CREATE' command, and save/restore their attributes.
5. If entered, the NUMBER_OF_CYCLES parameter must be a positive integer. This value will be
optional and if not entered, will default initially to 1 (until updated by the user).
6. If entered, the INCREMENT_FRAMES_BY parameter must have an absolute value less than the
default to 1.
7. If entered, the time_range parameter must be two real numbers (separated by commas) where the
value greater than the simulation end in time is entered for the second value, the system will stop
at the last frame. These time values will be rounded to the nearest simulation output time step
value. This parameter is optional and mutually exclusive with the FRAME_RANGE parameter.
If neither is entered, the previous values to TIME_RANGE will be used (0,0,1000.0, if they have
not been changed by the user).
Note: Even if only one view_name is provided, the time range will be applied to the specified
view and any other views that contain the same model (the model indicated by
analysis_name parameter). If only analysis_name is provided (view_name parameter is
8. If entered, the frame_range parameter must be two positive integers (separated by commas) where
the second is greater than the first and the default values are initially 1,10000. If new values are
value greater than the last frame number is entered for the second value, the system will stop at
the last frame. This parameter is optional and mutually exclusive with the TIME_RANGE
parameter. If neither is entered, the previous values to FRAME_RANGE will be used (1,10000,
if they have not been changed by the user).
Note: Even if only one view_name is provided, the frame range will be applied to the specified
motion. This is an optional parameter and if not entered, then no superimposed frames will be
drawn. The legal values of this parameter are ON and OFF. ON indicates that frames will be
superimpose during the animation. OFF, the default, indicates that frames will not be
superimposed during theanimation.
10. The base_marker parameter is used to specify a marker whose position will be frozen in the view
as the model animates. This is particularly useful when a relatively small object undergoes both,
small configuration changes as well as large overall gross motion. For example, the flight path of
a jet is very large over time relative to the motion of the control surfaces on the jet. In this case,
selecting the BASE_MARKER to be on the jet would be appropriate. This parameter can be used
with the CAMERA_REF_MARKER to create a different effect on the viewing direction. When
the CAMERA_REF_MARKER and the BASE_MARKER are specified together, the viewing
direction is "from" the CAMERA_REF_MARKER position "to" the BASE_MARKER position.
distance, pass by, and proceed into the distance. You may identify a marker by typing its name or
by picking it from the screen. If the marker is not visible on the screen, you must type the name.
You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the marker is displayed. If you created
the marker by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the marker name is the letters MAR
followed by the Adams data set marker ID number. For example, the name ofAdams
it a name at that time. If a marker is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its
name. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a marker under a different part, for
instance, you may need to enter the model and part names, as well. For example, you may specify
marker 'pivot' from model 'links', part 'lower_arm' by entering ".links.lower_arm.pivot". If you
type a "?", Adams/View will list the markers available by default. You must separate multiple
marker names by commas. If the marker is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by
picking on it. You need not separate multiple marker picks by commas.
graphic_results 7
11. The camera_ref_marker parameter connects the viewing camera to the "z" axis of a marker. The
animation is then viewed from the moving location of that marker in the "z" direction. This is
particularly useful when a "drivers eye" or "pilots eye" viewing perspective is desired. This
parameter can be used with the BASE_MARKER to create a different effect on the viewing
direction. When the CAMERA_REF_MARKER and the BASE_MARKER are specified
together, the viewing direction is "from" theCAMERA_REF_MARKER position "to" the
BASE_MARKER position. In addition the "up" direction of the view is computed based on the
direction of the CAMERA_REF_MARKER "y" axis (i.e. the y axis is projected into a direction
perpendicular to the viewing direction defined by the two markers). This viewing direction is
recomputed between each frame of the animation. This feature allows the effect of watching an
object come from a distance, pass by, and proceed into the distance.
12. The point_trace_marker parameter is used to specify marker(s) whose position will be traced in
the view as the model animates. This is particularly useful when a marker undergoes complicated
BASE_MARKER to be on the wheel center would be appropriate. Note that the model graphics
need not be displayed to trace the path of a marker in a view. Up to 10 markers can be traced
simultaneously.
13. . Entering 'ON' for the icon_visibility parameter will cause Adams/View to display the icons
during animation. This will cause slower animation times. For this reason, 'OFF' is the default
value.
14. The fullscreen_animation parameter specifies the animation should be done using the entire
application window. This includes the areas for all the displayed views, the menu/panel area,
fixed menu area , and the command/message areas. The application window will return to the
configuration in effect prior to theanimation command when the animation is complete.
15. Bitmap animation is a platform dependent feature that may be used to obtain faster animations.
The value for this parameter may be one of the following:
- OFF - perform no bitmap animation operations.
- RECORD - record frames for the bitmap animation using the current window size.
- RECORD_SHRINK - record frames for the bitmap animation, but first shrink the Adams/View
window so that it is approximately 20% of the total screen size. This is to obtain a faster animation
by using a smaller amount of screen space.
- PLAY - play back the last recorded bitmap animation.
- FREE_MEM - free any memory resources that were allocated for bitmap animations. Each time
you record a new bitmap animation, any previous bitmap animation will be deleted. When you
exit Adams/View, any bitmap animations will be deleted. It issuggested that after you have
finished with a bitmap animation to use the FREE_MEM option so that you can make available
the memory resources used by theanimation. It should be noted that there is a direct correlation
between the size of the Adams/View window and the memory requirements for recording and the
speed upon playback. A large Adams/View window on a color machine may require a significant
amount of memory to perform bitmap animation. In addition, playback speeds are going to be
slower for a large window as opposed to a smaller window because more pixels per frame need
to be drawn. Currently, this feature is only available on Sun workstations, running the SunView
windowing system.
16. Single frame recording allows you to render complex graphics images using the highest quality
rendering modes and record the images sequentially on the laser disc. Upon playback, the
recorded frames are displayed at the standard video rate of 30 frames/sec, allowing for smooth,
high-quality animation of modeling or analysis graphics. In addition, laser disc devices allow you
to vary the playback rate (unlike video tape systems) to speed up or slow down the resulting
animation sequence.
Tips:
Here are some tips to improve animation performance in Adams/View.
1. Animate only a single view. If you animate multiple views simultaneously, animation will be
slower. You can use the Delete command box on the View Control Panel or the 'VIEW
MANAGEMENT DELETE' command to delete views that are not needed. You may also erase a
view with the 'VIEW ERASE' command. Erasing a view leaves the view window in the display,
but erases the contents, so they will not be animated.
2. Animate in wireframe mode rather than in solid fill or shaded mode. Animate a subset of the
available frames by using the INCREMENT_FRAME_BY parameter on the
'GRAPHIC_RESULTS ANIMATE' command. Remove unnecessary geometry with the
'DISPLAY_ATTRIBUTES VISIBILITY GEOMETRY VISIBILITY=OFF' command. You can
remove entire parts with the 'DISPLAY_ATTRIBUTES VISIBILITY PART VISIBILITY=OFF'
command.
Avoid excessive detail in your geometry. For example, avoid creating a cylinder with 60 sides if
it looks acceptable with 20 sides.
3. Remove or replace "rubber-band" geometry. In general, geometry that "rubberbands" (i.e.
changes size or shape with each time step) takes longer to display than similar geometry that does
not. Spring-dampers, force vectors, and outlines that go between parts are examples of "rubber-
banding" geometry. Turn off the view name and triad with the command 'VIEW
MANAGEMENT MODIFY NAME_VISIBILITY=OFF TRIAD_VISIBILITY=OFF'.
graphic_results 9
graphic_results deformed_mode_shape
Allows you to display the model at maximum deformation from the operating point of the requested
natural frequency of the EIGEN_SOLUTION.
Format:
eigen_solution_name = an existing eigen
mode_number = integer
frequency = real
translation_maximum = length
rotation_maximum = angle
display_undeformed_shape = boolean
color_of_undeformed_shape = an existing color
Example:
graphic_results deformed_mode_shape &

eigen_solution_name = eigen__1 &
mode_number = 1 &
translation_maximum = 0.15 &
color_of_undeformed_shape = salmon &
display_undeformed_shape = yes &
contour_plots = off
Description:

eigen_solution_name An Existing Eigen Specifies an existing eigen_solution.You may
identify an eigen_solution by typing its name.
view_name An Existing View Specifies an existing view
mode_number Integer Specifies which mode shape of the
EIGEN_SOLUTION is to be used to calculate the
deformation of the model.

frequency Real The FREQUENCY parameter is used to determine
which mode shape of the EIGEN_SOLUTION is
to be used to calculate the deformation of the
model.
translation_maximum Length Specifies the maximum amount the parts will
translate from their undeformed position.
rotation_maximum Angle Specifies the maximum amount the parts are
allowed to rotate from their undeformed position.
display_undeformed_shape Boolean Specifies whether the undeformed model is to be
displayed with the deformed shape superimposed
on top of it. YES indicates that the undeformed
model will be displayed.
color_of_undeformed_shape An Existing Color Specifies the color of the undeformed model. If no
color is specified, the undeformed model will be
displayed with the same color as the deformed
mode.
1. Adams linearizes the model at an operating point you specify and calculates the eigenvalues and
eigenvectors. This information is communicated to Adams/View in the output files. Adams/View
then can use this command to display the deformed shape as predicted from the
EIGEN_SOLUTION. Because the linear solution eigenvectors are normalized you can specify
what the maximum excursion of the deformed shape should be for best visualization. You can
specify the mode by entering the MODE_NUMBER, or the FREQUENCY of the mode. If you
specify the FREQUENCY, the mode closet to the specified FREQUENCY will be used. If neither
the mode parameter or the FREQUENCY parameter is specified, the model is deformed using the
first mode. You can display the model in its undeformed state, as well as its deformed state using
the DISPLAY_UNDEFORMED_SHAPE parameter. The amount of deformation is controlled
with the MAXIMUM_TRANSLATION and MAXIMUM_ROTATION parameters. The
deformations are all scaled, so that no part is translated more than the specified
MAXIMUM_TRANSLATION, or rotated more than the specified MAXIMUM_ROTATION.
2. If an eigen_solution is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. The
EIGEN_SOLUTION must be in an existing analysis that is associated to an existing model.
Therefore, any reference to the EIGEN_SOLUTION can include the model and analysis name.
For example, assume you have read a result file called "SECOND_GEAR.RES", and this result
file contains the analysis "SECOND_GEAR". If you wish to refer to the EIGEN_SOLUTION
named "EIG1" for the model "TRANSMISSION", enter
.TRANSMISSION.SECOND_GEAR.EIG1 (the.TRANSMISSION.SECOND_GEAR. may be
omitted if SECOND_GEAR is the current default analysis_name). SECOND_GEAR refers to the
analysis name that the result set came from (or is stored under). If you type a "?", Adams/View
graphic_results 11
will list the eigen_solutions available by default. The eigen_solution name begins with the letters
EIG and ends with the eigen_solution ID number. You must separate multiple eigen_solution
names by commas. If the eigen_solution is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by
4. If neither MODE_NUMBER or FREQUENCY is specified the first mode in the
EIGEN_SOLUTION is used. To get a list of the available modes and the orresponding
frequencies use the LIST_INFO EIGEN command.
5. The mode shape (i.e. eigenvector) of the mode closest to the specified FREQUENCY is used. If
neither MODE_NUMBER nor FREQUENCY is specified, the first mode in the
EIGEN_SOLUTION is used. To get a list of the available modes and the corresponding
6. The reason why the translation_maximum parameter is needed is because the eigenvectors are
normalized during the eigen_solution. Therefore, to get a meaningful animation or deformed
shape you must sometimes set this value to scale the maximum deformation to get a recognizable
shape.
7. The reason why the rotation_maximum parameter is required is because the eigenvectors are
normalized during the EIGEN_SOLUTION. Therefore, to get a meaningful animation or
deformed shape, you must sometimes set this value to scale the maximum deformation to get a
recognizable shape.
Tips:
1. If the MAXIMUM_TRANSLATION parameter is not specified, 20 percent of the model size is
used.
2. If the MAXIMUM_ROTATION parameter is not specified, 20 degrees is used.
3. To get a list of the modes and frequencies to select from, use the LIST_INFO EIGEN_VALUE
command.
4. The undeformed model is displayed in dashed lines.
graphic_results mode_shape_animation
Allows you to view the model oscillating at one of its natural frequencies.
Format:
mode_number = integer
frequency = real
translation_maximum = length
rotation_maximum = angle
show_time_decay = boolean
frames_per_cycle = integer
fullscreen_animation = on_off
bitmap_animation = bitmap_opts
record_to_laser_disc = on_off
Example:
graphic_results mode_shape_animation &

eigen_solution_name = eigen__1 &
mode_number = 1 &
translation_maximum = 0.15 &
record_to_laser_disc = on
Description:

eigen_solution_name An Existing Eigen Specifies an existing eigen_solution.You may identify a
eigen_solution by typing its name.
view_name An Existing View Specifies an existing view
graphic_results 13

mode_number Integer Specifies which mode shape of the EIGEN_SOLUTION
is to be used to calculate the deformation of the model.
frequency Real The FREQUENCY parameter is used to determine which
mode shape of the EIGEN_SOLUTION is to be used to
calculate the deformation of the model.
translation_maximum Length Specifies the maximum amount the parts will translate to
from their undeformed position.
rotation_maximum Angle Specifies the maximum amount the parts are allowed to
rotate from their undeformed position.
show_time_decay Boolean Specifies whether the amplitudes of the deformations are
to remain constant or decay due to the damping factor
calculated in the EIGEN_SOLUTION.
frames_per_cycle Integer Specifies the number of frames to be displayed for each
cycle for this MODE_SHAPE_ANIMATION.
number_of_cycles Integer Parameter used to specify the number of complete cycles
to animate. This means, based on this parameter, the
animation will continuously run through all the specified
frames the specified number of times.
superimposed On_Off Parameter used with the animation command to specify
individually or superimposed on top of one another.
icon_visibility On_Off Specifies whether or not to display icons during an
animation. Entering 'ON' will cause Adams/View to
display the iconsduring animation. This will cause slower
animation times. For this reason, 'OFF' is the default
value.
fullscreen_animation On_Off Specifies the animation should be done using the entire
application window.
bitmap_animation Bitmap_Opts
record_to_laser_disc On_Off Causes a single video frame to be recorded on the laser
disc.
1. This animation cycles through the model deformation from the operating point of the requested
natural frequency of the EIGEN_SOLUTION. Adams linearizes the model at an operating point
you specify and calculates the eigenvalues and eigenvectors. This information is communicated
to Adams/View in the output files. Adams/View then can use this command to display the
animated deformed shape as predicted from the EIGEN_SOLUTION. Because the linear solution
eigenvectors are normalized you can specify what the maximum excursion of the animated
deformed shape should be for best visualization.
2. Animation is created by requesting a series of "frames" to be displayed in rapidsuccession. These
frames correspond to a pictures of the model interpolated between the maximum deformation in
the positive and negative directions. The animation then cycles through the deformation of the
model mode shape, from undeformed, to maximum deformed, to negative maximum deformed,
and finally, to the undeformed shape. This deformation is about the operating point of the
requested natural mode of the EIGEN_SOLUTION.
3. The number of frames per cycle is controlled with the FRAMES_PER_CYCLE parameter. The
interpolation between the frames is done with trigonometric functions, therefore, the frames will
tend to be segregated at the maximum deformation in the positive and negative directions.
4. You can see the effect of the damping in the MODE_SHAPE_ANIMATION with the
SHOW_TIME_DECAY parameter. If not specified, the amplitude of the deformations will not
change as each frame is calculated. Only periodic eigen modes can be animated. Therefore, there
is no animation of modes that do not have periodic data (i.e. modes with an imaginary component
of the eigenvalue = 0). You can specify the mode by entering the MODE_NUMBER, or the
FREQUENCY of the mode. If you specify the FREQUENCY, the mode closet the specified
FREQUENCY will be used. If neither the mode parameter or the FREQUENCY parameter is
specified, the model is deformed using the first mode.
The amount of deformation is controlled with the MAXIMUM_TRANSLATION and
MAXIMUM_ROTATION parameters. The deformations are all scaled so that no part is
translated more than the specified MAXIMUM_TRANSLATION, or rotated more than the
specified MAXIMUM_ROTATION. The speed of the animation depends on the hardware
Adams/View is running on, the complexity of the graphics being displayed, and the draw mode
of the graphics being displayed (wireframe, solid filled, or shaded; wireframe being the fastest).
5. If an eigen_solution is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. The
EIGEN_SOLUTION must be in an existing analysis that is associated to an existing model.
Therefore, any reference to the EIGEN_SOLUTION can include the model and analysis name.
For example, assume you have read a result file called "SECOND_GEAR.RES", and this result
file contains the analysis "SECOND_GEAR". If you wish to refer to the EIGEN_SOLUTION
named "EIG1" for the model "TRANSMISSION", enter
.TRANSMISSION.SECOND_GEAR.EIG1 (the .TRANSMISSION.SECOND_GEAR. may be
analysis name that the result set came from (or is stored under). If you type a "?", Adams/View
will list the eigen_solutions available by default. The eigen_solution name begins with the letters
EIG and ends with the eigen_solution ID number. You must separate multiple eigen_solution
names by commas. If the eigen_solution is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by
graphic_results 15
7. If neither MODE_NUMBER nor FREQUENCY is specified, the first mode in the
8. The mode shape (i.e. eigenvector) of the mode closest to the specified FREQUENCY is used. If
neither MODE_NUMBER nor FREQUENCY is specified, the first mode in the
frequencies, use the LIST_INFO EIGEN command.
9. The reason why the translation_maximum parameter is needed is because the eigenvectors are
normalized during the eigen_solution. Therefore, to get a meaningful animation or deformed
shape you must sometimes set this value to scale the maximum deformation to get a recognizable
shape.
10. The reason why the rotation_maximum parameter is required is because the eigenvectors are
normalized during the EIGEN_SOLUTION. Therefore, to get meaningful animation or deformed
shape, you must sometimes set this value to scale the maximum deformation to get a recognizable
shape.
11. A full cycle goes from undeformed, to maximum positive displacement, back to undeformed, then
to maximum displacement in the negative direction, and finally back to undeformed. The
interpolation between the frames is done with trigonometric functions, therefore, the frames will
tend to be segregated at the maximum deformation in the positive and negative directions.
12. If entered the NUMBER_OF_CYCLES parameter must be a positive integer. This value will be
optional and if not entered will default initially to 1 (until updated by the user).
motion. This is an optional parameter and if not entered then no superimposed frames will be
drawn. The legal values of this parameter are ON and OFF. ON indicates that frames will be
superimposed during the animation. OFF, the default, indicates that frames will not be
superimpose during the animation.
14. The fullscreen_animation parameter specifies the animation should be done using the entire
application window. This includes the areas for all the displayed views, the menu/panel area,
fixed menu area , and the command/message areas. The application window will return to the
configuration in effect prior to the animation command when the animation is complete.
15. Bitmap animation is a platform dependent feature that may be used to obtain faster animations.
The value for this parameter may be one of the following:- OFF perform no bitmap animation
operations.
- RECORD - record frames for the bitmap animation using the current window size.
- RECORD_SHRINK - record frames for the bitmap animation, but first shrink the Adams/View
window so that it is approximately 20% of the total screen size. This is to obtain a faster animation
by using a smaller amount of screen space.
- PLAY - play back the last recorded bitmap animation.
- FREE_MEM - free any memory resources that were allocated for bitmap animations. Each time
you record a new bitmap animation, any previous bitmap animation will be deleted. When you
exit Adams/View, any bitmap animations will be deleted. It is suggested that after you have
finished with a bitmap animation to use the FREE_MEM option so that you can make available
the memory resources used by the animation. It should be noted that there is a direct correlation
between the size of the Adams/View window and the memory requirements for recording and the
speed upon playback. A large Adams/View window on a color machine may require a significant
amount of memory to perform bitmap animation. In addition, playback speeds are going to be
slower for a large window as opposed to a smaller window because more pixels per frame need
to be drawn. Currently, this feature is only available on Sun workstations running the SunView
windowing system.
16. Single frame recording allows you to render complex graphics images using the highest quality
rendering modes and record the images sequentially on the laser disc. Upon playback, the
recorded frames are displayed at the standard video rate of 30 frames/sec, allowing for
smooth,high-quality animation of modeling or analysis graphics. In addition, laser disc devices
allow you to vary the playback rate (unlike video tape systems) to speed up or slow down the
resulting animation sequence.
Tips:
1. If the MAXIMUM_TRANSLATION parameter is not specified, 20 percent of the model is used.
2. If the MAXIMUM_ROTATION parameter is not specified, 20 degrees is used.
3. To get a list of the modes and frequencies use LIST_INFO EIGEN_VALUE
4. Animate only a single view. If you animate multiple views simultaneously,animation will be
slower. You can use the Delete command box on the View Control Panel or the "VIEW
MANAGEMENT DELETE" command to delete unneeded views.
You may also erase a view with the "VIEW ERASE" command. Erasing a view leaves the view
window in the display, but erases the contents so they will not be animated.
5. Animate in wireframe mode rather than in solid fill or shaded mode.
6. Remove unnecessary geometry with the "DISPLAY_ATTRIBUTES VISIBILITY GEOMETRY
VISIBILITY=OFF" command. You can remove entire parts with the"DISPLAY_ATTRIBUTES
VISIBILITY PART VISIBILITY=OFF" command.
Avoid excessive detail in your geometry. For example, avoid creating a cylinder with 60 sides if
it looks acceptable with 20 sides.
graphic_results 17
7. Remove or replace "rubber-band" geometry. In general, geometry that "rubberbands" (i.e.

changes size or shape with each time step) takes longer to display than similar geometry that does
not. Spring-dampers, force vectors, and outlines that go between parts are examples of "rubber-
banding" geometry.
Turn off the view name and triad with the command "VIEW MANAGEMENT
MODIFYNAME_VISIBILITY=OFF TRIAD_VISIBILITY=OFF".
graphic_results single_frame_display
Allows you to display the model geometry based on Adams simulation results, one frame at a time. These
frames correspond to "simulation output time steps".
Format:
rame_number = f integer
time = time
offset = location
contour_plots = on
Example:
graphic_results single_frame_display &

frame_number = 10 &
base_marker = mar_3 &
camera_ref_marker = psmar &
colors = pink &
offset = 10 , 10 , 10 &
contour_plots = on
Description:

analysis_name An Existing Analysys This parameter specifies the name of an analysis name.
view_name An Existing View Specifies the view for the display
graphic_results 19

frame_number Integer The FRAME_NUMBER parameter is used to specify
the frame number (Adams simulation output time step)
at which to configure a model during the
Time Time The TIME parameter allows you to identify the frame
number (Adams simulation output time step) at which to
configure the model in the
SINGLE_FRAME_DISPLAY command.
Configuration Display_Frame This parameter is used to specify what output frame, or
output time step, of the simulation results is to be
displayed for the single_frame_display command.
Base_marker An Existing Marker This parameter is used to specify a marker whose
animates.
Camera_ref_marker An Existing Marker This parameter is used to identify a marker which
specifies the viewing direction as the model animates.
Offset Location Specifies the offset of the axis line from the plot border.
Colors An Existing Color Modifies the red, green, and blue components of
existing colors.
contour_plots on/off
1. Options are provided to control the single-frame-at-a-time display mode. The options effect what
model configuration is to be displayed. They include, specifying the Adams output
FRAME_NUMBER, TIME, or CONFIGURATION (CONFIGURATION options include:
model_input, initial_conditions, equilibrium, forward, and backward). This command also allows
the user to view the results of multiple models simultaneously. Each simulation result is read and
associated to an analysis name.
This ANALYSIS_NAME can be viewed in any number of views at one time.
2. When Adams/View reads a graphics file (.GRA), a request file (.REQ), or a results file (.RES) an
analysis name is created. By default, the name of the analysis is the file name excluding the
extension. Adams/View requires that Adams simulations have unique names and the default name
of an analysis may be overridden when reading the file(s) using the file_name parameter. When
change the default analysis name without reading in an analysis file use, the "defaults analysis"
command.
(output time step) and the default value is initially 1. If a new value is entered, this value will be
frame number is entered, the system will display the last frame. This parameter is optional and
mutually exclusive with the CONFIGURATION and TIME parameters. If none of the three are
entered, the first frame will be displayed.
Note: Even if only one view_name is provided, the frame number will be applied to the specified
5. The frame with the closest time value to the time specified in the TIME parameter will be selected.
Adams/View will display the last frame if the time entered is greater than the time for the last
frame in the simulation. This parameter is optional and mutually exclusive with the
CONFIGURATION and FRAME_NUMBER parameters. If none of the three are entered, the
first frame will be displayed.
6. The legal values for the configuration parameter are:
• MODEL_INPUT, the configuration as input to Adams before analysis
• INITIAL_CONDITIONS, the configuration after initial conditions are met
• EQUILIBRIUM, the configuration after an equilibrium analysis
• FORWARD, one frame forward from the current one displayed
• BACKWARD, one frame backward from the current one displayed.
parameters are used to specify the time dependent frames of the simulation output. The
CONFIGURATION parameter is optional and if not entered, the system will display the first time
dependent frame in the graphics file (assuming its mutually exclusive counterparts are not entered
either).
7. The base_marker parameter is used to specify a marker whose position will be frozen in the view
as the model animates. This is particularly useful when a relatively small object undergoes both
small configuration changes as well as large overall gross motion. For example, the flight path of
a jet is very large over time relative to the motion of the control surfaces on the jet. In this case
selecting the BASE_MARKER to be on the jet would be appropriate. This parameter can be used
with the CAMERA_REF_MARKER to create a different effect on the viewing direction. When
graphic_results 21
the CAMERA_REF_MARKER and the BASE_MARKER are specified together, the viewing
direction is "from" the CAMERA_REF_MARKER position "to" the BASE_MARKER position.
In addition the "up" direction of the view is computed based on the direction of the
8. You may identify a marker by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.If the marker is not
even if the marker is displayed. If you created the marker by reading an Adams data set or graphics
file, the marker name is the letters MAR followed by the Adams data set marker ID number. For
example, the name of Adams MARKER/101 is MAR101. If you created the marker during
preprocessing, you will have given it a name at that time. If a marker is available by default, you
may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a
marker under a different part, for instance, you may need to enter the model and part names, as
well. For example, you may specify marker 'pivot' from model 'links', part 'lower_arm' by entering
".links.lower_arm.pivot. You must separate multiple marker names by commas. If the marker is
visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on it. You need not separate multiple
marker picks by commas.
9. The camera_ref_marker parameter connects the viewing camera to the "z" axis of a marker. The
animation is then viewed from the moving location of that marker in the "z" direction. This is
particularly useful when a "driver’s eye" or "pilot’s eye" viewing perspective is desired. This
parameter can be used with the BASE_MARKER to create a different effect on the viewing
direction. When the CAMERA_REF_MARKER and the BASE_MARKER are specified
together, the viewing direction is "from" the CAMERA_REF_MARKER position "to" the
BASE_MARKER position. In addition the "up" direction of the view is computed based on the
direction of the CAMERA_REF_MARKER "y" axis (i.e. the y axis is projected into a direction
perpendicular to the viewing direction defined by the two markers). This viewing direction is
recomputed between each frame of the animation. This feature allows the effect of watching an
object come from a distance, pass by, and proceed into the distance.
Cautions:
1. Even if only one view_name is provided, the frame number will be applied to the specified view
and any other views that contain the same model (the model indicated by analysis_name
parameter). If only analysis_name is provided (view_name parameter is omitted), any views that
contain the model indicated by analysis_name will be affected.
Tips:
1. f the VIEW_NAME parameter is used, the desired view can be identified by picking in the
2. ". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the markers available by default.
group 1
group
group attributes
group attributes
Allows the specification of attributes to be set on a group
Format:
group attributes
group_name = an existing group
size_of_icons = real
Example:
group attributes &

group_name = group_1 &
visibility = on &
color = blue &
line_thickness = 0.19 &
line_type = dash &
entity_scope = fill_color &
active = on d &
group 3
group attributes
Description:

group_name An Existing Group Specifies the group to be modified. You use
this parameter to identify the existing group to
current icon size.
visibility On_off_with_toggle Specifies the visibility of graphic entities
name_visibility On_off_with_toggle The NAME_VISIBILITY parameter provides
control over the visibility of the view name
view.
color An Existing Color Specifies the color the modeling entity should
be drawn in.
line_thickness Real Specifies the thickness of the line for a curve
line_type Line_style This parameter allows the selection of the line
type for a curve.
dependents_active On_off_no_opinion Specifies whether children of the objects are
to be acted upon in the same way as the active
parameter does.
1. If a group has attributes associated with it, any object in the group will inherit the group's
attribute. If an object is in more than one group, the object will inherit the attribute of the last
group it was added to.
2. You may identify a group by typing its name.
If a group is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the group available by default.
You must separate multiple group names by commas.
group attributes
When you specify SCALE_OF_ICONS, a new size is calculated by multiplying the current size
For Example:
.model ---------------------- SIZE_OF_ICONS =.15 meters
For Example:
5. Specifies the visibility of graphic entities. The visibility parameter is used to control whether
graphic entities, such as markers, joints, and parts, are to be drawn in an Adams/View viewport.
and if not entered the name will be visible (i.e. will be ON).
Note that if the visibility of the view name is turned off the only indication that a view is "active"
Example 1:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- RED
Example 2:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- RED
group 5
group attributes

Example 3:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- NO_COLOR
8. The line type describes how the line will look when displayed on a plot. Adams/View supports
solid, dash, dotdash, and dot.
-------------------------------------
solid _______________
dash _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
dotdash . _ . _ . _ . _
dot . . . . . . . .
9. The legal values for the entity_scope parameter are FILL_COLOR,
EDGE_COLOR,OUTLINE_COLOR, and ALL. FILL_COLOR is the color of those areas of a
graphic that can be shaded (they include sides of a cylinders, frustums, boxes, etc.) The
EDGE_COLOR is the color of the lines making up the edges of the facets (or areas filled by the
FILL_COLOR) of a graphic that can be shaded.
springdamper.
following command:
status changed indvidually. Elements affected are:
• Group
group attributes
• Part
• Marker
• Geometry
• Constraints
• Forces
• Data Elements
• Output Control
group 7
group copy
group copy
Allows you to copy an existing group to a new group.
All objects that are referenced by the first group will be referenced by the new group.
When objects in a group are copied, they are copied in the same manner as other copy operations in
Adams/View. That is, a replica of the original objects are created, reference markers for the new object
are created as needed and a new name is automatically generated.
Format:
group copy
new_group_name = new name for group
Example:
group copy &

group_name = my_part_group &
new_group_name = my_part_copy
Description:

Group_name Existing Group Specifies the group name to be copied.
New_group_name New Group Specifies the new name for the group.
group create
group create
Allows you to create a new Adams/View group.
An Adams/View group is a collection of any Adams/View objects except other groups. Groups can be
used to control object's attributes, like visibility and color.
Format:
group create
group_name= new group name
comments= string
objects_in_group= existing entity
type_filter= entity
expand_groups= yes/no
expr_active= integer
Example:
group create &

group_name = pendulum_parts &
comments = "group containing all parts of a pendulum" &
objects_in_group = .model_1.part_2,.model_1.part_3 &
type_filter = part &
expand_groups = no &
expr_active = 1
Description:

group_name New Group Name Specifies the name of the new group. You may use
this name later to refer to this group.
comments String Specifies comments for the group being created or
modified.
objects_in_group Entity Specifies the objects to be in the group.
type_filter Entity Type Specifies the type of objects allowed.
group 9
group create

expand_groups Yes/no Specifies a Boolean value
expr_active Integer EXPR_ACTIVE allows you to set the activity of the
group using an integer value, which allows
parameterization.
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two group with the same name, so you must provide a
unique name.
You may identify a group by typing its name. If a group is available by default, you may identify
it by entering only its name. If it is not, you must enter its full name. If you type a "?",
Adams/View will list the group available by default.
2. The “objects_in_group” parameter takes one or more of any existing Adams/View objects. If a
wild card is used to specify the objects, the TYPE_FILTER parameter can be used to accept only
objects of a particular type.
3. Adams/View at this time does not allow expressions when specifying option lists. To allow the
activity of a group to be set parametrically, the parameter EXPR_ACTIVE was added to the
GROUP CREATE and GROUP MODIFY commands. This parameter takes on integer value.
If the value is not set, either because the parameter was never used, or it was unset with the (none)
expression, then the standard activity rules apply.
If the EXPR_ACTIVE is set to an expression that evaluates to zero (FALSE), the objects in the
group will be in active (and will not be included by Adams/Solver in any simulation). If the value
is the default or non-zero (TRUE), then the objects will be active (and will be included in
simulations).
group delete
group delete
Allows the deletion of an Adams/View group. When objects in a group are deleted, they are deleted in
the same manner as other delete operations in Adams/View. That is, they are checked for dependent
objects, and if any dependencies are found the object can not be deleted.
Format:
group delete
Example:
group delete &

group_name = my_part_group
Description:

Group_name Existing group Specifies the group to delete.
You may identify a group by typing its name.If a group is available by default, you may identify
it by entering its name only. If it is not, you must enter its full name. If you type a "?",
group 11
group empty
group empty
Removes all objects from the group. Group continues to exist unlike the use of “group delete” command
that deletes the group as well.
Format:
group empty
Example:
group empty &

group_name = my_part_group
Description:

Group_name Existing Group Specifies the group to empty. You use this
parameter to identify the existing group to be
group modify
group modify
Allows the modification of an existing Adams/View groups.
An Adams/View group is a collection of any Adams/View objects except other groups. Groups can be
used to control object's attributes, like visibility and color.
Format:
group modify
group_name= existing group name
new_group_name = new group name
comments= string
objects_in_group= existing entity
type_filter= entity
expr_active= integer
Example:
group modify &

group_name = pend_parts_and_joints &
comments = "group containing all parts and joints" &
objects_in_group = model_1.part_2,.model_1.part_3,.model_1.joint_1
Description:

group_name Group Name Specifies the name of the existing group to
be modified.
New_group_name New Group Name Specifies the new name for the group. You
may us e this name later to refer to this
group.
comments String Specifies comments for the group being
objects_in_group Entity Specify the objects to be in the group.
type_filter Entity Type Specify the type of objects allowed.
group 13
group modify

expand_groups Yes/no Specify a Boolean value
expr_active Integer EXPR_ACTIVE allows you to set the
activity of the group using an integer value,
which allows parameterization.
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two group with the same full name, so you must provide
a unique name.
You may identify a group by typing its name.
If a group is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you
2. The “objects_in_group” parameter takes one or more of any existing Adams/View objects. If a
wldcaring is used to specify the objects, the TYPE_FILTER parameter can be used to accept only
objects of a particular type.
3. Adams/View at this time does not allow expressions when specifying option lists. To allow the
activity of a group so to be set parametrically the parameter EXPR_ACTIVE was added to the
GROUP CREATE and GROUP MODIFY commands. This parameter takes on integer value.
If the value is not set, either because the parameter was never used, or it was unset with the (none)
expression, then the standard activity rules apply.
If the EXPR_ACTIVE is set to an expression that evaluates to zero (FALSE), the objects in the
group will be in active (and will not be included by Adams/Solver in any simulation). If the value
is the default or non-zero (TRUE), then the objects will be active (and will be included in
simulations).
group objects add
group objects add

Allows you to add objects to an Adams/View group.
Format:
group objects add

group_name= existing group
objects_in_group= existing entities
type_filter= entity type
Example:
group objects add &

objects_in_group = .model_1.part_2, .model_1.part_3 &
type_filter = part
Description:

Group_name Existing Group Name Specifies the group to be modified. You use this
Objects_in_group Existing Entity/entities Specifies the objects to be added or removed
from the group.
Expand_groups Yes, No Specifies a Boolean value.
Type_filter Entity Type Specifies the type of objects allowed.
1. The “objects_in_group” parameter takes one or more of any existing Adams/View objects.
If a wildcard is used to specify the objects, the TYPE_FILTER parameter can be used to accept
only objects of a particular type.
2. When specifying the objects for the “type_filter” operation a wild cards can be used, which may
result in too many objects being found. For example, if all the parts for model MOD1 are desired,
specifying .MOD1.* will get not only the parts, but all children of the model, like joints, forces,
etc. Using the parameter TYPE_FILTER=part will result in only the parts being processed by
this command.
group 15
group objects attributes

Allows the specification of attributes on all objects in a group which can take attributes.
Format:

type_filter = ent
Example:
group objects attributes &

visibility = on &
color = blue &
line_thickness = 0.19 &
line_type = dash &
entity_scope = fill_color &
active = on d &
dependents_active = on &
type_filter = color
Description:

group_name An Existing Group Specifies the group to be modified. You use
this parameter to identify the existing group to
current icon size.
visibility On_off_with_toggle Specifies the visibility of graphic entities
name_visibility On_off_with_toggle The NAME_VISIBILITY parameter provides
control over the visibility of the view name
view.
color An Existing Color Specifies the color the modeling entity should
be drawn in.
line_thickness Real Specifies the thickness of the line for a curve
line_type Line_style This parameter allows the selection of the line
type for a curve.
dependents_active On_off_no_opinion Specifies whether children of the objects are to
be acted upon in the same way as the active
parameter does.
type_filter Ent Specifies the type of objects allowed.
transperency Integer Sets the transparency
group 17
When you specify SCALE_OF_ICONS, a new size is calculated by multiplying the current size,
For Example:
.model ---------------------- SIZE_OF_ICONS =15 meters
.part-------------------- SIZE_OF_ICONS =.125 meters
For Example:
4. Specifies the visibility of graphic entities. The visibility parameter is used to control whether
graphic entities, such as markers, joints, and parts, are to be drawn in an Adams/View
viewport.The legal values for this parameter are: ON, OFF, and TOGGLE. ON will make the
desired entity visible. OFF will make the desired entity invisible. TOGGLE will take the current
state of an entity’s visibility and reverse it.
Example 1:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part---------------------- RED
Example 2:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part---------------------- RED

Example 3:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part---------------------- NO_COLOR
7. The line type describes how the line will look when displayed on a plot. Adams/View supports
solid, dash, dotdash, and dot.
solid _______________
dash _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
dotdash . _ . _ . _ . _
dot . . . . . . . .
shaded (they include sides of a cylinders, frustums, boxes, etc.) The EDGE_COLOR is the color
that can be shaded.
springdamper.
following command:
• Group
group 19
• Part
• Marker
• Geometry
• Constraints
• Forces
• Data Elements
• Output Control
10. When specifying the objects for this operation a wild cards can be used, which may result in too
many objects being found. For example, if all the parts for model MOD1 are desired, specifying
.MOD1.* will get not only the parts, but all children of the model, like joints, forces, etc. Using
the parameter TYPE_FILTER=part will result in only the parts being processed by this
command.
group objects copy
group objects copy

Allows you to create replicas of all objects in the group.
Format:
group objects copy

new_group_name = a new or existing group
type_filter = ent
search_for_string = string
replace_string = string
Example:
group objects copy &

new_group_name = group_2 &
type_filter = color &
search_for_string = "ab" &
replace_string = "ba"
Description:

group_name An Existing Specifies the group to be modified. You use this
Group parameter to identify the existing group to be affected
with this command.
new_group_name A New Or Specifies the group the copied objects are to be added to.
Existing Group
type_filter Ent Specifies the type of objects allowed.
search_for_string String
replace_string String
1. When objects in a group are copied, they are copied in the same manner as other copy operations
in Adams/View. That is, a replica of the original objects are created, reference markers for the
new object are created as needed and a new name is automatically generated.
group 21
group objects copy
The newly created objects can be placed into a new or an existing group as they are being copied
with the NEW_GROUP_NAME parameter.
2. You may identify a group by typing its name. If a group is available by default, you may identify
3. If a new group is specified, the group is created.
You may identify a group by typing its name. If a group is available by default, you may identify
command.
group objects delete

Allows the deletion of all objects in a group.
Format:

remove_unused_references = boolean
expand_groups = boolean
type_filter = ent
Example:
group objects delete &

new_group_name = group_2 &
search_for_string = "ab" &
replace_string = "ba"
Description:

group_name An Existing Specifies the group to modify. You use this parameter
Group to identify the existing group to affect with this
command.
remove_unused_refere Boolean Parameter used to specify whether or not to delete any
nces unused references found for the objects being deleted.
expand_groups Boolean
type_filter Ent Specify the type of objects allowed.
1. When objects in a group are deleted, they are deleted in the same manner as other delete
operations in Adams/View. That is, they are checked for dependent objects, and if any
dependencies are found they are deleted.
command.
4. As an example for the remove_unused_references parameter, if a circle is being deleted, and its
center marker is not being used by anything other than the circle, then it is an unused reference.
group objects remove

Allows objects to be removed from an Adams/View group.
Format:

objects_in_group= existing entities
type_filter= entity type
Example:
group objects remove &

objects_in_group = .model_1.part_3 &
type_filter = part
Description:

Group_name Existing Group Name Specifies the group to be modified.You
group to be affected with this command.
Objects_in_group Existing Entity/entities Specifies the objects to be removed from
the group.
Type_filter Entity Type Specifies the type of objects allowed.
1. The “objects_in_group” parameter takes one or more of any existing Adams/View objects.
If a wildcard is used to specify the objects, the TYPE_FILTER parameter can be used to accept
only objects of a particular type.
2. When specifying the objects for the “type_filter” operation a wild cards can be used, which may
result in too many objects being found. For example, if all the parts for model MOD1 are desired,
specifying .MOD1.* will get not only the parts, but all children of the model, like joints, forces,
etc. Using the parameter TYPE_FILTER=part will result in only the parts being processed by
this command.
group objects rename

Allows you to modify the name of an existing group object
Format:

prefix_string = string
suffix_string = string
type_filter = ent
Example:
group objects rename &

prefix_string = gr_ &
type_filter = color
Description:

group_name An Existing Group Specifies the group to modify. You use this parameter
to identify the existing group to affect with this
command.
prefix_string String String to be prefixed to the name
suffix_string String String to be suffixed to the name
type_filter Ent Specify the type of objects allowed.
command.
hardcopy 1
hardcopy
Allows you to send screen output to hard copy file. The user may specify the view_name to be sent to the
desired hard copy file name. The FILE_NAME parameter provides a means to specify the name of the
hard copy file the screen image(s) selected by the user will be written to. The FILE_NAME is an optional
parameter, and if not entered, a default name will be constructed. If entered, the file name must be
enclosed in quotes.
The ORIENTATION parameter is used to specify how to orient the image sent to a hard copy file. There
are two legal values for this parameter: LANDSCAPE and PORTRAIT.
The LANGUAGE parameter is used to specify that plotting language is to be used for the image sent to
a hardcopy file. There are two legal values for this parameter: POSTSCRIPT and HPGL.
Format:
hardcopy
window_name= existing gi_window
view_name= existing view
page_name= existing page
file_name= string
orientation= landscape, portrait
paper_type= default, eight_by_eleven, a0, a1, a2, a3, a4, b5, b, c, d, e, f
send_to_printer= boolean
language= hpgl, postscript, pict, hoops_metafile, windows_native
image_width_height= real,real
force_black_and_white= on/off
setup_only= boolean
include_toolbars= boolean
Example:
hardcopy &
view_name = view_1 &
file_name = “c:\my_files\my_view” &
orientation = portrait &
paper_type = default &
image_width_height = 0.5,0.25
Description:

window_name Existing Gi_window Specifies an existing window name whose screen
output is required
view_name Existing View_name Specifies existing view name
page_name Existing Page_name Specifies existing page name
file_name String Specifies the name of the hard copy file the screen
image(s) selected by the user will be written to
orientation Portrait/landscape Specifies how the image sent to a hardcopy file is to
be oriented
paper_type Default, Specifies the size of paper that needs to be used
Eight_by_eleven, A0,
A1, A2, A3, A4, B5, B,
C, D, E, F
send_to_printer Boolean Specifies if a printout of the screen output is
required
language Hpgl, Postscript, Pict, Specifies the plotting language to be used for the
Hoops_metafile, image sent to a hardcopy file
Windows_native
image_width_height Real,real Specifies the size of the hardcopy output in the
format ( x, y )
print_control_panel On/off Allows the user to print the control panel graphics
when screen output is sent to a hard copy file.
force_black_and_wh Boolean Specifies whether or not to override all color
ite specifications in a scene and produce a hardcopy
image which is solely black and white.
Include_toolbar Boolean Specifies whether the toolbar is to be included in the
screen output
hardcopy 3
2. The FILE_NAME is an optional parameter and if not entered, a default name will be constructed.
The file name constructed will be of the form fig_000x.ps (where x is 1 - 9) if the postscript
language is chosen or fig_000x.hpgl if the HPGL language is chosen. The integer value x will be
automatically incremented each time a new default hard copy name is requested. The value x
will expand and take the place of the zeros in every order of magnitude increase. Therefore, the
tenth file would be named fig_0010.ps, the 100th file would be named fig_0100.ps, etc. In this
manner, 9999 default hardcopy files can be created, named: fig_0001.ps up to fig_9999.ps
(or.hpgl).
If entered, the file name must be enclosed in quotes.
3. There are two legal values for the orientation parameter: LANDSCAPE and PORTRAIT. The
LANDSCAPE value will cause the image to be oriented such that the top of the image (as seen
on the terminal screen) will be along the "long" edge of the paper. The PORTRAIT value will
cause the image to be oriented such that the top of the image (as seen on the terminal screen) will
be along the "short" edge of the paper.
The ORIENTATION parameter is optional and if not entered, will be set to LANDSCAPE.
4. There are three legal values for the language parameter: POSTSCRIPT, HPGL, and PICT. The
POSTSCRIPT value will cause the image to be written in color compatible postscript. If an
explicit file name is provided with an extension of '.eps', then the image will be written in
encapsulated postscript. The HPGL (Hewlett Packard Graphics Language(tm)) value will cause
the image to be written in color compatible HPGL. The PICT value will cause the image to be
written out as an Extended Format Version 2 PICT file, which is readable in many Macintosh
programs. The resulting file should be printable on any device supporting those languages.
The LANGUAGE parameter is optional, and if not entered, will be set to POSTSCRIPT.
5. The largest possible dimensions for hardcopy output are 1 x 1 ( IMAGE_WIDTH_HEIGHT=
1,1).
These hardcopy dimensions specify a "window" for the image to be fit into. If 1x1 is the
maximum, then .5 x .5 will result in an image half as big. Dimensions that are not symmetrical
will result in the image being "stretched" or "compressed" to fit the dimensions.
All hard copy output, regardless of its dimensions, is centered on the page.
6. Normally, when a hard copy operation is performed, only the views and their associated graphics
are set to the hard copy file. This command allows the control panel graphics to be printed in
addition to the view graphics. This way the user gets a hardcopy file which looks exactly the way
he sees it on the screen.
7. If the “force_black_and_white” parameter is set to "ON", all of the text and geometry in the hard
copy will be black and white. All text, polylines and edges will be black. Polygon faces will be
white if the polygon edges are visible, otherwise, they will be black. If this is set to OFF, the
colors that you have specified for geometry and text will be present in the hard copy file. Black
and white hard copy devices may use shades of gray to represent various colors. If the shades of
gray are undesirable, you may set the FORCE_BLACK_AND_WHITE parameter to ON to
ensure that the output will consist of solely black and white colors.
Cautions:
1. Care should be taken when attempting to get a hard copy. The choice of draw modes in the view
(wireframe, solid, shaded, set in the view manage modify command or from the control panel)
will have impact on the image sent to the hard copy file. If solid or shaded mode is "On" in the
desired view, some graphics may "seem" to disappear. This happens if the image of an entity is
such that the edges of the shaded entity obscured the shaded or filled area. To avoid this, use
wireframe draw mode or ensure "facet" interiors are visible before the hardcopy is attempted. The
choice of background colors can have a similar effect.
help 1
help
Allows you to do the following.
• Request Command Navigator help on any command, keyword or a topic.
• Turn context sensitive help on or off.
• Turn the status bar messages on or off.
Format:
help
command_or_topic= string
context_sensitive= true
tips= on_off_toggle
Example:
help &
help command_or_topic = analysis
Description:
:

Command_or_topic String The value of this parameter is the command or topic name
about which command navigator help is to be requested.
Context_sensitive True The value of this parameter decides if the context sensitive
help should be displayed or not.
Tips On/off/toggle The value of this parameter decides if advice/tips should be
provided or not.
The “Command_or_topic” parameter cannot be used in conjuction with the parameters,
context_sensitive or tips.
highlight 1
highlight
The HIGHLIGHT command changes the appearance of an object, so that you can see its position in the
model. Optionally, you can also see the other entities it depends upon or which depend on it.
You can change the color or the line style of the object to highlight it. Adams/View will change the
appearance of the objects being highlighted, then wait for you to enter input from the mouse or keyboard
before continuing, or wait for a given time period, if specified.
You can specify which entities, related to the selected object, are to be highlighted. This must be one of
SELF, DEPENDENTS, REFERENTS, PARTS, or ALL.
SELF indicates that only the selected object is to be highlighted.
DEPENDENTS indicates that the entities that are dependent on the selected object are to be highlighted.
If a marker is selected, this would show any constraints, forces, geometry, or parts (if the marker is the
center of mass or inertia marker) that depend on it. If a joint is selected, this would show any motions or
couplers that depend on it.
REFERENTS indicates that the entities on which the selected object is dependent, are to be highlighted.
For constraints, forces, and geometry, this will show any markers that they depend on. For motions and
couplers, this will show the joints they depend on.
PARTS indicates that any part on which the selected object are dependent, usually indirectly through one
of the part's markers, are to be highlighted. For constraints and forces, this will show the parts that the
object affects directly. For dynamic (part-connecting) graphics, this will show the parts that will affect
their appearance.
ALL indicates that the selected object plus entities, that would be highlighted by the DEPENDENTS,
REFERENTS, and PARTS arguments, are to be highlighted.
Format:
highlight
marker_name= existing marker name
geometry_name= existing geometry name
part_name= existing part name
constraint_name= existing constraint name
force_name= existing force name
line_type= solid, dash, dotdash, dot, none
time_delay= real
entity= self, dependents, referents, parts, all
Example:
highlight &
color = green &
line_type = dotdash &
time_delay = 5 &
entity = self
This command will highlight only the MARKER_28. It will display it in green color in the dotdash
format. This will be highlighted for 5 seconds
This command will highlight the MARKER_28, as well as all the entities that are dependant it, and all
parts on which it is dependant. It will display it in green color in the dotdash format. This will be
highlighted for 5 seconds.
Description:

marker_name Existing Marker Specifies the name of the marker to be highlighted
geometry_name Existing Geometric Entity Specifies the name of the geometric object to be
highlighted. The geometric element may be one of
OUTLINE, ARC, CIRCLE, BSPLINE, BLOCK,
CYLINDER, FRUSTUM, SPRING_DAMPER, or
FORCE.
part_name Existing Body Specifies the name of the part to be highlighted.
constraint_name Existing Constraint Specifies the name of the constraint object to be
highlighted. The constraint element may be one of
JOINT, JOINT_PRIMITIVE,
HIGHER_PAIR_CONTACT,
MOTION_GENERATOR, or USER_DEFINED.
force_name Existing Force Specifies the name of the force object to be
highlighted. The force element may be one of BEAM,
BUSHING, FIELD,
TRANSLATIONAL_SPRING_DAMPER,
ROTATIONAL_SPRING_DAMPER, TIRE,
SINGLE_COMPONENT_FORCE,
FORCE_VECTOR, TORQUE_VECTOR,
GENERAL_FORCE, or MULTI_POINT_FORCE.
color Existing Color Specifies what COLOR an object should be changed
to, when it is highlighted.
highlight 3

line_type Solid, Dash, Dotdash, Specifies the selection for the LINE_TYPE for the
Dot, None object or objects being highlighted.
time_delay Real The TIME_DELAY parameter is used to specify the
number of seconds to temporarily halt command
processing. Command processing will resume after
the specified number of seconds has elapsed or when
the user types any character on the keyboard or makes
a pick with the mouse in the Adams/View window.
entity Self, Dependents, Specifies which entities related to the selected object
Referents, Parts, All are to be highlighted.
to enter the model and part names, as well. For example, you may specify marker 'pivot' from
to enter the model and part names, as well. For example, you may specify arc 'end' on part 'arm'

at that time.
associated with it.
may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify constraint 'servo_motor'
from model 'test' by entering ".test.servo_motor". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the
constraints available by default.
If the constraint is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
You need not separate multiple constraint picks by commas.
highlight 5
associated with it.
6. The object is defined by what you have selected to highlight and the associated objects that are
specified in the ENTITY parameter. Therefore, when the COLOR of an object is specified, all
objects specified in the entity parameter associated to that object are drawn with the specified
COLOR. Adams/View supports the following COLOR: black, white, red, green, blue, cyan,
magenta, and yellow.
NOTE: If you choose the COLOR of an entity to be drawn in the view background color (typically
white or black ), it may not show up. See help for hardcopy.
7. The LINE_TYPE describes how the lines drawn for the wireframe representation of the
highlighted objects will look during highlighting. Adams/View supports solid, dash, dotdash, and
dot. Note that objects highlighted with non-solid line types may look more indistinct as you zoom
away from them.
---------------------------------------
solid -----------
dash - - - - - -
dotdash . _ . _ . _
dot . . . . . .
8. The “entity” parameter must be one of SELF, DEPENDENTS, REFERENTS, PARTS, or ALL.
SELF indicates that only the selected object is to be highlighted.
DEPENDENTS indicates that the entities that are dependent on the selected object are to be
highlighted. If a marker is selected, this would show any constraints, forces, geometry, or parts (if
the marker is the center of mass or inertia marker) that depend on it. If a joint is selected, this
would show any motions or couplers that depend on it.
REFERENTS indicates that the entities, on which the selected object is dependent, are to be
highlighted. For constraints, forces, and geometry, this will show any markers that they depend
on. For motions and couplers, this will show the joints they depend on.
PARTS indicates that any parts on which the selected object is dependent, usually indirectly
through one of the part's markers, are to be highlighted. For constraints and forces, this will show
the parts that the object affects directly. For dynamic (part-connecting) graphics, this will show
the parts that will affect their appearance.
ALL indicates that the selected object plus entities, that would be highlighted by the
DEPENDENTS, REFERENTS, and PARTS arguments, are to be highlighted.
hotspots 1
hotspots
hotspots display
hotspots display
Allows you to display hotspots. Hot spots are locations of high stress or strain on a flexible body or rigid
stress object. You can easily locate and view hot-spot information during animation displays in the
Adams/PostProcessor. When the Adams/Durability plugin is loaded, a Hot Spots tab is available on the
Adams/PostProcessor dashboard for Animation displays. This tab allows you to define the hot spots and
control their display.
Hot-spot information is derived from the data that is generated and cached for a flexible body (or rigid
stress object) during contour animations. This allows the display and control of hot-spot information to
be completely interactive.
Hot spot visualization is currently supported for durability-type contours, such as stress, strain, or fatigue.
Deformations are not supported.
Format:
hotspots display
animation_name= existing animation
visibility= on/off
Example:
hotspots display &

visibility = on
Description:

Animation_name Existing Animation Specifies the animation on which the hotspot should be
displayed.
Visibility On/off Sets the visibility of the hotspot to ON or OFF.
hotspots 3
hotspots filter
hotspots filter
Allows you to filter the hotspots for display.
Format:
hotspots filter
animation_name= Existing animation
type= count, threshold, percentage
value= real
sort= minimum, maximum, absolute
radius= real
Example:
hotspots filter &

type = threshold value = 29 &
sort = maximum&
radius = 0.8
Description:

Animation_name Existing Animation Name Specifies the name of an existing animation in
which the hotspots are to be filtered.
Type Count, Threshold, Percentage Selects the type of hot spots to be displayed
Value Real Selects the value of hot spots to be displayed
Sort Minimum, Maximum, Specifies the sorting option
Absolute
Radius Real Enters the distance between hot spots
1. Hot spots are locations of high stress or strain on a flexible body or rigid stress object. You can
easily locate and view hot-spot information during animation displays in the
Adams/PostProcessor. When the Adams/Durability plugin is loaded, a Hot Spots tab is available
on the Adams/PostProcessor dashboard for Animation displays. This tab allows you to define the
hot spots and control their display.
hotspots filter
Hot-spot information is derived from the data that is generated and cached for a flexible body (or
rigid stress object) during contour animations. This allows the display and control of hot-spot
information to be completely interactive.
Hot spot visualization is currently supported for durability-type contours, such as stress, strain, or
fatigue. Deformations are not supported.
2. Hotspots could be of the following types:
• Count - Enter the number of top hot spots to be displayed.
• Threshold - Display only those hot spots that meet or exceed this value.
• Percentage - Specify the number of hot spots to be displayed as a percentage
3. Specify one of the following sorting options for the sort parameter:
• Absolute - The sign of the value is ignored when sorting hot spots. You would use this option
when only the magnitude is important and not the sign or direction (in case of stress or strain).
• Maximum - Hot spots are ranked from maximum to minimum.
• Minimum - Hot spots are ranked from minimum to maximum.
4. All nodes that fall within the radius specified by the radius parameter are candidates for the same
hot spot. A value of 0.0 considers all nodes to be potential hot spots.
hotspots 5
hotspots label
hotspots label
Allows you to specify the settings for the label of the hotspot.
Format:
hotspots label
Animation_name = existing animation
Ranking = Boolean
Value = Boolean
Frame = Boolean
Node_id = boolean
Example:
hotspots label &

ranking = on &
value = on &
frame = on &
node_id = on
Description:

Animation_name Existing Animation Specifies the name of the animation in which the hotspot
labels need to be altered.
Ranking On/off Displays the sorting order of each hot spot, if turned ON.
Value On/off Displays the value of each hot spot, if turned ON.
Frame On/off Displays the frame when the value occurred, if turned ON.
NodE_id On/off Displays the node ID for that hot spot, if turned ON.
Tips:
1. If you do not select any of these options, Adams/PostProcessor only displays a cross hair at each
hot-spot location.
2. The color of the hot-spot graphics is the same as the flexible body color.
hotspots label
3. Hot-spot graphics can be hidden by other graphics. For better viewing of hot spot graphics, try
rotating the display, making the flexible body transparent, or displaying only one body at a time
using the Component display feature in the Animation tab.
if 1
if
expression.
You can use the IF command with or without the ELSE command.
Format:
if
end
else
end
Example:
if condition=(db_exists ("mar1"))
marker modify marker= mar1 location=2,0,0
else
marker create marker=mar1 location=2,0,0
end
In the above example, if the marker MAR1 exists, Adams/View modifies its location. If the marker does
not exist, Adams/View creates it and sets its location.
Description:

Condition Expression If the expression evaluates to a non-zero value, Adams/View executes
the commands following the IF or ELSEIF command up to the ELSE,
when present, or the END, if you do not use the ELSE. If the
expression evaluates to zero and you used ELSE, Adams/View
executes the commands between the ELSE and the END commands.

value.
else
end
variable_b))
Tips:
1. You can have any number of ELSEIF CONDITION commands.
info_window 1
info_window
info_window close
info_window close
Allows you to close an info_window.
Adams/view uses the Information window to display many different types of information about your
model, simulation, or motion data. In addition to just viewing information about your model, you can
perform a variety of operations in the Information window.
The information includes:
• Topology on the different objects in your model
• Object information, such as information about a part or a view
• Model verification results
• Measurements from one coordinate system marker to another
• Result set component information
• View attributes
• Results from a system command you run using the Tools -> System Command
The displayed info_window can be closed by using this command.
All the information about the model, simulation or motion data is displayed into the info_window. This
information can be saved to a file or the info_window can be emptied by ‘empty’ command. When not
needed it can be closed by using the ‘close’ command.
info_window 3
info_window empty
info_window empty
Allows you to empty the contents of an info_window.
• View attributes
The contents of a info_window can be cleared by using this command.
1. The info_window contents can be cleared by using this command. The saved information about
the model, simulation or motion data can be read into the info_window by using ‘read’ command.
info_window read
info_window read
Allows you to read the contents of a remote file to an info_window.
• View attributes
The contents of a saved file can be read into the info_window by using this command.
Format:
info_window read
file_name = string
Example:
info_window read &

file_name = "C:\ aview.log"
Description:

file_name String Specifies a remote file name from which the saved information can be
read.
The saved information about the model, simulation or motion data can be read into the info_window by
using this command.
interface 1
interface
interface btn_stack create

Allows you to create a new button stack.
The button stack is a stack of buttons which has multiple buttons attached to one button tab. The button
stack can be created by using this command.
Format:

btn_stack_name = a new GI_btn_stack
enabled = boolean
help_text = string
documentation_text = string
units = int_units
horiz_resizing = int_h_resize
vert_resizing = int_v_resize
location = real
height = real
width = real
Example:
interface btn_stack create &

btn_stack_name = .gui.cntrl.btn &
location = 0.0, 0.0 &
height = 0.5 &
width = 0.5 &
enabled = yes &
help_text = "help2text" &
documentation_text = "doc2text” &
units = relative &
horiz_resizing = attach_left &
vert_resizing = attach_top
interface 3
Description:

btn_stack _name A New Specifies the name of a new button stack
GI_btn_stack
enabled Boolean Activates the btn stack
help_text String Specifies the help text
documentation_text String Specifies the documentation text
units Int_units Specifies the btn_stack size as pixel or relative to dialog
box window
horiz_resizing Int_h_resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for the
btn_stack
vert_resizing Int_v_resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for the
btn_stack
location Real Specifies the location of the btn_stack on the dialog box
height Real Specifies the height of the btn_stack in terms of relative
units or pixel
width Real Specifies the width of the btn_stack field in terms of
relative units or pixel
1. The preliminary parameters of the btn_stack like size, placement and label are set using this
command.
2. The pop-up help and documentation help can be specified in appropriate columns.
3. The size of the btn_stack can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively, the
size can also be stated as relative to the dialog box window
4. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the btn_stack on
existing dialog box. For example, attach_left; attach_top options for Horiz_resizing and
Vert_resizing will place the btn_stack on the top left corner of the dialog box. The location can
also be specified from the top left corner by adjusting the parameter ‘location’
5. The size of the btn_stack can be specified with respect to the dialog box window size. The value
for parameter height and width should be a real number between 0.0 and 2.0, where 2.0 represents
the height of the dialog window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the btn_stack field window to
be one half as high as the dialog box window.
interface btn_stack delete

Allows you to delete an existing button stack.
Format:

btn_stack_name = an existing GI_btn_stack
Example:
interface btn_stack delete &

btn_stack_name = btn
Description:

btn_stack _name An Existing GI_btn_stack Specifies the name of an existing button stack
The btn_stack can be deleted by using this command.
interface 5
interface btn_stack display

Allows you to display an existing button stack.
The button stack may not be always displayed and it can be displayed by using this command.
Format:

Example:
interface btn_stack display &

Description:

The closed btn_stack can be displayed using this command
interface btn_stack modify

Allows you to modify an existing button stack.
Format:

new_btn_stack_name = a new btn_stack
enabled = boolean
help_text = string
units = int_units
location = real
height = real
width = real
Example:
interface btn_stack modify &

btn_stack_name = .gui.cntrl.btn &
new_btn_stack_name = .gui.cntrl.btn1 &
location = 0.0, 0.0 &
height = 0.5 &
width = 0.5 &
enabled = yes &
documentation_text = "doc2text” &
units = relative &
interface 7
Description:

btn_stack _name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing button stack
GI_btn_stack
new_btn_stack_nam A New Specifies a new name for an existing btn_stack
e GI_btn_stack
enabled Boolean Activates the btn stack
units Int_units Specifies the btn_stack size as pixel or relative to dialog
box window
btn_stack
btn_stack
location Real Specifies the location of the btn_stack on the dialog box
height Real Specifies the height of the btn_stack in terms of relative
units or pixel
width Real Specifies the width of the btn_stack field in terms of
1. The preliminary parameters of the btn_stack like size, placement, and name can be modified by
using this command.
3. The size of the btn_stack can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively, the
size can also be stated as relative to the dialog box window
4. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the btn_stack on
Vert_resizing will place the btn_stack on the top left corner of the dialog box. The location can
5. The size of the btn_stack can be specified with respect to the dialog box window size. The value
the height of the dialog window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the btn_stack field window to
be one half as high as the dialog box window.
interface btn_stack undisplay

Allows you to close an existing button stack.
The button stack may not be always need to be displayed and hence it can be closed by using this
command.
Format:

Example:
interface btn_stack undisplay &

Description:

The displayed btn_stack can be closed by using this command
interface 9
interface cmd_window
Allows you to display the command window.
The command window displays is used to enter the command statements. It also prompts the error
messages for the bad syntax. The window help is available for completing the commands and syntax.
In the command window, you can get help with keywords and parameter name completion. In addition,
you can get help with possible parameter values for modeling objects and files. For example, you can get
a list of possible marker names in your model or you can display the File Browser to help you find a file.
The command window displays all the keywords that beGIn with letter or letters. For example, for f it
displays file, floating_marker, and so on, when you type ‘?’ after initial letter of the command.
when you type ‘?’ after a command parameter, if the parameter value requires a modeling object, the
command window displays a list of possible objects in your current model. If the parameter value
requires a file, the File Browser appears.
Format:
display = on_off_with_toggle
Example:
interface cmd_window &

display = toggle
Description:

display On_off_with_toggle Specify the mode of displaying the command window
The command window can be displayed or closed as and when required by using this command.
interface container create

Allows you to create a new container on an existing dialog box.
The container is a submenu on the dialog box, which can collect other interface objects like buttons,
option menus, sliders etc. The container can be used to segregate and ‘contain’ a set of menus and buttons
on the dialog box.
The container size and location is decided by this command.
Format:

container_name= a new GI_container
enabled = boolean
help_text = string
units = int_units
location = real
height = real
width = real
start_commands = string
finish_commnads = string
sash_type = sash_type
position_of_sash = real
tab_label = string
Example:
interface container create &

container_name = .gui.dgbox.cntr &
enabled = yes &
help_text = "text2help" &
documentation_text = "txt2doc" &
units = relative &
vert_resizing = attach_top &
location = 0.0, 0.0 &
height = .4 &
width = .4 &
interface 11
start_commands = "view center view=.gui.main.front

object=431.34, 7.4886913511, 0.0" &
finish_commands ="view center view=.gui.main.front object=-
431.34, -7.4886913511, 0.0" &
execution_commands = "view zoom view=.gui.main.front zoom=2." &
sash_type = horizontal &
position_of_sash = 0.9 &
tab_label = "contain"
Description:

container_name A New GI_container Specifies the name for a new container to be created
enabled Boolean Activates the container
units Int_units Specifies the container size as pixel or relative to
Adams window
container
container
location Real Specifies the location of the container on the dialog
box
height Real Specifies the height of the container in terms of
width Real Specifies the width of the container field in terms of
start_commands String Specifies the command associated with the container
finish_commands String Specifies the command associated with the container
execution_commnads String Specifies the command associated with the container
sash_type Sash_type Specifies the type of sash
position_of_sash Real Specifies the position of sash
tab_label String Specifies the label of the container
1. The preliminary parameters of the container like size, associated commands and editing capability
are set using this command.
2. The pop-up help and documentation help can be specified initially.
3. The size of the container can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively, the
size can also be stated as relative to the Adams window.
4. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the container menu
on existing dialog box. For example, attach_left; attach_top options for Horiz_resizing and
Vert_resizing will place the container on the top left corner of the dialog box. The location can
also be specified from the top left corner by adjusting the parameter ‘location’.
5. The size of the container window can be specified with respect to the dialog box size value for
parameter height and width should be a real number between 0.0 and 2.0, where 2.0 represents
the height of the dialog window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the container field window to
be one half as high as the dialog box.
6. Each of the parameters start, finish and execution commands specifies the command associated
with the container. Each of these command will get executed for specific event. The command
‘display container’ will execute the associated ‘start command’. The command ‘undisplay
container’ will execute associated ‘finish command’. The associated ‘execute command’ is
executed explicitly by running the ‘container execute command’.
7. You may want to expand the width, height of the container so you have more space for entering
the text. To expand the container, point to the sash on its border. When the cursor changes to a
double-sided arrow, drag the cursor to increase the container size. The value for
‘position_of_sash’ is 0.0 to 1.0.
interface 13
interface container delete

Allows you to delete an existing container on the dialog box.
on the dialog box.
The command is used to delete the container on the dialog box.
Format:

container_name = an existing GI_container
Example:
interface container delete &

container_name= ctr1
Description:

container_name An Existing GI_container Specifies the name for an existing container
1. The command is used to delete an existing container on the dialog box window.
interface container display

Allows you to display an existing container on the dialog box.
on the dialog box.
The container can be displayed by using this command.
Format:

container_name = An Existing GI_container
Example:
interface container display &

container_name = .gui.dgbox.cntr1
Description:

1. The container can be displayed or closed as the need arises by using the ‘container display’ and
‘container undisplay’ command.
interface 15
interface container execute
interface container execute

Allows you to delete an existing container on the dialog box.
on the dialog box.
The command is used to delete the container on the dialog box.
Format:

container_name = An Existing GI_container
Example:
interface container delete &

container_name= contro1
Description:

1. The command is used to delete an existing container on the dialog box window.
interface container modify

Allows you to modify an existing container on the dialog box.
on the dialog box.
The container properties and name can be edited by this command.
Format:

container_name= An Existing GI_container
new_container_name = A New GI_container
enabled = Boolean
help_text = String
documentation_text = String
units = Int_units
horiz_resizing = Int_h_resize
vert_resizing = Int_v_resize
location = Real
height = Real
width = Real
start_commands = String
finish_commnads = String
sash_type = Sash_type
position_of_sash = Real
tab_label = String
Example:
interface container create &

container_name = .gui.dgbox.cntr &
enabled = yes &
documentation_text = "txt2doc" &
units = relative &
location = 0.0, 0.0 &
height = .4 &
interface 17
width = .4 &
start_commands = "view center view=.gui.main.front
object=431.34, 7.4886913511, 0.0" &
finish_commands ="view center view=.gui.main.front object=-
431.34, -7.4886913511, 0.0" &
execution_commands = "view zoom view=.gui.main.front zoom=2." &
sash_type = horizontal &
position_of_sash = 0.9 &
tab_label = "contain"
Description:

new_container_name A New GI_container Specifies a new name for an existing container
enabled Boolean Activates the container
units Int_units Specifies the container size as pixel or relative to
Adams window
horiz_resizing Int_h_resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for
the container
vert_resizing Int_v_resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for
the container
location Real Specifies the location of the container on the
dialog box
height Real Specifies the height of the container in terms of
width Real Specifies the width of the container field in
terms of relative units or pixel
start_commands String Specifies the command associated with the
container
finish_commands String Specifies the command associated with the
container
execution_commnads String Specifies the command associated with the
container
sash_type Sash_type Specifies the type of sash
position_of_sash Real Specifies the position of sash
tab_label String Specifies the label of the container
1. The container will be replaced by new name for any value of parameter ‘new_container_name’.
The preliminary parameters of the container like size, associated commands and editing capability
are set using this command.
3. The size of the container can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively, the
4. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the container menu
Vert_resizing will place the container on the top left corner of the dialog box. The location can
5. The size of the container window can be specified with respect to the dialog box size value for
the height of the dialog window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the container field window to
be one half as high as the dialog box.
6. Each of the parameters start, finish and execution commands specifies the command associated
with the container. Each of these command will get executed for specific event. The command
‘display container’ will execute the associated ‘start command’. The command ‘undisplay
container’ will execute associated ‘finish command’. The associated ‘execute command’ is
executed explicitly by running the ‘container execute command’.
7. You may want to expand the width, height of the container so you have more space for entering
the text. To expand the container, point to the sash on its border. When the cursor changes to a
double-sided arrow, drag the cursor to increase the container size. The value for
‘position_of_sash’ is 0.0 to 1.0.
interface 19
interface container undisplay

Allows you to close an existing container on the dialog box.
on the dialog box.
The container can be closed by using this command.
Format:

container_name= an existing GI_container
Example:
interface container undisplay &

container_name = .gui.dgbox.cntr1
Description:

1. The container can be displayed or closed as the need arises by using the ‘container display’ and
‘container undisplay’ command.
interface coord_window
Allows you to display the coordinate window.
The coordinate window displays the coordinates of the location of the cursor on the Adams/View
window. This shows the instantaneous coordinates of the cursor as it moves along the Adams/View
window. The window can be displayed as and when required.
Format:
display = on_off_with_toggle
Example:
interface coord_window &

display = toggle
Description:

display On_off_with_toggle Specify the mode of displaying the coordinate window
The coordinates of the cursor location on the Adams/view window are displayed live in the coordinate
window. The window display can be controlled by ON, OFF, or TOGGLE mode.
interface 21
interface data table clear

Allows you to erase the contents of a data table.
The data table is similar to a excel workbook where a categorized data can be stored as array, locating
each item by its row and column index. The data table can be created on a dialog box and the data is
displayed using this command.
This command helps to clear any cell contents of the data table
Format:

data_table_name = an existing GI_data_table
clear_target = clear_opts
Example:
interface data_table clear &

data_table_name= .gui.param.dtable &
clear_target changed_cell_highlights
Description:

data_table _name An Existing GI_data_table Specifies the name of an existing data table
clear_target Clear_opt Specifies the action to be taken on the cell contents
1. The contents of a data table can be erased by clear command, when the ‘clear_target’ option is set
to ‘cell_contents’
2. The contents of a cell in the data table get highlighted when the data table is edited. The
highlighting can be cleared by choosing ‘changed_cell_highlights’ for clear command. This will
preserve the contents of a cell, but the highlighting will be removed.
Tips:
The parameters ‘cell contents’ and ‘changed_cell_highlights’ are mutually exclusive.
interface data table create

Allows you to create a new data table.
displayed using this command .
Format:

data_table_name = A New
GI_data_table
enabled = Boolean
help_text = String
units = Int_units
location = Real
height = Real
width = Real
cell_select_commands = String
commands = String
editable = Boolean
Example:
interface data_table create &

data_table_name= .gui.param.dtable
enabled = yes &
documentation_text = "text4doc" &
units = pixel &
location = 0.0, 0.0 &
interface 23
interface data_table create &

height = 280 &
width = 360 &
commands = "interface dialog display dialog=.gui.about_Adams" &
cell_select_commands = “int dialog dis dialog=.gui.moag”&
editable = yes
Description:

data_table _name A New Specifies the name for a new data table to be created
GI_data_table
enabled Boolean Activates the data table
units Int_units Specifies the data table size as pixel or relative to Adams
window
horiz_resizing Int_h_resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for the data table
vert_resizing Int_v_resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for the data table
location Real Specifies the location of the data table on the dialog box
height Real Specifies the height of the data table in terms of relative
units or pixel
width Real Specifies the width of the data table field in terms of relative
units or pixel
cell select commands String Specifies the command to be executed whenever any cell is
selected
commands String Specifies the command to be executed
editable Boolean Allows editing the data table contents
1. The preliminary parameters of the data table like size, associated commands and editing
capability are set using this command. The data table is then by filled by entering the appropriate
fields for row and column. The data table with specified name is created on the dialog box If
parameter ‘Enabled’ is set to ON, the data table is be preactivated.
3. The size of the data table can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively, the
size can also be stated as relative to the Adams window
4. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the data table
menu on existing dialog box. For example, attach_left; attach_top options for Horiz_resizing and
Vert_resizing will place the data table on the top left corner of the dialog box. The location can
5. The size of the data table window can be specified with respect to the Adams window size. The
value for parameter height and width should be a real number between 0.0 and 2.0, where 2.0
represents the height of the dialog window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the data table field
6. ‘Cell select command’ gets executed whenever any cell is selected for editing.
7. The parameter ‘command’ specifies the name of the command to be executed.
8. The data table can be edited after initializing it if the BOOLEAN option is ‘yes’ for the parameter
‘editable’
interface 25
interface data table delete

Allows you to delete an existing data table.
This command is used to delete any data table.
Format:

Example:
interface data_table delete &

data_table_name= .gui.param2.dtable
Description:

data_table _name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing data table to be deleted
GI_data_table
The data table can be deleted by choosing the appropriate data_table_name for the command ‘interface
data_table delete’
interface data table display

Allows you to display an existing data table.
displayed using this command
The data table need not be always displayed on the screen. Whenever required, the appropriate data table
can be displayed by using this command.
Format:

Example:
interface data_table display &

data_table_name = .gui.atv.dtable
Description:

data_table _name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing data table to be displayed
GI_data_table
The data table can be displayed by choosing the appropriate data_table_name and running the ‘display’
command.
interface 27
interface data table execute

Allows you to execute a command specified while creating a data table.
The data table may be linked to a relevant command to be executed. The command is run explicitly by
this command.
Format:

Example:
interface data_table execute &

data_table_name = .gui.param2.dtable
Description:

data_table _name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing data table for the
GI_data_table execution of a command
Any command listed in the data table gets executed when the data table is edited, alternatively, this
command can be directly executed by the ‘execute’ option.
interface data table insert column

Allows you to insert columns in a data table field
Format:

data_table_name= an existing GI_data_table
width = integer
label = string
index = integer
Example:
interface data_table column insert &

data_table_name = .gui.param.dtable &
width = 3 &
label = length &
index = 1
Description:

width Interger Specifes the width of a column
label String Specifies the column label
index Integer Specifies the column index
1. After creating the data table, the rows and columns can be created by using the ‘insert’ command.
2. The width of a column can be specified by the parameter ‘width’, similar to an excel sheet. The
width can also be entered in mm or inches as desired.
3. The column can be labeled in accordance with the contents of the column by the parameter ‘label’.
Moreover, the column can be directly accessed using the its index. The index of a column
identifies its location similar to a ‘label’
interface 29
Tips:
If the index of a column to be created already exists, then the existing column is inserted with new one.
The old column is shifted to, n+1th index, where, n is the oriGInal index of the column
interface data table insert row

Allows you to insert row in a data table field.
This command is used to insert rows in a data table.
Format:

row_number = integer
number_to_insert = integer
column_indices= integer
insert_action = insert_actiion
Example:
interface data_table row insert &

row_number = 3 &
number_to_insert = 5 &
column_indices = 2,3 &
insert_action = before
Description:

data_table _name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing data table
GI_data_table
row_number Integer Specifies the row number where the row are to be added
number_to_insert Integer Specifies the number of rows to be added
column_indices Integer Specifies the column index to which the row is added
insert_action Insert_action Specifies whether the rows are to be added before or after
the ‘row_number’
interface 31
After creating the data table, the rows and columns can be created by using the ‘insert’ command.
The ‘row_number’ the row index where the row will be added . The number of rows added to this
location are decided by the parameter ‘number_to_insert’. Similarly, the parameter ‘insert action’ decides
whether the row will be added ‘before’ or ‘after’ the row indexed by the parameter ‘row_numer’. As
illustrated in the above example five rows will be added after second row shifting the row 3 to 8th place.
Tips:
The rows and columns created will be symmetric independent of the column indices specified.
interface data table modify

Allows you to modify existing data table
Once created, the parameters of the data table can be modified by using this command. It will not change
the contents of the cell but it will change the table properties.
Format:

new_data_table_name= a new data GI table
enabled= boolean
help_text = string
units= int_units
horiz_resizing= int_h_resize
vert_resizing= int_v_resize
location = real
height = real
width = real
cell_select_commands = string
commands = string
editable = boolean
Example:
interface data_table modify &

data_table_name= .gui.param.dtable &
new_data_table_name = .gui.param2.dtable &
enabled = yes &
help_text= "text2help" &
documentation_text= "text4doc" &
units= pixel &
interface 33
interface data_table modify &

location = 0.0, 0.0 &
height = 280 &
width= 360 &
commands= "interface dialog display dialog=.gui.about_Adams" &
cell_select_commands= “int dialog dis dialog=.gui.moag” &
editable = yes
Description:

GI_data_table
new_data_table_name A New Specifies a new name for the existing data table
GI_data_table
enabled Boolean Activates the data table
units Int_units Specifies the data table size as pixel or relative to
Adams window
data table
data table
location Real Specifies the location of the data table on the dialog
box
height Real Specifies the height of the data table in terms of
width Real Specifies the width of the data table field in terms of
cell select commands String Specifies the command to be executed for selecting
a cell
editable Boolean Allows editing the data table contents
1. The preliminary parameters of the data table like size, associated commands and editing
capability are set using this command. The data table is then by filled by entering the appropriate
fields for row and column. The data table with specified name is created on the dialog box If
parameter ‘Enabled’ is set to ON, the data table is be preactivated. A new name can be applied to
an existing data table by filling the parameter ‘NEW GI TABLE NAME’
3. The size of the data table can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively, the
4. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the data table
Vert_resizing will place the data table on the top left corner of the dialog box. The location can
5. The size of the data table window can be specified with respect to the Adams window size. The
represents the height of the dialog window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the data table field
8. The data table can be edited after initializing it if the BOOLEAN option is ‘yes’ for the parameter
‘editable’
interface 35
interface data table read

Allows you to read a remote file and importing the data to a data table field
Any existing tabular data, e.g. a tab delimited text file of a excel file can be read into a data table, instead
of entering the elements manually.
Format:

file_name = string
Example:
interface data_table read &

data_table_name = .gui.atv.dtable1 &
file_name= "C:/data_1.xls"
Description:

data_table _name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing data table to be
GI_data_table displayed
file_name String Specifies the remote file name to be accessed
Specifies the name of the file that is to be read, written, or executed. The proper extension is the default
but can be overridden by simply supplying a different extension. You do not need to enclose the file name
in quotes if it only contains alpha-numeric characters and starts with a letter. If you want to include other
characters, such as a '.' for an extension or '/' or '[]' for directory paths, you must enclose the name in
quotes.
interface data table remove column

Allows you to delete column in a data table field
displayed using this commandThis command is used to remove any column of the data table.
Format:

data_table_name= An Existing GI_data_table
range = Integer
column_indices = Integer
use_column_selected = True_only
Example:
interface data_table remove column &

data_table_name = dtable &
range = 3,4
Description:

range Interger Specifies the range of columns to be removed
column_indices Integer Specifies the index of the column to be removed
use_column_selected True_only Specifies the selected column to be removed
1. Any number of columns can be removed either by selecting range or index of the column or by
selecting the column itself. Anyone of the parameters namely, 1) ‘range’, 2) column_indices, and,
3) use selected column can be used to indicate the column to be removed. If the range is specified
2-7, the value from 2 through 7 of the column index are selected to be removed. It set NONE for
not removing any column
Tips:
The parameters namely, 1) ‘range’, 2) column_indices, and, 3) use selected column are mutually
exclusive to each other.
interface 37
interface data table remove row

Allows you to delete a row in a data table field.
displayed using this commandThis command is used to delete any row form the data table.
Format:

data_table_name = An Existing GI_data_table
range = Integer
row_numbers = Integer
use_row_selected = True_only
column_indices = Integer
Example:
interface data_table remove row &

data_table_name= .gui.atv.dtable &
range = 4,5 &
column_indices = 2
Description:

GI_data_table
range Interger Specifies the range of rows to be removed
row_numbers Integer Specifies the row numbers where the contents are to
be removed
use_row_selected True_only Specifies the rows from which the contents are to be
removed
column_indices Integer Specifies the index of the column to be in which the
row contents are to be removed
1. Any number of cell contents in a row can be removed either by selecting any of the three
combinations, namely, 1) range and column indices, 2) row_numbers and the column indices, or
3) selected_row and column indices. Anyone of the parameters namely, 1) range, 2) row numbers
and, 3) use selected row can be combined selected column to indicate the cell contents to be
removed. If the range is specified 2-7, the value from 2 through 7 of the row index are selected to
be removed. It set NONE for not removing any row.
Tips:
The parameters namely, 1) range, 2) row numbers, and, 3) use row selected are mutually exclusive to each
other.
interface 39
interface data table set cell

Allows you to alter the cells in a data table field.
displayed using this commandThe cell properties like width, contents and associated command can be
edited by using the set command.
Format:

use_cell_selected = True_only
row_range = Integer
column_range= Integer
order= Matrix_input_order
repeat_strings = Boolean
strings= String
reals = Real
action = Col_action
Example:
interface data_table set cell &

row_range = 18,19 &
column_range= 1,2 &
order = by_row &
repeat_strings = yes &
strings = this_is_to_append &
action = prefix
Description:

use_cell_selected True_only Specifes the cell of cells to be altered
use_row_selected True_only Specifies the row or rows to be altered
row_range Integer Specifies the range of rows to be altered
column_range Integer Specifies the range of columns to be altered
order Matrix_input_order Specifies the of ascending/ descending
arrangement of cell content
repeat_strings Boolean Specifies the whether strings in the cell to be
repeated
strings String Specifies the string to be appended
reals Real Specifies the REAL value to be inserted
action Col_action Specifies the insertion point of the string or reals
1. The contents of an existing cell of a data table can be altered using the ‘SET’ command. The cells
which will be altered can be specified by multiple – mutually exclusive – choices like
‘use_cell_selected’, ‘use_row_selected’, ‘row_range’, or ‘column _range’. The parameters
‘use_row_selected’ and ‘use_cells_selected’ can directly indicate the row or cells to be affected.
Alternatively, the range of cell or rows can be entered in the ‘row_range’ and column_range’
parameters. The order of the resulting rows or columns can be set by the parameter ‘order’, which
specifies whether the result set component is to be listed in ascending or descending order. If
entered, this parameter is used regardless of whether the values are to be printed to the terminal
or to a file. This parameter is optional and if not entered, it will default to "ascending" order. The
two values for the ORDER parameter are ‘by_row’ and ‘by_column’, which specifies whether the
column or the row is to be arranged in order.
2. If the cell contains the same strings or reals as the one to be entered after alteration, then whether
the strings is to be repeated or not is decided by the parameter ‘repeat_strings’. If the ‘repeat
strings’ is set to ‘yes’ then all the rows in the column will be replaced by new contents. On the
other hand, if the ‘repeat_strings’ is set to ‘no’, then only first row of the column will be replaced
by the new contents.
3. The parameter ‘string’ or ‘real’ is used to specify the new contents of the cell which may replace,
append or prefix the existing contents of the cell. To specify how the new contents would be
inserted in the existing cell contents, the parameter ‘action’ which has multiple options like
‘replace’, ‘append’, or ‘prefix’ is used.
Tips:
The parameters ‘use_row_selected’ and ‘row_range’ are mutually exclusive.
interface 41
interface data table set column

Allows you to alter the columns in a data table field.
The column properties of a data table can be edited using this command.
Format:

data_table_name= An Existing GI_DATA_TABLE
widths = Integer
labels = String
range = Integer
indices = Integer
strings = String
reals = Real
repeat_strings = Boolean
enabled = Boolean
action = Col_action
Example:
interface data_table set column &

data_table_name = .gui.atv.dtable &
widths = 3 &
labels = Frequency, amplitude &
range = 1,2 &
reals = 1001 &
enabled = yes &
action = replace
Description:

GI_data_table
widths Integer Specifes the new widths for existing columns
labels String Specifies the new labels for existing columns
use_column_selected True_only Specifies the range of columns to be altered
range Integer Specifies the range of columns to be altered
indices Integer Specifies the range of columns to be altered
strings String Specifies the new STRING contents for the cells
reals Real Specifies the new REAL contents for the cells
repeat_strings Boolean Specifies whether same STRING or REAL will be inserted
to all marked cells
enabled Boolean Specifies if the columns are read only or editable
action Col_action Specifies the mode of insertion of new contents in to the cells
‘use_cell_selected’, ‘range’, or ‘indices’. The parameter ‘use_cells_selected’ can directly indicate
the cells to be affected. Alternatively, the range of cell in a column can be entered in the ‘range’
or indices parameters. Specifying the range as ‘1,6’ or entering respective column numbers as
‘1,2,3,4,5,6’ will alter the columns with indices 1 through 6. As the three parameters namely, 1)
use_column_selected, 2) range, and 3) indices are mutually exclusive, any one of the parameter
is sufficient to specify the columns to be altered.
strings’ is set to ‘yes’ then all the rows in the column will be replaced by new contents. On the
other hand, if the ‘repeat_strings’ is set to ‘no’, then only first row of the columns will be replaced
by the new contents, hence the new contents will appear only once in each column. If the values
are repeated for all the rows then the parameter ‘repeat strings’ need to be set to ‘yes’.
4. The parameter 'enabled' is used to specify if the specified columns can be editable or otherwise.
The rows are specified using the use_column_selected/range/indices parameter as discussed
earlier.
interface 43
Tips:
The parameters ‘use_column_selected’, ‘range’ and ‘indices’ are mutually exclusive. Any one of those
is sufficient to indicate the cell to be altered.
interface data table set row

Allows you to alter the rows in a data table field.
The row properties of a data table can be edited using the ‘set row ‘ command.
Format:

use_row_selected = true_only
range = integer
indices = integer
strings = string
reals = real
repeat_strings = boolean
enabled = boolean
action = col_action
Example:
interface data_table set row &

indices = 2,4 &
strings = none &
action = replace &
enabled = yes
Description:

GI_data_table
use_row_selected True_only Specifies the range of rows to be altered
interface 45

range Integer Specifies the range of rows to be altered
indices Integer Specifies the range of rows to be altered
strings String Specifies the new STRING contents for the cells in the row
reals Real Specifies the new REAL contents for the cells in the row
repeat_strings Boolean Specifies whether same STRING or REAL contents will be
inserted to all marked cells
action Col_action Specifies the mode of insertion of new contents in to the
cells of the row
enabled Boolean Specifies if the rows are read only or editable
‘use_row_selected’, ‘range’, or ‘indices’. The parameter ‘use_row_selected’ can directly indicate
the cells to be affected. Alternatively, the range of rows can be entered in the ‘range’ or indices
parameters. Specifying the range as ‘1,6’ or entering respective row numbers as ‘1,2,3,4,5,6’ will
alter the rows with indices 1 through 6. As the three parameters namely, 1) use_column_selected,
2) range, and 3) indices are mutually exclusive, any one of the parameter is sufficient to specify
the rows to be altered.
strings’ is set to ‘yes’ then all the cells in the rows will be replaced by new contents. On the other
hand, if the ‘repeat_strings’ is set to ‘no’, then only first cell of the row will be replaced by the
new contents, hence the new contents will appear only once in each row. If the values are repeated
for all the cells in a row then the parameter ‘repeat strings’ need to be set to ‘yes’.
4. The parameter 'enabled' is used to specify if the specified rows can be editable or otherwise. The
rows are specified using the use_row_selected/range/indices parameter as discussed earlier.
Tips:
The parameters ‘use_row_selected’, ‘range’ and ‘indices’ are mutually exclusive. Any one of those is
sufficient to indicate the cell to be altered.
interface data table set selected

Allows you to alter the selected cells in a data table field
The selected cell of a data table can be edited using the ‘set selected’ command.
Format:

strings= string
reals= real
repeat_strings= boolean
action = col_action
Example:
interface data_table set selected &

strings = select_new &
action = replace &
repeat_strings = yes
Description:

GI_data_table
strings String Specifies the new STRING contents for the selected cells
reals Real Specifies the new REAL contents for the selected cells
repeat_strings Boolean Specifies whether same STRING or REAL contents will be
inserted to all marked cells
action Col_action Specifies the mode of insertion of new contents in to the
selected cells
interface 47
The contents of an existing cell of a data table can be altered using the ‘SET’ command. The cells which
will be altered can be are selected first and then the command is entered.
If the cell contains the same strings or reals as the one to be entered after alteration, then whether the
strings is to be repeated or not is decided by the parameter ‘repeat_strings’. If the ‘repeat strings’ is set
to ‘yes’ then all the selected will be replaced by new contents. On the other hand, if the ‘repeat_strings’
is set to ‘no’, then only first selected of the group will be replaced by the new contents, hence the new
contents will appear only once. If the values are repeated for all the selected cells then the parameter
‘repeat strings’ need to be set to ‘yes’.
The parameter ‘string’ or ‘real’ is used to specify the new contents of the cell which may replace, append
or prefix the existing contents of the cell. To specify how the new contents would be inserted in the
existing cell contents, the parameter ‘action’ which has multiple options like ‘replace’, ‘append’, or
‘prefix’ is used.
Tips:
Select the cell to be altered first and then execute the command.
interface data table sort

Allows you to arrange the cell contents in a data table field.
The elements of a table can be sorted using the ‘table sort’ command
Format:

sort_column_index = Integer
affected columns = Integer
order = Sort_order
Example:
Interface data_table sort &

data_table_name= dtable &
sort_column_index = 1 &
affected_columns= 2 &
order= ascending &
type_of_sort = alphabetic
Description:

GI_data_table
sort_column_index Integer Specifies the index of the column to be sorted
affected columns Interger Specifies the range of columns associated with the
column to be sorted
order Sort_order Specifies the mode of sorting the cell contents
interface 49
1. The contents of a column can be sorted in ascending or descending order. The sorting can be
numeric or alphabetical. Generally, the column will have one or more associated columns which
will get affected due to reallocation of the column to be sorted. Hence, the associated column
contents also need to be repositioned in accordance with the column sorted. This can be easily
achieved by directly choosing the ‘affected columns’. Hence, there is no need of repositioning of
the cell contents of associated columns.
interface data table undisplay

Allows you to close an existing data table.
The data table need not be always displayed, whenever required it can be closed by using this command.
Format:

Example:
interface data_table undisplay &

data_table_name = .gui.atv.dtable
Description:

data_table _name An Existing GI_data_table Specifies the name of an existing data table to be
closed
The data table can be closed by choosing the appropriate data_table_name and running the ‘undisplay’
command
interface 51
interface data table write

Allows you to write the contents of a data table field to a file.
The contents of a data table can be directly stored in a file e.g. excel sheet or a tab delimited text file.
Format:

file_name = String
row_labels = Boolean
column_labels = Boolean
Example:
interface data_table write &

data_table_name = .gui.atv.dtable1 &
file_name = "C:/data_2.xls"
Description:

data_table _name An Existing GI_data_table Specifies the name of an existing data table to be
displayed
row_labels String Specifies whether existing row labels to be exported
column_labels String Specifies whether existing column labels to be
exported
1. ‘File_name’ specifies the name of the file that is to be read, written, or executed. The proper
extension is the default but can be overridden by simply supplying a different extension. You do
not need to enclose the file name in quotes if it only contains alpha-numeric characters and starts
with a letter. If you want to include other characters, such as a '.' for an extension or '/' or '[]' for
directory paths, you must enclose the name in quotes.
2. If the BOOLEAN value for ‘row labels’ and ‘column labels’ is ‘yes’ then existing labels of the
rows and columns are exported along with the data_table contents.
interface 53
interface database_navigator
Allows the creating a database_navigator.
The Database Navigator has several modes in which you can display object information. It can be set to
just let you browse for objects or you can set it to rename objects, view information about the objects,
such as view how the object relates to other objects, and view dependencies.The Database Navigator only
displays the types of objects that are appropriate for the command you are executing. For example, if you
are renaming a model, it only displays models in your database. On the other hand, if you are searching
for any modeling object in the database, it displays all types of modeling objects. You can also set a filter
for the types of objects that the Database Navigator displays.The Database Navigator shows objects in
their database hierarchy. The following figure shows the Database Navigator with the top-level modeling
objects in a small database that contains one model, model_1. These objects do not have parents. Double-
click the name of a model, in this case model_1, to find all the objects belonGIng to that model. The
assocaitvity, e.g., the i_marker and j_marker for a link can also be displayed. The display mode can thus
be browse, graphical_topology, topology_by_parts, topology_by_connections, associativity,
information, rename, comments, select_list, and display_attribute. The database navigator can also
display the topology of the parts, i.e., kind of connectivity among the objects. It can display the same by
graphical topology which is very convenient to understand the model topology.
Format:
top_object = an_existing_entity
name_filter = string
type_filter = ent
display = on_off
mode = mode_options
Example:
interface database_navigator &

top_object = model_1 &
name_filter = link &
type_filter = joint &
display = on &
mode = graphical_topology
Description:

top_object An Existing Entity Specifies the top object, all the objects belonGIng to it will be
displayed
name_filter String Specifies the name of a object under top object, all the objects
belonGIng to it will be displayed
type_filter Ent Specifies the type of entities which will be displayed
display On_off Specifies the default parameter for displaying database
navigator
mode Mode_options Specify the mode of displaying the objects beneath the
top_object
1. The ‘top_object’ is the object under which all the objects are arranged in hierarchical form in the
database navigator. If the ‘model’ is chosen as the ‘top_object’, it will list all the objects in the
model. On the other hand if a entity in the model, e.g., ‘PART_4’ is chosen as the ‘top_object’
then the listing starts from the ‘PART_4’ covering all the objects under ‘PART_4’
2. The ‘name filter’ specifies the name of the object for the all the dependent parts are to be
displayed. For example, name filter ‘PART_1’ will display all the objects belonGIng to the
‘PART_1’ irrespective of the type of objects, e.g. revolute joint, measure, marker, etc.
3. The ‘type filter’ specify the type of objects allowed. When specifying the objects for this
4. The default parameter for ‘display’ can be set ‘on’ or ‘off’. The database navigator has several
modes of display as browse, graphical_topology, topology_by_parts, topology_by_connections,
associativity, information, rename, comments, select_list, and display_attribute. Depending on
the user requirement any useful mode can be selected such as for renaming few objects from the
database, the database can be opened in ‘renaming’ mode, it will display the names in database
which can be renamed as required. Similarly, if the display attributes like, color, transparency, etc.
are to be changed then the models can be browsed in that mode where one can change the display
attributes selectively.
interface 55
interface dialog_box build

Allows you to build-up and edit a dialog box, as well as create menus on the dialog box.
The dialog box is a blank interface window created where various buttons and option menus can be
placed.
The build command opens up a building-box window with various option, which help one to edit the
dialog box properties as well as creating new menus and buttons on the existing dialog box.
Format:

dialog_box_name = An Existing GI_dbox
Example:
interface dialog_box build &

dialog_box_name = .gui.dgbox
Description:

dialog_box _name An Existing GI_dbox Specifies the name of an existing dialog box
1. The blank dialog box is created with initial size, appearance and editing options. This dialog box
can grab various kinds of input like, push buttons, container, option menus, etc. To create these
interface options on the dialog box window. The build command can be used. The build
command opens up a new dialog box building window, with which we can edit the existing dialog
box, as well as add different menus on it.
2. The build window offers option like layout, appearance, command and help.
3. With appearance tab on build window we can edit the location and size of the dialog box. The
appearance tab on the build window helps to edit the properties like resizing ability, decorating
and iconification etc. The command tab is used to specify the ‘start’, ‘finish’ and ‘execute’
commands.
4. The create tab on the build window is used to create various interface options like field, separator,
radio button, option menu, etc.
5. The build box offers other capabilities like, edit, create, option, preference for building a complete
dialog box.
interface dialog_box create

Allows you to create a new dialog box window.
placed. The size and editing capabilities are set by this command for the dialog box.
Format:

dialog_box_name = a new GI_dbox
enabled= boolean
help_text string
units = int_units
location = real
height = real
width = real
title = string
icon_label = string
start_commnads = string
finish_commands = string
execution_commands = string
decorate = boolean
resizable = boolean
width_minimum = real
width_maximum = real
height_minimum = real
height _maximum = real
grab_all_input = boolean
iconifiable= boolean
interface 57
Example:
interface dialog_box create &

dialog_box_name = dbox &
enabled = yes &
help_text = text2help &
documentation_text = text2doc &
units = relative &
location = 0.4,0 &
height = 0.4 &
width = 0.4 &
title = dbox &
icon_label = iconic_label &
start_commands = "interface coord_window display=toggle" &
finish_commands = "view zoom view=.gui.main.front zoom=1.1" &
execution_commands = "interface dialog display dialog=.gui.about_Adams" &
decorate = yes &
resizable = yes &
width_minimum = 0.3 &
width_maximum = 0.6 &
height_minimum = 0.3 &
height_maximum = 0.6 &
grab_all_input = no &
iconifiable = yes
Description:

dialog_box _name A New GI_dbox Specifies the name of a new dialog box
enabled Boolean Activates the info dialog box

units Int_units Specifies the dialog box window size as pixel or
relative to Adams window
horiz_resizing Int_h_resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for dialog
box
vert_resizing Int_v_resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for dialog
box
location Real Specifies the location of the dialog box
height Real Specifies the height of the dialog box in terms of
width Real Specifies the width of the dialog box in terms of
title String Specifies the title for the dialog box
iconic_label String Specifies the label to appear on a minimized window
icon
start_commands String Specifies the command associated with the dialog box
finish_commands String Specifies the command associated with the dialog box
execution_commands String Specifies the command associated with the dialog box
decorate Boolean Specifies the peripheral outline decorating for dialog
box
resizable Boolean Specifies the resizing ability of the dialog box
width_minimum Real Specifies the minimum size of the window to be
dragged
width_maximum Real Specifies the maximum size of the window to be
dragged
height_minimum Real Specifies the maximum size of the window to be
dragged
height_maximum Real Specifies the maximum size of the window to be
dragged
grab_all_input Boolean Specifies the input type
iconifiable Boolean Specifies whether the window can be iconified
1. A new dialog box created if a dialog box with specified name do not exist. The dialog box can
grab all kinds of interface inputs on the push_button, toggle_button, option menu, etc. The dialog
box is enabled by setting the parameter to yes.
2. The dialog box is displayed by using ‘display’ command.
interface 59
3. . The pop-up help and documentation help is be specified for the respective parameters.
4. The size of the dialog box can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively, the
5. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the dialog box on
Vert_resizing will place the dialog on the top left corner of the dialog box. The location can also
be specified from the top left corner by adjusting the parameter ‘location’
6. The size of the dialog box can be specified with respect to the Adams window size. The value for
the height of the Adams/View window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the info window to be
one half as high as the Adams/View window.
7. Initial height and width of the dialog box appearing on screen can be set by ‘height’ and ‘width’.
If the dialog box is made ‘resizable’ it can be dragged to resize. The resizing limits are set by the
parameters ‘height_minimum’, ‘height_maximum’, ‘width_minimum’, and ‘width_maximum’
respectively.
8. If the dialog box is made iconifiable, then it can be minimized or maximized by clicking the ‘_ ‘
and square appearing on upper right corner. Once minimized the icon on the taskbar shows the
label set by the parameter ‘iconic_label’
9. The ‘decorate’ parameter if set to ‘no’, it will show a blank dialog box without any peripheral
decorating outline.
10. The ‘start_commands’, ‘finish_commands’, and ‘execution_commands’ are the commands
associated with the dialog box, which can be executed explicitly. The ‘start command’ gets
executed when the dialog box is displayed, whereas the ‘finish_command’ gets executed when
the dialog box is closed and the ‘execute_command’ will be run when the ‘dialog_box execute’
command is run explicitly.
interface dialog_box delete

Allows you to delete an existing dialog box window.
placed. The dialog box can be deleted by this command.
Format:

dialog_box_name= An Existing GI_dbox
Example:
interface dialog_box delete &

Description:

1. The dialog box can be deleted by using this command. It will delete all the child-menus like
buttons, option menus and menus created on the dialog box.
interface 61
interface dialog_box display

Allows you to display existing dialog box window.
placed. The dialog box may not be required to be displayed always. It can be displayed by the command
as the need arises.
Format:

dialog_box_name= an existing GI_dbox
parameter = string
Example:
interface dialog_box display &

dialog_box_name = .gui.dgbox &
parameter= STRING
Description:

parameter String Specifies the parameter for dialog box display
1. The dialog box may not be required to be displayed every time, and can be displayed or closed by
using the ‘dialog_box display’ and ‘dialog_box undisplay’ commands respectively.
2. The ‘start_command’ associated with the dialog get executed when the dialog box is displayed .
interface dialog_box execute

Allows you to execute of the command associated with the dialog box.
placed.
The ‘execute command’, if specified is run when the ‘dialog box execute’ command is run. The dialog
box may be closed after the execution of the command, if specified.
Format:

dialog_box_name = an existing GI_dbox
undisplay= boolean
Example:
interface dialog_box execute &

undisplay = yes
Description:

dialog_box _name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing dialog box
GI_dbox
undisplay Boolean Specifies if the dialog box is closed after execution
1. The command specified as ‘execution_command’ get executed with this command statement.
2. If the parameter ‘undisplay’ is set to ‘yes’, the dialog box will be closed with execution of the this
command.
interface 63
interface dialog_box modify

Allows you to modify an existing dialog box window.
placed. The size and editing capabilities are modified by this command for the dialog box.
Format:

new_dialog_box_name= a new GI_dbox
enabled = boolean
help_text = string
units = int_units
location = real
height = real
width= real
title= string
icon_label = string
start_commnads = string
finish_commands = string
execution_commands = string
decorate = boolean
resizable = boolean
width_minimum = real
width_maximum = real
height_minimum = real
height _maximum = real
grab_all_input = boolean
iconifiable = boolean
Example:
interface dialog_box modify &

new_dialog_box_name = .gui.dgbox2 &
enabled = yes &
help_text = text2help &
documentation_text = text2doc &
units = relative &
location = 0.4,0 &
height = .4 &
width = 0.4 &
title = dbox &
icon_label = minimized_dgbox &
start_commands = "interface coord_window display=toggle" &
finish_commands = "view zoom view=.gui.main.front zoom=1.1" &
execution_commands = "interface dialog display dialog=.gui.about_Adams" &
decorate = yes &
resizable = yes &
width_minimum = 0.3 &
width_maximum = 0.6 &
height_minimum = 0.3 &
height_maximum = 0.6 &
grab_all_input = yes &
iconifiable = yes
Description:

dialog_box _name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing dialog box
GI_dbox
new_dialog_box_name A New GI_dbox Specifies a new name for an existing dialog box
enabled Boolean Activates the info dialog box
interface 65

units Int_units Specifies the dialog box window size as pixel or
horiz_resizing Int_h_resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for dialog
box
vert_resizing Int_v_resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for dialog
box
location Real Specifies the location of the dialog box
height Real Specifies the height of the dialog box in terms of
width Real Specifies the width of the dialog box in terms of
title String Specifies the title for the dialog box
iconic_label String Specifies the label to appear on a minimized window
icon
start_commands String Specifies the command associated with the dialog
box
finish_commands String Specifies the command associated with the dialog
box
execution_commands String Specifies the command associated with the dialog
box
decorate Boolean Specifies the peripheral outline decorating for dialog
box
resizable Boolean Specifies the resizing ability of the dialog box
width_minimum Real Specifies the minimum size of the window to be
dragged
width_maximum Real Specifies the maximum size of the window to be
dragged
height_minimum Real Specifies the maximum size of the window to be
dragged
height_maximum Real Specifies the maximum size of the window to be
dragged
grab_all_input Boolean Specifies the input type
iconifiable Boolean Specifies whether the window can be iconified
1. The existing dialog box will be renamed if the parameter ‘new_dialog_box_name’ is specified.
The dialog box can grab all kinds of interface inputs on the push_button, toggle_button, option
menu, etc. The dialog box is enabled by setting the parameter to yes.
2. The dialog box is displayed by using ‘display’ command
3. The pop-up help and documentation help is be specified for the respective parameters.
4. The size of the dialog box can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively, the
5. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the dialog box on
Vert_resizing will place the dialog on the top left corner of the dialog box. The location can also
6. The size of the dialog box can be specified with respect to the Adams window size. The value for
the height of the Adams/View window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the info window to be
7. Initial height and width of the dialog box appearing on screen can be set by ‘height’ and ‘width’.
If the dialog box is made ‘resizable’ it can be dragged to resize. The resizing limits are set by the
parameters ‘height_minimum’, ‘height_maximum’, ‘width_minimum’, and ‘width_maximum’
respectively.
8. If the dialog box is made iconifiable, then it can be minimized or maximized by clicking the ‘_ ‘
and square appearing on upper right corner. Once minimized the icon on the taskbar shows the
label set by the parameter ‘iconic_label’
9. The ‘decorate’ parameter if set to ‘no’, it will show a blank dialog box without any peripheral
decorating outline.
10. The ‘start_commands’, ‘finish_commands’, and ‘execution_commands’ are the commands
associated with the dialog box, which can be executed explicitly. The ‘start command’ gets
executed when the dialog box is displayed, whereas the ‘finish_command’ gets executed when
the dialog box is closed and the ‘execute_command’ will be run when the ‘dialog_box execute’
command is run explicitly.
interface 67
interface dialog_box undisplay

Allows you to close an existing dialog box window.
placed. The dialog box may not be required to be displayed always. It can be displayed by the command
as the need arises.
Format:

Example:
interface dialog_box undisplay &

Description:

1. The dialog box may not be required to be displayed every time, and can be displayed or closed by
using the ‘dialog_box display’ and ‘dialog_box undisplay’ commands respectively.
2. The ‘finish_command’ associated with the dialog get executed when the dialog box is closed.
interface entity modify

Is used to modify the 'enabled' and 'display' attributes of any GUI entity, such as a label, push button, filed
or even a dialog box.
Format:
interface entity modify &

entity_name = GRAPHIC_USER_INTERFACE &
enabled = YES_NO_NO_OPINION &
displayed = YES_NO_NO_OPINION
Example:
interface entity modify &

entity_name = .gui.spline_cremod.c_tabular &
enabled = NO &
displayed = No_OPINION
Description:

entity_name AN EXISTING Specifies the name of an existing Graphic User
GRAPHIC_USER_INTERFACE Interface such as a push button, field, label, dialog
box etc.
enabled YES_NO_NO_OPINION Specifies if the entity is editable or otherwise. A no-
opinion means that the enabled state of the entity is
maintained "as-is".
displayed YES_NO_NO_OPINION Specifies if the entity is visible or otherwise. A no-
opinion means that the enabled state of the entity is
maintained "as-is".
1. The command is used to modify the "enabled" and "displayed" attributes of GUI entities such as
a field, push button dialog etc.
2. Remember that the rules of hierarchy apply here. For example, if a container is disabled (enabled
is set to 'no'), then all elements on the container become disabled as well. When the container is
enabled thereafter, the elements on the container, will regain their previous states. For example,
if a field on the container were disabled (explicitly) before the container was disabled, it will
remain so, even after the container is enabled again.
interface 69
3. A no-opinion for the displayed/enabled attributes means that the attribute of the entity in
consideration will remain unchanged. This is particularly useful, when only one of the attributes
(either "displayed" or "enabled") needs to be changed, without altering the other.
interface field copy

Allows you to copy the contents of a field to another field.
A field is a space on a dialog box where a data elements can be entered and displayed.
The field contents can be copied to another location by using this command.
Format:

field_name= An Exisitng GI_field
Example:
interface field copy &

field_name= .gui.ATC.flde
Description:

field _name An Existing GI_field Specifies the name of an existing field
1. The command allows copying the contents of a field to another field.
interface 71
interface field create

Allows you to create a new field menu.
Format:

field_name = A New GI_field
enabled = Boolean
help_text = String
units = Int_units
location = Real
height = Real
width = Real
preload_strings = String
commands = String
scrollable = Boolean
editable = Boolean
required = Boolean
execute_cmds_on_exit= Boolean
number_of_values= Integer
string_type= Str_type
add_quotes= Add_quotes
object_type = New_old_any
type_filter = Ent
name_filter = String
numeric_type = Num_type
lower_check = Low_check
lower_limit = Real
upper_check = Upp_check
upper_limit = Real

file_type = New_old_any
directory = String
filter = String
alert_on_overwrite = Boolean
Example:
interface field create &

field_name = .gui.ATC.flde &
enabled = yes &
help_text= hlp_txt &
documentation_text= doc_txt &
units= relative &
location = 0.1,0.1 &
height= 0.3 &
width = 0.3 &
preload_string = predefined_txt_display &
commands = "interface coord_window display=toggle" &
scrollable = yes &
editable = yes &
required = yes &
execute_cmds_on_exit = yes &
number_of_values = 1 &
string_type = alpha_numeric &
add_quotes = yes
Description:

field _name A New GI_field Specifies the name of a new field
enabled Boolean Activates the field
interface 73

units Int_units Specifies the field size as pixel or relative to Adams
window
filed
field
location Real Specifies the location of the field on the dialog box
height Real Specifies the height of the field in terms of relative
units or pixel
width Real Specifies the width of the field in terms of relative
units or pixel
preload strings String Specifies the initial text to be displayed
commands String Specifies the command to be executed after exiting
the field
scrollable Boolean Specifies the scroll bar option of the field
editable Boolean Allows editing the field contents
required Boolean Specifies whether field is required or optional
execute_cmds_on_exit Boolean Sets the BOOLEAN parameter for execution of
command after exiting field
number_of_values Integer Specifies the number of values allowed in the field
string_type add_quotes Add_quotes Specifies addition of quotes to the string
object_type New_old_any Specifies the object allowed in the field
name_filter String Specifies the name_filter for the object
numeric_type Num_type Specifies the type of numeric objects allowed
lower_check Low_check Specifies the applicability of lower check
lower_limit Real Specifies lower limit for lower check of numeric
value
upper_check Upp_check Specifies the applicability of upper check
upper_limit Real Specifies upper limit for upper check of numeric
value
file_type New_old_any Specifies the types of file allowed in the field
directory String Specifies the directory for the file

filter String Tests each value of the component
alert_on_overwrite Boolean Sets alert for file overwrite
1. The field with specified name is created on the dialog box If parameter ‘Enabled’ is set to ON, the
field is be preactivated.
3. 3. The size of the field can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively, the size
can also be stated as relative to the Adams window.
4. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the field menu on
Vert_resizing will place the option menu on the top left corner of the dialog box. The location can
also be specified from the top left corner by adjusting the parameter ‘location.’
5. The size of the field window can be specified with respect to the Adams window size. The value
the height of the Adams/View window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the field window to be
6. The preload string is used to specify a predefined text to be displayed in the field. Thus a string ia
preloaded in to the dialog box initially.
7. The parameter ‘command’ specifies the name of the command to be executed while exiting the
field.
8. If the contents of the field do not fit the field window, then the field can be added with horizontal
and vertical scrollbars making it ‘scrollable’. The contents of a field can be edited if the field is
made ‘editable’ by choosing appropriate BOOLEAN value.
9. The execution of the associated command after exiting the window can be activated by setting the
BOOLEAN option to ‘yes’. The number of values allowed in the field can be set by stating an
integer value for the parameter ‘number_of_values’.
command. Similarly, use of the NAME_FILTER will set the types of object allowed depending
on the name of the object.
11. The numeric type of the object i.e., integer, real or entering the node_id is allowed, where a check
on the upper or lower limit of the numeric value can be set by choosing the upper and lower limits.
This limit will filter the value above and below the specified value depending the parameter
UPPER_CHECK and LOWER_CHECK.
interface 75
12. The file type tobe read or written and its default directory can be chosen by specifying directory.
if the ‘FILTER’ value is above the specified maximum value, or below the specified minimum
value, set it to zero. For example: if the component is a discrete sampling of a sinusoidal wave
with an amplitude of one (1), and filter is requested with a maximum value of .9
(above_value=.9), All the values of the corresponding to 'sin (x) > .9' will be set to 0.
interface field cut
interface field cut

Allows you to eliminate the contents of a field to paste elsewhere.A field is a space on a dialog box where
a data elements can be entered and displayed. The filed contents can be cut and pasted elsewhere by using
this command.
Format:
interface field cut

field_name = an existing GI_field
Example:
interface field cut &

field_name = .gui.ATC.flde
Description:

field _name A New GI_field Specifies the name of a new field
1. The contents of a field can be cut and pasted elsewhere by using the ‘cut’ command to editing a
document.
interface 77
interface field delete

Allows you to delete a field menu.
Format:

field_name= an existing GI_field
Example:
interface field delete &

Description:

1. Allows the deletion of the field with specified name
interface field display

Allows you to display a field on the dialog box.
Whenever required a field can be displayed using the command.
Format:

Example:
interface field display &

Description:

field _name An Existing GI_field Specifies the name of an existing field to be displayed
1. The field created can be displayed on appropriate dialog box by the ‘DISPLAY’ command.
Alternatively, it can be closed by the ‘UNDISPLAY’ command.
interface 79
interface field execute

Allows you to execute a command associated with the field.
The command associated with the field can be executed explicitly by using this command.
Format:

Example:
interface field execute &

Description:

field _name An Existing GI_field Specifies the name of a new field
1. If any command is specified while creating a field, the command is executed while exiting the
field. Alternatively, the same command can be executed by running the execute command for any
specific filed name
interface field modify

Allows you to modify an already existing field.
The field properties can be modified by using this command.
Format:

field_name = An Existing GI_field
new_field_name = A New GI_field
enabled = Boolean
help_text = String
units = Int_units
vert_resizing= Int_v_resize
location = Real
height = Real
width = Real
preload_strings = String
commands = String
scrollable = Boolean
editable= Boolean
required= Boolean
execute_cmds_on_exit = Boolean
number_of_values = Integer
string_type = Str_type
add_quotes = Add_quotes
object_type = New_old_any
type_filter= Ent
name_filter = String
numeric_type = Num_type
lower_check = Low_check
lower_limit = Real
interface 81

upper_check = Upp_check
upper_limit = Real
file_type = New_old_any
directory = String
filter = String
alert_on_overwrite= Boolean
Example:
interface field modify &

field_name = .gui.naresh.flde &
new_field_name = .gui.naresh.flde1 &
enabled = Yes &
help_text= hlp_txt &
documentation_text= doc_txt &
units= relative &
horiz_resizing = attach_right &
location = 0.15,0.15 &
height = 0.4 &
width = 0.4 &
preload_string = new_predefined_txt_display &
scrollable = yes &
editable = yes &
required = yes &
execute_cmds_on_exit = no &
number_of_values = 1 &
string_type = literal &
add_quotes = yes
Description:

field _name An Existing GI_field Specifies the name of a new field
new_field_name A New GI_field Specifies a new name for an existing field
enabled Boolean Activates the field
units Int_units Specifies the field size as pixel or relative to
Adams window
filed
field
location Real Specifies the location of the field on the dialog box
height Real Specifies the height of the field in terms of relative
units or pixel
width Real Specifies the width of the field in terms of relative
units or pixel
preload strings String Specifies the initial text to be displayed
commands String Specifies the command to be executed after exiting
the field
scrollable Boolean Specifies the scroll bar option of the field
editable Boolean Allows editing the field contents
required Boolean Specifies whether field is required or optional
execute_cmds_on_exit Boolean Sets the BOOLEAN parameter for execution of
command after exiting field
number_of_values Integer Specifies the number of values allowed in the field
string_type add_quotes Add_quotes Specifies addition of quotes to the string
object_type New_old_any Specifies the object allowed in the field
name_filter String Specifies the name_filter for the object
numeric_type Num_type Specifies the type of numeric objects allowed
lower_check Low_check Specifies the applicability of lower check
lower_limit Real Specifies lower limit for lower check of numeric
value
interface 83

upper_check Upp_check Specifies the applicability of upper check
upper_limit Real Specifies upper limit for upper check of numeric
value
file_type New_old_any Specifies the types of file allowed in the field
directory String Specifies the directory for the file
filter String Tests each value of the component
alert_on_overwrite Boolean Sets alert for file overwrite
1. The field with specified name is created on the dialog box If parameter ‘Enabled’ is set to ON, the
field is be preactivated. If a new name is specified, the field will be renamed.
3. The size of the field can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively, the size
can also be stated as relative to the Adams window.
4. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the field menu on
5. The size of the field window can be specified with respect to the Adams window size. The value
the height of the Adams/View window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the field window to be
6. The preload string is used to specify a predefined text to be displayed in the field. Thus a string ia
preloaded in to the dialog box initially.
7. The parameter ‘command’ specifies the name of the command to be executed while exiting the
field
8. If the contents of the field do not fit the field window, then the field can be added with horizontal
and vertical scrollbars making it ‘scrollable’. The contents of a field can be edited if the field is
made ‘editable’ by choosing appropriate BOOLEAN value.
9. The execution of the associated command after exiting the window can be activated by setting the
BOOLEAN option to ‘yes’. The number of values allowed in the field can be set by stating an
integer value for the parameter ‘number_of_values’.
command. Similarly, use of the NAME_FILTER will set the types of object allowed depending
on the name of the object.
11. The numeric type of the object i.e., integer, real or entering the node_id is allowed, where a check
on the upper or lower limit of the numeric value can be set by choosing the upper and lower limits.
This limit will filter the value above and below the specified value depending the parameter
UPPER_CHECK and LOWER_CHECK.
12. The file type to be read or written and its default directory can be chosen by specifying directory.
if the ‘FILTER’ value is above the specified maximum value, or below the specified minimum
value, set it to zero. For example: if the component is a discrete sampling of a sinusoidal wave
with an amplitude of one (1), and filter is requested with a maximum value of .9
(above_value=.9), All the values of the corresponding to 'sin (x) > .9' will be set to 0.
interface 85
interface field paste

Allows you to paste a copied contents of a field to another field.
Format:

field_name= an exisitng GI_field
Example:
interface field paste &

Description:

field _name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing field where the contents are to
GI_field be pasted
1. The command allows pasting of the contents of a remote field to another field.
interface field read

Allows you to read/ execute the contents of a file to a field .A field is a space on a dialog box where a
data elements can be entered and displayed.
Format:

field_name = an exisitng GI_field
file_name = string
Example:
interface field read &

file_name = “c:/spring_data.txt”
Description:

file_name String Specifies the file name to be read
1. Specifies the name of the file that is to be read, written, or executed. The proper extension is the
default but can be overridden by simply supplying a different extension. You do not need to
enclose the file name in quotes if it only contains alpha-numeric characters and starts with a letter.
If you want to include other characters, such as a '.' for an extension or '/' or '[]' for directory paths,
you must enclose the name in quotes.
interface 87
interface field set
interface field set

Allows you to set the execution parameters and the editing the contents of a field .A field is a space on a
dialog box where a data elements can be entered and displayed.
The field properties can be set using the command
Format:
interface field set

field_name = An Exisitng GI_field
strings = String
database_fields = String
action = Field_action
execute = Boolean
Example:
interface field set &

field_name = .gui.naresh.fldst &
strings = append_text &
action = append &
execute = yes
Description:

field _name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing field
GI_field
strings String Specifies the strings to be added to the field
database_field String Specifies the database_filed to be added
action Field_action Specifies whether the new addition will replace or add to the
existing contents
execute Boolean Sets the execution of the command to ‘yes’ or ‘no’
1. A string/ database field can be added, appended or inserted to the existing contents of a field
depending upon the parameter ‘action’. The command, if specified, associated with the particular
dialog box is executed depending on the BOOLEAN parameter ‘yes’ or ‘no’.
interface field set
Tips:
The parameters ‘strings’ and ‘database fields’ are mutually exclusive to each other.
interface 89
interface field undisplay

Allows closing of an displayed field on the dialog box
It may not be necessary to display the field always and hence it can be closed by the command.
Format:

field_name= an existing GI_field
Example:
interface field undisplay &

Description:

field _name An Existing GI_field Specifies the name of an displayed field
1. The displayed field can be closed by choosing the field name and running the command
‘undisplay’. It can be displayed again by the command ‘display’ specifying the field name.
interface field write

Allows writing the contents of a field to a file
A field is a space on a dialog box where a data elements can be entered and displayed. The contents of a
field can be directly written to a file like excel workbook or a tab delimited txt file.
Format:

file_name = string
Example:
interface field write &

file_name = c:/write_backup.txt
Description:

field _name An Existing GI_field Specifies the name of an existing field to be displayed
file_name String Specify here a new or existing file name to be written or
overwritten
1. The contents of the field can be written to a new or existing file by ‘write’ command. If an existing
file name is suggested then the file will be overwritten after a prompt warning. The new file can
be specified with extension like .txt or .doc. If no extension is specified then the file will be created
with an extension .tab. You do not need to enclose the file name in quotes if it only contains alpha-
numeric characters and starts with a letter. If you want to include other characters, such as a '.' for
an extension or '/' or '[]' for directory paths, you must enclose the name in quotes.
interface 91
interface grid copy
interface grid copy

Allows you to copy an existing grid.
A new grid can be created independent of the default grid, which can be located or oriented as per the
preference. The grid oriGIn can be conveniently located at any location other than the global oriGIn.
The grid can be copied and displayed in a new view. The grid is copied by this command.
Format:
interface grid copy

grid_name = an existing grid
new_grid_name = a new grid
Example:
interface grid copy &

grid_name = .model_1.grd &
new_grid_name = grd4
Description:

grid_name An Existing Grid Specifies the name of an existing grid
new_grid_name A New Grid Specifies a new name for the copied grid
1. The grid can be copied and displayed in a new view. This reduces the task of repeating the grid
creation for a new view.
Cautions:
The grid settings should not exceed the maximum number of points as specified by the environment
variable 'MDI_MAX_GRID_POINTS'. The default maximum is 10000 points.
interface grid create

Allows you to create a new grid in an existing view.
The grid size, mesh, appearance and snapping ability can be decided by this command.
Format:

grid_name = a new grid
location = location
snapping_enabled = boolean
view_normal = boolean
extent = length
spacing = length
maximum_radius = length
circle_spacing = length
radial_increments = integer
triad_visible = boolean
lines_visible= boolean
line_weight= integer
line_style= line_style
line_color = an existing color
dots_visible = boolean
dot_size = integer
dot_color = an existing color
axes_visible = boolean
axis_weight = integer
interface 93
Example:
interface grid create &

grid_name = .model_1.grd &
location = .model_1 &
orientation = .model_1 &
snapping_enabled = yes &
view_normal = yes &
extent = 1000,1000 &
spacing = 100,100 &
triad_visible= yes &
lines_visible = yes &
line_weight = 2 &
line_style = solid &
line_color = .colors.RED &
dots_visible = yes &
dot_size = 3 &
dot_color = .colors.BLUE &
axes_visible = yes &
axis_weight = 3 &
axis_color = .colors.GREEN
Description:

grid_name A New Grid Specifies the name for a new grid
location Location Specifies the location of the grid oriGIn
orientation Orientation Specifies the orientation of the grid
snapping_enabled Boolean Specifies the ability to snap to grid points
view_normal Boolean Keeps the grid always normal to the viewer irrespective of
actual orientation
extent Length Specifies the extent of the grid in two axial directions in
model units
spacing Length Specifies the spacing of the grid points
maximum_radius Length Specifies the maximum radius of the polar grid

circle_spacing Length Specifies the circular spacing of the polar grid
radial_increments Integer Specifies the radial increments in case of polar grid
triad_visible Boolean Specifies the visibility of triad
lines_visible Boolean Specifies the visibility of grid lines
line_weight Integer Specifies the line weight
line_style Line_style Specifies the line style for the grid line
line_color An Existing Color Specifies the grid line color
dots_visible Boolean Specifies the visibility of the grid dots
dot_size Integer Specifies the size of the grid dots
dot_color An Existing Color Specifies the grid dot color
axes_visible Boolean Specifies the visibility of the axes
axis_weight Integer Specifies the axes line weight
axis_color An Existing Color Specifies the axis line color
1. The new working grid can be defined with the name ‘grid_name’ .The location can be at global
oriGIn or any other location which can be entered as coordinates of ‘picked-up’ from the view
window. Either you can keep the Global OriGIn, i.e., 0,0,0, to set the center location of the grid
to the center of the view window or pick or click a location on the screen to set as the center of
the working grid.
2. By orientation, select how you want to orient the grid. You can set its orientation by picking points
or by aligning it with the screen plane. Note that if you select Pick for orientation, you will also
set the location of the working grid. This orients the grid axes to the global axes.
3. By enabling the ‘snapping’, you can snap a closest grid point with the cursor. When you drag an
item with the mouse to move or resize it, the mouse position will snap to the nearest grid point.
4. The parameter ‘view normal’ always orients the grid normal to the viewer irrespective of the
actual orientation of the grid. Thus, if the grid is oriented at angle, as you change the orientation
of the object view, the grid realigns itself normal to the viewer. But if the parameter is not enabled,
then the grid will remain oriented in space as per the specified orientation.
5. The extents specifies the length of the grid in x,y directions in the model length units. The spacing
specifies the distance between the grid points in x and y directions in models length units.
interface 95
6. Maximum radius specifies the radius of the outermost grid circle from the grid oriGIn and
circle_spacing specifies amount of space between each circle in the working grid. The smaller the
spacing, the more circles Adams/View defines.
For radial increments,enter the number of lines radiating from the oriGIn of the working grid.
Adams/View spaces the lines equally around the working grid. The lines do not include the axes.
The number of lines (N) determines the angle increment between lines (q), as shown in the
formula:
 = 360×/N
7. You can hide the new grid triad or display it by the parameter ‘triad_visible’. The visibility of
lines and axes on the grid can be switched ON or OFF by the parameter ‘lines_visible’ and
‘axes_visible’ . The line and axes weight can be set by using the ‘line_weight’ and ‘axes_weight’
parameters. The value range for this weight is 1 to 5. The color of the lines and axes is set by using
the ‘axes_color’ and ‘line_color’ parameter. The line style can be chosen form various line style
options like solid, dash, etc,.
8. The dot properties like size, color and visibility are set by using the parameters ‘dot_size’,
‘dot_color’ and ‘dot_visible’ parameter. The dot_size range is from 1 to 3 screen pixel.
Cautions:
interface grid delete

Allows you to delete an existing grid in the view.
The grid created can be deleted by this command.
Format:

Example:
interface grid delete &

grid_name = grd4
Description:

view_name An Existing View Specifies view_name of displayed grid
1. The existing grid can be deleted by this command.
Tips:
The grid may not be deleted if any views or objects are dependent on it. You must first delete the
dependent objects.
Cautions:
interface 97
interface grid display

Allows you to display an existing grid in the view.
preference. The grid origin can be conveniently located at any location other than the global origin.
The grid created can be displayed by this command.
Format:

Example:
interface grid display &

grid_name = .model_1.grd5 &
view_name = front
Description:

1. The existing grid can be displayed by this command.
Cautions:
interface grid modify

Allows you to modify an existing grid in the view.
The grid size, mesh, appearance and snapping ability can be modified by this command.
Format:

new_grid_name= a new grid
location = location
snapping_enabled = boolean
view_normal = boolean
extent = length
spacing = length
maximum_radius = length
circle_spacing = length
radial_increments = integer
triad_visible = boolean
lines_visible = boolean
line_weight = integer
line_style= line_style
line_color= an existing color
dots_visible= boolean
dot_size= integer
dot_color = an existing color
axes_visible = boolean
axis_weight = integer
interface 99
Example:
interface grid modify &

grid_name= .model_1.grd &
new_grid_name= .model_1.grd2 &
location = .model_1 &
orientation = .model_1 &
snapping_enabled = yes &
view_normal = yes &
extent = 1000,1000 &
spacing = 100,100 &
triad_visible = yes &
lines_visible = yes &
line_weight = 2 &
line_style = solid &
line_color = .colors.RED &
dots_visible = yes &
dot_size = 3 &
dot_color = .colors.BLUE &
axes_visible = yes &
axis_weight = 3 &
axis_color = .colors.GREEN
Description:

new_grid_name A New Grid Specifies a new name for an existing grid
location Location Specifies the location of the grid oriGIn
orientation Orientation Specifies the orientation of the grid
snapping_enabled Boolean Specifies the ability to snap to grid points
view_normal Boolean Keeps the grid always normal to the viewer
irrespective of actual orientation
extent Length Specifies the extent of the grid in two axial
directions in model units

spacing Length Specifies the spacing of the grid points
maximum_radius Length Specifies the maximum radius of the polar grid
circle_spacing Length Specifies the circular spacing of the polar grid
radial_increments Integer Specifies the radial increments in case of polar
grid
triad_visible Boolean Specifies the visibility of triad
lines_visible Boolean Specifies the visibility of grid lines
line_weight Integer Specifies the line weight
line_style Line_style Specifies the line style for the grid line
line_color An Existing Color Specifies the grid line color
dots_visible Boolean Specifies the visibility of the grid dots
dot_size Integer Specifies the size of the grid dots
dot_color An Existing Color Specifies the grid dot color
axes_visible Boolean Specifies the visibility of the axes
axis_weight Integer Specifies the axes line weight
axis_color An Existing Color Specifies the axis line color
1. The new working grid can be defined with the name ‘grid_name’ .The location can be at global
oriGIn or any other location which can be entered as coordinates of ‘picked-up’ from the view
window. Either you can keep the Global OriGIn, i.e., 0,0,0, to set the center location of the grid
to the center of the view window or pick or click a location on the screen to set as the center of
the working grid.
The ‘new_grid_name’ replaces the name of the existing grid.
2. By orientation, select how you want to orient the grid. You can set its orientation by picking points
or by aligning it with the screen plane. Note that if you select Pick for orientation, you will also
set the location of the working grid. This orients the grid axes to the global axes.
3. By enabling the ‘snapping’, you can snap a closest grid point with the cursor. When you drag an
item with the mouse to move or resize it, the mouse position will snap to the nearest grid point.
4. The parameter ‘view normal’ always orients the grid normal to the viewer irrespective of the
actual orientation of the grid. Thus, if the grid is oriented at angle, as you change the orientation
of the object view, the grid realigns itself normal to the viewer. But if the parameter is not enabled,
then the grid will remain oriented in space as per the specified orientation.
5. The extents specifies the length of the grid in x,y directions in the model length units. The spacing
specifies the distance between the grid points in x and y directions in models length units.
interface 101
6. Maximum radius specifies the radius of the outermost grid circle from the grid oriGIn and
circle_spacing specifies amount of space between each circle in the working grid. The smaller the
spacing, the more circles Adams/View defines.
For radial increments,enter the number of lines radiating from the oriGIn of the working grid.
Adams/View spaces the lines equally around the working grid. The lines do not include the axes.
The number of lines (N) determines the angle increment between lines (q), as shown in the
formula:
 = 360×/N
7. You can hide the new grid triad or display it by the parameter ‘triad_visible’. The visibility of
lines and axes on the grid can be switched ON or OFF by the parameter ‘lines_visible’ and
‘axes_visible’ . The line and axes weight can be set by using the ‘line_weight’ and ‘axes_weight’
parameters. The value range for this weight is 1 to 5. The color of the lines and axes is set by using
the ‘axes_color’ and ‘line_color’ parameter. The line style can be chosen form various line style
options like solid, dash, etc,.
8. The dot properties like size, color and visibility are set by using the parameters ‘dot_size’,
‘dot_color’ and ‘dot_visible’ parameter. The dot_size range is from 1 to 3 screen pixel.
Cautions:
interface grid undisplay

Allows you to close an existing grid in the view.
The grid can be closed by this command.
Format:

Example:
interface grid undisplay &

grid_name= .model_1.grd5 &
view_name= front
Description:

1. The existing grid can be closed by this command.
Cautions:
interface 103
interface label create

Allows creation of a new label on the dialog box.
Specifies a label for an axis which will be displayed near the axis, its placement depending on where the
axis is placed. The label can be of unlimited length, but may not all fit on the plot if it's very long. If the
string contains spaces, it must be enclosed in quotation marks.
Format:

label_name = a new GI_label
location = real
height = real
width = real
enabled = boolean
help_text = string
units = int_units
text = string
icon_file = string
justified = justified
Example:
interface label create &

label_name = .gui.dbox.lbl &
location = 0.0, 0.0 &
height = 0.8 &
width = 0.8 &
enabled = yes &
documentation_text = "doc2text" &
units = relative &
interface label create &

text = "this_is_label" &
justified = center
Description:

label _name A New GI_label Specifies the name of a new label
enabled Boolean Activates the label
units Int_units Specifies the label size as pixel or relative to dialog box
window
horiz_resizing Int_h_resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for the label
vert_resizing Int_v_resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for the label
location Real Specifies the location of the label on the dialog box
height Real Specifies the height of the label in terms of relative units or
pixel
width Real Specifies the width of the label field in terms of relative units
or pixel
icon_file String Specifies the address of the image to be displayed for iconic
label
text String Specifies the text to be displayed on the label
justified Justified Specifies the text justification on the window
1. The preliminary parameters of the label like size and text to be displayed are set using this
command.
3. The size of the label can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively, the size
can also be stated as relative to the dialog box window
4. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the label menu on
Vert_resizing will place the label on the top left corner of the dialog box. The location can also
interface 105
5. The size of the label window can be specified with respect to the dialog box window size. The
represents the height of the dialog window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the label field
window to be one half as high as the dialog box window.
6. The ‘text’ specifies the text string(s) that will comprise the note text. You may enter the text
string(s) for this parameter without double quote marks, if the string contains no "blanks" or
special characters such as *&^%$#@!-/><. If the text string(s) do have any of these special
characters the string must be quoted. To enter a multiline note, each line must be entered as a
separate string, separated by a comma. An Example: note create note=.front.n1
screen_coords=0,0 & TEXT="This is a","multi line note" size = .12
This example command would produce a two line note located at the center of the view named
'front', and at a height of .12 units.
7. By default ‘label’ is left justified, but it can be adjusted center or right by parameter ‘JUSTIFIED’
8. The parameter ‘iconic_file’ specifies the name of the file that contains the icon definition for use
on an iconic menu.
interface label delete

Allows deletion of a existing label on the dialog box.
Specification of a label for an axis is displayed near the axis, its placement depending on where the axis
is placed. The label can be of unlimited length, but may not all fit on the plot if it's very long. If the string
contains spaces, it must be enclosed in quotation marks.
Format:

label_name = an existing GI_label
Description:

label _name An Existing GI_label Specifies the name of an existing label
The label can be deleted by choosing the appropriate ‘label_name’ while the ‘delete’ command.
interface 107
interface label display

Allows displaying the existing label on the dialog box.
Format:

Example:
interface label display &

label_name = .gui.dobx.lbl
Description:

The label can be displayed or closed using the ‘display’ and ‘undisplay’ commands respectively as the
need arises.
interface label modify

Allows modification of an existing label on the dialog box.
Format:

new_label_name = a new GI_lable
location = real
height = real
width = real
enabled = boolean
help_text = string
units = int_units
text = string
icon_file = string
justified = justified
Example:
interface label modify &

new_label_name = .gui.dbox.lbl &
location = 0.0, 0.0 &
height = 0.8 &
width = 0.8 &
enabled = yes &
interface 109
interface label modify &

units = relative &
text = "this_is_label" &
justified = center
Description:

label _name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing label
GI_label
new_label_name A New GI_label Specifies a new name for an existing label
enabled Boolean Activates the label
units Int_units Specifies the label size as pixel or relative to dialog
box window
label
label
location Real Specifies the location of the label on the dialog box
height Real Specifies the height of the label in terms of relative
units or pixel
width Real Specifies the width of the label field in terms of
icon_file String Specifies the address of the image to be displayed
for iconic label
text String Specifies the text to be displayed on the label
justified Justified Specifies the text justification on the window
1. The preliminary parameters of the label like size and text to be displayed are set using this
command. The name of the label can also be change by adding parameter ‘new_label_name’.
3. The size of the label can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively, the size
4. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the label menu on
Vert_resizing will place the label on the top left corner of the dialog box. The location can also
5. The size of the label window can be specified with respect to the dialog box window size. The
represents the height of the dialog window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the label field
6. The ‘text’ specifies the text string(s) that will comprise the note text. You may enter the text
string(s) for this parameter without double quote marks, if the string contains no "blanks" or
special characters such as *&^%$#@!-/><. If the text string(s) do have any of these special
characters the string must be quoted. To enter a multiline note, each line must be entered as a
separate string, separated by a comma. An Example: note create note=.front.n1
screen_coords=0,0 & TEXT="This is a","multi line note" size = .12
7. By default ‘label’ is left justified, but it can be adjusted center or right by parameter ‘JUSTIFIED’
8. The parameter ‘iconic_file’ specifies the name of the file that contains the icon definition for use
on an iconic menu.
interface 111
interface label set
interface label set

Allows setting-up of initial appearance parameters for the existing label on the dialog box.
Format:
interface label set

rgb_color = real
Example:
interface label set &

rgb_color = 0.3,0.4,0.1
Description:

color An Existing Color Specifies the color of the label
rgb_color Real Specifies the color of the label as real numbers
1. The label appearance can be changed by choosing label color as either available colors or entering
the color code as real numbers, i.e. rgb_color.
interface label set
The ‘color’ specifies the COLOR of a graphic object. A graphic object is an object that may be
drawn on the screen by Adams/View, these include curves, parts, markers, arcs, outlines, boxes,
circles, cylinders, frustums, spring damper graphics, force graphics, and plot curves and symbols.
When the COLOR of a part is specified, all graphic objects fixed to that part are drawn with the
COLOR of the part. Adams/View supports the following COLOR: black, white, red, green, blue,
cyan, magenta, and yellow.
Note: If you choose the COLOR of an entity to be drawn in the view background color (typically
white or black... ) it may not show up. See help for hardcopy also.
2. The RGB_COLOR is specified as reals ranGIng from 0,0,0 to 1,1,1

interface 113
interface label undisplay

Allows closing the existing label on the dialog box.
Format:

Example:
interface label undisplay &

label_name= .gui.dobx.lbl
Description:

The label can be displayed or closed using the ‘display’ and ‘undisplay’ commands respectively as the
need arises.
interface menu create

Allows you to create a new row for a new or existing menu.
The ‘interface menu’ allows you to create, manage, and display menus. Adams/view displays menus
below the Command Line. You may enter Adams/view commands by picking on menus, and filling out
the resulting panels. If you have menus loaded and displayed, you have your choice between typing
commands in the Command Line, and picking through the menus. If you are unfamiliar with a command,
you will probably find the menus easier to use. If you know exactly which command to enter, you may
find it quicker to type it directly.
Adams/view menus are data base objects. You create, modify, and delete them as you would any other
objects in Adams/view. With your Adams/view distribution, you received a predefined set of menus and
panels that closely match the Adams/view command structure. You may use them as they are, or modify
them to suit your own needs and tastes.
The main menu is named '.gui.root'. The names of other menus are derived from the keywords they
represent. The fixed menu, at the bottom of the display, is a special menu named '.gui.fixed_menu'. You
may add, modify, or delete items from the fixed menu, but you may not delete the menu itself. To get
the name of any particular menu, type on the command line (while the desired menu is displayed):
"list_info pick <CR>". Then pick the desired menu and then it's full definition, including the name, will
be displayed in the information window.
Menus work very simply. Each menu item has a command string associated with it. When you select an
item by picking on it, Adams/view executes the command associated with the item. Many times, this
command will display a new menu next to the current one, allowing you to work your way down the
command structure. The final menu item will display the panel associated with the command you are
entering, if it has parameters, or issue the command immediately, if it has no parameters.
This command is used to create a menu on the menubar.
Format:

menu_name= a new GI_menu
enabled = boolean
help_text = string
units = int_units
location = real
height = real
interface 115

width = real
label = string
Example:
interface menu create &

menu_name = .gui.win.mnbr1.zoom &
enabled = yes &
help_text= "text2help" &
units = relative &
location= 0.0, 0.0 &
height = 0.3 &
width = 0.3&
label = "zoom control"
Description:

menu_name A New GI_menu Specifies the name for a new menu
enabled Boolean Activates the menu
units Int_units Specifies the menu size as pixel or relative to Adams window
horiz_resizing Int_h_resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for the menu
vert_resizing Int_v_resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for the menu
location Real Specifies the location of the menu on the window
height Real Specifies the height of the menu in terms of relative units or
pixel
width Real Specifies the width of the window field in terms of relative
units or pixel
label String Specifies the label to appear on menubar
1. The ‘menu_name’ specifies the name of an existing menu which you want to modify. You
identify a menu by typing its name. If a menu is available by default, you may identify it by
entering its name only. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a menu under a
different library, for instance, you may need to enter the library name as well. For example, you
may specify menu 'menu1' from library 'gui', by entering ".gui.menu1". If you type a "?",
Adams/View will list the menus available by default.
2. A menubar contains various menus. Each of these menus may be associated with different
commands. The menus on this menubar can be created by this command, adding commands to
the menus is done by ‘interface menubar build’ command. The menubar can be displayed on the
main_window, popup_window, ppt_main_window, or a user defined custom window.
3. The menu is enabled by the parameter ‘enabled’. The popup_help_text and documentation is
specified. The size of the menu can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively,
the size can also be stated as relative to the Adams window. The vertical and horizontal resizing
options are used to adjust the placement of the menu on existing window. For example,
attach_left; attach_top options for Horiz_resizing and Vert_resizing will place the window on the
top left corner of the window. The location can also be specified from the top left corner by
adjusting the parameter ‘location’
4. The ‘label’ will appear on menu created on the menubar.
interface 117
interface menu delete

Allows you to delete an existing menu on the menubar.
The ‘interface menu’ allows you to create, manage, and display menus. Adams/View displays menus
below the Command Line. You may enter Adams/View commands by picking on menus, and filling out
Adams/View menus are data base objects. You create, modify, and delete them as you would any other
objects in Adams/View. With your Adams/View distribution, you received a predefined set of menus and
panels that closely match the Adams/View command structure. You may use them as they are, or modify
item by picking on it, Adams/View executes the command associated with the item. Many times, this
This command is used to delete an existing menu on the menubar.
Format:

menu_name= an exisitng GI_menu
Example:
interface menu delete &

menu_name = zoom
Description:

menu_name An Exisitng GI_menu Specifies the of an existing menu
1. An existing menu can be deleted from the menubar by using this command.
Description:

1. All the menus need not be displayed everytime. The menus can be selectively displayed and close
by using the ‘interface menu display’ and ‘interface menu undisplay’ commands respectively by
specifying the ‘menu_name’.
interface 119
interface menu display

Allows you to display an existing menu on the menubar.
The ‘interface menu’ allows you to create, manage, and display menus. Adams/View displays menus
panels that closely match the Adams/View command structure. You may use them as they are, or modify
item by picking on it, Adams/View executes the command associated with the item.Many times, this
This command is used to display an existing menu on the menubar.
Format:

Example:
interface menu display &

menu_name= zoom
Description:

interface 121
interface menu modify

Allows you to modify an existing row for an existing menu.
may add, modify, or delete items from the fixed menu, but you may not delete the menu itself. To get the
name of any particular menu, type on the command line (while the desired menu is displayed): "list_info
pick <CR>". Then pick the desired menu and then it's full definition, including the name, will be
displayed in the information window.
This command is used to modify a menu on the menubar.
Format:

menu_name= An Existing GI_menu
new_menu_name = A New GI_menu
enabled = Boolean
help_text = String
documentation_text= String
units = Int_units
location = Real

height = Real
width = Real
label = String
Example:
interface menu modify &

menu_name = .gui.win.mnbr1.zoom &
new_menu_name = .gui.win.mnbr1.zoom1 &
enabled = yes &
units = relative &
vert_resizing= attach_top &
location = 0.0, 0.0 &
height = 0.3 &
width = 0.3 &
label = "zoom control"
Description:

menu_name An Existing GI_menu Specifies the name of an existing menu
new_menu_name A New GI_menu Specifies a new name for the existing menu
enabled Boolean Activates the menu
units Int_units Specifies the menu size as pixel or relative to Adams
window
menu
menu
interface 123

location Real Specifies the location of the menu on the window
height Real Specifies the height of the menu in terms of relative
units or pixel
width Real Specifies the width of the window field in terms of
label String Specifies the label to appear on menubar
1. The ‘menu_name’ specifies the name of an existing menu which you want to modify. You
identify a menu by typing its name. If a menu is available by default, you may identify it by
entering its name only. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a menu under a
different library, for instance, you may need to enter the library name as well. For example, you
may specify menu 'menu1' from library 'gui', by entering ".gui.menu1". If you type a "?",
Adams/View will list the menus available by default.
commands. The menus on this menubar can be created by this command, adding commands to
the menus is done by ‘interface menubar build’ command. The menubar can be displayed on the
3. The ‘new_menu_name’ will specify a new name for a menu. The new name must be unique, since
you are not allowed to have two menus with the same name.
4. The menu is enabled by the parameter ‘enabled’. The popup_help_text and documentation is
specified. The size of the menu can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively,
the size can also be stated as relative to the Adams window. The vertical and horizontal resizing
options are used to adjust the placement of the menu on existing window. For example,
attach_left; attach_top options for Horiz_resizing and Vert_resizing will place the window on the
top left corner of the window. The location can also be specified from the top left corner by
adjusting the parameter ‘location’
5. The ‘label’ will appear on menu created on the menubar.
interface menu read
interface menu read

Allows you to add commands to existing menus.
objects in Adams/view. With your Adams/View distribution, you received a predefined set of menus and
item by picking on it, Adams/View executes the command associated with the item. Many times, this
This command is used to add command to a menu on the menubar.
Format:
interface menu read

file_name= string
Example:
interface menu read &

menu_name = .gui.win.mnbr1.zoom.vwc_pop_up &
file_name = "D:/naresh/20 sept/z1.mnu"
interface 125
interface menu read
Description:

file_name String Specifies the name of a *.mnu file from which the commands
are to be read
field_name An Exisitng GI_field Specifies the existing interface field name
1. The commands can be added to a menu by the ‘interface menu read’ command. The command
can be added by reading a .mnu file already created or accessing an existing field.
2. The .mnu consists of a commands which can be written by ‘interface menu write’ and accessed
by ‘interface menu read’.
for example, the zoom operation will need the following command set which is written to a .menu
file
-----------------------------
NAME=vwc_pop_up
BUTTON2 Zoom In/Out <z>
HELP=Dynamically zoom the view
CMD=interface mode repeat=push mode=dyn_view_zoom
---------------------------
The above mentioned contents from a .mnu file can be read by this command, which will display the
menu zoom-in and zoom-out buttons against the already created zoom-menu.
interface menu undisplay

Allows you to close an existing menu on the menubar.
Adams/View menus are data base objects. You create, modify, and delete them as you would any other
This command is used to close an existing menu on the menubar.
Format:

menu_name = an exisitng GI_menu
Example:
interface menu undisplay &

menu_name = zoom
interface 127
Description:

interface menu write

Allows you to write the commands associated with a menu to a file.
This command is used to write the commands associated with a menu to a file.
Format:

menu_name= An Exisitng GI_menu
file_name= String
field_name = An Existing GI_field
Example:
interface menu write &

menu_name = .gui.win.mnbr1.zoom.vwc_pop_up &
file_name= "D:/naresh/20 sept/z1.mnu"
interface 129
Description:

file_name String Specifies the name of a *.mnu file to which the
commands are to be written
field_name An Exisitng GI_field Specifies the existing interface field name
1. The commands associated with a menu can be written to a .mnu file by ‘interface menu write’
command. This file can further be accessed to build another menu. Also an existing interface field
can be written by using ‘interface menu write’ command.
2. The .mnu consists of a commands which can be written by ‘interface menu write’.
for example, the zoom operation tab on the menu has the following commands set which is written
to a .mnu file
--------------------
NAME=vwc_pop_up
---------------------------
The above mentioned contents from a .mnu file can be read by ‘interface menu read’ command, which
will display the menu zoom-in and zoom-out buttons against the already created zoom-menu.
interface menubar build

Allows you to build an existing menubar to add button and commands to it.
The menubar can be created on main_window, popup_window, ppt_main_window, or a user defined
custom window.
This menubar is built up by adding menus, which are associated with Adams commands.
Format:

menubar_name = An Existing GI_menubar
Example:
interface menubar build &

menubar_name = mnbr1
Description:

menubar_name An Existing GI_menubar Specifies the name of an existing menubar
1. The command ‘interface menubar build’ will ask for the ‘menubar name’. Enter the name of an
existing menubar created by ‘create’ command.
2. A ‘menubar builder’ will open up. It will have two object tabs namely, 1) Menu bar and 2) Edit.
The ‘Edit’ tab can be used to edit the text contents of the menubar window. The ‘Menu bar’ tab
has various command options namely, 1) Load, 2) Apply, 3) Reload, 4) Import text, 5) Export text
and 6) Exit.
3. Add the commands to the text window of the Menu-bar, and click ‘Load’ tab which will open a
database navigator to prompt for a GUI where the menubar should be loaded. Select the proper
GUI to load the menubar. If you do any further changes to the text in menubar-text-window, click
reload to update the changes. Lastly, click ‘Apply’ to display the menubar on GUI.
As an Example, to create a zoom menu on menubar write the following into the menubar-text-
window
MENU1= zoom control
NAME=vwc_pop_up__1
interface 131
-------------------------------------------------------
After writing the text into menubar-text-window, select ‘Load’ from the main menu. It will
prompt the GUI namely, 1) main_window, 2) popup_window, 3) ppt_main_window, and 4) user
defined custom window (if already created).
Select the option 4, to display the menubar on a user defined custom window. It will display the
zoom tab on the menubar on the custom window.
By clicking this tab to perform zooming on the Adams/View window.
interface menubar create

Allows you to create a new menubar.
custom window. The menubar can further be built up by adding menus, which are associated with Adams
commands.
This command is used to create a menubar which is then used to add menus for execution of various
commands. For adding the menus and activating the menubar refer to ‘menubar_build’.
Format:

menubar_name= a new GI_menubar
enabled = boolean
help_text = string
units = int_units
Example:
interface menubar create &

menubar_name = .gui.win.mbar &
enabled = yes &
units = relative &
Description:

menubar_name A New GI_menubar Specifies the name for a new menubar
enabled Boolean Activates the menubar
interface 133

units Int_units Specifies the menubar size as pixel or relative to Adams
window
menubar
menubar
commands. Such a menubar can be created by this command. adding menus and commands to the
buttons is done by ‘interface menubar build’ command. The menubar can be displayed on the
2. The menubar is enabled by the parameter ‘enabled’. The popup_help_text and documentation is
specified. The size of the menubar can be specified either in terms of number of pixels.
Alternatively, the size can also be stated as relative to the Adams window.
3. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the menu on
existing window. For example, attach_left; attach_top options for Horiz_resizing and
Vert_resizing will place the menu on the top left corner of the window box. The location can also
interface menubar delete

Allows you to delete of an existing menubar.
custom window. The menubar can further be built up by adding buttons, which are associated with
Adams commands.
This command is used to delete an existing menubar.
Format:

menubar_name = an existing GI_menubar
Example:
interface menubar delete &

menubar_name= mnbr1
Description:

1. The existing menubar can be deleted by using this command.
interface 135
interface menubar display

Allows you to display an existing menubar.
commands.
This command is used to display an existing menubar.
Format:

Example:
interface menubar display &

Description:

1. The existing menubar can be displayed or closed as per the requirement of command menus on
the menubar, by the command ‘interface menubar display’ and ‘interface menubar undisplay’
respectively.
interface menubar modify

Allows you to modify an existing menubar .
commands.
This command is used to modify a menubar which may be further used to add menus for execution of
various commands. For adding the menus and activating the menubar refer to ‘menubar_build’.
Format:

new_menubar_name = a new GI_menubar
enabled = boolean
help_text = string
units = int_units
Example:
interface menubar modify &

menubar_name = .gui.win.mnbr &
new_menubar_name = mnbr1 &
enabled = yes &
units = relative &
interface 137
Description:

new_menubar_name A New GI_menubar Specifies a new name for an existing menubar
enabled Boolean Activates the menubar
units Int_units Specifies the menubar size as pixel or relative to
Adams window
the menubar
the menubar
1. The ‘new_menubar_name’ will replace the existing menubar with the new name.
commands. Such a menubar can be created by this command. adding menus and commands to the
menus is done by ‘interface menubar build’ command. The menubar can be displayed on the
3. The menubar is enabled by the parameter ‘enabled’. The popup_help_text and documentation is
specified. The size of the menubar can be specified either in terms of number of pixels.
Alternatively, the size can also be stated as relative to the Adams window. The vertical and
horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the menubar on existing window.
For example, attach_left; attach_top options for Horiz_resizing and Vert_resizing will place the
menu on the top left corner of the window box. The location can also be specified from the top
left corner by adjusting the parameter ‘location’
interface menubar read

Allows you to read the menubar building commands from a file.
custom window.
This menubar is built up by adding menus, which are associated with Adams commands. Those
commands can be written to a file with .mnu extension.
This file can be read to build a new menubar by using this command. Or else, a field can be written to
and read back by using this command.
Format:

file_name = string
Example:
interface menubar read &

menubar_name= .gui.win.mnbr1 &
file_name = "C:/menubar_data.mnu"
Description:

file_name String Specifies a remote file name from where the menubar
commands are to be read
1. The menubar commands data for any menubar are written to a file with extension .mnu. This file
can be accessed while using the ‘menubar read’ command to create a new menubar with same
commands.
2. Alternatively, the same file can be written by using the ‘import text’ tab from the ‘menubar
builder’.
As an Example, to create a zoom menu on menubar, following text appears in the menubar-text-
window.
interface 139
------------------------------------------------------
MENU1 zoom control
NAME=vwc_pop_up__1
-------------------------------------------------------
which can be read from of a file with extension .mnu writtenm previously. This file can be read
directly to create similar menubar on a window.
3. Similarly, a individual ‘field’ previously written can be accessed by selecting the parameter
‘field_name’, which will read data related to a field.
interface menubar undisplay

Allows you to close an existing menubar.
commands.
This command is used to close an existing menubar.
Format:

Example:
interface menubar undisplay &

Description:

1. The existing menubar can be displayed or closed as per the requirement of command menus on
the menubar, by the command ‘interface menubar display’ and ‘interface menubar undisplay’
respectively.
interface 141
interface menubar write

Allows you to write the menubar building commands to a file
custom window.
This menubar is built up by adding menus, which are associated with Adams commands. Those
commands can be written to a file with .mnu extension. This file can be further read to build a new
menubar.
Format:

file_name = string
Example:
interface menubar write &

menubar_name = .gui.win.mnbr1 &
file_name = "C:/menubar_data.mnu"
Description:

file_name String Specifies a remote file name where the menubar
commands are to be written
1. The menubar commands data for any menubar can be written to a file with extension .mnu. This
file can be accessed while using the ‘menubar read’ command to create a new menubar with same
commands.
2. Alternatively, the same file can be written by using the ‘export text’ tab from the ‘menubar
builder’ As an Example, to create a zoom menu on menubar, following text appears in the
menubar-text-window
MENU1 zoom control
NAME=vwc_pop_up__1

which can be written in the form of a file with extension .mnu. This file can be read directly to
create similar menubar on a window.
interface 143
interface message
interface message
Allows the setting the mode of display in plot panel in the plot window
Allows you to set the messages displayed in the message window and clear the messages from the
window. By default, the message window only displays error and fatal messages and messages from
commands that you execute from the user interface (for example, menus and dialog boxes). You can also
display messages that you execute from the Command Window, Command Navigator, and command
files. In addition, you can set the severity level of the messages displayed, from informational to fatal
messages.
Format:
interface message
graphic_window_level= msg_gui_level
command_window_level= msg_gui_level
start_up_level= msg_gui_level
threshold_severity = severity
message= string
enabled= boolean
Example:
interface message &

graphic_window_level= brief &
command_window_level= brief &
startup_level= brief
Description:

graphic_window_level Msg_gui_level Specifies the message type displayed for graphic
window event
command_window_level Msg_gui_level Specifies the message type displayed for
command window event
start_up_level Msg_gui_level Specifies the message type displayed for start up
threshold_severity Severity Specifies the threshold limit above which a
message is displayed
interface message

message String Specifies the message dtring to be displayed
enabled Boolean Enables the message setting
1. By default, the Message window only displays error and fatal messages and messages from
commands that you execute from the user interface (for example, menus and dialog boxes). You
can also display messages that you execute from the command window, Command navigator, and
command files. In addition, you can set the severity level of the messages displayed, from
informational to fatal messages.
2. You can set the message level displayed for ‘graphics_window’, ‘command_window’ and at the
‘start_up’ as either of the ‘quiet’, ‘brief’ or ‘verbose’. Thus, if the parameter is set to ‘quiet’, no
message will appear, and if the the parameter is set to ‘verbose’ a detail message will appear.
3. On the other hand, you can the the threshold severity or severity to either of the ‘information’,
‘warning’, ‘error’ or ‘fault’. Thus the minimum level for displaying a message will be occurrence
of error if the level is set to ‘error’. Elsewise, you can set a message string by the parameter
‘message’. The limit set to information will display messages about what is occurring during a
command. Setting the message window to display these types of messages helps you understand
what is happening in Adams/View but requires no action from you. Warning message will display
messages that warn you that something unusual occurred but the operation can continue. You may
want to fix or change something to complete the operation without warnings. The error display
messages that indicate that the operation cannot be executed. You need to fix or change something
to complete the operation. The fatal error or fault displays messages that indicate that a
programming error occurred. You should report the message to MSC's Technical Support staff
interface 145
interface object_table copy_object

Allows you to copy an existing object in a object_table
The object_table is used to list one or more types of objects in a modeling environment. For example, a
type of entities like link, center_marker or properties like mass, inertia can be selectively listed and
displayed using this command. The objects listed can be edited, or copied as required.
The objects in a object_table can be copied using this command.
Format:

object_table_name = a exisitng GI_otable
use_row_selected = true_only
row_index = integer
new_object_name = string
Example:
interface object_table copy_object &

object_table_name= .gui.obj.objt &
row_index= 2 &
new_object_name= "new_object"
Description:

object_table _name An Existing Specifies the name of the object_table from
GI_otable which an object is to be copied
use_row_selected True_only Specifies the row of the object to be copied
row_index Integer Specifies the index of the row to be copied
new_object_name String Specifies a new name for the copied object
‘Row index’ specifies the row position of each of the N entries in the VALUES parameter for a SPARSE
MATRIX. Therefore, for each non-zero value in the SPARSE MATRIX each entry for this parameter
defines to the position in the matrix of the corresponding entry in the VALUES parameter. For example,
the third value entered for the ROW_INDEX parameter defines what matrix row the third value entered
for the VALUES parameter is located on.
The object copied can be accessed through the Adams view window, Similarly, the object copied can be
displayed in the object_table by modifying the ‘object_table’ and adding the copied object name to the
parameter ‘displayed entities’ or selecting to ‘display existing all’
interface 147
interface object_table create

Allows you to create of a new object_table.
Format:

object_table_name = A New GI_otable
enabled = Boolean
help_text= String
units= Int_units
horiz_resizing= Int_h_resize
location = Real
height = Real
width = Real
commands = String
cell_select_commands = String
entity_type = Ent
fields_for_columns = String
column_widths = Integer
filter_function = An Existing Expr_func
displayed_entities = An Existing Entity
parent_entity = An Existing Entity
sorting_column_index = Integer
type_of_sort= Sort_type
ground_reference_frame= Boolean
editable= Boolean
Example:
interface object_table create &

object_table_name = .gui.obj.otb &
enabled = yes &
units= relative &
location = 0.0, 0.0 &
height = 0.6 &
width = 0.6 &
cell_select_commands = "int dialog dis dialog=.gui.moag" &
entity_type = link &
fields_for_columns = i_marker,j_marker,depth &
column_widths = 5 &
displayed_entities = LINK_1,LINK_2,BOX_3,BOX_6,LINK_4,LINK_5,BOX_3,LINK_4 &
parent_entity = .model_1 &
sorting_column_index = 1 &
type_of_sort = alphabetic &
ground_reference_frame = no &
editable = yes
Description:

object_table _name A New Specifies the name for a new object_table to be
GI_data_table created
enabled Boolean Activates the object_table
units Int_units Specifies the object_table size as pixel or relative to
Adams window
interface 149

object_table
object_table
location Real Specifies the location of the object_table on the dialog
box
height Real Specifies the height of the object_table in terms of
width Real Specifies the width of the object_table field in terms
of relative units or pixel
cell select commands String Specifies the command to be executed whenever any
cell is selected
entity type Ent Specifies the entity types to be listed in the
object_table
fields_for_columns String Specifies the fields associated with the object to be
entered in the columns
column_widths Integer Specifies the column width for a object_table to be
created
filter_function An Existing Expr Specifies the type of filter to be applied for listing the
Func object types
displayed entities An Existing Entity Specifies the list of entities to be displayed
parent entity An Existing Entity Specifies the parent entity to which the object belongs
sorting column index Integer Specifies the index of the column to be sorted
type of sort Sort_type Specifies the mode of sorting the table contents
ground reference Boolean Specifies the ground reference frame
frame
editable Boolean Specifies whether the table contents can be edited or
not
1. The preliminary parameters of the object_table like size, associated commands and editing
capability are set using this command. The object_table is then prepared by choosing the types of
object, filtering function and the parent type. The object_table with specified name is created on
the dialog box If parameter ‘Enabled’ is set to ON, the data table is be preactivated.
3. The size of the object_table can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively,
the size can also be stated as relative to the Adams window.
4. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the object_table
Vert_resizing will place the object_table on the top left corner of the dialog box. The location can
5. The size of the object_table window can be specified with respect to the Adams window size. The
represents the height of the dialog window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the object_table field
8. The ‘entity_type’ is the type of object to be listed in the table. The object types can be link, box,
joint, spline etc. If the object type is ‘link’ and the ‘parent_type’ is ‘Part_1’, then the links
associated with the Part_1 will be listed.
9. ‘Fields for columns’ are the parameters of a an object type to be selected for listing in the
object_table. For example, the ‘field for columns’ has three parameters namely, 1) mass, 2)
center_marker, and 3) inertia_marker as fields under a model ‘Model_1’ then mass,
center_marker, and inertia_marker for all the parts under ‘Model_1’ will be enlisted in the
object_table.
10. The column width for field of the object_table can be specified in terms of units like mm or inches.
If not specified, it will take the default unit for the width values entered.
11. ‘Filter_function’ is used to limit the scope of the search, if you want, to include all objects beneath
a particular object in the database hierarchy by entering the name of the object. For example, enter
.model_1 to display all objects under your entire model or enter .model_1.PART_3 to display
objects belonGIng only to PART_3.
12. ‘Displayed entities’ can be limited to a few by choosing the entities of interest. Otherwise all the
entities for a particular filed will be listed in the object_table. By default the ‘displayed entities’
are ‘Existing all’.
13. The displayed object can further be limited a parent part by choosing ‘parent type’. For example,
the ‘field for column’ has the STRING ‘joints’ with ‘parent type’ as PART_1, all the joint applied
to the PART_1 will be listed in the object_table.
14. All the data listed in the object_table can be sorted either ‘alphabetically’ or ‘numerically’ as
required by choosing the parameter ‘type_of_sort’. Moreover, the all the data will be sorted in
accordance with cell contents of the column marked by ‘sorting column index’. The cell contents
of the other affected columns will be repositioned according to the sorted cell contents of the
column marked by ‘sorting column’. The ‘ground reference frame’ is marked if the BOOLEAN
option for ‘ground reference frame’ is ‘yes’.
15. object_table can be edited after initializing it if the BOOLEAN option is ‘yes’ for the parameter
‘editable’
interface 151
interface object_table delete

Allows you to delete the existing object_table.
The object can be directly deleted from the modeling environment by using this command.
Format:

object_table_name = A Exisitng GI_otable
Example:
interface object_table delete &

object_table_name = .gui.obj.otb
Description:

object_table _name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing object_table to be deleted
GI_otable
1. The object_table is deleted by specifying the appropriate ‘object_table name’ in the ‘delete’
command
interface object_table display

Allows you to display the existing object_table.
The object_table may not be displayed always, it can be displayed as the need arises by this command.
Format:

Example:
interface object_table display &

object_table_name= .gui.obj.otb
Description:

object_table An Existing Specifies the name of an existing object_table to be
_name GI_otable displayed
1. The object_table is displayed by specifying the appropriate ‘object_table name’ in the ‘display’
command
interface 153
interface object_table execute

Allows you to execute the command associated with the object_table.
The command associated with the object_table can be explicitly run by the execute command.
Format:

Example:
interface object_table execute &

Description:

object_table _name An Existing Specifies the name of the object_table for which the
GI_otable command is to be executed
1. The object_table has ‘command’ as optional parameter. If any command is specified in the field,
it will be executed when the execute command is provided with the appropriate ‘object_table
name’.
Tips:
The ‘cell select command gets executed whenever we switch from one cell to another
interface object_table modify

Allows you to modify the contents of an existing object_table.
The object_table properties can be modified as any table properties in a document like Microsoft Word.
Format:

new_object_table_name = a new GI_otable
enabled = boolean
help_text = string
units = int_units
location = real
height = real
width = real
commands = string
cell_select_commands = string
entity_type = ent
fields_for_columns= string
column_widths= integer
filter_function= an existing expr_func
displayed_entities = an existing entity
parent_entity = an existing entity
sorting_column_index = integer
type_of_sort = sort_type
ground_reference_frame = boolean
editable = boolean
interface 155
Example:
interface object_table modify &

object_table_name = .gui.obj.otb &
new_object_table_name = .gui.obj.objt &
enabled = yes &
units = relative &
location = 0.4, 0.4 &
height = 0.6 &
width = 0.6 &
cell_select_commands = "int dialog dis dialog=.gui.moag" &
entity_type = link &
fields_for_columns = i_marker,j_marker,depth &
column_widths = 5 &
displayed_entities = LINK_1,LINK_2,BOX_3,BOX_6,LINK_4,LINK_5,BOX_3, LINK_4 &
parent_entity = .model_1 &
sorting_column_index = 1 &
type_of_sort = alphabetic &
ground_reference_frame = no &
editable = yes
Description:

object_table _name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing object_table to be
GI_otable modified
new_object_table_n A New GI_otable Specifies a new name for an existing object_table
ame
enabled Boolean Activates the object_table

units Int_units Specifies the object_table size as pixel or relative to
Adams window
object_table
object_table
location Real Specifies the location of the object_table on the dialog
box
height Real Specifies the height of the object_table in terms of
width Real Specifies the width of the object_table field in terms of
cell select commands String Specifies the command to be executed whenever any
cell is selected
entity type Ent Specifies the entity types to be listed in the object_table
fields_for_columns String Specifies the fields associated with the object to be
entered in the columns
column_widths Integer Specifies the column width for a object_table to be
created
filter_function An Existing Expr Specifies the type of filter to be applied for listing the
Func object types
displayed entities An Existing Entity Specifies the list of entities to be displayed
parent entity An Existing Entity Specifies the parent entity to which the object belongs
sorting column index Integer Specifies the index of the column to be sorted
type of sort Sort_type Specifies the mode of sorting the table contents
ground reference Boolean Specifies the ground reference frame
frame
editable Boolean Specifies whether the table contents can be edited or not
interface 157
1. The preliminary parameters of the object_table like size, associated commands and editing
capability are set using this command. The object_table is then prepared by choosing the types of
object, filtering function and the parent type. If the object_table is to be renamed, then fill the
parameter ‘new_object_table_name’ with the new suggested name. The object_table with
specified name is created on the dialog box If parameter ‘Enabled’ is set to ON, the data table is
be preactivated.
3. The size of the object_table can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively,
the size can also be stated as relative to the Adams window.
4. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the object_table
menu on existing dialog box. For example, attach_left, attach_top options for Horiz_resizing and
Vert_resizing will place the object_table on the top left corner of the dialog box. The location can
5. The size of the object_table window can be specified with respect to the Adams window size. The
represents the height of the dialog window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the object_table field
8. The ‘entity_type’ is the type of object to be listed in the table. The object types can be link, box,
joint, spline etc. If the object type is ‘link’ and the ‘parent_type’ is ‘Part_1’, then the links
associated with the Part_1 will be listed.
9. ‘Fields for columns’ are the parameters of a an object type to be selected for listing in the
object_table. For example, the ‘field for columns’ has three parameters namely, 1) mass, 2)
center_marker, and 3) inertia_marker as fields under a model ‘Model_1’ then mass,
center_marker, and inertia_marker for all the parts under ‘Model_1’ will be enlisted in the
object_table.
10. The column width for field of the object_table can be specified in terms of units like mm or inches.
If not specified, it will take the default unit for the width values entered.
11. ‘Filter_function’ is used to limit the scope of the search, if you want, to include all objects beneath
a particular object in the database hierarchy by entering the name of the object. For example, enter
.model_1 to display all objects under your entire model or enter .model_1.PART_3 to display
objects belonGIng only to PART_3.
12. ‘Displayed entities’ can be limited to a few by choosing the entities of interest. Otherwise all the
entities for a particular filed will be listed in the object_table. By default the ‘displayed entities’
are ‘Existing all’.
13. The displayed object can further be limited a parent part by choosing ‘parent type’. For example,
the ‘field for column’ has the STRING ‘joints’ with ‘parent type’ as PART_1, all the joint applied
to the PART_1 will be listed in the object_table.
14. All the data listed in the object_table can be sorted either ‘alphabetically’ or ‘numerically’ as
required by choosing the parameter ‘type_of_sort’. Moreover, the all the data will be sorted in
accordance with cell contents of the column marked by ‘sorting column index’. The cell contents
of the other affected columns will be repositioned according to the sorted cell contents of the
column marked by ‘sorting column’. The ‘ground reference frame’ is marked if the BOOLEAN
option for ‘ground reference frame’ is ‘yes’.
15. object_table can be edited after initializing it if the BOOLEAN option is ‘yes’ for the parameter
‘editable’
interface 159
interface object_table set cell

Allows you to alter the contents of single or multiple cells in a object tableThe object_table is used to list
one or more types of objects in a modeling environment. For example, a type of entities like link,
center_marker or properties like mass, inertia can be selectively listed and displayed using this command.
The objects listed can be edited, or copied as required.
The properties of a single of multiple cells can be edited by using this command.
Format:

use_cell_selected= True_only
row_range= Integer
object_rows = An Existing Entity
use_column_selected= True_only
column_range= Integer
field_name_of_column = String
string = String
action = Col_action
Example:
interface object_table set cell &

object_table_name = .gui.obj.objt &
row_range = 4,5 &
column_range = 1,1 &
strings = stationary &
action = replace
Description:

object_table _name An Existing Specifies the name of the object_table in which the
GI_otable cells are to be altered
use_cell_selected True_only Specifies the cell to be altered directly

row_range Integer Specifies the range of rows to be altered
use_row_selected True_only Specifies the row in which cells are altered
object_rows An Existing Entity Specifies the row to be altered by entering the object
name for the row
use_column_selected True_only Specifies the column in which the cells are altered
column_range Integer Specifies the range of columns in which the cells are
to be altered
field_name_of_colum String Specifies the column in which the cells are altered by
n entering the field name
string String Specifies the new contents of the cell
action Col_action Specifies the mode of insertion of new contents
1. The cells to be altered are initially addressed by the ‘object_table name’. Next, the exact location
of the cells can be specified by various choices like, ‘use_cell_selected’, ‘row_range’,
‘use_row_selected’, ‘object rows’, ‘use_column_selected’, ‘column range’, and ‘field_name_of_
columns’.
2. The single of multiple cells to be altered can be directly selected with the choice
‘use_cell_selected’.
3. All the cells in a column or a row can be directly selected by choosing the ‘use_column_selected’
and ‘use_row_selected’ parameters.
4. Specifying ‘row range’ and ‘column range’ allows to modify the contents of multiple cells. For
example, row range = 1,2 and column range = 3 will alter the cells (1,3) and (2,3).
5. Alternatively, the row or a column can be selected by specifying the name of the ‘object name’ or
the ‘field name for the column’. For example, to rename ‘i_marker’ of the ‘part_3’, the
‘object_rows’ = part_3 and the ‘field_name_for_column’ = i_marker.
6. The parameter ‘string’ specifies the new contents of the respective cells. The mode of insertion of
the new contents depends on the choice ‘append’, ‘prefix’ or ‘replace’ denoted by the parameter
‘action’
interface 161
interface object_table set column

Allows you to alter the contents of single or multiple columns in a object_table
The column properties of the object_table can be edited using this command.
Format:

column_width = Integer
column_range = Integer
field_name_of_column = String
string = String
action = Col_action
Example:
interface object_table set column &

column_width = 5 &
column_range = 1,2 &
strings = new_str &
action = replace
Description:

object_table _name An Existing Specifies the name of the object_table in which the
column_width Integer Specifies a new width for the columns
use_column_selected True_only Specifies the columns in which cells are altered
column_range Integer Specifies the range of columns in which the cells
are to be altered

field_name_of_column String Specifies the column in which the cells are altered
by entering the field name
string String Specifies the new contents of the cell
action Col_action Specifies the mode of insertion of new contents
1. The cells to be altered are initially addressed by the ‘object_table name’. Next, the columns to be
altered are marked by various choices like, ‘use_column_selected’, ‘column_range, and
‘field_name_of_ columns’.
2. The width of the columns can be changed by entering a new value of ‘column_width’. The column
width can be specified in units like mm or inches. If not specified, the unit for the parameter field
will be the default length unit.
3. All the cells in a column are selected with the choice ‘use_column_selected’
4. Specifying ‘column range’ allows to modify the contents of multiple cells. For example, column
range = 1,2 will change all the cells in column 1,2.
Alternatively, a column can be selected by specifying the ‘field name for the column’. For
example, to rename cells in column ‘i_marker’ (which is field_name_of_column) the
‘field_name_for_column’ = i_marker.
The parameter ‘string’ specifies the new contents of the respective cells. The mode of insertion of
the new contents depends on the choices like ‘append’, ‘prefix’ or ‘replace’ denoted by the
parameter ‘action’
interface 163
interface object_table set row

Allows you to alter the contents of single or multiple rows in a object_table
The row properties of a object_table can be edited using this command.
Format:

use_row_selected= True_only
row_range= Integer
object_rows= An Existing Entity
new_row_entity = An Existing Entity
row_action = Row_action
strings = String
Example:
interface object_table set row &

row_range = .model_1.PART_3.LINK_2 &
new_row_entity = .model_1.PART_2.LINK_1 &
row_action = replace
Description:

object_table _name An Existing Specifies the name of the object_table in which the cells
GI_otable are to be altered
Use_row_selected True_only Specifies a row to be altered
row_range Integer Specifies the range of multiple rows to be altered
object_rows An Existing Entity Specifies the object name listed in the row
new_row_entity An Existing Entity Specifies the new object which will be added to the table

row_action Row_action Specifies the mode of insertion of new row
Strings String Specifies the new contents of the cells in a modified row
1. The cells to be altered are initially addressed by the ‘object_table name’. Next, the rows to be
altered are marked by various choices like, ‘use_row_selected’, ‘row_range’, and ‘object_rows’.
2. Specifying ‘row range’ allows to modify the contents of multiple cells in a row. For example, row
range = 1,2 will change all the cells in rows 1,2
3. Alternatively, the row can be marked by the name of the ‘object’ contained within the row.
4. The row can be altered in two ways, namely, 1) ‘string action’ and 2) ‘object_action’.
5. The choice ‘string action’ will replace all the contents in that row with the new contents specified.
On the other hand if the ‘object action’ is specified, then keeping the ‘field for columns’ same all
the contents of the row for old entity will be replaced with values of ‘field for column’ for the new
entity mentioned.
For example, in the example above, the entity listed in the row is ‘i_marker’ for entity
‘PART_3.LINK_2’ under ‘model_1’. With the execution of the command, the field for the
columns will be replaced by the similar values for the ‘PART_2.LINK_1’ under ‘model_1’.
6. The mode of insertion of the new row contents depends on the choices like ‘before’, ‘after’,
‘delete’ or ‘replace’ denoted by the parameter ‘row_action’
interface 165
interface object_table set selected

Allows you to alter the contents of single or multiple selected cells in a object_table
The selected cell properties are edited by using this command.
Format:

strings = string
action = col_action
Example:
interface object_table set selected &

strings = new_str &
action = replace
Description:

object_table _name An Existing Specifies the name of the object_table in which the selected
strings String Specifies the new contents of the cells in selected cells
action Col_action Specifies the mode of insertion of new cell contents
1. The cells to be altered are initially addressed by the ‘object_table name’. Next, the cells to be
altered are marked by selecting the required cells.
2. The parameter ‘strings’ will replace all the contents in the selected cells with the new contents
specified.
3. The mode of insertion of the new row contents depends on the choices like ‘append’, ‘prefix’, or
‘replace’ denoted by the parameter ‘action’.
interface object_table undisplay

Allows you to close the displayed object_table.
The object_table can be closed whenever required by using this command.
Format:

Example:
interface object_table undisplay &

Description:

object_table _name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing object_table to be
GI_otable closed
1. The object_table is closed by specifying the appropriate ‘object_table name’ in the ‘undisplay’
command
interface 167
interface object_table write

Allows you to write the contents of a object_table field to a file.
The contents of a object_table can be directly written to a excel or tab delimited text file directly by using
this command.
Format:

file_name = String
Example:
interface object_table write &

file_name = c:/objt_1.xls
Description:

object_table _name An Existing GI_otable Specifies the name of the object_table contents of
which are to be written to a file
1. ‘File_name’ specifies the name of the file that is to be read, written, or executed. The proper
extension is the default but can be overridden by simply supplying a different extension. You do
not need to enclose the file name in quotes if it only contains alpha-numeric characters and starts
with a letter. If you want to include other characters, such as a '.' for an extension or '/' or '[]' for
directory paths, you must enclose the name in quotes.
interface option_menu create

Allows you to create a new information window.
Format:

option_menu_name = a new GI_opt_menu
enabled = boolean
help_text = string
units = int_units
location = real
height = real
width = real
choices = string
values = string
commands = string
current_choice = string
Example:

option_menu_name = test &
enabled = yes &
help_text = help &
documentation_text = doc &
units = relative &
location = 0,0 &
height = 1 &
width = 1 &
choices = one, two, three &
values = "10,20,30" &
commands = "model display fit_to_view = no view_name =
all","interface dialog &
undisplay dialog=.gui.moag","interface dialog display
dialog=.gui.moag" &
current_choice = two
interface 169
Description:

option_menu_name A New Specifies the name of a new information window
GI_opt_menu
enabled Boolean Activates the information window
units Int_units Specifies the information window size in pixels or
units relative to Adams window
horiz_resizing Int_H_Resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for menu
vert_resizing Int_V_Resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for menu
location Real Specifies the location of the menu
units or pixels
width Real Specifies the width of the menu in terms of relative
units or pixels
choices String Specifies the names of the choices
values String Specifies values of each of the choices
commands String Specifies the command name to be executed
associated with the choice
current_choice String Specifies the current command from the choices
1. A new option menu is created if the menu with the specified name does not exist. This menu has
multiple choices offered as various options or commands are to be executed. Each option or
choice has an associated command.
2. If parameter ‘Enabled’ is set to ON, the menu will be preactivated.
3. The pop-up help and documentation help can be specified in appropriate dialog boxes.
4. The size of the info window can be specified in terms of the number of pixels. Alternatively, the
5. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the option menu
on the existing dialog box. For example, attach_left; attach_top options for Horiz_resizing and
6. The size of the option menu window can be specified with respect to the Adams window size. The
window to be half as high as the Adams/View window.
7. Multiple choices can be specified for a number of commands to be executed. The choice can be
offered as any string variable. Similarly, the choices can also be specified as values by specifying
the parameter, ‘value’9. The number of commands equal to the choices offered are entered within
quotation marks, separated by commas.
8. While executing the option menu, the default command to be executed is selected from the
parameter, ‘current choice’.
Tips:
If the values of the choices in item 12 above are numeric, it should be quoted as a string. Similarly, the
complete commands should be entered with quotations. Multiple commands are separated by commas.
interface 171
interface option_menu delete

Allows you to delete an existing option menu.
Format:

option_menu_name = an existing GI_opt_menu
Example:
interface option_menu delete &

option_menu_name = test
Description:

option_menu_name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing menu to be deleted
GI_opt_menu
An option menu with the specified name is deleted.
interface option_menu display
interface option_menu display

Allows you to close an existing information window displayed.
Format:
interface option_menu undisplay

Example:
interface option_menu undisplay &

option_menu_name = info
Description:

option_menu_name An Existing Specifies the name of an information window
GI_OPT_Menu displayed to be closed
An existing information window displayed, with the specified name, is closed.
interface 173
interface option_menu execute

Allows you to execute the command from the option menu.
Format:

Example:
interface option_menu execute &

option_menu_name = test
Description:

option_menu_name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing menu which is to be
GI_opt_menu executed
As the information window of the option menu has multiple choices, the default choice GIven as the
current choice determines the associated command to be executed. The command with parameter,
‘current choice’, is executed.
interface option_menu modify

Allows you to modify an existing option menu.
Format:

option_menu_name = an existing
GI_opt_menu
new_option_menu_name = a new GI_opt_menu
enabled = boolean
help_text = string
Iunits = int_units
location = real
height = real
width = real
choices = string
values = string
commands = string
current_choice = string
Example:

option_menu_name = test &
new_option_menu_name = new_test&
enabled = yes &
help_text = help for info window&
documentation_text = doc for the command&
units = relative &
location = 0,0 &
height = 1 &
width = 1 &
choices = one, two, three &
values = "10,20,30" &
commands = "model display fit_to_view = no view_name = all","interface dialog
&
undisplay dialog=.gui.moag","interface dialog display dialog=.gui.moag" &
current_choice = two
interface 175
Description:

option_menu_name A New Specifies the name of an existing information
GI_opt_menu window
new_option_menu_name A New Specifies a new name for the existing information
GI_opt_menu window
enabled Boolean Activates the information window
units Int_units Specifies the info window size in pixels or units
horiz_resizing Int_h_resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for menu
vert_resizing Int_v_resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for menu
location Real Specifies the location of the menu
units or pixels
width Real Specifies the width of the menu in terms of relative
units or pixels
choices String Specifies the names of the choices
values String Specifies value of each of the choices
commands String Specifies the command name to be executed
current_choice String Specifies the current command from the choices
1. The name of the existing menu can be changed by specifying the parameter
new_option_menu_name. This menu has multiple choices offered as various option or commands
are to be executed. Each option or choice has an associated command.
2. If the parameter, ‘Enabled’, is set to ON, the menu will be preactivated.
in the existing dialog box. For example, attach_left; attach_top options for Horiz_resizing and
Vert_resizing will place the option menu in the top left corner of the dialog box. The location can
also be specified from the top left corner by adjusting the parameter, ‘location’.
window to be half as high as the Adams/View window.
7. Multiple choices can be specified for a number of commands to be executed. The choice can be
offered as any string variable. Similarly, the choices can also be specified as values by specifying
the parameter, ‘value’.
8. The number of commands equal to the choices offered are entered within quotation marks,
separated by commas.
9. While executing the option menu, the default command to be executed is selected from the
parameter, ‘current choice’.
Tips:
1. If the values of the choices, in item 12 above, are numeric, then it should be quoted as a string.
interface 177
interface option_menu set

Allows you to enable the commands from an existing information window.
Format:

choice = string
value = string
execute = boolean
Example:
interface option_menu set &

option_menu_name = info &
choice = one &
execute = yes
Description:

option_menu_name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing info window
GI_opt_menu
choice String Specifies any of the multiple choices for an existing
option_menu
value String Specifies any of the multiple values for an existing
option_menu
execute Boolean Specifies the BOOLEAN value for enabling and disabling a
choice
The parameter, ‘choice’, lists the options available for an option menu. Alternatively, same choices can
be represented by the parameter, ‘value’. By choosing any of the ‘choice’ or ‘value’ options, the default
command to be run is selected. The execution will run the specified command.
Tips:
The parameters, “choice” and “value”, are mutually exclusive.

Allows you to close an existing information window displayed.
Format:

Example:
interface option_menu undisplay &

option_menu_name = info
Description:

option_menu_name An Existing Specifies the name of an information window displayed to
GI_OPT_Menu be closed
An existing information window displayed, with the specified name, is closed.
interface 179
interface page create

Allows you to create a new page.
The page can be created without opening the Adams postprocessor. The page is used to display plots to
show the results, or to display the model in animation mode. The page properties and layout can be set
by using this command.
Format:

page_name= a new page
layout_type = layout_type
expanded = boolean
header_left_text = string
header_center_text = string
header_right_text = string
footer_left_text= string
footer_center_text= string
footer_right_text= string
header_left_image_file= string
header_center_image_file= string
header_right_image_file= string
footer_left_image_file= string
footer_center_image_file= string
footer_right_image_file= string
display = boolean
color= an existing
color
set_contents= boolean
page_type = plot_page
Example:
interface page create &

page_name = page_5 &
layout_type = page2x1 &
expanded = yes &
header_left_text = header_left &
header_center_text = header_center &
header_right_text = header_right &
footer_left_text = footer_left &
footer_center_text = footer_center &
footer_right_text = footer_right &
header_left_image_file = "C:/lefthead.bmp" &
header_center_image_file = "C:/centerhead.bmp" &
header_right_image_file = "C:/righthead.bmp" &
footer_left_image_file= "C:/leftfoot.bmp" &
footer_center_image_file= "C:/centerfoot.bmp" &
footer_right_image_file = "C:/rightfoot.bmp" &
display= yes &
color= .colors.RED &
set_contents = yes &
Description:

page_name A New Page Specifies the name of a new page
layout_type Layout_type Specifies the layout of the plot page
expanded Boolean Specifies the page display parameters
header_left_text String Specifies the header text to be displayed
header_center_text String Specifies the header text to be displayed
header_right_text String Specifies the header text to be displayed
footer_left_text String Specifies the footer text to be displayed
footer_center_text String Specifies the footer text to be displayed
footer_right_text String Specifies the footer text to be displayed
interface 181

header_left_image_file String Specifies the image to be displayed at the header
space
header_left_image_file String Specifies the image to be displayed at the header
space
header_center_image_file String Specifies the image to be displayed at the header
space
header_right_image_file String Specifies the image to be displayed at the header
space
footer_left_image_file String Specifies the image to be displayed at the footer
space
footer_center_image_file String Specifies the image to be displayed at the footer
space
footer_right_image_file String Specifies the image to be displayed at the footer
space
display Boolean Specifies the page display parameter
color An Existng Color Specifies the color of the plot page
set_contents Boolean Specifies the contents of the plot page
page_type Plot_page Specifies the page type
1. The ‘page’ is a plot window where either a result plot or a model can be displayed. The properties
of the page can be initially set by this command. A blank plot or model page with specified
properties will be displayed with this command.
2. The layout type allows one to display multiple plot windows on the same page where more than
one results can be displayed simultaneously. For example, PAGE 2X1 will display two horizontal
plots, one above the other. On the other hand PAGE 1X2 will display the two plots side by side
on the same page.
3. Any one of the plots on a page can be expanded fully as the need arises by parameter ‘expanded’.
If the ‘expanded’ is set to ‘yes’ one of the multiple plots will occupy full page.
4. The header and footer text can be displayed at left, center or right to add information to the plot
by selecting appropriate ‘header_text’ or ‘footer_text’. Alternatively, an image may be displayed
at left, center or right location of the header or footer to make the plot page self-explanatory. If
both the image and text is specified the image may hide the header of footer text specified.
Address of any remote image file with proper extension should be entered in the parameters
‘header_image_file’ and ‘footer_image_file’ for left, right or center location.
5. The plot will be displayed in the page in the post-processor if the parameter ‘display’ is set to
‘yes’.
6. The background ‘color’ of the page can be chosen from the ‘EXISTING COLORS’.
7. The ‘set_contents’ places empty plots in the views if in plotting mode or empty ‘model_space’ in
animation mode.
8. The ‘page type’ is by default ‘plot_page’.
interface 183
interface page delete

Allows deletion an existing page or plot.
This command allows the deletion of a panel or its fields, buttons, or text.
Format:

delete_plots = boolean
delete_contents = boolean
display_next = boolean
delete_ptemplates = boolean
Example:
interface page delete &

delete_plots = yes &
delete_ptemplates = yes &
display_next = yes
Description:

page_name An Existing Page Specifies the name of an existing page
delete_plots Boolean Allows deleting a plot
delete_contents Boolean Allows deleting the contents of a plot
display_next Boolean Allows displaying next plot
delete_ptemplates Boolean Allows deleting ptemplates
2. The plot can be deleted or the contents of a plots can be deleted keeping the page setting same by
choosing ‘delete_plots’ and ‘delete_contents’ respectively.
3. Once the plot is deleted from the page_window, the next plot will occupy the space if the
‘display_next’ option is set to ‘yes’.
4. The templates are deleted by choosing the parameter ‘delete_ptemplates’
interface 185
interface page display

Allows displaying an existing page
Format:

page_name= an existing page
Example:
interface page display &

page_name = page_5
Description:

1. The ‘page’ can be displayed or undisplayed from the plot window in the postprocessor as and
when required by choosing the appropriate ‘page_name’ while ‘display’ command.
interface page load_view

Allows loading of page_contents on an existing page or plot
Format:

view_index = integer
model = an existing model
plot = an existing plot
ptemplate = an existing ptemplate
Example:
interface page load_view &

page_name= page_2 &
view_index = 1 &
model = model_1
Description:

view index Integer Specifies the plot index
model An Existing Model Specifies the model name
plot An Existing Plot Specifies the name of the plot to be displayed
ptemplates An Existing Ptemplate Specifies the name of an existing page template
interface 187
2. The index of the page can be set by entering ‘view_index‘. The parameter ‘model’ state the
existing ‘model_name’, where a model allows you to create and manage models. A model
contains a complete description of a mechanism, including parts, markers, joints, forces and
geometry. In order to build a mechanism in Adams/View, you must first create a model object in
the Adams/View database. You then add parts and other objects to the model. As you are
developing your model, you may display it, verify it, and change its attributes. Once you have
created a model, you add parts to it with the 'PART CREATE RIGID_BODY
NAME_AND_POSITION' command. After you have created your first part or two, you can
continue creating parts, or you may wish to start putting markers on the parts so you can add
geometry, constraints, and forces. You use the 'MARKER CREATE' command to add markers
to a part. Adding markers may help you position other parts, and creating geometry with markers
will help you visualize your model as you are constructing it. When your model is complete, you
use the OUTPUT_CONTROL' command to request Adams output, write an Adams data set, and
then analyze it with Adams. If your analysis is fairly simple, you may use the 'SUBMIT'
command to write the dataset and invoke Adams.
3. The ‘plot’ refers to an existing plot showing results or output. The page templates can also be
loaded in to the ‘page’
Tips:
1. The model, plot and ptemplates are mutually exclusive to each other.
interface page modify

Allows modifying an existing page.
Format:

page_name= an existing page
layout_type = layout_type
expanded = boolean
header_left_text = string
header_center_text = string
header_right_text = string
footer_left_text= string
footer_center_text= string
footer_right_text= string
header_center_image_file= string
header_right_image_file= string
footer_left_image_file= string
footer_center_image_file= string
footer_right_image_file= string
display = boolean
set_contents = boolean
Example:
interface page modify &

layout_type = page2x1 &
interface 189
interface page modify &

expanded = yes &
header_left_text = header_left &
header_center_text = header_center &
header_right_text = header_right &
footer_left_text = footer_left &
footer_center_text = footer_center &
footer_right_text = footer_right &
header_left_image_file = "C:/lefthead.bmp" &
header_center_image_file = "C:/centerhead.bmp" &
header_right_image_file = "C:/righthead.bmp" &
footer_left_image_file = "C:/leftfoot.bmp" &
footer_center_image_file = "C:/centerfoot.bmp" &
footer_right_image_file = "C:/rightfoot.bmp" &
display = yes &
color = .colors.BLUE &
set_contents = no &
Description:

layout_type Layout_type Specifies the layout of the plot page
expanded Boolean Specifies the page display parameters
header_left_text String Specifies the header text to be displayed
header_center_text String Specifies the header text to be displayed
header_right_text String Specifies the header text to be displayed
footer_left_text String Specifies the footer text to be displayed
footer_center_text String Specifies the footer text to be displayed
footer_right_text String Specifies the footer text to be displayed
header_left_image_file String Specifies the image to be displayed at the
header space
header_left_image_file String Specifies the image to be displayed at the
header space

header_center_image_file String Specifies the image to be displayed at the
header space
header_right_image_file String Specifies the image to be displayed at the
header space
footer_left_image_file String Specifies the image to be displayed at the footer
space
footer_center_image_file String Specifies the image to be displayed at the footer
space
footer_right_image_file String Specifies the image to be displayed at the footer
space
display Boolean Specifies the page display parameter
color An Existng Color Specifies the color of the plot page
set_contents Boolean Specifies the contents of the plot page
page_type Plot_page Specifies the page type
2. The layout type allows one to display multiple plot windows on the same page where more than
one results can be displayed simultaneously. For example, PAGE 2X1 will display two horizontal
plots, one above the other. On the other hand PAGE 1X2 will display the two plots side by side
on the same page.
3. Any one of the plots on a page can be expanded fully as the need arises by parameter ‘expanded’.
If the ‘expanded’ is set to ‘yes’ one of the multiple plots will occupy full page.
4. The header and footer text can be displayed at left, center or right to add information to the plot
by selecting appropriate ‘header_text’ or ‘footer_text’. Alternatively, an image may be displayed
at left, center or right location of the header or footer to make the plot page self-explanatory. If
both the image and text is specified the image may hide the header of footer text specified.
Address of any remote image file with proper extension should be entered in the parameters
‘header_image_file’ and ‘footer_image_file’ for left, right or center location.
5. The plot will be displayed in the page in the post-processor if the parameter ‘display’ is set to
‘yes’.
6. The background ‘color’ of the page can be chosen from the ‘EXISTING COLORS’.
7. The ‘set_contents’ places empty plots in the views if in plotting mode or empty ‘model_space’ in
animation mode.
8. The ‘page type’ is by default ‘plot_page’.
interface 191
interface page undisplay

Allows closing an existing page
Format:

page_name = An Existing Page
Example:
interface page undisplay &

page_name = page_5
Description:

Page_name An Existing Page Specifies The Name Of An Existing Page
1. The ‘page’ can be displayed or undisplayed from the plot window in the postprocessor as and
when required by choosing the appropriate ‘page_name’ while ‘display’ command.
interface plot panel mode_set

Allows the setting the mode of display in plot panel in the plot window
The plot window can display plots, model, animation as well as reports. The plot panel is displayed below
the plot window enables to select the mode of display in the plot window.
The mode of the display can be any of the following: object, request, measure, result, eigen, default, dac,
rpc, etc.
Format:

mode = plot_panel_modes
Example:
interface plot panel mode_set &

mode = object
Description:

mode Plot_panel_modes Specify the mode of display of plot panel parameters
1. The plot panel lists the available items under a parameter like object, request, measure, result,
eigen, default, dac, rpc, etc. For example, if the mode is set to ‘object’, then the panel will display
all the objects under the model with default filters applied. One can choose any object and its
characteristics to be measured from this panel. For example, a simple pendulum modeled in
Adams/View may have objects as link with filter ‘body’. The link has characteristics like
CM_position, CM_velocity etc. for which the x,y, or z components can be displayed in the plot.
Otherwise if the mode is set to measure, then the panel will display all the measure created under
the model and any characteristic components of the same can be chiosen to be displayed.
interface 193
interface plot panel reload

Allows the reloading the information from the model to the plot panel.
The plot window can display plots, model, animation as well as reports. The plot panel is displayed below
the plot window enables to select the mode of display in the plot window.
The mode of the display can be any of the following: object, request, measure, result, eigen, default, dac,
rpc, etc.
Whenever, the model is edited the it may have few elements added of deleted. This command updates
the information in the plot panel.
Format:
Example:
1. The plot panel lists the available items under a parameter like object, request, measure, result,
eigen, default, dac, rpc, etc. For example, if the mode is set to ‘object’, then the panel will display
all the objects under the model with default filters applied. One can choose any object and its
characteristics to be measured from this panel. For example, a simple pendulum modeled in
Adams/View may have objects as link with filter ‘body’. The link has characteristics like
CM_position, CM_velocity etc. for which the x,y, or z components can be displayed in the plot.
2. Whenever, the model is edited, the new information of the model can be reloaded into the plot
panel by this command. For example, a new measure created in the model will get displayed in
the plot panel it is ‘reloaded’.
Tips:
The command needs no parameter.
interface plot window set mode

Allows the setting the mode of display in the plot window
The plot window is created in the Adams postprocessor. The plot page can be opened to display plots
showing the results, or to display the model in animation mode.
Any of the modes needs to be set to show particular attribute. This command is used to set the plot
window to any of the modes like plotting , animation, reports or 3dplots
Format:

mode = plot_win_mode
Example:
interface plot window set mode &

mode = plot3d
Description:

mode Plot_win_mode Specifies the mode of display in the plot window
1. The plot window can show 2D, 3D plots, animation of the model or reports. The display mode for
a particular window needs to be set to either of these to show the respective windows. Thus, one
can select the ‘animation’ mode and overlay the model to see the animation or plot any result by
choosing ‘plots’
interface 195
interface plot window update_toolbar

Allows to update the page specific icons and fields on toolbar
Format:
Interface plot window update_toolbar
Example:
1. Update page specific icons and fields on toolbar and status window, specifically the page number
fields in the status bar and the page layout icon on the toolbar
Tips:
No parameter needed to be specified.
interface plot window close

Allows closing the plot window of the postprocessor
Format:
Interface plot window close
Example:
The plot page in the Adams postprocessor can be opened and closed by running the command ‘interface
plot window open’ and ‘’interface plot window close’. It needs no parameter and the default page in the
plot window is opened or the window is closed.
interface 197
interface plot window create_new_page
interface plot window create_new_page

Allows the creating a new page in the plot window
A new page can be created by using this command which may have a default layout or predefined
template.
Format:
interface plot window create new page

default_layout = boolean
display = boolean
Example:
interface plot window create_new_page &

default_layout = yes &
display = yes
Description:

default_layout Boolean Specify a default layout for the plot
display Boolean Specifies the whether the new page should occupy the plot window
1. A new page will be added to the plot window by this command. By default it will have a default
layout with no header or footer.
2. The ‘display’ option set to ‘yes’ will overlay the new page on the existing plot. Otherwise, a new
page will be created but the plot window will have the current page already displayed.
interface plot window delete_page

Allows the deletion of an existing page in the plot window
An existing page in the plot window is deleted by using this command.
Format:

delete_ptemplates = boolean
delete_plots = boolean
Example:
Description:

page_name An Existing Page Specify the name of the page to be deleted
delete_ptemplates Boolean Allows page template to be deleted
delete plots Boolean Allows the displayed plot to be deleted
The page can be deleted by choosing the page_name. Similarly, the ‘page template delete’ will also
deleted the page having the specified template.
The ‘delete plots’ will delete the plot in the plot window and the page name is GIven to successive page.
interface 199
interface plot window load_view

Allows the selective plotting or loading of new contents in the plot window.
The selective plotting from multiple plots can be done by choosing the plot name, animation name,
analysis name, eigen solution name or report name
Format:
interface plot window load view

view = An Exisitng View
model_name = An Existing Model
plot name = An Existing Plot
animation name = An Existing Animaton
analysis name = An Existing Analysis
eigen solution name = An Existing Eigen Solution
report name = An Existing Report
Example:
interface plot window load_view &

view_name = .gui.ppt_main.sash1.sash2.gfx.page_2.view_1 &
plot_name = .plot_3
Description:

view Plot_page_modes Specifies the name of the view
model name An Existing Model Specifies the name of the model to be displayed
plot name An Existing Plot Specifies the name of the plot to be displayed
animation name An Existing Animation Specifies the name of the animation page to be
displayed
analysis name An Existing Analysis Specifies the name of the analysis to be displayed
eigen solution name An Existing Eigen Specifies an existing eigen solution
Solution
report name An Existing Report Specifies an existing report to be displayed
1. The selective output from multiple pages and plots in the postprocessor can be displayed in the
plot window by choosing any of the parameter namely; model_name, plot_name,
animation_name, analysis_name, eigen_solution_name, or report_name.
2. The Adams/View program provides a set of operations for viewing the Adams model. Some of
the operations are activate, center, erase, fill screen, translate, rotate, zoom, management, etc.
Adams/View also provides support and controls for multiple windows. Views can be created,
modified, deleted, saved, restored, etc. using the view management command. A maximum of
eight windows can exist at any GIven time. Adams/View prevents the last window from being
deleted.
There is always one view window which is considered the active window. The color of the view
name text and existence of the view name outlining box indicate the active view. The other view
windows have a different view name text color, as well as not having an outlining box around the
view name. The active window is selected by the user using the "view activate" command. It is
important to recognize that a view is made up of three separate parts:
• the contents (the analysis, plot, etc.),
• the viewport itself (has size and location), and
• the viewport attributes (the model LOCATION and ORIENTATION in the
• viewport, the RENDER, PROJECTION, TRIAD_VISIBILITY, and
• NAME_VISIBILITY parameters, etc.)
This is important because different commands are used to manipulate the three part. Some
overlap in control exists but still the distinction exists. The contents of a viewport are controlled
by the GRAPHICS_RESULTS, XY_PLOT, VIEW (other than the "view management"
commands), etc. The viewport size and location is controlled by the "view management"
commands, create and modify in particular. Finally the viewport attributes are controlled by the
"view management" commands, create and modify, as well as, save and restore. The ‘action’
helps to choose the page directly by the choice like first, last, previous and next without specifying
the names or indices.
3. The ‘model name’ specifies an existing model. You may identify a model by typing its name or
by picking it from the screen. If the model is not visible on the screen, you must type the name.
You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the model is displayed. You must
separate multiple model names by commas. If the model is visible in one of your views, you may
identify it by picking on any of the graphics associated with it. You need not separate multiple
model picks by commas.
4. The plot name is a string of characters that identifies a plot. Plot names are assigned when plots
are created. After a plot has been created, it may be referenced by its name until it is deleted. A
plot may NOT have the same name as another plot. A plot_name may be arbitrarily long and a
combination of letters of the alphabet and numbers may be used. The leading character must be
a letter.
interface 201
5. The analysis_name specifies an existing analysis. You may identify a analysis by typing its name
or by picking it from the screen. An analysis may be picked from the screen if you have read an
Adams Graphics file, and use the GRAPHIC_RESULTS command to display it. If the analysis is
not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it convenient to type the
name even if the analysis is displayed. You may have explicitly named the analysis when you
created it by reading one or more Adams output files. By default, the name of the analysis is the
root name of the Adams output files. If you created the analysis by reading an Adams Graphics
file, for instance, the analysis name is the name of the graphics file without the '.gra' extension.
name be entered. You must separate multiple analysis names by commas. If the analysis is visible
in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics associated with it. You
need not separate multiple analysis picks by commas.
interface plot window open

Allows opening the plot window in the postprocessor
Format:
Interface plot window open
Example:
The plot page in the Adams postprocessor can be opened and closed by running the command ‘interface
plot window open’ and ‘’interface plot window close’. It needs no parameter and the default page in the
plot window is opened or the window is closed..
interface 203
interface plot window page_display
interface plot window page_display

Allows the selective plotting in the plot window
The selective plotting from multiple plots can be done by choosing the plot number,or page_name, else
the successive plots can be displayed.
Format:
interface plot window page display

action = plot_page_modes
number = integer
Example:
interface plot window page_display &

action = next
Description:

action Plot_page_modes Specifies the next, previous, first or last page to be displayed
page_name An Existing Page Specifies the name of the page to be displayed
number Integer Specifies the page number of the page to be displayed
The selective output from multiple pages and plots in the postprocessor can be displayed in the plot
window by choosing any of the parameter namely 1) action, 2) page_name and 3) number.
The ‘action’ helps to choose the page directly by the choice like first, last, previous and next without
specifying the names or indices.
The ‘page_name’ parameter will display the mentioned page in the plot window, alternatively the page
can be accessed by stating its index, i.e., the number of the page.
Tips:
1. The action, page_name and number are mutually exclusive to each other. Specifying any of the
same will perform the action.
interface push_button create

Allows creation of a push button.
Format:

push_button_name = a new GI_push_btn
enabled = boolean
help_text = string
units = int_units
location = real
height = real
width = real
label = string
icon_file= string
commands = string
dbl_commands = string
default = true_false
Example:
push_button_name = DISP_WIN
enabled = yes &
help_text = "help_text" &
documentation_text = "doc_text" &
units = relative &
location = 0.0, 0.0 &
height = 0.3 &
width = 0.3 &
label = "label_button" &
icon_file = "c:/images.jpg" &
commands = "interface dialog display dialog=.gui.info_window" &
dbl_commands = "interface dialog display dialog=.gui.about_adams" &
default = true
interface 205
Description:

push_button_name A New Specifies the name of a new push button
GI_Push_BTN
enabled Boolean Activates the push button
units INT_Units Specifies the push button size as pixel or relative to
Adams window
horiz_resizing INT_H_Resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for push
button
vert_resizing INT_V_Resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for push
button
location Real Specifies the location of the push button
height Real Specifies the height of the push button in terms of
width Real Specifies the width of the push button in terms of
label String Specifies label for the push button
icon_file String Specifies the name and location of the image for
icon
commands String Specifies the command to be executed with single
click
dbl_commands String Specifies the command name to be executed with
double click
default True_False Set the current status for parameter ‘dbl_command’
1. The push button has a command associated with it which is is created if the push button with
specified name. The parameter ‘Enable’ activates the push button depending on the Boolean value
which is either yes or no
2. If parameter ‘Enabled’ is set to ON, the menu will be preactivated.
4. The size of the info window can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively,
the size can also be stated as relative to the Adams window
7. The label which should appear on the button is specified by the parameter ‘label’.
8. Specify the name of the file that contains the icon definition for use on an iconic menu. If an icon
file is selected for the push button, the image will appear on the button instead of the string ‘label’.
Its placement depends on where the axis is placed. The label can be of unlimited length, but may
not all fit on the plot if it's very long. If the string contains spaces, it must be enclosed in quotation
marks.
9. The parameter ‘command’ specifies the command to be executed by clicking the push button.
You can also specify a different command for double clicking of the push button. Thus, the push
button can execute two different commands depending upon the single or double click.
Tips:
If the iconic image is selected for display, the display label may not appear
interface 207
interface push_button delete

Allows deletion of a push button
Format:

push_button_name = a existing GI_push_btn
Example:
interface push_button delete &

push_button_name = operate

push_button_name An Existing GI_Push_BTN Specifies the name of an existing push button
The name of the push button is specified to delete an existing push button
interface push_button display

Allows you to display the push button.
Format:

push_button_name = an existing GI_push_btn
Example:
interface push_button display &

push_button_name = _2
Description:

push_button_name An Existing GI_Push_BTN Specifies the name of an existing push button
The push button is displayed with iconic image, if specified, or the button carries the command name.
interface 209
interface push_button execute

Allows you determine the mode of the push button operation.
Format:

action = push_btn_action
Example:
interface push_button execute &

push_button_name = _2 &
action = single_click
Description:

push_button_name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing push button
GI_push_btn
action Push_btn_action Determines the mode of the push button operation
The push button can execute the associated commands with a single or double-click, depending on the
choice specified by this command. A single click will carry the execution of ‘command’, while, a double-
click will carry the execution of ‘dbl command’.
interface push_button modify

Allows you to modify an existing push button.
Format:

new_push_button_name = a new GI_push_btn
enabled = boolean
help_text = string
units = int_units
horiz_resizing = int_H_resize
vert_resizing = int_V_resize
location = real
height = real
width = real
label = string
icon_file= string
commands = string
dbl_commands = string
default = true_false
Example:
push_button_name = operate &
new_push_button_name = operate_new&
enabled = yes &
help_text = text_help &
documentation_text=doc_help &
units = relative &
horiz_resizing = expand &
vert_resizing = expand &
location = 0,0 &
height = 0.5 &
width = 0.5 &
label = button_label &
icon_file="C:\ images.jpg" &
dbl_commands = "interface dialog display dialog=.gui.about_adams" &
default = true
interface 211
Description:

push_button_name A New Specifies the name of an existing push button
GI_push_btn
new_push_button_name A New Specifies a new name for an existing push button
GI_push_btn
enabled Boolean Activates the push button
units Int_units Specifies the push button size in pixels or units
horiz_resizing Int_H_Resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for push
button
vert_resizing Int_V_Resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for push
button
location Real Specifies the location of the push button
height Real Specifies the height of the push button in terms of
relative units or pixels
width Real Specifies the width of the push button in terms of
label String Specifies label of the push button
icon_file String Specifies the name and location of the image for
icon
commands String Specifies the command to be executed with a single
click
dbl_commands String Specifies the command name to be executed with a
double-click
default True_False Set the current status for parameter ‘dbl_command’
1. The push button has a command associated with it, which is created if the push button with
specified name. The parameter ‘Enable’ activates the push button depending on the Boolean
value, which is either yes or no. The name of the existing push button can be changed by
specifying the ‘new_push_button_name’
2. If the parameter ‘Enabled’ is set to ON, the menu will be preactivated.
also be specified from the top left corner by adjusting the parameter, ‘location’
represents the height of the Adams/View window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the
information window to be half as high as the Adams/View window.
7. The label which should appear on the button is specified by the parameter, ‘label’.
Specify the name of the file that contains the icon definition for use on an iconic menu. If an icon
file is selected for the push button, the image will appear on the button instead of the string,‘label’.
Its placement depends on where the axis is placed. The label can be of unlimited length, but may
not all fit on the plot if it is very long. If the string contains spaces, it must be enclosed in quotation
marks.
8. The parameter ‘command’ specifies the command to be executed by clicking the push button.
You can also specify a different command for double-clicking the push button. Thus, the push
button can execute two different commands, depending upon single or double click.
interface 213
interface push_button undisplay

Allows you to close the displayed push button.
Format:

Example:
interface push_button undisplay &

push_button_name = _2
Description:

push_button_name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing push button
GI_Push_BTN
interface radio_box create

Allows you to create a new radio box
Format:
interface radio box create

radio_box_name= A New GI_radio_box
enabled = Boolean
help_text = String
units = Int_units
horiz_resizing= Int_h_resize
location= Real
height = Real
width= Real
choices = String
values = String
commands = String
current_choice = String
Example:
interface radio_box create &

radio_box_name = .gui.rdbx..rdbx1 &
enabled = yes &
help_text = help_text &
documentation_text = doc_text &
units = relative &
height = 0.3 &
width = 0.3 &
choices = yes,no &
interface 215
interface radio_box create &

values = "1,2" &
commands = "intrface coord_window display=toggle" &
current_choice = yes
Description:

radio_box_name A New GI_radio Specifies a new name for an existing radio box
Box
enabled Boolean Activates the radio box
units Int_units Specifies the radio box size as pixel or relative to
Adams window
radio box
radio box
location Real Specifies the location of the radio box
height Real Specifies the height of the radio box in terms of
width Real Specifies the width of the radio box in terms of
choices String Specifies labels of the choices to be displayed for
the radio box
values String Specifies the real values to be stored in result
component
commands String Specifies the command to be executed by the radio
box
current choice String Specifies the default choice to be executed by the
radio box
1. The name of the radio box to be created is specified initially. If parameter ‘Enabled’ is set to ON,
the radio box button will be preactivated.
3. The size of the radio box can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively, the
4. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the radio box on
Vert_resizing will place the radio box on the top left corner of the dialog box. The location can
5. The size of the radio box window can be specified with respect to the Adams window size. The
represents the height of the Adams/View window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the button
6. The parameter ‘command’ specifies the name of the command to be executed when the radio box
is clicked. If multiple commands are entered then the command to be executed is decided by the
parameter ‘choice’. Alternatively, the values specifies the real values to be stored in the result set
component, The values can be a list of numbers, or an expression referencing an array of existing
values. The ‘current choice’ parameter decides the default value for the radio box from the choices
offered.
interface 217
interface radio_box delete
interface radio_box delete

Allows deletion of an existing radio box
Format:
interface radio box delete

radio_box_name = An Existing GI_radio_box
Example:
interface radio_box delete &

radio_box_name = .gui.rdbx..rdbx1
Description:

radio_box_name An Existing Specifies the name for an existing radio box to be deleted
GI_radio Box
1. The radio box can be deleted by specifying the appropriate name in the ‘delete’ dialog box.
interface radio_box display
interface radio_box display

Allows displaying the radio box
Format:
interface radio box display

Example:
interface radio_box display &

radio_box_name = .gui.naresh.rdbx &
choice = "yes" &
execute = no
Description:

radio_box_name An Existing GI_radio Box Specifies the name for an existing radio box to be
displayed
1. The radio box can be displayed on the dialog box by entering appropriate name during the
‘display’ command
interface 219
interface radio_box execute
interface radio_box execute

Allows execution of a command associated with the radio box
Format:
interface radio box execute

radio_box_name = an existing GI_radio_box
Example:
interface radio_box execute &

radio_box_name = .gui.rdbx..rdbx1
Description:

radio_box_name An Existing Specifies the name for an existing radio box of which
GI_radio Box the command is to be executed
1. The command associated with the radio box can be explicitly executed by the ‘execute’
command, which is alternatively, executed by clicking the radio box.
interface radio_box modify

Allows modifying an existing radio box
Format:
interface radio box modify

new_radio_box_name = A New GI_radio Box
enabled = Boolean
help_text = String
units = Int_units
location = Real
height = Real
width = Real
choices = String
values = String
commands = String
current_choice = String
Example:
interface radio_box modify &

radio_box_name = .gui.obj.rdbx &
enabled = yes &
help_text = "help_text" &
documentation_text = "doc_text" &
units = relative &
height = 0.4 &
width = 0.4 &
interface 221
interface radio_box modify &

choices = yes &
values = “1” &
current_choice = "yes"
Description:

radio_box_name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing radio box
GI_radio Box
new_radio_box_name A New Specifies a new name for an existing radio box
GI_radio_box
enabled Boolean Activates the radio box
units Int_units Specifies the radio box size as pixel or relative to
Adams window
horiz_resizing Int_h_resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for radio
box
vert_resizing Int_v_resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for radio
box
location Real Specifies the location of the radio box
height Real Specifies the height of the radio box in terms of
width Real Specifies the width of the radio box in terms of
choices String Specifies labels of the choices to be displayed for the
radio box
values String Specifies the real values to be stored in result
component
commands String Specifies the command to be executed by the radio
box
current choice String Specifies the default choice to be executed by the
radio box
1. The name of the radio box to be created is specified initially. If parameter ‘Enabled’ is set to ON,
the radio box button will be preactivated. A new name can be suggested for the radio box by
specifying the parameter ‘new_radio_box_name’.
3. The size of the radio box can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively, the
4. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the radio box on
Vert_resizing will place the radio box on the top left corner of the dialog box. The location can
5. The size of the radio box window can be specified with respect to the Adams window size. The
represents the height of the Adams/View window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the button
6. The parameter ‘command’ specifies the name of the command to be executed when the radio box
is clicked. If multiple commands are entered then the command to be executed is decided by the
parameter ‘choice’. Alternatively, the values specifies the real values to be stored in the result set
component, The values can be a list of numbers, or an expression referencing an array of existing
values. The ‘current choice’ parameter decides the default value for the radio box from the choices
offered.
interface 223
interface radio_box set
interface radio_box set

Allows setting up of initial parameters of the radio box
Format:
interface radio box set

choices = String
value= String
execute= Boolean
Example:
interface radio_box set &

radio_box_name = .gui.rdbox.rdbx &
choice = "yes" &
execute = yes
Description:

radio_box_name An Existing GI_radio Box Specifies the name for an existing radio box to be
displayed
choices String Specifies the choice for the commands to be executed
value String Specifies the choice for the commands to be executed
execute Boolean Specifies the default parameter for the execution of the
command
1. The command associated with the radio box is specified while creating it. The execution of the
same can be made ON or OFF depending on the BOOLEAN parameter ‘yes’ or ‘no’ for the
parameter ‘execute’. Moreover, the selective execution of a command from multiple commands
can be done by specifying the ‘choice’
Tips:
The parameters ‘choice’ and ‘value’ mutually exclusive
interface radio_box undisplay
interface radio_box undisplay

Allows closing a displayed radio box
Format:
interface radio box undisplay

radio_box_name = an existing GI_radio_box
Example:
interface radio_box undisplay &

radio_box_name= .gui.rdbx..rdbx1
Description:

radio_box_name An Existing Specifies the name for an existing radio box to be closed
GI_radio Box
1. The displayed radio box can be closed by entering appropriate radio box name during the
‘undisplay’ command
interface 225
interface separator create

Allows creation of a new separator
The separator is a is a line look-alike to a embossing element separating two entities on the dialog box.
It is an element to improve the readability of the contents of the dialog box.
This command helps to create the separator on the dialog box, the length of which is specified ‘width’
and the ‘height’ will specify its placement from top of the dialog box.
Specifies whether or not Adams will write separators to the Request, Graphics, Results, and Tabular
Output Files when you modify the model topology in the middle of a simulation. You can change the
model topology by adding Adams commands to your ACF file to activate an element, deactivate an
element, change a marker position, or change the type or point of application of a force or constraint
during a simulation. If you specify SEPARATOR=ON (this is the default) the analysis information will
be read into Adams/View, one analysis for each block of output between the separators. If you specify
SEPARATOR=OFF the analysis information will be read into Adams/View as a single analysis. This
allow you to plot or animate the analysis from beGInning to end.
Format:

separator_name= a new GI_separator
enabled= boolean
help_text= string
documentation_text= string
units = int_units
location = real
height = real
width = real
Example:
interface separator create &

separator_name = .gui.dbox.sepr &
enabled = yes &
interface separator create &

units = relative &
vert_resizing attach_top &
location 0.0, 0.0 &
height 0.4 &
width 0.4
Description:

separator _name A New GI_separator Specifies the name for a new separator to be created
enabled Boolean Activates the separator
units Int_units Specifies the separator size as pixel or relative to dialog
window
separator
separator
location Real Specifies the location of the separator on the dialog box
from upper left corner
height Real Specifies the placement of separator from upper corner
width Real Specifies the width of the separator in terms of relative
units or pixel
1. The preliminary parameters of the separator like location and width are set using this command.
3. The separator is a element look-alike to embossing, which separated two entities on the dialog
box. It has no command or function associated. It is used to improve the readability of the contents
of the dialog box. The placement of the separator on the dialog box is decided by the location,
which is the starting point of the separator line from upper left corner on the dialog box.
4. From the point specified by ‘location’ the placement of the separator below the ‘location’ is
decided by the height and the length of the separator line is decided by the parameter ‘width’
interface 227
interface separator delete

Allows deletion of an existing separator.
This command allows deletion of an existing separator.
Format:

separator_name = an existing GI_separator
Example:
interface separator delete &

separator_name = .gui.dbox.sepr
Description:

separator _name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing separator
GI_separator
1. . The separator is deleted by entering the appropriate separator name in the parameter
‘separator_name’ while ‘delete’ command.
interface separator display

Allows displaying of an existing separator
This command allows displaying of an existing separator.
Format:

Example:
interface separator display &

Description:

separator _name An Existing GI_separator Specifies the name of an existing separator
1. The separator is displayed by entering the appropriate separator name in the parameter
‘separator_name’ while ‘display’ command.
interface 229
interface separator modify

Allows modifying of an existing separator
Format:

new_separator_name= a new GI_separator
enabled= boolean
help_text = string
units = int_units
location = real
height = real
width = real
Example:
interface separator modify &

separator_name= .gui.dbox.sepr &
new_separator_name = .gui.dbox.sepr1 &
enabled= yes &
interface separator modify &

units relative &
horiz_resizing attach_left &
vert_resizing attach_top &
location 0.2, 0.0 &
height 0.6 &
width 0.7
Description:

separator _name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing separator
GI_separator
new_separator_name A New GI_separator Specifies a new name for the existing separator
enabled Boolean Activates the separator
units Int_units Specifies the separator size as pixel or relative to dialog
window
separator
separator
location Real Specifies the location of the separator on the dialog box
from upper left corner
height Real Specifies the placement of separator from upper corner
width Real Specifies the width of the separator in terms of relative
units or pixel
1. The preliminary parameters of the separator like location and width are set using this command.
A new name can be specified for an existing separator by the parameter ‘new_separator_name’.
3. The separator is a element look-alike to embossing, which separated two entities on the dialog
box. It has no command or function associated. It is used to improve the readability of the contents
of the dialog box. The placement of the separator on the dialog box is decided by the location,
which is the starting point of the separator line from upper left corner on the dialog box.
4. From the point specified by ‘location’ the placement of the separator below the ‘location’ is
decided by the height and the length of the separator line is decided by the parameter ‘width’
interface separator undisplay

Allows closing of an existing separator .
This command allows undisplaying of an existing separator.
Format:

separator_name= an existing GI_separator
Example:
interface separator undisplay &

Description:

separator _name An Existing GI_separator Specifies the name of an existing separator
1. The separator is closed by entering the appropriate separator name in the parameter
‘separator_name’ while ‘undisplay’ command.
interface slider create

Allows you to create of a new slider on the dialog box.
The slider is an element on the dialog box, specifying a variable parameter, the dragGIng of the slider
bar, will vary the parameter value between minimum and maximum depending on the current position of
the slider.
Format:

slider_name= A New GI_slider
enabled = Boolean
help_text= String
units = Int_units
location= Real
height = Real
width = Real
commands = String
value = Integer
minimum= Integer
maximum = Integer
live_drag == Boolean
show_value Boolean
Example:
interface slider create &

slider_name = .gui.dbox.sldr &
enabled = yes &
units = relative &
interface slider create &

location = 0.2, 0.2 &
height = 0.2 &
width= 0.6 &
commands= "view zoom view=.gui.main.front zoom=1.0" &
value = 1 &
minimum = 0 &
maximum = 10 &
live_drag = yes &
show_value = yes
Description:

slider _name A New GI_slider Specifies the name of a new slider
enabled Boolean Activates the slider
units Int_units Specifies the slider size as pixel or relative to dialog box
window
slider
slider
location Real Specifies the location of the slider on the dialog box
height Real Specifies the height of the slider in terms of relative
units or pixel
width Real Specifies the width of the slider field in terms of relative
units or pixel
commands String Specifies the command to be executed while the slider
is dragged
value Integer Specifies the default value of the command
minimum Integer Specifies the minimum value at the beGInning of slider
maximum Integer Specifies the maximum value at the end of slider

live_drag Boolean Specifies the live display of current value on the slider
show_value Boolean Specifies the default parameter for displaying the
current slider value
1. The preliminary parameters of the slider like size, associated commands and range of values are
set using this command.
3. The size of the slider can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively, the size
4. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the slider menu
Vert_resizing will place the slider on the top left corner of the dialog box. The location can also
5. The size of the slider window can be specified with respect to the dialog box window size. The
represents the height of the dialog window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the slider field
6. The parameter ‘command’ specifies the name of the command to be executed, when the slider is
dragged. The parameters ‘minimum’ and ‘maximum’ shows the slider lower and upper limit
values, the instantaneous or current value of which is displayed over the slider, if the parameter
‘show_value’ is set to ‘yes’. Similarly, if the command to be executed concurrently with the slider
movement, when the slider is dragGIng, the parameter ‘live_drag’ needs to be set to ‘yes’.
interface slider delete

Allows deletion of an existing slider on the dialog box.
the slider.
Format:

slider_name = An Existing GI_slider
Example:
interface slider delete &

slider_name = .gui.dbox.sldr
Description:

slider _name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing slider
GI_slider
1. The slider can be deleted by specifying the appropriate name for the parameter ‘slider_name’ in
the delete dialog box.
interface slider display

Allows displaying of an existing slider on the dialog box.
the slider.
Format:

slider_name= an existing GI_slider
Example:
interface slider display &

Description:

slider _name An Existing GI_slider Specifies the name of an existing slider
1. The slider can be displayed by specifying the appropriate name for the parameter ‘slider_name’
in the display dialog box.
interface slider execute

Allows execution of a command associated with the slider.
the slider.
The optional command associated with the slider can be explicitly run by this command.
Format:

Example:
interface slider execute &

Description:

slider _name An Existing GI_slider Specifies the name of an existing slider
1. The slider has an optional parameter, ‘command’, if specified gets executed explicitly without
dragGIng the slider bar by the command ‘execute’.
interface slider modify

Allows modifying of an existing slider on the dialog box.
the slider.
Format:

new_slider_name = A New GI_slider
enabled = Boolean
help_text = String
units = Int_units
location= Real
height = Real
width = Real
commands = String
value = Integer
minimum = Integer
maximum = Integer
live_drag = Boolean
show_value = Boolean
Example:
interface slider modify &

new_slider_name = .gui.dbox.sldr1&
enabled = yes &
interface slider modify &

units = relative &
height = 0.2 &
width = 0.6 &
value = 0 &
minimum = 0 &
maximum = 1 &
live_drag = yes &
show_value = yes
Description:

GI_slider
new_slider_name Specifies a new name for the slider
enabled Boolean Activates the slider
units Int_units Specifies the slider size as pixel or relative to dialog
box window
slider
slider
location Real Specifies the location of the slider on the dialog box
height Real Specifies the height of the slider in terms of relative
units or pixel
width Real Specifies the width of the slider field in terms of
commands String Specifies the command to be executed while the slider
is dragged

value Integer Specifies the default value of the command
minimum Integer Specifies the minimum value at the beGInning of
slider
maximum Integer Specifies the maximum value at the end of slider
live_drag Boolean Specifies the live display of current value on the slider
show_value Boolean Specifies the default parameter for displaying the
current slider value
1. The preliminary parameters of the slider like size, associated commands and range of values are
set using this command. A new name can be specified for the slider by using parameter
‘new_slider_name’.
3. The size of the slider can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively, the size
4. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the slider menu
Vert_resizing will place the slider on the top left corner of the dialog box. The location can also
5. The size of the slider window can be specified with respect to the dialog box window size. The
represents the height of the dialog window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the slider field
6. The parameter ‘command’ specifies the name of the command to be executed, when the slider is
dragged. The parameters ‘minimum’ and ‘maximum’ shows the slider lower and upper limit
values, the instantaneous or current value of which is displayed over the slider, if the parameter
‘show_value’ is set to ‘yes’. Similarly, if the command to be executed concurrently with the slider
movement, when the slider is dragGIng, the parameter ‘live_drag’ needs to be set to ‘yes’.
interface slider set

Allows setting-up of initial parameters for an existing slider on the dialog box.
the slider.
Format:

slider_name = An Existing
GI_slider
value = Integer
execute = Boolean
Example:
interface slider set &

value = 3 &
execute = yes
Description:

GI_slider
value Integer Specifies the current value of the slider position
execute Boolean Specifies whether the associated command will be
executed or not
1. The slider can be set to default parameter by choosing the parameter ‘value’, which denotes the
instantaneous current value of the slider position between the minimum and maximum values
specified. The execute option specifies the whether the associated command will be executed or
not, when the slider is dragged.
interface slider undisplay

Allows closing of an existing slider on the dialog box.
the slider.
Format:

slider_name = an existing GI_slider
Example:
interface slider undisplay &

slider_name= .gui.dbox.sldr
Description:

GI_slider
1. The slider can be closed by specifying the appropriate name for the parameter ‘slider_name’ in
the ‘undisplay’ dialog box.
interface tab_container create

Allows you to create of a new tab_container
Tab_container is similar to a container but can be added to a dialog box or another container. When you
add a tab_container, a tab appears in the parent container.
Format:
interface object tab_container create

object_table_name= A New GI_tab_container
enabled= Boolean
help_text = String
units = Int_units
location = Real
height = Real
width= Real
commands = String
current choice = String
Example:
interface tab_container create &

tab_container_name = .gui.cntr.tabcnt &
enabled= yes &
help_text= "help2text" &
documentation_text= "doc2text" &
units= relative &
location = 0.0, 0.0 &
height = 0.4 &
width = 0.4 &

current_choice= "yes"
Description:

tab _container_name A New GI_tab_container Specifies the name for a new tab_container
to be created
enabled Boolean Activates the tab_container
units Int_units Specifies the tab_container size as pixel or
horiz_resizing Int_h_resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option
for the tab_container
vert_resizing Int_v_resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option
for the tab_container
location Real Specifies the location of the tab_container
on the dialog box
height Real Specifies the height of the tab_container in
width Real Specifies the width of the tab_container
field in terms of relative units or pixel
current choice String Specifies the default option for the
command to be executed
1. The preliminary parameters of the tab_container like size, associated commands and editing
capability are set using this command.
3. The size of the tab_container can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively,
4. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the tab_container
Vert_resizing will place the tab_container on the top left corner of the dialog box. The location
can also be specified from the top left corner by adjusting the parameter ‘location’
5. The size of the tab_container window can be specified with respect to the Adams window size.
The value for parameter height and width should be a real number between 0.0 and 2.0, where
2.0 represents the height of the dialog window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the tab_container
field window to be one half as high as the Adams/View window.
6. The parameter ‘command’ specifies the name of the command to be executed, whereas the current
choice determines the default choice for the execution of the command.
interface tab_container delete
interface tab_container delete

Allows deleting an existing tab_container.
Format:
interface object tab_container delete

tab_container_name= an exisitng GI_tab_container
Example:
interface tab_container delete &

tab_container_name = .gui.cntr.tabcnt
Description:

tab_container_name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing tab_container to be
GI_tab_container deleted
1. The tab_container can be deleted by choosing the appropriate name for the ‘tab_container’ during
the ‘delete’ command
interface tab_container display
interface tab_container display

Allows displaying an existing tab_container.
The tab_container can be displayed or closed as the need arises
Format:
interface object tab_container display

tab_container_name = an exisitng gi_tab_container
Example:
interface tab_container display &

Description:

tab_container_name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing
GI_tab_container tab_container to be displayed
1. The tab_container can be displayed by choosing the appropriate name for the ‘tab_container’
during the ‘display’ command
interface tab_container execute
interface tab_container execute

Allows executing a command associated with an existing tab_container.
The tab_container has an optional command parameter, if specified a command, it gets executed while
running the ‘execute’ command.
Format:
interface object tab_container execute

Example:
interface tab_container execute &

Description:

tab _container_name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing tab_container the
GI_tab_container command for which needs to be executed
1. The tab_container associated command can be executed by running explicitly the ‘execute’
command.
interface tab_container modify

Allows modifying the tab_container properties.
Format:
interface object tab_container modify

new_ tab_container_name = a new gi_tab_container
enabled = boolean
help_text = string
units = int_units
location = real
height = real
width = real
commands= string
current choice= string
Example:

enabled = yes &
units = relative &
location = 0.0, 0.0 &
height = 0.4 &
width = 0.4 &

current_choice = "yes"
Description:

tab_container_name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing tab_container
GI_tab_container to be modified
new_tab_container_nam A New GI_tab_container Specifies a new name for the tab_container
e
enabled Boolean Activates the tab_container
units Int_units Specifies the tab_container size as pixel or
the tab_container
the tab_container
location Real Specifies the location of the tab_container on
the dialog box
height Real Specifies the height of the tab_container in
width Real Specifies the width of the tab_container field in
current choice String Specifies the default option for the command to
be executed
1. The preliminary parameters of the tab_container like size, associated commands and editing
capability are set using this command. To rename the tab_container, fill the parameter
‘new_tab_container_name’
3. The size of the tab_container can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively,
4. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the tab_container
Vert_resizing will place the tab_container on the top left corner of the dialog box. The location
can also be specified from the top left corner by adjusting the parameter ‘location’
5. The size of the tab_container window can be specified with respect to the Adams window size.
The value for parameter height and width should be a real number between 0.0 and 2.0, where
2.0 represents the height of the dialog window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the tab_container
field window to be one half as high as the Adams/View window.
6. The parameter ‘command’ specifies the name of the command to be executed, whereas the current
choice determines the default choice for the execution of the command.
interface tab_container set
interface tab_container set

Allows setting up of default parameters for a tab_container
The tab_container has an optional command parameter, if specified a command, it gets executed while
running the ‘execute’ command.
Format:
interface object tab_container set

tab_container_name= an exisitng gi_tab_container
choice = stirng
execute = boolean
Example:
interface tab_container set &

choice = "1" &
execute = yes
Description:

tab _container_name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing tab_container the
GI_tab_container command for which needs to be executed
choice String Specifies the choice of the command to be executed
execute Boolean Specifies the default parameter for execution of the
command
1. The tab_container associated command can be executed by running explicitly the ‘execute’
command. The default state for running a command depends on the BOOLEAN value of the
parameter ‘execute’ in the ‘set’ command.
interface tab_container undisplay
interface tab_container undisplay

Allows closing an existing tab_container.
The tab_container can be displayed or closed as the need arises
Format:
interface object tab_container undisplay

tab_container_name= an exisitng gi_tab_container
Example:
interface tab_container undisplay &

Description:

tab _container_name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing tab_container to be
GI_tab_container closed
1. The tab_container can be closed by choosing the appropriate name for the ‘tab_container’ during
the ‘undisplay’ command
interface toggle_button create

Allows you to create a new toggle button
Format:

toggle_button_name = a new GI_toggl_btn
enabled= boolean
help_text = string
units = int_units
horiz_resizing= int_H_resize
location = real
height = real
width = real
label= string
state= on_off
on_value= string
off_value= string
commands= string
icon_file= string
hit_icon_file = string
Example:
interface toggle_button create &

toggle_button_name = tgb &
enabled = yes &
help_text = text_help &
documentation_text= doc_help &
units = relative &
location = 0.0, 0.0 &
interface toggle_button create &

height = 0.5 &
width = 0.5 &
label = button_label &
state = on &
on value = on &
off value = off &
icon file = c:/images.jpg &
Hit icon file= c:/images1.jpg
Description:

toggle_button_name A New Specifies the name of a new toggle button
GI_toggl_btn
enabled Boolean Activates the toggle button
units Int_units Specifies the toggle button size in pixels or units
horiz_resizing Int_h_resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for toggle
button
vert_resizing Int_v_resize Specifies the attachment and scaling option for toggle
button
location Real Specifies the location of the toggle button
height Real Specifies the height of the toggle button in terms of
width Real Specifies the width of the toggle button in terms of
label String Specifies label of the toggle button
state On_Off Specifies the current status of the toggle button
value String Specifies the current status of the toggle button
commands String Specifies the command to be executed for the toggle
button operation
icon_file String Specifies the address of the image for icon when
button is inactive
Hit_icon file String Specifies the address of the image for icon when the
button is active
1. The name of the toggle button to be created is specified initially. If parameter ‘Enabled’ is set to
ON, the toggle button will be preactivated.
3. The size of the toggle button can be specified in terms of the number of pixels. Alternatively, the
in the existing dialog box. For example, attach_left; attach_top options for Horiz_resizing and
5. The size of the toggle button window can be specified with respect to the Adams window size.
The value for parameter height and width should be a real number between 0.0 and 2.0, where 2.0
information window to be half as high as the Adams/View window.
6. If the Label is specified, then the string associated will appear with a toggle window, where click
and unclick will be denoted by a ‘tick’. Alternatively, if the iconic image is selected for the toggle
button, then the iconic button will be displayed with corresponding image on it, with no label of
‘tick-mark’. The label for an axis will be displayed near the axis, its placement depending on
where the axis is placed. The label can be of unlimited length, but may not all fit on the plot if it
is very long. If the string contains spaces, it must be enclosed in quotation marks. The parameter
‘icon_file’ specifies the name of the file that contains the icon definition for use on an iconic
menu.
7. The default state of the toggle button is specified by ‘state’, whether it is on or off. Otherwise, the
values are specified as string where the status of the toggle button can marked. It is mutually
exclusive with the ‘state’ mentioned above.
8. The parameter ‘command’ specifies the name of the command to be executed when the toggle
button status is ON.
9. The push button iconic image can be changed by specifying the ‘Hit_icon_file’, i.e. when the
push button is active, it will show one image on the button, and when it is toggled or inactive, the
iconic image will toggle to another image file specified.
Tips:
The parameters, ‘state’ and ‘value’, are mutually exclusive. The display and undisplay of commands
work when any menu box is open, as the button will be created on existing menu
interface toggle_button delete

Allows you to delete an existing toggle button.
Format:

toggle_button_name = an existing GI_toggl_btn
Example:
interface toggle_button delete &

toggle_button_name = tgb
Description:

toggle_button_name An Existing GI_toggl_btn Specifies the name of an existing toggle button
An existing toggle button is deleted by specifying the name of the toggle button.
interface toggle_button display

Allows you to display an existing toggle button.
Format:

Example:
interface toggle_button display &

Description:

The toggle button appears on any of the menus displayed.
Tips:
Atleast one menu needs to be displayed initially to place a toggle button.
interface toggle_button execute

Allows you to execute a toggle button command.
Format:

Example:
interface toggle_button execute &


toggle_button_name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing toggle button
GI_toggl_btn
The command associated with a toggle button can be executed directly, without clicking the button.
interface toggle_button modify

Allows you to modify an existing toggle button.
Format:

toggle_button_name= an existing GI_toggl_btn
new_toggle_button_name = a new GI_toggl_btn
enabled = boolean
help_text = string
units = int_units
horiz_resizing = int_H_resize
location = real
height = real
width= real
label= string
state= on_off
on_value = string
off_value = string
commands = string
icon_file= string
hit_icon_file = string
Example:
interface toggle_button modify &

new_toggle_button_name = tgb2 &
enabled = yes &
help_text = "text_help" &
documentation_text = "text_doc" &
units = relative &
interface toggle_button modify &

location= 0.0,0.0 &
height = 0.3 &
width = 0.3 &
label = "button_label" &
state = on &
on_value = "on" &
off_value = "off" &
icon_file = "c:/images.jpg" &
hit_icon_file = "c:/images1.jpg"
Description:

GI_toggl_btn
new_toggle_button_na A New GI_toggl_btn Specifies a new name for an existing toggle button
me
enabled Boolean Activates the toggle button
units Int_units Specifies the toggle button size in pixels or units
toggle button
toggle button
location Real Specifies the location of the toggle button
height Real Specifies the height of the toggle button in terms of
width Real Specifies the width of the toggle button in terms of
label String Specifies label of the toggle button
state On_off Specifies the current status of the toggle button

value String Specifies the current status of the toggle button
commands String Specifies the command to be executed for the
toggle button operation
icon_file String Specifies the address of the image for icon when
button is inactive
Hit_icon file String Specifies the address of the image for icon when the
button is active
1. The name of an existing toggle button is specified initially. If parameter ‘Enabled’ is set to ON,
the toggle button will be preactivated.
3. The size of the toggle button can be specified in terms of the number of pixels. Alternatively, the
5. The size of the toggle button window can be specified with respect to the Adams window size.
The value for parameter height and width should be a real number between 0.0 and 2.0, where 2.0
information window to half as high as the Adams/View window.
6. If the Label is specified, then the string associated will appear with a toggle window, where click
and unclick will be denoted by a ‘tick’. Alternatively, if the iconic image is selected for the toggle
button, then the iconic button will be displayed with corresponding image on it, with no label of
‘tick-mark’. The label for an axis will be displayed near the axis, its placement depending on
where the axis is placed. The label can be of unlimited length, but may not all fit on the plot if it
is very long. If the string contains spaces, it must be enclosed in quotation marks. The parameter,
‘icon_file’ specifies the name of the file that contains the icon definition for use on an iconic
menu.
7. The default state of the toggle button is specified by ‘state’, whether it is on or off. Otherwise, the
values are specified as string where the status of the toggle button can be marked. It is mutually
exclusive with the ‘state’ mentioned above.
8. The parameter ‘command’ specifies the name of the command to be executed when the toggle
button status is ON.
9. The push button iconic image can be changed by specifying the ‘Hit_icon_file’, i.e. when the push
button is active, it will show one image on the button, and when it is toggled or inactive, the iconic
image will toggle to another image file specified.
Tips:
The parameters, ‘state’ and ‘value’, are mutually exclusive.
The commands display and undisplay works when any menu box is open, as the button will be created
on an existing menu.
interface toggle_button set

Allows you to set up the initial parameters of the toggle button
Format:

toggle_button_name= an existing GI_toggl_btn
state = on_off
value = string
execute = boolean
Example:
interface toggle_button set &

state = on &
execute = yes
Description:

GI_toggl_btn
state On_Off Specifies the current state of the toggle button
value String Specifies the current state of the toggle button
execute Boolean Specifies the execution of the associated command
1. The state or the value denotes the current status of the button when it is displayed. Thus, if the
status is ON, the toggle button will be ON when displayed.
2. The SET command is used to setup the initial condition of the parameters when the button is
displayed or activated.
Tips:
The parameters, ‘value’ and ‘state’, are mutually exclusive.
interface toggle_button undisplay

Allows you to close a displayed toggle button.
Format:

Example:
interface toggle_button display &


The toggle button displayed on of the any menus, is closed.
interface toolbar create

Allows you to create a new toolbar.
The toolbar can be created on a existing pop_window or a window, where various toolbar buttons can be
placed.
Format:

toolbar_name = a new GI_toolbar
enabled = boolean
help_text = string
units = int_units
location = real
height = real
width = real
rank = integer
top = boolean
Example:
interface toolbar create &

toolbar_name = .gui.ppwndw.tlbr &
location = 0.2, 0.2 &
height = 0.2 &
width = 0.9 &
enabled = yes &
units = relative &
interface toolbar create &

rank = 2 &
top = yes
Description:

toolbar _name A New GI_toolbar Specifies the name of a new toolbar
enabled Boolean Activates the toolbar
units Int_units Specifies the toolbar size as pixel or relative to
pop_up window
the toolbar
the toolbar
location Real Specifies the location of the toolbar on the
pop_up window
height Real Specifies the height of the toolbar in terms of
width Real Specifies the width of the toolbar field in terms
rank Integer Specifies the rank of the toolbar in case of
multiple toolbars
top Boolean Keeps the toolbar on the top of other windows
1. The preliminary parameters of the toolbar like size, rank and label are set using this command.
3. The size of the toolbar can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively, the size
can also be stated as relative to the pop_up window
4. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the toolbar menu
on existing pop_window. For example, attach_left; attach_top options for Horiz_resizing and
Vert_resizing will place the toolbar on the top left corner of the pop_up. The location can also be
specified from the top left corner by adjusting the parameter ‘location’
5. The size of the toolbar window can be specified with respect to the pop_up window size. The
represents the height of the window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the toolbar to be one half
as high as the pop_up window.
6. The toolbar remains on the ‘top’ of other windows if specified ‘yes’ for the parameter ‘top’
interface toolbar delete

Allows deletion of an existing toolbar
placed.
Format:

toolbar_name = an existing GI_toolbar
Example:
interface toolbar delete &

toolbar_name = .gui.ppwndw.tlbr
Description:

toolbar _name An Existing GI_Toolbar Specifies the name of an existing toolbar
1. The toolbar can be deleted by specifying the ‘toolbar name’ while the ‘delete’ command.
interface toolbar display

Allows displaying of an existing toolbar.
placed.
Format:

toolbar_name= an existing GI_toolbar
Example:
interface toolbar display &

toolbar_name = .gui.new_window.tlbr
Description:

toolbar _name An Existing Gi_toolbar Specifies the name of an existing toolbar
1. The toolbar can be displayed or closed as the need arises by using the ‘display’ and ‘undisplay’
commands.
interface toolbar modify

Allows you to modify an existing toolbar.
placed.
Format:

new_toolbar_name = a new GI_toolbar
enabled = boolean
help_text = string
units = nt_units
location = real
height = real
width = real
rank = integer
top = boolean
Example:
interface toolbar modify &

toolbar_name = .gui.ppwndw.tlbr &
new_toolbar_name = .gui.ppwndw.tlbr1 &
location = 0.2, 0.2 &
height = 0.2 &
width = 0.9 &
enabled = yes &
units = relative &
interface toolbar modify &

rank = 2 &
top = yes
Description:

toolbar _name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing toolbar
GI_toolbar
new_toolbar_name A New GI_toolbar Specifies a new name for an existing toolbar
enabled Boolean Activates the toolbar
units Int_units Specifies the toolbar size as pixel or relative to
pop_up window
the toolbar
the toolbar
location Real Specifies the location of the toolbar on the
pop_up window
height Real Specifies the height of the toolbar in terms of
width Real Specifies the width of the toolbar field in terms
rank Integer Specifies the rank of the toolbar in case of
multiple toolbars
top Boolean Keeps the toolbar on the top of other windows
1. The preliminary parameters of the toolbar like size, rank and label are set using this command.
3. The size of the toolbar can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively, the size
can also be stated as relative to the pop_up window
4. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the toolbar menu
on existing pop_window. For example, attach_left; attach_top options for Horiz_resizing and
Vert_resizing will place the toolbar on the top left corner of the pop_up. The location can also be
specified from the top left corner by adjusting the parameter ‘location’
5. The size of the toolbar window can be specified with respect to the pop_up window size. The
represents the height of the window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the toolbar to be one half
as high as the pop_up window.
6. The toolbar remains on the ‘top’ of other windows if specified ‘yes’ for the parameter ‘top’
interface toolbar undisplay

Allows closing of an existing toolbar
placed.
Format:

Example:
interface toolbar undisplay &

toolbar_name = .gui.ppwndw.tlbr
Description:

toolbar _name An Existing GI_Toolbar Specifies the name of an existing toolbar
1. The toolbar can be displayed or closed as the need arises by using the ‘display’ and ‘undisplay’
commands.
interface view create

Allows you to create a new view with user defined location and orientation
The Adams/view has some preset views, viz., .gui.main.front, .gui.main.right. The user can create a
custom view with predefined orientation and display specifications, which can be created on the main
view window or a separate window. The view can be set-up by parameters like eye, target, and up_vector.
Format:
Interface view create

view_name = a new view
enabled = boolean
help_text = string
units = int_units
location = real
height = real
width= real
eye = location
target= location
up_vector= location
Example:
interface view create &

view_name = .gui.win.user_view &
enabled = yes &
units = relative &
location = 0.0, 0.0 &
height = .4 &
interface view create &

width = .4 &
eye = 0,0,1000 &
target = 500,0,0 &
up_vector = 0,1000,0
Description:

view_name A New View Specifies the name for a new view
enabled Boolean Activates the view
units Int_units Specifies the view size as pixel or relative to
Adams or custom window
the view
the view
location Real Specifies the location of the view on the dialog
box
height Real Specifies the height of the view in terms of
width Real Specifies the width of the view field in terms of
eye Location Specifies the camera position nad orientation
target Location Specifies the target location which should be
centered on the view window
up_vector Location Specifies the upward vector for the view
window to describe inclination
1. A view name is string of characters that identifies a viewport or set of viewport attributes stored
in the database. View_names are assigned by the user when a view is created. After a view has
been created, it may be referenced by its name until it is deleted. A view may not have the same
name as another view. A view_name may be arbitrarily long and a combination of letters of the
alphabet and numbers may be used. The leading character must be a letter.
3. The size of the view window can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively,
the size can also be stated as relative to the Adams or custom window.
4. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the view window
Vert_resizing will place the view window on the top left corner of the Adams or custom window.
The location can also be specified from the top left corner by adjusting the parameter ‘location’
5. The size of the view window can be specified with respect to the custom of Adams window size
represents the height of the Adams or custom window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the view
field window to be one half as high as the Adams or custom window.
6. The ‘eye’ is similar to a camera position. The eye is specified by its x,y,z coordinates which
specifies the location from where the object is being viewed.
7. The parameter ‘target’ is the location to which is camera is targeted. The ‘target’ is also specified
by its x,y and z coordinates. This location will be positioned at the center of the view window to
be created.
8. The ‘up_vector’ determines the inclination of the of the camera or the upward direction of the
model. For example, setting the up_vector to 0,1000,0, the global y axis will be directed upwards
showing the front view of the object, if the eye is set at 0,0,0. Note that, if the eye is set at 0,0,0
which implies that the camera is set at oriGIn, it will not capture the object targeted at unless the
object is at sufficient distance in z direction.
9. The camera should be away from the object in the respective axis to view the object – specified
by parameter ‘eye’. The target location appears at the center of the view, thus if you target at the
center of a circular object, the object will be viewed with its center at the middle of the view
window. The inclination of viewing, which is similar to rotating an object, is achieved by setting
the up-vector in coordination with ‘eye’.
interface view delete

Allows you to delete an existing view.
The command displays an existing view.
Format:

Example:
interface view delete &

view_name = .gui.win.user_view
Description:

view_name An Existing View Specifies the name for an existing view
A new_view_name will replace the name of an existing view.
2. The view can be deleted by this command.
interface view display

Allows you to display an existing view.
The command displays an existing view.
Format:

Example:
interface view display &

view_name= .gui.win.user_view
Description:

2. The view can be displayed by this command.
interface view modify

Allows you to modify an existing view.
The command helps us to edit the user defined view.
Format:

new_view_name= a new view
enabled= boolean
help_text = string
units = int_units
location = real
height = real
width = real
eye= location
target = location
up_vector= location
Example:
interface view modify &

view_name = .gui.win.user_view &
new_view_name = .gui.win.user_view2 &
enabled = yes &
units = relative &
interface view modify &

location = 0.0, 0.0 &
height = .4 &
width = .4 &
eye = 0,0,2500 &
target = 0,0,0 &
up_vector = 0,0,1000
Description:

new_view_name A New View Specifies a new name for an existing view
enabled Boolean Activates the view
units Int_units Specifies the view size as pixel or relative to
Adams or custom window
the view
the view
location Real Specifies the location of the view on the dialog
box
height Real Specifies the height of the view in terms of
width Real Specifies the width of the view field in terms of
eye Location Specifies the camera position nad orientation
target Location Specifies the target location which should be
centered on the view window
up_vector Location Specifies the upward vector for the view
window to describe inclination
3. The size of the view window can be specified either in terms of number of pixels. Alternatively,
the size can also be stated as relative to the Adams or custom window
4. The vertical and horizontal resizing options are used to adjust the placement of the view window
Vert_resizing will place the view window on the top left corner of the Adams or custom window.
The location can also be specified from the top left corner by adjusting the parameter ‘location’
5. The size of the view window can be specified with respect to the custom of Adams window size
represents the height of the Adams or custom window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the view
field window to be one half as high as the Adams or custom window.
6. The ‘eye’ is similar to a camera position. The eye is specified by its x,y,z coordinates which
specifies the location from where the object is being viewed.
7. The parameter ‘target’ is the location to which is camera is targeted. The ‘target’ is also specified
by its x,y and z coordinates. This location will be positioned at the center of the view window to
be created.
8. The ‘up_vector’ determines the inclination of the of the camera or the upward direction of the
model. For example, setting the up_vector to 0,1000,0, the global y axis will be directed upwards
showing the front view of the object, if the eye is set at 0,0,0. Note that, if the eye is set at 0,0,0
which implies that the camera is set at oriGIn, it will not capture the object targeted at unless the
object is at sufficient distance in z direction.
9. The camera should be away from the object in the respective axis to view the object – specified
by parameter ‘eye’. The target location appears at the center of the view, thus if you target at the
center of a circular object, the object will be viewed with its center at the middle of the view
window. The inclination of viewing, which is similar to rotating an object, is achieved by setting
the up-vector in coordination with ‘eye’.
interface view undisplay

Allows you to close an existing view.
Adams/view has some preset views, viz., .gui.main.front, .gui.main.right. The user can create a custom
view with predefined orientation and display specifications, which can be created on the main view
window or a separate window. The view can be set up by parameters like eye, target, and up_vector. The
command closes an existing view.
Format:

Example:
interface view undisplay &

view_name = .gui.win.user_view
Description:

1. A view name is a string of characters that identifies a viewport or set of viewport attributes stored
2. The view can be closed by this command.
interface window create

Allows creation of a window. Windows and dialog boxes look similar, although they are quite different.
Windows usually stay on the screen for some time as you work in them, while dialog boxes come and go
as you need to enter data or access controls. Windows can contain toolbars and menu bars. Both windows
and dialog boxes contain other interface objects such as buttons, labels, and so on.
Format:

window_name= new_GI_window
enabled= boolean
help_text= String
units= int_units
vert_resizing= int v_resize
location= Real
height= Real
width= Real
title= String
icon_label= String
start_commands= String
finish_commands= String
decorate= yes/no
resizable= yes/no
width_minimum= real
width_maximum= real
height_minimum= real
height_maximum= real
grab_all_input= yes/no
Example:
interface window create &

window_name = my_window &
height = 1.0 &
width = 2.0 &
enabled = yes &
help_text= "My first window" &
width_minimum= 250 &
width_maximum= 500 &
title = "My window"
This will create a window having the title “My Window” with height =1.0[Half of the Adams View
window) and width=2.0(Same Width as Adams View window). The minimum width beyond which the
user will not be able to resize would be 250 and the maximum width would be 500. Since there is no
height minimum and maximum specified, the user can resize the window created to any size.
Description:

window_name String Specify the name of the new window created.
enabled Yes/no Specify whether the window created will be enabled or
not.
help_text String Specify the string that should be displayed on the Adams
View status bar when the mouse cursor is over the window
created.
documentation_text String Specify the documentation text associated with this
window.
units Relative/Pixel Specify whether the units used for the window
measurements will be in pixels or relative.
horiz_resizing ATTACH_LEFT/ Specify where the horizontal resizing should occur from.
ATTACH_RIGHT/
SCALE_CENTER/
EXPAND/
SCALE_ALL

vert_resizing ATTACH_TOP/AT Specify where the vertical resizing should occur from.
TACH_BOTTOM/
SCALE_CENTER/
EXPAND/SCALE_
ALL
location Real The real number should be greater than or equal to zero.
height, Real Specify a height for the info window. The value should be
a real number between 0.0 and 2.0, where 2.0 represents
the height of the Adams/View window. Therefore, a value
of 1.0 will set the info window to be one half as high as the
Adams/View window.
Width Real Specify a width for the info window. The value should be
a real number between 0.0 and 2.0, where 2.0 represents
the width of the Adams/View window. Therefore, a value
of 1.0 will set the info window to be one half as wide as
the Adams/View window.
title String This parameter allows the specification of the window
title.
icon_label String Specify the label for the icon.
start_commands String Specify the commands to be executed at the start of the
window creation.
finish_commands String Specify the commands to be executed at the end of the
window creation.
Decorate Yes/No
resizable Yes/No Specify whether this window can be resizable or not.
width_minimum Real Specify the minimum width beyond which the window
should not be allowed to resize.
width_maximum Real Specify the maximum width beyond which the window
should not be allowed to resize
height_minimum Real Specify the minimum height beyond which the window
height_maximum Real Specify the maximum height beyond which the window
grab_all_input Yes/No Default value will be No.
1. The title is a "quoted" character string that will be displayed at the top of the window. The title
will be scaled and centered automatically.
Titles need not be unique.A title may be arbitrarily long and a combination of letters of the
alphabet and numbers may be used.
interface window delete

Interface window delete will delete the specified window.
Format:

Window_name = existing GI_window
Example:
interface window delete &

Window_name = WIN_1
This command will delete the window Win_1
Description:

Window_name String Specify name of existing GI window to be deleted.
interface window display

Interface window display will display the specified window on the screen.
Format:

Window_name = existing GI_window
Parameters = string
Example:
interface window display &

Window_name = WIN_1
This command will display the window Win_1
Description:

Window_name String Specify name of existing GI window to be displayed.
Parameters String
interface window modify

Allows modification of a window. Windows and dialog boxes look similar, although they are quite
different. Windows usually stay on the screen for some time as you work in them, while dialog boxes
come and go as you need to enter data or access controls. Windows can contain toolbars and menu bars.
Both windows and dialog boxes contain other interface objects such as buttons, labels, and so on.
Format:

window_name= existing_GI_window
new_window_name = new name for the window
enabled= boolean
help_text= String
units= int_units
vert_resizing= int v_resize
location= Real
height= Real
width= Real
title= String
icon_label= String
start_commands= String
finish_commands= String
decorate= yes/no
resizable= yes/no
width_minimum= real
height_minimum= real
height_maximum= real
grab_all_input= yes/no
Example:
interface window modify &

window_name = MY_WINDOW &
new_window_name = MODIFIED_WINDOW &
height = 1.0 &
width = 2.0 &
enabled = yes &
help_text = "My first window" &
width_minimum = 250 &
width_maximum = 500 &
title = "My window"
This will modify the window having the title “My Window” with height =1.0[Half of the Adams View
window) and width=2.0(Same Width as Adams View window). The minimum width beyond which the
user will not be able to resize would be 250 and the maximum width would be 500. Since there is no
height minimum and maximum specified, the user can resize the window created to any size.
Description:

window_name String Specify the name of the new window created.
enabled Yes/no Specify whether the window created will be enabled
or not.
help_text String Specify the string that should be displayed on the
Adams View status bar when the mouse cursor is
over the window created.
documentation_text String Specify the documentation text associated with this
window.
units Relative/Pixel Specify whether the units used for the window
measurements will be in pixels or relative.
horiz_resizing, ATTACH_LEFT/ Specify where the horizontal resizing should occur
ATTACH_RIGHT/SCAL from.
E_CENTER/ EXPAND/
SCALE_ALL
vert_resizing ATTACH_TOP/ATTAC Specify where the vertical resizing should occur
H_BOTTOM/SCALE_C from.
ENTER/
EXPAND/SCALE_ALL

location Real The real number should be greater than or equal to
zero.
height Real Specify a height for the info window. The value
should be a real number between 0.0 and 2.0, where
2.0 represents the height of the Adams/View
window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the info
window to be one half as high as the Adams/View
window.
Width Real Specify a width for the info window. The value
should be a real number between 0.0 and 2.0, where
2.0 represents the width of the Adams/View
window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the info
window to be one half as wide as the Adams/View
window.
title String This parameter allows the specification of the
window title.
icon_label String Specify the label for the icon.
start_commands String Specify the commands to be executed at the start of
the window creation.
finish_commands String Specify the commands to be executed at the end of
the window creation.
Decorate Yes/No
resizable Yes/No Specify whether this window can be resizable or not.
width_minimum Real Specify the minimum width beyond which the
window should not be allowed to resize.
width_maximum Real Specify the maximum width beyond which the
window should not be allowed to resize
height_minimum Real Specify the minimum height beyond which the
height_maximum Real Specify the maximum height beyond which the
grab_all_input Yes/No Default value will be No.
1. The title is a "quoted" character string that will be displayed at the top of the window. The title
will be scaled and centered automatically.
Titles need not be unique.A title may be arbitrarily long and a combination of letters of the
alphabet and numbers may be used.
interface window undisplay

Allows closing of an existing window
The interface window created can be closed by using this command.
Format:

window_name = an existing GI_window
Example:
interface window undisplay &

window_name = .gui.win
interface 295
interface write
interface write
Allows the writing a set of commands for creating a GUI
The graphic user interface (gui) is created with a set of commands. The GUI may be a window or a dialog
box created. The set of commands used to create the GUI are written to a file using the ‘write’ command
Format:
interface write
gui_name = an existing GI_gui
file_name = string
Example:
interface write &

gui_name = .gui.dbox &
file_name = "c:/gui_text.txt"
Description:

gui_name An Existing GI_gui Specify the name of GUI for which the commands are written
file_name String Specifies the a remote file address to which the commands are to
be written
1. Any GUI, e.g. a toolbar, window, dialog box etc, created using a set of commands. These
commands can be written to a file, where the file_name specifies the name of the file that is to be
read, written, or executed. The proper extension is the default but can be overridden by simply
supplying a different extension. You do not need to enclose the file name in quotes if it only
contains alpha-numeric characters and starts with a letter. If you want to include other characters,
such as a '.' for an extension or '/' or ‘[]' for directory paths, you must enclose the name in quotes.
interface write
library 1
library
library copy
library copy
Allows you to copy an existing library.
The command allows copying an existing library to a new library.
Format:
library copy
library_name = an existing library
new_library_name = a new library
Example:
library copy &

library_name = .MDI.image &
new_library_name = new_images
Description:

library_name An Existing Library Specifies the name of an existing library
new_library_name A New Library Specifies a new name for the copied library
The existing library can be copied to a new library by this command, by specifying the ‘library_name’
and the ‘new_library_name’.
library 3
library create
library create
Allows you to create a new library.
The command allows creation of a new library in the database.
Format:
library create
library_name = a new library
Example:
library create &

library_name = .materials.LIBRARY1
Description:

library_name A New Library Specifies the name of a new library
A new library can be created by using the command, ‘library create’.
library delete
library delete
Allows you to delete an existing library.
The command allows deletion of an existing library.
Format:
library delete
library_name = an existing library
Example:
library delete &

library_name = new_images
Description:

The existing library can be deleted by using the command, and specifying the ‘library_name’.
library 5
library modify
library modify
Allows you to modify an existing library.
The command allows modifying an existing library to a new library.
Format:
library modify
library_name= an existing library
new_library_name = a new library
Example:
library modify &

library_name = .materials.LIBRARY1 &
new_library_name = library2
Description:

new_library_name A New Library Specifies a new name for the existing library
The existing library can be modified to a new library by this command, by specifying the ‘library_name’
and the ‘new_library_name’.
library modify
list_info 1
list_info
list_info aggregate_mass
Computes the total mass and inertia properties of the requested parts.
Format:
part_names = existing body
relative_to = existing model/part/marker
brief = on/off
write_to_terminal = on/off
file_name = string
Example:
list_info aggregate_mass &

brief = on &
write_to_terminal = off &
file_name = “c:\AView\model_info.txt”
This will display the mass and inertia properties of the model in the file model_info.txt.
Description:

part_names Existing body Specifies the names of the parts to be included in
the aggregate mass calculation.
model_name Existing model Specifies the name of the model to be included in
the aggregate mass calculation.
respect to.
brief On/off Specifies whether to use the brief form (default)
or an extended form of the requested information
to be displayed.
list_info 3

write_to_terminal On/off Specify if the information requested is to be sent
to the informational window or not.
file_name String Specify that the information requested is to be
sent to a file with the name specified with the
parameter.
Cautions:
1. The ground part, and any part with zero mass will be ignored.
list_info analysis
list_info analysis
Specifies information about the analysis within the model such as the result set, graphics file, result file,
request file, parent etc.
Format:
list_info analysis
brief= on/off
write_to_terminal= on/off
file_name= string
Example:
list_info analysis &

brief = on
If no parameters are specified, the above command will display brief information about all the analysis
existing within the current model. If brief was turned off then it would display the details of all the steps
of the internal solver.
Object Name : .model_1.Last_Run
Object Type : Analysis
Parent Type : Model
TITLE : 'None'
DATE : 2006-07-10 14:15:26
GRAPHICS FILE : ''
RESULTS FILE : ''
REQUEST FILE : ''
Result_Set:
PART_2_XFORM ADAMS ID: None TYPE: Result_Set
PART_3_XFORM ADAMS ID: None TYPE: Result_Set
JOINT_1 ADAMS ID: None TYPE: Result_Set
JOINT_2 ADAMS ID: None TYPE: Result_Set
list_info 5
list_info analysis
Description:

Femdata_name Existing femdata Specify an existing femdata name
Brief On/off Specify whether the information needs to be specified
in brief or not.If brief is turned off, it will display the
details of all the steps in the internal solver.
Write_to_terminal On/off Specify whether writing the information to the
terminal is necessary.
File_name String Specify a location and name of file to which the
information needs to be written.
Tips:
1. Typing ? after file_name parameter will open the browse window in Windows platform making
it easier to specify the file to which the information would be written into.
list_info constraint
lists information about the current state of the constraint in the system.
Format:
gear_name= existing gear name
coupler_name= existing coupler name
jprim_name = existing jprim name
point_curve_name= existing point_curve name
curve_curve_name= existing curve curve name
motion_name= existing motion name
user_constraint_name= existing user constraint name
brief= on/off
file_name= String
Example:
list_info constraint &

point_curve_name = PTCV_1 &
brief = off
This command will display the detailed information about the specified joint and the point curve and its
dependants on the screen in the information dialog window .
Description:

constraint_name Existing constraint name Specify an existing constraint name.
brief Yes/No Specify whether you want the marker
information in brief or not.
joint_name Existing joint name Specify an existing joint name
list_info 7

gear_name Existing gear name Specify an existing gear name
coupler_name Existing coupler name Specify an existing coupler name.
jprim_name Existing jprim Specify an existing jprim name
point_curve_name Existing point curve name Specify an existing point curve name.
curve_curve_name Existing curve curve name Specify an existing curve curve name.
motion_name Existing motion name Specify an existing motion name
user_constraint_name Existing user constraint Specify an existing user constraint name.
name
write_to_terminal Yes/No Specify whether you want the constraint
information to be displayed on the terminal.
file_name String Specify filename in which you want to save the
constraint information.
1. If the parameter “Brief” is turned on then only the information about the constraint is displayed
such as location and orientation without specifying the information on the dependants. If “Brief”
is turned off then the information about the dependents is also displayed.
Caution:
1. The directory which you specify the file_name should exist. If it does not then the constraint
information will not be copied into the specified filename.
Tips:
1. To specify file_name parameter, typing “?” after the “file_name=” will open the Browse window
using which the required filename can be specified.
2. The information in list_info constraint can be sent to the information window, a file, or both.
list_info curves
list_info curves
Format:
list_info curves
curve_name = existing plot curve name
brief= on/off
file_name= string
Example:
list_info curves &

Brief = on
If no parameters are specified, the above command will display brief information about all the plot curve
names existing within the current model.
Description:

Curve_name Existing plot curve name Specify an existing plot curve name.
Brief On/off Specify whether the information needs to be
specified in brief or not.
Tips:
list_info 9
list_info data_element
Format:
data_element_name= existing data element name
curve_name= existing curve name
spline_name= existing spline name
variable_name= existing variable name
array_name= existing array name
matrix_name= existing matrix name
plant_input_name= existing plant input
plant_output_name= existing plant output
plant_state_name= existing plant state name
string_name= existing ADAMS string name
brief= on/off
file_name= String
Example:
list_info data_element &

Curve_name = curve_1 &
Write_to_terminal = off &
File_name = “c:\temp.txt” &
Brief = on
The above statements will write the brief information about the curve data element in the file specified.
The information window will not be displayed on the terminal as the write_to_terminal parameter is
turned off.
Description:

data_element_name Existing data element name Specify an existing data element.
curve_name Existing curve name Specify an existing curve name

spline_name Existing spline name Specify an existing spline name
variable_name Existing Adams variable Specify an existing variable name
array_name Existing Adams array name Specify an existing array name
matrix_name Existing matrix name Specify an existing matrix name
plant_input_name Existing plant input name Specify an existing plant input name
plant_output_name Existing plant output name Specify an existing plant output name
plant_state_name Existing plant state name Specify an existing plant state name
string_name Existing string name Specify an existing string name
brief On/off Specifies whether the information
required is brief or not.
write_to_terminal On/Off Specifies whether the information has
to be displayed on the terminal.
file_name String Specify filename into which the
information should be written into
list_info 11
list_info defaults
list_info defaults
The LIST_INFO DEFAULTS command is used to list information about the current settings of the
systems defaults. The information can be sent to the information window, a file, or both.
Format:
list_info defaults
brief = on/off
file_name = string specifying the file path
Example:
list_info defaults &

brief = on &
file_name = "C:\info.txt"
Description:

brief ON_OFF Specifies whether to use the brief form (default) or an
extended form of the requested information to be
displayed.
write_to_terminal ON_OFF Specify if the information requested is to be sent to the
informational window or not.
file_name STRING Specify that the information requested is to be sent to a file
with the name specified with the parameter.
1. The ‘write_to_terminal’ parameter is most likely be used in conjunction with the FILE_NAME
parameter to get the information put to a file only.
list_info eigen_values
List information about all the eigen solution's predicted eigenvalues. You may instruct Adams/View to
print this information to the "Info Window" or to a file or both.
Format:
brief = on/off
Example:
list_info eigen_values &

eigen_solution_name = eigen_1 &
brief = on &
Description:

eigen_solution_name AN EXISTING Specifies an existing eigen_solution.
EIGEN
displayed.
file_name STRING Specify that the information requested is to be sent to a
file with the name specified with the parameter.
1. The information includes:
• MODE_NUMBER -the sequential number of the mode that was predicted by the eigen solution.
• FREQUENCY -the natural frequency corresponding to the mode (i.e. the eigenvalue)
list_info 13
• DAMPING -the damping ratio for the mode (the log decrement is another way to represent this
quantity).
• EIGENVALUES -list the real and imaginary part of the eigenvalue.
2. You may identify a eigen_solution by typing its name. Specifies an EIGEN_SOLUTION in a
existing analysis. If an eigen_solution is available by default, you may identify it by entering its
name only. The EIGEN_SOLUTION must be in an existing analysis that is associated to an
existing model. Therefore, any reference to the EIGEN_SOLUTION can include the model and
analysis name. For example, assume you have read a result file called "SECOND_GEAR.RES",
and this result file contains the analysis "SECOND_GEAR". If you wish to refer to the
EIGEN_SOLUTION named "EIG1" for the model "TRANSMISSION", enter
analysis name that the result set came from (or is stored under). The eigen_solution name begins
with the letters EIG and ends with the eigen_solution ID number. You must separate multiple
eigen_solution names by commas. If the eigen_solution is visible in one of your views, you may
identify it by picking on any of the graphics associated with it.
Tips:
1. If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the eigen_solutions available by default.
list_info entity
list_info entity
Lists information about the variables’s in the current model.
Format:
list_info entity
Entity_name = Existing entity name
Type_filter = Object type
Brief = on/off
Write_to_terminal = on/off
File_name = string
Example:
list_info entity &

entity_name= MACRO_1
type_filter = macro
brief= off
write_to_terminal = on
file_name= "C:\Documents and Settings\aview\My Documents\my_file"
This will display the following information on the terminal as well as in the file “my_file”,
Object Name : .MACRO_1
Object Type : Macro
User Command : None specified, using the macro name
'MACRO_1'
Wrap in Undo : No
Help : None specified
Commands :
! $FIRST_MARKER: T=marker
! $SECOND_MARKER: T=marker
! $NEW_MARKER_NAME: T=new_marker
!
marker create marker_name=$NEW_MARKER_NAME &
location = (( ($FIRST_MARKER.loc_x)+($SECOND_MARKER.loc_x)
)/2 ), &
(( ($FIRST_MARKER.loc_y)+($SECOND_MARKER.loc_y) )/2 ), &
(( ($FIRST_MARKER.loc_z)+($SECOND_MARKER.loc_z) )/2 ) &
orientation = 0,0,0 &
If brief is turned on then the dependant information will not be displayed.
list_info 15
list_info entity
Description:

Entity_name Existing entity name Specify an existing entity whose information has
to be listed. This entity could be a macro, gui ,
icons, plots, models etc.
Type_filter Object type Specify an object type to be used as a filter. All
entities of this object type will be displayed in the
information dialog box.
Brief On/off Specify whether the variable information
required is in brief or not.
Write_to_terminal On/off Specify whether the information has to be
displayed on the terminal.
File_name String Specify filename in which the information needs
to be written.
Tips:
1. Typing “?” after “file_name=” parameter will open the file browse window in Windows
environment, making it easier to specify the file name.
list_info executive_control equilibrium_parameters

Format:

model_name= existing model name
brief= on/off
file_name= string
Example:
Without specifying any parameters, the command above will display the following:
Equilibrium Analysis Settings For Model: .MODEL_2
Dynamic : No
Alimit : 10.0 deg
Error : 1.0E-004
Imbalance : 1.0E-004 newton
Maxit : 25
Pattern For Jacobian : Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes
Stability : 1.0E-005
Tlimit : 20.0
Global Damping : 0.0
Max Settling Time : 100.0 sec
Acceleration Error : 2.0E-002
Kinetic Energy Error : 2.0E-002
Static Method : Original
It will take the default model open as the argument and shows the equilibrium parameters for that.
Description:

Model_name Existing model Specify an existing model name
Brief On/off Specify whether the information needs to be specified in
brief or not.
Write_to_terminal On/off Specify whether writing the information to the terminal is
necessary.
list_info 17
Tips:
list_info executive_control initial_conditions_parameters
list_info executive_control
initial_conditions_parameters
Allows you to print out information on the parameters which control the ADAMS initial conditions
analysis. You may instruct Adams/View to print this information to the "Info Window" or to a file.
Format:

model_name = an existing model name
brief = on/off
Example:
list_info executive_control initial_conditions_parameters &

brief = on &
Description:

model_name AN EXISTING Specifies an existing model.
MODEL
displayed.
1. Initial conditions parameters include error tolerances and other parameters that control the initial
conditions analysis.
list_info 19
2. You would set these parameters only when requesting a dynamic, static equilibrium, or quasi-
static equilibrium analysis, and wish to change one or more of the tolerances for the initial
conditions analysis.
3. ADAMS automatically does an initial conditions analysis. An initial conditions analysis is not
necessary when the system has zero degrees of freedom because, in that case the kinematics of
the system fully determine its configuration.
4. The initial conditions analysis ensures that the system satisfies all constraints within the system.
If necessary ADAMS moves parts until both parts of each joint are in contact. This analysis
involves three separate phases. First, ADAMS makes the displacements between all parts and all
joints in the system physically consistent. This requires the use of Newton-Raphson iteration to
solve a set of nonlinear algebraic equations. Once the displacements are consistent, ADAMS
makes the velocities physically consistent. Because this requires solving a set of linear equations,
iteration is not necessary. Finally, ADAMS calculates consistent accelerations and forces. This
solution also requires solving a set of linear equations.
with it. You need not separate multiple model picks by commas.
Tips:
associated with it.
list_info executive_control integrator_parameters

displays the information on the integrator parameters such as integrator type, formulation, jacobian
pattern, etc.
Format:

brief= on/off
file_name= string
Example:
Numerical Integration Settings For Model: .MODEL_2

Integrator Type : gstiff
Formulation : i3
Error Tolerance : 1.0E-003
Pattern For Jacobian : Yes, No, No, No, Yes, No, No, No, Yes, No
Maxit Corrector Iterations : 10
Hinit Time Step : 0.0 sec
Hmin Time Step : 0.0 sec
Hmax Time Step : 0.0 sec
Adaptivity : 0.0
Scale : 1.0, 1.0, 1.0E-003, 1.0, 1.0
KMax Integrator Order : 12
Interpolate : No
Reconcile : all
Repartition Threshold : 1.0E-002, 1.0E+012
Corrector : original
Alpha : -0.3
Beta : 0.36
Gamma : 0.7
It will take the default model open as the argument and show the equilibrium parameters for that.
Description:

list_info 21

Write_to_terminal On/off Specify whether writing the information to
the terminal is necessary.
File_name String Specify a location and name of file to which
the information needs to be written.
Tips:
list_info executive_control kinematics_parameters

Allows you to print out information on the current values of the parameter which control an ADAMS
kinematic analysis. You may instruct Adams/View to print this information to the "Info Window" or to a
file.
Format:

brief = on/off
Example:
list_info executive_control kinematics_parameters &

brief = on &
Description:

MODEL
displayed.
list_info 23
1. Kinematics parameters include error tolerances and other parameters for kinematic analyses. You
would set these parameters only when you are requesting a kinematic analysis and you want to
change one or more of the tolerances and parameters from the default values. A kinematic analysis
is only appropriate when a system has zero degrees of freedom. A kinematic analysis solves for
the displacements, velocities, accelerations, and forces (if any) at a series of points in time.
2. To find the displacements, ADAMS uses Newton-Raphson iteration to solve a nonlinear set of
algebraic equations. After finding the displacements, ADAMS solves linear equations without
iteration to find the velocities, accelerations, and forces. ADAMS repeats this procedure at
successively later times until it obtains results over the period of time specified in the ADAMS
SIMULATE command.
list_info executive_control numeric_integration_parameters
numeric_integration_parameters
Format:
numeric_integration_parameters
brief= on/off
file_name= string
Description:

Tips:
list_info 25
list_info executive_control sensor

The LIST_INFO SENSOR command is used to list information about a sensor. The information can be
sent to the information window, a file, or both.
Format:

brief = on/off
Example:
list_info executive_control sensor &

brief = on &
Description:

MODEL
displayed.
Tips:
associated with it.
list_info 27
list_info executive_control solver_parameters

Allows you to print out information about the what integrator will be used when you submit an analysis
from Adams/View.
Format:

brief = on/off
Example:
list_info executive_control solver_parameters &

brief = on &
Description:

MODEL
extended form of the requested information to be displayed.
1. You can select between the harwell and calahan integration solvers in ADAMS. This selection is
made on a model by model basis. Therefore, each time you submit the model the chosen solver
will be used until this command is used to select the alternative. For a complete description of
these solvers see the ADAMS documentation.
Tips:
associated with it.
list_info 29
list_info files
list_info files
List information about the ADAMS files that have been read. It does not list the command files or the
user data files.
Format:
list_info files
graphics_file = an existing analysis
request_file = an existing analysis
results_file = an existing analysis
brief = on/off
Example:
list_info files &

analysis_name = Last_Run &
graphics_file = Last_Run &
request_file = Last_Run &
results_file = Last_Run &
brief = on &
Description:

analysis_name AN EXISTING Specifies an existing model.
ANALYSIS
graphics_file AN EXISTING The GRAPHICS keyword indicates that the file to be read
ANALYSIS into Adams/View is a graphics file (The default file
extension is .GRA) that has been generated by ADAMS.
request_file AN EXISTING The REQUEST keyword indicates that the file to be read
ANALYSIS into Adams/View is a request file (.REQ) that has been
generated by ADAMS
list_info files

results_file AN EXISTING The RESULTS keyword indicates that the file to be read
ANALYSIS into Adams/View is a results file (.RES) that has been
generated by ADAMS.
displayed.
• name: the name of the file specified on the file read command, minus the path and extension.
• type: request, results, or graphics steps the number of time steps
• date: the internal time stamp placed in the file by ADAMS corresponding to when the file was
created.
• title: the internal title placed in the file by ADAMS
An analysis may be picked from the screen if you have read an ADAMS Graphics file, and use
the GRAPHIC_RESULTS command to display it. If the analysis is not visible on the screen, you
displayed. You may have explicitly named the analysis when you created it by reading one or
more ADAMS output files. By default, the name of the analysis is the root name of the ADAMS
output files. If you created the analysis by reading an ADAMS Graphics file, for instance, the
analysis name is
the name of the graphics file without the '.gra' extension. You must separate multiple analysis
names by commas. If the analysis is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking
on any of the graphics associated with it. You need not separate multiple analysis picks by
commas.
3. When a graphics file is read by Adams/View a new analysis run is created and the information
found in the graphics file is stored under the analysis run name. The default name of the analysis
run will be the name of the graphics file excluding the extension.
4. When a request file is read by Adams/View a new analysis run is created. Each block of data in
the request file that corresponds to a REQUEST statement in the ADAMS input data is stored as
result set in the analysis run. The default name of the analysis run will be the name of the request
file excluding the extension. This defaults analysis name can be overridden using the file_name
parameter. The the name of each result set will be "req" with the request statement ID appended
to it. For example, REQUEST/1508 would produce a result set name of "req1508".
list_info 31
list_info files
5. When a results file is read by Adams/View a new analysis run is created. Each block of data in
the results file corresponds to an ADAMS entity like PART JOINT,
BUSHING, etc. The data corresponding to these entities is stored as result set in the analysis run.
The default name of the analysis run will be the name of the results file excluding the extension.
This defaults analysis name can be overridden using the file_name parameter. The the name of
each result set will be the first three letters of the entity name with the entity statement ID number
appended to it. For example, PART/101 would produce a result set name of "par101".
Tips:
1. You may get a list of analysis by typing a "?" in response to a parameter that requires an analysis
name be entered.
list_info force
list_info force
This command is used to display information about the force on the terminal or in a file.
Format:
list_info force
force_name = existing force name
single_component_force_name = existing single component force name
force_vector_name = existing force vector name
torque_vector_name = existing torque vector name
general_force_name = existing general force name
multi_point_force_name = existing multi_point force
gravity_field_name = existing gravity field
beam_name = existing beam name
bushing_name = existing bushing name
field_name = existing field name
spring_damper_name = existing spring damper name,
brief = on/off
file_name = string
Example:
list_info force &

force_name = SFORCE_1 &
brief = on &
The following will be displayed on the information window:

Object Name : .model_1.SFORCE_1
Object Type : Single_Component_Force
Parent Type : Model
Adams ID : 1
Active : NO_OPINION
I Marker : .model_1.PART_6.MARKER_16
J Marker : .model_1.ground.MARKER_17
Length : None
Mode : Translational
list_info 33
list_info force
Actiononly : TRUE
Function : 2.7
Description:

force_name Existing force name Specify an existing force name
single_component_force_name Existing single Specify an existing single component force
component force
force_vector_name Existing force vector Specify an existing force vector
torque_vector_name Existing torque vector Specify an existing torque vector
general_force_name Existing general force Specify an existing general force
multi_point_force_name Existing multi point Specify an existing multi point force
force
gravity_field_name Existing gravity field Specify an existing gravity field
beam_name Existing beam name Specify an existing beam name
bushing_name Existing bushing name Specify an existing bushing name
field_name Existing field name Specify an existing field name
spring_damper_name Existing spring damper Specify an existing spring damper
brief On/off Specify whether the information is required
in brief or not.
write_to_terminal On/off Specify whether the information has to be
displayed on the terminal
file_name String Specify the name of the filename to which
the information should be written to.
1. If the parameter brief is turned on then only the information about the force is displayed without
specifying the information on the I and the J marker. If brief is turned off then the information
about the I and J marker is also displayed.
Caution:
1. The directory which you specify the file_name should exist. If it does not then the constraint
list_info geometry
list_info geometry
Will display information about the geometry. This information can be displayed either on the terminal or
in a file or both.
Format:
list_info geometry
geometry_name= existing geometry_name
arc_name= existing arc_name
block_name= existing block_name
circle_name= existing circle_name
cylinder_name= existing cylinder_name
frustum_name= existing frustrum name
force_name= existing force_name
outline_name= existing outline_name
polyline_name= existing polyline_name
spring_damper_name= existing spring_damper name
gstring_name= existing gstring name
ellipsoid_name= existing ellipsoid name
torus_name= existing torus name
revolution_name= existing revolution name
extrusion_name= existing extrusion name
plane_name= existing plane name
brief= on/off
file_name= string
Example:
list_info geometry &

Geometry_name = LINK_1 &
Brief = off &
Write_to_terminal = on &
File_name = ” c:\geometry_info.txt”
list_info 35
list_info geometry
This will display information about the Link geometry as shown below on the terminal as well as the file
“c:\geometry_info.txt”
Object Name : .model_1.PART_5.LINK_4

Object Type : Link
Parent Type : Part
J Marker : .model_1.PART_5.MARKER_6
Length : 282.8427124746 mm
Width : 28.2842712475 (28.2842712475mm) mm
Depth : 14.1421356237 (14.1421356237mm) mm
Local :
Location : -50.0, 50.0, 0.0 (mm, mm, mm)
Orientation : 315.0, 0.0, 0.0 (deg)
Global :
Location : -50.0, 50.0, 0.0 (mm, mm, mm)
J Marker : .model_1.PART_5.MARKER_6
Local :
Location : 150.0, -150.0, 0.0 (mm, mm, mm)
Global :
Location : 150.0, -150.0, 0.0 (mm, mm, mm)
Comments : None
Attributes: Value: Inherited: From:

Active NO_OPINION
Colors
Line WHITE.......CYAN.........model_1.PART_5
Edge RED.........CYAN.........model_1.PART_5
Face WHITE.......CYAN.........model_1.PART_5
Text WHITE.......CYAN.........model_1.PART_5
Visibility NO_OPINION
Name Visibility NO_OPINION..OFF..........model_1.PART_5
Render FILLED

geometry_name Existing geometry name Specify name of existing geometry.
arc_name Existing arc name Specify name of existing arc.
block_name Existing block name Specify name of existing block name
circle_name Existing circle name Specify name of circle name
cylinder_name Existing cylinder name Specify name of cylinder name
frustum_name Existing frustrum name Specify name of frustrum name
list_info geometry

force_name Existing force name Specify name of force name
outline_name Existing outline name Specify name of outline name
polyline_name Existing polyline name Specify name of polyline name
spring_damper_name Existing spring damper Specify name of spring damper name
name
gstring_name Existing gstring name Specify name of gstring name
ellipsoid_name Existing ellipsoid name Specify name of ellipsoid name
torus_name Existing torus name Specify name of torus name
revolution_name Existing revolution name Specify name of revolution name
extrusion_name Existing extrusion name Specify name of extrusion name
plane_name Existing plane name Specify name of plane name
brief On/off Specify whether the information has to be
displayed in brief.
write_to_terminal On/off Specify whether the information has to be
displayed on the terminal.
file_name String Specify name of filename in which the
information has to be written into.
1. If the parameter “brief” = ON, then the information of the dependants of the geometry will not be
displayed. If brief is OFF then the information of the geometry as well as its dependants is
displayed.
Tips:
1. IF no parameters are specified to the list_info geometry command, it will display the information
of all the geometry objects in the current model.
2. On typing ? after the “file_name =”, the file browse window will appear allowing the file to be
specified.
list_info 37
list_info group
list_info group
Lists information about the groups in the current model.
Format:
list_info group
group_name = Existing group name
Brief = on/off
File_name = string
Example:
list_info group &

group_name= GROUP_1 &
brief= off &
write_to_terminal = on &
file_name= "C:\My Documents\my_file"
Object Name : .model_1.GROUP1
Object Type : Group
Parent Type : Model
Objects :
PART_2 (Part)
PART_3 (Part)
Object Name : .SELECT_LIST

Object Type : Group
Objects :
MARKER_8 (Marker)
MARKER_8 above was displayed because the parameter “brief” was turned OFF and MARKER_8 was
a dependant on the part in the group. If brief is turned on then the dependant information will not be
displayed.
list_info group
Description:

Group_name Existing group Specify an existing group whose information has to be
name listed.
Brief On/off Specify whether the group information required is in
brief or not.
Write_to_terminal On/off Specify whether the information has to be displayed
on the terminal.
File_name String Specify filename in which the information needs to be
written.
Tips:
list_info 39
list_info linear_mode_shapes
List the mode shapes for the model's bodies and equations for a linear analysis made during the
simulation.
Format:
brief = on/off
Example:
list_info linear_mode_shapes &

eigen_solution_name = eigen_1 &
brief = on &
Description:

eigen_solution_name AN EXISTING Specifies an existing eigen_solution.
EIGEN
displayed.
1. The object type and ID number of all the objects in the mode shape are given, followed by the
coordinates of the object's mode shape, labeled with the coordinate's name.
2. You may identify a eigen_solution by typing its name. Specifies an EIGEN_SOLUTION in a

existing analysis. If an eigen_solution is available by default, you may identify it by entering its
name only. The EIGEN_SOLUTION must be in an existing analysis that is associated to an
existing model. Therefore, any reference to the EIGEN_SOLUTION can include the model and
analysis name. For example, assume you have read a result file called "SECOND_GEAR.RES",
and this result file contains the analysis "SECOND_GEAR". If you wish to refer to the
EIGEN_SOLUTION named "EIG1" for the model "TRANSMISSION", enter
analysis name that the result set came from (or is stored under).
The eigen_solution name begins with the letters EIG and ends with the eigen_solution ID number.
You must separate multiple eigen_solution names by commas. If the eigen_solution is visible in
one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics associated with it.
Tips:
1. If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the eigen_solutions available by default.
list_info 41
list_info macro
list_info macro
Lists information about the macro’s in the current model.
Format:
list_info macro
Macro_name = Existing macro
Brief = on/off
File_name = string
Example:
list_info macro &

macro_name= MACRO_1 &
brief= off &
Object Name : .MACRO_1
Object Type : Macro
User Command : None specified, using the macro name
'MACRO_1'
Wrap in Undo : No
Help : None specified
Commands :
! $FIRST_MARKER: T=marker
! $SECOND_MARKER: T=marker
! $NEW_MARKER_NAME: T=new_marker
!
marker create marker_name=$NEW_MARKER_NAME &
location = (( ($FIRST_MARKER.loc_x)+($SECOND_MARKER.loc_x) )/2 ), &
(( ($FIRST_MARKER.loc_y)+($SECOND_MARKER.loc_y) )/2 ), &
(( ($FIRST_MARKER.loc_z)+($SECOND_MARKER.loc_z) )/2 ) &
list_info macro
Description:

Macro_name Existing macro name Specify an existing macro whose information has to be
listed.
Brief On/off Specify whether the macro information required is in
brief or not.
Write_to_terminal On/off Specify whether the information has to be displayed on
the terminal.
written.
Tips:
list_info 43
list_info marker
list_info marker
lists information about the current state of the markers in the system.
Format:
list_info marker
marker_name= existing_marker
brief= on/off
file_name= string
Example:
:
list_info marker &

Marker_name = MARKER_1 &
Brief = on &
Write_to_terminal = off &
File_name = “c:\info\information”
This command will give the brief information about the marker_1 in the file specified.
Object Name : .model_1.PART_2.MARKER_1

Object Type : Marker
Parent Type : Part
Adams ID : 1
Active : NO_OPINION
Local :
Location : -500.0, 300.0, 0.0 (mm, mm, mm)
Global :
Location : -500.0, 300.0, 0.0 (mm, mm, mm)
If the Write_to_terminal parameter is turned on then the marker information is displayed on the terminal
as well.
list_info marker
Description:

marker_name Existing marker Specify the marker name you want information
to be displayed about.
brief Yes/No Specify whether you want the marker
information in brief or not.
write_to_terminal Yes/No Specify whether you want the marker
information to be displayed on the terminal.
file_name String Specify filename in which you want to save the
marker information.
1. If the parameter “Brief” is turned on then only the information about the marker is displayed such
as location and orientation without specifying the information on the markers dependants. If
“Brief” is turned off then the information about the marker dependents is also displayed.
Example of list_info marker with Brief = on
Parent Type : Part
Adams ID : 1
Active : NO_OPINION
Local :
Location : -500.0, 300.0, 0.0 (mm, mm, mm)
Global :
Location : -500.0, 300.0, 0.0 (mm, mm, mm)
Example of list_info marker with Brief=off
Parent Type : Part
Adams ID : 1
Active : NO_OPINION
Local :
Location : -500.0, 300.0, 0.0 (mm, mm, mm)
Global :
Location : -500.0, 300.0, 0.0 (mm, mm, mm)
Marker's Dependents:
LINK_1 ADAMS ID: 0 TYPE: Link
Comments : None
Attributes: Value: Inherited: From:

Active NO_OPINION
list_info 45
list_info marker
Colors
Line WHITE.......RED..........model_1.PART_2
Edge RED.........RED..........model_1.PART_2
Face WHITE.......RED..........model_1.PART_2
Text WHITE.......RED..........model_1.PART_2
Visibility NO_OPINION
Name Visibility NO_OPINION..OFF..........model_1.PART_2
Icon Size 50.0
Caution:
1. The directory which you specify the file_name should exist. If it does not then the marker
Tips:
1. To specify file_name parameter, typing “?” after the “file_name=” will open the Browse window
using which the required filename can be specified.
2. The information in list_info marker can be sent to the information window, a file, or both.
list_info measure
list_info measure
List the distance between a marker and ground, or between two markers. The distance can be listed
relative to ground or a third marker.
The magnitude, X component, Y component, and the Z component are listed.
If the J_MARKER_NAME parameter is specified, the distance will be between the I and the J marker,
otherwise the distance will be from the I marker to ground.
If the R_MARKER_NAME parameter is specified the data will be relative to it, otherwise the data will
be relative to ground.
Because the location of the markers is time dependent, you can specify the time, frame_number, or
configuration of the model that the measurements are to be taken.
The information can be sent to the information window, a file, or both.
Format:
list_info measure
r_marker_name= existing marker
model_name= existing model
Configuration= display_frame
time= real
frame_number= integer
brief= on/off
file_name= string
Example:
list_info measure &

j_marker_name = MARKER_6 &
brief= off
list_info 47
list_info measure
This will measure the distance between MARKER_5 and MARKER_6 relative to the ground. The
following information will be displayed in the information window.
Measurements for the model:.model_1
The distance between MARKER_5 and MARKER_6 is:
MAG = 492.4428900898 mm
X = -200.0 mm
Y = 450.0 mm
Z = 0.0 mm
The angular offsets between MARKER_5 and MARKER_6 are:
ANG1 = 0.0 deg
ANG2 = 0.0 deg
ANG3 = 0.0 deg
Description:

i_marker_name Existing marker To specify the first of a pair of markers that will be
involved in the distance calculation.
j_marker_name Existing marker To specify the second of a pair of markers that will be
involved in the distance calculation.
r_marker_name Existing marker To specify a marker the distance calculation is to be
relative to.
model_name Existing model Specifies an existing model.
analysis_name Existing analysis name Specifies an existing analysis.
configuration MODEL_INPUT/EQUIL This parameter is used to specify what output frame,
IBRIUM/ FORWARD/ or output time step, of the simulation results is to be
BACKWARD displayed for the single_frame_display command.
Time Real The TIME parameter allows you to identify which
frame number (ADAMS simulation output time step)
at which to configure the model in the
SINGLE_FRAME_DISPLAY command.
frame_number integer To specify the frame number (ADAMS simulation
output time step) at which to configure a model during
the single_frame_display command.
brief On/off Specifies whether to use the brief form (default) or an
displayed.
write_to_terminal On/off Specify if the information requested is to be sent to the
file_name String Specify that the information requested is to be sent to
a file with the name specified with the parameter.
list_info measure
1. The I_MARKER_NAME parameter is used with the LIST_INFO MEASURE command to list
the distance between two markers. The I_MARKER_NAME is the marker that the measurement
is from.
The I_MARKER_NAME parameter is a required parameter and a legal marker name must be
entered.
It Specifies an existing marker.
2. The J_MARKER_NAME parameter is used with the LIST_INFO MEASURE command to list
the distance between two markers. The J_MARKER_NAME is the marker that the measurement
is "to".
The J_MARKER_NAME parameter is a required parameter and a legal marker name must be
entered.
It specifies an existing marker.
3. The R_MARKER_NAME parameter is used with the LIST_INFO MEASURE command to list
the distance between two markers. This means that the output from the measurement calculations
will be in a coordinate system based on the definition (orientation) of the R_MARKER_NAME.
The R_MARKER_NAME parameter is an optional parameter and if not entered the measurement
will be relative to the global (ground) coordinate system. If the R_MARKER_NAME parameter
is entered a legal marker name must be entered.
It specifies an existing marker.
4. You may identify a marker/model by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the marker/model is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it
convenient to type the name even if the marker is displayed.
If you created the marker/model by reading an ADAMS data set or graphics file, the marker name
is the letters MAR/ANA/MODEL followed by the ADAMS data set marker ID number. The
name of ADAMS MARKER/101 is MAR101, for example. If you created the marker/model
during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that time.
If a marker/model is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is
You must separate multiple marker/model names by commas.
If the marker/model is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on it.
5. An analysis may be picked from the screen if you have read an ADAMS Graphics file, and use
the GRAPHIC_RESULTS command to display it. If the analysis is not visible on the screen, you
displayed.
You may have explicitly named the analysis when you created it by reading one or more ADAMS
output files. By default, the name of the analysis is the root name of the ADAMS output files. If
you created the analysis by reading an ADAMS Graphics file, for instance, the analysis name is
the name of the graphics file without the '.gra' extension.
list_info 49
list_info measure
name be entered.
associated with it.
6. The legal values for the configuration parameter are:
• MODEL_INPUT, the configuration as input to ADAMS before analysis,
• INITIAL_CONDITIONS, the configuration after initial conditions are met,
• EQUILIBRIUM, the configuration after an equilibrium analysis,
• FORWARD, one frame forward from the current one displayed, and
• BACKWARD, one frame backward from the current one displayed.
parameter are used to specify the time dependent frames of the simulation output.
The CONFIGURATION parameter is optional and if not entered the system will display the 1st
time dependent frame in the graphics file (assuming it's mutually exclusive counterparts are not
entered either).
7. The frame with the closest time value to the time specified in this parameter will be selected.
Adams/View will display the last frame if the time entered is greater than the time for the last
frame in the simulation.
This parameter is optional and mutually exclusive with the CONFIGURATION and
FRAME_NUMBER parameters. If none of the three are entered, the first frame will be displayed.
any views that contain the model indicated by analysis_name will be affected.
8. If entered the frame_number must be a positive integer corresponding to the desired frame (output
Cautions:
1. Even if only one view_name is provided, the frame number will be applied to the specified view
and any other views that contain the same model (the model indicated by analysis_name
parameter). If only analysis_name is provided (view_name parameter is omitted), any views that
contain the model indicated by analysis_name will be affected.
list_info measure
Tips:
1. To identify a marker under a different part, for instance, you may need to enter the model and part
names as well. For example, you may specify marker 'pivot' from model 'links', part 'lower_arm'
by entering ".links.lower_arm.pivot". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the markers
list_info 51
list_info memory_usage parasolid

You may instruct Adams/View to print this information to the "Info Window" or to a file or both.
Format:

brief= on/off
file_name= string specifying the file path
Example:
list_info memory_usage parasolid &

brief = on &
Description:

1. The ‘write_to_terminal’ parameter is most likely be used in conjunction withthe FILE_NAME
list_info model
list_info model
The LIST_INFO MODEL command is used to list the various elements known to the system (i.e. parts,
joints, ...). The information can be sent to the information window, a file, or both.
Format:
list_info model
model_name = model_name
brief = on/off
file_name = file path
Example:
list_info model &

brief = on &
Description:

MODEL
to type the name even if the model is displayed. You must separate multiple model names by
commas. If the model is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
graphics associated with it. You need not separate multiple model picks by commas.
list_info 53
list_info model
2. The write_to_terminal parameter is most likely be used in conjunction with the FILE_NAME
list_info name_generation
Allows the user to obtain information for the default names Adams/View generates.
Information for the default name settings includes: a general prefix, an entity-specific prefix, an integer
entity identifier, and a general suffix. These prefixes, suffixes, and identifiers are combined together to
form the default name.
You may instruct Adams/View to print this information to the "Info Window" or to a file.
Format:
Brief = on/off
File_name = string
Example:
list_info name_generation &

brief= on &
Name Generation Defaults:

General Prefix For Name Default : is off
Entity Prefix For Name Default : is on
ADAMS ID Suffix for Name Default : is on
General Suffix For Name Default : is off
Entity Prefix For Model is: MODEL_

Entity Prefix For Gravity_Field is: ACCGRAV_
Entity Prefix For Sensor is: SENSOR_
Entity Prefix For Part is: PART_
Entity Prefix For Differential_Equation is: DIFF_
Entity Prefix For Transfer_Function is: TFSISO_
Entity Prefix For Linear_State_Equation is: LSE_
Entity Prefix For General_State_Equation is: GSE_
Entity Prefix For Marker is: MARKER_
Entity Prefix For Floating_Marker is: FMARKER_
Entity Prefix For Point is: POINT_
Entity Prefix For Coupler is: COUPLER_
list_info 55
Entity Prefix For Gear is: GEAR_

Entity Prefix For Joint is: JOINT_
Entity Prefix For Primitive_Joint is: JPRIM_
Entity Prefix For Motion is: MOTION_
Entity Prefix For User_Constraint is: UCON_
Entity Prefix For Curve_Curve is: CVCV_
Entity Prefix For Beam is: BEAM_
Entity Prefix For Bushing is: BUSHING_
Entity Prefix For Field is: FIELD_
Entity Prefix For Single_Component_Force is: SFORCE_
Entity Prefix For Multi_point_Force is: NFORCE_
Entity Prefix For Force_Vector is: VFORCE_
Entity Prefix For Torque_Vector is: VTORQUE_
Entity Prefix For General_Force is: GFORCE_
Entity Prefix For Spring_damper is: SPRING_
Entity Prefix For Spline is: SPLINE_
Entity Prefix For ADAMS_Variable is: VARIABLE_
Entity Prefix For ADAMS_Array is: ARRAY_
Entity Prefix For ADAMS_Matrix is: MATRIX_
Entity Prefix For Plant_Input is: PINPUT_
Entity Prefix For Plant_Output is: POUTPUT_
Entity Prefix For Plant_State is: PSTATE_
Entity Prefix For ADAMS_String is: STRING_
Entity Prefix For Arc is: ARC_
Entity Prefix For Block is: BOX_
Entity Prefix For Circle is: CIRCLE_
Entity Prefix For Cylinder is: CYLINDER_
Entity Prefix For Ellipsoid is: ELLIPSOID_
Entity Prefix For Extrusion is: EXTRUSION_
Entity Prefix For Frustum is: FRUSTUM_
Entity Prefix For Force_Graphic is: FORCE_GRAPHIC_
Entity Prefix For Note is: NOTE_
Entity Prefix For Polyline is: POLYLINE_
Entity Prefix For BSpline is: GCURVE_
Entity Prefix For Outline is: OUTLINE_
Entity Prefix For Spring_Damper_Graphic is: SPRING_DAMPER_
Entity Prefix For Revolution is: REVOLUTION_
Entity Prefix For Torus is: TORUS_
Entity Prefix For Plot is: plot_
Entity Prefix For Complex_Scatter is: scatter_
Entity Prefix For Eigen is: EIG_
Entity Prefix For FEMdata is: FEMDATA_
Entity Prefix For Request is: REQUEST_
Entity Prefix For MRequest is: MREQUEST_
Entity Prefix For View is: VIEW
Description:

Brief On/off Specify whether the information required is in brief or not.
Write_to_terminal On/off Specify whether the information has to be displayed on the
terminal.
File_name String Specify filename in which the information needs to be written.
Tips:
list_info 57
list_info names
list_info names
Allows the user to obtain information for existing database entities. You may instruct Adams/View to
Format:
list_info names
entity_name= an existing entity
type_filter = an existing object type
brief = on/off
Example:
list_info names &

entity_name= gui &
brief = off &
Description:

entity_name AN EXISTING Specifies any existing database entity.
ENTITY
type_filter ENT Specify the type of objects allowed.
list_info names
1. You may identify a database entity by typing its name or by picking it from the screen. If the
database entity is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it
convenient to type the name even if the database entity is displayed. If you created the database
entity by reading an ADAMS data set or graphics file, the database entity name is the first three
letters of the ADAMS object, followed by the ADAMS data set database entity ID number. The
name of ADAMS PART/101 is PAR101, for example. If you created the database entity during
2. If the database entity is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is
not, you must enter its full name. For example, to identify a part under an analysis, you may need
to enter the analysis name as well. You may specify the part named par101 from the analysis
named test by entering "/test/par101". You must separate multiple database entity names by
commas.
If the database entity is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
Tips:
1. If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the database entities available by default.
list_info 59
list_info notes
list_info notes
Allows the user to obtain information for Notes. You may instruct Adams/View to print this information
to the "Info Window" or to a file or both.
Format:
list_info notes
note_name= an existing note name
brief = on/off
Example:
list_info notes &

note_name = note_1 &
brief = on &
Description:

note_name AN EXISTING Specifies an existing model.
NOTE
1. All information for the specified note name will be displayed. This information includes note
name, type, parent name, parent type, location, and the note.The note name can be entered, or a
note can be picked from the screen.
2. You may identify a note by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
list_info notes
If the note is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it convenient
to type the name even if the note is displayed. If a note is available by default, you may identify
it by entering its name only. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a note under a
note "n1" from the model named test by entering ".test.n1". You must separate multiple note
names by commas. If the note is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on
any of the graphics associated with it. You need not separate multiple note picks by commas.
Tips:
1. If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the notes available by default.
list_info 61
list_info output_control debug

Allows you to print out information on the current values set to control the debugging of an ADAMS data
set. You may instruct Adams/View to print this information to the "Info Window" or to a file.
Format:

model_name= an existing model name
brief = on/off
Example:
list_info output_control debug &

brief = on &
Description:

MODEL
1. You can expect information on the following parameters.
• DUMP Instructs ADAMS to write the internal representation of your data set.
• EPRINT Instructs ADAMS to print simulation information for each integration step and
convergence information for each iteration.
• VERBOSE Instructs ADAMS to output full rather than partial diagnostics.

• REQDUMP Instructs ADAMS to dump request output at each iteration.
• JMDUMP Instructs ADAMS to dump the Jacobian Matrix at each iteration.
• RHSDUMP Instructs ADAMS to dump the if you want to dump the state vector at each iteration.
• DOF Instructs ADAMS to print a degree-of-freedom table in the tabular output file.
• TOPOLOGY Instructs ADAMS to print topological data in the tabular output file.
Tips:
associated with it.
list_info 63
list_info output_control femdata

Format:

femdata_name = existing femdata
brief= on/off
file_name= string
Description:

brief or not.
necessary.
Tips:
list_info output_control madata

Allows you to print out information on an existing madata entity. You may instruct Adams/View to print
this information to the "Info Window" or to a file.
Format:

brief = on/off
Example:
list_info output_control madata &

brief = on &
Description:

MODEL
brief ON_OFF Specifies whether to use the brief form (default) or an extended
form of the requested information to be displayed.
list_info 65
Tips:
associated with it.
list_info output_control mrequest

List information about the mrequest settings.
Format:

Mrequest_name = existing mrequest
brief= on/off
file_name= string
Description:

mrequest_name Existing mrequest Specify an existing mrequest name
brief or not.
necessary.
Tips:
list_info 67
list_info output_control output

Allows the user to obtain information for the Adams/View OUTPUT settings. You may instruct
Adams/View to print this information to the "Info Window" or to a file.
Format:

brief = on/off
Example:
list_info output_control output &

brief = on &
Description:

MODEL
1. OUTPUT controls the generation of request, graphics, and initial conditions files.
In addition, it controls the form, format, coordinates, filtering, and scaling of request data in the
tabular output file. Information generated for OUTPUT includes output name, type, parent name,
parent type, acceleration - displacement - Force and Velocity scales, acceleration - displacement
- Force and Velocity minimum values, request - graphics - and initial condition file creation, and
the formatting parameters.
Tips:
associated with it.
list_info 69
list_info output_control request

Format:
e:

request_name = existing mrequest
brief= on/off
file_name= string
Object Name : .MDI.Forces.vpg_tire.forces_request

Object Type : Request
Parent Type : UDE_Definition
Adams ID : 0
Active : NO_OPINION
Comment : None
Title : None
Functions :
User Function : 902.0, 3.0, 0.0 (vpg_tire.force.adams_id)
Routine : abgTire::req902
Description:

request_name Existing request Specify an existing request name
brief or not.
necessary.
Tips:
list_info output_control results

Lists information about the result settings for a model.
Format:

brief= on/off
file_name= string
Example:
Results Settings For Model: .MODEL_2
Formatted : Off
XRF : On
Accelerations : On
Applied Forces : On
Displacements : On
Reaction Forces : On
Velocities : On
Data Structures : On
System Elements : On
Linear : On
Floating Markers: On
Friction Summary: Off
Request : On
Comment : None
It will take the default model open as the argument and show the equilibrium parameters for that.
Description:

brief or not.
necessary.
list_info 71
Tips:
list_info part
list_info part
The LIST_INFO part command is used to list the information about a part or (various parts) in the model.
The information can be sent to the information window, a file, or both.
Format:
list_info part
flexible_body_name = an existing flexible body
point_mass_name = an existing mass name
equation_name = an existing eq
brief = on/off
file_name = file name
Example:
:
ist_info part &

brief = on &
Description:

part_name AN EXISTING Specifies an existing part.
PART
flexible_body_name AN EXISTING Specifies the name of a flexible body. A flexible
FLEX_BODY body may not have the same name as another
flexible body in the
same model.
point_mass_name AN EXISTING Specifies an existing point_mass.
POINT_MASS
equation_name AN EXISTING Specifies an existing equation.
EQU
list_info 73
list_info part

brief ON_OFF Specifies whether to use the brief form (default) or
an extended form of the requested information to be
displayed.
write_to_terminal ON_OFF Specify if the information requested is to be sent to
the informational window or not.
file_name STRING Specify that the information requested is to be sent
to a file with the name specified with the parameter.
2. If you created the part by reading an ADAMS data set or graphics file, the part name is the letters
PAR followed by the ADAMS data set part ID number. The name of ADAMS PART/101 is
PAR101, for example. If you created the part during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that
time. If a part is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not,
you must enter its full name. To identify a part under another model, for instance, you may need
to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify part 'arm' from model 'robot' by
entering ".robot.arm". You must separate multiple part names by commas. If the part is visible in
one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics associated with it. You
need not separate multiple part picks by commas.
3. You may identify a flexible body by typing its name, by selecting it from the database navigator's
select list or by picking its graphical representation from the screen, whichever is most
convenient. If Adams/View created the flexible body by reading an ADAMS data set, the name
may either come from the "adams_view_name" field of the preceding comment, or be synthesized
from the ADAMS id number. In the case that the flexible body is created as a result of reading a
results or graphics file, the flexible body name will be synthesized from the ADAMS id number.
When the name is created by Adams/View it will be composed of "FLX" concatenated with the
ADAMS data set flexible body ID number. For example, the Adams/View name of
FLEX_BODY/42 would be FLX42. Flexible bodies you create during preprocessing have
userspecified names.
4. You may identify a flexible body belonging to the current default model by entering just its name.
For others, you must enter the full name. To identify a flexible body under another model, for
instance, you need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify flexible body
'snake' from model 'reptiles' by entering ".reptiles.snake". You can invoke the database navigator
by typing "?", which will bring up the select list from which you can pick a flexible body. For
commands which accept multiple flexible body names, you must separate the names by commas.
If the flexible body is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
graphics associated with it. When you do this Adams/View will automatically separate multiple
flexible body picks by commas.
5. You may identify a point_mass by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
list_info part
If the point_mass is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it
convenient to type the name even if the point_mass is displayed. If you created the point_mass by
reading an ADAMS data set or graphics file, the point_mass name is the letters POI followed by
the ADAMS data set point_mass ID number. The name of ADAMS POINT_MASS/101 is
POI101, for example. If you created the point_mass during preprocessing, you gave it a name at
that time.
If a point_mass is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not,
you must enter its full name. To identify a point_mass under another model, for instance, you may
need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify point_mass 'arm' from model
'robot' by entering ".robot.arm". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the point_masss available
by default. You must separate multiple point_mass names by commas. If the point_mass is visible
need not separate multiple point_mass picks by commas.
also find it convenient to type the name even if the equation icon is displayed. If you created the
equation by reading an ADAMS data set or graphics file, the equation name is the letters DIF
followed by the ADAMS data set equation ID number. The name of ADAMS DIFF/101 is
DIF101, for example. If you created the equation during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that
time. If a equation is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is
not, you must enter its full name. To identify a equation under a different model, for instance, you
may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify equation 'fluid_volume'
the equations available by default. You must separate multiple equation names by commas.
If the equation is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
graphics associated with it. You need not separate multiple equation picks by commas.
7. The write_to_terminal parameter is most likely be used in conjunction with the FILE_NAME
Tips:
list_info 75
list_info plots
list_info plots
Lists information about the plots such as the title, subtitle, analysis, data and time stamp in a current
model
Format:
list_info plots
plot_name = existing plot
brief= on/off
file_name= string
Example:
list_info plots &

Brief= on
If no parameters are specified, the above command will display brief information about all the plots
existing within the current model.
Object Name : .plot_1
Object Type : Plot
Title : No Title
Subtitle : No Subtitle
Analysis : No Analysis Stamp
Date : No Date Stamp
Type : None
Description:

brief or not.
necessary.
File_name String Specify a location and name of file to which the information
needs to be written.
list_info plots
1. If brief is turned off, it will display other details such as the legend visibility, the values of the
horizontal and vertical axes, colors etc
Tips:
list_info 77
list_info results
list_info results
List information about all the result sets. You may instruct Adams/View to print this information to the
"Info Window" or to a file or both.
Format:
list_info results
brief = on/off
Example:
list_info results &

brief = on &
Description:

MODEL
• name - name of the result set.
• type - the type of result set (displacement, computed, etc.)
list_info results
• comment - the internal comment of the result set provided by the user on the REQUEST
statement in ADAMS.
• number of steps* - the number of output time steps of the result set.
• I marker id** - The I marker for this request, if specified.
• J marker id** - The J marker for this request, if specified.
**These fields are displayed for result sets read from a request file only.
* All components read in from an ADAMS file will have the same number of steps.
It is possible to create components that have lengths different from the number_of_steps value in
the result set. (i.e.: numeric_results create interpolate).
Tips:
associated with it.
list_info 79
list_info statistics
Allows the user to obtain information for existing database entities. You may instruct Adams/View to
Format:
type_filter = an existing object type
depth = an integer
brief = on/off
Example:
list_info statistics &

entity_name = * &
depth = 1 &
brief = on &
Description:

entity_name AN EXISTING Specifies any existing database entity.
ENTITY
type_filter ENT Specify the type of objects allowed.
depth INTEGER

1. You may identify a database entity by typing its name or by picking it from the screen. If the
database entity is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it
convenient to type the name even if the database entity is displayed. If you created the database
entity by reading an ADAMS data set or graphics file, the database entity name is the first three
letters of the ADAMS object, followed by the ADAMS data set database entity ID number. The
name of ADAMS PART/101 is PAR101, for example. If you created the database entity during
the parameter TYPE_FILTER=part will result in only the parts being processed by this command.
3. If the database entity is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is
not, you must enter its full name. For example, to identify a part under an analysis, you may need
to enter the analysis name as well. You may specify the part named par101 from the analysis
named test by entering "/test/par101". You must separate multiple database entity names by
commas.
If the database entity is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
Tips:
1. If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the database entities available by default.
list_info 81
list_info topology
list_info topology
Lists information on how a model's parts are connected to each other.
When you request information about a models topology, Adams/View will determine what joints, jprims,
point curves, and curve curves are owned be the model and what parts these objects are connected to by
determining the parent of the I and J markers of the connecting objects.
You can request the information to be output by part or by the object connecting the parts with the
OUTPUT_BY parameter.
If you specify OUTPUT_BY=PARTS (this is the default) every part in the model will be listed, along
with the parts it is connected to and what joint, jprim, point curve, curve curve or force is connecting it.
If you specify OUTPUT_BY=CONNECTIONS each joint, jprim, point curve, curve curve and force
will be listed and what parts it connects. A listing of the unconnected parts will also be displayed.
Format:
list_info topology
model_name= existing model
output_by= topology_output
brief= on/off
file_name= string
Example:
list_info topology &

output_by = parts &
This will display the following information:

Topology of model: model_1
Ground Part: ground
Part ground
Is not connected to any parts
Part PART_2
Is connected to:
PART_3 via JOINT_1 (Revolute Joint)
Part PART_3
Is connected to:
list_info topology
PART_2 via JOINT_1 (Revolute Joint)
Description:

model_name Existing model Specifies an existing model.
output_by Parts/connections Specifies how the model topology is to be listed.
Brief On/off Specifies whether to use the brief form (default) or an
displayed.
write_to_terminal On/off Specify if the information requested is to be sent to the
file_name String Specify that the information requested is to be sent to a
associated with it.
2. If you specify OUTPUT_BY=PARTS (this is the default) every part in the model will be listed,
along with the parts it is connected to and what joint, jprim, point curve, curve curve or force is
connecting it.
If you specify OUTPUT_BY=CONNECTIONS each joint, jprim, point curve, curve curve and
force will be listed and what parts it connects. A listing of the unconnected parts will also be
displayed.
list_info 83
list_info triglue
list_info triglue
You may instruct Adams/View to print this information to the "Info Window" or to a file or both.
Format:
list_info triglue
brief = on/off
Example:
list_info undo &

brief = on &
Description:

list_info undo
list_info undo
Allows you to UNDO a previous operation. There is a user controllable stack of operations that can be
undone. You may instruct Adams/View to print this information to the "Info Window" or to a file or both.
Format:
list_info undo
brief = on/off
Example:
list_info undo &

brief = on &
Dsecription:

file_name STRING Specify that the information requested is to be sent to a file with
the name specified with the parameter.
1. The user can undo "backwards", the default, or undo "forward" (an undo backward must precede
an undo forward). In other words, the user can move backward and forward in the operation stack.
Adams/View lets you set the number of operations to be "remembered", for use by the UNDO
command at later time. You set the number of operations with the command: UNDO SET
STEPS_STORED=. The default number of steps stored is five.
2. The UNDO command works only on the last operation performed by the user. For example, if you
wanted to undo an operation that occurred five commands previously, you would have to undo
the last five commands, starting with the most recent. You cannot selectively choose which
command remembered by Adams/View will be undone.
list_info 85
list_info undo
3. The UNDO supports grouping of Adams/View commands into blocks. Once defined, these
blocks may be undone with a single UNDO command. An UNDO block is defined by issuing the
command UNDO BEGIN_BLOCK to mark the beginning of the block. All following
Adams/View commands will be included in the UNDO block until the block is closed. The
UNDO block is closed by issuing the command UNDO END_BLOCK.
4. You may define your own UNDO BLOCKS around macros, command files, or any group of
Adams/View commands. This allows the sum of operations performed in the command file or
macro to be reversed by a single selection of the UNDO button.Once the UNDO block has been
closed individual commands and nested UNDO blocks within the UNDO block may not be
effected. Once closed, the UNDO block may not be opened again.
5. The limitation on the number of commands remembered by the UNDO SET STEPS_STORED
does not apply to commands nested within an UNDO block. Care should be taken not to allow too
many commands to collect within an UNDO block. You may experience unexceptable system
performance if too many commands are stored in a single UNDO block.
For example, the following pseudo-commands illustrate how an UNDO block may be defined and
used.
MODEL CREATE...
UNDO BEGIN_BLOCK ! Issued automatically when part builder
entered.
PART CREATE ...
MARKER CREATE...
UNDO BACKWARDS
MARKER CREATE...
GEOM CREATE...
UNDO END_BLOCK ! Issued automatically when part builder
exited
PART DELETE..
UNDO BACKWARDS ! Undo the PART DELETE command
UNDO BACKWARDS ! Undo the entire "Part Builder" session
The limitation on the number of commands remembered by the UNDO SET
STEPS_STORED does not apply to commands nested within an UNDO block. Care should be
taken not to allow too many commands to collect within an UNDO block.
You may experience unexceptable system performance if too many commands are stored in a
single UNDO block.
For example, the following pseudo-commands illustrate how an UNDO block may be defined and
used.
MODEL CREATE...
UNDO BEGIN_BLOCK ! Issued automatically when part builder
entered.
PART CREATE ...
MARKER CREATE...
UNDO BACKWARDS
MARKER CREATE...
GEOM CREATE...
UNDO END_BLOCK ! Issued automatically when part builder exited
PART DELETE..
list_info undo
UNDO BACKWARDS ! Undo the PART DELETE command

UNDO BACKWARDS ! Undo the entire "Part Builder" session
Cautions:
1. Limitations:
• You cannot UNDO a FILE operation.
• Reading and Writing files cannot be undone.
• You cannot UNDO a HELP operation.
• You cannot UNDO the VIEW CONTROL_PANEL "corner" rotations with a single UNDO
command. This operation is actually three separate view control rotations. Therefore you would
have to perform three UNDO commands.
• You cannot UNDO the MENU or PANEL commands.
list_info 87
list_info variable
list_info variable
Lists information about the variables’s in the current model.
Format:
list_info variable
variable_name = Existing variable name
Brief = on/off
File_name = string
Example:
list_info variable &

variable_name = DV_1 &
brief = off &
file_name = "C:\My Documents\my_file"
Object Name : .model_1.DV_1
Object Type : Variable
Parent Type : Model
String Value(s) : MyDesignVar
Comment String : None
Orig Value(s) : MyDesignVar
Dependents : None.
If brief is turned on then the dependant information will not be displayed.
Description:

Variable_name Existing variable name Specify an existing variable whose information has to be
listed.
Brief On/off Specify whether the variable information required is in
brief or not.
list_info variable

Write_to_termina On/off Specify whether the information has to be displayed on
l the terminal.
written.
Tips:
list_info 89
list_info views
list_info views
List information about all the result sets. The information can be sent to the information window, a file,
or both.
Format:
list_info views
view_name = an existing view name
view_layout_name = an existing view layout
brief = on/off
Example:
list_info views &

view_name = view_1 &
view_layout_name = vlayout_1 &
brief = on &
Description:

view_name AN EXISTING An existing view name
VIEW
view_layout_name AN EXISTING Specifies an existing view layout.
VLAYOUT
list_info views
• name - the name of the view
• center - the view center in global model coordinates.
• field of view - the width (x) and the height (y) of the view in global model coordinates
• project - the view is drawn in either (orthographic or perspective) mode
• render - the view is drawn in (wireframe, solid, or shaded) mode
• saved - whether the view has been saved.
3. You may identify a view_layout by typing its name. If a view_layout is available by default, you
may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you must enter its full name. If you type a
"?", Adams/View will list the view_layouts available by default. You must separate multiple
view_layout names by commas.
Cautions:
Tips:
1. If the VIEW_NAME parameter is used, the desired view can be identified by picking in the
macro 1
macro
macro create
macro create
A macro is a single command that you create to execute a series of Adams/View commands. To create a
macro, you give Adams/View the list of commands you want executed, as well as the new command (i.e.,
the macro) that will execute them.
Format:
macro create
macro_name = macro name
user_entered_command = command representing the macro
commands_to_be_executed = list of commands to be executed
wrap_in_undo = yes/no
help_file = help file path
help_string = help text
create_panel = yes/no
security_code = alpha-numeric code to run a macro
Example:
macro create &

macro_name = .TEST_MACRO &
user_entered_command = "TESTMAC" &
commands_to_be_executed = &
"!$parts:T=part:C=0", &
"!$analysis:T=analysis:D=Last_Run", &
"!END_OF_PARAMETERS", &
"!", &
"!---set the default analysis", &
"defaults analysis analysis_name = $analysis", &
"",&
"!---loop through part list", &
"for var=the_part obj=$parts", &
" defaults model part_name=(the_part)", &
" file spread_sheet write &", &
" file_name = (DB_DEFAULT(SYSTEM_DEFAULTS,\"PART\").name) &", &
" result_set_name =
((DB_DEFAULT(SYSTEM_DEFAULTS,\"PART\").name)//\"_XFORM\")", &
"end", &
"", &
"!---clean-up", &
"variable delete
variable_name=(eval(db_children($_self,\"variable\")))" &
!
wrap_in_undo = No &
help_string = "This test macro can export part XFORM results." &
macro 3
macro create
create_panel = No
!
Description:

macro_name String Specifies the name of the new macro.
user_entered_command String Specifies the command string to be entered by the user
to execute the macro.
commands_to_be_ executed String Specifies the list of Adams/View commands to be
executed.
wrap_in_undo Yes/No Specifies whether or not to the entire macro can be
undone with a single undo command.
help_file String Specifies the text that is to be used as the command or
topic string when getting help on a macro.
help_string String Specifies the text that is to be used as the command or
create_panel Yes/No Allows the user to specify if a panel is to be created for
the specified macro.
security_code
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two macros with the same full name, so you must provide
a unique name. You must separate multiple macro names by commas.
2. The user_entered_command is a string with list of keywords separated by blanks. The keywords
can match existing keywords, but the final command defined must be unique.
For example: user_entered_command = "force my_force create"
If this parameter is not entered, the name of the macro will become the new command.
3. You can specify the Adams/View commands that are to be executed when the macro is used with
the commands_to_be_executed parameter on the macro read and macro modify commands, or
from a file on the macro read command. Adams/View does not check your entries in this field for
correct syntax when you create the macro, only when the macro is executed the syntax errors will
be notified. You enter these commands as quoted strings separated by commas. You can have
quotes inside a string by proceeding them with a backslash "\". You can indicate parameters to
associate with the macro be placing a dollar sign '$' followed by the name of the parameter you
want anywhere in the commands.
4. The help that is obtained by help_file is the same as you would get if you supplied the help string
to the command: help command_or_topic=. You must specify the entire file name, there is no
default extension. The search path facility is used to find the specified file.
macro create
5. If there are no parameters in the macro, no panel will be created. The name of the macro panel
will be macro_ appended with the macro name. For example, if the name of macro being created
or modified is MAC1, the panel will be named macro_MAC1.
Cautions:
1. If the macro is very large turning the wrap_in_undo option to yes may decrease the speed of it's
execution.
Tips:
1. You may identify a macro by typing its name. If a macro is available by default, you may identify
Adams/View will list the macros available by default.
macro 5
macro delete
macro delete
Allows you to delete existing macros.
Format:
macro delete
macro_name = macro name/list
Description:
Parameters Value Type Description

macro_name String Specifies the name of an existing macro
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two macros with the same name, so you must provide a
unique name. You must separate multiple macro names by commas.
Tips:
macro modify
macro modify
A macro is a single command that you create to execute a series of Adams/View commands. The macro
modify command allows edition of existing macros.
Format:
macro modify
new_macro_name= modified macro name
user_entered_command = command representing the macro
commands_to_be_executed= list of commands to be executed
help_file = help file path
security_code = alpha-numeric code to run a macro
Example:
macro modify&
macro_name = .TEST_MACRO &
new_macro_name = .TEST_MACRO_1 &
user_entered_command = "TESTMAC" &
commands_to_be_executed = &
"!$parts:T=part:C=0", &
"!$analysis:T=analysis:D=Last_Run", &
"!END_OF_PARAMETERS", &
"!", &
"!---set the default analysis", &
"defaults analysis analysis_name = $analysis", &
"",&
"!---loop through part list", &
"for var=the_part obj=$parts", &
" defaults model part_name=(the_part)", &
" file spread_sheet write &", &
" file_name = (DB_DEFAULT(SYSTEM_DEFAULTS,\"PART\").name) &", &
" result_set_name =
((DB_DEFAULT(SYSTEM_DEFAULTS,\"PART\").name)//\"_XFORM\")", &
"end", &
"", &
"!---clean-up", &
"variable delete
variable_name=(eval(db_children($_self,\"variable\")))" &
!
macro 7
macro modify
wrap_in_undo = No &
help_string = "This test macro can export part XFORM results." &
create_panel = No
!
Description:

macro_name String Specifies the name of the macro to be modified
new_macro_name String Specifies the name of the new macro
user_entered_command String Specifies the command string to be entered by the user
to execute the macro.
commands_to_be_ executed String Specifies the list of Adams/View commands to be
executed.
wrap_in_undo Yes/No Specifies whether or not to the entire macro can be
undone with a single undo command.
help_file String Specifies the text that is to be used as the command or
help_string String Specifies the text that is to be used as the command or
create_panel Yes/No Allows the user to specify if a panel is to be created for
the specified macro.
security_code
2. You may use this name later to refer to this macro. Adams/View will not allow you to have two
macros with the same full name, so you must provide a unique name. Normally, entity names are
composed of alphabetic, numeric, or '_' (underscore) characters, and start with an alphabetic or
'_' character. They may be any length. By enclosing the name in double quotes, you may use other
printable characters, or start the name with a numeral. If a name contains characters, or starts with
a numeral, you must always quote the name when entering it. Note that you can specify the
it by changing the name. If you enter just the entity name, then the default parent will be assigned
by Adams/View. If you type in the full name, then you may over ride the default parent. In most
Adams/View provides will specify the parentage that it has assumed. You may, of course, delete
"...._NAME.GRAND_PARENT_NAME.PARENT_NAME.ENTITY_NAME" The number of levels used varies
from case to case and the parentage must exist before an entity can be assigned to it.
macro modify
3. The user entered command is a string is a list of keywords separated by blanks. The keywords can
match existing keywords, but the final command defined must be unique. For example:
user_entered_command = "force my_force create" If this parameter is not entered, the name of
the macro will become the new command.
the COMMANDS_TO_BE_EXECUTED parameter on the MACRO READ and MACRO
MODIFY commands, or from a file on the MACRO READ command. Adams/View does not
check your entries in this field for correct syntax when you create the macro, only when the macro
is executed. You enter these commands as quoted strings separated by commas. You can have
want anywhere in the commands (see MACRO).
5. The help that is obtained by this string is the same as you would get if you supplied the help string
to the command: help command_or_topic=. You must specify the entire file name, there is no
default extension. The search path facility is used to find the specified file.
6. If there are not parameters in the macro, no panel will be created. The name of the macro panel
will be 'macro_' appended with the macro name. For example, if the name of macro being created
or modified is MAC1, the panel will be named 'macro_MAC1'.
Tips:
macro 9
macro read
macro read
Allows you to create a macro by reading the commands to be executed from a file. Thus, instead of
creating a new macro from the scratch, an existing command file can be used as a template.
Format:
macro read
file_name = file name with path
user_entered_command = command
help_file= help file path
Example:
macro read &

macro_name = TEST_MACRO &
file_name = “C:\macros\test_mac.cmd” &
user_entered_command = “TESTMAC” &
wrap_in_undo = No &
help_string = ‘This is a test macro’ &
create_panel = No
Description:

macro_name String Specifies the name of an existing macro.
executed.
user_entered_command String Specifies the command string to be entered by the user to
execute the macro.
wrap_in_undo Yes/No Specifies whether or not to the entire macro can be undone
with a single undo command.
macro read

help_file String Specifies the text that is to be used as the command or topic
string when getting help on a macro.
help_string String Specifies the text that is to be used as the command or topic
string when getting help on a macro.
create_panel Yes/No Allows the user to specify if a panel is to be created for the
specified macro.
2. The user_entered_command is a string with a list of keywords separated by blanks. The
keywords can match existing keywords, but the final command defined must be unique.
For example: user_entered_command = "force my_force create"
If this parameter is not entered, the name of the macro will become the new command.
the commands_to_be_executed parameter on the macro read and macro modify commands, or
from a file on the macro read command. Adams/View does not check your entries in this field for
correct syntax when you create the macro, only when the macro is executed the syntax errors will
be notified. You enter these commands as quoted strings separated by commas. You can have
want anywhere in the commands.
4. The help that is obtained by help_file string is the same as you would get if you supplied the help
string to the command: help command_or_topic=. You must specify the entire file name, there is
no default extension. The search path facility is used to find the specified file.
5. If there are no parameters in the macro, no panel will be created. The name of the macro panel
will be macro_ appended with the macro name. For example, if the name of macro being created
or modified is MAC1, the panel will be named macro_MAC1.
Cautions:
1. If the macro is very large turning the wrap_in_undo option to yes may decrease the speed of it's
execution.
Tips:
macro 11
macro write
macro write
Write the commands that are to be executed (defined by the commands_to_be_executed parameter)
from the macro to a file. The file will contain comments at the top about the macro definition and the
commands to be executed.
Format:
macro write
file_name = file name with path
Example:
macro write &

macro_name= ANALYSIS_DELETE
Case:
macro create &
macro_name=ANALYSIS_DELETE &
user_entered_command="delete analysis" &
help_string="Quickly delete an analysis" &
commands_to_be_executed ="model delete
analysis_name=$analysis_name"
macro write macro_name=ANALYSIS_DELETE
would generate the file ANALYSIS_DELETE.cmd, which contains:

! USER_ENTED_COMMAND ANALYSIS_DELETE
! WRAP_IN_UNDO YES
! HELP_STRING Quickly delete an analysis
model delete analysis_name=$analysis_name
Description:
Parameters Value Type Description

macro_name String Specifies the name of the existing macro whose commands will be
written to a file
file_name String Specifies the name of the file that is to be read, written, or executed.
macro write
Adams/View will list the macros available by default. You must separate multiple macro names
by commas.
or '[ ]' for directory paths, you must enclose the name in quotes.
Tip:
1. You can read the macro back into Adams/View with the macro read command. The default
extension for this file is '.cmd'.
marker 1
marker
marker attributes
marker attributes
Allows you to set the specification of attributes on an individual marker or a group of markers.
Format:
marker attributes
name_ visibility = on_off_with_toggle
Example:
marker attributes &

marker_name = psmar &
visibility = on &
color = blue &
active = on &
Description :

marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies the marker to be modified. You use this
parameter to identify the existing marker to be affected
with this command.
icon size.
size_of_icons Real Specifies the size, in modeling units, the Adams/View
marker 3
marker attributes

name_ visibility On_Off_With_Toggle The NAME_VISIBILITY parameter provides control
over the visibility of the view name displayed at the top
color A Existing Color Specifies the color the modeling entity should be drawn
in.
active On_Off_No_Opinion Sets the activation status of the element
dependents_active On_Off_No_Opinion Sets the activation status of the dependants of an
element
SIZE_OF_ICONS / SCALE_OF_ICONS. These two parameters are mutually exclusive. You
may set a size of the icon used for the marker representation in modeling units, or you may scale
VISIBILITY. You may set a marker's visibility ON, OFF or TOGGLE the current setting. When
you set a marker's visibility OFF, the marker will not be drawn. When you set a marker's visibility
ON, you allow that marker to be drawn.
NAME_VISIBILITY. You may set a marker's name label visibility ON, OFF or TOGGLE the
COLOR. You may set the color of a marker with this parameter.
ATTRIBUTE may be inherited from another entity.
INHERITANCE may either be TOP_DOWN or BOTTOM_UP.
hierarchy is a tree structure with the model at the apex.
Parts exist beneath the model, and markers exist beneath the parts.
If the icon size of the model is set to 0.1, and the default INHERITANCE is set to TOP_DOWN,
then all icons displayed within the model will be displayed at this size. However, if the icon size
of a model is set to 0.1, and then the default INHERITANCE is set to BOTTOM_UP, then any
icons set to a size other than the model's icon size will be displayed in their own size.
marker attributes
LENGTH unit. For example, if the modeling units are K/M/S, a part axes icon will have triad legs,
one meter in length.
When you specify SCALE_OF_ICONS, a new size is calculated by multipling the current size by
LENGTH unit. For example, if the modeling units are K/M/S, a part axes icon will have triad legs,
one meter in length.
An Example:
If the model has SIZE_OF_ICONS set to 0.0 , and a part under that model has a SIZE_OF_ICONS
set to .125, the part's icon size will be used.
An Example:
marker 5
marker attributes
displayed at the top center position of a given view.
The legal values of this parameter are ON and OFF. This is an optional parameter and if not
entered the name will be visible (i.e. will be ON).
Example 1:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- RED
Example 2:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- RED
Example 3:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- NO_COLOR
following command:
marker attributes

• Group
• Part
• Marker
• Geometry
• Constraints
• Forces
• Data Elements
• Output Control
marker 7
marker copy
marker copy
Allows you to create a replica marker within the same model.
Format:
marker copy
new_marker_name = a new marker
Example:
marker copy &

new_marker_name = marker_2

marker_name An Existing Specifies an existing marker
Marker
new_marker_name A New Marker Specifies the name of the new marker. You may use
this name later to refer to this marker.
1. The replica marker will be identical to the original, with the exception of the marker name.
Markers must have unique names relative to other markers under a given part. You specify the
replica marker's name with the NEW_MARKER_NAME parameter. The replica will be
completely independent of the original, and may be modified without affecting the original.
marker copy

Note that you can specify the parentage of an entity (e.g. which part "owns" a marker or a
geometry element) when you CREATE it by changing the name. If you enter just the entity name,
then the default parent will be assigned by Adams/View. If you type in the full name, then you
may override the default parent. In most cases, when creating an entity, Adams/View will provide
a default name. The default name that Adams/View provides will specify the parentage that it has
assumed.
Cautions:
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two markers with the same name, so you must provide a
unique name.
marker 9
marker create
marker create
Allows you to create a marker. You may reverse this creation at a later time with an UNDO command.
Format:
marker create
marker_name = a new marker
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
location = location
preserve_location = true_only
node_id = integer
velocity = real
vx = real
vy = real
vz = real
reference_marker_name = an existing marker
Example:
marker create &

adams_id = 1 &
comments = "a new marker" &
location = 10 , 20 , 10 &
node_id = 5 &
orientation = 10 , 10 , 10 &
relative_to = piston &
reference_marker_name = marker_33
marker create
Description:

marker_name A New Marker Specifies the name of the new marker. You may use
modified.
location Location Specifies the location of the origin of a coordinate
system (e.g. marker or part).
preserve_location True only An optional parameter, which when specified means
that the marker location is to be retained as specified
(e.g. marker on a flexible body will not be snapped to
the nearest node). The parameter is mutually
exclusive with the 'node_id' parameter, for marker
creation.
node_id Integer Specifies a node_id on a flexible body that
Adams/view will use to determine the location at
which it will place a marker.
orientation Orientation Specifies the orientation of a coordinate system (e.g.
marker or part) using three rotation angles.
the axis.
Model, Part Or coordinates and orientation angles correspond to.
Marker
curve_name An Existing Sepecifies the curve name on which to create a marker
Curve
velocity Real Specifies the initial conditions
vx Real Specifies the initial conditions
vy Real Specifies the initial conditions
marker 11
marker create

vz Real Specifies the initial conditions
reference_marker_name An Existing Specifies an existing marker which acts as a reference
Marker
1. Markers are attached to parts, which are contained in models. Before creating markers, you must
use the 'MODEL CREATE' and 'PART CREATE RIGID_BODY NAME_AND_POSITION'
command to create at least one model and part.
assumed.
yourself.
marker create
coordinate system.
6. The preserve_location parameter is specified to indicate that the specified marker location is to be
preserved. The parameter comes into play for markers on a flex body or on an external system
(where an MNF/MD DB is specified). For example, a flex marker will not be snapped to the node
nearest to the specified location, if this parameter is specified. This parameter is mutually
exclusive with the node_id parameter for the marker create command.
7. The value must be an integer which is a valid node ID from your flexible element model.
z axes.
coordinate system.
9. You may enter either one or two locations to direct the axis using the along_axis_orientation
paramater. If you enter one location, the axis will point towards the location. If you specify two
locations, the axis will be parallel to, and pointing the same way as the vector from the first
coordinate system.
marker 13
marker create
10. You may enter either two or three locations for the in_plane_orientation parameter. If you enter
two locations, the axis will point towards the first location and the plane will fall on the second.
If you specify three locations, the axis will be parallel to, and pointing the same way as the vector
locations.
coordinate system.
Cautions:
unique name.
marker delete
marker delete
Allows you to delete an existing marker.
Format:
marker delete
Example:
marker delete &

marker_name = marker_2
Description:

marker_name An Existing Specifies the marker to be deleted.
Marker
1. You must enter the name of the marker you wish to delete either by picking it from the screen or
3. If a marker is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you
marker 15
marker delete
Tips:
marker modify
marker modify
Allows you to modify an existing marker.
Format:
marker modify
new_marker_name = a new marker
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
location = location
preserve_location = true_only
node_id = integer
velocity = real
vx = real
vy = real
vz = real
reference_marker_name = an existing marker
Example:
marker modify &

new_marker_name = marker__2 &
adams_id = 1 &
comments = "modifying an existing marker" &
location = 10 , 20 , 10 &
node_id = 5 &
marker 17
marker modify
marker modify &

relative_to = piston &
reference_marker_name = marker_33
Description:

marker_name
new_marker_name A New Marker Specifies the name of the new marker. You may use
adams_id ADAMS_ID Specifies an integer used to identify this element in
the AdamsAdams data file.
modified.
location Location Specifies the location of the origin of a coordinate
system (eg. marker or part).
preserve_location True only An optional parameter, which when specified means
that the marker location is to be retained as specified
(e.g. marker on a flexible body will not be snapped to
the nearest node).
node_id Integer Specifies a node_id on a flexible body that
Adams/view will use to determine the location at
which it will place a marker.
orientation Orientation Specifies the orientation of a coordinate system (eg.
marker or part) using three rotation angles.
along_axis_orientation Location Specifies the orientation of a coordinate system (eg.
the axis.
in_plane_orientation Location Specifies the orientation of a coordinate system (eg.
Part OR Marker coordinates and orientation angles correspond to.
curve_name An existing Curve Specifies the curve name on which to create a marker
velocity Real Specifies the initial conditions
vx Real Specifies the initial conditions
vy Real Specifies the initial conditions
marker modify

vz Real Specifies the initial conditions
reference_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker which acts as a reference
You must separate multiple marker names by commas. If the marker is visible in one of your
views, you may identify it by picking on it. You need not separate multiple marker picks by
commas.
assumed.
marker 19
marker modify
yourself.
4. When an Adams/Solver data file (.adm) is read into AdamsAdams/View, all comments associated
with a statement (from the end of the previous statement through the end of the current statement)
are stored with the object. Comments in the data file can be associated with model.
coordinate system.
6. The preserve_location parameter is specified to indicate that the specified marker location is to be
preserved. The parameter comes into play for markers on a flex body or on an external system
(where an MNF/MD DB is specified). For example, a flex marker will not be snapped to the node
nearest to the specified location, if this parameter is specified.
This parameter can be specified with the node_id parameter during marker modification, to
indicate that the marker is NOT to be snapped to the nearest node, but instead its existing location
is to be maintained.
e.g. marker create marker = .model_1.flex_body_1.marker_1 node_id = 15 location = 10,10,10
marker modify marker = .model_1.flex_body_1.marker_1 node_id = 20 preserve_location = true
The modify marker command will change the node_id of the marker to 20 and its original location
(10,10,10) will be maintained.
7. The node_id value must be an integer which is a valid node ID from your flexible element model.
marker modify
coordinate system.
9. You may enter either one or two locations to direct the axis using the along_axis_orientation
parameter. If you enter one location, the axis will point toward the location. If you specify two
locations, the axis will be parallel to, and pointing the same way as the vector from the first
coordinate system.
10. You may enter either two or three locations for the in_plane_orientation paramater. If you enter
you specify three locations, the axis will be parallel to, and pointing the same way as the vector
locations.
coordinate system.
Cautions:
unique name.
Tips:
1. You must enter the name of the marker you wish to modify by either picking it from the screen
2. You may reverse this modification at a later time with an UNDO command.
material 1
material
material copy
material copy
Allows you to copy the existing material properties to a new material in the model database.
The material can be specified with the essential properties, namely, 1) Young’s modulus, 2) Poisson’s
ratio, and 3) Density. Any new material can be specified by entering these properties in the material
database.
Format:
material copy
material_name= an existing material
new_material_name = a new material
Example:
material copy &

material_name = alloy &
new_material_name = alloy_new
Description:

material _name An Existing Material Specifies the name of an existing material
new_material_name A New Material Specifies a new name for the material
The material with its existing properties can be copied to a new material with a different name.
material 3
material create
material create
Allows you to create a new material in the model database.
database.
Format:
material create
material_name= a new material
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
youngs_modulus = pressure
poissons_ratio = real
density = density
Example:
material create &

material_name = .materials.alloy &
adams_id = 2 &
comments = toughened_alloy &
youngs_modulus = 2.4e5 &
poissons_ratio = 0.29 &
density = 7.8
Description:

material _name A New Material Specifies a new name for the material to be created
adams_id Adams_id Specifies an integer used to identify this element in Adams
database
comments String Specifies comments, if any, on the element
Young’s modulus Pressure Specifies the modulus of elasticity of the material
material create

poisson’s ratio Real Specifies the data table size in pixels or units relative to
Adams window
density Density Specifies the density of the material
1. The material name specifies a new material to be defined. The ‘adams_id’ specifies an integer
used to identify this element in the Adams data file. When you use the FILE
ADAMS_DATA_SET WRITE command, Adams/View writes an Adams data file for your
model. Adams requires that each modeling element be identified by a unique integer identifier.
If you use this parameter to specify a non-zero identifier, Adams/View will use it in the
3. The Young’s Modulus specifies modulus of elasticity for the beam material and the poisson’s
ratio is also entered for the material. Specifies the part density and that the mass properties of the
part are to be automatically calculated. The calculated mass properties are based upon the solid
geometry that belongs to the part.
material 5
material delete
material delete
Allows you to delete an existing material in the model database.
database.
Format:
material delete
material_name = an existing material
Example:
material delete &

material_name= .materials.alloy
Description:

material _name An Existing Material Specifies the name of an existing material
An existing material can be removed from the database by providing the appropriate material name with
the ‘delete’ command.
material modify
material modify
Allows you to modify an existing material in the model database.
ratio, and 3) Density. Any new material can be specified by entering those properties in the material
database.
Format:
material modify
material_name= an existing material
new_material_name = a new material
adams_id = integer
comments = string
youngs_modulus = pressure
poissons_ratio = real
density = density
Example:
material modify &

material_name = .materials.alloy &
new_material_name = .materials.modified_alloy &
adams_id = 2 &
comments = toughened_alloy &
youngs_modulus = 2.4E+005 &
poissons_ratio = 0.29 &
density = 7.8
Description:

material _name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing material
Material
new_material_name A New Material Specifies a new name for an existing material
adams_id Integer Specifies an integer used to identify this element in Adams
database
material 7
material modify

comments String Specifies comments, if any, on the element
Young’s modulus Pressure Specifies the modulus of elasticity of the material
poisson’s ratio Real Specifies the data table size in pixels or units relative to
Adams window
density Density Specifies the density of the material
1. The material name specifies the name of an existing material, which can be renamed by the
parameter ‘new_material_name’. The ‘adams_id’ specifies an integer used to identify this
element in the Adams data file. When you use the FILE ADAMS_DATA_SET WRITE
command, Adams/View writes an Adams data file for your model. Adams requires that each
modeling element be identified by a unique integer identifier. If you use this parameter to specify
a non-zero identifier, Adams/View will use it in the corresponding statement in the Adams data
file.
3. The Young’s Modulus specifies modulus of elasticity for the beam material and the Poisson’s
Ratio is also entered for the material. Specifies the part density and that the mass properties of the
part are to be automatically calculated. The calculated mass properties are based upon the solid
geometry that belongs to the part.
material modify
measure 1
measure
measure attributes
measure attributes
Allows you can set the attributes for a strip chart, including creating a legend, setting axis limits, and
setting the color and line type for the curve.
Strip chart is a monitoring device in which Adams/View plots a measure. The strip chart monitors the
measure during a simulation.
Format:
measure attributes
measure_name= existing measure
comment= string
legend= string
axis_lower= real
axis_upper= real
axis_label= string
axis_type= axis_units
curve_color= existing color
curve_line_type= line_style
curve_thickness= real
curve_symbol_type= plot_symbols
Example:
measure attributes &

measure_name = mea_angle__1 &
comment = "change the attributes" &
legend = "angle measure" &
axis_type = linear &
curve_color = red &
curve_thickness = 2.5 &
curve_line_type = dash
measure 3
measure attributes
Description:

measure_name Existing measure Specifies an existing measure whose attributes have to
be modified.
comment String Specifies any comments.
legend String Enter text that describes the data that the curve in the
strip chart represents.
axis_lower Real Parameter not supported.
axis_upper Real Parameter not supported.
axis_label String Parameter not supported.
axis_type Linear/logar/db/default Select the type of plot to be displayed in
Adams/PostProcessor when you transfer the strip chart
to it for plotting.
curve_color Existing color Enter color of the curve.
curve_line_type SOLID, DASH, Sets curve_Line Type to the type of line style for the
DOTDASH, DOT, curve. For example, you can select a line that alternates
NONE between dots and dashes.
curve_thickness Real Changes the weight of the curve line. Weight values
range from 1 to 5 screen pixels.
1. The text specified in the legend parameter appears in the title bar of the strip chart. Note that you
have to redisplay the strip chart to see the effects of changing the legend.
2. There are 4 types of plots that can be specified in the axis_type parameter:
• linear - Performs no transformation of data or axis values. This is the default.
• logar (Logarithmic) - Scales the axis values so that each power of 10 is separated by the same
distance. For example, the values 1, 10, 100, 1000, and 10,000 are equally spaced.
• db (Decibel) - Displays 20 * log 10 (value) for each value.
• default - Selecting this means no specific axis type is requested and it appears in the default axis
type, which is usually linear.
Cautions:
1. You have to redisplay the strip chart to see the effects of changing the legend, color, line type, line
symbol, and line thickness. Learn about redisplaying strip charts.
The axis_Lower, axis_Upper, and axis_Label options currently are not available.
measure copy
measure copy
Creates a copy of an existing measure.
Format:
measure copy
measure_name = existing measure
new_measure_name = new name for the copy
Example:
measure copy &

measure_name = my_angle_mea_1 &
new_measure_name = angle_mea_1_copy
Description:

Measure_name Existing measure Specifies the name of the measure to be copied.
New_measure_name New name for the measure Specifies the new name for the copy of the
measure.
measure 5
measure create angle

This command will create a new angle measure.
Format:

measure_name= new mea_angle
first_point= existing marker
middle_point= existing marker
last_point= existing marker
comments= string
legend= string
Example:
measure create angle &

measure_name= angle_between_link1_link2 &
first_point = marker_2 &
last_point = marker_4 &
middle_point = marker_1 &
legend = "angle between two links" &
comments = "to track the angle between two links"
If Link1 and Link2 are connected by a revolute joint and Marker2 lies on Link1, Marker 3 lies on Link2
and Marker 1 lies in the intersection of Link1 and Link2, then the above command will create an angle
measure to compute the angle between the two links. The title of the measure will be the string specified
in the legend parameter.
Description:

measure_name New Meaure name Specifies the name of the angle measure. You can use this name
later to specify this new angle measure created.
first_point Existing marker Specifies an existing marker on an entity.
middle_point Existing marker Specifies an existing marker on an entity.
last_point Existing marker Specifies an existing marker on an entity.

Legend String Specifies the text that will appear at the top of the Angle
measure.
Comments String Specifies any comments that are to be associated with this
angle measure.
1. About Measuring Included Angle Characteristics
The included angle measure captures the instantaneous angle between two vectors defined by
three markers. For example, you can use the angle measure to find the included angle between
any two links connected by a revolute joint. The default unit for angle measures is degrees.
To create an included angle, you select three markers, as illustrated in the figure below. These
three markers define two vectors:
It is the instantaneous angle between these vectors that Adams/View tracks in an included angle
measure. Note that the included angle changes over time as the markers move during a simulation.
Example of Points That Define Included Angles
There are two conventions used in Adams/View to define the sign and magnitude of an included
angle measure as it changes over time:
2. The sign and magnitude is always calculated so as to have an initial value within the range [0, PI]
regardless of the order in which you select the points.
3. The axis of rotation is automatically calculated as the cross-product of , which is
sensitive to the order in which you select the points. This, along with the right-hand rule,
determines all subsequent changes to the sign and magnitude of the included angle measure.
measure 7
measure create computed

Adams/View computed measures allow you to create measures in the Adams/View expression language
that can be evaluated before a simulation or any time after. You build them using design-time functions
and typically use them in the initial model set up.
An Adams/View computed measure is convenient because it can reference any Adams/View variable.
For example, if you create two measures and you want to add or subtract them, you can use an
Adams/View computed measure to do so. You can also compute data from a run-time measure.
Format:

measure_name= new computed measure
units= string
create_measure_display= boolean
legend= string
comments = string
Example:
Assuming that ADAMS_KE is an existing measure of the kinetic energy of a pendulum and MY_KE is
an existing analytical measure if the kinetic energy.
measure create computed &

measure_name = my_measure_computed &
text_of_expression = “100*(.model_1.adams_ke - .model_1.my_ke)/322.6” &
units = “no_units” &
legend = “measure comparison of analytical and kinetic energy
results”
Description:

measure_name New measure name Specifies name of the computed measure
text_of_expression String The TEXT_OF_EXPRESSION parameter defines the
computation to be performed by the function.
Remember that the value of this argument should be a
character string, NOT an expression.

units String Specifies units of the measure.
create_measure_display Yes/No Specifies whether the strip chart has to be displayed of
the measure.
Legend String Specifies the text that will appear at the top of the
created measure.
comments String Specifies any comments.
Cautions:
1. Be careful, however, about the changes you make in your model. Making changes can cause a
potential problem because model changes can invalidate the accuracy of any measure that
depends on the results of a simulation. The simulation redefines the model data and re-evaluates
your Adams/View computed measures.
measure 9
measure create function

An Adams/Solver function measure allows you to create a measure in Adams/View that Adams/Solver
evaluates during simulations. Because Adams/Solver function measures are only evaluated during
simulations, function measures remain unevaluated until you run a simulation. The Adams/Solver
function measure is convenient because it lets you reference any user-defined Adams/Solver function or
subroutine. Function measures are built from Adams/Solver run-time functions.
Format:

measure_name= new function measure
function= function
user_function= real
routine= string
units= string
legend= string,
comments= string
Example:
measure cre function measure = .model_1.function_mea_1 &

function = "0.5*wz(.model_1.part_2.cm)**2*(15*(5
0**2 + 300**2) + 15000)/1000" &
units = no_units &
create_measure_display = yes
Description:

Measure_name New name for measure Specifies the name of the measure.
function Function Specifies function to be evaluated during the
simulation.
user_function Real Specifies a real number
routine String Specifies a string for the routine.
units String Specifies any units that have to be associated.

create_measure_display Yes/No Specifies yes if the strip chart of the measure
needs to be displayed.
legend String Specifies the text that will appear on the top of
the measure dialog.
Comments String Specifies any comments about the function
measure.
Cautions:
1. Be careful, however, about the number of Adams/Solver function measures you create because
Adams/View writes each measure to the Adams/Solver dataset as a VARIABLE statement. Each
VARIABLE statement adds another equation to the overall set of equations. The more equations
Adams/Solver must solve, the longer your simulation takes.
measure 11
measure create object

Creates an object measure.
In general, all objects in your model have some pre-defined measurable characteristics. For example, you
can capture and investigate the power consumption of a motion, or measure a part’s center-of-mass
velocity along the global x-axis, taking time derivatives in the ground reference frame. The default
coordinate system is the ground coordinate system, but you can use any marker as the coordinate system.
Format:
measure cre‘ate object

measure_name= new object measure
component= coordinate_component
motion_rframe= existing marker
coordinate_rframe= existing marker
characteristic= measure_object_characteristic
object= existing object
from_first = boolean
legend = string
comments = string
Example:
measure create object &

measure_name = mea_object__1 &
from_first = yes &
component = x_component &
characteristic = angular_acceleration &
object = joint_2 &
create_measure_display = yes &
legend = "joint_2 object measure"
Description:

measure_name New point measure Specifies the name of the new point measure. You can
use this name later to refer to this measure.
component X_COMPONENT, Specifies the component in which you are interested.
Y_COMPONENT, The components available depend on the coordinate
Z_COMPONENT, system.
MAG_COMPONENT,
R_COMPONENT,
RHO_COMPONENT,
THETA_COMPONENT
, PHI_COMPONENT
motion_rframe Existing marker Specifies existing marker
coordinate_rframe Existing marker Specifies existing marker
measure 13

characteristic ANGULAR_ACCELE Specifies the object characteristic to be measured.
RATION,
ANGULAR_DEFORM
ATION,
ANGULAR_DEFORM
ATION_VELOCITY,
ANGULAR_KINETIC_
ENERGY,
ANGULAR_MOMENT
UM_ABOUT_CM,
ANGULAR_VELOCIT
Y,
AX_AY_AZ_PROJECT
ION_ANGLES,
CM_ACCELERATION,
CM_ANGULAR_ACC
ELERATION,
CM_ANGULAR_DISP
LACEMENT,
EULER_ANGLES,
CM_ANGULAR_VEL
OCITY,
CM_POSITION,
CM_POSITION_RELA
TIVE_TO_BODY,
CM_VELOCITY,
CONTACT_POINT_LO
CATION,
ELEMENT_FORCE,
ELEMENT_TORQUE,
INTEGRATOR_ORDE
R,
INTEGRATOR_STEPS
IZE,
INTEGRATOR_TIME_
STEP,
ITERATOR_STEPS,
ITERATION_COUNT,
KINETIC_ENERGY,
POTENTIAL_ENERG
Y_DELTA,
POWER_CONSUMPTI
ON,
PRESSURE_ANGLE,
STATIC_IMBALANCE
,
STRAIN_KINETIC_E

Object Existing object in Enter the object to measure.
Adams
legend String Specifies the text that will appear in the top of the
measure window.
comments String Specifies any comments on this measure.
Create_measure_d Yes/No Specifies yes if you want to display a strip chart of the
isplay measure.
The measurable characteristics of objects are shown in the table below. Click an object characteristic to
view the description.
The object: Has these measurable characteristics:

Marker • Total force at point
• Total force at location
• Total_Torque_On_Point
• Total_Torque_At_Location
• Translational_Displacement
• Translational_Velocity
• Translational_Acceleration
• Angular_Velocity
• Angular_Acceleration
Rigid body • CM_Position

• CM_Velocity
• CM_Acceleration
• CM_Angular_Velocity
• CM_Angular_Acceleration
• Kinetic_Energy
• Translational_Kinetic_Energy
• Angular_Kinetic_Energy
• Translational_Momentum
• Angular_Momentum_About_CM
• Potential_Energy_Delta
measure 15

Point mass body • CM_Position
• CM_Velocity
• CM_Acceleration
• Kinetic_Energy
Flexible body • CM_Position
• CM_Velocity
• CM_Acceleration
• Kinetic_Energy
• Angular_Momentum_ About_CM
• Strain_Energy
Spring-damper force, • element_force
single-component • element_torque
force, field force,
• translational_displacement
bushing force
• ax_ay_az_projection_angles
• translational_velocity
• translational_acceleration
• angular_velocity
• angular_acceleration

Joint constraint, • element_force
joint primitive • element_torque
constraint
Curve-curve • pressure_angle
constraint, point- • element_force
curve constraint
• contact_point_location
Joint motion, general • power_consumption

point motion • element_force
• element_torque
measure 17

Three-component • element_force
force, three- • element_torque
component torque,
general force/torque
Contact force • element_force
• element_torque
Double-click a ack to view:
• I_Point
• I_Normal_Force
• I_Friction_Force
• I_Normal_Unit_Vector
• I_Friction_Unit_Vector
• J_Point
• J_Normal_Force
• J_Friction_Force
• J_Normal_Unit_Vector
• J_Friction_Unit_Vector
• Slip_Deformation
• Slip_Velocity
• Penetration
measure create orient

Creates an orientation measure. Orientation measures capture the orientation characteristics of one part
or marker relative to another coordinate system in a specified convention. For example, you could use
orientation measures to determine the:
• Yaw angle associated with a yaw, pitch, roll, or body-fixed 321 rotation sequence.
• First Euler parameter.
• Second rotation associated with a body-fixed 123 rotation sequence.
All such orientation characteristics are simply transformed from the direction cosine matrix.
The following example shows two markers whose orientation relative to each other can be captured using
orientation angles. When associated with a body-fixed 313 rotation sequence, the example returns the
rotation angles 1 = +90 °, 1 = +90 °, an d 1 = +90°.
Format:

measure_name= name for the orientation measure
component= orientation_component
characteristic= measure_orient_characteristic
to_frame= an existing model, part or marker
from_frame= an existing model, part or marker
legend= string
measure 19
Example:
measure create orient &

measure_name = mea_orient__1 &
component = angle_1_component &
characteristic = yaw_pitch_roll &
to_frame = part_2 &
from_frame = part_3 &
legend = "orientation of yaw pitch"
Description:

measure_name New mea_orient Specifies name for the measure to be created
component ANGLE_1_COMPONENT, Specifies the rotational component you want
ANGLE_2_COMPONENT, to measure.
ANGLE_3_COMPONENT,
PARAM_1_COMPONENT,
PARAM_2_COMPONENT,
PARAM_3_COMPONENT,
PARAM_4_COMPONENT,
MAT_1_1_COMPONENT,
MAT_1_2_COMPONENT,
MAT_1_3_COMPONENT,
MAT_2_1_COMPONENT,
MAT_2_2_COMPONENT,
MAT_2_3_COMPONENT,
MAT_3_1_COMPONENT,
MAT_3_2_COMPONENT,
MAT_3_3_COMPONENT

characteristic EULER_ANGLES, Specifies the Characteristic convention
YAW_PITCH_ROLL, with which to associate the component.
AX_AY_AZ_PROJECTION
_ANGLES,
BRYANT_ANGLES,
BODY_1_2_3,
BODY_2_3_1,
BODY_3_1_2,
BODY_1_3_2,
BODY_2_1_3,
BODY_3_2_1,
BODY_1_2_1,
BODY_1_3_1,
BODY_2_1_2,
BODY_2_3_2,
BODY_3_1_3,
BODY_3_2_3,
SPACE_1_2_3,
SPACE_2_3_1,
SPACE_3_1_2,
SPACE_1_3_2,
SPACE_2_1_3,
SPACE_3_2_1,
SPACE_1_2_1,
SPACE_1_3_1,
SPACE_2_1_2,
SPACE_2_3_2,
SPACE_3_1_3,
SPACE_3_2_3,
EULER_PARAMETERS,
RODRIGUEZ_PARAMETE
RS, DIRECTION_COSINES
to_frame Existing model, part or Enter the coordinate system to which to
marker measure
from_frame Existing model, part or Enter the coordinate system from which to
marker measure.
create_measure_display Yes/No Specifies yes if you want to display the strip
chart.
legend String Specifies the text that will appear at the top
of the created measure.
measure 21
1. The orientation characteristics that you can measure are shown in the table below
The
object: Has the measurable characteristics:
Part or • Euler angles
marker • Yaw, pitch, roll
• Ax, ay, az projection angles
• Bryant angles
• Any of 12 body - or space-fixed rotation sequences (123, 132, and so on)
• Euler parameters
• Rodriguez parameters
• Direction cosines
Note:
• Euler parameters are P0, P1, P2, and P3. P0 is the cosine of one-half the angle
of rotation of the rotated frame with respect to the reference frame. P1, P2, and
P3 are the x, y, and z components, respectively, of the unit vector around which
the rotation occurs, multiplied by the sine of one-half the angle. Rodriguez
parameters (R1, R2, and R3) define the relative rotation between two frames of
reference. The relationship between Rodrigues parameters and Euler
parameters is R1 = P1/P0, R2 =P2/P0, and R3 = P3/P0. Rodriguez parameters
become undefined when P0 = 0, that is, when the angle of rotation about the
vector is 180 degrees.
• Many dynamics textbooks define some or all of these orientation schemes.
Refer to:
• Meriam, Kraige. Engineering Mechanics, Vol. 2 . John Wiley & Sons, 1992.
• Greenwood. Principles of Dynamics, Second Edition. Prentice-Hall, Inc.,
1988.
• Kane, Likins, Levinson. Spacecraft Dynamics. McGraw-Hill, 1983.
• Nikravesh. Computer-Aided Analysis of Mechanical Systems. Prentice-Hall
Inc., 1988.
measure create point

This is a predefined measure that lets you capture and investigate Characteristics of a point, such as its
location relative to the global coordinate system or the sum of forces acting on it.
For example, you can use point measures to resolve a force at a specific location on a flexible body, or
you can determine the acceleration of the end marker of a pendulum with respect to the ground reference
frame.
Format:

measure_name= new point measure
characteristic= measure_point_characteristic
point= existing marker
legend = string
comments = string
Example:
measure create point &

measure_name = .model_1.mea_point_1 &
point = .model_1.part_3.marker_4 &
characteristic = " total_force_on_point " &
component = "mag_component" &
coordinate_rframe = .model_1.ground.marker_10&
comments = "point measure to capture the total force
of point marker_3" &
measure 23
Description:

measure_name New point measure Specifies the name of the new
point measure. You can use this
measure.
component X_COMPONENT, Y_COMPONENT, Specifies the component in
Z_COMPONENT, which you are interested. The
MAG_COMPONENT, components available depend
R_COMPONENT, on the coordinate system.
RHO_COMPONENT,
THETA_COMPONENT,
PHI_COMPONENT
characteristic TOTAL_FORCE_ON_POINT, Specifies the kinematic and
TOTAL_TORQUE_ON_POINT, characteristic to be measured.
TOTAL_FORCE_AT_LOCATION,
TOTAL_TORQUE_AT_LOCATION,
TRANSLATIONAL_DEFORMATION,
ANGULAR_DEFORMATION_VELOC
ITY,
TRANSLATIONAL_DEFORMATION_
VELOCITY,
TRANSLATIONAL_DISPLACEMENT,
TRANSLATIONAL_VELOCITY,
TRANSLATIONAL_ACCELERATION,
ANGULAR_VELOCITY,
ANGULAR_DEFORMATION,
ANGULAR_ACCELERATION
point Existing marker Enter the marker or point to
measure.
legend String Specifies the text that will
appear in the top of the measure
window.
comments String Specifies any comments on this
measure.
Create_measure_display Yes/No Specifies yes if you want to
display a strip chart of the
measure.
Point Characteristics You Can Measure
The characteristics of markers that you can measure are shown in the table below. All types of markers
have the same measurable characteristics, but markers on flexible bodies have additional characteristics
for deformation
.
The object : Has the measurable characteristics:

Markers on a rigid body, point • total_force_on_point
mass, or flexible body • total_torque_on_point
• total_force_at_location
• total_torque_at_location
Markers on flexible body • angular_deformation
• angular_deformation_velocity
• angular_deformation_acceleration
• translational_deformation
• translational_deformation_velocity
• translational_deformation_acceleration
measure 25
measure create pt2pt

This is a predefined measure that lets you capture and investigate kinematic characteristics of a point
relative to another point, such as the relative velocity or acceleration. For example, you can use a point-
to-point measure to calculate the global y-component of distance between any two specified markers.
You can also obtain point-to-point characteristics for geometric vertices. When you select vertices for the
markers, Adams/View automatically creates a marker at each vertex and uses it in the point-to-point
measure.
Format:

measure_name= new point-to-point measure
characteristic= measure_pt2pt_characteristic
from_point= existing marker
to_point= existing marker
legend = string
comments = string
Example:
measure create pt2pt &

measure_name = .model_1.mea_pt2pt_1 &
to_point = .model_1.part_3.marker_4 &
characteristic = "translational_displacement" &
coordinate_rframe = .model_1.ground.marker_10 &
comments = "point 2 point measure to capture the
translational displacement of point
marker_3" &
Description:

measure_name New point-point measure Specifies the name of the new
point-to-point measure.You can use
this name later to refer to this
measure.
component X_COMPONENT, Specifies the component in which
Y_COMPONENT, you are interested. The components
Z_COMPONENT, available depend on the coordinate
MAG_COMPONENT, system.
R_COMPONENT,
RHO_COMPONENT,
THETA_COMPONENT,
PHI_COMPONENT
characteristic TRANSLATIONAL_DISPLACEM Specifies the kinematic
ENT, characteristic to be measured. The
TRANSLATIONAL_VELOCITY, values you enter next in the
TRANSLATIONAL_ACCELERA command depend on whether you
TION, ANGULAR_VELOCITY, select a translational or angular
ANGULAR_ACCELERATION characteristics.
from_point Existing marker Enter the marker or point from
which to measure.
to_point Existing marker Enter the marker or point to which
to measure
legend String Specifies the text that will appear in
the top of the measure window.
measure.
Create_measure_display Yes/No Specifies yes if you want to display
a strip chart of the measure.
measure 27
The point-to-point kinematic characteristics that you can measure are shown in the table below.
The object: Has the measurable characteristics:

Two markers • Translational displacement
• Translational velocity
• Translational acceleration
• Angular velocity (not available when creating a point-to-point measure
from the Main toolbox)
• Angular acceleration (not available when creating a point-to-point
measure from the Main toolbox)
measure create query

Format:

measure_name= new mea_query
gui_driver_name= existing gi_gui
delay_time= time
initial_condition= real
legend= string
Description:

measure_name New name for the measure Specifies name for the new measure to
be created
gui_driver_name Existing graphic user interface Specifies an existing graphic user
interface
delay_time Time Specifies the time delay
initial_condition Real Specifies the initial condition
create_measure_display Yes/No Specifies yes if you want to display the
strip chart
legend String Specifies the text that will appear at the
top of the measure dialog.
measure 29
measure create range

Allows you to use range measures to obtain statistical feedback about any existing measure. Ranges
dynamically calculate the maximum, minimum, average, or variation characteristics of any measure.
Format:

measure_name= new mea_range
type= range_type
of_measure_name= existing measure name
legend= string
Example:
measure create range &

measure_name = range_mea_angle_measure &
tpe = maximum &
of_measure_name = my_mea_angle__1 &
legend = "maximum angle between the links"
Description:

measure_name New Name For The Range Specifies the name of the new measure to be
Measure created.
type Minimum, Maximum, Specifies type of the range measure.
Average, Variation,
Same_as
of_measure_name Existing Measure Specifies existing, predefined measure to
analyze.
create_measure_display Yes/no Type Yes if you want to display the strip chart
of the measure.
legend String Specifies comments for the range measure.
Range Measure Characteristic Descriptions
The following table describes the characteristics that range measures provide. For information on the
conventions used, see Conventions.
The measure: Description: Definition/Formula:

Average Arithmetic mean of current set of measured
data.
Minimum Minimum value in the current set of Min (M1, M2, ..., Mn)
measured data.
Maximum Maximum value in the current set of Max (M1, M2, ..., Mn)
measured data.
Variation Difference between the maximum and Maximum - Minimum
minimum value in the current set of
measured data.
measure 31
measure delete
measure delete
This command will delete the specified marker.
Format:
measure delete
measure_name= existing measure
Example:
measure delete &

measure_name= mea_1
Description:

Measure_name Existing measure Specifies an existing measure to be deleted.
measure modify angle

This command will modify an existing angle measure.
Format:

measure_name= existing mea_angle
new_measure_name = new name for the measure
first_point= existing marker
middle_point= existing marker
last_point= existing marker
comments= string
legend= string
Example:
measure modify angle &

measure_name = angle_between_link1_link2 &
first_point = marker_2 &
last_point = marker_4 &
middle_point = marker_1 &
legend = "angle between two links" &
comments = "this measure will track the angle
between the two links"
If Link1 and Link2 are connected by a revolute joint and Marker2 lies on Link1, Marker 3 lies on Link2
and Marker 1 lies in the intersection of Link1 and Link2, then the above command will modify the
existing angle measure to compute the angle between the two links. The title of the measure will be the
string specified in the legend parameter.
Description:

measure_name Existing Meaure name Specifies the name of the existing angle measure.
New_measure_name New measure name Specifies the new name for the measure. You can
use this name later to specify this new angle
measure created.
measure 33

first_point Existing marker Specifies an existing marker on an entity.
middle_point Existing marker Specifies an existing marker on an entity.
last_point Existing marker Specifies an existing marker on an entity.
Angle measure.
Comments String Specifies any comments that are to be associated
with this angle measure.
About Measuring Included Angle Characteristics
The included angle measure captures the instantaneous angle between two vectors defined by three
markers. For example, you can use the angle measure to find the included angle between any two links
connected by a revolute joint. The default unit for angle measures is degrees.
To create an included angle, you select three markers, as illustrated in the figure below. These three
markers define two vectors:
It is the instantaneous angle between these vectors that Adams/View tracks in an included angle measure.
Note that the included angle changes over time as the markers move during a simulation.
Example of Points That Define Included Angles
There are two conventions used in Adams/View to define the sign and magnitude of an included angle
measure as it changes over time:
• The sign and magnitude is always calculated so as to have an initial value within the range [0, PI]
regardless of the order in which you select the points.
• The axis of rotation is automatically calculated as the cross-product of , which is

sensitive to the order in which you select the points. This, along with the right-hand rule,
determines all subsequent changes to the sign and magnitude of the included angle measure.
measure modify computed

Allows you to modify an existing computed measure
Adams/View computed measures allow you to create measures in the Adams/View expression language
that can be evaluated before a simulation or any time after. You build them using design-time functions
and typically use them in the initial model set up.
An Adams/View computed measure is convenient because it can reference any Adams/View variable.
For example, if you create two measures and you want to add or subtract them, you can use an
Adams/View computed measure to do so. You can also compute data from a run-time measure.
Format:

measure_name= existing computed measure
units= string
legend= string
comments = string
Example:
Assuming that ADAMS_KE is an existing measure of the kinetic energy of a pendulum and MY_KE is
an existing analytical measure if the kinetic energy.
.
measure modify computed &

measure_name = my_computed_measure &
new_measure_name = ke_comparison_measure &
text_of_expression = “100*(.model_1.adams_ke - .model_1.my_ke)/322.6” &
units = “no_units” &
legend = “measure comparison of analytical and kinetic
energy results”
measure 35
Description:

measure_name Existing measure Specifies name of the existing computed measure to
name be modified.
New_measure_name New measure name Specifies the new name for the measure.
text_of_expression String The TEXT_OF_EXPRESSION parameter defines
the computation to be performed by the function.
Remember that the value of this argument should be
a character string, NOT an expression.
units String Specifies units of the measure.
create_measure_displa Yes/No Specifies whether the strip chart has to be displayed
y of the measure.
created measure.
comments String Specifies any comments.
Cautions:
1. Be careful, however, about the changes you make in your model. Making changes can cause a
potential problem because model changes can invalidate the accuracy of any measure that
depends on the results of a simulation. The simulation redefines the model data and re-evaluates
your Adams/View computed measures.
measure modify function

An Adams/Solver function measure allows you to modify a measure in Adams/View that Adams/Solver
evaluates during simulations . Because Adams/Solver function measures are only evaluated during
simulations, function measures remain unevaluated until you run a simulation. The Adams/Solver
function measure is convenient because it lets you reference any user-defined Adams/Solver function or
subroutine . Function measures are built from Adams/Solver run-time functions.
Format:
measure function
measure_name= existing function measure
new_measure_name= new function measure name
function= function
user_function= real
routine= string
units= string
legend= string,
comments= string
Example:
measure modify function measure = .model_1.function_mea_1 &

new_measure_name = .model_1.my_function_mea &
function = "0.5*wz(.model_1.part_2.cm)**2*(15*(50**2
+ 300**2) + 15000)/1000" &
units = no_units &
Description:

Measure_name String Specifies name of measure to be modified.
New_measure_name String Specifies new name of measure.
function Function Specifies function to be evaluated during the
simulation.
user_function Real Specifies a real number
measure 37

routine String Specifies a string for the routine.
units String Specifies any units that have to be associated.
create_measure_display Yes/no Specifies yes if the strip chart of the measure needs to
be displayed.
legend String Specifies the text that will appear on the top of the
measure dialog.
Comments String Specifies any comments about the function measure.
Cautions:
1. Be careful, however, about the number of Adams/Solver function measures you create because
Adams/View writes each measure to the Adams/Solver dataset as a VARIABLE statement. Each
VARIABLE statement adds another equation to the overall set of equations. The more equations
Adams/Solver must solve, the longer your simulation takes.
measure modify object

Allows you to modify an existing object measure.
In general, all objects in your model have some pre-defined measurable characteristics. For example, you
can capture and investigate the power consumption of a motion, or measure a part’s center-of-mass
velocity along the global x-axis, taking time derivatives in the ground reference frame. The default
coordinate system is the ground coordinate system, but you can use any marker as the coordinate system.
Format:

measure_name= existing object measure
new_measure_name = new name for the object measure
characteristic= measure_object_characteristic
object= existing object
from_first = boolean
legend = string
comments = string
Example:
measure modify object &

measure_name = mea_object__1 &
from_first = yes &
component = y_component &
characteristic = angular_acceleration &
object = joint_2 &
legend = "joint_2 object measure"
measure 39
Description:

measure_name Existing Point Measure Specifies the name of the existing
point measure that has to be
modified.
New_measure_name New Name For The Point Measure Specifies the new name for the point
measure. You can use this name later
to refer to this measure.
component X_component, Y_component, Specifies the component in which
Z_component, Mag_component, you are interested. The components
R_component, Rho_component, available depend on the coordinate
Theta_component, Phi_component system.
motion_rframe Existing Marker Specifies existing marker
coordinate_rframe Existing Marker Specifies existing marker

characteristic Angular_acceleration, Specifies the object characteristic to
Angular_deformation, be measured.
Angular_deformation_velocity,
Angular_kinetic_energy,
Angular_momentum_about_cm,
Angular_velocity,
Ax_ay_az_projection_angles,
Cm_acceleration,
cm_angular_acceleration,
Cm_angular_displacement,
Euler_angles, Cm_angular_velocity,
Cm_position,
Cm_position_relative_to_body,
Cm_velocity, Contact_point_location,
Element_force, Element_torque,
Integrator_order, Integrator_stepsize,
Integrator_time_step, Iterator_steps,
Iteration_count, Kinetic_energy,
Potential_energy_delta,
Power_consumption, Pressure_angle,
Static_imbalance,
Strain_kinetic_energy,
Translational_acceleration,
Translational_deformation,
Translational_deformation_velocity,
Translational_displacement,
Translational_kinetic_energy,
Translational_momentum,
Translational_velocity
Object Existing Object In Adams Enter the object to measure.
legend String Specifies the text that will appear in
the top of the measure window.
measure.
Create_measure_dis Yes/no Specifies yes if you want to display a
play strip chart of the measure.
measure 41
The measurable characteristics of objects are shown in the table below. Click an object characteristic to
view the description.

Marker • Total force at point
• Total force at location
• Total_Torque_On_Point
• Total_Torque_At_Location
• Translational_Displacement
• Translational_Velocity
• Translational_Acceleration
• Angular_Velocity
• Angular_Acceleration
Rigid body • CM_Position

• CM_Velocity
• CM_Acceleration
• Kinetic_Energy
• Angular_Momentum_About_CM
Point mass body • CM_Position
• CM_Velocity
• CM_Acceleration
• Kinetic_Energy

Flexible body • CM_Position
• CM_Velocity
• CM_Acceleration
• Kinetic_Energy
• Angular_Momentum_ About_CM
• Strain_Energy
Spring-damper force, • element_force
single-component force, • element_torque
field force, bushing force
Joint constraint, • element_force

joint primitive constraint • element_torque
Curve-curve constraint, • pressure_angle

point-curve constraint • element_force
• contact_point_location
measure 43

Joint motion, general point • power_consumption
motion • element_force
• element_torque
Three-component force, • element_force

three-component torque, • element_torque
general force/torque
Contact force • element_force

• element_torque
Double-click a rack to view:

• I_Point
• I_Normal_Force
• I_Friction_Force
• I_Normal_Unit_Vector
• I_Friction_Unit_Vector
• J_Point
• J_Normal_Force
• J_Friction_Force
• J_Normal_Unit_Vector
• J_Friction_Unit_Vector
• Slip_Deformation
• Slip_Velocity
• Penetration
measure modify orient

Allows you to modify an orientation measure. Orientation measures capture the orientation
characteristics of one part or marker relative to another coordinate system in a specified convention. For
example, you could use orientation measures to determine the:
• Yaw angle associated with a yaw, pitch, roll, or body-fixed 321 rotation sequence.
• First Euler parameter.
• Second rotation associated with a body-fixed 123 rotation sequence.
All such orientation characteristics are simply transformed from the direction cosine matrix.
The following example shows two markers whose orientation relative to each other you can capture using
orientation angles. When associated with a body-fixed 313 rotation sequence, the example returns the
rotation angles 1 = +90 °, 1 = +90 °, an d 1 = +90°.
Format:

measure_name= name of existing orientation measure
component= orientation_component
characteristic= measure_orient_characteristic
to_frame= an existing model, part or marker
from_frame= an existing model, part or marker
legend= string
measure 45
Example:
measure modify orient &

measure_name = mea_orient__1 &
new_measure_name = mea_yaw_orient &
component = angle_1_component &
characteristic = yaw_pitch_roll &
to_frame = part_2 &
from_frame = part_3 &
legend = "orientation of yaw pitch"
Description:

measure_name New mea_orient Specifies name for the measure to be
created
component Angle_1_component, Specifies the rotational component
Angle_2_component, you want to measure.
Angle_3_component,
Param_1_component,
Param_2_component,
Param_3_component,
Param_4_component,
Mat_1_1_component,
Mat_1_2_component,
Mat_1_3_component,
Mat_2_1_component,
Mat_2_2_component,
Mat_2_3_component,
Mat_3_1_component,
Mat_3_2_component,
Mat_3_3_component

characteristic Euler_angles, Yaw_pitch_roll, Specifies the Characteristic
Ax_ay_az_projection_angles, convention with which to associate
Bryant_angles, Body_1_2_3, the component.
Body_2_3_1, Body_3_1_2,
Body_1_3_2, Body_2_1_3,
Body_3_2_1, Body_1_2_1,
Body_1_3_1, Body_2_1_2,
Body_2_3_2, Body_3_1_3,
Body_3_2_3, Space_1_2_3,
Space_2_3_1, Space_3_1_2,
Space_3_2_3, Euler_parameters,
Rodriguez_parameters,
Direction_cosines
to_frame Existing model, part or marker Enter the coordinate system to which
to measure
from_frame Existing Model, Part Or Marker Enter the coordinate system from
which to measure.
create_measure_displ Yes/no Specifies yes if you want to display
ay the strip chart.
legend String Specifies the text that will appear at
the top of the created measure.
measure 47
1. The orientation characteristics that you can measure are shown in the table below.
.
The
object: Has the measurable characteristics:
Part or • Euler angles
marker • Yaw, pitch, roll
• Ax, ay, az projection angles
• Bryant angles
• Any of 12 body - or space-fixed rotation sequences (123, 132, and so on)
• Euler parameters
• Rodriguez parameters
• Direction cosines
Note:
• Euler parameters are P0, P1, P2, and P3. P0 is the cosine of one-half the angle
of rotation of the rotated frame with respect to the reference frame. P1, P2, and
P3 are the x, y, and z components, respectively, of the unit vector around which
the rotation occurs, multiplied by the sine of one-half the angle. Rodriguez
parameters (R1, R2, and R3) define the relative rotation between two frames of
reference. The relationship between Rodrigues parameters and Euler
parameters is R1 = P1/P0, R2 =P2/P0, and R3 = P3/P0. Rodriguez parameters
become undefined when P0 = 0, that is, when the angle of rotation about the
vector is 180 degrees.
• Many dynamics textbooks define some or all of these orientation schemes.
Refer to:
• Meriam, Kraige. Engineering Mechanics, Vol. 2 . John Wiley & Sons, 1992.
• Greenwood. Principles of Dynamics, Second Edition. Prentice-Hall, Inc.,
1988.
• Kane, Likins, Levinson. Spacecraft Dynamics. McGraw-Hill, 1983.
• Nikravesh. Computer-Aided Analysis of Mechanical Systems. Prentice-Hall
Inc., 1988.
measure modify point

Allows you to modify an existing point measure.
This is a predefined measure that lets you capture and investigate Characteristics of a point, such as its
location relative to the global coordinate system or the sum of forces acting on it.
For example, you can use point measures to resolve a force at a specific location on a flexible body, or
you can determine the acceleration of the end marker of a pendulum with respect to the ground reference
frame.
Format:

measure_name= existing point measure
new_measure_name = new name for measure
characteristic= measure_point_characteristic
point= existing marker
legend = string
comments = string
Example:
measure modify point &

measure_name = .model_1.mea_point_1 &
new_measure_name = mea_my_point &
point = .model_1.part_3.marker_4 &
characteristic = " total_force_on_point " &
comments = "point measure to capture the total force
of point marker_3" &
measure 49
Description:

measure_name Existing point measure Specifies the name of an
existing point measure to be
modified.
New_measure_name New name for the measure Specifies the new name for the
measure. You can use this name
later to refer to this measure.
component X_component, Y_component, Specifies the component in
Z_component, Mag_component, which you are interested. The
R_component, Rho_component, components available depend
Theta_component, Phi_component on the coordinate system.
characteristic Total_force_on_point, Specifies the kinematic and
Total_torque_on_point, characteristic to be measured.
Total_force_at_location,
Total_torque_at_location,
Translational_deformation,
Angular_deformation_velocity,
Translational_deformation_velocity,
Translational_displacement,
Translational_velocity,
Translational_acceleration,
Angular_velocity, Angular_deformation,
Angular_acceleration
point Existing Marker Enter the marker or point to
measure.
legend String Specifies the text that will
appear in the top of the measure
window.
measure.
Create_measure_displ Yes/no Specifies yes if you want to
ay display a strip chart of the
measure.
Point Characteristics You Can Measure
The characteristics of markers that you can measure are shown in the table below. All types of markers
have the same measurable characteristics, but markers on flexible bodies have additional characteristics
for deformation.
The object : Has the measurable characteristics:

Markers on a rigid body, • total_force_on_point
point mass, or flexible body • total_torque_on_point
• total_force_at_location
• total_torque_at_location
Markers on flexible body • angular_deformation
• angular_deformation_velocity
• angular_deformation_acceleration
• translational_deformation
• translational_deformation_velocity
• translational_deformation_acceleration
measure 51
measure modify pt2pt

Allows you to modify an existing point-to-point measure.
This is a predefined measure that lets you capture and investigate kinematic characteristics of a point
relative to another point, such as the relative velocity or acceleration. For example, you can use a point-
to-point measure to calculate the global y-component of distance between any two specified markers.
You can also obtain point-to-point characteristics for geometric vertices. When you select vertices for the
markers, Adams/View automatically creates a marker at each vertex and uses it in the point-to-point
measure.
Format:

measure_name= existing point-to-point measure
characteristic= measure_pt2pt_characteristic
from_point= existing marker
to_point= existing marker
legend = string
comments = string
Example:
measure modify pt2pt &

measure_name= .model_1.mea_pt2pt_1 &
new_measure_name = .model_1.mea_pt_to_pt &
to_point= .model_1.part_3.marker_4 &
characteristic = "translational_displacement" &
measure modify pt2pt &

comments= "point 2 point measure to capture the
translational displacement of point
marker_3" &
Description:

measure_name Existing point-point measure Specifies the name of an existing point-
to-point measure to be modified.
New_measure_name New name for the measure Specifies the new name for the measure.
You can use this name later to refer to
this measure.
component X_component, Y_component, Specifies the component in which you
Z_component, Mag_component, are interested. The components
R_component, Rho_component, available depend on the coordinate
Theta_component, Phi_component system.
characteristic Translational_displacement, Specifies the kinematic characteristic to
Translational_velocity, be measured. The values you enter next
Translational_acceleration, in the command depend on whether you
Angular_velocity, select a translational or angular
Angular_acceleration characteristics.
from_point Existing Marker Enter the marker or point from which to
measure.
to_point Existing Marker Enter the marker or point to which to
measure
legend String Specifies the text that will appear in the
top of the measure window.
measure.
Create_measure_displ Yes/No Specifies yes if you want to display a
ay strip chart of the measure.
measure 53
The point-to-point kinematic characteristics that you can measure are shown in the table below.
The object: Has the measurable characteristics:

Two markers • Translational displacement
• Translational velocity
• Translational acceleration
• Angular velocity (not available when creating a point-to-point measure from
the Main toolbox)
• Angular acceleration (not available when creating a point-to-point measure
from the Main toolbox)
measure modify query

Allows you to modify an existing query.
Format:

measure_name= existing mea_query
new_measure_name = new name for query
gui_driver_name= existing gi_gui
delay_time= time
legend= string
Description:

measure_name Existing measure Specifies name for the existing measure to be
modified.
New_measure_name New measure name Specifies the new name for the measure.
gui_driver_name Existing graphic user Specifies an existing graphic user interface
interface
delay_time Time Specifies the time delay
initial_condition Real Specifies the initial condition
create_measure_display Yes/No Specifies yes if you want to display the strip
chart
legend String Specifies the text that will appear at the top of
the measure dialog.
measure 55
measure modify range

Allows you to modify an existing range measure.
You can use range measures to obtain statistical feedback about any existing measure. Ranges
dynamically calculate the maximum, minimum, average, or variation characteristics of any measure.
Format:

measure_name= existing mea_range
new_measure_name = new mea_range name
type= range_type
of_measure_name= existing measure name
legend= string
Example:
measure modify range &

measure_name = range_mea_angle_measure &
new_measure_name = range_angle_measure &
tpe = maximum &
of_measure_name = my_mea_angle__1 &
legend = "maximum angle between the links"
Description:

measure_name existing range measure Specifies the name of the existing measure to
be modified.
New_measure_name New name for the measure Specifies the new name for the measure.
type Minimum, Maximum, Specifies type of the range measure.
Average, Variation,
Same_as
of_measure_name Existing measure Specifies existing, predefined measure to
analyze.

create_measure_display, Yes/No Type Yes if you want to display the strip chart
of the measure.
legend String Specifies comments for the range measure.
1. Range Measure Characteristic Descriptions
The following table describes the characteristics that range measures provide. For information on
the conventions used, see Conventions.
The measure: Description: Definition/Formula:

Average Arithmetic mean of current set of
measured data.
Minimum Minimum value in the current set of Min (M1, M2, ..., Mn)
measured data.
Maximum Maximum value in the current set of Max (M1, M2, ..., Mn)
measured data.
Variation Difference between the maximum and Maximum - Minimum
minimum value in the current set of
measured data.
measure_display 1
measure_display
measure_display create
Allows you to transfer the plot on the strip chart to full_plot creation of a measure_display for an existing
measure.
A measure gauge particular quantities in your model during a simulation . For example, you can measure
the force in a spring throughout a simulation or the angle between two points or axes. The measure once
created can be displayed as a strip chart or can be transferred to full plot.
The measured quantity is displayed against TIME as default axis, or it can be displayed against any
‘independent_measure’ existing in the model.
Format:
measure_name = an existing measure
mea_display = a new mea_display
independent_measure_name = an existing measure
Example:
measure_display create &

mea_display= .model_1.mdsp &
measure_name= .model_1.msr &
independent_measure_name = .model_1.mea_3
Description:

measure_name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing measure
Measure
mea_display A New Mea Display Specifies a new name for the new measure
display
independent_measure_name An Existing Specifies an existing as abscissa along which the
Measure new measure is displayed
1. While creating a measure a strip chart of the measure can be displayed by clicking the toggle
button to ‘create strip chart’. If a display of the measure at an later stage, it can be created using
this command.
measure_display 3
2. The command ‘measure_display create’ will create a display of an existing measure, the quantity
variation being displayed along default axis as ‘TIME’, when ‘independent_measure_name’ is
not specified. For example, the ‘ANGLE’ turned by a revolute joint with respect to ‘TIME’ will
give the angular velocity measure of the joint.
3. If the quantity is to be displayed with respect to any parameter other than default ‘TIME’, e.g., the
variation in ‘FORCE’ with respect to ‘ANGLE’ turned by crank, then two measured are first
created for force and angle. Then the new measure is created for ‘measure_name’ FORCE and the
‘independent_measure_name’ as ANGLE. This will display the variation in force with respect to
the angle.
measure_display delete
Allows deletion of a measure_display for an existing measure.
Format:
measure_name= an existing measure
Example:
measure_display delete &

mea_display= .model_1.disp2_display
Description:

measure_name An Existing Measure Specifies the name of an existing measure
The existing measure_display can be deleted by choosing the display name while ‘delete’ command. On
the other hand, if the measure display if closed then it can be redisplayed by ‘measure’-‘display’ from
the main menu.
measure_display 5
measure_display full_plot
Allows transferring the plot on the strip chart to full_plot creation of a measure_display for an existing
measure.
Format:
mea_display = a new mea_display
independent_measure_name = an existing measure
Example:
measure_display full_plot &

mea_display= .model_1.mdsp &
measure_name= .model_1.msr &
independent_measure_name = .model_1.MEA_3
Description:

measure_name An Existing Specifies the name of an existing measure
Measure
mea_display A New Mea Display Specifies a new name for the new measure
display
independent_measure_name An Existing Specifies an existing as abscissa along which the
Measure new measure is displayed
1. While creating a measure a strip chart of the measure can be displayed by clicking the toggle
button to ‘create strip chart’. If a display of the measure at an later stage, it can be created using
this command.
2. The command ‘measure_display create’ will create a display of an existing measure, the quantity
variation being displayed along default axis as ‘TIME’, when ‘independent_measure_name’ is
not specified. For example, the ‘ANGLE’ turned by a revolute joint with respect to ‘TIME’ will
give the angular velocity measure of the joint.
3. If the quantity is to be displayed with respect to any parameter other than default ‘TIME’, e.g., the
variation in ‘FORCE’ with respect to ‘ANGLE’ turned by crank, then two measured are first
created for force and angle. Then the new measure is created for ‘measure_name’ FORCE and the
‘independent_measure_name’ as ANGLE. This will display the variation in force with respect to
the angle.
measure_display save_curve
Allows to save the curve on the measure_display.
A measure gauge particular quantities in your model during a simulation. For example, you can measure
Format:
mea_display= an existing mea_display
Example:
measure_display save_curve &

mea_display= mdsp
Description:

mea_display An Existing Mea_display Specifies the name of an existing measure display
The curve on strip chart is replaced by a new curve, whenever a new simulation is carried out. In case it
is necessary to retain the current curve from current simulation to compare with a new curve displayed
after a new simulation, the current curve can be saved. Thus, the new curve will be superimposed on the
current one facilitating comparison of the curves.
model 1
model
model assemble
model assemble
Allows you to merge several models into one big model.
Format:
model assemble
new_model_name = a new model
model_names = an existing model
prefix = string
suffix = string
translation = location
rotation = orientation
duplicate_parts = dupl_part_action
add_to_group_name = a new or existing group
Example:
model assemble &

new_model_name = model__1 &
model_names = crankshaft , model_1 &
prefix = "new_" &
translation = 10 , 10 , 10 &
rotation = 0 , 0 , 0 &
duplicate_parts = rename
Description:

new_model_name A New Model The model into which the models specified by
'model_names' will be merged.
model_names An Existing Model Specifies a list of existing models in Adams/View,
to be merged to create an assembled model.
prefix String This parameter specifies the list of prefixes that are
applied to all entities at the part level as they are
assembled into a destination model.
model 3
model assemble

suffix String This parameter specifies the list of suffixes that are
applied to all entities at the part level, as they are
assembled into a destination model.
translation Location Specifies the translations (relative to the global
origin) that are applied to the parts, polylines, and
notes beneath the source model before it is merged
with the destination model.
rotation Operation Specifies the rotations (about to the global origin)
that are applied to the parts, polylines, and notes
beneath the source model before it is merged with
the destination model.
duplicate_parts Dupl_Part_Action Specifies what to do when a part in the destination
model has the same name as a part in the source
model.
add_to_group_name A New or Existing Group This parameter specifies a new or existing group
into which Adams/View will add all merged
objects.
1. The "model_names" lists the source of the objects being merged and the "new_model_name"
names the destination model. The source models are not changed after the assemble operation.
You can specify a set of translations and rotations that are applied to the parts, polylines, and notes
of each source model before it is merged with the assembled model.
If you specify that parts with the same name in both models (duplicate parts) are to be merged,
then all of the children beneath the parts of the source model will be copied beneath the
corresponding parts in the assembled model. Otherwise, the duplicate parts in the source model
will be copied and renamed in the destination model.
MODEL MERGE VS. MODEL ASSEMBLE
Although the "model merge" and "model assemble" commands accomplish much the same thing,
there are several differences between them. These differences are
a. If ground parts are not merged during a "model assemble", then they will be constrained to
ground with an automatically created fixed joint. ("Ground" is what was originally ground in
the the first model in the "model_names" list.)
The auto-created fixed joints for the ground parts are named
"fixed_ORIGINAL_MODEL_NAME"; the markers are named,
"fixed_i_ORIGINAL_MODEL_NAME" and "fixed_j_ORIGINAL_MODEL_NAME" with
the J marker going to the assembled model's ground part and the I marker on the part that was
once a ground.
model assemble
b. In "model assemble", with the renaming of like-named parts, the ground parts for all but the
first model in the list are renamed "ground_ORIGINAL_MODEL_NAME" (unless the
prefixes/suffixes you specify are sufficient for distinguishing the ground names). In "model
merge", ground parts are renamed only if their names conflict, and then they are renamed the
same way as other parts (typically, "ground_2" or "ground_3").
c. As with "model copy", the "model assemble" command retains the Adams IDs for the first
model; all others may be changed if there are conflicts.
d. With "model assemble", you may relocate and/or reorient any of the models, including the
first one, as they are merged into the assembly.
e. With "model assemble", gravity forces are eliminated from all but the first model. If the first
model has no gravity, then there will be no gravity in the assembly. In a "model merge",
duplicate gravity forces are renamed (usually, something like "gravity_2").
f. The model assemble command is much faster than using the copy, merge strategy for creating
an assembly of models. You will often see a four-fold improvement in performance by using
"model assemble" instead of a "model copy", "model merge" sequence.
associated with it.
8. If you specify that duplicate parts are to be merged, then all the children beneath the parts of the
source model will be copied beneath the corresponding parts in the destination model. Otherwise,
the duplicate parts in the source model will be copied and renamed in the destination model.
9. The add_to_group parameter specifies a new or existing group into which Adams/View will add
all merged objects. All objects that were copied from the source model into the destination model
will be added to the specified group.
Cautions:
1. The source entities are not changed by the assemble operation.
model 5
model attributes
model attributes
Allows you to set specification of attributes on the entire model.
Format:
model attributes
name_ visibility = on_off_with_toggle
Example:
model attributes &

model_name = model__1 &
visibility = on &
color = blue &
active = on &
Description:

model_name An Existing Model Specifies the model to be modified. You use this
with this command.
icon size.
model attributes

size_of_icons Real Specifies the size, in modeling units, the Adams/View
name_ visibility On_Off_With_Toggle The NAME_VISIBILITY parameter provides control
over the visibility of the view name displayed in the top
color An Existing Color Specifies the color the modeling entity should be drawn
in.
active On_Off_No_Opinion Set the activation of the element
dependents_active On_Off_No_Opinion Set the activation of the dependants of an element
entity_scope Color_Scope The ENTITY_SCOPE parameter is used to control how
a color modification is to affect a particular graphic
entity.
- SIZE_OF_ICONS / SCALE_OF_ICONS. These two parameters are mutually exclusive. You
may set a size of the icon used for the marker representation in modeling units, or you may scale
- VISIBILITY. You may set a marker's visibility ON, OFF or TOGGLE the current setting.
When you set a marker's visibility OFF, the marker will not be drawn. When you set a marker's
visibility ON, you allow that marker to be drawn.
- NAME_VISIBILITY. You may set a marker's name label visibility ON, OFF or TOGGLE the
- COLOR. You may set the color of a marker with this parameter.
ATTRIBUTE may be inherited from another entity. INHERITANCE may either be
TOP_DOWN or BOTTOM_UP.
hierarchy is a tree structure with the model at the apex.
Parts exist beneath the model, and markers exist beneath the parts.
If the icon size of the model is set to 0.1, and the default INHERITANCE is set to TOP_DOWN,
then all icons displayed within the model will be displayed in this size. However, if the icon size
of a model is set to 0.1, and then the default INHERITANCE is set to BOTTOM_UP, then any
icons set to a size other than the model's icon size will be displayed in their own size.
model 7
model attributes
associated with it.
An Example:
If the model has SIZE_OF_ICONS set to 0.0 , and a part under that model has its
An Example:
model ---------------------- SIZE_OF_ICONS = 0.0 meters
The part's icon will be .125 meters in size.
displayed in the top center position of a given view.
The legal values of this parameter are ON and OFF. This is an optional parameter and if not
entered, the name will be visible (i.e. will be ON).
model attributes
Specifying 'NO_COLOR' for a modeling entity instructs Adams/View to use the default color for
Example 1:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- RED
Example 2:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- RED
Example 3:
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- NO_COLOR
for the dependents all the way down the dependency chain. For example, if you execute the
following command:
• Group
• Part
• Marker
• Geometry
model 9
model attributes
• Constraints
• Forces
• Data Elements
• Output Control
and ALL.
FILL_COLOR is the color of those areas of a graphic that can be shaded (they include sides of
cylinders, frustums, boxes, etc.) The EDGE_COLOR is the color of the lines making up the edges
of the facets (or areas filled by the FILL_COLOR) of a graphic that can be shaded.
springdamper.
model copy
model copy
Allows you to create a replica model.
Format:
model copy
time = time
include_contact_steps = integer
Example:
model copy &

view_name = view_1
Description:

new_model_name A New Model Specifies the name of the new model. You may use
this name later to refer to this model.
analysis_name An Existing Analysis Specifies the name of an analysis.
frame_number Integer Specifies the frame number (Adams simulation
output time step) at which to configure the new
model.
time Time Allows you to identify the frame number (Adams
simulation output time step) at which to configure
the new model.
view_name An Existing View Specifies the view in which to display this model.
Include_contact_steps Integer
model 11
model copy
1. You can either copy a model as it was created, or at a specified frame/time step of an analysis.
If you use the MODEL_NAME parameter, the replica model will be identical to the original with
the exception of the model name. All modeling entities under the original model will be copied to
the replica and have the same names, including the analysis data.
If you use the ANALYSIS_NAME parameter, the replica model will contain all the modeling
entities under the original model, including the analyses. The part positions (locations and
orientations) and the dynamic polyline shapes will be modified to match what they would be at
the time, or frame, you specify.
Models must have unique names relative to other models in Adams/View.
The replica will be completely independent of the original, and may be modified without
affecting the original.
associated with it.
assumed.
can be assigned to it
4. When Adams/View reads a graphics file (.GRA), a request file (.REQ), or a results file (.RES)
extension.
model copy
change the default analysis name without reading in an analysis file, use the "defaults analysis"
command.
(output time step). If a value greater than the last frame number is entered, the system will display
the last frame.
6. The frame with the time value closest to the time specified in this parameter will be selected.
Adams/View will use the last frame if the time entered is greater than the time for the last frame
in the simulation.
7. You may identify a view by typing its name or by picking it from the screen. In most cases, you
may enter the special view name 'all', which means all the views currently displayed.
You must separate multiple view names by commas. You need not separate multiple view picks
by commas.
Cautions:
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two models with the same name, so you must provide a
unique name.
model 13
model create
model create
Allows you to create a model. You may reverse this creation at a later time with an UNDO command.
You can also create models as children of other models.
Format:
model create
model_name = a new model
comments = string
title = string
fit_to_view = boolean
Example:
model create &

comments = "a new model" &
title = model1 &
view_name = view__1 &
fit_to_view = yes
Description:

model_name A New Model Specifies the name of the new model. You may use this name
later to refer to this model.
title String Specifies the title of model
fit_to_view Boolean The FIT_TO_VIEW parameter is used to control whether or not
to compute the extents of the model or part before displaying the
model or part in a view.
model create
1. In order to build a mechanism in Adams/View, you must first create a model object in the
Adams/View database. You then add parts and other objects to the model. As you are developing
your model, you may display it, verify it, and change its attributes.
Once you have created a model, you add parts to it with the 'PART CREATE RIGID_BODY
will help you visualize your model as you are constructing it.
When your model is complete, you use the 'OUTPUT_CONTROL' command to request Adams
output, write an Adams data set, and then analyze it with Adams. If your analysis is fairly simple,
you may use the 'SUBMIT' command to write the dataset and invoke Adams.
4. The title is a character string up to 80 characters which describes the model. It is used as the
TITLE statement in the Adams DATA SET (.adm file)
by commas.
model 15
model create
Cautions:
unique name.
model delete
model delete
Allows you to delete an existing model.
Format:
model delete
Example:
model delete &

model_name = crankshaft
Description:

model_name An Existing Model Specifies the model to be deleted
analysis_name An Existing Analysis Specifies the analysis to be deleted
1. You must enter the name of the model you wish to delete either by picking it from the screen or
You may identify a model by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
associated with it.
3. Any AdamsAdamsAdams/View object you delete, may be "undeleted" by using the UNDO
commands. If you have deleted something you would like back, enter the command "undo
backward", or pick on the fixed menu entry 'UNDO'.
You may identify an analysis by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
model 17
model delete
displayed.
name be entered.
associated with it.
Tips:
model display
model display
Allows you to display the model in the specified view. If no view has been specified, the model will be
displayed in the active view.
Format:
model display
fit_to_view = boolean
Example:
model display &

fit_to_view = yes
Description:

view_name An Existing View Specifies the view in which to display this model
fit_to_view Boolean The FIT_TO_VIEW parameter is used to control whether or not
to compute the extents of the model or part before displaying the
model or part in a view.
1. This command can be useful when the the entire model is no longer visible in the current view
space. MODEL DISPLAY will "fit" the model to the current view space.
associated with it.
model 19
model display
by commas.
model generate_ids
model generate_ids
This command sets the adams_ids of all objects that are descendents of the specified models. The
adams_ids can be set to positive integers, as required by Adams/Solver or can be all set to zero.
Format:
model generate_ids
model_names = Names of the existing models
zero_ids = yes/no
Example:
model generate_ids &

model_names = .model_1, .model_2 &
zero_ids = yes
Description:

model_names String Existing model name (s) whose descendents will have their
adams_ids set.
zero_ids yes/no If set to yes, adams_ids will be set to zero.
If set to no, adams_ids will be set to positive integers.
model 21
model merge
model merge
Allows you to merge one model into another. The 'model_name' model is the source of the objects being
merged and the 'into_model_name' model is the destination model.
Format:
model merge
into_model_name = an existing model
translation = location
rotation = orientation
duplicate_parts = dupl_part_action
add_to_group_name = a new or existing group
Example:
model merge &

into_model_name = crankshaft &
translation = 10 , 10 , 10 &
rotation = 0 , 0 , 0 &
duplicate_parts = merge
Description:

into_model_name An Existing Model The model into which the model specified by
'model_name' will be merged.
translation Location This parameter specifies the translations (relative
to the global origin) that are applied to the parts,
polylines, and notes beneath the source model,
before it is merged with the destination model.
rotation Orientation This parameter specifies the rotations (about to the
global origin) that are applied to the parts,
polylines, and notes beneath the source model
before it is merged with the destination model.
model merge

duplicate_parts Dupl_Part_Action This parameter specifies what to do when a part in
the destination model has the same name as a part
in the source model.
add_to_group_name A New Or Existing Group This parameter specifies a new or existing group
into which Adams/View will add all the merged
objects.
1. The source model will not be changed after the merge operation. You can specify a set of
translations and rotations that are applied to the parts, polylines, and notes beneath the source
model, before it is merged with the destination model. If you specify that parts with the same
name in both models (duplicate parts) are to be merged, then all of the children beneath the parts
of the source model will be copied beneath the corresponding parts in the destination model.
Otherwise, the duplicate parts in the source model will be copied and renamed in the destination
model.
associated with it.
3. If you specify that duplicate parts are to be merged, then all the children beneath the parts of the
source model will be copied to be beneath the corresponding parts in the destination model.
Otherwise, the duplicate parts in the source model will be copied and renamed in the destination
model.
4. The add_to_group parameter specifies a new or existing group into which Adams/View will add
all merged objects. All objects that were copied from the source model into the destination model
will be added to the specified group.
model 23
model modify
model modify
Allows you to create a model. You may reverse this creation at a later time with an UNDO command.
Format:
model modify
comments = string
title = string
Example:
model modify &

comments = “a new model” &
title = model2 &
view_name = view__1
Description:

model_name An existing model Specifies the model to be modified. You use this parameter
to identify the existing model to be affected with this
command.
new_model_name A New Model Specifies the name of the new model. You may use this name
later to refer to this model.
title String Specifies the title of model
1. In order to build a mechanism in Adams/View, you must first create a model object in the
Adams/View database. You then add parts and other objects to the model. As you develop your
model, you may display it, verify it, and change its attributes.
model modify
Once you have created a model, you add parts to it with the 'PART CREATE RIGID_BODY
will help you visualize your model as you are constructing it.
When your model is complete, you use the 'OUTPUT_CONTROL' command to request Adams
output, write an Adams data set, and then analyze it with Adams. If your analysis is fairly simple,
you may use the 'SUBMIT' command to write the dataset and invoke Adams.
3. If the model is not visible on the screen, you must type the name.
associated with it.
5. The title is a character string up to 80 characters which describes the model. It is used as the
TITLE statement in the Adams DATA SET (.adm file)
model 25
model modify
by commas.
Cautions:
unique name.
model verify
model verify
Allows you to verify the consistency of your model.
Format:
model verify
write_to_terminal = on_off
file_name = string
check_solver_compatibility = boolean
Example:
model verify &

file_name = "c:\model_verify.txt"
Description:

write_to_terminal On_Off Specifies whether the information requested is to
be sent to the informational window or not.
file_name String Specifies that the information requested is to be
sent to a file with the name specified with the
parameter.
check_solver_compatibility Boolean
1. Adams/View will perform most of the checks that Adams does during the Adams Input Check
Phase, and report the results to the Information Box.
Adams/View checks marker location and alignment at joints, joint primitives, and beams, for
instance. Adams/View also computes the model degrees-of-freedom using the Grubler equation.
The information Adams/View generates is only advisory. You are free to ignore it, at least
temporarily. You may continue modeling or even write an Adams data set file from your model.
model 27
model verify
If Adams/View reports errors, you must correct them eventually, however, or Adams will not run
the data set. Adams/View may also issue warnings, usually joints that are somewhat misaligned,
but not severely enough to warrant an error. You should make sure these warnings are not the
result of mistakes.
associated with it.
3. The write_to_terminal parameter is most likely to be used in conjunction with the FILE_NAME
model verify
move 1
move
move control_panel
move control_panel
The MOVE panel provides several convenient methods to relocate a marker or a part. The MOVE control
panel is invoked by picking MOVE from the fixed menu,or by using the "MOVE CONTROL_PANEL"
command.
Format:
move control_panel
s_trans_step_and_increment = real
s_rotate_step_and_increment = real
o_trans_step_and_increment = real
o_rotate_step_and_increment = real
Example:
EXAMPLE 1:
To translate an existing marker MAR1 in the X direction of a given part LPRF (e.g.PAR1) by ten model
units:
1. Assure the OBJECT type is set to marker_named by picking the cycle button to the OBJECT
name field label.
2. Put the marker name (pick MAR1 from a view or type in MAR1) in the OBJECT field.
3. Assure the reference coordinate system ENTITY type is set to "lprf_of_part" by picking the cycle
button next to the "RELATIVE TO" name field label.
4. Put the part name (pick PAR1 from a view or type in PAR1) in the "RELATIVE TO" field.
5. Assure the value in the step field below the "TRANSLATE OBJ" dial is set to 10 model units by
picking the up or down arrow beside the value.
6. Pick the X triad axis on the "TRANSLATE OBJ" dial icon once. The ROTATE OBJ dial makes
use of the orientation of the RELATIVE TO coordinate system but not the location of its origin.
Therefore, OBJECTS rotated via this method undergo pure rotation without translation.
EXAMPLE 2:
To rotate a marker (MAR1) about an axis parallel to the Z axis of another marker(MAR2) in seven moves
for a total of 35 degrees:
1. Assure the OBJECT type is set to "marker_named" by picking the cycle button next to the
"OBJECT" name field label.
2. Put the name of the marker to be rotated (pick MAR1 from a view) in the OBJECT field.
3. Assure the reference coordinate system ENTITY type is set to "marker_named" by picking the
cycle button next to the RELATIVE TO" name field label.
move 3
move control_panel
4. Put the reference marker name (pick MAR2 from a view) in the "RELATIVE TO" field.
5. Set the value in the step field below the ROTATE OBJ dial to 5 (pick the up or down arrow next
to the value).
6. Pick the Z axis on the "ROTATE OBJ" dial icon seven times. Each time the triad is picked, the
coordinate values in the "CURRENT POSITION" fields are updated (See below for more
information).
Description:

s_trans_step_and_increment Real Specifies the screen translate step and increments for
the translate button on the "move control_panel".
s_rotate_step_and_increment Real Specifies the initial values for screen rotation step on
the "move control_panel", as well as the increment
that is applied to the screen rotation step each time the
scroll icon is activated.
o_trans_step_and_increment Real Specifies the object translate step and increments for
the object translate button on the "move
control_panel".
o_rotate_step_and_increment Real Specifies the object rotate step and increments for the
object rotate button on the "move control_panel".
1. The QUIT button in the upper right corner will terminate the panel. The DONE button executes
the MOVE and closes the MOVE panel. The SUBMIT button executes the MOVE and leaves the
control panel open. When a part is moved, all associated markers and geometry move with the
part. When a marker is moved, all associated geometry moves with the marker. For the rest of this
description, the marker or part to be moved will be called the OBJECT. Moving an OBJECT is
carried out in three steps:
a. Selecting the OBJECT (part or marker) to be MOVED by filling in the OBJECTname field.
b. Selecting the coordinate system for the move by filling in the RELATIVE TO field. This step
is not required if the move is done relative to screen coordinates.
c. Doing the actual move using one of the three methods:
• a. Using the TRANSLATE OBJ or ROTATE OBJ dials to move an object relative to axes
attached to another part or marker.
• b. Using the TRANSLATE or RELATIVE dials to move an object relative to the axes attached
to a view.
• c. Using the GET COORDINATE button to extract and reapply coordinates of existing parts
or markers.
THE THREE STEPS TO MOVING AN OBJECT
move control_panel
There are three steps to moving an object in Adams/View. First, you must select the OBJECT
(part or marker) to be MOVED, by filling in the OBJECT name field. The OBJECT name field is
preceded by the text, "Relocate the marker named". Notice the cycle button that lets you select
whether you wish to relocate a PART or MARKER. You must, then, specify the specific OBJECT
that you wish to move, either by picking it from the graphics window or entering the hierarchical
name of the OBJECT (for example, typing .pend.par1.mar3). Then, you must select the
coordinate system for the move by filling in the RELATIVE TO ENTITY field. This indicates the
coordinate system that you wish to use in defining your relative transforms of the OBJECTs
position. Again, note that you can cycle this field between a MARKER, PART, MODEL, or a
VIEW coordinate system, and must fill in the name of the OBJECT that you wish to use as a
reference for your move. Finally, you specify the transform you wish to apply, using one of one
of three methods explained in MOVING THE OBJECT below.
Step 1: SELECTING THE OBJECT TO MOVE
The first step to moving an object is deciding which object (part or marker) to move. Select the
object to be moved, by filling in the name of the object in the OBJECTname field:
Select the OBJECT type (part or marker) to be input by picking the cycle button next to the
OBJECT name field label until the desired OBJECT type name is displayed. The object type
specification is needed so that the system can validate the name as it is being input.
Enter the name of the specific OBJECT to be moved. Pick the desired OBJECT from a view.
Alternatively, you may type the name of the OBJECT into the field. This field must be highlighted
and empty while data is being input using either method.
Use the delete or the control-u keys to erase the field.
Step 2: SELECTING THE COORDINATE SYSTEM REFERENCE
The RELATIVE TO field is the marker, part, model, or view that is to be used as the move
coordinate system reference. Therefore, the rotational and translational coordinates, applied to the
OBJECT for the move, are based on the origin and orientation of this coordinate system. The use
of this coordinate system does not affect the way the OBJECT coordinates are subsequently stored
by Adams view.
Also, if this field is left blank, Adams/View uses the default coordinate system as the
"RELATIVE TO" coordinate system. To specify the "RELATIVE TO" coordinate system, follow
these steps:
Select the ENTITY type (marker, part, model, or view) to be input, by clicking on the cycle button
next to the "RELATIVE TO" field label until the desired ENTITY type name is displayed. The
ENTITY type specification is needed so the system can validate the name as it is being input.
Enter the name of the specific ENTITY (marker, part, model, or view) to be used as the MOVE
coordinate system reference. Pick the desired ENTITY from a view.
Alternatively, you may type the name into the field. This field must be highlighted and empty
while data is being input using either method. Use the delete key or a control-u to erase the field.
Step 3: MOVING THE OBJECT
move 5
move control_panel
Once you have specified the object to be moved and selected the appropriate coordinate system
reference, you must input the translation or rotation values for the OBJECT move. This is done
in one of the three ways:
a. Using the TRANSLATE OBJ or ROTATE OBJ (i.e. body fixed coordinate)dials to move
relative axes attached to other parts or markers .
b. Using the TRANSLATE or ROTATE (i.e. screen fixed coordinate) dials to move relative axes
attached to a view.
c. Using the GET COORDINATE button to extract and reapply coordinates of existing parts or
markers.
MOVING THE OBJECT USING BODY-FIXED COORDINATES
This section will explain moving objects using the TRANSLATE OBJ and ROTATE OBJ icons
on the move panel.
The "ROTATE OBJ" and "TRANSLATE OBJ" dials move the OBJECT based on body fixed
coordinates. The body fixed coordinate system is specified in the "RELATIVE TO" field. This
type of MOVE is incremental. Each time the mouse is clicked on one of the icon triad axes, the
OBJECT will be MOVED. The displacement magnitude of the MOVE corresponds to the number
of units displayed below the dial. The OBJECT is moved along the body fixed axis of the
ENTITY specified in the RELATIVE TO field.
The specific axis on the ENTITY used for the MOVE corresponds to the particular icon axis
picked.
1. The increment specified by the trans_step_and_increment parameter is applied to the translate
step each time the scroll icon is activated. The user may change these values for personal
preference or based on the needs dictated by the scale of a particular model. If the user enters
values for the trans_step_and_increment parameter, they will be stored and used the next time the
"move control_panel" command is invoked, unless changed by the user.
2. The user may change the values specified by the s_rotate_step_and_increment parameter for
personal preference or based on the needs dictated by the scale of a particular model. If the user
enters values for the rotate_step_and_increment parameter, they will be remembered and used the
next time the "move control_panel" command is invoked, unless overridden by the user.
3. The increment specified by the o_trans_step_and_increment is applied to the translate step, each
time the translate icon is activated. The user may change these values for personal preference or
based on the needs dictated by the scale of a particular model. When you enter values for the
translate_step_and_increment parameter, they will be stored and used the next time the "move
control_panel" command is invoked, unless changed.
4. The increment specified by the o_rotate_step_and_increment parameter is applied to the rotate
step each time the rotate icon is activated. The user may change these values for personal
preference or based on the needs dictated by the scale of a particular model. If the user enters
values for the rotate_step_and_increment parameter, they will be stored and used the next time
the "move control_panel" command is invoked, unless changed by the user.
move control_panel
Cautions:
1. The specific coordinate system used varies for each ENTITY type. The following shows the
coordinate system used for each entity:
• marker: the markers coordinate triad.
• part: the part's local part reference frame (LPRF) triad.
• model: the model's global coordinate system or ground part LPRF triad.
• view: the screen coordinate triad at the center of the "active" view.
move 7
move mirror
move mirror
Allows you to mirror parts, markers, geometry, forces, and constraints across a plane defined by the
LPRF of a part, or a marker.
The plane that the objects are mirrored across can be the XY, YZ or the ZX plane of a part LPRF or a
marker. The plane is defined as parallel to the two specified axes through the origin of the reference
frame.
Since complete mirroring would change the handedness of the mirrored part LPRF or marker, only
partial mirroring is possible. To perform partial mirroring you must choose two axes to be mirrored,
with the remaining axis pointing in the direction required to maintain a right-handed system.
As with all MOVE commands when mirroring geometry, forces and constraints it is the markers
associated with these objects that are modified.
When mirroring multiple objects, each object is mirrored independently. The resultant orientation of the
mirrored object depends on the orientation of the original object and the mirror plans. If you try to
mirror multiple objects that have different orientations you will probably get something that looks
different than you expect. For example in the following example, the relative orientation between MAR1
and MAR2 is different after the mirror operation.
model create model_name = MOD1
!
part create rigid_body name_and_position &
part_name = PAR2 &
location = 1,0,0 &
orientation = -90,0,0
!
marker create marker_name=MAR1 location=1,0,0 relative_to=PAR2
!
part_name = PAR3 &
location = 1,0,0 &
relative_to=MOD1
!
marker create marker_name=MAR2 location=1,0,0 relative_to=PAR3
!
list_info measure i_marker=MAR1 j_marker=MAR2
!
move mirror part_name=PAR2,PAR3 axes=xy plane=yz
relative_to=ground
!
list_info measure i_marker=MAR1 j_marker=MAR2
To maintain the same orientations between the MAR2 and MAR1, you need to mirror the 'xy' axes of
PAR2 and the 'zx' axes of PAR2.
move mirror part_name=PAR2 axes=xy plane=yz relative_to=ground
move mirror part_name=PAR3 axes=zx plane=yz relative_to=ground
move mirror
Format:
move mirror
marker_name= existing marker
part_name= existing body
flexible_body_name= existing flexible body
point_mass_name= existing point mass
geometry_name= existing geometry
force_name= existing force
entity_name= existing entity
Plane= mirror_axes
axes= mirror_axes
relative_to= existing model part or marker
csmodel_name= existing model
cspart_name= existing part
csmarker_name= existing marker
csview_name= existing view
csentity_name= existing entity
Example:
move mirror &

part_name = PART_2 &
plane = xy &
axes = yz
Description:

marker_name Existing marker Specifies the marker to modify. You use this
parameter to identify the existing marker to affect
with this command.
move 9
move mirror
part_name Existing part Specifies the part to modify. You use this parameter
to identify the existing part to affect with this
command.
flexible_body_name Existing flex body Specifies the name of an existing flexible body to
modify.
point_mass_name Existing point mass Specifies the point_mass to modify. You use this
parameter to identify the existing point_mass to
affect with this command.
geometry_name Existing geometry Specifies the geometry to modify. You use this
parameter to identify the existing geometry to affect
with this command.
constraint_name Existing constraint Specifies the constraint to modify. You use this
parameter to identify the existing constraint to affect
with this command.
force_name Existing force Specifies the force to modify. You use this parameter
to identify the existing force to affect with this
command.
group_name Existing group Specifies the group to modify. You use this
parameter to identify the existing group to affect
with this command.
entity_name Existing entity Specify 1 or more existing entities.
Plane Mirror_axes Specifies which plane of the reference frame to
mirror across.
axes Mirror_axes Specifies which two axes of the part LPRF, marker,
or markers associated with the geometry, force or
constraint are mirrored.
relative_to Existing part, body Specifies the LPRF of a part, or a marker, through
or marker which the mirror plane runs.
csmodel_name Existing model Specifies an existing model's global origin to use as
the coordinate system in a MOVE, or PANEL SET
POSITION & ORIENTATION command.
cspart_name Existing part Specifies an existing part to use as the coordinate
system in a MOVE, or PANEL SET POSITION &
ORIENTATION command.
csmarker_name Existing marker Specifies an existing marker to use as the coordinate
system in a MOVE, or PANEL SET POSITION &
ORIENTATION command.
move mirror
csview_name Existing view Specifies an existing view's origin to use as the

coordinate system in a MOVE, or PANEL SET
csentity_name Existing entity Specifies an existing entity's origin to use as the
1. You may identify a marker/part/flexible_body/point_mass/geometry/constraint/force/group by
typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the marker/part/flexible_body/point_mass/geometry/constraint/force/group is not visible on
the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the
marker/part/flexible_body/point_mass/geometry/constraint/force/group is displayed.
If you created the marker by reading an ADAMS data set or graphics file, the marker is the letters
MAR followed by the ADAMS data set marker ID number. The name of ADAMS
MARKER/101 is MAR101, for example. If you created the
marker/part/flexible_body/point_mass/geometry/constraint/force/group during preprocessing,
you gave it a name at that time.
If a marker/part/flexible_body/point_mass/geometry/constraint/force/group is available by
default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you must enter its full name.
To identify a marker/part/flexible_body/point_mass/geometry/constraint/force/group under a
different part, for instance, you may need to enter the model and part names as well. For example,
you may specify marker 'pivot' from model 'links', part 'lower_arm' by entering
".links.lower_arm.pivot". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the marker available by default.
You must separate multiple
marker/part/flexible_body/point_mass/geometry/constraint/force/group names by commas.
If the marker/part/flexible_body/point_mass/geometry/constraint/force/group is visible in one of
your views, you may identify it by picking on it.
You need not separate multiple
marker/part/flexible_body/point_mass/geometry/constraint/force/group picks by commas.
2. The plane that the objects are mirrored across can be the XY, YZ or the ZX plane of a part LPRF
or a marker. The plane is defined a parallel to the two specified axes through the origin of the
reference frame.
3. Since complete mirroring would change the handedness of the mirrored part LPRF or marker,
only partial mirroring is possible. To perform partial mirroring you must choose two axes to be
mirrored, with the remaining axis pointing in the direction required to maintain a right-handed
system.
4. The global origin specified in the csmodel_name becomes the coordinate system to which the
relative distances, and orientation angles will be applied.
5. The part specified in the parameter cspart_name becomes the coordinate system to which the
relative distances, and orientation angles will be applied.
move 11
move mirror
6. The marker specified in the csmarker_name parameter becomes the coordinate system to which
the relative distances, and orientation angles will be applied.
7. The csview's origin becomes the coordinate system to which the relative distances, and
orientation angles will be applied.
8. The csentity's origin becomes the coordinate system to which the relative distances, and
orientation angles will be applied.
move object
move object
Allows you to set the position of a part or marker.
Format:
move object
flexible_body_name = an existing flex_body
point_mass_name = an existing point_mass
c1 = real
c2 = real
c3 = real
a1 = real
a2 = real
a3 = real
csmodel_name = an existing model
cspart_name = an existing part
csmarker_name = an existing marker
csview_name = an existing view
csentity_name = an existing entity
incrementally = boolean
Example:
move object
c1 = 0.1 &
c2 = 0.12 &
c3 = 0.14 &
move 13
move object
move object
a1 = 0.14 &
a2 = 0.121 &
a3 = 0.11 &
csmodel_name = crankshaft &
incrementally = yes
Description:

marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies the marker to be modified. You use this
parameter to identify the existing marker to be
part_name An Existing Part Specifies the part to be modified. You use this
parameter to identify the existing part to be
affected with this command. You may identify a
part by typing its name or by picking it from the
screen.
flexible_body_na An Existing Flex_body Specifies the name of an existing flexible body to
me modify. You may identify a flexible body by
typing its name, by selecting it from the database
navigator's select list or by picking its graphical
representation from the screen, whichever is most
convenient.
point_mass_name An Existing Point_mass Specifies the point_mass to be modified. You use
this parameter to identify the existing point_mass
constraint_name An Existing Constraint Specifies the constraint to be modified. You use
this parameter to identify the existing constraint
force_name An Existing Force Specifies the force to be modified. You use this
group_name An Existing Group Specifies the group to be modified. You use this
group by typing its name.
move object

entity_name An Existing Entity Specifies an existing entity
c1 Real Specifies the first location coordinate to be
applied to the marker or part you wish to move.
Check the current COORDINATE SYSTEM
TYPE by using the command LIST_INFO
DEFAULTS. This first location coordinate will be
of the current coordinate system type.
c2 Real Specifies the second location coordinate to be
c3 Real Specifies the third location coordinate to be
a1 Real Specifies the first orientation angle to be applied
to the marker or part you wish to move. Check the
current ORIENTATION TYPE using the
command LIST_INFO DEFAULTS, to confirm
which axis this angle will be applied to.
a2 Real Specifies the second orientation angle to be
Check the current ORIENTATION TYPE using
the command LIST_INFO DEFAULTS, to
confirm which axis this angle will be applied to.
a3 Real Specifies the third orientation angle to be applied
to the marker or part you wish to move. Check the
current ORIENTATION TYPE using the
command LIST_INFO DEFAULTS, to confirm
which axis this angle will be applied to.
csmodel_name An Existing Model Specifies an existing model's global origin to use
as the coordinate system in a MOVE, or PANEL
SET POSITION & ORIENTATION command.
cspart_name An Existing Part Specifies an existing part to use as the coordinate
system in a MOVE, or PANEL SET POSITION
& ORIENTATION command.
move 15
move object

csmarker_name An Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker to use as the
csview_name An Existing View Specifies an existing view's origin to use as the
csentity_name An Existing Entity Specifies that the MOVE OBJECT command
should be done by adding the coordinates to the
existing position of the object(s) being moved
incrementally Boolean
1. You may identify a marker by typing its name or by picking it from the screen. If the marker is
name even if the marker is displayed. If you created the marker by reading an Adams data set or
graphics file, the marker name is the letters MAR followed by the Adams data set marker ID
number. For example, the name of Adams MARKER/101 is MAR101. If you created the marker
during reprocessing, you will have given it a name at that time. If a marker is available by default,
you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify
a marker under a different part, for instance, you may need to enter the model and part names as
".links.lower_arm.pivot". You must separate multiple marker names by commas. If the marker is
2. If the part is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it convenient
preprocessing, you will have given it a name at that time. If a part is available by default, you may
identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a part
under another model, for instance, you may need to enter the model name as well. For example,
you may specify part 'arm' from model 'robot' by entering ".robot.arm". If you type a "?",
Adams/View will list the parts available by default. You must separate multiple part names by
commas. If the part is visible in one of your views, you may identifyit by picking on any of the
graphics associated with it. You need not separate multiple part picks by commas.
3. If Adams/View created the flexible body by reading an Adams data set, the name may either come
from the "adams_view_name" field of the preceding comment, or be synthesized from the Adams
ID number. In the case that the flexible body is created as a result of reading a results or graphics
file, the flexible body name will be synthesized from the Adams ID number. When the name is
created by Adams/View, it will be composed of "FLX" concatenated with the Adams data set
flexible body ID number. For example, the Adams/View name of FLEX_BODY/42 would be
move object
FLX42. Flexible bodies you create during preprocessing have user-specified names. You may
identify a flexible body belonging to the current default model by entering just its name. For
others, you must enter the full name. To identify a flexible body under another model, for
by typing "?", which will bring up the select list from which you can pick a flexible body. For
graphics associated with it. When you do this Adams/View will automatically separate multiple
reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the point_mass name is the letters POI followed by
the Adams data set point_mass ID number. For example, the name of Adams POINT_MASS/101
is POI101. If you created the point_mass during preprocessing, you will have given it a name at
that time.
If a point_mass is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not,
by default.
You must separate multiple point_mass names by commas. If the point_mass is visible in one of
your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics associated with it. You need not
separate multiple point_mass picks by commas.
convenient to type the name even if the geometry is displayed. If geometry is available by default,
you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify
geometry under another model, for instance, you may need to enter the model and part names as
well. For example, you may specify arc 'end' on part 'arm' in model 'susp' by entering
".susp.arm.end". If youtype a "?", Adams/View will list the geometrys available by default. You
must separate multiple geometry names by commas. If the geometry is visible in one of your
views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics associated withit. You need not
separate multiple geometry picks by commas.
convenient to type the name even if the constraint is displayed. If you created the constraint by
reading an Adams data set, the constraint name is the first three letters of the Adams statement
type followed by the Adams data set constraint ID number. For example, the name of Adams
JOINT/101 is JOI101. If you created the constraint during preprocessing, you will have given it
a name at that time. If a constraint is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its
name. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a constraint under a different model,
move 17
move object
for instance, you may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify
constraint 'servo_motor' from model 'test' by entering ".test.servo_motor". If you type a "?",
Adams/View will list the constraints available by default. You must separate multiple constraint
names by commas. If the constraint is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking
on any of the graphics associated with it. You need not separate multiple constraint picks by
commas.
7. You may identify a force by typing its name or by picking it from the screen. If the force is not
even if the force is displayed. If you created the force by reading an Adams data set or graphics
file, the force name is the first three letters of the Adams statement followed by the Adams data
set force ID number. For example, the name of Adams SFORCE/101 is SFO101. If you created
the force during preprocessing, you will have given it a name at that time. If a force is available
by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you must enter its full name.
To identify a force under a preprocessing model, for instance, you may need to enter the model
name as well. For example, you may specify the force named 'bumper' from the model named 'test'
by entering ".test.bumper". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the forces available by default.
You must separate multiple force names by commas. If the force is visible in one of your views,
multiple force picks by commas.
8. If a group is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you
9. For the c1 parameter,COORDINATE_SYSTEM_TYPE = cartesian ( X,Y,Z ) - C1 will be a X
coordinate.
This location coordinate will be relative to the marker, part, screen axes, or global axes specified
in the parameter RELATIVE_TO.
10. For the c2 parameter,COORDINATE_SYSTEM_TYPE = cartesian ( X,Y,Z ) - C2 will be a Y
coordinate.
11. For the c3 parameter,COORDINATE_SYSTEM_TYPE = cartesian ( X,Y,Z ) - C3 will be a Z
coordinate.
12. For the a1 parameter,• ORIENTATION_TYPE = body313 ( Euler angles ) • A1 will be applied to
the Z axis.
13. For the a2 parameter,• ORIENTATION_TYPE = body313 ( Euler angles )• A2 will be applied to
the new X axis.
the new Z axis.
move object
15. This model global origin becomes the coordinate system to which the relative distances, and
orientation angles will be applied. You may identify a model by typing its name or by picking it
picking on any of the graphics associated with it. You need not separate multiple model picks by
commas.
16. This part becomes the coordinate system to which the relative distances, and orientation angles
will be applied. You may identify a part by typing its name or by picking it from the screen. If the
part is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it convenient to type
the name even if the part is displayed.
at that time. If a part is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is
not, you must enter its full name. To identify a part under another model, for instance, you may
need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify part 'arm' from model 'robot'
by entering ".robot.arm". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the parts available by default.
You must separate multiple part names by commas. If the part is visible in one of your views, you
may identify it by picking on any of the graphics associated with it. You need not separate
multiple part picks by commas.
17. The marker specified by the csmarker_name parameter becomes the coordinate system to which
the relative distances, and orientation angles will be applied. You may identify a marker by typing
its name or by picking it from the screen. If the marker is not visible on the screen, you must type
the name. You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the marker is displayed. If you
created the marker by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the marker name is the letters
MAR followed by the Adams data set marker ID number. For example, the name of Adams
it a name at that time. If a marker is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name
only. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a marker under a different part, for
instance, you may need to enter the model and part names as well. For example, you may specify
18. This view's origin becomes the coordinate system to which the relative distances, and orientation
angles will be applied. You may identify a view by typing its name or by picking it from the
screen. In most cases, you may enter the special view name 'all', which means all the views
currentlydisplayed. You must separate multiple view names by commas. You need not separate
multiple view picks by commas.
19. This command can move an object to absolute coordinates relative to the specifiedcoordinate
system or the move can be done "incrementally"from the current position.When
INCREMENTALLY is set to YES the coordinates specified in the command are added to the
current coordinates of the object to be moved.
move 19
move object
When INCREMENTALLY is set to NO the object to be moved is positioned at the absolute

coordinates specified in the command.
Tips:
1. If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the markers available by default.
move rotation
move rotation
Allows you to rotate a part or marker from its current orientation.
Format:
move rotation
a1 = real
a2 = real
a3 = real
Example:
move rotation &

c1 = 0.1 &
c2 = 0.12 &
c3 = 0.14 &
a1 = 0.14 &
a2 = 0.121 &
a3 = 0.11 &
csmodel_name = crankshaft
move 21
move rotation
Description:

marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies the marker to be modified. You use
this parameter to identify the existing marker to
screen.
flexible_body_name An Existing Flex_body Specifies the name of an existing flexible body
to be modified. You may identify a flexible
body by typing its name, by selecting it from the
database navigator's select list or by picking its
graphical representation from the screen,
whichever is most convenient.
point_mass_name An Existing Point_mass Specifies the point_mass to be modified. You
point_mass to be affected with this command.
about Specifies a reference frame to be used as the
center of rotation. The locations, as well as the
orientations of the objects being rotated will be
changed.
move rotation

a1 Real Specifies the first orientation angle to be
a2 Real Specifies the second orientation angle to be
a3 Real Specifies the third orientation angle to be
Check the currentORIENTATION TYPE using
the command LIST_INFODEFAULTS, to
confirm which axis this angle will be appliedto.
csmodel_name An Existing Model Specifies an existing model's global origin to
use as the coordinate system in a MOVE, or
PANEL SET POSITION & ORIENTATION
command.
cspart_name An Existing Part Specifies an existing part to use as the
csmarker_name An Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker to use as the
csview_name An Existing View Specifies an existing view's origin to use as the
should be doneby adding the coordinates to the
existing position of theobject(s) being moved
move 23
move rotation
commas. If the part is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
created by Adams/View it will be composed of "FLX" concatenated with the Adams data set
others, you must enter the full name. To identify a flexible body under another model, for
by typing "?", whichwill bring up the select list from which you can pick a flexible body. For
graphics associated with it. When you do this, Adams/View will automatically separate multiple
that time.
by default.
move rotation
".susp.arm.end". If youtype a "?", Adams/View will list the geometrys available by default. You
views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics associated with it. You need not
commas.
8. If a group is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you
move 25
move rotation

the Z axis.
the new X axis.
the new Z axis.
12. Example for the about parameter, if you rotate a marker located at x=1, y=0,z=0 with an
orientation of 0,0,0 ABOUT the LPRF of its part by 0,0,90, the marker will be placed at x=0, y=1,
z=0with an orientation of 90,0,0 (all angles in degrees and SPACE123))
commas.
part is not visible on the screen, you must type thename. You may also find it convenient to type
at that time. If a part is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is
move rotation
16. This view's origin becomes the coordinate system to which the relative distances and orientation
currently displayed.
by commas.
Tips:
move 27
move translation
move translation
Allows you to translate a part or marker from its current position.
Format:
move translation
c1 = real
c2 = real
c3 = real
Example:
move translation &

c1 = 0.1 &
c2 = 0.12 &
c3 = 0.14 &
csmodel_name = crankshaft
move translation
Description:

marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies the marker to be modified. You use
this parameter to identify the existing marker to
screen.
flexible_body_name An Existing Flex_body Specifies the name of an existing flexible body
to be modified. You may identify a flexible
body by typing its name, by selecting it from the
database navigator's select list or by picking its
graphical representation from the screen,
whichever is most convenient.
point_mass_name An Existing Point_mass Specifies the point_mass to be modified. You
point_mass to be affected with this command.
c1 Real Specifies the first location coordinate to be
DEFAULTS. This first location coordinate will
be of the current coordinate system type.
move 29
move translation

c2 Real Specifies the second location coordinate to be
c3 Real Specifies the third location coordinate to be
csmodel_name An Existing Model Specifies an existing model's global origin to
use as the coordinate system in a MOVE, or
PANEL SET POSITION & ORIENTATION
command.
cspart_name An Existing Part Specifies an existing part to be used as the
csmarker_name An Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker to be used as the
csview_name An Existing View Specifies an existing view's origin to be used as
the coordinate system in a MOVE, or PANEL
SET POSITION & ORIENTATION command.
should be done by adding the coordinates to the
existing position of the object(s) being moved
move translation
others, you must enter the full name. To identify a flexible body underanother model, for instance,
you need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify flexible body 'snake'
from model 'reptiles' by entering ".reptiles.snake". You can invoke the database navigator by
typing "?", which will bring up the select list from which you can pick a flexible body. For
that time.
by default.
move translation
".susp.arm.end". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the geometrys available by default. You
commas.
8. If a group is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you
move translation
9. For the c1 parameter,COORDINATE_SYSTEM_TYPE = cartesian ( X,Y,Z ) - C1 will be a X

coordinate.
10. For the c2 parameter,COORDINATE_SYSTEM_TYPE = cartesian ( X,Y,Z ) - C2 will be a Y
coordinate.
11. For the c3 parameter,COORDINATE_SYSTEM_TYPE = cartesian ( X,Y,Z ) - C3 will be a Z
coordinate.
commas.
part is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it convenient to type
at that time. If a part is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is
move 33
move translation
15. This view's origin becomes the coordinate system to which the relative distances, and orientation
currently displayed.
by commas.
Tips:
move translation
multi_run_analysis 1
multi_run_analysis
multi_run analysis create

Allows you to create an empty analysis. You may find this useful for reading spreadsheet data into a
results set with the NUMERIC_RESULTS READ_FROM_FILE command.
Format:

multi_run_analysis_name= new multi_run_analysis
comments= string
Example:
multi_run_analysis create &

multi_run_analysis_name= mrun__1 &
comments = "analysis for reading spreadsheet data"
Description:

multi_run_analysis_name New Multi_run Analysis Name Specifies the name of the new multi-run
analysis.
Comments String Specifies any comments to be associated
with this analysis.
When an Adams/Solver data file (.adm) is read into Adams/View, all comments associated with a
statement (from the end of the previous statement through the end of the current statement) are stored
with the object. Comments in the data file can be associated with model.
These comments must follow the title statement and be followed by the comment 'END OF MODEL
When an Adams/Solver data file is written, the comments for an object are written before the statement
corresponding to the object.
multi_run analysis delete

Allows you to delete an existing analysis.
You must enter the name of the analysis you wish to delete by specifying its name on the default model
or the full name.
Format:

multi_run_analysis_name= existing multi_run_analysis
Example:
multi_run_analysis delete &

multi_run_analysis_name= mrun__1
Description:

multi_run_analysis_name Existing Multi_run Analysis Specifies the name of an existing multi-run
analysis.
multi_run analysis modify

Allows you to modify an existing analysis.
You must enter the name of the analysis you wish to delete by specifying the name of an analysis on the
default model or the full name.
You may reverse this modification at a later time with an UNDO command.
Format:

multi_run_analysis_name= existing multi_run_analysis
new_multi_run_analysis_name= new name for the multi-run analysis
comments= string
Example:
multi_run_analysis modify &

multi_run_analysis_name = mrun__1 &
new_multi_run_analysis_name = mrun_to_save_data &
comments = "analysis for reading spreadsheet data"
Description:

multi_run_analysis_name Existing Multi_run Analysis Specifies the name of an existing
multi-run analysis.
new_multi_run_analysis_name New Multi-run Analysis Specifies a new name for the
multi_run analysis
Comments String Specifies comments to be associated
with this analysis, if any.
notes 1
notes
notes attributes
notes attributes
Allows you to set specification of attributes on an individual note or a group of notes.
You can set the following attributes on a note.
• SIZE. You may set a size of the note text in modeling units.
• SCALE. You may scale the size of the note text by a non-unit scale factor.
• VISIBILITY. You may set a note's visibility ON, OFF or TOGGLE the current setting. When
you set a note's visibility OFF, the note will not be drawn. When you set a note's visibility ON,
you allow that note to be drawn.
• COLOR. You may set the color of a note with this parameter.
Format:
notes attributes
note_name= existing note
size= length
unitless_size= real
point_size= integer
scale= real
visibility= on/off
Example:
notes attributes &

note_name = note_2 &
size = 2.0 &
color = red &
visibility = on
notes 3
notes attributes
Description:

note_name Existing Note Specifies the note to be modified. You use this parameter to identify the
existing note to be affected with this command.
size Length Specifies the size, in modeling units, that the note height will appear in.
The width of each character in the note is approximately 60%of the
height.
unitless_size Real Specifies a real number
point_size Integer Specifies an integer
scale Real Specifies the amount to scale the note size. Adams will compute the new
note size by multiplying the current note size by this scale.
color Existing Color Specifies the COLOR of a graphic object.
visibility On, Off Specifies the visibility of notes.
1. You may identify a note by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the note is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it convenient
to type the name even if the note is displayed.
If a note is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify a note under a model, for instance, you may need to enter the
model name as well. For example, you may specify note "n1" from the model named test by
entering ".test.n1". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the notes available by default.
You must separate multiple note names by commas.
If the note is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
You need not separate multiple note picks by commas.
2. A graphic object is an object that may be drawn on the screen by Adams/View, these include
curves, parts, markers, arcs, outlines, boxes, circles, cylinders, frustums, spring damper graphics,
force graphics, and plot curves and symbols. When the COLOR of a part is specified, all graphic
objects fixed to that part are drawn with the COLOR of the part. Adams/View supports the
following COLOR: black, white, red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, and yellow.
3. If you set the visibility of a note OFF, Adams/View will erase it from the display. The note will
remain in the data base, and you may redisplay it by turning the visibility ON.
Cautions:
1. If you choose the COLOR of an entity to be drawn in the view background color (typically, white
or black ) it may not show up.
See help for hardcopy also.
notes copy
notes copy
Allows you to copy an existing note to a new note. A note is a single text string, or a series of text strings
used to add an annotation to an existing view or plot.
Format:
notes copy
new_note_name= new note
Example:
notes copy &

note_name = note_for_part_1 &
new_note_name = note_for_part2
Description:

Note_name Existing Note Specifies an existing note.
New_note_name New Note Specifies the name of the new note. You may use this name later
to refer to this note.
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two notes with the same name, so you must provide a
unique name.
assumed.
notes 5
notes copy
notes create
notes create
Allows you to create a note, with an optional leader line.
Notes are general purpose text strings that can be used to add annotations to views, plots, or analyses.
Notes contain one or more lines of text. You place them by selecting the location for the upper left corner
of the text string(s). You should place the text far enough away from the border of the window to ensure
that the note will not run off the screen. If you make a mistake, use the 'NOTES MODIFY' command to
move the note.
Notes have an optional leader line that can point to a specific spot on the display. This leader line can
have 1 to n points, where the last point specified is the location of an arrow head. You may specify a
color for the text and leader line.
Format:
notes create
note_name= new note
text= string
location= location
pick= location indicated by a pick in the view
screen_coords= real
size= length
unitless_size= real
point_size= integer
bitmapped_text= on/off
leader_line= location
arrow_visibility= on/off
arrow_size= real
user_text= on/of
Example:
notes create &

note_name = notes create &
note_name = note__1 &
text= "this is a new part that i have added" &
location = 10.0,10.0,10.0
notes 7
notes create
Description:

note_name New Note Specifies the name of the new note.You may use this name later to
refer to this note.
text String Specifies the text string(s) that will comprise the note text.
location Location Specifies the location to be used to define the note.
pick Pick Location Specifies a position in a view by picking with the mouse or pen.
screen_coords Real Specifies an x,y location in a view on the Adams/View screen.
SCREEN_COORDS refers to a coordinate reference tied to the
terminal screen.
size Integer Specifies the size, in modeling units, that the note height will
appear in. The width of each character in the note is approximately
60%of the height.
point_size Integer Specifies an integer to define the point size
bitmapped_text On, Off Specifies whether or not a note is to be drawn using bitmapped
text.
leader_line Location Specifies the screen locations which define a leader line for a note.
arrow_visibility On, Off Specifies whether there should be an arrow head at the last point
on the leader line of the note.
arrow_size Real Specifies the size, in modeling units, that the arrow head of the
leader line on the note will appear. If arrow_size has not been
set,or it is set to zero, the arrowhead will be roughly the size of the
text in the note.
user_text On, Off Specifies on or off.
unique name.
notes create
assumed.
2. You may enter the text string(s) for this parameter without double quote marks, if the string
contains no "blanks" or special characters such as *&^%$#@!-/><.
If the text string(s) do have any of these special characters the string must be quoted.
To enter a multiline note, each line must be entered as a separate string, separated by a comma.
An Example:
note create note=.front.n1 screen_coords=0,0 & TEXT="This is
a","multi line note" size = .12
Notes are left-justified.
3. The “pick” parameter is used in the context of various commands. The response from a pick of
the screen is usually the view name and the screen coordinates of the pick. Some of the ways a
pick is used is to select the position to split a view to create a new view, to select the box corners
of a view to zoom in on, etc.
To enter a pick move the cursor to the location in the desired view using the mouse or pen. Once
in the desired position depress one of the mouse buttons.
4. Bitmapped text provides better looking text and can make use of the fonts available on your
system. Bitmapped text will not transform in the same manner as geometry. Only the placement
point will move.
The text will always face the screen. Non-bitmapped text (stroked text) will transform in the same
manner as geometry.
5. The screen locations are entered by using the mouse cursor. Move the mouse cursor to the desired
locations and "click" any mouse button to record the position. Adams/View will create a leader
line from the first point through successive points, ending with an arrow head at the last point.
6. There is no limit to the number of points in the leader line.
notes 9
notes delete
notes delete
Allows you to delete a note. A note is a single text string, or a series of text strings used to add an
annotation to an existing view or plot.
Format:
notes delete
Example:
notes delete &

note_name = note_for_part_1
Description:

Note_name Existing Note Specifies an existing note to be deleted.
You may identify a note by typing its name or by picking it from the screen. If the note is not
even if the note isdisplayed.
If a note is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify a note under a model, for instance, you may need to enter the
model name as well. For example, you may specify note "n1" from the model named test by
entering ".test.n1". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the notes available by default.
You must separate multiple note names by commas.
If the note is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
You need not separate multiple note picks by commas.
notes modify
notes modify
Allows you to modify an existing note.
Notes are general purpose text strings that can be used to add annotations to views, plots, or analyses.
Notes contain one or more lines of text. You place them by selecting the location for the upper left corner
of the text string(s). You should place the text far enough away from the border of the window to insure
that the note will not run off the screen. If you make a mistake, use the 'NOTES MODIFY' command to
move the note.
Notes have an optional leader line that can point to a specific spot on the display. This leader line can
have 1 to n points, where the last point specified is the location of an arrow head. You may specify a
color for the text and leader line.
Format:
notes modify
new_note_name= new note name
text= string
location= location
pick= location indicated by a pick in the view
screen_coords= real
rotation= real
alignment= justified
size= length
unitless_size= real
point_size= integer
bitmapped_text= on/off
leader_line= location
arrow_visibility= on/off
arrow_size= real
user_text= on/off
user_location= on/off
notes 11
notes modify
Example:
notes modify &

note_name = note__1 &
new_note_name = my_note &
text= "this is a new part that i have added" &
location = 10.0,10.0,20.0
Description:

note_name Existing Note Specifies the name of an existing note.
New_note_name New Note Specifies the new name of the note
text String Specifies the text string(s) that will comprise the note text.
location Location Specifies the location to be used to define the note.
pick Pick Location Specifies a position in a view by picking with the mouse or pen.
screen_coords Real Specifies an x,y location in a view on the Adams/View screen.
SCREEN_COORDS refers to a coordinate reference tied to the
terminal screen.
size Integer Specifies the size, in modeling units, that the note height will
appear in. The width of each character in the note is approximately
60% of the height.
point_size Integer Specifies an integer to define the point size
bitmapped_text On, Off Specifies whether or not a note is to be drawn using bitmapped
text.
leader_line Location Specifies the screen locations which define a leader line for a note.
arrow_visibility On, Off Specifies whether there should be an arrow head at the last point
on the leader line of the note.
arrow_size Real Specifies the size, in modeling units, that the arrow head of the
leader line on the note will appear. If arrow_size has not been set,
or it is set to zero the arrowhead will be roughly the size of the text
in the note.
user_text On, Off Specifies on or off.
User_location On, Off Specifies on or off.
notes modify

Rotation Real This parameter specifies the rotations (about to the global
origin)that are applied to the parts, polylines, and notes beneath the
source model before it is merged with the destination model. The
source model will not be changed after the merge operation.
Alignment Left, Center, Specifies the alignment of the text in the note.
Right
unique name.
assumed.You may, of course, delete this name and use your own. The form of a full name is:
You may enter the text string(s) for this parameter without double quote marks, if the string
contains no "blanks" or special characters such as *&^%$#@!-/><.
If the text string(s) do have any of these special characters, the string must be quoted.
To enter a multiline note, each line must be entered as a separate string, separated by a comma.
An Example:
note create note=.front.n1 screen_coords=0,0 & TEXT="This is
a","multi line note" size = .12
Notes are left-justified.
2. The “pick” parameter is used in the context of various commands. The response from a pick of
the screen is usually the view name and the screen coordinates of the pick. Some of the ways a
pick is used is to select the position to split a view to create a new view, to select the box corners
of a view to zoom in on, etc.
notes 13
notes modify
3. To enter a pick, move the cursor to the location in the desired view using the mouse or pen. Once
in the desired position depress one of the mouse buttons.
4. Bitmapped text provides better looking text and can make use of the fonts available on your
system. Bitmapped text will not transform in the same manner as geometry. Only the placement
point will move.
The text will always face the screen. Non-bitmapped text (stroked text) will transform in the same
manner as geometry.
5. The screen locations are entered by using the mouse cursor. Move the mouse cursor to the desired
locations and "click" any mouse button to record the position. Adams/View will create a leader
line from the first point through successive points, ending with an arrow head at the last point.
6. There is no limit to the number of points in the leader line.
notes modify
numeric_results 1
numeric_results
numeric_results component create

Allows you to create a result set component. It is the same as using numeric_results create value.
Format:

new_result_set_component_name= new result_set
units = type of units
values= real
Example:
For example, the following command generates a full-cycle sine curve with 100 points:
numeric_results component create &

new_result_set_component_name= req1.x &
values= (sin(series2(0.0, two_pi, 100)radians)))
Description:

new_result_set_c New Result Set Name Identifies the new result set
omponent_name component.
Values Real Specifies the real values to be
stored in the result set component.
The values can be a list of
numbers, or an expression defining
an array of values.
Units no_units, calculate, length, angle, mass, Specifies the type of units to be
density, time, area, volume, velocity, used for the new result set
acceleration, angular_velocity, component. Once you set the unit
angular_acceleration, inertia, type, Adams/View can perform the
area_inertia, damping, stiffness, proper unit conversion on the data.
torsion_stiffness, torsion_damping, force,
torque, pressure, force_time, torque_time
numeric_results 3
1. The heirarchy of a model's results is shown below with the components of a result set under the
result set:
If you want to store the component:

• In an existing result set, the name must include the result set. For example, assume you have
a request file called SHIFT.REQ, and it contains the result set REQ1. If you want to store the
new result set component in result set REQ1 with the component name NEW, enter:
.SHIFT.REQ1.NEW (it is not necessary to include .SHIFT., if SHIFT is the current
analysis_name).
• In a new results set, named REQ99, for example, in the analysis run SHIFT, enter
.SHIFT.REQ99.NEW. The number of components to be stored is inferred by the number of
components named in this parameter. You can enter multiple names separated with commas
(,).
The component name must be unique, even though it can be stored in an existing result set. A
result set name can be of any length and any combination of alphanumeric characters. The
leading character must be a letter.
with request 101 from an analysis named test is often referred to as .test.req101.
The table below illustrates the default names assigned to result sets and result set components, read from
File that
result is
Result set type Result set name Component names from
vx vy vz wx wy wz
accx accy accz wdx wdy wdz
File that
result is
coupler COUxxx... fx1 fy1 fz1 tx1 ty1 tz1 fmag1 tmag1 results file
fx2 fy2 fz2 tx2 ty2 tz2 fmag2 tmag2
2. If the value for the “units” parameter is calculate, Adams/View tries to determine the units to use
for this operation. For example, if velocities are added (length/time), then the calculated “units”
parameter for the new result set component is velocity (length/time). If the derivative of a velocity
is taken, the calculated “units” parameter is acceleration (length/time**2).
Adams/View can only handle calculated units with a maximum exponent for the base units (force,
length, mass, time) of plus or minus four. For example, if a result set component with the units
(length/time**3) is multiplied with a result set component having the same units, it gives the
calculated units (length**2/time**6). Because the exponent of time is greater than four,
Adams/View uses no_units and issues a warning.
Values are: no_units, calculate, length, angle, mass, density, time, area, volume, velocity,
acceleration, angular_velocity, angular_acceleration, inertia, area_inertia, damping,
stiffness, torsion_stiffness, torsion_damping, force, torque, pressure, force_time,
torque_time.
numeric_results 5
numeric_results component delete

Allows you to delete a result set component.
Format:

result_set_component_name = existing result_set component name
Example:
numeric_results delete &

result_set_component_name = res_01
Description:

result_set_component_name Existing result set component Identifies a result set component
to be deleted.
1. The components must be in an existing result set and reference to the component must include the
result set name. A result set is a storage place for any kind of numeric tabular data. A result set
can contain any number of components. A component is usually set up to contain vector
components of values such as displacement, velocity, acceleration, and force. In this case,
however, a result set is completely general and can store any numeric value in a component with
few exceptions. These exceptions are those cases when you ask the system to mix incompatible
value types, such as complex values in the same component as real values.
The result set name given must be within a particular analysis. A result set name can be of any
length, and any combination of letters and numbers. The leading character, however, must be a
letter.
with request 101 from an analysis named test is referred to as .test.req101.
When you read into Adams/View request and result files, Adams/View creates several predefined
result set types. For example, if you read in a request file named SHIFT.REQ, and this request file
contains the result information for the statement REQUEST/1, the result set is named REQ1, and
can also be referred to as being relative to the analysis name .shift.req1. If you want to refer to a
component in the same result set, the full name for the X component would be
.SHIFT.REQ1.X.
request (.req) and results (.res) files
File that result

Result set type Result set name Component names is from
vx vy vz wx wy wz


numeric_results 7
numeric_results component modify

Allows you to modify a result set component.
Format:

result_set_component_name = existing result set
values= real
Example:
For example, the following command generates a full-cycle sine curve with 100 points:
numeric_results component modify &

new_result_set_component_name= req1.x &
result_set_component_name= sine1.x
Description:

result_set_comp Existing Result Set Name Specifies an existing result set
onent_name name.
Values Real Specifies the real values to be
stored in the result set component.
The values can be a list of numbers,
or an expression defining an array
of values.
Units No_units, Calculate, Length, Angle, Mass, Specifies the type of units to be
Density, Time, Area, Volume, Velocity, used for the new result set
Acceleration, Angular_velocity, component. Once you set the unit
Angular_acceleration, Inertia, Area_inertia, type, Adams/View can perform the
Damping, Stiffness, Torsion_stiffness, proper unit conversion on the data.
Torsion_damping, Force, Torque, Pressure,
Force_time, Torque_time
result set:

.SHIFT.REQ1.NEW (it is not necessary to include .SHIFT., if SHIFT is the current
analysis_name).
(,).
File that result

vx vy vz wx wy wz
numeric_results 9
File that result

torque_time.
numeric_results create absolute_value

Allows you to take the absolute value of a real component or the magnitude of a complex component.
Format:

result_set_component_name = an existing component
new_result_set_component_name = a new component
units = units_type_with_calc
Example:
numeric_results create absolute_value &

result_set_component_name = time &
new_result_set_component_name = rsc__1 &
units = time
Description:

result_set_component_name An Existing Component Identifies the component of an existing
result set.
new_result_set_component_name A New Component Allows you to identify where the new
data components are to be stored.
units Units_Type_With_Calc Allows you to specify the type of units
to be used for the new result set
component.
1. The component must be in an existing result set and reference to the component must include the
result set name. For example, assume you have read a request file called "SHIFT.REQ", and this
request file contains the result set REQ1. If you wish to refer to the X component in the result set
REQ1, enter .SHIFT.REQ1.X (the .SHIFT. may be omitted if shift is the current analysis_name).
SHIFT refers to the analysis name that that result set came from (or is stored under).
numeric_results 11
will be named REQ1, and may also be referred to as being relative to the analysis name .shift.req1.
If you wish to refer to a component in the same result set, the full name for the X component
would be .SHIFT.REQ1.X.
The following table illustrates the default names assigned to result sets and result set components, read
File that result

vx vy vz wx wy wz


2. If the component is to be stored in an existing result set, then the name entered must include the
result set. For example, assume you have read a request file called "SHIFT.REQ", and this
request file contains the result set REQ1. If you wish to store the new result set component in
result set REQ1 with the component name NEW, enter .SHIFT.REQ1.NEW (The .SHIFT. can be
left off if SHIFT is the "current" analysis_name). If you wish to store the component in a new
result set named REQ99 in the analysis run SHIFT, enter .SHIFT.REQ99.NEW. The number of
components to be stored is inferred by the number of components named in this parameter.
Multiple names can be entered separated by commas (,).
This is a required parameter and the component name given must be unique even though it may
be stored in an existing result set. A result set name may be arbitrarily long and a combination of
letters of the alphabet and numbers may be used. The leading character must be a letter.
File that result

vx vy vz wx wy wz


numeric_results 13
File that result

3. Once the unit type is set, Adams/View can perform the proper unit conversion on the data. If the
value for the “units” parameter is calculate, Adams/View tries to determine the units to use for
this operation. For example, if velocities are added (length/time), then the calculated “units”
numeric_results create addition

Adds two components of a result set, either real or complex. The two components must:
• Have the same number of elements. Otherwise, Adams/View issues an error and does not
execute the command.
• Be from the same domain: either the time domain or the frequency domain. Otherwise,
Adams/View issues an error and does not execute the command.
If the two components are complex, the new component will be complex. A component
containing the magnitude of the new component is also created and is named
name_MAGNITUDE. For example, if the new component is named X, the magnitude component
will be named X_MAGNITUDE.
Format:

result_set_component_names = existing result set components
units = Type of units
Example:
numerical_results create addition &

new_result_set_component_name= dingdong.bell &
result_set_component_name= res101.x, res102.y
Description:

new_result_set_component_n New Result set name Identifies the new result
ame set component.
numeric_results 15

result_set_component_names Existing result set components Identifies two result set
components on which to
perform the operation.
Units no_units, calculate, length, angle, Specifies the type of units
mass, density, time, area, volume, to be used for the new
velocity, acceleration, result set component.
angular_velocity, Once you set the unit type,
angular_acceleration, inertia, Adams/View can perform
area_inertia, damping, stiffness, the proper unit conversion
torsion_stiffness, torsion_damping, on the data.
force, torque, pressure, force_time,
torque_time
1. 1. The heirarchy of a model's results is shown below with the components of a result set under the
result set:
.SHIFT.REQ1.NEW (it's not necessary to include .SHIFT., if SHIFT is the
current analysis_name).
• In a new results set, for example named REQ99 in the analysis run SHIFT, enter
(,).
result set name can be any length and any combination of alphanumeric characters. The
See a table below that illustrates the default names assigned to result sets and result set
components read from request (.req) and results (.res) files.
Result set File that result is

type: Result set name: Component names: from:
vx vy vz wx wy wz

coupler COUxxx... fx1 fy1 fz1 tx1 ty1 tz1 fmag1 results file
tmag1
fx2 fy2 fz2 tx2 ty2 tz2 fmag2

tmag2

tmag3
for this operation. For example, if velocities are ADDed (length/time), the calculated units for the
new result set component are a velocity (length/time). If the derivative of a velocity is is taken,
the calculated units are acceleration (length/time**2).
numeric_results 17
(length/time**3) is multiplied with a result set component with the same units, the calculated
units are (length**2/time**6). Because the exponent of time the is greater than four, Adams/View
uses no_units and issues a warning.
acceleration, angular_velocity, angular_acceleration, inertia, area_inertia, damping, stiffness,
torsion_stiffness, torsion_damping, force, torque, pressure, force_time, torque_time.
numeric_results create definite_integral

Allows you to calculate the definite integral of an existing result set component.
Format:

result_set_component_names = 2 existing components
Example:
numeric_results create definite_integral &

result_set_component_names = rsc__1 , rsc__2 &
units = time
Description:

result_set_component_names An Existing Component Identifies two result-set
components to perform the
operation on.
new_result_set_component_n A New Component Allows you to identify where the
ame new data components are to be
stored.
units Units_Type_With_Calc Allows you to specify the type of
units to be used for the new result
set component.
1. The definite integral operation evaluates the area under the result set component data curve over
the closed interval represented by the result set component data.
The integral is calculated by fitting a cubic spline to the result set component data and analytically
evaluating the definite integral. In other words, the cubic spline fit gives a polynomial
representation of the segments that represent the data. This polynomial in then analytically
integrated over the closed interval of the data.
numeric_results 19
SHIFT refers to the analysis name from which that result set came from (or is stored under).
If you wish to refer to a component in the same result set the full name for the X component would
be .SHIFT.REQ1.X.
File that
Result set type Result set name Component names result is from
vx vy vz wx wy wz


File that
If one component is complex, and the other is real, the real component is promoted to complex.
If the two components are of different lengths, the longer one is truncated (only for that
operation).
If the new component being created is complex, a MAGNITUDE component is automatically
generated. If the component is being added to an existing result set and a MAGNITUDE
component already exits, an error will be issued.
Multiple names can be entered, separated by commas (,).
File that
vx vy vz wx wy wz

numeric_results 21
File that

numeric_results create differentiation

Allows you to calculate the derivative function of an existing result set component.
Format:

result_set_component_names = 2 existing components
Example:
numeric_results create differentiation &

result_set_component_names = rsc1,rsc2 &
units = time
Description:

result_set_component_names An Existing Component Identifies two result-set components
to perform the operation on.
component.
5. This operation numerically differentiates the result set component data over the closed interval
represented by its finite set of data points.
The derivative is evaluated by fitting a cubic spline to the result set component data and
analytically forming the derivative. In other words, the cubic spline fit gives a polynomial
differentiated over the closed interval of the data.
numeric_results 23
be .SHIFT.REQ1.X.
The following table illustrates the default names assigned to result sets and result set components read
File that result

vx vy vz wx wy wz


File that result

If the two components are different lengths, the longer one is truncated (only for that operation).
will be named REQ1, and may also be referred to relatives of the analysis name .shift.req1. If you
wish to refer to a component in the same result set, the full name for the X component would be
.SHIFT.REQ1.X.
The following table illustrates the default names assigned to result sets and result set components
read from request (.REQ) and results (.RES) files.
File that result

vx vy vz wx wy wz

numeric_results 25
File that result


8. Once the unit type is set, Adams/View can perform the proper unit conversion on the data.
If the value for this parameter is calculated, Adams/View will try to determine the units to use
for this operation. For example, if velocities are ADDed (length/time), the calculated units for
the new result set component will be a velocity (length/time). If the derivative of a velocity is is
taken, the calculated units will be acceleration (length/time**2).
Adams/View, at this time, can only handle calculated units with a maximum exponent for the base
units (force, length, mass, time) is plus or minus four (4). For example, if a result set component
with the units (length/time**3) is multiplied with a result set component with the same units, The
calculated units would be (length**2/time**6). Since the exponent is greater than 4,
Adams/View will use NO_UNITS and issue a warning.
numeric_results create division

Allows you to divide two components (the first by the second), either real or complex.
Tests are made for overflow and underflow.
• Underflow is the condition where the numerator is near zero irrespective of the denominator
value, and always results in zero:
0/0-1=0
0/0 = 0
• Overflow is when the denominator is zero and results in 1E25:
1/0 = 1E25
9E100/0 = 1E25
-4/0 = 1E25
The two components must have the same number of elements, or an error is issued and the
command is aborted.
The two components must be from the same domain, either the TIME domain or the FREQUENCY
domain, or an error is issued and the command is aborted.
If the two components are complex, the new component will be complex.
A component containing the magnitude of the new component will also be created. It is named
'name_MAGNITUDE'. For example, if the new component is named 'X', the magnitude component will
be named 'X_MAGNITUDE'.
Format:

Example:
numerical_results create division &

new_result_set_component_name = dingdong.bell &
result_set_component_name = res101.x, res102.y
numeric_results 27
Description:

new_result_set_component_name New Result Set Name Identifies the new result
set component.
result_set_component_names Existing Result Set Components Identifies two result set
Units No_units, Calculate, Length, Specifies the type of units
Angle, Mass, Density, Time, Area, to be used for the new
Volume, Velocity, Acceleration, result set component.
Angular_velocity, Once you set the unit type,
Angular_acceleration, Inertia, Adams/View can perform
Area_inertia, Damping, Stiffness, the proper unit conversion
Torsion_stiffness, on the data.
Torsion_damping, Force, Torque,
Pressure, Force_time,
Torque_time
result set:

• In an existing result set, the name must include the result set. For example, assume you have a
request file called SHIFT.REQ, and it contains the result set REQ1. If you want to store the new
result set component in result set REQ1 with the component name NEW, enter:
.SHIFT.REQ1.NEW (It is not necessary to include .SHIFT., if SHIFT is the current
analysis_name).
components named in this parameter. You can enter multiple names separated with commas (,).
File that
result is
vx vy vz wx wy wz


numeric_results 29
torque_time.
numeric_results create dynamic_polyline

Allows you to create a result set which specifies time dependent locations for polylines.
Format:

polyline_name = an existing polyline
vertex = integer
z_result_set_component_name = z_result_set_component_name
Example:
numeric_results create dynamic_polyline &

polyline_name = an existing polyline &
vertex = 10 &
Description:

polyline_name An Existing Specifies an existing POLYLINE
Polyline
vertex Integer Specifies the vertex this result set corresponds to.
x_result_set_component_na An Existing Specifies the name of a result set component to be
me Component used to drive the vertex in the X direction over time.
y_result_set_component_na An Existing Specifies the name of a result set component to be
me Component used to drive the vertex in the Y direction over time.
z_result_set_component_na An Existing Specifies the name of a result set component to be
me Component used to drive the vertex in the Z direction over time.
Model,Part OR coordinates and orientation angles correspond to.
Marker
numeric_results 31
1. Just as a part's locations and orientations for the steps of a simulation are stored in a result set,
you can create a result set that has the time dependent locations for polylines that are children of
a model. When the model is displayed at a time step with the single_frame_display command, or
is animated with the animation command, Adams/View will use these result sets to display the
polylines.
This allows you to drive each component (X, Y, and Z) of a vertex of a polyline from any result
test component including the output of any Adams equation.
For example, you could model a flexible air bag as a mesh of polylines, and using Adams
equations (linear state equations, general state equations), specify the location of the vertices of
the mesh over time. When the model is animated it would show the air bag deployment.
The polylines must be children of a model.
Each result set contains the X, Y, and Z data for a vertex of a polyline The names of the result sets
created are encoded with the name of the polyline and the vertex number. The components of the
result set are named 'X', 'Y' and 'Z'. For example, if the name of the polyline is 'POL1' and the
you are creating the result set for the second vertex, the result set name will be
'POL1_LOCATION_2'.
If Adams/View cannot find the result set components, it will use the location specified when the
model was created, and will not vary over time.
2. You may identify a POLYLINE by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the POLYLINE is not visible on the screen, you must type the name.
You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the POLYLINE is displayed.
Since a POLYLINE cannot be defined in an Adams data set or graphics file, the POLYLINE
cannot be created by reading in one of these files. The only way to create a POLYLINE is to do
it interactively, by reading a command file, or by reading an IGES file. POLYLINEs are owned
by parts.
If a POLYLINE is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. You may
You need not separate multiple POLYLINE picks by commas.
Tips:
1. IF no X_RESULT_SET_COMPONENT_NAME is specified, the X component of the vertex
does not change over time. This holds the same for the Y and Z components of the vertex.
numeric_results 33
numeric_results create empty

Allows you to create an empty result set.
Format:

comments = string
Example:
numeric_results create empty &

new_result_set_component_name = rsc__empty &
comments = “an empty result set
Description:

new_result_set_component_name A New Component This parameter allows you to
identify where the new data
components are to be stored.
comments String Specifies comments for the
object being created or modified.
File that
vx vy vz wx wy wz


numeric_results 35
numeric_results create fft

Allows you to use FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) to change a result set component from the time domain
to the frequency domain, and back.
Because the FFT algorithm requires an evenly spaced sampling of elements and the number of elements
must be a power of two (512, 1024, and so on), the data is interpolated before the FFT. The default
interpolation method is the Akima method with 1024 elements. These values can be overridden.
If the input is a real component with N interpolated elements, this operation generates a complex
component of (N+1)/2 elements with the name specified in the NEW_RESULTS_NAME parameter. It
also generates the real components, FREQUENCY and one named 'name'_MAGNITUDE of size N/2,
and places these components in the same result set as the complex component. For example, the
command:
result_set_component_name=Res.timeDomain &
new_result_set_name=fft.x
results in:
fft.x - complex result in the frequency domain
fft.x_MAGNITUDE - mag (fft.x)
fft.FREQUENCY
If the input is a complex component, this command performs an inverse FFT, and generates a real
component with the name specified in the new_results_set_name parameter. It also generates the real
component TIME. For example:
result_set_component_name=res.frequencyDomain &
new_result_set_name=inverseFFT.x
Note: If you perform an FFT on a component, and then perform an inverse FFT on the result,
Adams/View does not return the same data, because the original data is interpolated
There is no interpolation for an inverse FFT.
Format:

interpolate_type = interpolation_type
number_of_points = integer
numeric_results 37
Example:
numerical_results create fft &

result_set_component_name = res101.x, res102.y &
interpolate_type = linear &
number_of_points = 1024
Description:

new_result_set_ New Result Set Name Identifies the new result set component.
component_nam
e
result_set_comp Existing Result Set Components Identifies two result set components on which
onent_names to perform the operation.
Interpolate_type Linear, Cubic, Akima, Cspline Specifies the method to interpolate the result set
component.
Number_of_poi Integer Specifies the number of interpolation points
nts used in the fitting of data contained in a result
set component. You might want to use this
curve-fitting operation in preparation for an
FFT operation, and so on.
Units No_units, Calculate, Length, Specifies the type of units to be used for the
Angle, Mass, Density, Time, new result set component. Once you set the unit
Area, Volume, Velocity, type, Adams/View can perform the proper unit
Acceleration, Angular_velocity, conversion on the data.
Angular_acceleration, Inertia,
Area_inertia, Damping,
Stiffness, Torsion_stiffness,
Torque_time
result set:

analysis_name).
(,).
result set name can be any length and any combination of alphanumeric characters. The
File that result

vx vy vz wx wy wz

numeric_results 39
File that result


torque_time.
3. If the interpolation operation is in preparation for an FFT, then the number of points must be an
even power of two (for example, 256, 512, and 1024).
If you do not specify this parameter, it defaults to 1024.
If you specify this parameter, you must use a positive integer.
Once you change the value of this parameter, Adams/View will remember the new value and use
it as the default the next time you need this parameter.
numeric_results create filter

Allows you to test each value of the component; if the value is above the specified maximum value, or
below the specified minimum value, set it to zero. For example: If the component is a discrete sampling
of a sinusoidal wave with an amplitude of one (1), and filter is requested with a maximum value of .9
(above_value=.9), all the values corresponding to 'sin (x) > .9' will be set to 0.
Format:

below_value = real
above_value = real
Example:
numeric_results create filter &

units = time
Description:

result set.
new_result_set_component_n A New Component This parameter allows you to identify
ame where the new data components are to be
stored.
below_value Real The BELOW_VALUE parameter is used
as a critical value evaluator in the
operation to be performed.
above_value Real The ABOVE_VALUE parameter is used
as a critical value evaluator in the
units Units_Type_With_Calc Allows you to specify the type of units to
be used for the new result set component.
numeric_results 41
be .SHIFT.REQ1.X.
File that result

vx vy vz wx wy wz

tmag1

tmag2

tmag3
File that result

File that result

vx vy vz wx wy wz

numeric_results 43
File that result


3. The below_value parameter is a critical value which determines the threshold below which a
particular numeric value will be modified, printed, etc. (depending on the operation to be
performed).
This parameter is optional and if not entered, no value will be passed to the application, and
therefore, no action will be taken based on the BELOW_VALUE parameter. If entered, the
BELOW_VALUE parameter must be a real number.
4. The above_value parameter is a critical value which determines the threshold above which a
performed).
therefore, no action will be taken based on the ABOVE_VALUE parameter. If entered, the
ABOVE_VALUE parameter must be a real number.
numeric_results create interpolation

Allows you to create an evenly spaced sampling of the component.
This operation does not assume the points are evenly spaced, it uses the "TIME" or "FREQUENCY"
component as the dependent variable.
The "TIME" or "FREQUENCY" component is also interpolated to be evenly spaced. The new
TIME/FREQUENCY component is stored with the new component
Format:

interpolate_type = interpolation_type
number_of_points = integer
Example:
numeric_results create interpolation &

units = time
Description:

result_set_component_na An Existing Component Identifies the component of an existing result
me set.
new_result_set_componen A New Component Allows you to identify where the new data
t_name components are to be stored.
interpolate_type Interpolation_Type Specifies the three methods used to
interpolate the result set component.
number_of_points Integer Specifies the number of interpolation points
used in the fitting of data contained in a result
set component.
units Units_Type_With_Calc Allows you to specify the type of units to be
used for the new result set component.
numeric_results 45
request file contains the result set REQ1.If you wish to refer to the X component in the result set
request file contains the result information for the Adams statement REQUEST/1.The result set
be .SHIFT.REQ1.X.
File that result

vx vy vz wx wy wz


File that result

request REQxxx... x y z r1 r2 r3 mag amag REQUEST file
File that
vx vy vz wx wy wz

wdz
numeric_results 47
File that
fmag1 tmag1

fmag2 tmag2

fmag3 tmag3
4. The three methods used to interpolate the result set component:
linear - uses the first order LaGrangian interpolation
cubic - uses the second order LaGrangian interpolation
akima - uses the Akima method, as documented in Journal of the Association Computing
Machinery Vol 17, No 4, October 1970.
5. This curve fitting operation could be desired by the user, in preparation for an FFT operation, etc.
If the interpolation operation is in preparation for an FFT, then the number of points must be an
even power of two. (e.g. 256, 512, 1024, etc.).
This is an optional parameter and if not entered, will be set to 1024.
If entered, the NUMBER_OF_POINTS parameter must be a positive integer.

Also, once changed by the user, the new value will be remembered and used as default the next
time the parameter is needed.
numeric_results 49
numeric_results create linear_equation

Allows you to multiply two components of a result set, either real or complex. The two components must:
Format:

a_multiplier = real
b_multiplier = real
Example:
numerical_results create linear_equation &

a_multiplier = (2*365+7.2) &
b_multiplier = 25.7 &
Description:

A_multiplier Real The A_MULTIPLIER parameter is used
as a constant coefficient in the
linear_equation operation for
manipulating numeric results. The linear
equation is of the form:
A*X + B*Y = Result Where A

corresponds to the A_MULTIPLIER.
B_multiplier Real The B_MULTIPLIER parameter is used
as a constant coefficient in the
linear_equation operation for
manipulating numeric results. The linear
equation is of the form:
A*X + B*Y = Result where B

corresponds to the B_MULTIPLIER.
This parameter is optional and if not
entered, it will default to 1.0. If entered,
the B_MULTIPLIER must be a real
number.
new_result_set_com New Result Set Name Identifies the new result set component.
ponent_name
result_set_compone Existing Result Set Components Identifies two result set components on
nt_names which to perform the operation.
Units No_units, Calculate, Length, Specifies the type of units to be used for
Angle, Mass, Density, Time, Area, the new result set component. Once you
Volume, Velocity, Acceleration, set the unit type, Adams/View can
Angular_velocity, perform the proper unit conversion on the
Angular_acceleration, Inertia, data.
Area_inertia, Damping, Stiffness,
Torsion_stiffness,
Torque_time
numeric_results 51
result set:

analysis_name).
components named in this parameter. You can enter multiple names, separated by commas (,).
File that
vx vy vz wx wy wz

File that

torque_time.
numeric_results 53
numeric_results create multiplication

Allows you to multiply two components of a result set, either real or complex. The two components
must:
Format:

Example:
numerical_results create multiplication &

Description:


result_set_comp Existing Result Set Components Identifies two result set
onent_names components on which to perform
the operation.
Units No_units, Calculate, Length, Angle, Mass, Specifies the type of units to be
Density, Time, Area, Volume, Velocity, used for the new result set
Acceleration, Angular_velocity, component. Once you set the
Angular_acceleration, Inertia, Area_inertia, unit type, Adams/View can
Damping, Stiffness, Torsion_stiffness, perform the proper unit
Torsion_damping, Force, Torque, Pressure, conversion on the data.
Force_time, Torque_time
result set:

analysis_name).
(,).
numeric_results 55
The table below illustrates the default names assigned to result sets and result set components,
read from request (.req) and results (.res) files.
Result set File that result

type Result set name Component names is from
vx vy vz wx wy wz


torque_time.
numeric_results 57
numeric_results create percent_difference

Allows you to calculate the percent difference of two real result set components using the formula:
((x1-x2)*100/x1)
where:
x1 is an element of the first component

x2 is an element of the second component
Note that:
• If x1 is zero and x2 is zero, the result is zero.
• If x1 is zero and x2 is nonzero, the result is +/- infinity with the sign taken from x2.
Format:

Example:
numerical_results create percent_difference &

Description:

new_result_set_component_name New ResulT Set Name Identifies the new result
set component.

Units No_units, Calculate, Length, Specifies the type of
Angle, Mass, Density, Time, Area, units to be used for the
Volume, Velocity, Acceleration, new result set
Angular_velocity, component. Once you set
Angular_acceleration, Inertia, the unit type,
Area_inertia, Damping, Stiffness, Adams/View can
Torsion_stiffness, perform the proper unit
Torsion_damping, Force, Torque, conversion on the data.
Pressure, Force_time, Torque_time
result set:

analysis_name).
(,).
numeric_results 59
Result set File that result

Result set type name Component names is from
vx vy vz wx wy wz


torque_time.
numeric_results 61
numeric_results create scale

Allows you to multiply all the elements of a result set component, either real or complex, by some value
and then add a constant value. The form of the equation is:
Ax + B = Result
Format:

a_scale_value = real
b_offset_value = real
Example:
numeric_results create scale &

units = time
Description:

result_set_component_na An Existing Component Identifies the component of an existing
me result set.
new_result_set_component A New Component Allows you to identify where the new
_name data components are to be stored.
a_scale_value Real The A_SCALE_VALUE parameter is
used as a constant coefficient in the scale
operation for manipulating numeric
results.
b_offset_value Real Specifies the constant real value that is to
be added to a scaled
RESULT_SET_COMPONENT
units Units_Type_With_Calc Allows you to specify the type of units to
be used for the new result set component.
Result set type Result set name Component names File that result is from
vx vy vz wx wy wz

tmag1

tmag2

tmag3
numeric_results 63
If the component is to be stored in an existing result set, then the name entered must include the
be stored in an existing result set. A result set name may be arbitrarily long, and a combination of
The following table illustrates the default names assigned to result sets and result set components,
File that result is

vx vy vz wx wy wz

File that result is


Once the unit type is set, Adams/View can perform the proper unit conversion on the data. If the
2. The scaling equation is of the form:
A*X + B = Result
where A corresponds to the A_SCALE_VALUE and B corresponds to the B_OFFSET_VALUE
parameter.
3. The B_OFFSET_VALUE parameter is used as a constant coefficient in the scale operation for
manipulating numeric results. The scaling equation is of the form:
A*X + B = Result
where B corresponds to the B_OFFSET_VALUE.
numeric_results 65
numeric_results create spline

Allows you to create a result set from spline data points.
Format:

spline_name = an existing spline
new_result_set_name = new_result_set_name =
z = real
Example:
numeric_results create spline &

new_result_set_name = rsc__1 &
z = 3.1 &
units = force
Description:

spline_name An Existing Spline Specifies an existing spline.
new_result_set_name A New Result Set Allows you to identify the new result set name
to be created with this operation.
z Real
units Units_Type_With_Calc Allows you to specify the type of units to be
used for the new result set component.
1. You may plot the result set to display the data points, or use it with the 'NUMERIC_RESULTS
CREATE INTERPOLATION' command to construct an interpolated curve.
If the spline has one independent variable (x), Adams/View will create a result set with two
components named 'x' and 'y'. These components will contain the x and y values you entered
when creating the spline.
If a spline has one independent variable (x), Adams/View ignores parameter Z. If a spline has
two independent variables (x and z), you may optionally specify the Z parameter.
If you do not specify Z, Adams/View will create a result set with components named 'x', 'z', and
'y_1', 'y_2', ... 'y_n', where 'n' is the number of z values. These components will include the x, y,
and z values you entered when creating the spline. There will be a y component for each z value,
and the lengths of the x and y components will be the same.
If you do enter a Z value, Adams/View will create a result set with two components named 'x' and
'y'. Component 'x' will contain the x values you entered when creating the spline. Adams/View
will create component 'y' by finding the two z values nearest to the value you specify, and linearly
interpolating between the corresponding sets of y values.
2. You identify a spline by typing its name. If you created the spline by reading an Adams data set,
the spline name is the letters SPL followed by the Adams data set spline ID number. For example,
the name of Adams SPLINE/101 is SPL101. If you created the spline during preprocessing, you
will have given it a name at that time.
If a spline is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify a spline under another model, for instance, you may need to
enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify spline 'stiffness' from model
'suspension' by entering ".suspension.stiffness". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the
splines available by default.
You must separate multiple spline names by commas.
components. Result sets are associated with an Adams analysis run and can be identified as such.
A result set associated with request 101 from and analysis named "test" is referred to as
.test.req101.
This is a required parameter and the result set name given must be unique within the particular
analysis name. A result set name may be arbitrarily long, and a combination of letters of the
.SHIFT.REQ1.X.
numeric_results 67
File that result

vx vy vz wx wy wz


numeric_results create sqrt_sum_of_squares

Allows you to add two components of a result set, either real or complex. The two components must:
If the two components are complex, the new component will be complex. A component containing the
magnitude of the new component is also created and is named name_MAGNITUDE. For example, if the
new component is named X, the magnitude component will be named X_MAGNITUDE.
Format:

Example:
numerical_results create sqrt_sum_of_sqares &

Description:

new_result_set_component_na New Result Set Name Identifies the new result set
me component.
numeric_results 69

Units No_units, Calculate, Length, Specifies the type of units to be
Angle, Mass, Density, Time, used for the new result set
Area, Volume, Velocity, component. Once you set the
Acceleration, Angular_velocity, unit type, Adams/View can
Angular_acceleration, Inertia, perform the proper unit
Area_inertia, Damping, Stiffness, conversion on the data.
Torsion_stiffness,
Torque_time
result set:

analysis_name).
In a new results set, named REQ99, for example, in the analysis run SHIFT, enter
components named in this parameter. You can enter multiple names separated by commas (,).
The table below illustrates the default names assigned to result sets and result set components read from
File that result

vx vy vz wx wy wz


numeric_results 71
numeric_results create subtraction

Allows you to subtract two components of a result set, either real or complex. The two components must:
• Have the same number of elements. Otherwise, AdamsAdams/View issues an error and does not
If the two components are complex, the new component will be complex. A component containing the
magnitude of the new component is also created and is named name_MAGNITUDE. For example, if the
new component is named X, the magnitude component will be named X_MAGNITUDE.
Format:

Example:
numerical_results create subtraction &

Description:

new_result_set_component_na New Result Set Name Identifies the new result set
me component.
numeric_results 73

Units No_units, Calculate, Length, Angle, Specifies the type of units to
Mass, Density, Time, Area, Volume, be used for the new result set
Velocity, Acceleration, component. Once you set the
Angular_velocity, unit type, Adams/View can
Angular_acceleration, Inertia, perform the proper unit
Area_inertia, Damping, Stiffness, conversion on the data.
Torsion_stiffness, Torsion_damping,
Force, Torque, Pressure, Force_time,
Torque_time
result set:

analysis_name).
(,).
vx vy vz wx wy wz
tmag1
tmag2
tmag3
numeric_results 75
numeric_results create values

Allows you to create a result set by specifying the values directly.
Format:

values = real
Example:
numeric_results create values &

values = 10, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15 &
units = time
Description:

values Real Specifies the real values to be stored
in the result set component.The
values can be a list of numbers, or an
expression referencing an array of
existing values.
units Units_Type_With_Calc Allows you to specify the type of
units to be used for the new result set
component.
numeric_results 77
File that result is

vx vy vz wx wy wz


File that result is

If the two components are of different lengths, the longer one is truncated. (Only for that
operation)
File that result is

vx vy vz wx wy wz

numeric_results 79
File that result is


numeric_results create zero

Allows you to zero the values of the component that correspond to TIME/FREQUENCY component
which are above a maximum value and below a minimum value.
If no corresponding TIME/FREQUENCY component exists, an error will be issued.
Format:

below_value = real
above_value = real
Example:
numeric_results create zero &

units = time
Description:

result_set_component_nam An Existing Component Identify the component of an existing
e result set.
new_result_set_component A New Component Allows you to identify where the new
_name data components are to be stored.
below_value Real The BELOW_VALUE parameter is
used as a critical value evaluator in the
above_value Real The ABOVE_VALUE parameter is
used as a critical value evaluator in the
component.
numeric_results 81
File that result

vx vy vz wx wy wz

tmag1

tmag2

tmag3
File that result

File that
vx vy vz wx wy wz

numeric_results 83
File that

3. The below_value parameter is a critical value which determines the threshold below which a
performed).
4. The above_value parameter is a critical value which determines the threshold above which a
performed).
numeric_results delete
Allows you to delete an entire result set.
Format:
result_set_name = existing result_set name
Example:
numeric_results delete &

result_set_name = res_01
Description:

result_set_name Existing result set Identifies a result set to be deleted.
1. A result set is a storage place for any kind of numeric tabular data. A result set can contain any
number of components. A component is usually set up to contain vector components of values
such as displacement, velocity, acceleration, and force. In this case, however, a result set is
completely general and can store any numeric value in a component with few exceptions. These
exceptions are those cases when you ask the system to mix incompatible value types, such as
complex values in the same component as real values.
The result set name given must be within a particular analysis. A result set name can be of any
length, and any combination of letters and numbers. The leading character, however, must be a
letter.
with request 101 from an analysis named test is referred to as .test.req101.
When you read into Adams/View request and result files, Adams/View creates several predefined
result set types. For example, if you read in a request file named SHIFT.REQ, and this request file
contains the result information for the statement REQUEST/1, the result set is named REQ1, and
can also be referred to as being relative to the analysis name .shift.req1. If you want to refer to a
component in the same result set, the full name for the X component would be .SHIFT.REQ1.X.
numeric_results 85
File that
vx vy vz wx wy wz
numeric_results list_info all

Allows you to use the ALL keyword to control what information about a particular result set component
should be included as it is written to the terminal or file using the NUMERICAL_RESULTS LIST_INFO
command.
Format:

file_name = string
Example:
numeric_results list_info all &

file_name = "c:\info.txt"
Description:

result_set_component_name An Existing Identifies the component of an existing result set.
Component
write_to_terminal On_Off Specifies whether the information requested is to be
sent to the informational window or not.
file_name String Specifies that the information requested is to be sent
1. If selected, the ALL keyword will cause the MAXIMUM_VALUE, MINIMUM_VALUE,
TIME_RANGE, (or frequency, if appropriate) and NO_OF_TIME_STEPS to be output in the
form of an informational message.
If there is no time/frequency range, the value listed is zero (0).
List all the information about the specified component.
numeric_results 87
File that result

vx vy vz wx wy wz
File that result

3. This parameter is most likely to be used in conjunction with the FILE_NAME parameter to get
the information to be put into a file.
numeric_results 89
numeric_results list_info maximum_value

Allows you to use the MAXIMUM_VALUE keyword to control what information should be included
about a particular result set component as it is written to the terminal or file using the
NUMERICAL_RESULTS LIST_INFO command.
Format:

file_name = string
Example:
numeric_results list_info maximum_value &

result_set_component_name = TIME &
Description:

result_set_component_na An Existing Identifies the component of an existing result set.
me Component
write_to_terminal On_Off Specifies whether the information requested is to be
sent to the informational window or not
file_name String Specifies that the information requested is to be sent
1. If selected, the MAXIMUM_VALUE keyword will cause the maximum value of the desired
result set component to be output in the form of an informational message.
This command has one required parameter, which is RESULT_SET_COMPONENT_NAME.
All other parameters have default settings, or are optional.
be .SHIFT.REQ1.X.
File that result

vx vy vz wx wy wz
numeric_results 91
File that result

numeric_results list_info minimum_value

Allows you to use the MINIMUM_VALUE keyword to control what information about a particular
result set component should be included as it is written to the terminal or file using the
Format:

file_name = string
Example:
numeric_results list_info minimum_value &

Description:

result_set_component_name An Existing Identifies the component of an existing
Component result set.
write_to_terminal On_Off Specifies whether the information
requested is to be sent to the informational
window or not.
file_name String Specifies that the information requested is
to be sent to a file with the name specified
with the parameter.
1. If selected, the MINIMUM_VALUE keyword will cause the minimum value of the desired result
set component to be output in the form of an informational message.
All other parameters have default settings or are optional.
numeric_results 93
would be
.SHIFT.REQ1.X.
File that
vx vy vz wx wy wz


File that
numeric_results 95
numeric_results list_info number_of_time_steps

Allows you to use the NUMBER_OF_TIME_STEPS keyword to control what information about a
particular result set component should be included as it is written to the terminal or file using the
Format:

on_off string
Example:
numeric_results list_info number_of_time_steps &

Description:

result_set_component_name An Existing Component Identifies the component of an existing result
set.
write_to_terminal On_Off Specifies whether the information requested
is to be sent to the informational window or
not.
file_name String Specifies that the information requested is to
be sent to a file with the name specified with
the parameter.
1. If selected, this parameter will cause the NUMBER_OF_TIME_STEPS to be output in the form
of an informational message.
be .SHIFT.REQ1.X.
File that
vx vy vz wx wy wz


user request UREQxxx... u1 u2 u3 u4 u5 u6 u7 u8
request REQxxx... x y z r1 r2 r3 mag amag
the information to be put to a file.
numeric_results 97
numeric_results list_info time_range

Allows you to use the TIME_RANGE keyword to control what information about a particular result set
component should be included as it is written to the terminal or file using the NUMERICAL_RESULTS
LIST_INFO command.
Format:

file_name = string
Example:
numeric_results list_info time_range &

Description:

result set.
write_to_terminal On_Off Specifies whether the information
requested is to be sent to the informational
window or not.
file_name String Specifies that the information requested is
to be sent to a file with the name specified
with the parameter.
1. If selected, the TIME_RANGE keyword will cause the time range that the result set spans to be
output in the form of an informational message.
If there is no time range, the frequency range is listed. If there is no frequency range also, all the
values are listed as zero (0).
All other parameters have default settings or are optional.
be .SHIFT.REQ1.X.
File that result

vx vy vz wx wy wz

x2 fy2 fz2 tx2 ty2 tz2 fmag2 tmag2

numeric_results 99
File that result

the information to be put to a file.
numeric_results modify
Allows you to change the units of an existing result set component. You can reverse modifications using
the undo command.
Format:
Example:
numeric_results modify &

res= req1.x &
units= "length/time"
Description:

Units no_units, calculate, length, angle, Specifies the type of units to be
mass, density, time, area, volume, used for the new result set
velocity, acceleration, component. Once you set the
angular_velocity, unit type, Adams/View can
angular_acceleration, inertia, perform the proper unit
area_inertia, damping, stiffness, conversion on the data.
torsion_stiffness, torsion_damping,
force, torque, pressure, force_time,
torque_time
numeric_results 101
1. The hierarchy of a model's results is shown below with the components of a result set under the
result set:

analysis_name).
components named in this parameter. You can enter multiple names separated by commas (,).
File that
vx vy vz wx wy wz

File that

numeric_results read_from_file
Allows you to read components from an ASCII file into an existing result set or into a new result set. You
can specify the names of the components, as well as the name of the result set.
To accommodate a wide variety of formats used by third-party software, the format of the file to be read
is intentionally general. Adams/View only reads the lines that begin with a number. All other lines are
considered comments and are ignored. Using this command, output files generated from finite element,
modal analysis, or custom programs can be read into Adams/View and combined with data read from the
Adams output files. You can use files that numeric_results write command generates with this command.
This allows for the saving of important data between Adams/View sessions.
The format supported by the Adams/View file reader is a flexible one.
All lines that do not begin with a number are considered comments.
Other lines are read by Adams/View. Adams/View starts at the first line of the file and reads one line at
a time. Lines that do not begin with a number (digit,-,+,decimal point) are considered comments and are
ignored. The number of components to be read is determined by the number of components that are
named in the NEW_RESULT_SET_COMPONENT_NAME parameter. If only 3 components are
named in this parameter, then, only the first three components are read and all others in the file are
ignored.
Format:
new_result_set_component_name= new component
number_of_steps= integer
units= string
file_name= string
Example:
numeric_results read_from_file &

new_result_component_name = res_01 &
number_of_steps = 15 &
file_name = “c:\sample_file.txt”
This sample file contains three components. The first two columns of numbers, beginning with 1 and
10.0, are the first two components and the third column of numbers, beginning with 22, is the third
component.
If you do not specify the number of steps, Adams/View uses a blank line to delimit the end of a
component. In the following example, the first two components have ten numbers each. If you specify
the number of steps to be read, Adams/View continues to read lines until the requested number of steps
have been stored in the component. For example, if only one component was read from the following file
and the number of steps was specified to be 15, the component would contain the values 1, 2, 3.4, -4, 5,
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 22, 23, .24, 25, 26.
>>>>>> beginning of file <<<<<<<

This is a test file for the NUMERIC_RESULT READ command.
1 10.0
2 11.0
3.4 12.5
-4 13.0
5 +14.0
6 15.5
7 17
8 18
9 19
10 20
22
23
.24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
>>>>>> end of file <<<<<<<
Description:

new_result_set_component_name, New component Allows you to identify where
the new data components are to
be stored.
number_of_steps, Integer Shows the number of values to
be stored in each component of a
result set being read from a file.
units, String Specifies the type of units to be
used for the new result set
component.
file_name String Specifies the name of the file to
which the information is to be
sent.
1. The hierarchy of a model's results is shown below with the components of a result set under the
result set:

analysis_name).
(.RES) files.
Result set File that

type Result set name Component names result is from
vx vy vz wx wy wz
2. All components being read from a file must have the same number of steps.
Lines that do not begin with a number are considered comments and are ignored.
If you do not specify this parameter, Adams/View will infer the size of the components from the
format of the file. Adams/View will read a component from a file until it encounters a comment
line. A comment line marks the end of the component.
3. Once you set the unit type, Adams/View can perform the proper unit conversion on the data.
Cautions:
1. If a paragraph of text contains a line that begins with a number, Adams/View tries to read the line.
To avoid this, precede lines that are to be ignored with a non-numeric character. Do not use +, -,
or . because these characters are valid as the first characters in a real number

This sample file contains only one component but contains the number
3 at the beginning of a line in this header paragraph. Adams/View will
try to read this line because it is not considered a comment.
• 1.5
3.0
4.5
6.0
>>>>>> end of file <<<<<<<
The same file, without a numerical character, ensures that Adams/View does not try to read the
paragraph of text.
• 1.5
3.0
4.5
6.0
>>>>>> end of file <<<<<<<
Tips:
1. Numbers can be separated by a comma (,) and they do not have to be lined up in even columns.
numeric_results transform
Allows you to get results to return at locations other than the positions reported in the result file. The
transform command only transforms the results in the part result sets (these are the result sets denoted by
names of the form xxx_XFORM, where xxx is the part name). The transform command is needed
because the result file only gives displacement, velocity, and acceleration results of the local part
reference frame (LPRF) origin position relative to ground.
You can use the transform command to transform the displacements, velocities, and accelerations of a
part's LPRF to a different position, while it is still rigidly attached to the same part. The transformed
results will be relative to the ground's reference frame as the part moves during the simulation.
You specify the part by naming the result set to be transformed. You specify the location to which you
want to transform the results, by giving its global or LPRF coordinates, or by using the coordinates of a
named marker.
Format:
result_set_name= existing result_set
new_result_set_name= new result set
marker_name= existing marker
lprf_coords= real
global_coords= real
Description:
Paramenter Value Type Descritpion

RESULT_SET_NAME Existing Result Set Allows you to identify a result set name.
NEW_RESULT_SET_NAME New Result Set Allows you to identify the new result set
name to be created with this operation.
MARKER_NAME Existing Marker The MARKER_NAME parameter
specifies a marker whose coordinates are to
be used as the reference position for
transformation. The reference position is
fixed relative to the part indicated by the
RESULTS_SET_NAME parameter
throughout the simulation.
Paramenter Value Type Descritpion

LPRF_COORDS Real The LPRF_COORDS parameter provides
the coordinates of a point where information
in a "part result set" should be transformed.
GLOBAL_COORDS Real The GLOBAL_COORDS parameter
provides the coordinates of a point where
information in a "part result set" should be
transformed.
components. A component is most usually setup to contain vector components of values like
displacement, velocity, acceleration, force, etc. However, in this case a result set is completely
general and can store any numeric value in a component with only a few exceptions. These
result set name may be arbitrarily long, and a combination of letters of the alphabet and numbers
be .SHIFT.REQ1.X.
read from request (.REQ) and results (.RES) files
.
File that result is

vx vy vz wx wy wz

File that result is


2. If the named marker is actually attached to the part specified by the RESULTS_SET_NAME
parameter, then the marker's LPRF coordinates (which remain fixed, relative to the part
throughout the simulation) are used to perform the transformation. Using these coordinates, the
results (displacement, velocity, and acceleration) associated to the desired part are transformed
into the global (or ground) coordinate system as the part moves during the simulation. Thus
creating a new result set (named based on the NEW_RESULT_SET_NAME parameter).
If the named marker is attached to a part other than the one specified by the
RESULTS_SET_NAME parameter, the program will issue a warning, and proceed. Then, the
specified marker's coordinates are first transformed into the ground reference frame (global
coordinates) at the time step corresponding to the input step (as the model was initially defined in
the Adams data set). Then the marker's global coordinates are transformed into the LPRF of the
specified part (also at the time corresponding to the input step). From this point, these LPRF
coordinates (which remain fixed, relative to the part throughout the simulation, but are no longer
associated with the named marker) are used to perform the transformation as described above.
A marker name can be entered by specifies an existing marker. You may identify a marker by
typing its name or by picking it from the screen. If the marker is not visible on the screen, you
must type the name. You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the marker is
displayed.
You must separate multiple marker names by commas. If the marker is visible in one of your
views, you may identify it by picking on it. You need not separate multiple marker picks by
commas.
3. The LPRF coordinates entered are assumed to be fixed to the part in question for purposes of the
transformation. The transformed results will be relative to the ground's reference frame as the part
moves during the simulation. The part is specified by the RESULTS_SET_NAME parameter
used with the TRANSFORM command.
The transformation used is based on the following assumption: The described LPRF coordinates
are assumed to be associated to the part at the time step that corresponds to the model input step
(i.e. as input in the Adams data set).
The LPRF_COORDS parameter consists of six real numbers. The first three coordinates are the
(x,y,z) coordinates of the desired location in the parts local coordinate system. The last three
coordinates are the Euler angles of the desired location in degrees.
4. The global coordinates entered are assumed to be fixed to the part in question for purposes of the
transformation. The transformed results will be relative to the ground's reference frame as the part
moves during the simulation. The part is specified by the RESULTS_SET_NAME parameter
used with the TRANSFORM command.
Even though the coordinates are input in the global (or ground) reference frame, the system
associates them to the part's local part reference frame as defined in the model input step (as input
in the Adams data set).
The first three coordinates are the (x,y,z) coordinates of the desired location, and the last three
coordinates are the Euler angles of the desired location in degrees.
numeric_results write
Allows you to write the contents of one or more result set components to the information window, a file,
or both.
Format:
sort_by= results_sort
order= sort_order
file_name= string
above_value= real
below_value= real
Example:
numerical_results write &

result_set_component_name = dingdong.bell &
sort_by = by_value &
order = ascending &
file_name = “c:\result_set_file” &
above_value = 5.0 &
below_value = 100.9
The result set specified will be written in the file specified as well as on the screen. Only the values above
5.0 and below 100.9 will be printed and sorted in the ascending order.
Description:

result_set_component_name Existing Result Set Identifies the existing result set.
Component
Sort_by By_time/By_value Specifies how numerical results are sorted as
they are written to the terminal or to a file
using the NUMERICAL_RESULTS WRITE
command.
Order Sort_order Specifies whether the result set component is
to be listed in ascending or descending order.
Write_to_terminal On, Off Specifies if the information requested is to be
sent to the informational window or not. This
parameter is most likely to be used in
conjunction with the FILE_NAME parameter
to get the information put into a file.
Above_value Real The ABOVE_VALUE parameter is used as a
critical value evaluator in the operation to be
performed.
Below_value Real The BELOW_VALUE parameter is used as a
critical value evaluator in the operation to be
performed.
result set:

analysis_name).
File that
vx vy vz wx wy wz


2. The legal values for the “sort_by” parameter are BY_VALUE and BY_TIME. If BY_VALUE
is entered, then the values will be sorted by the magnitude of the result set component being
written. If BY_TIME is entered, then the values will be sorted by the simulation time associated
with the result set component being written.
This is an optional parameter and if not entered, the SORT_BY option will not be set to any value.
The result set component will be written in the order it appears in the result set.
3. If entered, the “order” parameter is used regardless of whether the values are to be printed to the
terminal or to a file.
This parameter is optional and if not entered, it will default to "ascending" order. The only legal
values for the ORDER parameter is "ascending" and "descending".
4. The “above_value” parameter determines the threshold above which a particular numeric value
will be modified, printed, etc. (depending on the operation to be performed).
5. The “Below_value” parameter determines the threshold below which a particular numeric value
will be modified, printed, etc. (depending on the operation to be performed).
optimize 1
optimize
optimize constraint evaluate

Allows you to evaluate a constraint given in an existing analysis.
You have two options for defining an optimization constraint:
1. Select a result set component and its output characteristic.
2. Specify a function which computes the objective.
The result set component/output characteristic method requires a name of the form "REQ1.R1" or
"PAR2_XFORM.THETA".
If you specify a function, use "FUNCTION CREATE FUNCTION_NAME=..." to create it. Make sure
that your function has exactly one argument named "analysis". You may or may not use this argument
in the function, but it must still be there. For example, FUN CRE FUN=objective_function
ARG=analysis TEXT="MAX(analysis.req1.r1.values)" or FUN CRE FUN=total_mass ARG=analysis
TEXT="100 - par1.mass + par2.mass"
Format:

constraint_name= existing opt_constraint
Description:

constraint_name Existing Opt_constraint Specifies the name for an optimization constraint
analysis_name Existing Analysis Specifies an existing analysis
displayed.You may have explicitly named the analysis when you created it by reading one or more
Adams output files. By default, the name of the analysis is the root name of the Adams output
files. If you created the analysis by reading an Adams Graphics file, for instance, the analysis
name is the name of the graphics file without the '.gra' extension.
name to be entered.
optimize 3
associated with it.
optimize design_of_experiments
The DESIGN_OF_EXPERIMENTS command allows you to perform a number of analyses on a
parametric model.
You specify which design variables are to be changed, and one or more objective functions that are to be
evaluated upon completion of each analysis.
The combinations of design variable values to be used by the DOEalgorithm are taken from a table,
which might look like this (for an experiment with three variables and four trials).
-1 -1 0
-1 +1 0
-1 0 +1
0 0 +1
The values in the table are used as indexes into the list of ALLOWED_VALUES, where 0 is meant to
index the central value (if there is one).
The tables used by Adams/View in its DOE algorithm can come from one of three places:
1. An already existing disk file (possibly generated by another program).
2. They can be entered on the command line by you.
3. They can be automatically generated by Adams/View.
There are three mutually exclusive groups of parameters providing different means for performing the
analysis on your model. The first two use Adams/Solver with either simple values (END_TIME,
NUMBER_OF_STEPS, and so on) or the Adams command file (ACF) interface.
The third group (labelled INDEPENDENT_OF_RESULTS) allows you to perform a DOE without
invoking Adams/Solver (set the DO_NOT_RUN_SOLVER parameter to TRUE). This is appropriate for
models where the objective is not dependent on any analysis results.
For example, you might define a model in which the objective is dependent upon the mass of a part. If
the mass of the part is determined by the geometry of the system, then you do not need to run
Adams/Solver. If you can use this type of analysis, do so, as it reduces the amount of time required for
analysis by orders of magnitude.
Format:
model_name= existing mode
user_executable= string
brief= on/off
on_objective_error= stop/continue
optimize 5
analysis_type= analysis_type
end_time= real
initial_static= yes/no
adams_command_file= string
do_not_run_solver= true
objective_name= existing objective
design_variables= existing design variable
technique= doe_technique
number_of_user_trials= integer
user_matrix= integer
matrix_file_name= string
Description:

model_name Existing Model Specifies an existing model
analysis_name Existing Analysis Specifies an existing analysis
user_executable String Specifies the name of the user Adams executable to use
for this analysis. If no values are specified, the standard
Adams executable is run.
brief On, Off Specifies whether or not to display the brief form of the
information about the analysis being submitted. If set to
Off, the entire output from the Adams run will be
displayed in the info_window. If set to On, only errors
and warnings will be displayed.
on_objective_error Stop, Continue Indicates how Adams/View should handle an
invalid/nonexistent objective
analysis_type Dynamics, Specifies which type of analysis you want Adams to
Kinematics, perform.
Statics, Transient
number_of_steps Integer The number of values to be stored in each component of
a result set being read from a file.
end_time Real Specifies the end time for a dynamic, kinematic, or
quasi-static equilibrium analysis.

initial_static Yes, No Specifies whether or not Adams is to execute a static
solution prior to the main simulation.
adams_command_file String Specifies the contents of the Adams command file to use
to control the execution of the Adams simulation.
do_not_run_solver True When you set DO_NOT_RUN_SOLVER to TRUE (its
only possible value), you are indicating that the DOE or
optimization is to take place without using
Adams/Solver. This is only possible when you have a
model whose design functions (objectives or constraints)
are not dependent upon analysis results in any way.
objective_name Existing Objective Specifies the names of the objectives that are to be
evaluated at every run during the Design of Experiments
analysis.
design_variables Existing Design The DESIGN_VARIABLES parameter allows you to
Variable specify which Adams/View variables are to be modified
for the DOE runs. Each variable must have its
ALLOWED_VALUES specified for the DOE
algorithms to operate.
technique Doe Technique When you perform a Design of Experiments analysis,
you may select a built-in technique for creating the trial
matrix.
number_of_user_trials Integer Use the NUMBER_OF_USER_TRIALS parameter
with the USER_MATRIX parameter to indicate how
many user trials are being entered.
user_matrix Integer The USER_MATRIX parameter specifies indexes to the
levels for each variable.
matrix_file_name String Specifies the file in which the DOE trials are described
You must separate multiple model names by commas. If the model is visible in one of your views,
you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics associated with it.
optimize 7
displayed.
name to be entered.
associated with it.
3. If on_objective_error is "stop", the simulations will stop if Adams/View detects an
invalid/nonexistent objective during the simulations. If on_objective error is "continue", the
simulations will continue if Adams/View detects an invalid/nonexistent objective.
On_objective_error defaults to "stop".
4. There are 4 different analysis types:
• DYNAMIC: Specifies that Adams is to integrate the dynamics equations.
If you request a dynamic analysis for a model with zero degrees-of-freedom, Adams issues a
warning message and integrates the equations instead of using kinematic analysis. Kinematic
analysis is faster.
• KINEMATICS: Specifies that Adams is to run a kinematic analysis. If you request a kinematic
analysis for a model with one or more degrees-of-freedom, Adams issues an error message and
ignores the entire command.
• STATICS: Specifies that Adams is to run either a static equilibrium analysis or a quasi-static
equilibrium analysis. If you choose STATICS and fail to specify an END_TIME, or
NUMBER_OF_STEPS, Adams performs a static equilibrium analysis at the current time. If you
choose STATICS and specify an end time and one or more steps, Adams performs a quasi- static
equilibrium analysis.
• TRANSIENT: Specifies that Adams is to run a kinematic analysis if the model has zero degrees
of freedom, or a dynamic analysis if the system has one or more degrees-of-freedom.
You may use the 'MODEL VERIFY' command to display the number of degrees-of-freedom in
your model.-
5. All components being read from a file must have the same number of steps. Lines that do not
begin with a number are considered comments and ignored.
If this parameter is not specified, the size of the components will be inferred from the format of
the file. A component will be read from a file until a comment line is encountered. This comment
line marks the end of the component.
6. END_TIME must be greater than the begin time.

Since the begin time must be greater than zero, this means that the end time must also be greater
that zero.
7. If you select YES for the initial_static parameter, Adams will run a static analysis before starting
the simulation you have specified with the ANALYSIS_TYPE, NUMBER_OF_STEPS, and
END_TIME parameters.
You may wish to set this parameter to YES when running a vehicle model, for instance, to allow
the vehicle to settle on its suspension before starting a transient analysis.
8. Adams/View allows you to create your own Adams Command File by using the text edit window.
You can control the Adams simulation parameters and commands by putting all commands in the
command file just as you would enter them during an interactive Adams analysis session. When
Adams/View submits the Adams analysis run, the command file "View_Ana.acf" will be created,
and Adams will use this command file to control the simulation.
See the Adams documentation for a complete description of the Adams Command File.
To invoke the text edit window for modification of the ACF file, just pick the "EDIT" button on
the SUBMIT command panel while the ADAMS_COMMAND_FILE parameter field in active.
Below, is a description of the text editor.
The Text Edit Window provides a flexible means of entering large amounts of text into a panel
field.
• Invoking the text edit window:
The Text Edit Window is displayed by either typing control-t or picking the EDIT button on a
panel.
When the text edit window is displayed, the contents of the current active field are placed into it.
If the contents of the current active field consist of multiple quoted strings, then each string will
be placed on a separate line in the text edit window.
• Cursor placement: Point and click. You can place the text cursor anywhere within the text by
placing the mouse cursor at the desired location and clicking. Arrow keys can be used to move
the cursor left, right, up and down within the text in the window. The up and down arrow keys
will also scroll the window if there are more than 8 lines of text. Carriage-return advances to the
next line.
• Buttons:
• OK - The OK button is used when you are satisfied with the text in the window and that you
wish it to be placed into the panel from which it originated. A verification will be performed,
and if there are no problems, the contents of the text edit window will be placed into the
originating field. If the verification failed, the cursor will be placed at or near the location where
the parser detected a problem.
• CANCEL - The CANCEL button is used to terminate the current use of the text edit window,
and to return to the originating panel without changing the contents of the current active panel
field.
optimize 9
• VERIFY - The VERIFY button is used to perform a verification on the current contents of the
text edit window. It checks for the proper syntax required by the active field on the originating
panel. A message will be output indicating success or failure. In the case of a failure, the text
cursor will be placed at or near the location where the parser detected a problem.
• GET_NAME - The GET_NAME button is used to place the name of a marker into the text in
the window at the current text cursor location. After the MARKER button has been picked, you
may then pick a marker and its name will be inserted at the current text cursor location.
• FUNCTIONS - The FUNCTIONS button provides a means of constructing an Adams function
string. Upon picking the FUNCTIONS button, you will be presented with the list of available
functions in the "selection window". After you select the desired function, a panel will appear
with fields representing the various parameters for the function. You will have full access to on-
line help with this panel just like you have with regular panels. After you have completed the
panel and selected the DONE button on the panel, the function string will be constructed and
inserted at the current text cursor location in the text edit window.
• INSERT/OVERSTRIKE - The INSERT/OVERSTRIKE button toggles between insert mode
and overstrike mode. In insert mode, as characters are typed, any characters to the right of the
insertion point on the current line are shifted further to the right. In overstrike mode, as
characters are typed, they will replace any characters to their right that they may encounter.
• CUT - The CUT button will cut out the line that currently contains the text cursor. The line is
remembered until a subsequent CUT is performed. The information in the CUT buffer is
accessible for PASTE operations for the duration of the Adams/VIEW session.
• PASTE - The PASTE button will insert the text that was last CUT. The insertion will be
performed at the current text cursor location.
• Control characters: control-i set for insert mode, control-o set for overstrike mode, control-d
equivalent to OK button, control-q equivalent to CANCEL button, control-x equivalent to CUT
button, control-v equivalent to PASTE button
9. One simple means for generating the trial matrix is by using the the case number as an index into
the allowed values of the design variables. This is called the CASEWISE technique. You end up
with N trials, where N is the number of levels for the design variables.
The FULL_FACTORIAL technique is a simple "brute force" algorithm that generates all possible
permutations (there are N**M of them, where N is the number of levels for the design variables
and M is the number of design variables; all design variables must have the same number of
levels). This can quickly get out of hand, so it is often the case that you will choose a "reduced
factorial" trial matrix.
CENTRAL_COMPOSITE is a reduced factorial algorithm that selects design points on the axis
and adds the "star points", i.e. the corners of the design space.
BOX_BEHNKEN is a reduced factorial algorithm that selects the points on the planes of the
design space.
USER1, USER2 and USER3 are used to invoke user-written code for generating tables.
A comparison of how many runs are required for a given algorithm is shown in the following
table.
nDV nLv FF BB CC
--- --- -- -- --
2 3 9 5 9
2 5 25 9 17
2 7 49 13 25
3 3 27 13 15
3 5 125 49 29
3 7 343 109 43
4 3 81 33 25
4 5 625 257 49
4 7 2401 865 73
5 3 243 81 43
5 5 3125 1281 85
5 7 16807 6481 127
6 3 729 193 77
6 5 15625 6145 153
6 7 117649 46657 229
7 3 2187 449 143
7 5 78125 28673 285
7 7 823543 326593 427
where:
nDV = number of design variables

NLv = number of levels on each design variable
FF = number of trials for a Full Factorial experiment
BB = number of trials for a Box-Behnken experiment
CC = number of trials for a Central Composite experiment
10. The indexes specified in the user_matrix parameter should be centered. This means that for a two-
level variable, the only possible values are -1 and +1; for three-levels, -1, 0 and +1; for four-levels,
-2, -1, +1, +2; and so on.
11. The following is an example which could be used for an experiment with two variables with three
levels each. There would be four trials in the experiment.
NUMBER_OF_USER_TRIALS=4 USER_MATRIX=0,+1, -1, 0, +1,-1, +1,+1
12. The first line of the file contains three numbers. The first is the number of variables for this DOE.
The second number is the number of levels for each variable. The third number is the number of
trials to be found on the subsequent lines of the file.
Each line that follows contains indexes to the levels for each variable. These indexes should be
centered. This means that for a two-level variable, the only possible values are -1 and +1; for
three-levels, -1, 0 and +1; for four-levels, -2, -1, +1, +2; and so on.
The following is an example of a file which could be used for an experiment with two variables
with three levels each. There would be four trials in the experiment.
2 3 4
0 +1
-1 0
+1 -1
+1 +1
optimize 11
optimize fit_response_surface
The FIT_RESPONSE_SURFACE command fits a surface of arbitrary polynomial degree to a given set
of result set components. Usually, the dependent data is the response component produced by a DOE, and
the independent data values are the design variable values used to compute the response.
The polynomial data can be stored in a new result set, and also written to a file (say, for use by a
spreadsheet program).
Format:
result_set_name= result_set name
dependent_variable= existing component
independent_variables= existing component
polynomial_degrees= integer
file_name= string
Description:

result_set_name Result Set Name This parameter allows you to identify a result set
name
dependent_variable Existing Component The DEPENDENT_VARIABLE specifies the result
set which is the left-hand side of the fit equation.
DEPENDENT_VARIABLE =
F(INDEPENDENT_VARIABLES)
Usually, this result set is the response values of an

experiment.
independent_variables Existing Component The INDEPENDENT_VARIABLES specify the
result sets which are the right-hand side of the fit
equation. DEPENDENT_VARIABLE =
F(INDEPENDENT_VARIABLES) Usually, these
result sets were the experimental values of the design
variables in an experiment.

polynomial_degrees Integer The POLYNOMIAL_DEGREES parameter specifies
the highest degree for each of the indpendent
variables.
components. A component is most usually setup to contain vector components of values like
displacement, velocity, acceleration, force, etc. However, in this case a result set is completely
general and can store any numeric value in a component with only few exceptions. These
result set name may be arbitrarily long and a combination of letters of the alphabet and numbers
.SHIFT.REQ1.X.
The following table illustrates the default names assigned to result sets and result set components
Result set type Result set name Component Name File that result is from
Part AR xxx x y z e le2e3 e4mag vx vy Result file
vz wx wy wz acc
diff diffxxx q dq results file
joint JOIxxx fx fy fz tx ty tzfmag tmag results file
jprim JPRxxx.. fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag tmag results file
gear GEAxxx.. fx fy fz results file
fmag1 tmag1
optimize 13
Result set type Result set name Component Name File that result is from
spring damp SPRxxx.. fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag tmag results file
Bushing BUSxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag tmag results file
Beam BEAxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag tmag results file
Field FIExxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag tmag results file
User Request UREQxxx... x y z r1 r2 r3 mag amag Request file
Ucon Not implemented+
request REQxxx...
2. For example, if you have specified two independent variables, you would enter
POLYNOMIAL_DEGREES=1,1 for a linear approximation. For a polynomial fit which is cubic
in the first variable and linear in the second, you would enter POLYNOMIAL_DEGREES=3,1.
3. The proper extension for the file_name parameter is the default but can be overridden by simply
output_control
output_control attributes femdata

Allows you to change the color and visibility of a femdata icon.
Format:

femdata_name= .model.femdata_name
visibility = on/off
color = color_string
active= on/off
dependents_active = on/off
Example:
output_control attributes femdata &

mrequest_name = .test.link_forces &
visibility = on &
color = PINK &
active = on &
Description:

femdata_name String Specifies the femdata to be modified. You use this
parameter to identify the existing femdata to be affected
with this command.
visibility String Specifies the visibility of graphic entities. The visibility
parameter is used to control whether graphic entities, such
as markers, joints, and parts, are to be drawn in an
Adams/View viewport.
color String Specifies the color the modeling entity should be drawn
in.
output_control 3

active On/Off/No_opi When you set ACTIVE=NO, that element is written to the
nion data set as a comment.
dependents_active On/Off/No_opi The DEPENDENTS_ACTIVE parameter acts in the
nion same fashion as that of the ‘active’ parameter, but sets the
ACTIVE attribute for the dependents all the way down
the dependency chain.
1. You identify a femdata by typing its name. If you created the femdata by reading an Adams data
set, the femdata name is the letters FEM followed by the Adams data set femdata ID number. For
example, the name of Adams FEM/101 is FEM101. If you created the femdata during
If a femdata is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify a femdata under a different model, for instance, you may need
to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify femdata 'link_forces' from model
'test' by entering ".test.link_forces". You must separate multiple femdata names by commas.
3. Specifies the color the modeling entity should be drawn in. Adams/View allows you to specify
the following colors for modeling entities: BLACK, WHITE, RED, GREEN, BLUE, CYAN,
MAGENTA, YELLOW, and NO_COLOR. Specifying 'NO_COLOR' for a modeling entity,
instructs Adams/View to use the default color for this entity, if there is no color present in its
parent modeling entity.
Example 1
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- RED
Example 2
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- RED
Example 3
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part---------------------- NO_COLOR

5. The DEPENDENTS_ACTIVE parameter acts in the same fashion, but sets the ACTIVE attribute
following command:
indvidually.
• Group
• Part
• Marker
• Geometry
• Constraints
• Forces
• Data Elements
• Output Control
Tips:
1. If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the mrequests available by default.
output_control 5
output_control attributes mrequest

Allows you to change the color and visibility of an mrequest icon.
Format:

mrequest_name= .model.mrequest_name
visibility= on/off
color= color_string
active = on/off
Example:
output_control attributes mrequest &

mrequest_name= .model.m01 &
visibility = on &
color = PINK &
active = on &
Description:

mrequest_name String Specifies the mrequest to be modified. You use this
parameter to identify the existing mrequest to be
visibility String Specifies the visibility of graphic entities. The
visibility parameter is used to control whether graphic
entities, such as markers, joints, and parts, are to be
drawn in an Adams/View viewport.
color String Specifies the color the modeling entity should be
drawn in.

active On/Off/No_opinio When you set ACTIVE=NO, that element is written to
n the data set as a comment.
dependents_active On/Off/No_opinio The DEPENDENTS_ACTIVE parameter acts in the
n same fashion as that of the ‘active’ parameter, but sets
the ACTIVE attribute for the dependents, all the way
down the dependency chain.
1. You may identify an mrequest by typing its name. If you created the mrequest by reading an
Adams data set or graphics file, the mrequest name is the letters MRE followed by the Adams data
set mrequest ID number. For example, the name of Adams MREQ/101 is MRE101F. If you
created the mrequest during preprocessing, you will have given it a name at that time. If a
mrequest is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify an mrequest under another analysis, for instance, you may
need to enter the analysis name as well. For example, you may specify mrequest 101 from the
analysis named test by entering ".test.mre101".
Example 1
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- RED
Example 2
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- RED
Example 3
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part---------------------- NO_COLOR
output_control 7

following command:
indvidually.
• Group
• Part
• Marker
• Geometry
• Constraints
• Forces
• Data Elements
• Output Control
Tips:
output_control attributes request

Allows you to change the color and visibility of a request icon.
Format:

request_name = .model.request_name
visibility = on/off
color = color_string
active = on/off
Example:
output_control attributes request &

request_name = .model.m01 &
visibility = on &
color = PINK &
active = on &
Description:

request_name String Specifies the request to be modified. You use this
parameter to identify the existing request to be affected
with this command.
visibility String Specifies the visibility of graphic entities. The visibility
parameter is used to control whether graphic entities,
such as markers, joints, and parts, are to be drawn in an
Adams/View viewport.
color String Specifies the color the modeling entity should be drawn
in.
output_control 9

active On/Off/No_opinion When you set ACTIVE=NO, that element is written to
the data set as a comment.
dependents_active On/Off/No_opinion The DEPENDENTS_ACTIVE parameter acts in the
same fashion as that of the ‘active’ parameter, but sets
the ACTIVE attribute for the dependents all the way
1. You may identify a request by typing its name. If you created the request by reading an Adams
data set or graphics file, the request name is the letters MRE followed by the Adams data set
request ID number. For example, the name of Adams MREQ/101 is MRE101. If you created the
request during preprocessing, you will have given it a name at that time. If a request is available
To identify a request under another analysis, for instance, you may need to enter the analysis name
as well. For example, you may specify request 101 from the analysis named test by entering
".test.req101".
invisible. TOGGLE will take the current state of an entity’s visibility and reverse it.
Example 1
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- RED
Example 2
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part ---------------------- RED
Example 3
.model -------------------------NO_COLOR
.part---------------------- NO_COLOR
following command:
indvidually.
• Group
• Part
• Marker
• Geometry
• Constraints
• Forces
• Data Elements
• Output Control
Tips:
1. If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the requests available by default.
output_control 11
output_control copy femdata

Allows you to create a replica of an existing femdata object. This replica will be an exact copy of the
original, except for the name.
Format:

femdata_name = model_name.femdata_name
new_femdata_name = model.new_femdata_name
Example:
output_control copy femdata &

femdata_name = model_name.femdata1 &
new_femdata_name = model.femdata2
Description:

femdata_name String Specifies an existing femdata. You identify a femdata by
typing its name.
new_femdata_name String Specifies the name of the new femdata. You may use this
name later to refer to this femdata.
1. FEMDATA is used to produce a special data file containing all reaction forces and all applied
forces (except gravity) acting on each part. So that inertia forces can be calculated, this file also
contains the displacement, velocity, and acceleration of each part center of mass. You or your
systems support personnel can write a small program to convert this file into boundary condition
input for a commercial finite element program.
2. If you created the femdata by reading an Adams data set, the femdata name is the letters FEM
followed by the Adams data set femdata ID number. For example, the name of Adams FEM/101
is FEM101. If you created the femdata during preprocessing, you will have given it a name at that
time. If a femdata is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not,
you must enter its full name. To identify a femdata under a different model, for instance, you may
need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify femdata 'link_forces' from
model 'test' by entering ".test.link_forces". You must separate multiple femdata names by
commas.
Cautions:
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two femdatas with the same name, so you must provide
a unique name for the new_femdata_name parameter
Tips:
1. If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the femdatas available by default.
output_control 13
output_control copy mrequest

Allows you to create a replica mrequest for a model. This mrequest is will be an exact copy of the original
except the name. You may modify the replica without any harm done to the original.
Format:

mrequest_name = string
new_mrequest_name = string
Example:
output_control copy mrequest &

mrequest_name = mrequest1 &
new_mrequest_name = mrequest2
Description:

mrequest_name String Specifies an existing mrequest. You may identify an
mrequest by typing its name.
new_mrequest_name String Specifies the name of the new mrequest. You may use
this name later to refer to this mrequest. Adams/View
will not allow you to have two mrequests with the same
name, so you must provide a unique name.
1. The MREQUEST indicates multiple sets of data you want Adams to output. You can request sets
of displacements, velocities, accelerations, or forces for system elements such as parts, joints,
joint primitives, or applied forces in your system.
Except for rotational displacements, all the information types are vectors. For example, joint
velocities are actually translational and rotational velocity difference vectors of the joint I marker
with respect to the joint J marker. Joint accelerations are actually translational and rotational
acceleration difference vectors of the joint I marker with respect to the joint J marker. In other
words, if V is a translational vector quantity and W is a rotational vector quantity,
Vij = Vi - Vj,
and Wij = Wi - Wj
V'ij = V'i - V'j
and W'ij = W'i - W'j
Because two markers (I and J) define each joint, joint primitive, and applied force, Adams
measures the request information for one of of these at the I marker with respect to the J marker.
Because a center-of-mass marker is the only marker that is necessary to define a part, Adams
measures the request information for a part at its center-of-mass marker with respect to ground or
with respect to an alternative marker you specify. Regardless of the system information you want,
you can use a reference marker (R_MARKER_NAME) to resolve the component information
into any coordinate system you wish. Note that the units for rotational displacement data in the
request output of the tabular output file default to degrees. The units for all other angular output
data default to radians.
2. You may identify a mrequest by typing its name. If you created the mrequest by reading an Adams
data set or graphics file, the mrequest name is the letters MRE followed by the Adams data set
mrequest ID number. For example, the name of Adams MREQ/101 is MRE101. If you created
the mrequest during preprocessing, you will have given it a name at that time. If an mrequest is
available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you must enter its
full name. To identify a mrequest under another analysis, for instance, you may need to enter the
analysis name as well. For example, you may specify mrequest 101 from the analysis named test
by entering ".test.mre101". You must separate multiple mrequest names by commas.
name, then you may override the default parent. In most cases, when creating an entity,
specify the parentage that it has assumed. You may, of course, delete this name and use your own.
Cautions:
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two mrequests with the same name, so you must provide
a unique name for the new request to be created.
Tips:
output_control 15
output_control copy request

Allows you to create a replica request. This replica request will be an exact copy of the original with the
exception of the name.
Format:

request_name = string
new_request_name = string
Example:
output_control copy mrequest &

mrequest_name = mrequest1 &
new_mrequest_name = mrequest2
Description:

request_name String Specifies an existing request. You may identify an
mrequest by typing its name.
new_request_name String Specifies the name of the new request. You may use this
name later to refer to this mrequest. Adams/View will not
allow you to have two mrequests with the same name, so
1. A REQUEST indicates a set of data you want Adams to output. Using a REQUEST, you can
output a set of displacements, velocities, forces, or accelerations, with respect to markers in your
system; or you can use the user-written subroutine REQSUB to define nonstandard output. Adams
calculates all data in the ground reference frame, although you can specify that the data be
resolved in another reference frame. This is of no importance in the case of force data, but it can
be very important in the case of displacements and time derivatives, that is, velocities and
accelerations. Except for rotational displacements, all the information types are vectors. For
example, joint velocities are actually translational and rotational velocity difference vectors of the
joint I marker with respect to the joint J marker. Joint accelerations are actually translational and
rotational acceleration difference vectors of the joint I marker with respect to the joint J marker.
In other words, if V is a translational vector quantity and W is an rotational vector quantity,
Vij = Vi - Vj,
and Wij = Wi - Wj
V'ij = V'i - V'j

and W'ij = W'i - W'j
Note that the units for rotational displacement data in the request output of the tabular output file
default to degrees. The units for all other angular output data default to radians.
2. If you created the request by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the request name is the
letters MRE followed by the Adams data set request ID number. For example, the name of Adams
MREQ/101 is MRE101. If you created the request during preprocessing, you will have given it a
name at that time. If a request is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its
name. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a request under another analysis, for
instance, you may need to enter the analysis name as well. For example, you may specify request
101 from the analysis named test by entering "/test/req101". You must separate multiple request
names by commas.
name, then you may override the default parent. In most cases, when creating an entity,
Cautions:
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two requests with the same name, so you must provide a
unique name for the new request to be created.
Tips:
1. If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the requests available by default.
output_control 17
output_control create femdata

Produces data files of component loads, deformations, stresses, or strains for input to subsequent finite
element or fatigue life analysis for use in third party products. Adams/View will not output to any files
unless you specify the format.
Format:

femdata_name = .model_name.femdata_name
adams_id = geom._id
output_type = loads/loads_on_flex/,odal_deformation/stress/strain
r_marker_name = .marker_name
no_inertia = yes/no
peak_slice= fx/fy/fz/fmag/gmag/tx/ty/tz/tmag/none/all
flex_body= .model_name.flexible_body_name
datum = integer_number
nodes = integer_number
hotspots = integer_number
radius = real _number
criterion = von_mises/max_principle/min_principle/max_shear/normal_x/norma
l_y/normal_z/shear_xy/shear_yz,shear_xz
start = real_number
end = real_number
skip = integer_number
Example:
Output_control create femdata &

femdata_name = fem_data_1 &
adams_id = 100 &
output_type = stress &
r_marker_name = .marker_name &
flex_body = 101 &
hotspots = 7 &
Output_control create femdata &

radius = 0.5 &
criterion = max_principle &
file_name = hotspots_101
These statements create a text file named hotspots_101.tab containing hot spot information for the
flexible body 101. Seven hot spots with a radius of 0.5 based on maximum principal stress are requested.
The names of the DAC files are given the prefix “hotspots_101” as specified in the file_name format.
Description:

femdata_name String Specifies the name of the FEMDATA element in the modeling
database to be created.
adams_id Integer Specifies an integer used to identify this element in the Adams data
file.
output_control 19

output_type loads/loads_on Specifies the information you want as output:
_flex/modal_d
eformation/stre • Loads on rigid body/Flex body- Output all external forces
ss/strain (reaction and applied forces except gravity) acting on the
specified body and, optionally, inertial forces of the specified
body (angular velocity and acceleration, including effects of
gravity) as a function of time. Load data will be output in the
simulation set of units.
• Modal Deformation - Outputs modal deformations as a
function of time of the specified flexible body. Adams/View
will only export coordinates of the active modes in the
simulation.
• Nodal Deformation - Outputs nodal deformations as a
function of time of the specified flexible. Adams/View
writes the deformations in the simulation set of units.
• Strain - Outputs strain information if strain modes are
available in the modal neutral file (MNF) of the specified
flexible body and an Adams/Durability license is available.
Adams/Durability outputs all six components of strain
(normal-X, normal-Y, normal-Z, shear-XY, shear-YZ, shear-
ZX). It outputs strains in the basic FEA coordinate system of
the flexible body except where specified below.
• Stress - Outputs stress information if modal stresses are
available in the MNF of the flexible body and an
Adams/Durability license is available. Adams/Durability
outputs all six components of stress (normal-X, normal-Y,
normal-Z, shear-XY, shear-YZ, shear-ZX). It outputs
stresses in the simulation set of units in the basic FEA
coordinate system of the flexible body except where
specified below.
r_marker_name String Specifies the rigid body marker to be the reference coordinate system
to output loads. Because Adams/Solver resolves all loads acting on
the rigid body in the coordinate system of the specified marker, the
marker should represent the FEA basic coordinate system of the
part's finite element (FE) model.
no_inertia yes/no Specifies ‘yes’ for Adams/View to include inertial loads (linear
acceleration, angular acceleration, and velocity) when outputting the
loads acting on the body. Otherwise, Adams/View outputs no inertial
loads and you will need to rely on an inertia relief capability in the
finite element program to balance the external loads with the internal
loads.

peak_slice fx/fy/fz/fmag/g Specifies that FE model load data are to be output only at those time
mag/tx/ty/tz/tm steps where the specified peak load occurred in the simulation. When
ag/none/all you set the Time options, Adams/View only checks the time steps
within those specifications for the peak load.
flex_body String Enters the flexible body whose data Adams/View outputs.
Adams/View outputs the data in the FE model basic coordinate
system that is inherent to the flexible body.
datum Integer Enters the node ID of the flexible body to be the datum of the nodal
displacements.
nodes Integer Enters the node numbers of a flexible body whose data is to be
output.
hotspots Integer Enters the number of hot spots to locate and output. With this option,
a text file containing a tab-delimited table of hot spot information,
such as node ID, maximum value, time when the maximum value
occurred, and location, is generated.
radius Real Enter a radius that defines the spherical extent of each hotspot. A
default value of 0.0 (zero) means that all nodes in the flexible body
will be hotspot candidates.
von_mises/ma Specifies the value of stress/strain in determining hotspots from one
criterion x_principle/mi of Von Mises, Max Prin., Min Prin., Max Shear, Normal-X, Normal-
n_principle/ma Y, Normal-Z, Shear-XY, Shear-YZ, or Shear-ZX.
x_shear/norma
l_x/normal_y/n
ormal_z/shear_
xy/shear_yz,sh
ear_xz
file_name String Enters the output file name for the FE model data. You can specify
an existing directory, root name, and/or extension. By default, the
file name will be composed of the MSC Adams run and body IDs
according to the type of data and file format that you specified in
Solver -> Settings -> Output -> More -> Durability Files
start Real Specifies the time at which to start outputting the data. The default is
the start of the simulation.
end Real Specifies the time at which to end the output of the data or the search
of a peak load. The default is to output to the end of the simulation.
skip Integer
output_control 21
1. If you do not specify a node list, Adams/View exports nodal data at each attachment point of the
flexible body. Adams/Solver issues a warning if a node ID is specified that does not belong to the
flexible body.
2. Adams/Solver computes all nodal displacements relative to the datum node ID. If you do not
specify a datum node, Adams/Solver generates an arbitrary relative set of nodal displacements. It
displays a warning message if the specified node does not belong to the flexible body.
3. You can use the FILE_NAME argument to specify the directory, name, and/or extension
(directory/name.extension) for the output file. If you do not specify a directory, FEMDATA
creates all its output files except DAC files in the current working directory. Because several DAC
files are typically generated for a FEMDATA statement, FEMDATA creates them in a separate
directory named after the body. It creates this directory in the current working directory if it does
not exist.
If a file name is not specified in the FILE argument, default file names are assigned according to
the type of FEM data and file format (which is specified in the OUTPUT statement) as shown in
the table below.
FEMDATA Default File Names and Extensions
Type of data Format* File name Extension

(none) (none) <run_name> .fem
Loads DAC <run_name>_<channel_id> .dac
NASTRAN <run_name>_<body_name> .dat
ABAQUS <run_name>_<body_name> .dat
ANSYS <run_name>_<body_name> .dat
RPC <run_name> .rsp
Modal DAC <run_name>_<channel_id> .dac
Deformation Generic <run_name>_<body_name .mdf
NASTRAN <run_name>_<body_name> .mdf
PUNCH <run_name>_<body_name> .mdf
ANSYS <run_name> .out
RPC <run_name> .rsp
Nodal Generic <run_name>_<body_name> .ndf
Deformation NASTRAN <run_name>_<body_name> .spc
ANSYS <run_name>_<body_name> .inp
Strain DAC <run_name>_<node_id>e_<channel_id> .dac
Generic <run_name>_<body_name> .nsf
Hotspots <run_name>_body_name>_hots .tab
Stress DAC <run_name>_<node_id>se_<channel_id> .dac
Hotspots <run_name>_<body_name>_hote .tab
*Specified in the OUTPUT statement

4. Peak Loads
Except for FMAG, GMAG, and TMAG, each PEAK_SLICE load specification (FX, FY, FZ, TX,
TY, TZ) generates two output time steps for each marker force of the component, one for the
maximum (peak) and one for the minimum (valley). For FMAG and TMAG, only one time step
is output for each marker force since these quantities are load magnitudes and generate only
positive values. With GMAG, only one time step is output per body. If:
• Fm(t) represents the force acting on the body at Marker m.
ˆ ˆ ˆ
• r x r y r z represents the unit vector of the reference coordinate system of the rigid body
(FEA coordinate system of the flexible body).
• r(t) represents the position of the reference marker (RM) in that coordinate system.
ˆ ˆ ˆ
• || || represents taking the magnitude or length of a vector (that is, || ( r x r y r z ) || = 1)
Then the following conditions apply:
• FX = Output loads at time t when F m  t   rˆx  t  is a maximum and minimum for each
marker m.
• FY = Output loads at time t when F m  t   rˆy  t  is a maximum and minimum for each
marker m.
• FZ = Output loads at time t when F m  t   rˆz  t  is a maximum and minimum for each marker
m.
• FMAG = Output loads at time t when F m  t   r̂  t  is a maximum for each marker m.
• GMAG = Output loads at time t when
 
MAX   F m  t   r x  t   F m  t   r y  t   F m  t   r z  t 
m m m

Note: Similar expressions exist for TX, TY, TZ, and TMAG. The PEAK_SLICE argument is not
available when you specify a time history OUTPUT load format (DAC or RPC).
Caution:
1. Using FEMDATA to output loads encounters the same limitations as exporting FEA Loads in
Adams/View.
2. Note that all FEMDATA are output in the MSC Adams modeling units. This causes a problem
when the MSC Adams units are inconsistent with those used in the finite element model, and the
data that is output will be included in a subsequent finite element analysis.
For example, when outputting FEMDATA of type LOADS to ANSYS or MSC Nastran for
inclusion in the FE analysis, the MSC Adams and FE modeling units must be consistent. This is
also true when outputting FEMDATA of type NODAL_DEFORMATION when the OUTPUT
format is ANSYS or MSC Nastran and the data will be used as input to the FE analysis.
output_control 23
3. In the case of outputting FEMDATA of type MODAL_DEFORMATION, the only concern for
units is when MSC Nastran (or PUNCH) has been specified as the OUTPUT format. This is
because rigid body motion is included in the output file along with the modal coordinates. By
definition, modal coordinates are unitless, so the modal stresses (or strains) will be recovered
correctly in MSC Nastran irregardless of unit settings. However, for the overall displacement of
the component to be correctly recovered, the unit of length must be consistent between models.
output_control create mrequest

Allows you to create mrequest files. The MREQUEST statement specifies multiple sets of data that you
want Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) to write in the tabular output file and request file. You can request sets
of displacements, velocities, accelerations, or forces for system elements such as parts, joints, joint
primitives, or applied forces in the system.
Format:

mrequest_name = .model_name.mrequest_name
adams_id = geom_id
j_marker_name = marker_name
r_marker_name = marker_name
comment = string
output_type =
displacement/velocity/acceleration/force
part_name = .model.part_name
joint_name = .model.joint_name
jprim_name = .model.primitive_joint_name
force_name = .model.existing_force_name
Example:
output_control create mrequest &

mrequest_name = mrequest__1 &
comment = 'sample output control creation' &
output_type= displacement
This MREQUEST statement requests displacement data for Part 2. For the part, Adams/Solver
(FORTRAN) outputs eight headings and eight columns of data to the tabular output file. The same
information also goes to the request file. Because this statement does not supply arguments J and RM,
Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) measures the displacements with respect to the ground coordinate system
(GCS), and resolves the displacements in the global coordinate system.
output_control 25
Description:

Mrequest_name String Specifies the name of the mrequest to be created. You use this
parameter to identify the existing mrequest to be affected with
this command.
Adams_id Integer Specifies an integer used to identify this element in the Adams
data file.
J_marker_name String Specifies a single base marker for measuring the displacements,
velocities, or accelerations of the center-of-mass of the parts.
Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) makes all measurements for parts on
the center-of-mass marker on each part with respect to the J
marker you specify. The J marker defaults to the ground
coordinate system (GCS).
 id1  ,...,id
JOINTS = 
 ALL
Indicates that you want to output displacements, velocities,
accelerations, or forces for as many as thirty JOINT statements or
for all JOINT statements. Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) makes
these measurements on the I marker with respect to the J marker.
 id1  ,...,id
JPRIMS = 
 ALL
Indicates that you want to output displacements, velocities,
accelerations, or forces for as many as thirty JPRIM statements or
for all JPRIM statements. Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) makes
these measurements on the I marker with respect to the J marker.
 id1  ,...,id
PARTS = 
 ALL
Indicates that you want to output displacements, velocities, or
accelerations for as many as thirty center-of-mass of parts in the
model (to which the PART statement identifiers refer) or for the
centers of mass of all parts (except the ground part).
Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) makes these measurements on the
center-of-mass marker of the part with respect to the marker
specified by the J argument. The PARTS argument cannot be used
for massless parts. The PARTS argument cannot be used with the
FORCE argument.
R_marker_name String Identifies the reference marker with respect to which you want to
resolve information. RM defaults to zero, which causes
Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) to resolve components in the ground

Comment String Specifies a title for the top of each set of information the
MREQUEST statement outputs. The entire comment must be on
one line. Because the COMMENT argument can be only eighty
characters long at most, the title can be from seventy-two
characters long (if you do not abbreviate COMMENT=) to
seventy-eight characters long (if you abbreviate COMMENT= to
C=). Blank spaces and all alphanumeric characters can be used.
However, the comma (,), the semicolon (;), the ampersand (&),
and the exclamation point (!) cannot be used.
DISPLACEME See extended definition for details on each output_type
output_type NT/VELOCITY
/ACCELERATI
ON/FORCE
part_name String Specifies names of part with which you want to output
displacements,velocities, or accelerations.
joint_name String Specifies name of joint with which you want to output
jprim_name String Specifies name of joint primitive with which you want to output
force_name String Specifies name of force or a list of forces with which you want to
output displacements,velocities, or accelerations.
All Parts/joints/jpri Specifies that Adams is to output data for all parts, joints, joint
ms/forces primitives, or forces. Rather than entering each name
individually, you may use this parameter to request data for all
entities of a particular type.
1. The MREQUEST statement indicates multiple sets of data you want Adams/Solver (FORTRAN)
to write in the tabular output file and request file. You can request sets of displacements,
velocities, accelerations, or forces for system elements such as parts, joints, joint primitives, or
applied forces in the system.
2. Acceleration -Generates acceleration requests that output the accelerations for the markers that
define part centers of mass, joints, joint primitives, or applied forces. This argument generates
nine headings and nine columns of output for each part, joint, joint primitive, or applied force.
The columns in the Tabular Output file include the time (TIME), the translational magnitude
(ACCM), the x component (ACCX), the y component (ACCY) the z component (ACCZ), the
rotational magnitude (WDTM), the rotational x component (WDTX), the rotational y component
(WDTY), and the rotational z component (WDTZ). The same data without the magnitude are
written in the Request file.
 id1  ,...,id30] 
APPFORS =  
 ALL 
output_control 27
Indicates that you want to output displacements, velocities, accelerations, or forces for as many
as thirty BEAM, BUSHING, FIELD, GFORCE, NFORCE, SFORCE, SPRINGDAMPER,
VFORCE, and VTORQUE statements or for all of these statements. For action-reaction forces,
Displacement- Generates displacement requests that output the displacements for the markers
that define part centers of mass, joints, joint primitives, or applied forces. This argument generates
eight headings and eight columns of output for each part, joint, joint primitive, or applied force.
The columns in the tabular output file include the time (TIME), the translational magnitude
(MAG), the x component (X), the y component (Y), the z component (Z), the psi angle (PSI), the
theta angle (THETA), and the phi angle (PHI). The same data without the magnitude are written
in the Request file. For joints, joint primitives, and applied forces, the psi, theta, and phi angles
are the Euler angle displacements of the I marker with respect to the J marker. For parts, the psi,
theta, and phi angles are the Euler rotations of the part center-of-mass marker with respect to the
ground coordinate system (GCS) or with respect to a J marker you specify.
Force -Generates force requests that output the forces for the markers that define joints, joint
primitives, or applied forces. This argument generates nine headings and nine columns of output
for each joint, joint primitive, or applied force. The columns in the Tabular Output file include the
time (TIME), the translational force magnitude (FM), the translational x component (FX), the
translational y component (FY), the translational z component (FZ), the rotational force
magnitude (TM), the rotational x component (TX), the rotational y component (TY), and the
rotational z component (TZ). The same data without the magnitudes are written to the Request
file. The FORCE argument cannot be used with the PARTS argument.
3. Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) measures the force that the J marker applies on the I marker. For
action-only forces, Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) measures the external forces acting on the I
marker. If an MREQUEST statement is issued with an APPFORS argument that requests
information for an identifier that is used for two or more applied force statements, Adams/Solver
(FORTRAN) outputs information for the first applied force statement with that identifier. To
avoid problems, you may want to use a different identifier for each applied force statement in the
dataset.
Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) calculates all time derivatives in the ground coordinate system
(GCS), although you can specify that the data be resolved in another reference frame. This is of
no importance in the case of force data, but it can be very important in the case of velocities and
accelerations. For example, joint velocities are actually translational and rotational velocity
difference vectors of the joint I marker and the joint J marker in ground. Joint accelerations are
actually translational and rotational acceleration difference vectors of the joint I marker in ground
and the joint J marker in ground.
4. Because two markers (I and J) define each joint, joint primitive, and applied force, Adams/Solver
(FORTRAN) measures the request information for one of these at the I marker with respect to the
J marker. Because a center-of-mass marker is the only marker that is necessary to define a part,
Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) measures the request information for a part at its center-of-mass
marker with respect to ground or with respect to an alternative marker you specify. Regardless of
the system information you want, a reference marker (RM) can be used to resolve the component
information into any coordinate system you wish.
Cautions:
1. Note that the units for rotational displacement data in the request output of the tabular output file
2. For any argument =ALL, Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) ignores any invalid selections.
3. Applied forces and torques are those generated by beams, bushings, fields, general forces
(GFORCEs), n-component forces (NFORCEs), single-component forces (SFORCEs),
springdampers (SPRINGDAMPERs), vector forces (VFORCEs), and vector torques
(VTORQUEs). Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) outputs the applied forces and torques acting at the
request I marker (which may be either the applied force I marker or the applied force J marker).
The magnitude and point of force application on the part containing the applied force J marker
varies with the type and source of the force.
• For springdampers, action-reaction single-component forces, general forces, vector forces,
and vector torques, the forces and torques acting at the J marker are equal and opposite to the
forces and torques acting at the I marker.
• For action-only single-component forces, no force or torque acts at the applied force J marker.
• For beams, fields, bushings, and multi-point forces, the forces acting at the applied force J
marker are equal and opposite to the forces acting at the applied force I marker.
4. As long as the applied force I marker and the applied force J marker are coincident, the torques
acting at the applied force J marker are equal and opposite to the torques acting at the applied force
I marker. If there is a finite separation distance between the I and J markers, the torques acting at
the applied force J marker are not necessarily opposite or equal, to the torques acting at the applied
force I marker.
5. Reaction forces and torques are those generated by constraint-inducing elements. For revolute,
primitives, Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) outputs the reaction forces and torques acting at the
request I marker (which may be either the constraint I marker or the constraint J marker).
Depending on the type of constraint, some or all of the torques acting at the I marker are zero. The
force and torque acting at the request J marker are equal and opposite to the force and torque
acting at the request I marker.
6. Determining reaction forces-and torques for cylindrical, planar, rack-and-pinion, screw, and
translational joints and for inline and inplane joint primitives is more complex. If the request I
marker corresponds to the constraint I marker, then Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) outputs the force
and torque acting at the constraint I marker. If the request I marker corresponds to the constraint
J marker, then Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) outputs the force and torque acting at the
instantaneous location of the constraint I marker, but on the part containing the constraint J
marker. The force translated to the constraint J marker is the same as computed above. If the I and
J markers are coincident, the torque translated to the constraint J marker is the same as computed
above. But if there is a finite separation between the I and J markers, the torque translated to the
constraint J marker is different from the one computed above (because of the moments
contributed by the reaction forces).
7. The MREQUEST statement is not scheduled to be supported in Adams/Solver (C++). You are
encouraged to migrate away from this statement and use the REQUEST statement instead.
output_control 29
output_control create request

Allows you to create a replica request. This replica request will be an exact copy of the original with the
exception of the name.
A REQUEST indicates a set of data you want Adams to output. Using a REQUEST, you can output a
set of displacements, velocities, forces, or accelerations, with respect to markers in your system; or you
can use the user-written subroutine REQSUB to define nonstandard output.
Adams calculates all data in the ground reference frame, although you can specify that the data be
resolved in another reference frame. This is of no importance in the case of force data, but it can be very
important in the case of displacements and time derivatives, i.e. velocities and accelerations.
Except for rotational displacements, all the information types are vectors. For example, joint velocities
are actually translational and rotational velocity difference vectors of the joint I marker with respect to
the joint J marker. Joint accelerations are actually translational and rotational acceleration difference
vectors of the joint I marker with respect to the joint J marker. In other words, if V is a translational vector
quantity and W is a rotational vector quantity,
Vij = Vi – Vj,
And Wij = Wi – Wj,
V’ij = V’i- V’j
And W’ij = W’I – W’j
Note that the units for rotational displacement data in the request output of the tabular file default to
degrees. The units for all other angular output data defaults to radians.
Format:
output_control create &

request_name = .model_name.request_name&
adams_id= geom._id&
comment = string&
component_names = string&
component_units = string&
component_labels = string&
results_name = string&
title = string&
output_type =
displacement/velocity/acceleration/force&
i_marker_name = marker_name&
j_marker_name = marker_name&
r_marker_name = marker_name&
output_control create &

user_function = real number&
f1 = run time function&
variable_name = variable name&
file = file name&
file_type = xml/csv/dac/rpc&
routine = string
Description:

Request_name String Specifies the name of the new request to be created. You
may later identify a request by typing its name.
Adams data file.
Output_type Displacement/vel Specifies whether you want the request to output
ocity/acceleration/ displacement, velocity, acceleration, force, or user data.
force/user
I_marker_name An existing triad Specifies the marker for which you wish Adams to
generate data.
J_marker_name An existing triad Specifies the marker with respect to which you wish
Adams to generate the data.
R_marker_name An existing triad Specifies the marker with respect to which you want
Adams to resolve the data. Adams computes the data
identified by the I and J markers, then reports the data as
x, y, and z components in the reference frame of the
reference marker. Angular displacements, which are not
vectors, are not affected by reference marker. If you do
not supply this parameter, Adams will resolve the data in
the ground reference frame.
output_control 31

Comment String Specifies a comment for the request. The comment can
contain up to 80 characters, and can be comprised of
letters of the alphabet (a-z, A-Z), numbers (0-9), and
underscores. You may also use spaces and special
characters (*&^%$#) if you enclose the comment in
quotation marks.
Examples:
comment=the_first_request
comment="Displacement of wheel
center 1 wrt ground"
User_function Real Specifies up to 30 values for Adams to pass to a user-
Title String Specifies any of the eight alphanumeric headings for
columns of request output in the request file.
Note: Enter function expressions in the boxes f2 , f3 , f4 , f6 , f7 , and f8 . Do not use f1 and f5 .
Adams/Solver uses them to hold magnitudes for the three functions that follow. You do not
need to enter a function in every text box.
F1 Function Specifies the function expression that is the first
component of the request that is being created or
modified. The f1 parameter allows you to generate user-
defined output variables and have them reported by
Adams to the request file.
F2 Function Specifies the function expression that is the second
F3 Function Specifies the function expression that is the third
F4 Function Specifies the function expression that is the fourth

F5 Function Specifies the function expression that is the fifth
F6 Function Specifies the function expression that is the sixth
F7 Function Specifies the function expression that is the Seventh
F8 Function Specifies the function expression that is the eight
Routine String Specifies an alternative library and name for the user
subroutine REQSUB.
Component_names String This option is available only for XML format. By default,
there are eight components per results set, and they have
generic names, such as X, Y, Z, and MAG.. You can
specify more descriptive names for them or specify a
particular unit label or unit type associated with each
component.
Component_units String This option is available only for XML format. Specify the
unit dimension of the result ser components. If you do not
specify units, then the units of the components are
predefined based upon standard request type (For
example, displacement, velocity and acceleration)
Component_labels String This option is available only for XML format. Specify the
labels to be used when plotting the result set components.
Labels can be strings that include white space. Quotes
must be used to define the string if you see special
characters or white space.
output_control 33

Results_name String Specifies the name of the results set in which all result set
components are placed. If there is an existing result set
with this name, then the result set components are placed
in that result set.
Variable_name String Specifies one or more variables that represent the
components associates with a request. This option is only
available if the format of the results files is set to XML.
File String Specifies the file name.
File_type Xml/csv/dac/rpc Specifies the type of the file. Can take values XML, CSV,
DAC or RPC.
1. Normally, request names are composed of alphabetic, numeric, or '_' (underscore) characters, and
yourself.
3. You may choose one of the following values for the output_type.
a. DISPLACEMENT
generates eight headings and eight columns of output. The columns include the time (Time),
the translational magnitude (Mag), the x component (X), the y component (Y), the z
component (Z), the psi angle (Psi), the theta angle (Theta), and the phi angle (Phi).
The psi, theta, and phi angles are the Euler angle displacements of the I marker with respect
to the J marker. Adams calculates this displacement data in the global coordinate system. If
you specify R_MARKER_NAME, Adams resolves the translational x component, the
translational y component, and the translational z component in the coordinate system of the
R marker. The R marker does not affect psi, theta, and phi.
If you enter the 'OUTPUT_CONTROL SET OUTPUT YPR=ON' command, psi, theta, and
phi rotations become yaw, pitch, and roll rotations.
information is in psi, theta, and phi coordinates or in yaw, pitch, and roll coordinates, the
rotation sequence is not a vector. As a result, Adams outputs no magnitude column. In
addition, the sequence of coordinates is independent of any frame external to the I and the J
markers. Therefore, the R_MARKER_NAME parameter has no effect on the angular
coordinates.
b. VELOCITY
Adams outputs the velocity of the I marker with respect to the J marker. This argument
generates nine headings and nine columns of data for velocity. The nine columns include the
time (Time), the translational magnitude (Vm), the translational x component (Vx), the
translational y component (Vy), the translational z component (Vz), the rotational magnitude
(Wm), the rotational x component (Wx), the rotational y component (Wy), and the rotational
z component (Wz).
Adams calculates this velocity data (the first derivative of the displacement of the I marker
with respect to the J marker) in the global coordinate system. If you specify
component, the translational z component, the rotational x component, the rotational y
component, and the rotational z component in the coordinate system of the R marker.
c. ACCELERATION
generates nine headings and nine columns of output. The columns include the time (Time),
the magnitude of translational acceleration (Accm), the translational x component (Accx), the
rotational acceleration (Wmdot), the rotational x component (Wxdot), the rotational y
component (Wydot), and the rotational z component (Wzdot). Adams calculates this
acceleration data (the second derivative of the displacement of the I marker with respect to the
J marker) in the global coordinate system. If you specify R_MARKER_NAME, Adams
resolves the translational x component, the translational y component, the translational z
output_control 35
d. FORCE
Adams outputs the force associated with the I and the J markers or, if only the I marker is
given, outputs the action-only forces on the I marker. When both, the I and the J markers are
given, Adams sums the forces on the I marker of those forces associated with the I and the J
markers. These forces can include both, applied forces (such as SPRINGDAMPERs and
BUSHINGs) and reaction forces from constraint elements (such as JOINTs and MOTIONs).
When only the I marker is given, Adams sums all of the action-only forces that are applied to
the I marker. Adams reports the components of the resulting vectors in the reference frame of
the R marker if you specify R_MARKER_NAME.
reference frame. This argument generates nine columns of output. The columns include the
time, the translational force magnitude, the three components of the translational force, the
rotational force (torque) magnitude, and the three components of the torque.
forces, and spring-dampers. Adams outputs the applied forces and torques acting at the
request I marker (which may be either the applied force I marker or the applied force J
marker). The magnitude and point of force application on the part containing the applied force
J marker varies according to the type and source of the force. For spring-dampers and action-
reaction single-component forces, the forces and torques acting at the J marker are equal and
opposite to the forces and torques acting at the I marker. For action-only single-component
forces, there is no force or torque acting at the applied force J marker. For beams, fields, and
bushings, the forces acting at the applied force J marker are equal and opposite to the forces
acting at the applied force I marker. As long as the applied force I marker and the applied
force J marker are coincident, the torques acting at the applied force J marker are equal and
opposite to the torques acting at the applied force I marker. If there is a finite separation
between the I and the J markers, the torques acting at the applied force J marker are opposite,
but not equal, to the torques acting at the applied force I marker.
Reaction forces and torques are those generated by constraint-inducing elements. For
revolute, spherical, and universal joints and for atpoint, orientation, parallel axes, and
perpendicular joint primitives, Adams outputs the reaction forces and torques acting at the
request I marker (which may be either the constraint I marker or the constraint J marker). The
acting at the request I marker. Depending on the type of constraint, some or all of the torques
acting at the I marker are zero.
specified in the force-producing element. Adams reports the force as if it were applied to the
J marker of the force-producing element. The translational force on the J marker of the force
element will be equal and opposite to the translational force on the I marker of the force
element if it is not action only. The force will be zero if it is action only. The torque on the J
marker of the force element has an extra component that may have significance. The torque
is the sum of two contributions. The first contribution is the opposite of the torque on the I
marker. The second contribution is due to the force acting across the separation between the
I and the J markers. If the force acts along the line of sight of the two markers, this extra torque
will be zero. To minimize misunderstandings, attach your REQUEST markers in the same
order as the markers on the force-producing element.
e. USER
Adams will output the values computed by the user-written subroutine REQSUB. If you
choose a USER request type, you must also supply the USER_FUNCTION parameter to
define the constants Adams will pass to the REQSUB.
4. If you are requesting displacement, velocity, or acceleration data, you must supply the J_marker.
Adams will measure the displacement, velocity, or acceleration of the I marker with respect to the
J marker.
If you are requesting force data for action-reaction forces, you must supply the J marker. Adams
will sum the forces on the I marker of those forces associated with the I and J markers.
If you are requesting force data for action-only forces, do not supply the parameter, J_marker.
Adams will sum all of the action-only forces applied to the I marker.
5. Each title heading can have as many as eight alphanumeric characters, and underscores. No
leading or internal white-space characters are allowed. The first character in each heading must
be alphabetic. You can use all alphanumeric characters. You cannot use the comma (,), the
semicolon (;), the ampersand (&), or the exclamation point (!). These are limitations dictated by
the Adams data-set parser. If you do not want to specify a title for a particular column, use two
quotation marks with no characters in between the quotations marks.
If you want to unset all of the titles, use only two quotation marks with no characters in between
the quotations marks ("").
Examples:
title = First, Second,"", DISP_X, Last, ANG_disp, AMAG, ""
6. To enter a function expression, you enter a series of quoted strings.
output_control 37
Components Examples
NUMBERS
OPERATORS
• In a FUNCTION expression, Adams allows any of the operators **, *, /, +, and -. Adams
executes these operators according to the following precedence rules:
• From greatest to least, the operators have the following priorities. ** then * / then + -. In
SYSTEM CONSTANTS

BLANKS
restrictions.
CONTINUATION COMMAS
FUNCTION BUILDER
SYSTEM VARIABLES
frame.
output_control 39
ARITHMETIC IFS
follows.
FUNCTION = 6 * IF(VR(10,31): 0 , 0 , 100)
Adams FUNCTIONS
Invoke the text edit window and pick the FUNCTIONS button to get a list of functions that can
be accessed.
Names Purposes
AKISPL Accesses the data in a SPLINE statement and uses the Akima cubic
method to fit a cubic curve(a spline) to the data.
BISTOP Evaluates a force restricting displacement of a part in two opposite
directions.
Names Purposes
7. Result sets are helpful if you want to group the output from multiple requests into a single results
set. For example, you might have several different requests measuring driver input for a vehicle,
and you might want to place them all within a result set named Driver_Inputs for easier viewing
in Adams/PostProcessor.
8. Units for component_labels may be:
MASS AREA
TIME VOLUME
FORCE TORQUE
LENGTH PRESSURE
VELOCITY DENSITY
ACCELERATION ENERGY
ANGLE TORSIONAL_STIFFNESS
ANGULAR_VELOCITY TORSIONAL_DAMPING
ANGULAR_ACCELERATION FREQUENCY
INERTIA AREA_INERTIA
STIFFNESS FORCE_TIME
DAMPING TORQUE_TIME
output_control 41
output_control delete femdata

Allows you to delete an existing femdata object.
Format:

femdata_name = .model.femdata_name
Example:
output_control delete femdata &

request_name= . test.link_forces
Description:

femdata_name String Specifies the femdata to delete.
fixed menu entry 'UNDO'. You identify a femdata by typing its name. If you created the femdata
by reading an Adams data set, the femdata name is the letters FEM followed by the Adams data
set femdata ID number. For example, the name of Adams FEM/101 is FEM101. If you created
the femdata during preprocessing, you will have given it a name at that time. If a femdata is
available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you must enter its
full name. To identify a femdata under a different model, for instance, you may need to enter the
model name as well. For example, you may specify femdata 'link_forces' from model 'test' by
entering ".test.link_forces". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the femdatas available by
default.
2. You must separate multiple femdata names by commas.
Tips:
1. If you realize that this deletion was a mistake, deletion of a request can be reversed by using an
UNDO command.
2. ". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the femdata available by default.
output_control delete mrequest

Allows you to delete an existing mrequest. You specify the name of the mrequest you wish to delete by
using the MREQUEST_NAME parameter.
Format:

mrequest_name = string
Example:
output_control delete mrequest &

mrequest_name= .test.mre101
Description:

mrequest_name String Specifies an existing mrequest to be deleted. You may
identify a mrequest by typing its name.
1. Any Adams/View object you delete may be "undeleted" by using the UNDO commands. If you
fixed menu entry 'UNDO'. You may identify a mrequest by typing its name. If you created the
mrequest by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the mrequest name is the letters MRE
followed by the Adams data set mrequest ID number. For example, the name of Adams
MREQ/101 is MRE101. If you created the mrequest during preprocessing, you will have given it
a name at that time. If an mrequest is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its
name. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify an mrequest under another analysis, for
instance, you may need to enter the analysis name as well. For example, you may specify
mrequest 101 from the analysis named test by entering ".test.mre101". If you type a "?",
Adams/View will list the mrequests available by default. You must separate multiple mrequest
names by commas.
Tips:
1. If you realize that this deletion was a mistake, deletion of an mrequest can be reversed by using
an UNDO command.
output_control 43
output_control delete request

Allows you to delete an existing request. You specify the name of the request you wish to delete by using
the REQUEST_NAME parameter.
Format:

request_name = string
Example:
output_control delete request &

request_name = .test.mre101
Description:

request_name String Specifies the request to be deleted
fixed menu entry 'UNDO'. You may identify a request by typing its name. If you created the
request by reading an Adams data set or request file, the request name is the letters REQ followed
by the Adams data set request ID number. For example, the name of Adams REQUEST/101 is
REQ101. If you created the request during preprocessing, you will have given it a name at that
time.
If a request is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify a request under an analysis, for instance, you may need to
enter the analysis name as well. For example, you may specify request 101 from the analysis
named test by entering "/test/req101. You must separate multiple request names by commas.
Tips:
1. If you realize that this deletion was a mistake, deletion of a request can be reversed by using an
UNDO command.
2. ". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the requests available by default.
output_control modify femdata

Allows you to modify data files of component loads, deformations, stresses, or strains for input to
subsequent finite element or fatigue life analysis for use in third party products. Adams/View will not
output to any files unless you specify the format.
Format:

femdata_name = .model_name.femdata_name
new_femdata_name = .model_name.new_femdata_name
adams_id = geom._id
output_type = loads/loads_on_flex/,odal_deformation/stress/strain
r_marker_name = .marker_name
no_inertia = yes/no
peak_slice= fx/fy/fz/fmag/gmag/tx/ty/tz/tmag/none/all
flex_body= .model_name.flexible_body_name
datum = integer_number
nodes = integer_number
hotspots= integer_number
radius= real _number
criterion = von_mises/max_principle/min_principle/max_shear/n
ormal_x/normal_y/normal_z/shear_xy/shear_yz,shear
_xz
start = real_number
end = real_number
skip = integer_number
Example:
output_control modify femdata &

femdata_name = fem_data_1 &
new_femdata_name = fem_new_name &
adams_id = 100 &
output_type = stress &
r_marker_name = .marker_name &
output_control 45
output_control modify femdata &

flex_body = 101 &
hotspots = 7 &
radius = 0.5 &
criterion = max_principle &
file_name = hotspots_101
These statements create a text file named hotspots_101.tab containing hot spot information for the
flexible body 101. Seven hot spots with a radius of 0.5 based on maximum principal stress are requested.
The names of the DAC files are given the prefix “hotspots_101” as specified in the file_name format.
Description:

femdata_name String Specifies the name of the FEMDATA element in the
modeling database to be created.
New_femdata_name String Specifies the new name of the FEMDATA element in the
modeling database to be created.

Adams data file.

output_type loads/loads_on_ Specifies the information you want as output:
flex/modal_def
ormation/stress/ • Loads on rigid body/Flex body- Output all
strain external forces (reaction and applied forces except
gravity) acting on the specified body and,
optionally, inertial forces of the specified body
(angular velocity and acceleration, including
effects of gravity) as a function of time. Load data
will be output in the simulation set of units.
• Modal Deformation - Outputs modal
deformations as a function of time of the specified
flexible body. Adams/View will only export
coordinates of the active modes in the simulation.
• Nodal Deformation - Outputs nodal deformations
as a function of time of the specified flexible.
Adams/View writes the deformations in the
simulation set of units.
• Strain - Outputs strain information if strain modes
are available in the modal neutral file (MNF) of
the specified flexible body and an
Adams/Durability license is available.
Adams/Durability outputs all six components of
strain (normal-X, normal-Y, normal-Z, shear-XY,
shear-YZ, shear-ZX). It outputs strains in the basic
FEA coordinate system of the flexible body except
where specified below.
• Stress - Outputs stress information if modal
stresses are available in the MNF of the flexible
body and an Adams/Durability license is
available. Adams/Durability outputs all six
components of stress (normal-X, normal-Y,
normal-Z, shear-XY, shear-YZ, shear-ZX). It
outputs stresses in the simulation set of units in the
basic FEA coordinate system of the flexible body
except where specified below.
r_marker_name String Specifies the rigid body marker to be the reference
coordinate system to output loads. Because Adams/Solver
resolves all loads acting on the rigid body in the coordinate
system of the specified marker, the marker should
represent the FEA basic coordinate system of the part's
finite element (FE) model.
output_control 47

no_inertia yes/no Specify ‘yes’ if you want Adams/View to include inertial
loads (linear acceleration, angular acceleration, and
velocity) when outputting the loads acting on the body.
Otherwise, Adams/View outputs no inertial loads and you
will need to rely on an inertia relief capability in the finite
element program to balance the external loads with the
internal loads.
peak_slice fx/fy/fz/fmag/g Specifies that FE model load data are to be output only at
mag/tx/ty/tz/tm those time steps where the specified peak load occurred in
ag/none/all the simulation. When you set the Time options,
Adams/View only checks the time steps within those
specifications for the peak load.
flex_body String Enters the flexible body whose data Adams/View outputs.
Adams/View outputs the data in the FE model basic
coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible body.
datum Integer Enters the node ID of the flexible body to be the datum of
the nodal displacements.
nodes Integer Enters the node numbers of a flexible body whose data is
to be output.
hotspots Integer Enters the number of hot spots to locate and output. With
this option, a text file containing a tab-delimited table of
hot spot information, such as node ID, maximum value,
time when the maximum value occurred, and location, is
generated.
radius Real Enters a radius that defines the spherical extent of each
hotspot. A default value of 0.0 (zero) means that all nodes
in the flexible body will be hotspot candidates.
von_mises/max Specifies the value of stress/strain in determining hotspots
criterion _principle/min_ from one of Von Mises, Max Prin., Min Prin., Max Shear,
principle/max_s Normal-X, Normal-Y, Normal-Z, Shear-XY, Shear-YZ, or
hear/normal_x/ Shear-ZX.
normal_y/norm
al_z/shear_xy/s
hear_yz,shear_x
z
file_name String Enters the output file name for the FE model data. You can
specify an existing directory, root name, and/or extension.
By default, the file name will be composed of the MSC
Adams run and body IDs according to the type of data and
file format that you specified in Solver -> Settings ->
Output -> More -> Durability Files

start Real Specifies the time at which to start outputting the data. The
default is the start of the simulation.
end Real Specifies the time at which to end the output of the data or
the search of a peak load. The default is to output to the end
of the simulation.
skip Integer
1. If you do not specify a node list, Adams/View exports nodal data at each attachment point of the
flexible body. Adams/Solver issues a warning if a node ID is specified that does not belong to the
flexible body.
2. Adams/Solver computes all nodal displacements relative to the datum node ID. If you do not
specify a datum node, Adams/Solver generates an arbitrary relative set of nodal displacements. It
displays a warning message if the specified node does not belong to the flexible body.
3. You can use the FILE_NAME argument to specify the directory, name, and/or extension
(directory/name.extension) for the output file. If you do not specify a directory, FEMDATA
creates all its output files except DAC files in the current working directory. Because several DAC
files are typically generated for a FEMDATA statement, FEMDATA creates them in a separate
directory named after the body. It creates this directory in the current working directory if it does
not exist.
If a file name is not specified in the FILE argument, default file names are assigned according to
the type of FEM data and file format (which is specified in the OUTPUT statement) as shown in
the table below.
FEMDATA Default File Names and Extensions

(none) (none) <run_name> .fem
Loads DAC <run_name>_<channel_id> .dac
NASTRAN <run_name>_<body_name> .dat
ABAQUS <run_name>_<body_name> .dat
ANSYS <run_name>_<body_name> .dat
RPC <run_name> .rsp
Modal DAC <run_name>_<channel_id> .dac
Deformation Generic <run_name>_<body_name .mdf
NASTRAN <run_name>_<body_name> .mdf
PUNCH <run_name>_<body_name> .mdf
ANSYS <run_name> .out
RPC <run_name> .rsp
output_control 49

Nodal Generic <run_name>_<body_name> .ndf
Deformation NASTRAN <run_name>_<body_name> .spc
ANSYS <run_name>_<body_name> .inp
Strain DAC <run_name>_<node_id>e_<channel_id> .dac
Hotspots <run_name>_body_name>_hots .tab
Stress DAC <run_name>_<node_id>se_<channel_id> .dac
Hotspots <run_name>_<body_name>_hote .tab
*Specified in the OUTPUT statement

4. Peak Loads
Except for FMAG, GMAG, and TMAG, each PEAK_SLICE load specification (FX, FY, FZ, TX,
TY, TZ) generates two output time steps for each marker force of the component, one for the
maximum (peak) and one for the minimum (valley). For FMAG and TMAG, only one time step
is output for each marker force since these quantities are load magnitudes and generate only
positive values. With GMAG, only one time step is output per body. If:
• Fm(t) represents the force acting on the body at Marker m.
• rˆx rˆy rˆz represents the unit vector of the reference coordinate system of the rigid body
(FEA coordinate system of the flexible body).
• r(t) represents the position of the reference marker (RM) in that coordinate system.
ˆ ˆ ˆ
• || || represents taking the magnitude or length of a vector (that is, || ( r x r y r z ) || = 1)
Then the following conditions apply:
• FX = Output loads at time t when F m  t   rˆx  t  is a maximum and minimum for each
marker m.
• FY = Output loads at time t when F m  t   rˆy  t  is a maximum and minimum for each
marker m.
• FZ = Output loads at time t when F m  t   rˆz  t  is a maximum and minimum for each marker
m.
• FMAG = Output loads at time t when F m  t   r̂  t  is a maximum for each marker m.
• GMAG = Output loads at time t when
 
MAX   F m  t   r x  t   F m  t   r y  t   F m  t   r z  t 
m m m

Note: Similar expressions exist for TX, TY, TZ, and TMAG. The PEAK_SLICE argument is not
available when you specify a time history OUTPUT load format (DAC or RPC).
Cautions:
1. Using FEMDATA to output loads encounters the same limitations as exporting FEA Loads in
Adams/View.
2. Note that all FEMDATA are output in the MSC Adams modeling units. This causes a problem
when the MSC Adams units are inconsistent with those used in the finite element model, and the
data that is output will be included in a subsequent finite element analysis.
3. For example, when outputting FEMDATA of type LOADS to ANSYS or MSC Nastran for
inclusion in the FE analysis, the MSC Adams and FE modeling units must be consistent. This is
also true when outputting FEMDATA of type NODAL_DEFORMATION when the OUTPUT
format is ANSYS or MSC Nastran and the data will be used as input to the FE analysis.
In the case of outputting FEMDATA of type MODAL_DEFORMATION, the only concern for
units is when MSC Nastran (or PUNCH) has been specified as the OUTPUT format. This is
because rigid body motion is included in the output file along with the modal coordinates. By
definition, modal coordinates are unitless, so the modal stresses (or strains) will be recovered
correctly in MSC Nastran irregardless of unit settings. However, in order for the overall
displacement of the component to be correctly recovered, the unit of length must be consistent
between models.
output_control 51
output_control modify mrequest

Allows you to modify mrequest files. The MREQUEST statement specifies multiple sets of data that you
want Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) to write in the tabular output file and request file. You can request sets
of displacements, velocities, accelerations, or forces for system elements, such as parts, joints, joint
primitives, or applied forces in the system.
Format:

mrequest_name= .model_name.mrequest_name
new_mrequest_name= .model_name.mrequest_name
adams_id= geom_id
comment = string
output_type = displacement/velocity/acceleration/force
part_name = .model.part_name
joint_name = .model.joint_name
jprim_name = .model.primitive_joint_name
force_name = .model.existing_force_name
all = parts/joints/jprims/forces
Example:
output_control modify mrequest &

mrequest_name = mrequest__1 &
comment = 'sample output control creation' &
all = parts &
output_type = displacement
This MREQUEST statement requests displacement data for all Parts. For the part, Adams/Solver
(FORTRAN) outputs eight headings and eight columns of data to the tabular output file. The same
information also goes to the request file. Because this statement does not supply arguments J and RM,
Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) measures the displacements with respect to the ground coordinate system
(GCS), and resolves the displacements in the global coordinate system.
Description:

mrequest_name String Specifies the name of the mrequest to be modified. You
use this parameter to identify the existing mrequest to be
new_Mrequest_na String Specifies the new name of the mrequest. You use this
me parameter to identify the existing mrequest to be affected
with this command.
Adams data file.
output_control 53

J_marker_name String Specifies a single base marker for measuring the
displacements, velocities, or accelerations of the center-
of-mass of the parts. Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) makes
all measurements for parts on the center-of-mass marker
on each part with respect to the J marker you specify. The
J marker defaults to the ground coordinate system (GCS).
 id1  ,...,id
JOINTS = 
 ALL
Indicates that you want to output displacements,
velocities, accelerations, or forces for as many as thirty
JOINT statements or for all JOINT statements.
Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) makes these measurements
on the I marker with respect to the J marker.
 id1  ,...,id
JPRIMS = 
 ALL
velocities, accelerations, or forces for as many as thirty
JPRIM statements or for all JPRIM statements.
Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) makes these measurements
on the I marker with respect to the J marker.
 id1  ,...,id
PARTS = 
 ALL
velocities, or accelerations for as many as thirty center-
of-mass of parts in the model (to which the PART
statement identifiers refer) or for the centers of mass of all
parts (except the ground part). Adams/Solver
(FORTRAN) makes these measurements on the center-
of-mass marker of the part with respect to the marker
specified by the J argument. The PARTS argument cannot
be used for massless parts. The PARTS argument cannot
be used with the FORCE argument.
r_marker_name String Identifies the reference marker with respect to which you
want to resolve information. RM defaults to zero, which
causes Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) to resolve
components in the ground coordinate system (GCS).

comment String Specifies a title for the top of each set of information the
MREQUEST statement outputs. The entire comment
must be on one line. Because the COMMENT argument
can be only eighty characters long at most, the title can be
from seventy-two characters long (if you do not
abbreviate COMMENT=) to seventy-eight characters
long (if you abbreviates COMMENT= to C=). Blank
spaces and all alphanumeric characters can be used.
However, the comma (,), the semicolon (;), the
ampersand (&), and the exclamation point (!) cannot be
used.
DISPLACEMENT/V See extended definition for details on each output_type
output_type ELOCITY/ACCELE
RATION/FORCE
part_name String Specifies names of part with which you want to output
joint_name String Specifies name of joint with which you want to output
jprim_name String Specifies name of joint primitive with which you want to
output displacements,velocities, or accelerations.
force_name String Specifies name of joint with which you want to output
1. The MREQUEST statement indicates multiple sets of data you want Adams/Solver (FORTRAN)
to write in the tabular output file and request file. You can request sets of displacements,
velocities, accelerations, or forces for system elements such as parts, joints, joint primitives, or
applied forces in the system.
Acceleration -Generates acceleration requests that output the accelerations for the markers that
define part centers of mass, joints, joint primitives, or applied forces. This argument generates
nine headings and nine columns of output for each part, joint, joint primitive, or applied force.
The columns in the Tabular Output file include the time (TIME), the translational magnitude
(ACCM), the x component (ACCX), the y component (ACCY) the z component (ACCZ), the
rotational magnitude (WDTM), the rotational x component (WDTX), the rotational y component
(WDTY), and the rotational z component (WDTZ). The same data without the magnitude are
written in the Request file.
Indicates that you want to output displacements, velocities, accelerations, or forces for as many
as thirty BEAM, BUSHING, FIELD, GFORCE, NFORCE, SFORCE, SPRINGDAMPER,
VFORCE, and VTORQUE statements or for all of these statements. For action-reaction forces,
 id1  ,...,id30] 
APPFORS =  
 ALL 
output_control 55
Displacement- Generates displacement requests that output the displacements for the markers
that define part centers of mass, joints, joint primitives, or applied forces. This argument generates
eight headings and eight columns of output for each part, joint, joint primitive, or applied force.
The columns in the tabular output file include the time (TIME), the translational magnitude
(MAG), the x component (X), the y component (Y), the z component (Z), the psi angle (PSI), the
theta angle (THETA), and the phi angle (PHI). The same data without the magnitude are written
in the Request file. For joints, joint primitives, and applied forces, the psi, theta, and phi angles
are the Euler angle displacements of the I marker with respect to the J marker. For parts, the psi,
theta, and phi angles are the Euler rotations of the part center-of-mass marker with respect to the
ground coordinate system (GCS) or with respect to a J marker you specify.
Force -Generates force requests that output the forces for the markers that define joints, joint
primitives, or applied forces. This argument generates nine headings and nine columns of output
for each joint, joint primitive, or applied force. The columns in the Tabular Output file include the
time (TIME), the translational force magnitude (FM), the translational x component (FX), the
translational y component (FY), the translational z component (FZ), the rotational force
magnitude (TM), the rotational x component (TX), the rotational y component (TY), and the
rotational z component (TZ). The same data without the magnitudes are written to the Request
file. The FORCE argument cannot be used with the PARTS argument.
2. Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) measures the force that the J marker applies on the I marker. For
action-only forces, Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) measures the external forces acting on the I
marker. If a MREQUEST statement is issued with an APPFORS argument that requests
information for an identifier that is used for two or more applied force statements, Adams/Solver
(FORTRAN) outputs information for the first applied force statement with that identifier. To
avoid problems, you may want to use a different identifier for each applied force statement in the
dataset.
3. Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) calculates all time derivatives in the ground coordinate system
(GCS), although you can specify that the data be resolved in another reference frame. This is of
no importance in the case of force data, but it can be very important in the case of velocities and
accelerations. For example, joint velocities are actually translational and rotational velocity
difference vectors of the joint I marker and the joint J marker in ground. Joint accelerations are
actually translational and rotational acceleration difference vectors of the joint I marker in ground
and the joint J marker in ground.
4. Because two markers (I and J) define each joint, joint primitive, and applied force, Adams/Solver
(FORTRAN) measures the request information for one of these at the I marker with respect to the
J marker. Because a center-of-mass marker is the only marker that is necessary to define a part,
Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) measures the request information for a part at its center-of-mass
marker with respect to ground or with respect to an alternative marker you specify. Regardless of
the system information you want, a reference marker (RM) can be used to resolve the component
information into any coordinate system you wish.
Cautions:
1. Note that the units for rotational displacement data in the request output of the tabular output file
2. For any argument =ALL, Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) ignores any invalid selections.
3. Applied forces and torques are those generated by beams, bushings, fields, general forces
(GFORCEs), n-component forces (NFORCEs), single-component forces (SFORCEs),
springdampers (SPRINGDAMPERs), vector forces (VFORCEs), and vector torques
(VTORQUEs). Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) outputs the applied forces and torques acting at the
request I marker (which may be either the applied force I marker or the applied force J marker).
The magnitude and point of force application on the part containing the applied force J marker
varies with the type and source of the force.
• For springdampers, action-reaction single-component forces, general forces, vector forces,
and vector torques, the forces and torques acting at the J marker are equal and opposite to the
forces and torques acting at the I marker.
• For action-only single-component forces, no force or torque acts at the applied force J marker.
• For beams, fields, bushings, and multi-point forces, the forces acting at the applied force J
marker are equal and opposite to the forces acting at the applied force I marker.
4. As long as the applied force I marker and the applied force J marker are coincident, the torques
acting at the applied force J marker are equal and opposite to the torques acting at the applied force
I marker. If there is a finite separation distance between the I and J markers, the torques acting at
the applied force J marker are not necessarily opposite or equal, to the torques acting at the applied
force I marker.
5. Reaction forces and torques are those generated by constraint-inducing elements. For revolute,
primitives, Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) outputs the reaction forces and torques acting at the
request I marker (which may be either the constraint I marker or the constraint J marker).
Depending on the type of constraint, some or all of the torques acting at the I marker are zero. The
acting at the request I marker.
6. Determining reaction forces-and torques for cylindrical, planar, rack-and-pinion, screw, and
translational joints and for inline and inplane joint primitives is more complex. If the request I
marker corresponds to the constraint I marker, then Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) outputs the force
and torque acting at the constraint I marker. If the request I marker corresponds to the constraint
J marker, then AdamsAdams/Solver (FORTRAN) outputs the force and torque acting at the
instantaneous location of the constraint I marker, but on the part containing the constraint J
marker. The force translated to the constraint J marker is the same as computed above. If the I and
J markers are coincident, the torque translated to the constraint J marker is the same as computed
above. But if there is a finite separation between the I and J markers, the torque translated to the
constraint J marker is different from the one computed above (because of the moments
contributed by the reaction forces).
7. The MREQUEST statement is not scheduled to be supported in Adams/Solver (C++). You are
encouraged to migrate away from this statement and use the REQUEST statement instead.
output_control 57
output_control modify request

Allows you to modify an existing request.
A REQUEST indicates a set of data you want Adams to output. Using a REQUEST, you can output a
set of displacements, velocities, forces, or accelerations, with respect to markers in your system; or you
can use the user-written subroutine REQSUB to define nonstandard output.
Adams calculates all data in the ground reference frame, although you can specify that the data be
resolved in another reference frame. This is of no importance in the case of force data, but it can be very
important in the case of displacements and time derivatives, i.e. velocities and accelerations.
Except for rotational displacements, all the information types are vectors. For example, joint velocities
are actually translational and rotational velocity difference vectors of the joint I marker with respect to
the joint J marker. Joint accelerations are actually translational and rotational acceleration difference
vectors of the joint I marker with respect to the joint J marker. In other words, if V is a translational vector
quantity and W is an rotational vector quantity,
Vij = Vi – Vj,
And Wij = Wi – Wj,
V’ij = V’i- V’j
And W’ij = W’I – W’j
Note that the units for rotational displacement data in the request output of the tabular file default to
degrees. The units for all other angular output data defaults to radians.
Format:
output_control modify
request_name = .model_name.request_name
new_request_name .model.new_request_name
=
adams_id = geom._id
comment = string
component_names= string
component_units = string
component_labels = string
results_name = string
title = string
output_type =
displacement/velocity/acceleration/forc
e
i_marker_name = marker_name
output_control modify
user_function = real number
f1 = run time function
variable_name = variable name
file= file name
file_type = xml/csv/dac/rpc
routine= string
Description:

request_name String Specifies the name of the request to be modified. You
may later identify a request by typing its name.
new_request_name String Specifies the name of the new request.
output_type Displacement/velocit Specifies whether you want the request to output
y/acceleration/force/u displacement, velocity, acceleration, force, or user
ser data.
i_marker_name An existing triad Specifies the marker for which you wish Adams to
generate data.
j_marker_name An existing triad Specifies the marker with respect to which you wish
Adams to generate the data.
output_control 59

r_marker_name An existing triad Specifies the marker with respect to which you want
Adams to resolve the data. Adams computes the data
identified by the I and J markers, then reports the data
as x, y, and z components in the reference frame of the
reference marker. Angular displacements, which are
not vectors, are not affected by reference marker. If
you do not supply this parameter, Adams will resolve
the data in the ground reference frame.
comment String Specifies a comment for the request. The comment
can contain up to 80 characters, and can be comprised
of letters of the alphabet (a-z, A-Z), numbers (0-9),
and underscores. You may also use spaces and
special characters (*&^%$#) if you enclose the
comment in quotation marks.
Examples:
comment="Displacement of wheel
center 1 wrt ground"
title String Specifies any of the eight alphanumeric headings for
columns of request output in the request file.
F1 Function Specifies the function expression that is the first
modified. The f1 parameter allows you to generate
user-defined output variables and have them reported
by Adams to the request file.
F2 Function Specifies the function expression that is the second
F3 Function Specifies the function expression that is the third

F4 Function Specifies the function expression that is the fourth
F5 Function Specifies the function expression that is the fifth
F6 Function Specifies the function expression that is the sixth
F7 Function Specifies the function expression that is the Seventh
F8 Function Specifies the function expression that is the eight
subroutine REQSUB.
Component_names String This option is available only for XML format. By
default, there are eight components per results set,
and they have generic names, such as X, Y, Z, and
MAG.. You can specify more descriptive names for
them or specify a particular unit label or unit type
associated with each component.
Component_units String This option is available only for XML format.
Specify the unit dimension of the result set
components. If you do not specify units, then the units
of the components are predefined based upon
standard request type (For example displacement,
velocity and acceleration)
output_control 61

Component_labels String This option is available only for XML format.
Specify the labels to be used when plotting the result
set components. Labels can be strings that include
white space. Quotes must be used to define the string
if you see special characters or white space.
Results_name String Specifies the name of the results set in which all result
set components are placed. If there is an existing
result set with this name, then the result set
components are placed in that result set.
Variable_name String Specifies one or more variables that represent the
components associated with a request. This option is
only available if the format of the results files is set to
XML.
File String Specifies the file name.
File_type Xml/csv/dac/rpc Specifies the type of the file. Can take values XML,
CSV, DAC or RPC.
1. Normally, request names are composed of alphabetic, numeric, or '_' (underscore) characters, and
yourself.
3. You may choose one of the following values for the output_type.
A. DISPLACEMENT
generates eight headings and eight columns of output. The columns include the time (Time),
the translational magnitude (Mag), the x component (X), the y component (Y), the z
component (Z), the psi angle (Psi), the theta angle (Theta), and the phi angle (Phi).
The psi, theta, and phi angles are the Euler angle displacements of the I marker with respect
to the J marker. Adams calculates this displacement data in the global coordinate system. If
you specify R_MARKER_NAME, Adams resolves the translational x component, the
translational y component, and the translational z component in the coordinate system of the
R marker. The R marker does not affect psi, theta, and phi.
If you enter the 'OUTPUT_CONTROL SET OUTPUT YPR=ON' command, psi, theta, and
phi rotations become yaw, pitch, and roll rotations.
information is in psi, theta, and phi coordinates or in yaw, pitch, and roll coordinates, the
rotation sequence is not a vector. As a result, Adams outputs no magnitude column. In
addition, the sequence of coordinates is independent of any frame external to the I and the J
markers. Therefore, the R_MARKER_NAME parameter has no effect on the angular
coordinates.
B. VELOCITY
Adams outputs the velocity of the I marker with respect to the J marker. This argument
generates nine headings and nine columns of data for velocity. The nine columns include the
time (Time), the translational magnitude (Vm), the translational x component (Vx), the
translational y component (Vy), the translational z component (Vz), the rotational magnitude
(Wm), the rotational x component (Wx), the rotational y component (Wy), and the rotational
z component (Wz).
Adams calculates this velocity data (the first derivative of the displacement of the I marker
with respect to the J marker) in the global coordinate system. If you specify
component, the translational z component, the rotational x component, the rotational y
component, and the rotational z component in the coordinate system of the R marker.
C. ACCELERATION
generates nine headings and nine columns of output. The columns include the time (Time),
the magnitude of translational acceleration (Accm), the translational x component (Accx), the
rotational acceleration (Wmdot), the rotational x component (Wxdot), the rotational y
output_control 63
component (Wydot), and the rotational z component (Wzdot). Adams calculates this
acceleration data (the second derivative of the displacement of the I marker with respect to the
J marker) in the global coordinate system. If you specify R_MARKER_NAME, Adams
resolves the translational x component, the translational y component, the translational z
D. FORCE
Adams outputs the force associated with the I and the J markers or, if only the I marker is
given, outputs the action-only forces on the I marker. When both the I and the J markers are
given, Adams sums the forces on the I marker of those forces associated with the I and the J
markers. These forces can include both applied forces (such as SPRINGDAMPERs and
BUSHINGs) and reaction forces from constraint elements (such as JOINTs and MOTIONs).
When only the I marker is given, Adams sums all of the action-only forces that are applied to
the I marker. Adams reports the components of the resulting vectors in the reference frame of
the R marker if you specify R_MARKER_NAME.
reference frame. This argument generates nine columns of output. The columns include the
time, the translational force magnitude, the three components of the translational force, the
rotational force (torque) magnitude, and the three components of the torque.
forces, and spring-dampers. Adams outputs the applied forces and torques acting at the
request I marker (which may be either the applied force I marker or the applied force J
marker). The magnitude and point of force application on the part containing the applied force
J marker varies according to the type and source of the force. For spring-dampers and action-
reaction single-component forces, the forces and torques acting at the J marker are equal and
opposite to the forces and torques acting at the I marker. For action-only single-component
forces, there is no force or torque acting at the applied force J marker. For beams, fields, and
bushings, the forces acting at the applied force J marker are equal and opposite to the forces
acting at the applied force I marker. As long as the applied force I marker and the applied
force J marker are coincident, the torques acting at the applied force J marker are equal and
opposite to the torques acting at the applied force I marker. If there is a finite separation
between the I and the J markers, the torques acting at the applied force J marker are opposite,
but not equal, to the torques acting at the applied force I marker.
Reaction forces and torques are those generated by constraint-inducing elements. For
revolute, spherical, and universal joints and for atpoint, orientation, parallel axes, and
perpendicular joint primitives, Adams outputs the reaction forces and torques acting at the
request I marker (which may be either the constraint I marker or the constraint J marker). The
acting at the request I marker. Depending on the type of constraint, some or all of the torques
acting at the I marker are zero.
specified in the force-producing element. Adams reports the force as if it were applied to the
J marker of the force-producing element. The translational force on the J marker of the force
element will be equal and opposite to the translational force on the I marker of the force
element if it is not action only. The force will be zero if it is action only. The torque on the J
marker of the force element has an extra component that may have significance. The torque
is the sum of two contributions. The first contribution is the opposite of the torque on the I
marker. The second contribution is due to the force acting across the separation between the
I and the J markers. If the force acts along the line of sight of the two markers, this extra torque
will be zero. To minimize misunderstandings, attach your REQUEST markers in the same
order as the markers on the force-producing element.
E. USER
Adams will output the values computed by the user-written subroutine REQSUB. If you
choose a USER request type, you must also supply the USER_FUNCTION parameter to
define the constants Adams will pass to the REQSUB.
4. If you are requesting displacement, velocity, or acceleration data, you must supply the J_marker.
Adams will measure the displacement, velocity, or acceleration of the I marker with respect to the
J marker.
If you are requesting force data for action-reaction forces, you must supply the J marker. Adams
will sum the forces on the I marker of those forces associated with the I and J markers.
If you are requesting force data for action-only forces, do not supply the parameter J_marker.
Adams will sum all of the action-only forces applied to the I marker.
5. Each title heading can have as many as eight alphanumeric characters, and underscores. No
leading or internal white-space characters are allowed. The first character in each heading must
be alphabetic. You can use all alphanumeric characters. You cannot use the comma (,), the
semicolon (;), the ampersand (&), or the exclamation point (!). These are limitations are dictated
by the Adams data-set parser. If you do not want to specify a title for a particular column, use
two quotation marks with no characters in between the quotations marks.
If you want to unset all of the titles, use only two quotation marks with no characters in between
the quotations marks ("").
Examples:
title = First, Second,"", DISP_X, Last, ANG_disp, AMAG, ""
verification.
output_control 65
Components Examples
NUMBERS
OPERATORS
• In a FUNCTION expression, Adams allows any of the operators **, *, /, +, and -. Adams
executes these operators according to the following precedence rules:
• From greatest to least, the operators have the following priorities. ** then * / then + -. In
SYSTEM CONSTANTS

BLANKS
restrictions:
CONTINUATION COMMAS
FUNCTION BUILDER
SYSTEM VARIABLES
frame.
output_control 67
ARITHMETIC IFS
follows.
FUNCTION = 6 * IF(VR(10,31): 0 , 0 , 100)
Adams FUNCTIONS
Invoke the text edit window and pick the FUNCTIONS button to be a list of functions that can be
accessed.
Names Purposes
method to fit a cubic curve(a spline) to the data.
directions.
Names Purposes
7. Result sets are helpful if you want to group the output from multiple requests into a single results
set. For example, you might have several different requests measuring driver input for a vehicle,
and you might want to place them all within a result set named Driver_Inputs for easier viewing
in Adams/PostProcessor.
8. Units for component_labels may be:
MASS AREA
TIME VOLUME
FORCE TORQUE
LENGTH PRESSURE
VELOCITY DENSITY
ACCELERATION ENERGY
ANGLE TORSIONAL_STIFFNESS
ANGULAR_VELOCITY TORSIONAL_DAMPING
ANGULAR_ACCELERATION FREQUENCY
INERTIA AREA_INERTIA
STIFFNESS FORCE_TIME
DAMPING TORQUE_TIME
output_control 69
output_control set debug

Allows you to output data for debugging your data set. You can instruct Adams toprint out information
using the following parameters:
Format:

eprint = on/off
verbose = on/off
topology= on/off
dof = on/off
Example:
output_control set debug &

eprint = on &
verbose = off &
topology = on &
dof = on
Description:

model_name String Specifies the model to be modified. You use this parameter to
eprint On/Off Specifies that a block of information will be printed for each
kinematic, static, or dynamic step.
verbose On/Off Specifies that Adams will output additional information in the
diagnostic messages and send it to the screen during an analysis.
jmdump On/Off Specifies that the Jacobian matrix will be dumped after each
iteration. JMDUMP is useful only when you request a dynamic
analysis.
reqdump On/Off Specifies that data from the REQUEST and MREQUEST
statements is to be output at each iteration.

rhsdump On/Off Specifies that data from the YY array (state vector), the RHS
array (error terms), and the DELTA array (increment to state
vector) is to be dumped at each iteration.
dump On/Off Specifies that Adams will write the internal representation of
your data set in the tabular output file after Adams reads and
checks the input.
topology On/Off Specifies that Adams will print topological data in the message
file.
dof On/Off Specifies that a degree-of-freedom table will be printed in the
tabular output file.
2. The “eprint” information helps you to monitor the simulation process and to locate the source of
the error if there is a problem.
Each step consists of two phases:
a. A forward step in time (dynamic predictor).
b. The solution of the equations of motion (dynamic corrector).
For the first phase, Adams prints three or four pieces of information. The information includes the
following:
• The step number. This is a running count of the number of steps taken and can be used as a
measure of how hard Adams is working.
• For dynamics, the order of the predictor. This corresponds to the order of the polynomial
Adams uses to predict the solution at the end of the integration step.
• The value of time at the beginning of the step.
• The size of the step.
For the second phase, Adams prints out the cumulative number of iterations and a table of
information about the iterations. The cumulative number of iterations is a running count of the
iterations needed to solve the equations of motion and can be used as a measure of how many
computations Adams is performing. The table contains information about the maximum equation
error and maximum variable change for each iteration. For each iteration, Adams prints out seven
or eight pieces of the following information:
The iteration number. This will be the one at the beginning of each step and will increment by one
until Adams converges to a solution or exceeds the maximum allowable number of iterations.
output_control 71
The absolute value of the largest equation error. Each equation should have an error value close
to zero. This number is an indicator of how far Adams is from a solution. It should decrease after
every iteration.
The data set element associated with the largest equation error.
For the above data set element, the equation that has the largest equation error.
The absolute value of the largest change in a variable. The final iteration should not need to
change variables very much. This number is an indicator of how far Adams needs to change
variables to approach. The data set element associated with the absolute value of the largest
change in a variable.
For the above data set element, the variable with the largest change.
If Adams has updated the Jacobian, YES appears under the new Jacobian header.
3. Information such as the name of the subroutine from which Adams sends each diagnostic,
explanations, and possible remedies (when available) will be output
4. Adams can generate topological data from the information in your data set about the relationship
between parts and constraints ( except for couplers and user-defined constraints), such as joints.
An understanding of this topological data will help you find constraint errors in you model, but it
is not essential to an understanding of Adams. You can use the topological data generated by
Adams to chart the connections between parts and constraints in the model.This alerts you to
overconstrained loops and immobile loops. A value of ON instructs Adams to print this data in
the message file. The default value is OFF.
5. The dof table tells whether or not each of the six components of motion (i.e. translation along the
x-axis, the y-axis, and the z-axis and rotation about the x-axis, the y-axis, and the z-axis) is
constrained for each part. These are the degrees of freedom as input, not the degrees of freedom
after Adams removes redundant constraints.
Cautions:
1. Adams always outputs VERBOSE information to the message file regardless of the setting of the
VERBOSE parameter.
2. The dump facility essentially maps the equations and variables in your system and provides their
numeric codes.
Tips:
1. If you do not include the VERBOSE argument, Adams outputs only severities and basic error
messages to the screen.
output_control set madata

MADATA generates a modal file. This file serves as input to the Adams/Modal program. Adams/Modal
is an auxiliary program marketed and supported by Mechanical Dynamics, Inc.
Format:

statics = yes /no
time = real_number
comment= string
Example:
output_control set madata &

model_name= model_1 &
statics = yes &
time = 10 &
comment= "Displacement of wheel center 1 wrt ground"
Description:

model_name String Specifies the model to be modified. You use this
with this command.
statistics Yes/No Specifies that the modal data is to be dumped from the
first static equilibrium analysis and writes it to the modal
file.
time Real Number Dumps the modal data at up to thirty time steps
greater than 0 (r1[,...,r30]) from the next quasi-static equilibrium
analysis or from the next dynamic analysis and writes it to
the modal file.
Comment String Specifies a comment for request, mrequest, madata, and
results entities.
output_control 73
2. To record modal data for subsequent static equilibrium analyses, you must use an MADATA
command/statement with the STATICS argument just before each static equilibrium analysis.
3. The The REAL values for the tme parameter (r1[,...,r30]) should correspond to thetime steps for
a quasi-static equilibrium or a dynamic analysis. The values (r1[,...,r30]) must each be greater than
zero.
4. The comment can contain up to 80 characters, and can be comprised of letters of the alphabet (a-
z, A-Z), numbers (0-9), and underscores. You may also use spaces and special characters
(*&^%$#) if you enclose the comment in quotation marks.
Cautions:
1. Adams always outputs VERBOSE information to the message file regardless of the setting of the
VERBOSE parameter.
2. The dump facility essentially maps the equations and variables in your system and provides their
numeric codes.
Tips:
1. With Adams/Modal, you can linearize a mechanical system about any appropriate point of interest
and calculate eigenvalues and eigenvectors for that point in time. You can then use this data to
analyze the linear system response. The Adams/Modal program includes a comprehensive
postprocessor for easy graphic examination of the computed data.
output_control set output

OUTPUT controls the generation of request, graphics, and initial conditions files. In addition, it controls
the form, format, coordinates, filtering, and scaling of request data in the tabular output file. Specifically,
OUTPUT controls the following:
1. Forms of request data in the tabular output file:
• X-y charts of the request data for the tabular output file--The output is in the same order as the
requests are in the data set. The information about each request (including those created by an
MREQUEST) is in two parts. The left side of the first part contains a table of simulation time
and the translational information output by the request, and the right side contains a plot of the
translational information against time. The left side of the second part contains a table of
simulation time and the rotational information output by the request, and the right side contains a
plot of the rotational information against time.
These plots differ in two important ways from plots you create with the Adams PLOT command,
or the Adams/View XY_PLOT command. First, time is along the vertical axis in the chart plots
and request data is along the horizontal axis. Second, the chart plots are normalized; i.e. each
curve is scaled independently of the others from the highest value to the lowest value for that
curve. Therefore, use care when comparing curves to one another. You can compare the shapes
but not the magnitudes of the curves.
• Time-response-request tables--A time-response-request table lists all values for a single
request from throughout the simulation. There is one line in the table for each output time
step; the lines are in ascending order of time.
• Output-step-request (OS) table--An output-step-request table lists the values of all requests
at each output time step. There is a line for each output time step, followed by one line for
each request.
2. Formats of request data in the tabular output file
• Columns per line - 72 columns per line or - 132 columns per line
• Numerical notation of request data in the tabular output file - Fixed-point--Fixed-point
notation expresses a decimal or an integer number without an exponent or
• Scientific--Scientific notation expresses a number as the appropriate power of 10 (the
exponent). Adams uses E between the mantissa and the exponent, and may use a decimal
number as the value.
3. Coordinates of rotational request data in the tabular output file
• Yaw, pitch, and roll or o Psi, theta, and phi
4. Scales for request data in the tabular output file
• Scale for displacements o Scale for velocities o Scale for accelerations o Scale for forces
5. Filters for request data in the tabular output file
• Zero filter for displacements
• Zero filter for velocities
• Zero filter for accelerations
output_control 75
• Zero filter for forces
Format:

model_name= String
chart = on/off
reqsave = on/off
dacsave = on/off
rpcsave = on/off
print = on/off
fixed = on/off
osformat = on/off
ypr = on/off
separator = on/off
icsave= on/off
teletype= on/off
grsave= on/off
dscale= real
dzero= real
vscale= real
vzero= real
ascale= real
azero = real
fscale= real
fzero = real
loads= none/ dac/ nastran/ generic/ rpc/ ansys/ abaqus/ marc
modal_deformation= none/ generic/ nastran/ dac/ punch/ rpc/ ansys/ femfat
nodal_deformation= none/ generic/ nastran/ ansys/ abaqus
stress== none/dac/generic
strain none/dac/generic
Description:

model_name String Specifies the model to be modified. You use this
parameter to identify the existing model to be
chart On/off Specifies that Adams will produce x-y charts of the
request data in the tabular output file. If you do not
specify CHART=ON, Adams does not produce
charts of the request data for the tabular output file.
A value of ON for this parameter will produce a
chart, and a value of OFF will not produce a chart.
reqsave On/off Specifies that Adams will save request output in the
request file so that you can use Adams/View to
display x-y plots. If you do not specify
REQSAVE=ON, Adams does not save the request
output in the request file. The default value for this
parameter is OFF.
dacsave On/off
rpcsave On/off
print On/off Specifies whether or not Adams will print time-
response-request tables in the Adams Tabular Output
File. If you specify ON, Adams will write tables for
each request and mrequest in your model. If you
specify OFF, Adams will not write the tables.
fixed On/off Specifies numerical output in fixed-point notation
format. A value of FIXED=ON will force output to
fixed-point notation. Any values that are too small or
too large for fixed-point notation are output in
scientific notation. If you specify FIXED=OFF,
Adams formats numerical output in scientific
notation.
osformat On/off Specifies that output-step-request (OS) tables will be
written to the tabular output file immediately after
completion of each output step for dynamic,
kinematic, or quasi-static equilibrium analysis. If you
specify OSFORMAT=ON, Adams outputs an
output-step-request (OS) table at each output time
step during simulation. If you specify
OSFORMAT=OFF, Adams does not output request
data in this form for these analysis types.
output_control 77

ypr On/off Specifies that rotational values are to be OUTPUT in
yaw, pitch, and roll coordinates, rather than in psi,
theta, and phi coordinates.
separator On/off Specifies whether or not Adams will write separators
to the Request, Graphics, Results, and Tabular
Output Files when you modify the model topology in
the middle of a simulation.
icsave On/off Specifies that the state vector at every output time
step will be saved.
teletype On/off Specifies Adams to format tabular output for printers
with 72 columns per line, rather than for printers with
132 columns per line (this is done with the value
TELETYPE=ON). A value of TELETYPE=OFF
instructs Adams to format tabular output in 132
columns.
grsave On/off Specifies that Adams is to save graphic output in a
graphics file. This file can then be read into
Adams/View, and the graphics can be displayed. A
value of GRSAVE=ON will instruct Adams to write
graphics data to the graphics file. If GRSAVE=OFF
is specified, Adams does not save graphics output.
dscale Real Specifies the scale factor applied to translational and
rotational displacements Adams outputs. Dscale
accepts two REAL numbers( r1, r2). Define r1 to
scale the translational displacements. Define r2 to
scale the rotational displacements. Both r1 and r2
default to 1.0.
dzero Real Specifies that output displacements less than the
value of this parameter, in magnitude, are to be set
equal to zero. The value of DZERO must be greater
than zero. The value of DZERO defaults to 1.0E-07
in scientific notation and to 0.001 in fixed-point
notation.
vscale Real Specifies scale factors to apply to the translational
and rotational velocities Adams outputs. VSCALE
accepts two REAL numbers( r1, r2 ). Define r1 to
scale the translational velocities. Define r2 to scale
the rotational velocities. Both r1 and r2 default to 1.0.

vzero Real Specifies that output velocities less than the value of
this parameter, in magnitude, are to be set equal to
zero. The value of VZERO must be greater than zero.
The value of VZERO defaults to 1.0E-07 for output
in scientific notation and to 0.001 for output in fixed-
point notation.
ascale Real Specifies a scale factor which is applied to the
translational and the rotational accelerations that
Adams outputs.
Azero Real Specifies that output accelerations that have a
magnitude less than the value of this parameter are
to be set equal to zero. The value given must be
greater than zero. The value defaults to 1.0E-07 for
output in scientific notation and to 0.001 for output in
fixed-point notation.
fscale Real Specifies a scale factor which is applied to the
translational and the rotational forces Adams
outputs. FSCALE accepts two REAL numbers ( r1,
r2 ). Define r1 to scale the translational forces. Define
r2 to scale the rotational forces. Both r1 and r2
default to 1.0E+00 in scientific notation and to 1.0 in
fixed-point notation.
fzero Real Specifies that output forces less than the value of this
parameter, in magnitude, are to be set equal to zero.
The value of FZERO must be greater than zero. The
value of FZERO defaults to 1.0E-07 for output in
scientific notation and to 0.001 for output in fixed-
point notation.
loads none/ dac/ nastran/ generic/ rpc/ ansys/ abaqus/ marc
modal_deformation none/ generic/ nastran/ dac/ punch/ rpc/ ansys/ femfat
nodal_deformation none/ generic/ nastran/ ansys/ abaqus
stress none/dac/generic
strain none/dac/generic
output_control 79
associated with it.
2. When you request a static equilibrium analysis, Adams always outputs an output-step-request
(OS) table whether or not you specify OSFORMAT=ON. Use OSFORMAT to view the values
of all requests at a particular output time or to provide printed output in cases where the simulation
might not run to completion. A simulation may not run to completion because the model or user-
written subroutines are not fully debugged. OSFORMAT might provide information useful useful
in debugging the model or the user-written subroutines.
3. For ypr, first Adams rotates about the z-axis, then about the new negative y-axis (y'), and then
about the second new x-axis (x"). If you specify YPR=OFF, Adams outputs rotational values in
psi, theta, and phi coordinates.
4. You can change the model topology by adding Adams commands to your ACF file to activate an
element, deactivate an element, change a marker position, or change the type or point of
application of a force or constraint during a simulation.
If you specify SEPARATOR=ON (this is the default) the analysis information will be read into
Adams/View, one analysis for each block of output between the separators.
If you specify SEPARATOR=OFF the analysis information will be read into Adams/View as a
single analysis. This allows you to plot or animate the analysis from beginning to end.
5. Adams uses a special format to output this information to the the initial conditions file so that a
subsequent simulation can be restarted at any time in the current simulation. When a subsequent
simulation is performed using the same data set, the mid-simulation conditions from the previous
analysis can be accessed and used as the initial conditions for the current analysis. Adams prompts
the user for the name of the initial conditions file if the ICSAVE parameter is set to ON. When
a simulation is restarted, Adams searches the initial conditions file for the time closest to the time
specified in the EXECUTION command, and then replaces the state vector in the model with that
from the initial conditions file. If ICSAVE=OFF is specified, Adams does not save initial
conditions in the initial conditions file.
6. ASCALE accepts two REAL numbers( r1, r2 ). Define r1 to scale the translational accelerations.
Define r2 to scale the rotational accelerations. These numbers are multiplied by the accelerations
in Adams, therefore, a scale factor between 0.0 and 1.0 scales the accelerations down, a scale
factor greater than 1.0 scales the accelerations up. Negative scale factors change the sign of the
accelerations. Both r1 and r2 default to 1.0.
Tips:
1. If your simulation has many output steps, or you have many requests and mrequests, specifying
OFF for print parameter will result in a much smaller Tabular Output File and conserve disk
space.
output_control set results

RESULTS is used to create the results file. This all-purpose file can contain all the simulation output
from Adams. You can use the results file as an input file to Adams/View. The results file may contain
any combination of system displacements, velocities, accelerations, forces, variables defined through
user-written differential equations, and user-written requests.
The results file can contain any combination of the following information:
• Displacements--Displacements of the LPRF with respect to ground and resolved in the
ground reference frame.
• Velocities--Velocities of the LPRF with respect to ground and resolved in the ground reference
frame.
• Accelerations--Accelerations of the LPRF with respect to ground and resolved in the ground
reference frame.
• Reaction forces--Forces on the I marker required to enforce each constraint, resolved in the
• Applied forces--Forces on the I marker applied by Adams force elements, resolved in the ground
reference frame.
• Differential equations--Values of the variables defined by the user-written differential
equations and their first derivatives with respect to time.
• User results--Values computed in the evaluation user-written subroutine REQSUB.
Description:

model_name Existing model Specifies the model to be modified. You use this parameter to
create_results_file On/Off Specifies whether or not Adams is to create a results file which
contains all simulation output from Adams. For more
information about the contents and format of the results file,
see Appendix F in the Adams/View Reference file.
formatted On/Off Specifies that the results file is to be a formatted file. The
default is an unformatted (or binary) file. The formatted file is
a sequential ASCII text file, and the unformatted file is a direct
access binary file. You can understand a formatted file if you
write it to the screen or print it. An unformatted binary file will
read into a postprocessing program faster.
applied_forces On/off Specifies whether the results file is to include output from
applied_forces. ON indicates that the results file will include
the desired output. OFF indicates that the results file will not
include the applied_forces output.
output_control 81

displacements On/off Specifies whether the results file is to include output from part
displacements. ON indicates that the results file will include
include the part displacements output.
reaction_forces On/off Specifies whether the results file is to include output of
reaction_forces. ON indicates that the results file will include
include the reaction_forces output.
velocities On/off Specifies whether the results file is to include output from part
velocities. ON indicates that the results file will include the
desired output. OFF indicates that the results file will not
include the part velocity output.
data_structures On/off Specifies whether the results file is to include output from
data_elements. These elements include: curves, splines,
variables, arrays, matrices, plants, and strings. ON indicates
that the results file will include the desired output. OFF
indicates that the results file will not include the data_elements
output.
system_elements On/off Specifies whether the results file is to include output from
system_elements. These elements include
LINEAR_STATE_EQUATIONs,
GENERAL_STATE_EQUATIONs, and
TRANSFER_FUNCTIONs. ON indicates that the results file
will include the desired output. OFF indicates that the results
file will not include the system_element output.
linear On/off Specifies whether the results file is to include output from an
Adams linear analysis. ON indicates that the results file will
include the desired output. OFF indicates that the results file
will not include the linear analysis output.
floating_markers On/off Specifies whether the results file is to include output from
floating_markers. ON indicates that the results file will
include the desired output. OFF indicates that the results file
will not include the floating_markers output.
comment String Specifies a comment for request, mrequest, madata, and
results entities.
accelerations On/off Specifies whether the results file is to include part
accelerations.
associated with it.
2. The comment can contain up to 80 characters, and can be comprised of letters of the alphabet (a-
z, A-Z), numbers (0-9), and underscores. You may also use spaces and special characters
(*&^%$#) if you enclose the comment in quotation marks.
Examples:
comment="Displacement of wheel center 1 wrt ground"
panel 1
panel
panel set acf_twindow activate

Activates a statement that was previously turned off by the DEACTIVATE command.
An ACTIVATE command, used in conjunction with the DEACTIVATE command, switches Adams
elements on and off. All Adams elements are active by default in the input dataset, but may be
deactivated using the DEACTIVATE command. For simulation purposes, when ADASMS activates a
statement, the statement appears as though it were always in the dataset. When Adams deactivates a
statement, the statement effectively disappears from the model. Both ACTIVATE and DEACTIVATE
commands take effect when the user issues the next SIMULATE command.
After the activation of any element, Adams reprocesses the model at the next SIMULATE command, as
if it had just been read in from the dataset. During the reprocessing Adams checks the entire model for
consistency, reinitializes user subroutines, and recomputes initial conditions.
When checking, Adams verifys that the model is still valid when the newly activated elements are
included. If, for example, an activated JOINT overconstrains a model resulting in an immobile system,
Adams issues an error message.
Adams also reinitializes all user subroutines to re-establish functional dependencies. For each element
that refers to a user-written subroutine, Adams calls the user-written subroutine with IFLAG set to true.
If the user activates a constraint or force in the middle of a simulation, by default Adams will split the
Tabular Output, Request, Graphics and Results output into two separate set of output concatenated
together. This ensures that the output correctly reflects the new system topology.
The OUTPUT/NOSEPARATOR argument will prevent Adams from splitting the file. This allows the
user to plot or animate the output continuously from the beginning to end, but may result in misleading
graphics during postprocessing.
Format:

beam_name= existing beam
bushing_name= existing bushing
field_name= existing field
jprim_name= existing jprim
motion_name= existing motion
sensor_name= existing sensor
single_component_force_name= existing single_component_force
spring_damper_name= existing spring damper
panel 3
Example:
panel set acf_twindow activate &

panel set acf_twindow activate joint_name = joint_1
Description:

beam_name Existing beam Specifies an existing beam.
bushing_name Existing bushing Specifies an existing bushing.
field_name Existing field Specifies an existing field
joint_name Existing joint Specifies an existing joint.
jprim_name, Existing jprim Specifies an existing jrpim.
motion_name Existing motion Specifies an existing motion
generator.
sensor_name Existing sensor Specifies an existing sensor
single_component_force_nam Existing Specifies an existing
e single_component_force single_component force
spring_damper_name Existing spring damper Specifies an existing spring damper
group_name Existing group Specifies an existing group.
1. You may identify a motion generator by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the motion generator is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find
it convenient to type the name even if the motion generator is displayed.
If you created the motion generator by reading an Adams data set file, its name is the letters MOT
followed by the Adams data set ID number. The name of Adams MOTION/101 is MOT101, for
example. If you created the motion generator during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that
time.
If a motion generator is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it
is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a motion generator under a model, for instance,
you may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify motion generator
'servo' in model 'links' by entering ".links.servo". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the
motion generators available by default.
You must separate multiple motion-generator names by commas.
If the motion generator is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of
the graphics associated with it.
You need not separate multiple motion-generator picks by commas.
panel set acf_twindow deactivate

Turns off a statement that was previously turned on by the ACTIVATE command or was active by default
Format:

beam_name= an existing beam.
bushing_name= an existing bushing
field_name= an existing field
joint_name= an existing joint
jprim_name= an existing primative joint
motion_name= an existing motion
sensor_name= an existing sensor
spring_damper_name= an existing spring-damper force
group_name= an existing group
Example:
panel set acf_twindow deactivate &

panel set acf_twindow deactivate beam_name = beam_1 &
panel set acf_twindow deactivate bushing_name = bushing_1 &
panel set acf_twindow deactivate field_name = field_1 &
panel set acf_twindow deactivate joint_name = joint_1 &
panel set acf_twindow deactivate sensor_name = sensor_1 &
panel set acf_twindow deactivate sensor_name = sensor_1 &
panel set acf_twindow deactivate group_name = group_1
Description:

beam_name An Existing Beam Specifies an existing beam.
bushing_name An Existing Bushing Specifies an existing bushing.
field_name An Existing Field Specifies an existing field which you
want information on
panel 5

joint_name An Existing Joint Specifies an existing joint
jprim_name An Existing Primative Specifies an existing jprim
Joint
motion_name An Existing Motion Specifies an existing motion
generator.
sensor_name An Existing Sensor Specifies an existing sensor
single_component_force_name An Existing Single- Specifies an existing
component Force single_component_force
spring_damper_name An Existing Spring-damper Specifies an existing spring-damper
Force force
group_name An Existing Group Specifies an existing group
1. A DEACTIVATE command, used in conjunction with the ACTIVATE command, switches
Adams elements off and on. All Adams elements are active by default in the input dataset, but
may be deactivated using the DEACTIVATE command. For simulation purposes, when
ADASMS activates a statement, the statement appears as though it were always in the dataset.
When Adams deactivates a statement, the statement effectively disappears from the model. Both
ACTIVATE and DEACTIVATE commands take effect when the user issues the next
SIMULATE command. Once deactivated, a statement remains inactive until it is activated using
the ACTIVATE command.
After the deactivation of any element, Adams reprocesses the model at the next SIMULATE
command, as if it had just been read in from the dataset. During the reprocessing Adams checks
the entire model for consistency, reinitializes user subroutines, and recomputes initial conditions.
When checking, Adams examines all active-element function expressions and arguments for
references to inactive elements. If an active force, constraint or sensor refers to an inactive
element, Adams issues an error message just as if the inactive element did not exist. If a force
REGUEST or a force GRAPHIC refers to an inactive element, Adams reports zero forces for the
inactive element.
Adams also reinitializes all user subroutines to re-establish functional dependencies. For each
element that refers to a user-written subroutine, Adams calls the user-written subroutine with
IFLAG set to true.
Adams reports zero values in all output files for any forces associated with inactive elements,
including both applied forces and joint reaction forces. This includes requests, force graphics, and
forces in the results file.
AdamsAdams continues to report displacements, velocities, and accelerations for all JOINT and
JPRIM MREQUESTs, even for JOINTs and JPRIMs that have been deactivated. MREQUEST
create displacements, velocities and accelerations requests for the markers associated with the
specified JOINTs and JPRIMs. Adams continues to output the relative marker displacements
velocities and accelerations even if the user has deactivated the original JOINT or JPRIM.
If the user deactivates a constraint or force in the middle of a simulation, by default Adams will
split the Tabular Output, Request, Graphics and Results output into two separate set of output
concatenated together. This ensures that the output correctly reflects the new system topology.
The OUTPUT/NOSEPARATOR argument will prevent Adams from splitting the file. This
allows the user to plot or animate the output continuously from the beginning to end, but may
result in misleading graphics during postprocessing.
2. You may identify a beam by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the beam is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it convenient
to type the name even if the beam is displayed.
If you created the beam by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the beam name is the letters
BEA followed by the Adams data set beam ID number. The name of AdamsAdams BEAM/101
is BEA101, for example. If you created the beam during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that
time.
If a beam is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify a beam under a different model, for instance, you may need
to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify beam 101 from the model named
test by entering ".test.bea101". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the beams available by
default.
3. You may identify a bushing by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the bushing is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it
convenient to type the name even if the bushing is displayed.
If you created the bushing by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the bushing name is the
letters BUS followed by the Adams data set bushing ID number. The name of Adams
BUSHING/101 is BUS101, for example. If you created the bushing during preprocessing, you
If a bushing is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify a bushing under a different model, for instance, you may need
to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify bushing 'lower_front' from model
'sla' by entering ".sla.lower_front". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the bushings available
by default.
4. You may identify a field by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the field is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it convenient
to type the name even if the field is displayed.
If you created the field by reading an Adams data set file, the field name is 'FIE'. If you created
the field during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that time.
panel 7
If a field is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify a field under a different model, for instance, you may need
to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify field 'fld1' from model 'robot' by
entering ".robot.fld1". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the fields available by default.
JOI followed by the AdamsAdams data set joint ID number. The name of Adams JOINT/101 is
JOI101, for example. If you created the joint during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that
time.
6. You may identify a jprim by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the jprim is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it convenient
to type the name even if the jprim is displayed.
If you created the jprim by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the jprim name is the letters
JPR followed by the Adams data set jprim ID number. The name of Adams JPRIM/101 is
JPR101, for example. If you created the jprim during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that
time.
If a jprim is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify a jprim under an analysis, for instance, you may need to enter
the analysis name as well. For example, you may specify jprim 101 from the analysis named test
by entering ".test.jpr101". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the jprims available by default.
time.
followed by the Adams data set sensor ID number. The name of Adams SENSOR/101 is SEN101,
for example. If you created the sensor during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that time.
If a sensor is owned by the default model, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is
you type a "?", AdamsAdams/View will list the single-component forces available by default.
10. You may identify a spring-damper force by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the spring-damper force is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also
find it convenient to type the name even if the spring-damper is displayed.
If you created the spring-damper force by reading an AdamsAdams data set, the spring-damper
name is the letters SPR followed by the Adams data set spring-damper ID number. The name of
Adams SPRINGDAMPER/101 is SPR101, for example. If you created the spring-damper during
If a spring-damper is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is
not, you must enter its full name. To identify a spring-damper under a different model, for
instance, you may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify spring-
damper 'left' from model 'sla' by entering ".sla.left". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the
spring-dampers available by default.
Cautions:
1. You must separate multiple beam names by commas.
panel 9
2. You must separate multiple single-component force names by commas.

3. You must separate multiple spring-damper names by commas.
4. You must separate multiple group names by commas.
5. You must separate multiple bushing names by commas.
6. You must separate multiple joint names by commas.
7. You must separate multiple field names by commas.
8. You must separate multiple jprim names by commas
9. You must separate multiple motion-generator names by commas.
10. You must separate multiple sensor names by commas.
Tips:
1. If the beam is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
2. You need not separate multiple beam picks by commas.
3. If the single-component force is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on
any of the graphics associated with it
4. You need not separate multiple single-component force picks by commas
5. If the spring-damper is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
panel set acf_twindow dynamic_simulation

Specifies the type of analysis you want Adams to perform is dynamic.
The DYNAMIC_SIMULATION command specifies that Adams is to integrate the dynamics equations.
If you request a dynamic analysis for a model with zero degrees of freedom, Adams issues a warning
message and integrates the equations instead of using kinematic analysis.
Kinematic analysis is faster.
You may use the 'MODEL VERIFY' command to display the number of degrees-of-freedom in your
model.
Format:

step_size= real
end_time= real
duration= real
Example:
panel set acf_twindow dynamic_simulation &

end_time = 5.0
Description:

number_of_steps Integer Specifies the number of values to be stored in each
component of a result set being read from a file.
step_size Real Specifies the size of the output step for a dynamic,
kinematic, or quasi-static equilibrium analysis in
model time units. STEP_SIZE must be greater
than zero.
duration real Specifies the duration for a dynamic, kinematic, or
quasi-static equilibrium analysis in model time
units. The DURATION must be greater than zero.
panel 11
If the parameter “number_of_steps” is not specified the size of the components will be inferred
from the format of the file. A component will be read from a file until a comment line is
encountered. This commented line marks the end of the component.
2. The parameter END_TIME must be greater than the begin time. Since the begin time must be
greater than zero, this means that the end time must also be greater that zero.
panel set acf_twindow eigen_solution_calculation

Specifies that you want Adams linearize the model about an operating point by performing an eigen
solution analysis.
To linearize and Adams model about an operating point, the Adams model should first be placed in the
configuration by performing and STATIC_SIMULATION or an TRANSIENT_SIMULATION. Then
the EIGEN_SOLUTION_CALCULATION can be performed to provide the eigen value and eigen
vectors associated to the linear system derived from the model at the operating point.
Specifying the DAMPING parameter as NO means that the velocity dependent terms in forces and
VARIABLEs are not included in the stiffness (K) and mass (M) matrices.
Specifying the VECTORS parameter as NO means that no eigenvectors (i.e. mode shapes) will be
computed. Only eigenvalues will be reported.
Format:

damping= yes/no
no_eigen_vectors= true_only
coordinates_of_modes= integer
energy_of_modes= integer
dissipative_energy= integer
kinetic_energy= integer
strain_energy= integer
Example:
panel set acf_twindow eigen_solution_calculation &

damping= yes &
no_eigen_vectors = true
panel 13
Description:

Damping Yes/No Specifies if damping is to be included in the eigen
solution analysis
no_eigen_vectors True Specifying the NO_EIGEN_VECTORS parameter
indicates to Adams that the eigen solution analysis
is to be performed without computation of mode
shapes (eigenvectors). Only the eigenvalues will be
reported.
coordinates_of_modes Integer This parameter is used to specify the mode numbers
for which a table of mode shape coordinates will be
output to the Adams output file.
energy_of_modes Integer This parameter is used to specify the mode numbers
for which a table of modal energy distribution will
be output to the Adams output file.
dissipative_energy Integer This parameter is used to specify the mode numbers
for which a table of disspative energy distribution
will be output to the Adams output file.
kinetic_energy Integer This parameter is used to specify the mode numbers
for which a table of kinetic energy distribution will
strain_energy Integer This parameter is used to specify the mode numbers
for which a table of strain energy distribution will
1. Specifying the DAMPING parameter as NO means that the velocity dependent terms in forces
and VARIABLEs are not included in the stiffness (K) and mass (M) matrices.
2. The “coordinates_of_modes”, ”dissipative_energy”,”strain_energy”,”kinetic_energy” and
“energy_of_modes” parameter accepts either one (1) value or two (2) values separated by a
comma (,). The values are mode shape numbers, and must be greater than zero. Two values are
given to specify a range of mode shape numbers. One value is given to specify a single mode
shape number.
panel set acf_twindow generate_state_matrix

Specifies that you want linearize the model and generate a state matrix representation of the linearized
model.
To linearize and model about an operating point, the model should first be placed in the configuration
by performing and STATIC_SIMULATION or an TRANSIENT_SIMULATION. Then the
GENERATE_STATE_MATRIX command can provide the the state matrices. The representation of the
linear system is:
xdot = Ax + Bu
y = Cx + Dy
where x is the states of the plant model, u is the inputs to the plant model, y is the outputs from the plant
model, and A, B, C, and D are the state matrices representing the plant. These are the matrices that are
reported to the you.
You specify the plant inputs and outputs using the PLANT_INPUT_NAME and
PLANT_OUTPUT_NAME parameters. Plant state are automatically determined by and result in the
best numerical conditioning of the state matrices. Only one PLANT_INPUT_NAME and
PLANT_OUTPUT_NAME can be specified for each GENERATE_STATE_MATRIX command.
The state matrices can be output in either MATRIX_X format or MATLAB format through the use or the
MATRIX_FORMAT parameter.
The FILE_NAME parameter tells the name of the file the you want the state matrices written to. For
MatrixX all the matrices are written to the file named in this parameter. For the MATLAB format the
specified name is used as the base name and all matrices are written to separate files named with each
matrix name appended to the name specified in this parameter.
Format:

file_name= string
matrix_format= matrix_format
plant_input_name= existing pinput
plant_output_name= existing poutput
plant_state_name = existing pstate
reference_marker = existing marker
panel 15
Description:

File_name String Specifies the name of the file that the state
matrices are to be written to.
Matrix_format Matrix_x/matlab Specifies the state matrices will be output in either
MATRIX_X format or MATLAB format.
Plant_input_name Existing pinput Specifies an existing plant_input.
Plant_output_name Existing poutput Specifies an existing plant_output.
Plant_state_name Existing plant state Specifies an existing plant state.
Reference_marker Existing marker Specify a marker that will serve as the reference.
1. The state matrices can be output in either MATRIX_X format or MATLAB format through the
use or the MATRIX_FORMAT parameter.
2. The FILE_NAME parameter tells the name of the file the you want the state matrices written to.
For MatrixX all the matrices are written to the file named in this parameter. For the MATLAB
format the specified name is used as the base name and all matrices are written to separate files
named with each matrix name appended to the name specified in this parameter.
3. You may identify a plant_input by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
Since plant_input do not have a geometric position, /View displays plant_input icons at or near
the model origin. If the plant_input icon is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You
may also find it convenient to type the name even if the plant_input icon is displayed.
If you created the plant_input by reading an data set or graphics file, the plant_input name is the
letters PIN followed by the data set plant_input ID number. The name of PINPUT/101 is
PIN101, for example. If you created the plant_input during preprocessing, you gave it a name at
that time.
If a plant_input is owned by the default model, you may identify it by entering its name only. If
it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a plant_input under a different model, for
instance, you may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify
plant_input 'velocity_set_point' from model 'motor' by entering ".motor.velocity_set_point'". If
you type a "?", /View will list the plant_input elements available by default.
You must separate multiple plant_input names by commas.
If the plant_input is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
You need not separate multiple plant_input picks by commas.
4. You may identify a plant_output by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
Since plant_output do not have a geometric position, /View displays plant_output icons at or near
the model origin. If the plant_output icon is not visible on the screen, you must type the name.
You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the plant_output icon is displayed.
If you created the plant_output by reading an data set or graphics file, the plant_output name is
the letters "POU" followed by the data set plant_output ID number. The name of POUTPUT/101
is POU101, for example. If you created the plant_output during preprocessing, you gave it a name
at that time.
If a plant_output is owned by the default model, you may identify it by entering its name only. If
it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a plant_output under a different model, for
plant_output 'actual_velocity' from model 'motor' by entering ".motor.actual_velocity'". If you
type a "?", /View will list the plant_output available by default.
You must separate multiple plant_output names by commas.
If the plant_output is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
You need not separate multiple plant_output picks by commas.
panel 17
panel set acf_twindow kinematic_simulation

Specifies the type of analysis you want Adams to perform is kinematic.
The KINEMATIC_SIMULATION command specifies that Adams is to run a kinematic analysis. If you
request a kinematic analysis for a model with one or more degrees of freedom, Adams issues an error
message and ignores the entire command.
model.
Format:
Panel set acf_twindow kinematic_simulation

step_size= real
end_time= real
duration= real
Example:
panel set acf_twindow kinematic_simulation &

end_time = 5.0
Description:

model time units. STEP_SIZE must be greater than
zero.
quasi-static equilibrium analysis in model time units.
The DURATION must be greater than zero.
panel 19
panel set acf_twindow output_file_separator

Specifies if Adams is to write delimiting lines to the Request, Results, Graphics, and Tabular Output files
when the user modifies the model topology in the middle of of a simulation.
Format:

separator= on_off
Example:
panel set acf_twindow output_file_separator &

panel set acf_twindow output_file_separator separator = on
Description:

separator ON_OFF Specifies whether or not Adams will write separators to the
Request, Graphics, Results, and Tabular Output Files
when you modify the model topology in the middle of a
simulation.
1. You can change the model topology by adding Adams commands to your ACF file to activate an
element, deactivate an element, change a marker position, or change the type or point of
application of a force or constraint during a simulation.
If you specify SEPARATOR=ON (this is the default) the analysis information will be read into
AdamsAdams/View, one analysis for each block of output between the separators.
If you specify SEPARATOR=OFF the analysis information will be read into Adams/View as a
single analysis. This allow you to plot or animate the analysis from beginning to end.
Tips:
1. The default is to write the separator.
panel set acf_twindow reload

Restart a simulation from a previously saved model or simulation state.
Format:

save_type= adams_save_type
file_name= string
output_prefix = string
title= string
Example:
panel set acf_twindow reload &

panel set acf_twindow save save_type = system &
panel set acf_twindow save file_name = "c:\users\save"
Description:

save_type ADAMS_SAVE_TYPE Specifies the type of file to be SAVEd or RELOADed
file_name STRING Specifies the name of the file that is to be read, written,
or executed.
output_prefix STRING Specifies a new base (root) name for the output files
(.REQ, .RES, .GRA, .OUT, etc.) from the simulation
which follows this RELOAD command.
title STRING This parameter allows the specification of the XY plot
title.
1. Using the reload command with the STATES argument allows the user to reload the saved
simulation time and state values, including displacements, velocities, force values and user-
defined variable values. Adams resets the simulation time to the saved values and uses the saved
states as initial conditions for the next simulation.
panel 21
Using the RELOAD command with the SYSTEM argument allows the user to reload the entire
saved system, including the model definition (parts, markers, joints, etc.), simulation time and
state values (displacements, velocities, force values, user-defined variable values, etc.) and solver
data (integrator parameters, state derivatives, etc.). Adams completely resets all model,
simulation and solver data to that stored in the file.
SAVE_TYPE=STATES respecifies that the file contains simulation time and state values
(displacements, velocities, force values user-defined variable values, etc.).
2. SAVE_TYPE=SYSTEM respecifies that the file contains the entire Adams system, including the
model, simulation time, and state_values.
extension.
4. If the user does not specify the OUTPUT_PREFIX argument, Adams will append the output to
the currently open output files after writing a special delimiter line into the file.
5. This parameter allows the specification of the XY plot title. The title is a "quoted" character string
that will be displayed at the top of the XY plot. The title will be scaled and centered automatically.
Unlike plot names, titles need not be unique.
A title may be arbitrarily long and a combination of letters of the alphabet and numbers may be
used.
panel set acf_twindow save

A save command stores the current AdamsAdams model and simulation conditions or only the current
simulation states
Format:

save_type= adams_save_type
file_name= string
autosave= integer
Example:
panel set acf_twindow save &

panel set acf_twindow save save_type= system&
panel set acf_twindow save file_name = "c:\users\save"&
panel set acf_twindow save autosave = 2
Description:

save_type ADAMS_SAVE_TYPE Specifies the type of file to be SAVEd or
RELOADed.
file_name STRING Specifies the name of the file that is to be read,
autosave INTEGER Indicates that Adams is to save the simulation states
every i output steps.
1. A save command stores the current Adams model and simulation conditions or only the current
simulation states. This allows the user to return to the model or states at a later time using the
RELOAD command.
The user may use the SAVE command with the STATES argument to save the current simulation
time and state values, including displacements, velocities, force values, and user-defined variable
values. The user can later restart a simulation from this point by reloading the states with the
RELOAD/STATES command. When the user reload this file, Adams resets the simulation time
to the saved value and use the saved states as initial conditions for the next simulation.
panel 23
The user may use the SAVE command with the SYSTEM argument to save the entire current
system, including the model definition (parts, markers, joints, etc.), simulation time and state
values (displacements, velocities, force values, and user-defined variable values etc.), and solver
data (integrator parameters, state derivatives, etc.). SAVE/SYSTEM creats a complete record of
the current model and simulation conditions. The user can later return to this point by reloading
the conditions using the RELOAD/SYSTEM command. When the user reloads a system file,
Adams completely reset the model, simulation and solver data to that stored in the file.
2. SAVE_TYPE=STATES respecifies that the file contains simulation time and state values
(displacements, velocities, force values user-defined variable values, etc.).
SAVE_TYPE=SYSTEM respecifies that the file contains the entire Adams system, including the
model, simulation time, and state_values.
extension.
4. Each subsequent SAVE command overrides the previous case. Setting AUTOSAVE to zero turns
AUTOSAVE off.
panel set acf_twindow static_simulation

Specifies the type of analysis you want Adams to perform is static.
The STATIC_SIMULATION command specifies that Adams is to run either a static equilibrium analysis
or a quasi-static equilibrium analysis. If you choose STATIC_SIMULATION and fail to specify an
END_TIME, or NUMBER_OF_STEPS, Adams performs a static equilibrium analysis at the current
time. If you use choose STATIC_SIMULATION and specify an end time and one or more steps, Adams
performs a quasi- static equilibrium analysis.
model.
Format:

step_size= real
end_time= real
duration= real
Example:
panel set acf_twindow static_simulation &

end_time = 5.0
Description:

kinematic, or quasi-static equilibrium analysis in model
time units. STEP_SIZE must be greater than zero.
panel 25
panel set acf_window transient_simulation

Specifies the type of analysis you want Adams to perform is transient.
The TRANSIENT_SIMULATION command specifies that Adams is to run a kinematic analysis if the
model has zero degrees of freedom, or a dynamic analysis if the system has one or more degrees of
freedom.
model.
Format:
Panel set acf_window transient_simulation

step_size= real
end_time= real
duration= real
Example:
panel set acf_twindow transient_simulation &

end_time = 5.0
Description:

model time units. STEP_SIZE must be greater than
zero.
panel 27
panel set twindow_function akima_spline

The AKIMA_SPLINE function uses the AKIMA method of interpolation to create a spline function
across a set of data points.
Format:

x= function
z = function
spline_name= an existing spline
derivative_order= integer
Example:
panel set twindow_function akima_spline &

panel set twindow_function cubic_spline spline_name = spline_1 &
panel set twindow_function cubic_spline derivative_order = 2
Description:

x FUNCTION Specifies the real variable that is the independent
variable value along the x-axis of the spline.
z FUNCTION Specifies a real variable that is the second
independent variable value along the z-axis of the
surface being interpolated
spline_name AN EXISTING Specifies an existing spline
SPLINE
derivative_order INTEGER An optional integer that specifies the order of the
derivative at the interpolate value to be returned by
CUBSPL.
Range: 0 < iord < 2
1. The data points to be interpolated are defined in the SPLINE element in your Adams model. The
SPLINE that you define may represent a curve ( x-y points) or a surface (x-y-z points).
Interpolation in the y direction is cubic, and interpolation in the z direction is linear.
panel 29
The AKIMA_SPLINE function is very fast, since it uses local methods. It always produces good
results for the value of the function being approximated. The AKIMA_SPLINE returns good
estimates for the first derivative of the approximated function when the data points are evenly
spaced. In instances where the data points are unevenly spaced, the estimate of the first derivative
may be in error. In all cases, the second derivative of the function being approximated is
unreliable.
2. This variable can be any value of interest that you can compute using a function expression.
To enter a function expression you enter a series of quoted strings.
verification.
summerized in the following table.
Components Examples
NUMBERS FUNCTION = 1E2 + 3.4 + 6
OPERATORS FUNCTION = 3*6/2 + 3 - 2**2
SYSTEM CONSTANTS FUNCTION = PI + 20
SYSTEM VARIABLES FUNCTION = AX(1040, 2010)
ARITHMETIC IFS FUNCTION = IF(DX(3, 5): -1, 0, 1)
FORTRAN-77 FUNCTIONS FUNCTION = ABS(NUM) - 6
BLANKS FUNCTION = 1 + 2
CONTINUATION COMMAS FUNCTION = 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 , + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1
Adams FUNCTIONS FUNCTION = POLY(0, 0, 6.28)
NUMBERS
FUNCTION expressions can include integers, real numbers, and exponents. In other words, all
OPERATORS
• From the greatest to the least, the operators have the following priorities. ** then * / then + -
. In other words, Adams executes exponentiation (**) before all other operators and executes
SYSTEM CONSTANTS
BLANKS
restrictions:
CONTINUATION COMMAS
FUNCTION BUILDER
panel 31
SYSTEM VARIABLES
frame.
ARITHMETIC IFS
as follows:
FUNCTION = 6 * IF(VR(10,31): 0 , 0 , 100)
Adams FUNCTIONS
be accessed.
Names Purposes
AKISPL Accesses the data in a SPLINE statement and uses the Akima cubic method to fit
a cubic curve(a spline) to the data.
CUBSPL Accesses the data in a SPLINE statement and uses the traditional cubic method to
fit a cubic curve (a spline) to the data.
3. If the SPLINE defines only one curve, Adams ignores this parameter.
The easiest way to enter a function expression in AdamsAdams/View is to use the text editor in
verification.
Components Examples
panel 33

NUMBERS
OPERATORS
SYSTEM CONSTANTS
BLANKS
restrictions:
CONTINUATION COMMAS
FUNCTION BUILDER
SYSTEM VARIABLES
frame.
ARITHMETIC IFS
as follows:
FUNCTION = 6 * IF(VR(10,31): 0 , 0 , 100)
panel 35
Adams FUNCTIONS
be accessed.
Names Purposes
the spline name is the letters SPL followed by the Adams data set spline ID number. The name
of Adams SPLINE/101 is SPL101, for example. If you created the spline during preprocessing,
If a spline is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you
Cautions:
1. You must separate multiple spline names by commas.
panel 37
panel set twindow_function ax

The AX function returns the rotational displacement of the I_MARKER (i1) about the x-axis of the
J_MARKER (i2). This value is computed as follows: Assuming that rotations about the other two axes
(y-, z-axes) of marker i2 are zero, then, AX is the angle between the two y-axes (or the two z-axes).
Mathematically, AX is calculated as:
AX = ATAN2 ((dot_product_of yi1 zi2),(dot_product_of yi1 yi2))
where yi1 is the y-axis of marker i1, yi2 is the y-axis of marker i2, and zi2 is the z-axis of marker i2.
This type of measurement is also referred to as "shadow angles".
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function ax &

Description:

I_marker_name Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker used as the
I_MARKER (i1) in the evaluation of the function.
J_marker_name Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker used as the
J_MARKER (i2) in the evaluation of the function.
panel 39
panel set twindow_function ay

The AY function returns the rotational displacement of the I_MARKER (i1) about the y-axis of the
J_MARKER (i2). This value is computed as follows: Assuming that rotations about the other two axes
(x-, z-axes) of marker i2 are zero. Then AY is the angle between the two x-axes (or the two z-axes).
Mathematically, AY is calculated as:
AY = ATAN2 ((dot_product_of zi1 xi2),(dot_product_of zi1 zi2))
where zi1 is the z-axis of marker i1, xi2 is the x-axis of marker i2, and zi2 is the z-axis of marker i2.
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function ay &

Description:

I_marker_name Existing marker Specifies an existing marker used as the
J_marker_name Existing marker Specifies an existing marker used as the
panel 41
panel set twindow_function az

The AZ function returns the rotational displacement of the I_MARKER (i1) about the z-axis of the
J_MARKER (i2). This value is computed as follows: Assume that rotations about the other two axes (x-
, y-axes) of marker i2 are zero. Then AZ is the angle between the two x-axes (or the two y-axes).
Mathematically, AZ is calculated as:
AZ = ATAN2 ((dot_product_of xi1 yi2),(dot_product_of xi1 xi2))
where xi1 is the x-axis of marker i1, xi2 is the x-axis of marker i2, and yi2 is the y-axis of marker i2.
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function az &

Description:

I_marker_name Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker used as the I_MARKER
(i1) in the evaluation of the function.
J_marker_name Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker used as the J_MARKER
panel 43
panel set twindow_function b_spline

Format:

curve_name= an existing curve
alpha= function
component= curve_component
Example:
panel set twindow_function b_spline &

panel set twindow_function b_spline curve_name = curve_1 &
panel set twindow_function b_spline derivative_order = 2 &
panel set twindow_function b_spline component = x
Description:

curve_name An Existing Acurve A curve name is string of characters that identifies a
curve
alpha Function A real variable that identifies the value of the
independent parameter, , at which the CURVE
function evaluates the curve.
derivative_order Integer Order of the derivative that you want returned from
the curve.
component Curve_component An integer variable that specifies the component
that the CURVE function returns
1. Curve names are assigned by the user when curves are created. After a curve has been created, it
may be referenced by its name until it is deleted. A curve may not have the same name as another
curve on the same plot. A curve is associated to a plot and may be referenced at any time with
respect to the plot. For example, a curve named "c1" on plot "p1" may be referenced by the full
specification of ".p1.c1". This type of full name specification avoids the need to force a given plot
to be the "current" or "default" to reference data (i.e. a curve) associated with it. This is very
useful when copying a curve from one plot to another, etc.
A curve_name may be arbitrarily long and a combination of letters of the alphabet and numbers
2. If the curve is a B-spline computed by the CURVE statement, alpha must be in the domain -1 <
<1
3. The legal values are:
1 - returns the x coordinate or derivative
2 - returns the y coordinate or derivative
3 - returns the z coordinate or derivative
4. An integer variable that specifies the component that the CURVE function returns. The legal
values are:
1 - returns the x coordinate or derivative
2 - returns the y coordinate or derivative
3 - returns the z coordinate or derivative
Parameters iord and icomp together allow you to request any one of the following nine return
values:
panel 45
panel set twindow_function beam

The BEAM function returns the COMPONENT of a force due to BEAM you identify in the
BEAM_NAME parameter.
The force or torque is calculated in the coordinate system of the REFERENCE_MARKER. If the
RETURN_VALUE_ON_MARKER parameter is set to "i", the value returned is the force or torque
acting on the I_MARKER of the force/torque generating element. If the
RETURN_VALUE_ON_MARKER parameter is set to "j", the value returned is the one acting on the
J_MARKER. If the REFERENCE_MARKER is not specified, the results are with respect to the ground
coordinate system.
Format:

beam_name= existing beam
return_value_on_marker= marker_type
component= all_components
reference_marker= existing marker
Description:

beam_name Existing beam Specifies an existing beam.
return_value_on_mar Marker_type Specifies for which marker on the force
ker element (i or j) the function will return force
values.
component FM, FX, FY, FZ, TM, TX, TY, Specifies the specific COMPONENT of
TZ force or torque that the function is to return
for the force element.
reference_marker Existing Marker Specifies a marker that provides a reference
coordinate system for the function.
1. You may identify a beam by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the beam is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it convenient
to type the name even if the beam is displayed.
If you created the beam by reading an ADAM data set or graphics file, the beam name is the letters
BEA followed by the Adams data set beam ID number. For example, the name of Adams
BEAM/101 is BEA101. If you created the beam during preprocessing, you will have given it a
name at that time.
If a beam is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify a beam under a different model, for instance, you may need
to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify beam 101 from the model named
test by entering ".test.bea101". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the beams available by
default.
You must separate multiple beam names by commas.
If the beam is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
You need not separate multiple beam picks by commas.
2. The force or torque is calculated in the coordinate system of the REFERENCE_MARKER. If the
RETURN_VALUE_ON_MARKER parameter is set to "i", the value returned is the force or
torque acting on the I_MARKER of the force/torque generating element. If
RETURN_VALUE_ON_MARKER parameter is set to "j", the value returned is that acting on the
J_MARKER. If the REFERENCE_MARKER is not specified, the results are with respect to the
ground coordinate system.
3. The value for the COMPONENT parameter is one of fm, fx, fy, fz, tm, tx, ty, or tz.
torque acting on the I_MARKER of the force/torque generating element. If the
J_MARKER. If the REFERENCE_MARKER is not specified the results are with respect to the
panel 47
panel set twindow_function bistop_slot

The BISTOP_SLOT function models a gap element.
Format:

x= function
dx= function
lower_bound= real
upper_bound= real
boundary_penetration= real
angular_lower_bound= angle
angular_upper_bound= angle
angular_boundary_penetration= angle
stiffness= real
force_exponent= real
max_damping_coefficient= real
Example:
panel set twindow_function bistop_slot &

panel set twindow_function bistop_slot lower_bound = 5 &
panel set twindow_function bistop_slot angular_lower_bound = 58 &
panel set twindow_function bistop_slot angular_boundary_penetration = 10 &
panel set twindow_function bistop_slot max_damping_coefficient = 3
Description:

x Function Specifies a real variable that is the
distance variable you want to use
to compute the force.
dx Function Specifies a real variable that
communicates the time derivative
of x to the function

lower_bound Real Specifies a real variable that is the
non-angular lower bound of x.
upper_bound Real A real variable that specifies the
non-angular upper bound of the
independent variable x.
boundary_penetration Real Specifies a positive real variable
that is the non-angular boundary
penetration at which Adams
applies full damping.
angular_lower_bound Angle Specifies a real variable that is the
angular lower bound of x.
angular_upper_bound Angle A real variable that specifies the
angular upper bound of the
independent variable x
angular_boundary_penetration Angle Specifies a positive real variable
that is the angular boundary
penetration at which Adams
stiffness Real A non-negative real variable that
specifies the stiffness of boundary
surface interaction.
force_exponent Real Specifies a positive real variable
that is the exponent of the force
deformation characteristic.
max_damping_coefficient Real Specifies a non-negative real
variable that is the maximum
damping coefficient
1. The gap element essentially consists of a slot which defines the domain of motion of a Part located
in the slot. As long as the Part is located in the slot between the LOWER_BOUND (i.e. x1) and
the UPPER_BOUND (i.e. x2), and has no interference with the ends of the slot, it is free to move,
and no forces act on the Part. When the Part tries to move beyond the physical definition of the
slot, impact forces representing contact are created by the BISTOP_SLOT function. The force
created tends to move the floating Part back into the slot.
The BISTOP_SLOT force, which you define, has two components, a spring or STIFFNESS
component and a damping or viscous component. The STIFFNESS component (i.e. k) with the
FORCE_EXPONENT (i.e. e) is dependent on the penetration of the floating part beyond the gap
or slot into the restricting part, The damping or viscous component may be used to model energy
loss.
panel 49
To prevent a discontinuity in the damping force at zero penetration, the damping coefficient is
defined as a cubic step function of the penetration. Thus at zero penetration, the damping
coefficient is always zero. The damping coefficient achieves a maximum,
MAX_DAMPING_COEFFICIENT (i.e. cmax), at a user-defined penetration,
BOUNDARY_PENETRATION (i.e. d). Even though the points of contact between the floating
part and the restricting part may change as the system moves, Adams always exerts the force
between the I and the J markers.
The equation for this function can be mathematically expressed as follows:
| k*(x1-x)**e - STEP(x,x1-d,cmax,x1,0)*x' when x < x1 |
BISTOP = < 0 when x1 <= x <= x2
>
|-k*(x-x2)**e - STEP(x,x2,0,x2+d,cmax)*x' when x > x2 |
2. You compute x value using a function expression. For example, if the user wants to use the x
displacement of marker MAR0201 with respect to MAR0301, then x is
DX(MAR0201,MAR0301).
verification.
Components Examples
NUMBERS
OPERATORS
From greatest to least, the operators have the following
• priorities. ** then * / then + -. In other words, Adams
• executes exponentiation (**) before all other operators and
• executes multiplication (*) and division (/) before addition
• (+) and subtraction (-).
You can use parentheses to alter the precedence of operators.
SYSTEM CONSTANTS
BLANKS
restrictions.
Adams does not accept a blank space between a function and its left bracket. (This is true for both
CONTINUATION COMMAS
panel 51
FUNCTION BUILDER
SYSTEM VARIABLES
frame.
ARITHMETIC IFS
follows.
FUNCTION = 6 * IF(VR(10,31): 0 , 0 , 100)
a FORTRAN reference manual.
Invoke the text edit window and pick the FUNCTIONS button to ge a list of functions that can be
accessed.
Adams FUNCTIONS
accessed.
Names Purposes
directions.
CHEBY Evaluates a Chebyshev polynomial.
FORCOS Evaluates a Fourier cosine series.
FORSIN Evaluates a Fourier sine series.
IMPACT | Evaluates a force restricting displacement of a part in one direction.
You compute this value using a function expression. For example, if x (the distance variable you
use to compute the force) is compute using the distance function DX(0201,0301) then, dx is
computed using the velocity function VX(0201,0301).
panel 53
verification.
Components Examples
NUMBERS
OPERATORS
• priorities. ** then * / then + -. In other words, Adams
• executes exponentiation (**) before all other operators and
• executes multiplication (*) and division (/) before addition
• (+) and subtraction (-).
SYSTEM CONSTANTS

BLANKS
restrictions.
Adams does not accept a blank space between a function and its left bracket. (This is true for both
CONTINUATION COMMAS
FUNCTION BUILDER
SYSTEM VARIABLES
panel 55
frame.
ARITHMETIC IFS
follows.
FUNCTION = 6 * IF(VR(10,31): 0 , 0 , 100)
accessed.
Adams FUNCTIONS
accessed.
Names Purposes
directions.
CHEBY Evaluates a Chebyshev polynomial.
Names Purposes
CUBSPL Accesses the data in a SPLINE statement and uses the traditional
cubic method to fit acubic curve (a spline) to the data.
FORCOS Evaluates a Fourier cosine series.
FORSIN Evaluates a Fourier sine series.
IMPACT | Evaluates a force restricting displacement of a part in one direction.
If x is less than LOWER_BOUND, Adams calculates a positive value for the force. The value of
LOWER_BOUND must be less than the value of UPPER_BOUND. The LOWER_BOUND
parameter is given as "x1" in the BISTOP_SLOT equation below.
3. If x is greater than UPPER_BOUND, Adams calculates a negative value for the force. The value
of UPPER_BOUND must be greater than the value of LOWER_BOUND. The UPPER_BOUND
parameter is given as "x2" in the BISTOP_SLOT equation below.
4. The BOUNDARY_PENETRATION parameter is given as "d" in the BISTOP_SLOT and
IMPACT equations below.
IMPACT = < >
| 0 when x >= x1 |
5. If x is less than ANGULAR_LOWER_BOUND, Adams calculates a positive value for the force.
The value of ANGULAR_LOWER_BOUND must be less than the value of
ANGULAR_UPPER_BOUND. The ANGULAR_LOWER_BOUND parameter is given as "x1"
in the BISTOP_SLOT equation below.
6. If x is greater than ANGULAR_UPPER_BOUND, Adams calculates a negative value for the
force. The value of ANGULAR_UPPER_BOUND must be greater than the value of
ANGULAR_LOWER_BOUND. The ANGULAR_UPPER_BOUND parameter is given as "x2"
in the BISTOP_SLOT equation below.
panel 57

7. The ANGULAR_BOUNDARY_PENETRATION parameter is given as "d" in the
BISTOP_SLOT and IMPACT equations below.
>
IMPACT = < >
| 0 when x >= x1 |
8. For a stiffening spring characteristic, FORCE_EXPONENT (i.e. e in the equations below) is
greater than 1.0. For a softening spring characteristic, 0 < FORCE_EXPONENT < 1.0.
The FORCE_EXPONENT parameter is used in the BISTOP_SLOT and IMPACT equations
below:
IMPACT = < >
| 0 when x >= x1 |
9. The maximum damping is reached when the BOUNDARY_PENETRATION (i.e. d) value is
reached.
The MAX_DAMPING_COEFFICIENT (i.e. cmax) parameter is used in the BISTOP_SLOT and
IMPACT equations below:
IMPACT = < >
| 0 when x >= x1 |
panel set twindow_function bushing

The BUSHING function returns a force COMPONENT for the BUSHING you identify in the
BUSHING_NAME parameter.
coordinate system.
Format:

bushing_name= existing bushing
Description:

Bushing_name Existing Bushing Specifies an existing bushing.
return_value_on_marker Marker_type Specifies for which marker on the force
element (i or j) the function will return
force values.
component FM, FX, FY, FZ, TM, Specifies the specific COMPONENT of
TX, TY, TZ force or torque that the function is to return
reference_marker Existing Marker Specifies a marker that provides a reference
1. You may identify a bushing by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the bushing is not visible on the screen, you must type the name.
You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the bushing is displayed.
If you created the bushing by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the bushing name is the
letters BUS followed by the Adams data set bushing ID number. For example, the name of
AdamsAdams BUSHING/101 is BUS101. If you created the bushing during preprocessing, you
will have given it a name at that time.
panel 59
If a bushing is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify a bushing under a different model, for instance, you may need
to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify bushing 'lower_front' from model
'sla' by entering ".sla.lower_front". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the bushings available
by default.
You must separate multiple bushing names by commas.
If the bushing is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
You need not separate multiple bushing picks by commas.
panel set twindow_function chebyshev_polynomial

The CHEBYSHEV_POLYNOMIAL function evaluates a Chebyshev polynomial at a user specified
value x. The SHIFT (i.e. x0) and the COEFFICIENTS (i.e. a0, a1,..., a30) parameters are used to define
the constants for the Chebyshev polynomial. The Chebyshev polynomial is defined as:
C(x) =\ aj * Tj(x-x0)
where the functions Tj are recursively defined as:
Tj(x-x0) = 2 * (x-x0) * Tj-1(x-x0) - Tj-2(x-x0)
where
T0(x-x0) = 1, and
T1(x-x0) = x-x0.
The index "j" has a range from zero (0) to n, where n is the number of terms in the series.
Note that:
T2(x-x0) = 2 * (x- x0)**2 - 1
T3(x-x0) = 4 * (x- x0)**3 - 3 * (x- x0)
Format:

x= run time function
shift= real
angular_shift= angle
coefficients= real
angular_coefficients= angle
Description:

x Run Time Function Specifies a run time function.
shift Real Specifies a real variable that is a non-angular
shift in a Chebyshev polynomial, Fourier
Cosine series, Fourier Sine series, or
polynomial function. Or, a phase shift in the
independent variable x, for a
simple_harmonic_function.
panel 61

angular_shift Angle Specifies a real variable that is a non-angular
shift in a Chebyshev polynomial, Fourier
Cosine series, Fourier Sine series, or
polynomial function. Or, a phase shift in the
independent variable x, for a
coefficients, Real Specifies the non-angular real variables that
define as many as thirty-one coefficients (a0,
a1,..., a30) for the series or polynomial.
angular_coefficients Angle Specifies the angular real variables that define
as many as thirty-one coefficients (a0, a1,...,
a30) for the series or polynomial.
panel set twindow_function cosine_fourier_series

The COSINE_FOURIER_SERIES function evaluates a Fourier Cosine series at a user specified value
"x". The SHIFT (i.e. x0) and the COEFFICIENTS (i.e. a0, a1,..., a30) parameters are used to define the
constants for the Fourier Cosine series. The FREQUENCY (i.e. w) parameter specifies the fundamental
frequency of the series. The Fourier Cosine series is defined :
F(x) =\ aj * Tj (x-x0)
where the functions Tj are defined as:
Tj (x-x0) = cos{j * w * (x-x0)}
The index j has a range from zero (0) to n, where n is the number of terms in the series.
Format:

shift= real
coefficients= real
frequency = angle
Description:

x Run time function Specifies a run time function.
shift Real Specifies a real variable that is a non-angular shift
in a Chebyshev polynomial, Fourier Cosine
series, Fourier Sine series, or polynomial
function. Or, a phase shift in the independent
variable x, for a simple_harmonic_function.
angular_shift Angle Specifies a real variable that is a non-angular shift
in a Chebyshev polynomial, Fourier Cosine
coefficients Real Specifies the non-angular real variables that
panel 63

angular_coefficients Angle Specifies the angular real variables that define as
many as thirty-one coefficients (a0, a1,..., a30)
for the series or polynomial.
Frequency Angle Specifies the real variable that is the fundamental
FREQUENCY of the series or harmonic function.
1. Adams assumes FREQUENCY is in radians per unit of the independent variable unless you use
a D after the value.
The FREQUENCY parameter is represented in the following functions as "w".
The SIMPLE_HARMONIC_FUNCTION
SHF = a * sin(w * (x-x0) - phi) + b
The FOURIER_COSINE_SERIES is defined :
F(x) =aj*Tj(x-x0), where the Tj are: Tj(x-x0)=cos{j * w * (x-x0)}
The FOURIER_SINE_SERIES is defined as:
F(x) =aj*Tj(x-x0), where the Tj are: Tj(x-x0)=sin{j * w * (x-x0)}
panel set twindow_function cubic_spline

The CUBIC_SPLINE function uses the standard cubic method of interpolation to create a spline function
across a set of data points
Format:

x= function
z = function
Example:
panel set twindow_function cubic_spline &

panel set twindow_function cubic_spline spline_name = spline_1 &
panel set twindow_function cubic_spline derivative_order = 2 &
Description:

x Function Specifies the real variable that is the independent
variable value along the x-axis of the spline.
z Function Specifies a real variable that is the second
independent variable value along the z-axis of the
surface being interpolated
spline_name An Existing Spline Specifies an existing spline
derivative_order Integer An optional integer that specifies the order of the
derivative at the interpolate value to be returned by
CUBSPL.
Range: 0 < iord < 2
1. The data points are defined in a SPLINE DATA_ELEMENT in your Adams/View model. The
SPLINE that you define may represent a curve ( x-y points) or a surface (x-y-z points).
Interpolation in the y direction is cubic, and interpolation in the z direction is linear.
panel 65
The CUBIC_SPLINE, though not as fast as AKIMA_SPLINE, always produces good results for
the value of the function being approximated, including its first and second derivatives. There is
no requirement on the data points being evenly spaced. This may be an important consideration
when you use splines to define functions in Adams. The solution process often requires estimates
of derivatives of the functions being defined. The smoother a derivative is, the easier it is for the
solution process to converge.
If the spline data incorporates sudden changes in value, the CUBIC_SPLINE function gives more
oscillatory results for the curve or surface than are given by the AKIMA_SPLINE function.tended
Definition:
2. This variable can be any value of interest that you can compute using a function expression.
verification.
Components Examples
NUMBERS
OPERATORS
AdamsAdams subtracts TIME from one before it performs multiplication and division.
SYSTEM CONSTANTS
BLANKS
restrictions:
CONTINUATION COMMAS
FUNCTION BUILDER
panel 67
SYSTEM VARIABLES
frame.
ARITHMETIC IFS
as follows:
FUNCTION = 6 * IF(VR(10,31): 0 , 0 , 100)
Adams FUNCTIONS
be accessed.
Names Purposes
3. If the SPLINE defines only one curve, Adams ignores this parameter.
verification.
Components Examples
panel 69

NUMBERS
OPERATORS
SYSTEM CONSTANTS
BLANKS
restrictions:
CONTINUATION COMMAS
FUNCTION BUILDER
SYSTEM VARIABLES
frame.
ARITHMETIC IFS
as follows:
FUNCTION = 6 * IF(VR(10,31): 0 , 0 , 100)
panel 71
Adams FUNCTIONS
FUNCTION expression. The following table lists all the AdamsAdamsAdams functions and their
purposes. Invoke the text edit window and pick the FUNCTIONS button to make a list of
functions that can be accessed.
Names Purposes
the spline name is the letters SPL followed by the Adams data set spline ID number. The name
of Adams SPLINE/101 is SPL101, for example. If you created the spline during preprocessing,
panel set twindow_function curve_curve

The curve_curve function returns the COMPONENT of a force due to curve_curve you identify in the
CURVE_CURVE_NAME parameter.
J_MARKER. If the REFERENCE_MARKER is not specified the results are with respect to the ground
coordinate system.
Format:

curve_curve_name= existing curve_curve
Description:

Curve_curve_name Existing curve_curve Specifies an existing curve_curve
constraint.
return_value_on_marker Marker_type Specifies for which marker on the
force element (i or j) the function
will return force values.
component FM, FX, FY, FZ, TM, TX, TY, Specifies the specific
TZ COMPONENT of force or torque
that the function is to return for the
force element.
reference_marker Existing Marker Specifies a marker that provides a
reference coordinate system for the
function.
1. You may identify a curve_curve by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the curve_curve is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it
convenient to type the name even if the curve_curve is displayed.
panel 73
If you created the curve_curve by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the curve_curve
name is the letters CCU followed by the Adams data set curve_curve ID number. For example,
the name of Adams CVCV/101 is CCU101. If you created the curve_curve during preprocessing,
you will have given it a name at that time.
If a curve_curve is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not,
To identify a curve_curve under an model, for instance, you may need to enter the model name
as well. For example, you may specify CVCV101 from the model named test by entering
".test.CCU101". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the curve_curves available by default.
You must separate multiple curve_curve names by commas.
If the curve_curve is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
You need not separate multiple curve_curve picks by commas.
panel set twindow_function differential_equation

The DIFFERENTIAL_EQUATION function returns the value of the state variable associated with the
DIFFERENTIAL_EQUATION you identify in the DIFFERENTIAL_EQUATION_NAME parameter.
Format:

differential_equation_name = existing equation
Example:
panel set twindow_function differential_equation &

differential_equation_name = diff_1
Description:

differential_equation_name Existing Equation Specifies an existing
differential_equation.
1. You may identify a differential_equation by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
Since differential_equation do not have a geometric position, Adams/View displays
differential_equation icons at or near the model origin. If the differential_equation icon is not
even if the differential_equation icon is displayed.
If you created the differential_equation by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the
differential_equation name is the letters DIF followed by the Adams data set differential_equation
ID number. For example, the name of Adams DIFF/101 is DIF101. If you created the
differential_equation during preprocessing, you will have given it a name at that time.
If a differential_equation is owned by the default model, you may identify it by entering its name
only. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a differential_equation under a different
model, for instance, you may need to enter the model name as well.
For example, you may specify differential_equation 'fluid_volume' from model 'hydro' by
entering ".hydro.fluid_volume'". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the differential_equation
You must separate multiple differential_equation names by commas.
If the differential_equation is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any
panel 75
You need not separate multiple differential_equation picks by commas.

panel set twindow_function dm

The DM function returns the magnitude of the translational displacement vector from J_MARKER (i2)
to I_MARKER (i1).
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function dm &

panel set twindow_function dm i_marker_name= marker_71 &
panel set twindow_function dm j_marker_name = marker_82
Description:

i_marker_name AN EXISTING Specifies an existing marker used as the
MARKER I_MARKER (i1) in the evaluation of the function.
j_marker_name AN EXISTING Specifies an existing marker used as the
MARKER J_MARKER (i2) in the evaluation of the function.
1. The J_MARKER (i2) may not be specified, in which case it defaults to ground. DM is the
distance between markers i1 and i2 and by definition is always positive. Mathematically, DM is
calculated as follows:
DM = ( [ Ri1 - Ri2] [ Ri1 - Ri2] )**1/2
where Ri1 is the displacement of marker i1 in ground, and Ri2 is the displacement of marker i2
in ground.
If you created the marker by reading an ADAMS data set or graphics file, the marker name is the
letters MAR followed by the ADAMS data set marker ID number. The name of ADAMS
panel 77
If you created the marker by reading an ADAMS data set or graphics file, the marker name is the
letters MAR followed by the ADAMS data set marker ID number. The name of ADAMS
Tips:
panel set twindow_function dt_differential_equation

The DT_DIFFERENTIAL_EQUATION function returns the value of the time derivative of the state
variable associated with the DIFFERENTIAL_EQUATION you specify in the
DIFFERENTIAL_EQUATION_NAME parameter.
Format:

differential_equation_name = an existing equation
Example:
panel set twindow_function dt_differential_equation &

differential_equation_name= diff_eq_1
Description:

differential_equation_name An Existing Specifies an existing differential_equation.
Equation
1. In instances, where a DIFFERENTIAL_EQUATION is used to define an implicit algebraic
equation, the DT_DIFFERENTIAL_EQUATION function returns an approximation of the time
derivative obtained by numerical differencing.
Since differential_equation do not have a geometric position, Adams/View displays
ID number. The name of Adams DIFF/101 is DIF101, for example. If you created the
differential_equation during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that time.
If a differential_equation is owned by the default model, you may identify it by entering its name
only. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a differential_equation under a different
differential_equation 'fluid_volume' from model 'hydro' by entering ".hydro.fluid_volume'".
panel 79
Tips:
1. If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the differential_equation available by default.
panel set twindow_function dx

The DX function returns the x-component of the translational displacement vector from J_MARKER (i2)
to I_MARKER (i1), as expressed in R_MARKER (i3) coordinate system.
Format:

r_marker_name= an existing marker
Example:
panel set twindow_function dx &

panel set twindow_function dm i_marker_name = marker_71 &
panel set twindow_function dm j_marker_name= marker_82
Description:

i_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker used as the I_MARKER (i1)
in the evaluation of the function.
j_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker used as the J_MARKER (i2)
r_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies the marker used as the R_MARKER (i3) with
respect to which you want Adams to evaluate the function.
1. The J_MARKER (i2) may not be specified, in which case it defaults to ground. Similarly, the
R_MARKER (i3) may not be specified, in which case it defaults to ground. Mathematically, DX
is calculated as follows:
DX = [ Ri1 - Ri2] xi3
where Ri1 is the displacement of marker i1 in ground, Ri2 is the displacement of marker i2 in
ground, and xi3 is the unit vector along the x-axis of marker i3 .
panel 81
4. If you do not supply this parameter, Adams will evaluate the function in the ground reference
frame.
Tips:
panel set twindow_function dy

The DY function returns the y-component of the translational displacement vector from J_MARKER (i2)
to I_MARKER (i1), as expressed in the R_MARKER (i3) coordinate system. J_MARKER (i2) may not
be specified, in which case, it defaults to ground. Similarly, the R_MARKER (i3) may not be specified,
in which case it defaults to ground. Mathematically, DY is calculated as follows:
DY = [ Ri1 - Ri2] yi3
where, Ri1 is the displacement of marker i1 in ground, Ri2 is the displacement of marker i2 in ground,
and xi3 is the unit vector along the y-axis of marker i3 .
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function dy &

r_marker_name = cm
Description:

I_marker_name Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker used as the I_MARKER
R_marker_name Existing Marker Specifies the marker used as the R_MARKER (i3)
with respect to which you want Adams to evaluate the
function. If you do not supply this parameter, Adams
will evaluate the function in the ground reference
frame.
panel 83
panel set twindow_function field

The FIELD function returns the force COMPONENT for the FIELD you identify in the FIELD_NAME
parameter.
coordinate system.
Format:

field_name= existing field
Description:

field_name Existing Field Specifies an existing bushing.
return_value_on_marke Marker_type Specifies for which marker on the force
force values.
component FM, FX, FY, FZ, TM, TX, TY, TZ Specifies the specific COMPONENT
of force or torque that the function is to
return for the force element.
function.
1. Specifies an existing field which you want information on.
You may identify a field by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the field is not visible on the screen, you must type the name.
You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the field is displayed.
panel 85
If you created the field by reading an Adams data set file, the field name is 'FIE'. If you created
the field during preprocessing, you will have given it a name at that time.
If a field is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify a field under a different model, for instance, you may need
to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify field 'fld1' from model 'robot' by
entering ".robot.fld1". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the fields available by default.
You must separate multiple field names by commas.
If the field is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
You need not separate multiple field picks by commas.
panel set twindow_function fm

The FM function returns the magnitude of the net translational force acting at the I_MARKER (i1). You
should omit specification of the J_MARKER (i2) when the user wants to find the magnitude of an action-
only force acting at I_MARKER (i1).
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function fm &

Description:

I_marker_name Existing marker Specifies an existing marker used as the I_MARKER (i1)
J_marker_name Existing marker Specifies an existing marker used as the J_MARKER (i2)
letters MAR followed by the AdamsAdams data set marker ID number. The name of Adams
panel 87
panel set twindow_function force_vector

The FORCE_VECTOR function returns the force COMPONENT of a FORCE_VECTOR you identify
in the FORCE_VECTOR_NAME parameter.
Format:

force_vector_name= an existing vforce
reference_marker= an existing marker
Example:
panel set twindow_function force_vector &

panel set twindow_function single_component_force return_value_on_marker = i &
panel set twindow_function single_component_force component = fx &
panel set twindow_function single_component_force reference_marker = marker_84
Description:

force_vector_name An Existing Vforce Specifies an existing force_vector.
element (i or j) the function will return force
values
component All_components Specifies the specific COMPONENT of force
or torque that the function is to return for the
force element.
reference_marker An Existing Marker Specifies a marker that provides a reference
panel 89
2. You may identify a force vector by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the force vector is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it
convenient to type the name even if the force vector is displayed.
If you created the force vector by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the force vector name
is the letters VFO followed by the Adams data set force vector ID number. The name of Adams
VFORCE/101 is VFO101, for example. If you created the force vector during preprocessing, you
If a force vector is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not,
you must enter its full name. To identify a force vector under another model, for instance, you
may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify force vector 'spring'
from the model 'suspension' by entering ".suspension.spring". If you type a "?",
AdamsAdams/View will list the force vector available by default.
J_MARKER. If the REFERENCE_MARKER is not specified the results are with respec to the
REFERENCE_MARKER is not specified the results are with respect to the ground coordinate
system.
Tips:
1. You need not separate multiple force vector picks by commas.
2. If the force vector is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
panel set twindow_function fx

The FX function returns the x-component of the net translational force acting at the I_MARKER (i1) as
computed in the coordinate system of the R_MARKER (i3). All force elements acting between the I_
and J_MARKERs (i1 and i2) are included in the calculation of the force, unless the force is an action-
only type force. You should omit specification of the J_MARKER (i2) and the R_MARKER (i3) to find
the x-component of an action-only force acting at the I_MARKER (i1).
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function fx &

r_marker_name = marker_4
Description:

I_marker_name Existing marker Specifies an existing marker used as the I_MARKER (i1)
J_marker_name Existing marker Specifies an existing marker used as the J_MARKER (i2)
R_marker_name Existing marker Specifies the marker used as the R_MARKER (i3) with
respect to which you want Adams to evaluate the function.
If you do not supply this parameter, Adams will evaluate
the function in the ground reference frame.
panel 91
AdamsAdams/View will list the markers available by default.
panel set twindow_function fy

The FY function returns the y-component of the net translational force acting at the I_MARKER (i1), as
computed in the coordinate system of the R_MARKER (i3). All force elements acting between the I_
and J_MARKERs (i1 and i2) are included in the calculation of the force, unless the force is an action-
only type force. The user should omit specification of the J_MARKER (i2) and the R_MARKER (i3) or
specify it as zero to find the y-component of an action-only force acting at the I_MARKER (i1).
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function fy &

r_marker_name = marker_4
Description:

I_marker_name Existing marker Specifies an existing marker used as the I_MARKER
J_marker_name Existing marker Specifies an existing marker used as the J_MARKER
R_marker_name Existing marker Specifies the marker used as the R_MARKER (i3)
with respect to which you want Adams to evaluate the
function. If you do not supply this parameter, Adams
frame.
panel 93
panel set twindow_function general_force

The GENERAL_FORCE function returns the force COMPONENT for a GENERAL_FORCE you
identify in the GENERAL_FORCE_NAME parameter.
Format:

general_force_name= an existing genforce
Example:
panel set twindow_function general_force &

Description:

general_force_name An Existing Genforce Specifies an existing general force.
force values
component All_components Specifies the specific COMPONENT of
force or torque that the function is to return
reference_marker An Existing Marker Specifies a marker that provides a
function.
panel 95
vectors formed by the three component forces and the three component torques determines the
components along and about the "reference" marker axes. The reactions are equal and opposite
to the action. The user may define the GENERAL_FORCE in Adams/View through user-
specified function expressions or by specifying up to 30 user-defined parameters that are passed
to a user-written subroutine (a "GFOSUB") the user links with Adams.
The GENERAL_FORCE corresponds to the Adams GFORCE statement.
A GENERAL_FORCE creates a six component force element that applies the forces between two
"floating_marker". As the system moves, Adams moves the "floating_marker" on its part to keep
marker. The magnitude of the force depends on expressions or subroutines that the user supplies.
The value of the force is the resultant (i.e., the square root of the sum of the squares) of (up to)
three mutually orthogonal force components together with the resultant (i.e., the square root of the
sum of the squares) of (up to) three mutually orthogonal torque components.
The resultant vector formed by the three user-defined component forces along the reference
opposite to the action.
The resultant vector formed by the three component torques determines the direction of the
rotational torque action. The user defines these torques about the reference marker axes. The
reaction is equal and opposite to the action.
system.
Cautions:
1. If the REFERENCE_MARKER is not specified the results are with respect to the ground
coordinate system.
panel 97
panel set twindow_function impact

The IMPACT function models collisions. It evaluates a function that turns on when the distance between
the I and the J markers falls below a nominal FREE_LENGTH (i.e. x1), (i.e. when two parts collide). As
long as the distance between the I and the J markers is greater than the FREE_LENGTH, the force is zero.
An example of a system you can model with the IMPACT function is a ball impacting the ground.
The force has two components, a spring or STIFFNESS component and a damping or viscous
component. The STIFFNESS component (i.e. k) with the FORCE_EXPONENT (i.e. e) is a function of
the penetration of the I_MARKER within the free length distance from the J_MARKER. The stiffness
component opposes the penetration. The damping component of the force is a function of the speed of
penetration. The damping opposes the direction of relative motion. To prevent a discontinuity in the
damping force at contact, the damping coefficient is, by definition, a cubic step function of the
penetration. Thus at zero penetration, the damping coefficient is always zero. The damping coefficient
achieves a MAX_DAMPING_COEFFICIENT (i.e. cmax), at a user-defined penetration,
BOUNDARY_PENETRATION (i.e. d).
The equation for this function can be mathematically expressed as follows:
Note that when:

• x > x1, no penetration occurs and the force is zero (penetration p = 0)
• x < x1, penetration occurs at the end closer to the J marker, and the force is > 0 (penetration p =
x1 - x).
Also note that when p < d, the instantaneous damping coefficient is a cubic step function of the
penetration p.
When p > d, the instantaneous damping coefficient is cmax.
Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) never returns a negative force for IMPACT. If the above expression
is negative, Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) returns a value of zero.
Figure 2, below, is a plot of damping coefficient versus penetration.
Figure 2. Damping Coefficient versus Penetration
Format:

dx= function
free_length= real
boundary_penetration= real
angular_free_length= angle
angular_boundary_penetration= angle
stiffness= real
force_exponent= real
max_damping_coefficient= real
Description:

x Run Time Function Specifies the run time function.
dx Function Specifies a real variable that communicates the
time derivative of x to the function.
free_length Real Specifies the non-angular FREE_LENGTH of the
independent variable, x.
boundary_penetration Real Specifies a positive real variable that is the non-
angular boundary penetration at which Adams
panel 99

angular_free_length Angle Specifies the ANGULAR_FREE_LENGTH of
the independent variable, x.
angular_boundary_pene Angle Specifies a positive real variable that is the
tration angular boundary penetration at which Adams
stiffness Real A non-negative real variable that specifies the
stiffness of boundary surface interaction.
force_exponent Real Specifies a positive real variable that is the
exponent of the force deformation characteristic.
max_damping_coefficie Real Specifies a non-negative real variable that is the
nt maximum damping coefficient.
1. IMPACT models collisions and contact. It evaluates a force that turns on when a distance falls
below a nominal free length (i.e. when two parts collide).
The force has two components: a spring or stiffness component and a damping or viscous
component. The stiffness component opposes the penetration. The damping component of the
force is a function of the speed of penetration. The damping opposes the direction of relative
motion. To prevent a discontinuity in the damping force at contact, the damping coefficient is, by
definition, a cubic step function of the penetration. Thus, at zero penetration, the damping
coefficient is always zero. The damping coefficient achieves a maximum, cmax, at a user-defined
penetration, d.
An object colliding with ground is an example of a system that can be modeled with the IMPACT
function.
Let x be the instantaneous distance, x1 be the free length (when x is less than x1, the force turns
on), x1 - x be the penetration, and d be the penetration at which Adams/Solver applies full
damping (cmax).
• When x x1, force = 0.
• When x < x1, force is positive.
• When (x1-d) < x < x1, force is positive; there is damping, but it is less than cmax.
• When x (x1-d), force is positive and damping = cmax.
The following equation defines IMPACT:
2. You compute the value of the dx parameter by using a function expression.

For example, if x (the distance variable you use to compute the force) is compute using the
distance function DX(0201,0301) then, dx is computed using the velocity function
VX(0201,0301).
verification.
.
Components Examples
Continuation commas FUNCTION = 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1, + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1
NUMBERS
panel 101
OPERATORS
• priorities. ** then * / then + -. In other words, Adams executes exponentiation (**) before all
other operators and executes multiplication (*) and division (/) before addition (+) and
subtraction (-).
SYSTEM CONSTANTS
BLANKS
restrictions.
CONTINUATION COMMAS
FUNCTION BUILDER
The FUNCTIONS button on the right side of the Adams/View text editor provides a means of
SYSTEM VARIABLES
frame.
ARITHMETIC IFS
follows.
FUNCTION = 6 * IF(VR(10,31): 0 , 0 , 100)
panel 103
be accessed.
Adams FUNCTIONS
be accessed.
Names Purposes
cubic curve (a spline) to the data.
BISTOP Evaluates a force restricting displacement of a part in two opposite directions.
4. For an impact force, the free_length parameter specifies the distance above which there is no
contact, and therefore, no force is generated. Specifically, if x is less than the FREE_LENGTH
(i.e. x1), Adams calculates a positive value for the force. Otherwise, the force value is zero.
5. The BOUNDARY_PENETRATION parameter is given as "d" in the BISTOP_SLOT and
IMPACT equations below.
6. For an impact force, the angular_free_length is the distance above which there is no contact, and
therefore no force, is generated. Specifically, if x is less than the FREE_LENGTH (i.e. x1),
Adams calculates a positive value for the force. Otherwise, the force value is zero.
7. For a stiffening spring characteristic, FORCE_EXPONENT (i.e. e in the equations below) is
greater than 1.0. For a softening spring characteristic, 0 < FORCE_EXPONENT < 1.0.
The FORCE_EXPONENT parameter is used in the BISTOP_SLOT and IMPACT equations
below:
8. The maximum damping is reached when the BOUNDARY_PENETRATION (i.e. d) value is

reached.
The MAX_DAMPING_COEFFICIENT (i.e. cmax) parameter is used in the BISTOP_SLOT and
IMPACT equations.
Cautions:
1. IMPACT is only used to determine force or torque magnitudes.
2. The force value and the distance measure must both be positive in the same direction.
3. When e is less than or equal to one, the rate of change of the force is discontinuous at contact. This
may cause convergence problems.
panel 105
panel set twindow_function input_value_for_plant

The OUTPUT_VALUE_FOR_PLANT function returns the COMPONENT of a PLANT_OUTPUT you
identify in the PLANT_OUTPUT_NAME parameter.
A PLANT_OUTPUT is made up of a list of VARIABLES (algebraic expressions). The COMPONENT
parameter is an integer indicating the kth VARIABLE in the list. For example, if the PLANT_OUTPUT
is defined by a list of ten VARIABLEs, and you list the component as 7, the
OUTPUT_VALUE_FOR_PLANT function returns the value for the 7th VARIABLE in the list.
Format:
panel set twindow_function output_value_for_plant

plant_input_name= existing poutput
component= integer
Example:
panel set twindow_function output_value_for_plant &

plant_output_name= poutput_01 &
component= 2
The OUTPUT_VALUE_FOR_PLANT function returns the value for the 2nd VARIABLE in the list since
the component value specified is 2.
Description:

Plant_output_name Existing poutput Specifies an existing plant_output.
Component Integer Specifies which VARIABLE value should be returned for the
OUTPUT_VALUE_FOR_PLANT or
OUTPUT_VALUE_FOR_PLANT function.
1. You may identify a plant_output by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
Since plant_output do not have a geometric position, Adams/View displays plant_output icons at
or near the model origin. If the plant_output icon is not visible on the screen, you must type the
name. You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the plant_output icon is displayed.
If you created the plant_output by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the plant_output
name is the letters "POU" followed by the Adams data set plant_output ID number. For example,
the name of Adams POUTPUT/101 is POU101. If you created the plant_output during
If a plant_output is owned by the default model, you may identify it by entering only its name. If
it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a plant_output under a different model, for
plant_output 'actual_velocity' from model 'motor' by entering ".motor.actual_velocity'". If you
type a "?", Adams/View will list the plant_output available by default.
You must separate multiple plant_output names by commas.
If the plant_output is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
You need not separate multiple plant_output picks by commas.
2. The COMPONENT is an integer indicating the kth VARIABLE in the list.
For example, A PLANT_OUTPUT is made up of a list of VARIABLES (algebraic expressions).
The COMPONENT parameter for the OUTPUT_VALUE_FOR_PLANT function is an integer
indicating the kth VARIABLE in the list. Therefore, if the PLANT_OUTPUT is defined by a list
of ten VARIABLEs, and you request the 7th component to be returned, the
panel 107
panel set twindow_function invpsd

The INVPSD (Inverse Power Spectral Density) function regenerates a time signal from a power spectral
density description
Format:

x= function
min_frequency= real
max_frequency= real
num_frequencies = real
use_logarithmic= boolean
random_number_seed= real
Example:
panel set twindow_function invpsd &

panel set twindow_function invpsd spline_name = spline_1 &
panel set twindow_function invpsd min_frequency = 30 &
panel set twindow_function invpsd num_frequencies = 47 &
panel set twindow_function invpsd use_logarithmic = yes
Description:

x Function Specifies a real variable that is the independent
variable of the function
spline_name An Existing Spline You identify a spline by typing its name.
min_frequency Real A real variable that specifies the lowest frequency
to be regenerated.
max_frequency Real A real variable that specifies the highest frequency
to be regenerated
num_frequencies Real An integer that specifies the number of
frequencies. This number is supposed to be larger
than 1 and less than 200

use_logarithmic Boolean An integer variable that acts as a flag indicating
whether the PSD data points are interpolated in the
linear or logarithmic domain.
random_number_seed Real A real variable that specifies a seed for a random
number generator, used to calculate the phase
shifts
1. This variable can be any value of interest that you can compute using a function expression. For
example, if the independent variable in the function is time, x is the system variable TIME.
verification.
Components Examples
NUMBERS
OPERATORS
panel 109
SYSTEM CONSTANTS
BLANKS
restrictions:
CONTINUATION COMMAS
FUNCTION BUILDER
SYSTEM VARIABLES
frame.
ARITHMETIC IFS
as follows:
FUNCTION = 6 * IF(VR(10,31): 0 , 0 , 100)
Adams FUNCTIONS
panel 111
be accessed.
Names Purposes
2. If you created the spline by reading an Adams data set, the spline name is the letters SPL followed
by the Adams data set spline ID number. The name of Adams SPLINE/101 is SPL101, for
example. If you created the spline during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that time.
3. The legal values are:yes (0) - linear domain no (1) - logarithmic domain
4. During a simulation, PSD can be called with up to a maximum of 20 different seeds.
Cautions:
1. You must separate multiple spline names by commas.
panel set twindow_function joint

The JOINT function returns the force COMPONENT for the JOINT you identify in the JOINT_NAME
parameter.
Format:

joint_name= an existing joint
Example:

Description:

joint_name An Existing Joint Specifies an existing joint
return_value_on_marker Marker_type Specifies for which marker on the force element (i or
j) the function will return force values
component All_components Specifies the specific COMPONENT of force or
torque that the function is to return for the force
element.
panel 113
2. Specifies an existing joint.

You may identify a joint by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
system.
Cautions:
1. You must separate multiple joint names by commas.
Tips:
1. If the joint is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
2. You need not separate multiple joint picks by commas.
panel set twindow_function m_acc

The M_ACC function calculates the magnitude of the difference of the translational acceleration vector
of the I_MARKER (i1) in ground and the J_MARKER (i2) in ground.
Format:

reference_frame_marker = an existing marker
Example:
panel set twindow_function m_acc &

Description:

i_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker used as the I_MARKER
j_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker used as the J_MARKER
reference_frame_marker An Existing Marker The reference frame in which the second time
derivative of the displacement vector is taken
1. Mathematically, M_ACC is calculated as follows:
M_ACC = ([ai1-ai2] dot_product_with [ai1-ai2])**1/2
where ai1 is the acceleration of the I_MARKER (i1) in ground, and ai2 is the acceleration of the
J_MARKER (i2) in ground.
panel 115
4. Set l = 0 or omit the argument if you want the time derivatives to be calculated in the ground
panel set twindow_function m_wdt

The M_WDT function returns the magnitude of the difference between the angular acceleration vector
of the I_MARKER (i1) in ground and the angular acceleration of the J_MARKER (i2) in ground.
Mathematically, M_WDT is calculated as follows:
M_WDT = ([i1-i2] dot_product_with [i1-i2])**1/2
where i1 is the angular acceleration vector of the I_MARKER (i1) in ground, and i2 is the angular
acceleration vector of the J_MARKER (i2) in ground.
Format:

Reference_frame_marker= an existing marker
Example:
panel set twindow_function m_wdt &

reference_frame_marker = marker_4
Description:

I_MARKER (i1) in the evaluation of the
function.
J_MARKER (i2) in the evaluation of the
function.
Reference_frame_marker Existign marker Specifies the reference frame marker.
panel 117
panel set twindow_function motion

The MOTION function returns the force COMPONENT caused by the MOTION you identify in the
MOTION_NAME parameter.
Format:

motion_name= an existing motion
Example:

Description:

motion_name An Existing Motion Specifies an existing motion generator.
return_value_on_marker Marker_type Specifies for which marker on the force element (i or
j) the function will return force values
component All_components Specifies the specific COMPONENT of force or
torque that the function is to return for the force
element.
panel 119
time.
system.
Cautions:
1. You must separate multiple motion-generator names by commas.
Tips:
1. If the motion generator is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of
the graphics associated with it.
2. You need not separate multiple motion-generator picks by commas.
panel set twindow_function multi_point_force

Format:

multi_point_force_name= an existing nforce
marker_name= an existing marker
Example:

panel set twindow_function multi_point_force marker_name = marker_1 &
panel set twindow_function multi_point_force reference_marker = marker_80
Description:

multi_point_force_name An Existing Nforce Specifies an existing multi_point_force
marker_name An Existing Marker
component All_components Specifies the specific COMPONENT of force
or torque that the function is to return for the
force element.
1. You use multi_point_force_name parameter to identify the existing multi_point_force to affect
with this command.
You may identify a multiple point force by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the multiple point force is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find
it convenient to type the name even if the multiple point force is displayed.
If you created the multiple point force by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the multiple
point force name is the letters NFO followed by the Adams data set multiple point force ID
number. The name of Adams NFORCE/101 is NFO101, for example. If you created the multiple
point force during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that time.
panel 121
If a multiple point force is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If
it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a multiple point force under another model, for
instance, you may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify multiple
point force 'FEA_element' from the model 'suspension' by entering ".suspension.FEA_element".
If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the multiple point forces available by default.
You must separate multiple multiple point force names by commas.
If the multiple point force is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any
Tips:
1. You need not separate multiple multiple point force picks by commas.
panel set twindow_function phi

The PHI function calculates the third angle of a body-2 [3 1 3] Euler rotation sequence, which will orient
the J_MARKER (i2) the same as the I_MARKER (i1).
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function phi &

Description:

panel 123
panel set twindow_function pitch

The PITCH function calculates the second angle of a body-3 [3 -2 1]
Euler rotation sequence which will orient the J_MARKER (i2) the same as the I_MARKER (i1).
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function pitch &

Description:

I_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker used as the I_MARKER (i1) in
the evaluation of the function.
J_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker used as the J_MARKER (i2) in
panel 125
panel set twindow_function point_curve

The point_curve function returns the COMPONENT of a force due to point_curve you identify in the
POINT_CURVE_NAME parameter.
coordinate system.
Format:

point_curve_name= existing point_curve
Description:

Point_curve_name Existing point_curve Specifies an existing point_curve
constraint.
force values.
component FM, FX, FY, FZ, TM, TX, TY, Specifies the specific COMPONENT
TZ of force or torque that the function is to
function.
1. You may identify a point_curve by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the point_curve is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it
convenient to type the name even if the point_curve is displayed.
panel 127
If you created the point_curve by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the point_curve name
is the letters PCU followed by the Adams data set point_curve ID number. For example, the name
of Adams CVCV/101 is PCU101. If you created the point_curve during preprocessing, you will
have given it a name at that time.
If a point_curve is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not,
To identify a point_curve under an model, for instance, you may need to enter the model name as
well. For example, you may specify CVCV101 from the model named test by entering
".test.PCU101". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the point_curves available by default.
You must separate multiple point_curve names by commas.
If the point_curve is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
You need not separate multiple point_curve picks by commas.
panel set twindow_function polynomial

The POLYNOMIAL function evaluates a standard polynomial at a user specified value x. The SHIFT
(i.e. x0) and the COEFFICIENTS (i.e. a0, a1,..., a30) parameters are used to define the constants for the
polynomial. The standard polynomial is defined as:
The index j has a range from zero to n, where n is the number of terms in the series.
Format:

x= run time functiom
shift= real
coefficients= real
Example:
panel set twindow_function polynomial &

x = time &
shift= 0 &
coefficients = 0
Description:

x Run Time Function Specifies the run time function.
shift Real Specifies a real variable that is a non-angular shift in a
Chebyshev polynomial, Fourier Cosine series, Fourier
Sine series, or polynomial function.Or, a phase shift in the
independent variable x, for a simple_harmonic_function.
panel 129

angular_shift Angle Specifies a real variable that is a angular shift in a
Chebyshev polynomial, Fourier Cosine series,Fourier
Sine series, or polynomial function.Or, a phase shift in the
independent variable x, for a simple_harmonic_function.
coefficients Real Specifies the non-angular real variables that define as
many as thirty-one coefficients (a0, a1,..., a30) for the
series or polynomial.
angular_coefficients Angle Specifies the angular real variables that define as many as
thirty-one coefficients (a0, a1,..., a30) for the series or
polynomial.
panel set twindow_function primitive_joint

The PRIMITIVE_JOINT function returns the force COMPONENT caused by the PRIMITIVE_JOINT
you identify in the JPRIM_NAME parameter.
Format:

jprim_name= an existing primative joint
Example:
panel set twindow_function primitive_joint &

Description:

jprim_name An Existing Primative Joint Specifies an existing jprim
values
panel 131
2. You may identify a jprim by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the jprim is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it convenient
to type the name even if the jprim is displayed.
If you created the jprim by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the jprim name is the letters
JPR followed by the Adams data set jprim ID number. The name of AdamsAdams JPRIM/101 is
JPR101, for example. If you created the jprim during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that
time.
If a jprim is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify a jprim under an analysis, for instance, you may need to enter
the analysis name as well. For example, you may specify jprim 101 from the analysis named test
by entering ".test.jpr101". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the jprims available by default.
system.
Cautions:
1. You must separate multiple jprim names by commas.
Tips:
1. If the jprim is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
2. You need not separate multiple jprim picks by commas.
panel set twindow_function psi

The PSI function calculates the first angle of a body-2 [3 1 3] Euler rotation sequence, which will orient
the J_MARKER (i2) the same as the I_MARKER (i1).
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function az &

Description:

I_marker_name Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker used as the I_MARKER (i1) in the
evaluation of the function.
J_marker_name Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker used as the J_MARKER (i2) in the
panel 133
panel set twindow_function roll

The ROLL function calculates the third angle of a body-3 [3 -2 1] Euler rotation sequence which will
orient the J_MARKER (i2) the same as the I_MARKER (i1).
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function roll &

Description:

I_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker used as the I_MARKER (i1) in
J_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker used as the J_MARKER (i2) in
model 'links', part 'lower_arm' by entering ".links.lower_arm.pivot".
panel 135
Tips:
panel set twindow_function simple_harmonic_function
panel set twindow_function

simple_harmonic_function
The SIMPLE_HARMONIC_FUNCTION evaluates a simple harmonic function.
The following equation defines the function:
where:
x = independent variable expression

a = AMPLITUDE
w = fundmental FREQUENCY
x0 = phase SHIFT in the independent variable
phi = PHASE_SHIFT in the harmonic function
b = AVERAGE_VALUE_OF_DISPLACEMENT
Format:

shift= real
amplitude= real
average_value_of_displacement= real
angular_amplitude= angle
angular_average_value_of_displacement= angle
frequency= angle
phase_shift= angle
Example:
panel set twindow_function simple_harmonic_function &

x = time &
shift = 5 &
amplitude = 200 &
average_value_of_displacement = 256.6 &
frequency = 245 &
phase_shift = 45
panel 137
Description:

X Run Time Function Specifies a run time function.
shift Real Specifies a real variable that is a non-angular shift in
a Chebyshev polynomial, Fourier Cosine series,
Fourier Sine series, or polynomial function. Or, a
phase shift in the independent variable x, for a
angular_shift Angle Specifies a real variable that is a angular shift in a
Chebyshev polynomial, Fourier Cosine series,
Fourier Sine series, or polynomial function. Or, a
phase shift in the independent variable x, for a
amplitude Real Specifies the non-angular AMPLITUDE of the
harmonic function.
average_value_of_dis Real Specifies the non-angular
placement AVERAGE_VALUE_OF_DISPLACEMENT of the
SIMPLE_HARMONIC_FUNCTION.
angular_amplitude Angle Specifies the ANGULAR_AMPLITUDE of the
harmonic function.
angular_average_valu Angle Specifies the
e_of_displacement ANGULAR_AVERAGE_VALUE_OF_DISPLAC
EMENT of the
frequency Angle Specifies the real variable that is the fundamental
FREQUENCY of the series or harmonic function.
phase_shift Angle Specifies a PHASE_SHIFT in the
1. The “amplitude” and the “angular_amplitude” parameters are used in the following
SIMPLE_HARMONIC_ FUNCTION equation:
Where "a" is the AMPLITUDE parameter.
2. In the SIMPLE_HARMONIC_ FUNCTION, “b” represents the average_value_of_displacement.
where, b is the ANGULAR_AVERAGE_VALUE_OF_DISPLACEMENT parameter.
3. Adams assumes FREQUENCY is in radians per unit of the independent variable, unless you use

where:
Tj (x-x0) = cos{j * w * (x-x0)}

where the funtions Tj are defined as:

Tj (x-x0) = sin {j* *(x-x0)}
4. SHF = a * sin(w * (x-x0) - phi) + b
where, "phi" is the PHASE_SHIFT parameter.
panel 139
panel set twindow_function sine_fourier_series

The SINE_FOURIER_SERIES function evaluates a Fourier Sine series at a user specified value x. The
SHIFT (i.e. x0) and the COEFFICIENTS (i.e. a0, a1,..., a30) parameters are used to define the constants
for the Fourier Sine series. The FREQUENCY (i.e. w) parameter specifies the fundamental frequency
of the series. The Fourier Sine series is defined as:
F(x) = aj * Tj (x-x0),
where the functions Tj are defined as:
Tj (x-x0) = sin{j * w * (x-x0)}
The index j has a range from zero (0) to n, where n is the number of terms in the series.
Format:

shift= real
coefficients= real
Frequency = angle
Description:

x Run Time Function Specifies a run time function.
shift Real Specifies a real variable that is a non-angular
shift in a Chebyshev polynomial, Fourier Cosine
angular_shift Angle Specifies a real variable that is a non-angular
shift in a Chebyshev polynomial, Fourier Cosine
coefficients Real Specifies the non-angular real variables that

angular_coefficients Angle Specifies the angular real variables that define as
many as thirty-one coefficients (a0, a1,..., a30)
for the series or polynomial.
Frequency Angle Specifies the real variable that is the
fundamental FREQUENCY of the series or
harmonic function.
1. Adams assumes FREQUENCY is in radians per unit of the independent variable unless you use
F(x) =\ aj*Tj(x-x0),
where the Tj are:
Tj(x-x0)=cos{j * w * (x-x0)}
F(x) =\ aj*Tj(x-x0),
where the Tj are:
Tj(x-x0)=sin{j * w * (x-x0)}
panel 141
panel set twindow_function single_component_force

The SINGLE_COMPONENT_FORCE function returns the force COMPONENT for the
SINGLE_COMPONENT_FORCE you identify in the SINGLE_COMPONENT_FORCE_NAME
parameter.
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function single_component_force &

panel set twindow_function single_component_force single_component_force_name = sforce &
Description:

single_component_force_name An Existing Single- Specifies an existing
component Force single_component_force.
force values
force or torque that the function is to
reference_marker An Existing Marker Specifies a marker that provides a
function.
you type a "?", Adams/View will list the single-component forces available by default.
You must separate multiple single-component force names by commas.
If the single-component force is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on
any of the graphics associated with it.
J_MARKER.
system.
Cautions:
1. If the REFERENCE_MARKER is not specified the results are with respect to the ground
coordinate system.
panel 143
Tips:
1. You need not separate multiple single-component force picks by commas.
panel set twindow_function spring_damper

The SPRING_DAMPER function returns a force COMPONENT for the SPRING_DAMPER you
identify in the SPRING_DAMPER_NAME parameter.
coordinate system.
Format:

spring_damper_name= existing spring_damper
Description:

Spring_damper_name Existing Spring_damper Specifies an existing spring_damper.
force values.
component FM, FX, FY, FZ, TM, TX, TY, Specifies the specific COMPONENT
TZ of force or torque that the function is to
function.
1. You may identify a spring-damper force by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the spring-damper force is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also
find it convenient to type the name even if the spring-damper is displayed.
panel 145
If you created the spring-damper force by reading an Adams data set, the spring-damper name is
the letters SPR followed by the Adams data set spring-damper ID number. For example, the name
of Adams SPRINGDAMPER/101 is SPR101. If you created the spring-damper during
If a spring-damper is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is
To identify a spring-damper under a different model, for instance, you may need to enter the
model name as well. For example, you may specify spring-damper 'left' from model 'sla' by
entering ".sla.left".
If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the spring-dampers available by default.
You must separate multiple spring-damper names by commas.
If the spring-damper is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
You need not separate multiple spring-damper picks by commas.
panel set twindow_function state_value_for_plant

The STATE_VALUE function returns the COMPONENT of a STATE_VALUE you identify in the
PLANT_STATE_NAME parameter.
A PLANT_STATE is made up of a list of VARIABLES (algebraic expressions). The COMPONENT
parameter is an integer indicating the kth VARIABLE in the list. For example, if the PLANT_STATE is
defined by a list of ten VARIABLEs, and you list the component as 7, the
STATE_VALUE_FOR_PLANT function returns the value for the 7th VARIABLE in the list.
Format:

plant_state_name= existing plant state
component= integer
Example:
panel set twindow_function state_value_for_plant &

plant_state_name= pstate_01 &
component= 2
The STATE_VALUE_FOR_PLANT function returns the value for the 2nd VARIABLE in the list since
the component value specified is 2.
Description:

Plant_state_name Existing Plant State Specifies an existing plant_state.
Component Integer Specifies which VARIABLE value should be
returned for the STATE_VALUE_FOR_PLANT
or STATE_VALUE_FOR_PLANT function.
1. You may identify a plant_state by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
Since plant_state do not have a geometric position, Adams/View displays plant_state icons at or
near the model origin. If the plant_state icon is not visible on the screen, you must type the name.
You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the plant_state icon is displayed.
panel 147
If a plant_state is owned by the default model, you may identify it by entering only its name. If
it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a plant_state under a different model, for
plant_state 'actual_velocity' from model 'motor' by entering ".motor.actual_velocity'". If you type
a "?", Adams/View will list the plant_state available by default.
You must separate multiple plant_state names by commas.
If the plant_state is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
You need not separate multiple plant_state picks by commas.
2. The COMPONENT is an integer indicating the kth VARIABLE in the list.
For example, A PLANT_STATE is made up of a list of VARIABLES (algebraic expressions).
The COMPONENT parameter for the OUTPUT_VALUE_FOR_PLANT function is an integer
indicating the kth VARIABLE in the list. Therefore, if the PLANT_STATE is defined by a list
of ten VARIABLEs, and you request the 7th component to be returned, the
panel set twindow_function step

The STEP function approximates the HEAVERSINE step function with a cubic polynomial. The figure
illustrates the STEP function.
Figure 1. Step Function
The value x is the independent variable, x0 and x1 define the variable values at which the step begins and
ends, h0 and h1 are the initial value and the final value of the step. The equation that defines STEP is as
follows.
Format:

x= runtime function
begin_at= real
panel 149

end_at= real
angular_begin_at= angle
angular_end_at= angle
initial_function_value= real
final_function_value= real
angular_initial_function_value= angle
angular_final_function_value= angle
Step5 = boolean
Description:

x Run Time Function Specifies a run time function
begin_at Real Specifies the non-angular value of "x" (the
independent variable) where the haversine function
begins. The BEGIN_AT parameter is represented
below as "x0"
end_at Real Specifies the non-angular value of "x" (the
ends. The END_AT parameter is represented below
as "x1"
angular_begin_at Angle Specifies the angular value of "x" (the independent
variable) where the haversine function begins. The
ANGULAR_BEGIN_AT parameter is represented
below as "x0"
angular_end_at Angle Specifies the angular value of "x" (the independent
variable) where the haversine function ends. The
ANGULAR_END_AT parameter is represented
below as "x1"
initial_function_value Real Specifies the non-angular value of "x" (the
is at its initial value. The
INITIAL_FUNTION_VALUE parameter is
represented below as "h0"

final_function_value Real Specifies the non-angular value of "x" (the
has its final value. The
FINAL_FUNCTION_VALUE parameter is
represented below as "h1"
angular_initial_function_ Angle Specifies the angular value of "x" (the independent
value variable) where the haversine function is at its
initial value. The
ANGULAR_INITIAL_FUNTION_VALUE
parameter is represented below as "h0"
angular_final_function_v Angle Specifies the angular value of "x" (the independent
alue variable) where the haversine function has its final
value. The
ANGULAR_FINAL_FUNCTION_VALUE
parameter is represented below as "h1"
Step5 Yes/No Specifies a Boolean value
Cautions:
1. The value x1 must not equal x0. Equal values of x1 and x0 imply a discontinuous step, which
STEP cannot fit.
panel 151
panel set twindow_function sweep

The SWEEP function returns a constant amplitude sinusoidal function with linearly increasing
frequency.
Format:

x= function
amplitude= real
start_value= real
start_frequency= real
end_value= real
end_frequency= real
delta_x= real
Example:
panel set twindow_function sweep &

panel set twindow_function sweep amplitude = 10 &
panel set twindow_function sweep start_value= 2 &
panel set twindow_function sweep start_frequency = 4 &
panel set twindow_function sweep delta_x = .01
Description:

x Function Specifies a real variable that is the independent variable of the
function
amplitude Real Specify the amplitude of the sinusoidal function.
start_value Real Specifies the initial value of the variable.
start_frequency Real The initial frequency of the sinusoidal function
end_value Real Specifies the when the loop is done.
end_frequency Real The final frequency.
delta_x Real The interval in which the SWEEP function becomes fully active.
1. This variable can be any value of interest that you can compute using a function expression. For
example, if the independent variable in the function is time, x is the system variable TIME.
verification.
Components Examples
NUMBERS
OPERATORS
panel 153
SYSTEM CONSTANTS
BLANKS
restrictions:
CONTINUATION COMMAS
FUNCTION BUILDER
SYSTEM VARIABLES
frame.
ARITHMETIC IFS
as follows:
FUNCTION = 6 * IF(VR(10,31): 0 , 0 , 100)
Adams FUNCTIONS
be accessed.
Names Purposes
panel 155

2. For each iteration of the loop, including the first, Adams/View checks the value of
START_VALUE + INCREMENT_VALUE. If the result is less than or equal to END_VALUE
(or greater than or equal to if INCREMENT_VALUE is negative) the loop is executed
panel set twindow_function theta

The THETA function calculates the second angle of a body-2 [3 1 3] Euler rotation sequence, which will
orient the J_MARKER (i2) the same as the I_MARKER (i1).
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function theta &

Description:

function.
function.
If you created the marker by reading an data set or graphics file, the marker name is the letters
MAR followed by the data set marker ID number. For example, the name of MARKER/101 is
MAR101. If you created the marker during preprocessing, you will have given it a name at that
time.
model 'links', part 'lower_arm' by entering ".links.lower_arm.pivot". If you type a "?", /View will
list the markers available by default.
panel 157

panel set twindow_function tm

The TM function returns the magnitude of the net torque acting at the I_MARKER (i1). You should omit
specification of the J_MARKER (i2) and the R_MARKER (i3) to find the magnitude of an action-only
torque acting at the I_MARKER (i1).
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function theta &

Description:

function.
function.
panel 159
panel set twindow_function torque_vector

The TORQUE_VECTOR function returns a force COMPONENT for the TORQUE_VECTOR you
identify in the TORQUE_VECTOR_NAME
Format:

torque_vector_name= an existing vtorque
Example:
panel set twindow_function torque_vector &

Description:

torque_vector_name An Existing Vtorque Specifies an existing torque_vector.
values
panel 161
2. You may identify a torque vector by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the torque vector is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it
convenient to type the name even if the torque vector is displayed.
If you created the torque vector by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the torque vector
name is the letters VTO followed by the Adams data set torque vector ID number. The name of
Adams VTORQUE/101 is VTO101, for example. If you created the torque vector during
If a torque vector is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not,
you must enter its full name. To identify a torque vector under another model, for instance, you
may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify torque vector 'spring'
list the torque vector available by default.
You must separate multiple torque vector names by commas.
system.
Tips:
1. If the torque vector is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
2. You need not separate multiple torque vector picks by commas.
panel set twindow_function tx

The TX function returns the x-component of the net torque acting at the I_MARKER (i1), as computed
in the coordinate system of the R_MARKER (i3). All force elements acting between the I_ and
J_MARKERs (i1 and i2) are included in the calculation of the torque, unless the force element is an
action-only type of force. The user should omit specification of the J_MARKER (i2) and the
R_MARKER (i3), or specify it as zero to find the x-component of an action-only torque element acting
at the I_MARKER (i1).
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function tx &

r_marker_name = cm
Description:

R_marker_name Existing Marker Specifies the marker used as the R_MARKER (i3)
with respect to which you want Adams to evaluate
the function. If you do not supply this parameter,
Adams will evaluate the function in the ground
reference frame.
panel 163
panel set twindow_function ty

The TY function returns the y-component of the net torque acting at the I_MARKER (i1), as computed
action-only type of force. You should omit specification of the J_MARKER (i2) and the R_MARKER
(i3), to find the y-component of an action-only torque element acting at the I_MARKER (i1).
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function ty &

r_marker_name = cm
Description:

function.
function.
R_marker_name Existing Marker Specifies the marker used as the
R_MARKER (i3) with respect to which
you want Adams to evaluate the function.
If you do not supply this parameter, Adams
will evaluate the function in the ground
reference frame.
panel 165
panel set twindow_function tz

The TZ function returns the z-component of the net torque acting at the I_MARKER (i1), as computed
action-only type of force. You should omit specification of the J_MARKER (i2) and the R_MARKER
(i3), to find the z-component of an action-only torque element acting at the I_MARKER (i1).
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function tz &

r_marker_name = cm
Description:

I_marker_name Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker used as the I_MARKER (i1) in the
J_marker_name Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker used as the J_MARKER (i2) in the
R_marker_name Existing Marker Specifies the marker used as the R_MARKER (i3) with respect
to which you want Adams to evaluate the function. If you do not
supply this parameter, Adams will evaluate the function in the
panel 167
panel set twindow_function variable_value

The VARIABLE_VALUE function returns the value of a VARIABLE you identify in the
VARIABLE_NAME parameter.
This function evaluates the VARIABLE and returns its value. A VARIABLE is defined as a scalar
algebraic equations. A VARIABLE can be used independently, or as part of the PLANT INPUT, PLANT
OUTPUT, or ARRAY elements. The computed value of the VARIABLE may depend on almost any
Adams system variable.
Format:

variable_name= existing solver variable
Example:
panel set twindow_function variable_value &

Description:

Variable_name Existing Solver Variable Specifies an existing variable.
followed by the Adams data set variable ID number. For example, the name of Adams
VARIABLE/101 is VAR101. If you created the variable during preprocessing, you will have
given it a name at that time.
If a variable is owned by the default model, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is
panel 169

If the variable is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics
associated with it.
You need not separate multiple variable picks by commas.
panel set twindow_function vm

The VM function calculates the magnitude of the translational velocity vector of the I_MARKER (i1)
with respect to the J_MARKER (i2).
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function vm &

i_marker_name marker_1 &
j_marker_name marker_2
Description:

I_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker used as the
J_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker used as the
Reference_frame_marker An Existing Marker
1. Mathematically, VM is calculated as follows:
VM = ( [ Vi1 - Vi2] dot_product_of [ Vi1 - Vi2] )**1/2
where Vi1 is the velocity of the I_MARKER (i1) in ground, and Vi2 is the velocity of the
J_MARKER (i2) in ground.
panel 171
Tips:
panel set twindow_function vr

The VR function calculates the radial (relative) velocity of the I_MARKER (i1) with respect to the
J_MARKER (i2).
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function vr &

Description:

I_marker_name An Existing Specifies an existing marker used as the I_MARKER
Marker (i1) in the evaluation of the function.
J_marker_name An Existing Specifies an existing marker used as the J_MARKER
Reference_frame_marke An Existing
r Marker
1. Mathematically, VR is calculated as follows:
VM = ( [ Vi1 - Vi2] dot_product_of [ Ri1 - Ri2] ) / DM(i1,i2)
where Vi1 is the velocity of the I_MARKER (i1) in ground, Vi2 is the velocity of the J_MARKER
(i2) in ground, Ri1 is the displacement of the I_MARKER (i1) with respect to the global origin,
Ri2 is the displacement of the J_MARKER (i2) with respect to the global origin, and DM(i1,i2)
is the distance between markers i1 and i2. When the I_MARKER (i1) and the J_MARKER (i2)
are separating from each other, VR is positive. VR is negative when the I_MARKER (i1) and the
J_MARKER (i2) are approaching each other.
panel 173
Tips:
panel set twindow_function vx

The VX function returns the x-component of the difference between the global velocity vector of the
I_MARKER (i1) and the global velocity vector of the J_MARKER (i2) as computed in the coordinate
system of the R_MARKER (i3).
Format:

r_marker_name = an existing marker
Example:
panel set twindow_function vx &

Description:

I_marker_name An Existing Specifies an existing marker used as the I_MARKER (i1)
Marker in the evaluation of the function.
J_marker_name An Existing Specifies an existing marker used as the J_MARKER (i2)
R_marker_name An Existing Specifies the marker used as the R_MARKER (i3) with
Marker respect to which you want Adams to evaluate the
function.
Reference_frame_marke An Existing
r Marker
1. Mathematically, VX is calculated as follows:
VX = [ Vi1 - Vi2] dot_product_with xi3
(i2) in ground, and xi3 is the unit vector along the x-axis of the R_MARKER (i3).
panel 175
Tips:
2. If you do not supply the the r_marker_name parameter, Adams will evaluate the function in the
panel set twindow_function vy

The VY function returns the y-component of the difference between the global velocity vector of the
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function vy &

Description:

function.
Reference_frame_marker An Existing
Marker
1. Mathematically, VY is calculated as follows:
VY = [ Vi1 - Vi2] dot_product_with yi3
(i2) in ground, and yi3 is the unit vector along the y-axis of the R_MARKER (i3) .
panel 177
Tips:
panel set twindow_function vz

The VZ function returns the z-component of the difference between the global velocity vector of the
Format:

reference_frame_marker an existing marker
=
Example:
panel set twindow_function vz &

Description:

function.
Reference_frame_marker An Existing
Marker
1. Mathematically, VZ is calculated as follows:
VZ = [ Vi1 - Vi2] dot_product_with zi3
(i2) in ground, and zi3 is the unit vector along the z-axis of the R_MARKER (i3) .
panel 179
Tips:
panel set twindow_function wx

The WX function returns the x-component of the difference between the angular velocity vector of the
I_MARKER (i1) in ground and the angular velocity vector of the J_MARKER (i2) in ground, as
computed in the coordinate system of the R_MARKER (i3)
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function wx &

Description:

i_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker used as the
function.
j_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies an existing marker used as the
function.
r_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies the marker used as the R_MARKER
(i3) with respect to which you want Adams to
evaluate the function.
1. Mathematically, WX is calculated as follows:
WX = [wi1 - wi2] dot_product_with xi3
where wi1 is the angular velocity vector of the I_MARKER (i1) in ground, wi2 is the angular
velocity vector of the J_MARKER (i2) in ground, and xi3 is the unit vector along the x-axis of
the R_MARKER (i3) .
panel 181
frame.
Tips:
panel set twindow_function wy

The WY function returns the y-component of the difference between the angular velocity vector of the
computed in the coordinate system of the R_MARKER (i3)
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function wy &

Description:

r_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies the marker used as the R_MARKER (i3)
the function.
1. Mathematically, WY is calculated as follows:
WY = [wi1 - wi2] dot_product_with yi3
velocity vector of the J_MARKER (i2) in ground, and yi3 is the unit vector along the y-axis of
the R_MARKER (i3) .
panel 183
frame.
panel set twindow_function wz

The WZ function returns the z-component of the difference between the angular velocity vector of the
computed in the coordinate system of the R_MARKER (i3).
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function wz &

Description:

function.
function.
1. Mathematically, WZ is calculated as follows:
WZ = [wi1 - wi2] dot_product_with zi3
velocity vector of the J_MARKER (i2) in ground, and zi3 is the unit vector along the z-axis of the
R_MARKER (i3) .
panel 185
frame.
Tips:
panel set twindow_function x_acc

The X_ACC function returns the x-component of the difference between the global acceleration vector
of the I_MARKER (i1) and the global acceleration vector of the J_MARKER (i2) as computed in the
coordinate system of the R_MARKER (i3)
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function x_acc &

panel set twindow_function dm i_marker_name= marker_71 &
Description:

function.
function.
r_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies the marker used as the
R_MARKER (i3) with respect to which you
want Adams to evaluate the function.
1. Mathematically, X_ACC is calculated as follows:
X_ACC = [ ai1 - ai2] dot_product_with xi3
panel 187
where ai1 is the velocity of the I_MARKER (i1) in ground, ai2 is the velocity of the J_MARKER
(i2) in ground, and xi3 is the unit vector along the x-axis of the R_MARKER (i3) .
frame.
Cautions:
1. You must separate multiple marker names by commas.
Tips:
panel set twindow_function x_wdt

The X_WDT function returns the x-component of the difference between the angular acceleration vector
of the I_MARKER (i1) in ground and the angular acceleration vector of the J_MARKER (i2) in ground,
as computed in the coordinate system of the R_MARKER (i3).
Mathematically, X_WDT is calculated as follows:
X_WDT = [i1 - i2] dot_product_with xi3
where wdoti1 is the angular acceleration vector of the I_MARKER (i1) in ground, wdoti2 is the angular
acceleration vector of the J_MARKER (i2) in ground, and xi3 is the unit vector along the x-axis of the
R_MARKER (i3) .
Format:

r_marker_name = existing marker
reference_frame_marker= an existing marker
Example:
panel set twindow_function x_wdt &

Description:

function.
function.
panel 189

Reference_frame_marker Existing marker Specifies the reference frame marker.
R_marker_name Existing marker Specifies the marker used as the R_MARKER
evaluate the function. If you do not supply this
parameter, Adams will evaluate the function in
the ground reference frame.
panel set twindow_function y_acc

The Y_ACC function returns the y-component of the difference between the global acceleration vector
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function y_acc &

panel set twindow_function dm j_marker_name = marker_82 &
panel set twindow_function x_acc reference_frame_marker = marker_74
Description:

function.
function.
r_marker_name An Existing Marker Specifies the marker used as the
R_MARKER (i3) with respect to which you
want Adams to evaluate the function.
1. Mathematically, Y_ACC is calculated as follows:
Y_ACC = [ ai1 - ai2] dot_product_with yi3
panel 191
where ai1 is the acceleration of the I_MARKER (i1) in ground, ai2 is the acceleration of the
J_MARKER (i2) in ground, and yi3 is the unit vector along the y-axis of the R_MARKER (i3) .
frame.
Cautions:
Tips:
panel set twindow_function y_wdt

The Y_WDT function returns the y-component of the difference between the angular acceleration vector
as computed in the coordinate system of the R_MARKER (i3). Mathematically, Y_WDT is calculated
as follows:
Y_WDT = [i1 - i2] dot_product_with yi3
where i1 is the angular acceleration vector of the I_MARKER (i1) in ground, i2 is the angular
acceleration vector of the J_MARKER (i2) in ground, and yi3 is the unit vector along the x-axis of the
R_MARKER (i3) .
Format:

r_marker_name = existing marker
reference_frame_marker= an existing marker
Example:
panel set twindow_function y_wdt &

Description:

R_marker_name Existing marker Specifies the marker used as the R_MARKER (i3)
Adams will evaluate the function in the ground
reference frame.
panel 193
panel set twindow_function yaw

The YAW function calculates the first angle of a body-3 [3 -2 1] Euler rotation sequence which will orient
the J_MARKER (i2) the same as the I_MARKER (i1). Note that mathematically YAW is the same as
AZ.
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function yaw &

i_marker_name = origin &
j_marker_name = cm
Description:

I_MARKER_NAME An Existing Specifies an existing marker used as the I_MARKER (i1)
J_MARKER_NAME An Existing Specifies an existing marker used as the J_MARKER
panel 195
panel set twindow_function z_acc

The Z_ACC function returns the z-component of the difference between the global acceleration vector
Format:

Example:
panel set twindow_function z_acc &

panel set twindow_function dm j_marker_name = marker_82 &
panel set twindow_function x_acc reference_frame_marker = marker_74
Description:

function.
function.
(i3) with respect to which you want adams to
1. Mathematically, Z_ACC is calculated as follows:
Z_ACC = [ ai1 - ai2] dot_product_with zi3
panel 197
where ai1 is the acceleration of the I_MARKER (i1) in ground, ai2 is the acceleration of the
J_MARKER (i2) in ground, and zi3 is the unit vector along the z-axis of the R_MARKER (i3) .
If you created the marker by reading an adams data set or graphics file, the marker name is the
letters MAR followed by the adams data set marker ID number. The name of adams
adams/View will list the markers available by default.
If you created the marker by reading an adams data set or graphics file, the marker name is the
letters MAR followed by the adams data set marker ID number. The name of adams
adams/View will list the markers available by default.
4. If you do not supply this parameter, adams will evaluate the function in the ground reference
frame.
Cautions:
Tips:
panel set twindow_function z_wdt

The Z_WDT function returns the z-component of the difference between the angular acceleration vector
as computed in the coordinate system of the R_MARKER (i3). Mathematically, Z_WDT is calculated
as follows:
Z_WDT = [i1 - i2] dot_product_with zi3
where i1 is the angular acceleration vector of the I_MARKER (i1) in ground, i2 is the angular
acceleration vector of the J_MARKER (i2) in ground, and zi3 is the unit vector along the x-axis of the
R_MARKER (i3) .
Format:

R_marker_name = existing marker
Reference_frame_marker= an existing marker
Example:
panel set twindow_function z_wdt &

Description:

function.
function.
panel 199

R_marker_name Existing marker Specifies the marker used as the R_MARKER
(i3) with respect to which you want to evaluate
frame.
If you created the marker by reading an data set or graphics file, the marker name is the letters
MAR followed by the data set marker ID number. The name of MARKER/101 is MAR101, for
example. If you created the marker during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that time.
f a marker is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you
model 'links', part 'lower_arm' by entering ".links.lower_arm.pivot". If you type a "?", /View will
list the markers available by default.
part 1
part
part attributes
part attributes
Allows you to set attributes for a part:
• Size or scale of icons - You can set a size of the icon used to represent the part in modeling units,
or you can scale its size by a non-unit scale factor.
• Visibility - You can set a part's visibility to on or off, or toggle its current setting. When you set a
part's visibility off, the part will not be drawn and all markers and geometry belonging to the part
are turned off. When you set a part's visibility on, you allow the entire part to be drawn.
• Name Visibility - You can set the visibility of the part's name label to on or off, or toggle its the
current setting.
• Color - You can set the color of the part. You can also set the scope of the color using entity
scope to limit the application of the color. For example, you can set the scope of the color to only
edges.
If an entity does not have a particular attribute setting, it can inherit that from another entity. Inheritance
can be either top down or bottom up. Top down refers to the natural hierarchy of an Adams model. The
hierarchy is a tree structure with the model at the apex. Parts exist beneath the model, and markers exist
beneath the parts
For example, if the icon size of the model is set to 0.1, and the default inheritance is set to top down, then
all icons displayed within the model are displayed at this size. However, if the icon size of a model is set
to 0.1, and the default inheritance is set to bottom up, then any icons set to a size other than the model's
icon size are displayed at their own size.
Format:
part attributes
external_system_name = existing external system
equation_name = existing equation
part 3
part attributes
Example:
part attributes &

size_of_icons = .125 &
color = red &
visibility = on &
entity_scope = fill_color
Description:

part_name Existing Part Specifies the rigid body to be modified
flexible_body_name Existing Flex Body Specifies the flexible body to be modified
external_system_name Existing external system Specifies an external system to be
modified
point_mass_name Existing Point Mass Specifies the point mass to be modified
equation_name Existing Equation Specifies the equation to be modified
scale_of_icons Real Specifies the amount by which you want to
scale the icons.
size_of_icons(Mutually Length Specifies the size, in modeling units, the
exclusive with scale_of_icons) Adams/View icons will appear.
visibility On/off/toggle Specifies the visibility of the part in a
view:
• on - The part is visible.

• off - The part is invisible.
• toggle - Reverses the current state
of the part's visibility.
name_visibility On/off/toggle Specifies whether or not you want the
name of the part displayed in the view
color Existing Color Specifies the color of the part.
entity_scope Controls how a color modification is to
affect a particular graphic entity.
Active On/off/no_opinion Sets the activation status of the part during
a simulation.
dependents_active See explanation for active parameter.
part attributes
1. The scale factor is relative to the current size set. If no initial size is specified for Adams/View
icons, the default size is one modeling LENGTH unit. For example, if the modeling units are
K/M/S, a part axes icon has triad legs of one meter in length.
When you specify scale_of_icons, Adams/View calculates a new size by multiplying the current
size by the scale, and storing the product as the new icon size.
2. For the size_of_icon parameter, if no initial size is specified for Adams/View icons, the default
size is one modeling LENGTH unit. For example, if the modeling units are K/M/S, a part axes
icon has triad legs of one meter in length.
Example:
When you set size_of_icons at the model level, all Adams/View icons used in creating a model
use the size specified. If the model has a size_of_icons set, and a part under that model has a
different size_of_icons, the model's size_of_icons takes precedence.
if the following: are set to:

.model size_of_icons = .125 meters
.part size_of_icons = .15 meters
the part's icon is .125 meters in size
Example:
If the model has size_of_icons of set to 0.0, and a part under that model has a size_of_icons set to
.125, the part's icon size is used.

.model size_of_icons = 0.0 meters
.part size_of_icons = .125 meters
the part's icon is .125 meters in size
3. You can specify any color in the modeling database and no_color. If you specify no_color,
Adams/View uses the default color for this entity if there is no color present in its parent modeling
entity.
Example 1:
In the following example, the geometry (circle) will be red because its parent part is set to red and
it is set to no_color.

.model no_color
part 5
part attributes
.part red
then the geometry is red.
Example 2:
In the following example, the circle will be red because if a parent modeling entity has a color
previously specified, that color takes precedence. Adams/View issues a warning message about
color precedence.

.model no_color
.part red
.geometry(circle) blue
then the geometry is red.
Example 3:
In this example, the parents of the geometry (circle) have no colors set, so the color of the
geometry takes precedence.

.model no_color
.part no_color
.geometry(circle) blue
then the geometry is blue.
4. The values for the entity_scope parameter are:

• fill_color - Applies color to those areas of a graphic that can be shaded (including, sides of a
cylinders, frustums, boxes, and so on).
• edge_color - Applies color to lines making up the edges of the facets (or areas filled by the
fill_color) of a graphic that can be shaded.
• outline_color - Applies color to lines that define the outline of graphics, which cannot be
shaded or filled, such as two points defining an outline using the GRAPHICS statement or the
coil of a spring-damper.
• text_color - Applies color to the text associated with the part (its name).
• all - Applies all three entity types: fill_color, edge_color, and outline_color to the graphic
entity.
entity_scope is optional and if you do not enter it, the default is set to fill_color.
part attributes
5. The active parameter can take the following values: yes - The part is active. no - The part is
written to the dataset as a comment.
• no_opinion - The part inherits the activation status of its parent.
When you set the active attribute on an object, you are also setting it on the children of the object.
If you set active=no on a part, but want the marker on that part to be on, then you must explicitly
set active=yes on the marker, after setting activation on the part.
The dependents_active parameter acts in the same way, but sets the active attribute for the
dependents, all the way down the dependency chain. For example, if you execute the following
command:
• where, PAR1 has a marker MAR1, which is the I marker of a joint JOI1 (which has a J marker
• Also, if the joint JOI1 is referenced in a request function, or if the I marker is referenced by a
status changed individually.
• Group
• Part
• Differential equation
• Marker
• Geometry
• Constraints
• Forces
• Data elements
• Output control
part 7
part copy
part copy
Allows you to create a copy of an existing part (rigid body, equation, flexible body, point mass) within
the same model.
The copy is identical to the original with the exception of the part name. Parts must have unique names
relative to other parts in a given model. The replica is completely independent of the original, and you
can modify it without affecting the original.
All modeling entities under the original part will be copied to the replica, using the same names.
Because the parts have different names, markers under the two parts can have the same names.
Format:
part copy
part_name= existing part name
new_part_name= name of new rigid body
new_flexible_body_name= new flex body
point_mass_name= new point mass
new_point_mass_name= existing point mass
equation_name= new equation
new_equation_name= existing equation
Example:
part copy &

new_part_name = part_3_copy
Description:

part_name Existing Part Specifies the name of the rigid body to be copied
new_part_name New Part Specifies the name of the new rigid body. You can
use this name later to refer to this part.
part copy

view_name Existing View Specifies the view in which to display a part. You
must associate a view with each part you are
copying.
flexible_body_name Existing Flex Body Specifies the name of the flexible body to be copied
new_flexible_body_name New Flex Body Specifies the name of the new flexible body. You
can use this name later to refer to this part.
point_mass_name Existing Point Mass Specifies the name of the point mass to be copied
new_point_mass_name New Point Mass Specifies the name of the new point mass. You can
equation_name Existing Equation Specifies the name of the equation to be copied
new_equation_name New Equation Specifies the name of the new equation. You can
1. Adams/View does not allow you to have two parts with the same name, so you must provide a
unique name.
2. You can identify a view by typing its name or by picking it from the screen. In most cases, you
can enter the special view name all, which means all the views currently displayed.
by commas.
part 9
part create equation differential_equation

Allows you to create or modify a user-defined differential equation.
A differential equation creates a user-defined state variable and defines a first-order differential equation
that describes it. The equation can be dependent on any Adams/Solver state variable available in a
function expression except point-curve and 2D curve-curve constraints. You can create systems of
differential equations using more than one differential equation, linear state equation, or general state
equation.
Both, Adams FUNCTION expressions and user-written subroutines, can access the user-defined state
variables and their derivatives.
FUNCTION expressions access the values by using the function DIF(i1) and the derivatives by using
DIF1(i1). In each case, i1 specifies the ADAMS_ID of the differential equation that defines the variable.
User-written subroutines access the values and derivatives by calling the subroutine, DEQINF.
You describe the variable in a differential equation either by writing a function expression or user-written
subroutine. Because it is easier to write function expressions than subroutines, you should use function
expressions whenever possible to describe user-defined differential variables.
The equation defined by a FUNCTION expression or by a user-written subroutine may be in either
explicit or implicit form. The following equation defines the explicit form of a differential equation:
y' = f (y, q, q', t)
In this equation, y' is the derivative of the user-defined state variable, y is the user-defined state variable
itself, and q is a vector of Adams-defined state variables. If you cannot solve for the first derivative of
the state variable, you need to use the implicit form. The following equation defines the implicit form of
a differential equation:
0 = F (y, y', q, q', t)
Format:

differential_equation_name= new equation
adams_id= integer
comments= string
no_initial_condition= true_only
function= function
user_function= real
static_hold= on/off

implicit= on/off
routine = string
Description:

differential_equation_name New Equation Specifies the name of the equation to be created or
modified
adams_id Integer Assigns a unique ID number to the equation.
Comments String Adds any comments about the equation to help you
initial_condition Real Specifies the initial value of the differential equation at
the start of the simulation.
no_initial_condition True_only Unsets the velocity initial condition for the specified
equation (true) so it no longer has a velocity initial
condition.
Function Function Specifies a function expression or defines and passes
constants to a user-written subroutine to define the
differential equation.
user_function Real Specifies up to 30 values for Adams/Solver to pass to a
subroutine DIFSUB.
static_hold On/off Indicates that equation states are not permitted to
change during static and quasi-static simulations (on).
Implicit On/off Indicates that the function expression or subroutine
defines the implicit form of the equation (on).
of any length. By enclosing the name in double quotes, you can use other printable characters, or
start the name with a numeral. If a name contains characters, or starts with a numeral, you must
always quote the name when entering it.
part 11
comments.)
3. Initial_condition parameter may also specify in case of definition of an implicit equation, an
approximate value of the initial time derivative of the differential equation at the start of the
simulation. (You do not need to supply a second value when you enter an explicit equation
because Adams/Solver can compute the initial time derivative directly from the equation.)
Adams/Solver might adjust the value of the time derivative when it performs an initial conditions
simulation. Entering an initial value for the time derivative helps Adams/Solver converge to a
desired initial conditions solution.
4. Remember, leaving a velocity unset lets Adams/View calculate the velocity of the part during an
initial conditions simulation, depending on the other forces and constraints acting on the part. It
is not the same as setting the initial velocity to zero.
5. Adams/View treats the function parameter as a series of literal strings. When you write an
Adams/Solver dataset, Adams/View writes these strings, just as you enter them here, after the
'FUNCTION=' argument.
If you want to define the equation with an expression, enclose the expression in quotes and enter
it just as you would in the dataset.
If you want to define the equation with a user-written subroutine, enter the character string
"USER(r1[,...,r30])", where r1[,...,r30] are the values you want Adams/Solver to pass to your
user-written subroutine DIFSUB. For example, if you enter "USER(1.,2.,3.)", Adams/Solver calls
your DIFSUB with values 1, 2, and 3. For more information, see the Adams/Solver Subroutines
online help
6. Many Adams/Solver statements and commands feature the construct
FUNCTION=USER(r1,r2,...,r30), which specifies that Adams/Solver is to obtain element
characteristics by loading and calling a specific user subroutine from a specific library of user
subroutines. For example, Adams/Solver calls the SFOSUB subroutine for the SFORCE
statement.
The ROUTINE argument allows you to optionally specify an alternative library and user
subroutine name for some or all elements.
The ROUTINE argument takes a string argument:
ROUTINE=libname::subname
The delimiter, ::, is required to separate the library name from the subroutine name. Both the
libname and the subname are optional, but the :: delimiter is required to distinguish the library
name. For example, to specify that a different subroutine name, mysfo, is to be loaded from the
default subroutine library (the library that was mentioned when Adams/Solver was run in run-user
mode), you should write:
ROUTINE=mysfo
or
ROUTINE=::mysfo
If the default name (for example SFOSUB for SFORCE) is acceptable but the user subroutine is
to be loaded from a library 'mylib', you must write:
ROUTINE=mylib::
part 13
The table below lists the default names for user subroutines for Adams/Solver statements and
commands.
Statement/Command Default User Subroutine

MOTION MOTSUB
FIELD FIESUB
SFORCE SFOSUB
STORQUE SFOSUB
MFORCE MFOSUB
GFORCE GFOSUB
VFORCE VFOSUB
VTORQUE VTOSUB
VARIABLE VARSUB
DIFF DIFSUB
SENSOR SENSUB
SENSOR SEVSUB
REQUEST REQSUB
CURVE CURSUB
SURFACE SURSUB
CONTROL CONSUB
COUPLER See the COUPLER and GSE section below.
GSE See the COUPLER and GSE section below.
Note: The subroutine specified by the ROUTINE argument must have the same argument list as
the default subroutine. Only the name is changed. Failure to satisfy this requirement results
in unpredictable runtime failure.
Just like many elements of a particular type can share the default user subroutine, many elements
may share an alternative user subroutine. In other words, a group of your SFORCE elements may
use the SFOSUB in the default library while a different group of SFORCE elements is using
mylib::mysfo.
You can either fully qualify the name and location of the library or rely on Adams/Solver to search
for the library using predefined rules. For example, ROUTINE argument can specify absolute
paths:
ROUTINE=/home/jdoe/mylibs/libsforces.so::sfo312
or relative paths with abbreviated library names:
ROUTINE=mylibs/sforces::sfo312
In the latter case, you would be relying on Adams/Solver knowing to search in /home/jdoe (see
the PREFERENCES statement (C++ or FORTRAN) for details about the library search path) and
built-in search-rules that first look for the specified name, and failing that, try to prepend the lib
prefix and an architecture specific suffix (.dll on the Microsoft Windows platform, .sl on the HP-
UX platform and .so on other UNIX platforms and Linux).
COUPLER and GSE
The COUPLER and GSE elements deserve special mention because they require more than one
user subroutine.
The COUPLER element requires that three subroutines be provided. This is handled by providing
a comma separated list of three libname::subname pairs, for example:
ROUTINE=lib1::cou1, lib2::cou2, lib3::cou3
where lib1, lib2, and lib3 can be three different libraries. The default names for these subroutines
are COUSUB,COUXX,COUXX2, in that order.
The GSE case is further complicated by the fact that the GSE subroutine interface has recently
been redesigned and the ROUTINE argument had been previously reserved to address the now
deprecated GSESUB interface. To specify the new GSE_DERIV, GSE_OUTPUT,
GSE_UPDATE, GSE_SAMP subroutines for GSE, use the INTERFACE argument:
INTERFACE=lib1::gse1,lib2::gse2,lib3::gse3,lib4::gse4
to specify the subroutines that default to GSE_DERIV, GSE_OUTPUT, GSE_UPDATE,
GSE_SAMP, in that order. You can specify deprecated GSE subroutine interface using:
ROUTINE=lib1::gse1,lib2::gse2,lib3::gse3,lib4::gse4,lib5::gse5
to specify the subroutines that default to GSESUB, GSEXX, GSEXU, GSEYX, GSEYU, in that
order.
1. The user-specified initial conditions are retained as the static equilibrium values. Note that this
does not guarantee that the time derivatives of the user-defined variable will be zero after static
analysis.
2A0D0210000000
part 15
part create equation linear_state_equation

Allows you to create a linear_state_equation.
Format:

linear_state_equation_name = a new lse
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
x_state_array_name = an existing array
u_input_array_name = an existing array
y_output_array_name = an existing array
ic_array_name = an existing array
a_state_matrix_name = an existing matrix
b_input_matrix_name = an existing matrix
c_output_matrix_name = an existing matrix
d_feedforward_matrix_name = an existing matrix
static_hold = on_off
Example:
part create equation linear_state_equation &

linear_state_equation_name = lse__1 &
adams_id = 10 &
comments = "a new lse" &
x_state_array_name = array__1 &
a_state_matrix_name = matrix__1
Description:

linear_state_equation_name A New Lse Specifies the name of the new
linear_state_equation.
adams_id Adama_Id Specifies an integer used to identify this element

or modified.
x_state_array_name An Existing Array Specifies the array in the model which will be
used as the state array for this linear system.
u_input_array_name An Existing Array Specifies the array name in the current model
which will be used as the input (or control) array
for this linear system
(LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION).
y_output_array_name An Existing Array Specifies the array name in your model which
will be used as the output array for this linear
system (LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION)
ic_array_name An Existing Array Specifies the array in the model which will be
used as the initial conditions array for this linear
system (LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION).
a_state_matrix_name An Existing Matrix Specifies the matrix in the model which is used as
the state matrix for this linear system
b_input_matrix_name An Existing Matrix Specifies the matrix in the model which is used as
the control matrix for this linear system
c_output_matrix_name An Existing Matrix Specifies the matrix in the model which is used as
the output matrix for this linear system
d_feedforward_matrix_name An Existing Matrix Specifies the matrix in your model which is used
as the feedforward matrix for this linear system
static_hold On_Off Indicates that equation states are not permitted to
change during static and quasi-static analysis.
1. The LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION is used, along with associated arrays and matrices
statements, to define a system of constant coefficient, explicit, differential, and algebraic
equations in the classic state-space format.
The Linear State Equation (LSE) is designed to model a linear, time-invariant control system
defined in the state space, especially to facilitate importing of controllers developed in with
external software. It can be used, however, to define any arbitrary set of coupled constant-
coefficient differential and algebraic equations which can be expressed in matrix notation as:
| dX/dt | | A | B | |X|
< ----- > = | ----- | < - >
| Y | | C | C | |U|
part 17
where, at least the A matrix must be non-zero. The LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION follows

standard control systems terminology, where X is the state vector, Y is the output vector, U is the
input vector and IC is the initial condition vector, X(t=0). In the Adams data set, each of these
vectors is defined using an ARRAY. Similarly, A is the state matrix, B is the control matrix, C is
the output matrix, and D is the feedforward matrix. Each of these matrices is defined using a
MATRIX. All MATRIX and ARRAY sizes must be conformable as required by the above
equation. ARRAYs with zero-length and zero-sized matrices should not be defined; Adams will
correctly formulate the system equations based on those ARRAYs and MATRIXs which do exist.
2. You may use this name later to refer to this linear_state_equation. Adams/View will not allow you
to have two linear_state_equations with the same name, so you must provide a unique name.
assumed.
yourself.
5. The user must have an array with the name specified by the x_array_name parameter, in their
model and it may not be used in any other LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION,
GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION or TRANSFER_FUNCTION.
6. When the Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY_NAME parameter is used, the user must have an array with this
name in the model and it may not be used in any other LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION,
GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION or TRANSFER_FUNCTION.
When the Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY_NAME parameter is used, the user must also include a
C_OUTPUT_MATRIX or D_FEEDFORWARD_MATRIX name, or both, in the
LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION definition, and these matrices must have the same number of
rows as there are elements in the Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY_NAME.
7. When the IC_ARRAY_NAME parameter is used, the user must have an array with this name in
their model and it must have the same number of elements as the X_STATE_ARRAY (equal to
the number of rows in the A_STATE_MATRIX). When no IC array is specified for a
LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION, all states are initialized to zero.
8. The user must have a MATRIX with this name in their model, it must be a square matrix (same
number of rows and columns) and it must have the same dimension as the X_STATE_ARRAY.
If the user has specified an inconsistent size for the X_STATE_ARRAY, Adams will issue a
warning message and automatically resizes the X_STATE_ARRAY to match the
A_STATE_MATRIX.
9. When the B_INPUT_MATRIX_NAME parameter is used, the user must also include a
U_INPUT_ARRAY_NAME parameter in the LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION definition. You
must have a matrix with this name in your model. This matrix must have the same number of rows
as the A_STATE_MATRIX and the same number of columns as the number of elements in the
U_INPUT_ARRAY.
10. When the C_OUTPUT_MATRIX parameter is used, you must also include a
Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY parameter in the LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION definition. You must
have a matrix with this name in your model. This matrix must have the same number of columns
as the A_STATE_MATRIX and the same number of rows as the number of elements in the
Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY.
11. When the D_FEEDFORWARD_MATRIX_NAME parameter is used, you must also include
both Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY_NAME and U_INPUT_ARRAY_NAME parameters in the
LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION definition. You must have a matrix with this name in your
model. This matrix must have the same number of rows as the number of elements in the
Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY and the same number of columns as the number of elements in the
U_INPUT_ARRAY.
12. The user specified initial conditions are retained as the static equilibrium values. Note that this
analysis.
part 19
part create equation transfer_function

Allows you to create or modify a user-defined transfer function.
You can use transfer functions to define an arbitrary set of constant-coefficient, differential and algebraic
equations that can be expressed in the Laplace domain as the following where m k:
Transfer functions are especially useful for describing elements from control-system block diagrams. The
characteristic equation for a single transfer function can be a polynomial of degree less than 30.
Internal to Adams/Solver, there is an algorithm to automatically convert the list of fixed numerator and
denominator coefficients to the following elements:
• Canonical state-space form.
• Set of coupled, linear, constant-coefficient differential equations
• Single algebraic equation
You define the arrays for a transfer function using array data elements. The arrays define the transfer
function input and let you reference the states and output of the transfer function. Initial conditions for a
transfer function are assumed to be identically zero.
Format:

transfer_function_name= new tfsiso
adams_id= integer
comments= string
x_state_array_name= existing array
u_input_array_name= existing array
y_output_array_name= existing array
ic_array_name= existing adams array
static_hold= on_off
numerator_coefficients= real
denominator_coefficients= real
Description:

transfer_function_name New TFSISO Specifies the name of the equation to be created
or modified
adams_id Integer Assigns a unique ID number to the equation.
comments String Adds comments about the equation to help you
x_state_array_name Existing Array Specifies the array that defines the state variable
array for the transfer function.
u_input_array_name Existing Array Specifies the array that defines the input (or
control) for the transfer function. The array
must be an inputs (U) array. If you specified the
size of the array when you created it, it must be
one.
y_output_array_name Existing Array Specifies the array that defines the output for
the transfer function.
static_hold On/off Indicates that equation states are not permitted
to change during static and quasi-static
simulations (on).
numerator_coefficients Real Specifies the coefficients of the polynomial in
the numerator of the transfer function.
denominator_coefficients Real Specifies the coefficients of the polynomial in
the denominator of the transfer function.
Ic_array_name Existing Adams Array Specifies an existing Adams array.
of any length.
part 21
Comments:
For comments, you can enter any alphanumeric characters. The comments that you create appear in the
Information window when you select to display information about the object, in the Adams/View log file
and in a command or dataset file when you export your model to these types of files. (Note that design
variables are not output to datasets; therefore, neither are their comments.)
1. The array specified in the x_state_array_name must be a states (X) array, and it cannot be used in
any other linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function. If you specified the
size of the array when you created it, it must be one less than the number of coefficients in the
denominator.
2. The array specified in the y_state_array_name must be an outputs (Y) array, and it cannot be used
in any other linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function. If you specify the
size of the array when you created it, its size must be one.
3. For the static_hold parameter, the user-specified initial conditions are retained as the static
equilibrium values. Note that this does not guarantee that the time derivatives of the user-defined
variable will be zero after static analysis.
During a static simulation, Adams/Solver finds equilibrium values for user-defined differential
variables (differential equations, general state equations, linear state equations, and transfer
functions), as well as for the displacement and force variables. The equilibrium values it finds
change the initial conditions for subsequent simulations. To help you control the static simulation
results, Adams/View provides an option that you can set to keep the values constant. This option
is called static hold. Static hold retains the user-specified initial conditions as the static
equilibrium values.
If you do not set static hold, Adams/Solver sets the time derivatives of the user-defined variables
to zero during a static simulation, and uses the user-supplied initial-condition values only as initial
guesses for the static solution. Generally, the final equilibrium values are not the same as the
initial condition values. Adams/Solver then uses the equilibrium values of the user-defined
variables as the initial values for any subsequent simulation, just as with the equilibrium
displacement and force values.
If you do set static hold, Adams/Solver retains the user-specified initial conditions as the static
equilibrium values. Therefore, the final equilibrium values are the same as the user-specified
initial conditions. Note that this does not guarantee that the time derivatives of the user-defined
variable are zero after a static simulation.
4. For the numerator_coefficients and the denominator_coefficients, list the coefficients in order of
ascending power of s, starting with s to the zero power, including any intermediate zero
coefficients. The number of coefficients for the denominator must be greater than or equal to the
number of coefficients for the numerator.
part create external_system initial_velocity

Allows you to create initial velocities on an existing external system part.
Format:

external_system_name = an existing part
vm = existing marker
wm = existing marker
vx = velocity
no_vx = true_only
vy = velocity
no_vy = true_only
vz = velocity
no_vz= true_only
wx = angular_vel
no_wx = true_only
wy = angular_vel
no_wy = true_only
wz = angular_vel
no_wz = true_only
Example:
part create external_system initial_velocity &

external_system_name= external_system_1 &
vm = cm &
wm = marker_1 &
vx = 1.02 &
vy = 1.01 &
vz = 1.05 &
no_wz = true
part 23
Description:

external_system_name Existing external system You use this parameter to identify the existing
external system part to affect with this command.
vm Existing marker Specifies the marker representing the translational
velocity.
wm Existing marker Specifies the marker representing the rotational
velocity about it.
vx Velocity Specifies the initial translational velocity of the
center-of-mass marker along the x-axis of the
no_vx True_only Specifies to "UNSET" the "vx" velocity initial
condition for the specified part, if set.
vy Velocity Specifies the initial translational velocity of the
center-of-mass marker along the y-axis of the
no_vy True_only Specifies to "UNSET" the "vy" velocity initial
vz Velocity Specifies the initial translational velocity of the
center-of-mass marker along the z-axis of the
no_vz True_only This is not the same as setting the value to zero. A
zero velocity is not the same as "no" velocity.
Therefore, by setting this parameter to true there is
no longer a velocity initial condition for this
element.
wx Angular_velocity Specifies the initial rotational velocity of the
center-of-mass marker about its x-axis.
no_wx True_only Specifies to "UNSET" the "wx" angular_velocity
initial condition for the specified part, if set.
wy Angular_velocity Specifies the initial rotational velocity of the
center-of-mass marker about its y-axis.
no_wy True_only Specifies to "UNSET" the "wy" angular_velocity
wz Angular_velocity Specifies the initial rotational velocity of the
center-of-mass marker about its z-axis.
no_wz True_only Specifies to "UNSET" the "wz" angular_velocity
1. Translational velocities are specified by parameters VX, VY, and VZ.
Rotational velocities are specified by parameters WX, WY, and WZ.
Note: The initial translational velocities are with respect to the ground coordinate axes, while the
initial rotational velocities are with respect to the center-of-mass marker axes.
2. You may identify an external system by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
a. If the external system part is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also
find it convenient to type the name even if the part is displayed.
b. If you created the part by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the part name is the letters
PART/101 is PAR101.
c. If you created the part during preprocessing, you will have given it a name at that time.
d. If a part is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you
must enter its full name. To identify a part under another model, for instance, you may need
to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify part 'arm' from model 'robot'
e. You must separate multiple part names by commas. If the part is visible in one of your views,
you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics associated with it.
f. You need not separate multiple part picks by commas.
7. Note that the initial translational velocities are with respect to the ground coordinate axes, while
the initial rotational velocities are with respect to the center-of-mass marker axes.
8. Setting no_vx or no_vy or no_vz is not the same as setting the corresponding velocity value to
zero. A zero velocity is not the same as "no" velocity. Therefore, when this parameter is set to
true, there is no longer a velocity initial condition for this element.
9. Setting no_wx, no_wy, no_wz is not the same as setting the corresponding angular velocity value
to zero. A zero angular_velocity is not the same as "no" angular_velocity. Therefore, when this
parameter is set to true, there is no longer an angular_velocity initial condition for this element.
part 25
part create external_system name_and_position

Allows you to create an external system part by specifying its name and position.
Format:

external_system_name = a new external system
type = boolean
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
input_file_name = string
interface_routines = string
location = location
Example:
part create external_system name_and_position &

external_system_name = external_system_1 &
adams_id = 1 &
type = nastran &
planar = yes &
Description:

external_system_name New external system Specifies the name of the external system
to be created.
type Nastran, Marc, user The type of external system. Defaults to
'nastran' if not specified.
view_name Existing View Specifies the view in which to display
this part.
input_file_name String File containing the input source
parameters for the external system.
modal_neutral_file_name String An optional (rigid only) MNF, if a visual
representation of the external system is
required.
md_db_file_name String An optional MD DB, if a visual
required.
index_in_database Integer Index of the body in the specified MD
DB. Valid only if the parameter
md_db_file_name is specified.
user_function Real Specifies up to 30 values for
Adams/Solver to pass to a user-written
subroutine. Valid only if the external
system type is 'user'.
interface_routines Function Specifies an alternative library and
subroutine names for the user subroutines
EXTSYS_DERIV, EXTSYS_UPDATE,
EXTSYS_OUTPUT, EXTSYS_SAMP,
EXTSYS_SET_NS,
EXTSYS_SET_ND,
EXTSYS_SENSUB,
EXTSYS_SET_STATIC_HOLD,
EXTSYS_SET_SAMPLE_OFFSET,
respectively.
part 27

location Location Specifies x, y, and z coordinates defining
the flexible body's location in a given
reference frame defined in the parameter
relative_to.
orientation Orientation Specifies the orientation method
along_axis_orientation Location Specifies the orientation method
in_plane_orientation Location Specifies the in_plane orientation method
relative_to Existing model, part or marker Specifies a reference frame relative to
which the location and orientation are
defined. Leave blank or enter model
name to use the global coordinate system.
1. The position of the external system part can be broken down into two parts:
a. LOCATION
It can be specified by supplying three coordinates corresponding to the current coordinate
system type. For example, if the current coordinate system type is 'cartesian', you would
supply an X, Y, and Z. You may also specify location by "clicking" on an existing part or
marker, with the mouse cursor, that has the same desired location.
b. ORIENTATION
It can be specified by three different methods in Adams/View.
The first is by supplying three angles that correspond to the current orientation type. For
example, if the current orientation type is 'body313' you would supply Z,X',Z'' rotation angles.
You may also supply three angles by "clicking" on an existing part or marker, that has the
same desired orientation. The second method is called the ALONG_AXIS_ORIENTATION.
This method specifies the orientation by directing one of the axes. Adams/View will assign an
arbitrary rotation about that axis. The third and final method is called
IN_PLANE_ORIENTATION. This method specifies orientation by directing one of the axes,
All location and orientation coordinates will be relative to the coordinate system specified in
the parameter RELATIVE_TO. RELATIVE_TO defaults to the global origin of the model.
2. Currently, there are three types supported for an external system: nastran, marc and user. If the
parameter is not specified, it defaults to 'nastran'.
3. The input file name defines the source for the external analysis component. Nominally, this is a
string defining a path and input file, but can potentially be interpreted by the external analysis
component in an arbitrary manner.
4. Note that the parameters user_function and 'interface_routines' are valid only for external systems
that are of type 'user'.
5. When a valid rigid only MNF or an MD-DB (with the optional index) parameters are specified,
the external system will have a visual representation. Interactive marker creation and swap
operations (for a rigid or a flex body) are supported for such systems. However, these parameters
are optional. When not specified, the external system will have no visual representation.
default name. The default name that AdamsAdams/View provides will specify the parentage that
it has assumed.
yourself.
by commas.
part 29
coordinate system.
By default, you supply Euler (body313, or body-fixed z, x, z) angles.You may change this
coordinate system.
12. You may enter either one or two locations for the in_plane_orientation parameter to direct the
the axis will be parallel to, and pointing the same way as the vector from the first location to the
coordinate system.
14. The six coordinates are below.
• X X coordinate
• Y Y coordinate
• Z Z coordinate
• PSI Psi angle
• THETA Theta angle
• PHI Phi angle
You may enter these coordinates in any order. If Adams has to alter the part position to obtain
consistent initial conditions, it does not vary the coordinates you specify with this parameter
unless Adams must vary them to satisfy the initial conditions you specify for a joint or for a
motion.
part 31
part create flexible_body initial_velocity

Allows you to create initial velocities on an existing part.
Translational velocities are specified by parameters VX, VY, and VZ.
Note that the initial translational velocities are with respect to the ground coordinate axes, while the
Format:

vm= existing marker
wm= existing marker
vx= velocity
no_vx= true_only
vy= velocity
no_vy= true_only
vz= velocity
no_vz= true_only
wx= angular_vel
no_wx= true_only
wy= angular_vel
no_wy= true_only
wz= angular_vel
no_wz= true_only
Example:
part create flexible_body initial_velocity &

flexible_body_name = flex_body__2 &
vm = int_node_12001 &
vx = 200 &
no_vy = true &
no_vz = true
This will apply a translational velocity of 200 at the center-of-mass marker along the x-axis of the ground
reference frame.
Description:

flexible_body_name Existing flex body Specifies the name of the flexible body.
vm Existing marker Specifies a marker about whose axes the translational
velocity vector components will be specified.
wm Existing marker Specifies a marker about whose axes the angular
vx Velocity Specifies the initial translational velocity of the center-
of-mass marker along the x-axis of the ground
reference frame.
no_vx True_only Unsets the vx velocity initial condition for the
specified part (true) so it no longer has a velocity
initial condition.
vy Velocity Specifies the initial translational velocity of the center-
of-mass marker along the y-axis of the ground
reference frame.
no_vy True_only Unsets the vy velocity initial condition for the
specified part (true) so it no longer has an velocity
initial condition.
vz Velocity Specifies the initial translational velocity of the center-
of-mass marker along the z-axis of the ground
reference frame.
no_vz True_only Unsets the vz velocity initial condition for the
initial condition.
wx Angular_velocity Specifies the initial rotational velocity of the center-of-
mass marker about its x-axis.
no_wx True_only Unsets the wx velocity initial condition for the
initial condition.
wy Angular_velocity Specifies the initial rotational velocity of the center-of-
mass marker about its y-axis.
no_wy True_only Unsets the wy velocity initial condition for the
initial condition.
part 33

wz Angular_velocity Specifies the initial rotational velocity of the center-of-
mass marker about its z-axis.
no_wz True_only Unsets the wz velocity initial condition for the
specified part (true) so it no longer has an velocity
initial condition.
Tips:
1. Remember, leaving a velocity unset lets /View calculate the velocity of the part during an initial
conditions simulation, depending on the other forces and constraints acting on the part. It is not
the same as setting the initial velocity to zero.
part create flexible_body modal_ics

Allows you to set the initial conditions parameters on a flexible body, including the selected modes, the
initial displacements and velocities and the modal exact coordinates for selected modes.
Format:

flexible_body_name = existing flex_body
selected_modes = real
initial_modal_displacements = real
initial_modal_velocities = real
modal_exact_coordinates = integer
set_ic_modes = integer
modal_ic_displacements = real
modal_ic_velocities = real
Description:

flexible_body_name Existing flex_body Specifies the name of the flexible body.
selected_modes Real Specifies which modes to include when
computing the modal integrals for use by
Adams/Solver.
initial_modal_displacements real Specifies the initial displacements for the
selected modes.
initial_modal_velocities Real Specifies the initial velocities for the selected
modes.
modal_exact_coordinates Integer Specifies integers that correspond to the modal
coordinates you want held exact during initial
conditions displacement analysis.
set_IC_modes Integer Specifies a list of modes to use when setting
modal_IC_displacement or
modal_IC_velocities.
modal_IC_displacements Real Specifies a displacement IC to use for the modes
specified in set_IC_modes.
modal_IC_velocities Real Specifies a velocity to use for the modes
part 35
1. Note that when you change the selected modes, you should also modify any initial conditions that
you have set.
If you created a marker by reading an Adams/Solver dataset or graphics file, the marker name is
the letters MAR followed by the dataset marker ID number. For example, the name of
You may have explicitly named an analysis when you created it by reading one or more Adams
output files (graphics (.gra), request (.req), or results (.res)). By default, the name of the analysis
is the root name of the Adams output files without the extension. If you created the analysis by
reading an Adams graphics file, for example, the analysis name is the name of the graphics file
without the .gra extension.
part create flexible_body name_and_position

Allows you to create or modify a flexible body. You specify a modal neutral file (MNF) or an MD DB
file and Adams/View creates the necessary Adams/View geometry for displaying the flexible body. It
also creates a mesh on the flexible body representing the flexible body nodes.
By default, Adams/Flex places the flexible body so the flexible body’s local body reference frame
(LBRF) is at the origin of the global coordinate system. The LBRF corresponds to the origin of the finite
element (FE) environment in which the body was originally modeled. You can also set the location and
orientation.
Format:

flexible_body_name = new flex body
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
view_name = existing view
matrices = existing matrix
damping_ratio = function
damping_routine = string
generalized_damping = off/full/internal_only
dynamic_limit = real
location = location
relative_to = existing model part or marker
exact_coordinates = exact_coordinates
invariants = boolean
characteristic_length = real
stability_factor = real
part 37
Example:
part create flexible_body name_and_position &

modal_neutral_file_name = "d:\msc.software\adams\con_rod.mnf" &
comments = "example of creating a flexible body"
Description:

flexible_body_name New Flex Body Specifies the name of the flexible body to be
created or modified
adams_id Integer Assigns a unique ID number to the part.
comments String Adds comments about the part to help you manage
and identify it.
view_name Existing View Specifies the view in which to display the part.
You may identify a view by typing its name or by
picking it from the screen. In most cases, you can
enter the special view name all, which means, all
the views currently displayed.
You must separate multiple view names by

commas. You need not separate multiple view
picks by commas.
modal_neutral_file_name String This parameter is mutually exclusive to the MD
DB file. Specifies the name of the MNF
md_db_file_name String This parameter is mutually exclusive to the MNF
file. Specifies the name of the MD DB file to
create the flex body from.
index_in_database Integer The parameter applies only, when the user is
creating a flexible body out of the MD DB. The
parameter specifies the index of the flexible body
in the specified MD DB. The parameter is
optional. If not specified, it is assumed to have the
value 1.
matrices Existing Matrix Specifies the names of seventeen matrices for the
modal representation of the flexible body.
damping_ratio Function Specifies the damping ratio to be used.
damping_routine String Specifies the path to user-written subroutine to be
used to define modal damping.

generalized_damping Off, full, Sets generalized damping:
internal_only
• off - Disables the generalized damping.
• full - Enables the complete generalized
damping matrix, including the effects of a
resultant damping force.
• internal_only - Only enables the portion
of the generalized damping matrix
corresponding to the modal coordinates
(i.e. ignore the resultant damping force).
dynamic_limit Real Specifies the threshold frequency for quasi-static
modes.
location Location Specifies x, y, and z coordinates defining the
flexible body's location in a given reference frame
defined in the parameter relative_to.
along_axis_orientation Location Specifies the orientation method.
relative_to Existing Model, Part Specifies a reference frame relative to which the
or Marker location and orientation are defined. Leave blank
or enter model name to use the global coordinate
system.
exact_coordinates X, Y, Z, PSI, THETA, Specifies as many as six part coordinates that
PHI, NONE, ALL Adams/View is not to change as it solves for the
initial conditions.
invariants Yes, No Lists nine on/off values used to control the
invariants
characteristic_length Real Specifies the characteristic length of the flexible
body for linear limit check. This should be in the
model length unit. The linear limit is defined as
10% of this length.
stability_factor Real Specifies the amount of damping needed to add to
the quasi-static modes.
part 39
of any length. By enclosing the name in double quotes, you can use other printable characters, or
start the name with a numeral. If a name contains characters, or starts with a numeral, you must
always quote the name when entering it.
comments.)
If an entity is available by default, you can identify it by entering only its name. If it is not, you
part 41
extension.
• The matrices compose the modal integrals used by Adams/Solver during
simulation. In general, if you enter the MNF, you do not need to specify names for
the matrices.
• For the damping_ratio parameter, do one of the following:
• Do not specify to accept the default nonzero damping as follows:
• 1% damping for all modes with frequency lower than 100.
• 10% damping for modes with frequency in the 100-1000 range.
• 100% critical damping for modes with frequency above 1000.
• Enter the scalar damping ratio that you want applied to all modes.
• For example if you would like to apply 1% damping enter 0.01. For more
examples you can see FLEX_BODY statement documentation
• Enter Adams run-time function expressions to create complex damping
phenomena in your flexible body. In addition, function expressions, such as
FXFREQ and FXMODE, allow you to apply different levels of damping to
individual modes.
Several types of damping are inherently present in mechanical systems.
Understanding the source and level of damping are important in the simulation and
testing of dynamic systems. For example, a mechanism having low natural
frequencies and relatively low damping, could produce damaging motions under
resonant conditions.
Applying damping judiciously can also improve simulation performance for
models containing flexible bodies. For example, consider a flexible body with a 10
kHz mode whose shape is considered essential to allowing the body to assume a
particular deformation. Any response in this mode at its resonant frequency
dictates integration steps on the order of 1E-5 seconds, which can be unacceptable
for long duration simulations. If the damping for this mode is set at 100% of
critical damping, however, any resonant response is immediately suppressed. The
mode's compliance is retained but its dynamics are eliminated and the simulation
performance is improved.
Damping Dissipation and Damping Matrix

The damping force on a flexible body is proportional to its generalized velocities and is assumed
to be derivable from the quadratic form:
where:
• D is a symmetric matrix of damping coefficients
q
• is a vector of generalized velocities:
x 
y 
 
z 
 
wx
wy
 
q  wz 
q1 
 
. 
. 
 
. 
q 2 
 
• x·  y·  z· are the absolute time derivatives of the position vector coordinates of the local part
reference frame with respect to the local part reference frame.
• w x w y w z are the angular velocity vector coordinates with respect to the local part reference
frame.
• q· 1  q· 2 are the time derivatives of the modal coordinates.
The matrix D is composed of two parts, Dm and Dg :

D = Dm + Dg
Dm represents the contribution of proportional modal damping, and Dg represents the contribution
of a generalized damping matrix. Both are explained in the next section.
Specifying Modal Damping
part 43
The modal damping matrix Dm is diagonal and defined using critical damping ratios  i for each
mode i= 1,n.
where  and m1 are the generalized stiffness and mass for mode i.
Note: The damping ratio  i does not need to be constant. It can be a function of time or system
state.
If you do not specify modal damping when you create the flexible body, Adams/Flex applies a
default, non-zero critical damping ratio as follows:
• 10% damping for modes with frequency in the 100 to 1000 range.
You can change the default modal damping in three ways:
• Assign a single scalar critical damping ratio that Adams/Flex applies uniformly to all modes.
• Enter Adams run-time function expressions to create complex damping phenomena in your
flexible body. In addition, function expressions, such as FXFREQ and FXMODE, allow you
to apply different levels of damping to individual modes.
• Control the damping using the DMPSUB user-written subroutine. DMPSUB lets you set
different levels of damping for different modes and the damping can vary over time. For more
on writing subroutines, see the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help.
To assign modal damping when creating or modifying a flexible body:
1. In either the Create a Flexible Body dialog box or Flexible Body Modify dialog box, clear the
selection of default (use default in the Create a Flexible Body dialog box).
2. In the Damping Ratio text box, either:
• Enter the critical damping ratio.
• Enter a function. To get help building the function, next to the Damping Ratio text box, select
the More button . The Adams/View Function Builder appears. For information on using
the Function Builder, see the Adams/View Function Builder online help.
3. Continue creating or modifying the body, and then select OK.

Specifying Generalized Damping
The generalized damping matrix Dg is a constant symmetric matrix of the form:
 Dg D g TR D g TM 
 TT 
Dg   D T
g D g RR D g RM 
 T TR 
 D g TM DT
g D g MM 
 RM 
To better understand how the generalized damping matrix is handled in Adams/Flex, it is helpful
to start with the discrete finite element equations of motion
Mx·· + Bx·· + Kx·· = F
where:
• M, B, and K are the finite element mass, stiffness, and damping matrices, respectively.
• x·· is the nodal coordinate vector.

• is the applied force vector.
The damping matrix B is derived from damping elements and parameters defined in the finite
element model. The previous equation can be transformed into modal coordinates:
P T MPq·· + P T BPq· + P T KPq = P T F where P is the matrix of mode shapes stored
column-wise and q is the vector of modal coordinates P T BP represents the generalized damping
matrix. However, before Adams/Flex can use the generalized damping matrix, the portion P T BP
of that projects onto the rigid body modes must be transformed to the nonlinear, large motion,
generalized coordinates: X, Y,  , Z,  , and  used to represent the flexible bodys large overall
motion in Adams/Solver (C++). To this end, a m x 6 transformation matrix, A, is constructed and
transforms m rigid body modes to the six coordinates X ,Y, Z,  ,  , and  , and the final
generalized matrix Dg is computed:
A T 0  T A 0 
Dg    P BP  
 0 I n  n  0 I n  n 
If the damping description in the finite element model results in a resultant damping force, there
will be nonzero entries in the sub-matrices Dg  Dg
TT TR Dg T M Dg RR Dg RM .
Because the resultant damping force was derived from a linear finite element model governed by
small strain approximations and infinitesimal rotations, a resultant damping force may yield
unexpected results in the context of large overall motion supported in Adams. Therefore,
Adams/Flex provides the option to ignore the resultant damping force. Ignoring a resultant
damping force is referred to as internal-only generalized damping.
part 45
Because the generalized matrix Dg is derived from the component finite element model, you can
leverage the damping elements and features in the finite element program. This is particularly
useful for defining non-proportional and spatially-dependent damping. Furthermore, the
generalized damping matrix is stored in the MNF to be optionally applied to the flexible body.
That is, because you defined damping in the finite element model, it is not necessary to employ it
in Adams. To enable generalized damping, however, you must have a generalized damping matrix
stored in your MNF.
To specify generalized damping when creating or modifying a flexible body:
1. In either the Create a Flexible Body dialog box or Flexible Body Modify dialog box, set
Generalized Damping to:
• Off - Disables the generalized damping.
• Full - Enables the complete generalized damping matrix, including the effects of a resultant
damping force.
• Internal Only - Only enables the portion of the generalized damping matrix corresponding to
the modal coordinates (i.e. ignore the resultant damping force).
3. Orientation of rigid or flexible body using three rotation angles. Adams/View orients the body
starting from the initial coordinate system and applying three successive rotations. Depending on
the convention you select, the rotations occur about space-fixed or body-fixed axes in any
combination of the x, y, and z axes. By default, you supply body 313 (body-fixed z, x, z) angles.
Adams/View applies your orientation angles with respect to the coordinate system in the
Orientation Relative To or Relative To text box.
Along Axis Orientation
Orientation of a rigid or flexible body by directing one of its axes. Adams/View assigns an
arbitrary rotation about the axis. Two points are needed to define an axis but you can enter either
one or two points to direct the axis. If you enter two points, the axis points from the first location
to the second. If you enter one point, Adams/View uses the location you specified in the Location
text box as the first point and the new location as the second point.
Adams/View applies the location coordinates in the coordinate system you identify in the
Location Relative To or Relative To text box.
positions the coordinate system with an arbitrary rotation about the axis. If you must completely
control the coordinate system orientation, select Orientation or In Plane Orientation.
By default, you direct the z-axis of the coordinate system. You can use the DEFAULTS
ORIENT_AXIS_AND_PLANE AXIS_AND_PLANE_SETTING command to change this
convention. For example, selecting either X_AXIS_XY_PLANE or X_AXIS_XZ_PLANE
directs the x-axis. The plane-convention setting does not affect this parameter.
You can also direct the axis graphically using the marker’s position handle. Simply point the
appropriate axis on the marker in the desired direction.
In Plane Oriention
Orientation of the rigid or flexible body by directing one of the axes and locating one of the
coordinate planes.
In Plane Orientation
To define an axis and a plane, you need three points. You can enter either two or three locations, however.
If you enter three locations, the axis points from the first location to the second and the plane is parallel
to the plane defined by the three locations. If you enter only two locations, Adams/View uses the location
you specified in the Location text box as the first point and the other two locations as the second and third
points.
Adams/View applies the location coordinates in the coordinate system in the Relative To text box.
By default, you direct the z-axis of the coordinate system marker and locate the zx plane. You can
use the DEFAULTS ORIENT_AXIS_AND_PLANE AXIS_AND_PLANE_SETTING
command to change this convention. For example, selecting X_AXIS_XY_PLANE directs the x-
axis and orients the xy plane.
4. The six coordinates for the exact_coordinates parameter are:
• X - X coordinate
• Y - Y coordinate
• Z - Z coordinate
• PSI - Psi angle
• THETA - Theta angle
• PHI - Phi angle
You can enter these coordinates in any order. If Adams/View has to alter the part position to
obtain consistent initial conditions, it does not vary the coordinates you specify with this
parameter unless Adams/View must vary them to satisfy the initial conditions you specify for
a joint or for a motion.
part 47
5. Adams/Flex computes the time varying mass matrix of the flexible body using nine inertia
invariants. (For details, see Theory of Flexible Bodies.) Four combinations of invariants have
special significance and they are provided with Adams/Flex. In most cases, the modal basis in the
MNF is an orthogonal set including six rigid body modes. Theoretically, invariant 3 and 4 are zero
in this situation even though you may see some small non-zero entries due to numerical errors.
So, invariants 3 and 4 are disabled in all the four combinations by default. If you want to enable
them, you can choose to customize the invariant formulation. The standard formulations are:
• Rigid body - In this formulation, Adams/Flex disables invariant 6, the modal mass, and the
flexible body is considered rigid. Adams/View ignores all modes, even those you enable,
during the simulation. The results of the flexible body simulation closely resemble those for
an Adams rigid part although formulation differences can cause subtle result variations.
• Constant - In this formulation, Adams/Flex disables invariants 3, 4, 5, 8 and 9. The flexible
body's inertial properties are unaffected by deformation (that is, deformation and rigid body
motion are uncoupled).
The Constant option may only have academic value because computational savings will be
modest while potentially having a dramatic effect on results. When you select Constant,
Adams/View does not account for changes in the moment of inertia due to deformation.
• Partial coupling - In this formulation, which is the default, Adams/Flex disables invariants 3,
4, 5 and 9. Invariants 5 and 9 provide a second-order correction to the flexible body inertia
tensor. These invariants impose the greatest computational overhead on the evaluation of the
flexible body equations of motion. Disabling these invariants can reduce CPU time
significantly while having minor impact on results in most cases.
• Full coupling - In this formulation, Adams/Flex enables all of the invariants except for
invariants 3 and 4. Use this method to achieve full accuracy.
When Adams/Flex creates a flexible body, it uses the Partial Coupling formulation by default
because Partial Coupling has significant computational efficiency over the more accurate Full
Coupling formulation. You should verify, however, that your model does not require Full
Coupling.
You should always be careful when using the Constant formulation even when you expect
deformations to be small. Use it only after careful experimentation.
The Rigid Body formulation removes all flexibility effects, and you should only use it as a
debugging tool.
To set a modal formulation:
1. In the Inertia modeling area of the Flexible Body Modify dialog box, select a formulation option
or select Custom.
When you select Custom, Adams/Adams/Flex displays a Custom Inertial Modeling dialog box
that lets you set up the invariants that you want selected.
2. Use the dialog box to select the inertia invariants, and then select OK.
You can also use this dialog box to view the effects of the different options. For example, select
Partial Coupling to view the invariants that option disables and enables.
part create new_ground

Allows you to create a new part and makes it the ground part. This feature is useful when incrementally
designing a model.
Format:

part_name = a new part
Example:
part create new_ground &

part_name = part_1
Description:

part_name A New Part Specifies the name of the new part. You may use this name later to refer
to this part.
assumed.
part 49
Cautions:
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two parts with the same name, so you must provide a
unique name.
part create point_mass initial_velocity

Allows you to create initial velocities on an existing point mass.
Note that the initial translational velocities are with respect to the ground coordinate axes.
Format:

point_mass_name= existing point_mass
vm= existing marker
vx= velocity
no_vx= true_only
vy= velocity
no_vy= true_only
vz= velocity
no_vz= true_only
Example:
part create point_mass initial_velocity &

point_mass_name = point_mass__2 &
vx = 200 &
no_vy = true &
no_vz = true
reference frame.
Description:

Point_mass_name Existing point_mass Specifies the name of an existing point mass.
part 51

vx Velocity Specifies the initial translational velocity of the center-of-
mass marker along the x-axis of the ground reference
frame.
no_vx True_only Unsets the vx velocity initial condition for the specified part
(true) so it no longer has a velocity initial condition.
vy Velocity Specifies the initial translational velocity of the center-of-
mass marker along the y-axis of the ground reference
frame.
no_vy True_only Unsets the vy velocity initial condition for the specified part
vz Velocity Specifies the initial translational velocity of the center-of-
mass marker along the z-axis of the ground reference frame.
no_vz True_only Unsets the vz velocity initial condition for the specified part
1. You can specify initial velocities for parts. AdamsAdams/View uses the initial velocity during the
initial conditions simulation, which it runs before it runs a simulation of your model.
You can specify translational and angular velocities for rigid bodies and only translational
velocity for point masses.
• Translational velocity defines the time rate of change of a part’s center of mass with respect to
ground or another marker in your model. You can specify translational velocity for each vector
component of the marker.
• Angular velocity defines the time rate of change of a part’s rotational position with respect to the
CM marker of the part or another marker in your model. You can specify angular velocity for
each vector component of the marker.
If you specify initial velocities, Adams/View uses them as the initial velocity of the part during
assemble model operations, regardless of any other forces acting on the part. You can also leave
some or all of the velocities unset. Leaving a velocity unset lets Adams/View calculate the
velocity of the part during an assemble operation depending on the other forces and constraints
acting on the part. Note that it is not the same as setting the initial velocity to zero. Setting an
initial velocity to zero means that the part will not be moving in the specified direction when the
simulation starts, regardless of any forces and constraints acting upon it.
Tips:
2. Note that the initial translational velocities are with respect to the ground coordinate axes.
part create point_mass mass_properties

Creates the mass properties on an existing point mass.
The mass properties of a point_mass include the mass and the center-of-mass marker. You may assign
zero mass to a point_mass whose three degrees of motion you constrain with respect to bodies that do
have mass. However, due to the number of changes that you may make to the dataset in the course of
defining a model, the probability of a later change requiring that the point mass have mass is high.
Therefore, we recommend that you assign finite (although insignificant) masses and inertias to point
masses that you would otherwise assign zero mass properties.
If you specify the mass for a point_mass, you must also specify the center-of-mass marker for the
point_mass.
Format:

point_mass_name= existing point_mass
mass= mass
center_of_mass_marker= existing marker
density= density
material_type= existing material
Description:

point_mass_name Existing point mass Specifies the name of the part to create or modify.
Mass Mass Specifies the mass of the point mass.
center_of_mass_marker Existing marker Enter the marker that is to be used to define the
center-of-mass (CM) for the part.
density Density Specifies the part density and that the mass
properties of the part are to be automatically
calculated.
material_type Existing material Specifies the material type of the part and that the
mass properties of the part are to be automatically
calculated.
part 53
1. If the point mass has no mass, Adams/View uses the point mass local part reference frame (LPRF)
to represent the position of the point mass internally. If the point mass has mass, Adams/View
uses the position of the center-of-mass marker to represent the translational position of the point
mass internally.
The orientation of the point_mass and the center-of-mass marker have no effect on the simulation.
2. If the point mass has mass, Adams/View uses the position of the CM marker to represent the
translational position of the point mass internally.
3. Adams/View uses the part’s density and the volume of the geometry to calculate its mass and
inertia.
Standard Material Properties
The following table shows the material properties for the standard material types in Adams/View.
All material types in Adams/View are assumed to be linearly elastic. Adams/View automatically
calculates the material’s Shear Modulus (G) from the Young’s Modulus (E) and Poisson’s Ratio
() according to the equation:
E
G = ---------------------
21 + 
Young’s Modulus value Density

The material: (Newton/meter2): Poisson’s Ratio: (kg/meter3):
Aluminum 7.1705E+ 10 0.33 2740.0
Cast iron 1.0E+11 0.211 7080.0
Steel 2.07E+11 0.29 7801.0
Stainless steel 1.9E+11 0.305 7750.0
Magnesium 4.48E+10 0.35 1795.0
Nickel 2.07E+11 0.291 7750.0
Glass 4.62E+10 0.245 2595.0
Brass 1.06E+11 0.324 8545.0
Copper 1.19E+11 0.326 8906.0
Lead 3.65E+10 0.425 11370
Titanium 1.0204E+11 0.3 4850.0
Tungsten 3.447E+11 0.28 19222
Wood 1.1E+10 0.33 438.0
any length.
or course, delete this name and use your own. The form of a full name is:
part 55
part create point_mass name_and_position

Allows you to create a point mass by specifying its name and position. You must supply a unique name
for the new part, or accept the name that Adams/View generates for you.
You define the position of the point mass by:
• Location - You can specify the location by supplying three coordinates corresponding to the
current coordinate system type. For example, if the current coordinate system type is Cartesian,
you would supply an x, y, and z. You can also specify location by clicking on an existing part or
marker that has the same desired location.
• Orientation - You can use the three different methods in Adams/View:
• Orientation
• Along-axis orientation
• In_plane_orientation
All location and orientation coordinates are relative to the coordinate system specified in the parameter
relative_to.
relative_to defaults to the global origin of the model.
Format:

point_mass_name= new point mass
adams_id= adams_id
comments= string
location= location
relative_to= existing model part or marker
exact_coordinates= exact_coordinates
Description:

Point_mass_name New Point Mass Specifies the name of the point mass to create or
modify.
comments String Adds comments about the part to help you manage
and identify it.
view_name Existing view Specifies the view in which to display the part.
location Location Specifies x, y, and z coordinates defining the flexible
body's location in a given reference frame defined in
the parameter relative_to.
relative_to Existing Model, Specifies a reference frame relative to which the
Part or Marker location and orientation are defined. Leave blank or
enter model name to use the global coordinate system.
exact_coordinates X, Y, Z, PSI, Specifies as many as six part coordinates that
THETA, PHI, Adams/View is not to change as it solves for the initial
NONE, ALL conditions.
length.
part 57
comments.)
must enter its full name. To identify an entity under a different part, you may need to enter the
You must separate multiple entity names by commas. If the entity is visible in one of your views, you can
identify it by picking it. You need not separate multiple element picks by commas.
extension.
by commas.
5. FThe along_axis_orientation parameter specifies the orientation of a rigid or flexible body by

directing one of its axes. Adams/View assigns an arbitrary rotation about the axis. Two points are
needed to define an axis but you can enter either one or two points to direct the axis. If you enter
two points, the axis points from the first location to the second. If you enter one point,
Adams/View uses the location you specified in the Location text box as the first point and the new
location as the second point.
Adams/View applies the location coordinates in the coordinate system you identify in the
Location Relative To or Relative To text box. Note that this does not completely dictate the
orientation of the coordinate system. Adams/View positions the coordinate system with an
arbitrary rotation about the axis. If you must completely control the coordinate system orientation,
select Orientation or In Plane Orientation.
By default, you direct the z-axis of the coordinate system. You can use the DEFAULTS
convention. For example, selecting either X_AXIS_XY_PLANE or X_AXIS_XZ_PLANE
directs the x-axis. The plane-convention setting does not affect this parameter.
You can also direct the axis graphically using the marker?s position handle. Simply point the
appropriate axis on the marker in the desired direction.
6. IThe in_plane_orientation parameter specifies the orientation of the rigid or flexible body by
directing one of the axes and locating one of the coordinate planes.
To define an axis and a plane, you need three points. You can enter either two or three locations,
however. If you enter three locations, the axis points from the first location to the second and the
plane is parallel to the plane defined by the three locations. If you enter only two locations,
Adams/View uses the location you specified in the Location text box as the first point and the
other two locations as the second and third points. Adams/View applies the location coordinates
in the coordinate system in the Relative To text box. By default, you direct the z-axis of the
part 59
coordinate system marker and locate the zx plane. You can use the DEFAULTS
convention. For example, selecting X_AXIS_XY_PLANE directs the x-axis and orients the xy
plane.
• PSI - Psi angle
• PHI - Phi angle
parameter unless Adams/View must vary them to satisfy the initial conditions you specify for a
joint or for a motion.
part create rigid_body initial_velocity

Allows you to create initial velocities on an existing part
Format:

vm = an existing marker
wm = an existing marker
vx = velocity
no_vx = true_only
vy = velocity
no_vy = true_only
vz = velocity
no_vz = true_only
wx = angular_vel
no_wx = true_only
wy = angular_vel
no_wy = true_only
wz = angular_vel
Example:
part create rigid_body initial_velocity &

vm = cm &
wm = marker_1 &
vx = 1.02 &
vy = 1.01 &
vz = 1.05 &
no_wz = true
part 61
Description:

part_name An Existing Part Specifies the part to be modified. You use this parameter to
identify the existing part to affect with this command.
vm An Existing Marker
wm An Existing Marker
vx Velocity Specifies the initial translational velocity of the center-of-mass
marker along the x-axis of the ground reference frame.
no_vx True_Only Specifies to "UNSET" the "vx" velocity initial condition for the
specified part, if set.
vy Velocity Specifies the initial translational velocity of the center-of-mass
marker along the y-axis of the ground reference frame.
no_vy True_Only Specifies to "UNSET" the "vy" velocity initial condition for the
specified part, if set.
vz Velocity Specifies the initial translational velocity of the center-of-mass
marker along the z-axis of the ground reference frame.
no_vz True_Only This is not the same as setting the value to zero. A zero velocity
is not the same as "no" velocity. Therefore, by setting this
parameter to true there is no longer a velocity initial condition for
this element.
wx Angular_Vel Specifies the initial rotational velocity of the center-of-mass
marker about its x-axis.
no_wx True_Only Specifies to "UNSET" the "wx" angular_velocity initial ondition
for the specified part, if set.
wy Angular_Vel Specifies the initial rotational velocity of the center-of-mass
marker about its y-axis.
no_wy True_only Specifies to "UNSET" the "wy" angular_velocity initial
wz Angular_vel Specifies the initial rotational velocity of the center-of-mass
marker about its z-axis.
no_wz True_only Specifies to "UNSET" the "wz" angular_velocity initial
at that time.
associated with it.
5. Setting no_wx, no_wy, no_wz is not the same as setting the corresponding angular velocity value
to zero. A zero angular_velocity is not the same as "no" angular_velocity. Therefore, when this
parameter is set to true, there is no longer a angular_velocity initial condition for this element.
part 63
part create rigid_body mass_properties

Allows you to create mass properties on an existing part.
Format:

mass = mass
center_of_mass_marker = an existing marker
inertia_marker = an existing marker
ixx = inertia
iyy = inertia
izz = inertia
ixy = inertia
iyz = inertia
izx = inertia
material_type = an existing material
density = density
Example:
part create rigid_body mass_properties &

mass = 1.85 &
center_of_mass_marker = marker__1 &
material_type = steel
Description:

parameter to identify the existing part to be affected
with this command.
mass Mass Specifies the part mass

center_of_mass_marker An Existing Marker Specifies the marker that defines the part center of
mass and, in the absence of the inertia marker, the
axes for the inertia properties.
inertia_marker An Existing Marker Specifies the marker that defines the axes for the
inertia properties. If you do not supply an inertia
marker, it defaults to the part center-of-mass marker.
ixx Inertia Specifies the xx component of the mass-inertia
tensor as computed about the origin of the inertia
marker, and expressed in the coordinates of the
inertia marker reference frame.
iyy Inertia Specifies the yy component of the mass-inertia
izz Inertia Specifies the zz component of the mass-inertia
ixy Inertia Specifies the xy component of the mass-inertia
iyz Inertia Specifies the yz component of the mass-inertia
izx Inertia Specifies the zx component of the mass-inertia
material_type An Existing Material Specifies the part material_type and that the mass
calculated
calculated.
1. The mass properties of a part include the mass, mass-inertia tensor, center-of-mass marker, and
inertia marker.
part 65
You may assign zero mass to a part whose six degrees of motion you constrain with respect to
parts that do have mass. However, due to the number of changes that you may make to the data
set in the course of defining a model, the probability of a later change requiring that the part have
mass is high. Consequently, you are encouraged to assign finite (although insignificant) masses
and inertias to parts you would otherwise give zero inertial properties.
A part without mass cannot have moments of inertia. If you specify the mass and moments of
inertia for a part, you must also specify the center-of-mass marker for the part.
at that time.
associated with it.
3. If the part has no mass, Adams uses the part LPRF to represent the position and orientation of the
part internally.
If the part has mass, Adams uses the position of the center-of-mass marker to represent the
translational position of the part internally and uses the principal axes of the inertia tensor about
the center-of-mass marker to represent the orientation of the part internally. This internal frame
of reference is referred to as the part principal axes frame.
4. If the part has mass, Adams uses the position of the center-of-mass (CM) marker to represent the
translational position of the part internally and uses the principal axes of the inertia tensor about
the CM marker to represent the orientation of the part internally. This internal frame of reference
is referred to as the part principal axes frame.
5. The inertia matrix is defined as follows:
[ Ixx -Ixy -Ixz]
[ ]
J = [-Ixy Iyy -Iyz]
[ ]
[-Ixz -Iyz Izz]
It is a symmetrical, positive definite matrix. Compute the individual terms as follows:
Ixx = Integral (y**2 + z**2) dm
Iyy = Integral (x**2 + z**2) dm
Izz = Integral (x**2 + y**2) dm
Ixy = Integral xy dm
Ixz = Integral xz dm
Iyz = Integral yz dm
In the above formulae, x, y, and z are the components of displacement of an infinitesimal mass
particle of mass dm, measured from the origin of the inertia marker in the reference frame of the
inertia marker. The integral is performed over the entire mass of the body. If you do not specify
the inertia marker, then it defaults to the center-of-mass marker. In that case, you compute these
quantities about the origin of the center-of-mass marker in the reference frame of the center-of-
mass marker.
Tips:
1. The calculated mass properties are based upon the solid geometry that belongs to the part.
part 67
part create rigid_body name_and_position

Allows you to create a rigid body part by specifying its name and position.
Format:

part_name = a new part
ground_part = boolean
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
location = location
Example:

ground_part = yes &
adams_id = 1 &
comments = " a new ground part" &
planar = yes &
Description:

part_name A New Part Specifies the name of the new part. You
part.
ground_part Boolean

adams_id Adams_Id Specifies an integer used to identify this
comments String Specifies comments for the object
being created or modified.
view_name An Existing View Specifies the view in which to display
this part.
location Location Specifies the location of the origin of a
coordinate system (e.g. marker or part).
orientation Orientation Specifies the orientation of a coordinate
system (e.g. marker or part) using three
rotation angles.
along_axis_orientation Location Specifies the orientation of a coordinate
system (e.g. marker or part) by
directing one of the axes. Adams/View
will assign an arbitrary rotation about
the axis.
in_plane_orientation Location Specifies the orientation of a coordinate
system (e.g. marker or part) by
directing one of the axes and locating
relative_to An Existing Model, Part Or Marker Specifies the coordinate system that
location coordinates and orientation
angles correspond to.
exact_coordinates Exact_Coordinates Specifies as many as six part
coordinates that Adams is not to change
as it solves for the initial conditions.
1. You must supply a unique name for the new part, or accept the name that Adams/View has
generated for you.
The position of the rigid body part can be broken down into two parts:
location, and orientation.
LOCATION can be specified by supplying three coordinates corresponding to the current
coordinate system type. For example, if the current coordinate system type is 'cartesian', you
would supply an X, Y, and Z. You may also specify location by "clicking" on an existing part or
ORIENTATION can be specified by three different methods in Adams/View.
part 69
The first is by supplying three angles that correspond to the current orientation type. For example,
if the current orientation type is 'body313' you would supply Z,X',Z'' rotation angles. You may
also supply three angles by "clicking" on an existing part or marker, that has the same desired
orientation. The second method is called the ALONG_AXIS_ORIENTATION. This method
specifies the orientation by directing one of the axes. Adams/View will assign an arbitrary
rotation about that axis. The third and final method is called IN_PLANE_ORIENTATION. This
method specifies orientation by directing one of the axes, and locating one of the coordinate
planes.
All location and orientation coordinates will be relative to the coordinate system specified in the
parameter RELATIVE_TO. RELATIVE_TO defaults to the global origin of the model.
assumed.
yourself.
by commas.
coordinate system.
coordinate system.
coordinate system.
part 71
• X X coordinate
• Y Y coordinate
• Z Z coordinate
• PSI Psi angle
• PHI Phi angle
motion.
part delete
part delete
Allows you to delete an existing part (rigid body, equation, flexible body, point mass, or rigid stress
object). You must enter the name of the part you want to delete by either picking it from the screen or
You can reverse this deletion using an undo command.
Format:
part delete
equation_name = existing equation
external_system_name = existing external system
rigid_stress_name = existing rigid stress
Example:
part delete &

part_name = part_2
Description:

part_name Existing Part Specifies the name of the rigid body to be deleted
equation_name Existing Equation Specifies the name of the equation to be deleted
flexible_body_name Existing Flex Body Specifies the name of the flexible body to be deleted
external_system_name Existing External Specifies the name of an existing external system to
System be deleted
point_mass_name Existing Point Mass Specifies the name of the point mass to be deleted
rigid_stress_name Existing Rigid Stress Specifies the name of the rigid stress object to be
deleted
part 73
part delete
Note: • You created a marker by reading an Adams/Solver dataset or graphics file, the
extension
part display
part display
Allows you to display the part (rigid body, flexible body, or point mass) in the specified view. If you do
not specify a view, Adams/View displays the model in the active view. This command can be useful when
the entire part is no longer visible in the current view space because it fits the model into the current view.
Format:
part display
part_name= existing part
flexible_body_name= existing flex body
point_mass_name= existing point mass
fit_to_view= boolean
Example:
part display &

part_name = part_1
Description:

part_name Existing part Specifies the name of the rigid body to be displayed
flexible_body_name Existing flex body Specifies the name of the flexible body to be displayed
point_mass_name Existing point mass Specifies the name of the point mass to be displayed
view_name Existing view Specifies the view in which to display this model.
fit_to_view Yes/No Controls whether or not to compute the extents of the
model or part before displaying the model or part in a
view. This parameter is optional and has a default value
of on.
by commas.
part 75
part merge rigid_body

Allows you to merge one part into another part. The part identified in part name is the part being merged
and the model identified in into_part_name is the destination model into which part_name will be
merged. The source part will not be changed after the merge operation.
Notes on merging:
Note: • If the parts differ in mass properties, the destination part's properties are used. If
they differ in density, the destination part's material will be used.
• Children of the two parts that have the same names will be renamed after the
merge with an integer appended (for example, marker_1 would become
marker_1_1).
Format:

into_part_name= existing part
Example:
part merge rigid_body &

into_part_name = part_3
Description:

Part_name Existing part Specifies the part to be merged into the destination part.
Into_part_name Existing part Specifies the name of the new part into which the part listed in part
name will be merged.
length.
part 77
part modify equation differential_equation

Allows you to modify an existing user defined differential equation.
Format:

differential_equation_name = an existing equation
new_differential_equation_name = a new equation
adams_id = integer
comments = string
no_initial_condition = true_only
function = function
implicit = on_off
Example:
part modify equation differential_equation &

differential_equation_name = diff__1 &
new_differential_equation_name = diff__2 &
static_hold = on &
no_initial_condition = true
Description:

differential_equation_name An Existing Equation Specifies the differential_equation to be
modified. You use this parameter to
identify the existing differential_equation
tobe affected with this command.
new_differential_equation_name A New Equation Specifies the name of the new
differential_equation. You may use this
differential_equation.

initial_condition Real Specifies the initial value of the
user_defined differential variable and,
optionally, an approximate value of the
initial time derivative.
no_initial_condition True_Only Specifies that if an initial condition has
been set, to "UNSET" the initial condition
for the specified
DIFFERENTIAL_EQUATION.
function Function Specifies an expression, or defines and
passes constants to a user-written
subroutine to define the differential
equation.
static_hold On_Off Indicates that equation states are not
permitted to change during static and quasi-
static analysis.
implicit On_Off Specifies that the FUNCTION expression
or the DIFSUB subroutine defines the
implicit form of your differential equation.
1. A differential equation describes a user-defined variable in terms of its time derivative. The
equation may be dependent on any system displacement, velocity, or acceleration; on any applied
force; or on any other state variable defined by other differential equations.
Both, Adams FUNCTION expressions and user-written subroutines, can access the user-defined
state variables and their derivatives.
FUNCTION expressions access the values by using the function DIF(i1) and the derivatives by
using DIF1(i1). In each case, i1 specifies the ADAMS_ID of the differential equation that defines
the variable.
User-written subroutines access the values and derivatives by calling the subroutine DEQINF.
You can describe the variable in the differential equation either by writing a FUNCTION
expression or by writing a user-written subroutine.
Because it is easier to write FUNCTION expressions than it is to write subroutines, you should
use FUNCTION expressions whenever possible to describe user-defined differential variables.
The equation defined by a FUNCTION expression or by a user-written subroutine may be in
either explicit or implicit form. The following equation defines the explicit form of a differential
equation:
y' = f (y, q, q', t)
part 79
In this equation, y' is the derivative of the user-defined state variable, y is the user-defined state
variable itself, and q is a vector of Adams-defined state variables. If you cannot solve for the first
derivative of the state variable, you need to use the implicit form. The following equation defines
the implicit form of a differential equation:
0 = F (y, y', q, q', t)
Since differential_equation does not have a geometric position, Adams/View displays
ID number. For example, the name of Adams DIFF/101 is DIF101. If you created the
differential_equation during preprocessing, you will have given it a name at that time.
If a differential_equation is owned by the default model, you may identify it by entering only its
name. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a differential_equation under a different
model, for instance, you may need to enter the model name as well.
For example, you may specify differential_equation 'fluid_volume' from model 'hydro' by
entering ".hydro.fluid_volume'". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the differential_equation
assumed.
yourself.
6. The first value of the initial_condition parameter is the value of the user- defined variable at the
start of the simulation. If you have entered an implicit equation, the second value may also need
to be specified, which is an approximate value of the time derivative of the user-defined variable
at the start of the simulation. Adams may adjust the value of the time derivative when it performs
an initial conditions analysis. Entering an initial value for the time derivative may help Adams
converge to an initial conditions solution. If you enter an explicit equation, you do not need to
supply the second value since Adams can compute the initial time derivative directly from the
equation.
7. Setting the no_initial_condition parameter is not the same as setting the value to zero. A zero
initial condition is not the same as "no" initial condition. Therefore, when this parameter is set to
true, there is no longer an initial condition for this element.
8. Adams/View treats this parameter as a series of literal strings. When you write an Adams data set,
If you want to define the equation with an expression, enclose the expression in quotes and enter
it just as you would in the data set.
See the Adams User's Manual for information on writing function expressions. If your expression
is longer than 65 characters, you should break it up into separate strings so it does not extend past
the Adams 80-character line-length limit. Adams/View will write each string on a separate line in
the data set.
If you want to define the equation with a user-written
subroutine, enter the character string "USER(r1[,...,r30])",
where r1[,...,r30]
part 81
are the values you want Adams to pass to your user-written subroutine DIFSUB. If you enter
"USER(1.,2.,3.)", for instance, Adams will call your DIFSUB with values 1, 2, and 3. See the
Adams User's Manual for more information on using DIFSUBs.
9. The user specified initial conditions are retained as the static equilibrium values. Note that this
analysis.
10. In this case, Adams will set the derivative of the state variable to a value that makes the value of
FUNCTION zero. If you do not specify IMPLICIT, Adams assumes that either the expression or
the user-written subroutine defines the explicit form of the equation. In this case, the time
derivative of the state variable is set to the value of FUNCTION.
Cautions:
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two differential_equations with the same name, so you
part modify equation general_state_equation

Allows you to modify an existing general_state_equation.
The equation command allows you to create and manage equation elements in your model. These
elements include differential_equations, transfer_functions, linear_state_equations, and
general_state_equations. EQUATIONS help you model controls system elements or any other
phenomena that can be represented by differential equations. Adams/View makes it easier for you to
identify these equations by allowing you to assign them names and drawing them as icons on the screen.
During preprocessing, the icons for the EQUATIONs you create are displayed at or near the origin of
your model by Adams/View. All EQUATIONs are "owned" by a particular model and then you reference
these EQUATIONs in the definition of other model objects.
A GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION is used along with associated ARRAYs and user-subroutines to
define a system of explicit differential and (optionally) algebraic equations in state-space form. The state
derivatives and outputs for a GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION may be user defined functions of the
states, inputs, and time. The GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION is designed to model a nonlinear, time-
varying system. It is especially useful in importing nonlinear system models developed elsewhere, into
Adams. The set of coupled differential and algebraic equations which can be expressed in matrix notation
as:
{(dX/dt)/Y} = {f({X},{U},t)}
The GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION definition is restricted to explicit functions of the states and
inputs. However, because the VARIABLEs included in the u_input_array can be completely general, the
user can write GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION equations that implicitly depend on any available
Adams variable. The GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION follows standard control systems terminology,
where X is the state array, Y is the output array, U is the input array, and IC is the initial condition array,
X(t=0). In Adams/View, each of these vectors is defined using an particular ARRAY. All ARRAY sizes
must be consistent with the GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION definition. ARRAYs with zero-size and
zero-valued partial derivative matrices should not be defined; Adams will correctly formulate the system
equations based on those ARRAY statements and derivatives which do exist. The current values for the
state derivative and output vectors of this GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION are computed in the user-
supplied GSESUB subroutine (see the Adams Users Manual section on the "GSESUB"), much as the
user would do for any other user-written subroutine. Additionally, the user must provide GSEXX,
GSEXU, GSEYX and GSEYU subroutines (see the proper sections in the Adams Users Manual for a
description of these routines) to compute the necessary internal partial derivatives in accordance with the
values of df_dx_method, df_du_method, dg_dx_method, and the dg_du_method flags. Note that optional
computation of these partial derivatives using finite differencing is planned for a future release of Adams.
Format:

general_state_equation_name = an existing gse
new_general_state_equation_name = a new gse
adams_id = integer
part 83

comments = string
state_equation_count = integer
discrete_state_equation_count = integer
output_equation_count= integer
x_state_array_name= an existing array
u_input_array_name= an existing array
y_output_array_name= an existing array
df_dx_method = gse_xxflag
df_du_method = gse_flag
dg_dx_method = gse_flag
dg_du_method = gse_flag
Example:
general_state_equation_name = .model_1.gse_1 &

adams_id = 1 &
x_state_array_name = .model_1.array_18 &
u_input_array_name = .model_1.array_16 &
y_output_array_name = .model_1.array_17 &
ic_array_name = .model_1.array_19 &
static_hold = on &
user_function = 1.0 &
state_equation_count = 1 &
output_equation_count = 1 &
interface_routines = "force" &
comments = "none"
Description:

general_state_equation_name An Existing Gse Specifies the general state equation to
modify
new_general_state_equation_name A New Gse Specifies the name of a new general state
equation
adams_id Integer Specifies a integer used to identify this
element in Adams data file
comments String Specifies the comments about the object
being created or modified
state_equation_count Integer Specifies the number of state equations to
be used to define the system
discrete_state_equation_count Integer Specifies the number of discrete state
equations to be used to define the system
output_equation_count Integer Specifies the number of output equations to
be used to define the system
x_state_array_name An Existing Array Specifies the array to represent the state
array
u_input_array_name An Existing Array Specifies an array to be used as input or
control of linear system
y_output_array_name An Existing Array Specifies an array name to be used as output
array
ic_array_name An Existing Array Specifies the array name for stating the
initial conditions of linear system
discrete_state_array_name An Existing Array Specifies the array to represent the discrete
state array
discrete_ic_array_name An Existing Array Specifies the array name for stating the
initial conditions of linear system
df_dx_method Gse_xxflag Specifies how to compute the matrix of
partial derivatives of the state equations
with respect to the states
df_du_method Gse_flag Specifies whether or not and how to
compute the matrix of partial derivatives of
the state equations with respect to the inputs
dg_dx_method Gse_flag Specifies whether or not and how to
compute the matrix of partial derivatives of
the output equations with respect to the
states
part 85

dg_du_method An Existing Specifies whether or not and how to
Matrix compute the matrix of partial derivatives of
the output equations with respect to the
inputs
discrete True_only Specifies discrete GSE
sample_period Real Specify sampling time
static_hold On_off Indicates that the equations states are not
changed during static and quasi-static
analysis
user_function Real Specifies the constants to be passed to
GSESUB
1. Specifies the general_state_equation to modify. You use this parameter to identify the existing
general_state_equation to affect with this command. You may identify a general_state_equation
by typing its name or by picking it from the screen. Since general_state_equation do not have a
geometric position, Adams/View displays general_state_equation icons at or near the model
origin. If the general_state_equation icon is not visible on the screen, you must type the name.
You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the general_state_equation icon is
displayed. If you created the general_state_equation by reading an Adams data set or graphics file,
the general_state_equation name is the letters GSE followed by the Adams data set
general_state_equation ID number. The name of Adams GSE/101 is GSE101, for example. If you
created the general_state_equation during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that time. If a
general_state_equation is available by default, you may identify it by entering its name only. If it
is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a general_state_equation under a different model,
general_state_equation 'fluid_volume' from model 'hydro' by entering ".hydro.fluid_volume'". If
you type a "?", Adams/View will list the general_state_equation available by default. You must
separate multiple general_state_equation names by commas. If the general_state_equation is
visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the graphics associated with
it. You need not separate multiple general_state_equation picks by commas.
2. The new name specifies the name of the new general_state_equation. You may use this name later
to refer to this general_state_equation. Adams/View will not allow you to have two
general_state_equations with the same full name, so you must provide a unique name. Normally,
entity names are composed of alphabetic, numeric, or '_' (underscore) characters, and start with
an alphabetic or '_' character. They may be any length. By enclosing the name in double quotes,
you may use other printable characters, or start the name with a numeral. If a name contains
characters, or starts with a numeral, you must always quote the name when entering it. Note that
you can specify the parentage of an entity (e.g. what part "owns" a marker or a geometry element)
when you CREATE it by changing the name. If you enter just the entity name, then the default
parent will be assigned by Adams/View. If you type in the full name, then you may over ride the
default parent. In most cases, when creating an entity, Adams/View will provide a default name.
The default name that Adams/View provides will specify the parentage that it has assumed. You
may, or course, delete this name and use your own. The form of a full name is:
3. Adams id specifies an integer used to identify this element in the Adams data file. When you use
the FILE ADAMS_DATA_SET WRITE command, Adams/View writes an Adams data file for
your model. Adams requires that each modeling element be identified by a unique integer
explicitly or by default. The next time you write an AdamsAdams file, Adams/View will replace
the zero with a unique, internally-generated identifier. Adams/View will permanently store this
required to enter a non-zero identifier. You only need to specify it, if, for some reason, you wish
to control the Adams file output. The value range is 0 to 99999999.
4. ‘Comments’ specifies comments for the object being created or modified. When an Adams/Solver
data file (.adm) is read into Adams/View, all comments associated with a statement (from the end
of the previous statement through the end of the current statement) are stored with the object.
Comments in the data file can be associated with model. These comments must follow the title
statement and be followed by the comment 'END OF MODEL COMMENTS'. This string must
be uppercase. When an Adams/Solver data file is written, the comments for an object are written
before the statement corresponding to the object.
5. The ‘state equation count’ specifies the number of state equations (differential variables) that will
be used in the definition of this system of equations (GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION). There
must be at least one state in your GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION definition. The value range
is 1 to 1200.
6. Discrete systems can be described by their difference equations. They are, therefore, represented
in the state-space form as:
xd is called the state of the system, and contains n elements for an nth-order system. In matrix
notation, xd is a column matrix of dimension nx1. u and y have the same meaning as for
continuous systems.The fundamental difference between continuous and discrete systems is that
the discrete or digital system operates on samples of the sensed plant data, rather than on the
continuous signal. The dynamics of the controller are represented by recursive algebraic
equations, known as difference equations, that have the form shown in Equations 8.The sampling
of any signal occurs repetitively at instants in time that are T seconds apart. T is called the
sampling period of the controller. In complex systems, the sampling period is not a constant, but
part 87
is, instead, a function of time and the instantaneous state of the controller. The signal being
sampled is usually maintained at the sampled value in between sampling instances. This is called
zero-order-hold (ZOH). Determining an appropriate sampling period is a crucial design decision
for discrete and sampled systems.One major problem to avoid with sampling is aliasing. This is
a phenomenon where a signal at a frequency  0 produces a component at a different frequency
 1 simply because the sampling is occurring too infrequently. The general rule of thumb for such
situations is as follows: If you want to avoid aliasing in a signal with a maximum frequency of  f ,
the sampling frequency is  s calculated from  2  2 w . This is a lower limit for  s . If you want
to obtain a reasonably smooth time response, then  2  2 w .The sampling rate for sampling the
states of a discrete system must follow the above criterion to avoid aliasing
7. The ‘output equation count’ specifies the number of output equations (algebraic variables) that
will be used in the definition of this system of equations (GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION). If
OUTPUT_EQUATION_COUNT (the NO argument on the Adams GSE statement )is greater
than 0, a Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY must also be specified. The value range is 0 to 1200.
8. The ‘X_state array name ’ specifies the array in the model which will be used as the state array
for this system element (GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION). An array with this name must be in
the model and it may not be used in any other LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION,
GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION, or TRANSFER_FUNCTION. If SIZE is specified for this
ARRAY, it must equal the STATE_EQUATION_COUNT value.
9. The ‘U_input array’ specifies the array defined in the current model which will be used as the
input (or control) array for this system element (GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION). The use of
this parameter is optional. When the U_INPUT_ARRAY_NAME parameter is used, an
U_INPUT_ARRAY with this name must be in the model, it must be of the U type and the user
must also set either the DF_DU_METHOD or the DG_DU_METHOD, or both, to USER. The
number of inputs to the GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION is inferred from the number of
variable names given in the U_INPUT_ARRAY_NAME
10. The ‘Y output array name ’ specifies the array name in the model which will be used as the output
array for this system element (GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION). When the
Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY_NAME parameter is used, an array with this name must be in the model
and it may not be used in any other LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION,
GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION, or TRANSFER_FUNCTION. When the
Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY_NAME parameter is used, the user must also set either the
DG_DX_METHOD or the DG_DU_METHOD, or both, to USER. If SIZE is specified for this
ARRAY, it must equal OUTPUT_EQUATION_COUNT value.
11. The ‘ic array name’ specifies the array name in the model which will be used as the initial
conditions array for this system element (GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION). When the
IC_ARRAY_NAME parameter is used, an array with this name must be in the model and it must
have the same number of elements as the X_STATE_ARRAY (equal to the
STATE_EQUATION_COUNT value). When no IC array is specified for a
GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION, all states are initialized to zero.
12. If you selected Discrete or Sampled, for X array discrete, Enter the array element that is used to
access the discrete states for the GSE. It must be of the X type, and it cannot be used in any other
linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function. for IC array discrete, Enter the
array element that specifies the initial conditions for the discrete states in the system. The array is
optional. The array element must be of the IC type. When you do not specify an IC array for a
GSE, all the discrete states are initialized to zero.
13. If you select discrete, specify first sample time as the simulation time at which the sampling of
the discrete states is to start. All discrete states before the first sample time are defined to be at the
initial condition specified. The default is zero. Specify the sampling period associated with the
discrete states of a GSE. This tells Adams/Solver to control its step size so that the discrete states
of the GSE are updated at:
last_sample_time + sample_period
In cases where an expression for the sampling period is difficult to write, you can specify it in a
user-written subroutine GSE_SAMP. Adams/Solver will call this function at each sample time to
find out the next sample period.
14. The ‘df_dx method’ specifies how to compute the matrix of partial derivatives of the state
equations with respect to the states. In the present release of Adams, the only possible value for
this flag is USER, meaning that the user must provide a GSEXX subroutine to return the current
values of these partial derivatives. See the Adams Reference Manual for additional information
on how to incorporate these user provided routines. This parameter corresponds to the XXFLAG
argument on the Adams GSE statement.
15. The ‘df_du method’ specifies whether or not and how to compute the matrix of partial derivatives
of the state equations with respect to the inputs. In the present release of Adams, the only possible
values for this flag are USER and NONE. USER means that the user must provide a GSEXU
subroutine to return the current values of these partial derivatives, and NONE means that the state
equations do not depend on the inputs. See the Adams Reference Manual for additional
information on how to incorporate these user provided routines. This parameter corresponds to
the XUFLAG argument on the Adams GSE statement.
16. The ‘dg_dx method’ specifies whether or not and how to compute the matrix of partial derivatives
of the output equations with respect to the states. In the present release of Adams, the only
possible values for this flag are USER and NONE. USER meaning that the user must provide a
GSEYX subroutine to return the current values of these partial derivatives, and NONE means that
the output equations do not depend on the states. See the Adams Reference Manual for additional
the YXFLAG argument on the Adams GSE statement.
17. The ‘dg_du method’ specifies whether or not and how to compute the matrix of partial derivatives
of the output equations with respect to the inputs. In the present release of Adams, the only
possible values for this flag are USER, meaning that the user must provide a GSEYU subroutine
to return the current values of these partial derivatives, and NONE, meaning that the output
equations do not depend on the inputs. See the Adams Reference Manual for additional
the YUFLAG argument on the Adams GSE statement.
part 89
18. The ‘static-hold’ indicates that equation states are not permitted to change during static and quasi-
static analysis. The user specified initial conditions are retained as the static equilibrium values.
Note that this does not guarantee that the time derivatives of the user-defined variable will be zero
after static analysis.
19. The ‘user function’ specifies up to thirty constants which are passed to the user-written GSESUB
subroutine that determines the current values of the state derivatives and outputs forming this
GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION. These constants are also passed to the partial derivative
subroutines, GSEXX, GSEXU, GSEYX, and GSEYU (also currently user_written). The
FUNCTION argument must either be the last argument in the GSE statement list, or be followed
by a backslash (\). See the Adams Reference Manual for additional information on the use of these
routines.
part modify equation linear_state_equation

Allows you to modify an existing linear_state_equation.
The equation command allows you to create and manage equation elements in your model. These
elements include differential_equations, transfer_functions, linear_state_equations, and
general_state_equations. EQUATIONS help you model controls system elements or any other
phenomena that can be represented by differential equations. Adams/View makes it easier for you to
identify these equations by allowing you to assign them names and drawing them as icons on the screen.
During preprocessing, the icons for the EQUATIONs you create are displayed at or near the origin of
your model by Adams/View. All EQUATIONs are "owned" by a particular model and then you reference
these EQUATIONs in the definition of other model objects.
The LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION is used, along with associated arrays and matrices statements, to
define a system of constant coefficient, explicit, differential, and algebraic equations in the classic state-
space format. The Linear State Equation (LSE) is designed to model a linear, time-invariant control
system defined in the state space, especially to facilitate importation of controllers developed in with
external software. It can be used, however, to define any arbitrary set of coupled constant-coefficient
differential and algebraic equations which can be expressed in matrix notation as:
| dX/dt | |A|B| | X|
< ----- > = | ----- | < - >
| Y | | C | C | | U |
\ / - - \ /
where at least the A matrix must be non-zero. The LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION follows standard
control systems terminology, where X is the state vector, Y is the output vector, U is the input vector and
IC is the initial condition vector, X(t = 0). In the Adams data set, each of these vectors is defined using
an ARRAY. Similarly, A is the state matrix, B is the control matrix, C is the output matrix, and D is the
feed-forward matrix. Each of these matrices is defined using a MATRIX. All MATRIX and ARRAY sizes
must be conformable as required by the above equation. ARRAYs with zero-length and zero-sized
matrices should not be defined; Adams will correctly formulate the system equations based on those
ARRAYs and MATRIXs which do exist.
Format:

linear_state_equation_name= an existing lse
new_linear_state_equation_name= a new lse
adams_id= integer
comments = string
x_state_array_name = an existing array
u_input_array_name = an existing array
y_output_array_name = an existing array
part 91

a_state_matrix_name = an existing matrix
b_input_matrix_name = an existing matrix
c_output_matrix_name = an existing matrix
d_feedforward_matrix_name = an existing matrix
Example:
part modify equation linear_state_equation &

linear_state_equation_name= .model_1.lse_1 &
new_linear_state_equation_name= new_eq &
adams_id = 1 &
comments = lse_of_part_2 &
x_state_array_name = .model_1.array_11 &
u_input_array_name = .model_1.array_7 &
y_output_array_name = .model_1.array_12 &
ic_array_name = .model_1.array_15 &
a_state_matrix_name = .model_1.a &
b_input_matrix_name = .model_1.b &
c_output_matrix_name = .model_1.c &
d_feedforward_matrix_name = .model_1.d &
static_hold = on
Description:

linear_state_equation_name An Existing Lse Specifies the linear state equation to modify
new_linear_state_equation_n A New Lse Specifies the name of a new linear state equation
ame
adams_id Integer Specifies a integer used to identify this element
in Adams data file
comments String Specifies the comments about the object being
created or modified

x_state_array_name An Existing Array Specifies the array to represent the state array
u_input_array_name An Existing Array Specifies an array to be used as input or control
of linear system
y_output_array_name An Existing Array Specifies an array name to be used as output
array
ic_array_name An Existing Array Specifies the array name for stating the initial
conditions of linear system
a_state_matrix_name An Existing Matrix Specifies the array to be used as state matrix
b_input_matrix_name An Existing Matrix Specifies the matrix to be used as control matrix
c_output_matrix_name An Existing Matrix Specifies the matrix to be used as output matrix
d_feedforward_matrix_name An Existing Matrix Specifies the feed-forward matrix name of the
linear system
static_hold On_off Indicates that the equations states are not
changed during static and quasi-static analysis
1. Specifies the linear_state_equation to modify. You use this parameter to identify the existing
linear_state_equation to affect with this command. You may identify a linear_state_equation by
typing its name or by picking it from the screen. Since linear_state_equations do not have a
geometric position, Adams/View displays linear_state_equation icons at or near the model origin.
If the linear_state_equation icon is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may
also find it convenient to type the name even if the linear_state_equation icon is displayed. If you
created the linear_state_equation by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the
linear_state_equation name is the letters LSE followed by the Adams data set
linear_state_equation ID number. The name of Adams LSE/101 is LSE101, for example. If you
created the linear_state_equation during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that time. If a
linear_state_equation is owned by the default model, you may identify it by entering its name
only. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a linear_state_equation under a different
linear_state_equation 'fluid_volume' from model 'hydro' by entering ".hydro.fluid_volume'". If
you type a "?", Adams/View will list the linear_state_equation available by default. You must
separate multiple linear_state_equation names by commas. If the linear_state_equation is visible
need not separate multiple linear_state_equation picks by commas.
2. The new name specifies the name of the new linear_state_equation. You may use this name later
to refer to this linear_state_equation. Adams/View will not allow you to have two
linear_state_equations with the same full name, so you must provide a unique name. Normally,
entity names are composed of alphabetic, numeric, or '_' (underscore) characters, and start with
an alphabetic or '_' character. They may be any length. By enclosing the name in double quotes,
you may use other printable characters, or start the name with a numeral. If a name contains
part 93
characters, or starts with a numeral, you must always quote the name when entering it. Note that
you can specify the parentage of an entity (e.g. what part "owns" a marker or a geometry element)
when you CREATE it by changing the name. If you enter just the entity name, then the default
parent will be assigned by Adams/View. If you type in the full name, then you may over ride the
default parent. In most cases, when creating an entity, Adams/View will provide a default name.
The default name that Adams/View provides will specify the parentage that it has assumed. You
may, or course, delete this name and use your own. The form of a full name is:
3. Adams id specifies an integer used to identify this element in the Adams data file. When you use
the FILE ADAMS_DATA_SET WRITE command, Adams/View writes an Adams data file for
your model. Adams requires that each modeling element be identified by a unique integer
to enter a non-zero identifier. You only need to specify it, if, for some reason, you wish to control
the Adams file output. The value range is 0 to 99999999.
4. ‘Comments’ specifies comments for the object being created or modified. When an Adams/Solver
data file (.adm) is read into Adams/View, all comments associated with a statement (from the end
of the previous statement through the end of the current statement) are stored with the object.
Comments in the data file can be associated with model. These comments must follow the title
statement and be followed by the comment 'END OF MODEL COMMENTS'. This string must
be uppercase. When an AdamsAdamsAdams/Solver data file is written, the comments for an
object are written before the statement corresponding to the object.
5. The ‘X_state array name ’ specifies the array in the model which will be used as the state array
for this linear system. The user must have an array with this name in their model and it may not
be used in any other LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION, GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION or
TRANSFER_FUNCTION.
6. The ‘U_input array’ specifies the array name in the current model which will be used as the input
(or control) array for this linear system (LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION). The use of this
parameter is optional. When the U_INPUT_ARRAY_NAME parameter is used, the user must
have an array with this name in their model, and it must be of the U type. When
U_INPUT_ARRAY_NAME is used, the user must also include a B_INPUT_MATRIX or
D_FEEDFORWARD_MATRIX name, or both, in the LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION
definition, and these matrix name(s) must have the same number of columns as there are elements
in the U_INPUT_ARRAY.
7. The ‘Y output array name ’ specifies the array name in your model which will be used as the
output array for this linear system (LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION). When the
Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY_NAME parameter is used, the user must have an array with this name in
the model and it may not be used in any other LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION,
GENERAL_STATE_EQUATION or TRANSFER_FUNCTION. When the
Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY_NAME parameter is used, the user must also include a
C_OUTPUT_MATRIX or D_FEEDFORWARD_MATRIX name, or both, in the
LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION definition, and these matrices must have the same number of
rows as there are elements in the Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY_NAME
8. The ‘ic array name’ specifies the array in the model which will be used as the initial conditions
array for this linear system (LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION). When the IC_ARRAY_NAME
parameter is used, the user must have an array with this name in their model and it must have the
same number of elements as the X_STATE_ARRAY (equal to the number of rows in the
A_STATE_MATRIX). When no IC array is specified for a LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION, all
states are initialized to zero.
9. The ‘A state matrix name’ specifies the matrix in the model which is used as the state matrix for
this linear system (LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION). The user must have a MATRIX with this
name in their model, it must be a square matrix (same number of rows and columns) and it must
have the same dimension as the X_STATE_ARRAY. If the user has specified an inconsistent size
for the X_STATE_ARRAY, Adams will issue a warning message and automatically resizes the
X_STATE_ARRAY to match the A_STATE_MATRIX.
10. The ‘B input matrix name’ specifies the matrix in the model which is used as the control matrix
for this linear system (LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION). When the B_INPUT_MATRIX_NAME
parameter is used, the user must also include a U_INPUT_ARRAY_NAME parameter in the
model. This matrix must have the same number of rows as the A_STATE_MATRIX and the same
number of columns as the number of elements in the U_INPUT_ARRAY
11. The ‘C output matrix name specifies the matrix in the model which is used as the output matrix
for this linear system (LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION). When the C_OUTPUT_MATRIX
parameter is used, you must also include a Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY parameter in the
model. This matrix must have the same number of columns as the A_STATE_MATRIX and the
same number of rows as the number of elements in the Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY.
12. The ‘D feedforward matrix name’ specifies the matrix in your model which is used as the
feedforward matrix for this linear system (LINEAR_STATE_EQUATION). When the
D_FEEDFORWARD_MATRIX_NAME parameter is used, you must also include both
Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY_NAME and U_INPUT_ARRAY_NAME parameters in the
model. This matrix must have the same number of rows as the number of elements in the
Y_OUTPUT_ARRAY and the same number of columns as the number of elements in the
U_INPUT_ARRAY.
part 95
13. The ‘static-hold’ indicates that equation states are not permitted to change during static and quasi-
static analysis. The user specified initial conditions are retained as the static equilibrium values.
Note that this does not guarantee that the time derivatives of the user-defined variable will be zero
after static analysis.
part modify equation transfer_function

Allows you to modify a user-defined transfer function.
You can use transfer functions to define an arbitrary set of constant-coefficient, differential and algebraic
equations that can be expressed in the Laplace domain as the following where m
k:
Transfer functions are especially useful for describing elements from control-system block diagrams. The
characteristic equation for a single transfer function can be a polynomial of degree less than 30. Internal
to Adams/Solver, there is an algorithm to automatically convert the list of fixed numerator and
denominator coefficients to the following elements:
• Canonical state-space form
• Set of coupled, linear, constant-coefficient differential equations
• Single algebraic equation
You define the arrays for a transfer function using array data elements. The arrays define the transfer
function input and let you reference the states and output of the transfer function. Initial conditions for a
transfer function are assumed to be identically zero.
Format:

transfer_function_name= existing tfsiso
new_transfer_function_name = new name for the transfer function
adams_id= integer
comments= string
x_state_array_name= existing array
u_input_array_name= existing array
y_output_array_name= existing array
ic_array_name= existing adams array
static_hold= on_off
numerator_coefficients= real
denominator_coefficients= real
part 97
Description:

transfer_function_name Existing TFSISO Specifies the name of the equation to
be modified
New_transfer_function_name New Transfer Function Name Specify the new name for the transfer
function
adams_id Integer Assigns a unique ID number to the
equation.
comments String Adds any comments about the
equation to help you manage and
identify it.
x_state_array_name Existing Array Specifies the array that defines the
state variable array for the transfer
function.
u_input_array_name Existing Array Specifies the array that defines the
input (or control) for the transfer
function. The array must be an inputs
(U) array. If you specified the size of
the array when you created it, it must
be one.
y_output_array_name Existing Array Specifies the array that defines the
output for the transfer function.
static_hold On/Off Indicates that equation states are not
permitted to change during static and
quasi-static simulations (on).
numerator_coefficients Real Specifies the coefficients of the
polynomial in the numerator of the
transfer function.
denominator_coefficients Real Specifies the coefficients of the
polynomial in the denominator of the
transfer function.
Ic_array_name Existing Adams array Specifies an existing Adams array.
length.
Comments:
Adams/View log file and in a command or dataset file when you export your model to these types
comments.)
2. The array specified in the x_state_array_name must be a states (X) array, and it cannot be used in
any other linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function. If you specified the
size of the array when you created it, it must be one less than the number of coefficients in the
denominator.
3. The array specified in the y_state_array_name must be an outputs (Y) array, and it cannot be used
in any other linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function. If you specify the
size of the array when you created it, its size must be one.
4. For the static_hold parameter, the user-specified initial conditions are retained as the static
equilibrium values. Note that this does not guarantee that the time derivatives of the user-defined
variable will be zero after static analysis.
During a static simulation, Adams/Solver finds equilibrium values for user-defined differential
variables (differential equations, general state equations, linear state equations, and transfer
functions), as well as for the displacement and force variables. The equilibrium values it finds
change the initial conditions for subsequent simulations. To help you control the static simulation
results, Adams/View provides an option that you can set to keep the values constant. This option
is called static hold. Static hold retains the user-specified initial conditions as the static
equilibrium values.
If you do not set static hold, Adams/Solver sets the time derivatives of the user-defined variables
to zero during a static simulation, and uses the user-supplied initial-condition values only as initial
guesses for the static solution. Generally, the final equilibrium values are not the same as the
initial condition values. Adams/Solver then uses the equilibrium values of the user-defined
variables as the initial values for any subsequent simulation, just as with the equilibrium
displacement and force values.
part 99
If you do set static hold, Adams/Solver retains the user-specified initial conditions as the static
equilibrium values. Therefore, the final equilibrium values are the same as the user-specified
initial conditions. Note that this does not guarantee that the time derivatives of the user-defined
variable are zero after a static simulation.
5. For the numerator_coefficients and the denominator_coefficients, list the coefficients in order of
ascending power of s, starting with s to the zero power, including any intermediate zero
coefficients. The number of coefficients for the denominator must be greater than or equal to the
number of coefficients for the numerator.
part modify external_system initial velocity

Allows the modification of initial velocities on an existing external system part.
You can specify initial velocities for parts. Adams/View uses the initial velocity during the initial
conditions simulation, which it runs before it runs a simulation of your model.
You can specify translational and angular velocities for rigid bodies and only translational velocity for
point masses.
• Translational velocity defines the time rate of change of a part's center of mass with respect to
• Angular velocity defines the time rate of change of a part's rotational position with respect to the
If you specify initial velocities, Adams/View uses them as the initial velocity of the part during assemble
model operations, regardless of any other forces acting on the part. You can also leave some or all of the
velocities unset. Leaving a velocity unset lets Adams/View calculate the velocity of the part during an
assemble operation depending on the other forces and constraints acting on the part. Note that it is not
the same as setting the initial velocity to zero. Setting an initial velocity to zero means that the part will
not be moving in the specified direction when the simulation starts, regardless of any forces and
constraints acting upon it.
Translational velocities are specified by parameters VX, VY, and VZ. Rotational velocities are specified
by parameters WX, WY, and WZ. Note that the initial translational velocities are with respect to the
ground coordinate axes, while the initial rotational velocities are with respect to the center-of-mass
marker axes.
Format:
part modify external_system initial_velocity

external_system_name = an existing external system part
vm = existing marker
wm = existing marker
vx = velocity
no_vx = true_only
vy = velocity
no_vy = true_only
vz = velocity
no_vz = true_only
wx = angular_vel
part 101
part modify external_system initial_velocity

no_wx = true_only
wy = angular_vel
no_wy = true_only
wz = angular_vel
no_wz = true_only
Example:
part modify external_system initial_velocity &

vm = cm &
wm = cm &
vx = 4 &
no_vy = true &
no_vz = true &
no_wz = true &
no_wy = true &
no_wz = true

external_system_name Existing external system Specifies the external system to be modified
part
vm Existing marker Specifies the marker representing the translational
velocity
wm Existing marker Specifies the marker representing the rotational
velocity about it
vx Velocity Specifies the translation velocity in x of vm
no_vx True_only Specifies the zero translational velocity in x of vm
vy Velocity Specifies the translation velocity in y of vm
no_vy True_only Specifies the zero translational velocity in y of vm
vz Velocity Specifies the translation velocity in z of vm
no_vz True_only Specifies the zero translational velocity in z of vm
wx Angular_velocity Specifies the rotational velocity about x of wm

no_wx True_only Specifies the zero rotational velocity about x of
wm
wy Angular_velocity Specifies the rotational velocity about y of wm
no_wy True_only Specifies the zero rotational velocity about y of
wm
wz Angular_velocity Specifies the rotational velocity about z of wm
no_wz True_only Specifies the zero rotational velocity about z of
wm
1. The external_system_name specifies the external system part to be modified. You use this
parameter to identify the existing part to be affected with this command. You may identify a part
by typing its name or by picking it from the screen. If the part is not visible on the screen, you
must type the name. You may also find it convenient to type the name even if the part is
displayed.If you created the part by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the part name is
the letters PAR followed by the Adams data set part ID number. The name of Adams PART/101
is PAR101, for example. If you created the part during preprocessing, you would have given it a
name at that time. If a part is available by default, you may identify it by entering only its name.
If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a part under another model, for instance, you
may need to enter the model name as well. For example, you may specify part 'arm' from model
'robot' by entering ".robot.arm". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the parts available by
default. You must separate multiple part names by commas. If the part is visible in one of your
separate multiple part picks by commas.
2. The vm specifies the marker with reference to which the x, y, z components of velocities of the
'PART', vx, vy, vz respectively are specified. Translational velocity defines the time rate of
change of a part's center of mass with respect to ground or another marker 'vm' in your model.
You can specify translational velocity for each vector component of the marker as vx, vy and vz.
3. If the part has no translational velocity in either x, y or z directions, then you need not specify it
explicitly. By default, the initial velocity is zero. Or else, you can set it to zero by setting
parameters 'no_vx', 'no_vy', and 'no_vz' to TRUE.
4. The wm specifies the marker about which the rotational velocities of the part are specified. The
wx, wy, wz components are the rotational velocities of the part about x, y, and z axis of the marker
'wm', respectively. Angular velocity defines the time rate of change of a part's rotational position
with respect to the CM marker of the part or another marker 'wm' in your model. You can specify
angular velocity for each vector component of the marker as wx, wy, wz.
5. If the part has no rotational velocity about either x, y or z directions of 'wm' marker, then you need
not specify it explicitly. By default, the initial rotational velocity is zero. Or else, you can set it to
zero by setting parameters 'no_wx', 'no_wy', and 'no_wz' to TRUE.
part 103
part modify external_system name_and_position

Allows you to modify an external system part’s name and position.
Format:

external_system_name = an existing external system part
new_external_system_name = a new external system part
type = boolean
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
input_file_name = string
interface_routines = string
location = location
hide_warnings = boolean
Example:
part modify external_system name_and_position &

adams_id = 1 &
type= nastran &
planar = yes &
Description:

external_system_name Existing external Specifies the name of an existing external
system system to be modified.
new_external_system_name New external system Specifies the name of the external system.
type Nastran, Marc, user The type of external system. Defaults to
'nastran', if not specified.
comments String Adds comments about the part to help you
view_name Existing View Specifies the view in which to display this
part.
input_file_name String File containing the input source parameters
for the external system.
modal_neutral_file_name String An optional (rigid only) MNF, if a visual
required.
md_db_file_name String An optional MD DB, if a visual
required.
index_in_database Integer Index of the body in the specified MD DB.
Valid only if the parameter md_db_file_name
is specified.
user_function Real Specifies up to 30 values for Adams/Solver to
pass to a user-written subroutine. Valid only if
the type is 'user'.
interface_routines Function Specifies an alternative library and
subroutine names for the user subroutines
EXTSYS_DERIV, EXTSYS_UPDATE,
EXTSYS_OUTPUT, EXTSYS_SAMP,
EXTSYS_SET_NS, EXTSYS_SET_ND,
EXTSYS_SENSUB,
EXTSYS_SET_STATIC_HOLD,
EXTSYS_SET_SAMPLE_OFFSET,
respectively.
flexible body's location in a given reference
frame defined in the parameter relative_to.
part 105

relative_to Existing model, part or Specifies a reference frame relative to which
marker the location and orientation are defined.
Leave blank or enter model name to use the
global coordinate system.
exact_coordinates exact_coordinates Specifies as many as six part coordinates that
Adams/View is not to change as it solves for
the initial conditions.
hide_warnings boolean Hide warnings that may be generated in the
modification operation. Defaults to false.
1. You must supply a unique name for the new external system, or accept the name that Adams/View
has generated for you.
The position of the external system part can be broken down into two parts:
a. LOCATION
It can be specified by supplying three coordinates corresponding to the current coordinate
system type. For example, if the current coordinate system type is 'cartesian', you would
supply an X, Y, and Z. You may also specify location by "clicking" on an existing part or
b. ORIENTATION
It can be specified by three different methods in Adams/View.
2. Currently, there are three types supported for an external system: nastran, marc and user. If the
parameter is not specified, it defaults to 'nastran'.
3. The input file name defines the source for the external analysis component. Nominally, this is a
string defining a path and input file, but can potentially be interpreted by the external analysis
component in an arbitrary manner.
4. Note that the parameters user_function and 'interface_routines' are valid only for external systems
that are of type 'user'.
5. When valid rigid only MNF or MD-DB (with the optional index) parameters are specified, the
external system will have a visual representation. Interactive marker creation and swap operations
(for a rigid or a flex body) are supported for such systems. However, these parameters are
optional. When not specified, the external system will have no visual representation.
it has assumed.
yourself.
stored with the object. Comments in the data file can be associated with the model.
part 107
by commas.
coordinate system.
By default, you supply Euler (body313, or body-fixed z, x, z) angles.You may change this
coordinate system.
coordinate system.
14. The six coordinates are as given below.
• X X coordinate
• Y Y coordinate
• Z Z coordinate
• PSI Psi angle

• PHI Phi angle
You may enter these coordinates in any order. If Adams has to alter the part position to obtain consistent
initial conditions, it does not vary the coordinates you specify with this parameter unless Adams must
vary them to satisfy the initial conditions you specify for a joint or for a motion.
part 109
part modify flexible_body auto_disable_modes

After performing a pilot simulation, you can disable those modes that do not significantly contribute to
the total strain energy of a flexible body. You can set Adams/View to automatically disable any modes
that contributed less than a specified fraction of the total strain energy during the test simulation. After
disabling the modes that do not significantly contribute to strain energy, simulation times should be
reduced.
The pilot simulation that you run should be typical of the simulations that you are going to run on the
flexible body. Disabling a particular set of modes based on the simulation of one event might be totally
inappropriate when simulating another unrelated event.
An important energy contribution from a model might be of a short duration that its total energy can seem
insignificant but yet the mode is important to the simulation. For example, although the strain energy that
a mode contributes may be quite low compared to the total strain energy for the entire simulation,
Adams/Solver may be unable to complete the simulation without the mode. Therefore, you should choose
a very conservative strain energy fraction (for example, 0.001 or smaller). If a mode is truly inactive, it
will be disabled in spite of a low setting.
Format:

flexible_body_name= existing flex body
energy_tolerance= real
Example:
part modify flexible_body auto_disable_modes &

flexible_body_name = flex_body_1 &
energy_tolerance = 0.001 &
analysis_name = last_run
Adams/Flex will disable all modes that contributed less than the 0.1% to the total strain energy during
the test simulation.
Description:

flexible_body_name Existing flex body Specifies the name of an existing flexible body to be
modified
energy_tolerance Real Specifies a real number greater than 0 and less than 1.
analysis_name Existing analysis Specifies an existing analysis
convenient.
If Adams/View created the flexible body by reading an Adams data set, the name may either come
FLX42. Flexible bodies you create during preprocessing have user-specified names.
You may identify a flexible body belonging to the current default model by entering just its name.
by typing "?", which will bring up the select list from which you can pick a flexible body.
For commands which accept multiple flexible body names, you must separate the names by
commas.
2. Adams Flex will disable those modes that contributed less than the fraction specified in the
energy_tolerance parameter of the total strain energy during the test simulation.
Cautions:
1. Disabling an important mode can, however, adversely affect the numerical conditioning of a
flexible body model. The computational savings that you gain by disabling a mode can be quickly
lost by the computational cost of a difficult simulation.
part 111
part modify flexible_body deformed_mode_display

Allows you to set mode shape parameters such as deformed mode number, scale factor, animation cycles,
and color interpolation.
Format:

flexible_body_name= existing flex_body
deformed_mode_number= integer
animation_cycles= integer
frames_per_cycle = integer
display_only_deformed= boolean
Example:
part modify flexible_body deformed_mode_display &

deformed_mode_number = 2 &
animation_cycles = 4 &
frames_per_cycle = 5 &
display_only_deformed = yes
Description:

flexible_body_name Existing Flex Body Specifies the name of an existing flexible body to be
modified
deformed_mode_number Integer Enter the number of the mode in the flexible body to
view
animation_cycles Integer Enter the number of animation cycles. By default, the
animation runs 3 times or through 3 cycles.
frames_per_cycle Integer Specifies the number of frames per second in the
animation.
display_only_deformed Yes/no Enter “Yes” to display only the mode deformations.
Enter “No” to display both the mode deformations
and the undeformed flexible body.
convenient.
If Adams/View created the flexible body by reading an Adams data set, the name may either come
FLX42. Flexible bodies you create during preprocessing have user-specified names.
You may identify a flexible body belonging to the current default model by entering just its name.
by typing "?", which will bring up the select list from which you can pick a flexible body.
For commands which accept multiple flexible body names, you must separate the names by
commas.
2. When you create a flexible body from a modal neutral file (MNF) in Adams/View, Adams/Flex
calculates the number of modes in the flexible body. It displays the number of modes on the
Flexible Body Modify dialog box, as shown below.
3.
part 113
Mode Display in Flexible Body Modify Dialog Box
When you display a mode, AdamsAdams/Flex displays its frequency in the Frequency text box. Also,
when you display a mode, the mode deformations appear along with the undeformed flexible body. You
can turn this off to display only the deformed mode.
Tips:
1. You can also use the Animation tool on the Main toolbox to animate the entire model containing
the flexible body after you have run a simulation.
part modify flexible_body initial_velocity

Allows you to create initial velocities on an existing part.
Format:

vm= existing marker
wm= existing marker
vx= velocity
no_vx= true_only
vy= velocity
no_vy= true_only
vz= velocity
no_vz= true_only
wx= angular_vel
no_wx= true_only
wy= angular_vel
no_wy= true_only
wz= angular_vel
no_wz= true_only
Example:
part modiy flexible_body initial_velocity &

vx = 200 &
part 115
part modiy flexible_body initial_velocity &

no_vy = true &
no_vz = true
reference frame.
Description:

flexible_body_name Existing flex body Specifies the name of the flexible body
wm Existing marker Specifies a marker about whose axes the angular velocity
vector components will be specified.
vx Velocity Specifies the initial translational velocity of the center-of-
mass marker along the x-axis of the ground reference
frame.
no_vx True_only Unsets the vx velocity initial condition for the specified
part (true) so it no longer has a velocity initial condition.
vy Velocity Specifies the initial translational velocity of the center-of-
mass marker along the y-axis of the ground reference
frame.
no_vy True_only Unsets the vy velocity initial condition for the specified
vz Velocity Specifies the initial translational velocity of the center-of-
mass marker along the z-axis of the ground reference
frame.
no_vz True_only Unsets the vz velocity initial condition for the specified
wx Angular_velocity Specifies the initial rotational velocity of the center-of-
mass marker about its x-axis.
no_wx True_only Unsets the wx velocity initial condition for the specified
wy Angular_velocity Specifies the initial rotational velocity of the center-of-
mass marker about its y-axis.
no_wy True_only Unsets the wy velocity initial condition for the specified

wz Angular_velocity Specifies the initial rotational velocity of the center-of-
mass marker about its z-axis.
no_wz True_only Unsets the wz velocity initial condition for the specified
Tips:
2. Note that the initial translational velocities are with respect to the ground coordinate axes,
whilethe initial rotational velocities are with respect to the center-of-mass marker axes.
part 117
part modify flexible_body modal_ics

Allows you to set the initial conditions parameters on a flexible body, including the selected modes, the
initial displacements and velocities and the modal exact coordinates for selected modes.
Format:

selected_modes= real
initial_modal_displacements= real
initial_modal_velocities= real
modal_exact_coordinates= integer
set_ic_modes = integer
modal_ic_displacements = real
moal_ic_velocities = real
Description:

flexible_body_name Existing flex_body Specifies the name of the flexible body
selected_modes Real Specifies which modes to include when
computing the modal integrals for use by
Adams/Solver.
initial_modal_displacements real Specifies the initial displacements for the
selected modes.
initial_modal_velocities Real Specifies the initial velocities for the selected
modes.
modal_exact_coordinates Integer Specifies integers that correspond to the modal
coordinates you want held exact during initial
conditions displacement analysis.
set_IC_modes Integer Specifies a list of modes to use when setting
modal_IC_displacement or
modal_IC_velocities.
modal_IC_displacements Real Specifies a displacement IC to use for the modes
modal_IC_velocities Real Specifies a velocity to use for the modes
1. Note that when you change the selected modes, you should also modify any initial conditions that
you have set.
If you created a marker by reading an Adams/Solver dataset or graphics file, the marker name is
the letters MAR followed by the dataset marker ID number. For example, the name of
You may have explicitly named an analysis when you created it by reading one or more Adams
output files (graphics (.gra), request (.req), or results (.res)). By default, the name of the analysis
is the root name of the Adams output files without the extension. If you created the analysis by
reading an Adams graphics file, for example, the analysis name is the name of the graphics file
without the .gra extension.
part 119
part modify flexible_body name_and_position

Allows you to create or modify a flexible body. You specify a modal neutral file (MNF) or a MD DB file
and Adams/View creates the necessary Adams/View geometry for displaying the flexible body. It also
creates a mesh on the flexible body representing the flexible body nodes.
By default, Adams/Flex places the flexible body so the flexible body’s local body reference frame
(LBRF) is at the origin of the global coordinate system. The LBRF corresponds to the origin of the finite
element (FE) environment in which the body was originally modeled. You can also set the location and
orientation.
Format:

new_flexible_body_name = new flex_body name
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
md_db_file = string
matrices = existing matrix
damping_ratio = function
damping_routine = string
generalized_damping = off/full/internal_only
dynamic_limit = real
location = location
relative_to = existing model part or marker
invariants = boolean
characteristic_length = real
hide_warnings = no/yes
stability_factor = real
Example:
part modify flexible_body name_and_position &

new_flexible_body_name = con_rod &
modal_neutral_file_name = "d:\mscnastran\demo\con_rod.mnf" &
comments = "example of creating a flexible body"
Description:

flexible_body_name, Existing Flex Body Specifies the name of the flexible body to be
modified
new_flexible_body_name New Flex_body Name Specifies the new name of the flexible body.
adams_id, Integer Assigns a unique ID number to the part.
comments, String Adds comments about the part to help you
view_name, Existing View Specifies the view in which to display the part.
You may identify a view by typing its name or by
picking it from the screen. In most cases, you can
enter the special view name all, which means all
the views currently displayed. You must separate
multiple view names by commas. You need not
separate multiple view picks by commas.
modal_neutral_file_name String This parameter is mutually exclusive to the MD
DB file. Specifies the name of the MNF.
md_db_ file String This parameter is mutually exclusive to the MNF
file. Specifies the name of the MD DB file to
create the flex body from.
index_in_database Integer The parameter applies only, when the user is
creating a flexible body out of the MD DB. The
parameter specifies the index of the flexible
body in the specified MD DB. The parameter is
optional. If not specified, it is assumed to have
the value 1.
matrices Existing Matrix Specifies the names of seventeen matrices for the
modal representation of the flexible body.
damping_ratio Function Specifies the damping ratio to be used.
part 121

damping_routine String Specifies the path to user-written subroutine to
be used to define modal damping.
Generalized_damping Off, full, internal_only Sets generalized damping:
• off - Disables the generalized damping.

• full - Enables the complete generalized
damping matrix, including the effects of
a resultant damping force.
• internal_only - Only enables the portion
of the generalized damping matrix
corresponding to the modal coordinates
(i.e. ignore the resultant damping force).
dynamic_limit Real Specifies the threshold frequency for quasi-static
modes.
flexible body's location in a given reference
frame defined in the parameter relative_to.
relative_to Existing Model, Part Specifies a reference frame relative to which the
or Marker location and orientation are defined. Leave blank
or enter model name to use the global coordinate
system.
exact_coordinates X, Y, Z, PSI, THETA, Specifies as many as six part coordinates that
PHI, NONE, ALL Adams/View is not to change as it solves for the
initial conditions.
invariants Yes, No Lists nine on/off values used to control the
invariants
characteristic_length Real Specifies the characteristic length of the flexible
body for linear limit check. This should be in the
model length unit. The linear limit is defined as
10% of this length.
hide_warnings No/Yes Sets the option of displaying the warnings to yes
or no.
stability_factor Real Specifies the amount of damping needed to add
to the quasi-static modes.
length.
Note: You can specify the parentage of an entity (for example, what part "owns" a marker or a
geometry element) when you create it by changing the name. If you enter just the entity
name, then Adams/View assigns the default parent. If you type in the full name, then you
can override the default parent. In most cases, when creating an entity, Adams/View
provides a default name. The default name that Adams/View provides specifies the
parentage that it has assumed. You can, of course, delete this name and use your own. The
form of a full name is:
The number of levels used varies from case to case and the parentage must exist before an
entity can be assigned to it.
comments.)
part 123
extension.
4. The matrices compose the modal integrals used by Adams/Solver during simulation. In general,
if you enter the MNF, you do not need to specify names for the matrices.
5. For the damping_ratio parameter, do one of the following:
• Do not specify to accept the default nonzero damping as follows:
• 1% damping for all modes with frequency lower than 100
• 10% damping for modes with frequency in the 100-1000 range
• 100% critical damping for modes with frequency above 1000
• Enter the scalar damping ratio that you want applied to all modes.
For example if you would like to apply 1% damping enter 0.01. For more examples you can see
FLEX_BODY statement documentation.
flexible body. In addition, function expressions, such as FXFREQ and FXMODE, allow you to
apply different levels of damping to individual modes.
Several types of damping are inherently present in mechanical systems. Understanding the
source and level of damping are important in the simulation and testing of dynamic systems.
For example, a mechanism having low natural frequencies and relatively low damping, could
produce damaging motions under resonant conditions.
Applying damping judiciously can also improve simulation performance for models
containing flexible bodies. For example, consider a flexible body with a 10 kHz mode whose
shape is considered essential to allowing the body to assume a particular deformation. Any
response in this mode at its resonant frequency dictates integration steps on the order of 1E-5
seconds, which can be unacceptable for long duration simulations. If the damping for this
mode is set at 100% of critical damping, however, any resonant response is immediately
suppressed. The mode's compliance is retained but its dynamics are eliminated and the
simulation performance is improved.
Damping Dissipation and Damping Matrix
The damping force on a flexible body is proportional to its generalized velocities and is assumed
to be derivable from the quadratic form:
where:
• D is a symmetric matrix of damping coefficients
• is a vector of generalized velocities:
• are the absolute time derivatives of the position vector coordinates of the local part
reference frame with respect to the local part reference frame.
• are the angular velocity vector coordinates with respect to the local part reference
frame.
• are the time derivatives of the modal coordinates.
The matrix D is composed of two parts, Dm and Dg:
Dm represents the contribution of proportional modal damping, and Dg represents the

contribution of a generalized damping matrix. Both are explained in the next section.
Specifying Modal Damping
The modal damping matrix Dm is diagonal and defined using critical damping ratios for each
mode i= 1,n.
part 125
where and are the generalized stiffness and mass for mode i.
Note: The damping ratio does not need to be constant. It can be a function of time or system
state.
If you do not specify modal damping when you create the flexible body, Adams/Flex applies a
default, non-zero critical damping ratio as follows:
• 10% damping for modes with frequency in the 100 to 1000 range.
You can change the default modal damping in three ways:
• Assign a single scalar critical damping ratio that Adams/Flex applies uniformly to all modes.
flexible body. In addition, function expressions, such as FXFREQ and FXMODE, allow you
to apply different levels of damping to individual modes.
• Control the damping using the DMPSUB user-written subroutine. DMPSUB lets you set
different levels of damping for different modes and the damping can vary over time. For more
on writing subroutines, see the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help.
To assign modal damping when creating or modifying a flexible body:
• In either the Create a Flexible Body dialog box or Flexible Body Modify dialog box, clear the
selection of default (use default in the Create a Flexible Body dialog box).
• In the Damping Ratio text box, either:
• Enter the critical damping ratio.
• Enter a function. To get help building the function, next to the Damping Ratio text box, select
the More button . The Adams/View Function Builder appears. For information on using
the Function Builder, see the Adams/View Function Builder online help.
Specifying Generalized Damping
The generalized damping matrix Dg is a constant symmetric matrix of the form:
To better understand how the generalized damping matrix is handled in Adams/Flex, it is helpful
to start with the discrete finite element equations of motion
where:
• and are the finite element mass, stiffness, and damping matrices, respectively.
• is the nodal coordinate vector.
• is the applied force vector.
The damping matrix is derived from damping elements and parameters defined in the finite
element model. The previous equation can be transformed into modal coordinates:
where is the matrix of mode shapes stored column-wise and is the vector of modal
coordinates . represents the generalized damping matrix. However, before Adams/Flex

can use the generalized damping matrix, the portion of that projects onto the rigid body
modes must be transformed to the nonlinear, large motion, generalized coordinates: X, Y, Z , ,
, and used to represent the flexible body’s large overall motion in Adams/Solver (C++). To this
end, a m x 6 transformation m atrix, , is constructed and transforms m rigid body modes to the
six coordinates X , Y, Z, , , and , and the final generalized matrix Dg is computed:
If the damping description in the finite element model results in a resultant damping force, there
will be nonzero entries in the sub-matrices . Because the

resultant damping force was derived from a linear finite element model governed by small strain
approximations and infinitesimal rotations, a resultant damping force may yield unexpected
results in the context of large overall motion supported in Adams. Therefore, Adams/Flex
provides the option to ignore the resultant damping force. Ignoring a resultant damping force is
referred to as internal-only generalized damping.
part 127
Because the generalized matrix Dg is derived from the component finite element model, you can
leverage the damping elements and features in the finite element program. This is particularly
useful for defining non-proportional and spatially-dependent damping. Furthermore, the
generalized damping matrix is stored in the MNF to be optionally applied to the flexible body.
That is, because you defined damping in the finite element model, it is not necessary to employ it
in Adams. To enable generalized damping, however, you must have a generalized damping
matrix stored in your MNF.
To specify generalized damping when creating or modifying a flexible body:
• In either the Create a Flexible Body dialog box or Flexible Body Modify dialog box, set
Generalized Damping to:
• Off - Disables the generalized damping.
• Full - Enables the complete generalized damping matrix, including the effects of a resultant
damping force.
• Internal Only - Only enables the portion of the generalized damping matrix corresponding to
the modal coordinates (i.e. ignore the resultant damping force).
• Continue creating or modifying the body, and then select OK.
• Orientation of rigid or flexible body using three rotation angles. Adams/View orients the body
starting from the initial coordinate system and applying three successive rotations.Depending
on the convention you select, the rotations occur about space-fixed or body-fixed axes in any
combination of the x, y, and z axes. By default, you supply body 313 (body-fixed z, x, z)
angles.Adams/View applies your orientation angles with respect to the coordinate system in
the Orientation Relative To or Relative To text box.
Orientation of a rigid or flexible body by directing one of its axes. Adams/View assigns an
arbitrary rotation about the axis.Two points are needed to define an axis but you can enter either
one or two points to direct the axis. If you enter two points, the axis points from the first location
to the second. If you enter one point, Adams/View uses the location you specified in the Location
text box as the first point and the new location as the second point.
Note: • Adams/View applies the location coordinates in the coordinate system you identify
in the Location Relative To or Relative To text box.
• Note that this does not completely dictate the orientation of the coordinate system.
Adams/View positions the coordinate system with an arbitrary rotation about the
axis. If you must completely control the coordinate system orientation, select
Orientation or In Plane Orientation.
• By default, you direct the z-axis of the coordinate system. You can use the
DEFAULTS ORIENT_AXIS_AND_PLANE AXIS_AND_PLANE_SETTING
command to change this convention. For example, selecting either
X_AXIS_XY_PLANE or X_AXIS_XZ_PLANE directs the x-axis. The plane-
convention setting does not affect this parameter.
• You can also direct the axis graphically using the marker’s position handle. Simply
point the appropriate axis on the marker in the desired direction.
In Plane Oriention
Orientation of the rigid or flexible body by directing one of the axes and locating one of the
coordinate planes.
In Plane Orientation
To define an axis and a plane, you need three points. You can enter either two or three locations,
however. If you enter three locations, the axis points from the first location to the second and the
plane is parallel to the plane defined by the three locations. If you enter only two locations,
Adams/View uses the location you specified in the Location text box as the first point and the
other two locations as the second and third points. Adams/View applies the location coordinates
in the coordinate system in the Relative To text box. By default, you direct the z-axis of the
coordinate system marker and locate the zx plane. You can use the DEFAULTS
convention. For example, selecting X_AXIS_XY_PLANE directs the x-axis and orients the xy
plane.
part 129

• PSI - Psi angle
• PHI - Phi angle
parameter unless Adams/View must vary them to satisfy the initial conditions you specify for a
joint or for a motion.
8. Adams/Flex computes the time varying mass matrix of the flexible body using nine inertia
invariants. (For details, see Theory of Flexible Bodies.) Four combinations of invariants have
special significance and they are provided with Adams/Flex. In most cases, the modal basis in the
MNF is an orthogonal set including six rigid body modes. Theoretically, invariant 3 and 4 are zero
in this situation even though you may see some small non-zero entries due to numerical errors.
So, invariants 3 and 4 are disabled in all the four combinations by default. If you want to enable
them, you can choose to customize the invariant formulation. The standard formulations are:
• Rigid body - In this formulation, Adams/Flex disables invariant 6, the modal mass, and the
flexible body is considered rigid. Adams/View ignores all modes, even those you enable,
during the simulation. The results of the flexible body simulation closely resemble those for
an Adams rigid part although formulation differences can cause subtle result variations.
• Constant - In this formulation, Adams/Flex disables invariants 3, 4, 5, 8 and 9. The flexible
body's inertial properties are unaffected by deformation (that is, deformation and rigid body
motion are uncoupled).
The Constant option may only have academic value because computational savings will be
modest while potentially having a dramatic effect on results. When you select Constant,
Adams/View does not account for changes in the moment of inertia due to deformation.
• Partial coupling - In this formulation, which is the default, Adams/Flex disables invariants 3,
4, 5 and 9. Invariants 5 and 9 provide a second-order correction to the flexible body inertia
tensor. These invariants impose the greatest computational overhead on the evaluation of the
flexible body equations of motion. Disabling these invariants can reduce CPU time
significantly while having minor impact on results in most cases.
• Full coupling - In this formulation, Adams/Flex enables all of the invariants except for
invariants 3 and 4. Use this method to achieve full accuracy.
When Adams/Flex creates a flexible body, it uses the Partial Coupling formulation by default
because Partial Coupling has significant computational efficiency over the more accurate Full
Coupling formulation. You should verify, however, that your model does not require Full
Coupling.
You should always be careful when using the Constant formulation even when you expect
deformations to be small. Use it only after careful experimentation.
The Rigid Body formulation removes all flexibility effects, and you should only use it as a
debugging tool.
To set a modal formulation:
1. In the Inertia modeling area of the Flexible Body Modify dialog box, select a formulation option
or select Custom.
When you select Custom, Adams/Adams/Flex displays a Custom Inertial Modeling dialog box
that lets you set up the invariants that you want selected.
2. Use the dialog box to select the inertia invariants, and then select OK.
You can also use this dialog box to view the effects of the different options. For example, select
Partial Coupling to view the invariants that option disables and enables.
part 131
part modify flexible_body visual_representation

Allows you to change the amount by which Adams/Flex deforms a mode. You can exaggerate
deformations so you can see deformations that might otherwise be too subtle to see, or you can limit the
deformations. The default scale factor is 1.
By default, animations containing flexible bodies display the nodal deformations for the bodies at each
frame of the animation. To display these nodal deformations, Adams/PostProcessor computes a cache of
information before displaying the animation. The generation of this cache can cause a delay in the initial
display of the animation. You can avoid the caching delay by turning off the nodal deformations and
displaying the flexible bodies in their undeformed shapes only. To turn off the nodal deformations, set
the scale to 0, which treats the flexible body like a rigid body, showing no physical deformations. You
can still display the contour and vector plots. Note that these settings only apply to animations and will
not affect the simulation of the specified bodies.
Format:

scale_factor= real
color_contours= color_contours_opts
mnf_graphics= boolean
outline_graphics= boolean
datum_node_for_deformation= integer
contour_plots= boolean
vector_plots= boolean
mode_filter= none/ deformation/ percentage/ frequency
filter_value= real
render= flat/ smooth/ precision
Example:
part modify flexible_body visual_representation &

scale_factor = 20 &
color_contours = on &
outline_graphics = yes &
mode_filter = none &
part modify flexible_body visual_representation &

mnf_graphics = yes &
render = smooth
Description:

flexible_body_name Existing Flex Body Specifies the flexible body that needs to be
modified.
scale_factor Real Specifies the amount by which the deformations
should be exaggerated.
color_contours Off/On/by_deformation Specifies whether this has to be turned On,Off or
by_deformation.
mnf_graphics Yes/No Specifies ON to turn on the viewing of the full MNF
graphics; OFF to turn off the viewing.
outline_graphics Yes/No Specifies ON to see the outline graphics.
datum_node_for_def Integer Set the datum node for which you want deformation
ormation color changes to be relative to using Adams/Flex.
contour_plots Yes/no You can select to animate the deformations, modal
forces (MFORCEs), or the stresses and strain acting
on the flexible body as contour or vector plots or
both. Specify YES if the animation should be
viewed as a contour plot, NO otherwise.
vector_plots Yes/No You can select to animate the deformations, modal
forces (MFORCEs), or the stresses and strain acting
on the flexible body as contour or vector plots or
both. Specify YES if the animation should be
viewed as a contour plot, NO otherwise.
mode_filter None/ Deformation/ Select a filter type, as explained in the extended
Percentage/ Frequency definition.
filter_value Real Enter the frequency, minimum displacement, or
percentage for the specified filter.
render Flat/ Smooth/ Precision Set the flexible body rendering to flat, smooth or
precision.
part 133
1. Outline Graphics Applied to a Flexible Body
When you build a flexible body into Adams/View, Adams/Flex creates a mesh on the body based
on the description of the flexible body in the modal neutral file (MNF). Often flexible bodies are
based on a finite element model with such a high level of detail that it stretches the capabilities of
your graphical hardware. In other cases, the detailed mesh can hide other modeling elements.
If you encounter either of these, you can substitute a graphical outline for the graphics from the
MNF by sketching an outline.
2. For the datum_node_for_deformation parameter, Adams/Flex considers the deformation to be
relative to the origin of the flexible body (its local body reference frame (LBRF) or coordinate
system) by default. For example, if you were modeling a cantilever beam in Adams/Flex, you
could specify that deformations should be relative to the clamped end
3. By default, all enabled modes are used to generate nodal displacements for each flexible body
during animations. To increase animation performance, Adams/PostProcessor has three filters
that let you remove graphically insignificant modes for animations. A mode that is filtered out is
excluded from the modal superposition and any contribution to the deformation of the body is
ignored. Note that these modes are not filtered out for numeric operations, such as signal
processing or xy plotting. Select one of the following for the mode_filter parameter:
• None - Includes all modes for computing the graphics display.
• Frequency - Excludes any mode that is activated above the specified frequency.
• Min Displacement - Excludes any mode that does not contribute the minimum displacement
specified for at least one vertex of the flexible body. For example, if you are viewing the
animation of a vehicle driving down the road, it is unlikely that you would be able to see
deformations of 0.5 mm or less. Therefore, if you set a mode filter value of 0.5, any mode that
contributes less then 0.5 is considered insignificant and is ignored for animations. This
calculation is performed at each frame of the animation, allowing the set of significant modes to
change throughout the simulation.
• Percentage - Determines the maximum displacement contributed by all modes, and excludes
any mode that doesn't contribute displacement of one vertex at least as significant as a
percentage of the maximum. For example, setting the percentage filter at 15% excludes any
mode not contributing at least 15% of the most dominant mode. This calculation is performed for
each frame of the animation, therefore, allowing the set of significant modes to change
throughout the simulation.
4. The render parameter can take the following values:
• Flat - Renders flexible bodies more simply, with flat edges. Uses face normals to produce a
faceted rendition of the body. Also, the normals are calculated for the undeformed body and are
reused when showing its deformed shaped. This is the fastest of the rendering options but can
produce some incorrect light intensities for bodies with large nodal deformations.
• Smooth - Renders the flexible body with smooth, rounded edges, appropriate for presentations,
but slows down the animation. It uses vertex normals to produce the smooth rendition of the
body and also uses normals calculated for the undeformed body.
• Precision - Renders the highest quality image for the flexible body at a cost of decreased
drawing speed for the body. It uses vertex normals to produce a smooth rendition of the body.
When the body is displayed in a deformed context, such as when contained in an animation, the
normals are calculated for each deformed shape. This option produces the most accurate shading
for each body but is slower than the other options. We recommend that this option only be used
when producing movie files or hardcopy images for presentation purposes.
Cautions:
1. Note that setting the scale factor to a value other than 1 can make the joints at the flexible body
appear to separate. This is because the motion of a point on a flexible body is the sum of the
deformation that has been scaled and a rigid body motion that is not scaled.
In addition, if you set the scale to 0, Adams/Flex treats the flexible body as a rigid body during
animations.
part 135
part modify point_mass initial_velocity

Allows you to modify initial velocities on an existing point_mass.
Format:

point_mass_name = an existing part
vx = velocity
no_vx = true_only
vy = velocity
no_vy = true_only
vz = velocity
no_vz = true_only
Example:
part modify point_mass initial_velocity &

vm = cm &
vx = 1.02 &
vy = 1.01 &
vz = 1.05
Description:

point_mass_name An Existing Point_Mass Specifies the point_mass to be modified. You use this
parameter to identify the existing point_mass to be
vm An Existing Marker
vx Velocity Specifies the initial translational velocity of the center-
of-mass marker along the x-axis of the ground
reference frame.
no_vx True_Only Specifies to "UNSET" the "vx" velocity initial

vy Velocity Specifies the initial translational velocity of the center-
of-mass marker along the y-axis of the ground
reference frame.
no_vy True_Only Specifies to "UNSET" the "vy" velocity initial
vz Velocity Specifies the initial translational velocity of the center-
of-mass marker along the z-axis of the ground
reference frame.
no_vz True_Only This is not the same as setting the value to zero. A zero
velocity is not the same as "no" velocity. Therefore, by
setting this parameter to true, there is no longer a
Note: The initial translational velocities are with respect to the ground coordinate axes. The
point_mass object does not have any initial rotational velocities.
convenient to type the name even if the point_mass is displayed.
If you created the point_mass by reading an Adams data set or graphics file, the point_mass name
is the letters POI followed by the Adams data set point_mass ID number. For example, the name
of Adams POINT_MASS/101 is POI101. If you created the point_mass during preprocessing,
To identify a point_mass under another model, for instance, you may need to enter the model
name as well. For example, you may specify point_mass 'arm' from model 'robot' by entering
".robot.arm". If you type a "?", Adams/View will list the point_masss available by default.
You must separate multiple point_mass names by commas.
If the point_mass is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on any of the
You need not separate multiple point_mass picks by commas.
3. Note that the initial translational velocities are with respect to the ground coordinate axes
part 137
part modify point_mass mass_properties

Allows you to modify mass properties on an existing point_mass.
Format:

point_mass_name = an existing part
mass = mass
material_type = an existing material
density = density
Example:
part modify point_mass mass_properties &

point_mass_name = piston &
mass = 1.85 &
center_of_mass_marker = marker__1 &
material_type = steel
Description:

point_mass_name An Existing Point_Mass Specifies the point_mass to be modified. You use
this parameter to identify the existing point_mass
center_of_mass_marker An Existing Marker Specifies the marker that defines the part center
of mass and, in the absence of the inertia marker,
the axes for the inertia properties.
material_type An Existing Material Specifies the part material_type and that the mass
calculated
calculated.
part 139
1. The mass properties of a point_mass include the mass and the center-of-mass marker.
You may assign zero mass to a point_mass whose three degrees of motion you constrain with
respect to bodies that do have mass. However, due to the number of changes that you may make
to the data set in the course of defining a model, the probability of a later change requiring that
the point_mass have mass is high. Consequently, you are encouraged to assign finite (although
insignificant) masses and inertias to point_mass you would otherwise give zero mass properties.
If you specify the mass for a point_mass, you must also specify the center-of-mass marker for the
point_mass.
You may identify a point_mass by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
2. If the point_mass has no mass, Adams uses the point_mass LPRF to represent the position of the
point_mass internally. If the point_mass has mass, Adams uses the position of the center-of-mass
marker to represent the translational position of the point_mass internally.The orientation of the
point_mass and the center-of-mass marker have no effect on the simulation.
3. If the point_mass has mass, Adams uses the position of the center-of-mass (CM) marker to
represent the translational position of the point_mass internally.
part modify point_mass name_and_position

Allows you to modify an existing point_mass's name and position.
Format:

new_point_mass_name = a new point_mass
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
location = location
Example:
part create point_mass name_and_position &

new_point_mass_name = point_mass__2 &
adams_id = 1 &
comments = "modifying an existing part" &
planar = yes &
part 141
Description:

point_mass_name An Existing Point_Mass Specifies the point_mass to be
modified. You use this parameter to
identify the existing point_mass to be
new_point_mass_name A New Point_Mass Specifies the name of the new
point_mass. You may use this name
later to refer to this point_mass.
adams_id Adams_Id Specifies an integer used to identify
this element in the Adams data file.
this part.
location Location Specifies the location of the origin of
a coordinate system (e.g. marker or
part).
orientation Orientation Specifies the orientation of a
coordinate system (e.g. marker or
part) using three rotation angles.
along_axis_orientation Location Specifies the orientation of a
part) by directing one of the axes.
Adams/View will assign an arbitrary
in_plane_orientation Location Specifies the orientation of a
part) by directing one of the axes and
relative_to An Exixting Model, Part Or Marker Specifies the coordinate system that
coordinates that Adams is not to
change as it solves for the initial
conditions.
1. The position of the rigid body part can be broken down into two parts:
location, and orientation.

LOCATION can be specified by supplying three coordinates corresponding two the current
planes.
part 143
an AdamsAdams file, Adams/View will replace the zero with a unique, internally-generated
identifier.
yourself.
by commas.
coordinate system.
You may change this convention with the 'DEFAULTS UNITS
ORIENTATION_TYPE=' command. For example, selecting SPACE123 means you will
subsequently be supplying space-fixed x, y, and z angles.
coordinate system.
coordinate system.
• X X coordinate
• Y Y coordinate
• Z Z coordinate
• PSI Psi angle
• PHI Phi angle
motion.
part 145
Cautions:
1. Adams/View will not allow you to have two point_masses with the same name, so you must
Tips:
part modify rigid_body initial velocity

Allows the modification of initial velocities on an existing part.
You can specify initial velocities for parts. Adams/View uses the initial velocity during the initial
conditions simulation, which it runs before it runs a simulation of your model.
You can specify translational and angular velocities for rigid bodies and only translational velocity for
point masses.
• Translational velocity defines the time rate of change of a part’s center of mass with respect to
• Angular velocity defines the time rate of change of a part’s rotational position with respect to the
If you specify initial velocities, Adams/View uses them as the initial velocity of the part during
assemble model operations, regardless of any other forces acting on the part. You can also leave
some or all of the velocities unset. Leaving a velocity unset lets Adams/View calculate the
velocity of the part during an assemble operation depending on the other forces and constraints
acting on the part. Note that it is not the same as setting the initial velocity to zero. Setting an
initial velocity to zero means that the part will not be moving in the specified direction when the
simulation starts, regardless of any forces and constraints acting upon it.
Translational velocities are specified by parameters VX, VY, and VZ. Rotational velocities are
specified by parameters WX, WY, and WZ. Note that the initial translational velocities are with
respect to the ground coordinate axes, while the initial rotational velocities are with respect to the
center-of-mass marker axes.
Format:
part modify rigid_body initial_velocity

wm= an existing marker
vx = velocity
no_vx = true_only
vy = velocity
no_vy = true_only
vz = velocity
no_vz = true_only
wx = angular_vel
part 147
part modify rigid_body initial_velocity

no_wx = true_only
wy = angular_vel
no_wy = true_only
wz= angular_vel
no_wz = true_only
Example:
part modify rigid_body initial_velocity &

part_name= part_2 &
vm = cm &
wm = cm &
vx = 4 &
no_vy = true &
no_vz = true &
no_wx = true &
no_wy = true &
no_wz = true
Description:

part_name A Existing Part Specifies the part name to modify
vm An Existing Marker Specifies the marker representing the translational velocity
wm An Existing Marker Specifies the marker representing the rotational velocity about it
vx Velocity Specifies the translation velocity in x of vm
no_vx True_only Specifies the zero translational velocity in x of vm
vy Velocity Specifies the translation velocity in y of vm
no_vy True_only Specifies the zero translational velocity in y of vm
vz Velocity Specifies the translation velocity in z of vm
no_vz True_only Specifies the zero translational velocity in z of vm
wx Angular_vel Specifies the rotational velocity about x of wm
no_wx True_only Specifies the zero rotational velocity about x of wm

wy Angular_vel Specifies the rotational velocity about y of wm
no_wy True_only Specifies the zero rotational velocity about y of wm
wz Angular_vel Specifies the rotational velocity about z of wm
no_wz True_only Specifies the zero rotational velocity about z of wm
1. The part name specifies the part to modify. You use this parameter to identify the existing part to
affect with this command. You may identify a part by typing its name or by picking it from the
screen. If the part is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it
convenient to type the name even if the part is displayed.If you created the part by reading an
Adams data set or graphics file, the part name is the letters PAR followed by the Adams data set
part ID number. The name of Adams PART/101 is PAR101, for example. If you created the part
during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that time. If a part is available by default, you may
identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a part
2. The vm specifies the marker with reference to which the x, y, z components of velocities of the
‘PART’, vx, vy, vz respectively are specifies. Translational velocity defines the time rate of
change of a part’s center of mass with respect to ground or another marker ‘vm’ in your model.
You can specify translational velocity for each vector component of the marker as vx, vy and vz.
3. If the part has no translational velocity in either of x, y and z directions, then the you need not
specify it explicitly. By default, the initial velocity is zero. Or else, you can set it to zero by
selecting parameter ‘no_vx’, ‘no_vy’, and ‘no_vz’ to TRUE.
4. The wm specifies the a marker about which the rotational velocities of the part are specifies. The
wx, wy, wz components are the rotational velocities of the part about x, y, and z axis of the marker
‘wm’, respectively. Angular velocity defines the time rate of change of a part’s rotational position
with respect to the CM marker of the part or another marker ‘wm’ in your model. You can specify
angular velocity for each vector component of the marker as wx, wy, wz.
5. If the part has no rotational velocity about either of x, y and z directions of ‘wm’ marker, then the
you need not specify it explicitly. By default, the initial rotational velocity is zero. Or else, you
can set it to zero by selecting parameter ‘no_wx’, ‘no_wy’, and ‘no_wz’ to TRUE.
part 149
part modify rigid_body mass_properties

Allows the modification of mass properties on an existing part.
The mass properties of a part include the mass, mass-inertia tensor, center-of-mass marker, and inertia
marker. You may assign zero mass to a part whose six degrees of motion you constrain with respect to
parts that do have mass. However, due to the number of changes that you may make to the data set in the
course of defining a model, the probability of a later change requiring that the part have mass is high.
Consequently, you are encouraged to assign finite (although insignificant) masses and inertias to parts
you would otherwise give zero inertial properties. A part without mass cannot have moments of inertia.
If you specify the mass and moments of inertia for a part, you must also specify the center-of-mass
marker for the part.
Format:

mass = mass
inertia_marker = an existing marker
ixx = inertia
iyy =
izz =
ixy =
izx =
iyz =
density =
material_type=
Example:
part modify rigid_body mass_properties &

mass = 20 &
center_of_mass_marker = cm &
inertia_marker = cm &
ixx = 1.8e6 &
iyy = 1.8e6 &
part modify rigid_body mass_properties &

izz = 1.8e6 &
ixy = 0 &
izx = 0 &
iyz = 0
Description:

part_name A Existing Part Specifies the name of a rigid body
center_of_mass_marker An Existing Marker Specifies the marker to define center of mass
inertia_marker An Existing Marker Specifies the marker that defines the inertia
properties of the rigid body
ixx Inertia Specifies the xx component of the mass-inertia
tensor
iyy Inertia Specifies the yy component of the mass-inertia
tensor
izz Inertia Spcifies the zz component of the mass-inertia tensor
ixy Inertia Spcifies the xy component of the mass-inertia tensor
izx Inertia Spcifies the zx component of the mass-inertia tensor
iyz Inertia Spcifies the yz component of the mass-inertia tensor
density Density Specifies the part density
material_type An Existing Material Specifies the material type
1. The part name specifies the part to modify. You use this parameter to identify the existing part to
affect with this command. You may identify a part by typing its name or by picking it from the
screen. If the part is not visible on the screen, you must type the name. You may also find it
convenient to type the name even if the part is displayed.If you created the part by reading an
Adams data set or graphics file, the part name is the letters PAR followed by the Adams data set
part ID number. The name of Adams PART/101 is PAR101, for example. If you created the part
during preprocessing, you gave it a name at that time. If a part is available by default, you may
identify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you must enter its full name. To identify a part
part 151
2. Mass specifies the part mass. If the part has no mass, Adams uses the part LPRF to represent the
position and orientation of the part internally. If the part has mass, Adams uses the position of the
center-of-mass marker to represent the translational position of the part internally and uses the
principal axes of the inertia tensor about the center-of-mass marker to represent the orientation of
the part internally. This internal frame of reference is referred to as the part principal axes frame.
3. The center of mass marker specifies the marker that defines the part center of mass and, in the
absence of the inertia marker, the axes for the inertia properties. If the part has mass, Adams uses
the position of the center-of-mass (CM) marker to represent the translational position of the part
internally and uses the principal axes of the inertia tensor about the CM marker to represent the
orientation of the part internally. This internal frame of reference is referred to as the part principal
axes frame.
4. The inertia marker specifies the marker that defines the axes for the inertia properties. If you do
not supply an inertia marker, it defaults to the part center-of-mass marker.
5. The ixx, iyy, izz, ixy, iyz and ixz are the xx, yy, zz, xy, yz and xz components of the mass-inertia
tensor, respectively.The mass-inertia tensor as computed about the origin of the inertia marker,
and expressed in the coordinates of the inertia marker reference frame. The inertia matrix is
defined as follows:
[ Ixx -Ixy -Ixz]
J = [-Ixy Iyy -Iyz]
[-Ixz -Iyz Izz]
It is a symmetrical, positive definite matrix. Compute the individual terms as follows:
Ixx = Integral (y**2 + z**2) dm
Iyy = Integral (x**2 + z**2) dm
Izz = Integral (x**2 + y**2) dm
Ixy = Integral xy dm
Ixz = Integral xz dm
Iyz = Integral yz dm
In the above formulae, x, y, and z are the components of the displacement of an infinitesimal mass
particle of mass dm, measured from the origin of the inertia marker in the reference frame of the
inertia marker. The integral is performed over the entire mass of the body. If you do not specify
the inertia marker, then it defaults to the center-of-mass marker. In that case, you compute these
quantities about the origin of the center-of-mass marker in the reference frame of the center-of-
mass marker.
6. Density specifies the part density and that the mass properties of the part are to be automatically
calculated. The calculated mass properties are based upon the solid geometry that belongs to the
part.
7. The material type specifies the part material_type and that the mass properties of the part are to
be automatically calculated. The calculated mass properties are based upon the solid geometry
that belongs to the part.
part modify rigid_body name_and_position

Allows you to modify an existing rigid body part's name and position.
Format:

new_part_name = a new part
ground_part = boolean
adams_id = adams_id
comments = string
location = location
Example:

new_part_name = part__2 &
ground_part = yes &
adams_id = 1 &
comments = "modifying an existing part" &
planar = yes &
part 153
Description:

part_name An Existing Part Specifies the part tobe modified. You
use this parameter to identify the
existing part to be affected with this
command.
new_part_name A New Part Specifies the name of the new part.
You may use this name later to refer to
this part.
ground_part Boolean
adams_id Adams_Id Specifies an integer used to identify
this element in the Adams data file.
this part.
location Location Specifies the location of the origin of a
part).
orientation Orientation Specifies the orientation of a
coordinate system (e.g. marker or part)
using three rotation angles.
along_axis_orientation Location Specifies the orientation of a
by directing one of the axes.
Adams/View will assign an arbitrary
in_plane_orientation Location Specifies the orientation of a
by directing one of the axes and
relative_to An Existing Model, Part Or Marker Specifies the coordinate system that
coordinates that Adams is not to
change as it solves for the initial
conditions.
1. The position of the rigid body part can be broken down into two parts:
• location
• orientation.
LOCATION can be specified by supplying three coordinates corresponding to the current
would supply an X, Y, and Z. You may also specify location by "clicking" on an existing part
or marker, with the mouse cursor, that has the same desired location.
at that time.
associated with it.
3. You must supply a unique name for the new part, or accept the name that Adams/View has
generated for you.
The position of the rigid body part can be broken down into two parts:
• location
• orientation.
part 155
LOCATION can be specified by supplying three coordinates corresponding two the current
planes.
it has assumed.
yourself.
by commas.
coordinate system.
coordinate system.
coordinate system.
part 157
• X X coordinate
• Y Y coordinate
• Z Z coordinate
• PSI Psi angle
• PHI Phi angle
motion.
Tips:
pause 1
pause
The PAUSE command is used to temporarily halt command processing until the user types any character
on the keyboard or makes a pick with the mouse in the Adams/View window or until the number of
seconds specified with the optional parameter, time_delay, expires. Even though this command can be
used during an interactive session it is most useful when used in a command file. Stopping command
processing during the execution of a command file facilitates demo's, presentations, and so on.
Format:
pause
time_delay= real
Example:
pause &
time_delay = 5
Description:

time_delay Real The TIME_DELAY parameter is used to specify the number of seconds
to temporarily halt command processing. Command processing will
resume after the specified number of seconds has elapsed or when the
user types any character on the keyboard or makes a pick with the mouse
in the Adams/View window.
plot3D 1
plot3D
plot3D legend create
plot3D legend create

Allows creation of a legend on the three dimensional plot showing color gradient
The legend that appears when you select to have interpolated colors on the surface of your three-
dimensional plot.
Format:
plot3d legend create

legend_name = a new plot3d legend
visibility = on_off
gradients = integer
fit_plot = boolean
Example:
plot3D legend create &

legend_name= new_lgnd &
visibility = on &
gradients = 200 &
fit_plot = yes
Description:

legend_name A New Plot3d Legend Specifies the name of a 3D plot legend to be created
visibility On_off Sets the default visibility status to ON or OFF
gradients Integer Specifies the number of gradients shown in the legend
fit_plot Boolean Specifies whether the legend fits the plot window
1. The name of the legend can be specified, and the default visibility of the legend bar can be set to
ON or OFF by the parameter ‘visibility’.
2. When we use interpolated colors to show the colors on the surface of three dimensional plot, the
number of colors used to display the surface can be set while using the surface command. This
number cannot be more than 255.
two and les than or equal to 255.
plot3D 3
plot3D legend delete
plot3D legend delete

Allows deletion of a existing legend on the three dimensional plot
The legend that appears when you select to have interpolated colors on the surface of your three-
dimensional plot.
It can be deleted if the surface is to be shown with a single color.
Format:
plot3d legend delete

legend_name = an existing plot3d legend
Example:
plot3D legend delete &

legend_name = new_lgnd
Description:

legend_name An Existing Plot3d Legend Specifies the name of a 3D plot legend to be deleted
1. When we use interpolated colors to show the colors on the surface of three dimensional plot, the
number of colors used to display the surface can be set while using the surface command. This
number cannot be more than 255 and the color gradients can be split into number required on the
legend bar.
2. Alternatively, if the surface is shown with single color, then the legend is not required, where the
existing legend can be deleted by using the ‘plot3D legend delete’ command.
plot3D plot clear
plot3D plot clear

Allows you to clear the contents of an existing three dimensional plot
The three dimensional plot can be created on plot window in a page over the postprocessor window. The
‘interface plot window open’ command can be used to create a new plot window, where a page can be
created to display the three dimension plot.
The existing 3D plot can be cleared by using the ‘clear’ command, erasing its contents
Format:
plot3d plot clear

plot_name = an existing plot3d
Example:
plot3d plot clear &

plot_name= .plot_3d_2
Description:

plot_name An Existing Plot3d Specifies an existing 3D plot name
The plot name specifies the name of a existing 3D plot to be cleared. It erases the contents of the plot,
including the title and subtitle.
plot3D 5
plot3D plot create
plot3D plot create

Allows you to create a three dimensional plot.
Format:
plot3d plot create

plot_name= a new plot3d
create_page = boolean
display_page = boolean
page_name = string
view= an existing view
bounding_box= on_off
graph_volume= integer
grid_lines= on_off
grid_style= grid_style
grid_thickness = real
title = string
subtitle = string
Example:
plot3d plot create &

plot_name = easy_plot &
create_page = yes &
display_page = yes &
page_name = new_page &
bounding_box = on &
graph_volume = 1,1,1 &
grid_lines = on &
grid_color = red &
grid_style = solid &
plot3D plot create
plot3d plot create &

grid_thickness = .8 &
title = '3D_plot' &
subtitle = "curve"
Description:

plot_name A New Plot3d Specifies a new name for 3D plot
create_page Boolean Creates a new page to display plot
display_page Boolean Specifies whether the page will be displayed or not
page_name String Specifies the name of the page to be created
view An Existing View Specifies an existing view where the plot can be displayed
bounding box Boolean Specifies whether the bounding box will be displayed or not
graph_volume Integer Specifies the graph volume
grid_lines Boolean Specifies displaying the grid lines
grid_color An Existing Color Specifies the color of the grid
grid_style Grid_style Specifies the grid line style
grid _thickness Real Specifies the grid line thickness
titile String Specifies the title of the plot
subtitle String Specifies the subtitle of the plot
1. The plot name specifies the new name for a 3D plot. If the ‘create_page’ is set to ‘yes’, a new page
will be created with the new 3D plot, but it will be displayed in the current view of the
plot_window if the parameter ‘display_page’ is also set ‘yes’. If a new page is to be created it can
be named by the parameter, ‘page_name’ besides the name of the 3D plot.
2. Alternatively, the 3D plot can be simply displayed in any of the existing view of the plot_window
by choosing the existing ‘view_name’.
3. The ‘bounding box’ option set to ‘yes’ will show complete line diagram bounding the volume of
the box, else, only the background surface will be displayed to show the 3D plot.
4. The graph volume can be specified by specifying the length, breadth and the depth of the box
encompassing the bounding volume of the 3D plot. The gird lines display can be switched to ‘yes’
and ‘no’ depending on requirement. The grid properties like color, line thickness and style, e.g.
solid or dashed line style, can be edited by using respective parameters. For graph volume, enter
the x, y, and z aspect ratio of the plot. For example, a volume of 1,1,1 makes the plot look like a
cube, while a volume of 2,1,1 makes the plot twice as long in the x dimension as it is in the y and z.
plot3D 7
plot3D plot create
5. The ‘title‘ and ‘subtitle’ is applied by using the respective commands to the 3D plot.
plot3D plot delete
plot3D plot delete

Allows you to delete the contents of an existing three dimensional plot
The existing 3D plot can be deleted from the current plot window, keeping the page blank.
Format:
plot3d plot delete

plot_name= an existing plot3d
Example:
plot3d plot delete &

plot_name= .plot_3d_2
Description:

The plot name specifies the name of a existing 3D plot to be deleted. It deletes the plot and the page
remains blank.
plot3D 9
plot3D plot modify
plot3D plot modify

Allows you to modify an existing three dimensional plot.
The existing 3D plot can be edited by using the ‘modify’ command
Format:
plot3d plot modify

bounding_box= boolean
graph_volume= reals
grid_lines = on_off
grid_style = grid_style
grid_thickness = real
title = string
subtitle = string
Example:
plot3d plot modify &

plot_name= .plot_3d_2 &
bounding_box= on &
graph_volume= 0.5,1.0,1.0 &
grid_lines= on &
grid_color= .colors.red &
grid_style= dash &
grid_thickness= 0.8 &
title = "3d plot" &
subtitle = "bspline_surface"
plot3D plot modify
Description:

bounding box Boolean Specifies whether the bounding box will be displayed or not
graph_volume Integer Specifies the graph volume
grid_lines Boolean Specifies displaying the grid lines
grid_color An Existing Color Specifies the color of the grid
grid_style Grid_style Specifies the grid line style
grid _thickness Real Specifies the grid line thickness
titile String Specifies the title of the plot
subtitle String Specifies the subtitle of the plot
1. The plot name specifies the name of a existing 3D plot.
2. The ‘bounding box’ option set to ‘yes’ will show complete line diagram bounding the volume of
the box, else, only the background surface will be displayed to show the 3D plot.
3. The graph volume can be specified by specifying the length, breadth and the depth of the box
encompassing the bounding volume of the 3D plot. The gird lines display can be switched to ‘yes’
and ‘no’ depending on requirement. The grid properties like color, line thickness and style, e.g.
solid or dashed line style, can be edited by using respective parameters. For graph volume, enter
the x, y, and z aspect ratio of the plot. For example, a volume of 1,1,1 makes the plot look like a
cube, while a volume of 2,1,1 makes the plot twice as long in the x dimension as it is in the y and z.
4. The ‘title‘ and ‘subtitle’ is applied by using the respective commands to the 3D plot.
plot3D 11
plot3D plot restore
plot3D plot restore

Allows you to restore an existing three dimensional plot to the current view window.
The ‘restore’ command brings the respective plot to the plot_window currently viewed.
Format:
plot3d plot restore

Example:
plot3d plot restore &

plot_name= .plot_3d_2 &
view_name = .gui.ppt_main.sash1.sash2.gfx.page_1.view_1
Description:

view_name An Existing View Specifies the name of an existing view
The plot name specifies the name of a existing 3D plot, and the ‘view_name’ specifies an existing view
name of the plot_window where the 3D plot is to be restored.
plot3D surface create

Allows you to create a three dimensional surface plot.
The three dimensional surface plot can be created on plot window in a page over the postprocessor
window. The ‘interface plot window open’ command can be used to create a new plot window, where a
page can be created to display the three dimension surface plot.
Format:
plot3d surface create

surface_name= a new plot3d surface
x_data = real
y_data = real
z_data = real
x_units = string
y_units = string
z_units = string
skip_x = integer
skip_y = integer
use_interpolated_colors = true_only
fit_plot= boolean
Example:
plot3D surface create &

surface_name= dome_surf &
x_data= 1 &
y_data= 1 &
z_data= 1 &
x_units= mm &
y_units= mm &
z_units= mm &
skip_x= 1 &
skip_y= 1 &
plot3D 13
plot3D surface create &

use_interpolated_colors= true &
fit_plot = yes
Description:

surface_name A New Plot3d Surface Specifies the name of a 3D surface plot to be
created
x_data Real Specifies the datum value of the x axis
y_data Real Specifies the datum value of the y axis
z_data Real Specifies the datum value of the z axis
x_units String Specifies the units of x axis
y_units String Specifies the units of y axis
z_units String Specifies the units of z axis
skip_x Integer Specifies the x increment values to skip
skip_y Integer Specifies the y increment values to skip
use_interpolated_colors True_only Displays the surface as range of colors, if selected
color An Existing Color Specifies a single color with which to display the
color
fit_plot Boolean Specifies whether surface plot fits the plot window
1. The name of the surface plot to be created is specified initially.
2. The datum values of x, y and z data are entered, where the upper and lower limits of the respective
axis can be specified explicitly. If not specified, the upper and lower limits of each axis will be
datum value ±1.
3. The units of x, y and z axis are specified by entering the ‘units’ for respective axes. The units can
be entered as default units, e.g. for force enter ‘newton’. Alternatively, you can enter unit as
‘force’ which will display the default unit for force on the surface plot.
4. Set the x and y increment values you want Adams/PostProcessor to skip. Setting it to 1 for each
creates a smooth surface.
5. The parameter ‘use_interpolated_colors’ is set to ‘true’ to display the surface of the plot as a range
of colors. A legend explaining the colors and the values they represent appears. Alternatively, the
‘color’ is set to any single color with which to display the surface.
plot3D surface delete
plot3D surface delete

Allows you to delete a three dimensional surface plot.
Format:
plot3d surface delete

surface_name = an existing plot3d surface
Example:
plot3D surface delete &

surface_name= surf
Description:
:

surface_name An Existing Plot3d Surface Specifies the name of a an existing 3D surface plot to
be deleted
The name of surface plot to be is entered for the ‘delete’ command to delete the 3D surface plot.
plot3D surface modify

Allows you to modify a three dimensional surface plot.
Format:
plot3d surface modify

surface_name= an existing plot3d surface
x_data= real
y_data = real
z_data= real
x_units = string
y_units = string
z_units = string
skip_x = integer
skip_y = integer
use_interpo true_only
lated_color
s =
Example:
plot3D surface modify &

surface_name = surf &
x_values = 3 &
y_values = 3 &
z_values = 3 &
x_units = force &
y_units = force &
z_units = pressure &
skip_x = 1 &
plot3D surface modify &

skip_y = 1 &
color = BLUE
Description:

surface_name An Existing Plot3d Surface Specifies the name of a an existing 3D surface
plot to be modified
x_data Real Specifies the datum value of the x axis
y_data Real Specifies the datum value of the y axis
z_data Real Specifies the datum value of the z axis
x_units String Specifies the units of x axis
y_units String Specifies the units of y axis
z_units String Specifies the units of z axis
skip_x Integer Specifies the x increment values to skip
skip_y Integer Specifies the y increment values to skip
use_interpolated_colors True_only Select to display the surface as range of colors
color An Existing Color Specifies single color with which to display
the color
1. The name of surface plot to be modified is entered as ‘surface_name’.
2. The datum values of x, y and z data are entered, where the upper and lower limits of the respective
axis can be specified explicitly. If not specified, the upper and lower limits of each axis will be
datum value ±1.
3. The units of x, y and z axis are specified by entering the ‘units’ for respective axes. The units can
be entered as default units, e.g. for force enter ‘newton’. Alternatively, you can enter unit as
‘force’ which will display the default unit for force on the surface plot.
4. Set the x and y increment values you want Adams/PostProcessor to skip. Setting it to 1 for each
creates a smooth surface.
5. The parameter ‘use_interpolated_colors’ is set to ‘true’ to display the surface of the plot as a range
of colors. A legend explaining the colors and the values they represent appears. Alternatively, the
‘color’ is set to any single color with which to display the surface.
plot3D 17
plugin 1
plugin
plugin load
plugin load
Allows you to load a plugin for use in the current session.
Format:
plugin load
plugin_name= any plugin
See List of valid plugin names.
Example:
plugin load &

plugin_name= vibration
Description:

plugin_name Any Plugin Specifies the name of the plugin to be loaded
1. Any action that the user does while interacting with the plugin essentially falls in one of the three
categories listed below,
a. Plugin discovery: Since, plugins are written by the Adams users themselves, there has to be a
defined way for the Adams/View software to discover the existence of the plugin. This is done
with the help of xml files. There is one xml file per plugin, which has the file name as
plugin_plg.xml (where plugin is the name of the plugin) and lies in one of the following three
locations,
• plugin specific directory included in the colon-separated list of directories contained in the
user environment variable MDI_USER_PLUGIN_DIR.
• The $topdir/adams installation directory (i.e. /usr/mdi/win32).
• A plugin specific directory under the mdi installation directory (i.e. /usr/mdi/vibration) with a
symbolic link from the $topdir/ directory.
The xml file contains the top level information about the plugin such as the plugin name,
version number, Adams version for which it was designed and a brief description of the plugin
itself. Note that the xml file is the only way for the plugin to establish its existence to Adams.
plugin 3
plugin load
b. Plugin Load/unload : Whenever a plugin is loaded through the plugin manager, the plugin
view dll is first searched. If present, the loader searches for the entry point function named
plugin_initialize, inside the dll. The function is executed and contains the code to register the
custom functions which the plugin provides. A function named “vc_function_add” is used for
the purpose. The function, through its parameters takes the Function name of the function
being registered, Function address, Number of parameters, Types of the parameters, i.e.
information which in itself is sufficient for the custom function to be used from inside the
Adams/View environment. All functions registered with Adams/view through this function,
are available in the function builder for use, like other standard functions which Adams/View
provides. The actual function implementations are defined as part of the view dll itself.
The dll also must export a function named plugin_terminate and is responsible for un-
registering all plugin functions, which it does with the help of a complementary function
called “vc_function_remove”.
As mentioned earlier, a full/partial binary file named plugin.bin must be present in one of the
3 defined locations. This file must contain,
• A view library object (this library object must have the same name as that of the plugin). It
typically contains the dialog boxes, UDE definitions and the macros specific to the plugin.
• A load macro. This macro is called as part of the plugin load procedure and generally contains
the Adams commands to create/load a custom menu in Adams/View. The menu provides the
central point of access for the plugin. The individual members of the menu are typically linked
to the plugin specific dialog boxes (defined inside the BIN file itself) which provide a user-
interface to access the plugin functionality.
• An unload macro. This macro typically does the opposite of what the load macro does. It
restores the Adams/View environment back to its original state, by removing any plugin
specific menus/dialogs etc. This macro is automatically called as part of the plugin-unload
procedure, i.e. when the user unloads the plugin from the plugin manager.
When the plugin is loaded, the function registration as described earlier takes place after
which the load macro inside the BIN file gets executed which in turn makes all the changes to
the Adams UI as required by the plug-in.
c. Plugin use: Using plug-ins the user can enhance the functionality of the parent program, while
making use of the environment that the parent offers.
List of valid plugin names
Product Plugin name

General Plugins for both Adams/Car Plotting aplt
Adams/View and Adams/Car
Adams/Controls controls
Adams/Durability durability
Adams/Mechatronics amech
Adams/Vibration vibration
plugin load
Product Plugin name

Adams/Car-Specific Plugins Adams/Car Ride aride
Adams/Car Truck atruck
Adams/Driveline adriveline
plugin 5
plugin unload
plugin unload
Allows you to remove any plugin menus or commands.
Format:
plugin unload
plugin_name= existing plugin
See List of valid plugin names.
Example:
plugin unload &

plugin_name= vibration
Description:

plugin_name Existing plugin Specifies the name of the plugin to be unloaded
1. Any action that the user does while interacting with the plugin essentially falls in one of the three
categories listed below,
a. Plugin discovery: Since, plugins are written by the Adams users themselves, there has to be a
defined way for the Adams/View software to discover the existence of the plugin. This is done
with the help of xml files. There is one xml file per plugin, which has the file name as
plugin_plg.xml (where plugin is the name of the plugin) and lies in one of the following three
locations,
• A plugin specific directory included in the colon-separated list of directories contained in the
user environment variable MDI_USER_PLUGIN_DIR.
• The $topdir/adams installation directory (i.e. /usr/mdi/win32).
• A plugin specific directory under the mdi installation directory (i.e. /usr/mdi/vibration) with a
symbolic link from the $topdir/ directory.
The xml file contains the top level information about the plugin such as the plugin name,
version number, Adams version for which it was designed and a brief description of the plugin
itself. Note that the xml file is the only way for the plugin to establish its existence to Adams.
plugin unload
b. Plugin Load/unload : Whenever a plugin is loaded through the plugin manager, the plugin
view dll is first searched. If present, the loader searches for the entry point function named
plugin_initialize, inside the dll. The function is executed and contains the code to register the
custom functions which the plugin provides. A function named “vc_function_add” is used for
the purpose. The function, through its parameters takes the Function name of the function
being registered, Function address, Number of parameters, Types of the parameters, i.e.
information which in itself is sufficient for the custom function to be used from inside the
Adams/View environment. All functions registered with Adams/view through this function,
are available in the function builder for use, like other standard functions which Adams/View
provides. The actual function implementations are defined as part of the view dll itself.
The dll also must export a function named plugin_terminate and is responsible for un-
registering all plugin functions, which it does with the help of a complementary function
called “vc_function_remove”.
As mentioned earlier, a full/partial binary file named plugin.bin must be present in one of the
3 defined locations. This file must contain,
• A view library object (this library object must have the same name as that of the plugin). It
typically contains the dialog boxes, UDE definitions and the macros specific to the plugin.
• A load macro. This macro is called as part of the plugin load procedure and generally contains
the Adams commands to create/load a custom menu in Adams/View. The menu provides the
central point of access for the plugin. The individual members of the menu are typically linked
to the plugin specific dialog boxes (defined inside the BIN file itself) which provide a user-
interface to access the plugin functionality.
• An unload macro. This macro typically does the opposite of what the load macro does. It
restores the Adams/View environment back to its original state, by removing any plugin
specific menus/dialogs etc. This macro is automatically called as part of the plugin-unload
procedure, i.e. when the user unloads the plugin from the plugin manager.
When the plugin is loaded, the function registration as described earlier takes place after
which the load macro inside the BIN file gets executed which in turn makes all the changes to
the Adams UI as required by the plug-in.
c. Plugin use: Using plug-ins the user can enhance the functionality of the parent program, while
making use of the environment that the parent offers.
point 1
point
point attributes
point attributes
Attributes of points are the characteristics or properties of points which need to be set as per the
requirement of the users.
Format:
point attributes
point_name = an existing point
name_visibility = on/off/no opinion/toggle
active = on/off/no opinion
dependents_active = on/off/no opinion
Example:
point attributes &

point_name= POINT__1 &
visibility = on &
name_visibility = toggle &
color = tan &
active = on &
Description:

point name An Existing Point Specifies the name of the point for which you want to
set attributes
Scale of icon Real Specifies the amount by which you want to scale the
(Mutually icons
exclusive with
size_of_icons)
point 3
point attributes

Size of icon Real Specifies the size, in modeling units, the Adams/View
(Mutually icons will appear in.
exclusive with
scale_of_icons)
Visibility Visibility_option Specifies the visibility of geometry in a view
Name visibility Name_visibility_option You can set the visibility of the point’s label to On or
Off, or Toggle its current setting. Refer to the extended
definition for visibility, for an explanation of the
choices.
Color Color Specifies the color of the icon
Active Active_option Sets the activation status of the geometry during a
simulation
Dependents Active Dep_active_option Sets the active attribute for the dependents all the way
1. The scale factor is relative to the current size set. If no initial size is specified for Adams/View
icons, the default size is one modeling LENGTH unit. For example, if the modeling units are
K/M/S, a part axes icon has triad legs of one meter in length. When you specify scale_of_icons,
Adams/View calculates a new size by multiplying the current size by the scale, and storing the
product as the new icon size.
2. If no initial size is specified for Adams/View icons, the default size is one modeling LENGTH
unit. For example, if the modeling units are K/M/S, a part axes icon has triad legs of one meter in
length.
3. For the visibility parameter,
• on - The geometry is visible
• off - The geometry is invisible
• toggle - Reverses the current state of the geometry's visibility
• no_opinion - Inherits visibility from its parent
4. You can specify any color in the modeling database. If you specify no_color, Adams/View uses
the default color for this entity, if there is no color present in its parent modeling entity.
5. For the active parameter,
• Yes - The geometry is active
• No - The geometry is written to the dataset as a comment
• no_opinion - The geometry inherits the activation status from its parent
point attributes
When you set the active attribute on an object, you are also setting it on the children of the
object. If you set active=no on a part, but want the marker on that part to be on, then you must
explicitly set active=yes on the marker, after setting activation on the part.
6. An example for the dependents_active parameter,
where, PAR1 has a marker MAR1, which is the I marker of a joint JOI1 (which has a J marker,
individually.
• Group
• Part
• Marker
• Geometry
• Constraints
• Forces
• Data Elements
point 5
point copy
point copy
Allows you to create a copy of an existing point. The copy is identical to the original with the exception
of the point name.
Format:
point copy
Example:
point copy &

point_name = POINT__1 &
new_point_name = POINT__2
Description:

point_name An Existing Point Specifies the point to be modified
new_point_name A New Point Specifies the name of the new point to be created, which will
be a copy of an existing point
1. Point must have unique names relative to other markers under a given part. The replica is
completely independent of the original, and you can modify it without affecting the original.
point create
point create
Allows you to create a point at the location provided by the user.
Format:
point create
point_name = a new point
comment = string
location = location
relative_to = an existing reference_frame
Example:
point create &

point_name = POINT__1 &
location = 10 , 15 , 10 &
Description:

point_name A New Point Specifies the name of the point to be created
comment String Adds comments about the point, if any, to help you
manage and identify the point. You can enter any
alphanumeric characters.
location Location Specifies the coordinates for placing the point. Default
location is at 0, 0, 0.
relative_to An Existing Reference_frame Specifies the coordinate system in which the location
and orientation coordinates are specified.
Tips:
1. If you do not specify the ‘relative_to’ parameter, Adams/View uses the reference marker.
point 7
point delete
point delete
Allows you to delete the point by specifying the name of the point to be deleted.
Format:
point delete
point_name= an existing point
Example:
point delete &

point_name = POINT__1
Description:

point_name An Existing Point Specifies the point to be deleted
point modify
point modify
Allows you to modify an existing point. You must enter the name of the point you want to modify by
either picking it from the screen or specifying the full name.
Format:
point modify
comment = string
location = location
relative_to = an existing reference_frame
Example:
point modify &

point_name = point__1 &
new_point_name = point__2 &
location = 10,15,10 &
Description:

point_name An Existing Point Specifies the point to be modified
new_point_name A New Point Specifies the name of the point to be created
comment String Adds comments about the point, if any, to help
you manage and identify the point. You can enter
any alphanumeric characters.
location Location Specifies the coordinates for placing the point.
Default location is at 0, 0, 0.
relative_to An Existing Reference_frame Specifies the coordinate system in which the
location and orientation coordinates are specified.
Tips:
1. If you do not specify the ‘relative_to’ parameter, Adams/View uses the reference marker.
ptemplate 1
ptemplate
ptemplate create
ptemplate create
A plot template is analogous to a piece of paper on which the horizontal axis label, vertical axis label,
legend, title, and subtitle will be drawn. Each plot template has a name, and you can identify the entire
plot by the name of the plot template. One horizontal axis and one vertical axis are created with the plot
template.
Format:
ptemplate create
ptemplate_name= new page template
num_plots= integer value
Configuration= plot_configuration
Type / Size = hardcopy_paper
Orientation= hardcopy_orient
Height= real
Width= real
Example:
ptemplate create &

ptemplate_name = page_template__1 &
num_plots = 4 &
Configuration = Plot1 &
Type = A1 &
Orientation = Portrait
Description:

ptemplate_name New Page Template Specifies a string of characters that identifies an existing plot
num_plots Integer Value
Configuration Plot_configuration
Type / Size Hardcopy_paper
Orientation Hardcopy_orient
Height Real Specifies the height of the info window
Width Real Specifies the width of the info window
ptemplate 3
ptemplate create
1. Ptemplate_name or plot names are assigned at the time of plot creation. You can refer to the plot
by its name until it is deleted. Each plot should have a unique name.
2. The value should be a real number between 0.0 and 2.0, where 2.0 represents the height of the
Adams/View window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the info window to be half as high as the
Adams/View window.
3. The value should be a real number between 0.0 and 2.0, where 2.0 represents the width of the
Adams/View window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the info window to be half as wide as the
Adams/View window.
ptemplate delete
ptemplate delete
Deletes an existing ptemplate.
Format:
ptemplate delete
ptemplate_name= an existing ptemplate
Example:
ptemplate delete &

ptemplate_name= page_template__1
Description:

ptemplate_name An Existing Ptemplate Modifies a string of characters that identifies an existing
plot
ptemplate modify
ptemplate modify
Format:
ptemplate modify
ptemplate_name= an existing ptemplat
Type / Size = hardcopy_paper
Orientation= hardcopy_orient
Height= real
Width= real
Example:
ptemplate modify &

ptemplate_name = page_template__1 &
Type = A1 &
Orientation = landscape
Description:

ptemplate_name An Existing Ptemplate Modifies a string of characters that identifies an existing
plot
Type / Size Hardcopy_paper
Orientation Hardcopy_orient
Height Real Modifies the height of the info window
Width Real Modifies the width of the info window
1. Ptemplate_name or plot names are assigned at the time of plot creation. You can refer to the plot
by its name until it is deleted. Each plot should have a unique name.
2. The value should be a real number between 0.0 and 2.0, where 2.0 represents the height of the
Adams/View window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the info window to be as high as the
Adams/View window.
3. The value should be a real number between 0.0 and 2.0, where 2.0 represents the width of the
Adams/View window. Therefore, a value of 1.0 will set the info window to be half as wide as the
Adams/View window.
ptemplate modify
report 1
report
report create
report create
Allows you to create a report.
A page can be created with the command ‘interface page create’, where the report can be displayed. The
report can be accessed from a remote file.
Format:
report create
report_name= a new report
file_name = string
base_font_size = integer
view_name = an exiting view
Example:
report create &

report_name= .report_1 &
file_name= "C:/gui_text.txt" &
base_font_size= 10 &
view_name= .gui.ppt_main.sash1.sash2.gfx.page_5.view_1
Description:

report_name A New Report Specifies the name of the report to be created
file_name String Specifies the file to be read
base_font_size Integer Specifies the font size of the report text
view_name An Existing Report Specifies the name of the page view
1. The report can be created from an existing file by providing the ‘file name’. The font size of the
text in the report can be specified by ‘base_font_size’. The ‘view_name’ requires the view name
of the page where the report is displayed.
report 3
report delete
report delete
Allows you to delete the report.
A page can be created with command ‘interface page create’, where the report can be displayed. The
The report can be deleted by this command.
Format:
report delete
report_name = an existing Report
Example:
report delete &

report_name = report_2
Description:

report_name An Existing Report Specifies the name of an existing report
1. The report can be created from an existing file by providing the ‘file name’. The font size of the
2. The report can be deleted by using this command.
report modify
report modify
Allows you to modify a report.
The report can be deleted by this command.
Format:
report modify
report_name = an existing report
file_name= string
base_font_size= integer
Example:
report modify &

report_name= report_1 &
file_name= "C:/gui_text.txt" &
base_font_size= 12
Description:

report_name An existing Specifies the name of the report to be modified
report
file_name String Specifies the file to be read
base_font_size Integer Specifies the font size of the report text
1. The report can be created from a existing file by providing the ‘file name’. The font size of the
2. The parameters of the existing report like the file to be read and the font size of display can be
modified using this command.
report 5
report reload
report reload
Allows you to reload the report from a remote file.
If this remote file undergoes editing, the changes need to be incorporated or reloaded into the report. This
is done by using the ‘reload’ command, which reload the edited contents form the file to the report
Format:
report reload
report_name = An Existing Report
force_reload = boolean
Example:
report reload &

report_name = .report__2 &
force_reload = no
Decription:

report_name A new report Specifies the name of the report to be reloaded
force_reload Boolean
1. The report can be created from a existing file by providing the ‘file name’. The font size of the
2. If the external file accessed by the report changes, those changes can be reloaded into the report
by using the ‘reload’ command.
report restore
report restore
Allows you to restore an existing report to the current view.
Example:
report restore &

report_name= .report__1 &
view_name = .gui.ppt_main.sash1.sash2.gfx.page_5.view_1
Description:

report_name An existing report Specifies the name of an existing report
view_name An existing view Specifies the view name to display the report
Any existing report can be restored to the current view page by using the ‘restore’ command.
return 1
return
Allows you to exit a command file or macro and return to the command file or macro that invoked it. Its
effect is similar to BREAK when you use it to exit a loop, skipping all remaining commands in the
command file or macro (including any cleanup commands you may have at the end of your macro).
If a RETURN is executed within loops (nested to any depth), it exits those loops and performs all required
cleanup, just as multiple BREAKs would do. You can have as many RETURN commands in your
command files or macros as you want.
Format:
RETURN
Example:
RETURN is often used as a means of recovering from an error condition or allowing a user to cancel an
operation. Below, are two examples.
Example 1
In the example, the RETURN command lists information on the contents of the select list, but only if
there are objects on the list. If it finds no objects, it returns and issues an error message.
if condition=(DB_COUNT(.SELECT_LIST, "objects_in_group")==0)
mdi gui_utl_alert_box_1 type="Error" text="Select List is empty.
Select objects first."
return
end !if
!
info empty
!
list_info group &
group_name = .SELECT_LIST &
brief = on &
!
Example 2
This example macro determines if a particular file exists and asks the user if it should overwrite the
existing file.
variable create variable=$_self.fileName string="file.dat"
if condition=(file_exists($_self.fileName))
if condition=(alert("warning", "Delete existing
"//$_self.fileName//"?", "Ok", "Cancel", "", 2) == 2)
variable create variable=$_self.junk &
int=(alert("information", "File "//$_self.fileName//" not
destroyed.", "Ok", "", "", 1))
variable delete variable=$_self.*
return
end
variable create variable=$_self.junk &

int=(alert("information", "File "//$_self.fileName//" was
destroyed.", "Ok", "", "", 1))
end
! Write the new file.

file text open file=($_self.fileName) open_mode=overwrite
file text close
! Clean up.
variable delete variable=$_self.*
simulation 1
simulation
simulation configuration restore

Allows you to restore the configuration to its previous settings.
Format:

configuration_label = string
analysis_included = yes/no
Example:
simulation configuration restore &

configuration_label = "for model #1" &
analysis_included = yes
Description:

model_name An Existing Model Specifies an existing model.
configuration_label String Enters a string for the configuration label
analysis_included Boolean Takes the Boolean values of YES or NO depending on
whether or not the analysis is to be included with the
configuration
1. The user may use the SAVE command with the STATES argument to save the current simulation
RELOAD/STATES command. When the user reloads this file, Adams resets the simulation time
2. The user may use the SAVE command with the SYSTEM argument to save the entire current
values (displacements, velocities, force values, and user-defined variable values, etc.), and solver
data (integrator parameters, state derivatives, etc.). SAVE/SYSTEM creates a complete record of
Adams completely resets the model, simulation and solver data to that stored in the file.
simulation 3
Caution: This is an experimental feature only. Works only when the environment variable
MDI_AVIEW_EXPERIMENTAL is set to true.
simulation configuration save

Allows you to store the current Adams model and simulation conditions, or only the current simulation
states. This allows the user to return to the model or states at a later time, using the RELOAD command.
Format:

configuration_label = string
analysis_included = yes/no
Example:
simulation configuration save &

configuration_label = "for model #1" &
analysis_included = yes
Description:

configuration_label String Enter a string for the configuration label
analysis_included Boolean Takes the Boolean values of YES or NO depending on
whether the analysis has to be included with the
configuration or not.
1. The user may use the SAVE command with the STATES argument to save the current simulation
RELOAD/STATES command. When the user reload this file, Adams resets the simulation time
simulation 5
2. The user may use the SAVE command with the SYSTEM argument to save the entire current
values (displacements, velocities, force values, and user-defined variable values, etc.), and solver
data (integrator parameters, state derivatives, etc.). SAVE/SYSTEM creats a complete record of
Adams completely resets the model, simulation and solver data to that stored in the file.
Caution: This is an experimental feature only. Works only when the environment variable
MDI_AVIEW_EXPERIMENTAL is set to true.
simulation multi_run design_study

A set of simulations that help you adjust a parameter in your model to measure its effect on the
performance of your model. For example, you can run a design study to determine the optimal length
required for a driving link in a stamping machine required to make a stamp hit a box.
Format:

sim_script_name = an existing sim_script
number_of_levels = integer
objective_name = an existing objective
output_characteristic = output_characteristic
Example:
simulation multi_run design_study &

model_name = ATV_4poster &
sim_script_name = Last_Sim &
variable_name = variable__1 &
measure_name = measure__1 &
output_characteristic = average &
objective_name = objective__1 &
number_of_levels = 2
Description:

sim_script_name An Existing Sim_script Specifies the name of your simulation script, or the
default is used.
variable_name An Existing Vvar Enters the name of the design variable that you want
to vary
simulation 7

number_of_levels Integer If you specified only a range for the design variable,
enter the number of levels (values) you want to use
in the Default Levels text box.
measure_name An Existing Measure Specifies the name of an existing measure to be used
for the doe.
objective_name An Existing Objective Enters the name of the design objective.
output_characteristic Output_characteristic
2. Objectives usually involve simulation results, but they are not required to do so. You can create
an objective that depends only on the model data, such as overall weight or size. You can then use
Adams/View to vary, or even optimize, the design variables and immediately see the results on
the model
Typical objectives include time, energy, or displacement from a path.
simulation multi_run doe

Allows you to use a set of simulations that help you adjust parameters related to doe.
Format:

variable_names = an existing variable
objective_names = an existing objective
output_characteristic = output_characteristic
number_of_user_trials = integer
user_matrix = integer
technique = doe techinque
matrix_file_name = string
Example:
simulation multi_run doe &

model_name = ATV_4poster &
sim_script_name = Last_Sim &
technique = full_factorial &
variable_names = var__1 &
number_of_levels = 2 &
objective_names = objective__1 &
measure_name = measure__1 &
output_characteristic = average &
number_of_user_trials = 2
simulation 9
Description:

sim_script_name An Existing Enters the name of your simulation script or use the
Sim_script default.
variable_names An Existing Var Enters the name of the design variable that you want
to vary.
number_of_levels Integer Specifies the number of levels of the variable
objective_names An Existing Objective Enters the name of the design objective.
measure_name An Existing Measure Specifies the name of an existing measure.
output_characteristic Output_characteristic If you are using a measure set the design objective’s
value.
number_of_user_trials Integer Enters the number of trials (simulations) and the
trial matrix.
user_matrix Integer Specifies indexes to the levels for each variable.
technique Selects a DOE technique.
rows_in_table
table_of_values
matrix_file_name String Specifies the file in which the DOE trials are
described.
1. DOE is an active approach to quality improvement. DOE is a methodology by which you design
a set of runs or trials and extract from the results a pattern of behavior for the system. DOEs can:
• Provide up-front optimization
• Reduce sensitivity to manufacturing variation
• Enable you to balance conflicting designs
• Link physical and computer tests
• Correlate computer models
• Transfer up-front information downstream
• Communicate results to non-computer literate individuals
3. You can also browse for the script name in the Database Navigator. Right-click in the text box,
point to Simulation_Script, and then select Browse. Select the model in the Database Navigator,
and then select OK. The simulation script contains options or commands to drive the simulation.
4. Before you run a design study or design of experiment (DOE), you must specify a range of values
or list of values for each design variable used in the analysis. These determine the values that
Adams/View uses during the design study or DOE simulations. These values are called the levels
of the variable. Specify the number of levels to use when you run the design study or DOE.
the model. Typical objectives include time, energy, or displacement from a path.
6. The DOE technique or trial matrix controls the number of simulations and the combination of
variable values to use for each simulation. For example, the Full Factorial technique simulates
every possible combination of levels. If you use two variables with three levels each,
Adams/View runs nine simulations. The DOE technique or trial matrix selects values for a
variable based on the range or list of values you defined for the variable.
• If you specified only a range for a design variable, Adams/View selects from equally spaced
values across the range. You enter the number of values in the Default Levels text box.
• If you specified a list of values for a design variable, Adams/View selects directly from those
values, ignoring the value in the Default Levels text box.
7. The matrix_file_name parameter specifies the file in which the DOE trials are described. The first
line of the file contains three numbers. The first is the number of variables for this DOE. The
second number is the number of levels for each variable. The third number is the number of trials
to be found in the subsequent lines of the file. Each line that follows, contains indexes to the levels
for each variable. These indexes should be centered. This means that for a two-level variable,
the only possible values are -1 and +1; for three-levels, -1, 0 and +1; for four-levels, -2, -1, +1,
+2; and so on.
The following is an example of a file which could be used for an experiment with two variables
with three levels each. There would be four trials in the experiment.
2 3 4
0 +1
-1 0
+1 -1
+1 +1
8. The USER_MATRIX parameter specifies indexes to the levels for each variable. These indexes
should be centered. This means that for a two-level variable, the only possible values are -1 and
+1; for three-levels, -1, 0 and +1; for four-levels, -2, -1, +1, +2; and so on.
The following is an example which could be used for an experiment with two variables with three
levels each. There would be four trials in the experiment.
...
NUMBER_OF_USER_TRIALS=4 USER_MATRIX=0,+1, -1, 0, +1,-1, +1,+1
simulation 11
simulation multirun optimization

In general, an optimization problem is described as a problem of minimizing or maximizing an objective
function over a selection of design variables, while satisfying various constraints on the design and state
variables of the system.
Format:

model_name = existing model name
sim_script_name = Existing simulation script
variable_names = Existing variable
objective_name = Existing objective
output_characteristic = minimum/maximum/ average/ last_value/ absolute_minimum/
absolute_maximum/ rms/ standard_deviation
constraint_names = existing optimization constraint
characteristic = minimize/maximize
Example:
simulation multi_run optimization &

model_name = .MODEL_1 &
sim_script_name = .MODEL_1.Last_Sim &
variable_names = DV2 &
objective_name = .MODEL_1.OBJECTIVE_1 &
characteristic = minimize
Description:

model_name Existing Model Specifies the name of the model.
sim_script_name Existing Simulation Enters the name of your simulation script or uses the
Script default.
variable_name Existing Variable Specifies an existing variable name that has to be
used for the optimization study.
constraint_ names Existing Optimization Specifies the names of the constraints.
Constraint

characteristic Minimize/maximize Specifies whether to minimize or maximize the
characteristic
output_characteristic Minimum/maximum/ If you are using a measure, set the design objective’s
Average/ Last_value/ value. For a measure, enter minimum, maximum,
Absolute_minimum/ average, last_value,
Absolute_maximum/ absolute_minimum,rms,standard_deviation and
Rms/ absolute_maximum of the measure.
Standard_deviation
objective_name Existing Objective Enters the name of the design objective.
measure_name Existing Measure Enters the name of an existing measure to be used
for the doe.
1. The simulation script contains options or commands to drive the simulation.
the model
3. The objective function is a numerical representation of the quality, efficiency, cost, or stability of
the model. You decide whether the optimization chooses to find the minimum or maximum of the
function. The optimum value of this function corresponds to the best design possible using that
particular mathematical model. Examples of objective functions include execution time, energy
(effort) required, and total material costs.
Tips:
1. You can also browse for the script name in the Database Navigator. Right-click in the text box,
point to Simulation_Script, and then select Browse. Select the model in the Database Navigator,
and then select OK.
2. If you are preparing for an optimization, you can create constraint objects to limit the changes that
the optimizer can make. Often an optimization finds a configuration that optimizes the objective
you provided, but is unrealistic because it violates overall design constraints such as weight, size,
speed, or force limits.
To avoid results that violate the design constraints, you can create constraints for the optimization.
The optimization analysis improves the objective as much as possible without violating the
constraints.
simulation 13
simulation multi_run preview_doe

Allows you to see each configuration of your model for every design variable. Displays an alert box
asking if you want to pause after each configuration. Select YES to pause.
Format:

variable_names = Existing variables
technique = full_factorial/ user1/ user2/ user3
number_of_user_trials = integer
user_matrix = integer
rows_in_table = integer
table_of_values = real
matrix_file_name = Filename
Example:
simulation multi_run preview_doe &

model_name = .MODEL_1 &
variable_names = DV2 &
number_of_levels = 2 &
technique = full_factorial
Description:

model_name Existing Model Specifies the name of an existing model.
variable_name Existing Variables Enters the name of the design variable that you
want to vary.
number_of_levels Integer Specifies the number of levels to use when you
run the design study or DOE.
number_of_user_trials Integer Enters the number of trials (simulations) and the
trial matrix.
user_matrix Integer Specifies an integer

rows_in_table Integer Specifies an integer
table_of_values Real Specifies a real number.
technique Full_factorial/user1/user Selects a DOE technique.
2/user3
matrix_file_name Filename Specifies file name containing the matrix of
values to be read from.
1. Before you run a design study or design of experiment (DOE), you must specify a range of values
or list of values for each design variable used in the analysis. These determine the values that
Adams/View uses during the design study or DOE simulations. These values are called the levels
of the variable.
2. The DOE technique or trial matrix controls the number of simulations and the combination of
variable values to use for each simulation. For example, the Full Factorial technique simulates
every possible combination of levels. If you use two variables with three levels each,
Adams/View runs nine simulations.
The DOE technique or trial matrix selects values for a variable based on the range or list of values
you defined for the variable.
If you specified only a range for a design variable, Adams/View selects from equally spaced
values across the range. You enter the number of values in the Default Levels text box.
If you specified a list of values for a design variable, Adams/View selects directly from those
values, ignoring the value in the Default Levels text box.
simulation 15
simulation multirun read_results

Allows you to read a results files into Adams/View so you can plot, manipulate, or view the information
in the file.
Format:

variable_names = existing variable
objective_names = existing objective
output_characteristic = maximum/average/last_value/absolute_minimum/absolute_maximum/rms/
standard_deviation
var_values = real
ana_file_names = any file
Description:

model_name Existing Model Specifies the name of the model
variable_names Existing Variable Enters the name of the design variable that you want
to vary
var_values Real Specifies a real value
ana_file_names File Name Specifies the analysis file name
output_characteristic Minimum, Maximum, If you are using a measure, set the design objective’s
Average, Last_value, value. For a measure, enter minimum, maximum,
Absolute_minimum,r average, last_value,
ms,standard_deviatio absolute_minimum,rms,standard_deviation and
n And absolute_maximum of the measure.
Absolute_maximum
objective_ names Existing Objective Enters the name of the design objective.
measure_name Existing Measure Enters the name of an existing measure to be used for
the doe.
Adams/View to vary, or even optimize the design variables and immediately see the results on the
model.
Tips:
1. When specifying the name of the results file to be read, Adams/View will append the extension
.res. You can override the default by specifying a different extension. You can associate the
results file with a particular model or simulation.
2. You can import multiple files if you associate and store the files with a model. Adams/View reads
and creates all analysis file under the specified model. If you do not provide a model name,
Adams/View reads each analysis file into its own model.
3. If you select to associate the files with a particular simulation, you can only import one set of
output files generated from the same Adams/Solver simulation. Adams/View uses the time-date
stamp placed at the beginning of each output file, to determine if the files were generated by the
same simulation run.
4. When Adams/View reads a results file, it creates a new analysis run. Each block of data in the
results file corresponds to an Adams entity, such as part, joint, bushing, and so on. The data
corresponding to these entities is stored as a result set in the analysis run. The default name of the
analysis run will be the name of the results file, excluding the extension. You can override the
default analysis using the file_name parameter. The name of each result set will be the first three
letters of the entity name with the entity statement ID number appended to it. For example,
PART/101 would produce a result set name of par101
simulation 17
simulation multirun plot_measure

Format:

result_set_name = existing result_set
load_plot_window = yes/no
all_runs = yes/no
Description:

result_set_name Existing Result Set Enters the parametric analysis result set you want to
display.
view_name Existing View Each view created has a name associated with it.
load_plot_window Yes/No Takes boolean value of YES or NO.
all_runs Yes/No Takes boolean value of YES or NO.
1. Result set is a basic set of state variable data that Adams/Solver calculates during a simulation.
joint).
The result set contains:
• A component named Trial that contains the number of each run (one through the number of
runs).
• For each design variable, a component with the same name as the variable which contains the
values used for the variable in each run.
For each measure or objective, a component with the same name as the objective or measure
which contains the values of the performance measure for each run.
2. The view_name parameter is used to identify a view for a particular operation. In most cases,
view_name=all is also a valid entry. The all option indicates "all displayed views". There are
eight standard views available when the Adams/View is started. These views are: front, top,
right, iso, bottom, left, and back. The first four of these standard views are displayed by default
when Adams/View is started.
save/restore their attributes.
simulation 19
simulation multirun save

Allows you to save the results of the last simulation under a new name so that you can animate or plot
the results at a later time.
Format:

analysis_name = new analysis
auto_increment = yes/no
title = String
Example:
simulation multi_run save &

analysis_name = ANALYSIS__2 &
auto_increment = yes &
title = test
Description:

analysis_name New Analysis Name Specifies the name of the analysis to be saved
auto_increment Yes/No Select if you want Adams/View to automatically increment
the run names when you save subsequent simulations.
title String Specifies a string
1. By default, the results of a simulation are only saved to the modeling database and not to external
Adams/Solver analysis files. To save the results to external Adams/Solver analysis files, set the
simulation output before you run the simulation, as explained below:
You can change the default simulation settings so you can have greater control over both, the
performance of simulations and the output that is generated from them.
The Solver Settings dialog box contains options for controlling and managing simulations and
parametric analyses, including:
• Setting the types of files output during the simulation - You can set up Adams/View so that it
saves simulation data to external Adams/Solver files and controls what data Adams/View saves.
Adams/View saves the files in the directory in which you started Adams/View.
If you are using Adams/Durability, you can also save Adams/View RPC III and DAC output. For
more information, see Adams/Durability online help.
• Controlling the display during the simulation - You can control how Adams/View displays
your model during a single simulation or how it displays your model during a parametric
analysis, such as a design study or optimization. You can also set the information that
Adams/View displays during a parametric analysis.
Adams/View lets you set display options so you see just the amount of information you need
during a simulation. For example, when you perform a simulation on a new model, you can set
up the display to see the model change as the solution proceeds to determine if the simulation is
working properly. Frequently updating the display of the model can, however, slow down the
overall solution process.
Once your model runs properly, you can change Adams/View so it only updates the model at the
end of the simulation. You can even set Adams/View so it never updates the model. You can then
play an animation of the simulation, as required.
• Change solution settings for all types of simulations (kinematic, initial conditions, dynamic,
static) - The options for setting simulations match the arguments for the corresponding
statements in Adams/Solver. For example, options for setting a kinematic simulation match the
arguments for the KINEMATICS statement. Therefore, you will find it very easy to refer to the
more extensive simulation setting information in Adams/Solver online help.
Keep in mind that settings for individual simulations also affect the simulations during parametric
analyses, such as during a design study or optimization.
• Set what type of Adams/Solver to run - In addition to running interactive or scripted
simulations, you have several options for performing simulations. You can choose:
• Internal - Run Adams/Solver from within Adams/View and animate the results as they are
calculated, which is the default and is explained in Setting Simulation Controls. In addition, if
you select the Internal option, you can select from two different types of solvers:
• FORTRAN - Our existing version of Adams/Solver.
• C++ - Our new version of Adams/Solver, which is C++-based and promises to be faster, provide
new linear analysis capabilities, and have an improved methodology for identifying and handling
redundant constraints. Currently, it does not support all modeling elements that the
Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) supports.
• External - Perform a simulation with Adams/Solver while in Adams/View, but without seeing
the model update on your screen during the simulation. Adams/View automatically plays an
animation of the simulation when the simulation is complete.
• Write Files Only - Instruct Adams/View to write out the files that are needed to run a simulation
using Adams/Solver from outside of Adams/View.
Tips:
1. Saving simulation results is particularly important when you want to compare the results from
several design variations.
simulation 21
simulation multirun set

Allows you to set the parameters for the multi-run simulation.
Format:

load_analyses= yes/no
save_analyses= yes/no
analysis_prefix= string
stop_on_error= yes/no
save_curves= yes/no
chart_objectives= yes/no
chart_variables= yes/no
show_summary= yes/no
opt_algorithm= yes/no
opt_maximum_iterations= integer
opt_convergence_tolerance= real
opt_differencing_technique= centered_difference/forward_difference
opt_scaled_perturbation= real
opt_user_parameters= real
opt_rescale_iterations= integer
opt_slp_convergence_iter= integer
opt_debug= on/off
Example:
simulation multi_run set &

load_analysis = yes &
save_analyses = yes &
analysis_prefix = ANAL_1 &
stop_on_error = yes &
save_curves = no &
show_summary = no &
opt_user_parameters = 2.0
Description:

load_analysis Yes/No Specifies yes or no.
save_analysis Yes/No Set to Yes to automatically copies the
parametric analysis results to a permanent
location when the analysis is complete
analysis_prefix String Enters the name you want to use for each
analysis object.
stop_on_error Yes/No Set to Yes to stop the parametric analysis if
Adams/Solver encounters an error during a
simulation. If you set it to No, Adams/Solver
continues running simulations even if a
simulation fails or another error occurs.
save_curves Yes/No Clears all displayed measures at the beginning
of the parametric analysis and automatically
saves the curve from each trial or iteration.
chart_ objectives Yes/No Enter yes or no. See extended definition for
more details.
chart_variables Yes/No Displays a strip chart for each design variable,
plotting its value versus the trial or iteration
number. Adams/View updates the strip chart
every trial or iteration. Set it to yes or no
accordingly .
show_summary Yes/No
opt_algorithm Yes/No Specify yes or no. See extended definition for
more details.
opt_maximum_ iterations Integer Maximum iterations tells the optimization
algorithm how many iterations it should take
before it admits failure. Note that a single
iteration can have an arbitrarily large number of
analysis runs
opt_ convergence_ Real Convergence tolerance is the limit below which
tolerance subsequent differences of the objective must
fall before an optimization is considered
successful.
opt_ differencing_ tecnique Centered_difference/f The differencing technique controls how the
orward_difference optimizer computes gradients for the design
functions.
simulation 23

opt_scaled_ perturbation Integer The size of the perturbation can reduce the
effect of errors in the analysis.
opt_user_parameter Integer Adams/View passes the user parameters to a
user-written optimization algorithm.
opt_rescale_iteration Real Rescale iteration is the number of iterations
after which the design variable values are
rescaled. If you set the value to -1, scaling is
turned off.
opt_slp_convergence_iter Real The number of consecutive iterations for which
the absolute or relative convergence criteria
must be met to indicate convergence in the DOT
Sequential Linear Programming method.
opt_debug On/Off Turning on debugging output sends copious
optimizer diagnostics to the window that
launched Adams/View.
1. For the “analyis_prefix” parameter, Adams/View appends a unique number to the prefix to form
the complete name of the new analysis object. Adams/View creates the new analysis under the
model you analyzed.
2. If you do not select Save Curves, Adams/View does not clear or save any curves. It only displays
the curve for the current simulation and any curves you previously saved. Set to yes to save
curves, else, set to No.
3. For the “Chart_ Objectives” parameter, enter “yes” to display a strip chart of the following,
depending on the type of parametric analysis:
• Objective value versus variable value for a design study.
• Objective value versus trial for a design of experiments (DOE).
• Objective value versus iteration number for an optimization.
Adams/View updates the strip chart at every trial or iteration.
4. Algorithm specifies the algorithm used to perform the optimization. The OPTDES algorithms are
provided with Adams/View. The DOT algorithms can be purchased from Vanderplaats R&D, Inc.
You can also include your own optimization algorithm.
• OPTDES-GRG - Use the GRG (Generalized Reduced Gradient) algorithm from the OptDes
code of Design Synthesis. This algorithm requires that design variables have range limits,
since it works in scaled space.
• OPTDES-SQP - Use the SQP (Sequential Quadratic Programming) algorithm from the
OptDes code of Design Synthesis. This algorithm requires that design variables have range
limits, since it works in scaled space.
• DOT1 - Use DOT with BFGS (Broydon-Fletcher-Goldfarb-Shanno) for unconstrained

problems. Use DOT with MMFD (Modified Method of Feasible Directions) for constrained
problems.
• DOT2 - Use DOT with FR (Fletcher-Reeves) for unconstrained problems. Use DOT with SLP
(Sequential Linear Programming) for constrained problems.
• DOT3 - Use DOT with FR (same as DOT2) for unconstrained problems. Use DOT with SQP
(Sequential Quadratic Programming) for constrained problems.
User 1, User 2, User 3 - Allows you to invoke a user-written optimization algorithm that has been
linked to Adams/View
5. For the “opt_convergence_tolerance” parameter, if the condition ABS (objective[now] -
objective[now-1]) < convergence_tolerance is true for a certain number of iterations (usually
two), then the convergence tolerance criterion is met. Note that this is only one test that is made
by most optimization algorithms before they terminate successfully.
Like other Adams/Solver tolerances, you may need to experiment with this tolerance to find the
right value for your application. Display the objective versus iteration strip chart. If the optimizer
quits even though the last iteration made noticeable progress, try reducing the tolerance. If the
optimizer continues iterating even after the objective has stopped changing very much, make the
tolerance larger.
6. Centered differencing perturbs each design variable in the negative direction from the nominal
value, then again in the positive direction using finite differencing between the perturbed results
to compute the gradient. If you choose forward differencing, each design variable is perturbed in
a positive direction only.
Centered differencing can sometimes generate smoother, more reliable gradients (especially in
noisy models), but it causes twice as many analysis runs to be performed.
7. Naturally, you want to remove as much of pertubations as you can. If you are uncertain of the
accuracy and smoothness of your model, use a large perturbation at first, then reduce it as you get
better designs. Remember that the accuracy of the gradients generally improves as the
perturbations get smaller.
8. Realizing that there may be parameter information that is not conveyed through the existing
parameter set, this “opt_user_parameter” parameter was added to allow you to pass any real
numeric data to your algorithm.
9. Keep an eye on the debug window as some important warnings might be written there.The
debugging output shows you the data the optimizer is receiving from Adams/View, among other
things. If the optimizer is behaving erratically, this may help you determine the source of the
problem.
Cautions:
1. Use care if you turn the “stop_on_error” option off. Optimizations probably do not recover well
from an error. In some cases, you may want to continue a design study or design of experiment
even if a few of the simulations fail.
simulation 25
simulation multirun summarize

Format:

result_set_name= existing result set
column_width= integer
precision= integer
format= Fixed/exponential/automatic
file_name= filename
Description:

result_set_name Existing Result Set Enters the parametric analysis result set you
want to display.
column_width Integer Enters values for the column.
precision Integer Enters values for the precision.
format Fixed/exponential/automatic Selects either Automatic, Exponential, or Fixed.
write_to_terminal On/off Specifies whether or not the information
requested is to be sent to the Information
window.
file_name File Name Enters the file name if you want to write the table
to a file.
joint).
runs).
2. You can control the format of the numbers in the table, the width of the columns, and the precision
of the numbers. For the format of the numbers, you can select:
• Automatic - Selects either exponential or fixed, depending on the size of the number and the
column width. If you select automatic format, the value you enter for the precision of the
numbers sets the overall number of digits.
• Exponential or fixed - The value you enter for the precision sets the number of digits past the
decimal point.
For each measure or objective, a component with the same name as the objective or measure,
3. The “write_to_terminal” parameter is most likely to be used with the file_name parameter to write
the information only to a file.
simulation 27
simulation multirun update variable

Format:

result_set_name = existing result set
trial = integer
Description:

result_set_name Existing Result_set Entersthe parametric analysis result set you want to display.
trial Integer Shows the path, or trail, of parts from one frame to another.
joint).
runs).
• For each measure or objective, a component with the same name as the objective or measure
2. Showing the trail is useful in showing the relationship of the model parts between frames but often
obscures the view of the motion.
simulation script copy

Allows you to copy an existing simulation script.
Format:

new_sim_script_name = a new sim_script
Example:
simulation script copy &

sim_script_name = script__1 &
new_sim_script_name = script__2
Description:

sim_script_name An Existing Sim_script Specifies the name of the original simulation script
which is to be renamed
new_sim_script_name A New Sim_script Specifies the New script name for the copy of the
simulation script
simulation 29
simulation script create

Allows you to create a simulation script. This script can then be run using the simulation single scripted
command by specifying the script name.
Format:

sim_script_name = a new sim_script
comments = string
initial_static = yes/no
type = trans_type
number_of_steps = integer
end_time = time
duration = time
commands = string
solver_commands = string
Example:
simulation script create &

initial_static = yes &
type = dynamic &
end_time = 1.5
Description:

sim_script_name A New Sim_script Specifies the name of the script to be created
comments String Enters comments for the script to be created, if any.
initial_static Yes/No Sets static simulation to be performed before the dynamic
simulation
type Trans_type Specifies the type of simulation to be run

number_of_steps Integer Represents the total number of times you want
Adams/View to provide output information over your
entire simulation
step_size Integer Represents the amount of time, in current model units,
between output steps.
end_time Time Specifies the absolute point in time at which you want the
simulation to stop.
duration Time Specifies the amount of time over which you want the
simulation to run.
commands Enters a set of Adams/View commands, including
commands that change the model or Adams/Solver settings
solver_commands A set of Adams/Solver commands, including commands
that change the model or Adams/Solver settings.
1. You can run five types of simulations in Adams/View
• Dynamic
A time-history solution for all displacements, velocities, accelerations, and internal reaction
forces in your model driven by a set of external forces and excitations. A dynamic simulation
is also known as a kinetic simulation.
• Kinematic
Determines the range of values for the displacement, velocity, and acceleration of any point
of interest in the model, independent of forces applied to it. During a kinematic simulation,
Adams/Solver solves only the reduced set of algebraic equations. This type of simulation,
therefore, is only available for models with zero degrees of freedom.
• Static
Finds the state of the model in which all internal and external forces are balanced in the
absence of any system motions or inertial forces. It sets all system velocities and accelerations
to zero, so inertial forces are not taken into consideration. A static simulation is for use with
models that have one or more degrees of freedom so Adams/Solver can move parts around as
it seeks to balance all the forces acting on the model.
• Initial conditions
An initial conditions simulation ensures the proper assembly of your model before other
simulations. It checks to ensure that all constraints and initial conditions are allowable and
consistent. If it finds any discrepancies, it corrects them so that there is a consistent set of
values representing the state of the model and assembles the model in a more appropriate way.
• Linear
simulation 31
Linearizes your nonlinear dynamic equations of motion about a particular operating point in
order to determine natural frequencies and corresponding mode shapes. You must purchase
Adams/Linear to perform a linear simulation.
2. As an example for the number_of_steps parameter, specifying 50 steps over a one-second
simulation interval to define an output period of 0.02 seconds per step, which yields an output
frequency of 50 steps/second.
3. The step_size parameter represents the amount of time, in current model units, between output
steps.
4. The output frequency remains constant even if you change your simulation end time or duration.
For example, enter a step size of 0.01 seconds to specify an output period of 0.01 seconds per step,
which yields an output frequency of 100 steps/second.
5. If you enter commands to change the model or Adams/Solver settings, they do not affect a
simulation that is in progress. For example, if you run a simulation to 5 seconds, then change the
model, then continue the simulation, the continuation uses the original model. You must restart
the simulation to use the changes during a simulation. The best way to get started with the
Adams/View commands is to use the interactive controls to perform a simulation, then look at the
script that Adams/View creates, called Last_Sim. You can then modify and rename it.
6. Unlike an Adams/View command script, you can use an Adams/Solver command script to change
your model or Adams/Solver settings during the simulation.
simulation script delete

Allows you to delete an existing simulation script.
Format:

Example:
simulation script delete &

sim_script_name = script__1
Description:

sim_script_name An Existing Sim_script Specifies the name of the original simulation script
which is to be renamed
simulation 33
simulation script modify

Allows you to modify an existing simulation script.
Format:

comments = string
initial_static = yes/no
type = trans_type
number_of_steps = integer
end_time = time
duration = time
commands = string
solver_commands = string
Example:
simulation script modify &

initial_static = yes &
type = dynamic &
end_time = 1.5
Description:

sim_script_name An Existing Sim_script Specifies the name of the script to be created
comments String Enters comments for the script to be created, if any.
initial_static Yes/no Sets static simulation to be performed before the
dynamic simulation
type Trans_type Specifies the type of simulation to be run

number_of_steps Integer Represents the total number of times you want
Adams/View to provide output information over your
entire simulation
step_size Integer Represents the amount of time, in current model units,
between output steps.
end_time Time Specifies the absolute point in time at which you want
the simulation to stop.
duration Time Specifies the amount of time over which you want the
simulation to run.
commands Enters a set of Adams/View commands, including
commands that change the model or Adams/Solver
settings
solver_commands A set of Adams/Solver commands, including
commands that change the model or Adams/Solver
settings.
1. You can run five types of simulations in Adams/View
• Dynamic
A time-history solution for all displacements, velocities, accelerations, and internal reaction
forces in your model driven by a set of external forces and excitations. A dynamic simulation
is also known as a kinetic simulation.
• Kinematic
Determines the range of values for the displacement, velocity, and acceleration of any point
of interest in the model, independent of forces applied to it. During a kinematic simulation,
Adams/Solver solves only the reduced set of algebraic equations. This type of simulation,
therefore, is only available for models with zero degrees of freedom.
• Static
Finds the state of the model in which all internal and external forces are balanced in the
absence of any system motions or inertial forces. It sets all system velocities and accelerations
to zero, so inertial forces are not taken into consideration. A static simulation is for use with
models that have one or more degrees of freedom so Adams/Solver can move parts around as
it seeks to balance all the forces acting on the model.
• Initial conditions
An initial conditions simulation ensures proper assembly of your model before other
simulations. It checks to ensure that all constraints and initial conditions are allowable and
consistent. If it finds any discrepancies, it corrects them so that there is a consistent set of
values representing the state of the model and assembles the model in a more appropriate way.
simulation 35
• Linear
Linearizes your nonlinear dynamic equations of motion about a particular operating point in
order to determine natural frequencies and corresponding mode shapes. You must purchase
Adams/Linear to perform a linear simulation.
2. As an example for the number_of_steps parameter, specifying 50 steps over a one-second
simulation interval to define an output period of 0.02 seconds per step, which yields an output
frequency of 50 steps/second.
3. The step_size parameter represents the amount of time, in current model units, between output
steps.
4. The output frequency remains constant even if you change your simulation end time or duration.
For example, enter a step size of 0.01 seconds to specify an output period of 0.01 seconds per step,
which yields an output frequency of 100 steps/second.
5. If you enter commands to change the model or Adams/Solver settings, they do not affect a
simulation that is in progress. For example, if you run a simulation to 5 seconds, then change the
model, then continue the simulation, the continuation uses the original model. You must restart
the simulation to use the changes during a simulation. The best way to get started with the
Adams/View commands is to use the interactive controls to perform a simulation, then look at the
script that Adams/Vie

Using Adams/View Command Lang. - MD Adams 2010

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Descrição original:

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Using Adams/View Command Lang. - MD Adams 2010

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

analysis 1

analysis collate_contacts &

Parameter Value Type Description

analysis create &

Parameter Value Type Description

analysis delete &

Parameter Value Type Description

analysis modify &

Parameter Value Type Description

analysis reload_files &

Parameter Value Type Description

animation add_simulation &

Parameter Value Type Description

animation create &

animation create &

Parameter Value Type Description

Parameter Value Type Description

animation delete &

Parameter Value Type Description

animation display &

Parameter Value Type Description

animation log &

Parameter Value Type Description

animation modify &

animation modify &

Parameter Value type Description

Parameter Value type Description

animation pause &

Parameter Value Type Description

animation play &

Parameter Value Type Description

animation record start

animation record start

animation record start &

Parameter Value Type Description

Parameter Value Type Description

Caution: (AVI format is only available on Windows).

Tip: 1. Turn off compression to improve the quality of the images.

animation record stop

animation replace_simulation &

Parameter Value Type Description

animation reset &

Parameter Value Type Description

animation step &

Parameter Value Type Description

Parameter Value Type Description

clearance compute &

Parameter Value Type Description

clearance create &

Parameter Value Type Description

Parameter Value Type Description

clearance delete &

Parameter Value Type Description

clearance export_results &

Parameter Value Type Description

clearance modify &

Parameter Value Type Description

color create &

Parameter Value Type Description

color modify &

Parameter Value Type Description

constraint attributes &